Skip to content

Honey Harvesting and Backyard Beekeeping

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/27 (Unpublished)

Simon Mildren, Founder and CEO of HiveKeepers, talks about the Micro Honey Harvester, a benchtop device designed for small-scale beekeepers. The innovation allows quick, clean honey extraction without disrupting bees or using traditional equipment. Mildren explains how the system ensures honey purity, minimizes contamination, and eliminates the need for filtering. The device uses cassette-based frames that can be harvested indoors, helping reduce bee disruption and honey fraud. Designed for Langstroth hives, it simplifies backyard beekeeping. Mildren emphasizes transparency, food safety, and empowering beekeepers with high-quality, unprocessed honey delivered directly from hive to table.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with HiveKeepers, the Melbourne-based startup that launched the Micro Honey Harvester, an innovative benchtop device revolutionizing honey extraction. It’s a compact tool enables beekeepers with 1–5 hives to extract honey quickly—without uncapping, using giant extractors, filtering, or creating a mess. Designed to be bee-friendly and about the size of a small coffee machine, it makes backyard beekeeping more accessible and efficient than ever. Our guest Simon Mildren, founder and CEO of HiveKeepers, stated, “We’ve taken the labour out of harvesting and made fresh honey instantly accessible.” The Micro Honey Harvester is now live on Kickstarter. It is set to make global waves in sustainable small-scale beekeeping. Thank you for joining me today—I appreciate it.

Simon Mildren: Great to be here with you, Scott. Thanks.

Jacobsen: So, quick question—why micro honey harvesting rather than macro? It’s a good concept.

Mildren: Yes, thank you. I’ve been a beekeeper for over 15 years, Scott, but I’ve always been a small-scale backyard beekeeper. You wouldn’t see it here on camera, but just behind the wall are a couple of beehives. I’ve always kept it small—just a few hives. I did that to look after bees because it’s fascinating. That’s one part of it. The other part is the benefit to my garden and surroundings and, of course, the pleasure of having honey from those bees. But we were never trying to chase dozens upon dozens of kilos of honey, which most people do because there hasn’t been a better way to extract honey in small quantities. Traditionally, it’s big quantities, bulky equipment, and lots of time and effort. Most current extraction methods are modelled after or derived from the commercial honey industry. We saw an opportunity to lighten the load for small-scale beekeepers—something easy and quick that suits their needs. They’re not trying to collect 200 pounds or 100 kilos of honey once or twice a season. They want smaller amounts more often.

Jacobsen: How does the device get the honey out in under five minutes without disturbing the bees too much? That’s the interesting part.

Mildren: Yes. So, any beekeeper would know you are still obliged to go in there and look at your bees. You still need to lift the lid off a beehive. You still need to go in there and lift out the frames. You must do that, and a regular part of the process is taking them out, having a thorough inspection, and being clear about the biology of the bee and what’s going on. So, while I say “without any disruption,” we don’t want to ignore that you still need to check on your bees. Our system allows you to work with that normal routine rather than having a big, special harvesting or extraction process. We put our frames in a special frame designed to fit into the same space as a normal frame. This frame has eight sections on it. We call those cassettes. You take this out of a hive when the actual cassette itself is fully capped—it needs to be fully capped with beeswax by the bees—and then we know there’s honey in there, ready to be harvested. The beekeeper can do this easily, either next to the beehive or they can take it inside their kitchen. There’s never been a way, Scott, that’s made this easy to do quickly—inside your kitchen or even next to your beehive. So I’ll show you. Others can’t see this, but our cassette splits in half for simplicity. And you saw before that this outside face was capped. When the honey is ready, those cappings remain there. You must remove the cappings in normal harvesting to get the honey out. In what we do, we leave them on because we’re harvesting from the inside. And we can do that because when we separate the two halves, you’ll note there’s a little opening on the back of each cell. It’s those openings that allow us to harvest the honey. What we do next with those cassettes is we have our benchtop Micro Harvester. We slide these cassettes inside here—and I know you can probably see it yourself. They slide in with the openings facing out, and then in a brief amount of time—literally pressing the button—it’ll spin for 20 seconds. A little bit of honey is still coming from the cassette I’m showing you now.

I harvested this one earlier. In 20 seconds, most of the honey is removed. Normally, there’s a huge process to remove a whole frame of honey, remove those cappings I spoke about earlier, harvest the frame, and filter the honey. And it’s the cleanup step after that—that’s extensive. So that’s slowing down now after 20 seconds. I’ll put that to the side. Feel free to ask more questions. I’m giving you the quick version of that, I guess. But without all those extra steps you must go through, the honey there now is clean and essentially filtered. It doesn’t need filtering because of the way the mechanism works. And that honey is ready to consume right now. That’s minutes instead of hours. And you asked specifically about the disruption to the bees—I put the cassette back in the beehive, even with the beeswax cappings on there. The bees will clean that up in no time and repurpose that beeswax. That’s low friction for the bees, whereas normally, a full box on top is harvested at a time, and that’s a huge disruption to the dynamics of the hive. Now, we’re lucky the bees get on with it, Scott. They get on with it. But where we can minimize that and give them less to have to do and make it easier for them to, I suppose, get back to it afterwards by harvesting smaller amounts and being less destructive to the honeycomb—that’s a much better option for them.

Jacobsen: How do you ensure honey purity and prevent contamination during this process?

Mildren: Cool. Yes, great. That’s a question I would love to answer because we have a strong case with the cassettes. The bees do their work inside the hive. Once this cassette is capped and sealed, you can see the one I’m holding up: untouched honey. It’s up to the beekeeper, but you take this straight from the hive to your harvester. Nothing’s happened to it. It’s not even exposed to the air. There’s no other extraction method that can do that quite the same. You can take this, store it, and keep it wherever necessary.

We’ve got to be mindful of honey crystallization—that can happen over time—but it stays fresh and pure the whole time. When you harvest it, you see it with your own eyes, which is stunning. It looks amazing. And that honey is absolutely at its purest. In the old approach—or the commercial, larger-scale approach to honey production—we don’t know what’s happening through all the steps. A honey producer might provide the honey to a packing shed, which goes through the packing shed arrangements in six to eight steps. As the end consumer, you don’t know if it’s been heat-treated, you don’t know if it’s been blended with other honey, and you may be sold something that’s not quite what it is. You don’t know if additives have been used—like that dreaded high-fructose corn syrup or any other sugary syrup replacement. There’s no fooling this system. You can’t fake it because the honey the bees capped hasn’t touched since it was made in the beehive. It’s truly the bees’ work.

Jacobsen: What feedback have you gotten from early testers, especially from the beekeeping community—particularly the small-batch beekeepers?

Mildren: Yes. So we’ve had it out there, testing for about nine months. Overall, they’re pleased with the operation of the frames and the cassettes. That’s the main bit. We wanted the most feedback on the interaction with the bees because the harvester itself is quite simple. Indeed, the frames and cassettes are, too. But you don’t know until you test with the bees. The user experience from the beekeepers has been that they’re happy to use the frames. We’ve made modifications, upgrades, and improvements based on their guidance. We had initial concerns about the honey volume we could produce from this system. That concern came to Scott because we’re conditioned to think we must have as much production as possible. Since there’s a bit less space to collect honey, the slight reduction in harvestable honey per frame initially concerns some of them. Then they said, “Well, if I can opt for this method, which allows me to harvest more often but with less honey each time, maybe that’s not such an issue.” So that was part of the feedback we got. Occasionally, we also get people asking about plastic—which I’m curious to learn more about from people out there. We get comments like, “How’s the plastic going to hold up?” because we know plastic is used in many forms. There’s a real attitude against plastic being in contact with food; I get that concern. I’m not saying people shouldn’t be concerned—they should be thinking about that. Where I’m interested, Scott, is the opportunity to find alternative materials moving forward other than standard plastics. We use food-grade plastics. We know it takes a little longer for bees to start using plastic initially. Now, in the commercial industry here in Australia, there are 800,000 to 900,000 beehives. Hundreds of thousands would use plastic in their hives, and the bees get along and do well with that. So, we acknowledge the issue, accept that it’s been used successfully many times by many others, and tell people that plastic will take longer for the bees to get accustomed to it the first time. But after that, they won’t know any difference. They need that first nectar flow to recognize that it works well, and then after that, the bees treat it no differently.

Jacobsen: I’m not a bee expert, but I have some questions based on assumptions. One would be: do different species or genera of bees have different ways of building their hives? And if so, would you need different models or design patterns for your cassettes?

Mildren: Good thinking. There are many different types of bees; you’re right. But only a small portion of them are colony-forming bees—like the European honeybee—and they’re the ones that collect honey. Globally, the honey and pollination industries are based around the European honeybee. That’s the bee backyard keepers use as well. There are places in Northern Australia, in our tropical regions, where people use native bees, and that’s a completely different arrangement. What we’ve proposed wouldn’t work with those. I’d be confident that nearly 100% of beekeepers—say 99.999%—use European honeybees. There’ll be a few exceptions, but generally speaking, the European honeybee is the dominant species used in beekeeping. I will mention, though, Scott, that there are differences in hive format and size. While we’ve launched a product that suits the most common beehive system in the world—the Langstroth system—it’s based on size standards. Many people won’t yet be able to use our technology until we create modifications for other hive sizes. We will certainly do that, but we must crawl before running. So, we’re starting with the most common size first.

Jacobsen: And does the simplicity of the format and reduced number of steps also help reduce honey fraud? You know, we were talking earlier about things like adding high fructose—

Mildren: Corn syrup—

Jacobsen: —or whatever into it.

Mildren: Oh yes, it’s horrifying to think. Yes, the answer is yes. But it’s horrifying to think how much fraud is happening out there. It’s staggering. We’re talking about nine out of ten honey samples taken off supermarket shelves in the United Kingdom not passing the test to be classified as genuine honey. Sometimes, that number can reach 100%. Here in Australia, we’re a bit isolated from it, so it’s a much lower number—but it still happens. And how’s this? Apimondia, the largest beekeeping and honey conference on the planet, is held annually in Europe. This year, it’s in September, in Copenhagen. They’ve cancelled their annual honey awards. They cancelled them because they were not confident they could determine legitimate honey. After the fact—after the awards had been analyzed and given out—they later discovered that many of the top 10 samples were fraudulent. Not real, honey.

Jacobsen: It’d be like running the Academy Awards this year and then cancelling it because all the year’s movies turned out to be AI-generated.

Mildren: Isn’t it staggering? And it’s even worse because food is something you put inside your body. You expect it to meet a certain standard. So, we feel that delivering honey from the beehive directly to the consumer—without touching it during the process—gives proper credit to the beekeepers, who do an amazing job producing high-quality, fresh, pure honey. And it gives the consumer what they rightfully expect. We’ve removed all those unnecessary steps. I see it this way, Scott: if we can remove all those steps and package it in a way that feels like the Nespresso machine for honey—that’s the vision I’m working toward. Going from beehive to plate with zero interference. Keeping the quality intact, rewarding the beekeeper for their premium product, and rewarding the consumer for choosing something that truly is high quality.

Jacobsen: We discussed contamination before and touched on fraud, a different issue. I’m not talking about fraud here, but more about things like wax and debris—stuff that might be blended out or filtered but not something you necessarily want in the honey immediately. How do you manage that—a different kind of purity? It’s not the end of the world, but still worth addressing.

Mildren: No, I know what you’re saying. So, with traditional honey harvesting methods, they go through a heavy filtering process, and that’s time-consuming. If you didn’t filter it, you’d end up with large chunks in the honey you buy from the supermarket—I promise you. Given how that process works, you’d have bee bodies, heads of bees, legs of bees, and all sorts of things. In our system, we don’t filter. We take what has been harvested in here. If you could see inside, I’d show you. I’ll take the lid off the base, leave it charging while it’s there, and take it off. I’ll show you—nothing’s better than visually.

Jacobsen: For the transcript, it looks like a big blender, but it’s not large.

Mildren: It’s about the size of a small coffee machine or blender. So here I’ve got the plastic bucket where the honey drains into—it flows nicely down the side. I know it is not easy to describe without seeing it, but I’ll try. We’re looking for big chunks of wax or anything where you’d think, “I wouldn’t want to put that on my toast in the morning.” I don’t know if you can see it, but on the side closest to me, I can see a section of beeswax—about a centimetre long. Looking straight in, I can see one other little chunk of beeswax and maybe a second one. And we’re talking about small pieces you’d mistake for a crumb from the bread. You might take out that one slightly bigger piece—and just to be clear—that’s not from the honey itself. That’s from the edge of the cassette, surrounding the cassette. Any beekeeper—well, it tastes and smells amazing—would not be concerned about that. You wouldn’t do a special filtering step just for that. If you have a big chunk, take it out with a teaspoon. The number of times I’ve harvested and had a big chunk in the honey—I could count on one hand. So, the idea is to make it as simple as possible. It can be that simple because the main source of mess in traditional harvesting comes when people uncap that outer surface. That loosens beeswax, and it gets pulled through in the spinning process and ends up in the honey. But if we’re not removing the cappings in the first place, I promise you—the bees underneath produce clean, clear honey. Completely unfiltered, but with barely an ounce of debris in it. We’re taking that out with only the occasional speck of beeswax coming through. No bee bodies, no dust, no dirt from the air. We eliminate a lot of those issues by doing it this way.

Jacobsen: My final question—something I can ask reasonably: what about ensuring you do not disturb the bees and do not accidentally pull in a bee and injure it?

Mildren: Yes, and that’s quite a simple fix. Firstly, you could always harvest away from the hive—sometimes, that’s the best option. There are certain times of the year when the bees if they smell honey, will be very interested—like, “Yep, I’m going for that.” Other times of the year, they’re not as concerned. That’s why the Micro Honey Harvester has a lid that sits over the top. When it’s time to harvest, the lid should be on to stabilize the central spinning component. If the lid’s on and there are no bees in there, to begin with, then you’re good. If there are bees in the air around you, you can move away a little—walk around the corner, for example. What I prefer to do, and what my kids love, is to take it inside and harvest it in the kitchen—something that cannot be done cleanly, without any effort or large setup, using current traditional methods.

Jacobsen: Excellent, Simon. Thank you for your time today. I appreciate you talking honey with me and teaching me a little bit.

Mildren: Thank you very much, Scott.

Jacobsen: Excellent. I’ll be in touch. Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Purpose and Outcomes of Reciprocal Tariffs

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/27

Laura Dow is the Business Director of China Performance Group (CPG Sourcing), a global sourcing service provider operating in China since 1978. With expertise in supply chain management, logistics, and responsible sourcing, she helps companies navigate procurement challenges while ensuring compliance and efficiency. Laura frequently speaks on trade policies, tariffs, and economic trends. She advocates for strategic sourcing solutions to optimize global trade and mitigate risks in an evolving market.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is the purpose and expected outcome of reciprocal tariffs?

Laura Dow: While reciprocal tariffs may aim to establish fairer trading practices and reduce trade imbalances, historical evidence shows that tariffs often deliver the opposite.

Tariffs function as taxes on imports and, as such, increase costs. Businesses pass these additional costs onto consumers, leading to higher prices for a wide range of goods and contributing to increased inflation.

Tariffs can impact economic growth and employment in three primary ways:

Reduced Consumer Spending: Higher consumer prices resulting from tariffs can decrease consumer spending, as individuals buy less when prices rise. This reduced demand may cause businesses to cut back on production and, consequently, their workforce.

Increased Operational Costs: To offset higher costs due to tariffs, businesses often downsize their workforce, even before any noticeable decline in consumer demand.

Reduced planning and investment: In an environment of uncertainty, businesses do not invest or plan for expansion, thus reducing growth and hiring. 

Reciprocal tariffs may also prompt retaliatory measures from trading partners, escalating into trade wars that further hinder global commerce. In turn, diminished global commerce can lower competition between countries, adversely affecting innovation in the following ways:

Reduced Investment in R&D: The financial strain from tariffs can compel firms to cut back on research and development expenditures, hindering technological advancement and innovation.

Reduced Innovation: With decreased competition, industries may feel less pressure to innovate, leading to a decline in competitiveness. Global collaboration and the exchange of ideas are essential drivers of innovation.

Conversely, trade liberalization and reduced global tariffs have proven more effective in promoting economic growth. A notable example is the Reciprocal Trade Agreements Act of 1934, which led to a significant reduction in tariffs and an expansion of international trade.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Laura.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Addressing Trauma & Addiction With Brittany Cilento Kopycienski

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/26

Brittany Cilento Kopycienski, NCC, CAADC, CCTP, LPC, LCADC, ACS, is the owner of Glow Counseling Solutions in Philadelphia, PA, and an accomplished mental health professional. She specializes in treating depression, anxiety, mood disorders, addictions, life transitions, self-harm, and trauma. As a Nationally Certified Counselor, Certified Advanced Alcohol and Drug Counselor, Certified Clinical Trauma Professional, Licensed Certified Drug and Alcohol Counselor, and Approved Clinical Supervisor, Brittany employs evidence-based approaches including DBT, CBT, ACT, and somatic interventions. Serving clients in PA and NJ, she delivers compassionate, individualized care. Her work demonstrates unwavering commitment to client well-being. Her extensive expertise enhances transformative outcomes.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does trauma manifest in those struggling with substance use?

Brittany Cilento Kopycienski: Trauma can manifest in individuals struggling with substance use in various ways. People may use substances as a form of self-medication to cope with the emotional pain caused by trauma. Trauma can include past or present abuse (physical, sexual, emotional), neglect, or witnessing & experiencing adverse events. Trauma can lead to increased anxiety, depression, apathy, flashbacks, and relationship conflicts. These symptoms tend to also contribute to maintaining substance use when an individual doesn’t possess alternative coping skills due to the difficulty and debilitating nature of them. In many cases, substance use becomes a way to numb these symptoms and struggles temporarily, reinforcing a cycle of addiction. 

Jacobsen: What is the role of trauma in the development of addiction?

Kopycienski: Trauma plays a critical role in the development of addiction, often acting as an underlying cause, a precipitating factor. For individuals who experience early-life trauma, such as childhood abuse, there is a higher risk of engaging in substance use as a means of coping with emotional pain. This coping strategy can eventually lead to dependence. Additionally, trauma can alter the brain’s chemistry and stress-response systems, which can make a person more susceptible to addiction. 

Jacobsen: What are common misconceptions about alcohol and drug counseling?

Kopycienski: Two common misconceptions:
1) It’s only for “severe” cases: Many believe that alcohol and drug counseling is only necessary for those with severe addiction issues, but it can be beneficial at any stage of substance misuse, even before dependence fully develops.
2) It’s only about willpower: A common misconception is that addiction is purely a matter of willpower. In reality, addiction is a complex disease involving both the brain’s neurochemistry and psychological components.

Jacobsen: What therapeutic approaches are effective in helping break the cycle of addiction?

Kopycienski: 1) Cognitive Behavioral Therapy (CBT): This is a therapy theoretical orientation that helps individuals recognize and change negative thought patterns that contribute to substance use.
2) Trauma-Informed Care: This is a type of therapeutic framework that integrates an understanding of trauma into therapy, recognizing its impact on behavior and mental health, and aims to create a safe environment for healing. Trauma-Informed Care is an umbrella term for several evidence based values and perspectives to implement into client care. 
3) Motivational Interviewing (MI): This type of therapeutic orientation helps individuals resolve ambivalence about change and increase motivation to address their addiction.
4) 12-Step Programs (AA/NA): These programs, although are not professionally based but more peer facilitated, provide support through social networks and emphasize personal responsibility and spirituality.
5) Medication-Assisted Treatment (MAT): For certain substances like opioids and alcohol, MAT (medication-assisted treatment) uses medications in combination with therapy to help manage withdrawal symptoms and cravings.

Jacobsen: What about factors of socioeconomic disparities, housing instability??

Kopycienski: Socioeconomic disparities and housing instability significantly contribute to the cycle of addiction. Individuals in lower socioeconomic brackets often face greater stress, limited access to mental health and addiction services, and fewer opportunities for education and employment. These conditions increase susceptible to substance use as a form of coping. Additionally, housing instability—homelessness or risk of homelessness—creates stress and increases the likelihood of individuals turning to substances for relief.

Jacobsen: Canada has introduced some harm reduction and decriminalization discussions. How effective are these measures?

Kopycienski: Harm reduction strategies, such as supervised injection sites, needle exchange programs, and decriminalization of certain substances, aim to reduce the negative health impacts of substance use rather than solely focusing on abstinence. Research has shown that harm reduction can reduce overdose deaths, prevent the spread of diseases like HIV and Hepatitis C, and help engage individuals in treatment who might otherwise avoid the system due to fear of arrest. Decriminalization of drugs, by removing the criminal penalties for drug possession, reduces stigma and allows individuals to seek help without fear of legal repercussions. However, the effectiveness of these measures depends on a comprehensive approach that includes access to treatment, mental health care, and social supports.

Jacobsen: How might public policy better integrate with mental health and addiction services to address the root causes of substance misuse?

Kopycienski: 1) Dual Diagnosis Treatment: Policymakers should support programs that treat addiction and mental health issues simultaneously, recognizing that they often co-occur. Integrated care can improve outcomes for individuals by addressing both issues at once. 
2) Access to Comprehensive Care: Ensuring access to affordable and culturally competent mental health services and addiction treatment is key.
3) Prevention and Early Intervention: Policies that prioritize early education about mental health, trauma, and substance misuse can prevent issues from escalating. These types of policies can also reduce the stigma associated with addiction and mental health disorders through education campaigns
4) Social Support Systems: Addressing the broader social determinants of health, such as affordable housing, employment opportunities, and food security, is essential. Supporting stable living conditions and addressing socioeconomic disparities can reduce the stressors that contribute to addiction.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Brittany. 

Kopycienski: If you have any other questions please let me know.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Small Business Carbon Tax Rebate and Canada

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/26

Dan Kelly, President and CEO of CFIB, discusses the small business carbon tax rebate and the federal government’s failure to distribute the promised 10% rebate to businesses since 2019. Despite accumulating $2.5 billion, the government struggled to create a rebate formula. CFIB developed a headcount-based system, which was included in the 2024 budget, but the rebate was later deemed taxable. Parliament’s prorogation stalled corrective legislation, creating uncertainty. With a potential leadership change and carbon tax policy shifts, CFIB continues lobbying for a legislative fix to ensure rebates remain tax-free and businesses receive overdue funds.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dan Kelly. He is the President, CEO, and Chair of the Canadian Federation of Independent Business (CFIB), representing 100,000 small and medium-sized business members across Canada.

He began his career at CFIB as a policy analyst in Winnipeg in 1994, later taking on leadership roles in Calgary and Ottawa, where he helped shape Canada’s first Code of Conduct for the Credit and Debit Card Industry. Now based in Toronto, Dan has led CFIB through the challenges of COVID-19, advocating for relief measures such as wage subsidies and rent support. He has served on multiple committees and is recognized as one of Canada’s leading advocates on issues related to taxation, regulation, labor, and payments.

Dan holds a Bachelor of Commerce from the University of Manitoba and lives with his family. Thank you for joining me today. I appreciate it.

Dan Kelly: Thanks, happy to be here.

Jacobsen: Regarding the small business carbon tax rebate, what is the main issue that people should be aware of? This is not a small amount of money.

Kelly: No, it certainly is not. Let me take you back and provide a quick overview of the history of the federal carbon tax as it relates to small businesses since 2019.

When the federal government introduced the carbon pricing system, it established what was called the federal carbon backstop for provinces that did not implement their own carbon pricing plans. Initially, this applied to Saskatchewan, Manitoba, Ontario, and New Brunswick. Over time, more provinces were added, and now eight provinces are subject to the federal carbon pricing system. Quebec and British Columbia remain outside of this system because they have their own provincial carbon pricing mechanisms.

At the outset, the federal government made a commitment to return all revenue collected through the carbon tax back to Canadians and businesses. The stated goal was to encourage lower emissions while ensuring that the tax did not become a net cost to the economy.

The carbon tax revenue was supposed to be split as follows:

  • 90% of the revenue was designated for direct rebates to individuals through quarterly Climate Action Incentive payments (also known as “carbon tax rebates”).
  • 10% was set aside for small and medium-sized businesses, Indigenous groups, and non-profits.

The consumer rebate program has been active, and millions of Canadians receive quarterly payments. You may have heard the Prime Minister and other officials claim that 80% of Canadians receive more back in rebates than they pay in carbon tax. However, this claim is widely debated. Even if true, the reason some individuals receive more in rebates is that businesses receive little to nothing in return—effectively subsidizing the consumer rebates.

Now, here’s where the issue lies: Since 2019, the federal government has not returned the 10% share meant for small businesses. While these funds have been accounted for on paper, they have never been distributed to business owners.

The government attempted to implement two programs to return these funds:

  1. The first program was announced but quickly abandoned.
  2. The second program was proposed but never implemented.

As a result, billions of dollars in carbon tax revenue that were supposed to go back to small businesses remain unreturned. Businesses continue to pay the tax, but they are not receiving the promised rebates.

From 2019 to 2023, the federal government collected carbon tax revenue from both businesses and consumers. While 90% of the revenue was rebated back to consumers as promised, the 10% allocated for small businesses was never returned. However, to their credit, the government did not spend that money elsewhere—it simply sat in an account in Ottawa for five years.

After more than 100 meetings with officials from Environment Canada and the Department of Finance, we realized the main issue was not a lack of intent to return the money, but rather a lack of understanding on how to distribute it. The government had no clear mechanism for determining how to rebate the money or how to ensure businesses received it in the correct proportions.

This created a massive political and logistical mess that remained unresolved for years. As an advocacy organization for small businesses, CFIB said, “Wait a minute—this fund has now accumulated $2.5 billion, with a B, that rightfully belongs to businesses.” Most of this money was owed to businesses in Ontario, Manitoba, Saskatchewan, and Alberta, but in 2023, the government expanded the program to include the four Atlantic provinces as well.

This money could have been critical for struggling businesses, especially during the COVID-19 pandemic, yet it remained untouched. We quickly realized that the federal government was not going to create a formula on its own. So, working with our economists, we devised a rebate system based on headcount—a simple, fair way to return the money to businesses.

In spring 2024, we met with Chrystia Freeland, then Deputy Prime Minister and Minister of Finance, and pushed for a solution. To her credit, she acknowledged the issue and incorporated our proposed framework into the 2024 federal budget. She even publicly credited CFIB for our role in developing the plan.

The plan stated that businesses would receive their long-overdue rebates by the end of 2024. Over the next several months, we worked with the government to finalize the implementation details. Eventually, they confirmed that payments would be distributed in December 2024.

At that point, we asked a key question: “Like the consumer rebates, these payments will be tax-free, correct?”Officials at Finance Canada assured us multiple times that yes, the rebates would not be taxed.

However, about a month before the checks were set to go out, the Canada Revenue Agency (CRA) informed us that the government had classified the payments as taxable government assistance for businesses. This was completely unnecessary and counterproductive, as it meant small businesses would lose a portion of their long-overdue rebates to taxes.

We lobbied for weeks to get Finance Canada to overturn the Canada Revenue Agency’s (CRA) decision to tax the rebate. However, at the time, the government had bigger political concerns, including the ongoing tensions between the Prime Minister and the Deputy Prime Minister.

When we realized we were getting nowhere, CFIB issued a news release in November 2024, warning small businesses that their long-overdue carbon tax rebate would be taxable. The announcement sparked immediate and overwhelming backlash from business owners and advocacy groups.

That same day, Deputy Prime Minister Chrystia Freeland personally called me and issued a public statement, announcing that the rebate would now be tax-free. That was in November 2024.

However, on December 16, 2024, the Deputy Prime Minister resigned, in part due to the fallout from the failed GST holiday, which we had also criticized publicly. Shortly after, the Prime Minister announced his resignation and prorogued Parliament, effectively stalling all legislative processes.

Then, in January 2025, the CRA informed us that the Deputy Prime Minister’s promise to make the rebate tax-free was never implemented. This required a legislative change, but since no bill was ever introduced in the House of Commons, the rebate remained taxable.

The only way to change this now is for the government to introduce a legislative proposal—a Ways and Means motion in the House of Commons—to formally remove the tax. But with Parliament prorogued, this cannot happen.

Meanwhile, the $2.5 billion in rebate checks were already distributed to businesses in December 2024 and January 2025—and, ironically, they were sent by mail during a postal strike, further delaying payments.

Honestly, it feels like a bad political satire.

Even now, the CRA is confirming that the rebate remains taxable, while Finance Canada insists they are working on a fix—but they lack the power to implement one without Parliament reconvening.

Adding to the uncertainty, the current Finance Minister may not even be in office in a few weeks, depending on who takes over as the next Liberal Party leader. Meanwhile, the Conservative Party is campaigning on scrapping the carbon tax altogether, which raises the question: Will they even bother fixing this rebate issue if they come into power?

This has been a political football kicked around for five years, and small businesses are still paying the price.

Jacobsen: Given all this, why is CFIB calling for Parliament to be reconvened immediately?

Kelly: This isn’t the only issue, but it is a major one. If Parliament is reconvened, Finance Canada can introduce a Ways and Means motion to remove the tax on the carbon tax rebate.

If they do that, the CRA will administer the rebate as tax-free, even before the legislation formally passes. This would give Parliament time to officially pass the change while ensuring businesses get the full amount they were promised.

Kelly: Even if the government changes, having draft legislation in place increases the likelihood that any new government will follow through and finalize the process of making the rebate tax-free.

We have received an informal commitment from the Conservatives that they will implement this change if they come to power. If Chrystia Freeland becomes Liberal Party leader, one would assume she would proceed with the legislation, given that she led the effort while in office.

As for Mark Carney, who knows? There is still a lot of uncertainty.

At this moment, businesses are filing corporate income taxes throughout the year, and as things stand, they must pay tax on the rebate. This is why we need Parliament to reconvene.

And this isn’t the only issue. Businesses are also facing new tariffs that will have significant economic impacts, and we need to be prepared for that.

Additionally, two outstanding issues related to capital gains legislation remain unresolved. These have been controversial, but if Parliament resumes, we could at least push forward two positive changes proposed by the Liberals last year, even if the overall capital gains increase is unfavorable.

Jacobsen: How does the tax treatment of the small business carbon tax rebate compare to the rebates given to Canadian families?

Kelly: From the start, it was made clear that the carbon tax rebates for Canadian households in the eight affected provinces would be tax-free—and they have been.

Yet for businesses, the government has classified the rebate as taxable government assistance, which makes no sense.

This is supposed to be a tax rebate. Imagine if you file your income taxes, receive a refund because you overpaid, and then the government imposes a tax on your refund—that would be absurd. And yet, that’s exactly what’s happening here.

Not only is this deeply unfair, but it also undermines the fundamental principle of the carbon tax that the Liberals have insisted upon.

They have repeatedly claimed that the carbon tax is revenue-neutral—that every dollar collected would be returned to Canadians to help cover costs.

However, with $2.5 billion in rebates sent out to businesses, the government could collect $300–400 million in corporate income taxes on that amount.

That means the federal government is now generating revenue from the carbon tax—despite explicitly promising that it would not.

Jacobsen: What discrepancy exists between the CRA’s decision and the information available on the Department of Finance website?

Kelly: The Department of Finance website still states that the carbon tax rebate is tax-free.

In fact, former Finance Minister Chrystia Freeland even tweeted that the rebate would be tax-free. That post still exists.

Additionally, in our CFIB news release, we linked to an official government webpage that still claims the rebate is tax-free.

However, despite these statements, Finance Canada has clarified that, while they intend for the rebate to be tax-free, they cannot implement the change without legislation.

The problem is, with Parliament prorogued, they lack the authority to fix this right now.

Given the current political uncertainty, there is no guarantee that this issue will be resolved.

Meanwhile, the CRA still has not updated its website to confirm whether the rebate is taxable or not.

The only reason businesses even know about this issue is because the CRA privately informed us that the rebate is taxable.

And that’s unacceptable. Accountants and tax professionals have not been formally notified that businesses are expected to pay tax on these rebates.

Jacobsen: What legislative changes does CFIB want or recommend regarding the small business carbon tax rebate formula while the carbon tax remains in effect?

Kelly: All the Department of Finance needs to do is introduce a Ways and Means motion, just as it did for many—though not all—of the capital gains changes.

Once that is in place, it would officially designate the small business carbon tax rebate as a tax rebate rather than government support, meaning it would no longer be taxable.

This is a simple legislative fix.

I suspect we could get all-party support to pass it. But we cannot move forward until Parliament is in session, and right now, it is not.

Jacobsen: What else could go comically wrong?

Kelly: Well, a few things.

To complete the absurdity of this situation, after five years of struggling to get rebates to small businesses—the 10% share of carbon tax revenue originally promised—the government has now decided to reduce that percentage to 5%.

Essentially, the government found the rebate process too complicated, so instead of fixing the issue, they cut small businesses’ share in half.

Meanwhile, the carbon tax continues to be collected for 2024 and into 2025. While we expect it may be scrapped, given that both major Liberal leadership candidates and the Conservatives have promised to eliminate it, the tax is still scheduled to increase by 19% on April 1, 2025.

No one in government has signaled otherwise.

Additionally, with small business rebates now reduced to just 5%, I am concerned that businesses may never receive the money they are owed.

If the carbon tax is repealed, will the government still follow through and return every dollar collected up to that point?

That will likely become a major lobbying battle because these are billions of dollars flowing into Ottawa, and governments can always find other ways to spend it.

Jacobsen: What could be the long-term implications of the CRA’s decision for the relationship between small businesses and the federal government?

Kelly: Unfortunately, this is not the first time we’ve seen a disconnect between the Department of Finance and the Canada Revenue Agency (CRA).

One of the basic expectations in a functioning democracy is that when a government sets tax policy, it is implemented as intended. However, to ensure this happens, the rules must be legislated.

This is not the only example. I was on the other side of this issue when dealing with the capital gains tax changes. In that case, the CRA attempted to enforce new tax rules before the legislation was even passed. We need to create a tighter legislative window to prevent these kinds of problems.

CFIB is actively lobbying for Canada to adopt a rule similar to the United Kingdom, where if a government introduces new tax measures, it must pass legislation within a fixed timeframe—we suggest three to six months.

If the government fails to pass the legislation within that period, then the tax rules would automatically revert to their previous state.

This would provide clarity and accountability in tax policymaking, which is especially critical in a country where minority parliaments are common. We need a better system for tax policy decisions than the one we have today.

Jacobsen: Does the prolonged delay and unclear guidance from Finance Canada and the CRA affect CFIB’s credibility with some of its members?

Kelly: I have worried about that, yes. I don’t want to be the boy who cried wolf—saying “it’s taxable”, then the government switches gears, and suddenly “it’s not taxable”, only to have them reverse course again.

I have been concerned about this, but at the end of the day, if small business owners are looking for an honest broker on tax policy, they are more likely to trust CFIB than they are to rely on Finance Canada or the Canada Revenue Agency right now.

And that is deeply troubling.

Small businesses shouldn’t have to turn to a non-profit business association to get accurate tax policy information. That is the government’s responsibility, and the fact that we are in this situation today is entirely avoidable.

This mess never needed to happen.

Jacobsen: One final question: Throughout this conversation, we’ve touched on it, but what timelines should people reasonably expect—whether they’re following CFIB’s advocacy work or monitoring the political developments we’re seeing domestically?

Kelly: As of now, Parliament is scheduled to return on March 24, 2025, when the prorogation ends. Before that, on March 9, 2025, the Liberal Party is expected to announce its new leader, who will likely become Prime Minister.

Following that, we assume a new cabinet will be formed, and government operations will resume.

However, it is unclear how long Parliament will sit—it could be days or even just hours, as multiple parties have indicated they no longer have confidence in the government.

We are pushing to get this issue on the immediate legislative agenda.

Right now, all we need is a Ways and Means motion.

We don’t even need full legislation to pass yet—we just need the government to introduce it. That alone would set the process in motion and allow the CRA to change its tax interpretation.

Regardless of who is in power—Liberal, Conservative, or some other coalition—we will need to continue lobbying to ensure this legislation is finalized.

I am hoping that by spring, we can at least get the CRA to change its initial interpretation.

Most businesses have not yet filed their corporate income taxes for this year, so if we act quickly, we may be able to fix this issue before they are forced to file tax amendments.

That is our goal.

Jacobsen: Dan, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it. It was great to meet you.

Kelly: Not at all. Pleasure to meet you as well, and congratulations on the business you’ve built.

Jacobsen: Thank you.

Kelly: Cheers! Have a great day.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Beer Girl Brewing Co.: Crafting a Refreshing, Inclusive Lager

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/25 (Unpublished)

Beer Girl Brewing Co., founded by Caroline Renezeder Foulk in Los Angeles, specializes in a 3.5% ABV Mexican-style lager. Foulk, drawing from her entrepreneurial background, identified a market gap as many women opt for seltzers and ciders over beer. Beer Girl aims to bridge that gap, offering a full-bodied, approachable lager. The brand is rapidly growing, hosting community events and expanding its reach while maintaining intentional, grassroots growth in Southern California. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, today, we are here with Beer Girl Brewing Co., which is a Los Angeles-based brewery founded by Caroline Renezeder Foulk, specializing in a 3.5% ABV Mexican-style lager that is gluten-reduced, low in sugar, and easy to drink. The brand aims to create an inclusive beer culture by offering a light, refreshing alternative to traditional brews. Available in 12 oz cans and on draft across Southern California, Beer Girl operates through self-distribution and community engagement. The company also offers a monthly “Beerlivery” subscription service. Through its products and events, Beer Girl promotes a welcoming environment for all beer enthusiasts while redefining beer industry norms. Thank you for joining me today. 

Caroline Foulk: Of course. Thank you for taking the time to talk. 

Jacobsen: Now, what inspired you to create Beer Girl? 

Foulk: So, I have been in the beer industry for the last five years or so. Ironically, my background was not in food and beverage. I went to school to study music and writing. I ended up in the beer industry by happenstance working on the development of a brewery in Oxnard, California. I was involved in construction, finance and eventually the operations of the brewery. 

During that time, I learned so much about the beer industry. I’ve always had an entrepreneurial spirit and looked for gaps in the market and ways to fill them creatively. 

At Wagon Wheel, we had a wide variety of beers, which are well-received by both men and women. However, I noticed that some women would choose seltzers, ciders, tequila, or vodka instead of beer. I saw this not just at our brewery and everywhere—restaurants, bars, and even back in college. 

I decided to look into the data and discovered a significant market share gap. Compared to vodka and tequila, which have a 50/50 consumer split, and wine, which is 60/40 (women to men), beer skews heavily male at 75/25. That led me to ask the question, why aren’t more women drinking beer? 

I saw this as a missed market opportunity. We could expand the category by creating a beer that appealed to women who typically choose other drinks. So, I did a deep dive into understanding what those women didn’t like about beer. 

That research led to the development of the Beer Girl recipe. We created the branding, marketing, and recipe to target these consumers intentionally. 

So far, it has been successful. We see Beer Girl as a gateway for women who haven’t traditionally given beer a chance. We hope that they enjoy it and eventually explore different beer styles. 

And then it’s also for the people who already love beer—who love lagers. We are 3.5% ABV, low sugar, and gluten-reduced. However, the taste of Beer Girl still has such a full of body. It tastes amazing and has a similar profile to that of a Peroni. It blows people away—men and

women alike – they try the beer and expect it to taste light or watered down because it’s gluten-reduced low sugar, and low ABV. But it doesn’t. 

It keeps its full-bodied finish, and I give full credit to our head brewer, who is so talented and came up with the recipe. 

Jacobsen: Does your husband have anything to say about the difference between Canadian beer, American beer, and Beer Girl? 

Foulk: Oh my gosh, that is a great question, and I have no idea what he would say. When he was in Canada, to be honest, he was 15 to 21 years old, and he was playing hockey. So, he’s not super well-versed in Canadian brews. But I can tell you that he loves a lager. Since becoming a Southern Californian, he has become obsessed with Mexican lagers and is a fan of Beer Girl. 

Jacobsen: What about the process for developing the 3.5% ABV Mexican-style lager? Can you describe both the concept development and the brewing process from the brewery to the can? 

Foulk: Yes. So, we put a Mexican-style lager on draft at our brewery in 2023. It did so well amongst both men and women. Honestly, it was my favourite beer that we produced. 

Based on market research, I wanted the ABV needed to be just a little lower. The one we had on draft was 4.5% ABV, so I asked our head brewer if there was any way to bring it down to 3.5%. he’s so talented—he made it happen. 

The biggest concern when lowering ABV is that the beer can start to taste a little watered down. But through our recipe and trade secrets, we ensured it still tastes phenomenal. 

We brew everything in Oxnard and can the product straight from our tanks. We self-distribute, store in Southern California, and have our delivery fleet. We handle our self-distribution, so the process starts at the brewery in Oxnard, moves to cold box storage, and then goes out to our retail accounts. 

Jacobsen: What are the biggest challenges in developing the product? Are they specific to the beer itself or more about building the business? 

Foulk: Well, these challenges are intertwined. 

Jacobsen: Let’s start with the big picture—the business as a whole—and then we can get into the specific challenges with the beer itself. 

Foulk: Yes. So, in terms of the beer itself, one of the biggest concerns was whether making it a reduced-ABV product would compromise the beer’s body and flavor. We had to navigate that carefully to ensure it had the richness and flavour we wanted. 

Regarding the business, I’d say one of the biggest challenges we’re facing—something pretty typical when taking the self-distribution route—is that retailers generally prefer to work with beer brands that already have a distributor. So, coming in and disrupting that space means we have to prove ourselves to retailers. We must show them how hard we work, how reliable we are, 

and how timely our deliveries will be. The biggest concern for many retailers is, “You’re self-distributed. Can you get this to me on time?” Because distributors know orders will be delivered reliably. These are large companies with pre-existing logistics networks. 

Another challenge is that they often represent five, ten, fifteen, or even twenty brands simultaneously when a distributor comes in. General and bar managers—especially in

on-premise locations—are incredibly busy and prefer a one stop shop. They want to handle multiple orders simultaneously, making them hesitant to take on a new brand. They’re also reluctant because carrying a new brand could mean giving up valuable shelf or tap space and potentially disrupting existing relationships with major distributors. This makes it challenging for an independent brand like ours to break in. 

That said, we chose self-distribution for a reason. Distributors take 30% of sales, and as a new company with a new concept, we decided it was better to build our brand from the ground up. Instead of giving up that 30%, we reinvest it into our team. We have an excellent sales team here in California. Despite initial pushback about not having a distributor, they consistently win accounts. 

One of our biggest advantages over distributors is that we can show up in ways they cannot. We provide specialized marketing, do on-site tastings and hand sales, pitch customized events, and engage directly with our Beer Girl community. Our approach helps drive product movement for 

retailers, proving that working with us is worth it. So, while self-distribution does present challenges, it has also become our biggest asset. It requires more backend logistics for me and my husband, but it’s worth it because we can scale at our own pace and grow intentionally—on our terms. 

We’ll likely partner with a distributor when ready to expand beyond California. But by that time, we’ll have built a strong, independent brand that will make it easy for a distributor to want to work with us. 

Jacobsen: And there’s that 30% margin on at least one line item that you can capitalize on. At the same time, you don’t have access to the standardized distribution networks that these larger companies rely on. So, how does the self-distribution model impact your profit margins and distribution strategy in a state like California? 

Foulk: I wouldn’t say it changes the profit margins overall because that 30% we would typically allocate to a distributor is instead being **invested into our own sales team—**their salaries, commissions, and direct sales efforts. So, while we don’t have the logistical support of a large distributor, we make up for it by having a dedicated team focused solely on Beer Girl. 

We’re putting that 30% back into our own team and marketing efforts, so we don’t necessarily see a difference in profit per unit. However, we see a significant difference in overall profit because of how our sales reps operate. They can move products at a higher velocity by actively marketing to retailers. When a distributor rep visits a retailer, they’re juggling 10 to 20 different brands, which means they cannot give equal attention to all of them—especially the smaller brands. On the other hand, our Beer Girl sales reps get to focus entirely on our brand, ensuring that our product is moving efficiently and consistently. 

As a result, we are generating more profit through self-distribution at this stage. That being said, at a certain point, logistics will become too complex to manage without a distributor, particularly when expanding nationally. However, in California, we’ve completely nailed our model and are super happy with how it works. We wouldn’t want to deviate from this approach anytime soon. 

Jacobsen: What about community engagement? How does it contribute to the brand’s success? 

Foulk: We have strategically placed community managers in the territories where we operate. Whether at on-premise accounts, off-premise accounts, or unique venues, we constantly pitch

and host events to build a community around Beer Girl. We create spaces where women and men can come out, have fun, and experience the brand’s identity firsthand. 

For example, we host tap takeovers at on-premise accounts where Beer Girl is on draft. For Valentine’s Day, we organized a movie night. These events bring people together, allowing them to engage with the brand while meeting other like-minded people—especially women—who are drawn to our events. 

Even though we are Beer Girl, our events attract men, and many attendees become fans of the brand. When we launch a new retail account, we can call on our community and say, “Hey, we’re now available at this location—go check it out!” This level of engagement helps us sell out inventory quickly and expand our footprint. 

Beyond just sales, we create a sense of ownership within our community. People want to see the brand succeed because they love the product, the merchandise, and the branding as a whole. In return, we invest in them by continuously hosting community events that strengthen customer relationships. 

It’s a win-win situation for everyone. As long as we thrive in retail, we can continue to give back to our community, host more events, and grow the brand sustainably and inclusively. It’s a cyclical process, and that’s exactly how we want to scale our impact. 

Jacobsen: How do you see the company evolving? How do you see the company incorporating bigger events and wider distribution networks outside of Southern California? 

Foulk: Yes. I’m a creative and visual person, and I think big. I’ve learned through this process that my goal when I think about Beer Girl in five years is for it to be a national brand. However, we’re going to get there by focusing on our backyard first—by winning in Southern California and ensuring we are doing everything we can to be the best here. We have to remain so, so focused on building a strong foundation. 

At the right time, with the right partners, expansion will happen organically. I am all about things growing naturally rather than forcing someone to take a chance on us from a distribution standpoint. I want any partnership to feel mutually beneficial and authentic. I believe that when things happen genuinely, they work out best—both parties push the product because they truly believe in it. 

So, the more we focus on growing Beer Girl authentically in Southern California, the more the right partner will look at what we’re doing and say, “Wow, look at their success. I want to help take this to the next level.” But that will only happen at the right time—we’re not trying to expand too quickly and get ahead of ourselves. We want to build this brand brick by brick. 

Jacobsen: Are there any other beers like this in other states? 

Foulk: I don’t know of any in other states. However, the beer industry is starting to pay more attention to women. It’s funny because when I’ve had conversations with bigger players or industry contacts, mostly men, they’ve all reacted positively to the concept. There has been a lot of discussion within the beer industry about the need to bring more women into the category. 

As we continue to grow, I expect to see more brands emerge that specifically target women. The beer industry needs it—women comprise half the population, so they should be included in the narrative.

Jacobsen: What has been the response from customers? 

Foulk: Customers love the product. What usually draws people in is the name—Beer Girl—and the branding. Women love the aesthetic and branding, while men tend to find the name cheeky and fun, which makes them curious to try it. 

I also think that when people hear that it’s gluten-reduced and low ABV, they’re often skeptical, thinking, “Let’s see how this tastes.” But once they try it, they are blown away. We’ve been capturing real-time reactions from both men and women for our social media, and the feedback has been overwhelmingly positive. 

One of the biggest things we hear, especially from women, is that they don’t experience the heavy, bloated feeling that beer often causes. Of course, everyone is different, and I would never make a blanket statement that all women won’t feel bloated drinking Beer Girl. But I can speak from my own experience—I have an autoimmune disease, and I struggle with feeling very sensitive to alcohol. I really only drink beer, and this product has been a great option for me. 

I don’t drink any hard alcohol. I don’t drink wine because of the sugar. The Beer Girl recipe we created works well for my system and me. Not to say that it’s necessarily a healthy product, but it’s certainly a better-for-you option. 

Jacobsen: What has been your biggest event or initiative involving this product or promoting more women’s involvement in this space? 

Foulk: Yes. Well, our biggest initiative—we’ve done around 40 events in the last two months. We’re constantly hosting events at new retail locations where Beer Girl is available. Our biggest turnout of women was definitely at our Valentine’s Day event. I don’t want to give too much away yet, but we’re working hard to scale up for a few big events in April and May. These will be festival-related, and that’s all I’ll say for now, but we’re very excited. 

It’s been so cool to see the impact of these events. We sell merchandise at them, and now, just walking around Orange County or San Diego, we’re spotting people wearing Beer Girl hats. It’s incredible to see the brand spreading organically in real life. The community is growing, and we can physically see it happening. That’s been one of the most rewarding parts of this journey. 

Jacobsen: If you were to expand nationally, which state do you think would be the most successful for Beer Girl? 

Foulk: We would do well in Texas. It gets super hot down there, and I’m obsessed with Austin. Some of my best friends live there, and it’s such a fun, cool, and unique city. There’s a huge presence of young entrepreneurs, emerging brands, and creative thinkers. A light lager on a hot day would do phenomenally well there. 

Any of the hotter states—Arizona, Nevada, Texas, and down along the coast to Florida—would be great markets for us. I also think Beer Girl would do well in New York. The cool part about Beer Girl’s branding is that we’ve made it feel classic and timeless, so it resonates across different regions. 

However, it will naturally perform best in warmer states because it’s a light lager. I don’t know if people will drink much Beer Girl in Saskatchewan, Canada, but in states with warm weather, we’ll see people fall in love with it.

Jacobsen: Well, I have it on good authority that how much Beer Girl you drink highly depends on whether or not you’re from Saskatoon. 

Foulk: So funny. 

Jacobsen: What about competitors? 

Foulk: It’s funny—I’ve been in blinder mode a little, and I learned that approach from my husband. Naturally, I tend to be someone who looks at the competition and wants to see what’s out there. To a certain extent, that’s smart. But my husband comes from an athletic background, and his mindset has always been, “You train and focus on being the best version of yourself.” That’s how we’ve approached Beer Girl. We’re not obsessing over competitors but focusing on perfecting what we do best. 

That being said, there are a few female-founded brands in Orange County, including one based in San Clemente, and they’re amazing. Their branding is strong, and it’s important to champion that rather than view them as competition. Some Southern California-based brands have a fun, coastal, cowgirl vibe but don’t particularly target one gender over the other. While many women gravitate toward those brands, they’re not necessarily designed for women. We may fall in line with some of those competitors. 

But in Orange County and San Diego—our two primary markets—we haven’t encountered many brands doing exactly what we’re doing. That has been both an advantage and a reminder that the more we collaborate and build friendships in this space, the better. If we can raise the entire category, everyone wins. That has always been our approach. 

Jacobsen: What about business multilateralism and partnerships with other industries? Have you looked into collaborations outside of beer, and if so, to what extent? 

Foulk: Yes. We’re actively looking into different verticals because you want to create a full lifestyle brand when building a brand. That’s how the most successful brands operate. Look at Red Bull—they are more than just an energy drink. They have built a culture around action sports, music, and extreme events. That’s the long-term brand-building we’re considering for Beer Girl. 

One example of this is our first apparel drop next month. We’ve taken a hands-on approach and done all of our cut-and-sewn apparel. I worked hard on the designs because we wanted to go beyond screen-printed merchandise. There’s nothing wrong with traditional branded merch, but we wanted to elevate it. We wanted to create something that truly feels like Beer Girl. 

We’ll see how our consumers react to the clothing line, but I’m hoping it will be positive—that people will want to wear Beer Girl apparel while drinking Beer Girl. 

Beyond that, I’ve always been a huge sports fan. My dad was a professional athlete in the racing world, so I grew up surrounded by that culture. I would love for Beer Girl to get involved in sports sponsorships when the time is right. There’s so much opportunity right now, especially with the rise of female athletic leagues getting more media attention and support. 

There will be some cool opportunities for synergy between those leagues and Beer Girl. 

Jacobsen: Do you think much is left to explore in this space? Not just light beers but different types of beer-adjacent alcoholic beverages that women might be interested in but haven’t been catered to yet.

Foulk: Absolutely. The standard stereotypes of alcohol categories—wine for women, beer for men, spritzers as the in-between option—have been around for a long time. But beer, and especially craft beer, is so diverse. It’s like drinking wine—figuring out what styles you like best takes time. 

I don’t consider myself to have the most advanced palate. I know what I like when it comes to beer, but I will say that once you start drinking lagers and develop a taste for them, you’re more likely to expand your palate and try other styles—maybe an IPA, a blonde ale, or something with more complexity. 

At our brewery, where we manufacture Beer Girl, we also produce a double hazy IPA that I am obsessed with. It’s so good. I can only drink about half of one because of the alcohol content, but it’s amazing. So, there is potential for other styles to resonate with women, but for now, we are laser-focused on lagers. I believe lagers are the best gateway into the beer category for people who may not have traditionally explored it. 

Jacobsen: Have you ever had moments while building this company when you felt alone as a businesswoman and had to muster emotional fortitude to keep going? Or have you always felt supported? 

Foulk: I feel very lucky to have an amazing support network of family and friends. My entire family has an entrepreneurial mindset, which has been incredible because I’ve always had role models to look up to. Seeing their journeys has made me feel reassured in the decisions I’m making. 

That being said, there are times when you’re working so hard that you hit a moment of exhaustion and think, “Oh my gosh, can I keep pushing forward?” 

Sometimes I think, “I could just get a normal job.” Many people assume that when you start your own company, you have free time or do it for yourself. But in reality, it’s the opposite—your workload increases exponentially. It’s like flipping a switch that never turns off. 

It gets so much harder, and you work around the clock. There are moments when I think, “What did I sign myself up for?”But those moments are fleeting. The feeling quickly fades because we’re building something amazing. Our team has a strong camaraderie, and we celebrate daily wins that lift everyone up. 

I also feel really lucky to be at this point in my life and in a time when 

entrepreneurship—especially for women—is encouraged. In 2025, many of my male and female friends are launching their own companies, and women are being told they can do this. I feel incredibly grateful to have been born in this era and to be building my career now. It would have been so much harder twenty years ago. 

Jacobsen: I’ll ask one more question, and then we can wrap up. I’m not sure why I didn’t ask this earlier—when you do get moments to take a break, what are your favourite ways to disconnect from the chaos of being a business owner? 

Foulk: I love spending time with family and friends. That always helps me step out of my head. But I also have personal outlets that bring me back to myself. My background is in music, so playing the piano is my go-to way to reset. 

Recently, I’ve fallen in love with equestrian sports. Playing piano and riding horses are the two things that completely remove me from my constant task list and help me be present.

I’m also an ocean girl. Living in Southern California is incredible because I can quickly dip in the ocean, instantly feeling grounded and in the moment. That’s important because, right now, I’m balancing so many things and wearing a million hats. It’s hard to step away from work, but I feel fortunate to live where I can easily immerse myself in nature and regain that sense of balance. 

Jacobsen: Well, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it. 

Foulk: Yes, thank you! Thank you so much.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Aminah Taariq Sidibe on Plastics and Sustainability

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/25

Aminah Taariq-Sidibe is the Manager of End Plastics Initiatives at EARTHDAY.ORG, where she leads efforts to combat plastic pollution and its impact on marginalized communities. She holds a B.Sc. in Environmental and Sustainability Sciences and a B.Sc. in Communications from Cornell University, as well as a Master’s in Communications from Columbia University. Previously a Yale Environmental Fellow, Aminah specializes in science communication, environmental justice, and sustainability advocacy. Plastic pollution disproportionately impacts marginalized communities, particularly in the Global South and low-income areas, where waste processing facilities expose residents to toxic chemicals and health risks. Microplastics have been detected in human organs, raising concerns about endocrine disruption, immune system damage, and chronic diseases. Environmental justice initiatives, such as Flint’s water crisis activism and the LA Zero Waste Plan, highlight the intersection of social equity and sustainability. However, pro-plastic lobbying hinders progress by promoting false solutions like “advanced recycling.” Community engagement ensures inclusive policies, while science communication and the End Plastics Initiative drive global action toward sustainable plastic reduction.Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does plastic pollution impact marginalized communities?

Aminah Taariq Sidibe: Marginalized communities, particularly those in the Global South and low-income areas in wealthier nations, are disproportionately burdened with plastic waste, pollution, and toxic exposure. These communities often host plastic production facilities, incinerators, and landfills, leading to higher rates of respiratory diseases, cancer, and endocrine disorders due to chemical exposure. Additionally, plastic waste exports from wealthier countries flood regions that they know lack the infrastructure to manage them, further compounding environmental and health risks.

Jacobsen: What are the health risks associated with microplastic exposure?

Sidibe: Microplastics have infiltrated our air, water, food, and bodies. Studies have found microplastics in the human brain, blood, lungs, and even placentas. These particles act as carriers for toxic chemicals, endocrine disruptors (like BPA and phthalates), and persistent organic pollutants, all of which have been linked to hormone disruption, immune system damage, and chronic diseases like cancer and metabolic disorders. The reality is, we don’t yet know the full extent of the harm they cause—but we do know that marginalized communities facing higher environmental toxic loads are at even greater risk.

Jacobsen: What are case studies of environmental justice initiatives integrating social equity with sustainability?

Sidibe: Flint Water Crisis & Environmental Justice Organizing: Flint’s water crisis exposed low-income, Black residents to lead-contaminated water due to cost-cutting measures, prompting grassroots activism, national outrage, and policy changes that highlighted environmental racism and forced broader accountability for water safety.

The LA Zero Waste Plan: Los Angeles is implementing equity-centered waste management policies, ensuring that frontline communities benefit from sustainable waste solutions rather than being dumping grounds.

The Basel Convention Amendments (2019): Countries like Indonesia and the Philippines successfully pushed back against plastic waste imports, citing environmental justice concerns. This marked a shift in the Global South fighting back against plastic colonialism.

Jacobsen: What are the pro-plastic lobbying efforts and preemptive legislation?

Sidibe: The plastics industry, led by fossil fuel giants, has aggressively lobbied to frame plastic as a “recyclable” and “necessary” material despite overwhelming evidence of its harm. One example of lobbying is The American Chemistry Council’s effort to gain funding and subsidies for “advanced recycling”, which is really just plastic incineration. Preemptive legislation, often backed by industry, blocks cities and states from passing plastic bans or regulations (banning bans on plastics).

Jacobsen: How do these hinder sustainable future solutions and approaches?

Sidibe: By promoting false solutions (like recycling), resisting bans, and controlling policy narratives, these lobbying efforts delay real progress. They divert attention from reduction efforts, mislead consumers about recyclability, and actively push more plastic production while the world drowns in plastic pollution. This makes it harder to implement circular economy strategies and transition to sustainable alternatives.

Jacobsen: What role does community engagement play in ensuring sustainability policies are inclusive?

Sidibe: Community engagement is essential. It ensures that the people most affected by plastic pollution have a seat at the table. Grassroots organizations, Indigenous leadership, and youth activists are shaping solutions that are both culturally relevant and equitable. Successful policies come when frontline communities are not just consulted, but actively leading in decision-making, shaping waste reduction strategies, and holding corporations accountable.

Jacobsen: How can science and sustainability communication highlight environmental activism?

Sidibe: Science communication is most powerful when it’s accessible and action-driven. Overloading people with stats won’t inspire change—storytelling, personal narratives, and real-world impact examples resonate more. Highlighting how plastic exposure connects to health, economic justice, and everyday life makes these issues tangible.

Jacobsen: To Earth Day’s 55th anniversary in 2025, how will the End Plastics Initiative influence global sustainability policies?

Sidibe: In 2025, Earth Day’s 55th anniversary will serve as a global rallying point to push for stronger plastic reduction policies and corporate accountability. The End Plastics Initiative will continue to (1) advocate for legally binding global agreements on plastic production cuts, (2) support grassroots and community-led efforts against plastic waste, (3) push for corporate responsibility, holding polluters accountable for their role in the crisis, and (4) elevate the conversation about plastic pollution’s impact on health, especially in marginalized communities. This year, we want to turn awareness into action!

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Aminah.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Transforming Jails Through Education, Second Chances

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/24 (Unpublished)

Sheriff Chris Swanson of Genesee County, Michigan, leads IGNITE (Inmate Growth Naturally and Intentionally Through Education), a transformative jail program focused on rehabilitation through education, job training, and wraparound support. Since launching in 2020, IGNITE has significantly reduced recidivism, jail violence, and costs, earning validation from Harvard, Brown, and Michigan. With partnerships from labour unions and support from figures like Jelly Roll and Snoop Dogg, IGNITE equips inmates for successful reentry into society. The program is expanding nationally and globally, with Swanson set to keynote at Oxford in 2025. IGNITE proves that cultural change in corrections is possible—and practical.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Sheriff Chris Swanson, a dedicated law enforcement leader serving Genesee County, Michigan.

With a deep commitment to public safety and criminal justice reform, Sheriff Swanson has led transformative change in the local correctional system through innovative initiatives—most notably, the IGNITE program (Inmate Growth Naturally and Intentionally Through Education). His leadership has contributed to a measurable reduction in recidivism, improved inmate behaviour, and a historic shift in how Genesee County approaches incarceration. Swanson’s forward-thinking strategies have earned recognition from community leaders and national organizations.

Through tireless efforts, he continues promoting rehabilitation and building trust between law enforcement and the community. His visionary leadership inspires meaningful change daily. Thank you so much for joining me today.

Chris Swanson: I truly appreciate it. It’s a pleasure to know your background, Scott. 

Jacobsen: So, what inspired the development of the IGNITE program?

Swanson: IGNITE is more than a program—a cultural shift. Think back to your school years. Some had great educational experiences; others didn’t. But there’s a large group of people—especially among our incarcerated population—who had no educational experience at all. Those individuals often come from cycles of poverty, addiction, trauma, and brokenness. And that’s who we see filling jails across North America.

I was a struggling student myself. But I made it through community college, then earned a bachelor’s and a master’s degree. In 1998, while finishing my master’s thesis, I explored the question: What lowers crime? The answer wasn’t more police or harsher sentences—it was hope, education, and purpose through employment.

Throughout my 30-year career, I’ve seen the same families cycling in and out of jail. When I became sheriff in 2019, I knew Michigan wasn’t immune to this cycle. If we were going to break it, we needed to change how we did business. So, we replaced a culture of incarceration with a culture of education. We didn’t push cases—we created opportunities.

When someone comes to jail, they’re going to learn, work toward a diploma, trade certification, or college credit, and prepare for a job. The goal is that they never return. When that happens, we all win: fewer victims, reduced costs for taxpayers, and real rehabilitation.

Jacobsen: And building a culture like this takes more than just policy. It takes people—staff members, educators, volunteers, community leaders, and even celebrities. So, how did Snoop Dogg get involved?

Swanson: Great question. And you’re spot on—culture change starts at the top and moves outward. Not everyone’s heart will get there at the same speed, but leadership has to lead.

When we transformed our jail into a place of opportunity, it made the facility safer for inmates and corrections officers, law enforcement on the street, and administrative staff. It also reduces legal liability and fills workforce gaps in the community. There’s a ripple effect when you educate people and give them the tools not to return to jail.

As for Snoop Dogg—he reached out because he saw what we were doing with IGNITE and wanted to help. He’s passionate about giving people second chances and breaking the cycle, just like we are. He’s since become a vocal supporter of the program, helping us expand our message nationwide.

When that happened in 2020, we launched it. I started noticing all the data—that crime had gone down, that violence in the jail was down by 90%, and that our liability lawsuits were significantly reduced. But we fought an uphill battle because if there’s one profession I know that fights change, it’s law enforcement. And if there’s one profession I know that wants to change, it’s law enforcement. So you’re working both ends of the spectrum at the same time.

However, when we saw the success and tracked the data from day one, it caught the eye of many influencers. In the United States, 80 million people have been incarcerated for at least one day, according to The Nation Outside, a group representing returning citizens. That’s 80 million people. One of those is Snoop Dogg.

Another is Jelly Roll. They’re the ones who contacted me. They saw what we’re doing because we share our story—just like we’re doing on your show. When you have people who have the same heart but a position of influence, they want to be a part of it. That’s how I connected with Shaggy, Jelly Roll, and Snoop Dogg.

Jacobsen: Who has been the most involved of those three?

Swanson: Hands down, Jelly Roll. This guy has burst onto the country music–pop–and rap scene over the last three years like a firestorm. He’s currently in Canada finishing a tour and genuinely loves people. His real name is Jason DeFord, and under the name Jelly Roll, he’s become an advocate for second chances. He spent multiple years incarcerated and has felony convictions for drugs and other crimes—but he turned his life around.

Everyone listening to the show has been given that opportunity—maybe not through the criminal justice system, but we’ve all had second chances. I had a mutual friend in the country music industry who connected us. I sent him a video, and he sent me one back. When I told him what we were doing, it caught his attention. Since then, he’s visited our community twice in the last year and a half. You can find those visits online. He became an inspiration not only to the inmates but a validator for the staff.

You asked earlier about culture change. Sometimes, the validators must come from outside the leadership circle—and that’s exactly what Jelly Roll has done and continues to do.

Jacobsen: What are the core components of the educational programming offered through IGNITE?

Swanson: IGNITE is simple. It’s the mindset shift from incarceration to education. We go to school five days a week.

The entire jail population has the opportunity—whether you need to learn your colours and numbers, want to earn a GED, a diploma, a degree, improve financial literacy, or explore one of thousands of other courses. That five-day-a-week educational structure is based on meritocracy. When you succeed in a program or graduate, we celebrate that accomplishment.

Many of the people in jails across North America have never been told, “Great job. I’m proud of you.” They’ve grown up in broken homes. Nine out of ten people incarcerated in North America are addicted or co-addicted. Six out of ten of them struggle with a mental illness—often undiagnosed. And half of them can’t read a menu.

So when we build opportunities to learn—and we bring in instructors who aren’t paid but come from industries, communities, labour unions, online platforms, and even virtual reality systems—they are proud of what they’re doing. And when we talk about that population, and they don’t come back, it matters because nine out of ten men and women are returning to our communities.

Only ten percent of incarcerated individuals in the United States go to prison. The remaining ninety percent cycle through jails. So when people do not come back to jail, it means there’s less crime, fewer victims, and reduced relapse into addiction. It all comes down to one principle: value. Give people value. Could you give them a job? They don’t come back to jail.

Jacobsen: What about the issue of recidivism? That’s a major challenge in the United States and many other places. A significant portion—arguably the majority—of individuals in jail are there because they’ve returned after reoffending. Often, it is the same crime committed shortly after release. How does the IGNITE program address that issue?

Swanson: I’ll tell you this: “recidivism” has been a buzzword for my thirty-two years in law enforcement. No matter the area or political affiliation, everyone tries to figure out the same thing: How do we reduce crime? After all the strategies we’ve tried, I’ve found that one approach works, and that’s IGNITE. From the day we launched it, we began tracking the data. That launch wasn’t marked by a new building or a big budget—it was a ribbon-cutting on September 8, 2020, driven by a culture change.

I knew that if we tracked the data consistently. Eventually, someone outside the system would validate it. That moment came when Dr. Alsan from Harvard University took an interest. We entered into a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) with Harvard, Brown University, and the University of Michigan, and those institutions studied IGNITE’s outcomes for 18 months. In February 2024, they published peer-reviewed results.

I could tell you what Genesee County feels, what our community believes, or what families say—but instead, let me share the hard, validated data from the peer-reviewed economic and finance research done by those institutions:

  1. One month of IGNITE reduces weekly jail misconduct by 49 percent.
  2. On average, IGNITE participants gained one full grade level in math and reading proficiency.
  3. IGNITE improved community perceptions of law enforcement and fostered positive relationships.
  4. One month of IGNITE reduces the 12-month social cost of crime by $5,600 per person.

And ultimately:

  1. One month of IGNITE reduces three-month recidivism by 19% and one-year recidivism by 20%, as validated by Harvard University.

So yes—this is the answer. It’s not the only answer, but the one we’ve been looking for. That’s why IGNITE is expanding across the country—and even internationally.

Jacobsen: Is there a need to tailor the program’s educational components to the specific needs of incarcerated individuals?

Swanson: Great question. No jail is the same. IGNITE has a national standard, but it originated in Genesee County and took root in places like Collin County, Texas—just north of Dallas–Fort Worth—and as far north as Fargo, North Dakota, just south of Canada. Each region has its own needs based on its population. You’ll find the same thing in Northern New York or Minneapolis, Minnesota.

Sheriffs and leaders working with incarcerated populations know their people. IGNITE is a philosophy—it’s a culture change. But education is universal. There are no borders when it comes to teaching. You meet people where they are and give them the incentive to raise their own ceiling.

For example, in Fargo, North Dakota, the emphasis is on agriculture, business, and finance. We’re training individuals to become ironworkers and line operators in Michigan because of our strong labour and manufacturing sectors. In Texas, they even have an equestrian program. Sheriff Skinner in Collin County serves over 1.2 million people, and his population has very different needs.

So, we tailor IGNITE based on where individuals will go when they leave jail and what skills the community needs. That’s how the program is adapted effectively.

Jacobsen: What are your plans for expansion into more facilities or new regions?

Swanson: We’re taking this global. I’ve had the incredible privilege of seeing our story and message resonate far beyond Michigan. In February 2024, I was contacted by the World Literacy Foundation, which is hosting a global summit at Oxford University. I’ve been selected as the keynote speaker for April 2025 to present IGNITE to an international audience.

That summit represents 82 countries that will be there in person. And when you look at the Harvard study—an expansive, empirical study—they included a statement, Scott, that humbled me when I read it. They knew the program worked, but now they had validated it with peer-reviewed data. They said: If this mentality of education—this philosophy, this cultural shift—can work in the Genesee County Jail in Flint, Michigan, post–water crisis, then it can work anywhere.You’ve done stories on environmental crises in broken communities. When you talk about poverty, crime, and systemic trauma—if it can work in a place like that, then it can work anywhere in the world. I’m telling you, remember what IGNITE stands for: Inmate Growth Naturally and Intentionally Through Education. It is the model that’s going to change the game.

Jacobsen: You mentioned cost savings per person. What about the overall cost efficiency of the program?

Swanson: That’s the great thing—this is not a costly program. When I launched IGNITE in September 2020, we didn’t get a single dollar in funding for the first two and a half years. All we did was change how we used our time. Instead of dead time, we brought in volunteers and teachers from the community.

I have not paid a single dime for anyone to teach in the more than 300,000 contact hours delivered so far inside our jail. We structured the day so that someone participated in one hour of class before lunch. One hour before dinner, they’d earn more time out of their cell, time for quiet study, and incentives—more TV, radio, and movie time—things society uses to reinforce positive behaviour. When they do their part, we do ours.

So no—we didn’t need more money. Too often, when people look for answers, they first ask for funding. I did the opposite. I proved the concept first. We got the results, and then I asked for money because now I had data and real stories to support it.

Getting a program up and running is one thing, but sustaining it is where funding becomes relevant. That’s where partnerships come in. We now work with the National Sheriffs’ Association, which represents 3,084 sheriffs across the U.S., and they have corporate sponsors who help sheriff’s offices bring IGNITE into their communities. So it’s not costing counties anything. Bottom line: It’s a solution with no up-front cost, which makes it even more attractive—anywhere in the world.

Jacobsen: Are any innovative tools—like virtual reality—being integrated into the curriculum?

Swanson: Absolutely. We implemented virtual reality (VR) during the first six months of IGNITE. There are skills we cannot teach hands-on in jail—for obvious safety reasons. We can’t teach people how to build a doorframe, weld a seam, or wire an outlet with actual tools in a secure facility. We still have a violent jail population, and Genesee County is large, with a significant number of high-risk inmates.

So, I immediately partnered with VR software companies. Our first three VR stations taught over 50 professional life skills, including plumbing, electrical, welding, and more. These gave inmates what I call professional awareness—the chance to see and experience trades they might pursue. Then, we linked up with labour unions to create real opportunities on the outside.

For example, we talked offline about a visit to New York and the big city skylines. Ironworkers made those towering buildings. Through IGNITE, we now have a nationwide partnership with the Ironworkers of the United States. When a participant graduates with a welding certification, they’re given—upon release—a helmet, gloves, apron, and direct entry into an apprenticeship with the Ironworkers Union, wherever they live. Do you want to talk about changing a family tree? That’s it right there.

That’s the kind of incentive we’re talking about. The VR stations opened the door to possibilities—literally and figuratively. And once individuals are released from incarceration, they walk into the real world with real skills. That’s just one of many ways IGNITE prepares them.

Jacobsen: How long does it usually take to change the jail culture and how people view incarcerated people?

Swanson: I’m still fighting an uphill battle with many. Even within my facility, some people have a built-in default mindset about how things should be. But that’s not what leaders rest on. Genesee County Jail has been open since 1836. Other counties around the country have been established for hundreds of years. It’s going to take time to get everyone on board.

However, leadership plows through the field. And when the once skeptical people begin to see results, that becomes the most powerful answer to the question, “Will it work?” I’ve read you the validated outcomes from the Harvard study, but beyond that, it’s about consistent momentum.

When another county adopts IGNITE—even if it’s led by a sheriff of a different political party, a different race, a different gender—and they’re still pushing the same culture shift, that’s proof this is not a one-time experiment. This is genuine, measurable, sustainable culture change.

To your second point, there will always be resistance. If we’ve been doing things the same way since the 1830s, it’s up to us as leaders to show people that something better exists. IGNITE is that something better. That’s why you see so many people adopting it—because we don’t just have passion, we have data. It makes sense.

There’s a line I often use when I talk to the media because I know, on the other hand, people who may question educating inmates while they’re incarcerated. But after speaking with families my entire career and dealing with both the street and the jail sides, I always say this: It might not seem like a big deal—unless it’s your kid.

That personalizes it. Because every one of us has either been through something ourselves or loves someone who’s made a bad decision, who’s struggled with addiction, who’s fallen short. But we’ve also seen redemption. We’ve seen second chances turn into lifelong transformations. And when someone embraces that opportunity, it’s a testimony that cannot be denied.

So yes—it’s easy to doubt something you’ve never experienced. But when it touches your family, that’s when people become believers. And I can tell you, Scott, we’ve seen that happen repeatedly. That’s why this movement has gained so much momentum—people from all walks of life are beginning to see the value of our actions.

Jacobsen: And when prisoners get out and participate in the program, what do they say to you?

Swanson: It’s powerful. First, it’s important to note that nine out of ten jail inmates are male, and a smaller percentage are female. But IGNITE serves both genders. The needs of incarcerated women are very different from those of men, and we try to address those differences. One of our goals is to help restore the family unit while someone is still incarcerated.

As I said, nine out of ten individuals return to their communities. So, we have a wraparound program that picks up where IGNITE leaves off. And let me emphasize—people don’t ask to come to jail. What many do not realize is that about 90% of people in U.S. jails are pre-adjudicated. That means they haven’t been convicted; they’re still going through the court process. A very small percentage are serving sentences.

Some are in jail for two, three, or even five years, awaiting court outcomes. Imagine your whole life being paused—your job, family, opportunities—because of a bad decision or just the people you were around. Then, years later, you’re suddenly released—maybe with time served, on a tether, or because your case was dismissed or you were found not guilty. And now you’re expected to rebuild your life from scratch. It’s nearly impossible without help.

We provide wraparound services: identification, education through IGNITE, job placement, and housing support. That’s how people succeed. We’ve had former inmates walk out of Genesee County Jail and into full-time employment. I have countless testimonials—parents coming to the sheriff’s office, former inmates returning for graduation in civilian clothes because they want to be recognized. That’s why we hold commencement ceremonies.

And I’m not exaggerating—I have never seen anything like it. They are so thankful. I’d love to send you a link to a story about one of our early graduates. This man came back from out of state just to say thank you. He was in one of the first IGNITE graduations, and he’s now working as a mason with the Bricklayers Union, making $35 to $40 an hour, with full benefits and retirement. He returned to the jail, walked in with his head held high, and told me, “This changed my life.”

Jacobsen: Chris, thank you for the opportunity and your time today. I appreciate you taking the time.

Swanson: Thank you for your platform, and I appreciate your dedication to journalism.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Cleantech Funding, NRC IRAP, and Innovate BC Support

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/24

Sona Kazemi, Industrial Technology Advisor and NRC IRAP lead for the BC Fast Pilot program, discusses the selection of 12 companies based on market size, industry challenges, and commercialization potential. The program funds cleantech projects in wildfire management, water treatment, and AI, offering up to $1.5M in support. Performance metrics track efficiency and economic impact, with funding bridging pilot-to-market gaps. NRC IRAP and Innovate BC provide ongoing technical and business advisory services for long-term success.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What criteria were the basis for selection of 12 companies participating in the BC Fast Pilot program?

Sona Kazemi: The 12 successful projects were selected based on their alignment with BC Fast Pilot (BCFP) program criteria, including readiness for pilot-scale field testing, demonstrated commercial interest, and a clear commitment from an early adopter or potential customer to test the proposed solution.

The selected projects ranked highest in the following critical evaluation areas:

market size;

industry pain points; 

sales and profit potential; 

technology differentiation; 

scalability; 

strength of intellectual property protection; and,

go-to-market strategies. 

The selection process also assessed the quality of early adopters or potential customers, the strength of the project team, the financial and operational capacity of companies to conduct pilot projects, and the strategy for funding commercialization activities.

The program guidelines can be found here for more details: PDF BC Fast Program Guidelines 2025.pdf

Jacobsen: How were wildfire management to water treatment and artificial intelligence project areas prioritized for the funding round?

Kazemi:The BCFP program is sector-agnostic, prioritizing projects that address critical challenges, have strong business cases, and high commercial potential. Applications are evaluated for their expected economic, environmental, and societal benefits to BC and Canada.

Wildfire management and water treatment have been key focus areas of the program over the past years given their role in protecting communities, preserving natural resources, and ensuring long-term sustainability. There is also growing support for AI-driven innovations that optimize existing industries, improve efficiency, and drive economic growth. 

Jacobsen: What are important details to know about the cleantech projects piloted through this funding?

Kazemi:The 6th round of the BCFP program funded 12 pilot projects across the province with up to $1.5M from the National Research Council of Canada Industrial Research Assistance Program (NRC IRAP) and Innovate BC. These projects encompass a range of sectors, including wildfire management, critical minerals, water treatment and management, clean fuels, transportation, and agriculture. Each initiative uniquely contributes to reducing emissions or waste, or improving resource management.

Jacobsen: What performance metrics will evaluate the pilot projects?

Kazemi: Upon project completion, awardees must submit two reports—one to NRC IRAP and one to Innovate BC—detailing technical and commercial achievements of the project. These reports must include key performance metrics (e.g., capacity, cost, rate, efficiency) and economic metrics such as jobs created or retained, purchase orders, new customer engagements, and secured funding. Additionally, NRC IRAP tracks revenue and employment data for at least 5 years after a project is signed.

Jacobsen: What is the estimated timeline for the pilot phase of the companies before reaching market viability?

Kazemi: The pilot phase timeline varies by industry, lasting from a few months to extended testing to ensure robustness and stability. Some markets enable immediate rollout post-pilot, while others require further demonstrations or de-risking to meet industry standards.  Partnering with early adopters during testing helps identify challenges, validate demand, and navigate real-world complexities, potentially accelerating market viability. Pilot results ultimately shape the path to commercialization, which differs across different industries.

Jacobsen: How will the funding help the transition from pilot demonstrations to full-scale market adoption?

Kazemi: Pilot-scale demonstrations are costly, especially in cleantech, where SMEs often have access to limited cash reserves. Investors, on the other hand, often seek de-risking and customer validation before committing.  The BCFP program bridges that gap by helping with building investor confidence, attracting customers, and accelerating market adoption. Funding is strategically allocated: NRC IRAP supports labour and contractors, while Innovate BC funds equipment, materials, and travel, maximizing financial support within the program’s budget constraints.

Jacobsen: How do the NRC IRAP and Innovate BC plan to support these companies beyond the initial research and development?

Kazemi: NRC IRAP and Innovate BC offer comprehensive support beyond pilot-scale demonstration, further helping SMEs through the commercialization valley of death. NRC IRAP provides support to SMEs through technical and business advisory services provided by industrial technology advisors at every stage of development, from early innovation to market adoption.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Sona.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Best and Worst States for Women 2025

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/24

WalletHub analyst Chip Lupo discusses the best and worst states for women in 2025. Women face disparities in economic opportunities and political representation, with only 26% of Senate seats and 28.7% of House seats held by women. WalletHub’s analysis ranks Hawaii, California, and Minnesota as top states for gender equality, while Arkansas, Oklahoma, and Mississippi lag behind due to high poverty and unemployment rates. Socioeconomic conditions, education, and policy play critical roles. Based on government and nonprofit data, the study emphasizes economic empowerment as key to improving women’s health and safety outcomes nationwide.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We’re here again with WalletHub analyst Chip Lupo to discuss the best and worst states for women in 2025. The general finding is that women continue to face disparities compared to men in most states. Even though women constitute 51% of the U.S. population, they represent a significant portion of minimum-wage workers and have lower political representation. In the 119th Congress (2025–2027), women hold 26% of Senate seats and 28.7% of House seats (CAWP). Internationally, the U.S. shows moderate gender parity, but there’s ample room for improvement to achieve true equality. What are your general findings on this issue?

Chip Lupo: Scott, you’re correct. Significant efforts are needed nationwide to enhance women’s representation in the workforce and politics. However, some states excel in these areas. According to WalletHub’s “Best & Worst States for Women’s Equality” report, the top states include Hawaii, California, and Minnesota.

For instance, Hawaii ranks first overall, with high scores in workplace environment and political empowerment. California follows, performing well across multiple categories. Minnesota also ranks third, indicating strong performance in women’s economic and social well-being.

Conversely, states like Arkansas, Oklahoma, and Mississippi rank lower regarding women’s equality. These states often have higher unemployment rates for women, greater percentages of women living below the poverty line, and more women unable to afford medical care due to costs.

The disparity between the top and bottom states underscores the impact of policies and representation. States with higher female legislative representation tend to enact laws that advance women’s rights and opportunities. In contrast, states with lower female representation may lack such supportive policies.

Notably, the gap between the highest-ranked state, Hawaii, and the lowest-ranked states is significant, highlighting the varying degrees of progress across the country. This emphasizes the need for continued efforts to promote gender equality nationwide.

Jacobsen: This one is quite widespread, ranging from 77.22 to 35.73. What do you think are the reasons for this wide or flat spread among states regarding the best and worst states for women in the United States?

Lupo: Well, when you’re talking about something that is, for the most part, subjective—such as women’s equality—it’s not always cut and dry. A lot of it comes down to policy. The high-ranking states tend to be more progressive in their thinking and legislation, while the bottom-ranking states lack those policy measures.

It’s largely policy-driven, but socioeconomics also plays a major role. When discussing factors like unemployment rates or median income levels, the lowest-ranking states tend to be lower-income states with fewer job opportunities.

For example, Massachusetts, Minnesota, and Washington, D.C. have some of the highest median annual incomes. These states have strong economies, robust job markets, and policies that support women’s economic participation. In contrast, the lower-ranking states struggle in multiple areas.

One would think that some of the lower-ranking states would excel in at least one category, making them better places for women in some respects. However, the numbers simply do not support that. For instance, Arkansas ranks among the lowest in women’s participation in the last presidential election, with a high 30s, 40s, and even a 50th-place ranking in some metrics.

Jacobsen: How important are socioeconomic conditions, such as wealth, education, and employment opportunities, in achieving gender parity?

Lupo: Oh, it’s a huge factor. Everything ties together. Let’s take a closer look:

  • Massachusetts traditionally has some of the best public school systems and elite universities in and around Greater New England.
  • Not by coincidence, Massachusetts has the lowest unemployment rate for women.
  • Arkansas (ranked 48th overall) is in the bottom 10 for economic well-being and ranks 43rd in women’s unemployment, with a rate of over 4%, while Massachusetts is under 3%.
  • Minnesota has the fourth-lowest percentage of women living below the poverty line, while Mississippi ranks last (50th).

Another key economic indicator is public high school graduation rates:

  • Massachusetts and Minnesota both have graduation rates above 90% (Minnesota is nearly 94%).
  • Arkansas and Oklahoma hover just above 80%.
  • Mississippi ranks last, with a graduation rate of just under 74%.

Jacobsen: In the breakdown, we have economic and social well-being (60 points) and women’s health care and safety (40 points). These are significant weighted categories. My question is twofold:

  1. What subcategories within these broader categories are particularly noteworthy?
  2. What are the sources for the data collected on 02/03/2025?

Jacobsen: What was the reason for selecting these particular data sources?

Lupo: Well, the data was primarily drawn from government sources, including the Census Bureau, Bureau of Labor Statistics, CDC, National Center for Education Statistics, and the FBI. Additionally, we incorporated data from a large number of nonprofit think tanks as well as U.S. News & World Report.

What’s interesting, as you mentioned, is that this analysis is based on just two key dynamics:

  1. Women’s health care and safety
  2. Women’s economic and social well-being

The weighting is slightly tilted toward economic and social well-being, and that’s intentional. I believe one drives the other—if women are first empowered economically and socially, many health and safety issues tend to improve.

For example, we have a category measuring the economic clout of women-owned firms and the share of businesses owned by women. If women gain economic empowerment, the second dimension—health care and safety—tends to improve. That includes factors like:

  • Uninsured rates
  • Access to preventive health care
  • Depression and suicide rates

A strong foundation in economic and social well-being leads to better health outcomes.

Jacobsen: Those are all my questions for today, Chip. I appreciate your time again. 

Lupo: Fantastic, Scott. Excellent, man. Thank you.

Jacobsen: Take care. We’ll talk next week, I’m sure.

Lupo: Yeah, I’m sure. There’s always a new report, so thank you very much.

Jacobsen: Anytime, Scott. Take care. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Ronald Reese Ruark on Exorcism and Christian Religion

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/23

Dr. Ronald Reese Ruark, an attorney in private practice in Canton, Michigan, has nearly 35 years of legal experience and holds a Master of Theology from Dallas Theological Seminary (1984) and a Juris Doctor from Marquette University Law School (1991). Currently pursuing doctoral studies at the University of Michigan, he focuses on the influence of Enochic Judaism on Paul’s apocalyptic theology. Ruark has written on theology, law, and religious skepticism, including his Free Inquiry article, Three Exorcisms. His theological and legal expertise intersect with his deep interest in First Amendment issues, particularly religious freedom and expression. He left the ministry in 1988 and returned for two years before departing permanently in 2006. Ruark describes his journey as an intellectual evolution shaped by rigorous theological study and his legal career. His perspective highlights the ethical concerns surrounding religious practices like exorcism, the broader societal role of religion, and the interplay between faith and reason.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Ronald Reese Ruark. He is an attorney in private practice in Canton, Michigan, with almost thirty-five years of legal experience. He holds a Master of Theology from Dallas Theological Seminary(1984) and a Juris Doctor from Marquette University Law School (1991).

He is a doctoral student at the University of Michigan studying the influence of Enochic Judaism on Paul’s apocalyptic theology. Ruark has written on theology, law, and religious skepticism, including his Free Inquiry article, Free Exorcisms. He has been married to his wife, Nancy, for forty-five years. His extensive background brings a unique perspective on faith, law, and intellectual inquiry.

How do your theological and legal expertise intersect personally?

Dr. Ronald Reese Ruark: Theology, specifically the New Testament, has always been my first love. I was a Greek major in college, taught by a professor with a background in classical Greek, which deepened my interest in studying the New Testament. I strengthened that foundation at Dallas Theological Seminary, where I was a theology major studying under Norman Geisler. Sometimes, I wish I had pursued New Testament studies because, at the time, Dallas had a fine, young New Testament department—some of whom are still teaching today, forty years later, at the peak of their careers.

Jacobsen: How do theology and law blend in your career?

Ruark: Originally, I envisioned becoming a lay minister in a church. Legal issues, particularly First Amendment matters—especially freedom of expression—have always intrigued me. There is significant common ground between theology and law.

Eventually, I left the ministry in 1988, though I briefly returned in 2002–2004. I served as a pastor for twenty-five months before leaving for good in 2006.

Jacobsen: Those two years in the pulpit—this isn’t the main focus of the interview, but it’s insightful—what were the key takeaways, both positive and negative, that you carry with you today?

Ruark: The most positive takeaway was working with wonderful people. Many church members sincerely strive to shape their lives around their faith in Christ. Their sincerity was inspiring. I also enjoyed public speaking—I spoke four times weekly, twice from the pulpit and twice in the classroom. I was extremely busy.

Ruark: For one of those semesters, I took a full course load at Michigan. I also taught in Michigan and managed all my church responsibilities in addition to practicing law. I was barely keeping my head above water, but overall, it was a positive experience.

The negative takeaway was that when I left the church for good, I only returned for things like hearing my granddaughter sing in a Christmas choir. The most challenging realization—based on all my church experiences—was that Christians are neither better nor worse than any other religious group. In my legal work, I have interacted with Muslims, Buddhists, and Hindus, and I studied Judaism at the University of Michigan, working side by side with Jewish classmates. It was a difficult realization to accept because, according to Christian belief, Christians are supposed to have the Spirit of God residing within them. Yet, in practice, that did not seem to make them distinct in any meaningful way.

My study of the New Testament gospels led me to believe that most Christians do not follow a fundamental element of Jesus’ teachings—specifically, he was an apocalyptic prophet who instructed his disciples to relinquish their possessions. Luke 12:33 and Luke 14:33 make this clear: No man can be my disciple if he does not give up everything he has. Yet, despite this, the people I encountered were still good, and I enjoyed their company.

Being part of a church community has many benefits. You have to take the good along with some of the bad. I don’t know if that answers your question.

Jacobsen: It does. It also provides insight because that perspective has not always been given equal space or respect over the past two decades as a counterbalance in freethought circles, activism, and speaking engagements. We seem to move toward a more balanced cultural commentary from freethought, humanist, and atheist communities.

That’s a good perspective. So, what inspired you to write Three Exorcisms? And what led you to share these particular experiences?

Ruark: The two exorcism experiences were based on personal experience and deeply impacted my psyche.

I love to write and enjoy it very much. Now that I have finished my work at Michigan, I plan to write more. I am giving free expression to the evolution of my thoughts. I’m relieved that most of my Christian friends will never see it. I tried Googling it myself, and it wouldn’t come up unless I used my full name—but when I did, it appeared immediately.

That has always been a sensitive area for me. I do not attempt to lead anyone out of the church or away from their relationship with Christ. Most of my friends are solid Christian believers, and I would never try to persuade them to abandon their faith.

This is a very autobiographical reflection on how my life has evolved. I do not challenge anyone else to experience the same evolution—some might even consider it a devolution. I don’t know.

Jacobsen: How are exorcisms framed in most churches or denominations? How are they viewed theologically, especially in a hermeneutic or analytical sense? And in terms of lived experience, how do people perceive them?

Ruark: Keep in mind that I have only experienced two exorcisms firsthand. Other than that, my knowledge comes from watching movies.

I suspect that much of it involves the subjugation of evil forces and is apocalyptic. If Christ was an apocalyptic prophet—a Jewish apocalyptic prophet—then he engaged in exorcisms according to the Gospels. I believe that involves the subjugation of evil forces and the apocalyptic conflict between good and evil.

This is fundamentally an Enochic idea. Suppose you read the Epistles, the Epistle of Enoch, the Book of the Watchers, and especially the Book of Parables. In that case, you see more than parallels between that theology and Christian apocalyptic theology—you see structural similarities. Structurally, they are the same.

Some primordial events have thrown the world into chaos. This is attributed to Adam’s sin in Christian theology, particularly Romans 5 and 6. In Enochic theology, it is a primordial cosmic event—a war in heaven that plunged the universe and the world into chaos and disorder.

Modern exorcisms are seen as part of the reordering of the world, alleviating that chaos, particularly with the advent of Christ and the power he is believed to wield in the world today. But suppose you ask fifteen or twenty Christians. In that case, you might get fifteen or twenty answers about how they perceive exorcisms.

Jacobsen: And in terms of the reality of the situation—when an individual is reporting what is essentially a supernatural event, whether it is something they are acting out or experiencing as a physiological event—what is happening when you strip away the theological interpretations and supernatural elements?

Ruark: As I indicated in the article, it was easily explained. What I witnessed was theatre. I saw people who were probably under the influence, either emotionally or psychologically. They may have known what was expected of them, or perhaps they viewed it as a dramatic moment in their lives. Some might have even believed it bolstered their significance—that they were important enough for satanic forces to try to control them.

There are all kinds of psychological explanations at play. The Exorcist—the movie—created much of the hoopla surrounding exorcisms. I would be willing to bet that the number of reported exorcisms increased dramatically after that movie.

Of course, exorcisms appear in other films as well. The Exorcism of Emily Rose comes to mind—it was a well-made film. Ultimately, however, this is all part of the cultural phenomenon.

The two Christians I dealt with directly—I was not directly involved, but I was there—were fully immersed in that belief system.

I witnessed everything, but I wasn’t the one conducting the exorcism—thank God—especially on a 14-year-old girl. You can frame it in various ways without appealing to anything supernatural. I will admit that some aspects of exorcisms can be bizarre. Still, I would attribute almost all of them to some form of psychological disorder.

I am neither a psychologist nor claim to be one, but I see no need to invoke supernatural forces. At least, I saw nothing that compelled me to do so.

Jacobsen: How does the clergy class classify these experiences? And how do they whip up hysteria, building a culture of superstition around their supposed powers through incantations, symbols, crosses, and so on?

Ruark: Religion thrives on superstition, if you ask me. This is how they spin it. It has a certain appeal—it makes the exorcist seem courageous, fighting the battles of Christ on his behalf. That is something that appeals to many ministers.

I am not suggesting that there is no sympathy for the person undergoing the exorcism. Even if it is not supernatural, and even if it is purely psychological, there is still real suffering. Some clergy members sincerely want to help, and I do not doubt that. The exorcist I was working with was an interesting guy. For him, it was not just a sense of adventure but a sense of significance.

He saw himself as doing battle with Satan. It made him feel like a powerful and substantial person. A lot of that was probably happening in the two exorcisms I witnessed.

Jacobsen: Some ethical concerns come to mind.

On the one hand, if these cases involve individuals with mental health issues, they are being treated with incantations and supernatural methods. These are people in a highly vulnerable position. That makes them susceptible to abuse and manipulation.

A second issue—not secondary but related—is that in most industries, a small percentage of people are not sincere believers in what they preach. Instead, they are sincere believers in the gullibility of others. The ability to exploit that gullibility is very real.

So, beyond the abstract ethical concerns about treating mental health issues in a harmful way, there is also the question of bad actors—those who, in cultural terms, would be considered con artists. What about those two concerns?

Ruark: Ethics play a role, but the exorcist does not see it that way—because he has put a theological spin on it. He thinks he is helping, but in reality—especially for the 14-year-old girl—he made it worse.

There are clear ethical implications for any clear-thinking person. However, within the framework of religious belief, those ethical considerations are often ignored or reframed as a spiritual battle rather than a case of psychological distress.

You are correct in using the word vulnerable—these people were vulnerable. Maybe they wanted to feel significant, or perhaps they were genuinely experiencing psychological pain. But they looked to a man to help them, which put them in a vulnerable situation, and that vulnerability was exploited and manipulated. That is what I saw happening. The ethical issues are tremendous.

However, strong First Amendment protections in a church setting shield religious leaders from many of those concerns—for better or worse. As a lawyer, I appreciate the First Amendment, but I still agree with you 100% that there are serious ethical considerations here.

Jacobsen: Do priests—or, more broadly, clergy—have any code of conduct regarding this kind of thing?

Ruark: There are so many churches. How many different denominations are there in America alone? Then, you have synagogues, mosques, and countless other religious communities. There are thousands of groups, each with its own beliefs and practices.

Perspectives can vary widely regarding something as emotionally charged as an exorcism. So, a universal code of conduct? No.

As an attorney, I am bound by a code of professional responsibility. If I fail to uphold it, I face professional discipline before the grievance commission. Doctors and psychologists have similar ethical codes that they must follow.

However, the state does not intervene in matters involving clergy. This is part of the separation of church and state.

For example, it is often difficult to sue a clergy member in lawsuits because First Amendment protections are taken very seriously. If you are involved in a church, a lot can happen to you. While many lawsuits have been filed against clergy members, holding them legally accountable is still difficult because of the First Amendment.

The state tends to stay out of church matters. Judges typically back off when a theological issue is raised in a courtroom because they are jurists, not theologians, and “never the twain shall meet.”

This loophole gives church leaders much freedom to manipulate, exploit, and even harm. That is unfortunate, but it is true.

Jacobsen: To clarify, is the direct implication of your statement that you, as a lawyer, are bound by a code of ethics and guidelines while clergy are not? In other words, does that mean you are held to a higher ethical standard than the clergy?

Ruark: Yes, that is true because clergy have no formal, legally binding ethical standards.

Of course, you could point to biblical texts like Titus or 1 and 2 Timothy, which outline moral expectations for church leaders. But in practice, there is no enforceable, standardized code for clergy behaviour the way there is for lawyers, doctors, or psychologists.

It has been a long time since I studied those texts, but there are standards for elders that would apply to clergy. However, there is nothing that the state enforces. No government produces a standard of conduct for clergy.

There are a few laws that affect clergy. As I recall, clergy cannot take advantage of a counselee and engage in a sexual relationship with them. Michigan has a law against that, though I have not looked at it in decades. But beyond that, there is no clear-cut ethical standard dictates how clergy must act in a given situation.

That kind of standard does not exist except within individual churches or denominations. Some likely have codes of conduct, but we all know those are constantly violated.

Jacobsen: There is well-documented, decades-long evidence of both cover-ups and abuse by clergy across major Christian denominations. I am working with researchers—themselves victims—who have been abused by clergy in Eastern Orthodoxy, the second-largest Christian denomination. The Catholic Church gets the most attention because it is the largest. Hence, media coverage makes sense from that standpoint.

From a professional perspective, does this evidentiary history raise further concerns about ethics and conduct in these settings, especially given the lack of ethical guidelines and the potential for abuse?

Ruark: The Catholic Church is an interesting case. I am a big movie fan, and Calvary is an excellent commentary on this topic, particularly in distinguishing between institutional religion and personal spirituality.

There have been thousands of documented instances of clergy abuse. And there is a certain dynamic at play.

I can speak for Protestant churches and clergy who attended seminaries like Dallas Theological Seminary. The ministry tends to attract a certain mindset. In my opinion, the professional ministry offers an excellent opportunity for neurotic individuals to set up positions of power and abuse people. This dynamic always exists.

Now, going back to the Catholic Church, even though clergy abuse is widespread, I am not entirely sure why it happens so frequently in that setting. Is it because Catholic priests are not married? I have no idea—I have not studied that in depth. I am not a psychologist, and I do not claim to be.

However, abuse is not unique to the Catholic Church. There is plenty of abuse in Baptist churches and in any religious structure where the pastor, minister, or priest is placed in a position of extreme authority over the laity—similar to how Catholic priests function as the vicars of Christ. That hierarchical system attracts the wrong kinds of people to the ministry.

So you see these patterns of abuse in churches where institutional structures emphasize a single leader at the helm. And yet, despite these scandals, churches—especially the Catholic Church—continue to persist. I do not know if I would call it “thriving,” but it continues to exist.

With these churches’ money, power, and institutional backing, that is probably not a huge surprise.

But religion is a strange thing. It can be completely exposed as a vacuous enterprise, yet it thrives. There will always be a place for it because religion meets fundamental human needs.

No matter how much evidence, a person’s psychology makes it incredibly difficult to leave the church. Most people do not react to these issues rationally—they respond viscerally and emotionally. Moving someone out of the church takes a lot, and most people never leave. They do not even question it.

They assume that what they have been taught, what they were born into, must be true. I have no idea if that fullyanswered your question, but you raised some important issues.

Here’s the thing.

I was raised in a Christian home, and my Christian heritage goes back two hundred years. I recently visited the gravestone of my great-great-great-grandmother, who died around 1855. Her headstone includes a Christian inscription about living in Jesus, which was nice.

I was raised in this Christian atmosphere. My grandfather and my parents were good people. My parents were not what I would call faithful churchgoers, but my grandparents certainly were.

I spent much time with my grandparents—a satisfying, meaningful time in Northern Michigan and the Upper Peninsula. We read the Bible, attended church services, and did other things.

I attended Bryan College in Dayton, Tennessee, and had a positive experience there. Next, Nancy and I are leaving for Dallas next week to visit my old college roommate.

Dallas was a positive experience overall. There were many intelligent people there and in college. By the way, I studied with Norman Geisler. He was a fine man. In the 1980s, he was the foremost Christian apologist in the world. He was a brilliant scholar but also a genuinely nice guy.

I graduated from Dallas Theological Seminary in 1984. I was in ministry for three years, from 1985 to 1988. By 1988, I was frustrated with it. I had left the church, and that emotional tie was broken. The financial tie was also broken—I no longer needed the church in my life to survive. I am analytical. I was wrestling with difficult theological questions and wasn’t getting satisfying answers.

No matter how much evidence, a person’s psychology makes it incredibly difficult to leave the church. Most people do not react to these issues rationally—they respond viscerally and emotionally. Moving someone out of the church takes a lot, and most people never leave. They do not even question it.

They assume that what they have been taught, what they were born into, must be true. I have no idea if that fullyanswered your question, but you raised some important issues.

Jacobsen: From your experience, you attended seminary, and seminarians are typically elite intellectuals. They are intelligent people.

Ruark: Yes, that is true. There were many intelligent people when I was in seminary, including the professors.

Jacobsen: A significant benefit of seminary is its sophisticated hermeneutical and textual analysis. It helps scholars better understand which parts of religious texts are historical, which are myths mixed with history, moral teachings, etc. Regardless of one’s motivations, seminaries are quite good at that.

But how did you go from that cultural background to seminary, growing up in the church and living a religious life? I am shifting away from the ethical issues and historical abuses in the church and more toward your lived experience—growing up in the church, living the seminary life, and having that as a backdrop.

Ruark: Here’s the thing.

I was raised in a Christian home, and my Christian heritage goes back two hundred years. I recently visited the gravestone of my great-great-great-grandmother, who died around 1855. Her headstone includes a Christian inscription about living in Jesus, which was nice.

I was raised in this Christian atmosphere. My grandfather and my parents were good people. My parents were not what I would call faithful churchgoers, but my grandparents certainly were.

I spent much time with my grandparents—a satisfying, meaningful time in Northern Michigan and the Upper Peninsula. We read the Bible, attended church services, and did other things.

I attended Bryan College in Dayton, Tennessee, and had a positive experience there. Next, Nancy and I are leaving for Dallas next week to visit my old college roommate.

I was in the pulpit for twenty-five months, from February 2004 to February 2006. I am unsure why I did it, but I spent those two years in ministry. When I left that pulpit, I left the church altogether because the evidence was overwhelming. My experience at the University of Michigan only confirmed what I had already begun to realize. You can easily explain the origins of Christianity from a historical perspective.

The church began as a Jewish apocalyptic movement. I call it an Enochic movement because Enochic theology was behind it all. As Paul and his churches moved into a Hellenistic world, away from Judea and into the Mediterranean, present-day Turkey, and eventually Rome, they absorbed pagan influences. And, as you probably know, dying and rising gods were everywhere in the pagan world—they were all over the Mediterranean Basin. Once Christianity entered that cultural arena, we saw the development of the resurrection narrative and other Hellenistic influences shaping Christian theology.

In other words, I evaluated the evidence more objectively. I cannot claim to be completely objective, but my analysis was certainly more critical. And for me, the evidence became overwhelming. I could not stay in the church. That was my journey, and I view it autobiographically. I do not expect anyone else to think the way I do.

My attitude toward religion is this: if it makes you more gracious, forgiving, compassionate, and kind, then more power to you.

Jacobsen: You mentioned that you are more of a friend of truth than of Jesus. The first thing that came to my mind was Plato’s quote about being a friend of truth. In that sense, you are more of an epistemic Platonist than an epistemic Christian.

Ruark: You know what? I read Epictetus and the Stoics quite a bit. I like Marcus Aurelius especially. I get many ideas from Greek philosophy so that I will take that as a compliment.

Jacobsen: It was intended as such. So, let’s move on—what has been the response to your exorcism article? What have your Christian friends and colleagues said about it?

Ruark: Honestly, very few people I know are aware that I wrote it. I have only received one immediate response, and that was from someone who praised it, saying, “That’s one of the best articles I’ve ever read.” I don’t know if that is true, but it was nice to hear. Beyond that, the only other response I received was when Melissa told me that someone wanted to interview me—which turned out to be you.

Jacobsen: That tends to happen.

Ruark: I have no idea how the broader audience will react. I might get panned in the next issue of Free Inquiry. They might say, “That guy is full of it.”

And yet, I think the future belongs to the atheists. I do. Two hundred years from now, as science continues to explain the universe, the God idea may still exist, but it will be completely redefined. Any Christians still around will be found in small pockets, little conclaves of religious people clinging to their quaint ideas.

Yet, religion may persist because, as I have repeatedly said, it meets certain basic human needs. For that reason, by the way, it deserves some respect. If it is a human enterprise, it should be acknowledged as such. However, I still believe the future belongs to those who are not religious.

Jacobsen: What about employment impacts? If someone lives in a small community with only a few churches and they are known for their criticism of religion, how does that affect them?

Ruark: In that case, you have a real problem. In small-town America, you will be seen as an outcast, an oddball—that weird guy who doesn’t belong. This will likely affect your social standing, your relationships in the community, and possibly even employment. If your job is local, I think you could face serious issues.

However, in larger metropolitan areas, you can get along just fine. Most of the time, at least. I am part of the legal community in Detroit, and the only time we ever know what someone believes is on Ash Wednesday when the Catholics show up with ash crosses on their foreheads. Other than that, no one ever brings it up. No one asks. It is simply not a big issue anymore—which, by the way, tells you something right there.

Jacobsen: What about seminary? What was the gossip around individuals who lost their faith while studying it at the highest levels?

Ruark: Where I was, at Dallas Seminary, I can guarantee that plenty of guys left the ministry and went into law. That is a favourite profession for former seminarians. Others left for different careers, either because their lives evolved unexpectedly or because they became frustrated or disillusioned—which was my experience.

If you were in seminary openly voicing these kinds of concerns, particularly at Dallas, which is a fairly conservative seminary, a fundamentalist evangelical school, you would not have been tolerated. You would have been removed.

At Dallas Seminary, you had to sign a statement of faith, just as ministers do when they enter a church or denomination. You were expected to toe the line.

As a freethinker, that is a major concern. It is one of the reasons I left the ministry—my faith had shifted. I no longer viewed things as I used to, so I left quietly. I did not create a ruckus or cause conflict—I left.

Jacobsen: What are the things in those contracts, statements of faith, or covenant agreements?

Ruark: It depends on what church or denomination you’re in. Sometimes, it could be the Apostles’ Creed or the Fundamentals of the Faith. As I recall, it typically includes a doctrinal framework—a belief in God, Christ as His Son, the idea that Christ died for our sins, substitutionary atonement or some form of atonement theology, that He rose from the dead, and that He is coming back.

This has always been a prominent doctrinal statement among Christians, and these core ideas appear in most faith statements. Some Reformed tradition churches might add doctrines of predestination, for example. It depends on the denomination—churches have different minister and parishioner requirements.

Some churches do not require parishioners to sign anything at all. You can walk into any megachurch and never be asked to sign a statement of faith—it is not a big deal. But if you start voicing concerns or challenging beliefs, you will likely be schooled, disciplined, or expected to leave. I am quite confident of that. The religious mindset does not entertain dissent.

The First Amendment does not apply to the church. Churches have broad protections under the First Amendment. 

Jacobsen: I have heard of cases where someone was asked to leave for violating church doctrine. For example, I heard of a case where a woman working at a Christian school—not a teacher, just regular staff—was asked to leave after she got divorced. This might have even happened in Canada, but I do not believe it was widely reported. I grew up in an evangelical community. I remember someone talking about it while working at a restaurant in town. The school’s biblical framework did not permit divorce, so they politely told her that she had to leave for violating the covenant agreement.

Jacobsen: That kind of thing still happens?

Ruark: It is probably not as common in American churches as it once was, but I know of at least one person publicly disciplined after divorcing his wife. That still happens in conservative churches.

And here’s the thing—that kind of action is protected under the First Amendment. Church leaders cannot say anything they want, but they have extensive protections when dealing with parishioners. If a pastor were to stand in the pulpit and say something about me that was slanderous or defamatory, I could sue them—because I am not a church member. They would not have First Amendment protection in that case. But for their parishioners, they have much legal leeway.

Jacobsen: What are some of your worst stories about church discipline?

Ruark: Divorce plays a major role in these cases. There is a strong stigma against divorce in conservative churches, and that creates problems for people who leave marriages. That is one of the most common reasons for church discipline.

Other people who choose to live differently from traditional church teachings—such as individuals in churches that oppose homosexuality—often face serious consequences if they come out as gay or decide to transition. That can create a major problem within the church community.

Certain churches would not hesitate to expose what they consider immoral behaviour publicly. Other churches, however, may fear taking a strong stance, especially given today’s political and social climate in America. Church leaders always have to make this decision.

I can guarantee you that in any sizable elder board—let’s say in a Baptist church with twelve men on the board—there will be at least a couple of them who do not want to take a public stance due to liability concerns. More legally savvy people tend to be more cautious about making public statements.

On the other hand, some leaders will also say, “I don’t care about liability. We have to do God’s work.” And so, they go ahead and make a public statement anyway. These things still happen in American churches, though not as frequently as they once did.

Jacobsen: Regarding theology and politics, we have seen reactionary political movements emerging from certain evangelical Protestant Christian circles, seeking to align themselves with federal and state power. How common is this among other denominations? Is this a conscious effort among Christians in general, or are mainly select denominations reading biblical texts selectively literalistically?

Ruark: I think all churches read the Bible selectively to some extent. But yes, many conservative churches—especially evangelicals—have been aligned with the Republican Party for a long time, primarily due to the abortion issue.

Many of these churches have also aligned with Donald Trump, whom they consider to be more conservative than, for example, Kamala Harris or Joe Biden. Even though Biden identifies as a Catholic, many evangelicals do not consider him a true Christian leader.

So, in a way, conservative religion—with its moral values—and conservative politics—with its perceived moral stance—tend to walk hand in hand. One reinforces the other.

Donald Trump understood this dynamic very well. He made a big deal out of his faith, though I am not saying his faith is insincere—I have no idea whether it is. But what I do know is that he used religious rhetoric to win votes and get elected—for better or worse.

That kind of political use of religion is nothing new. We use religion to get what we want—that has always been the case.

It is important to note that more liberal churches are also politically involved but in the opposite direction. I do not particularly like the term liberal, though I consider myself liberal in the sense that I have been liberated from certain belief systems. However, progressive churches do exist and are heavily involved in activism—just not in the same way as conservative churches.

It’s like a civil war, where both sides fight each other and claim to be acting for God. Both sides pray to what is the same God, and yet they are shooting each other. 

Jacobsen: To quote George Carlin, ‘Someone’s gonna be fucking disappointed.’

Ruark: Now you’re going old school on me. But Carlin, regarding religion, is about as good as it gets.

Jacobsen: That was his last special, too.

Ruark: What was it?

Jacobsen: 2008, I believe. But let’s get back to the main focus. People are shaking, convulsing, screaming—going through all the theatrics of an exorcism. They go through the motions and receive their so-called “help.” Fine. Great. Whatever. But how do they interpret their performance or experience?

Ruark: Christians—especially the more fundamentalist ones—tend to be paranoid to begin with. And it’s not just about the devil and demons. There is this deep-rooted belief that the world is out to get them, that they are constantly persecuted, and that they are always under attack. So when they experience something as dramatic as an exorcism, they typically interpret it as a battle of good versus evil, a confrontation between God and Satan.

For those who take their spirituality seriously, an exorcism is not just a personal experience but proof that they are on the right side of a cosmic war. They see themselves warriors in a spiritual battle, proud to stand for truth and righteousness. That kind of mindset is deeply ingrained in evangelical and charismatic traditions.

I remember a specific case, but I won’t say exactly where because I don’t want to embarrass the person. But it’s a relevant story. I was working at a place, and a colleague—an extremely devout Christian—was telling me about someone in his family who had lost their faith. The way he spoke about it, you could tell he saw it as a tragedy. There wasn’t any explicit condemnation, but you could hear it in his tone—as if this person had been lost to the dark side.

Later, knowing that I was not religious, I decided to joke with him a little. We were alone, standing near a car door, and he was many yards away when I casually said, “Join us.” I was joking, referencing something else entirely, but his reaction was deadly serious.

He turned to me, looked me straight in the eye, and, in a low, intense voice, said, “I am not one.” It was chilling. His response had no humour, no hint of playfulness—just absolute conviction. That moment stuck with me because it revealed how deeply some Christians internalize this worldview. For them, it is not just about beliefs—it is about identity, loyalty, and an ongoing cosmic struggle.

Jacobsen: So, about 49% Christian in Canada, if you track a line of best fit?

Ruark: I can’t remember the exact statistics in America, but they’re similar. We are becoming increasingly secularized. 

Jacobsen: I was told today that around under two-thirds of the population identifies as Christian. It’s hard to quantify, though; different organizations might give you different numbers. 

Ruark: But the overall trend is clear—we are becoming more secular. Your Bible will be very short-lived at this rate.

Jacobsen: What other social phenomena are tightly linked with Christian religion in the United States? If people want to play that 1990s identity politics game, how does Christian identity factor into social issues?

Ruark: Well, health care is certainly one area—especially when it comes to abortion. That is a prime example, but other aspects of health care are tied up with religion. That would be a big one.

I’m trying to think—it’s a hard question to answer off the top of my head. Certainly, employment is not as much of an issue since we have laws against using religion as a hiring or firing criterion. In theory, it should not be a factor. However, certain companies do not hesitate to advertise their faith.

For a long time, on one of the turnpikes in Ohio or Pennsylvania, I remember seeing a big sign on the roof of a small business that said, “Jesus is the Answer.” That kind of public religious messaging still happens. But legally, in America, you cannot discriminate in employment decisions based on religion.

Jacobsen: What about other social phenomena?

Ruark: Well, there are the arts, but they are becoming less influenced by Christianity. However, sports—especially baseball and the Super Bowl—have seen a rise in public religious expression. It is becoming very prominent in athletics in general.

You’re always seeing athletes thank Jesus for their victories, which—well, we don’t have to get into that—is absurd. 

Jacobsen: To bring up Carlin’s point again, ‘Someone’s gonna be fucking disappointed.’

Ruark: Anyway, that happens all the time. So, sports, especially professional sports, are one of the most prominent examples of religion as a social phenomenon. Whether on the football field, the gridiron, or elsewhere, athletes always thank Jesus for what happens during the game.

That is one of the clearest examples of religion intertwining with a major social institution.

Jacobsen: What are you finding in Enochic Judaism and Paul’s apocalyptic theology? Those are some obscure concepts mashed together.

Ruark: You share the same idea of the origin of evil in Enochic and Pauline theology. Both traditions see the world as chaotic and disorderly and need redemption.

This contrasts with the temple priests of Second Temple Judaism, who viewed the world as perfect. They believed everything would be in order if you obeyed the law. The Enochic authors completely rejected that view. They saw the world as imperfect as possible, beyond redemption in its current state.

This is why Paul refers to “this present evil age” in Galatians 1:4. It is the same theological concept—a corrupt world in desperate need of divine intervention.

Enochic theology calls a messianic figure the Anointed One, the Son of Man, or the Righteous One. This is strikingly similar to the Christ figure in Christianity.

My research focuses on election—who is considered part of the chosen people in Enochic literature. This theme is also found in Romans 9, 10, and 11, where Paul speaks of a righteous remnant, a group of elected individuals. In both Paul’s writings and Enoch’s, election is not based on obedience to the law but on something else.

Enoch’s elect are those who bless the Lord of Spirits, the high God. This trinitarian theology—where there is a high God and a messianic figure—is almost identical to Paul’s view, where he speaks of “God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”

So structurally, the theology of Paul’s apocalyptic worldview and Enochic Judaism is incredibly similar. We are now stepping into New Testament criticism, a fascinating topic. Like myself, more freethinking scholars are drawn to these historical connections.

Ruark: There used to be a group called the Dutch Radicals. I don’t know if you’re familiar with them.

Jacobsen: I am Dutch, though I don’t know if I’m a radical.

Ruark: You might like these guys. They were active in the last third of the nineteenth century, mostly in the Netherlands. The Dutch Radicals doubted the existence of Jesus, much like what is happening today in certain academic circles. They fall under what we now call mythicism.

Jacobsen: Right? They would be considered mythicists today, correct?

Ruark: Yes, exactly. 

Jacobsen: There’s a prominent mythicist group in Milwaukee called Mythicist Milwaukee.

Ruark: I lived in Milwaukee for six years—where I was in ministry for the first time and attended law school. Suppose you read someone like Robert M. Price, who wrote Deconstructing Jesus and other books. In that case, you get a good idea of mythicism. Price leans in that direction if he hasn’t said Jesus was a myth.

The Dutch Radicals went further. Many of them doubted Paul’s existence, and some even argued that Paul’s epistles were second-century creations. Based on the Greek text, my study of Galatians has led me to believe that the letter was compiled by a redactor in the second century, after the publication of Acts, which probably didn’t occur until around 130 CE.

If Acts were written in the early second century, that would push Galatians as late as 150 CE or even 160 CE. These were the kinds of critical ideas that the Dutch Radicals were exploring. But today, it’s hard to get a hearing for these theories because of the continued influence of religion in biblical scholarship.

You can’t just express these ideas in journals like the Journal of Biblical Literature (JBL) or Vetus Testamentum. They don’t tolerate these kinds of challenges to traditional scholarship.

Jacobsen: Among the professional class of philosophers of religion, in your professional opinion, do you think there is much self-censorship?

Ruark: I believe there is. Certain ideas are just not entertained. You cannot bring them up.

When I was in seminary, we studied New Testament theology using a textbook by Donald Guthrie, a comprehensive work on the subject. Guthrie made a statement that stuck with me: When an idea is deeply entrenched in scholarship, it requires extraordinary evidence to overturn it.

It’s ridiculous, but that’s how the academic establishment protects its views. They don’t allow competition and don’t tolerate threats to traditional positions. That’s just how it works.

Do you know William Lane Craig, the Christian apologist? 

Jacobsen argues that Christians are more free to analyze and critique their beliefs than atheists or naturalists. What would you say to that?

Ruark: It’s just another way to protect his position.

Jacobsen: He says, “You just don’t know what you’re talking about because you’re not a Christian.” 

Ruark: This is a circular argument. According to Craig’s logic, only Christians are “enlightened,” so only they truly understand the evidence. That’s just a way of shutting down debate.

Jacobsen: That’s similar to his argument about how, even in the face of counterarguments, Christians can rely on the witness of the Holy Spirit as their ultimate justification.

Ruark: My point about Craig is that he always appeals to most New Testament scholars as if that proves anything. But it doesn’t prove anything. That is an observation, not an argument. But that is how religion works.

I was working on an article about how Christian apologists argue and discussed how they have stacked the deck in their favour. They have written their own rules in a way that benefits them, and they take advantage of that at every opportunity.

Jacobsen: What about Alvin Plantinga? Craig admires him.

Ruark: He is a Christian philosopher who converted to Christianity. Is he still alive?

Jacobsen: Born in 1932—no death noted. He is 92 years old.

Ruark: Wow. So he is still around. I don’t know if he is still active.

Jacobsen: He is known for his modal ontological argument and evolutionary argument against naturalism. Have you ever considered that argument—the idea that if naturalism is true, it undermines itself?

Ruark: I would have to review it. I haven’t thought about it in decades. This is the first time I have heard Plantinga’s name since Dr. Geisler mentioned him in the 1980s.

I am not saying he isn’t a prominent figure, but I have been preoccupied with other things—law and my studies at Michigan—so I really couldn’t address anything about Plantinga’s argument off the top of my head.

Jacobsen: What do you make of what I would call inflationary taxation on Anglophones—basically, how has the English language been weighted down by all these academic and theological terms? Angelology, demonology, pneumatology, Christology, hamartiology, patristics, mysticism, eschatology, soteriology, Mariology, ecclesiology… and so on.

Ruark: Yes, I studied almost all of those, except Mariology, during my time in seminary. I also took a course in angelology.

Jacobsen: What did you learn?

Ruark: According to the biblical text, there are angels, which is clear. But I am much more interested now in the Jewish concept of angels, particularly as heavenly beings. There is an argument out there that Christ was originally considered to be an angel before being elevated—that in Philippians 2, he ascended, and then suddenly, he was described as having risen from the dead.

The idea of the resurrection evolved, but it may have begun with Christ being seen as a mediating figure, an angelic or heavenly being. In Judaism, angels were sometimes worshiped as divine or celestial entities.

We have created a science of all these “-ologies” to make theology appear more credible. I don’t know, but I have studied most of them. I took courses in angelology, demonology, eschatology, Christology, and theology as part of the theological curriculum, especially at a conservative seminary.

Jacobsen: Are these topics widely discussed, or are they mainly limited to specialist scholars?

Ruark: It depends. In church settings, some parts of theology are emphasized more than others. Eschatology, for example—especially in conservative Protestant churches in America—is always a major topic. Discussions about the Second Coming of Christ, the end times, and similar topics are common, and plenty of seminars exist.

It was probably even more prominent in the 1950s, but these theological emphases tend to track cultural anxieties. When there is widespread paranoia or fear, churches must persuade believers that hope is coming—that Christ will return soon.

Before I left the church, I heard countless sermons about “Jesus is coming again.” I remember hearing them every summer at the youth camp I attended as a kid; they had a formative influence on my life.

Theology, at its core, is a way of systematizing the Christian faith. I understand the impulse. And the more conservative the church, the more they tend to structure theology systematically.

At the very least, theology requires imagination. You cannot study something like the Nicene Creed without appreciating the creativity of these early theologians. Even if the modern world is moving past these beliefs, they are still part of the history of ideas.

Jacobsen: What about reactions to the bombshell that Darwin dropped in the mid-1800s with On the Origin of Species? How did different Christian groups respond through acceptance, rejection, or half-measures?

Ruark: That’s an interesting topic. I attended William Jennings Bryan College in Dayton, Tennessee, where the Scopes Trial occurred in 1925.

Jacobsen: I went through H. L. Mencken’s reportage on the Scopes Trial, and he was a big inspiration. As a journalist, he was sharp and witty.

Ruark: He was unafraid to call things as he saw them. He had a sharp sense of humour.

Jacobsen: He did, though I think he could be mean sometimes—particularly when that fellow died. But overall, he was making valid points, and his flowery language is still delightful to read. You could remove the mean parts, and his work would still hold up well.

Ruark: He was harsh on Bryan. If you watch the 1960 movie Inherit the Wind—with Fredric March and Spencer Tracy—you see that they also portray Bryan harshly. Spencer Tracy was superb, as always, and the film is excellent, but it doesn’t give Bryan a fair shake.

That said, Bryan College is a fundamentalist school. Today, it’s essentially a training ground for people who will be Christian educators or enter some other religious vocation.

But I have always appreciated Bryan—William Jennings Bryan, that is—because he was essentially the founder of the modern Democratic Party. He was called “The Great Commoner” because he identified with low-income people, the working class, and those on the margins of society. He wanted to expand access to the benefits of American life and bring as many people as possible under its economic and political umbrella.

Yet, Bryan College, a deeply conservative fundamentalist institution, extols Bryan as a champion of the faith—primarily because of his role in Dayton and the Scopes Trial. But in reality, I think he was wrong constitutionally. His position was bigoted, and he refused to entertain the idea of evolution being taught in a science classroom.

That thinking is obsolete in American education today—and I imagine it is also in Canadian education. But we are still fighting battles to keep religion out of public schools. Every generation, a new court case emerges, with someone claiming that Genesis is science—when in reality, Genesis is a myth, as is so much of the Bible.

But that is the tension between religion and culture.

Jacobsen: Have I missed anything?

Ruark: No. It has been an interesting conversation.

Religion has had many positive effects on society but has also created serious problems. My personal view is that as long as half the world believes the other half is going to hell, we are going to struggle to create lasting peace—whether in this country or the world at large.

But that is just the nature of religious thought.

Jacobsen: Well, on that note, Ron, it was lovely to meet you. Thank you for your time today. 

Ruark: Your work is important and deserves attention. I did some Googling, and I appreciate what you’re doing.

Jacobsen: Oh, thanks, man.

Ruark: I know you’re on the humanist side, and I wish you the best. Enjoy Canada. I love it.

Jacobsen: Oh, especially now—it’s great.

Ruark: It is. And when I am in Canada, by the way, it is always for good reasons. I have always felt that Canada is a peaceful place—it feels different from America, where we always fight about something. So yeah, I think Canada is a great place to be. All right, Scott, thank you very much—I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: All right, take care.

Ruark: You too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Environmental Damages Fund: Conservation and Climate Action

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/22

Samantha Bayard is a Spokesperson for Environment and Climate Change Canada. She discussed how the Environmental Damages Fund (EDF) allocated $12.2 million to 22 projects following a rigorous selection process based on eligibility, scientific merit, environmental impact, and sustainability. Projects include conservation, restoration, and pollution mitigation efforts, benefiting ecosystems and communities across Canada. Indigenous organizations lead six initiatives, influencing project design and implementation. She noted how funding is sourced from fines under 14 federal legislative clauses, ensuring environmental remediation. Transparency and accountability are maintained through co-signed agreements, performance indicators, and regular reporting. EDF-funded projects align with national climate and pollution strategies, engaging 31,000 participants in activities like education workshops and habitat restoration.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What were the criteria used in the selection of the 22 projects for the acquisition of funding from the Environmental Damages Fund?

Samantha Bayard: The projects were selected following a call for applications launched in May 2023. The funding comes from fines that were available in British Columbia, Alberta, Saskatchewan, Ontario, Quebec, Nova Scotia, Newfoundland and Labrador, New Brunswick, and Prince Edward Island. Once the Call for Applications is closed, applications are reviewed by Environmental Damages Fund (EDF) regional teams to verify eligibility and to assess technical and scientific merit. All project applications are subject to the same evaluation process and criteria and are reviewed to ensure that they provide sufficient information to adequately assess the application and that they meet eligibility requirements. Following this administrative assessment, a project application may be examined by a team of technical reviewers, which may include experts from Environment and Climate Change Canada (ECCC), other federal government departments, or provincial departments (as applicable) to evaluate your application’s scientific and technical merit. The last step includes conducting a final evaluation of each of the applications received to assess the quality of applications, alignment with the program and fund priorities, environmental benefits and sustainability, monitoring and partnerships. Proposals are approved by senior executives from ECCC of the selected projects for funding.

Jacobsen: What are good examples of the conservation or restoration initiatives supported?

Bayard: Since the fund’s creation in 1995, more than $240 million has been invested in over 560 projects benefitting ecosystems and communities across Canada. To learn more about the completed and ongoing projects, visit the project map: Environmental Damages Fund: project map – Canada.ca

Jacobsen: How will the environmental outcomes be measured?

Bayard: When applying for funding under the EDF, organizations are required to provide performance indicators to demonstrate how projects will measure their results. Although they may vary by project, they are required to have at least one of the EDF performance indicators from the applicant guide included in their project. 

Jacobsen: How will the 31,000 participants be engaged and contributions tracked?

Bayard: The participants will be engaged by the organizations receiving funding. Depending on the project’s purpose, participants could be engaged in a variety of activities such as: education workshops, tree and vegetation planting, or removal of invasive plant species. Funding recipients are required to report on their outcomes, including engagement (as applicable) to ECCC.

Jacobsen: For the involvement of the six Indigenous organizations, how will they influence project design and implementation?

Bayard: Six of the projects are being led by Indigenous organizations that submitted applications for funding. Funding recipients are responsible for the project and it’s work plan design, implementation of project activities and reporting on their activities, spending and results to ECCC.

Jacobsen: How does the Environmental Damages Fund allocate funds around fines and penalties? (Are there legislative clauses relevant to this?)

Bayard: The EDF is helping to ensure that environmental good follows environmental harm by using fines from environmental infractions to support projects that will benefit Canada’s natural environment, usually in the area where the violation occurred. Fines and penalties are automatically directed to the Fund under 14 federal legislative clauses, including the Fisheries Act, subsection 40(6), the Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999, and the Migratory Birds Convention Act, 1994. Five federal statutes contain discretionary clauses that can be used to direct fines and penalties to the Fund, including the Fisheries Act, paragraph 79.2(f).

Jacobsen: How does the $12.2 million investment support national strategies to combat climate change and pollution?

Bayard: The EDF invests in environmental solutions when individuals or companies intentionally or unintentionally harm the environment. The main goal of EDF-funded projects is to restore the environment and conserve wildlife and habitats in a scientifically sound, cost-effective, and technically feasible way. The fund invests in projects falling within four funding categories: restoration, environmental quality improvement, research and development, and education and awareness. To learn more about the Fund visit: What is the Environmental Damages Fund – Canada.ca

Jacobsen: How will transparency and accountability be ensured with the funds?

Bayard: As the administrator of the EDF, ECCC ensures that allocated funding is spent responsibly and in line with the program’s objectives. The EDF program and funding recipients co-sign funding agreements which include the project’s objectives, work plan, budget information and reporting requirements on project activities, spending and results. To support strong results, EDF program officers work closely with funding recipients on their reporting requirements to ensure projects are on track. This includes regular contact through a variety of means, such as e-mail, phone calls, virtual meetings and in-person visits, as necessary.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Samantha. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Nathan H. Lents on Gender Diversity, Evolution, and the Science of Sex

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/22

Nathan H. Lents, a biologist at John Jay College, discusses gender diversity in biology, arguing that sex is a spectrum rather than a rigid binary. He critiques the ideological resistance to this perspective, particularly among older scientists, and emphasizes that natural selection depends on variation. Lents draws parallels between opposition to gender diversity and creationist arguments, highlighting intellectual rigidity in both. He advocates for a scientific approach that acknowledges diverse sexed bodies and behaviors. The discussion explores how human sexuality evolved over millions of years, challenging cultural assumptions about monogamy and gender roles while promoting adaptability as a key evolutionary advantage.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I want to make sure I get my facts correct here. Today, we are here with Nathan H. Lents.

He is an American scientist, author, and professor of biology at John Jay College of Criminal Justice, City University of New York. He specializes in forensic science, genetics, cell biology, and evolutionary biology. He has written several books, including Not So Different: Finding Human Nature in Animals and Human Errors: A Panorama of Our Glitches, from Pointless Bones to Broken Genes.

His latest book, The Sex Factor: How Evolution Influences Human Behavior, explores the evolutionary history of sex, gender, and relationships. He is a fellow of the Committee for Skeptical Inquiry, a well-regarded organization. Lents advocates for science communication and critical thinking and regularly contributes to media outlets and public discussions on human evolution. Thank you very much for joining Small-Town Canadians. I appreciate it.

Prof. Nathan Lents: My pleasure. Thanks for the invitation.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. So, first question: Your recent article, “Get Gender Ideology Out of Biology!,” critiques ideological influences in biological science. This topic has come up in some secular humanist and related community discussions recently.

It made a brief appearance in the news and then faded away. What prompted you to write this piece? And what are the key misconceptions the public holds regarding discussions about sex and gender?

Lents: To be honest, the title of that article was intended to provoke a reaction from certain groups. There is a common perception that progressive views on gender are based on feelings and ideology, while science and biology stand in opposition.

I am pushing back against that idea because there is strong scientific support for the notion that gender diversity is a natural phenomenon. Gender expression exists in other animals, and sex is not strictly reducible to gametes and binaries. 

Sexual characteristics appear in a wide range of forms, and defining maleness and femaleness is more complex than people often assume. While these complexities may not affect daily life for most people, they are crucial to understand from a biological perspective.

In reality, categorizing sex and gender with strict definitions and rigid boundaries is problematic because that is not how nature works. Life does not conform to binary classifications — it moves fluidly in and out of categories. Diversity, creativity, flexibility, and adaptability are the true hallmarks of life.

Strict definitions with hard boundaries are human constructs. That does not mean they are wrong or useless, but we must recognize that we created them.

And when we encounter biology that challenges definitions, the answer is not to call the biology wrong or aberrant but rather to rethink our definitions. People get freaked out by this because we have these cherished institutions and ideas. But we revise our understanding of many things as we learn more.

That’s what you do in intellectual pursuits. The more you learn, the more you have to revise your understanding. I can’t think of any scientific discipline where things did not turn out to be far more complicated than we initially thought.

That is the history of Western thought over the last 400 years. Every single subject we sought to understand became significantly more complex the deeper we investigated it. And it is fitting that gender, sex, and sexuality are finally receiving that same level of scrutiny.

We are now recognizing that these concepts are complicated, diverse, and messy — that they shift between categories without regard for our preconceived notions. At present, conservative reactionaries are trying to convince people that they have science on their side while portraying gender activists as driven purely by feelings and ideology. That is the narrative they push.

But I push back on that. There are strong scientific reasons to view gender as encompassing more diverse categories and expressions, both in humans and animals. When we observe animal behavior, we see how poorly it fits into two strict categories — male and female — so it would be unusual if humans were any different.

It was ideological bias that prevented us from understanding monogamy for centuries until DNA-based paternity testing forced us to reconsider what monogamy means in animals. Ideology also led us to ignore the diverse ways animals engage in reproductive behaviors. That was ideology at work.

So yes, I do want to remove ideology from biology — but that takes me in a different direction than some biologists. Some believe everything is reducible to two categories: male and female. I disagree with that, both in terms of the morphology of sexed bodies and in behaviors.

Jacobsen: Now, could the title imply getting gender ideologies out of biology in the sense that multiple ideological camps are approaching these issues differently, influencing how we interpret even those stances? From a broad perspective, what are the ideologies positioning themselves as the arbiters of truth? And where has science shifted the goalposts of those definitions, at least slightly — if not significantly — toward a more realistic perspective?

Lents: That’s a good point, and you are right that multiple ideological camps are involved. The biggest problem has been our historical tendency to view things strictly through a binary lens. That ideological perspective still dominates, and moving beyond it would benefit us significantly.

When people argue that sex should be seen as more of a spectrum, they are not claiming that everything we understand about males and masculinity is wrong or that femininity and femaleness do not exist. That is not the point. What it means is that sex exists on a continuous spectrum with two major peaks.

If you visualize a bell curve with two humps, that is a bimodal distribution. A good way to illustrate this is by considering a sex difference such as height.

Height — most men are taller than most women, right? So you have an average height difference between men and women. Those two peaks are distinct, but there is a significant amount of overlap.

There are some tall women. There are some short men. But overall, you still see two different peaks with some individuals falling in between.

Now, apply that same concept to basal metabolic rate. That is another significant difference in our bodies. On average, men have a much higher basal metabolic rate than women — typically by about 400 to 500 calories per day. That is not an insignificant difference.

But again, it exists on a spectrum. There are individuals who do not fit within their sex-typical category. Take red blood cell count or white blood cell count, for example. Men tend to have more red blood cells, while women tend to have more white blood cells. But there are people who do not fit neatly into those categories.

You can observe this pattern throughout the body — in different organs, tissues, hormone levels, and other biological traits. You can see it in testosterone levels, in estrogen levels, in the size of the corpus callosum, in the ratio of white matter to gray matter in the brain, and in the preoptic area of the hypothalamus.

When you examine all the sex differences in the body, they consistently form a spectrum — with average differences but significant overlap. This tells us that sex differences do not fit into two neatly defined categories. There are always individuals who fall somewhere in between.

Some individuals exhibit sex-atypical traits. And if you examine enough biological markers, most people will have at least one trait that places them outside their expected category.

Some men, for example, develop breasts. They may not be large, but they are larger than the breasts of some women. Some men have wide hips. Some women have strong upper-body musculature. There are always individuals who do not fit perfectly into either category based on at least one measure.

In reality, we are all mosaics of sex differences. No one fits perfectly into their designated category across every biological trait.

Why does this matter?

If you define sex purely by which gamete an individual produces, you are centering sperm and egg production over all other aspects of biological sex. Yet, all the other aspects of an individual’s biology are far more relevant — to themselves, to those around them, to their daily lives, and to their health.

For example, women develop lupus nine times more often than men. That has nothing to do with sperm or eggs. Men develop Parkinson’s disease two to three times more often than women. That also has nothing to do with sperm or eggs.

Whether it is heart attack risk, stroke susceptibility, or certain cancers, sex-based differences exist throughout the body. Even men can develop breast cancer. And if we reduced their classification to “sperm-producer,” we might dismiss breast cancer as irrelevant to men.

In fact, because male breast cancer is often overlooked, it tends to be more lethal when it does occur.

Recognizing that sex exists on a spectrum reinforces the idea that biology and sex-influenced traits permeate every aspect of our bodies. Every cell, tissue, and organ matters when considering sex differences — not just sperm and egg production.

Reducing sex to gametes ignores the rest of human biology. Another important factor is that there are individuals who are intersex — those who do not fit neatly into a sex-typical category for most biological measures or who fall somewhere in between. Discussions about sex differences often focus primarily on genital anatomy, since that is what most people fixate on.

To deny that intersex individuals straddle the categories of maleness and femaleness is to exclude them from our sex-based classification system entirely. That strips them of dignity, value, and respect. The vast majority of intersex people are perfectly healthy and fertile, and they are important members of society. Even if we adjust our understanding of sex categories solely for the benefit of this small minority, it is still worth doing.

That is why I argue that viewing sexed bodies as a spectrum aligns more closely with the biological realities that matter to us. And this is not just the case in humans — it applies to other animals as well. Many species include individuals who do not conform to the expected appearance, behavior, or physiology associated with the gametes they produce. To ignore this diversity is to overlook crucial aspects of these animals’ roles in their social ecologies.

In many species, minority sex variants play essential roles in maintaining social balance. That is one of the main themes of my book — it explores the various ways animals can be male and the various ways they can be female. It is not just about sperm and eggs; it is about everything they do with their bodies.

Jacobsen: Sexuality has evolved over several hundred million years. That is a long time — though I am told that about 1/5 of Canadians believe the maximum is only 10,000 years.

Lents: Yeah, that number is surprisingly high.

Jacobsen: I know. Iceland is the only country where, at least several years ago, surveys showed that no one under 30 held that belief. Either the world was created outright, or — my personal favorite, which I think is both more accurate and more hilarious — it was all designed by a committee. All these trade-offs, negotiations, and inefficiencies make more sense when you think of nature as the result of committee decisions.

Lents: It does, yes.

Jacobsen: That idea is only one step away from saying that nature itself is just a series of committee meetings. But back to the main point — sexuality has evolved over hundreds of millions of years. As far as I understand, and I am not a specialist, Homo sapiens speciated around a quarter of a million years ago.

Lents: Fully anatomically modern humans appeared around 200,000 years ago.

Jacobsen: Evolution takes a long time to speciate, depending on reproductive cycles. So what about human sexuality? How does this larger evolutionary story — spanning several hundred million years, say 500 million — connect to the story of the last 200,000 years of human existence?

Lents: That is a great question because a central thesis of my book is that we are a product of our evolutionary past. Understanding our natural history helps us make sense of the present. One of the fascinating patterns we see across human cultures worldwide is the presence of enduring themes in social and sexual behavior.

I am particularly interested in pre-agrarian societies — those that existed before farming. The transition to farming and settled life set us on a different trajectory, one that distanced us from our natural biology. Instead of following purely biological instincts, we began constructing a social biology, and from that point, cultural evolution took off at an accelerated pace.

However, if we look at foraging societies today, we see an incredible diversity in how they live. They inhabit different environments and construct their family structures in unique ways, but they still share some commonalities. One notable pattern is the tendency to form dyads — mating pairs of two individuals. While not strictly universal, this pattern is widespread, which suggests that humans have a natural inclination toward pairing up.

But what we do not commonly see is that these dyadic pairings necessarily lead to strict sexual monogamy. Many cultures practice pair bonding without exclusive sexual fidelity. In some cases, pair bonds are temporary, while in others, they exist within polygynous or polyandrous systems, meaning they are not always one-to-one relationships. The notion of permanent, lifelong, sexually exclusive marriage is actually a cultural peculiarity. Only a small minority of societies have historically adhered to it as a strict norm.

What does this tell us? It tells us that humans are highly adaptable in how we form families and pursue sexual relationships. Flexibility in social and sexual structures is a defining feature of our species. Unlike some animals that follow rigid reproductive strategies, humans do not have strict, predetermined ways of organizing their social lives.

In many aspects of biology, certain species exhibit much less flexibility, but humans are the ultimate generalists. This adaptability is evident not just in relationships but in all aspects of our existence. We can survive in an astonishing variety of environments. We can thrive on vastly different diets. We can use our bodies in countless ways to suit our surroundings. We are not designed for any single way of living — we are designed to be generalists. That adaptability has been one of our greatest strengths.

Jacobsen: So David Deutsch was right.

Lents: What’s that?

Jacobsen: So David Deutsch was right — we are the universal constructors.

Lents: Yeah, exactly. We construct our own environments. That is what our big brain is for — to manage complex social relationships and to navigate new situations. A significant part of our intelligence is dedicated to maintaining social bonds, but another critical function is our ability to enter an unfamiliar environment and figure it out.

Unlike other species, we do not have to wait for biological adaptations through mutations and natural selection. Instead, we actively engage with our surroundings, determine what needs to be done, and then pass that knowledge along to others. That is culture — the collective intelligence shared within a community.

Given how adaptable and flexible we are in other areas of life, why would those same tendencies not apply to our sexuality and gender? I am not saying that everyone is inherently pansexual or polyamorous or that modern perspectives on sexuality are just anomalies of contemporary culture. However, if you had been born in a different time and place, you would likely think differently about your sexuality and your relationships.

A great deal of what we perceive as the “natural” or “normal” human condition is simply cultural inheritance. That does not necessarily mean it is bad — some aspects of cultural tradition are beneficial — but it also does not mean it is some sacred, predetermined destiny. The idea that our current sexual norms are inevitable is simply not true.

If you look at foraging societies worldwide, they approach sexuality differently. Many exhibit a general openness toward sexual behavior, far more permissive than what modern societies consider acceptable. Sexuality in hunter-gatherer cultures is often more fluid, with greater acceptance of premarital and adolescent sexual exploration. In many of these societies, it is believed that gaining sexual experience is essential for becoming a well-adjusted adult. Imagine the radical notion that you improve at something through practice.

I wish modern culture would take more time to critically examine institutions handed down to us as though they were sacred and unchangeable. Many of them are arbitrary — they could have developed in a completely different way.

Jacobsen: I interviewed Michael Behe years ago and asked almost the similar questions to Kenneth Miller because that was fun and interesting. You have engaged with intelligent design creationists — who often resist being labeled as such, despite adhering to the same philosophical and epistemological framework.

When engaging with ideological perspectives, whether in politics, social issues, or scientific discussions, do you notice any patterns in how these interactions unfold? Specifically, do you see similarities between engaging with intelligent design proponents and addressing ideological debates about gender and biology?

Intelligent design creationists are more obvious in their approach, especially given that many of them were associated with the Wedge Strategy when it was first introduced. At that time, they were largely middle-aged and older American men of European descent, typically Protestant and often evangelical — except Behe is Catholic and Berlinski is agnostic–highly educated — all of them. So do you notice any commonalities in those interactions?

Lents: I do. When people become deeply attached to a particular way of thinking or an ideological framework, it makes them intellectually inflexible. I see that pattern among intelligent design proponents, but I also see the same rigidity in those who resist the idea of gender diversity.

And the fact that they are mostly older is not a coincidence. It is well-documented that as we age, we become less open to new ideas. That is a well-established psychological principle.

Here is a true story. Last week, I gave a talk at Washington University in St. Louis — a prestigious institution — to their evolutionary biology group. In my presentation, I invited them to consider gender diversity in the study of animal behavior. I presented multiple examples, using their own data, to demonstrate that they were missing a simpler explanation: gender diversity. Instead of acknowledging this straightforward framework, they had relied on more convoluted explanations, such as female mimicry or imperfect mate choice.

Many of the prevailing explanations for observed behaviors in animals are unnecessarily complex when gender diversity offers a much more intuitive answer. So, I laid out these examples for the audience.

In the room, there were about seven or eight faculty members — all older, with white hair and wrinkles — who furrowed their brows and sat in silence. You could tell they did not agree, but they also did not challenge me. They did not ask questions, they did not critique my argument, they just sat there, unmoved.

Meanwhile, the rest of the room — about 30 to 40 younger attendees, including postdocs and graduate students — were nodding their heads and snapping their fingers in agreement. They understood the concept immediately because they were open to it. They could see how the framework of gender diversity provides a clearer and more consistent explanation for animal behavior.

It really is a simpler way to interpret these observations — accepting that there is more than one way to be male and more than one way to be female. That explanation aligns with the data and follows Occam’s razor, which tells us that the simplest explanation is usually the correct one.

I do see a generational divide. Older biologists tend to be committed to rigid categorical labels and definitions that constrain diversity into simplistic frameworks. In contrast, younger scientists are much more open to the idea that diversity is an inherent feature of sexuality, not an anomaly.

Sexual diversity, like all other aspects of biology, is shaped by adaptability, flexibility, mutation, diversity, and creativity. These characteristics define biological systems. Once this diversity is introduced into nature, natural selection begins to operate on it.

Natural selection requires variation. Many people focus solely on selection, but they forget that selection cannot function if every organism is identical. Selection only works when variation exists. In fact, variation is the fundamental starting point of evolution by natural selection. You must first have variation, and that variation must be heritable. Only then can selection act upon it to determine the direction evolution will take.

We need to acknowledge that diversity in sexed bodies and gendered behaviors is a natural part of life. It is expected. It provides ecological and social resilience to a species. We already understand that diversity is the best insurance policy against an unpredictable future. We recognize this principle in all other areas of biology — physiology, survival strategies, and behavior.

Yet, for some reason, many resist applying the same logic to sexual behaviors and sexual morphologies. I am inviting biologists to approach the study of diverse sexed bodies and gendered behaviors with the same openness they apply to other aspects of biological research.

Jacobsen: Professor Lents, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Lents: It was nice to meet you. Let me know when this goes live.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Romana King on Financial Literacy for Canadians

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/21 (Unpublished)

Romana King, a seasoned financial and real estate expert, discusses Canadians’ top financial regrets, especially not saving early enough. She emphasizes the importance of financial literacy, budgeting, and realistic homeownership goals. King highlights generational shifts, noting that today’s young Canadians face tougher economic challenges without pensions and rising living costs. She advocates for early education, practical tools like spreadsheets, and using public resources such as government sites and library seminars. King also underscores the emotional aspects of financial decisions and encourages openness about financial mistakes to promote resilience and long-term stability. Trusted information and adaptability are key to financial success.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Romana King, an award-winning personal finance and real estate expert with over 20 years of experience.

She is a senior editor at money.ca and has contributed to major Canadian publications, including The Globe and Mail, Maclean’s, and The Toronto Star. She is also the best-selling host of No More and frequently appears on CBC, Global News, and CityNews.

Romana is also a licensed real estate professional in Ontario and British Columbia through her platform, RK Homeowner. You can follow her on X at @RKHomeowner, where she provides insights on smart homeownership, financial literacy, and expert financial advice. You can find more at romana.com. What were the most surprising findings from your money.ca survey on Canadians’ biggest financial regrets?

Romana King: It wasn’t necessarily surprising, but what stood out was the sheer number of people who had financial regrets. The large percentage of respondents expressing regret was notable, though the nature of their regrets—mainly not saving enough—was expected.

Many people don’t fully grasp the impact of not starting early or not saving enough until it’s too late. Instead of saving $100 a month, they need to save $1,000 because they no longer have the time to benefit from compound interest or long-term investment growth. The sheer volume of people facing this issue was surprising.

Jacobsen: That’s interesting. What financial mistakes did people make that prevented them from reaching their milestones? Not everyone wants to retire or own a home, but most Canadians want both.

King: Yes, the core issue is financial freedom. Whether someone wants to own a home or retire—some people have even said, “I want to work in retirement”—the real goal is financial independence. What that looks like varies from person to person.

As you mentioned, some people prioritize homeownership, while others prefer the flexibility of renting due to the financial and logistical responsibilities of owning a home. Ultimately, however, everyone strives for financial freedom.

One of the most telling findings from our survey is that nearly half of Canadians struggle to build savings. 46.4% of respondents said they had difficulty saving for a nest egg or even a down payment on a home. That’s a striking statistic. Looking back a few generations, people had similar concerns, but homeownership and financial security didn’t feel as unattainable as they do today.

You felt like you had an opportunity—you just had to put your nose to the grindstone and do it. Even with that level of effort, it just might not be possible.

Jacobsen: What are many young Canadians doing when they turn to loved ones for financial support after making money mistakes? Is that a common occurrence? Is it uncommon? Are there any incorrect assumptions in the question?

King: This isn’t drastically different from past generations, but we don’t have a strong national approach to financial literacy. Regardless of what organization I belong to or what job I have, I’ve been banging that drum for too long now. Many people feel confused about financial matters, and when they face challenges, what do they do?

They turn to the people they love because they trust them. So, yes, young Canadians do rely on their loved ones for support.

We also have to consider the economic landscape. Previous generations benefited from strong markets—whether in housing, stocks, or job security. There were more opportunities, wages were rising, and the cost of living was relatively lower.

By contrast, young people today are entering the workforce or trying to advance in their careers while dealing with significantly higher living costs. That’s why many turn to their family members for financial assistance.

Jacobsen: How do generational differences shape financial regrets and decision-making? You noted that generations aren’t that different in their goals, but you hinted at some key differences.

King: There isn’t a generational difference in the ultimate goal—financial freedom. However, there are massive differences in how each generation tries to achieve it.

The path was relatively clear if I look back to my grandparents’ or even my parents’ era. You got an education—whether through trade school, university, or college—you found a job, and you might have changed companies a couple of times, but generally, you stayed with an employer for 10 to 15 years. You’d earn a pension, typically a defined benefit or contribution pension, and then you retired.

That is not the reality for today’s younger generation. Defined benefit pensions or employer-sponsored pension plans have largely been phased out over the past 10 to 20 years. As a result, people now have a completely different approach to achieving financial freedom.

This shift has also changed how people work. Many are far more willing to embrace the gig economy or take on side hustles—something my father’s generation would have scoffed at. He would have said, “Why would you bother with that? Put all your eggs in one basket—stick with the company you work for.”

There is quite a big difference. I don’t believe that’s solely due to preference, though—I think we are shaped by what we experience.

If the younger generation—including myself and you—does not have access to employer-provided pension plans, that will inevitably shape how we pursue financial freedom. For example, I may now consider holding real estate as an investment because I don’t have a defined pension plan.

That’s just an example, not a prescription.

Jacobsen: How can financial literacy help people prevent costly mistakes? Or, when mistakes happen—which they inevitably will—how can they be less damaging?

King: Yes. When introduced early enough, financial literacy allows people to make small mistakes, adjust course, and avoid making expensive ones later.

What do I mean by that? In a world dominated by digital transactions—where debit and credit cards have replaced cash—it’s essential to understand how to use these tools responsibly. It is critical to know what it means to carry a balance on a high-interest credit card and its long-term impact.

If someone learns this lesson when their debt is $1,000 instead of $10,000, that knowledge can make a massive difference. When most of your income is spent paying off interest on a credit card, that $10,000 balance can take years—not months—to pay off. That, in turn, delays other financial goals, like saving for a home, a car, or retirement.

Financial literacy and money management skills, like saving, are crucial. The sooner you develop those skills, the better.

That doesn’t mean—and here I might ramble, Scott, so feel free to interrupt—that people in their 20s, 30s, 40s, or even 50s won’t make financial mistakes. Mistakes are inevitable. Some of the most financially savvy people I know still make mistakes.

The problem is that many people feel ashamed when they make financial missteps, as if a mistake means they’ve failed. That mindset is damaging. We need to be more forgiving—both of ourselves and others. We also need to encourage people to ask for help when needed. Many financial resources are available in Canada, but people often don’t seek them out.

That’s why part of what we wanted to highlight in this survey is that big financial mistakes are common. Normalizing that helps people understand they’re not alone. When someone realizes that others have also made significant financial mistakes, it becomes easier to say, “I didn’t save enough for retirement, and I’m in my late 40s or early 50s—what do I do?”

That’s the right question to ask at that time. The wrong thing to do is hide it, avoid talking about it, or refuse to address it.

Jacobsen: What policies and financial products can help Canadians make better financial decisions? Is it an app?

King: I wish there were a single app where you could input everything and get a perfect financial roadmap, but there isn’t.

I’m a big fan of Excel spreadsheets. When I was in my 20s, I asked friends who were far more financially savvy than I was, “How do I invest?”

At the time, they told me, “You just need this one ETF or you just need this one mutual fund.” Back then, it was all about mutual funds.

I’m dating myself, Scott—I probably shouldn’t say that, but I am.

I remember not understanding their advice. The worst mistake I made at the time was not asking follow-up questions. “What do you mean by a mutual fund? Why is that the right investment?” I didn’t ask those questions when I should have.

There isn’t one app or tool that does everything for you, but you can do a few things. The first step is finding a budget that works for you. I always emphasize this because people tend to resist budgeting. Friends tell me “I hate the idea of tracking every dollar.”

So, I suggest a simple approach—take pictures of everything you buy. Whether it’s a receipt or a meal, take a picture.

Then, at the end of the month, review those images. Visually scan what you’ve spent money on, and then assign a monetary value to something you genuinely want to save for—whether that’s a car, a house, or another goal.

When you start comparing your spending habits to your financial goals, you ask yourself, “Is this purchase more important than my long-term goal?”

That shift in perspective makes it easier to adjust behaviour. It’s easier to avoid financial mistakes when you can tangibly see that spending in one area means sacrificing in another.

This approach is far more effective than simply sitting down with a pen and paper, filling out a spreadsheet, listing numbers, and forcing yourself to cut expenses. It’s easier to say, “I’m choosing not to spend on this because I want to save for something else.”

Jacobsen: How does the volatility in real estate—the spikes over several years and the downturns—factor into Canadians’ financial regrets?

I know some people who sold their homes just a month before the market peak, right before the downturn, and they were quite happy with that decision. How does that kind of market fluctuation contribute to financial regrets? A big part is luck, but other factors are also at play.

King: Scott, that’s the first thing I would point out—I think there’s a well-documented cognitive bias at play here. We know that people have a cognitive bias against losses.

For example, you could buy a home for $250,000 and sell it for $750,000, making a $500,000 profit. But if, a month later, you learn that you could have sold it for $850,000, you might suddenly feel like you lost something—even though you made a huge gain.

We tend to fixate on what we missed out on rather than appreciating what we gained. We don’t value the positive as much as we should. Instead of seeing the $500,000 profit, we focus on the $100,000 we didn’t make.

One of the key things I’ve written and spoken about regarding homeownership is this: when buying a home, you must understand that it is not solely a financial decision. I’m very clear about that.

What do I mean by that? While math and finances should be factors, they should not be the sole determinants of what you buy. Life decisions dictate home purchases.

For example, you may want to live near a particular school if you have a family. That priority will shape what and where you buy. If a townhouse in that school district is within your budget, that may be a better home for you than a larger detached house in a less desirable neighbourhood.

Ultimately, buying a home is an emotional decision about safety, community, and security.

That being said, finances do play a role. You shouldn’t buy a home that stretches beyond your means. If you max out your housing budget and an unexpected expense arises—like a roof repair, plumbing issues, or a major appliance breaking down—you may have to take on high-interest debt to cover it. That kind of financial strain can derail all your future goals.

I’ve seen people in unfortunate situations, particularly during the pandemic. Some were dealing with both a housing market crisis and the end of a relationship, leading to divorce. Sure, they could sell their home at a fantastic profit, but they were forced to buy in an overheated market.

That’s a terrible situation because you’re not making decisions but being forced into action. And when you’re forced into financial decisions, you often lose. Statistically speaking, you might come out ahead, but it’s risky, and much luck is involved.

You asked how homeownership—and the roller-coaster ride of real estate prices in Canada—affects personal finances. The impact has been massive because saving up for a down payment now takes significantly more time.

It takes significantly more to purchase a home now than it did in previous generations. Homeownership is a much larger piece of our financial puzzle when creating a solid financial plan.

I would say that people need to be realistic about what they can afford—both in the short term and the long term—and understand that they may have to adjust their expectations.

Not everyone will get the showcase home that looks like it belongs in a glossy magazine. Instead, we should redefine what a home means—a safe place, something financially sustainable, and a purchase that won’t prevent us from reaching other financial goals.

When friends or family often call me and ask, “Should I buy this house?” The first thing I ask them is:

“If their household has two income earners, should you afford to keep this home on just one salary in a pinch?”

If one person lost their job, could the other person cover all the bills for six months to a year until you get back on your feet?

For me, that’s a critical benchmark. If the answer is yes, that home is within your budget. You may be taking on too much financial risk if the answer is no.

I say this because life happens. Unexpected events—like the pandemic—threw many people into financial uncertainty. Some found themselves wondering, “How am I going to afford this when neither of us is earning?”

Part of responsible financial planning is treating homeownership like an insurance policy—you need to ensure that your finances can withstand unexpected hits rather than collapsing under pressure.

Jacobsen: If people make a financial mistake, how do they recover? How do they aim for long-term stability after that mistake?

King: The hardest part of making a mistake is owning it—just being aware of it, acknowledging it, and understanding what went wrong. Then, the next step is figuring out how to fix it—which can sometimes require making tough choices.

Yes, I might need to cut expenses. That’s difficult. People often say, “I work really hard and deserve to treat myself—whether it’s meals out, shopping, or vacations.” That may be true, but pausing those expenses—even temporarily—can be the best way to get back on track.

The key word here is pausing, not denying. It’s about making temporary adjustments to regain financial stability rather than permanently cutting out things that bring joy.

The most critical factor in financial recovery is a clear view of the mistake and an understanding of what is needed to correct it. The mistake itself does not define you—how you respond to it matters.

Jacobsen: Where can Canadians find reliable government sources of financial knowledge for decision-making? Where can they find independent, trustworthy sources for financial literacy and education?

King: I’m a huge fan of the federal government’s financial resources. They provide extensive documentation on various financial topics, from buying a home to understanding buy-now-pay-later loans and short-term financing options available through credit cards and store cards. These government resources are incredibly valuable, and more Canadians should know them. A wealth of information is available if people are willing to tap into it.

I’m also a big fan of local knowledge dissemination. If you visit your local library, you’ll often find free financial seminars, especially around tax season, designed to help people navigate financial decisions. I’ve personally led sessions at the Toronto Public Library, offering insights to attendees who can ask questions in a supportive environment. These sessions are free, accessible, and a great way for people to educate themselves on financial matters.

Books are another excellent resource. And the best part? You don’t have to buy them—go to the library. Books allow you to learn at your own pace, putting them down and picking them back up as needed. I also believe that online forumscan be useful for starting your research, but I always caution people never to rely on them for definitive answers. Instead, use them as a launching point and verify the information through reputable sources like government websites or books written by credible personal finance experts.

For independent sources, there are many reputable voices in the field. I’ll do a shameless plug here—you can check out my book, website, or money.ca. Beyond that, many newspapers still have personal finance columnists who consistently provide authoritative and well-researched insights. My biggest piece of advice is to read as much as you can. If one financial expert doesn’t resonate with you—whether on topics like exchange-traded funds or building a financial plan—shop around. There are plenty of knowledgeable writers and experts covering these topics. Find someone who speaks in a way that makes sense to you and stick with them.

Jacobsen: Romana, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate your expertise, and it was great to meet you.

King: Thank you, Scott. Take care.

Jacobsen: Take care. Bye.

King: Bye now.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Prof. Christophe Courchesne on Environmental Advocacy

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/21

Professor Christophe Courchesne, Director of the Environmental Advocacy Clinic at Vermont Law and Graduate School, discusses the challenges of integrating social equity into environmental sustainability. He highlights how environmental laws often lack equity considerations and how enforcement strategies can advance environmental justice. Courchesne shares examples from his legal career, including cases in Massachusetts and advocacy for Oklahoma’s Tar Creek community. He emphasizes the need for policies addressing cumulative impacts and expanding public participation in environmental decisions. He also predicts growing youth activism and a shift toward state-level climate action in response to federal policy changes.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Prof. Christophe Courchesne. He is the Director of the Environmental Advocacy Clinic and an Assistant Professor of Law at Vermont Law and Graduate School. Before joining Vermont Law and Graduate School in 2022, he served as Deputy Chief of the Energy and Environment Bureau and Assistant Attorney General in Massachusetts, where he led initiatives addressing the climate crisis and advancing environmental and racial justice.

Christophe has dedicated his career to integrating environmental law with clean energy solutions while ensuring equitable outcomes for marginalized communities. His expertise in environmental law and advocacy continues to drive impactful, systemic changes in policy and practice nationwide. Thank you very much for joining me today. I appreciate it.

Prof. Christophe Courchesne: You’re welcome.

Jacobsen: From your perspective, what are the most significant challenges in integrating social equity into environmental sustainability initiatives? For example, legal frameworks might present challenges at some point.

Courchesne: One of the most significant challenges is that many environmental laws were not originally written with social equity goals in mind. They were primarily designed to achieve public health and environmental protection objectives, often with a strong focus on economic feasibility. These laws typically assume the continuation of the existing industrial and regulatory frameworks, which can inadvertently reinforce existing social inequities.

Many environmental laws promote gradual technological advancements within economic constraints rather than encouraging transformative change. As a result, systemic inequities persist, and in some cases, legal structures even maintain these inequities.

A clear example of this is land use policy. Regulations such as wetland protection laws and zoning ordinances often prioritize preserving existing land use patterns. This means that communities with abundant green space and environmental amenities remain protected. In contrast, those experiencing environmental degradation or economic disadvantages do not necessarily benefit from the same legal protection or investment level.

Over the past two decades, significant efforts have been made to incorporate environmental justice and social equity into policymaking. These efforts have influenced decision-making processes and expanded community participation in environmental law. However, many of these gains have been incremental, fragile, and incomplete.

At the federal level in the United States, we now witness significant pushback against environmental justice initiatives. Much of the environmental justice policy has been implemented through executive actions rather than permanent legislative reforms, making it vulnerable to political shifts. Without durable legislative integration, environmental justice remains susceptible to changes in administration and policy priorities.

In summary, environmental policy does not inherently prioritize social equity. While efforts to integrate equity considerations into environmental law have progressed, they have not yet achieved lasting, structural change.

Jacobsen: So, what are examples in your own work where environmental activism has been positive and constructive in advancing social justice for communities that have been overlooked, either by derivation or directly?

Courchesne: I will mention two examples from my current and prior positions.

The first example is my previous leadership role at the Massachusetts Attorney General’s Office, where I focused on energy and environmental litigation. One area we successfully prioritized was ensuring that when the state—in this case, the Commonwealth of Massachusetts—took enforcement action against a polluter or a violator of environmental laws, we would proactively consider environmental justice in our decisions.

We carefully examined the impacts associated with each violation. Where appropriate, we engaged community members and local organizations to assess the significance of these violations for affected communities. We then directed enforcement resources to those communities and violations to promote equity in environmental outcomes, particularly for communities historically marginalized in environmental decision-making.

Many of these communities had been subjected to land use decisions that placed highways directly through their neighbourhoods, close to residential areas, or exposed them to industrial activities that polluted their air and water. By prioritizing enforcement in these areas, we significantly improved environmental conditions and provided tangible benefits to those affected.

On the other hand, when we reached settlements or favourable outcomes in cases—whether by taking polluters to court or negotiating agreements to settle environmental violations—we worked to address existing environmental harms.

In both efforts—selecting cases and determining remedies—community activism was critical in shaping government action. Local advocacy drove awareness, concern, and, ultimately, meaningful change. We actively engaged with community members in environmental justice communities to help shape how we exercised our enforcement discretion.

This example illustrates how environmental justice considerations and efforts to address inequities often emerge from grassroots activism, leading to partnerships between communities and government agencies tasked with environmental protection.

One specific example from that prior role is the numerous settlements we reached, which directly benefited affected communities. In some cases, we secured funding for air filters in homes in environmental justice communities as part of pollution settlements. In other cases, we focused enforcement efforts on asbestos violations in urban neighbourhoods with high public health risks.

By allocating enforcement resources to these critical issues, we were able to address dangerous, ongoing violations of environmental laws—violations that affected communities daily.

So, that’s one key example of how enforcement strategies can be leveraged to advance environmental justice.

Now, moving to another context—my current position as a clinical law professor at Vermont Law and Graduate School—I am leading the Environmental Advocacy Clinic. One of our wonderful clients is an environmental justice organization in northeast Oklahoma. That community has faced decades of degradation from toxic pollution caused by legacy mining operations upstream.

The hazardous waste site associated with these mines is known as Tar Creek, and it has been one of the longest-standing Superfund sites in the country. This has resulted in large-scale lead poisoning among the local population, particularly affecting many children who have suffered severe health consequences due to environmental lead contamination.

Our client, an environmental justice organization called LEAD Agency, has been fighting for this community for years, drawing significant attention to the cleanup of the legacy mining area. This effort has been made even more challenging due to the bankruptcy and dissolution of the mining companies that once operated there, leaving few private entities to fund the massive cleanup required.

Despite these obstacles, our client has engaged in advocacy efforts alongside my students, working to address legal issues affecting the community and collaborating to improve environmental conditions and restore the health of the local waterway.

This example reflects a broader pattern across the country, where community groups have mobilized, utilized legal resources where available, and brought attention to pressing environmental harms affecting their neighbourhoods. These two distinct success stories demonstrate how social equity issues can be integrated into the environmental space. They illustrate the progress and advocacy that have taken place over the last several decades.

Jacobsen: Figuring out that big policy or law—what’s your policy? What progressive policies are most effective, or sufficiently effective, in merging environmental sustainability with equitable outcomes at the federal and state levels?

Courchesne: That’s a big question.

One important policy that is much needed—and is in the early stages of implementation in certain states—is the focus on cumulative impacts. This concept recognizes that new industrial projects and pollution sources cannot be considered in isolation when approving them.

You must consider new projects in the context of the history of environmental pollution and harm that the host community has already endured. You also need to assess the contributions of a new facility or modifications to an existing project seeking government approval. It is essential to determine how these changes will exacerbate existing problems rather than evaluating them in a vacuum against some abstract standard of environmental performance or pollution control.

The policy of integrating cumulative impacts into environmental project analysis is still in its early stages of implementation across various states. We are just now seeing efforts to give this policy real enforcement power—so that if a proposed project is located in a disadvantaged community, it will face greater scrutiny and may be difficult to approve.

Federal law already requires considering cumulative impacts when analyzing and approving projects. This information must be publicly available to increase transparency about potential environmental effects. However, it has historically been rare for cumulative impacts to lead to the denial of a project at either the federal or state level. Changing that precedent is long overdue.

Another critical progressive policy—one that has been much more widely adopted and continues to have significant impacts—is enhancing public participation in environmental decision-making at the federal, state, and local levels.

This policy has roots in the early days of environmental law. However, over the past decade, there has been a renewed focus on ensuring that the communities affected by projects and policy decisions have a genuine opportunity to participate—not just on paper but in reality.

Efforts to improve public participation include increased translation and language interpretation services, adjustments to public meeting schedules to accommodate working people, and ensuring that hearings do not only occur during inaccessible times—such as 10 a.m. on a Tuesday—but instead take place in the evenings or on weekends when more community members can attend.

Another key improvement has been the expansion of electronic participation options. Previously, people had to visit government offices during business hours to access permits or project documents. Many agencies have made these materials available online, allowing the public to review and comment on projects from anywhere.

These efforts to expand public participation in environmental decision-making have been highly successful. However, they remain a work in progress. Public notice provisions and opportunities for the public to provide input still need improvement.

In recent years, efforts have also been made to compensate grassroots organizations for their time intervening or participating in public processes. This is another important progressive policy that helps promote social equity by ensuring that impacted communities have the resources and capacity to engage meaningfully in environmental decision-making.

Jacobsen: What are the emerging trends for advocates and legal professionals in climate justice?

Courchesne: One of the key emerging trends is a renewed focus on state and local governments. We saw this shift during the Trump administration. We will likely see it again as the federal government retreats from climate action. As a result, there will be increased pressure on state and local governments to take meaningful steps to address climate change.

Youth climate activism will continue to grow. Young people’s leadership in the climate movement has already had a significant impact over the past decade. I expect this momentum to build as younger generations remain deeply concerned about their futures and the threats that climate change poses to their dreams and long-term plans.

We will see increasing pressure from young people demanding policy reforms that more effectively address the risks of climate change. Their advocacy drives the conversation and pushes for stronger, more urgent climate policies.

Jacobsen: Professor Courchesne, thank you very much for your time today.

Courchesne: You’re welcome. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Improving School Bus Safety With New Technology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/20

Maurice Gregoire, an expert in school bus safety, discusses the development of CrossSafe 360, a perimeter visibility system designed to prevent low-speed collisions involving students and pedestrians. With four HD wide-angle cameras and AI-powered monitoring, the system provides a 360° bird’s-eye view, enhancing driver awareness. Gregoire, a member of Transport Canada’s Advisory Committee, highlights the role of perimeter visibility mandates and explains how 4G/LTE connectivity enables real-time incident response and driver training. While CrossSafe 360 aligns with Canada’s 2027 mandate, expansion into the U.S. is not currently planned due to trade challenges.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What challenges in school bus safety led to CrossSafe 360?

Maurice Gregoire: In recent years there has been an increase of low speed collisions with students and pedestrians leading to injury and death. There seems to be a reduced respect for the size and awkwardness of a Big Yellow School Bus with inherent Blind Spots. School Bus Drivers can no longer rely on “common sense” and need a tool that can provide them with eyes all around the school bus, especially during low speeds. CrossSafe 360 provides this tool.

Jacobsen: How does this system address those challenges more effectively? 

Gregoire: With 4 HD wide angle cameras installed on the perimeter of the bus above the windows, CrossSafe 360 effectively provides the School Bus Driver with a complete view of the perimeter of the bus, from the ground at the sides of the bus to about 15 – 25 meters out. Using the systems Blind Spot Monitoring system, the images are stitched together for a birdseye view hovering above the bus 6 – 10 meters, and provides an audible and visual alert if motion is detected in the area around the school bus.

Jacobsen: What is your role with the Transport Canada’s Advisory Committee? 

Gregoire: Our role on the Advisory was mainly passive on the Perimeter Visibility segment. While we learned more about the technical requirements, we already knew the School Bus Driver benefits and had already started our system development. Our interest was session decorum and program rollout processes. We were more active in the infraction camera and ESA (Extended Stop Arm) segments of the Transport Canada initiative as this has been our forte for the past 8 – 15 years.

Jacobsen: How has this role led to the mandate for perimeter visibility on school buses? 

Gregoire: General consensus on the Perimeter Visibility solution seemed to be “yes, this makes sense and would greatly improve the Bus Drivers ability to see all around the bus”. Actually, the focus on the Perimeter Visibility segment being approved came as a bit of a surprise to us, and to many Student Transportation Departments across Canada. The main concern was the monitor distracting the School Bus Driver at speed, we resolved with CrossSafe 360 by turning off the monitor at a programmed speed. 

Jacobsen: How do the ultra-wide-angle HD cameras and the AI-powered HD DVR create a 360° view? 

Gregoire: Basically, each wide angle HD camera “sees” 180º, the images from all 4 cameras are then stitched together, much like a panoramic image on your smartphone. The School Bus Driver can view all 4 cameras individually, or view the birdseye view and see the entire area around the school bus. Using AI and advanced stitching algorithms, we produce this bird’s eye view. The BSM (Blind Spot Monitoring) system looks for motion while filtering out the background using similar motion detection technology found in modern CCTV surveillance camera systems. 

Jacobsen: What are the benefits of an audio-visual blind spot monitoring system for school bus drivers? What firmware upgrades may be added over time? 

Gregoire: This feature is a tool used by the School Bus Driver to enhance thier ability to drive the bus safely. It is not meant to replace the bus driver’s own eyes, but to provide an additional level of visibility to see people and objects moving around the bus while at low speeds. With an audible notification, the School Bus Driver can quickly see where the issue is located with an Icon on the screen, then take corrective action if required. As the system is currently stable, firmware upgrades would only take place if Transport Canada or the D250 changes the current perimeter visibility project system’s specifications. Our system is designed with sufficient power to add features with a firmware upgrade. This is performed by simply inserting the SD card with the new firmware into the device and powering up. The firmware is upgraded automatically. Our new revision CrossSafe 360 will allow for remote firmware upgrades via 4G/LTE.

Jacobsen: How does 4G/LTE contribute to immediate incident response and driver training?

Gregoire: Our 4G/LTE IVMS (Intelligent Video Monitoring System) provides a wealth of functions and features, including G-Force and Alarm/Event notifications. This is where an event such as an impact or School Bus Driver triggered event (button push), sends an SMS or Email to the administration. The Administration can then view the cameras in real-time and take appropriate action. As the recorded video shows the entire area around the bus, this can be turned into a Bus Driver Training tool. Also, remotely viewing the camera in real time can provide valuable live training opportunities. 

Jacobsen: The mandate takes effect in November 2027, and the system is tailored to meet Canadian standards; any plans to expand CrossSafe 360 for markets in the U.S.? 

Gregoire: CMVTC MJG Technologies will be ready to roll out to meet this timeline, and we will have retrofit equipment ready by summer 2025. With this being a system designed for Canadian School Buses, and the trading turmoil with the USA, we do not have plans to market to the USA. Traditionally, we have stayed focused on developing equipment for Canadian School Buses and providing our technologies to Canadian clients. This business model has worked well for us and provided substantial growth in Canada.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Maurice.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

AI-Powered Weight Loss with Intermittent Fasting

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/19 (Unpublished)

Simple, founded by Mike Prytkov, emerged from his personal health journey, leading to a 45-pound weight loss through intermittent fasting and whole-food nutrition. Recognizing a need for sustainable weight management, Simple launched in 2019, culminating in Coach Avo™—an AI-driven health coach supporting over 1.5 million users. Avo™ personalizes nutrition, detects eating patterns, and provides real-time coaching without calorie counting. Future advancements include AI voice coaching and customized workout plans. Ro Huntriss, Chief Nutrition Officer at Simple, is a UK-based Consultant Dietitian with expertise in fertility nutrition, gut health, and weight management, contributing her evidence-based approach to the app’s success.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What was the inspiration behind the app, Simple?

Ro Huntriss: Simple was founded on CEO Mike Prytkov’s personal health transformation. While Mike is now exceptionally fit, several years ago, he weighed 210 pounds, struggling with fatigue and stress. Between running a business and raising a family, traditional dieting—such as calorie counting and restrictive meal plans—felt impractical and unsustainable.

Determined to find a simpler, more effective approach, his journey took a lot of trial and error and filtering out misinformation. Ultimately, he discovered intermittent fasting, combined with eating more high-protein, high-fiber, whole food – this helped him lose 45 pounds effortlessly, without any stress. 

Recognizing that millions of people faced similar struggles, he saw an opportunity to redefine weight loss by making it science-backed, sustainable, and easy to follow. His vision extended beyond weight loss—he wanted to create a credible health coach accessible to everyone, providing actionable insights and support anytime, anywhere. While Simple launched as a fasting-focused app in 2019, his vision was fulfilled in 2023 when Simple launched Coach Avo™—an AI-powered coach designed to provide personalized, real-time guidance to help users develop lasting habits. Since its launch, Avo™ has supported over 1.5 million clients, keeping them motivated, accountable, and on track toward their goals.

Jacobsen: How does the smart coaching technology work?

Huntriss: Launched in June 2023, Avo™ is one of the world’s first AI-powered weight loss coaches, built into the Simple App to deliver hyper-personalized, evidence-based coaching 24/7. Unlike static meal plans or generic advice, Avo™ adapts to each user’s unique lifestyle, habits, and goals — providing real-time guidance, motivation, and accountability.

How Avo™ Works:

  1. Scientific Personalization – Using evidence-based nutrition and behavioral science, Avo™ fine-tunes recommendations based on user behavior, progress, preferences 
  2. Proactive Support – Avo™ detects patterns, such as stress eating or plateaus, and provides tailored strategies to overcome obstacles.
  3. Check-Ins and Chat Support – Avo™ monitors progress, asks about challenges, and adjusts recommendations based on real-life behaviors.
  4. Smart Habit Coaching –  Avo™ assigns small, achievable tasks to help users improve their eating habits, activity levels, and mindset — one step at a time.

By combining empathetic coaching, scientific rigor, and AI-driven insights, Avo™ makes sustainable weight loss easier, more accessible, and more effective than ever before.

Jacobsen: How do you make sure this app differentiates from others with some science-based strategies?

Huntriss: Simple differentiates itself from other health and weight loss apps through a science-based, user-friendly approach that removes common barriers to success while leveraging cutting-edge AI technology. Some of our differentiating features include:

  • No Calorie Counting or Food Weighing – Unlike many traditional weight loss programs, Simple program does not require calorie tracking or food weighing to work. Our users see results following the Simple rules of the program
  • Simple Yet Effective Rules – Instead of using complex methods, users are encouraged to engage with our core strategies, including intermittent fasting – simple eating within an eating window, logging foods with a Good or Optimal nutrition score and reaching the activity and hydration targets set out each day. 
  • Technology-Driven Simplicity – The app harnesses AI to simplify and augment the user experience, providing personalized recommendations and nudges to support habit formation with ease. Our tech allows users to log a food simply by taking a picture, it doesn’t get much easier than that! 
  • AI Health Coaching – Our AI-powered coach, Avo™, offers real-time guidance, motivation, and support tailored to each user’s unique needs, making sustainable health changes more accessible than ever. Avo™ is also available 24/7 which is beyond what is experienced with Human coaching. 
  • Holistic Approach – Simple integrates multiple pillars of health, including nutrition, activity, and hydration, ensuring a well-rounded and comprehensive program.  
  • Focus on Inclusion Over Restriction – Instead of fixating on what to cut out (like calories), the program emphasizes what to add, such as protein and fiber, to naturally support satiety, metabolic health and weight loss.  
  • User-Led Development – We prioritize user feedback and behavioral insights, continuously refining and improving the app’s features to ensure they align with real-world needs and preferences based on what the users want, not the developers.  

Jacobsen: Why do people tend to fail at building sustainable habits?

Huntriss: People struggle with habits when they set unrealistic goals. Extreme changes, like daily workouts or cutting entire food groups, lead to burnout. Smaller, sustainable goals work better long term.  

Habits need to be lifelong, not quick fixes. Many focus on short-term results, but real change comes from consistency over time. Shifting to a long-term mindset makes habits stick.  

Being ready for change matters. Doing something because you “should” won’t last. True commitment comes from personal reasons, not external pressure. Reflection helps build a strong foundation.  

Your environment shapes success. Support from friends, family, or a coach helps, as does making your physical environment work for you too. Keep nutritious foods visible and don’t keep too many tempting, less nutritious foods in the house – it makes things much easier.  

Self-compassion is key. Setbacks happen, but they don’t mean failure. Progress, not perfection, builds lasting habits. Learning from challenges keeps you moving forward.

Jacobsen: How do you build in a personalized approach to effectively adapt individual user needs and preferences?

Huntriss: At Simple, we build a personalized approach by adapting to individual user needs and preferences through several tailored strategies. We start by taking into account demographic information such as age and gender, which can influence nutritional needs and activity levels. This allows us to provide more relevant recommendations and support for each user.  

We also consider the user’s preferences and behaviors. By understanding their daily routines, habits, and engagement with the app, we can suggest tasks and challenges that feel natural and motivating. This helps users stay on track and achieve their goals without feeling overwhelmed.  

Food preferences are another key area we personalize. By factoring in users’ likes and dislikes, we ensure that meal suggestions, fasting protocols, and other recommendations align with what they enjoy eating, making the process more enjoyable and sustainable.  

We believe in setting realistic and agreeable targets. Goals are co-created with the user, ensuring that they feel empowered and motivated to reach them. These targets are customized to fit each individual’s circumstances and preferences, ensuring they are challenging yet achievable.  

Finally, we personalize based on user activity. If a user shows greater competency or adherence to tasks, we offer more challenging activities and goals to further their progress. Our AI coach tailors its approach accordingly, offering a variety of personalized tasks, such as fasting protocols, hydration, and activity targets. The AI coach even has memory, meaning it can tailor its conversations and guidance based on the user’s progress and preferences, providing a truly customized experience every step of the way.

Jacobsen: Any success stories of the app you’d like to share?

Huntriss: Simple has helped countless users not only achieve significant weight loss but also experience meaningful improvements in their health and well-being. Among them is Jessica, who lost 60 pounds in just five months and saw a profound transformation in her overall health.

“I was diagnosed with Type 2 diabetes and fibromyalgia and always felt horrible,” Jessica said. “I knew losing weight would help, but I didn’t realize how much better I would feel. Simple tailored my program specifically for me—my age, my body type—and it’s definitely the easiest, most sustainable weight loss system I’ve ever tried.”

Jessica proclaims that her health markers have improved dramatically. “My A1C levels have dropped, my insulin resistance has decreased, and my hormones have leveled out. I no longer experience fibromyalgia flares, and I feel my absolute best,” she said.

Jessica’s story is just one example of how Simple is helping users achieve lasting, life-changing results.

Jacobsen: What are the common misconceptions about weight loss and healthy weight maintenance?

Huntriss: Nutrition generally plays a bigger role than activity in successful in achieving weight loss over the long-term (ref). Although exercise remains to be very important for health and still supports weight management, for the best long-term results, it’s really important not to just focus on exercise alone. 

Muscle loss can occur with weight loss. When losing weight, some muscle mass is often lost along with fat. Prioritizing protein intake and incorporating strength training helps preserve muscle and maintain metabolism.  

Weight loss is more complex than “eat less, move more”. Factors like metabolism, hormones, stress, sleep, and genetics all play a role, in addition to our mental and emotional health, and the environments around us. 

Weight loss is easier for some people. Genetics, metabolism, medical conditions, and lifestyle factors can make weight loss more challenging for some individuals than others – it’s important to be aware of this and show yourself compassion when things may not be moving as quickly as you’d like. 

Maintaining weight loss can be more challenging than losing weight. Many people regain weight after reaching their goal, so focusing on long-term habits and sustainable changes is essential.  

Weight loss isn’t linear. Progress will include fluctuations, plateaus, and setbacks. This is normal and doesn’t mean failure—it’s part of the journey.

Jacobsen: What are potential evolutions of the app in 2025 to improve services?

Huntriss: In 2025, Simple will continue enhancing personalization within the app, ensuring users receive more tailored support on their weight loss journey. A key development will be the introduction of voice calls from Coach Avo™, allowing the AI-powered coach to provide real-time motivation, accountability, and timely nudges to keep users on track.

As a comprehensive weight-loss platform, Simple is expanding its features to support holistic health. This includes the rollout of customized workout plans designed to be accessible and enjoyable, making it easier for users to incorporate movement into their daily routines.

By continuously evolving its technology and features, Simple remains committed to making sustainable weight loss more effective, engaging, and accessible for all users.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Ro.AI-Powered Weight Loss with Intermittent Fasting

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Government of Canada: Substance Use a Healthcare Issue

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/19

The Office of the Minister of Mental Health and Addictions is responsible for leading Canada’s national response to substance use and mental health challenges. The ministry focuses on harm reduction, treatment access, prevention, and awareness, working with provinces, territories, and community organizations to implement evidence-based policies. Key initiatives include the Substance Use and Addictions Program (SUAP), which has allocated over $740 million since 2017 to support 450+ community-based projects focusing on prevention, treatment, and harm reduction. The government has expanded opioid agonist therapy (OAT), streamlined regulations for methadone access, and funded safe consumption sites, which have prevented over 60,000 overdoses since 2017. The Emergency Treatment Fund 2024 ($150M) aims to help municipalities and Indigenous communities address critical needs. In 2023, the federal government committed $200 billion over ten years to healthcare, with $25 billion dedicated to mental health and substance use services. The Canadian Drugs and Substances Strategy (CDSS)integrates public health and safety, addressing prevention, harm reduction, treatment, recovery, enforcement, and research. The Know More Opioids campaign has reached over 192,000 youth since 2018 through in-person and virtual sessions, with new awareness tours planned in 2025. Additionally, Health Canada has launched the Reduce Your Risks of Substance Use campaign, which includes post-secondary outreach from February to March 2025.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does this compassionate approach differ from previous strategies to address substance use? 

Office of the Minister of Mental Health and Addictions: The Government of Canada recognizes that substance use is first and foremost, a health care issue. Unlike the Harper government and Poilievre’s Conservatives, our government supports measures that divert people who use drugs away from the criminal justice system and towards appropriate health and social services, while maintaining the safety of communities.

Action has been taken to improve access to health services for people who are struggling.

  • While the previous government cut Health Canada’s Drug Treatment Funding Program by two-thirds, we’ve committed over $740 million through the Substance Use and Addictions Program (SUAP) since 2017 to support more than 450 community-based projects including those related to treatment, such as expanding opioid agonist therapy (OAT), and prevention.
  • Launching the Youth Substance Use Prevention Program and supporting seven projects in four provinces to implement it. This program is based on the Icelandic Prevention Model approach to preventing substance use among youth.
  • Launched the $150 million Emergency Treatment Fund 2024, which is aimed at supporting municipalities and Indigenous communities rapidly respond to critical needs related to the overdose crisis. This builds off the one-time emergency funding of $150 million through Emergency Treatment Fund 2018 for provinces and territories to improve access to evidence-based treatment services. 
  • Removing certain regulatory constraints imposed on methadone so that exemptions are no longer required from Health Canada for practitioners to prescribe, administer, sell, or provide methadone to their patients. Under the previous government, these constraints were in place. There are also now additional options for those seeking treatment through the approvals of Injectable hydromorphone and injectable diacetylmorphine. 

Additionally, safe consumption sites have responded to more than 60,000 overdoses since 2017. They are saving lives, helping to reduce public drug use and stopping the spread of infectious diseases. Prior to 2017, there was only one federally approved supervised consumption site in the entire country and since then, there have been up to 40 operating. 

In 2023, the federal government made an investment of close to $200 billion over ten years in health care through the Working Together to Improve Health Care for Canadians Plan. This investment included $25 billion to support shared health priorities, including mental health and substance use, through bilateral agreements with provinces and territories. All provinces and territories have included mental health and substance use in their action plans as part of these bilateral agreements. Provinces and territories have dedicated more than a third of the funding of these bilateral agreements to improving access to mental health and substance use services.

Jacobsen: Budget 2023 allocates $144 million for the Substance Use and Addictions Program (SUAP). Does this link to larger federal initiatives addressing the overdose crisis?

Office of the Minister of Mental Health and Addictions: We continue to leverage tools available to address the overdose crisis. The renewed Canadian Drugs and Substances Strategy (CDSS) is our comprehensive and compassionate approach to tackling this tragic public health crisis. The Substance Use and Addictions Program provide funds to community and not-for-profit organizations across the country. Since 2017, it has supported more than 450 community projects. 

SUAP is one part of the Canadian Drugs and Substances Strategy.  

The Strategy works with all orders of government and stakeholders, focuses on a full spectrum of services and supports,and takes a comprehensive approach that balances public health and public safety. It is focused on four key integrated priority areas for action: prevention and education, substance use services and supports (harm reduction, treatment and recovery), evidence, and enforcement. 

Jacobsen: Any final updates, e.g., regarding the Know More Opioids public awareness campaign in schools? 

Office of the Minister of Mental Health and Addictions: Since 2018, the Know More Opioids awareness program has been engaging with teens and youth across Canada on the facts about the overdose crisis, fentanyl, signs of an overdose, naloxone, the Good Samaritan Drug Overdose Act and the impacts of stigma on people who use drugs. 

Since 2018:

  • We have conducted over 900 in person sessions to schools across the country
  • We have conducted over 1,763 virtual sessions
  • We have reached 1,312 schools 
  • Between April 2018 and December 2024, we engaged 192,459 teens and young adults through high school and post-secondary awareness program.

In January-March 2025, Health Canada will run two in-person tours: 

  • The Know More in-person tour will resume in February 2025. The tour will include 33 days in secondary schools in Saskatchewan, Manitoba, Ontario, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia and PEI. 
  • Health Canada recently launched the Reduce Your Risks of Substance Use campaign in February 2025. This campaign includes a tour of campuses of post-secondary institutions across Canada from February 3rd until March 15th. The campaign, comprised of live events and student engagement, aims to increase awareness among young adults of the risks associated with substance use and polysubstance use, how to recognize substance poisoning and overdose and what to do. A digital toolkit was also developed to support the Reduce Your Risk of Substance Usecampaign and will be sent to all post-secondary institutions in Canada.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Humanist Alliance Philippines International: Sherwin Haro

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/18

Sherwin Dane Zauro Haro is the Chief HAPI Scholars and Editor in Chief. Humanism in the Philippines is often linked to traditional Filipino values like respect and hospitality but is typically attributed to Christianity. HAPI works to demonstrate that ethical behavior exists beyond religious doctrine. Digital media plays a key role in spreading humanist values, with HAPI producing high-quality animated videos addressing topics like feminism and atheism. The HAPI website highlights humanism through personal blogs and media works. Scholars undergo rigorous selection and contribute through writing, design, and activism. Despite limited mainstream visibility, HAPI promotes secular values through campaigns, events, and media, advocating critical thinking and social justice in an increasingly polarized world.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is humanism within the cultural and historical landscape of the Philippines?

Sherwin Dane Zauro Haro: Humanism is closely linked to traditional Filipino values like respect and hospitality. We Filipinos are taught early on that treating guests like they’re family is a virtue, and customs like “mano po” are practically mandated among kids. The difference is that Filipinos will usually attribute these particular flavors of humanism to Christianity by default. If you ask a Filipino why one should act compassionate towards their neighbor, most will probably tell you that it is because God encourages it. I have people in my circles who’ve never been able to get why I identify as a secular humanist; to them, humanist thinking was born of Christianity, there’s no way it could be a separate entity. I guess that’s why I find HAPI’s work to be so vital: Filipinos need to know that there are reasons to be good beyond the fact that their religion insists it.

Jacobsen: Digital media dominates many spaces. What strategies ensure humanistic values and are both represented and engaged with online audiences?

Haro: We at HAPI have started to put out more ambitious animated videos that tackle various aspects of humanism these past two years. I produce them myself with the help of the HAPI Scholars, especially Kelly Sepida (who’s our art director) and Kryshia Solon. From the outset, we felt that mixing high-quality animations with deeper humanistic themes would net us more engagement on Facebook—and we were mostly right! Our cartoon shorts helped make feminism, queerphobia, and atheism more “palatable” to Filipino audiences. In my opinion, Kelly’s work already approaches Dreamworks-level so the notably wider reach that these videos achieved made me so proud. HAPI has an active social media team led by Irine Dipano, another HAPI Scholar, who makes sure our videos plus the rest of the regular content developed by HAPI officers get shared punctually.

Jacobsen: What feature on the HAPI Website encapsulates humanist ideals?

Haro: The HAPI blog features intimate accounts of key experiences that our members have had as humanist activists. We’re also working on a gallery of all our media works that highlight various aspects of humanism, which we’re looking to launch soon. Apart from these, I think the hundreds of articles we’ve published over the years (and the sheer variety of their tones, intentions, and styles) encapsulate the reality of being a humanist in the Philippines.

For the Chief of the HAPI Scholars:

Jacobsen: How are humanistic values incorporated into the training and mentorship of emerging scholars?

Haro: It starts as early as their initial interview. Ms. M a/k/a Marissa Langseth, HAPI’s founder and creator of its Scholars department, insists that we push interviewees to think critically about matters of social justice, international and local issues, and religiosity. If we find that an applicant has a nuanced enough view of the world that we can foster, they’d probably have a strong chance of making the cut. The main job of a Scholar is to write compelling articles for the website, so if they’re a gifted writer and freethinker, all the better. Glemir Sordilla, who was among the first batch of Scholars in 2020, got promoted to Associate Editor of the website thanks to her diligence and marked improvement as a writer. On the other hand, Scholars whose skills lean more toward graphic design (like Kelly and Kryshia) and photography are given alternate tasks that allow them to take advantage of their strengths. 

Jacobsen: What opportunities for the promotion of humanism exist in the Philippine context?

Haro: Honestly, having been a humanist for five years now, I feel like humanism is still too niche of a concept for local mass media outlets to cover. Atheism, after all, is a core aspect of humanism and Filipinos tend to avoid the topic (or dismiss it outright if it is brought up). Opportunities do exist—in the opinion columns of left-leaning media like Rappler, for instance, or when one of the Scholars’ old pubmats randomly go viral again—but they’re few and far between. I feel proud whenever I see HAPI hold events across the country because they openly promote humanism without being preachy about it. HAPI is made up of people who don’t have a religion but believe you could positively impact your community regardless; things don’t have to be more complicated than that.

Jacobsen: What initiatives led by HAPI Scholars embody the spirit of humanism?

Haro: The HAPI Scholars were one of the groups who joined the online campaign to free Mubarak Bala when he was first detained in 2020. We’re a primarily online-based team—in fact, we’ve only ever been able to partially meet up in person—so to compensate, we’ve made articles and artwork our bread and butter. Since our inception, we’ve made four social media campaigns focusing on our individual opinions regarding issues like superstitious beliefs, critical thinking, and basic empathy. For us, being young Filipino humanists means coming together in any way we can to shine a secular light on the issues that persist in the world. With the way that fascist thinking has been on the rise lately, that light is needed more than ever.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Sherwin.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ethical Longevity, NAD+ Research, and the Future of Anti-Aging

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/17

Uladzimir Sevruk is the Founder and CEO of Cata-Kor, leading advancements in NAD+ supplements and anti-aging solutions through scientific innovation, ethical longevity, and wellness. Sevruk, Founder and CEO of Cata-Kor, discusses ethical dilemmas in anti-aging interventions. He emphasizes balancing longevity benefits with societal concerns, advocating for transparency in research and equitable access to life extension technologies. Sevruk argues that longer lifespans should not exacerbate economic inequality or resource depletion, highlighting the importance of sustainability. He stresses that public involvement in these discussions ensures responsible innovation, making longevity advancements beneficial for all rather than a privileged few.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Experts can be split on more life. Some see these technologies as potentially revolutionary medical breakthroughs. Others are skeptical and might see them as leading to societal burden. How do you view this dichotomy?

Uladzimir Sevruk: Some people believe that life extension technologies are a discovery that will help people live longer and stay healthy. Others believe that these discoveries could create new problems, such as too many people, which will put pressure on the world economy as a whole. But people forget that everything has its pros and cons. We need to approach this issue sensibly so we can find a balance where people will live longer and it will not create problems. Also, new life extension technologies help to find cures for many diseases, which does not only prolong life but ensures quality of life.

Jacobsen: Anti-aging interventions may be inaccessible to most. What are the ethics of diverse accessibility to longevity technologies?

Sevruk: No proof-of-work for the average human of life extension techniques. But who among us doesn’t want to be healthy and live longer? And it is critical these technologies become more broadly available over time, as medicine once did. A few decades ago, surgeries and drugs were only possible for a few; now hundreds of millions of people are able to take them. The crux is that this does not turn into something dividing people into “the rich and long-lived” and “everyone else.”

Jacobsen: How can we address the ethical challenges there?

Sevruk: Life extension can only be done transparently to resolve the ethical questions around it. Companies developing these technologies need to be transparent about how they work, what risks are involved, and what benefits they provide. It shouldn’t only be scientists and business leaders who are involved in the conversation, but regular people too, to ensure decisions are made for the benefit of everyone and not just a few.

Jacobsen: Will longer lives put increased pressure on natural resources?

Sevruk: Naturally, the longer a person lives, the more food, water, housing, and energy all of humanity will need. But we can solve all of these problems if we invest in recycling and renewable energy. We have faced population growth before, this is nothing new for humanity, and we have always managed to find solutions. Technology does not stand still and is looking for a solution. The day we stop caring about the earth is our last day. And one of the ways to live longer, to live better, to live well, not just longer, is for society to be better, and that means simply caring about the environment.

Jacobsen: With Cata-Kor, how do companies ensure scientific integrity while navigating the ethical dilemmas in ambiguous emerging trends or breakthroughs in anti-aging research?

Sevruk: Companies that work on life extension must be completely transparent. Research must inspire confidence, be transparent to people, show how the methods work, open the research to the public, and pay attention to experts. This is what we at Cata-Kor believe in and uphold from our side, to provide you with the transparency and ethical accountability.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Uladzimir.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Kuty Shalev on Emotional Intelligence in IT

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/17 (Unpublished)

 Kuty Shalev is the Founder and CEO of Lumenalta. Lumenalta defines emotional intelligence (EQ) in IT as the ability to navigate complex, high-stakes collaborations with empathy, adaptability, and self-awareness, combined with technical communication and problem-solving skills. They integrate EQ into daily workflows through simulation-based coaching and commitment-based communication, ensuring clear articulation of concerns and concrete commitments aligned with business outcomes. This approach fosters stakeholder alignment, reduces ambiguity, and improves client satisfaction. Despite challenges like strict deadlines and remote work barriers, IT leaders report significant benefits. Leadership plays a key role by modeling effective communication and continuously reinforcing EQ through coaching and mentoring. Overall, this strategy transforms IT culture.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does Lumenalta define emotional intelligence within IT teams? 

Kuty Shalev: At Lumenalta, we see emotional intelligence (EQ) as the ability to navigate complex, high-stakes collaborations with empathy, adaptability, and self-awareness. It’s not just about interpersonal skills—it’s about creating an environment where technical and non-technical team members can align on priorities, manage conflict constructively, and drive innovation. 

A key part of our approach is commitment-based communication. This means that instead of vague discussions or assumptions, our teams are trained to articulate their concerns clearly, identify the hidden concerns of others, and create commitments that are specific, validated, and aligned with business outcomes. This structured way of communicating ensures that nothing is left ambiguous—whether in a client meeting, a project plan, or even when prompting an AI model. 

Jacobsen: Does this differ much from more general definitions of emotional intelligence? 

Shalev: Yes, in many ways. While general definitions of emotional intelligence focus on self-awareness, empathy, and interpersonal effectiveness, EQ within IT teams also encompasses technical communication, problem-solving under pressure, and cross-cultural collaboration—especially in remote environments. IT professionals must translate technical concepts into business outcomes, prioritize conflicting demands, and adapt to evolving requirements—all of which require a blend of emotional and cognitive intelligence. 

Jacobsen: How have IT leaders overcome the challenge of strict deadlines limiting the development of EQ? 

Shalev: Lumenalta has tackled this challenge by integrating EQ development directly into how teams work. Instead of separating “soft skills” training from technical training, we embed emotional intelligence into real-world practice. For example, our teams participate in simulation-based coaching that mimics high-pressure client scenarios, helping them refine their communication, negotiation, and problem-solving skills in real time. This ensures that EQ development isn’t an extracurricular activity—it’s a core part of how we deliver results. 

Jacobsen: What companies have integrated EQ into IT culture to provide measurable improvements? 

Shalev: Many forward-thinking organizations have embraced EQ-driven approaches to IT. Our own experience at Lumenalta has shown that when developers are trained to navigate stakeholder dynamics, project outcomes improve. According to our research, 87% of IT leaders reported that

investing in EQ directly improved client satisfaction, and 81% saw a positive impact on technology adoption. Companies that embed emotional intelligence into daily workflows—rather than relying on one-off training—see the most significant gains. 

Jacobsen: What factors can blunt the positive effects of improved EQ in the IT workplace? 

Shalev: One major factor is a lack of structural reinforcement. If EQ training isn’t backed by a workplace culture that values open communication, psychological safety, and constructive feedback, it won’t stick. Another challenge is time pressure—if teams are constantly in reactive mode, they may default to transactional communication rather than thoughtful collaboration. Finally, hybrid and remote work environments can create EQ barriers if companies don’t establish clear norms for engagement and relationship-building. 

Jacobsen: How are facets of emotional intelligence—self-awareness, adaptability, and empathy—quantified and measured to improve workplace productivity? 

Shalev: One way Lumenalta measures the impact of EQ training is through the clarity and effectiveness of communication. Are teams making and keeping better commitments? Are they reducing ambiguity in client interactions? Are they proactively uncovering concerns before they become roadblocks? 

Interestingly, this same discipline in language and clarity extends to AI development. The best AI outputs come from well-structured prompts, and the ability to construct these prompts effectively comes from the same EQ skills we cultivate in our teams. A great AI prompt, much like a great commitment, is clear, concise, and validated against the outcomes we are targeting. 

Jacobsen: Do generational culture differences affect the workforce perception of EQ in IT teams? 

Shalev: Absolutely. Younger IT professionals often expect EQ to be embedded into company culture and value ongoing coaching, while more experienced team members may have developed technical expertise in environments where EQ wasn’t prioritized. Our research found that perspectives on 

EQ varied based on years of experience, but across the board, IT leaders recognized its importance—90% said it was essential for success. 

Jacobsen: How can leadership and management style foster more emotionally intelligent work environments in tech companies? 

Shalev: Leadership plays a crucial role in setting the tone for EQ in IT teams. At Lumenalta, we focus on leading by example—our senior engineers and product leads model effective communication, client engagement, and conflict resolution. We also emphasize continuous learning, using both AI-powered coaching tools and human-led mentoring to reinforce key EQ skills. Creating an

environment where engineers feel heard, valued, and empowered to solve problems autonomously is key to long-term success.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Kuty. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

AI-Powered Bookkeeping, Ethical AI in Finance

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/17 (Unpublished)

Swapnil Shinde, CEO and Co-Founder of Zeni, talks about Zeni’s AI-powered bookkeeping streamlines financial operations by providing real-time insights and automation while ensuring transparency, data privacy, and compliance. Shinde speaks to the ethical considerations that are crucial, especially in financial services, where AI-driven decisions impact lives, where transparency, minimizing bias, and privacy protection are fundamental pillars. As AI and nanoscale engineering evolve, ethical models must adapt to safeguard human interests. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: With financial institutions and tech startups, how do ethical considerations come into AI strategy?

Swapnil Shinde: Ethical considerations are fundamental to building trust in AI, especially in financial services where decisions directly impact people’s lives. Ensuring transparency, minimizing bias, and prioritizing data privacy are critical pillars in shaping responsible AI strategies.

Jacobsen: How do innovations in AI and nanoscale engineering challenge traditional ethical models?

Shinde: The convergence of AI and nanoscale engineering pushes the boundaries of what’s possible, often outpacing existing ethical frameworks. This requires a shift toward dynamic, principles-based governance models that can evolve with technology while safeguarding human interests.

Jacobsen: With more sophistication in cybersecurity and data integration challenges, how can ethical AI practices protect sensitive information?

Shinde: Ethical AI practices must prioritize data minimization, encryption, and transparent decision-making to protect sensitive information. By aligning AI design with privacy-first principles, organizations can mitigate risk and build long-term trust with users.

Jacobsen: How do you balance commercial innovation with robust ethical safeguards?

Shinde: It’s about integrating ethical considerations directly into the innovation lifecycle. When companies view ethical safeguards as catalysts for innovation rather than roadblocks, they’re able to deliver transformative solutions while upholding public trust.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Swapnil. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Most and Least ‘Sinful’ American States

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/17

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. He discusses the most sinful states in America for 2025 with Scott Douglas Jacobsen. Nevada ranks first, followed by California, Florida, Louisiana, and Texas. Gambling, drug use, and alcohol abuse significantly impact rankings, with Nevada’s Las Vegas driving its position. Texas moved from seventh to fifth, while Tennessee dropped out of the top five. The least sinful states—Idaho, New Hampshire, Vermont, Utah, and Wyoming—show regional and cultural influences, including religion and low urbanization. The seven-category index tracks vice-related metrics yearly, revealing trends in crime, financial recklessness, and social behaviours. Rankings remain relatively consistent over time.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are back with Chip Lupo, a WalletHub analyst. We will discuss the most sinful states in America in 2025.

New Mexico has one of the highest rates of drug use, Nevada has the most gambling addictions, and gambling alone in the United States results in losses of approximately $100 billion per year.

Someone call DOGE immediately! The amount of money lost due to smoking-related health issues and productivity loss exceeds $600 billion per year. Harmful behaviour at an individual level, based on personal choices, can lead to high economic costs on a national scale. So, the first big question: Why is this particular report on sinful behaviour important, and how do you frame this study?

Chip Lupo: It’s important because, as you mentioned, each of the 50 states has its vices and virtues, and some states are generally more well-behaved than others. We compare the states across key indicators of immoral or illicit behaviour.

This study goes beyond typical vices like gambling, smoking, and alcohol use—many of which serve as gateways to more serious issues such as domestic abuse, hate crimes, bullying, sex offences, and violent crimes.

Jacobsen: Now, the top five—are these the most sinful states? Nevada is the most sinful state by a landslide, followed by California, Florida, Louisiana, and Texas.

Some of these rankings are surprising. While Nevada ranks first in multiple categories, some of these states rank lower in certain areas, such as excesses, vices, or violent crime. It’s interesting because there isn’t always a clear-cut reason why these five states rank the highest, aside from the index itself, which factors in multiple elements, including anger and hatred, jealousy, excesses, greed, lust, vanity, and laziness.

So why do these rankings vary so much? In other studies, it’s often clear why a state ranks first, second, or third, but that’s not always the case here.

Lupo: Let’s start with Nevada. Of course, Las Vegas is the gambling capital, and unfortunately, in a state like Nevada, what happens in Las Vegas influences the entire state. Las Vegas drives many of Nevada’s issues, both positive and negative.

This is largely gambling-driven, and as I mentioned before, gambling often triggers other illicit behaviours. But what’s particularly interesting about Nevada is that, aside from gambling, it ranks high in other vices. For example, it has a high number of fast-food establishments per capita, ranks fourth overall in the share of adult coffee drinkers, and ranks seventh in the share of the population using marijuana.

Then, of course, we get into gambling itself. Nevada ranks first for the number of casinos, first for gambling-related arrests, first for the share of the population with gambling disorders, and first for persons arrested for embezzlement per capita.

That last statistic is key because embezzlement is often tied to gambling. Many casinos and gentlemen’s clubs operate as cash-only businesses, making it difficult to track where all the money is going.

So, it’s not surprising that Nevada ranks high for embezzlement arrests. Additionally, it ranks first for the number of persons arrested for prostitution or commercialized vice per capita.

Now, looking at some of these other states—take, for example, California and Louisiana—both have high violent crime rates. Louisiana ranks fifth, while California ranks sixth. Whether or not that directly ties into vices, a lot of it could be influenced by illicit drug use and alcoholism. In many cases, these two factors go hand in hand.

Texas, however, presents an interesting case. Overall, Texas has a fairly low crime rate and a relatively low number of registered sex offenders. However, it ranks high in bullying, hate crimes, and the number of hate groups per capita. As Texas continues to grow as a business hub, with more companies relocating to the state due to its business-friendly climate, it also ranks high in identity theft complaints per capita, fraud complaints per capita and thefts per capita.

Texas ranks high in adult coffee consumption and other lifestyle indicators in other areas. Interestingly, Texas ranks second overall in Google search interest for adult entertainment, which measures searches for pornographic websites. The state also ranks high for persons arrested for prostitution and commercialized vice. In summary, across all these states, crime and other societal issues often correlate with vices such as drug use, alcohol abuse, and excessive gambling.

Jacobsen: If we look at the least sinful states, the bottom five—Idaho, New Hampshire, Vermont, Utah, and Wyoming—we see an interesting trend. These states rank much closer than the top five, which are significantly spread apart, particularly when you factor in Nevada’s extreme scores. Although these states rank lower on the “sinfulness” scale, they aren’t necessarily morality outliers. What explains their rankings?

Lupo: This is where regional trends come into play. The bottom-ranking states share some common characteristics. Many are in the Mountain West, while two—New Hampshire and Vermont—are in Northern New England. One key factor is that these states tend to have a more homogenous population with a predominantly white demographic.

The areas where these states tend to falter are in bullying and hate crimes. However, their overall violent crime rates remain relatively low. A major reason for this is that these states are sparsely populated and lack major urban centers. Unlike California, which has Los Angeles and San Francisco, or states like Nevada, Louisiana, or Texas, which have large cities such as Las Vegas, New Orleans, Houston, or Dallas, the bottom-ranking states do not have large metro areas where crime rates typically surge.

Because of this, inner-city crime is not as much of an issue in these states. Another interesting factor is the religious influence in Idaho and Utah. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints (LDS Church) has a strong presence in both states, shaping cultural attitudes toward vices. Residents in these states tend to have lower rates of alcohol abuse, and even caffeine consumption is lower than the national average. Additionally, gambling is nearly nonexistent—neither Idaho nor Utah has commercial casinos, and Utah is one of the few states without a state lottery. The cultural deterrent against gambling is deeply embedded in these states, influencing overall behaviour and vice-related activities.

Jacobsen: The metrics in this study are particularly interesting because they first include the most categories of any of the reports you’ve shared with me. There’s also a wide range within each category. The weighting system scales from less than one point to over four points, ensuring an even distribution of how different factors are valued.

However, when looking at categories like vanity, excesses and vices, and anger and hatred, the index is highly detailed, with many subcategories. In contrast, jealousy and lust only have three subcategories each. What does this mean in terms of data analysis and metric construction? Given the large number of subcategories, how do you ensure the balance and accuracy of such a robust index?

Lupo: That’s where it gets tricky. This hasThis study has seven major dimensions, and within those, we’re breaking things down into 55 individual metrics. The challenge is ensuring that each of those metrics is fairly represented without overemphasizing one aspect over another.

When people hear the term “sinful,” their minds often jump to vices like lust or greed. However, these vices intersect with other factors, snowballing into broader issues such as crime rates, economic instability, or social behaviour. For example, under the excesses and vices category, we include a debt-to-income ratio metric, which measures how much debt residents have relative to their household income.

This is significant because high debt levels can be linked to gambling behaviour. If someone excessively gambles, they likely accumulate debt to cover daily expenses. While this metric may have a lower weighting, it’s an important indicator of financial recklessness. Including such nuanced measures makes the study more comprehensive, highlighting individual behaviours and their wider economic and social consequences.

Jacobsen: Can you track changes year over year? By this metric, or a similar one, are states becoming more virtuous or sinful over time? I’d be curious about that.

Lupo: The rankings are fairly consistent from year to year. Most metrics have remained unchanged from 2024 to 2025, so much of the 2025 rankings are based on 2024 data.

Nevada is still ranked number one as the most sinful state. The top five states have remained mostly the same, but there was one notable change: Tennessee was ranked fifth in 2024, scoring high in anger and hatred, excesses and vices, and lust. However, it dropped out of the top five in 2025. It’s also not in the bottom five, meaning it likely saw a significant decline in sinful behaviours overall. That’s an interesting shift.

Meanwhile, Texas moved up from seventh to fifth. The other rankings saw minor changes:

  • Nevada remains first.
  • Louisiana dropped from second to fourth.
  • California moved up from third to second.
  • Florida moved up from fourth to third.

The biggest takeaway is Tennessee’s sharp decline, which is worth noting, even if the 2025 numbers aren’t fully available yet.

Jacobsen: Chip, that’s all the questions I have for today. I appreciate your time again.

Lupo: All right, Scott. As always, we appreciate your interest. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Hollywood, Trump’s Ambassadors, and Film Industry Politics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/16

Scott Hamm Duenas is an actor, producer, and martial artist known for Final Wager and ReBroken. With over 15 years in SAG/AFTRA, he has appeared in General Hospital and The Bold and the Beautiful. Passionate about storytelling, he blends physicality and visionary filmmaking in his dynamic performances and productions.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What might happen with these appointments of conservative ambassadors?

Scott Hamm Duenas: President Trump appointing Jon Voight, Mel Gibson, and Sylvester Stallone as Hollywood ambassadors would add to his list of appointing change agents to his new administration. 

Having leaders in Hollywood who are huge stars but also happen to be conservatives could potentially cause a lot of friction. Since becoming president in 2016, Hollywood, Trump, and Trump supporters are like oil and water; they do not mix. I think you would have to influence many very important people to open their minds to the thought of taking these people and their ambassadorship seriously. 

Although, if they don’t come in overly aggressive, trying to force their views on people and instead come up with a plan to push for a return to more traditional forms of storytelling, emphasizing themes like patriotism and resilience, which are often associated with their work, I think that could possibly work, especially if that type of programming is a hit with audiences. At the end of the day, the industry is all about making a profit. If that type of contest equates to clicks, streams, and butts in seats, Hollywood will shift its content without hesitation. That being said, it wouldn’t alter Hollywood’s core values or diminish its commitment to telling progressive stories and giving a platform to issues they deeply believe in and feel deserve to be heard. 

Jacobsen: How might this come across to the industry as a whole?

Duenas: Realistically, the ambassadors’ involvement could really rub a lot of heavy hitters, including studios, producers, actors, directors, and writers, the wrong way. This could even deepen existing divides within the industry, as Hollywood is very proud of its liberal stance, and the last thing they want is lectures about how to do business from conservatives. 

No matter how their ideas are presented, they will definitely conjure up mixed reactions. Some stars may support their initiatives, some will stay neutral, and others—I think the majority—will oppose them. 

While they could advocate for bringing production back to California, I don’t know how much credit they would get, as things are already moving in that direction for 2025. Plans for tax incentives are already in the works to bring more production back from other states and countries, which would be huge for California and the enormous number of people this industry provides income for in the Golden State.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Justin Allen Rose on North Korea, Christianity, and America

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/16

Dr. Justin Allen Rose, a political scientist and media analyst, discusses the intersection of religion, politics, and authoritarianism in the U.S. and abroad. He explores religious devotion and political allegiance, noting how dogma and punishment reinforce control in Christian nationalism and North Korea alike. Rose examines biblical literalism’s role in legislation, citing State Senator Dusty Deevers and Trump’s Christian bias initiatives as evidence of religion-driven policymaking. He warns of a post-constitutional America where free thought is suppressed, and laws increasingly reflect evangelical ideology. Ultimately, he underscores the danger of blind faith and its societal consequences.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Dr. Justin Allen Rose, a political science researcher, lecturer, and media analyst in the United States. He earned his PhD in political science at the University of Tennessee, Knoxville, where he focused on social media’s influence on political polarization. Rose is greatly interested in the intersection of religion and politics, examining how faith shapes political behavior and opinions. He is currently a journalist living in Oklahoma. Contrary to what one might assume from Free Inquiry magazine, he was raised in a religious town. However, he comes from a nonreligious family and advocates for safeguarding civil liberties. 

Thank you for joining me today. I appreciate it on such short notice. Let’s dive into the first question: What are the key similarities between religious devotion and political allegiance in authoritarian regimes? The fundamental basis for both is religious or political dogma.

Dr. Justin Allen Rose: Yes. That is a very good question to start with.

And you’ll notice throughout this conversation that I’m not afraid of tackling these topics.

I know you—I’ve seen your work before. I don’t mean to backtrack or anything, but I love listening to and reading Christopher Hitchens and Richard Dawkins. They’re truly intellectual figures. And while I have a PhD, I didn’t grow up in an academic household. My dad dropped out of high school. My mom has a high school diploma.

So, in my language—you’re here, I’m here—I come from a blue-collar background.

I’m educated, but my language is still very blue-collar.

It really does seem like religion and political allegiance are one and the same, especially nowadays. In religion, people hold onto their beliefs no matter what. I love analyzing the logical processes that people go through to reach their opinions and allegiances.

That’s what led me to study political psychology.

And that is because anytime you see it, this whole religion topic is somewhat cyclical for me in terms of interest. I write about it and read about it, and then I step away from it.

At some point, you talk to a religious individual—let’s talk Christianity since we’re in America, and that’s the dominant religious framework here—you reach a situation where you ask them a question about a contradiction you’ve noticed, something that they logically cannot fully support.

Whether it’s a moral dilemma or a textual inconsistency, they’ll often respond with something like, “Well, you’re interpreting it wrong,” or, “God is mysterious.” It becomes a way to reinforce what they already believe.

We see the same phenomenon with political allegiances nowadays on both sides. Among Republicans and Democrats—though to different degrees—you often see partisans treating their political affiliation like a sports team. When a Democrat does something questionable, a hardcore Democrat will often try to justify it, even if it contradicts their previous opinions. The same happens with Republicans.

We see this pattern clearly in political science and public opinion research. When people consume information, they tend to read it in a way that reinforces their preexisting beliefs. If someone already has a strong opinion—whether it’s about God’s existence or their political party’s righteousness—they struggle to admit they might be wrong.

That cognitive dissonance people talk about? They don’t want to feel it. So, they’ll do anything to mentally flip the switch, convincing themselves that reality isn’t what it appears to be. Instead, they might say, “The liberal elites are manipulating the narrative,” or, “They’re trying to deceive me.” Their actual thoughts become their version of reality, and they reject any contradiction as a fabricated lie.

Jacobsen: Now, in a recent article, you argued that Kim Jong Un and the Christian God (I’m unsure whether you’re making a distinction between Catholicism and Protestantism here) share similar mechanisms of control over their followers.

So, how do you conceptually distinguish these forms of control? And how does this play out when one authority figure is a living person—like Kim Jong Un—while the other, like the Christian God, is believed to be real but remains intangible? Or, in the case of North Korea, how does the “dead dad and granddad” system function in what Hitchens might call a “necrocracy”? A tripartite comparison—Kim Jong Un, and the deceased leaders of North Korea.

Rose: For me, the mechanisms of control all center on getting people to believe in something unquestioningly. And in religion, the Christian God is God himself. In North Korea, Kim Jong Un is the absolute authority. The mechanism of control is always punishment. The question becomes: what is the consequence of not believing in this being?

This ties back to religion. Even within Christianity, different sects hold different beliefs about hell. Some believe in eternal damnation, while others think nonbelievers exist apart from God. Regardless, in their minds, separation from God is still a form of punishment—whether it’s eternal torment or spiritual exile.

Punishment is always central. In Christianity, punishment means being sent to hell. In North Korea, under Kim Jong Un, punishment means death or being sent to a concentration camp. That’s the core mechanism I focus on—punishment—because that ultimately compels people to conform.

Beyond punishment, there is also the element of solidarity. I can’t claim to know exactly what North Korean subjects truly believe in their hearts. But based on past research, historical patterns, and my reflections on belief systems, I see a recurring theme.

Even in oppressive groups—whether it’s a theocracy, a dictatorship, or a cult—people often remain loyal despite the harm they suffer. There’s a psychological benefit to group belonging. We see this in political interest groups as well. The same dynamic applies to Christianity:

It enforces belief through fear of punishment.

It fosters a sense of solidarity, even when the belief system may harm the individual or society.

Now, I don’t separate the two very much when we compare devotion to a living leader versus a deity. As I wrote in my article, let’s hypothetically assume, for argument’s sake, that God exists—setting aside any controversy.

Even if God is not a person but an entity, belief in him shapes society. It influences laws, behaviours, and human interactions, just as belief in Kim Jong Un dictates life in North Korea.

So, whether we view God as imaginary or real, the comparison holds. It’s all about effect—how belief in a real-life dictator versus a deity influences human beings. If you ever want me to elaborate on a specific point, just ask. I know my thoughts can sometimes branch off in multiple directions.

Jacobsen: But you have something that many Americans have—much more than many Canadians—something that may be more familiar to older generations who left religion in North America than younger generations who never had religion.

In a way, you are culturally bilingual regarding religion and nonreligion. You understand what religious people mean when they say certain things. It can be as simple as “God bless you,” essentially the secular equivalent of “Good luck.”

I don’t have any personal attachment to that phrase, but I understand the sentiment behind it. You grew up in a religious environment so that you can navigate both perspectives. So, how do you distinguish between faith and blind faith?

From the perspective of religious people in the United States—Christians in particular—how do they differentiate the two? 

Because often in religious debates—or what are called debates—you’ll see people pivot to “By faith, I mean trust. I trust that God is good.” It’s clever rhetoric but doesn’t add anything substantive to the conversation.

Rose: I totally see where you’re coming from. And yeah, that’s exactly why I lose interest in the battle between religion and nonreligion—it always comes down to semantics. One minute, someone claims to mean one thing, and then suddenly, “Oh, I didn’t mean that I meant this.”

Or you get the argument that “Everyone has some kind of religion.” It might not be believing in God, but they’ll insist it’s still a religion.

That’s when words start to lose meaning. What are we even doing if you redefine terms to justify your position? We’re not getting any closer to the truth.

And that’s what I’m after—the truth of what is actually real.

So, in terms of faith versus blind faith—Yes, I did grow up in a nonreligious household. For the first sixteen years of my life, I was born and raised in Virginia, which is a completely different environment from small-town Oklahoma, where we moved when I turned 16.

In Virginia, we never really talked about religion at home. Occasionally, it would come up on TV, but that was about it. Religion wasn’t present in schools. Then I moved to small-town Oklahoma, and it was a completely different world. The high school I graduated from was in a town one mile wide; within that one mile, there were six churches.

Religion and God were talked about constantly in that environment. I don’t think negatively about that experience because I had a good time at that school, but it was a strange experience. As you mentioned, I got to immerse myself in a completely different culture.

Take politics, for example. My parents always watched the news when I was growing up, so I heard their opinions. But never once did I hear religion as the justification for their views. It was never, “I believe this because of my faith.”

Politics came up in school as well—whether in conversations among students or even when teachers discussed it. But again, religion wasn’t a factor. Then, in Oklahoma, it was completely different. Almost every political opinion seemed to be tied directly back to religion, which was wild to experience.

That sparked my curiosity. I wanted to understand how religion could shape someone’s worldview, even though for me, that wasn’t the case at all.

I don’t have that religious framework in my head. So why does this one belief influence every other belief they hold? Now, getting into faith versus blind faith— I don’t think they see it as blind faith. Even though you and I might classify it that way, they don’t consider it faith.

You see this all the time on TikTok or other platforms. People ask, “How can you believe in something you haven’t seen?”Or, “You’re just reading words off a page—how do you believe in it without evidence?” But they genuinely think they do have evidence.

I saw a video of a woman claiming that God appeared in her house, in her room, and that she was able to hug God or Jesus—whichever entity she was referring to that day.

And honestly, how do you argue against that? You can’t. If they truly believe it, there’s nothing you can say to combat that. You have two possibilities:

They’re lying to themselves or others because they desperately want to convince people (and themselves) that this is real.

They truly believe it, which raises the question: Which is worse?

Is it scarier that they’ve lost their grip on reality to that degree? Or that they don’t believe it—but are deliberately lying and will do whatever it takes to get others to believe? Lately, I think it’s more of the latter—a calculated effort to push belief no matter what. And we see that happening through Christian nationalism. Oklahoma is the premier testing ground for that experiment.

Jacobsen: So, how do they use biblical literalism— through a fully literal reading or a selective literalist approach—to consolidate power and enforce obedience?

Rose: I’m not sure how familiar you are with Oklahoma politics, but judging by the topic, I’ll go ahead and name names—I don’t care.

Take Senator Dusty Deevers from Elgin, Oklahoma. If you scroll through his X (formerly Twitter) account, you’ll see biblical literalism on full display in the bills he’s trying to pass through the Oklahoma legislature.

For example, he has proposed legislation related to abortion—I believe he refers to it as chemical abortion, though not chemical castration. He’s also pushing bills targeting same-sex marriage and other issues in line with Christian nationalist ideology.

Now, you’d expect a deeply religious person—especially a pastor-turned-politician—to legislate based on his beliefs. And that’s exactly what he’s doing. This all ties back to punishment, whether in Christianity or North Korea.

When Christian nationalists like Deevers draft legislation, they often frame it in terms of God’s will. The underlying idea is that laws should punish those deviating from their Christian interpretation.

Deevers is an open Christian nationalist—he wrote a manifesto on the subject before he was even elected. So, he’s not just pandering when he pushes these laws—he genuinely believes in his actions.

And I can say this with some certainty because I’ve spoken to Senator Deevers in his office before. When we were discussing policy—purely political issues—you wouldn’t have guessed he was a pastor. But the moment he mentioned God, his entire demeanor changed. You could see it in his eyes.

Now, some people argue that politicians like Deevers are just using religion as a tool for power. That’s a fair argument. But there’s another possibility—some of these people truly believe everything they’re saying and genuinely want to implement it—not just in Oklahoma but nationwide.

And that’s a powerful thing to witness—the shift in his eyes, his energy—when he speaks about religion. If someone like Deevers truly believes in biblical literalism, then he will do everything in his power to enforce what he thinks the Bible demands.

The Bible suggests that if a land does not follow God’s will, it will be punished. Conversely, if a nation embraces God, it will prosper. If Deevers believes that literally, then his legislative efforts—banning gay marriage, outlawing abortion, and enforcing Christian moral codes—are all part of his mission.

Never mind the contradictions in the Bible itself—like God wiping out entire populations in the Great Flood—because biblical literalists rarely address those inconsistencies. However, the key takeaway is that we are witnessing real-life biblical literalism in action.

Some people, yes, are using Christian nationalism for power. But again, I truly believe that some people genuinely believe every word of the Bible and are acting on it. Dusty Deevers is one of them. And that brings us right back to the question—which is worse?

Is it more dangerous when someone doesn’t believe in biblical literalism but still tries to enforce it for political gain? Or is it worse when someone truly believes every word of the Bible and tries to legislate it into reality? Either way, this ideology affects more than just Oklahoma—we now see it at the federal level.

Take Trump’s recent initiatives, for example. His administration has been forming committees and groups dedicated to rooting out so-called ‘anti-Christian bias’ within the federal government. 

Jacobsen: But we know that’s not happening. If anything, we’ve seen the opposite—for a long time, there has been a pro-Christian bias in American politics.

Rose: All of these efforts fly in the face of reality. They contradict all the available evidence. So, what’s the purpose? It’s signalling about letting the so-called “good Christian people” know they’re on their side.

And if we set aside the courts and the power of Congress for a moment, we seem to be creeping toward a post-constitutional stage—where checks and balances are losing effectiveness. Yes, technically, we still have checks and balances. That’s the go-to response when someone points out that a president—whether Trump or anyone else—is overreaching. People say, “Don’t worry, we have the courts, we have Congress—they’ll push back.”

But we’re not seeing that. For decades, Congress has willingly handed more and more power over to the executive branch, and now, it’s on full display. So, when we talk about a post-constitutional era and what that means for Christian nationalism, it doesn’t bode well for those who don’t subscribe to their religious ideology.

And what does that mean for my family? My wife is an atheist, just like me. My daughter is only two years old, but what will life look like when she grows up if we’re still in Oklahoma? Because, in my view, the Bible—and Christianity in general—is deeply anti-woman. That’s clear as day to me.

So, if literal biblical interpretations start shaping our laws—whether at the state level in Oklahoma or at the federal level—what does that mean? What does that mean for women? What does that mean for nonbelievers?

And this is something I think many people fail to understand. Being an atheist isn’t a choice—it’s not about wanting to be an atheist or wanting to reject religion. No. It’s about reading the Bible, listening to the arguments, and saying: “I don’t buy it.”

It’s not as if I can wake up tomorrow and say, “You know what?”  I could say, “I believe in God.” It is all day long. But would that make it true?

Because I would always have that doubt, and I truly believe—probably always, though I won’t say always with absolute certainty—that it’s not true. That belief is outside of my control.

And that ties right back into the argument: If God created everyone and made them the way they are, then He made me this way—to send me to hell?

Jacobsen: What are the biggest parallels between the desired Christian nation of many Protestants—particularly white evangelical Christians in the United States—and authoritarian North Korea?

Rose: Uniform thought. It all goes back to the First Amendment—freedom of speech, freedom of thought, and the ability to reason freely in this country.

To truly control whether someone believes in God or anything—a political party, a social ideology—you have to control the flow of information. The more this country moves toward what they call a Christian nation or a Christian nationalist state, the greater the push will be to suppress dissenting voices.

We’ll see increased efforts to ban articles, shut down media companies, and restrict books from libraries because that’s how you control people. I’m sure—I’ve never been to North Korea—but I highly doubt they have vast, uncensored libraries on every corner.

Jacobsen: Dr. Rose, thank you very much for your time today. It was lovely to meet you.

Rose: Let me know anytime you want to talk. Bye.

Jacobsen: Thank you. Bye-bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Henri Chelhot on Iconic Movie Destinations 2025

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/15

Henri Chelhot is the CEO of FlightHub and a travel expert at Momentum Ventures. With extensive experience in the travel industry, he provides insights into tourism trends, flight services, and customer experiences. He is represented by Olivia LaBorde of Society22 PR and frequently shares expertise on travel and aviation topics. Movie-related travel is booming, with over half of travelers influenced by films and TV shows when choosing destinations. A survey by JustFly.com found Emily in Paris (24%) and Game of Thrones (23%) as top travel influencers, with Northern Ireland attracting fans to its Game of Thrones sites. Social media fuels this trend, making locations like Katz’s Deli from When Harry Met Sally viral. Sustainability is gaining importance, with destinations like New Zealand promoting eco-friendly tourism. Advances in AR and VR enhance experiences, allowing virtual explorations and interactive on-site elements. Despite TikTok disruptions, film tourism remains strong across platforms.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are iconic movie destinations attracting tourists now? 

Henri Chelhot: I’m excited to discuss this topic because my company, justfly.com, recently conducted a survey on movie-related travel destinations. More than half of the participants admitted to selecting travel destinations after seeing them featured in a movie, TV series, or show. 

In the survey, 24% of respondents said that *Emily in Paris* had the most significant impact on their travel choices, while *Game of Thrones* followed closely at 23%. *Game of Thrones* was filmed in several locations worldwide, but the top destination is Northern Ireland, where you can find The Game of Thrones Studio Tour at Linen Mill Studios. Iconic sites depicted as Winterfell, Castle Black, and the Kingsroad are also located in Northern Ireland. 

Jacobsen: How do these spots remain relevant year-on-year? 

Chelhot: These locations, like other popular film sites, stay relevant year after year because the characters and stories resonate with viewers on a deeper level. Even though we know

the actors and sets aren’t real, when fans travel to these places, they feel a connection to the movie. It’s as if they’ve experienced a part of the story or the journey of the characters they love. 

Jacobsen: Are customers attuned to values like authenticity, environmentalism, and sustainability when touring? 

Chelhot: We’re certainly noticing that more travelers value authenticity, environmentalism, and sustainability during their travels, and film tourism is no exception. 

Jacobsen: How has the rise of social media influenced the popularity of cinematic locations among travelers? 

Chelhot: Social media has significantly influenced the popularity of traveling to movie locations, just like it has affected many aspects of our culture. For example, lets say you’re a fan of “When Harry Met Sally”, and the iconic restaurant scene is your favorite part. You might be scrolling through your phone and come across a group of friends visiting Katz’sDeli in New York, where that scene was filmed. This realization can make you decide to add that location to your travel list. 

Jacobsen: How has the disruption in access to TikTok changed social media usage and impacted trends in movie-based travel? 

Chelhot: When TikTok was shut down, panic struck for many users around the world. However, it seems that people are now using it again without worrying about it going away. I don’t believe these disruptions have significantly impacted trends in movie-related travel. Social media remains a powerful tool for influencing travel choices, as illustrated by the “When Harry Met Sally” example. If TikTok were to disappear, travelers would likely transition to another platform. 

Jacobsen: Are/should movie destination tours be shifting to incorporate cultural or educational elements to align with the values mentioned earlier? 

Chelhot: Movie destination tours are shifting to include cultural and educational elements to align with tourists’ increasing values around environmentalism and sustainability. 

For instance, New Zealand, known for filming “The Lord of the Rings” and “The Hobbit,” is a leader in sustainable tourism. Many tours there emphasize preserving the land and wildlife. Both the government and tour operators encourage tourists to respect nature by

adopting sustainable travel practices, such as minimizing waste, avoiding harm to plants or animals, and participating in conservation projects. 

Jacobsen: How do advancements in AR and VR affect film tourism? 

Chelhot: Advancements in Augmented Reality (AR) and Virtual Reality (VR) have significantly impacted film tourism. For example, Google Earth provides an incredible tool that allows users to virtually explore various filming locations. Additionally, tourism departments in states like New York, Nevada, and California have incorporated virtual reality tours on their websites, enhancing the travel experience for potential visitors. 

As for AR, many filming locations have added that element. Some have virtual character interactions on-site, enhanced experiences through apps, and so on. For example, going back to “Games of Thrones.” At their filming locations in Northern Ireland, there are several AR elements. Through AR apps, tourists can use their smartphones or AR glasses to see how scenes were shot, adding visual effects that match the show.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Henri.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Business Resilience and Smart Growth in Trump 2.0

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/13

Steve Nixon is a world-touring jazz and blues pianist and the founder of FreeJazzLessons.com. A Berklee College of Music graduate, he has performed with legends like B.B. King, Buddy Guy, and Shemekia Copeland. Nixon is also an accomplished session musician and educator, sharing his expertise worldwide. Nixon discusses the impact of rising costs under the second Trump administration, emphasizing cost-saving measures like automation and careful expense tracking. He advises small businesses to prepare for tax changes, diversify income sources, and build customer loyalty. Nixon highlights networking, mental resilience, and strategic decision-making as keys to long-term business stability.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are the effects of the second Trump administration on rising costs so far?

Steve Nixon: One of the things you worry about the most is the rapid rise in costs. Everything from rent, wages, and materials appears to be rising. In business, you double-check all things so you don’t squander your capital. Saving is possible by being observant about small things, such as small service contracts or even the computer packages you pay for and fail to use.

I have automated much. Automating some bookings and customer support has saved me dozens of hours. I don’t waste time figuring things out anymore, and this has provided me with spare time to expand the business. Work smarter, not harder.

Jacobsen: How are you adapting to tax changes upcoming?

Nixon: Small businesses need to prepare for the tax changes looming ahead. My advice is prepare beforehand, not when tax season is here and you hear about it. One has to work with the right accounting firm that is informed about the tax changes. My accounting firm and I sit together quarterly to ensure that I am doing the right things.

While it may seem obvious, keeping track of every expense is huge. A lot of business owners miss out on deductions they could be taking advantage of. Staying organized can go a long way in making sure you’re not paying more than you need to.

Long-Term Stability: One thing I learned from all this is you can’t sit around when things aren’t good and only worry about making it through the day. You need to prepare for the future. Having multiple sources for making money has helped me a great deal. I don’t rely only on one source; rather, I have multiple sources for making money, such as conducting classes, consultancy, and doing some sort of performance. In this manner, when one is not good, the others can sustain the business.

Creating a solid brand and holding onto loyal customers is essential when the future is not clear. Customers prefer to stick around the people they know and can trust. My emphasis is building relationships, keeping them informed, and demonstrating you care about them beyond the sale. If you make your customers feel like you care about them and their business, you can count on them when you need them.

Jacobsen: How do you create support networks?

Nixon: The business arena can also be isolating, but support can make all the difference. One method for coping is by sitting and conferring with fellow small business proprietors and comparing notes. If you know that others experience similar things, you can handle them easier. Networking groups online or offline assist you in establishing relationships that can translate into business connections, acquiring new clients, and acquiring the support you require for your mental attitude.

Customers can assist you also. Be truthful and transparent about the issues your business is encountering, and you can gain their trust. Inform them you will do your best to maintain things operating smoothly and you will bring them back.

Jacobsen: What about the need for resilience and being mentally tough in conditions shaky for business?

Nixon: During hard times, you need to pay close attention to your mental state. My idea is that when you don’t like the way you feel mentally, you can’t make good business decisions. If you’re always “trying to survive,” you can easily get exhausted, and you need some space for yourself. For me, some space for yourself to walk around, work out, or something like this to break from work for a few minutes, helps you clear your head. When things turn tough, you need to remain cool and flexible. If you maintain your composure and remain focused, you can make sound judgments for the business to expand, rather than being agitated amidst the turmoil. I hope this is useful for you and provides you with good starting points for your work. If you require anything else or need clarification about something, please let me know.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Steve.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Adam Elmasri on Antisemitism and Uncomfortable Hermeneutics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/13

Adam Elmasri is an Australian Egyptian free thinker, human rights activist, author, and content creator. He is widely recognized as a strong religious critic whose viewpoints are based on academic studies and as a supporter of the LGBTQ+ and women’s rights in the Middle East. As an author, Adam Elmasri has published two books and numberous articles on various topics, including religion, politics, and human rights. His work has been praised for its insightful and thought-provoking analysis, and he is considered one of the leading voices in his field. In addition to his YouTube channels and writing, Adam Elmasri is also a popular speaker and commentator. He has appeared on numerous media outlets to share his expertise and insights, and he is often invited to speak at conferences, universities and community based events around Australia. He examines antisemitic narratives woven into Christian and Islamic texts, which continue to shape hostile attitudes toward Jews today. They note how scriptures like Matthew 27:25 and Surah 5:82 historically demonize Jews and incite hatred. Elmasri emphasizes that apocalyptic, end-times beliefs in the Middle East further reinforce these biases, conflating Jewish identity with political actions of Israel. He calls for a clear separation between legitimate critique of state policies and antisemitism, urging religious leaders to reinterpret sacred texts as historical artifacts rather than immutable moral guides, to dismantle ingrained prejudice and promote human dignity worldwide.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Do you see a pattern of antisemitic narratives woven into their sacred texts or commentaries, and how do these influence contemporary cultural attitudes toward Jewish people?

Adam Elmasri: Absolutely—antisemitic narratives are deeply embedded in both Christian and Islamic sacred texts, with Islamic texts being particularly severe in their portrayal of Jewish people.

In Christian scripture, the Gospels depict Jews as responsible for inciting the crucifixion of Jesus, with verses like Matthew 27:25—”His blood is on us and our children”—framing Jewish people as collectively culpable. This passage, among others, has historically fuelled antisemitic sentiments and persecution.

Islamic texts go even further. Both the Quran and Hadith contain explicit hostility toward Jews. For instance, Surah 5:82states:
“You will surely find that the most hostile people toward the believers are the Jews and those who associate partners with Allah.”

While these texts may not always command direct action against Jewish people in a contemporary sense, they undeniably shape negative perceptions. They portray Jews as enemies of God, the betrayers of Christ, and inherently corrupt, often implying that they are somehow “deserving” of misfortune.

It is important to clarify that I am not claiming all Christians or Muslims hate Jewish people. Many believers interpret their faith differently and do not harbor these views. However, the issue is that these texts explicitly paint a deeply negative and hostile image of Jews, and because they are regarded as sacred and divine, they serve as a foundational perspective on Jewish people within these religious traditions. Whether consciously or unconsciously, these portrayals continue to influence attitudes and perceptions, making it difficult to separate theological beliefs from ingrained prejudice.

Jacobsen: What sub-cultures of Middle Eastern culture and history might perpetuate antisemitic sentiments?

Elmasri: One particularly interesting sub-culture that perpetuates antisemitic sentiments in the Middle East is the apocalyptic, end-of-days worldview. Across nearly all Abrahamic faiths — including many Jewish, Christian, and Islamic sects — there is a deep-rooted belief that the end of days is inevitable and that Jewish people, Jerusalem, the Jewish temple, and Al-Aqsa Mosque will be central to the catastrophic events leading up to it.

In Islamic eschatology, for example, one of the most notorious hadiths states:

“The Final Hour will not come until the Muslims fight the Jews, and the Muslims will kill them until the Jew hides behind a rock or a tree, and the rock or tree will speak up: ‘O Muslim, O servant of Allah, there is a Jew behind me, so come and kill him.’”

The implications of such narrative are deeply troubling. The logic that follows is this: whenever major global crises or disturbing events occur, many people in the region interpret them as signs that the end times are near. This belief, in turn, subconsciously reinforces antisemitic attitudes. It becomes a self-fulfilling prophecy — one that fuels hostility toward Jewish people, whether through direct action or passive endorsement.

Some individuals, believing they are fulfilling divine prophecy, may feel justified in harming Jewish people, while others, convinced that Jewish suffering is predestined, may choose to stand by and do nothing. In either case, whether through violence or silent complicity, this apocalyptic narrative perpetuates antisemitism both in thought and in action. It’s a profoundly disturbing worldview that continues to shape cultural attitudes in the region and globally.

Jacobsen: As a religious critic, what interpretations or teachings in Islamic commentaries have been used as justification for antisemitism?

Elmasri: On the surface, contemporary Islamic commentary and apologetic responses often condemn violence against Jewish people, citing hadiths such as:

“Whoever kills a person with whom he has a covenant will never enter Paradise.”

This is frequently used to promote a more tolerant stance, suggesting that as long as Jewish people are not seen as aggressors — meaning they exist under a state of peace or a covenant (a ceasefire or non-hostile agreement) — they should be spared and “should not be killed.”

However, the problem with this apologetic framing is that it collapses entirely with the establishment of the State of Israel. From an Islamic perspective, particularly within traditional jurisprudence and commentary, Israel’s creation was not just a political event — it was an act of aggression against what is considered sacred Islamic and Palestinian land. By this interpretation, Jewish people are no longer seen as being under a covenant but rather as violators of Islamic territorial sanctity.

As a result, the apocalyptic narrative resurfaces, fuelling deep-seated hostility. Since many Islamic eschatological texts already frame Jews as enemies of God and the believers, Israel’s existence becomes the ultimate trigger for viewing Jewish people around the world as “out of covenant” — no longer protected under Islamic law but rather positioned as adversaries. This creates a ticking time bomb of tension and hostility, where antisemitic justifications are not only tolerated but, in some circles, actively reinforced as part of a divinely sanctioned struggle.

Jacobsen: What is important to distinguish between critiques of political actions of the Israeli state versus challenging antisemitic narratives around Jewish identity? Sometimes, these can be conflated conceptual spaces.

Elmasri: The fundamental issue is that many belief systems do not make this distinction—they fail to separate Jewish identity from the political actions of the Israeli state.

Historically, Jewish people have been referred to as “Banu Isra’il” (the Children of Israel), a term that links Jewish identity with the concept of Israel itself. This linguistic and historical association leads many — especially in the Middle East—to view all Jewish people, regardless of nationality or personal beliefs, as inherently tied to the Israeli state. The result is a widespread inability to distinguish between an individual of Jewish descent (as an ethnic or cultural identity) and Israel as a political entity.

This confusion is precisely why, whenever the Israeli government engages in military actions, Jewish individuals around the world often become targets of hostility. In the eyes of many, being Jewish and being Israeli are seen as one and the same, which fuels global antisemitic attacks in response to conflicts in the Middle East.

So, to answer the question precisely: the most critical distinction we must make is that political actions of a government should never be equated with the identity of an entire people. We need more advocates, thinkers, and voices across the world to actively challenge this conflation. A person can rightfully critique or condemn the actions of the Israeli government while still recognizing that their Jewish neighbour in Canada, the U.S., or Europe is simply an individual with Jewish heritage—not a representative of Israel’s policies.

I find it baffling that this is so difficult for some to grasp. If conflict or war erupts between African nations, does that justify hostility toward Black people worldwide? Do we not recognize that Black Americans, for example, have nothing to do with what happens in Africa beyond shared ancestry? This is exactly the distinction that must be made — politics are politics, with all their complexities, but people are people, individuals who come from diverse races and cultures and should never be held accountable for the actions of governments the represent them or not.

Jacobsen: Are there ex-believer communities who carry over antisemitic views rooted in their former religious lives?

Elmasri: Yes, absolutely—ex-believers can and often do carry over antisemitic views from their former religious lives, even after they leave their faith.

The reason for this is that religion is not just a set of doctrines that a person can simply abandon—it is a deeply ingrained cultural framework that shapes identity, worldview, and subconscious biases. Even when someone intellectually rejects their former religious beliefs, many of the implicit attitudes and prejudices they were raised with can persist, sometimes unnoticed.

A good example of this is gender inequality. Despite radical shifts in global beliefs about gender equality, we are still fighting deeply embedded prejudices against women today. That’s because centuries of religious and cultural conditioning do not disappear overnight—they linger in our social structures, legal systems, and personal biases. The same applies to antisemitic views among ex-religious individuals.

Many former believers may have left their faith but still retain anti-Israel sentiments due to their upbringing. In many environments, anti-Zionism and antisemitism are conflated (which is a complex topic on its own), making it difficult for people to recognize that their stance may still be rooted in biases carried over from religious teachings.

For instance, a former believer might reject religious justifications for antisemitism but still hold onto the political, social, or conspiratorial narratives they grew up with. They may continue to see Israel not as a political entity, but as an enemy of “their own people” or “their race.” A false but deeply ingrained notion like “I’m no longer Muslim, but the Jewish people are still killing my brothers and sisters” may still influence their thinking.

Ultimately, deconstructing faith does not automatically mean deconstructing everything faith taught them. Cultural prejudices, especially those reinforced over generations, can persist long after belief is gone. Unlearning them requires conscious effort, self-awareness, and a willingness to question not just religious teachings but the broader narratives inherited from them.

Jacobsen: What is the role of broader religious educations in dismantling harmful cultural misconceptions about Jewish people? How can religious leaders address antisemitic references in teachings and texts?

Elmasri: Allow me to combine these two questions. I fully acknowledge my own biases as an ex-religious person—I don’t have much faith left in religious leadership (pun intended). This is not to say that I lack faith in religious individuals themselves or in those who genuinely try to create change from within. My skepticism, however, comes from the limitations imposed by the religious texts themselves.

Take, for example, the struggle for LGBTQ+ rights. It has taken centuries to even begin shifting perspectives on homosexuality, and despite the efforts of progressive religious leaders, we are still far from full acceptance. Why?Because religious texts, when viewed through a sacred lens, do not change. The same applies to antisemitism. No matter how well-intentioned a religious leader may be, they are bound by the authority of texts that contain harmful narratives.

In my view, dismantling antisemitic misconceptions requires a shift away from strict religious frameworks and toward a more spiritual and secular approach. At this point in history, kindness, acceptance, and equality cannot be contingent upon what is “permissible” in sacred texts. These values must instead be rooted in spiritual and psychological awareness—an understanding of human dignity that transcends ancient dogmas.

One way forward is to recontextualize religious texts as historical artifacts rather than moral absolutes. We can acknowledge that these scriptures served a role in shaping civilizations, but that role must end where it ceases to serve humanity today. Antisemitic passages can be rendered historical, referring to conflicts of the past rather than dictating attitudes in the present. The apocalyptic narratives that continue to fuel hostility can be reframed—not as an impending future, but as a metaphor for an era we have already left behind.

These are just ideas, and I remain uncertain how effective they can be within a religious mindset that still holds these texts as sacred. But what I do know is this: the more we cling to religious texts and depend on religious leadership for moral progress, the more we risk being trapped in historical narratives that no longer serve humanity today.

Jacobsen: Where are the opportunities to challenge antisemitism in volatile geopolitical contexts shaped by long-standing historical conflicts, e.g., the Israel–occupied Palestinian territories?

Elmasri: One of the biggest challenges in addressing antisemitism in the Middle East is that it is not perceived as “hatred” in the traditional sense — rather, it is embedded in theology, education, and political discourse as an accepted “fact” about the world. It is a worldview rather than hatred, if that makes sense! This makes it even harder to confront because those who hold antisemitic beliefs do not necessarily see themselves as bigoted. Instead, their hostility toward Jewish people is often framed as justified by one or more of these factors, religious texts, historical conflicts, and/or ongoing geopolitical struggles.

The opportunities to challenge antisemitism, as I have outlined throughout my responses above, lie in several key areas. Religious texts that demonize Jewish people must be openly discussed and reinterpreted, shifting from being seen as eternal truths to historical contexts that no longer apply today. The idea that Jewish people are divinely cursed or that conflict with them is inevitable must be dismantled at the theological level, because as long as these beliefs remain untouched, they will continue to shape perceptions and fuel hostility. Furthermore, one of the most critical steps in addressing antisemitism is to consistently separate criticism of Israel’s political actions from hostility toward Jewish people. In many parts of the Middle East, the equation of Jewish = Israel = enemy is so deeply ingrained that people fail to distinguish between Jewish individuals and the actions of the Israeli government. This conflation must be broken if we are to make any meaningful progress.

I have also encountered many individuals who, even after leaving religion, continue to carry remnants of antisemitic thinking without realizing it. This is why deeper deconstruction is necessary. Not just of religious beliefs, but also of the political and psychological biases that have been inherited from them. Acknowledging these deeply rooted attitudes is crucial, even beyond ex-religious perspectives, because many of these biases exist at a subconscious level. One issue I find especially important to recognize is the mistaken idea that acknowledging the suffering of one group somehow diminishes the suffering of another. But challenging antisemitism does not mean ignoring the suffering of Palestinians or downplaying the realities of occupation and displacement. The key is to promote a worldview in which the humanity of one group does not (and should not) come at the expense of another.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Adam.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Star Kashman on Antisemitism and Bad Information

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/12

Star Kashman is a legal expert specializing in cybersecurity, privacy, and social media law. She authored the first scholarly article on Search Engine Hacking (Google Dorking) in the Washington Journal of Law, Technology & Arts and expanded on this research in Law360. She has led discussions on cybersecurity law, including an event at Brooklyn Law School’s Incubator & Policy Clinic (BLIP) with top legal and security experts. Recognized by the Office of the Director of National Intelligence (ODNI) for her research, she now works at C.A. Goldberg PLLC, tackling cyberstalking, doxing, deep fakes, and tech-based personal injury litigation. Social media platforms amplify antisemitism by prioritizing high-engagement content, often driven by outrage and emotional responses. Algorithms inadvertently promote harmful narratives, as seen with Osama bin Laden’s letter circulating on TikTok. Additionally, paid promotion allows the spread of antisemitic content. Legal challenges exist both domestically and internationally, with the U.S. prioritizing free speech under Section 230. Misinformation distorts history and current events, fueling conspiracy theories that reframe antisemitic rhetoric in “woke” narratives. AI tools can help detect antisemitism but require human oversight. Global jurisdictions complicate accountability, and while networks combat online hate, platforms often prioritize profits over regulation.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do social media amplify antisemitic content?

Star Kashman: Social media amplifies antisemitic content by blindly rewarding posts that receive high engagement. This can often prioritize content that brings a strong emotional response from a user, like outrage, shock, or disbelief. Algorithms push out high engagement content because it leads to more comments, debates, shares, and longer watch times from the platforms users. For example, when Osama bin Laden’s letter circulated on TikTok, it gained traction not just among those who agreed with it but also probably due to those who were outraged, which inadvertently boosted its visibility. This amplification is algorithm-driven and often leads to harmful narratives spreading faster and further. Also, social media platforms tend to blindly accept funding from nearly anyone, allowing users to pay to push out their content and accounts or pay for advertisements. For example, Meta admitted that Russia had paid around 150,000 to push out misinformation during the US 2016 election. It will likely come out in a few years that anti-israel and anti-jewish organizations and terrorist groups funded content, content creators, and accounts. Additionally, funding can be put behind creating artificial engagement to push out antisemitic content, and this is something that the public has already recognized. There are bots on numerous social media applications that will automatically either leave boiler-plate hate comments or arguments on jewish creators content, or template supportive comments on hateful antisemitic posts to push them out.

Jacobsen: Does this pose legal challenges domestically more or internationally more?

Kashman: Legal challenges exist in both domestic and international contexts, but they are more complex internationally due to vastly different regulations and goals. In the U.S., Section 230 protects platforms from liability for third-party content. We have laws in place to protect tech companies because US courts have in the past prioritized innovation, even sometimes over safety. Meanwhile, other areas like China or Iran have stricter regulations on platform accountability. Globally, balancing free speech with combating harmful content is challenging, especially when each country has different standards for what constitutes hate speech or propaganda. 

Jacobsen: How do mis- and dis-information play roles in the spread of both antisemitism and conspiracy theories?

Kashman: Mis- and disinformation play a big role in spreading antisemitism by rewriting history and distorting current events to dehumanize jews, and brainwash the public into thinking they are justified or even noble for having antisemitic or hateful thoughts against jews and israel. For instance, after the October 7 attacks in Israel, fabricated stories and AI-generated images were used to discredit verified accounts of violence against Israelis. For example, content was generated of a dog on a bed replacing visual evidence of burned israeli babies and children, which was disseminated to say that Israel lies and pushes out fake information. This was to stop a narrative that would cause people to empathize with israelis or jewish people, and to create distrust against jews and israelis so when something unfavorable was seen in the media it would not be trusted. So much misinformation and disinformation was pushed out regarding evidence of crimes to the point where people can almost only believe what they want to and not distinguish the truth from fiction. Similarly, misinformation about the Jewish community’s origins, and historical presence in the Middle East is frequently shared to justify harmful actions and make it appear as if they are unrelated settlers randomly choosing Israel to invade and “steal” from palestinians, in order to justify the actions taken on October 7. Such disinformation dehumanizes Jewish individuals and feeds into broader conspiracy theories that further spread hate.

Jacobsen: How do conspiracy theories, e.g., ‘globalists,’ ‘international banksters,’ etc., merge with antisemitic language for virulent narratives online?

Kashman: Conspiracy theories have evolved into a more “woke” narrative to blend into current cultural discussions while maintaining their antisemitic roots. Instead of using overtly racist language, modern narratives frame Jews as oppressors, calling them “globalists” or falsely accusing them of controlling media and finance. Terms like “Zio-Nazi” and references to “apartheid” and “genocide” are new iterations of old hate, cloaked in political activism to make them more palatable and less obvious to casual observers, more importantly using such sensitive language to jewish people against them. Jews are now often compared directly to their oppressor who actually tried to commit genocide against them, in order to dehumanize jews and make them appear as an oppressor.

Jacobsen: How can AI tools detect and mitigate antisemitism?

Kashman: AI tools can play a significant role in mitigating antisemitism by flagging patterns of harmful language for human review. Certain keywords and phrases—such as references to “genocide,” “apartheid,” or “Zio-Nazi”—should trigger content moderation systems. However, human oversight is crucial to avoid false positives. For example, while a Palestinian flag itself isn’t harmful, spamming it on unrelated Jewish creators’ content as a form of intimidation could be detected by AI systems and flagged for review, which would need human oversight so as to not suppress the comments in a place where it would not be deemed as hateful or antisemitic.

Jacobsen: What barriers do global jurisdictions present online platform accountability?

Kashman: Global jurisdictions present major challenges due to differing legal standards for speech and platform regulation. The U.S. prioritizes free speech and innovation, often under-regulating platforms, while countries like China and Iran impose heavy restrictions. This disparity makes it difficult to enforce consistent accountability, as platforms must comply with local laws that may conflict with each other.

Jacobsen: Are there networks of legal experts, tech companies, and policymakers, to combat antisemitism? If so, who? (If not, why not?)

Kashman: While networks to combat antisemitism exist in traditional advocacy spaces, similar networks for the digital space are still underdeveloped. Tech companies often avoid forming such coalitions or hosting such discussions to minimize liability and costs, preferring to focus on maximizing engagement and profitability. Some organizations have taken steps to engage with tech companies, but a broader, more organized coalition is needed to address online antisemitism. Especially because reducing hateful content on platforms often directly contrasts with platforms intent to profit from high engagement and rage-bait, there needs to be a more serious matter to encourage platforms to go against profitability for good moral reason. 

Jacobsen: What legal precedents have been set to address antisemitic harm?

Kashman: Legal precedent in the U.S. for addressing online antisemitism is limited due to Section 230 protections and free speech law which have in the past been broadly over-applied even in irrelevant cases. The other issue in the new wave of antisemitism, is often it looks very different than the already pre-established old, more often recognized form of antisemitism that is likely backed by case law and statutory language as well. For example, now it may be antisemitic to call a jew a “zio-nazi”, compare them to hitler, say that israel is committing genocide by ignoring the harms that occurred on October 7, etc. These are very different than what had been said in the past, which was already deemed antisemitic in courts of law and statutes. This means that these new cases are going to struggle because we have broad free speech rights, and we would have to prove new speech as hate speech without past precedent or statutory language to rely on. As for the legal protections for tech companies as well, things may be looking more positive in recent years. Recent cases have begun to chip away at these broad protections like section 230 and free speech. The TikTok ban bill and emerging product liability cases involving social media suggest a shift toward holding platforms more accountable. Courts have also started recognizing that algorithmic promotion of harmful content may constitute the platform’s speech, potentially opening the door for new legal carveouts.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Star.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Canada Expands Sexual and Reproductive Health Fund With $90M

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/12

Health Canada is the federal department responsible for ensuring that Canadians have access to safe and effective health products, services, and regulations. Public Health Agency of Canada focuses on disease prevention, health promotion, and emergency preparedness at the national level. Health Canada’s Sexual and Reproductive Health Fund launched a $17.7 million Call for Proposals in May 2024, funding 23 projects from December 2024 to March 2027. Projects focus on training healthcare providers, supporting abortion access, and providing culturally relevant resources. Success is measured through performance indicators, including accessibility and effectiveness for underserved communities. The fund was expanded in 2024’s Fall Economic Statement, securing $90 million over six years. Initiatives address barriers for Indigenous, racialized, and 2SLGBTQI+ populations, ensuring culturally safe care. Future planning includes ongoing evaluation and stakeholder collaboration to improve access and health outcomes nationwide.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What specific timelines/ milestones are there for rolling out the funded projects?

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada: Health Canada’s Sexual and Reproductive Health Fund launched a third targeted Call for Proposals in May 2024 that committed up to $17.7 million to community-based organizations delivering innovative activities to underserved communities across Canada. Approved projects began in December 2024 and will end by March 31, 2027. 

Jacobsen: What measurable indicators/ criteria will assess the success of these initiatives in the improvement of access to sexual and reproductive health services?

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada:All projects funded through the Sexual and Reproductive Health Fund must demonstrate clear plans to publicly disseminate evidence-based information and resources. Funding recipients are required to measure and report on outcomes through performance indicators (e.g., the number of targeted health care providers who access information resources; percentage of individuals served who report application of knowledge to manage their sexual and reproductive health; percentage of surveyed participants from the target population who agree that the information and activities were culturally appropriate and in the official language of their choice).

Jacobsen: What criteria were targeted / what process was used in the selection of the 23 projects funded by the Sexual and Reproductive Health Fund? How do these initiatives integrate into existing sexual and reproductive health programs?

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada:In 2024, Health Canada launched a targeted Call for Proposals focused on specific priority areas: training resources and materials for health care providers; travel and logistical support for people seeking abortion services; and, tools, awareness activities and resources for populations who face the greatest barriers to access.

A Health Canada review committee evaluated all submitted proposals against merit-based criteria, including the specificity and feasibility of proposed project activities and outputs, national or regional mandate or reach, organizational capacity as well as the level of stakeholder collaboration.

Jacobsen: What strategies ensure the care is culturally safe and relevant for Indigenous, racialized, and 2SLGBTQI+ populations? How will the training for healthcare providers address unique barriers faced by these underserved groups?

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada:Issues such as stigma and discrimination, geographic isolation in rural communities, and lack of access to primary care can impede access to sexual and reproductive health services and supports. Addressing these barriers and challenges is complex, yet can also provide new opportunities to improve culturally safe and relevant care and, ultimately, health outcomes for underserved populations.

For example, the Sex Information and Education Council of Canada carried out the Addressing Sexual Health Education Misinformation Among Parents/Caregivers project, which will equip health educators with information and resources to address sexual and reproductive health misinformation among parents and/or caregivers of school-aged youth. The project will consult parents and/or caregivers from under-served populations, with the aim of integrating their perspectives into the resources in a culturally appropriate manner.

The Society of Obstetricians and Gynaecologists of Canada carried out the Beyond the Hot Flash project, which will develop and distribute evidence-based tools and resources for those going through menopause, as well as for health providers, with the aim of improving access to health services related to menopause. The project will also produce updated clinical practice guidelines for menopause care with significant attention on under-served women and non-binary people with the aim of supporting Canadians to manage their menopause more effectively and improve their quality of life.

Jacobsen: What was involved in the formation of the advisory council guiding this initiative and what was the role of the advisory council helping address sexual health misinformation?

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada: Please contact the  Sex Information and Education Council of Canada on their advisory council.

Jacobsen: Are there any plans in discussions beyond the three-year funding period?

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada:The Government of Canada established Health Canada’s Sexual and Reproductive Health fund in 2021, with $81 million invested through the 2021 and 2023 federal budgets ($45 million and $36 million respectively). Additionally, in the 2024 Fall Economic Statement, the government committed a further $90 million over six years, starting in 2024-25, with $20 million ongoing, to expand and make permanent the Sexual and Reproductive Health Fund, along with funding for Statistics Canada to undertake related surveys ($7.5 million over four years, starting in 2025-26).

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

CRTC’s $730M Broadband Fund Empowers 270 Canadian Communities

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/10

The Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission explained its Broadband Fund, launched in 2019, has committed over $730 million across more than 270 communities, connecting essential institutions and households. Recently, $14 million was allocated to CityWest Cable for 250 kilometres of fibre infrastructure in British Columbia and Yukon. Community letters emphasized benefits including improved local business opportunities and healthcare access. The CRTC is refining the Broadband Fund to support Indigenous networks and launching an Indigenous Stream, with further funding and policy updates expected soon as announced recently.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Which regions are targeted by CRTC’s new fibre Internet initiative? 

Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission: The CRTC is an independent quasi-judicial tribunal that regulates the Canadian communications sector in the public interest. The CRTC holds public consultations on telecommunications and broadcasting matters and makes decisions based on the public record.     Canadians need access to reliable, affordable, and high-quality Internet and cellphone services for every part of their daily lives.  

Jacobsen: How is the CRTC implementing through its Broadband Fund to facilitate high-speed fibre Internet?

Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission: In 2019, the CRTC launched the Broadband Fundto help connect rural, remote, and Indigenous communities across Canada. Through its Broadband Fund, the CRTC contributes to a broad effort by federal, provincial, and territorial governments to address the gap in connectivity in underserved areas across Canada, including rural, remote, and Indigenous communities. The CRTC has held three calls for applications to its Broadband Fund, which resulted in over 700 applications. To date, the Broadband Fund has committed over $730 million to improve high-speed Internet and cellphone services for over 270 communities, connecting essential institutions such as schools, band offices and health care and community centres. This represents over 47,000 households and over 630 kilometres of major transportation roads. Further details are available on our website.   

Jacobsen: What is the total funding allocated for this project?

Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission: Most recently, on January 30, 2025, the CRTC committed over $14 million to CityWest Cable and Telephone Corp. to build approximately 250 kilometres of new transport fibre infrastructure to bring high-capacity transport services to the communities of Jade City and Good Hope Lake (Dease River) in British Columbia, as well as Upper Liard in the Yukon. The project will improve access to reliable and high-quality Internet service.

Jacobsen: What is the scope of the infrastructure development? Since 2019, how has the CRTC’s Broadband Fund impacted rural, remote, and Indigenous communities?

Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission: The project received support from the impacted communities. Letters of support emphasized the positive impact the project will have on daily life in these regions, including new opportunities for local businesses and improved access to health care. 

A summary of these letters was included in Telecom Decision 2025-30 | CRTC

  1. CityWest provided evidence of direct notification to all affected communities and received letters of support, including from the 3Nations Society, a partnership between Tahltan, Kaska, and Taku River Tlingit First Nations (the Kaska Nation is made up of five Kaska First Nations, which cover two of the affected communities), and the Premier of the Yukon. The 3Nations Society stated that collaborative efforts with CityWest have fostered a sense of shared purpose, and it anticipates that this collective support will significantly contribute to the success of the project. 

The Premier of the Yukon noted that dependable high-speed Internet can open new economic and social possibilities for Yukoners and support healthy, vibrant, and sustainable communities. 

For further information on their views, we encourage you to reach out to them directly.  

The CRTC continues to assess Broadband Fund applications and will make more funding announcements in the coming months.

Jacobsen: What benefits have the impacted communities highlighted in letters of support for this project?

Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission: The CRTC is also continuing to make improvements to the Broadband Fund. In December 2024, the CRTC announced its first decision to improve the fund and to help advance reconciliation with First Nations, Inuit, and Métis peoples. During its consultation, the CRTC received comments from 75 groups and individuals, including consumer groups, Indigenous organizations and governments, and Internet and cellphone service providers. As part of this decision, the CRTC is working to better support Indigenous applicants and communities by providing funding to build skills and support Indigenous-owned networks. The CRTC is also requiring applicants to engage meaningfully with Indigenous communities and provide proof of consent from any Indigenous community where they plan to build infrastructure. The CRTC will issue more decisions as part of its review and will launch the Indigenous Stream of the Broadband Fund later this year. 

Jacobsen: What are forthcoming initiatives or policy revisions including Indigenous Stream of the Broadband Fund?

Canadian Radio-television and Telecommunications Commission: As part of its broader efforts to improve Internet and cellphone services across Canada, the CRTC is taking action to help ensure residents of the Far North have access to reliable and affordable Internet services. The CRTC also created an Indigenous Relations Team to support Indigenous participation in its proceedings and ensure the distinct nature and lived experiences of Indigenous peoples are considered across the CRTC’s work. 

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Climate Change Adaptation for Ontario’s Great Lakes

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/10

Natural Resources Canada develops policies and programs that enhance the contribution of the natural resources sector to the economy, improve the quality of life for all Canadians and conducts innovative science in facilities across Canada to generate ideas and transfer technologies. The Climate-Resilient Coastal Communities (CRCC) Program is funding two Ontario Great Lakes projects with $4.1 million from Natural Resources Canada (NRCan). Conservation Ontario leads the $3.1 million Adaptation to Coastal Hazards project, developing resilience plans for Lake Superior, Lake Huron, and Lake Ontario. Zuzek Inc. leads the $1 million Pelee Coastal Climate Resilience Plan for Point Pelee Peninsula. The CRCC supports Indigenous-led projects, including initiatives in Passamaquoddy Bay and the Fraser River Estuary. The Flood Hazard Identification and Mapping Program (FHIMP) provides updated flood maps to enhance public safety, planning, and response. Canada prioritizes climate adaptation for long-term resilience.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is the funding for Ontario’s Great Lakes, under the Climate-Resilient Coastal Communities (CRCC) Program?

Natural Resources Canada (Government of Canada): The Climate-Resilient Coastal Communities (CRCC) Program is co-funding two CRCC pilot projects in the Ontario Great Lakes, which represents $4.1 million in NRCan funding.

Jacobsen: Who will lead these new projects?

Natural Resources Canada: backgrounder was included in the news release (Canada Invests in Climate Change Adaptation Around Ontario’s Great Lakes) with the project details below:

Project Name: Adaptation to Coastal Hazards across the Great Lakes Region 
Recipient (project lead): Conservation Ontario 

Reach: Lake Superior, Lake Huron, Lake Ontario, Ontario 

Location: Northern Lake Superiors shoreline within the Lakehead Region Conservation Authority jurisdiction; Southern Lake Huron shoreline within Maitland Conservation Authority jurisdiction; Western Lake Ontario shoreline from Niagara River to Joshua’s Creek 

Funding from the CRCC Program: $3,100,000 

Project Summary: This project will develop regional coastal resilience plans by working collaboratively with a broad range of stakeholders, including governments, Indigenous communities, businesses and experts, for three pilot project regions within the Great Lakes (Lake Huron, Lake Ontario, and Lake Superior). Each coastal resilience plan will identify adaptation actions, building on baseline science and risk assessments, to address climate change risks in these communities.

Project Name: Pelee Coastal Climate Resilience and Adaptation Action Plan 

Recipient (project lead): Zuzek Inc.

Reach: Pelee Peninsula Region, Lake Eerie, Ontario 

Location: Point Pelee East and Point Pelee West littoral cells converging at Point Pelee National Park 

Funding from the CRCC Program: $1,000,000

Project Summary: This project will develop a coastal climate resilience and adaptation action plan in Point Pelee Peninsula in southwestern Ontario, a coastal community that is at risk from flooding, erosion and loss of coastal wetlands. Through the leadership of a multi-stakeholder Coastal Resilience Committee, this project will conduct a vulnerability assessment to future climate change impacts and co-develop integrated regional resilience plans and adaptation actions that are equitable, sustainable and transformative.

For more information, please contact Zuzek Inc. and Conservation Ontario.

Jacobsen: What are the primary objectives in supporting coastal communities?

Natural Resources Canada: The Government of Canada remains committed to advancing climate change adaptation efforts to reduce risks and protect Canadians, communities, businesses, and the economy more broadly, as well as prepare for current and future impacts of climate change. Canada’s coastal communities are on the front lines of climate change, facing rising sea levels, extreme weather, and erosion that threaten homes, businesses, and ecosystems.

That’s why the Government of Canada has invested over $6.6 billion in climate adaptation since 2015, including $2.1 billion in new commitments since Fall 2022.

Through the CRCC Program, in support of the National Adaptation Strategy (NAS), Canada is funding 21 regional-scale pilot projects across the Atlantic, Pacific, and Arctic coasts, as well as the Great Lakes-St. Lawrence region. These projects bring together local partners to enhance climate resilience, reduce risks, and develop innovative solutions tailored to each region’s unique challenges. 

By integrating research, collaboration, and real-world action, these projects will not only strengthen coastal communities today but also provide insights to scale up adaptation efforts to other coastal communities and nationwide ensuring a safer, more resilient future for all Canadians.

Jacobsen: Why should Canada invest in climate change adaptation now? (What are future projections?)

Natural Resources Canada: Every year, Canadians are facing more frequent and extreme climate events such as floods, wildfires and heat waves, as well as gradual climate change impacts like thawing permafrost and rising sea levels. These challenges affect the quality of life, health, environment and economy of communities across the country.

Adapting to a changing climate is important to build resilient communities and protect Canadians’ homes and livelihoods. Investing in climate change adaptation also means that Canada can better plan for, withstand and recover from climate impacts and reduce disaster recovery costs.

Action and investments to build resilience helps avoid future costs and ensures long-term viability of assets and investments. The Government of Canada is supporting Canadians as they incorporate climate change considerations in their decision-making processes in response to Canada’s rapidly changing climate. Canadians can access, visualize, and analyze climate data, and access information and tools to support adaptation planning and decision-making at https://climatedata.ca/. This platform is a free open access climate data portal produced collaboratively by the country’s leading climate organizations and supported, in part, by the Government of Canada.

Of note, Canadians can also access information on climate change adaptation actions through the Map of Adaptation Actions, a collaboration between Environment and Climate Change Canada (ECCC) and NRCan. The Map is an interactive, searchable tool housing a collection of climate change adaptation examples, including from coastal communities, that provide useful information to decision-makers and those taking action on climate change adaptation.

Jacobsen: What are the justifications by the Government of Canada for cost efficacy of climate change adaptation measures?

Natural Resources Canada: Adaptation is about reducing risks related to climate change for Canadians, communities, businesses, and the economy more broadly, and being better prepared for current and future changes in climate through planning and action.

Every $1 spent on climate adaptation measures saves up to $15 in terms of the long-term costs involved in mitigating climate change and extreme weather events (Canadian Climate Institute, Damage Control: Reducing the Costs of Climate Impacts in Canada).

The CRCC Program will achieve benefits by working at a regional scale, such as more efficient alignment of resources and adaptation actions, innovative solutions, co-benefits and reduced risks of maladaptation.

Jacobsen: How can Indigenous communities play integral collaborations in these projects and in research?

Natural Resources Canada: The CRCC Program supports a range of communities, including rural, remote, and Indigenous communities that are disproportionately impacted by climate change due to complex and often interconnected factors that limit their adaptive capacity, including higher social vulnerability and increased exposure.

Recognizing the need to reduce barriers to accessing federal funding for climate change adaptation initiatives, the CRCC Program included an Indigenous-led Project Stream ($2.5 million). Indigenous applicants were also eligible to apply for project funding through the Open Call for Proposals Stream. The CRCC Program is funding five Indigenous-led projects of which the details on two out of the five projects announced are available on the CRCC website.

Project Name: Indigenous-led Climate Change Adaptation in the Passamaquoddy Bay 

Recipient: Passamaquoddy Recognition Group Inc. 

Reach: Passamaquoddy Bay, New Brunswick 

Location: Passamaquoddy Bay, St. Stephen 
Funding from the CRCC Program: $800,000 

Project Summary: This project will coordinate adaptation actions between the Peskotomuhkati Nation at Skutik and partners in the Passamaquoddy Bay region to increase resilience to future climate change risks. This work will identify actions to protect archaeological sites of cultural, spiritual and historical importance from sea level rise and erosion and develop policies and regional land-use plans that incorporate Indigenous knowledge and future climate change risks to protect residential and municipal shorelines.

Project Name: Lifelines in the Fraser Estuary: Taking Care of Each Other for a Climate Resilient Future 

Recipient: Emergency Planning Secretariat 

Reach: Lower Fraser River Estuary, British Columbia (Pacific Region) 

Location: Lower Fraser River Estuary, Abbotsford, B.C. 
Funding from CRCC: $1,791,265 

Project Summary: This project will develop priority adaptation actions and address climate risks from sea level rise, flooding and erosion to local essential services across the Fraser River Estuary. This work will increase the capacity, knowledge and engagement of communities to take coordinated short- and long-term adaptation action and will be driven by collaboration with First Nations and local governments.

CRCC pilot projects include meaningful involvement of Indigenous communities, rights-holders, and organizations as appropriate to ensure that their interests and perspectives are reflected.

Indigenous communities and organizations are involved in CRCC pilot projects in various ways, depending on the unique context of each project. For example, among the CRCC projects, Indigenous communities and organizations are involved as project leads or partners, as members of steering committees or advisory tables, and as key audiences for engagement and collaboration.

The CRCC Program also encourages projects to integrate Indigenous knowledge where possible and appropriate, in collaboration with Indigenous partners, to ensure that project results are useful and relevant for Indigenous communities. The Program acknowledges that there may be protected knowledge within the CRCC proponents’ possession that they choose not to share publicly and supports Indigenous proponents to integrate Indigenous Knowledge in products developed for their own use.

Jacobsen: How extensive is the Flood Hazard Identification and Mapping Program (FHIMP)?

Natural Resources Canada: Canadians across the country are already facing the consequences of climate change, contributing to more frequent and severe weather events like floods. Flood events cause significant damage and result in an annual average loss of over 2 billion dollars in Canada.

Launched November 2021, the Flood Hazard Identification and Mapping Program (FHIMP) provides essential information through current and accessible flood hazard maps to enable individuals, governments, and Indigenous communities to understand flood risks better, make informed decisions about land use and infrastructure development, and effectively plan and prepare for floods. Under the National Adaptation Strategy, the FHIMP has been extended to advance flood mapping until 2028.

Natural Resources Canada (NRCan) leads the FHIMP, with support from Environment and Climate Change Canada and Public Safety Canada. In partnership with provinces, territories and other key stakeholders, the program aims to fill in flood hazard information gaps by modelling and supporting the creation of flood hazard maps for areas at higher risk of flooding across Canada.

There are currently over 200 flood mapping projects impacting over 800 communities across Canada. FHIMP also reduces flood-related information gaps. The Canada Flood Map Inventory showcases areas in Canada where NRCan has collected a copy of a flood hazard study and maps and provides information on how to access the maps and data elsewhere: Canada Flood Map Inventory — GEO.CA

Jacobsen: How do updated flood maps benefit local communities?

Natural Resources Canada: Engineered flood hazard maps produced under the FHIMP can help strengthen public safety by informing land use planning (locating development away risky areas), emergency response plans (e.g. showing evacuation routes), insurability, structural flood mitigation options (e.g. where to build dykes), among other activities, thereby helping governments decide how to allocate resources necessary to protect properties and lives.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Christo Roberts on Christianity’s Contribution to Slavery

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/09

Christo Roberts, a writer and secular humanist, discusses Christianity’s role in Slavery. Roberts argues that Christian institutions actively supported Slavery for centuries, only abandoning it due to secular pressures. He critiques religious narratives that falsely credit Christianity with abolition, emphasizing that secular Enlightenment thinkers played a more significant role. The conversation explores theological justifications for Slavery, the Catholic Church’s involvement, and the abolitionist movement. Roberts also discusses modern perceptions of Slavery, the South African context, and the Church’s reluctance to acknowledge its historical complicity fully.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Christo Roberts, a writer and secular humanist, to critically examine religious claims, particularly those related to history and morality. He has contributed to Free Inquiry and written the article Christianity’s Supposed Role in Ending Slavery, which challenges the notion that Christianity was a driving force in abolition.

He argues that Christian institutions supported Slavery for centuries and only abandoned it due to secular pressures. Roberts’ work focuses on the historical entanglement of religion and human rights issues, advocating for evidence-based perspectives. While details on his background are limited, his writing contributes to broader discussions on religion and ethics.

Thank you for calling today from Cape Town, South Africa. What was the inspiration for writing Christianity’s Supposed Role in Ending Slavery? What misconceptions were you aiming to correct?

Christo Roberts: Well, several books have been published on this topic. The one I quote in my article is by a religious studies professor named Stephen Prothero, who argues that nonbelievers ought to acknowledge Christianity’s role in abolishing Slavery. Based on what I had previously read, I knew it was incorrect, so I decided to investigate the matter further and write a well-researched article. That’s why I did it.

Incidentally, I don’t have access to any large university libraries. I have a personal library, and I have sufficient information available. So, everything I’ve written comes from my books.

Jacobsen: How were Christian institutions and biblical texts used to justify Slavery historically?

Roberts: That’s a difficult question—it depends on the context. In my article, I quoted several Christian theologians and clergy members who, even before Slavery was abolished, attempted to justify their opposition to it using the Bible. However, they often provided strained interpretations of various passages, misreading them sometimes. That’s how they tried to reconcile their faith with abolitionist ideas.

Interestingly, some of these individuals even went beyond the Bible and appealed to general moral principles, arguing that Slavery was inherently wrong. It is also worth noting that, had it not been for the Transatlantic slave trade—particularly between Africa and the Americas—it is unlikely that there would have been as much opposition to Slavery. In the ancient world, Slavery existed, but some enslaved people were treated relatively well and were even valued for their skills or knowledge in some cases.

But the way that Black people were treated—the way they were shackled, forcibly placed onto ships, and the fact that large numbers of them died—caused some people to question the entire institution of Slavery. They had to develop arguments to oppose it, and that’s why, in some instances, they used the Bible to express their opposition to Slavery.

Jacobsen: What was the extent of the Roman Catholic Church’s active participation in Slavery—specifically, in the buying and selling of enslaved people?

Roberts: Well, the Church bought enslaved people on a large scale and used them in religious institutions, including monasteries, to perform manual labour. When the first enslaved Africans were captured, it was the Pope—though I’ve forgotten his name—who granted Spain and Portugal, particularly Portugal, the right to subjugate these people and sell them into perpetual Slavery. According to him, they were heathens and, therefore, fair game.

That’s how it started, and afterward, the Church actively bought enslaved people. Those who were brought from Africa to other parts of the world, including Europe, were purchased by Church institutions and forced into servitude, performing tasks that no one else would do.

Jacobsen: You used the term heathens. Did the word have the same meaning then as today, or did it carry a specific connotation in the context of Slavery and religious justification?

Roberts: According to them, a heathen was someone who didn’t believe in Christianity. It didn’t matter if the person followed another religion—he could even be a Muslim, and he would still be considered a heathen.

As such, Christian nations believed they were entitled to capture and enslave them. They justified this practice under the notion that these people were outside the Christian faith and thus could be subjugated.

Jacobsen: How did secular Enlightenment thinkers push for and contribute to the abolitionist movement?

Roberts: The leading secular figures advocating against Slavery were primarily from France, especially around the time of the French Revolution. Many opposed the Church, and some, like Voltaire and Denis Diderot, were not believers. They argued on secular grounds that Slavery was immoral.

Their arguments were later taken up by Scottish thinkers in Edinburgh, particularly David Hume and Adam Smith—and there was another one, but I’ve forgotten his name. They argued that Slavery was fundamentally incompatible with the principles of laissez-faire economics.

These thinkers played a significant role in influencing public opinion, and their ideas helped persuade the revolutionary French government, after the fall of the Bastille, to abolish Slavery in its colonies. However, there were not many enslaved people in France.

But when Napoleon took over as emperor in 1804, he was a Christian, and he reintroduced Slavery. It was only after the English took up the cause of abolitionism that France decided once again to abolish Slavery. That happened in the 1840s or even the 1850s—much later than in England.

Jacobsen: How did these secular Enlightenment thinkers differ from religious figures in their contributions to abolitionism?

Roberts: Well, as I said, they didn’t refer to the Bible at all. If you look at those who were Christian abolitionists, they dug up biblical texts. They interpreted them in unusual ways to convince others that Slavery was wrong—that it was not by Christian ideals or even the Old Testament.

So, for religious abolitionists, everything revolved around biblical interpretation. The battle was fought on that ground.

Interestingly, the leading abolitionist in England, William Wilberforce, who played a central role in the abolition of Slavery, never referred to the Bible at all. The people who led the movement against Slavery in Britain were part of a specific group—I’ve forgotten their name—but they never used religious arguments to justify abolition.

Instead, they argued that Slavery was immoral, and it was on that basis that the British Parliament abolished it.

Jacobsen: What is the narrative that Christianity was a leading force in abolition, and why does it remain popular despite historical evidence to the contrary?

Roberts: If I had to guess, I’d say one of the most commonly cited biblical justifications for Slavery comes from Genesis. After the flood, Noah and his family—according to the Bible—were the only people left on Earth.

One of Noah’s sons, Ham, did something that Noah found unacceptable. He saw his father lying drunk and naked in his tent. In response, Noah cursed him and declared that Ham and all his descendants would be enslaved people in perpetuity.

That’s probably one of the main reasons people have said, “Look, it’s in the Bible—one-third of the world must be enslaved.”

And no other passage in the Bible clearly refutes or overrides that curse. That’s my interpretation of why this narrative persisted for so long.

Jacobsen: Are there figures who wrote historical texts, who are seen as supporting abolition outside of the contexts you’ve already described?

Roberts: Yes, there were some individuals. In my article, I mentioned one of them as a law professor at the University of Mexico—though his name escapes me now.

He wrote a book in which he accused the clergy of collaborating with slave traders and participating in a disreputable enterprise. His arguments were based on secular principles. In response, the Church retaliated by placing his book on the Index Librorum Prohibitorum (the Index of Forbidden Books), meaning no one could read it.

No copies of the book exist today, but he was one of the only figures I can recall who was both secular and opposed to Slavery. He wasn’t necessarily a freethinker in the modern sense.

Jacobsen: Side question—what does the term freethinker mean in the context of South Africa?

Roberts: Very few people in South Africa use that word. I know what it means in Britain—more broadly in Great Britain—but it simply means someone nonconformist in South Africa. It doesn’t necessarily mean someone who rejects Christianity or is not religious. The term is much broader here and can even relate to politics.

For example, in the 1970s, I was part of the Progressive Federal Party, which advocated for extending the vote to Black South Africans. At the time, I was accused of being an atheist—which, well, I won’t deny—but also of being a freethinker because I held those political views.

Jacobsen: Is there much prejudice against freethinkers in South Africa today?

Roberts: No, I don’t think so. One thing I must say about the new dispensation ushered in after 1994 is that it is very liberal.

Of course, there are problems with the Constitution—I don’t agree with everything in it—but even so, people are generally free to hold unorthodox views without being silenced or persecuted.

That wasn’t always the case. In the old South Africa—before 1994—opposition to mainstream religious and political ideas could get you into serious trouble. But today, I don’t think we can complain about that.

Jacobsen: Are there significant differences between Christian denominations in their historical and present attitudes toward Slavery—whether by denomination, region, or ideology?

Roberts: About Slavery? That’s an interesting question. I don’t have clear evidence of that. The group I referred to earlier—the one associated with Wilberforce—certainly took a strong stand against Slavery. But beyond that, I’d need to look into the denominational positions.

The Quakers and similar groups tended to be more liberal and likely opposed Slavery in principle. However, some of the more orthodox and right-wing Protestant denominations saw nothing wrong with the institution of Slavery whatsoever.

Strangely, it played out this way because, in many cases, those groups were more religious than the Quakers and similar sects. But that was their stance.

Jacobsen: What about Christianity in the broader mix of other religions? Countries have diverse religious compositions—some are majority Islamic, Hindu, or Christian.

How does Christianity adapt its views on Slavery when compared to other religious traditions in a country? Is there a difference in how Christianity approaches the issue when it is the dominant religion versus when it is a minority religion? I’m unsure if that’s a factor, but I figured you’d be better positioned to answer.

Roberts: Well, it’s interesting—I don’t think Christianity historically paid much attention to what other religions thought about Slavery. Not as far as I can tell.

We know for a fact that Slavery was permitted under Islam. I also wrote in my article—though I couldn’t find the original text—that one writer claimed the Qur’an states that if you free a slave, you are guaranteed a place in heaven.

That suggests Islam may have had a more liberal attitude toward Slavery than Christianity did.

In the American South during the antebellum period, state legislatures made it as difficult as possible for enslaved people to be freed. This process, called manumission, was legally restricted in many cases. That directly contradicts what is written in the Qur’an.

So, in a certain sense, this makes Christianity look even worse than usual because people often claim that Islam is the more intolerant religion. But when you examine the issue of Slavery, Christianity appears to have been even more rigid.

As for other religions, I can’t say for sure. But we know that in India, the caste system has created social hierarchies that resemble Slavery.

While lower castes are not legally classified as property (chattel), they have been treated extremely poorly, and the system has functioned in a way that is similar to institutionalized Slavery.

Jacobsen: What lessons do you derive from Christianity’s long historical support for Slavery, followed by more recent attempts by some Christians to use the Bible to support abolition?

Roberts: Well, what’s interesting to me is that the history of Slavery and Christianity has been a cycle—an up-and-down dynamic.You may recall that, initially, there were very few enslaved people in Europe.

I’m talking about the period after the fall of the Roman Empire in the fifth century until the Portuguese began exploring the coast of Africa. During that period, there were very few enslaved people in Europe, so there was no real opposition to Slavery—it simply wasn’t an issue that affected most people. They didn’t see enslaved people in their daily lives, so they had no strong opinions on the matter.

However, after the Portuguese and other European powers began capturing and enslaving Black people from Africa, we started to see more individuals—not necessarily churches—becoming deeply concerned about the institution of Slavery. Many intellectuals and reformers found it completely objectionable.

It’s difficult to say whether church leaders were ever fully aware of the concerns raised by secular thinkers and intellectuals. They likely felt secure in their position, believing they had biblical justification for Slavery and, therefore, had no reason to listen to dissenting voices.

Jacobsen: When secular reformers first introduced laws to challenge Slavery, how did the churches respond? At that time, churches held enormous power and controlled much of society. They had nearly every advantage in terms of influence and authority.

Roberts: Well, you must remember that churches couldn’t act alone.

This was the same situation with the Roman Catholic Church. If they found someone guilty of heresy or apostasy, they couldn’t execute them themselves; they had to collaborate with secular authorities.

The same was true for Slavery. If the Church wanted Slavery to be upheld and enforced, they had to rely on governments to pass and maintain laws supporting it. Many government officials were Christians, and they were often eager to appease the Church.

So, enforcing Slavery was a collaborative effort between religious and secular institutions.

It’s important to note that legal challenges began before Slavery was abolished. A key turning point was the Somerset case in England around 1770. The ruling in that case declared that no person could be forcibly taken to England and held as an enslaved person.

After that decision, abolitionist movements gained momentum, and laws gradually began restricting and eventually abolishing Slavery. Once that process started, other countries followed suit.

Jacobsen: As secular abolitionists gained ground, how did church-sanctioned policies shift? Did churches relinquish control voluntarily or by force?

Roberts: They don’t have much of a choice.

I’m not aware of any cases where the Church excommunicated people for opposing Slavery or freeing enslaved people in defiance of church doctrine. They seemed to accept abolition reluctantly when it became inevitable.

Eventually, many within the Church began to reinterpret their stance and acknowledge that Slavery was wrong. However, the Roman Catholic Church tried its best to maintain its slaves for as long as possible, even after Slavery was abolished in various countries.

They held onto their slaves for as long as they could.

Jacobsen: Based on primary sources and archival records, how extensive was the Roman Catholic Church’s Involvement in Slavery—specifically in terms of trade and ownership?

Roberts: It was very extensive. Unfortunately, I don’t have access to the records themselves. But yes, you’re right. There must have been proper records because if you sell someone, there must be a deed of sale. There must be a record of ownership documenting what happened when a slaver handed over a person to a new owner.

However, I don’t know what happened to those records. I suspect they were probably destroyed by the Church when they saw that the tide was turning and there was nothing they could do about it. That’s likely what happened in the end.

Jacobsen: Which Christian denomination had the most laudable history in abolitionist efforts? For instance, did any small sect, like the Quakers, actively work internally to begin abolitionist efforts without secular pressure? Did any group truly lead the way in social, civic, or legal reforms?

Roberts: The only group I can think of is the Quakers.

It may sound surprising, but there aren’t any other Christian sects that took the lead. You have to remember that Christianity includes both liberal and extremely conservative sects. The more conservative ones likely saw no issue with Slavery and took no steps to oppose it.

So, as far as I know, the Quakers were the only group that actively wrote against Slavery, formed abolitionist committees, and directly influenced legislation—particularly in the British Parliament. And they were ultimately successful. They persisted until Slavery was abolished in the British Empire in 1833.

Jacobsen: Was the Church broadly committed to the slave trade due to racial, theological, hermeneutical, or economic motivations? What was the primary driving force?

Roberts: It was probably economic.

I’m speculating here, but I don’t think race played the dominant role. The fundamental issue was that enslaved people provided free labour—not just cheap labour, but completely unpaid labour after the initial purchase. Once an enslaved person was bought, the owner could use them for any purpose.

That’s likely why the Church supported Slavery.

And, of course, there was biblical justification—which mattered a great deal. If they hadn’t believed they had religious sanction, they might not have been so invested in maintaining Slavery.

But beyond economics and biblical justification, I can’t think of another strong reason for their support. They would never have admitted it outright, but that was the core of it.

Jacobsen: On the opposite end of the spectrum—what Christian sect was the most abhorrent in its endorsement, participation, and treatment of enslaved people?

Roberts: That’s a tough one.

Generally, the more conservative branches of Christianity were most complicit. That might include certain Baptist groups, though I’m not sure whether the Baptist Church as we know it today existed in quite the same form back then.

Particularly in the United States, many conservative churches were adamantly opposed to freeing enslaved people.

In contrast, churches in England and other parts of Europe weren’t as aggressively invested in defending Slavery. But in the American South, conservative Christian churches fought hard to maintain the institution until the very end.

And the funny thing is, once the tide started turning and they had to give way, they quickly changed their stance.

It’s interesting. Mark Twain wrote an essay, which I have but didn’t quote in my article, in which he said—this was around 1880—that churches had previously opposed freeing enslaved people, but in the future, they would claim to have been the ones responsible for abolishing Slavery.

Jacobsen: Did you examine internal church documents—debates, reforms, or papal encyclicals—that reveal any internal conflict over Slavery?

Roberts: I don’t know if such a document exists—I can’t say for sure. But I suspect that if any clergymen opposed Slavery, they probably kept their views to themselves. I do quote one clergyman in my article. He was a Roman Catholic priest sent to the island of Hispaniola in the Caribbean Sea.

From his pulpit, he openly condemned the Roman Catholic Church for forcing the Indigenous people—the Amerindians, as they are now called—into Slavery. He declared it scandalous and said God would never forgive the Church for such actions.

The Church was furious at him for making these remarks publicly, and he was sanctioned for speaking out.

The other clergy members I mentioned in my article took a different approach—they wrote articles arguing for the abolition of Slavery. However, I don’t think it was widely known at the time that some clergymen were against Slavery—these discussions were largely kept within the Church.

Jacobsen: Looking at the present moment, are there Christian denominations that are taking an honest, evidence-based approach to examining Christianity’s role in Slavery? Are interfaith or interdenominational discussions happening in South Africa or elsewhere to encourage a more realistic historical perspective?

Roberts: Are you talking about right now or the 19th century?

Jacobsen: That’s a good question. Let’s start with the 19th century, and if similar discussions are happening today, that would also be relevant.

Roberts: I don’t know.

If I had to guess, many of these discussions have been kept from the public, and many writers and scholars cannot access the full historical details.

So, I wouldn’t want to speculate too much on that.

Jacobsen: Beyond economic motivations, were there any competing economic factors that might have accidentally prevented the Church from engaging in Slavery? Or was the fact that the Bible endorses Slavery in many parts of the Old Testament enough to make it inevitable?

Roberts: The Bible certainly played a role, but you’re also right to point out that religion was another factor.

The people being enslaved were considered heathens—they belonged to different religious traditions than their Christian captors. That likely gave Christian slave traders a sense of justification—a carte blanche, if you will.

They probably reasoned that since these people were not Christians, they could capture them, sell them, and enslave them.

That said, enslaving fellow Christians was seen as taboo. You weren’t allowed to go from one Christian nation in Europe to another, capture people, and bring them back as enslaved people.

There were even cases where enslaved people in Europe converted to Christianity after being brought over, and many of them were then freed. This practice wasn’t widespread, but it did happen.

Jacobsen: There must have been a historical moment when the modern conception of Slavery—the sale and ownership of people for indentured servitude—was at its peak and another time when it was barely present. Then, there must have been a tipping point—a fulcrum in history when the system of Slavery began to collapse. When was that?

Roberts: Well, we know that the Romans were ambiguous about Slavery.

The reason is that Slavery fundamentally contradicted a core principle of Roman law—that all people should be treated equally before the law.

However, in the case of Slavery, some people were treated as legal objects, while others were considered legal subjects. That’s why the Roman jurist Florentinus, writing under Emperor Justinian in the Eastern Roman Empire, described Slavery as an institution against nature.

He believed that Slavery was incompatible with legal principles.

However, there were two major justifications for why Slavery was still permitted:

  1. Biblical sanction – Since Slavery was endorsed in the Bible, many justified it on religious grounds.
  2. Jus Gentium (Law of Nations) – Slavery was recognized as part of international law. As far as the Romans knew, every civilization practiced Slavery in some form.

Because of this, Roman authorities flip-flopped on the issue. At times, enslaved people were treated very harshly, particularly in certain periods of Roman history.

Jacobsen: What was the name of that 15th- or 16th-century doctrine issued by the Catholic Church?

It was their version of Manifest Destiny, similar to what the Americans had—a Doctrine of Discovery or something like that?

Roberts: Yes, you’re referring to the Doctrine of Discovery.

It was based on a series of papal bulls, most notably Dum Diversas (1452), Romanus Pontifex (1455), and Inter Caetera (1493).

These decrees essentially authorized European Christian nations to conquer non-Christian lands, subjugate indigenous peoples, and claim their territories.

The Doctrine of Discovery played a major role in colonial expansion, particularly in the Americas and Africa, and it was frequently used to justify Slavery and the forced conversion of indigenous populations.

It’s almost a given that the papal bulls were the key documents that sanctioned the capture of enslaved people in Africa and their transportation to the New World. Without those decrees, I don’t think the transatlantic slave trade would have developed the way it did.

Jacobsen: So, would you place most of the blame on the Catholic Church hierarchy?

Roberts: Yes, I would. And that’s just speaking in terms of the last five or six hundred years. The practice of Slavery stretches across many different eras, societies, and religious interpretations. However, in terms of formally sanctioning the transatlantic slave trade, the papacy played a pivotal role.

Remember, the popes played a key role in dividing the New World between the Spanish and the Portuguese. They wanted to keep both sides happy, so they issued the papal bulls. The Portuguese were already a dominant seafaring nation, more so than the Spanish, and they were deeply invested in the capture and transportation of enslaved people. The papacy likely understood this and wanted to maintain their influence over both empires, so they sanctioned the practice in a way that justified both colonization and Slavery.

Jacobsen: Up until the early 1900s, how did the colonial context in places that are now post-colonial—such as South Africa, New Zealand, Australia, the United States, and Canada—evolve from those papal decrees to the point where colonial legal structures were no longer viable and were eventually discarded?

Roberts: Well, I can tell you about South Africa. After Slavery was abolished in the British colonies through the 1833 Slavery Abolition Act, there were immediate effects in the Cape Colony—which is where I am at the moment. The colonists were instructed to release all their slaves. However, the reaction wasn’t solely based on opposition to emancipation itself. The major complaint among slaveholders was that they had received inadequate compensation from the British government for their loss of labour.

This grievance was one of the factors that led to the Great Trek—the migration of Afrikaner (Boer) settlers from the Cape Colony to the regions that eventually became the Transvaal Republic and the Orange Free State. The Trek began around 1836–1838, and the settlers moved nearly a thousand miles north, carrying all their possessions with them. They sought to establish self-governing settlements, partly in reaction to British policies, including abolition.

Jacobsen: Within South Africa, how did different racial and ethnic groups—such as Afrikaners, Black South Africans, and the Indian population—engage with the practice of Slavery within Christian churches? Did they have their versions of the institution? Did they participate, or was it more of a European practice?

Roberts: It’s interesting because one reason I believe the Great Trek narrative must be correct is that if those settlers had been fully committed to Slavery, one would expect that after moving north, they would have enslaved Black people and continued the practice. But that didn’t happen.

Instead, the Boers often negotiated with Black communities where possible, purchasing land or maintaining diplomatic relations with the local African kingdoms they encountered as they expanded northward. There were, of course, conflicts between Boers and various African groups. Still, outright enslavement of local populations in the manner of the transatlantic slave trade was not widespread.

So, after 1833, there was no more officially sanctioned slavery in the British Empire, and even where the Boers later founded their republics, they never reinstated Slavery. That chapter of history had ended for them.

Jacobsen: Where was the last place in Africa to have Christian-based Slavery?

Roberts: It was in Ethiopia, which was historically known as Abyssinia. They officially abolished Slavery in 1940, more than a hundred years after Slavery had been outlawed in places like the United Kingdom. Despite its deep historical ties to Christianity, Ethiopia was the last African country to end the practice formally.

Jacobsen: How is this history of religious-based Slavery perceived by different groups within Africa today—including white Africans, Black Africans, Indian Africans, and others?

Roberts: That isn’t easy to determine. I don’t know how much of this history is widely known among Africans today. They would probably be outraged if they were fully aware of the extent of what happened. However, I get the impression—though I hesitate to say this—that some people now demand compensation for what was done to their ancestors hundreds of years ago.

The issue with this argument is that we don’t even know if the people demanding compensation are directly descended from enslaved individuals. And in many cases, it seems to be motivated more by financial gain than a desire for historical justice. There has been increasing pressure on former colonial powers—such as Britain, France, and Spain—to pay reparations for the transatlantic slave trade.

But it doesn’t make much sense if you think about it logically. Normally, you want to seek legal compensation. In that case, it must be for something that happened directly to you or someone very close to you—someone still within living memory. In this case, the people affected lived centuries ago. Those demanding compensation today never knew them personally, and it has now turned into a broad demand for financial restitution from former colonial powers.

Unfortunately, this issue is being misused in some cases. I don’t agree with the idea of paying compensation centuries later when we don’t even know who the victims were, how many there were, or how to distribute compensation fairly.

Jacobsen: Even though Slavery was officially abolished in 1940 in Ethiopia—making it the last African nation to do so—are there still cultural remnants of slave-era attitudes among Black, White, or Indian Africans today? Even if Slavery itself is gone, do some social hierarchies or prejudices remain that were originally tied to that system?

Roberts: That’s an interesting question. I don’t know whether Black Africans themselves continue to capture or enslave people from other tribes. However, ethnic rivalries and social hierarchies still exist in many places. For example, there have been long-standing tensions between the Tutsi and the Hutu groups in Rwanda and Burundi. In many societies, the dominant group often sees itself as superior to those they consider inferior. However, whether that amounts to Slavery is another question. I don’t think you can equate it with chattel Slavery in the historical sense.

What we do know for a fact is that until very recently, some Arab nations were still making raids into Africa, capturing people, and possibly selling them into servitude. Whether they are being legally sold as modern enslaved people is unclear, but many are still held in captivity and treated as objects—which is functionally very similar to Slavery.

Things are happening behind the scenes that we don’t fully understand. Human trafficking and forced labour still exist in many parts of the world, but the mechanisms have changed.

Jacobsen: On an intellectual level, what was the Enlightenment challenge to theological justifications for Slavery? I’m not asking about history, specific figures, or political reactions—I’m asking about the philosophical and ethical framework of the Enlightenment critique.

I’m talking about philosophy—or, more specifically, the epistemology of how we understand human nature—as a foundation for making a principled, ethical, and objective stand against the ownership of other human beings.

Roberts: The most important thing is recognizing that science has shown us that we are all part of a single human family. That doesn’t mean we are identical—of course, we have different abilities, strengths, and weaknesses—but the things that unite us as human beings are far more significant than the differences that separate us.

Acknowledging that we are autonomous beings who can make our own decisions is crucial. The act of enslaving someone—of stripping away their freedom and their right to self-determination—is not only a moral crime but also a denial of their humanity. To enslave someone is, in effect, to refuse to recognize them as a member of the species Homo sapiens with full moral and legal personhood. I believe that is the most fundamental principle upon which we should oppose Slavery.

Jacobsen: Gaps in history, interpolations, and national myths shape how people interpret the past. When you analyze the history of Slavery in the Christian Church, what cautionary notes should people consider regarding methodological challenges in interpreting historical evidence about the Church’s involvement in Slavery? We know what happened, and we have historical documents. But what are some key points where a careful reading of history is necessary?

Roberts: The first and most important thing is to use common sense and critical thinking when evaluating historical narratives. We should assess right and wrong based on what we know—both from historical records and our legal and moral frameworks regarding human rights.

It is also essential to consider insights from psychology about human behaviour and social interactions. We must avoid justifying past actions simply because they were accepted then. If something was wrong by today’s ethical standards, it was still wrong back then—even if people did not recognize it.

The Church’s role in Slavery should be examined honestly, without attempts to sanitize or excuse what happened. A proper historical analysis acknowledges moral failures and progress rather than glossing over the uncomfortable parts.

Jacobsen: How does the Church—particularly the Roman Catholic Church—stand on Slavery today?

I can take a contemporary example from Canadian society. At one point, the Pope had an opportunity to apologize for the treatment of Indigenous peoples in the residential school system, which affected over 150,000 children over a century. The trauma caused by these institutions was widespread and affected many communities and individuals.

Some Indigenous groups have since repurposed former residential schools for positive community purposes, but that’s a separate issue. My point is about the Church having a second chance to apologize—and, as far as I recall, actually issuing a formal apology. At the very least, they acknowledged wrongdoing, which is the easiest thing to do.

As the saying goes, words are cheap. What is the Church’s stance on Slavery today?

Roberts: I think the Church acknowledges that what happened was wrong. The real question is whether their apologies are sincere or just lip service.

Most Church leaders today understand that Slavery was a moral atrocity. However, my problem is that many of them are still reluctant to acknowledge that Christianity itself—and the Bible—played a direct role in justifying and sustaining Slavery.

Suppose the Church truly wants to be honest. In that case, it cannot simply condemn Slavery while refusing to confront the role that biblical teachings and Christian institutions played in supporting it for centuries. To say, “Slavery was wrong,” while denying the Church’s past complicity, makes the apology sound hollow.

I think the Church will have to go all the way and come clean by saying, “Yes, the Bible was wrong. It should never have sanctioned Slavery. We should never have followed what is in the Bible because it completely contradicts everything we now stand for.” But as far as I know, they have never done that.

Jacobsen: How do they address any of this history? Are they even broadly aware of it?

Take South Africa as an example. The average churchgoer, whether an Afrikaner, Black South African or someone from another community who attends a local church, is aware of this history. Is it a topic of debate, or does it not really come up?

Roberts: I don’t know whether they are fully aware of it. I haven’t found any book that shows the Church has come clean on this issue. I haven’t seen any clergy openly explaining to their congregants that there are passages in the Bible where Slavery is condoned if not outright encouraged or justified.

Until the Church acknowledges that history within its ranks, we cannot say they have truly come to terms with Christianity’s involvement in Slavery.

Jacobsen: Elon Musk has been making statements recently about Julius Malema, the leader of the Economic Freedom Fighters (EFF) in South Africa. Is this inflaming old ethnic tensions?

He made public statements about Malema, buying into certain narratives about Africa and South Africa’s leadership. Do people in South Africa care about what a North American billionaire with South African roots thinks?

Roberts: Yes, now that you mention it, I know Musk attacked Malema at some stage—I don’t recall exactly what he called him. But I do know that Malema dislikes him intensely.

That being said, I doubt this has anything to do with Slavery or South Africa’s historical past. Malema, like South Africa’s recently elected president, thrives on being in the spotlight. He loves media attention, enjoys hearing his own voice, and frequently makes provocative statements—much like Donald Trump does.

His strategy is to stir controversy, and when he is criticized; he overreacts and goes overboard. That’s what he enjoys—it keeps him relevant. So even if Musk’s statements were meant as an insult, Malema probably sees them as an opportunity rather than an offence.

Jacobsen: Are there explicit laws in South Africa against Slavery, or is it simply that social and public pressure ensures that it is not tolerated?

For example, in some countries, you don’t need a law saying you can’t deny the Holocaust—because doing so would push you to the margins of society. Is Slavery treated similarly in South Africa, or are there specific legal prohibitions against it?

In some countries, it is illegal to deny the Holocaust or spread false narratives about it. Does South Africa have legal nuances around similar historical issues, or is everything handled through social norms?

Roberts: Well, the South African Constitution explicitly forbids Slavery. It clearly states that no form of Slavery or forced servitude is permitted. There are also specific laws against human trafficking, particularly sex trafficking, which is often referred to as sexual Slavery.

These laws were only recently enacted after 1994 when the ANC government came into power, and the so-called New South Africa was established. Before that, there were no specific laws banning Slavery, but it was never something that the old apartheid government would have condoned either.

Slavery was not a political issue or a rallying point for opposition groups at the time. However, under the new legal framework, South Africa now prohibits all forms of Slavery, including modern Slavery, where people may not be bought and sold in a traditional sense but are still exploited and controlled.

Jacobsen: I think we’ve covered just about everything.

Roberts: Yes, we’ve covered quite a bit of ground.

Jacobsen: It was lovely talking with you today. I appreciate your time and thank you for this extensive conversation on Christianity and Slavery. It’s a big topic.

Roberts: Yes, these are my personal views—everyone may not share them. But they are sincerely held, and I hope I’ve been able to provide some insight into my perspective on what it’s all about.

Jacobsen: I really appreciate it. 

Roberts: Thanks a lot, Scott, and it was nice talking to you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Why Life Sciences Should Be Exempt From U.S. Tariffs

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/08

Dr. Anmol Kapoor, MD, a cardiologist, healthcare innovator, and BioAro founder, advocates excluding life sciences from U.S. tariffs. He highlights the U.S.-Canada healthcare interdependence and warns that tariffs could disrupt medical innovation, increase costs, and delay treatment access. Kapoor stresses the need for stronger cross-border collaboration, elimination of interprovincial trade barriers, and domestic investment in life sciences. He also underscores the risks of AI restrictions, manufacturing relocations, and brain drain. While hopeful tariffs are temporary, he warns of long-term industry consequences. Kapoor urges policymakers to prioritize human lives over economic policies that hinder medical progress.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dr. Anmol Kapoor, MD. He is a distinguished cardiologist, healthcare innovator, and entrepreneur who advocates for excluding life sciences from U.S. tariffs.

As the founder of BioAro, he leads advancements in genomic precision health, nuclear imaging isotopes, and AI-driven medical breakthroughs. A key figure in the Canadian life sciences sector, Dr. Kapoor collaborates with high-complexity laboratories in the U.S., particularly in California, emphasizing the deep interconnection between the two countries’ healthcare systems. Thank you so much for joining me today. I appreciate your time.

Dr. Anmol Kapoor: Thank you for having me.

Jacobsen: Why should life sciences be exempt from U.S. tariffs?

Kapoor: At the time of publication, this discussion may be more relevant than ever. Life sciences should be excluded from tariffs because they impact human life directly. There should be no debate about placing tariffs on medical advancements that save lives. Access to healthcare is a fundamental human right.

The best healthcare should be available, enabling longer, healthier lives. If we begin taxing life sciences, we create barriers to access. Restrictions on medical innovation and distribution don’t just affect one country-they create a ripple effect globally. If my neighbour’s house is on fire, I will feel the heat too. Similarly, if my community faces a healthcare crisis-an epidemic or pandemic-it affects everyone.

No one can isolate themselves from healthcare challenges. Canada, the U.S., and the global medical community are deeply interconnected.

One major area is research and academia. Universities, clinicians, and medical scientists in North America collaborate with biotech firms and pharmaceutical companies to develop life-saving treatments. These partnerships transcend national borders. A research breakthrough in Canada could lead to a new drug developed in the U.S., or a clinical trial in the U.S. could help refine a therapy that benefits patients worldwide. The question isn’t about where a company is headquartered-it’s about ensuring the free flow of scientific knowledge that drives medical progress.

It is seamless. When ideas emerge, they are implemented immediately. However, imposing taxes or tariffs on them could harm them.

The second aspect is manufacturing, which is deeply intertwined. Some facilities are in Canada, some in the U.S., and different parts of the manufacturing process occur in different locations. One part of a medical device may be produced in Canada, another in the U.S., and another overseas. These processes are interconnected.

If you impose a tax on one side, the other will respond with tariffs. Ultimately, Americans and Canadians will bear the financial burden- effectively paying a tax on their lives.

So, the first is R&D, and the second is manufacturing.

The third issue is medical isotopes. Nearly all medical isotopes used in Canada-particularly for cardiac patients- come from the U.S. We do not have domestic production. We used to be an exporter, with the Chalk River nuclear reactor producing these critical isotopes. However, that facility was shut down, and we never revived it. Canada chose not to reinvest in this area, leaving us dependent on U.S. suppliers.

There are European sources, but they represent a small supply chain with high global demand. As a result, Canada is now a newt importer of medical isotopes, relying on the U.S. for supply.

Who will ultimately pay the price if counter-tariffs are imposed on life sciences products?

Canadians.

No special government billing code compensates for these tariffs in clinical settings. Canada does not have any domestic manufacturing of imaging equipment, such as MRIs and CT scans. We rely on American companies.

Yes, some of these companies manufacture in China, Israel, or other regions. Still, both countries bear the cost. Many software technologies essential for MRI and other imaging evaluations are developed through U.S.-Canadian innovation partnerships. Who will ultimately pay if tariffs and taxes are imposed on these technologies?

We will- through human lives. Delays in diagnosis. Delays in access to care. Increased healthcare costs. Healthcare systems in Canada and the U.S. are already under immense strain. Demand is skyrocketing. Instead of increasing tariffs and taxes, we should work together to lower costs.

At a time when we should be collaborating to make healthcare more affordable and accessible, imposing tariffs is equivalent to endangering human lives. That is wrong. That is unethical. It should not be done.

Jacobsen: Ethical, economic, and diplomatic frameworks are all built upon fundamental principles. Medical doctors take the Hippocratic Oath, committing not to harm. The United Nations bases its geopolitical and diplomatic efforts on universal human rights and consensus-building principles. In economics, the central concept is trade-offs. What are we willing to trade for innovation and healthcare access? If the price of tariffs is human lives, is it worth it?What is the opportunity cost of prioritizing one sector over another? Regarding life sciences and tariffs, beyond the critical impact on human well-being, are there other sectors that should also be exempt from tariffs? If we broaden the argument to include additional industries, could this make the case for life sciences exemptions more substantive? Is there another sector that could be paired with life sciences to strengthen the overall argument?

Kapoor: Absolutely. One major sector is pharmaceutical manufacturing, specifically Active Pharmaceutical Ingredients (APIs). APIs are the chemical components of medications, and their production depends on a complex network of chemical manufacturing facilities across North America.

These chemicals are essential for drug formulation. The packaging of medications, vaccines, and vials also relies on plastics and specialized materials, which tariffs could negatively impact. The entire pharmaceutical supply chain will be affected if tariffs are imposed on any of these components.

Beyond medications, we must also consider medical supplies and devices- critical items for patient care. This includes:

  • Medical gloves
  • Wearable health devices (e.g., heart monitors, blood pressure monitors, insulin pumps)
  • Pacemakers
  • Diabetes consumables (e.g., test strips, glucose monitors)
  • Cancer treatments (e.g., chemotherapy drugs)

You cannot isolate one sector of life sciences- everything is interconnected. Manufacturing, packaging, and consumables are all part of the same ecosystem.

If tariffs are imposed, what happens?

  • Medication costs will increase, making life-saving drugs inaccessible for many patients.
  • Diabetic patients may struggle to afford glucose test strips and insulin pumps.
  • Heart disease patients could lose access to pacemakers.
  • Cancer patients might face higher costs for chemotherapy.

The repercussions are enormous-affecting millions of lives.

Jacobsen: AI-driven medical technologies are increasingly important in global healthcare. Could tariffs slow the development of these technologies? If so, how would that impact healthcare systems in the United States and Canada? Would this create economic, healthcare, and public health consequences-perhaps even exacerbating existing cost and accessibility issues?

Kapoor: Definitely. AI-powered medical technology is revolutionizing healthcare. It is helping to reduce costs, improve efficiency, and bridge gaps in healthcare access. Tariffs could stifle AI-driven diagnostics, personalized medicine, and genomic research innovation.

Take genomics, for example. BioAro is one of the leading global companies in genomics. Why does this matter? Because genomic medicine is the future- it allows for:

  • Early disease detection
  • Precision medicine tailored to individuals
  • More effective treatment strategies

Suppose tariffs slow progress in AI-driven medical research. In that case, it would have a ripple effect across the entire healthcare system. This is especially problematic for the U.S., where healthcare costs are already a major issue. Though somewhat insulated, Canada would also feel the economic and healthcare consequences.

At a time when we should be investing in AI-driven healthcare innovations, imposing tariffs would be a step backward- increasing costs, delaying access, and ultimately harming patients.

Because of the PanOmiQ technology we developed, we are currently the only company globally with this advanced computing power and proprietary AI algorithms. This technology was built entirely in Canada, enabling us to analyze vast amounts of sequencing data from DNA, microbiomics, and epigenomics in real time.

No other company or country has this real-time whole genome analysis sequencing level. It typically takes days to weeks, sometimes even months, for patients to receive clinical reports from genetic sequencing.

However, our technology eliminates those delays, allowing instant genomic insights.

Our AI-driven genomics platform and advanced software algorithms were built locally in Calgary. If tariffs are imposed, this would have serious consequences, especially since American patients and researchers rely on fast genomics data for:

  • Cancer diagnostics
  • Dementia research
  • Heart disease screening
  • Pharmacogenomic analysis for personalized medicine

The new FDA Director has emphasized the need for faster adoption of new science to provide rapid access to innovative healthcare solutions. However, if tariffs are implemented, this will negatively impact the U.S. in several ways:

  1. Higher sequencing costs- making advanced genomic testing more expensive.
  2. Delayed access to care- slowing down diagnoses and treatment plans.

Today, labs can use PanOmiQ technology without additional taxes. But if tariffs are imposed, they will face two bad choices:

  • Option A: Pay the extra tariff and pass the cost to patients with high medical expenses.
  • Option B: Avoid AI-powered technology, revert to manual methods, and delay diagnoses, which could potentially lead to medical complications later on.

With the power of AI and genomics, we can revolutionize healthcare in America. AI is not just about cost-efficiency- it helps people live longer, healthier lives.

Jacobsen: AI-driven genomics is becoming a cornerstone of modern healthcare. If these tariffs delay AI adoption, what are the broader implications for genomics and the entire medical ecosystem?

Kapoor: There are two major impacts: Combining AI, genomics, and IoT (Internet of Things) data is already transforming medicine. AI processes massive amounts of wearable health data from devices like smartwatches, heart monitors, and glucose sensors- all integrated into real-time decision-making systems.

If tariffs increase costs, it will slow adoption at the hospital level and increase expenses for patients. Many AI models in Canada and the U.S. are trained on shared scientific data. AI models developed in the U.S. often rely on Canadian datasets and vice versa. If tariffs disrupt this collaboration, it will severely impact:

  • Medical research
  • Drug discovery
  • AI-driven diagnostics

A prime example is electronic health records (EHRs).

Most Canadian hospitals use American-built health record systems, such as:

  • Epic (used in Alberta, costing over $1 billion)
  • Cerner (used in British Columbia and Ontario)

These systems are already considered outdated by today’s standards. They lack AI-driven functionality, making them inefficient in clinical decision-making.

By failing to update healthcare AI integration, we are slowing medical progress in Canada and across North America.

This is why tariffs on life sciences and AI-driven healthcare are a fundamental mistake- they don’t just increase costs; they set back medical innovation, reduce access to critical healthcare, and ultimately harm patients.

Due to compatibility issues, the datasets generated in Canada are often difficult to integrate with current AI models. As a result, billions of dollars are spent in Canada, but much of that money ultimately flows back to American companies.

Canada has an opportunity to develop our own AI-driven health record systems- or even create some of the best in the world- so we can be self-reliant. Much of our healthcare data is transferred to and accessed by American systems. If we establish our AI-powered ecosystem, this data could remain in Canada, enhancing domestic innovation while reducing reliance on foreign-built platforms.

So, while tariffs create chaos, they also present opportunities. We must identify the right opportunities and leverage AI as an enabler. It is up to us how we choose to use AI.

Tariffs can have a negative impact, but they also force us to innovate. If we invest in our healthcare AI infrastructure, Canada could become less dependent on systems like Epic and Cerner, creating a stronger, self-sustaining ecosystem for healthcare technology.

Jacobsen: With trade policies under the Trump administration and this interview occurring on February 28, the extension on tariffs expires tomorrow, formally imposing new trade barriers across multiple sectors. Beyond just tariffs, what alternative strategies could protect life sciences from broader economic barriers?

Kapoor: The best protection is collaboration.

Canadian and American life sciences companies have a long history of working together. Now is the time to strengthen that relationship even further.

We already have robust academic collaborations across universities in North America. Industry partnerships between Canadian and U.S. biotech firms are also well-established. Now is the moment to reinforce those ties.

That is the most effective way to counteract tariffs.

Suppose we allow isolationist policies to disrupt this life-saving supply chain. In that case, the consequences will be severe for both Canada and the U.S.:

  • Rising costs for medications, supplies, and diagnostics
  • Delays in access to medical isotopes (critical for cancer treatments)
  • Increased costs for AI-driven diagnostics

We must intensify cross-border collaboration, invest in each other’s life sciences sectors, and grow the industry together.

The life sciences sector should be completely exempt from tariffs for humanitarian and economic reasons.

Jacobsen: Could you provide a historical example where international collaboration in life sciences was prioritized over economic restrictions?

Kapoor: Absolutely. Look at the COVID-19 pandemic. At the height of the crisis, the United States did not have an mRNA vaccine of its own. The technology came from Europe. European researchers had already developed the foundation for mRNA-based vaccines.

The vaccine was manufactured in the U.S., but the scientific breakthrough originated elsewhere. Imagine if Europe had imposed strict trade barriers or tariffs on that technology. If they had said:

“We will not allow you to access this innovation unless you pay more.”

That would have been disastrous. But they did not do that because it was a global health emergency. Yes, companies profited from the vaccine, but at its core, scientific collaboration saved lives.

Another example is insulin. When Canadian scientist Frederick Banting discovered insulin, he refused to patent it for profit. He believed that insulin should be accessible to all people and not controlled by a single corporation for financial gain.

That is the right model for life sciences. It is about humanity first, not profit. Life sciences must be exempt from tariffs. It is not just about economics-it is about saving lives.

We need to show a bigger heart. I ask our American friends to extend the same generosity toward the life sciences sector. Do not even consider imposing tariffs. If tariffs are in place, remove them- because lives depend on them.

Jacobsen: What ethical considerations should policymakers consider when crafting trade policies that affect the life sciences sector? I’m not talking about political appeals to leaders or calls for scientific collaboration- though those are important in global geopolitics. I mean policymakers- the people who set the tone for trade regulations.

Kapoor: From a policy perspective, there are multiple ways to support the life sciences sector. One crucial step is to loosen intellectual property (IP) laws to allow university research commercialization. Many groundbreaking technologies originate in academic institutions across North America. Yet, due to restrictive IP regulations, startups often struggle to bring these innovations to market. Policymakers should ensure that startups can take risks and test the market with these advancements.

Life sciences startups also need easier access to capital to develop new drugs, software technologies, and AI-driven healthcare models. To support innovation, policymakers should streamline funding opportunities for early-stage companies, making it easier for them to secure investment and scale.

Additionally, regulatory sandboxes can provide startups with a controlled environment to test new healthcare models without taking on excessive financial burdens. These IT and medical innovation sandboxes allow companies to:

  • Experiment safely in the healthcare sector.
  • Refine technologies before large-scale deployment.
  • Reduce costs while improving patient outcomes.

Further, policymakers should offer better tax credits for companies investing in research and development (R&D). Allowing businesses to reinvest their earnings into expansion, innovation, and scaling projects will strengthen the industry and enhance global competitiveness.

North America lags in pharmaceutical and medical device manufacturing, creating a strategic vulnerability as most life sciences companies rely on overseas production. Policies should incentivize domestic manufacturing by encouraging:

  • “Made in Canada” and “Made in America” initiatives.
  • Local procurement of medical technology.

By investing in local manufacturing, Canada and the U.S. can:

  • Retain scientific talent.
  • Build a sustainable ecosystem.
  • Reduce dependency on foreign supply chains.

Startups in the life sciences sector follow a cycle similar to students in education. They need the right environment to learn, grow, and innovate. They also require mentorship, education, and competition to succeed. The best ideas should rise to the top only if policy frameworks support their development.

Some countries are already investing heavily in the life sciences sector. Saudi Arabia’s Vision 2030, for example, aims to position the country as a global leader in:

  • Precision healthcare
  • Multi-omics research
  • Real-time genomic analysis

North America must take similar steps to enhance innovation, support startups, and strengthen life sciences infrastructure to remain competitive.

They recognize the potential of life sciences and are moving aggressively to lead in biotechnology and medical innovation. Meanwhile, Canada has underinvested in life sciences compared to other sectors like energy and mining.

Policymakers must take life sciences seriously. They are not just an industry-they are a humanitarian necessity. Strong policies will drive economic growth and save lives.

The pandemic has shown us that we are vulnerable. We relied on masks and medical gowns from other countries. We found ourselves in a position where we were begging for essential supplies. That should never happen again. Canada and the United States have more than enough resources to manufacture these necessities domestically.

Jacobsen: You live in Alberta. I live in British Columbia. We often see stereotypes about our provinces- Alberta as “Canada’s Texas” and British Columbia as “Canada’s California.” A bunch of cowboys in Alberta, a bunch of hippies in B.C. These are stereotypes, but like most, they contain a grain of truth. That said, do you think different provincial and territorial strategies will be needed to mitigate the effects of these tariffs? While tariffs may apply across the board, their impact on business networks and industries varies from province to territory and territory to territory.

Kapoor: Absolutely. As Canadians, we need to think nationally about life sciences. If Canada wants to be a global leader in this sector, we must address one of our biggest domestic barriers- interprovincial trade restrictions. Currently, Canada operates with fragmented healthcare systems, which hurts us.

Medical data is not easily shared between provinces. Physicians face bureaucratic barriers when trying to practice across provincial lines. This creates inefficiencies and hinders innovation. Canada claims to have a universal healthcare system, but in reality, each province operates in its silo. Some aspects of healthcare in British Columbia are superior, while others in Alberta are stronger. From a cardiology perspective, Alberta’s system is more efficient. We can perform more outpatient procedures than our counterparts in British Columbia, which means patients in B.C. often experience delays in care.

I see where the cowboy vs. hippie stereotype comes from. Albertans tend to be entrepreneurial, risk-takers, and innovators. That does not mean British Columbians are not, but restrictive policies often stifle innovation in certain provinces. Life sciences startups face barriers that prevent them from growing, whether unnecessary regulations, slow licensing processes, or a lack of investment incentives. If there is one major policy shift Canada should prioritize, it is the elimination of interprovincial barriers.

If Europe- a continent with multiple languages, cultures, and political systems- can break down trade barriers between its provinces, Canada should be able to do the same. Canada has more restrictive trade barriers between its provinces than the European Union does between its member states. This is unacceptable.

It is time to implement a free trade agreement covering life sciences and other industries in Canada. This would unify our markets, allow talent to move freely, and accelerate innovation. That should be step one. Next, we must mobilize talent nationally and encourage cross-border collaboration between provinces.

Jacobsen: Will these tariffs impact specific areas within the life sciences sector more than others? With tariffs being implemented across the board, are there specific subfields within life sciences that will be severely impacted while others may experience minimal disruption?

Kapoor: It depends on which products are affected. If radioisotopes are included in the tariffs, that would be catastrophic. Canada does not produce radioisotopes for medical use- we import them entirely from the U.S. These isotopes are essential for cardiac imaging and cancer treatments. If tariffs make them more expensive or less accessible, it will harm patients.

We also do not manufacture medical devices in Canada. The vast majority of diagnostic and treatment devices- from MRI machines to pacemakers- come from American manufacturers. Some small-scale manufacturing is done in Europe, but it is nowhere near enough to replace U.S. imports.

Canada excels in software development for medical applications. We are leaders in AI-driven diagnostics, health data analytics, and medical software innovations. However, even in this area, we depend on U.S. data, computing infrastructure, and partnerships. If tariffs or other trade restrictions disrupt this collaboration, it will slow innovation and increase costs.

Ultimately, the effects will be devastating if these tariffs target critical medical imports. The worst-case scenario involves delays in medical procedures, increased costs for patients, and restricted access to life-saving treatments. That is why the life sciences sector must be exempt from tariffs- this is about human lives, not just economics.

The impact may be less severe in some areas, but it could be significant in medical diagnostics. Items like diabetic supplies, glucose monitors, home healthcare services, and essential medical equipment are largely manufactured in the U.S. and imported into Canada. If tariffs increase costs, we need to find alternative suppliers internationally- which is easier said than done, especially in medical manufacturing.

Pharmaceuticals will also be affected. Many brand-name drugs are manufactured in the U.S., and while Canada produces some generics, we still rely heavily on American manufacturers. Generics might remain stable, but branded medications could become more expensive, leading to supply chain issues. The difficulty is that everything in life sciences is interconnected- it’s hard to predict which areas will suffer most.

I hope we never reach a point where patients have to choose between diabetic medical supplies and home healthcare essentials due to budget cuts caused by tariffs. The entire sector is deeply intertwined, and restrictions on one area will inevitably ripple across the healthcare ecosystem.

Jacobsen: Is there any indication that these tariffs will at least be temporary if they do not include an exemption for life sciences? Could they last only for 2025 or remain in place until the next U.S. election cycle, when a new administration might lift them? Or do you think this is part of a longer-term pattern where the U.S. moves toward imposing broad tariffs across multiple industries, including life sciences?

Kapoor: I hope these tariffs are short-term. I hope they are primarily a political play, a negotiation tactic aimed at domestic audiences, and they do not escalate into lasting trade restrictions.

That said, even if tariffs are eventually lifted, they could still have long-term consequences. Companies that relocate manufacturing overseas in response to tariffs may not return unless significant tax incentives or policy shifts make it financially viable. A brain drain could also occur, with Canadian scientists and life sciences experts moving to countries with more favourable business environments. If that happens, rebuilding Canada’s position in the life sciences sector will take years.

Looking at historical precedent, during President Trump’s first term, tariffs were imposed but later adjusted or lifted as compromises were reached. If that pattern repeats, we could expect a similar outcome this time. I am optimistic that these restrictions will not become permanent, but the uncertainty damages the industry.

Jacobsen: Let’s hope for the best. That concludes all my questions for today, Dr. Kapoor. Thank you for your time- I truly appreciate it. It was great to meet you.

Kapoor: Thank you. It was great meeting you as well. I always try to be honest and insightful, and I hope I provided useful perspectives.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Project Amicus and International LGBTI+ Rights

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/08

David Grasso, founder and CEO of Project Amicus, discusses the organization’s mission to promote LGBTQ+ rights abroad through policy, media, and diplomacy. He highlights the influence of North American advocacy and partnerships, such as with Harvard’s Carr Center for Human Rights Policy. Grasso details decriminalization trends in the Caribbean, the mental health impacts of criminalization, and how grassroots activism fosters change. He addresses corporate influence, geopolitical challenges, and backlash against LGBTQ+ progress. Project Amicus aims to reduce the global criminalization of same-sex relations and push for legal equality, emphasizing strategic advocacy, international pressure, and engagement with diverse stakeholders.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with David Grasso, the founder and CEO of Project Amicus. Project Amicus promotes LGBTQ+ rights abroad and raises awareness of which countries are making positive strides and which still have significant progress to make. I will use “still have work to do” as an euphemistic language. So, the first question is: How does Project Amicus leverage policy innovation to promote LGBTQ+ rights abroad? What successes have you seen so far?

David Grasso: Essentially, we strive to initiate conversations through American levers of power—whether in public policy, media, or diplomacy—to inspire change.

People often overlook the significant influence that North Americans wield through culture, politics, public policy, funding, and the nonprofit sector in shaping the reality of LGBTQ+ people worldwide. That influence is at the core of our mission at Project Amicus.

Our successes include a partnership with a program at Harvard University, where I studied at the Harvard Kennedy School, specifically at the Carr Center for Human Rights Policy and its LGBTQ+ Justice Initiative, which launched a little over a year ago.

This initiative has already sponsored two workshops for activists worldwide, training them in strategies to help them succeed—especially in countries where same-sex relations remain illegal. That is the primary focus of both Project Amicus and the Carr Center.

Currently, many discussions in North America and Western Europe revolve around what we might call second-generation issues, such as transgender rights, reproductive rights, and intersectional protections. However, we focus on the fundamentals: Is same-sex life even legal in a given country? If it is, we support that country’s progress. If not, we leverage the power available to us as North Americans to help change that reality.

Jacobsen: What groundbreaking legal shifts have recently redefined protections for LGBTQ+ communities, and how do these changes compare across different regions?

Grasso: One of the most significant yet underreported developments has been the wave of decriminalization efforts in the Caribbean, particularly over the past few years.

Due to their colonial histories, many Caribbean nations inherited anti-LGBTQ+ laws from British rule. However, in recent years, there has been a strong movement toward decriminalization in several countries.

Notable examples include Barbados, which struck down its anti-sodomy law in 2022, and Trinidad and Tobago, where a high court ruled in 2018 that laws criminalizing same-sex intimacy were unconstitutional.

There is a general pattern in the legal evolution of same-sex relations laws, which typically unfolds in three stages:

  1. In many countries with a British colonial legacy, same-sex relations were historically codified as illegal and remain so if the laws have not been reformed since colonial rule.
  2. Some countries have stopped enforcing these laws, meaning they remain on the books but are no longer actively prosecuted.
  3. The final stage is the formal repeal of these laws through legislative action or court rulings.

Nearly all countries in the Caribbean—aside from a few holdouts—are on this path toward full decriminalization.

We are only a few years away from achieving a Caribbean region free of these outdated and discriminatory laws.

Jacobsen: One thing we should probably note on a personal level is the impact on individuals. What do mental health literature and research tell us about the effects of criminalization—and, conversely, decriminalization—on LGBTQ+ people?

Grasso: It’s a huge deal.

I still remember when I was in college and lived in a state where, until 2003, same-sex relations were still criminalized in the United States. The Supreme Court case Lawrence v. Texas overturned sodomy laws that year, and as I sit here in Texas conducting this interview, it’s remarkable to think that, back then, I could have been arrested for sodomy.

Criminalization creates a culture of fear. It is incredibly difficult to demand acceptance when the state itself claims that any outward expression of LGBTQ+ identity is illegal.

And what does that do to someone’s psychology? By existing, you are treated as an enemy of the state by design. So what does repealing such laws do? It is the first step in a long journey toward full equality.

Right now, at least 64 countries still criminalize same-sex relations—and that number does not even account for places like Russia, which are regressing on LGBTQ+ rights. This is the daily reality for millions of people. And the fight for equality cannot even begin when same-sex relations remain illegal.

Jacobsen: In what ways do grassroots activism and policy reform reinforce each other in advancing LGBTQ+ rights globally?

Grasso: Grassroots activism humanizes the issue.

We all know that when people personally know someone who is LGBTQ+, they are far more likely to support equality. People often say, “I had a different opinion, but knowing you changed my mind.”

This applies broadly—whether you are from a religious background, a sexual minority, or any identity that diverges from the social norm. Or, rather, let’s call it any non-standard identity—”divergence” might not be the right word.

Grassroots activism gives a face to the issue. It humanizes the struggle. And fundamentally, whether in activism, politics, or business, the world is small. But on an individual level, our worlds are even smaller.

Activists play a crucial role because they live this reality. They have skin in the game, and they can show people—including those who may not initially agree with us—that LGBTQ+ individuals are human and deserve equal rights.

Jacobsen: Are governments and international bodies adapting legal frameworks to accommodate the evolving understanding of gender identity and sexual orientation?

Grasso: Well, I don’t know if governments fundamentally operate in any language other than money. Many countries are waking up to the reality that being unfriendly to certain demographics translates into fewer tourism dollars, less trade, and greater opprobrium from the international partners they rely on for aid and economic cooperation. This reality has become even more pronounced with the recent closure of USAID programs.

I think many countries recognize that, while LGBTQ+ rights may be seen as antithetical to their cultural traditions, maintaining discriminatory policies does not make sense from a business perspective—regardless of how they frame the morality of the issue.

We realize this in places like the United Arab Emirates and Saudi Arabia, where tourism boards explicitly state that they welcome LGBTQ+ travellers. That acknowledgment is significant. It signals the first step in a broader transformation because, as more LGBTQ+ tourists visit, the local population is exposed to people who openly express LGBTQ+ identities.

That exposure catalyzes change in societies where progress has historically been difficult.

Jacobsen: How can we leverage corporate and business advocacy to influence LGBTQ+ protections in places where political leadership resists change? I am aware of the draconian anti-LGBTQ+ bill that was recently proposed in Ghana, which had strong backing from American evangelicals. A similar case occurred in Uganda as well.

Grasso: Yes, it’s a major issue.

If you’re interested in a deeper dive, I highly recommend speaking with Dr. Christopher Velasco at Princeton University. He is currently writing a book on the role of the American nonprofit sector in shaping anti-LGBTQ+ legislation worldwide. He travelled to Ghana to interview the people responsible for passing these laws. He is the foremost expert on this topic and would provide invaluable insights.

As for what the business community can do—corporations wield significant influence and can use that leverage to improve conditions.

One of the strongest arguments businesses can make is that they need access to top talent. Any legal framework that restricts LGBTQ+ employees from freely living and working in emerging markets is disastrous for global business operations.

As countries seek to modernize, they need the best and brightest minds from every part of the world. Restricting LGBTQ+ populations—who make up 5–10% of the workforce in many Western nations—means leaving an enormous amount of talent untapped.

Jacobsen: What about internal disagreements within activist groups and organizations? When is it legitimate to create space for those conversations, and when is it more pressing to set differences aside and focus on enacting legal change at the federal or state level?

Grasso: That’s one of the biggest challenges in activism—whether in the United States or abroad. Activists often don’t agree on priorities, and different factions emphasize different aspects of the struggle.

Right now, for example, there is a significant push to separate trans issues from the broader LGBTQ+ rights movement. This is deeply controversial, given the long history of trans activists’ contributions to LGBTQ+ advocacy.

Ultimately, this is an ongoing conversation, and no one has yet figured out the perfect answer. Activist movements evolve, and these debates will continue to shape the direction of advocacy efforts.

Jacobsen: What legal trends are you observing in the West? Are you seeing a parallel between the progress of decolonization and advancements in LGBTQ+ rights in certain regions?

At the same time, we see regression in places like Russia or more authoritarian states like China. Even in large democracies such as India, political blockades sometimes slow progress. Given this diverse international landscape, what are the major positive and negative legal trends that stand out to you?

Grasso: I’m heading to India in two weeks to work with university students there. India recently took a major step forward by decriminalizing same-sex relations in 2018, thanks to the landmark Navtej Singh Johar v. Union of India ruling by the Supreme Court of India.

That decision was a huge milestone for LGBTQ+ rights in the world’s largest democracy, and it’s certainly a positive development.

Overall, we are seeing a global trend toward legalization and liberalization. However, there are notable counterexamples, including Ghana, Uganda, and Russia, where laws have become more restrictive. In addition, there are entire regions—particularly the Middle East and Sub-Saharan Africa—where progress has been extremely slow and resistance to change remains strong.

It’s not just Sub-Saharan Africa; North Africa also remains deeply resistant to reform. Entrenched legal frameworks and cultural conservatism make even small policy shifts incredibly difficult in many of these countries.

Most of the world is moving in the right direction, but unfortunately, some areas are regressing.

Right now, in this geopolitical climate, the situation is unpredictable. As Dr. Velasco often points out, there is a significant amount of money and political interest behind the push to use American power to advance anti-LGBTQ+ movements abroad. That is why staying engaged is more important than ever—starting with advocacy efforts here at home.

Jacobsen: What are the primary factors driving this cultural and legal regression in Africa and the Middle East? There are some broad similarities, but I imagine there are also significant regional differences. What do you see as the key reasons behind these setbacks? Would you say that the Middle East is regressing on LGBTQ+ rights, or is it more a case of resistance to change?

Grasso: We’ve seen any regression in the Middle East. Rather, what we’re witnessing is a strong resistance to change.

Countries considered “modern”—such as Qatar—remain outwardly uninterested in shifting their stance. They view LGBTQ+ rights as antithetical to Islam and their indigenous culture. However, some of their neighbours take a different approach, leading to a divided landscape.

Africa presents a different challenge because most nations there are democracies rather than top-down monarchies like those found in the Middle East. Change is often slower in democratic systems because multiple interest groups are competing for influence simultaneously.

Now, to answer your question—why is there a counter-movement?

When studying the theory of change, it’s clear that every social movement experiences backlash. In fact, backlash often indicates that a movement has made significant progress quickly.

As a 40-year-old gay man, I can say that my life has been split into two completely different halves. The first 20 years were nothing like the second 20 years in terms of societal attitudes toward LGBTQ+ people. That rapid progress inevitably triggers opposition.

Jacobsen: For activists reading this, from your experience, what works that people assume does not? And what does not work that people assume does?

Grasso: That’s a tough question, Scott.

One thing that always works is being kind. However, we’ve lost much of our humanity in how we engage online. Many people cosplay as different versions of themselves on social media, often embracing aggression that they wouldn’t use in real life.

But in activism, human connection carries you far. It is crucial to look your opposition in the eye, acknowledge their humanity, and recognize that they are still human even if they are diametrically opposed to your views.

This element is often lost in activism today. We must treat people with the same respect we demand for ourselves.

What does not work? Honestly, I have no clue. But maintaining our humanity, even in the face of hostility, is one of the most effective strategies we can adopt.

Jacobsen: That’s an important takeaway—everyone must occasionally check in with reality. You mentioned using American power to influence global LGBTQ+ rights. How can diplomatic and economic pressure be used responsibly? And how has it been used irresponsibly? A clear example of irresponsible use would be Ghana’s anti-LGBTQ+ bill, which American evangelical groups with significant financial influence heavily backed. How can these levers of power be used more effectively in the broader interest of human rights?

Grasso: We have to recognize that this is a complex society. In democratic systems, there are always opposing interests at play, making it difficult to predict the future. However, the reality for billions of people worldwide is often shaped by decisions made here—for better or worse.

That is why we must be thoughtful and strategic in engaging with our opposition. Otherwise, the unintended consequences of our actions can manifest in places like Ghana, where external influences have played a major role in shaping anti-LGBTQ+ legislation.

It is critical to maintain an open-door policy with people we disagree with. That includes engaging with Evangelicals, who are often portrayed as a monolithic group but, in reality, hold diverse views. Many Evangelicals today support LGBTQ+ rights and reject conversion therapy, and their numbers are growing.

We cannot simply divide people into those who support us and those who oppose us—the reality is much more nuanced. If we completely shut down dialogue, we risk alienating individuals who might otherwise be open to change, pushing them toward advocacy against LGBTQ+ rights in regions where they still hold influence.

At the same time, engaging in dialogue does not mean surrendering the fight. We must counterbalance anti-LGBTQ+ efforts by investing resources into human rights advocacy in countries like Ghana. We can be strategic and diplomatic while taking firm action to oppose those seeking to roll back rights.

There is a way to walk and chew gum simultaneously when dealing with these issues.

Jacobsen: Or pat your head and rub your stomach at the same time. Now, let’s shift to international protections. What global agreements have served as bulwarks in protecting LGBTQ+ rights? We have institutions like the LGBTI Core Group at the United Nations. While symbolic, these mechanisms don’t always carry as much leverage as we would like. What do you make of their role?

Grasso: The power of international multilateral institutions is clearly declining, so this question does not perfectly align with our current geopolitical reality. That said, just because the world is shifting doesn’t mean we cannot continue to drive progress using the levers of power we still have.

Many people would be shocked to learn that during the Trump administration, there was a concerted effort—led by Ric Grenell, the former U.S. Ambassador to Germany and Director of National Intelligence—to pressure countries to decriminalize same-sex relations.

Of course, that does not negate the very real setbacks that the LGBTQ+ community faced under that administration. However, it is important to recognize that progress can still be made even in challenging political environments. We must remain open-minded to opportunities for advancing LGBTQ+ rights, even in situations that seem adverse at first glance.

Jacobsen: What do you hope to accomplish through Project Amicus in the next administration?

Grasso: Our primary goal is to see more countries decriminalize same-sex relations.

That is the fundamental issue we are focused on. We want to see more governments recognize that, regardless of their wealth or power, they cannot call themselves modern nations if they continue to persecute LGBTQ+ people.

A nation’s true value is measured by how it treats its most vulnerable populations—minorities, older people, children, and LGBTQ+ individuals. A country that still criminalizes same-sex relationships cannot be considered a civilized society by modern human rights standards.

We hope to see that list of 64 countries shrink significantly. Our mission is to bring more nations into the global fold—so that we can ultimately live in a world where being LGBTQ+ is tolerated and fully accepted.

Jacobsen: David, thank you for your time and insights today. It was a pleasure speaking with you.

Grasso: Likewise. Thanks, Scott.

Jacobsen: Take care!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Canada Invests $2.7M in Climate Change Adaptation

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/07

Natural Resources Canada is committed to improving the quality of life of Canadians by ensuring the country’s abundant natural resources are developed sustainably, competitively and inclusively. Canada’s Climate Change Adaptation Program (CCAP) invests $2.7 million in five projects across Northern Ontario, leveraging an additional $1.8 million in partner investments. These initiatives enhance climate resilience through workforce training, Indigenous-led adaptation tools, and professional development. With $6.6 billion committed to adaptation since 2015, Canada aims to reduce climate risks, strengthen infrastructure, and protect communities. Research suggests that every $1 spent on adaptation saves up to $15 in long-term disaster recovery costs, reinforcing the economic benefits of proactive climate measures. The National Adaptation Strategy (NAS) integrates these efforts, fostering a sustainable, climate-resilient economy nationwide.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Are these investments by Canada’s investment in climate change adaptation also going to help reach net zero by 2050? 

Natural Resources Canada: The focus of this funding is climate change adaptation. Climate change adaptation focuses on reducing risks associated with climate change impacts. Along with climate change mitigation, which focuses on avoiding or minimizing greenhouse gas emissions, these efforts are necessary to protect communities and industries from the worst impacts of climate change. Adaptation is about reducing risks and embracing new opportunities related to climate change for Canadians, communities, businesses, and the economy more broadly, and being better prepared for current and future changes in climate through proactive planning and action.  

Climate change adaptation actions often generate a range of co-benefits (e.g., flood protection, erosion prevention, etc.), which can also include reducing GHG emissions. Restoring natural ecosystems like wetlands, forests, and peatlands not only helps communities adapt to climate impacts but also sequesters carbon. Every $1 spent on climate change adaptation measures saves up to $15 in terms of the long-term costs involved in addressing climate change and extreme weather events, based on research by the Canadian Climate Institute (Damage Control: Reducing the Costs of Climate Impacts in Canada). 

Investing in climate-resilient infrastructure reduces the risk of damage from extreme weather, which in turn minimizes the carbon footprint associated with rebuilding and repairing. 

Jacobsen: For the five projects in northern Ontario under the Climate Change Adaptation Program (CCAP), how much was invested for each and in total? 

Natural Resources Canada: A total of $2.7 million in NRCan funding was provided for these five projects.  

NRCan contributions leverage investments by project partners that total $1.8 million. The total value of these five projects, including in-kind contributions, is more than $4.5 million.  

backgrounder was included in the news release (Canada Invests in Climate Change Adaptation to Keep Communities Safe in Northern Ontario and Across Canada), which includes the project details below. Please find a brief overview of each project below. 

  • The CanAdapt: Advancing a Climate-Ready Workforce Through Courses and Networks project ($1,300,000 in NRCan funding) will enhance access to climate change adaptation education, training, resources, and networks for professionals through the online CanAdapt portal. 
  • The Partnership for Indigenous Climate Change Adaptation GeoHub and Microcredential Capacity Building Tools project ($546,195 in NRCan funding) will support staff in First Nation communities and Councils to assess climate change impacts and risks, develop adaptation plans, and identify adaptation actions. 
  • The Professions Advancing Adaptation Competencies (PAAC): An Initiative of Canada’s National Engineering, Planning, Accounting and Landscape Architecture Associations project ($442,851 in NRCan funding) will help national professional associations integrate climate change adaptation into the profiles and responsibilities of specific professions (e.g., engineers, planners, accountants, landscape architects).  
  • The Analysis and Reporting on Lessons Learned from Adaptation Implementation project ($259,045 in NRCan funding) will advance adaptation in the natural resource sectors by assessing and sharing best practices and lessons learned from previously implemented adaptation actions.  
  • The Development of a National Climate Adaptation and Resilience Professional Development Program for Forest Professionals project ($190,687 in NRCan funding) will advance climate change adaptation in the forestry sector through targeted adaptation training for forest professionals across Canada. 

Jacobsen: Which officials and Members of Parliament have been integral to this funding and its announcement? 

Natural Resources Canada: This funding was announced by Marc G. Serré, Parliamentary Secretary to the Honourable Jonathan Wilkinson, along with Member 

of Parliament Viviane Lapointe and Member of Parliament Anthony Rota. Their ridings are in Northern Ontario, where several of the proponents leading these projects are located (although the focus for many of these projects are national and not limited to Northern Ontario).  

Jacobsen: What extreme weather events and long-term climate impacts were the reasons for these investments by Canada?  

Natural Resources Canada: There was no specific extreme weather event that was the reason for these investments. Climate change impacts are regional in nature, and each community and business have their own needs and considerations. NRCan’s climate change adaptation actions are designed to be flexible and support regions, communities, and businesses, and the professionals that they rely on, in addressing their individual needs and priorities. 

NRCan has been working on climate change adaptation for over two decades, providing science to strengthen understanding of how our lands, forests, and coasts will change with the climate, convening experts and leaders, and delivering programs that help businesses and communities acquire and apply the knowledge, skills, and tools they need for adaptation.  

We know that Canadians are facing more frequent and extreme climate events such as floods, wildfires and heat waves, as well as gradual climate change impacts like thawing permafrost and rising sea levels, as detailed in Canada’s Changing Climate Report. These challenges affect the quality of life, health, environment and economy of communities across the country.   

We also know that costs associated with damage from extreme weather events in Canada are significant and rising. According to the Canada in a Changing Climate: National Issues Report, the scale of costs suggests that households, communities, businesses, and infrastructure are not currently prepared for current climate conditions and variability. 

Adapting to a changing climate is important to build climate resilient businesses and communities and protect Canadians’ homes and livelihoods. Investing in climate change adaptation also means that Canada can better plan for, withstand, and recover from climate impacts and reduce disaster recovery costs.  

Adaptation helps to avoid future costs associated with climate change impacts and ensures long-term viability of assets and investments.  

Additional information resources for Canadians: Canadians can access, visualize, and analyze climate data, and access information and tools to support adaptation planning and decision-making atclimatedata.ca. This platform is a free open access climate data portal produced collaboratively by the country’s leading climate organizations and supported, in part, by the Government of Canada.  Canadians can also access information on climate change adaptation actions through the  Map of Adaptation Actions, a collaboration between Environment and Climate Change Canada (ECCC) and NRCan. The Map is an interactive and searchable tool housing a collection of climate change adaptation examples that provide useful information to decision-makers and those taking action on climate change adaptation.  

Jacobsen: What are the expected outcomes from CCAP projects? 

Natural Resources Canada: CCAP is co-funding projects across Canada that enhance skills for adapting to climate change, advance adaptation in the natural resource sectors (forestry, mining, and energy), and expand knowledge on the economics of adaptation and on key emerging issues.  

NRCan works to help Canadian communities and industries adapt to climate change. To be more resilient to the impacts of climate change, they need to include adaptation in their plans and strategies and implement climate adaptation measures that address their region and sector-specific risks.  

Communities and industries rely on skilled professionals that have access to adaptation-related tools and information and know how to use these to inform their plans, strategies and overall adaptation decision-making.  

CCAP-supported projects equip these skilled professionals with tools, information and knowledge to support adaptation decision-making and actions by: 

  • Increasing access to and use of information, tools, and resources to inform adaptation actions (e.g., guidance documents, case studies, business cases, economic tools, good practices, guidelines for meaningful engagement).  
  • Enhancing adaptation knowledge and skills among Canada’s workforce and professionals (e.g., new requirements for professionals, delivery of training, peer-learning networks, adaptation in post-secondary curricula). 

Ultimately, these skilled professionals play a key role in increasing the number of Canadian communities and businesses that are identifying and implementing actions and helping them adapt to a changing climate.  

Additional information about CCAP and project updates are available on the NRCan website: https://natural-resources.canada.ca/climate-change/climate-change-adaptation/climate-change-adaptation-program  

Please find some examples of previous success of the CCAP, below: 

  • CCAP builds on two decades of past NRCan adaptation research, analysis and programming that has advanced our understanding of climate change impacts, approaches to adaptation, and how to help businesses and communities adapt to a changing climate. Many of the assessments, adaptation tools and resources continue to benefit the natural resource sectors.  
  • NRCan supported projects led by Electricity Canada (EC) that produced Adaptation guidance for the electricity sector. 85% of EC’s members have used these guidance tools and 60% have completed detailed climate change risk assessments within their organizations. 
  • With support from NRCan, the Mining Association of Canada (MAC) produced a Guide on Climate Change Adaptation in the Mining Sector. This guide helps mining companies to plan and report on their management of climate change impacts. 
  • NRCan supported Engineers Canada in developing the Public Infrastructure Engineering Vulnerability Committee (PIEVC) Protocol – a risk assessment tool for Engineers that includes training, a practitioners’ network, and many case studies showing how the tool was implemented.  
  • The tool has also been expanded to include options for single assets, groups of assets, PIEVC green, and an Indigenous focus.  
  • They now have international partnerships with Germany (GIZ) and are using the tool around the world.  
  • The Climate Risk Institute (CRI) and the Institute for Catastrophic Loss Reduction (ICLR) are now delivering the program, but the work started with Engineers Canada in 2005. 
  • NRCan funded the University of British Columbia Faculty of Forestry’s Climate Vulnerability and Adaptation Micro-Certificate – a flexible, online program that provides working forest professionals (e.g., foresters, technicians, tree planters, policy makers) with an understanding of climate science, vulnerability and adaptation, and how to apply both the theory and the science of vulnerability assessments in their work.  
  • NRCan provided funding to the Stewardship Centre for British Columbia for the Green Shores program. Launched in 2010, the Green Shores program encourages adoption of sustainability principles in the design and construction of projects on coastal and lake shores. Professionals and landowners can access tools for planning, design, and construction that minimizes the environmental impacts and costs of their projects. 
  • The Manitoba Climate Resilience Training Project, funded by the NRCan, created tailored approaches to integrate climate risk and opportunities into decision-making and planning within the Northern Business, Indigenous, Planning, and Infrastructure sectors in Manitoba. The project included development and delivery of a suite of training and capacity building courses. 

Jacobsen: How will the $2.7 million fit within the broader investment framework? 

Natural Resources Canada: The Government of Canada remains committed to advancing climate change adaptation to reduce risks and protect Canadians, communities, businesses, and the economy more broadly, as well as prepare for current and future impacts of climate change. That’s why Canada has invested over $6.6 billion in climate change adaptation since 2015, including $2.1 billion in new commitments since Fall 2022.   

NRCan’s Climate Change Adaptation Program (CCAP) (2022-2027) is a $39.5 million initiative that advances the National Adaptation Strategy, along with the Climate-Resilient Coastal Communities Program (CRCC), by supporting Canada’s regions and sectors to adapt to a changing climate by: 

  • supporting decision-makers in identifying and implementing adaptation actions;  
  • enhancing adaptation knowledge and skills among Canada’s workforce;  
  • and increasing access to climate change adaptation tools and resources. 

Jacobsen: How much long-term cost saving is associated with each $1 spent on climate change adaptation measures? 

Natural Resources Canada: Every $1 spent on climate change adaptation measures saves up to $15 in terms of the long-term costs involved in addressing climate change and extreme weather events, based on research by the Canadian Climate Institute (Damage Control: Reducing the Costs of Climate Impacts in Canada). 

According to the Canada in a Changing Climate: Synthesis Report, there is a strong business case for adaptation, with the benefits (including avoided costs) gained through adaptation measures generally exceeding the costs of implementation. For instance, a review of 60 Canadian adaptation projects found that “soft-engineering” actions, such as beach nourishment, were more efficient investments than “hard-engineering” measures, such as concrete walls and rock armour. Soft-engineering solutions saved on average $10 for each $1 invested, compared with savings of $3 for each $1 invested in hard-engineering. 

In 2024, for the first time in Canadian history, insured damage caused by severe weather events surpassed $8 billion, according to Catastrophe Indices and Quantification Inc. The previous record was $6 billion from 2016, following the Fort McMurray wildfires. (Insurance Bureau of Canada, 2024 shatters record for costliest year for severe weather-related losses in Canadian history at $8.5 billion

Jacobsen: How does the National Adaptation Strategy (NAS) connect to the initiatives and funding programs? 

Natural Resources Canada: Canada released its first National Adaptation Strategy (NAS) in June 2023. It provides a whole-of-society plan focused on protecting Canadian lives and building more resilient and prosperous communities.  

NRCan is also supporting coastal regions across Canada to adapt to climate challenges through its $41 million Climate-Resilient Coastal Communities Program (2023-2028) (CRCC) under the Government of Canada Adaptation Action Plan (GOCAAP), linked to the National Adaptation Strategy. 

Both the Climate-Resilient Coastal Communities Program (2023-2028) (CRCC) and Climate Change Adaptation Program (CCAP) (2022-2027) contribute to the goals of the National Adaptation Strategy by supporting initiatives that help to build climate resilience in Canadian communities and industries.  

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Pushing Back Against Fetal Personhood Laws

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/07

Pregnancy Justice, a legal advocacy organization, works to protect pregnant individuals from criminalization and state control. Caitlyn Garcia, a staff attorney, discusses how fetal personhood laws assert that embryos or fetuses have legal rights, leading to the criminalization of pregnancy outcomes. These laws restrict abortion, contraception, IVF, and prenatal care while increasing surveillance and prosecution. Garcia highlights the ideological roots of these policies and their role in reinforcing traditional gender roles. She advocates for litigation, legislative reform, and public education to counteract these laws and emphasizes the broader struggle for reproductive justice and autonomy in the U.S.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Caitlyn Garcia, a staff attorney at Pregnancy Justice. To ensure my facts are correct, Pregnancy Justice is a legal advocacy organization dedicated to ensuring that no one loses their rights due to pregnancy or the capacity for pregnancy.

The organization focuses on protecting pregnant individuals, particularly those most vulnerable to state control and criminalization, such as low-income individuals, people of color, and those who use drugs. Through litigation, policy advocacy, and public education, Pregnancy Justice challenges laws and policies that undermine reproductive rights, including fetal personhood laws, the criminalization of pregnancy outcomes, and restrictions on abortion, contraception, and IVF. The organization works to safeguard bodily autonomy and reproductive justice in the post-Dobbs legal landscape. So, in the United States’ legal context, how is fetal personhood defined, and how is this concept used to justify laws that restrict or deny reproductive rights?

Caitlyn Garcia: Fetal personhood is a radical legal doctrine that underlies abortion bans, the criminalization of pregnancy, and certain civil and criminal laws. It is the idea that a fetus or embryo has legal rights that supersede the rights of the pregnant person and therefore requires state protection. We have seen this doctrine applied in numerous cases across the country, as Pregnancy Justice has represented individuals in multiple states.

For example, fetal personhood is the basis of legal arguments seeking to grant frozen embryos legal protections. Because of this, when medical providers dispose of frozen embryos, there is significant legal uncertainty. Could they be held civilly or criminally liable? Fetal personhood is dangerous because it creates ambiguity in the law and generates conflicts between the alleged rights of the embryo or fetus and the rights of the pregnant person—ultimately undermining the rights of the pregnant person.

Jacobsen: Fetal personhood is based on the idea that personhood begins at the moment of conception. However, this is fundamentally a religious and ideological position, not a medical or scientific one. So, how might fetal personhood laws impact access to prenatal care, abortion, IVF, and contraception?

Garcia: Definitely. Because fetal personhood is the foundation of many abortion bans—asserting that the fetus requires legal protection—access to abortion is often severely restricted. This contributes to maternal health care deserts, where individuals lack access to essential reproductive health services. Many states have also passed laws explicitly criminalizing abortion.

As a result, individuals who seek an abortion may face criminal prosecution. Pregnancy Justice released a report, Pregnancy as a Crime, in September 2024. In that report, we documented the highest number of pregnancy-related criminalization cases in a single year since Dobbs v. Jackson Women’s Health Organization. We recorded 210 cases in which people were criminally charged for their pregnancy outcomes. These charges included allegations related to substance use during pregnancy, miscarriage, stillbirth, and abortion. (More info: New Pregnancy Justice Report Shows High Number of Pregnancy-Related Prosecutions in the Year After Dobbs | Pregnancy Justice)

We found that five cases in that report specifically referenced abortion. In those cases, either the individual had an abortion, or merely contemplating an abortion was used against them. I am currently working on a case in which an individual’s past contemplation of abortion is being used against her in a murder case—arguing that because she previously considered having an abortion, it indicates intent to harm a newborn or a living child later. This is extremely dangerous.

However, we cannot focus solely on abortion, as that would overlook the broader issue of pregnancy criminalization, which affects individuals in multiple ways. We need to separate access to reproductive health care from punitive measures, ensuring that people can consider their options without fear that their decisions might later be used against them in a legal case.

Jacobsen: Beyond the laws themselves, how does this lead to increased criminalization and state surveillance of pregnant individuals?

Garcia: Definitely. In many cases, for example, a mother with a substance use disorder may seek care at a hospital or from a doctor, hoping to receive medical support, including prenatal care. However, she may be subjected to drug testing—often without her consent. If she tests positive, she may then be reported to Child Protective Services (CPS), leading to a family court case. In some situations, law enforcement becomes involved, escalating the situation into a criminal case.

This legal entanglement discourages individuals from disclosing critical information to their health care providers—whether about substance use or other medical conditions—out of fear that it may be used against them. Additionally, the collaboration between the medical system, CPS, and law enforcement fosters distrust in health care providers and increases surveillance and intrusion into the lives of pregnant individuals and their families.

Jacobsen: One issue that is not discussed as much is the derivative effects of this atmosphere of criminalization—particularly the psychological toll, stress, and mental health impacts. Do you hear about this from individuals seeking your assistance?

Garcia: Definitely. We see this distrust in the medical system firsthand. Many of our clients feel betrayed after being drug tested without their consent, leading them to avoid medical providers altogether. Some of these cases result in CPS investigations, forcing individuals to endure months of home visits—both scheduled and unannounced.

We have also seen this occur during the COVID-19 pandemic, which was already a period of heightened anxiety. Despite this, individuals were still forced to open their homes for government inspections, adding to their distress.

In addition to criminal and family court cases, we are also witnessing a breakdown of trust within communities. A particularly troubling trend has emerged in cases documented in our Harming Fathersreport, in which fathers are being deemed neglectful if they fail to control their pregnant partner’s behavior. For example, a father may try to support his pregnant partner by helping her access substance use treatment, but if the court determines that his actions were not sufficient, he may still be charged with neglect—on the grounds that he failed to prevent harm to the fetus.

This is another example of fetal personhood being weaponized in the legal system, reinforcing the dangerous notion that a fetus has independent rights that override the rights of the pregnant person.

Jacobsen: But then, there is distrust and a breakdown within families themselves. If one partner is deemed neglectful for not controlling the actions of another partner, how can they rely on or trust one another? This creates tension within families, and it is happening not just in certain states—it is happening in New York as well.

I have conducted interviews with colleagues in Ghana, where we discussed Ghana and Uganda. In both countries, two of the most regressive LGBTQ+ bills in the world were posed. These bills received financing and support primarily from American evangelicals, who influenced the political and legal landscapes in ways that attempted to undermine human rights.

Similarly, in the United States, the origins of fetal personhood laws can also be traced back. There is a clear pattern of ideological and financial backing behind these regressive legal frameworks. Running the clock back here, where do fetal personhood laws originate?

Garcia: We have seen these laws embedded in state legal systems for decades. Alabama is a prime example. In 2013, the Alabama Supreme Court ruled that fetuses are children at any stage of gestation under the state’s criminal and child abuse laws. This decision opened the door to pregnancy-related prosecutions.

More recently, in 2024, an Alabama court ruled that frozen embryos are children or, at the very least, should be legally protected as such. This ruling set a precedent that could be used to further criminalize pregnancy-related decisions.

In states like Alabama, existing laws are being manipulated to criminalize pregnancy. For example:

  • Chemical endangerment of a child law: Originally intended to protect children from being exposed to illicit substances in places like meth labs, these laws are now being applied to pregnant individuals. Prosecutors have equated the womb to a drug lab, arguing that pregnancy while using substances constitutes endangerment.
  • Mississippi’s aggravated domestic violence laws: Initially designed to protect individuals from harm, these laws have been repurposed to prosecute pregnant individuals who use substances—on the grounds that they are causing harm to their fetuses.

These examples demonstrate how laws that were never originally intended to regulate pregnancy are now weaponized against pregnant individuals. The broader trend of pregnancy criminalization dates back many years, but its use has accelerated in recent times.

Jacobsen: What can be done legally and through policy advocacy? As a Canadian, I recognize that my commentary comes from an external perspective, but there are three possible paths forward: Slow the spread, halt their enforcement, or reverse these laws

Garcia: In legal and policy advocacy, there are key strategies that can be used to fight back:

  • Litigation: Civil rights organizations can challenge fetal personhood laws as unconstitutional, arguing that they violate due process and bodily autonomy.
  • Legislative advocacy: Advocates can push for state-level protections that explicitly prevent pregnancy criminalization and repeal existing fetal personhood laws.
  • Public education and awareness: Raising public awareness about the consequences of these laws can shift public opinion, which in turn pressures lawmakers.
  • Intersectional coalition-building: Collaborating with reproductive rights, racial justice, and civil liberties organizations can strengthen opposition efforts.

Ultimately, the fight against fetal personhood laws is part of a larger struggle for reproductive justice. It requires legal, legislative, and grassroots mobilization to ensure that pregnant individuals are not criminalized for their reproductive choices.

We saw an example of positive policy change in Hennepin County, where the prosecutor’s office announced that it would no longer pursue criminal charges against pregnant individuals for substance use. In a sweeping decision, they determined that pregnant individuals need care, maternal health services, and medical assistance, rather than punishment for substance use or seeking treatment. This was a major step toward reversing the harms caused by previous prosecutions. Additionally, the office stated that it would review and address past cases, providing a pathway for individuals previously charged to seek relief.

This demonstrates that prosecutors can take action to reverse past harms caused by pregnancy criminalization. Prosecutors need to recognize that their intentions to “protect” individuals often have the opposite effect, leading to harm instead. This is particularly evident in Mississippi, where aggravated domestic violence laws have been misused against pregnant individuals. Legal professionals must critically assess how existing laws impact communities and consider whether certain legal applications should be abandoned or repealed entirely—as was done in Hennepin County.

Jacobsen: Where do you see the most pushback against efforts to challenge fetal personhood laws?

Garcia: I cannot pinpoint a single location where resistance is strongest because we see pushback in numerous states across a wide range of cases. You might assume that in a state with constitutional protections for reproductive rights, such as Michigan, these types of prosecutions would not happen. However, we have seen cases in Michigan where individuals have been charged with murder after experiencing a stillbirth—despite the state’s legal protections for reproductive freedom.

Much of this resistance stems from a lack of education. Many prosecutors believe they are protecting fetuses, but in reality, their actions harm pregnant individuals and their families instead. Rather than offering protection, these prosecutions traumatize people, criminalize pregnancy outcomes, and worsen already difficult situations.

The pushback often comes from officials who believe they are acting with good intentions but are operating under misinformation, nonfactual legal reasoning, or faulty premises. Unfortunately, these misguided policies cause real harm—even when framed as “protective” measures.

Jacobsen: This pattern of state intervention into private reproductive decisions is not new. For example, under Nicolae Ceaușescu’s regime in Romania, the government enacted Decree 770 in July 1966, which severely restricted abortion in an effort to increase birth rates. The law mandated that women have a minimum number of children, subjected them to routine government inspections, and created a system of surveillance over their reproductive choices.

This is a clear example of how state control over pregnancy can lead to oppressive and long-lasting intergenerational harm. While the American case is distinct in many ways, it is striking how policies around reproductive rights can shift drastically depending on political changes and ideological agendas.

Garcia: Another key issue is that many of these prosecutions are not backed by science. In many cases, there is no medical or scientific support for the claims being made against pregnant individuals. Criminalizing pregnancy outcomes is often based on ideology rather than medical evidence, making these policies even more dangerous. At the end of the day, the legal system should not be punishing people based on pseudoscience or political agendas—especially when it comes to reproductive health.

Jacobsen: I think there’s a strong analogy to be made here. If you look at the creationism and intelligent design cases, there was a clear attempt to bypass scientific review and use the legal system to push religious ideology into high school science classrooms. These efforts were ultimately defeated through lawsuits, including some prominent ones. I think a similar dynamic is at play here.

Garcia: Legal challenges are essential to push back against fetal personhood laws, but litigation is costly. I also want to add some context to your point. If you step back and take a wider lens, it becomes clear that this is about much more than just “protecting fetuses”—even though that is the justification given. When we examine broader legislative trends, we see lawmakers pushing for policies that reinforce traditional gender roles.

For example:

  • Some lawmakers are now proposing the elimination of no-fault divorce.
  • There has been a rollback of affirmative action and DEI initiatives.
  • The pushback against racial and gender equity programs is accelerating.

It is critical to recognize that people of color are not the only beneficiaries of these programs. When you look at the full picture, the underlying agenda becomes clear: there is an effort to push women back into traditional roles—into a subservient position focused on childbearing. 

Jacobsen: This goes beyond just promoting traditional motherhood—it is an idyllicized or romanticized vision of motherhood that ignores reality. This reminds me of Margaret Atwood’s comments about how she incorporated Nicolae Ceaușescu’s policies into The Handmaid’s Tale. Under Ceaușescu’s regime, women were forced to have children, but without state support. This is the same contradiction we see today:

  • The state pushes for more births but refuses to invest in health care, education, or family support.

Garcia: This issue is not just about whether women want children or how many children they want—it is about controlling their choices. The long-term effects of these policies are devastating, particularly for low-income individuals and marginalized communities.

The long-term consequences of forced birth policies have been well-documented in other countries and historical contexts. Countries that have restricted reproductive rights without providing adequate social support have seen generations of children born into poverty, with limited access to education, health care, and stable family structures.

Jacobsen: This is not speculation—we have concrete evidence from history that these policies create systemic, intergenerational harm. And the people who suffer the most are those who already lack family wealth, decent income, and access to essential services.

Garcia: You are absolutely right—fetal personhood laws are just one piece of a much larger, coordinated strategy. The regressive policy agenda is multi-pronged, and many people focus only on abortion rights, missing the broader legal shifts happening in parallel. This is why it is essential to connect the dots between:

  • Abortion bans
  • The criminalization of pregnancy outcomes
  • The erosion of protections for women’s autonomy
  • Broader legal changes that restrict gender and racial equity initiatives

For decades, the criminalization of pregnant individuals for substance use has been used as a backdoor method to control and punish them. However, every major medical and public health organization opposes these policies because they do not create a safe environment where people can seek care.

These laws discourage pregnant individuals from seeking medical help. Instead of promoting health and safety, they create fear and uncertainty, making it less likely that people will feel safe discussing their medical needs with providers.

At the end of the day, these policies are not rooted in medical science—they are ideological tools designed to enforce a specific social order. That is why the fight against fetal personhood laws must be part of a broader movement for reproductive justice, gender equality, and human rights.

If you are pregnant and struggling with substance use, Suboxone is one of the recommended medications for treatment. But if you cannot access it, what happens? You may avoid seeking care altogether. And when that happens, pregnancy outcomes worsen—not just for the pregnant person, but also for the fetus and newborn. This leads to higher rates of maternal and infant complications.

There is a report you might want to reference called State-Created Harm, which examined the consequences of Tennessee’s fetal assault law. In 2014, Tennessee explicitly criminalized substance use during pregnancy. However, the law was so harmful that it was allowed to sunset after only two years. The data showed an increase in fetal and infant deaths because pregnant individuals were afraid to be honest with their health care providers or avoided medical care entirely.

From a Canadian perspective, this situation is shocking for two reasons:

  1. Canada has an integrated public health care system.
    • While there are challenges—such as doctor shortages and immigration-related pressures—there is universal access to medical care.
    • We also have a partially implemented national pharmacare program, which reduces financial barriers to prescription medications. In contrast, the U.S. system creates enormous disparities in access to care.
  2. Medical decisions should remain between a physician and their patient.
    • What happens between a trained medical professional and a pregnant individual should be a private medical matter—not something dictated by policy or law.
    • The intrusion of legal and state intervention into these decisions is a serious violation of privacy and autonomy.

Another problem is that hospitals and medical providers are mandated reporters, meaning they believe they are legally required to report certain cases. However, hospital policies themselves can be examined and changed.

For example, we have seen cases where a pregnant individual tested positive for opioids—only for it to be traced back to eating poppy seeds. If the hospital had properly reviewed its testing thresholds, it could have prevented unnecessary harm. Similarly, some patients test positive for a substance they have a valid prescription for, yet the result is still used against them.

Jacobsen: I have interviewed Dr. Gordon Guyatt, one of the most-cited epidemiologists in the world and a co-founder of Evidence-Based Medicine (EBM). In 1991, he co-authored a paper introducing EBM, which has since been widely adopted in medical decision-making.

One key point he has emphasized is that countries with national health care systems prioritize equity in health care access. This is evident in Western Europe and North America—outside of the United States.

In contrast, the United States places greater emphasis on individual privacy or autonomy, which can sometimes come at the expense of equitable health care access. This contradiction—criminalizing pregnancy while also valuing autonomy—reveals deeper issues in U.S. health policy.

The American emphasis on autonomy shifts the focus toward private health care rather than public health care. However, there is little evidence to suggest that private health care systems are more efficient or provide better services than public health care. Additionally, private systems cannot take full advantage of economies of scale in the way that national health care and national pharmacare programs can.

What cultural barriers do you see in challenging fetal personhood laws within the broader American value system? I see this as part of the argument that life begins at conception, which is fundamentally a religious and socially conservative viewpoint. These differences in values and preferences influence health care policy across advanced industrial economies.

So, how do you effectively challenge fetal personhood laws in a context where significant portions of the American population hold a different set of values and preferences compared to other high-income nations?

Garcia: Absolutely. Autonomy and privacy are deeply embedded in American values—particularly in medical privacy and patient confidentiality. However, in many of our cases, we see privacy violations that contradict these values.

For example:

  • Hospitals reporting patients to Child Protective Services (CPS) without informing them.
  • Medical providers sharing private medical information without consent.
  • Pregnant individuals believing their information was confidential, only to face surveillance and legal consequences.

The tension is that this sharing of private medical information is not being used to support families—it is leading to family policing and surveillance. Instead of protecting individuals, it creates additional harm.

This is why many advocates oppose mandated reporting in these contexts. It is not being implemented in a way that helps families—it is being used to criminalize pregnancy outcomes and restrict reproductive autonomy.

There is a societal tension between:

  • A desire to “protect” families and fetuses.
  • A commitment to respecting autonomy and individual decision-making.

At the end of the day, we must separate punishment from health care. If pregnant individuals fear criminalization, they will avoid seeking medical care—which worsens health outcomes for both them and their families.

Privacy protections, such as HIPAA, should ensure that medical records remain confidential and are not used for surveillance or prosecution. If patients trust that their information will not be shared with law enforcement or CPS, they are more likely to seek care and have better health outcomes.

One of the key contradictions in this debate is the gap between the American ideal of self-determination and the reality of reproductive control.

In theory:

  • The United States prides itself on individual freedom and self-determination.
  • Americans value privacy, autonomy, and the right to make personal choices.

In practice:

  • Pregnant individuals are being criminalized for their medical decisions.
  • Mandated reporting is leading to surveillance, not support.
  • Reproductive rights are increasingly restricted, contradicting the rhetoric of personal freedom.

This contradiction—claiming to champion autonomy while simultaneously imposing reproductive control—is at the heart of the issue. At the end of the day, privacy should be a tool for protecting individuals, not a selective value used to justify harmful policies.

But then, as soon as a fetus is involved, the entire framework shifts. Suddenly, if you do not have the capacity to be pregnant, these policies no longer apply to you. However, if you are a person of color, low-income, or otherwise marginalized, the state intervenes and dictates what you can and cannot do with your own body.

Another issue at odds with this is the American tendency to rely on the criminal legal system for everything.

  • If there is a health emergency, people call 911.
  • If someone is experiencing a mental health crisis, people call the police.
  • If there is a pregnancy-related issue, the criminal legal system steps in instead of the health care system.

But the police are not trained for these situations. That is not their role—yet, for some reason, they are frequently the default response.

This one-size-fits-all approach is harmful. We should not be using law enforcement as the primary response to:

  • Pregnancy and substance use.
  • The opioid crisis affecting pregnant individuals.
  • Medical conditions that require specialized care—not criminalization.

The increased opioid-related deaths among pregnant individuals are further proof that what is needed is care, not punishment.

We must completely separate medical care, pregnancy and reproductive rights, access to abortion, from the criminal legal system.

Jacobsen: America is an extremely litigious society. As the saying goes—maybe the solution is to just declare war on it. That seems to be the go-to strategy in the U.S. Whether it’s the War on Drugs, the War on Crime, or the War on Poverty, the framing is often about punitive measures.

But as we have seen in the last few weeks, this approach does not work. If anything, the language and framing of these policies matter just as much as their content. So, what should I be asking next?

Garcia: At the end of the day:

  • Health care must be separated from punishment.
  • Pregnant individuals must be allowed to make decisions for their own bodies and families.
  • The state should not be intervening in private medical decisions.
  • Autonomy must be protected, not restricted.

We also need to pay attention to what is coming next. The attacks on reproductive rights are not happening in isolation. The same forces targeting pregnant individuals are also targeting trans and nonbinary people, and other marginalized communities This is not just a single issue—it is part of a larger system of control over bodily autonomy.

This is an attack on all of our clients. These issues are deeply interconnected, and that is an important takeaway. This is not just about abortion. This is about reproductive justice as a whole. Pregnancy criminalization is a key part of this broader issue and must be actively fought against That is exactly what we are doing at Pregnancy Justice.

Jacobsen: I want to share a quick anecdote.

Last year, I took an Amtrak trip across the United States, traveling from Montreal to New York, Boston, Atlanta, Charleston, New Orleans, Chicago, Los Angeles, and Seattle—a journey that lasted three weeks.

Along the way, I met a wide range of Americans. One person I met was a cowboy who owned 400 acres of land, which had been gifted to his family by the King of Spain over 400 years ago.

Another person who had my seat, I said, “You can take my seat if you want. I’ll be working in the snack cart on my laptop.” They replied, “Nah, boo. I am Black. I am trans. I am six months pregnant. I don’t want any weirdo sitting next to me.” America is an incredibly diverse place.

It is important to keep in mind that these laws and policies have real, explicit consequences. Organizations must consider not just the legal aspects of these issues, but also the real-world impact on people’s lives. Many of these policies lack scientific evidence, and people often do not reflect deeply enough on the philosophical foundations of their beliefs.

Garcia: Scott, if you have additional questions, I’d be happy to follow up. Thank you so much—it was great having you here today.

Jacobsen: Enjoy your chaotic America and occasional good weather.

Garcia: Haha, thank you! Take care. 

Jacobsen: Ciao.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Pure Olive Oil and the Mediterranean Diet

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/06

Manuela Barzan is a professional with extensive experience in designing and coordinating projects aimed at promoting tourism, locally produced food products, and traditional crafts. She has served as the Project Coordinator for the “I Love Fruit & Veg from Europe” initiative, focusing on increasing exports of European fruits and vegetables.  Additionally, she has been involved in the “Pure Olive Oil from Europe” project, which aims to promote the export and consumption of European olive oil in Canada. Her work emphasizes the development and promotion of European agricultural products in international markets.The Pure Olive Oil from Europe project, co-funded by the European Union and promoted by L’Olivicola Cosentina, aims to increase awareness and consumption of European extra virgin olive oil (EVOO) in Canada. EVOO’s versatility in Mediterranean cuisine stems from its rich flavor, health benefits, and stability at high temperatures. It is widely used in dressings, marinades, sauces, and desserts while also playing a role in food preservation. Consumers can learn more through the project’s website and social media platforms. The initiative highlights EVOO’s nutritional advantages and culinary applications, making it a staple in both traditional and modern cooking.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is the “Pure Olive Oil from Europe” project?

Manuela Barzan: The Pure Olive Oil from Europe project is co-funded by the European Union and promoted by the producer association L’Olivicola Cosentina. The initiative aims to capture the attention of chefs, restaurateurs, hospitality professionals, consumers and opinion leaders in Canada to promote the export and consumption of oil and extra virgin olive oil produced in the EU and, more particularly, in Italy. A unique opportunity to explore the distinctive characteristics of oil and extra virgin olive oil and its extraordinary versatility in cooking.

Jacobsen: What makes extra virgin olive oil a versatile ingredient in the Mediterranean diet?

Barzan: Extra virgin olive oil (EVOO) is a staple in Mediterranean cuisines for several reasons:

 Flavor: EVOO has a rich, robust flavor that can enhance the taste of various dishes, from salads to stews. Its flavor profile can range from fruity to peppery, adding complexity to meals.

– Health Benefits: It is high in monounsaturated fats and antioxidants, making it a healthier choice for cooking and dressing. Its anti-inflammatory properties and contributions to heart health align with the Mediterranean diet.

– Culinary Uses: EVOO can be used in a variety of ways, including sautéing, frying, drizzling, and as a base for dressings and marinades. It’s suitable for cold dishes, like salads, and can withstand moderate heat, making it ideal for various cooking methods.

– Versatility: It complements a wide range of ingredients commonly found in Mediterranean cuisine, such as vegetables, grains, fish, and meats, allowing for creative and flavorful combinations.

– Traditional Practices: The long-standing tradition of olive oil production in Mediterranean countries contributes to its cultural significance and widespread use in regional recipes.

– Finishing Touch: Many chefs use EVOO as a finishing touch to add flavor and richness to cooked dishes, enhancing the overall dining experience.

These factors combine to make extra virgin olive oil an essential and versatile ingredient in Mediterranean cooking, contributing both to the flavor and the healthfulness of the cuisine.

Jacobsen: How does the monounsaturated fat content contribute to stability at high temperatures in cooking ?

Barzan: Monounsaturated fats, like those found in extra virgin olive oil (EVOO), have several characteristics that contribute to their stability during cooking at high temperatures:

 Chemical Structure: Monounsaturated fats have only one double bond in their fatty acid chains. This structure makes them more resistant to oxidation compared to polyunsaturated fats, which have multiple double bonds and are more prone to breaking down at high temperatures.

– Higher Smoke Point: EVOO typically has a higher smoke point (around 375-410°F or 190-210°C) than many other oils high in polyunsaturated fats. This means it can be heated to higher temperatures before it begins to smoke and degrade, making it suitable for various cooking methods like sautéing and roasting.

– Stability During Cooking: The resistance to oxidation means that monounsaturated fats in EVOO maintain their integrity and nutritional properties better than oils with a higher proportion of polyunsaturated fats, which can produce harmful compounds when heated excessively.

– Flavor Preservation: The more stable nature of these fats helps preserve the flavor compounds in EVOO, allowing them to contribute taste even after cooking.

In summary, the monounsaturated fat content of extra virgin olive oil contributes to its stability at high temperatures through its chemical structure, higher smoke point, oxidative stability, and ability to preserve flavor, making it a reliable choice for cooking.

Jacobsen: What are some common uses in raw preparation including dressings, sauces, and marinades ?

Barzan: Extra virgin olive oil (EVOO) is a versatile ingredient in raw preparations, offering flavor and health benefits. Here are some common uses:

– Salad Dressings: EVOO is often used as a base for vinaigrettes. Mixing it with vinegar (like balsamic or red wine vinegar) or citrus juice, along with herbs, garlic, and seasonings, creates a flavorful dressing.

– Dipping Oil: EVOO can be served plain or mixed with balsamic vinegar, herbs, or spices for dipping bread. It enhances the sensory experience with its rich flavor.

– Marinades: EVOO is frequently used in marinades for its ability to tenderize meats and infuse flavors. It can be combined with lemon juice, garlic, herbs, and spices to marinate vegetables, fish, or meats.

– Pesto and Sauces: EVOO is a key ingredient in pesto, blending basil, garlic, pine nuts, and parmesan cheese. It is also used in other fresh sauces, enhancing texture and flavor.

– Finishing Oil: Drizzling EVOO over finished dishes, like grilled vegetables or soups, adds a rich flavor and visual appeal. It can elevate the dish’s overall taste profile.

– Cold Pasta Dishes: In pasta salads, EVOO enhances flavor and prevents sticking while adding moisture and depth to the ingredients.

– Bruschetta: EVOO is often drizzled on toasted bread topped with tomatoes, garlic, basil, and cheese, enhancing the dish’s flavor and richness.

These uses showcase EVOO’s versatility and ability to enhance raw preparations in various cuisines, especially in Mediterranean dishes.

Jacobsen: Basic recipe for a tomato sauce with olive oil

Barzan: Basic Tomato Sauce with Olive Oil

Ingredients:

  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 medium onion, finely chopped
  • 2-3 cloves garlic, minced
  • 1 (28-ounce) can crushed tomatoes (or 2-3 cups fresh tomatoes, peeled and chopped)
  • 1 teaspoon salt (adjust to taste)
  • 1/2 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sugar (optional, to balance acidity)
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano (or fresh, if available)
  • 1 teaspoon dried basil (or fresh, if available)
  • Red pepper flakes (optional, for heat)
  • Fresh basil leaves (for garnish, optional)

Instructions:

– Sauté Aromatics: In a large saucepan, heat the extra virgin olive oil over medium heat. Add the chopped onion and sauté until it becomes translucent, about 5-7 minutes. Then add the minced garlic and cook for an additional minute, until fragrant.

– Add Tomatoes: Stir in the crushed tomatoes. If using fresh tomatoes, cook for a minute until they start to break down. 

– Season the Sauce: Add salt, pepper, sugar (if using), oregano, and basil. Stir to combine. 

– Simmer: Bring the sauce to a gentle simmer. Reduce the heat to low and let it cook uncovered for about 20-30 minutes, stirring occasionally. This will help thicken the sauce and enhance the flavors.

– Taste and Adjust: Taste the sauce and adjust the seasoning if necessary, adding more salt, pepper, or herbs as desired.

– Serve: Remove from heat and serve immediately over pasta, or as a base for pizzas, or with your favorite dishes. Garnish with fresh basil leaves if desired.

Tips:

  • For added depth of flavor, consider incorporating a splash of red wine or a tablespoon of tomato paste during cooking.
  • You can blend the sauce for a smoother texture if preferred.

Jacobsen: How does olive oil enhance desserts and pastries by being healthier and such ?

Barzan: Olive oil can enhance desserts and pastries in several ways, making them not only healthier but also adding unique flavors and textures. Here are some benefits and roles that olive oil plays in sweet recipes:

– Healthier Fat Option: Olive oil is high in monounsaturated fats, which are healthier compared to saturated fats found in butter. This can make desserts less guilt-inducing without compromising on taste.

– Lower Saturated Fat Content: By substituting olive oil for butter or other solid fats, you reduce the overall saturated fat content of the dessert, which can be beneficial for heart health.

– Flavor Profile: Extra virgin olive oil adds a subtle fruitiness and complexity to desserts, enhancing flavors. The specific notes (fruity, peppery, or grassy) can complement ingredients like chocolate and citrus.

– Moisture: Using olive oil can contribute to a moist texture in baked goods. It helps to create tender cakes and cookies, preventing them from becoming dry.

-Nutrient-Rich: Olive oil contains antioxidants and vitamins (like vitamin E) that can contribute to the nutritional profile of desserts, adding health benefits along with indulgence.

– Versatile Ingredient: Olive oil can be used in a variety of desserts, from cakes and muffins to custards and even ice creams. Its versatility allows for creative adaptations of classic recipes.

– Lower Caloric Density: While olive oil is calorie-dense, its high flavor intensity allows for smaller quantities to achieve desired results, which can lead to lower overall caloric intake in some recipes.

– Accessibility: Olive oil is often a more accessible and shelf-stable option than butter, making it easier to incorporate into a variety of dessert recipes such as:

  • Olive Oil Cakes: Olive oil can be a key ingredient in cakes, providing moisture and a unique flavor that pairs well with citrus and herbs.
  • Cookies: It can be used in recipes for chewy or crisp cookies, enhancing texture while keeping them tender.
  • Dressing for Fruit: A drizzle of olive oil over fresh fruit can enhance their sweetness and add richness.

Jacobsen: What are some preservation methods that inviolve olive oil?

Barzan: Olive oil is not only used in cooking but also serves as an effective ingredient in various preservation methods. Here are some common techniques that involve olive oil:

– Oil Infusion: You can infuse olive oil with herbs, spices, or garlic to enhance flavor and preserve the ingredients. The oil acts as a barrier, preventing exposure to air and moisture, which helps maintain the freshness of the infusions.

– Vegetable Preservation: Olive oil can be used to preserve vegetables, such as sun-dried tomatoes, artichokes, or peppers. After roasting or drying the vegetables, they can be submerged in olive oil, which helps inhibit bacterial growth and spoilage.

– Cured Meats and Fish: Olive oil can be used to preserve cured meats (like salami) and fish (like anchovies). The oil creates an oxygen-free environment, preventing spoilage and enhancing flavor.

– Marinated Delicacies: Marinating foods like olives or feta cheese in olive oil with seasonings not only adds flavor but also acts as a preservation method. The oil helps keep these items fresh for longer periods.

– Compressed Ingredients: In some culinary techniques, ingredients (such as fruits and vegetables) can be compressed and then submerged in olive oil to prolong their shelf life while adding richness to the flavor.

– Oiled Baking Dishes: Coating baking dishes with olive oil before storing prepared foods can help create a moisture barrier, keeping dishes fresher for longer.

– Vinegar and Oil Preservation: Vegetables (like pickles) can be preserved using a mixture of vinegar and olive oil. This combination can help extend the shelf life while adding delightful flavors.

Tips for Preservation:

  • Always ensure that the jars or containers used for preservation are clean and sterilized to avoid contamination.
  • Store preserved foods in a cool, dark place, or refrigerate if necessary, especially for items with fresh ingredients.
  • Check preserved items periodically for signs of spoilage, such as off smells or unusual textures.

Jacobsen: How can consumers learn more about the « Pure Olive Oil from Europe”

Barzan: https://www.oliveoilfromeurope.eu

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Manuela.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mark Temnycky on Rights Violations in Ukraine

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/05

Mark Temnycky is a nonresident fellow at the Atlantic Council’s Eurasia Center and an accredited freelance journalist specializing in Eurasian affairs, European energy security, and Ukrainian football. His work has appeared in The New York TimesForbesThe HillNewsweekEuronewsEUobserverDefense News, the Kyiv Post, and The Diplomat, among others. He has also contributed to think tanks like the Atlantic Council, Wilson Center, and Center for European Policy Analysis. His reporting has been cited by the European Parliament, NATO, the Helsinki Commission, the United Nations University, and Transparency International. Temnycky has been interviewed by BBC, France 24, NBC, Al Jazeera English, and FIFA, and has appeared on podcasts for The Telegraph, Chatham House, and Razom for Ukraine. He has guest lectured at West Point, Columbia University, NYU, and Boston University. Recognized by the International Sports Press Association and the Ukrainian World Congress, he holds master’s degrees in Public Administration and International Relations from Syracuse University and a history degree from Le Moyne College. Throughout the Russian invasion of Ukraine, organizations such as the UN, Human Rights Watch, and Amnesty International have documented severe human rights violations, including torture, rape, and executions. The U.S., NATO, and allied nations have condemned these atrocities, imposing sanctions and removing Russia from international organizations. The invasion has reshaped Europe’s energy landscape, accelerating diversification efforts and reducing reliance on Russian gas. Ukrainian civil society and NGOs collaborate with international bodies to document war crimes. The Biden administration has supported investigations, leading to ICC charges against Putin. The conflict highlights the necessity of timely military aid and strategic decision-making in warfare.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What have been the most egregious documented human rights violations committed in Ukraine?

Mark Temnycky: Throughout the Russian invasion of Ukraine, organizations such as the United Nations, Human Rights Watch, Amnesty International, and others have conducted research and written reports about human rights violations during the war. In a report issued by the U.S. Department of State, “significant human rights abuses committed by Russia’s forces in areas that were under Russian control involved severe and wide-ranging cases and included credible reports.” Some of the most egregious document human rights violations committed by the Russians are torturing, mutilating, raping, and executing Ukrainian men, women, and children. Many Ukrainian bodies were then left on the streets or dumped into unmarked graves. These Russian atrocities were discovered in the cities of Bucha and Izyum, and were reported elsewhere across the country.

Jacobsen: How have the U.S. and NATO responded to the war crimes?

Temnycky: The United States, NATO, EU, Canada, Japan, Australia, and many other countries and collectives have condemned war crimes committed during the Russian invasion of Ukraine. They have sought to punish Russia for committing these atrocities. For example, the United Nations General Assembly voted to suspend Russia from the Human Rights Council in April 2022. Russia was also removed from the Parliamentary Assembly for the Council of Europe, as well as several other international organizations. The removal from various political, cultural, business, and sports organizations has seen Russia lose hundreds of billions of dollars. In addition, the international community has imposed stiff sanctions on the Russian gas industry, Russian businesses, and Russian officials.

Jacobsen: How has Russia’s invasion affected Europe’s energy landscape?

Temnycky: The Russian invasion of Ukraine has forced the European continent to reevaluate its energy market and prioritize energy security. There were also swift actions taken by Europe to distance itself from Russia. For example, when the war began, the operation of Nord Stream 2 was halted (the pipeline was later damaged). The EU and UK banned seaborne imports of crude oil in December 2022, and a ban on Russian imports of diesel fuel and other products made from crude oil in Russian refineries occurred in February 2023. Furthermore, Europe has opted to diversify its energy market by purchasing larger quantities of liquid natural gas from countries such as the United States and Qatar. In addition, several European countries are pursuing clean energy and alternative energy options to further strengthen energy independence. Finally, Ukraine let its gas deal with Russia expire on January 1, 2025, meaning several countries would no longer receive Russian gas via Ukraine. This has forced Europe to further accelerate its plans for energy diversification.

Jacobsen: How are Ukrainian civil society and local NGOs documenting human rights violations?

Temnycky: The United Nations Office of the High Commissioner is one of the organizations that has worked with Ukrainian civil society and local NGOs to document grave human rights violations. Furthermore, the European Union Agency for Criminal Justice Cooperation has stated that members of Ukrainian civil society and NGOs have spoken with Ukrainians who have eyewitness accounts of human rights violations. They will speak with individuals who saw the Russians conduct atrocities, they will travel to areas where violations occurred so that they can collect information and document the events that unfolded in the area, and they will write summaries or reports about the events that unfolded. These accounts and the information are then shared with news outlets, international organizations, and governments so that they can be aware of the atrocities that are committed.

Jacobsen: How would you assess the previous (Biden) Administration’s approach to Ukrainian human rights concerns?

Temnycky: Throughout Russia’s invasion, President Biden called on the United Nations (UN) and the International Criminal Court (ICC) to investigate human rights violations committed by the Russians. The Biden administration also worked with officials from the UN, ICC, and the Ukrainian government to collect information and document human rights violations during the war. The evidence that was collected then led to the ICC issuing an arrest warrant for Russian President Vladimir Putin. Outside of the White House, the U.S. Department of State constantly identified and publicly condemned Russian war crimes committed in Ukraine. In addition, throughout the war, the United States Congress introduced resolutions which have condemned and opposed Russia’s invasion of Ukraine.

Jacobsen: What legal precedents exist for prosecuting Russian officials or military personnel for human rights violations?

Temnycky: The International Criminal Court (ICC) is examining and reading documentation and cases presented by Ukraine on human rights violations committed by the Russian Federation. The ICC has already issued an arrest warrant for President Putin. The international legal body is also exploring options on how to try and prosecute Russian officials and Russian military personnel for their involvement and participation in the Russian invasion of Ukraine.

Jacobsen: Based on experience lecturing at military academies, what key lessons should future leaders learn from this conflict?

Temnycky: Defense aid needed to be provided to Ukraine faster. For several years, numerous Western governments put self-imposed restrictions on Western aid used by the Ukrainians. They did not allow the Ukrainians to use Western weapons to strike Russian military targets within the Russian Federation. In addition, various forms of high-tech equipment were delayed. Imposing these restrictions, and with the delays in providing defense aid needed to defend Ukrainians from Russian attacks, allowed the Russians to regroup and re-strategize in the occupied regions. Ukraine also did not have the proper equipment to fully protect its citizens against the Russian incursion, and this led to additional deaths.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Mark.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ukraine’s Reconstruction and Canada-Ukraine Trade Partnerships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/04 (Unpublished)

Seyfi Tomar, Vice President of EBS Global, discusses his firm’s commitment to sustainable construction in Ukraine. Recently, EBS secured office space in Kyiv, initiated company registration, and engaged in partnerships. Tomar highlights Canada-Ukraine trade opportunities, emphasizing prefabricated steel systems and AI-driven construction. He notes challenges like tariffs but sees automation reducing labor needs. Tomar praises Ukrainian resilience, contrasts global construction practices, and stresses the role of international institutions. He anticipates AI and robotics transforming construction, shifting human roles to software development. Future Canadian leadership, he suggests, should prioritize economic diversification and strengthening global trade relationships.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Seyfi Tomar.

He is the Vice President of EBS Global, a Canadian construction firm focused on creating durable and sustainable structures, from hospitals and schools to mid-rise buildings, emphasizing cost efficiency and environmental responsibility. Seyfi passionately advocates for prefabricated steel systems, customizing designs to reflect local culture while delivering eco-friendly solutions.

As a key sponsor of the Rebuild Ukraine Initiative, Seyfi spearheads efforts to restore infrastructure in war-torn regions, blending Canadian expertise with international collaboration. His approach combines advanced technologies, including recycled galvanized steel, to address housing shortages and infrastructure demands. Despite challenges such as securing funding from organizations like the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD) and Export Development Canada (EDC), Seyfi remains committed to scaling sustainable solutions while prioritizing speed, affordability, and cultural integrity.

Early projects include rebuilding Bakhmut, emphasizing innovation and resilience in the face of immense challenges. Thank you so much for joining me again today, Seyfi. I appreciate it.

Seyfi Tomar: Thank you, Scott. Thank you for inviting me.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome.

There have been some updates since the last interview for International Policy Digest. This interview is conducted on March 3 and published much later. Some updates we are looking at involve company registration, lease agreements, and on-the-ground operations. You have recently travelled or are currently travelling. So, what are the immediate logistical hurdles regarding lease agreements and company registration?

Tomar: We have overcome those hurdles. This is my third visit to Ukraine since the war began. I was also here before the war. Today, we secured our office. We signed a letter of intent, and the lease agreement will be finalized in the morning.

It was not difficult. The landlords were cooperative and understanding of our situation, particularly since we have closed all operations in Turkey. Previously, we specialized in constructing high-rises and other large-scale projects in Turkey. Still, now we are transitioning all operations and personnel to Kyiv as our central hub before expanding to other parts of Ukraine as part of the Rebuild Ukraine effort.

We have already initiated discussions with our legal advisors in Kyiv. Tomorrow, we will formally begin the company registration process. This includes registering:

  • Our general contracting division (part of Van Horn)
  • Our manufacturing facilities under EBS Global
  • Our EU consulting division, Planet Turkey

These registrations will be officially launched tomorrow.

We will then focus on setting up our office space and acquiring furniture and other essentials. We have already hired a Ukrainian director, who will oversee operations full-time. Our Ukrainian partners have assisted with logistics, including securing office space, registering employees, and handling administrative processes.

Regarding banking operations, we expect that process to be completed within two weeks, as we first need to finalize our company registrations before initiating fund transfers.

We are fully engaged in these efforts, and progress is steady.

Tomar: On the same note, I have had meetings with the Canadian Embassy since I arrived here. They have been extremely helpful, as I expected. From the very first day, they have worked hard and remained accessible. They are available and always willing to assist whenever I need to reach them.

They invited us to the embassy today, where we had a very productive meeting. They provided us with all the data and information we needed. As we have done so far, we will continue to stay in close contact with them.

We will keep them informed and work alongside them. They are the best resource for scrutinizing Ukrainian companies, evaluating tendering processes, and obtaining reliable information. They have been great resources and valuable allies in our work.

Beyond the Canadian Embassy, we have also met with several major Ukrainian companies. We have tentatively agreed on upcoming joint ventures with some of them, though these discussions are still in their preliminary stages. We will continue meeting with them over the next few days until Friday. If additional discussions are necessary, I will return.

We are excited to contribute to Ukraine’s reconstruction efforts. Being here allows us to support the Ukrainian economy while diversifying the Canadian economy, particularly in light of the 25% tariffs we face. Who knows what changes might come next? This is just one aspect, and we encourage others in Canada to explore their strengths in different markets.

For too long, we have been overly dependent on the U.S. Diversifying trade and investments will strengthen the Canadian economy.

Jacobsen: When it comes to construction, there is a need for fire-resistant and more durable materials. What about sourcing materials from within Ukraine? In doing so, wouldn’t that bolster the construction economy and the material sourcing and manufacturing industries within Ukraine?

Tomar: Yes. For prefabricated metal production, all we need are coils. Our machines, including mobile prefabricated metal systems factories, are already in place. Currently, we have them in Barrie, Ontario, where they are stored in our yard. We may move a few mobile factories to Ukraine. If demand increases, we can purchase additional machines to scale up production.

We are analyzing the global market for galvanized coils. We have previously sourced them from Canada’s local market, but we will now compare prices from Canada, Turkey, Egypt, and India and choose the most feasible option.

Jacobsen: What about local zoning laws and building permits in Ukraine? Does the war affect these processes, or are they expedited?

Tomar: We have not encountered any issues so far. The Ukrainian authorities handle the planning and approval processes, and everything has proceeded smoothly within their established framework.

I do not foresee any issues because, on my previous visit, I have a four-hour meeting with the Director of the Kyiv National University of Construction and Architecture and the Head of the Veteran Institute, Artem. If any issues arise, we will get their assistance. Therefore, I do not anticipate any problems regarding zoning.

What about integrating subcontractors and suppliers to streamline the supply chain, ensuring a seamless process from sourcing materials to manufacturing and construction?

We are currently in the pricing phase for the projects we are securing. As a general contractor or through joint ventures, we are committed to using our manufactured products. We have not subcontracted our materials to third-party builders or undertaken projects for them. At present, our priority is to manage construction for ourselves.

However, if a construction company from Finland,  Switzerland or Denmark is interested in collaborating with us, we are open to it. We welcome partnerships with any reliable company, regardless of their country of origin. However, we must conduct due diligence and thoroughly vet their credibility. We have no objections to working with other builders and general contractors.

Regarding the tariffs you mentioned, we will rapidly revise our free trade agreements. Minister of International Trade, Export Promotion, Small Business, and Economic Development Mary Ng works diligently. What types of free trade agreements would be most beneficial for your test projects? Whether the 25% tariff takes effect tomorrow or not, it is crucial to consider its impact on the Canadian economy and trade policy.

We are currently reshaping and diversifying our economy, and Minister Ng has been working extensively over the past few months. Similarly, Minister of Foreign Affairs Mélanie Joly has been actively signing new free trade agreements with as many countries as possible. If I recall correctly, Canada now has free trade agreements with over 50 countries, covering approximately two-thirds of the global GDP.

These agreements strengthen Canadian businesses because, as a multicultural nation, we have vast global connections. Many communities in Canada have ties to their countries of origin, enabling the creation of new import and export relationships. This is precisely what we have done with Turkey. Currently, our primary focus is Ukraine. Other Canadian construction firms or businesses may establish trade relations with their respective ancestral homelands. This approach will help mitigate the impact of the 25% tariff in Canada. Any negative effects will be short-term; in the long run, we will recover and reshape our economy sustainably and resiliently. That is my belief.

Jacobsen: What financial and legal guarantees do Canadian companies require to secure land leases or property reconstruction projects in Ukraine? How does the bilateral or binational aspect of this arrangement function?

Tomar: We have not encountered such issues because our company has operated for 53 years. We have a proven track record of completing projects in Canada and Turkey. Our financial stability and credibility are well established, as demonstrated by the six subdivisions we are developing in Canada. We are neither a new company in Canada nor Turkey. Our strength comes from our history and the projects we have completed over time.

We have built airports, hospitals, schools, women’s shelters, shopping malls, and numerous high-rise buildings in Canada and Turkey. We have no difficulty securing projects because of our extensive experience and financial stability. Additionally, we do not seek bank loans. Our primary objective is to obtain government contracts in Ukraine or develop our projects within the country.

Jacobsen: Aside from Minister Mary Ng or Minister Mélanie Joly signing new contracts and looking for alternative trade agreements to bypass the 25% tariffs imposed by the Trump administration in the United States, what about emerging trade agreements or economic partnerships between Canada and Ukraine? Are there any new contracts or deals that could accelerate investment in infrastructure projects, such as those led by EBS Global in Ukraine? If we set aside the tariffs and the efforts by Ministers Ng and Joly to mitigate them, what about emerging economic partnerships or trade agreements with Ukraine or neighbouring countries? Are there any agreements that could benefit EBS Global, Canada, and Turkey directly by accelerating investment and expediting reconstruction projects?

Tomar: All these initiatives started before Trump was re-elected. We had already begun the process. To accelerate our work, the Canadian government could make Export Development Canada (EDC) and other financial entities more useful by allocating more resources to assist Canadian companies facing funding challenges or other issues.

Another solution is to restructure how aid is distributed. Funds could be channelled through Canadian companies instead of directly providing financial assistance to Ukrainian ministries. That could be a more effective approach.

For example, if the military requires modular housing or other infrastructure, rather than distributing aid directly, it could allocate those funds to Canadian companies—including us or any other Canadian firms interested in working in Ukraine. There are many competitors in this space. If a company like Aecon wanted to construct a major hydroelectric dam, aid funds could be allocated to them as part of the support package. Similarly, they could collaborate with us if the military needs geodesic domes or modular housing.

That approach would accelerate reconstruction efforts while ensuring Canadian taxpayers see a return on investment through the aid provided.

Jacobsen: Are there unique taxation structures or investment incentives associated with these projects, particularly when registering and operating in another country while maintaining a bilateral business model?

Tomar: I don’t have much information on that. It’s not within my scope. That falls under a different department within our company, and I am not directly involved. My role is as Vice President of Business Development, but I do not handle taxation matters. I am not familiar with the specific details of how that works.

Jacobsen: To give people an idea of the scale of the construction industry, it is a massive business. In British Columbia, where I am located, long-standing Italian Roman Catholic families—such as the Bosas—own some of the largest construction firms in Downtown Vancouver.

In terms of context regarding EBS Global, your company has been around for two years. When you say you will reconstruct Bakhmut, how much money should people consider when considering the cost of rebuilding an entire city?

Tomar: To clarify, we are in a preliminary agreement to reconstruct a town named “Steel Bakhmut” in a different region. It has a population of approximately 3,500 people. The budget for this project is estimated at over 100 million USD.

So that’s one project, and we are also working on other projects. We are budgeting for additional projects, and that is where we currently stand. Right now, 13% of Ukrainian housing has been damaged due to the war, in addition to the aged properties that need to be rebuilt. If a ceasefire takes effect, displaced Ukrainians will return, increasing demand. The housing demand in Ukraine is enormous.

It is a massive undertaking—far greater than the housing crisis in Canada. Ukraine needs to rebuild its homes, hospitals, and schools. The total estimated cost for rebuilding Ukraine is approximately $500 billion. Still, I am unsure what percentage is allocated specifically for housing. However, it is certainly a significant portion.

Given that many builders in Ontario and British Columbia are struggling due to the housing market slowdown and declining buyer confidence, the Canadian government might consider studying the potential for redirecting them to projects in Ukraine. I do not know if that would be feasible, but it is worth analyzing.

Jacobsen: One topic we briefly touched on in our last interview, around the time of the Rebuild Ukraine conference in Toronto, was the integration of automation with human labour. Machines, if well-maintained, can operate 24/7. At the same time, under labour protection laws, human workers typically work 40-hour weeks with eight-hour shifts over five days. Any additional work requires overtime pay.

Are there incentive structures to encourage workers to take on longer hours? Additionally, how much automation is being implemented to accelerate production speed? If you compare a typical building timeline to an accelerated construction model, what kind of time reduction are we looking at?

Tomar: Accelerating construction is based on off-site construction, which involves integrating automation. We have been building the same way for over a hundred years. Still, companies in the U.S. and Canada are adopting new technologies that will save millions of work hours and significantly reduce costs, leading to faster housing development.

Our system produces non-combustible, earthquake-resistant houses. I do not have an exact figure for how much time this process will save. Still, we can significantly speed up production by implementing three shifts that run 24 hours a day and employing Ukrainian veterans who primarily oversee machine operations.

Highly skilled labour is not required for these roles, contributing to faster, more affordable, and attainable housing solutions. That is the direction we are moving toward.

Jacobsen: If someone is interested in getting into your line of work, especially given the increasing demand, what qualities are necessary? Additionally, what skills, while not essential, would be beneficial for building partnerships, driving business development, and advancing in this industry?

Tomar: Partnering with local companies is always beneficial, and that is what we are prioritizing now. Previously, we were mostly focused on handling projects independently. Still, we have been meeting with and negotiating partnerships with local companies over the last few days. They bring valuable expertise, and collaboration will accelerate reconstruction efforts.

They might specialize in one area, while we have our strength in automation and building higher-quality housing. Regarding workforce qualifications, workers in our manufacturing process do not need to be highly skilled. However, we require skilled workers for on-site assembly, though not in large numbers. We have those resources and the necessary workforce.

In traditional construction methods, you typically need five to ten times more workers than we do. Building the same house on-site using conventional methods would take significantly longer and require more workforce.

Jacobsen: What areas do you see need further efficiency improvements? What would be the next step at the cutting edge of construction technology?

Tomar: That could involve AI. We have not implemented AI extensively but are currently exploring its potential. We are researching AI applications in different countries and evaluating how to integrate them into our processes.

AI could optimize material usage, workforce efficiency, and assembly methods, making construction even faster and more cost-effective. Another possibility is further advancing off-site customized home assembly rather than traditional on-site construction. However, given current transportation, logistics, and highway infrastructure limitations, this is not yet a feasible solution, but we are studying it.

Jacobsen: Let’s give a contrast effect for perception. You have experience in Turkey, Canada, and Ukraine. How do each country’s cultural and business environments help or hinder construction, efficiency, materials, and processes? What are the advantages and disadvantages?

Tomar: Every country has its pros and cons.

Once we secure a project in Canada, the approval process takes a long time. Zoning, permitting, and regulatory approvals can take years before construction begins. For example, we tendered a hospital this year, and even though there is a commitment to start soon, it could still take years before actual construction begins.

The process in Turkey moves much faster, but you must be more cautious about business practices. The system is not as transparent, so you must be careful in negotiations and contracts.

Ukraine presents similar challenges. That is why we work closely with Canadian embassies when operating abroad. We consult them and seek advice from international consulting firms before making major business decisions.

Jacobsen: Do you think that if Canada or Turkey were in a wartime scenario, they would respond in the same way as Ukrainians—beginning reconstruction efforts immediately and continuing them even during active bombings?

Tomar: I don’t believe so. But I deeply admire Ukrainians. They are incredibly brave and composed. Everyone remains focused on living their daily lives without significant change, even though they experience drone and missile alerts every day. It amazes me.

I am truly impressed with how they continue rebuilding. It is admirable. I admire their resilience and their way of life. It is inspiring.

Jacobsen: When you considered expanding your business, developing partnerships, and growing your construction efforts, you could have done more in Turkey or Canada. What made Ukraine the natural choice for your expansion, particularly since, during wartime, much of your work has been pre-construction?

Tomar: Why did we choose Ukraine? That’s a good question.

First, there is an obvious need. There is a pragmatic aspect to it—Ukraine requires extensive reconstruction. But beyond that, there is a moral dimension. We see the need, and we want to help.

There is also an emotional connection. We want to contribute to our Ukrainian friends. Over the past ten years, I have developed strong relationships with my Ukrainian colleagues through my involvement with FIABCI, the International Real Estate Federation affiliated with the United Nations. These connections were a major factor in our decision.

When we visited Ukraine and saw the situation firsthand, we knew we had made the right choice to expand here.

Jacobsen: In the modern era, we are experiencing unprecedented international networking. Over the last eighty years, particularly since World War II, global interconnectedness has grown exponentially—not only through trade and the passage of traditional ideas such as religion but also through the rapid exchange of new ideas, information technology, communications, culture, media, and entertainment.

Institutions like the United Nations, the World Trade Organization, and other international bodies help govern this interconnected world. Regardless of their bureaucratic challenges, how important do you think these international institutions will be in the future? As the world becomes more interconnected, will these organizations be essential in enforcing universal rules and preventing crises like the Russo-Ukrainian War?

Tomar: To me, networking is everything.

These international organizations are crucial because they allow us to stay informed about what is happening on the other side of the world. The way we operate today is completely different from the past. In the old days, businesses were restricted to their cities or countries. We have discovered that we can do the same or even better work in different countries.

Even though our company has been based in Ontario for over fifty years, it was only nine years ago that we decided to expand internationally. We have been successful because, in many ways, moving a construction company from Ontario to British Columbia is no different than expanding from Ontario to Turkey or Ukraine.

There are often better opportunities abroad, and businesses must be open to them. However, no matter where you go, you must thoroughly study local business practices and adapt accordingly.

Tomar: You have to adapt to local business habits, labour laws, and regulations—that is what we have been doing. I would recommend that other companies do the same. Instead of struggling in Ontario, they can expand abroad. This applies not only to construction companies but to other industries as well.

Jacobsen: I have recently interviewed business leaders, economists, and international law experts about tariffs, non-consensus decision-making, and the increasingly unilateral, winner-takes-all approach to business and international law. This trend is problematic because it disrupts the free flow of goods and services. Are tariffs a wise strategy in the short or long term? And do you believe they will remain in place for the long term?

Tomar: Tariffs are a short-term measure. They will not last long because they harm both economies. In the short term, particularly in a political context, Trump and others may use them to appeal to their base. Still, they will not be sustainable in the long run.

This is exactly why organizations like the European Union and trade agreements like NAFTA were created—the world needs free trade agreements. Without them, tariffs will make goods more expensive on both the U.S. and Canadian sides.

During the Cold War, we were united against the Warsaw Pact and the Soviet Union. Today, we face another major geopolitical force—China and its allies. Suppose North America and Europe do not eliminate these tariffs and work together. In that case, China will continue expanding its influence, particularly in Africa and other regions.

Tariffs raise prices significantly. Whether it is the automobile sector or construction, we can expect prices to rise by 3–7%, which fuels inflation that we cannot afford. That is why I do not see tariffs as a viable long-term strategy.

Trump and J.D. Vance are implementing these tariffs to appeal to their voters in the short term—that is all. That is my belief.

Jacobsen: Since 2021, China has reached its peak population. There are well-known cases of over-construction in China, which—though often criticized—can be somewhat understandable given the sheer scale of urbanization. Large-scale construction is inevitable when over a billion people are trying to transition hundreds of millions from rural areas to cities.

Tomar: Especially in an authoritarian system where a single leader makes all the decisions, it is much easier to mobilize populations and execute massive infrastructure projects. Whether it is Putin’s Russia, China, or North Korea, bureaucratic resistance is minimal. When the leader makes a decision, it is implemented immediately—you do not need to seek public consent or navigate democratic approval processes.

Jacobsen: That is correct. Many years ago, Russia reached its peak population. It is projected to lose tens of millions of people by mid-century, with even greater declines by the end of the century.

There seems to be a pattern in authoritarian regimes with nine—or ten-figure populations led by aging leaders (70+ years old). These governments often become sclerotic and resistant to change, and their populations lose the dynamism seen in more open societies.

What happens when a country’s population shrinks? China has been experiencing population decline for four years, while Russia has dealt with it for much longer. What happens to the construction industry when populations decline rapidly—when a country reaches its peak population, but the rate of decline accelerates each year?

Tomar: Population shrinkage used to be a major concern. It was considered a serious issue five, ten, or twenty years ago. However, with the advancements in AI and robotics—which we have been discussing for two decades but are now actively adopting—the demand for a large workforce is decreasing daily.

That is why I do not foresee population shrinkage as a problem. I do not see an issue because robots and AI will replace the need for human labour in many areas.

On the other hand, China is not Russia. Neither country is stagnant, but China, unlike Russia, continuously expands. The U.S. did the same 60–70 years ago with the Marshall Plan, spreading its economic influence globally. Today, China follows a similar pattern, expanding its economy every five years and consistently exceeding expectations. Their presence in Africa, the Middle East, and beyond continues to grow.

China will not face a major crisis due to population decline. The real issue is that Western countries must recognize this trend and eliminate tariffs. We must move beyond the European Union and the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) to form a stronger economic alliance. If we do not, we risk losing ground to China’s expanding influence.

Jacobsen: Given that outlook, where do you see the future of construction? Specifically, with robots performing essential tasks—from sourcing and fabricating materials to assembling entire buildings—how do you envision their role in the industry?

Tomar: Any repetitive work—regardless of industry—can be replaced by robots.

It does not matter whether the worker is a cashier, a handyman, a carpenter, or a steelworker. If the task is repetitive, it can be automated. The same applies to construction. If a worker does the same tasks every morning, those tasks can be automated with AI and robotics.

We have been discussing this for 30 to 40 years, but our technology is far beyond what we previously had. This is a transformational era in history. The pandemic accelerated our adoption of technology. We had to adapt quickly, and now we rapidly shift toward automation.

Jacobsen: What does this mean for materials development? Do you think AI will be used to design advanced construction materials that are cheaper, more durable, and more fire-resistant than we have today?

Tomar: Absolutely.

Our judgment can be flawed as humans, but AI makes fewer mistakes. When robots and AI are combined, the efficiency of building, assembling, and innovating increases dramatically.

Humans get tired, make mistakes, and have misleading judgments. Even in traffic, we cause millions of accidents every year. However, with AI-driven traffic management, accidents will become increasingly rare.

In five to ten years, having a car accident will be an anomaly—it will make the news because it will be so unusual. AI-powered vehicles do not drive with two eyes; they process the environment using 200 sensors, making them 200 times more perceptive than a human driver.

The same applies to construction. A carpenter has two hands and two eyes, but a robotic system can be designed with ten hands and ten eyes, making it five times more efficient.

We already have the technology—it is just a matter of adoption. How we think about construction, labour, and efficiency is still based on the limitations of human anatomy (two arms, two eyes). Once we fully integrate AI and robotics, those limitations will disappear, and construction will be faster, safer, and more cost-effective.

Now, we are going beyond what we traditionally know. Even when designing robots, we often model them after human capabilities, but we do not need to.

There is no reason we must limit robots to two eyes or two arms. We could design a single robot with 200 sensors or 10 arms, making it exponentially more efficient at constructing a house. With just four or five advanced robots, entire buildings could be assembled. The technology exists, and this is the future.

Jacobsen: Where do you see this industry expanding regarding human capital? What sectors will grow? Construction, business development, technology development—where will the focus be?

Tomar: As Canadians, we are conservative when adopting new technology—especially compared to Asia, the Middle East, and Africa. I have been to many countries, and I have seen this firsthand.

When new technologies emerge—AI, the metaverse, or automation—Canadian companies often develop the software. However, other countries purchase and implement it first. In Canada, construction and automotive manufacturing industries tend to stick with traditional methods until these technologies are adopted elsewhere. Then, and only then, do we integrate them. That is the difference.

Jacobsen: Given that shift, what role do you see for human workers in your industry?

Tomar: We must shift human labour toward software development and quality control.

Instead of working in physically demanding, high-risk environments, such as construction sites in extreme weather or driving long-haul trucks from Toronto to Miami, workers should transition to software engineering, automation control, and system monitoring.

That is where the new jobs will be created—software development, AI integration, and quality assurance.

Jacobsen: After the upcoming Canadian federal election, what should the next political leader and cabinet prioritize regarding construction partnerships—particularly with President Erdoğan in Turkey and President Zelensky in Ukraine? Or, more broadly, with the ministers responsible for these economic sectors?

Tomar: In three weeks, we will have a clearer picture.

Mark Carney and Pierre Poilievre will likely compete in the election in three months. Right now, Poilievre appears to be leading. Whoever forms a government and appoints a new cabinet in May or June must rebuild the public sector.

Many experienced bureaucrats have retired or left Canada, which has weakened policy development. We need to rehire skilled policymakers and bring in stronger leadership than before.

Additionally, new ministers must focus on diversifying Canada’s economy by expanding global trade and strengthening relationships with Ukraine, European nations, and African markets. I would like to see that.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Seyfi, thank you for your time today. I appreciate the updates and the deeper, exploratory questions—which I tend to ask.

Tomar: No, it is all good. Thank you very much.

Jacobsen: We will be in touch.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

A Businesswoman’s Mentorship Advice for Entrepreneurs

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/04

Leah Notarianni is a transformational speaker, business mentor, and Co-Founder and CEO of Legacy & Leverage. She empowers leaders to align business strategies with personal values, driving sustainable success. Leah’s clients include Global organizations, c-suite executives, industry leading CEO’s and wellness experts. Her programs blend cutting-edge strategy with mindset work, redefining leadership to prioritize impact and alignment. Specializing in scaling purposefully and building lasting legacies, Leah inspires transformative leadership and innovation across industries. She advises against burnout, instead advocating sustainable success through daily habits that balance work, health, and relationships. She highlights the importance of aligning business goals with personal values, understanding the seasons of growth, and pursuing intentional, meaningful actions. She helps clients scale businesses by addressing challenges holistically and aligning with their desired lifestyles and priorities. Her insights inspire reflection on balancing ambition with personal fulfillment.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Leah Notarianni. She is a speaker, business mentor, co-founder and CEO of Legacy and Leverage. She specializes in guiding entrepreneurs to align their values with business strategies. She offers mentorship programs, live events, and retreats through Legacy and Leverage. These programs are designed for industry leaders, coaches, and speakers to help them effectively scale their businesses. Regarding how you approach the development of programs for industry leaders, coaches, and speakers, there is a highly specialized group of business and entrepreneurial individuals. How do you approach conveying your lessons to them?

Notarianni: We work with a variety of entrepreneurs, including people who are also speakers and coaches like ourselves. However, we also work across various industries. The lane we truly focus on is transformation.

I operate at the intersection of mindset, strategy, and healing. When building a business and examining the mindset of its leaders, it becomes clear that internal transformation is essential for external success. Of course, there are specific strategies for building a speaking business, consultancy agency, or company.

We also encounter CEOs in different sectors who often feel stuck. Their mindset and what they bring significantly influence how they lead, show up, grow their business, and choose to grow it. This dynamic creates both challenges and opportunities.

Our role is to design transformational experiences that help individuals see themselves clearly, enabling them to reach their next potential level.

Jacobsen: What challenges do high achievers face when scaling their companies? For instance, I was listening to a business leader. They pointed out that as businesses scale up, the skill sets needed at each stage expand, evolve, and change.

Notarianni: Absolutely. The person who builds a million-dollar business is very different from the person you need to become to run a ten-million- or hundred-million-dollar business. How you operate changes and approach challenges changes, and your mindset and personal growth evolve along the way.

Everything changes, both externally and internally. While there are fundamental principles in how businesses operate, growth strategies must evolve. Your skill sets, emotional intelligence, and capacity to manage greater responsibilities must also increase because the challenges are different at each level.

Jacobsen: How do you define sustainable success?

Notarianni: Sustainable success is when someone is truly living in alignment with the value they want to provide to the world. It’s about living in alignment with their integrity, who they are, and how they appear. Sustained success is different because it comes from a more integrative space. It’s not about running at full speed, doing everything you can until the point of burnout, and then crashing.

Instead, it’s about caring for your mind, body, and mental health. You must address these things along the way because sustainable success isn’t just about getting somewhere; it’s about staying there. To sustain success, you must have reverence for creating space that’s just for you, both within and outside your business.

It is crucial to ensure that your values are aligned, spend time with family, and prevent one difficult season from turning into years of hardship. Growth can be demanding, but you must take space for yourself and build practices and systems to support you in the short and long term.

Jacobsen: Different people have different values. Clients can bring very diverse personal values to their businesses. How do you help people align their values, as varied as they may be, with their business strategies?

Notarianni: We design and support someone in their business by looking at it holistically. Many people focus solely on the growth and scaling of a company, which is great, and plenty of people, including us, do that well. However, we go beyond that by looking at the person’s life.

Business is just one part of life. If someone’s home life is out of alignment or filled with challenges, they might think it’s unrelated to their business, but that’s not true—it impacts their work. So, when we work with someone, we take a comprehensive approach. We don’t just look at them as businesspersons but as whole individuals.

We examine their health, spirituality, relationships, finances, connections, family, and life overall. For us, success comes from addressing a person’s wholeness so that they can thrive at work and in every aspect of life.

Jacobsen: Terms like “resilience,” “self-actualization,” and “growth’ are often used in business. These ideas can mean different things depending on the type of business—for instance, restaurants in my resort town experience seasonal ebbs and flows. There’s a rush during late spring to early fall, followed by a slow period where businesses either shut down completely or operate at a reduced capacity, often laying off staff to manage overhead.

How do you coach people to build resilience appropriate to their specific business and the seasonality of their operations?

Notarianni: I love what you shared there, Scott because certain business structures have an ebb and flow. How can you innovate within the current industry model? How do you cross-pollinate strategies from other industries to create new revenue streams and provide value in ways that others haven’t thought of?

Too often, people stay in a self-limiting box, doing only what they think they need to do. There’s a significant opportunity to think outside the box and add value in different industries or places. We can innovate and find creative approaches to solve problems and stand out.

That’s one part of it. The second part is that every business has its seasons. Whether you’re in a build phase, a growth phase, or a scaling phase, each stage requires something different from you. Having a clear start and endpoint for each season is crucial—not just for the business but for you as a person. Whether you’re a parent, spouse, or someone with responsibilities outside of work, it’s easier to manage the process when you know you’re working toward a specific goal within a set timeframe.

Understanding that you’re in a particular season and the next season will bring its rewards helps you stay focused and balanced.

Jacobsen: Do you find that people’s choice of business or entrepreneurship tends to align with their personality style?

Notarianni: Absolutely. It’s critical to understand your lifestyle goals. Earlier, you asked how I coach entrepreneurs. I always start with the person as a whole. You can have an incredible leader—someone who loves working 50, 60, 70, or even 80 hours a week—and they thrive in that environment.

On the other hand, you might have someone very different. They might say, “I’m great owning this business at this level of profitability, but I have clear constraints: I need to finish work by 4 PM, I don’t work weekends, and I’m unwilling to travel.”

People can and should design their businesses to fit their lifestyles, values, and how they want to present themselves in the world. It’s entirely possible to build a business that aligns with the life you want rather than chasing an outcome that doesn’t suit your needs or values.

Jacobsen: People often lose stamina as they age. This could be due to normal aging or lifestyle habits like diet and exercise.

For individuals who want to keep working 60- or 80-hour weeks but find themselves losing energy—falling asleep during the day or hitting a slump around 1 PM—how do you guide them? How do you nudge them to consider other factors affecting their capacity to perform at their best throughout the day?

They can have their values, goals, and a business structure that aligns with their personality and boundaries. But what about the intrinsic factors that could be modified, even as stamina naturally declines with age?

Notarianni: That’s such an important question. First, it’s about helping people understand the connection between their energy levels and daily habits. Sleep, nutrition, exercise, and even hydration can significantly affect how someone sustains energy throughout the day.

I often encourage those who want to maintain high productivity to optimize their physical and mental health. Simple adjustments—such as incorporating movement breaks, prioritizing high-quality sleep, or shifting to nutrient-dense meals—can make a big difference.

It’s also about self-awareness. Helping people recognize when they’re overexerting themselves or ignoring their body’s signals can prevent burnout. Suppose they’re falling asleep in the middle of the day or losing focus. In that case, it’s worth exploring whether they need to delegate more, adjust their schedule, or take better care of themselves physically.

Lastly, reminding people that sustainable success involves pacing themselves is crucial. Even with age-related changes, it’s possible to remain highly effective by aligning one’s work style with one’s capacity and making proactive choices to enhance one’s stamina and overall well-being.

I wouldn’t connect those two ideas directly. But I often work with people who are overworked and exhausted yet don’t know how to step off the hamster wheel. That’s when I step into the lane of healing and ask deeper questions like: What are you running from?

Sometimes, people run so fast toward something they aren’t even happy with. They’re overworked, their health is suffering, their family relationships are strained—perhaps even on the verge of separation. They need to take a step back and examine all the pieces. Why are they taking action the way they are? What’s driving them?

What’s available to them beyond this constant striving? People can work as long and hard as they want, but if they aren’t taking care of themselves, there’s likely an underlying issue. I always ask my clients to reflect on their intrinsic motivation: Does it come from needing to prove or achieve something?

This work is deep and meaningful because it allows people to shift from working 80 hours a week to a more sustainable and intentional pace. By doing this, they often create far more leverage and results. They stop working just for the sake of working and instead allow themselves the space to breathe, gain insights, and make meaningful changes in their business and life.

Jacobsen: What is the most significant challenge in your business and entrepreneurial development?

Notarianni: There have been many challenges throughout my journey. As an entrepreneur, a mother of three, and someone who started as a single parent with two kids, I’ve had to play every role—whether at home, in my company, with my team, or with my clients. I’ve had to wear many hats and fill many roles, which has always been challenging.

Looking back over the past decade, that challenge has not completely disappeared. However, I’ve found new ways to innovate and manage my energy, connecting it to my priorities while staying mindful of the seasons in my life, my children’s lives, and my business.

For example, I’ve taken a different approach to growing and scaling my company. I’ve intentionally chosen not to pursue certain things as aggressively during specific periods, like when my daughter was in her first 18 months or during her early childhood. I’ve designed a business model that allowed me to spend far more time with my children, especially when they were young.

This has always been a challenge, but it’s also been my greatest opportunity. It has inspired me to create innovative business models I haven’t seen elsewhere. I’m grateful for how this experience has allowed me to grow as a human being overall.

Jacobsen: When people want to scale—say they’ve built a business that generates half a million or a million dollars and is looking to grow it to $10 million—it’s an uncommon leap. Many fail, and I’m sure quite a few declare bankruptcy. What do you notice, not as a hard and fast rule but as a heuristic, to guide people during such business expansions? What should they avoid, and what should they focus on?

Notarianni: When looking at a business, it’s not always about growing the top line. You can have a $10 million company making a million dollars a month but only keeping $100K. On the other hand, you can have a company making $120K a month but keeping $100K.

Many people get stuck here, focused solely on top-line revenue, building a massive team, and scaling a big business. Sometimes, I step in and ask, “But for what? What are you trying to create? Do you know what the outcome is?”

What kind of lifestyle do you want? What do you want to keep? What are you going to net versus gross? Many people don’t consider these questions when scaling their businesses. It’s important to check whether their need for significance or validation drives their growth.

That said, there are incredible benefits to growing a $10 million company—supporting a team, building a healthy and efficient operation, and making a meaningful impact globally. There’s value and health in that.

I’ve seen both sides of it. I’ve coached $100 million, $1 million, and $100K companies and witnessed their growth over time. Ultimately, it depends on where someone is, where they want to go, and how they want to get there. There are many ways to reach a goal, but ensuring that the path aligns with the person’s wants is key.

Jacobsen: Do you see many cases where people want a big business to have a big business?

Notarianni: Absolutely—a thousand percent. Many of the people who come to us are at a breaking point. They’ll say, “Everything’s broken. I don’t know what to do.”

Usually, two types of people come to us: one who has done everything but isn’t happy and genuinely wants to grow, and the other who wants to grow to build a massive company.

Once, I was in a room with a mentor who had eight or ten eight-figure companies. I asked him about his strategies—how he scaled and grew different verticals across his businesses. He said, “Leah, I make more money in this room than maybe you do, but people would trade to have your life.”

That moment hit me. I looked at my husband and said, “Maybe we need to evaluate what we’re doing well, why we want to grow, and what that growth could look like. Should we stretch our timeline, scale back, or focus on consistency in different areas? Or is this just a different season of life?”

That conversation was meaningful, and I often shared it with others. It’s critical to take inventory and ask yourself if you’re enjoying the life you’ve built.

I’ve worked with people making $100 million who struggle to carve out time for a simple walk, take their family on vacation, or even spend meaningful time with loved ones. I hope everyone reading this takes a moment to evaluate their life. Ensure you’re truly enjoying the life you’ve built, and prioritize what matters most to you.

Jacobsen: Despite the value of persistence and grit, what are some dangerous myths that pervade the mentorship, speaker series, business classes, and entrepreneurial landscape that people should avoid? What are things that sound good but don’t work in the long term?

Notarianni: You should not burn yourself out for long periods. Learning to live an intentionally healthy life is crucial. There’s a lot of noise out there—different advice from different people—and much of it can be misleading.

For example, some encourage you to work a million hours a week, pushing the “hustle at all costs” mentality. Then, some people believe in manifesting everything without taking meaningful action.

The truth is, there’s a middle ground. Having a clear vision of who you are, what you value, and your purpose. Deep inner work is essential, but equally important is taking action.

If you start from scratch, the energy and focus required to move forward will be intense for some time. Growth takes time, deliberate effort, and significant change. Unfortunately, many don’t paint an honest picture of the entrepreneurial journey.

As a mother and someone who’s gone from nothing to where I am now, I can tell you—it’s not glamorous. People often see the “after”—the beautiful office, the beach houses, the ideal family—but they don’t see the losses, challenges, and sacrifices along the way. Even when people share their struggles, others don’t realize how significant those losses can be.

It’s also important to remember that not everything happens in a year, as you might see on Instagram. And that’s okay. It doesn’t mean you’ve failed. It just means you’re growing, and things will come in the right time and season they’re meant to.

Jacobsen: Leah, thank you for today’s time and this opportunity. I appreciate it.

Notarianni: Awesome. Thank you so much, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Two Reflections on the Legacy of David Lynch

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/03

Scott Hamm Duenas is an American actor and producer based in Southern California. He co-wrote, starred in, and produced the award-winning film ReBroken. With over 15 years in SAG-AFTRA, his career includes roles on Bold and the Beautiful. A martial artist, he integrates physicality into his performances and filmmaking.

Chris Hite is a filmmaker, screenwriter, animator, and film historian specializing in European cinema. His research on Italian film history appears in TransAtlantic Visions (2023), and he has presented at major academic conferences. His films have screened at over 80 international festivals, and his documentary FireStorm ’77 won “Best U.S. Documentary” at the Big Bear Film Summit.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do you see your artistic identity evolving over the decades? Was David Lynch an influence on this?

Scott Hamm Duenas: David Lynch’s work is known to be unconventional. His ability to mix the plain with the bizarre has encouraged me to take chances, especially when I’m auditioning for roles. Sometimes it works, and sometimes it doesn’t, but I never have any regrets afterward if I know I’ve made a bold choice.

Jacobsen: How has Lynch’s legacy influenced your artistic or philosophical approach to storytelling?

Duenas: Lynch’s work has always inspired me to trust my instincts and embrace the unknown. If you’re scared to take a chance or make a strong choice, how will you ever know how good you can really be?

Jacobsen: What did David Lynch mean to artists, producers, and directors in the Hollywood landscape who followed his work?

Duenas: To many artists, David Lynch represents creativity and thinking outside the box. His willingness to go against conventional storytelling and create unique films has no doubt inspired others. People love that Lynch will take risks and not compromise his artistic integrity just for commercial success.

Jacobsen: What is your favorite Lynch quote?

Duenas: My favorite David Lynch quote is: “Ideas are like fish. If you want to catch little fish, you can stay in the shallow water. But if you want to catch the big fish, you’ve got to go deeper.” I love this quote because it’s so true for me when it comes to anything in life. Certainly in the entertainment business, but I also apply it to my family, fitness, and martial arts journey all the time. It serves as a reminder to be persistent in your pursuits, but make sure you challenge yourself because it’s the only way you will get better.

Jacobsen: What was Lynch’s overall influence? 

Hite: David Lynch’s influence on the artistic community is legendary.

Pioneers like Lynch, Stan Brakhage, Luis Buñuel and more were considered avant-garde and experimental during their time, but their explorations have since been co-opted into mainstream filmmaking, and more so, marketing strategies as an extension of style. 

Lynch, perhaps more than any modern filmmaker, challenged Hollywood dogma and proved that a film can have commercial appeal, name actors, and still delve into the realms of surrealism. 

The Hollywood mentality, at least from the executives’ perspective, was very narrowly defined through most of the 20th century. They only considered film a business and felt that overly artistic approaches would alienate audience members. Filmmakers like Lynch made them uncomfortable by foregrounding the artistry of the medium but proved that audiences enjoy boundary pushing approaches.

As a commercial director, Lynch’s year 2000 Play Station ad demonstrated that product shots were dispensable and that a unusual narrative with a defined mood and tone was just as valuable in creating interest and demand.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Prof. Paul Robbins, Senomorphics, Senolytics, and Longevity

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/03

Prof. Paul Robbins is a renowned biochemistry, molecular biology, and biophysics professor at the University of Minnesota. He is Associate Director of the Institute on the Biology of Aging and Metabolism (iBAM). He is a leading researcher in aging science, pioneering gene therapies for autoimmune diseases and developing chemotherapeutics, including senolytics and senomorphic, to target senescent cells. With a Ph.D. from UC Berkeley and postdoctoral training at MIT’s Whitehead Institute, Dr. Robbins has held prominent roles at Scripps Research and the University of Pittsburgh. His groundbreaking work advances healthspan and lifespan science, aiming to improve aging-related health worldwide. Robbins discusses chemotherapeutics, targeting senescent cells, and advancing healthspan and lifespan science. He explains how senolytics kill harmful senescent cells while senomorphics suppress their damaging effects. Highlighting the importance of immune function, Robbins notes that improving immune health can help clear senescent cells and enhance resilience to aging-related diseases. He emphasizes the need for rigorous, well-controlled clinical trials to validate treatments for slowing aging, such as senolytics and NAD precursors. Robbins remains optimistic about the field’s progress, predicting a future of combination therapies addressing various hallmarks of aging for healthier, longer lives.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Paul Robbins, a professor of biochemistry, molecular biology, and biophysics. He also serves as the Associate Director of the Institute on the Biology of Aging and Metabolism (iBAM) at the University of Minnesota. His work has advanced healthspan and lifespan science globally. What inspired the transition from studying gene regulation and transcriptional enhancers to senescence and longevity research?

Prof. Paul Robbins: Right. I started at the University of Pittsburgh in the gene therapy field, where I ran a gene therapy core facility. We developed viral vectors for various investigators on campus, working on approaches to treat numerous diseases. As I collaborated with these researchers, I realized that the same molecular pathways and targets were implicated across multiple diseases. The same things going wrong in one disease were going wrong in others.

I quickly embraced the concept of geroscience: the idea that aging is the greatest risk factor for disease and involves common pathways linked to various conditions. By developing ways to target aging, I could reduce the risk, mitigate the severity, or even prevent the onset of many age-related diseases. This realization led to a transition from focusing on treating individual diseases to addressing the root cause of many—aging itself. Whether it’s cancer, osteoarthritis, Alzheimer’s, Parkinson’s, or muscle wasting, the biggest risk factor is the aging process itself.

Jacobsen: How do chemotherapeutic compounds reduce senescent cell burdens, and what are the mechanisms involved?

Robbins: There are now two types of chemotherapeutics, and we coined terms for these categories. First, there are drugs called senolytics, which preferentially kill senescent cells. Second, there are compounds called senomorphic, which suppress the adverse effects of senescent cells.

Cellular senescence is a cell fate that evolved in mammals and other vertebrates. It primarily acts as a cancer prevention mechanism. When cells are damaged or at risk of acquiring mutations that could lead to cancer, they activate pathways that induce senescence. This halts their proliferation and prompts them to release inflammatory factors that signal the immune system to clear them. A healthy individual’s immune system likely clears these senescent cells daily. A young, healthy immune system efficiently removes thousands of these cells regularly.

Since senescence is an anticancer mechanism, many cleared cells exhibit changes that could make them pre-tumorigenic or precancerous. Interestingly, many senolytics that target senescent cells also target pathways active in tumour cells. These pathways are upregulated in senescent cells because they are precancerous. Essentially, senolytics target similar pathways to those addressed by anticancer drugs.

Conversely, senomorphic targets the factors released by senescent cells, which are responsible for the adverse effects of these cells on surrounding tissues. These compounds can suppress senescent cells’ inflammatory and damaging signals without necessarily killing them.

They’ll target activated pathways leading to this inflammatory response. Many of them are anti-inflammatory, suppressing the chronic inflammation caused by the increase in the senescent cell burden with age, as the immune system does not clear these cells as effectively. So, senomorphic drugs are, in most cases, suppressing inflammatory factors. Senolytics target the same pathways that anticancer drugs target.

Jacobsen: Side question. Does this mean one could chart, across age, two lines of best fit? One from 0 to, let’s say, 80—a decrease in healing factors and an increase in inflammatory response over time. Is that generally the picture?

Robbins: That’s the hypothesis. I didn’t mention earlier that there is evidence for “good” senescence. For example, in wound healing, there’s evidence that senescent cells transiently accumulate at damage sites. These cells release beneficial factors, such as growth factors, that promote healing, especially in the skin. However, this likely applies to other tissues as well. Then, these senescent cells are cleared, presumably by the immune system or possibly other mechanisms. So, these are the “good” senescent cells.

Then there are the senescent cells that accumulate in older individuals, which chronically release factors that cause harmful effects. Though experimental methods vary between labs and age models, the data supports this idea. When you’re younger, the senescence you see in many cases is “good” senescence. Those cells appear, serve their function, and disappear. They are not a response to extensive damage or mutations that might lead to cancer. Instead, this is a natural process to promote wound healing.

The question is: Is a good senescent cell the same as a bad senescent cell? The answer is no. Drugs targeting bad senescent cells will not necessarily affect good senescent cells. There is ongoing discussion about whether senolytics might have adverse effects on processes like wound healing or even development in pregnant women, etc. These questions are still being investigated, but the consensus is that there are different classes of senescent cells—good and bad—and that the developed drugs aim to target only the subset of bad senescent cells.

Jacobsen: Regarding clinical trials, what are the mechanisms and the prospects for increasing health span and lifespan via a chemotherapeutic compound?

Robbins: This field took off in 2012 with pioneering work. It’s considered pioneering because nobody expected it to work. They created transgenic mice that could selectively kill cells expressing certain senescence markers. They used a marker that regulates the cell cycle called p16. When p16 is activated, it stops cells from growing, and many senescent cells express this marker. These transgenic mice were engineered so that if given a drug, it would kill p16-positive cells.

That study showed that clearing these cells could extend the median lifespan of mice. It delayed the onset of many age-related pathologies and the onset of cancer. However, it didn’t necessarily lead to a significant extension of lifespan—perhaps a minor increase.

A paper published this past year by a faculty member we recruited to the University of Minnesota, Ming Xu, demonstrated that clearing a different type of senescent cell—those positive for another cell cycle regulator called p21—led to mice being healthier and living about 10 to 15% longer. This suggests that targeting specific types of senescent cells could both increase health span and extend lifespan.

The hypothesis is—and these experiments are ongoing—that eliminating both p16-positive and p21-positive senescent cells would have a pronounced effect. Many of the chemotherapeutics that we’re developing appear to target both p16-positive and p21-positive cells. However, we don’t believe our approaches eliminate all types of senescent cells. Instead, we’re reducing their overall numbers but not clearing every subtype.

We still don’t know which senescent cell types in the body are the most critical to target. Is it senescent cells in the liver, brain, muscle, or cartilage? We don’t yet know which types to focus on with our senolytics. We’re reducing the total burden of senescent cells, but the specific subtypes remain uncertain. There’s still much work to be done. If we identify the senescent cell types that are most detrimental, we could develop more effective therapeutics, resulting in clearer benefits like extending the median lifespan, increasing the maximal lifespan, and improving healthspan. How much we can achieve remains to be seen.

Jacobsen: Imagine you have a dumpster pile. It’s as if one company only deals with cardboard waste—they clean that up. Similarly, by identifying specific genetic markers of senescent cells, you might work with another company specializing in copper waste, reducing the overall load but still leaving a significant pile of unknowns. 

Robbins: That’s a good senology. In the last few years, the NIH recognized the importance of senescence across all its institutes. Whether it’s heart, blood, and lung; cancer; allergy and infectious diseases; or aging, senescence has been acknowledged as a significant factor. The NIH Director’s Common Fund has been supporting the SenNet Consortium in addressing this. You can find it online at sennet.org or sennet.gov. This consortium comprises hundreds of scientists working to identify, characterize, and spatially map senescent cells across 18 tissues during normal human and mouse aging.

We’re trying to determine what senescent cell types emerge with age, where they accumulate, and their roles. In the second phase of the grant, we plan to conduct perturbation studies to determine which of these senescent cells are the most important to target. We’ll also have molecular characterizations of these cells, allowing us to leverage bioinformatics, AI approaches, and other techniques to identify compounds that can selectively clear them. At this stage, we know senescent cells accumulate with age, but we don’t know all their types or which drive disease pathology. This may vary depending on the disease, which raises additional questions that must be addressed.

Not all senescence is the same. The concept we’re introducing—and there’s a Nature Magazine perspective under review—is called genotypes. We think there are many different genotypes, much like many tumour types. Understanding these differences will be crucial for developing therapeutics that extend healthy aging and possibly increase lifespan.

Jacobsen: What challenges arise in translating chemotherapeutic research in mouse models to human clinical trials? People who may not know much about this might wonder why researchers work with organisms like Drosophila or mice. They might think, “Those are completely different from humans—why are they even relevant?” Can you explain the connection between clinical trials and these model organisms?

Robbins: Yes. Unfortunately, those working with mice often use genetically homogeneous strains. In theory, all the mice are genetically identical, though there are always slight variations in practice. Because of this, genetic uniformity makes their lifespans and molecular processes fairly consistent. Even then, we see variability—for example, some mice treated with senolytics live longer than others.

When you transition to humans, the situation becomes far more complex. There are likely subsets of people with a higher senescent cell burden and would benefit most from senolytics. Conversely, others may be aging more healthfully or whose diseases are driven by different hallmarks of aging rather than senescence. One of the first challenges we face is identifying the right population of patients to treat—the right diseases, conditions, dose, and timing. The process becomes an even bigger black box when treating people without a specific disease to extend their lifespan.

What we need are biomarkers to assess the burden of harmful senescent cells. Biomarkers could also help us determine which type of senolytic to use, as there isn’t a single drug that can effectively eliminate all senescent cell types. Ideally, we’d like to predict the most effective senolytic for a given biomarker profile. However, not everything that works in mice works in humans. For example, a senescent mouse cell doesn’t have identical molecular characteristics to a senescent human cell. Drugs that kill senescent mouse fibroblasts don’t always work on senescent human fibroblasts, even in cell cultures. These are some of the hurdles we’re dealing with.

That being said, the initial evidence is promising. In early-phase clinical trials, the first-generation senolytic drugs we’ve developed appear to reduce senescence markers, at least for inflammatory markers. Whether this translates to improved health span or reduced disease severity is unclear. Still, initial trials suggest some target engagement with the current drugs.

Jacobsen: That raises an interesting question about the opposite approach. Could there be conditions under which the accumulation of certain senescent cell types counterintuitively extends lifespan or health span?

Robbins: That’s a great question. Suppose you had asked me that five years ago, I would have said, “Of course not. All senescent cells are bad.” But now, the picture is more nuanced. As I mentioned earlier, transient senescent cells can be beneficial. Some senescent cells, as we currently define them with specific markers, may secrete factors that have positive effects.

These cells likely evolved to provide benefits during our evolutionary history. Most people think of senescent cells as part of an anti-tumour mechanism, and that’s true. However, senescent cells, or at least the senescence process, contribute to antiviral or anti-pathogen responses. For example, we know that cells infected with viruses often enter a senescent state. It’s possible that senescence evolved to prevent cancer and reduce the risk of infection.

The problem arises because, thousands of years ago, humans didn’t live to be 80 or 90 years old. Senescence was doing its job in individuals during their teens, twenties, or thirties—not in their eighties. That’s where the issue changes completely. While there’s clear evidence of beneficial senescence in younger individuals—where these cells emerge, perform their function, and disappear—what happens when people live far longer than our species evolved to? Some of these senescent cells persist, and their prolonged presence likely contributes to the negative effects we see in older individuals.

Robbins: That’s where these cells might start causing problems. Something beneficial when you’re 30 may not be beneficial when you’re 80. That’s the concept of antagonistic pleiotropy—traits advantageous at one stage of life might become detrimental at another. There are many examples of this. What you said is likely correct, but we don’t have definitive proof yet.

Jacobsen: How might chemotherapeutic compounds prevent age-related diseases compared to the treatment of existing conditions?

Robbins: If it’s a senolytic, in theory—not every disease is driven by senescence. There may be diseases where senescence accumulates due to disease rather than being the driver. That’s always the issue: Is senescence the driver, or is it the consequence? For example, if you have much inflammation, that inflammation can drive more senescence.

Each disease might be different. Using a senolytic is something you could do intermittently. You wouldn’t need to give it all the time. It’s like treating a bacterial infection—you take antibiotics to kill the bacteria. Then you’re done unless the bacteria return. Similarly, the thought is that senolytics could be administered intermittently, possibly in combination with standard treatments. It doesn’t have to be one or the other.

An example of this is a trial conducted by Unity Biotechnology for macular degeneration. The standard care involves regular injections to prevent angiogenesis in the eye, which helps stop degeneration. Unity Biotechnology found evidence of senescent cells in the back of the eye. It injected a senolytic compound directly into the eye. They observed improvements comparable to the standard care but with a single injection. That single injection provided benefits for a year, whereas the standard treatment requires injections every 1-2 months.

This suggests that senolytics might not need to be administered as frequently, and they could provide an additive—or, in some cases, a synergistic—benefit with standard treatments. However, not every disease will respond to a senolytic. While senescence may be present in every disease context, it might not play as significant a role in some diseases as in others.

Jacobsen: As an aside, this seems like an important question to address in interviews, and it’s worth reiterating ad nauseam. What is your expert perspective on the viability of the multi-billion-dollar industry around supplements, pills, injections, and, as some claim, practices like taking the blood of a young person to rejuvenate themselves? For example, famous individuals taking extraordinary amounts of supplements or adopting practices that make them seem like, for lack of a better phrase, “IV Draculas.”

Robbins: That’s a great question. I always get asked this. I keep my answers PG, but I’ll give it a go. Most of those supplements, and most of the clinical protocols you can go to some foreign country to get, have no clinical evidence from well-controlled trials. There’s no evidence that they work. That’s not to say that some might not work, but there’s no evidence regarding the right dose, timing, or patient population. This is why all these things need well-regulated and controlled clinical studies.

For example, one of the supplements we’ve worked with—and are now trying to test in FDA-approved clinical trials—is a natural product called fisetin. It’s a flavonoid found in the skins of many fruits and vegetables. At higher doses, it appears to have some hemolytic activity. We’re trying to determine if this weak senolytic, being a natural product and safe, could be effective. It doesn’t work at the low doses people typically take—it requires a much higher dose.

As part of the process, we tried to find the right source of fisetin. Our colleagues at the Mayo Clinic conducted mass spectrometry on various commercially available fisetin sources. Some were 50% pure, others 60%, and a few were 95%, which is the FDA’s standard. The FDA requires something over 95% pure. The concern is, if you’re taking something 50% pure, what’s in the other 50%? That raises questions.

No one knows what the right dose is. While some of these supplements may have positive effects, there’s no regulation, quality control, or reliable information about dosing or who should take them. They’re often marketed on late-night TV or in ads in the back of magazines. People buy them, but the products include everything from jellyfish extracts to stem cells from apple seeds. You could go through a long list of unproven substances. Some of these may have effects, but no clinical studies have been done to confirm it. That’s where the field is moving—toward scientific validation rather than unregulated supplements.

Jacobsen: Doubtless, much money is being made off supplements, but I’m paraphrasing here. ‘There’s no clinical trial evidence for most of it.’

Robbins: Yes, exactly. It’s sad, but true.

Jacobsen: Well, let’s move on to other topics. How will current therapies integrate with senescence-targeting treatments in longevity science?

Robbins: That’s still an unanswered question. No one approach will be 100% effective in extending everyone’s health span and lifespan. It will involve cocktails of treatments.

If you look at the aging literature now, there’s this concept of the hallmarks of aging. These include changes in the epigenome, stem cell function, mitochondrial function, the microbiome, inflammation, cellular senescence, etc. These hallmarks are all interconnected and influence each other. However, some people may have one hallmark that’s more prominent than another.

Because of this, future treatments will likely use a cocktail of compounds. Senolytics will likely play a critical role but won’t be the only intervention. In 10, 15, or 20 years, the approach to staying healthier for longer—and potentially living a bit longer—will involve a combination of therapies. It’s going to be a cocktail.

We need to know whether some of these treatments are working in an additive or synergistic way—or are they cancelling each other? For example, how do you proceed if you choose senolytics targeting the same senescent cell without an additive effect? These things will require more preclinical and clinical studies to determine. 

Jacobsen: What is the role of inflammation and immune system decline in the aging process? This has been alluded to multiple times in our discussion.

Robbins: Yes, exactly. We published, and others have also reported, that if you age the immune system in mice—at least using a genetic trick—it leads to systemic aging. Conversely, if young immune cells are returned to an old mouse, it seems to slow aging. This happens partly because the functional immune cells can now clear senescent cells. So, we believe that immune aging can drive systemic aging.

The question is: what drives immune aging? Is it senescence? There’s evidence that immune cells can become senescent-like cells. Immune aging is important because improving immune health could help clear other senescent cells and eliminate dysfunctional immune cells. Our team is investing more effort into understanding ways to improve immune function with age. This could be an indirect method to clear senescent cells, improve resilience to pathogen infections, and reduce the negative effects of aged immune cells on the rest of the body.

If you think about it, senescent immune cells—like T cells—can infiltrate into every tissue in the body. Let’s say you have a senescent liver cell, like a hepatocyte. It’s liver-specific but can release factors into the bloodstream, affecting the rest of the body. However, a senescent T cell can infiltrate any tissue in the body. If it’s releasing inflammatory factors and not functioning correctly, it can cause local adverse effects in multiple tissues.

When immune cells are young and healthy, they perform essential functions. But when they become dysfunctional, they start causing problems. They can invade tissues, release inflammatory factors, and contribute to damage across the body. Targeting immune aging—either with senolytics or other classes of drugs—will be a critical area of focus.

One example that has been published and is being developed for clinical application is CAR T cells. These engineered T cells were originally designed to clear cancer cells by targeting specific tumours. Researchers are now using CAR T cells to target senescent cells directly. In mice, this approach has been shown to clear senescent cells, improve health span, and extend lifespan.

Directing immune cells to clear senescent cells has clear benefits. However, there are challenges in translating this to the clinic. One issue is figuring out how to safely target senescent cells, as there isn’t a single protein on the surface of a unique senescent cell. This raises concerns about accidentally killing normal cells alongside senescent cells. Many safety studies still need to be done, but improving immune function will undoubtedly be an important target for the future.

Jacobsen: That was a long answer. Yes, immune function is something we need to be targeting. Now, for the concluding sentence, as is the case with every single paper and poster presentation, what early results could influence future research directions?

Robbins: Yes. Well, the field is now poised for solid, quality-controlled clinical data. Many studies in the clinic are now being conducted under FDA Investigational New Drug (IND) applications, ensuring quality control, proper statistical powering, and other rigorous standards. These studies include trials with certain senolytics, NAD precursors, and other factors. While most stem cell studies are still being done in other countries under conditions that may not provide the best evidence, legitimate stem cell clinical trials are underway. There’s also ongoing work with antioxidants and other compounds.

The field needs evidence of success. It doesn’t have to be a home run—it doesn’t have to make us live longer. There is a need for proof that these approaches can slow aging or positively impact an age-related disease or condition. That’s where the field is right now. And it doesn’t necessarily have to involve treating a disease; it could target a condition or a biological process.

For example, clinical trials are beginning to test whether senolytics can allow older organs to be transplanted. If you take a liver from an 80-year-old donor and clear all the senescent cells from it, does that organ engraft and function better following transplantation? That’s not the same as treating an individual directly. Still, it demonstrates that clearing senescent cells could improve tissue function after transplantation.

Another area involves trials we’ve been associated with initially focused on COVID-19. We contributed to some of the preclinical work for those studies. Unfortunately—or fortunately—the development of vaccines changed the landscape, slowing down those trials. However, there’s a trial underway to see if senolytics can improve survival in sepsis patients.

A lot is happening, and within the next year or two, we should know whether these approaches provide meaningful benefits. This will pave the way for the field to develop better drugs. The drugs we’re currently using are first-generation senolytics, senomorphic, and other compounds targeting the hallmarks of aging. They are far from optimal. We’re scratching the surface, but with a few wins in the clinic, the field will gain momentum and progress toward more effective treatments.

There are no setbacks, no poorly designed trials, and no evidence showing that older patients are more susceptible or at greater risk of dying from the treatment. Safety is a large priority. The question is: would you treat your grandmother with these drugs? That’s the standard—you have to prove to yourself that they’re safe enough for your grandmother to take, or, in my case, I would take them myself.

These are the things the field needs. It’s going to require some clinical success. There are a lot of clinical studies starting—some well-controlled, others not—but clinical successes are what will push the field forward. A few wins will also bring big pharma into the picture. Pharma has been hesitant because aging is not officially classified as a disease. As a result, developing drugs to slow aging hasn’t been a priority for them. However, they are interested, and a few successes will let the biotech field take off.

That’s a good enough answer for you. I’m optimistic—I’ll conclude with that. I’m optimistic about the field, where it’s going, and the quality of the science. There are going to be some wins.

Jacobsen: Anyways, thank you so much.

Robbins: Thank you so much. Enjoy yourself and stay warm in Canada. It was nice meeting you, Scott.

Jacobsen: Nice to meet you, too. You take care.

Robbins: Bye.

Jacobsen: All right.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Women’s and Girls’ Roles in Environmentalism and Public Health

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/02

Diamond Spratling, MPH, discusses the urgent need to shift climate change communication to a health and economic lens, making it more relatable to communities. She highlights the energy burden crisis in low-income Black and Brown communities, emphasizing systemic issues in housing infrastructure and policy. Spratling underscores the resilience and leadership of Black women in environmental justice, noting their historical role in major movements. She advocates for preventative solutions, policy changes, and community-driven action. Through Girl Plus Environment, she fosters education and empowerment, ensuring marginalized voices shape climate solutions. The conversation concludes with a call to amplify Black women’s leadership.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Diamond Spratling, MPH. She is an environmental health and climate justice activist, author, and public speaker. She grew up in Detroit and founded Girl Plus Environment. This national nonprofit empowered Black and Brown women to lead environmental justice efforts.

As a speaker, Diamond transforms complex environmental and health information into engaging messages for communities most affected by climate change. She has secured funding and developed award-winning equity tools for cities like Atlanta, earning accolades such as the Yale New Horizons in Conservation Award and recognition as an Aspen Institute Future Leader Climate Fellow. Diamond continues to inspire change and build equitable solutions for a healthier, more sustainable future.

What inspired you to found Girl Plus Environment? Did growing up in Detroit uniquely make this work for you?

Diamond Spratling: Yes. Growing up as a Black girl in Detroit, I loved being outdoors. Running up and down the street with all the other kids on the block was fun, especially in the summertime.

I naturally developed an interest in and curiosity about my environment. One moment that stood out to me was a Save the Polar Bears commercial I saw as a kid. It talked about how the ice sheets were melting, and as someone who loved the outdoors and animals, that was devastating. I thought, “Oh my goodness, I have to save the polar bears!” That sparked my deeper interest in the environment.

I started taking environmental science and AP classes in high school, where my interest grew even stronger. When I got to college, I studied Environmental Policy and Analysis. During one of my early internships, I began learning about the relationship between environmental issues and public health, particularly in Black and Brown communities.

I discovered how many Black and Brown children have asthma at disproportionately high rates due to environmental factors like air pollution. I learned how families were impacted—parents missing work, children missing school, and how these health disparities affected education, economic stability, and overall quality of life. It was eye-opening because I realized that environmental issues aren’t just about nature—they are deeply tied to public health, racial justice, and systemic inequalities.

I was frustrated by this realization. I started making Facebook posts to talk to my family about environmental issues and how they impact our health, but they brushed it off. They didn’t seem to care. That wasn’t very pleasant because I was so passionate about it.

I decided to create a space where we could normalize these conversations. I had to create opportunities for engagement. That’s how Girl Plus Environment was born—from my desire to create a safe, fun, and culturally relevant space for Black and Brown women to engage with environmental justice issues that impact us daily. It took off from there, and now, six years later, here we are.

Jacobsen: What strategies do you use to make technical information on policy and environmental justice more accessible and relatable?

Spratling: Yes, well, first, we do a whole lot of social media engagement and outreach. Social media and communications, in general, are our bread and butter because we know how to communicate with people non-technically. I’ve worked in various spaces—federal government, government in general, and academia. Still, I am also a regular Black woman, just like anyone else. So I think a lot about how my cousins, who have never studied environmental issues or set foot in a university, would want to receive this information. We use social media and trending topics to make the information accessible.

For example, last year, we had a campaign about toxic chemicals. We framed it around the movie Mean Girls, which everyone knows. We created content like “Meet the Toxins” and other relatable messaging. It was fun and engaging. We also create a ton of video content and host events that blend fun with education, incorporating culture into our work.

Jacobsen: How do you empower young Black and Brown women to lead and work on climate initiatives in their communities?

Spratling: Yes, well, we follow a strategy of education, engagement, and empowerment. First, education—because we don’t know what we don’t know. The government isn’t knocking on our doors, telling us, “Hey, we’re polluting your neighbourhood.” Often, we don’t even know about these issues.

So, we use visual media and other tools to educate our community, making them aware of environmental issues and how they impact their health and well-being. We ensure the information is easy to understand and relatable—helping people connect it to their daily lives, like how pollution affects their ability to go to work every day or take their kids to play at a park.

We also focus on engagement. We facilitate different training sessions and offer extensive advocacy training in our manual to help our community understand how to get involved. We teach people how to talk to decision-makers, such as legislators and senators, about the issues they care about. We train them to submit public comments, attend hearings, and engage in policymaking.

Finally, one of the most important pieces is empowerment and mobilization. We create safe spaces for these conversations and learning opportunities. People often feel more comfortable surrounded by others who look like them or share similar experiences. So, we cultivate those safe spaces—whether in our training sessions, events, or online content—so that young Black and Brown women feel comfortable learning about these issues and, more importantly, mobilizing their communities to take action.

Jacobsen: Beauty products are common in North America. In the United States, some products are harmless, while others contain harmful ingredients. Which beauty products are marketed to Black and Brown women that may not necessarily be healthy?

Spratling: Well, the sad reality is that an overwhelming number of beauty products are disproportionately marketed to Black women and Black communities. Many times, in beauty supply stores or even at your average corner store, some products contain ingredients harmful to our health.

For example, many products contain endocrine-disrupting chemicals (EDCs), which interfere with our endocrine system. These chemicals can increase women’s risk of developing fibroids or experiencing maternal health issues. These concerns are significant, yet many don’t always consider the connection between our beauty products and our health.

The reality is that the things we put on and inside our bodies profoundly impact our well-being.

Jacobsen: Why do low-income Atlanta communities spend over 20% of their income on energy bills? I’ll share a personal experience. Last year, I traveled across the United States by Amtrak, and when I arrived in Atlanta, I had my first Waffle House experience. I ordered a meal with grits.

Later, I walked to a downtown area with high-rises, where I stopped at a Starbucks located at the base of one of the buildings. I don’t remember the street names, but I remember that the cost of my fancy coffee was almost as much as my full breakfast at Waffle House.

These areas were within walking distance of each other, yet the economic divide was stark. The difference between neighbourhoods was clear just by crossing a few streets.

So, how do low-income communities in Atlanta end up spending over 20% of their income on energy bills? What are the reasons for this, and how can it be addressed systematically and responsibly?

Spratling: Yes. I appreciate your personal story—it reflects the deep disparities in Atlanta. These inequalities go beyond economics; they even impact health and life expectancy. In Atlanta, life expectancy can vary by up to 12 years, depending on your zip code. That is significant.

As for energy bills, I’ll first mention that many assume individuals are to blame for their high energy costs. But the reality is that many low-income and Black and Brown communities are already conservative with their energy use—simply because they don’t have the money to waste.

Historically, in Black households, our grandparents and great-grandparents taught us to turn off all the lights, conserve energy, reuse plastic bags, and limit waste. This mindset has been passed down through generations, so it’s not that individuals are careless with their energy consumption.

The real issue is structural and systemic factors, particularly housing quality and infrastructure. Many low-income communities live in older, less energy-efficient homes with poor insulation, outdated appliances, and inefficient heating and cooling systems. These factors force families to use more energy to maintain basic comfort, disproportionately driving up their utility bills.

Addressing this issue requires systematic investment in energy-efficient housing, affordable retrofitting programs, and stronger policies to ensure landlords maintain properties at a standard that doesn’t unfairly burden tenants.

Many of our homes are not setting us up for success. Many homes lack proper infrastructure, including insulation, needed to keep houses warm in the winter. The same issue exists in the summer—we don’t have adequate infrastructure, like proper windows or window treatments, to keep out excess heat.

A lot of this comes down to the structural conditions of our homes, but also the fact that many low-income and Black and Brown communities aren’t earning enough money to begin with. The annual household income in these communities is often between $35,000 and $45,000, yet people pay $400 monthly on energy bills. Of course, they are energy-burdened—because they don’t make enough money in the first place.

The concept of energy burden is interesting because, while it does involve energy conservation and efficiency, it is primarily about structural issues in housing and economic disparities.

So, how do we address and solve this energy burden crisis? A lot of it comes down to how we build and maintain homes. We need policies to ensure that landlords are responsible for maintaining properties—ensuring rentals are properly insulated and energy-efficient. We also need to ensure that wages are equitable so people can afford their energy bills without being financially overwhelmed.

A significant portion of this issue is policy-driven. Here in Georgia, a Public Service Commission repeatedly allows Georgia Power to raise energy rates, forcing residents to pay for projects they never approved. For instance, residents are paying for Georgia Power’s nuclear power plants, which are billions of dollars over budget. These weren’t projects the community demanded—they were corporate decisions, and now the financial burden is unfairly placed on consumers.

Jacobsen: This is a common problem. From my perspective as a Canadian, the American case appears more severe in this regard—where financial consequences and costs are offshored to individuals rather than absorbed by corporations or larger entities. The way these issues are framed and discussed also plays a significant role.

We are now seeing wildfires in California (LA fires) that clearly illustrate the impact of anthropogenic climate change, with extreme weather events becoming more frequent and severe.

How do you work with communities to provide effective education about anthropogenic climate change, its associated health risks, and the increasing intensity and frequency of natural disasters?

Spratling: Yes. What happened in California was a horrifying example of a community that was ultimately unprepared, even at the city level. Los Angeles was not adequately prepared, especially after funding was cut from fire departments.

As you mentioned, when it comes to communication and education, we have to focus on the health angle. How do we shift the narrative on climate change so that it is understood through a health lens?

My background is in public health, and I think a lot about the urgency that health-related messaging creates compared to climate change messaging. The reality is that the environmental and climate sectors have never been great at communication. We’ve traditionally relied on scare tactics—warnings about the sky falling, the world ending, and other apocalyptic predictions. But that approach has not worked.

We must be sensitive to how we communicate climate issues to our communities. Instead of highlighting the dangers, we must emphasize health implications and economic consequences—things people care about now.

Right now, people are struggling with immediate concerns—how to pay rent and put food on the table. Climate change is often perceived as a distant problem, even though we know it is happening now. But for many, it simply does not feel as urgent as putting food on the table today.

So, when it comes to education, it is about shifting the narrative—helping people understand climate change in a way that will ignite action rather than just instilling fear. We need to prepare our communities so that when disasters—like what we saw in Los Angeles and other parts of the world—happen, people are ready to take action rather than being caught off guard.

Jacobsen: Amid challenges, there are also new opportunities. For example, while doing some correspondence in Ukraine, I learned a lot. I came back. Then I attended a conference in Toronto about rebuilding Ukraine. 

One of the companies I spoke with was pursuing a large contacts—which, while significant, is perhaps not as large as it might seem in the context of massive rebuilding efforts. But they were focused on durable, fire-resistant building materials.

In that case, you had an entire city, designed for a population of many thousands people, that was flattened—80% to 90% destroyed by bombings. But as they plan to rebuild, they are considering more durable, fire-resistant materials—not just restoring what was lost, but creating something better and more resilient.

Similarly, with climate change and its many negative impacts, how do you shift the narrative toward solutions? How do we move from recognizing the increasing tragedies over time to actively proposing innovative, forward-thinking solutions?

Spratling: As you said, we must approach this from a precautionary standpoint, something the U.S. has historically failed to do. We tend to be reactionary rather than considering long-term impacts and investments.

A significant part of this conversation concerns investing in materials and infrastructure that will support our communities and help protect our environment. It’s critical that people understand this from an economic standpoint—that proactive investment is far more cost-effective than constantly rebuilding from scratch.

Approaching this work through an economic lens allows us to find shared values that resonate with everyone. We all want to live happy, healthy lives and have economic security. Meeting people where they are—by speaking in terms they relate to—works wonders. No one wants to have to rebuild their city.

So, from a mitigation standpoint, we need to focus on preventative measures—how we can lessen the impact of future disasters rather than simply reacting after they happen.

Jacobsen: What makes Black and Brown women in Atlanta and similar cities uniquely positioned to educate themselves and others about climate risks, infrastructure challenges, and the importance of making informed choices about environmental impacts and personal products?

Spratling: First, I would say that Black women are resilient.

Black women have had to endure and lead through countless challenges. Black women are the most educated demographic in the world.

If we look at major social movements—from the Me Too movement to the Civil Rights movement to Black Lives Matter—black women have always been the backbone.

This is no different when it comes to the climate and environmental justice movement. In fact, we must be even more engaged because environmental issues have disproportionate impacts on us and our communities.

Black women should be at the forefront of environmental justice—in conversations, decision-making, solutions, jobs, leadership roles, and every aspect. We understand the stakes because we have lived them.

We have been experiencing environmental burdens our entire lives. That lived experience gives us a unique ability to advocate for ourselves and everyone disproportionately affected by environmental injustice.

When we discuss Black women’s roles and strengths, we focus on our endurance and the fact that we already have what it takes to lead in this movement.

Unfortunately, for too long, we have been ignored and told this is not a space for us—which is completely false. Our grandmothers, great-grandmothers, and ancestors have been engaged in this work for generations. It is our time to amplify their legacy and push it even further.

Jacobsen: Diamond, thank you for taking the time to speak today. It was lovely to meet you.

Spratling: Yes, likewise. Thank you so much! It was great to meet you as well.

Jacobsen: We’ll be in touch shortly.

Spratling: Thank you. Take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Women’s and Girls’ Roles in Environmentalism and Public Health

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/02

Diamond Spratling, MPH, discusses the urgent need to shift climate change communication to a health and economic lens, making it more relatable to communities. She highlights the energy burden crisis in low-income Black and Brown communities, emphasizing systemic issues in housing infrastructure and policy. Spratling underscores the resilience and leadership of Black women in environmental justice, noting their historical role in major movements. She advocates for preventative solutions, policy changes, and community-driven action. Through Girl Plus Environment, she fosters education and empowerment, ensuring marginalized voices shape climate solutions. The conversation concludes with a call to amplify Black women’s leadership.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Diamond Spratling, MPH. She is an environmental health and climate justice activist, author, and public speaker. She grew up in Detroit and founded Girl Plus Environment. This national nonprofit empowered Black and Brown women to lead environmental justice efforts.

As a speaker, Diamond transforms complex environmental and health information into engaging messages for communities most affected by climate change. She has secured funding and developed award-winning equity tools for cities like Atlanta, earning accolades such as the Yale New Horizons in Conservation Award and recognition as an Aspen Institute Future Leader Climate Fellow. Diamond continues to inspire change and build equitable solutions for a healthier, more sustainable future.

What inspired you to found Girl Plus Environment? Did growing up in Detroit uniquely make this work for you?

Diamond Spratling: Yes. Growing up as a Black girl in Detroit, I loved being outdoors. Running up and down the street with all the other kids on the block was fun, especially in the summertime.

I naturally developed an interest in and curiosity about my environment. One moment that stood out to me was a Save the Polar Bears commercial I saw as a kid. It talked about how the ice sheets were melting, and as someone who loved the outdoors and animals, that was devastating. I thought, “Oh my goodness, I have to save the polar bears!” That sparked my deeper interest in the environment.

I started taking environmental science and AP classes in high school, where my interest grew even stronger. When I got to college, I studied Environmental Policy and Analysis. During one of my early internships, I began learning about the relationship between environmental issues and public health, particularly in Black and Brown communities.

I discovered how many Black and Brown children have asthma at disproportionately high rates due to environmental factors like air pollution. I learned how families were impacted—parents missing work, children missing school, and how these health disparities affected education, economic stability, and overall quality of life. It was eye-opening because I realized that environmental issues aren’t just about nature—they are deeply tied to public health, racial justice, and systemic inequalities.

I was frustrated by this realization. I started making Facebook posts to talk to my family about environmental issues and how they impact our health, but they brushed it off. They didn’t seem to care. That wasn’t very pleasant because I was so passionate about it.

I decided to create a space where we could normalize these conversations. I had to create opportunities for engagement. That’s how Girl Plus Environment was born—from my desire to create a safe, fun, and culturally relevant space for Black and Brown women to engage with environmental justice issues that impact us daily. It took off from there, and now, six years later, here we are.

Jacobsen: What strategies do you use to make technical information on policy and environmental justice more accessible and relatable?

Spratling: Yes, well, first, we do a whole lot of social media engagement and outreach. Social media and communications, in general, are our bread and butter because we know how to communicate with people non-technically. I’ve worked in various spaces—federal government, government in general, and academia. Still, I am also a regular Black woman, just like anyone else. So I think a lot about how my cousins, who have never studied environmental issues or set foot in a university, would want to receive this information. We use social media and trending topics to make the information accessible.

For example, last year, we had a campaign about toxic chemicals. We framed it around the movie Mean Girls, which everyone knows. We created content like “Meet the Toxins” and other relatable messaging. It was fun and engaging. We also create a ton of video content and host events that blend fun with education, incorporating culture into our work.

Jacobsen: How do you empower young Black and Brown women to lead and work on climate initiatives in their communities?

Spratling: Yes, well, we follow a strategy of education, engagement, and empowerment. First, education—because we don’t know what we don’t know. The government isn’t knocking on our doors, telling us, “Hey, we’re polluting your neighbourhood.” Often, we don’t even know about these issues.

So, we use visual media and other tools to educate our community, making them aware of environmental issues and how they impact their health and well-being. We ensure the information is easy to understand and relatable—helping people connect it to their daily lives, like how pollution affects their ability to go to work every day or take their kids to play at a park.

We also focus on engagement. We facilitate different training sessions and offer extensive advocacy training in our manual to help our community understand how to get involved. We teach people how to talk to decision-makers, such as legislators and senators, about the issues they care about. We train them to submit public comments, attend hearings, and engage in policymaking.

Finally, one of the most important pieces is empowerment and mobilization. We create safe spaces for these conversations and learning opportunities. People often feel more comfortable surrounded by others who look like them or share similar experiences. So, we cultivate those safe spaces—whether in our training sessions, events, or online content—so that young Black and Brown women feel comfortable learning about these issues and, more importantly, mobilizing their communities to take action.

Jacobsen: Beauty products are common in North America. In the United States, some products are harmless, while others contain harmful ingredients. Which beauty products are marketed to Black and Brown women that may not necessarily be healthy?

Spratling: Well, the sad reality is that an overwhelming number of beauty products are disproportionately marketed to Black women and Black communities. Many times, in beauty supply stores or even at your average corner store, some products contain ingredients harmful to our health.

For example, many products contain endocrine-disrupting chemicals (EDCs), which interfere with our endocrine system. These chemicals can increase women’s risk of developing fibroids or experiencing maternal health issues. These concerns are significant, yet many don’t always consider the connection between our beauty products and our health.

The reality is that the things we put on and inside our bodies profoundly impact our well-being.

Jacobsen: Why do low-income Atlanta communities spend over 20% of their income on energy bills? I’ll share a personal experience. Last year, I traveled across the United States by Amtrak, and when I arrived in Atlanta, I had my first Waffle House experience. I ordered a meal with grits.

Later, I walked to a downtown area with high-rises, where I stopped at a Starbucks located at the base of one of the buildings. I don’t remember the street names, but I remember that the cost of my fancy coffee was almost as much as my full breakfast at Waffle House.

These areas were within walking distance of each other, yet the economic divide was stark. The difference between neighbourhoods was clear just by crossing a few streets.

So, how do low-income communities in Atlanta end up spending over 20% of their income on energy bills? What are the reasons for this, and how can it be addressed systematically and responsibly?

Spratling: Yes. I appreciate your personal story—it reflects the deep disparities in Atlanta. These inequalities go beyond economics; they even impact health and life expectancy. In Atlanta, life expectancy can vary by up to 12 years, depending on your zip code. That is significant.

As for energy bills, I’ll first mention that many assume individuals are to blame for their high energy costs. But the reality is that many low-income and Black and Brown communities are already conservative with their energy use—simply because they don’t have the money to waste.

Historically, in Black households, our grandparents and great-grandparents taught us to turn off all the lights, conserve energy, reuse plastic bags, and limit waste. This mindset has been passed down through generations, so it’s not that individuals are careless with their energy consumption.

The real issue is structural and systemic factors, particularly housing quality and infrastructure. Many low-income communities live in older, less energy-efficient homes with poor insulation, outdated appliances, and inefficient heating and cooling systems. These factors force families to use more energy to maintain basic comfort, disproportionately driving up their utility bills.

Addressing this issue requires systematic investment in energy-efficient housing, affordable retrofitting programs, and stronger policies to ensure landlords maintain properties at a standard that doesn’t unfairly burden tenants.

Many of our homes are not setting us up for success. Many homes lack proper infrastructure, including insulation, needed to keep houses warm in the winter. The same issue exists in the summer—we don’t have adequate infrastructure, like proper windows or window treatments, to keep out excess heat.

A lot of this comes down to the structural conditions of our homes, but also the fact that many low-income and Black and Brown communities aren’t earning enough money to begin with. The annual household income in these communities is often between $35,000 and $45,000, yet people pay $400 monthly on energy bills. Of course, they are energy-burdened—because they don’t make enough money in the first place.

The concept of energy burden is interesting because, while it does involve energy conservation and efficiency, it is primarily about structural issues in housing and economic disparities.

So, how do we address and solve this energy burden crisis? A lot of it comes down to how we build and maintain homes. We need policies to ensure that landlords are responsible for maintaining properties—ensuring rentals are properly insulated and energy-efficient. We also need to ensure that wages are equitable so people can afford their energy bills without being financially overwhelmed.

A significant portion of this issue is policy-driven. Here in Georgia, a Public Service Commission repeatedly allows Georgia Power to raise energy rates, forcing residents to pay for projects they never approved. For instance, residents are paying for Georgia Power’s nuclear power plants, which are billions of dollars over budget. These weren’t projects the community demanded—they were corporate decisions, and now the financial burden is unfairly placed on consumers.

Jacobsen: This is a common problem. From my perspective as a Canadian, the American case appears more severe in this regard—where financial consequences and costs are offshored to individuals rather than absorbed by corporations or larger entities. The way these issues are framed and discussed also plays a significant role.

We are now seeing wildfires in California (LA fires) that clearly illustrate the impact of anthropogenic climate change, with extreme weather events becoming more frequent and severe.

How do you work with communities to provide effective education about anthropogenic climate change, its associated health risks, and the increasing intensity and frequency of natural disasters?

Spratling: Yes. What happened in California was a horrifying example of a community that was ultimately unprepared, even at the city level. Los Angeles was not adequately prepared, especially after funding was cut from fire departments.

As you mentioned, when it comes to communication and education, we have to focus on the health angle. How do we shift the narrative on climate change so that it is understood through a health lens?

My background is in public health, and I think a lot about the urgency that health-related messaging creates compared to climate change messaging. The reality is that the environmental and climate sectors have never been great at communication. We’ve traditionally relied on scare tactics—warnings about the sky falling, the world ending, and other apocalyptic predictions. But that approach has not worked.

We must be sensitive to how we communicate climate issues to our communities. Instead of highlighting the dangers, we must emphasize health implications and economic consequences—things people care about now.

Right now, people are struggling with immediate concerns—how to pay rent and put food on the table. Climate change is often perceived as a distant problem, even though we know it is happening now. But for many, it simply does not feel as urgent as putting food on the table today.

So, when it comes to education, it is about shifting the narrative—helping people understand climate change in a way that will ignite action rather than just instilling fear. We need to prepare our communities so that when disasters—like what we saw in Los Angeles and other parts of the world—happen, people are ready to take action rather than being caught off guard.

Jacobsen: Amid challenges, there are also new opportunities. For example, while doing some correspondence in Ukraine, I learned a lot. I came back. Then I attended a conference in Toronto about rebuilding Ukraine. 

One of the companies I spoke with was pursuing a large contacts—which, while significant, is perhaps not as large as it might seem in the context of massive rebuilding efforts. But they were focused on durable, fire-resistant building materials.

In that case, you had an entire city, designed for a population of many thousands people, that was flattened—80% to 90% destroyed by bombings. But as they plan to rebuild, they are considering more durable, fire-resistant materials—not just restoring what was lost, but creating something better and more resilient.

Similarly, with climate change and its many negative impacts, how do you shift the narrative toward solutions? How do we move from recognizing the increasing tragedies over time to actively proposing innovative, forward-thinking solutions?

Spratling: As you said, we must approach this from a precautionary standpoint, something the U.S. has historically failed to do. We tend to be reactionary rather than considering long-term impacts and investments.

A significant part of this conversation concerns investing in materials and infrastructure that will support our communities and help protect our environment. It’s critical that people understand this from an economic standpoint—that proactive investment is far more cost-effective than constantly rebuilding from scratch.

Approaching this work through an economic lens allows us to find shared values that resonate with everyone. We all want to live happy, healthy lives and have economic security. Meeting people where they are—by speaking in terms they relate to—works wonders. No one wants to have to rebuild their city.

So, from a mitigation standpoint, we need to focus on preventative measures—how we can lessen the impact of future disasters rather than simply reacting after they happen.

Jacobsen: What makes Black and Brown women in Atlanta and similar cities uniquely positioned to educate themselves and others about climate risks, infrastructure challenges, and the importance of making informed choices about environmental impacts and personal products?

Spratling: First, I would say that Black women are resilient.

Black women have had to endure and lead through countless challenges. Black women are the most educated demographic in the world.

If we look at major social movements—from the Me Too movement to the Civil Rights movement to Black Lives Matter—black women have always been the backbone.

This is no different when it comes to the climate and environmental justice movement. In fact, we must be even more engaged because environmental issues have disproportionate impacts on us and our communities.

Black women should be at the forefront of environmental justice—in conversations, decision-making, solutions, jobs, leadership roles, and every aspect. We understand the stakes because we have lived them.

We have been experiencing environmental burdens our entire lives. That lived experience gives us a unique ability to advocate for ourselves and everyone disproportionately affected by environmental injustice.

When we discuss Black women’s roles and strengths, we focus on our endurance and the fact that we already have what it takes to lead in this movement.

Unfortunately, for too long, we have been ignored and told this is not a space for us—which is completely false. Our grandmothers, great-grandmothers, and ancestors have been engaged in this work for generations. It is our time to amplify their legacy and push it even further.

Jacobsen: Diamond, thank you for taking the time to speak today. It was lovely to meet you.

Spratling: Yes, likewise. Thank you so much! It was great to meet you as well.

Jacobsen: We’ll be in touch shortly.

Spratling: Thank you. Take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Tariffs, Trade Policy, and Economic Strategy: Expert Insights

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/01 (Unpublished)

 Ian Fletcher is an economist and author specializing in industrial policy, trade, and economic strategy. His books include Industrial Policy for the United States and Free Trade Doesn’t Work. A former Senior Economist at the Coalition for a Prosperous America, he now serves on its Advisory Board, shaping U.S. economic policy discussions. James Crask is Managing Director at Marsh, specializing in risk management, resilience, and crisis strategy. A former UK Cabinet Office advisor, he chairs the ISO committee on business continuity and authored a key industry book. Tim Rosenberger is a Legal Policy Fellow at the Manhattan Institute and a Stanford Graduate School of Business Fellow, specializing in constitutional law, litigation, and public policy. His expertise spans legal research, judicial clerkships, entrepreneurship, urban development, and policy analysis on trade, immigration, and economic reform. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do the tariffs relate to inflation, costs of goods and services, and price increases, generally speaking?

Ian Fletcher: Obviously, if you push tariffs high enough, they will produce inflation, at least for the products in question. But the experience of tariffs during Trump’s first term showed, empirically, that the kind of moderate tariffs the US should be imposing have little or no inflationary impact. This ran directly opposite to mainstream theory on this question, and should make people skeptical of believing what mainstream economists are saying today. For a start, we saw a lot of exporters sacrifice profit margins. Furthermore, imports are only about 16% of the U.S. economy, so 84% of the economy isn’t even potentially exposed to inflationary pressure from tariffs.

James Crask: The Trump administration has outlined proposed tariffs on goods from China, Mexico and Canada and US-based organizations are bracing for significant cost shifts in their supply chains.

Marsh recently analyzed more than 120,000 suppliers that support global clients with significant operations in the US. It found that 40% of their direct and indirect suppliers providing goods to the US are based in Mexico, China, and Canada. This means that, on average, about one-fifth of an organization’s direct supplier base originates from these three countries.

Global events, beyond just tariffs, including geopolitical tensions and climate-related events are challenging organizations’ supply chain resilience and elevating supply chain risk management to the top of every corporate agenda. 

Marsh’s analysis also found that:

  1. More than 1 in 10 supplier sites are at high risk of natural disasters, with flooding and earthquakes representing the greatest risks
  2. 65% of organizations have at least one single point of failure / bottleneck hidden in their supply chain that is providing something critical. 

This data was derived from Sentrisk, Marsh’s AI powered platform that enables companies to comprehensively map their supply chains across all tiers and pinpoint low, medium, and high-risk vulnerabilities down to a site, supplier or component-specific level.

If you would like to speak to James on what the data shows re: possible outcomes of ‘reciprocal tariffs’ on U.S. trading partners, how companies are managing increasing global supply chain risks, and the overall supply chain risk landscape as we head into 2025 – I am happy to schedule a conversation.

Tim Rosenberger: Tariffs generally increase prices. At the same time, President Trump’s tariffs are designed to encourage strategic reshoring of jobs and the reindustrialization of the American heartline. While the tech-fueled economic boom of the coasts masks the collapse of middle America, many communities now have real incomes that are ~half what they were fifty years ago. Almost no family can survive on a single income and countless Americans stitch together a constellation of jobs to eek by on modest incomes and limited benefits. They work longer hours and enjoy fewer protections than the factory workers of yesteryear. So, if President Trump can succeed in his tariff and trade policy, modest price increases will be more than offset by gains in earnings, particularly for working Americans. Expect any short term economic pain and trade conflicts to be well worth a revitalized American middle.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Best Places to Get Married

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/03/01

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content.WalletHub’s report ranks the best and worst cities for weddings based on cost, facilities, services, activities, and attractions. Orlando, Las Vegas, Miami, Atlanta, and Tampa rank highest due to favorable weather and accessibility, despite high costs. Pearl City, Bridgeport, Warwick, South Burlington, and Lewiston rank lowest due to financial and logistical challenges. Memphis frequently appears in negative rankings, prompting public inquiries. Budget is the most weighted factor, as Valentine’s Day spending varies more than weddings. Data sources include the U.S. Census Bureau, Yelp, and Numbeo. Lupo shares insights from his own budget-friendly wedding experience.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Chip Lupo again. A recent report from WalletHub highlights the best places to get married. The average couple spends around $35,000—that’s in USD. That amount is significantly more in Canadian dollars for those reading from Canada.

The logistical and financial stresses of planning a wedding can be substantial. According to WalletHub’s analysis, the top cities for weddings are Orlando, Las Vegas, Miami, Atlanta, and Tampa. These cities seem more diverse than those featured in similar reports. Why is that? Looking at the rankings, the costs in these top five cities are quite high. However, they excel in facilities, services, activities, and attractions.

Chip Lupo: Yes, Scott, you’re right. It is a diverse set of cities. One thing they all have in common, for the most part, is favourable weather. Of course, you wouldn’t want to book a wedding in Miami during hurricane season. Still, aside from that, Orlando and Las Vegas generally have warm, stable climates. Atlanta and Tampa, which rank fourth and fifth on the list, also offer relatively mild weather.

Weather and accessibility are significant factors. While these cities may be expensive, they compensate with exceptional facilities, services, and attractions. For example, getting married in Orlando can be costly due to its proximity to Disney World and everything the area offers. However, this is balanced by the abundance of amenities and entertainment options.

Scott, let me share a quick anecdote about wedding costs. About 15 years ago, a co-worker was planning her February wedding. Timing plays a crucial role in wedding expenses, though this study doesn’t emphasize it much. In the U.S., weddings are traditionally held on Saturdays—typically mid-afternoon or early evening, and sometimes on Fridays if venues are available.

She was researching floral arrangements when she realized that Valentine’s Day fell on a Saturday that year—the date she had chosen for her wedding. When the florist quoted her the cost of flowers—roses, in this case—she immediately reconsidered and asked about pricing for the following Saturday. Simply changing the date will cut the cost of the flowers by half.

This highlights an important consideration when planning a wedding—timing. Suppose you schedule your wedding around major holidays, such as Christmas or Valentine’s Day. In that case, you will likely face higher costs, particularly for flowers and other high-demand services.

Returning to our discussion, while these cities may be expensive, they make up for it in other aspects. All of them rank very highly in the categories of facilities, activities, and attractions despite significant cost differences among the top five.

Jacobsen: When I look at the bottom of this ranking, the lowest-ranked cities are Pearl City, Bridgeport, Warwick, South Burlington, and Lewiston. As far as I recall, these cities don’t appear in many of the other surveys we reviewed.

Yet, they have consistently ranked near the bottom out of 182 cities. For instance, Pearl City ranks 180th, 179th, and 177th in three categories, making its overall index score the lowest. What makes these cities particularly poor in this area?

Lupo: Well, Pearl City—no pun intended—is kind of an island on its own, quite literally, since it’s in Hawaii. The cost of weddings there is high no matter when or where you get married. But beyond that, accessibility is a major factor.

Coordinating travel arrangements for family and friends, especially for a large wedding, is a logistical challenge. How many of your guests would be willing—or able—to take on that financial burden? Flying to Hawaii can be expensive, particularly for East Coast people.

So, accessibility hurts Pearl City. It’s obviously in a beautiful location—an ideal setting for a wedding—but the logistical coordination makes it impractical for many couples.

The other cities—South Burlington, Vermont; Warwick, Rhode Island; and Bridgeport, Connecticut—are all situated in the Northeastern New England region, where costs can be high.

None of these cities have wedding-friendly attractions. Accessibility is also an issue. And, of course, the weather this time of year—February—is likely not ideal for a wedding.

Jacobsen: Do you ever get emails from people in these cities, either complimenting or criticizing you?

Lupo: Since I’ve been doing this, we occasionally receive comments from media outlets in specific cities. Their journalists often reach out, looking for information—asking, “Why this?” or “Why that?”

A year or so ago, we received many emails and complaints from city officials and residents in Memphis, Tennessee. Memphis frequently appeared in our rankings concerning crime, affordability, and safety concerns.

That’s the one city that stands out. For the most part, though, media outlets within specific cities are just curious—they want to inform their audiences. They ask why their city ranked a certain way, whether positive or negative. They typically want a breakdown of where their city performed well and where it didn’t.

But yes, to my knowledge, Memphis is the one that keeps coming up—particularly from people outside of the media—questioning why their city frequently ranks at the bottom in some of these reports.

Jacobsen: The ranking had three broad categories: costs, facilities and services, and activities and attractions. Why that particular breakdown? Some might wonder—why not focus entirely on costs? It’s such a major factor. Shouldn’t it be the dominant consideration? Why break things down in a more sophisticated and nuanced way?

Lupo: Well, Scott, if you look at how the rankings are weighted, cost carries a slightly higher weight. Out of a possible 100 points, cost accounts for 40 points because it is likely the primary factor. However, you must also consider availability, which negatively affects some cities.

Some cities performed poorly in the facilities and services category. You want easy access to key wedding-related services such as:

  • Bridal shops
  • Florists
  • Hotels (since you’re hosting many guests)
  • Restaurants (for rehearsal dinners)
  • Catering companies
  • Bartenders (if you’re including alcohol)
  • Cake shops
  • Makeup artists

That last one is interesting—it didn’t apply to me personally.

Event planners are another key service. You want to ensure that your wedding location can easily access these vendors. Otherwise, outsourcing services from elsewhere may increase your costs significantly.

Activities and attractions also play a role. As we discussed, weather is a major factor. The number of attractions in an area is given full weight. For example, Las Vegas has abundant activities for the couple and their guests.

Another factor is its popularity as a travel destination. If a city is well-known and frequently visited, it can be an advantage. Aside from Pearl City, the cities at the bottom of the list are not popular travel destinations. For example, cities like Warwick, Rhode Island, and Bridgeport, Connecticut, lack broad appeal.

So, while cost carries more weight, we strive to keep the ranking comprehensive by including facilities, services, attractions, and availability.

Jacobsen: And the sources of data—the ones that make the most sense—include the U.S. Census Bureau, the Bureau of Labor Statistics, and more well-known sources like Tripadvisor, Yelp, Kayak.com, and your research.

But what about Numbeo, TravBuddy.com, and the Wedding Report?

Lupo: Well, TravBuddy is similar to Tripadvisor. Travel Buddy—if I’m not mistaken, it’s a social networking site for travellers. Yes, users can review destinations like Kayak.com and Tripadvisor. Now, the other one—Numbeo—is a cost-of-living database. You enter data, and it provides an index estimating living costs.

This is useful information because you need to factor in overall expenses when planning a wedding. This includes:

  • Hotel prices
  • Taxi fares
  • Flight costs in and out of a city

These additional expenses can significantly impact the total wedding budget. While we’re on the subject, one thing that may pop up when the survey goes live is that when we got married in 2018, we did a lot of it on our own, and it ended up costing us about $12,000.

Jacobsen: That sounds like a lot less than some of the others.

Lupo: Yes, we found out—and I did a budget breakdown afterward—that about 60% of the total cost was spent on food between the rehearsal dinner and catering. But since we handled a lot of it ourselves, we saved money.

I also designed and printed our wedding invitations because I do some graphic design. It’s more of a hobby than anything else, but it helped cut costs. 

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Chip.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Syphilis in Canada: Rising Cases and Prevention Strategies

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/28

The Public Health Agency of Canada is an agency of the Government of Canada that is responsible for public health, emergency preparedness and response, and infectious and chronic disease control and prevention. Between 2018 and 2023, infectious syphilis cases in Canada rose by 77% to 12,135 cases (30.5 per 100,000), while congenital syphilis increased by 220% to 53 cases (14.5 per 100,000 live births). Barriers include inequitable access to testing, stigma, and structural inequities. Prevention strategies emphasize regular screening, safer sex practices, and education. The Public Health Agency of Canada collaborates with partners through initiatives like the Syphilis Response Steering Committee and national awareness campaigns. Early and routine screening is crucial, particularly in pregnancy. Improved access includes point-of-care testing and expanded health education efforts to reduce stigma and promote testing.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How have infectious syphilis and congenital syphilis cases changed between 2018 and 2023?

Public Health Agency of Canada: In 2023, there were 12,135 reported cases of infectious syphilis, equivalent to a rate of 30.5 cases per 100,000 people in Canada, and 53 cases of early congenital syphilis, corresponding to a rate of 14.5 cases per 100,000 live births. These rates represent a 77% and 220% increase since 2018, respectively.

Jacobsen: What barriers contribute to the rise of syphilis and other STBBI?

Public Health Agency of Canada: Syphilis is a preventable and curable sexually transmitted and blood-borne infection. If left untreated, syphilis can increase the risk of acquiring HIV and can cause severe health complications, including damage to the blood vessels, heart, brain and nervous system. Congenital syphilis occurs when a syphilis infection is passed during pregnancy or at delivery, and can cause adverse pregnancy outcomes and severe health effects in newborns and children. 

Factors contributing to the rise of syphilis in Canada include inequitable access to testing, treatment, and care, alongside social and systemic barriers such as stigma, discrimination, and structural inequities. Syphilis disproportionately impacts communities and groups experiencing these challenges, including individuals facing housing instability and poverty. The presence of overlapping public health threats, such as HIV and problematic substance use, further increases vulnerability to syphilis infection. These interconnected factors create significant disparities in access to care, making it more difficult for certain affected populations to receive timely testing and treatment.

Jacobsen: What prevention strategies can reduce the spread of STBBI, including syphilis?

Public Health Agency of Canada: Signs and symptoms of syphilis include lesions, rashes, and swollen glands. However, syphilis symptoms can mimic other conditions, and syphilis infection can also be asymptomatic. Even with no symptoms, a person can transmit syphilis to sexual partners and during pregnancy and delivery. That is why it is important to know the risks and how to take preventative and early action. 

Timely screening is vital for detecting and treating asymptomatic infections, as well as reducing the risk of transmission and serious complications that may arise from undiagnosed and untreated STBBI. Individuals can reduce their risk of syphilis infection by practicing safer sex (use of barriers such as condoms and dental dams) and getting tested regularly.

Anyone who is sexually active should be aware of risk factors for syphilis such as having barrierless sex, having multiple sexual partners, substance use including chemsex, and having a previous syphilis infection or other STBBI.  

Health and social sector professionals can support individuals to make informed choices about their sexual health, and together we can help curb the spread of syphilis, prevent negative health impacts and promote inclusive and equitable sexual health care for all. The Public Health Agency of Canada (PHAC) encourages health professionals to integrate syphilis screening into routine health care to reduce stigma and foster a supportive environment for individuals to seek testing and treatment.

Jacobsen: What is being done to increase collaboration across sectors and jurisdictions in addressing syphilis?

Public Health Agency of Canada: PHAC is committed to working with partners and stakeholders across the country in support of the global goal of ending syphilis, viral hepatitis, HIV and other STBBI as public health concerns by 2030. Through the actions outlined in the Pan-Canadian STBBI Framework for Action and the Government of Canada’s STBBI Action Plan, the Government of Canada is working to reduce the impact of syphilis and other STBBI in Canada, and is collaborating with and supporting community-based organizations, Indigenous partners, provinces and territories, researchers, and the health sector towards this goal. 

In late 2022, the Pan-Canadian Public Health Network established a federal, provincial, and territorial committee on STBBI, providing a structured approach to strengthen cross-jurisdictional collaboration. The Syphilis Response Steering Committee (SRSC) serves as a key forum to identify opportunities for action based on emerging evidence and national trends. To further support knowledge exchange and collaborative action, PHAC hosted the Taking Action on Congenital Syphilis in Canada: National Conference 2024 in February 2024 in Ottawa. The event brought together 75 delegates from federal, provincial, territorial, Indigenous, academic, and community sectors, reinforcing the importance of multi-sector collaboration in addressing the rising rates of congenital and infectious syphilis.

Investments in community-based projects continue to be a pillar of the Government of Canada’s strategy and have remained stable for the past decade. The contribution of community-based organizations remains central to Canada’s ability to achieve its public health targets. Projects funded through the HIV and Hepatitis C Community Action Fund (CAF) and the Harm Reduction Fund (HRF) are designed to reach key populations and target regions most affected by HIV, hepatitis C, and other STBBI, including syphilis. To support the coordination of Canada’s response to rising syphilis cases and outbreaks, PHAC established the Syphilis Outbreak Investigation Coordinating Committee (SOICC) in July 2019. Through this committee, provinces and territories share enhanced syphilis surveillance data with PHAC, informing the development of evidence-based policies, programs, and interventions while identifying support needs. Public health surveillance of congenital syphilis is conducted in partnership with provincial and territorial public health authorities. PHAC receives de-identified data on diagnosed cases annually to track trends and inform public health action. More information is available on PHAC’s interactive web platform, Notifiable Diseases Online, and the STBBI surveillance page.

Jacobsen: Why is early and routine screening critical in dealing with syphilis?

Public Health Agency of Canada: Screening is testing that is done to detect conditions in people without any symptoms. Screening is particularly important for STBBI, including syphilis, because symptoms may not be noticed at all, or they may be confused with other conditions, or they may not present until very late, once complications have developed. Syphilis screening and timely treatment are thus essential to prevent complications and reduce ongoing transmission. Syphilis screening is particularly important in pregnancy, because an undetected and untreated infection in pregnancy can be passed during pregnancy or delivery and can cause congenital syphilis for infants.

Jacobsen: How can access to testing and treatment for syphilis be improved?

Health professionals can find PHAC’s syphilis screening recommendations, including recommendations for screening during pregnancy, in the STBBI Guides for Health Professionals. New diagnostic modalities, like point-of-care tests, can expand access to syphilis testing. Health Canada has authorized two dual HIV/syphilis point-of-care tests. These tests can be performed using fingerstick specimens and yield preliminary results for both HIV and syphilis within minutes, providing the opportunity for immediate treatment. It’s important to note that the syphilis component of these tests cannot distinguish between a current or past syphilis infection. Further confirmatory testing with standard laboratory tests and clinical evaluation for accurate diagnosis and treatment planning are necessary. The purchase and implementation of syphilis point-of-care tests falls within the roles and responsibilities of the provinces and territories.  

Jacobsen: How can ordinary Canadians help to foster an inclusive, culturally safe, and stigma-free health system important for addressing syphilis?

Public Health Agency of Canada: Canadians play a role in educating themselves and others in understanding the facts about syphilis. To raise awareness of syphilis and promote the availability of testing and treatment, PHAC developed a knowledge mobilization strategy in close collaboration with community and key populations. It includes advertising campaigns, conferences, webinar series, toolkits and tailored materials for community groups, key populations and health professionals. In March 2023, PHAC launched a short-term social media campaign targeting provinces and territories most affected by increasing infectious and congenital syphilis rates over the past few years in collaboration with key partners and stakeholders. The advertisements were targeted to people 18-40 yrs., with interests in pregnancy and geotargeted to regions with higher rates of syphilis. This small campaign was very successful, reaching people 5,256,164 times and having 6,072 engagements (liked, clicked, shared). During the campaign period, web visits increased by 228%, resulting in 10,985 visits during the 22-day campaign. Canadians can help by sharing this important information with their social networks to help amplify the message and build more awareness of the high rates of syphilis and congenital syphilis.

Building on last year’s efforts, PHAC launched a new awareness campaign (February–March 2025) to encourage young adults (18–39 years old) and health professionals to discuss sexual health, reduce stigma, and promote STBBI testing and prevention, with a focus on syphilis. It expands messaging to overall sexual health while maintaining a two-pronged approach: a national STBBI awareness campaign and targeted syphilis ads in high-incidence regions. The campaign features digital and social media ads, audio ads, and targeted ads to health professionals. Ads will direct traffic to Canada.ca/STI and Canada.ca/syphilis for accessible, evidence-based information.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WalletHub on Racial Wealth Inequality in the U.S.

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/28

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo explains that Washington, D.C., has the largest racial wealth gap due to high-paying jobs concentrated among white residents. At the same time, states like West Virginia and Alaska show smaller gaps but lower overall wealth. Entrepreneurship and financial literacy are key factors, but race-based programs may be ineffective compared to merit-based initiatives. Lupo also discusses income inequality policies, how government data sources influence rankings, and the need for better financial education to foster economic mobility.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here with Chip Lupo of WalletHub. Today, they will cover the states with the largest and smallest wealth gaps by race. How is wealth being measured in the United States for this study? How are race and ethnicity being defined?

Chip Lupo: Well, Scott, to provide some context, we analyzed all 50 states and the District of Columbia across 21 key metrics. Because white individuals comprise approximately 59% of the US population, we used this racial group as the benchmark against which to measure the wealth gap with the nonwhite population, including Black, Hispanic, and Asian individuals. For each metric, we selected the largest disparity among these racial groups.

For example, if the income gap in California was 20% between white and Black individuals, 30% between white and Hispanic individuals, and 0% between white and Asian individuals, we used 30% as the representative figure for that metric.

To measure wealth, we incorporated multiple indicators, including median household income, homeownership rates, unemployment, poverty levels, educational attainment, and gaps in educational attainment. Additionally, given its increasing significance, we examined disparities in health insurance coverage.

By evaluating these factors collectively, we aimed to capture a comprehensive picture of wealth disparities in the United States.

Jacobsen: Which states are performing the best? Why are they performing well? And is there a state that ranks relatively high but is notably unbalanced in its sub-rankings?

Lupo: Interestingly, in this study, lower rankings indicate smaller wealth gaps, so being at the bottom of the list can be seen as a positive outcome. However, this can also reflect low overall wealth levels rather than economic equality.

For example, West Virginia ranked 51st, meaning it had the smallest measured racial wealth gap. The disparities there include an approximate 32% gap in median household income, a 41% gap in homeownership rates, and a 72% gap in poverty between white and Black residents.

Similarly, Alaska, which ranked 50th, follows a comparable trend. Both states are predominantly rural and have lower overall income levels. In such cases, poverty, low wages, and limited economic opportunities affect the population across racial lines, resulting in narrower racial wealth gaps but lower wealth for all groups.

Let’s contrast that with the states at the top of the list, where racial wealth disparities are largest. Washington, D.C., ranks first, meaning it has the widest racial wealth gap. It has a 64% gap in median household income and a homeownership gap exceeding 50%. At the same time, the poverty rate among Black residents is 3.26 times higher than that of white residents.

Washington, D.C., has a unique demographic composition, with approximately 45% of its population being Black. However, as the nation’s capital, it also has a concentration of high-paying jobs in government, law, and consulting, which white residents disproportionately hold. This economic structure creates a sharp divide in income and wealth between racial groups.

In essence, when a minority population has a significant presence in high-income jobs, it can drive up overall income statistics while still leaving a large segment of the population economically disadvantaged, exacerbating wealth inequality.

Jacobsen: Even though white individuals make up a smaller percentage of the population in Washington, D.C., what does Professor Martha Davis attribute to the increase in the wealth gap over the past decade?

Lupo: Okay, now, according to Dr. Martha Davis, a distinguished professor of law at Northeastern University in Boston, and I quote:

“Many recent US tax policies have favoured those who have accumulated wealth. For example, the US Department of the Treasury estimates that 92 percent of the tax value of the preferential rates on long-term capital gains and dividends went to White families in 2023. Racial minorities, particularly Black Americans, bear the legacy of institutionalized slavery followed by decades of de facto segregation, educational bias, and other discriminatory practices. As a group, they start with less, and recent US policies have amply rewarded those who start with more.”

Using that as a starting point, this country must do more to provide economic opportunities. According to Dr. Davis, these efforts should begin at the federal level. However, if you’re going to create real societal change, you have to start locally. To change Washington, you first have to change town hall. You have to begin at the grassroots level—and we’re seeing examples today.

I will go off on a slight tangent here, but take Chicago, for example, amid the current immigration crisis. Issues surrounding undocumented immigrants and rising crime rates in an already crime-stricken city have reached a breaking point. Local leadership has implemented policies that favour undocumented immigrants. In response, residents are mobilizing in what could be considered a grassroots movement.

Where that leads is uncertain. But fundamentally, it comes down to policy decisions relating to employment programs, educational opportunities, or community support initiatives.

If you’re from a background where education is not easily accessible, stronger initiatives are needed to provide better learning opportunities. But real change has to start at the bottom—from the ground up.

Too much of the current approach relies on top-down solutions. Instead, we need bottom-up strategies—starting with education, opportunity creation, and policy reform.

The key is empowering individuals at the lowest economic levels, giving them the belief and the means to succeed. When combined with policies that foster and reward achievement, this can significantly impact wealth disparities.

Jacobsen: Another critical factor is entrepreneurship. Emerita Professor Myra Marx Ferree from the University of Wisconsin-Madison has commented extensively on this topic. Most businesses fail in their early stages, so there’s a risk-reward ratio to consider and a bias when we only focus on success stories. Martha Davis spoke about entrepreneurship programs, too. How should we analyze income inequality by race in the US, particularly business ownership? If most businesses fail, could that be reinforcing false perceptions about the actual success rate of startups?

Lupo: In terms of entrepreneurship—it can be valuable, as Dr. Davis noted. However, to be effective, programs must provide access to capital.

Entrepreneurship highlights a broader issue in the US that affects all racial and ethnic groups: a lack of financial literacy. Businesses fail because of a lack of preparation and fundamental financial or business skills.

Until that issue is addressed, entrepreneurship programs will remain beneficial in theory, but their success will be limited without a foundation in financial literacy. Suppose individuals do not understand how to write a check, calculate interest, manage credits and debits, navigate bank accounts, or handle basic business structures, marketing, and management. In that case, they will struggle to sustain a business.

So, before we can assess the value of an entrepreneurship program, we must ensure that individuals have access to basic financial education.

Furthermore, entrepreneurship is also about instilling a sense of achievement—getting people to believe in themselves. When individuals have confidence in their abilities, they strive for goals they may have once thought were out of reach.

Jacobsen: One of the largest gaps in net household wealth and median household income. Non-Hispanic white Americans have approximately $250,000 in median household wealth. Hispanic Americans have about $50,000, and Black Americans have around $25,000 per household.

So we’re talking about a fivefold to tenfold gap between ethnic groups in the United States.

How does that disparity affect residential patterns, including where people can buy homes, what services they can afford, and the quality across generations?

Lupo: Again, this comes back to localizing these issues. Solutions must begin at local and state levels through incentives, education programs, or policy initiatives. The disparities here are staggering.

Take Washington, D.C., for example. You have a minority population in extreme poverty, yet within that same racial group, there is a wealthy elite. That contrast is stark, and it speaks to broader systemic issues. There must be local initiatives aimed at closing this gap.

Jacobsen: Looking at the highest median household incomes, the District of Columbia, Wisconsin, and Nebraska top the ranking. However, these same states also have the largest homeownership rate gaps and the biggest poverty rate gaps among racial groups.

What makes these states stand out significantly—particularly regarding the disparities affecting African Americans?

Lupo: It’s interesting because when you examine the top-ranking states—number one, two, three, four, five, or six—they share a geographic pattern. These states are Upper Midwestern, have predominantly white populations, and experience cold climates. So, from a geographic standpoint, these may not be the most attractive locations for minority populations to settle in the first place.

For the minorities who do live in these states, policies and initiatives need to be developed that make them more attractive to Black and minority residents while also encouraging economic opportunity for those already residing there. This is a fascinating geographic trend—not one I initially expected to see. We often look for regional patterns, and here, we see a cluster of cold-weather, sparsely populated states sharing the same issue.

Take Minnesota and Wisconsin—they have some major metro areas, but these states, like Nebraska, have vast rural areas where economic opportunities are limited for people of all races.

Jacobsen: What policies help reduce income inequality across racial and ethnic groups in the US? And which policies fail to have an impact?

Lupo: When discussing entrepreneurship programs, job training programs, or educational initiatives, they can be effective if they are adequately funded and if participation levels are high. The focus should be on well-structured programs. Now, race-based programs do not work. Everything should be based on achievement. Artificially bending the curve and providing opportunities to individuals who have not earned them—regardless of race—can do more harm than good. That’s why any initiative or opportunity should be merit-based.

Jacobsen: Why is everything weighted equally? That might be a good way to wrap up.

Lupo: That’s a great question—I just noticed that myself. Let’s see if there’s any context provided on why the weights are distributed this way.

That’s an interesting point. This is because the data was compiled from only two government agencies: the Census Bureau and the Bureau of Labor Statistics.

You may not need to assign different weights to each metric when you have such a limited number of sources. Yeah, that’s something to think about—every metric being weighted equally is unusual.

Also, the fact that only two government agencies were used for these rankings stands out. Many other potential data sources could have been incorporated. Yes, I don’t know how to answer that. This is the first time I’ve seen a study in which every metric is weighted equally.

Jacobsen: Hypothetically, if you adjusted the weightings to make them more nuanced, which factors would you weigh more heavily and which would receive less weight?

Lupo: Household income, unemployment, education, and poverty should be weighted the most because they are the biggest drivers of wealth inequality.

The uninsured rate might receive slightly less weight since disparities in health insurance are a more recent trend than structural inequalities in income, education, and employment.

Homeownership could be given less weight since having a high income does not always correlate with high homeownership rates.

So, if I were adjusting the weights, household income and unemployment would carry the most weight, followed by the education gap. Poverty would be weighted less, as it is often a result of high unemployment and lower educational attainment rather than a standalone driver. The highest priority metrics would be income, unemployment, and education gap.

Jacobsen: All right, man. I appreciate your time again. Thank you.

Lupo: Thanks, Scott. Bye now.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Erin King, Utilizing Motivation and Confidence

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/27

Erin King is a bestselling author, global keynote speaker, and top authority on personal energy management. She founded and grew three successful ventures, including Socialite Agency, later acquired by Strikepoint. Named one of Success Magazine’s “Top 10 Must-See Motivational Speakers of 2023,” Erin has empowered millions worldwide with her book You’re Kind of a Big Deal and top 1% podcast, On Your Terms with Erin King. Her insights have been featured in Forbes, ABC, and SUCCESS Magazine. Erin enjoys outdoor sports outside of work with her husband, Hartman, and her cavapoo, Miss Betty White, embracing life with her Irish family.

King discusses the crucial role of personal energy in leadership and success. King highlighted how energy, often dismissed as a soft skill, influences leaders’ abilities to inspire and lead effectively, with historical examples like Alexander the Great. The The Energy Exam  framework identifies energy levels on a 1-7 scale, categorizing individuals as “Big Energy Beings” when consistently scoring high in energy and life satisfaction. With insights from research on 10,000 people, King explains that understanding one’s unique energy type and managing “superchargers”and “drainers” can optimize personal and professional performance.

You can take the 5-minute, PhD-created test here.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re with Erin King from The Energy Exam. You and your team offer a unique approach to viewing personal energy as a key driver of success—which might often be called “good vibes.” So, what is the foundational metric you’re using with The Energy Exam ?

Erin King: Great question. Interestingly, you bring up “good vibes” because traditionally, discussions of energy in corporate environments, especially among top executives worldwide, were often dismissed as “woo-woo,” “hippie-dippy,”or soft skills. However, history shows that leaders’ energy levels have consistently played a crucial role in their influence. Look at historical figures like Alexander the Great and Julius Caesar. You’ll find references to a leader’s energy as a factor that helped them rally people, mobilize support, and gather momentum for their initiatives or conquests—whether for good or bad. Sun Tzu, in The Art of War, even emphasized that a leader’s personal “chi” is the most critical element in rallying a team. Likewise, in history, leaders like Simón Bolívar or Harriet Tubman exhibited unwavering energy, motivating others to follow; for Tubman, her strength and dedication made the Underground Railroad possible. Across many cultures, this concept appears repeatedly, with terms like “mana” in Polynesian culture or “ka” in ancient Egyptian.

So, energy can be a decisive edge in determining one’s ability to influence, impact, and perform at one’s best. I spent over a year working with a team of PhD researchers, interviewing over 10,000 people across the United States aged 18 to 64 to understand their energy habits—how they source, spend, and conserve their most valuable energy resource. One of our questions asked participants what made a leader successful: their connections, experience, skill set, creativity, moral compass, or work ethic. The number one answer was their “vibe” or “way of being.”

Discussing energy at the highest levels of business, society, and personal growth is not a “nice-to-have” or a superficial concept. It’s become an essential workplace skill for leaders and professionals in the 21st century. Regarding your original question about the metric we use in the assessment, there have been around a dozen academic studies on personal energy management over the past 50 years. The widely accepted metric for personal energy is a scale from 1 to 7. If you ask, “Where’s your energy today?” you’re gauging it on this scale, like checking a personal battery level.

It’s Friday at 3:18 PM here in Utah, so our energy levels may be slightly lower after a long week with meetings and calls. When assessing energy, we should ask, “Where’s your battery now?”

King: The way scientists and psychologists ask us to evaluate our energy is by taking the last 90 days of our lives—the ups and downs, whether we’re morning people or night people, Monday starters or Friday finishers. They suggest we average our general energy level on a scale from 1 to 7, where one is the lowest and seven is fully charged. On this scale, 1 to 4 is considered the lower energy range, and 5 to 7 is the higher range.

Our study found a group that consistently reported higher energy levels in the 5 to 7 range and had high life satisfaction scores. Life satisfaction here means how present and joyful you feel, how successful you consider yourself, and how excited you are for the future. Those who reported both a life satisfaction score of 90 or above and an energetic score of 5 to 7 over the past 90 days are what we call “Big Energy Beings.” This group became the focal point of our research to understand how they source, spend, and save their energy.

The metric, then, revolves around your personal energy “battery.” Energy management isn’t about matching someone else’s energy level or mimicking another person’s style; it’s about finding that version of yourself that feels fully charged and at your best. It’s about bringing your best self to the table personally and professionally.

Jacobsen: So, this approach might sound “woo-woo” to some, especially because in psychology and other social sciences, concepts like this are inherently qualitative. People often semi-dismiss it if it can’t be measured with the same rigour as in the physical sciences. But what you’re presenting here is a qualitative blend: life satisfaction, authentic use of your resources, and how you engage in tasks or lead others.

I’m still working through the nuances, but it’s a more comprehensive concept. Are these people perhaps more likely to be what we’d consider “self-actualized” in common psychological terms? I’m thinking of Maslow’s hierarchy—people who use their energy broadly and deeply across various aspects of their lives.

King: Yes, so, what’s interesting is that when we talk about something like energy, which cannot be created or destroyed—that’s the hard science—even though it’s intangible, its impact is incredibly vast. Your energy introduces you before you even say a word. You might call it nonverbal communication, eye contact, body language, or simply catching someone’s vibe. But the reality is that you’re immediately transmitting a vibe if you step onto a stage, into an elevator, onto a Zoom call, or into an office or room. That vibe reflects how you’re feeling internally.

How you feel individually is what you transmit interactionally, ultimately influencing everything you do. From productivity and performance to influence and impact, and even how aligned or alive you feel personally. In the research we conducted over a year, I worked with 12 PhD researchers. The scores were self-reported, with us interviewing 10,000 people and asking them where they felt they were in terms of energy and how it impacted their lives.

One of the significant findings was the common assumption that energy levels relate to age. Plenty of generational research compares Boomers to Gen Z, for instance. But we found that, across different generations, what energized people and made them feel like their best selves at work or home was similar.

Considering the energy categories—physical, emotional, social, mental, and spiritual—most were consistent across generations. The only major difference was in the physical category, which varied due to obvious generational differences in physical ability. However, when we looked at mental, spiritual, and social energy, the variations were minimal across the 10,000 people surveyed.

However, when we re-categorized participants based on their “energy type,” we identified five distinct types, which showed the differences in what energized people were pronounced. What energizes people is more strongly influenced by their energy type than their age, effectively debunking the idea that energy sources are generational. We found that we aren’t defined by our age but rather by our energy.

Knowing your energy type—what drains you, what charges you, and how the world perceives you—are insights that help you pivot and adjust how you invest your energy in people, places, and projects. It matters far more how you’re wired energetically, at a foundational level, than how old you are or what you were taught growing up. Our “power source” is as distinct as our DNA.

In the last twenty years, there’s been much discussion around introverts and extroverts, with extroverts getting energy from people and introverts from solitude. However, our study found that about 70% of people are ambiverts. It’s situational; if you’re with someone whose energy you’re resonating with, you can feel extroverted, while in other settings, you may feel more introverted. So, ultimately, it’s not fixed—it’s situational.

It’s vibrational. Understanding how you work best energetically and how your team or family operates is crucial for anyone in a leadership or galvanizing role. What makes Jacobsen lean in and say, “Tell me more,” might not be the same for someone else. This whole concept of energy management is the new time management; it’s the currency we use to interact with the world. In a time when artificial intelligence, filters, and fake news often blur reality, energy is a truth-teller. It’s something reliable you can anchor to—someone’s energy or vibe doesn’t lie. Energy is the last remaining truth-teller.

Whether in sales, marketing, collaboration, creativity, or project management, understanding how your energy is perceived and others’ energy works allows for adjustments that lead to better collaboration, productivity, positivity, and profitability. Our research identified five energy types: Synergistic, Responsive, Rigorous, Generative, and Kinetic.

Jacobsen: And with a sample size of 10,000, that’s quite large for a study. Usually, an acceptable sample size is around 2,000 participants.

King:  Due to budget constraints, we conducted all interviews within the United States. Patterns emerged from these thousands of conversations regarding how people source, spend, and save energy. This led us to identify five distinct energy types: Kinetic, Responsive, Generative, Rigorous, and Synergistic.

Interestingly, around 5,000 people have taken the Energy Exam since it was launched two months ago. In follow-up emails, we asked participants how accurately their identified type reflected their experience—how the world perceives them, what powers them, and what drains them. The feedback has shown a substantial 97% self-reported accuracy rate.

Even more compelling, each type has a scientifically based shortcut for engineering your energy in high-stakes moments when you need it most. Think about peak performance: we all want to bring our best to valuable or challenging experiences, but sometimes, we’re drained. Each type’s unique “energy hack” enables individuals to channel their energy effectively when it matters most.

We’re exhausted. It’s often due to things within our control, like not enforcing boundaries, making unhealthy decisions, or overcommitting. Maybe we’re making mistakes with our energy—spreading ourselves too thin, not being honest, or adhering too much to societal or familial “shoulds.” These are all controllable energy drainers. Then there are the uncontrollable ones: wars, economic issues, politics, difficult seasons, accidents, trauma, illness, and loss. These factors drain our battery in ways we can’t always control.

So, when you think about what impacts your “battery,” personally and professionally, it’s important to consider what you can and can’t control. The idea behind this movement is that peak performance—being at your best—happens when you’re radically present when you’re “where your feet are.” This is challenging in 2024, with constant notifications, social media, and news feeds designed by the smartest engineers to distract us.

Our study asked people what they admired in someone’s energy. The top three responses were active listening, engaged body language, and authentic empathy. Each of these requires a radical presence—a sense of being fully there with others. Yet, many high achievers struggle with this; they’re constantly “time travelling”—either to the future, anticipating problems and trying to control outcomes (which fuels anxiety), or to the past, dwelling on mistakes, limiting beliefs, or difficult experiences (which can lead to depression).

So, in those key moments—whether it’s a work presentation or a family gathering—if we’re time travelling to the future or the past, we’re not fully present. And if we’re not present, we’re not transmitting the kind of energy that’s admirable. We’re not actively listening, our body language isn’t engaged, and we aren’t showing authentic empathy.

When we’re not where our feet are, we must be fully engaged and take advantage of opportunities to connect meaningfully with others. True presence happens when we’re naturally engaged and energized. That’s when we’re able to show up at our best.

Instead of just telling people to “be present” or “live in the moment,” we need to help them engineer a sense of being engaged in the moment. Suppose you can engineer that state—what science calls being “in flow”—you’re naturally present. It forces you to be “where your feet are.” And when you’re truly present, guess what happens? Your energy reflects all the qualities people admire in “good vibes,” as you said earlier, Scott. You’re actively listening, your body language is engaged, and you’re showing authentic empathy because you’re fully in the moment.

The idea behind this study was to find ways to engineer our energy so that we’re forced to be present, especially when we don’t feel like it. When we’re exhausted, burnt out, overwhelmed, or want to escape. We often escape to the future or the past but escape into our devices. We scroll away our self-awareness, avoiding being “where we are” by seeing who’s having a better time, who’s more successful, or who seems to have the life we want. This escape mechanism keeps us anywhere but the present.

We created a scientifically backed shortcut with the Energy Exam—a “supercharger” for each of the five energy types. You trigger engagement, flow, and presence by introducing this supercharger through people, projects, or places that energize you. This unlocks peak performance because now the energy you transmit is the energy people are naturally drawn to.

What our study showed is that 68% of people—so about 7 out of 10—who were initially in a low energy state (1 to 4 on the 1-7 scale) moved to a higher energy state (5 to 7) just by spending time with someone whose energy they admired. We didn’t phrase it as “someone you want to follow” because not everyone wants to be a follower. We asked about “energy you admire.” After spending time with such a person, we reassessed their energy, and 68% reported a boost.

So, the takeaway is that if you’re a professional, a leader, or anyone working in a low-energy environment, the fastest way to raise the energy isn’t to look around and criticize others’ energy but to raise your own. That’s contagious.

Everyone knows energy is contagious, but our study quantifies it: Seven out of 10 people shift from low to high energy just by being around someone who’s at their best. This isn’t just a soft skill or “woo-woo” idea; it’s a scientifically backed shift. Raising your vibe to raise your value is now an essential skill.

It’s the number one essential skill you can cultivate as a leader today. When people engage with this concept, they should be clear about the impact; it’s not just about “good vibes.” You, Scott, with your expertise in communication, speaking, and authorship, know the importance of carefully using terms like vibes, energy, and vibrational. These terms, while colloquial, convey evidence from studies rather than just empty words.

Jacobsen: Right. So, what are some potential weaknesses of this study?

King: Good question. The primary weaknesses in the study come from the participants themselves. Let’s take the energy types, for example. Say you’re a Rigorous energy type, Scott—I’m not sure if you’ve taken the test yet, but let’s assume that. Rigorous energy types tend to convey a sense of gravitas and discipline. They’re thorough, detail-oriented, and stick to the process. But when they’re drained, it’s often because there’s too much chaos or freewheeling energy around them. For someone with Rigorous energy, their supercharger is “order.” So, if they feel drained, they need to ask themselves, “How can I bring more order to this situation?” They need structure, a game plan, and preparation to unlock their energy and show up at their best.

But every superpower has a shadow side. For instance, Kinetic energy types thrive on motion—the faster, the more energy generated. If a Kinetic type is feeling drained, their supercharger is competition or challenge. When things become too repetitive or formulaic, they must create a sense of competition to re-energize. However, the weakness of this type is that they often ignore physical or emotional signals of exhaustion. They push themselves to burnout by silencing their body’s cues.

Each energy type has a unique strength and a corresponding weakness. Take Responsive energy types, for example. They’re empathetic and often act as listeners or therapists for others. Feeling drained, they need space to process, think, and digest what has transpired. Their superpower is being accessible and caring, but the downside is that they sometimes make themselves too accessible, allowing others to drain their energy because they care too much.

Each energy type has its unique “supercharger” to maintain balance, but it must also be cautious of overextending its strengths, which can turn into weaknesses. It’s about recognizing that each type has a strength and a shadow and learning how to manage both to optimize energy levels.

They often put everyone else ahead of themselves—it’s a classic people-pleaser personality. Each energy type has a superpower but also a shadow side. The same charger that fuels them can also act as their drainer.

So, one of the weaknesses in the study is recognizing that if you’re going through a “rainy season”—I call it “when it rains, it pours”—you may be dealing with multiple drainers in your life. You might think, “Erin, I’m just trying to get myself out of bed right now, let alone raise my vibe.” There are different levels of energy: surviving and thriving are two distinct states. If you’re in a high season, you’re ready to elevate, to “raise your vibe.” But if you’re in survival mode, it’s not about comparing yourself to others; it’s about understanding your baseline, giving yourself grace, and knowing there are small adjustments you can make to bring yourself back to your best gradually.

The biggest challenge in energy management is that social media and phones encourage constant comparison, which drains your energy faster than anything. This process isn’t about emulating your boss, coworkers, or influencers you follow. It’s about looking within and having the courage to search for answers internally rather than externally. Managing your energy isn’t something you master—it’s more like yoga or golf; it’s a practice. You improve each day, finding what works for you to show up at your best.

Our Big Energy Blueprint process uses a five-step, infinity-knot-shaped process to optimize energy daily. The steps are Ask, Assess, Align, Adjust, and Amplify. The third step, Alignment, is the hardest. It requires deleting drainers and leaning into chargers, which takes courage and guts. It means tuning into your gut instinct, which often tells you more than logic alone.

So Alignment is about having the courage to step away from things that should be fulfilling but aren’t, right? Sometimes, we stay in jobs, relationships, or projects that should feel fulfilling or energizing. This “should, should, should” mentality can be a trap. But your body speaks to you if you feel heavy, drained, or exhausted despite how things should be. It doesn’t matter how influential a person is, how smart a project seems, or how promising an environment appears. If your body signals exhaustion, it’s a cue to listen. Yet, we’re often so focused on escaping with our phones or time-travelling forward or backward that we ignore these signals. Especially as a leader, being attuned to your body’s guidance is crucial.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Erin.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mikkel Aaland on the Wellness of Sweating

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/26

Mikkel Aaland, a sweat bathing expert, discusses the history, cultural significance, and health benefits of sweat bathing with Scott Douglas Jacobsen. He explores traditions worldwide, from Finnish saunas to Japanese hot springs and Russian banyas. Aaland highlights sweat bathing’s physical benefits, such as improved circulation, cardiovascular health, and immune system support, as well as its social and spiritual aspects. He emphasizes its role in human history, dating back to ancient civilizations. While advocating for sweat bathing, he advises individuals with medical conditions to consult a doctor. He hopes for a growing appreciation of this practice in North America.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Mikkel Aaland, a sweat bathing expert, wellness advocate, author, and cultural historian. He is dedicated to revitalizing and preserving various wellness traditions practiced for centuries. He has nearly five decades of experience and is pivotal in the global wellness movement. His seminal book, Sweat, was first published in 1978. I assume there have been new editions over the years.

He explores diverse forms of sweat bathing practices and their associated benefits. He also was the host, and inspiration behind, the acclaimed seven-part docuseries, Perfect Sweat, which was created (directors per episode) by Bray’s Run Productions (with producer as Cassandra Jabola) and which was featured in multiple countries and showcased traditional and modern sweat practices.

You are based in San Francisco. The West Coast is often stereotyped as a wellness hub, particularly California. Over the past 50 years, what was the first indication that sweat bathing was a legitimate wellness practice worthy of extensive study and mastery that you could then share with others through advocacy?

Mikkel Aaland: That is a good question. My background is that I have lived in San Francisco for half a year and in Norway for the other half, as my father was from there. Norwegian culture has its form of sweat bathing, known as badstue, similar to the Finnish sauna.

I grew up with the bad stuff and took it for granted until I realized that not everyone practiced this tradition. However, as I began to explore further, I discovered that cultures worldwide have their forms of sweat bathing.

The sauna is just one example, so let me define a sweat bath. A sweat bath is any heated chamber where people go to sweat. This includes the Turkish bath, or hammam, common throughout the Middle East and North Africa. Native American cultures in North America have the sweat lodge, a sacred space used for purification and spiritual renewal.

Around the world, the Romans—one of the greatest bathing cultures in history—developed the thermae. What becomes evident is that sweat bathing is a universal and enduring tradition. Yet, for some reason, it has not been as widely practiced in modern North America.

Recognizing this, I set out to help reintroduce and expand the bathing culture in America. When my book Sweat was first published in 1978, I had already spent several years travelling worldwide—visiting Russia, Turkey, Germany, Japan (another great bathing culture), Mexico, North America, and Scandinavia.

In my research, sweat bathing is as fundamental to human culture as baking bread or fermenting beverages. Everywhere you go, there is a form of sweat bathing, varying in architecture, customs, and rituals but ultimately serving the same purpose—a place to cleanse, heal, and renew.

I asked myself, why is this practice so widespread across cultures yet so rare here? Fortunately, that is now changing, Scott. We are beginning to see a real movement toward bathing culture in North America, and I am very excited about that.

Jacobsen: Any basic knowledge of physiology suggests that heat causes blood vessels to dilate—a process known as vasodilation. But what does that mean in terms of blood flow?

What does sweating do beyond expelling a small amount of salt and water from the body’s reserves? Blood vessels open up, and people sweat out some water and salt—but what makes this a significant physiological response?

Aaland: That is a great question. You are referring to the physical effects of heat exposure on the body. What happens when you subject yourself to extreme heat?

We are talking about temperatures around 100 degrees Celsius (212 degrees Fahrenheit). When you expose your body—or anything, for that matter—to high temperatures, transformation occurs.

You mentioned sweating, which is the body’s natural response to heat. But what happens internally is even more fascinating. Heat stimulates nearly every organ in the body.

Even though you are sitting still, it mimics the physiological effects of running several miles. Circulation increases, and blood flow to the skin is significantly enhanced. Research has shown that heat exposure profoundly affects heart health and brain function.

Studies suggest that while regular sauna use does not cure Alzheimer’s, it may help reduce the risk of developing it. Extensive research on cardiovascular health has also indicated that maintaining a strong, healthy heart is possible through regular heat exposure.

Additionally, numerous studies have examined the impact of heat therapy on depression. When the body is heated, endorphin levels rise, and depressive symptoms often diminish.

There is also compelling research on the immune system benefits of alternating heat exposure with rapid cooling. This process triggers an adrenaline rush while strengthening the body’s natural defences.

So yes, it is an incredibly healthy activity, but that is not the only reason I am such a strong advocate for sweat bathing—though it is certainly a major factor.

Another important aspect is the social element, Scott. Many sweat baths, especially traditional ones, are public. When people bathe together—often minimally clothed—it fosters an uncommon level of openness and connection in other social settings.

The social benefits of sweat bathing are well-documented. We know that individuals who engage in regular social interactions are at a lower risk of depression. The communal aspect of bathing plays a significant role in overall well-being.

The third element is more difficult to articulate. Still, it is spiritual—not in a religious sense, but in a deeply personal way.

When you are immersed in intense heat, you experience a transformative experience. The boundaries between yourself and the external world seem to dissolve, creating a profound sense of connection to something larger than yourself—whether it is nature, community, or simply a heightened awareness of your own body and mind.

That is what I mean by “spiritual.” Under one roof, sweat bathing unites physical, social, and spiritual benefits—something few other human activities can offer. When you examine it closely, it becomes clear why sweat bathing has existed since the dawn of humankind and why it is practiced in cultures worldwide.

Jacobsen: Some individuals may benefit from sweat bathing but also have preexisting conditions that could pose risks—such as heart disease or blood pressure issues. What conditions should be considered for those with underlying health concerns? What are the potential risks?

Aaland: I am not a doctor, but I caution anyone with certain heart conditions or respiratory problems to consult a physician before engaging in intense heat exposure. Heat is powerful. Many traditional sweat baths are heated by fire, which can be beneficial and dangerous. This kind of heat is very intense, and it should not be taken lightly.

Suppose you have any doubts about your physical health. In that case, it is always best to check with a doctor before participating in sweat bathing.

Jacobsen: Of the cultures you have studied—both those still in existence and those long gone, such as the Romans—which do you think had the most technically developed approach to bathing and sweating? Without a full scientific understanding, which cultures had the most structured and therapeutic traditions surrounding heat exposure?

Aaland: Wow, these are great questions.

Regarding a highly developed sweat-bathing culture, the Russians are among the most passionate bathers I have encountered. There is a wonderful book—I am trying to recall the author’s name—titled Without the Banya We Would Perish: A History of the Russian Bathhouse by Ethan Pollock. The banya is the Russian sweat bath, and the book beautifully captures the Russian love for it. That passion has remained strong for thousands of years.

Of course, most people associate sweat bathing with the Finnish sauna, which originated in Finland. The Finns have maintained their sauna tradition for centuries, even during the Middle Ages, when much of Europe abandoned communal bathing due to various factors, including the Black Death and religious influences.

Another fascinating contemporary bathing culture is Japan. The Japanese have an incredible variety of bathing practices, using almost everything. Hot springs (onsen) are prevalent throughout the country. Still, in places with no natural hot springs, they have developed alternatives such as kamma-buro (heated rock baths) and mushi-buro (steam baths).

Jacobsen: What about contrast effects? We all know the experiment attributed to Aristotle: if you place one hand in cold water and the other in warm water, then put both in room-temperature water, the warm-water hand perceives the room-temperature water as cold, while the cold-water hand perceives it as warm.

Are there cultures that have developed a well-entrenched tradition of alternating between hot and cold water immersion to enhance the body’s physiological responses?

Aaland: Yes, absolutely. You are touching on two key aspects here.

Contrast therapy—alternating between hot and cold exposure—has become a popular topic, especially with the rise of cold water immersion. Many people follow instructors who teach them to stay in ice water for extended periods to achieve various health benefits.

It is interesting to me because heat and cold exposure have always been paired historically. In cultures with established sweat-bathing traditions, cooling off in cold water was a natural and necessary counterpart to heat exposure. Only now are people isolating the cold aspect and turning it into its own practice.

There is no question that contrast therapy has a profound physiological effect. The extreme stimulation of the body has been shown to fine-tune the immune system and significantly elevate mood. The rush of adrenaline and endorphins after moving from heat to cold is remarkable.

You also mentioned how temperature perception is relative, which I often discuss. For example, the hammam—commonly known as the Turkish bath—is found in some of the hottest climates on Earth. Many people wonder why someone would want to enter a hot bath when it is already scorching outside.

The answer is that heat can be fought with heat. Suppose you expose yourself to extreme temperatures—say, a 100-degree Celsius bath—then step outside into a 40-degree Celsius environment. In that case, the air will feel refreshingly cool by comparison.

The British learned a similar lesson in India: drinking hot tea in a hot climate can help regulate body temperature more effectively than consuming cold drinks. It seems counterintuitive, but fighting heat with heat is a well-documented phenomenon.

Jacobsen: We have discussed the different bathing traditions, primarily those involving water—whether saltwater, freshwater or even chlorinated water in a hot tub.

You mentioned that the Japanese have one of the most developed and diverse bathing cultures. What are some of the strangest or most unexpected practices you have encountered?

Aaland: Coffee beans—hot coffee beans—electric eels, and immersion into electric baths are some of the stranger practices I have encountered.

Of course, hot springs are a wonderful and natural way to engage in thermal bathing. However, a deep-rooted emphasis on cleanliness is at the core of Japanese culture.

Cleanliness in Japan is not just a physical concept; it extends beyond washing the body. It is also about purifying the mind and soul. Bathing is seen as a spiritual cleansing as much as a physical one. This cultural value has given rise to highly developed and intricate bathing rituals across Japan.

Jacobsen: That is a good point. How far back does this tradition go?

Aaland: That is a great question. We have historical records dating back thousands of years.

Herodotus, the ancient Greek historian, wrote about the Scythians using vapour baths as early as 2,500 years ago. Archaeological evidence supports that many civilizations, including the Mayans, practiced sweat bathing. The Mayans, for example, used the temazcal, a type of sweat lodge, thousands of years ago.

I recently returned from Ireland, where ancient sweat houses—small stone structures used for steam bathing—are believed to date back several thousand years.

But when considering human history, a thousand years is relatively recent. This is speculation on my part, but I imagine that prehistoric humans discovered the benefits of heat exposure very early on.

Picture a fire burning inside a cave—more wood is added, the temperature rises, and it feels good. The warmth relaxes the body, causing sweat to form. Perhaps early humans gathered around these fires, telling stories and experiencing heat’s social and therapeutic effects together.

This practice likely predates civilization itself. As long as humans have been controlling fire, they have probably been bathing in some form of sweat.

Jacobsen: Are there individuals for whom this process is less effective—people with a naturally subdued or blunted sweating response?

Aaland: Humans sweat. It is one of the defining characteristics of our species. If we did not sweat, we would not survive.

Sweat functions as our body’s primary cooling mechanism. Many other mammals do not sweat as effectively—or at all. Our ability to sweat has enabled us to inhabit a wide range of climates across the planet.

Additionally, it allows us to run long distances while staying cool. A lion, for example, can sprint at high speeds but cannot run for extended periods because it does not sweat—it overheats quickly. In contrast, humans can maintain endurance over long distances due to superior thermoregulation.

You previously asked what is in sweat. Sweat is indeed about 99% water and salt. Still, it also contains trace amounts of certain heavy metals and toxins that are not easily excreted through other means. This is why the skin is sometimes referred to as the “third kidney”—it plays an important role in detoxification and is also the body’s largest organ.

Of course, there are always exceptions. Some people do not tolerate heat well. Milder alternatives, such as a Finnish sauna, are available for those who find high-temperature sweat bathing too intense.

For instance, the Turkish hammam tends to be more humid but operates at a lower temperature. There are many different styles of sweat bathing. Finding the one that works best for you is just a matter of finding it. Even if you do not enjoy extreme heat, you can still experience significant benefits from a milder bath.

Ultimately, I want to encourage people to try sweat bathing without being discouraged by a particular style that may not suit them.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts based on our conversation today?

Aaland: No, but I want to say that I have enjoyed your questions—they were excellent.

I am passionate about this subject. When you engage with it and truly experience it as I have, you realize that few things also work across cultures. Sweat bathing has the power to transform people. Sharing the heat, sweat, converse, and cool down together fosters a unique human connection that is difficult to find elsewhere.

Now more than ever, Scott, we need meaningful rituals like this—healthy traditions that bring people together profoundly and authentically. So yes, I am a strong advocate, and I hope others also come to appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you so much for your time today. It was a pleasure to speak with you.

Aaland: Great. As I said, your questions were insightful, and I appreciate you taking the time.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. Take care.

Aaland: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Wataynikaneyap Power Project Connects First Nations to Grid

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/25

Indigenous Services Canada (ISC) works collaboratively with partners to improve access to high quality services for First Nations, Inuit and Métis. Natural Resources Canada (NRCan) is committed to improving the quality of life of Canadians by ensuring the country’s abundant natural resources are developed sustainably, competitively and inclusively. Environment and Climate Change Canada (ECCC) is committed to protecting and conserving our natural heritage, predicting weather and environmental conditions, preventing and managing pollution, promoting clean growth and a sustainable environment for present and future generations. The Wataynikaneyap Power project is a transformative, Indigenous-led initiative connecting 16 First Nations, including Poplar Hill First Nation, to the Ontario power grid. This shift from diesel-generated electricity improves reliability, economic opportunities, and environmental sustainability while reducing greenhouse gas emissions and fuel spill risks. Indigenous leadership plays a crucial role, with 24 First Nations owning 51% of the project, aiming for full ownership. The initiative fosters capacity building, infrastructure growth, and long-term self-reliance. Government funding and partnerships have been key to success, ensuring cleaner, safer, and more sustainable energy for remote communities.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How will connecting to the Ontario power grid improve daily life and opportunities for Poplar Hill First Nation?

Jennifer Cooper for Indigenous Services Canada (ISC): Access to reliable electricity is key to an improved quality of life for First Nation communities in Ontario, which includes Poplar Hill First Nation. Providing reliable energy to the First Nation enables better access to essential services and will improve the local environment by reducing greenhouse gas emissions and diesel fuel spills.

Connection to the provincial power grid leads the way to new economic and employment opportunities for Poplar Hill First Nation powered by safe, clean and reliable energy.

For more information about the benefits of this project, please visit the Wataynikaneyap Power webpage.

Jacobsen: What challenges did the transition from diesel-generated electricity to a grid-connected system create?Cooper (ISC): As the project lead, Wataynikaneyap Power is best positioned to discuss the challenges as First Nations transitioned away from diesel generation towards grid connection for their communities.

Please visit the Natural Resources Canada website for information on the challenges of powering Canada’s off-grid communities.

Natural Resources Canada (NRCan): Poplar Hill First Nation is an Independent Power Authority community; however, the grid connection through the Wataynikaneyap Transmission Project means that the community will now be serviced by Hydro One Remote Communities Inc. for the community’s local distribution of electricity. As articulated by the CEO of Wataynikaneyap Power LP, this affects the community’s desire for ownership, capacity building, and self-reliance in power distribution, and necessitates that, moving forward, the community complete all documentation in line with Hydro One’s requirements (source).

In general, transitioning away from diesel-generated electricity to a grid connected system requires coordinating multiple stakeholders over many years, as well as significant capital investments. There can be additional costs and technical challenges due to remoteness. In their report National Indigenous Electrification Strategy: Strategy to Accelerate Indigenous Ownership of Net Zero Infrastructure in Canada, the First Nations Major Projects Coalition outlines that access to competitively priced capital is often the main challenge for Indigenous ownership of clean energy infrastructure.

Jacobsen: How has Indigenous leadership influenced execution of the Wataynikaneyap Power project?

Cooper (ISC): The Wataynikaneyap Power project is the largest and most far-reaching Indigenous-led transmission project in Ontario’s history. Wataynikaneyap Power is majority owned by 24 First Nation communities and has played a critical role in leading this project. CEO Margaret Kenequanash has demonstrated leadership on this project for many years and her commitment to a better quality of life for First Nation people right across the vast Northern reaches of the province. The Wataynikaneyap Power project represents an Indigenous-led solution to longstanding infrastructure challenges.

Jacobsen: How does reduction of greenhouse gas emissions contribute to environmental and community health objectives?

Cooper (ISC): Greenhouse gas emission reduction aligns with Indigenous values offering holistic benefits that bridge ecological health, cultural vitality, and social justice.

Reliable electrical power is essential for the health, safety, and growth of First Nations communities. For too long, communities faced significant challenges due to reliance on diesel generation, which strained their quality of life and limited opportunities for housing, infrastructure, and development. Connecting to the power grid is transforming First Nation communities, enabling sustainable growth, and improving overall well-being. This partnership, reflected in the Wataynikaneyap Power project has been critical in making this transmission system for First Nations a reality, creating lasting benefits for the communities it serves.

For more information, we recommend that you reach out to First Nation communities to seek Indigenous voices directly for a more accurate and respectful representation of their views.

Jacobsen: How do traditional knowledge and values shape this clean energy initiative?

Cooper (ISC): Indigenous Services Canada (ISC) recognizes that Indigenous traditions and knowledge systems are sources of strength, wisdom and guidance. To learn more about how ISC recognizes and respects the deep knowledge and practices held by Indigenous communities, please consult Indigenous Services Canada: Strategic Plan 2020 to 2025.

To learn about the partnerships that guided the Wataynikaneyap Power project, please contact ‍watayinquiries@wataypower.ca or visit Wataynikaneyap Power for more information. 

Environment and Climate Change Canada (ECCC): As the impacts of climate change disproportionately affect First Nations communities, reducing emissions can contribute to First Nations’ community health objectives. The legacies of colonization and First Nations’ unique relationship with the land, waters, and ice are factors that compound the effects of climate change, leading to intensified negative cultural, social, and economic impacts for Indigenous Peoples that directly compromise their health and wellbeing. These impacts can be substantially reduced by cutting emissions and pollution.

Reducing greenhouse gas emissions and air pollution can have positive effects on human health. Improving water and air quality and reducing chronic illnesses are some of the most known health-related co-benefits of reducing emissions. Mitigating climate change can also help reduce impacts of temperature increases on humans, such as heart stroke, dehydration, and heat exhaustion. The impacts of extreme weather events can cause death, injury and increase mental health problems such as anxiety, depression, and post-traumatic stress disorder.

By investing in clean energy, communities can take concrete action to address the causes of climate change.

Jacobsen: How do partnerships with federal agencies and other stakeholders help the project succeed?

Cooper (ISC): Partnerships on the Indigenous-led Wataynikaneyap Power project, including with the Ontario and Canadian governments, have been crucial to the development and building of the transmission system, and enabled regulatory efficiencies, reduced delays and compliance issues, allowed for shared essential resources like funding, technical expertise and knowledge, and distributed responsibilities and risks.

The Government of Canada supported the project with $1.6 billion in federal funding, announced in March 2018, to connect 16 First Nations to the provincial power grid. Ontario will also apply existing ratepayer subsidies to support transmission connection and distribution costs.

The project is providing clean, safe and reliable energy to 15,000 people. Wataynikaneyap Power also estimates that the project has resulted in more than 750 jobs for First Nations.

First Nations are at the forefront of working toward a cleaner environment that will promote the health and safety of community members. Strong partnerships between First Nations and the Government of Canada are a key element of this commitment to foster the growth of Indigenous communities. 

To learn about the partnerships that guided the Wataynikaneyap Power project, please contact, ‍watayinquiries@wataypower.ca or visit Wataynikaneyap Power for more information. 

Jacobsen: What are the main lessons from these experiences that might guide similar energy projects in other remote First Nation communities?

Cooper (ISC): As the lead of the Wataynikaneyap Power project, they are in a better position to discuss some of the learned experiences. You can reach out to ‍‍watayinquiries@wataypower.ca for more information.

Jacobsen: How will access to clean and reliable power support remote communities’ long-term self-reliance?

Cooper (ISC): Reliable power is essential for the health, safety, and growth of First Nations communities. Connecting to the power grid is transforming First Nation communities, enabling sustainable growth and improving overall well-being. Thousands of people living in remote First Nations communities are experiencing much higher quality of life as a result of being connected to the grid.

All communities need access to energy that is clean and reliable. By investing in Indigenous-led solutions to long standing infrastructure challenges, the Government of Canada plays an important role to support companies like Wataynikaneyap Power on their Power Transmission Project that will support remote First Nations to power themselves and reduce greenhouse gas emissions related to diesel energy production.

Connecting 16 diesel-dependent First Nations to Ontario’s power grid will provide these communities with clean, safe and reliable energy that will have a significant effect on the health and safety of community members and also expand infrastructure and economic opportunities.

Natural Resources Canada (NRCan): 

  • Indigenous ownership: The Wataynikaneyap Transmission Project is the largest Indigenous-owned and led energy infrastructure project in Canada. Wataynikaneyap Power LP is 51% owned by 24 First Nations, through an entity called the 24 First Nations Limited Partnership (FNLP). The FNLP intends to eventually increase its 51% ownership share to 100%. Project ownership results in positive economic benefits such as local jobs from construction and long-term revenue generation.
  • Capacity building: FNLP has 100% ownership of Opiikapawiin Services Limited Partnership (OSLP). OSLP is primarily responsible for administering projects and programs for Wataynikaneyap Power relating to community engagement, education and training, stakeholder engagement, and capacity building. Through OSLP, the communities participating in the transmission project can develop the skills and training required to successfully commission and operate the project.
  • Avoided cost of diesel: Access to clean and reliable power supports self-reliance by eliminating the dependence on diesel fuel as the main source of electricity. Based on financial analysis conducted by Price Waterhouse Coopers (PwC) on behalf of Wataynikaneyap, compared to diesel use, grid connection will result in $1.15 billion in net present value savings over 40 years of operation for 16 communities involved.
  • Diesel fuel needs to be transported over long distances and stored locally. Remoteness and the potential for extreme climate conditions result in higher transportation costs, in addition to environmental risks (e.g. spills).
  • Fuel prices fluctuate with global market conditions, which can add uncertainty and additional cost to the communities.
  • Increased energy security: Grid connection will also increase the availability and quality of electricity compared to diesel generators that have limited generation capacity and lead to load restrictions. With a more abundant source of electricity, communities can pursue economic activities that would not have been possible under load restrictions, such as building new schools and health care centers, electrification, and supporting larger scale industries/businesses for the community.
  • For additional information on socio-economic benefits, please see: Economy – Watay Power.

Jacobsen: Thank you all for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Modernizing Government Contracts: Efficiency With SAS Viya

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/25

Michael Dagenais is a seasoned executive with extensive experience in the technology and analytics sectors. Currently serving as the Senior Executive Director of US Manufacturing, Transportation, Entertainment, and Services at SAS, he leads strategic initiatives to drive innovation and operational excellence for clients across industries. Previously, he held the role of Director, Federal Government, for SAS Canada, where he advanced analytics adoption within government operations. With an MBA and a strong background in business administration, Dagenais has also contributed to Canadian corporate leadership. Now based in Wake Forest, North Carolina, he is recognized for his expertise in fostering transformative data-driven solutions. Dagenais discussed the benefits of consolidating annual contracts into a single agreement for the Government of Canada. Dagenais highlighted the efficiency gained by reducing 117 separate contracts into one annual financial transaction, allowing for redirected resources. They also addressed the modernization of SAS software, transitioning from SAS 9 to SAS Viya, which aligns with Canada’s digital transformation goals by shifting to cloud infrastructure. Dagenais emphasized the importance of simplifying contracts and improving flexibility while reducing technical debt. He expressed confidence that future evaluations would be more favorable, with significant savings and alignment with government priorities.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How will the consolidation of annual contracts into a single agreement benefit the Government of Canada?

Michael Dagenais: There are several significant ways. The first and most obvious is efficiency for the federal government. Currently, awarding or renewing a contract requires a full review process at the departmental and agency level. After that, it is sent to Public Services and Procurement Canada (PSPC), which repeats the process to validate terms, conditions, pricing, and other details. Additionally, there is a financial validation process to ensure the agency or department has sufficient funds.

By consolidating these steps into a single annual agreement, the process is reduced from 117 separate negotiations, pricing reviews, and validations to one financial transaction per year. This change greatly reduces the man-hours required and allows resources to be redirected to other priorities, making the process much more efficient overall.

Jacobsen: How does SAS Viya align with Canada’s Digital Ambition Plan to prioritize digital initiatives?

Dagenais: The modernization from SAS 9 to SAS Viya represents a major technological leap for the government. This upgrade transitions from an on-premises infrastructure, where data resides on physical servers, to a cloud-based solution. The move to the cloud brings numerous benefits, including cost savings, reduced physical infrastructure, and environmental advantages, all of which align with Canada’s digital transformation and sustainability goals.

Jacobsen: What will be the challenges in modernizing SAS technology?

Dagenais: While modernization offers substantial benefits, there will be some challenges. A primary issue is the learning curve associated with adapting to cloud-based systems. Government employees, who are used to software residing on physical servers or desktops, will need to adjust to the new approach. From a technical perspective, however, the changes are minimal. The backend processes remain largely the same, but with improved speed and efficiency. Once users are familiar with the system, these adjustments will lead to better overall performance.

Jacobsen: How will standardized access to SAS software enhance the digital capabilities of federal employees?

Dagenais: The transition shifts the platform from a compute-based or CPU-based model to a user-based model. This leads to improved productivity and enhances the digital capabilities of federal employees, helping the government achieve its modernization goals.

Providing unlimited ways to access the system will also help the federal government as they navigate their back-to-work program. For example, whether someone is remote due to geography or by choice, we can accommodate that much better from a cloud-based perspective compared to the old on-premises approach. 

Jacobsen: How will adopting SAS Viya contribute to reducing technical debt and improving the flexibility of the computing structure?

Dagenais: As we discussed, the flexibility offered by a cloud-native approach will make access easier not only for end-users but also for the technical teams supporting these environments. From an efficiency perspective, we estimate the new platform is 30% faster than the current system.

For example, data analysis that previously required an entire weekend to process can now be completed in an afternoon. This faster processing translates directly into quicker insights and more immediate realization of efficiency and effectiveness.

This aligns with feedback we received starting in October 2022, when the Auditor General issued a critical report on IT environments in the federal government. 

Jacobsen: Do you think there will be a more more favorable review next time?

Dagenais: Yes, I do.

This also supports the Government of Canada’s digital ambition. These are key elements we focused on during the process. It wasn’t about simply selling software and discussing costs. Instead, we emphasized the broader benefits and alignment with government priorities.

Jacobsen: Michael, thank you for your time today.

Dagenais: Thank you, Scott. I appreciate it.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Scholarships for Future Canadian Meteorologists

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/24

Environment and Climate Change Canada (ECCC) is mandated for protecting and conserving our natural heritage, predicting weather and environmental conditions, preventing and managing pollution, promoting clean growth and a sustainable environment for present and future generations. The ECCC Meteorology Awards Program aims to address Canada’s need for skilled meteorologists by funding students pursuing atmospheric science degrees. The program, totaling $648,000 over five years, provides $5,000–$10,000 scholarships to students at six universities offering required coursework. Administered by Scholarship Partners Canada, the selection process prioritizes equity-deserving groups. Recipients gain eligibility for ECCC’s Meteorologist Occupational Training Program, a rigorous two-year program preparing them for operational forecasting. As Canada’s largest meteorologist employer, ECCC ensures workforce sustainability to enhance weather forecasting, climate resilience, and public safety. The initiative strengthens scientific recruitment, diversity, and meteorological expertise for Canada’s future.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does the Environment and Climate Change Canada Meteorology Awards Program address the need for skilled meteorologists in Canada?

Environment and Climate Change Canada: Environment and Climate Change Canada (ECCC) meteorologists are highly trained individuals who have completed post-secondary educations in atmospheric science programs, in addition to our in-house training program for new employees. To be eligible for entry into our training program for new meteorologists, candidates must first meet our essential education requirements. These requirements include the completion of a university science degree or certificate program with specialization in atmospheric science/meteorology, as well as specific courses in topics like math/physics, synoptic meteorology, dynamic meteorology, and thermodynamic meteorology. These requirements, in addition to the training provide via our in-house professional development program, allow ECCC to certify our meteorologists according to international training standards set out by the World Meteorological Organization.

Atmospheric science programs in Canadian universities are typically small, with few graduates each year. Students entering university and choosing their program of study may not have had much exposure to atmospheric science, and may not consider it as an option due to lack of awareness. The ECCC Meteorology Awards aim to raise awareness of the field among students in undergraduate science programs at universities offering atmospheric science programs that meet ECCC’s hiring requirements for meteorologists.

Jacobsen: What are the eligibility criteria?

Environment and Climate Change Canada: There are three categories of eligibility:

  1. Students enrolling into a meteorology certificate or diploma program (typically 30 credits). These students will have already completed a Bachelor of Science with foundational courses in math and physics. The certificate/diploma programs in Canada that offer ECCC’s course requirements are the University of British Columbia (UBC), York University, McGill University, Dalhousie University, and l’Université du Québec à Montréal (UQAM). These are one-time awards of $10,000.
  2. Students enrolled in a Bachelor of Science degree program with specialization in atmospheric science. The post-secondary institutions in Canada that offer ECCC’s course requirements are the University of Manitoba, the University of British Columbia, York University, McGill University, and l’Université du Québec à Montréal. These awards are valued at $6,000, and recipients can reapply for an additional year of funding so long as they remain registered in their program.
  3. Students enrolled in a Bachelor of Science degree program at one of the universities that offer atmospheric science programs that include ECCC’s course requirements. These awards are valued at $5,000, and recipients can reapply for an additional year of funding provided they then register in a program with specialization in atmospheric science.

Jacobsen: Is an investment of $648,000 comparable to similar scholarship programs?

Environment and Climate Change Canada: The funding for the ECCC Meteorology Awards is spread out over 5 years, with the aim of funding approximately 80 individual scholarships over the life of the program. In comparison to other scholarship programs such as the Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council of Canada (NSERC) Undergraduate programs the annual amounts (5K to 10K) are consistent with other similar awards. For example, ECCC also offers an Atmospheric and Meteorological graduate supplement to recipients of a Canada Graduate Scholarship (CGS) or an NSERC Postgraduate Scholarship – Doctoral which is $5K.

Jacobsen:  How does this fit into the strategy of the Environment and Climate Change Canada?

Environment and Climate Change Canada: As a science-based department, it is important that ECCC attract, recruit, and retain atmospheric science and meteorologists for today and the future. The department is committed to building a diverse and inclusive workforce, which is a departmental priority.

Jacobsen: How will this enhance the meteorological workforce and the capabilities in weather forecasting and combatting climate change?

Environment and Climate Change Canada: ECCC is the largest employer of meteorologists in Canada, with over 500 meteorologists employed across the country serving in roles such as operations, service delivery, and research and development. Regular intake of new meteorologists is critical to maintaining a high level of service to the public and stakeholders. Outside of ECCC, meteorologists are also employed in many sectors, such as with provincial forest fire agencies, the energy sector in solar and wind, and media.

Jacobsen: What is the selection process for the scholarship recipients, particularly candidates from Equity Deserving Groups?

Environment and Climate Change Canada: Scholarship Partners Canada, part of Universities Canada, is administering the program. Universities Canada possesses 60 years of experience in managing large-scale, complex, multi-year, multi-country, international scholarship programs, and currently administers over 140 scholarship programs, awarding more than $24+ million for students to attend universities, colleges, CEGEPs, and trade schools. As experts in the field of scholarship delivery, they are creating a fair and transparent selection process which promotes the lowering of barriers to the study of atmospheric science. A selection committee of Canadian university and college representatives will be convened and managed by Scholarships Partners Canada. ECCC has no influence on the decision. Applications will be assessed on academic performance; volunteer/community involvement and/or extra-curricular activities; essay; and content and relevance of applicant’s reference letters. Preference is accorded to students who identify as part of one or more of the following Equity Deserving Groups:

  •       Indigenous persons
  •       Members of visible minority groups and other equity deserving groups
  •       Persons with disabilities
  •       Women

Jacobsen: Why were Dalhousie University, Université du Québec à Montréal, McGill University, York University, University of Manitoba, and University of British Columbia chosen as eligible institutions?

Environment and Climate Change Canada: These 6 post-secondary institutions are the only institutions in Canada that offer all the essential courses that meet the education requirements for meteorologists employed by the Government of Canada. These include courses in synoptic meteorology, dynamic meteorology, and thermodynamic meteorology. These requirements, in addition to the completion of ECCC’s Meteorologist Occupational Training Program, allow ECCC to certify its meteorologists according to international training standards set out by the World Meteorological Organization.

Jacobsen: Scholarship recipients are eligible to apply for the Meteorology Training Program upon graduation. What is in this training and preparation for students’ future operational roles in weather forecasting? 

Environment and Climate Change Canada: University programs specializing in atmospheric science allow students to gain foundational knowledge in the theories and principles of meteorology. Students graduating from these programs do not possess sufficient operational knowledge or practice to meet ECCC’s standards to fully function as Operational Meteorologists right away. ECCC’s Meteorologist Occupational Training Program (MOTP) is designed to build on that foundation towards developing the skills needed to apply the theoretical knowledge into the production of operational forecast products and routines. Meteorologist Interns are usually hired at the entry level and immediately commence a classroom-based training course of approximately 6-7 months in duration. This classroom course takes an applied approach to the theory learned in university, where interns develop forecasting skills in a simulated operational environment. Following successful completion of the formal course, the intern will begin a period of double-banking in one of ECCC’s operational prediction centres, where they are directly supervised by a more senior meteorologist. During this phase of the training, the intern gradually works towards completing their full operational duties under general guidance and minimal supervision. After a minimum of 2 months, the intern is promoted to the Developmental Meteorologist level, which lasts a minimum of 18 months. Developmental Meteorologists will increasingly assume the duties of an operational office through a full 4 seasons to ensure exposure to a reasonable mix of forecasting situations in the Canadian climate. If they meet the standards within the allowed timeframe, they graduate from the MOTP, receive ECCC certification, and are promoted to the working level of an Operational Meteorologist.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Innovative Safety Initiatives and Industry Benchmarks in Manufacturing

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/24

Cristian Rodriguez is the Vice President of Safety, Sustainability, and People at Wajax, based in Mississauga, Ontario, Canada. With over a decade of senior leadership experience, he brings expertise in Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) matters, focusing on fostering workplace safety, promoting sustainability, and supporting community well-being. Previously, Cristian held key roles at SNC-Lavalin, including Director of Global Health and Safety, where he drove innovative solutions for health and environmental challenges. Passionate about creating psychologically safer workplaces, Cristian champions sustainability initiatives and inspires positive change across industries. Connect with him to explore impactful ESG strategies. Rodriguez emphasizes the pivotal role of safety in manufacturing planning at Wajax, highlighting its contribution to operational success through enhanced employee well-being, retention, and productivity. Innovative strategies, such as tailored safety training and wellness programs, integrate safety into daily operations. Rodriguez underscores that prioritizing safety boosts productivity, meets industry standards, and fosters trust. With advancements in AI, Wajax leverages technology to predict hazards and optimize workflows. Reflecting on lessons from past experiences, Wajax has adopted a proactive safety approach. Achieving industry benchmarks, like a TRIF below 1.00, and earning certifications further solidify Wajax’s leadership in safety excellence.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does prioritizing safety in manufacturing planning contribute to long-term operational success?

Cristian Rodriguez: Prioritizing safety is integral to everything we do at Wajax. Our people are our greatest asset, and by safeguarding their mental and physical health, we enhance job satisfaction and retention, which directly contributes to our long-term operational success. Putting safety first helps to boost productivity, reduce downtime, and lower costs.

Jacobsen: What innovative strategies has Wajax implemented to ensure workforce safety?

Rodriguez: Wajax has implemented several strategies to ensure workforce safety, including safety orientation training tailored to employees’ roles, situational awareness training, and safety leadership training for managers and supervisors. Beyond physical safety, we’ve implemented mental health initiatives and wellness programs to promote overall well-being, reflecting our integrated approach to workforce safety.

Jacobsen: Is it possible to improve safety while maintaining productivity?

Rodriguez: Absolutely. By integrating safety protocols into daily operations, Wajax has reduced injuries while improving overall efficiency. Each day at Wajax begins with a pre-shift safety meeting to discuss the jobs that will be performed that day and the associated hazards. This ensures that everyone is focused on what needs to be done, and more importantly, that it’s done safely. When safety is prioritized, productivity naturally follows.

Jacobsen: How does safety-focused planning help manufacturing companies meet industry standards?

Rodriguez: Safety-focused planning helps companies like Wajax meet and exceed industry standards by continuously improving. We are never completely satisfied and are always looking for ways to improve our overall safety performance. This enhances our reputation as a leader in the industry when it comes to health and safety.

Jacobsen: How does embedding safety into manufacturing protocols foster trust in business?

Rodriguez: At Wajax, we don’t just talk about safety—we live it every day. It is embedded in everything we do; it’s who we are. When our people and customers see that their safety comes first, it helps to foster trust and loyalty in Wajax as an organization.

Jacobsen: What is the importance of a commitment to safety principles and protocols for reputation and relationships with stakeholders?

Rodriguez: It’s very important. Safety must be demonstrated each day. People need to see it and feel it. Our dedication to safety and well-being is crucial for maintaining a positive reputation and building strong relationships with our stakeholders. It shows what our values are and that we truly are a company that puts people first.

Jacobsen: How will the integration of advanced technologies in manufacturing continue in an AI era?

Rodriguez: We are very excited about the possibilities that AI brings. AI-powered tools can be useful in helping to identify potential hazards and predict safety issues before they occur. They can help to optimize workflows, leading to a safer and more efficient work environment. At Wajax, we are focused on leveraging technology to improve safety and operational efficiency.

Jacobsen: What lessons has Wajax learned from past experiences shaping current approaches to safety in manufacturing?

Rodriguez: Wajax has learned several valuable lessons from past experiences, such as the importance of continuous improvement, the need for comprehensive training programs, and the benefits of leveraging technologies. In the past, our focus was more reactive when it came to safety. Now, we have adjusted our mindset to a more proactive approach. For example, when an incident occurs, rather than looking at compatibility, we focus on what we can do to improve, what lessons we can learn, and what type of controls can be put into place to better protect the health and safety of our teammates.

Jacobsen: What are the safety initiatives set as a benchmark for the industry in 2025?

Rodriguez: Every year we raise the bar a little higher as we keep looking to improve our safety performance. We have set several safety initiatives as benchmarks for the industry, including achieving a Total Recordable Injury Frequency (TRIF) of less than 1.00 and continuously improving safety training programs. We recently achieved Platinum Level Certification for both Mental Health at Work and Healthy Workplace, which is something we are very proud of.

Jacobsen: With prominent coverage of Wajax in BNN Bloomberg and Chief Executive, how has visibility helped amplify the importance of safety in the manufacturing sector?

Rodriguez: The prominent coverage of Wajax has helped to raise awareness about the importance of safety and well-being in our industry, not just for Wajax but for all our peer organizations. Safety cannot exist in isolation; it needs to be incorporated into everything that a company does. Our increased visibility has positioned us as a leader in the industry when it comes to promoting a strong safety culture, focusing not only on physical but also mental health and wellness programs.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Cristian.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Paa-Kwesi Heto on the Tobis Fellowship

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/23

Dr. Paa-Kwesi Heto is a distinguished political economist and development expert affiliated with the University of California, Irvine (UCI). He serves as a Policy Analyst for the TIME Project at UCI, contributing to research and policy development in education and international relations.  Dr. Heto has also been recognized with several awards, including the 2021 Joseph L. White Award and the 2020 Etel Solingen Outstanding Paper in International Relations Award. His scholarly work includes contributions to the book “Geopolitics, Supply Chains, and International Relations in East Asia,” where he authored a chapter on global supply chains and great power competition in Africa.

Heto, interviewed by Scott Douglas Jacobsen, shared his experience with the Tobis Fellowship, which he discovered during his PhD at UCI. He valued its mentorship, focus space, and collaborative environment, which inspired him to join. The fellowship, established by Jerome and Hazel Tobis, integrated ethics with personal growth. Heto admired the ethical framework and Kristen Monroe’s leadership, highlighting her supportive, nonjudgmental approach. The fellowship allowed him to explore research without tenure pressures and revise his work for broader audiences. Heto encouraged others to seek postdoc opportunities, emphasizing curiosity, collaboration, and genuine interest in learning and improvement.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with a fellow alumnus, Dr. Paa-Kwesi Heto. How did you first learn about the Tobis Fellowship? I’ve had a long history with them and gained significant value through mentorship and having a dedicated space to focus. I tend to be all over the place, but this fellowship provided a good corrective for me. It offered a space to center my efforts. How did you discover it, and what did it offer you broadly?

Dr. Paa-Kwesi Heto: Thank you for the opportunity to discuss the Tobi’s Fellowship and various other topics. I pursued my PhD at UCI, and during my first year, I connected with someone on campus who was remarkable. I wanted to learn from her and understand her work. I recall the Tobis Fellows coming to campus for a retreat during that first year. They had an amazing time, and I thought, “Wow, this is great.”

I loved having a year to work on my project in collaboration with others. The opportunity to collaborate with others and receive feedback inspired me to become part of the Tobis Fellowship. 

Jacobsen: A significant aspect of the fellowship, as I understand from what Jerome and Hazel Tobis established, was its aim to create an academic pursuit focused on ethics while integrating it with personal integrity, moral character, and practical application.

What did you admire about the ethical and moral focus and framework during your time there?

Heto: I would approach this from three perspectives: first, what Tobis stood for; second, what Kristen Monroe, the director who helped create this program, represents; and third, the unique space that was unintentionally created.

Regarding what Tobis stood for, I agree with your point about practical action aimed at advancing knowledge in ethics and supporting researchers whose spirit of inquiry led to actionable practices. Considering how this inquiry translated into our way of life and character formation was important. Although my topics were not directly focused on ethics, the fellowship compelled me to reflect on the ethical implications of my work and how I embodied those ethics in my research.

The second dimension pertains to Kristen Monroe herself. Kristen is extraordinary and known for her unwavering drive to create space, mentor others, and offer support. She provided a nonjudgmental space, which was essential for the Tobis Fellowship. Her approach was: “I’m going to create the space for you to do your best work. If you need me, I’ll be there to support you.” 

Sometimes, I would approach her to bounce ideas off her and talk. We end up, sometimes, talking about a whole range of issues that she has deep knowledge about, especially in terms of moral courage and all the various life experiences she has documented over the years. That creates a nurturing space, allowing people like me to venture into my work without feeling judged or dreading it. 

The last part for me was engaging in topics of interest without worrying about the job market, tenure clock, or the opinion of others.

Jacobsen: You sound like someone who just came out of a doctoral program!

Heto: Yes, right. That’s true. I came out of a doctoral program with all the trauma that goes with that. So, having that freedom to explore and letting your inquiring spirit guide you is liberating. When writing a dissertation, you have to be worried about what your committee wants and what is advantageous for the job market. However, revising that work for a broader audience requires more breathing room. That’s what the Tobis Fellowship provided.

The fellowship provided a financial cushion, allowing me to focus on my work without worrying about finding extra gigs to make ends meet. I could concentrate on perfecting my work how I wanted, different from what my committee expected. 

Jacobsen: What message would you give to people interested in opportunities like this—to get involved, reach out, and refine their applications for review?

Heto: This advice extends beyond the Tobis Fellowship to postdoc programs and similar fellowship opportunities. Many of us leave school hoping to land a tenure-track position immediately. If that’s you, great—congratulations! However, it’s also important to take the time to continue working on your research, driven by curiosity and collaboration. If you’re applying to fellowships, approach it with a keen interest in learning, improving, and doing your best work. I appreciate this opportunity. 

Jacobsen: You’re welcome.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Canada Invests $78.7M to Strengthen Drug Enforcement

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/22

Health Canada is responsible for helping Canadians maintain and improve their health. It ensures that high-quality health services are accessible, and works to reduce health risks. The Public Health Agency of Canada is part of the federal health portfolio. Our activities focus on protecting against threats to public health, preventing and reducing diseases and injury, and promoting health, well-being and equity. The Canadian government is investing $78.7 million to expand laboratory and regulatory capabilities as part of Canada’s Border Plan to combat synthetic drugs. This funding will establish the Canadian Drug Analysis Centre (CDAC) for specialized forensic analysis and launch the Precursor Chemical Risk Management Unit (PCRMU) to monitor emerging drug threats. Proposed amendments to the Precursor Control Regulations include mandatory suspicious transaction reporting and increased oversight of precursor chemicals. The initiative aims to enhance law enforcement intelligence, improve precursor tracking, and address the overdose crisis by strengthening public health, surveillance, and enforcement measures at Canada’s borders and within communities.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How will the investment of $78.7 million expand laboratory and regulatory capabilities?

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada: Health Canada plays a critical role in supporting Canadian law and border enforcement in their activities to counter the global synthetic drug threat.

The $78.7 million announced as part of Canada’s Border Plan will help law and border enforcement better detect and address fentanyl and its precursors by:

  1.     Creating the Canadian Drug Analysis Centre (CDAC), which will complement existing laboratory capacity by allowing for more specialized analysis of synthetic drug samples. The analysis will look at markers to help determine how and where these substances were manufactured.
  2.     Launching a new Precursor Chemical Risk Management Unit to increase oversight of precursor chemicals and to monitor emerging illegal drug trends. 

Jacobsen: What amendments are proposed for the Precursor Control Regulations (PCR) and Schedule IX of the Controlled Drugs and Substances Act (CDSA)? How does the consultation fit into Canada’s plan to combat illegal synthetics?  

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada: The proposed amendments would:

-Make suspicious transaction reporting to Health Canada mandatory for licensed and registered companies.

-Require licensed and registered companies to conduct additional criminal record and background checks on key personnel.

-Impose condition-of-sale restrictions for ephedrine and pseudoephedrine, limiting sales to pharmacies only.

-Expand registration requirement on the importation of component parts of designated devices like pill presses and encapsulators.

-Introduce regulatory flexibilities to enable Health Canada to respond more quickly to public health or safety risks.

Health Canada will use the comments received to inform the development of the proposed regulatory amendments.  

Jacobsen: How will Health Canada enhance monitoring and surveillance of precursor chemicals?

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada: The Precursor Chemical Risk Management Unit (PCRMU) will enhance Health Canada’s surveillance activities for timely identification of emerging substances of concern via wastewater analysis. Wastewater analysis involves testing samples collected from untreated wastewater (sewage) to screen for the presence of drugs and drug metabolites, such as fentanyl, fentanyl analogues, and their precursor chemicals.

Jacobsen: How will the Precursor Chemical Risk Management Unit work?  

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada: The PCRMU will provide better insight into precursor chemicals, distribution channels and enhance monitoring and surveillance to enable timely law enforcement action. Specifically, the PCRMU would provide:

  • Greater oversight of precursor chemicals and identification of risks in existing distribution channels.
  • More timely and agile response to potential threats of new and emerging precursor chemicals.
  • Enhanced ability to identify substances of concern through new monitoring and surveillance capacity (e.g., wastewater); and
  • Enhanced data and intelligence sharing capabilities between federal partners, as well as with US and international partners, to inform scheduling and strengthen controls.

Jacobsen: How will the creation of the Canadian Drug Profiling Centre strengthen forensic analysis?

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada: The new Canadian Drug Analysis Centre (CDAC) will operate through Health Canada’s Drug Analysis Service (DAS) laboratories. The new Canadian Drug Analysis Centre (CDAC) will allow for more specialized analysis of synthetic drug samples. The analysis will look at markers to help determine how and where these substances were manufactured. The analysis of these very low-level impurities and other components specific to the chemical manufacturing process will help to identify trends and patterns to inform on the origin, distribution, and manufacture patterns of the drugs. Profiling analyses will also involve purity determination of all active drugs and cutting agents to better understand how distributors and drug dealers are changing or modifying the drugs. This can help law enforcement and public health partners to more strategically target actions to address the synthetic drug threat.

Jacobsen: Why is mandating licensed and registered companies to report suspicious transactions to Health Canada important?  

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada: Currently, companies are required to keep records of suspicious transactions, but reporting to Health Canada is voluntary. This is a gap that has been identified through Health Canada’s discussions with law enforcement in helping detect the diversion of a precursor to an illicit market or use.

Jacobsen: What are the public health and safety concerns motivating the government’s initiatives here?  

Health Canada and the Public Health Agency of Canada: The overdose crisis is one of the most serious public health crises our country has ever faced. It is driven by an illegal toxic drug supply.

To address this crisis, we need a comprehensive and collaborative approach. All orders of government and communities need to work together on solutions, from prevention and harm reduction, to treatment, recovery, and enforcement. 

As part of Canada’s Border Plan, the Government of Canada is taking concrete action to keep communities safe on both sides of the border. This includes investing $1.3 billion to make out border stronger, with more personnel, advanced AI technology, new drones and helicopters, and stronger coordination between partners. The regulatory amendments are just one piece of the plan.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Five Years of Indigenous-led Child and Family Services Law

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/22

Jennifer Cooper is a Communications Advisor in Media Relations for Indigenous Services Canada and Crown-Indigenous Relations and Northern Affairs Canada, based in Ottawa, Ontario. With over three years of public service experience and a background in commercial insurance, she specializes in policy development, qualitative and quantitative research, and strategic communications. A graduate of Carleton University with a B.A. Honours in History, she has intermediate French proficiency (BBB) and a strong multidisciplinary skill set. Jennifer’s diverse experience includes teamwork, multi-factor analysis, and leadership, rooted in her upbringing as an Air Force brat and her involvement in sports like rowing and rugby. Bill C-92, An Act respecting First Nations, Inuit and Métis children, youth and families,addresses the over-representation of Indigenous children in child and family services. Enacted on June 21, 2019, and effective January 1, 2020, the Act empowers Indigenous communities to develop and govern their child and family services, affirming self-government rights. It sets principles of cultural continuity, equality, and child welfare. Coordination agreements establish roles between Indigenous, federal, and provincial bodies. With $851 million allocated for implementation and 13 Indigenous laws enacted, the Act promotes cultural preservation and reconciliation through strengthened Indigenous-Crown relationships and self-determined services.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What past practices in child and family services for Indigenous children and youth prompted Bill C-92?

Jennifer Cooper: Previously known as Bill C-92, An Act respecting First Nations, Inuit and Métis children, youth and families (the Act), was created in response to First Nations, Inuit, and Métis leaders, Elders, parents, grandparents, children, and community members who called on the government to reduce the number of Indigenous children in care. The Act aims to address the critical issue of over-representation of Indigenous children in the child and family services system. Canada recognizes that Indigenous communities are best positioned to identify and implement solutions for their own communities, where in the past, they were bound by systems that were not generally reflective of their cultures and identities.

Jacobsen: When did Bill C-92 (An Act respecting First Nations, Inuit and Métis children, youth and families) come into effect?

Cooper: The Act became law on June 21, 2019, and came into effect as of January 1, 2020 – 5 years ago. Celebrating Five Years of Indigenous-led Child and Family Services Law

Jacobsen: What national principles set out Bill C-92?

Cooper: The Act sets national principles, such as the best interests of the child, cultural continuity and substantive equality to help guide the delivery of child and family services, to keep families together and to reduce the number of Indigenous children in care.

Jacobsen: How did the Supreme Court of Canada rule on Bill C-92? 

Cooper: The continued implementation of the Act remains a government priority reinforced by the Supreme Court of Canada’s opinion, delivered on February 9, 2024, that the Act, in its entirety, is constitutionally valid. 

Jacobsen: How do coordination agreements integrate with Bill C-92?

Cooper: A coordination agreement articulates the roles and responsibilities between Indigenous governing bodies, Canada and provinces or territories in the implementation of the Indigenous governing body’s exercise of jurisdiction in relation to child and family services. 

By entering into tripartite coordination agreements and associated fiscal arrangements, Canada works with Indigenous governing bodies, as well as provinces and territories to ensure that Indigenous peoples, groups, and communities can establish their own laws, service models, supports, and programs that best meet the needs of their children, youth, and families.

We have signed 10 coordination agreements and 1 bilateral agreement with Indigenous governing bodies, including the first Inuit agreement. We are currently in discussion with a number of communities and provincial governments to implement additional agreements.

Jacobsen: How has the federal government supported Indigenous groups in capacity-building funding with C-92?

Cooper: As of January 2025, $851 million has been allocated to support the implementation of Indigenous child and family services laws and service models.

In addition, $251 million in capacity-building funding has been provided to more than 244 Indigenous governing bodies.

Jacobsen: What are the benefits in allowance of Indigenous groups to design child and family services programs?

Cooper: For generations, government policies devastated communities by separating children from their families, culture, and language. The Act provides a broad framework for Indigenous groups, communities and peoples to create and self-govern their child and family services. Through the Act, Indigenous laws can potentially gain the force of federal law and prevail over conflicting federal, provincial and territorial laws. In this way, the Act is a major step toward the continued affirmation of the Indigenous right to self-government in relation to child and family services in Canada.

As of January 1, 2025, 13 Indigenous Child and Family Services laws have come into force throughout the country. The Act advances the well-being of Indigenous children, youth and families by preserving and promoting connections to family, culture and community.

Jacobsen: How does C-92 reflect the government’s commitments to reconciliation and Indigenous-Crown relationships?

Cooper: Canada believes the Act to be an important step in the process of reconciliation with First Nations, Inuit and Métis through renewed nation-to-nation, government-to-government and Indigenous-Crown relationships based on recognition of rights, respect, cooperation and partnership. This is a critical step on our path towards reconciliation, and a future where kids can grow up surrounded by love, language and culture.

Please see below, the news releases from the most recent coordination agreements:

Sts’ailes, Canada and B.C. celebrate coordination agreement to support child and family services – Canada.ca

Gwa’sala-‘Nakwaxda’xw Nations reach historic agreement with Canada and British Columbia to support First Nations-led child and family services – Canada.ca

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Jennifer. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

CEO at Future Forward Women on Feminist Advocacy

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/21 (Unpublished)

Dr. C. Nicole Mason, a feminist policy analyst and CEO of Future Forward Women, which is a bold new initiative to build women’s power and influence in the U.S. They unite and support catalytic leaders, organizations, and changemakers committed to propelling lasting change in the lives of women, girls, and families. She discusses gender equity, reproductive rights, and social policies. She emphasizes the setbacks in feminist policymaking, including the repeal of Roe v. Wade, the lack of paid leave, and rising gender-based violence. Mason critiques social media’s role in spreading misinformation and calls for media literacy to counter false narratives. She highlights disparities in women’s rights across U.S. states, naming Alabama and Mississippi as the worst. She advocates for proactive policies and stresses the need for offensive strategies to protect and expand women’s rights.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We’re here with Dr. C. Nicole Mason today. She is a feminist, policy analyst, author, and advocate for gender and racial equity. She is the president and CEO of the Institute for Women’s Policy Research and previously served as the executive director of the Center for Research and Policy in the Public Interest. Her work focuses on the intersection of race, class, and gender in public policy.

She coined the term “she-cession” to describe the pandemic’s disproportionate impact on women. She graduated from Howard University and the University of Maryland, College Park. She is also the author of Born Bright: A Young Girl’s Journey from Nothing to Something in America and has been recognized as one of Fortune’s World’s 50 Greatest Leaders.

How did you become involved in gender equality advocacy, particularly with an inspiration and focus on feminist policy analysis?

Dr. C. Nicole Mason: How did I first become interested? While I was a student at Howard University, I took my first political science class. In that class, I started to learn about social inequality. Before then, I had no language for many of the things I had witnessed growing up in and around Los Angeles, California. A single mother raised me, and everything clicked.

During the summer break before junior year, like many students during school breaks, I was searching for something to fill my time off. On a whim, I signed up for a training program for a shelter for battered women. That training and volunteer experience changed my entire life. Again, I gained more language, not only for social inequality but also for the specific challenges women face.

When I returned to Howard University the following year, I founded the first feminist organization on campus: the Women’s Action Coalition. From that moment, I felt fortunate to have found my calling early on.

I knew that I wanted to figure out how to pursue this path—whether through feminist organizing or advocating for women’s issues. I didn’t know what my career would look like, but I knew this was what I wanted to do.

Jacobsen: What were the most pressing areas of concern in feminist policymaking and currently, particularly in light of the recent administration transition in the United States? How does this shift impact those with a feminist perspective?

Mason: Over the last ten to fifteen years, the women’s movement and the issues we tend to frame as “women’s issues “have faced many setbacks. We haven’t had many significant wins.

Many of our last major victories include the Violence Against Women Act, which was first passed in 1994 and has been reauthorized multiple times, and Title IX, which protects against sex-based discrimination in education. However, when we consider major policy achievements that have fundamentally changed the landscape for women in the U.S., there haven’t been many recent ones.

Instead, most of our victories have been incremental, and in some cases, we have even regressed—we have lost ground. The rollback of Roe v. Wade in 2022 significantly impacted reproductive rights, and we are seeing increasing challenges to gender equity policies at the state and federal levels. The lack of paid family leave, wage disparities, and barriers to affordable childcare continue to affect women, especially women of colour, disproportionately.

Moving forward, feminist policy advocates are focused on rebuilding protections for reproductive rights, securing paid leave policies, and addressing systemic gender inequities in the workplace and healthcare.

So, when we think about the fall of Roe v. Wade, we recognize that we have lost certain rights and protections. Some policies we had hoped for during the Biden administration’s first term—particularly in the early years—did not materialize. We had anticipated significant victories in childcare, care infrastructure, and the Build Back Better Act, but those did not come to fruition. This has been a moment of reckoning for those who work in this field, prompting us to reflect on what is possible, why we have not secured the major victories we had hoped for over the past decades, and what might explain these significant losses.

One issue I keep returning to in trying to understand why we have not progressed as much as we would have liked—particularly in recent years—is that women do not have enough power and influence to drive the policies needed to make meaningful change. That, in my view, is the fundamental barrier preventing us from achieving the goals we claim to strive for.

Jacobsen: What about policy measures aimed at combating gender-based violence, both in public and private spheres?

Mason: Gender-based violence is a significant issue, and it is personally important to me. I began my feminist organizing work in the gender-based violence space. The Violence Against Women Act was a major achievement, though not without complexities. Over the years, it has directed substantial support to both grassroots and national organizations committed to ending gender-based violence.

However, under the current administration, some of the gains we have made since the passage of VAWA could be reversed. Critical funding and support for these organizations may dry up or be eliminated, which would have real and serious consequences for women and families, leaving them more vulnerable.

Another critical aspect of gender-based violence is the way it is perceived in society. A recent global study on gender-based violence revealed mixed results. Many people do not see it as a serious issue, with some believing that women or victims exaggerate their claims. Alarmingly, in some instances, respondents even expressed the view that perpetrators had the right to commit acts of violence, including sexual assault and domestic violence.

Thus, we are not only facing tangible threats to organizations and their continued ability to provide services but also broader cultural norms that either condone violence, romanticize it, or exhibit ambivalence toward it. As someone engaged in this work, I see the fight against gender-based violence as multifaceted. It involves shifting cultural attitudes and framing the conversation in ways that resonate with both men and women, lawmakers and legislators. At the same time, we must defend and expand the essential services that are already in place.

Jacobsen: What role does social media play in amplifying false narratives about gender-based violence? We have the statistics. We understand the policies that, while they may not eliminate gender-based violence, can significantly reduce it and move us closer to an ideal outcome. However, social media is the largest gossip network ever created, spreading false narratives that obstruct meaningful policy change.

Misinformation and disinformation on social media distort public perception of gender-based violence, undermining the legitimacy of experiences and discouraging policy initiatives that could address the issue. False claims and rhetoric reinforce harmful norms, making it even more difficult to implement solutions. In this way, social media plays a direct role in hindering progress, preventing necessary reforms, and sustaining a culture that tolerates gender-based violence.

Mason: I want to complicate the discussion around social media. For better or worse, when I first started doing this work, there was no social media. You got your information and facts through reputable, reliable news sources that adhered to ethical reporting standards. That is no longer the case.

Social media can be used for good. It can be a tool for raising awareness about important issues, sharing facts and personal stories, and making women—such as those involved in the Me Too movement—feel less alone. It can create a powerful echo and amplify an issue. All of that is beneficial.

However, social media can also be harmful, particularly in how misinformation and disinformation spread rapidly—whether about an issue or a person. This is especially concerning when it affects young people, from teenagers like my daughter to celebrities. Misinformation can shape a narrative, discredit a survivor’s story, and diminish the credibility of someone who has experienced violence.

We saw this play out on a celebrity level with Megan Thee Stallion when she was shot in the foot by Tory Lanez. The amount of misinformation and disinformation surrounding the incident not only skewed public perception but also took a severe mental, physical, and emotional toll on her. And that’s a celebrity—someone with significant resources and insulation. Now, imagine what that means for an everyday woman who is threatened, stalked, or harassed online through misinformation, disinformation, and digital violence.

Gender-based violence on social media is a major concern. However, for younger women, social media has also become their primary source of information. Until recently, I did not take that seriously enough. As an activist, organizer, and researcher, I now realize that if young people get their information primarily from social media, we must ensure they have media literacy skills to differentiate between good and bad information. We also need to provide accurate information that resonates with them.

The traditional fact sheet approach does not work anymore. Instead, we must rethink how we present important issues—condense them into digestible, engaging formats, such as 30-second to two-minute videos or messages. I do not think we have gotten that right yet.

Jacobsen: Public figures like Megan Thee Stallion and others have some protection. However, the consequences can be far worse for most people who are not famous or wealthy, like the rest of us. They may not experience the same amplified attacks, but what protections exist for them when they do? When it comes to everyday people, what policies effectively address online harassment? And beyond policy, how can we shift cultural norms to reduce emotional violence online before it escalates into physical violence?

Mason: That is exactly my point about Megan Thee Stallion and other celebrities, such as Amber Heard. These individuals, while subject to intense scrutiny and harassment, have layers of protection and resources that ordinary women do not. Women often do not have access to legal teams, public relations firms, or other forms of support when they face online harassment, stalking, or digital violence.

When discussing what should be done, the first thing that raises concern is the legal framework. Some laws are improving. In California and a few other states, there are laws addressing issues like revenge porn—the non-consensual sharing of sexually explicit materials. Perpetrators can now face legal penalties, including jail time. However, overall, our laws have not yet caught up with the pace of technological advancements.

We need stronger legal protections to address online harassment, misinformation campaigns, and digital violence. At the same time, we must also engage in cultural shifts—educating people about digital ethics, strengthening media literacy, and fostering an environment where online spaces are not used as platforms for abuse. The issue will persist until policy and cultural change align, disproportionately harming those lacking the resources to fight back.

A woman can be harassed, threatened, or even physically harmed as a result of online violence. However, there are few laws and protections in place because of the significant lag between what is happening on social media and the legal safeguards that women—or people in general—believe they have or should have.

People often hide behind the First Amendment, citing freedom of speech as a defence for harmful behaviour. As a result, we are in a precarious situation because there are not enough legal protections. Even when we consider the Violence Against Women Act, its provisions on stalking exist—but do they truly address how violence against women is carried out on social media today? No, they do not. We have a great deal of work ahead of us.

Am I confident that this administration—or even in the next four, five, or ten years—will see proactive, offensive legislation addressing these issues? No, I am not. Social media companies like X, Facebook, Instagram (all owned by two major corporations), and TikTok have no real incentive to enact protections. We have already seen them roll back existing protections, and Facebook has even started allowing misinformation to spread unchecked.

This is not just about Russian bots. It is misinformation across the board—about individuals, about gender-based violence, about laws and protections. These issues can be misrepresented or outright fabricated, with little accountability.

In terms of what we might be able to do, I believe there is an opportunity to start thinking about new technologies and their intersection with gender-based violence. We need to articulate what digital violence looks like today and what effective protections might entail for victims. It is time to develop strategies, solutions, and legal protections that reflect the modern reality of online violence.

Jacobsen: Here’s a perennial issue in the United States. I have colleagues worldwide who cannot access the same basicresources we often take for granted—whether in African countries, Latin America, or elsewhere. When USAID funding was being pulled back or cut, many of them expressed concern. While some of those decisions were politically motivated and administration-driven, that is true for most government agencies.

These cuts devastated them because they directly impacted social and healthcare programs that provided essential humanitarian aid. I am now seeing the same pattern unfold domestically within the United States—where vulnerable communities are losing access to critical social and healthcare services.

I’m speaking as a foreigner—a Canadian. So, when I look at international commentary, I see the same pattern happening domestically in the United States—not just with the rollback of Roe v. Wade but also with restrictions on maternal healthcare access, abortion, reproductive rights, and so on.

What do you think of the current policy? Looking ahead through the rest of the 2020s, what policies might serve as a bulwark against the ongoing repeals and restrictions? What is always astonishing is that women’s bodies and their choices for the future continue to be politicized.

Mason: This feels like a full-frontal assault. What is happening in the United States has a global ripple effect. We see that with USAID. It is all deeply connected.

And yes, this is a full-frontal assault—on the safety, dignity, viability, and well-being of women, people, and families, both in the United States and around the world.

What concerns me most is that we do not have a robust response that matches the magnitude of these attacks. That terrifies me, to be completely honest. Even at the policy level, we lack an offensive strategy to combat the rollbacks that have happened—and will continue to happen.

Right now, the fight is about holding the line and trying to preserve what we have, which, to be frank, is not enough. The United States enjoys a level of relative privilege compared to many other countries, and I do not want to overlook that. However, I have conducted the analysis. I can say with certainty that for some women in certain states, their conditions—though relatively different—are on par with those in other parts of the world.

Women in these states are facing severe poverty, poor maternal health outcomes, and high rates of violence. Some women in the U.S. are flourishing, but it feels like they live in two different Americas for many others.

My concern is that we do not have a policy response that matches the scale of what is happening—or what is yet to come.

I do not know when you plan to publish this. Still, in just the first few weeks of this administration, we have already seen significant developments that will directly impact women and families.

For example, I would estimate that at least 30%, possibly even 50%, of the federal government workforce consists of women and people of colour. The attacks on the federal workforce are not typically framed as feminist or gender issues, but they should be—because women make up a significant portion of that workforce.

Yet, this administration has not fully addressed these issues meaningfully. They have made threats and vague statements about what they plan to do regarding women’s and gender issues. We have already seen direct attacks on gender identity and the rights of trans people.

These are real, tangible concerns. And unless we shift from a defensive to an offensive strategy, we risk losing even more ground.

They have not yet focused on women in the way we know is coming. That moment is inevitable, and we are not prepared for it. The situation is already horrific, but we have not seen a sharp turn in their strategy.

Currently, they are prioritizing other objectives—reducing the federal workforce, erasing people from data records, and pursuing other concerning policies. That, in itself, is alarming.

But if I were to emphasize anything, it would be the need to connect the dots—understanding what resistance looks like in other countries, how different populations have resisted regimes like this, and what strategies might be possible here. We need to start thinking about offensive and power-building strategies because we do not have one right now.

Jacobsen: I recently spoke with South Korean feminists and women’s rights activists. They are facing similar challenges. Their current leader, President Yoon Suk Yeol, came into power on a strong anti-feminist platform. One of his key promises was dismantling their equivalent of a government agency for women and families, the Ministry of Gender Equality and Family (MOGEF). While his administration failed to abolish the ministry, it weakened its influence, leaving the ministerial position vacant for nearly a year.

Other alarming trends are emerging there as well. Deepfake pornography is a growing concern, disproportionately targeting young women and girls. The South Korean government has increased penalties for producing, distributing, or possessing such content, with potential prison sentences of up to three years. However, digital sex crimes remain a majorissue, and feminist groups continue to advocate for stronger enforcement and support for victims.

At the same time, the 4B Movement, a feminist movement that rejects marriage, dating, sex, and childbirth as a protest against misogyny, has gained traction. Some women outside South Korea, including the United States, have supported its principles, especially in response to global rollbacks on women’s rights.

In December 2024, President Yoon attempted to declare martial law, citing national security concerns. This move was immediately resisted, including mass protests and political opposition. The National Assembly responded by impeaching him on December 14, 2024, with 204 out of 300 lawmakers voting in favour. Following his impeachment, Prime Minister Han Duck-soo assumed the role of acting president, and the Constitutional Court is expected to rule on the impeachment by March 2025.

These developments show that resistance to repressive policies exists within South Korea. However, many of the arguments made by anti-feminist groups there mirror those in the U.S., especially their focus on declining birth rates. These issues are often framed as broad demographic concerns without considering the underlying social and economic factors influencing women’s choices.

People make choices based on their lived realities. Instead of engaging in abstract discussions about birth rates, policymakers should examine why individuals make these choices and implement policies addressing their concerns.

If there is any hope to be found, many countries are facing similar struggles, though the specifics vary. However, we also see legal challenges emerging against unjust systems. Are any particular U.S. states that stand out to you as holdouts for women’s rights? In The Handmaid’s Tale, New York was portrayed as a holdout in Margaret Atwood’s dystopian future—do you see similar dynamics today?

Mason: I recently completed a 50-state analysis on where women have the most power and influence. New York is one of those states. In my analysis, I examined 12 indicators and eight policies. There are several states where, at this moment, I am fortunate to be living. On the other hand, there are states where women are struggling—where they have little power and influence and where they are doing poorly across all social and well-being indicators.

What strikes me is that it often comes down to a state border. You cross one border, and you have rights. You cross another, and your rights are significantly diminished, and your likelihood of doing well declines.

What do you make of that? What do you make of living in a country where everyone should have the same rights, access to opportunity, and equal protections, yet the reality is so uneven? There are “holdout” states; we know which ones they are. I feel fortunate to live in one of the states where women have more protections. But my biggest concern is for the women who do not.

Some people might say, “Well, move to New York.” But it is not that simple. 

Jacobsen: Many women cannot afford to move, even if they want to. 

Mason: That is what keeps me up at night.

Jacobsen: According to your 50-state analysis, which state is the worst?

Mason: Alabama. And number two is Mississippi.

Jacobsen: No surprises there.

Mason: No, not at all. 

Jacobsen: I remember Chris Rock’s comment about Mississippi—he joked: M-I-S-S-T-A-K-E. He called it that in his usual succinct way.

Mason: It is outright hostile to women. But the reality is that women are living there under those conditions. This is not about my coastal elitism, as some people like to claim. When I shared these findings with a friend, she said, “Oh, that’s just your coastal elitism—you people on the coasts always think that way.”

But I told her, “No, this is based on facts. This is not a narrative I am imposing on Mississippi and Alabama. These are real conditions that women are living under.”

So, yes, while there are states where I am relieved to live, my primary concern remains for women who do not have the option of living in those states. The question is: “What should we be doing to support them? How do we ensure they, too, have their full bundle of rights?”

Jacobsen: Thank you. I appreciate it. Have a good afternoon.

Mason: You too. Hopefully—I need that.

Jacobsen: Thanks.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

A Comprehensive on Antisemitism With Irina Tsukerman

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/21

Irina Tsukerman is a New York-based human rights and national security attorney specializing in international law, media strategy, and information warfare. She is the editor-in-chief of The Washington Outsider, providing insights on global affairs and advocating for human rights. Her expertise spans the Middle East, Africa, Eastern Europe, and Latin America. Tsukerman emphasizes humour’s power to expose absurdities and the role of critical education in countering disinformation. They analyze the influence of media, algorithms, and foreign actors in amplifying hate. Addressing challenges like organized boycotts, hacking campaigns, and financial targeting, they highlight the manipulation of narratives for political or economic motives. The conversation explores systemic antisemitism in countries like Russia, China, and Iran, contrasting legal frameworks and societal impacts across regions. They stress fostering critical thinking and transparency to combat prejudice effectively.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We will discuss another important subject: antisemitism. It’s a critical topic. What do you think the role of humour is in combating antisemitism? Take, for instance, the works of Mel Brooks, Seinfeld, Larry David, and others. 

Irina Tsukerman: Humour can respond to authoritarianism, conspiracy theories, and illogical or distorted beliefs. Arguing with someone deeply entrenched in such a mindset often doesn’t work; it can reinforce their position. Humour, however, can pause the conversation, ridicule the absurdity of the belief, and point out how nonsensical it is.

Not every type of humour works for everyone, of course. Sometimes, humour resonates more with outside observers than with the bigot in question. Those who harbour hateful beliefs often have a narrow sense of humour that only reinforces their worldview. Yet humour can still highlight the ridiculousness of a viewpoint, effectively saying, “This doesn’t make sense. Look at how absurd it is.” There are two key dimensions to understanding antisemitism: legal and human rights-based. 

Jacobsen: On one hand, there are forms of antisemitism that are more social and don’t necessarily fall under criminal law. On the other hand, some actions cross the line into criminality, such as hate speech or spreading historical falsehoods like Holocaust denial.

In North America, these dividing lines differ. Canada has stricter hate speech laws than the United States, but it also seems to have fewer overt, conspiratorial antisemites. While free speech protections are broader in the U.S., they often allow harmful rhetoric to flourish unchecked.

Tsukerman: The obsession with conspiracy theories is a relatively recent phenomenon in its modern form, largely fueled by social media. Historically, antisemitism in the U.S. has waxed and waned. For example, it was particularly widespread in the 1920s, during a period of rising nativism and xenophobia. However, it declined in the mid-to-late 20th century as multiculturalism gained traction. Antisemitism didn’t disappear — it remained present in pockets — but it became less socially acceptable.

In earlier periods, antisemitism often existed in ignorance or isolation. For instance, stereotypes or baseless beliefs about Jews were prevalent in some areas. However, public figures with large platforms rarely spread antisemitic conspiracy theories. One reason for this was the lack of social media and algorithmic amplification.

Culturally, the mid-20th century emphasized shared national values and multicultural curiosity, discouraging divisive identity politics. However, as identity politics became more prevalent in recent decades, expressions of antisemitism also resurfaced in some spaces. A decline in education about history and critical thinking contributed to this resurgence, as fewer people understood the roots of antisemitism or its devastating consequences.

Jacobsen: How has social media impacted this trend?

Tsukerman: Social media has also played a significant role. Algorithmic amplification often promotes extreme views, and foreign actors or organized groups have used these platforms to spread disinformation. Celebrities who repeat conspiratorial rhetoric add fuel to the fire. Unfortunately, many people place undue trust in celebrity opinions, allowing harmful ideas to spread more widely.

However, the influence of major media outlets and prominent commentators is more concerning than isolated celebrities. When trusted media personalities repeat antisemitic tropes, it legitimizes these ideas and creates a dangerous ripple effect. People are more likely to believe narratives from figures they respect. Once those figures embrace extreme or harmful views, their followers also adopt those views. This escalation can have dire consequences for public discourse and social cohesion.

Jacobsen: What do you find are the common conspiracy theories? And does this come up in your legal work or geopolitical analysis? For instance, does it become so problematic that it infiltrates mainstream geopolitical discourse?

Tsukerman: Some old conspiracy theories have faded, such as the notion that Jews and Freemasons are trying to take over the world. That used to be prevalent but has largely disappeared from U.S. discourse. You might still find it in parts of the Middle East or Europe, but in the U.S., it’s not as common. Most people here don’t know Freemasonry and the movement has become far less prominent. Its visibility has significantly diminished.

That said, religious antisemitism hasn’t entirely disappeared. It still exists in various forms across certain religious organizations, whether churches, mosques, or even in ostensibly secular institutions. In secular spaces, antisemitism often takes on a more cultural or ideological bent, but it remains entrenched in peculiar ways. For example, there’s the old trope of “Jews killed Jesus” or some Islamist rhetoric, which tends to amplify hostility.

These ideas have become more pervasive with the rise of internet platforms and mass gatherings, as they provide new avenues for amplification. Whether shared in person, in social settings, or online, the issue isn’t just about free speech — it’s about how that speech is promoted and by whom.

Governments often exacerbate the problem when they try to micromanage or accommodate every perspective. Instead of defining or regulating religions themselves, they should focus on measurable factors: the violence, the results, and the ideologies fueling harmful behaviour. Separating religion from ideology and examining the real-world impacts would be more effective.

For instance, governments can look at objective factors like who funds certain institutions, who participates in them, and their levels of education. Where were these individuals educated? Where does their funding come from? What translations of texts are being used? Governments can address these tangible areas without overstepping their bounds or trying to regulate religion itself.

Society is better equipped to self-regulate than government officials regarding the broader societal discourse. However, social media companies and media institutions play a critical role. If hosting objectionable rhetoric becomes a reputational or financial risk, it’s less likely to be tolerated. Conversely, it becomes more widely accepted when platforms and institutions find they can profit from such rhetoric.

The media’s role is pivotal. By giving platforms to objectionable figures, they inadvertently normalize harmful ideas. The way these platforms amplify rhetoric has changed drastically, and with it, so has the societal impact of conspiracy theories and antisemitism.

If you want to have a real debate between people, that’s fine. This is when better arguments can emerge, and people can see for themselves what works and what doesn’t. But conspiracy theorists, for obvious reasons, are not good debaters. Suppose you keep giving bigots soapboxes to rant, spread nonsense, manipulate people, and exploit social crises. In that case, that won’t end well.

We saw this during COVID-19, when many conspiracy theories became more prominent during a time of social and economic crisis. These crises often serve as breeding grounds for bigoted language.

When there’s a political or social crisis elsewhere, like a war in Gaza, people often import the discourse to the U.S. For example, it’s perfectly acceptable to say, “The Israeli government is taking steps I don’t agree with.” Criticism of any government or institution is valid.

However, it crosses into bigotry when people say, “All Israelis want to kill Palestinians.” That’s an assumption about an entire people, and it’s dangerous. Unfortunately, this type of rhetoric fuels the undercurrents of prejudice and is sometimes amplified by the media.

Some provocateurs deliberately stoke these tensions because outrage, polarization, and echo chambers sell. We see this phenomenon beyond antisemitism as well. Social media companies encourage polarization because it drives engagement and increases viewership. Conspiracy theories, bigotry, and outrage are particularly effective because they provide simple explanations for complex problems, scapegoats to blame and appeal to the worst aspects of human nature.

Jacobsen: So, many actors deliberately amplify this rhetoric for profit or political motives?

Tsukerman: Yes. Some actors are motivated by money, while others — often foreign state actors — deliberately foment social polarization in the U.S. Countries like Russia, China, and Iran are known to exploit social divisions through propaganda and disinformation campaigns.

Jacobsen: Do these countries face similar issues within their borders? Are they also grappling with internal dissent or unrest?

Tsukerman: To an extent, yes. Russia, for example, has a history of internal issues related to antisemitism. The worst period was during the peak of the Soviet Union when there were official state policies of discrimination, including quotas against Jews.

In contemporary Russia, antisemitism is less overt but still present. Media often portrays Jews using stereotypical tropes, and state officials occasionally make antisemitic remarks. For instance, they’ve made comments equating Jews with particular policies or questioning Jewish identities about figures like Zelensky or Israel.

China and Iran also have internal challenges, though the dynamics differ. While these countries project strength outward, there’s often a significant gap between public perception and the realities on the ground. In many cases, dissent is quietly suppressed, creating a facade of stability.

So that’s also antisemitic. It doesn’t necessarily mean that Jews within these countries are being targeted for violent acts. Still, when a country deliberately cultivates neo-Nazis within its borders and abroad while making official antisemitic statements, it sets a dangerous precedent. When TV and other media propagate subconscious messaging — implying, for example, that villains in the financial sector or other areas are Jewish — it’s bound to have a long-term impact. Sooner or later, this leads to increased social antisemitism and demands for antisemitic policies from the government.

In China, for instance, the Jewish community is practically nonexistent. However, the Communist Party of China (CPC) has embedded antisemitism into its media, education system, and even social apps. This creates a uniquely Chinese variant of antisemitism, particularly among active party members. Historically, antisemitism wasn’t a focus in China because their issues were primarily internal, dealing with various nationalities within the country. But now, the CPC is deliberately cultivating antisemitism, even though it doesn’t reflect the country’s history or reality.

In Iran, antisemitism is starkly evident. There have been executions of Jews solely for being Jewish. While the Jewish community is allowed to practice its religious rituals, there is an underlying fear. If they stray from the party line, they risk being accused of treason. Discriminatory practices are widespread.

For example, there was a recent incident where a young Jewish man killed a Muslim who attacked him during a fight. The Jewish man’s family offered “blood money” as compensation, but the Muslim family refused. Consequently, the Jewish man was executed. Normally, in self-defence cases, people are not executed for such actions, but in this instance, bigotry plays a role. The government could have intervened, declared a resolution, or sought reconciliation, but instead, they allowed the execution to proceed. This is a clear example of antisemitic policies translating into individual injustices and shaping public attitudes.

Jacobsen: How do these state-level policies and attitudes in countries like Russia, China, and Iran compare to the dynamics in the United States or Canada? The situation is distinct but still concerning in the United States. Analysis shows that the primary domestic terrorism threat now comes from white nationalist or Christian white nationalist groups. These groups often perpetuate nationalist, ethnic rhetoric, and antisemitic talking points. They amplify propaganda and conspiracy theories, which we’ve already discussed.

When these attitudes are perpetuated internally within a country or amplified by foreign state actors — like Russia, China, and Iran — they can lead to organized hate movements. These movements often result in real-world harm to individuals who are Jewish or perceived to be Jewish.

Tsukerman: The biggest challenge isn’t necessarily any single antisemitic group. The real danger lies in the “horseshoe theory” of politics. This occurs when radicals from different parts of the political spectrum — far-right extremists, radical leftists, Islamists, and fringe groups — join forces. By aligning, they amplify each other’s influence and create a false perception of unity.

These groups have limited audiences individually, even at the height of their influence. But when they join forces, they lend each other credibility and reach. This allows their antisemitic rhetoric to spread far more effectively than if they operated in isolation. The convergence of such ideologies can result in significant harm, both in terms of physical violence and broader societal divisions. It starts with normalizing and mainstreaming hate.

Jacobsen: They become unified by hate. But beyond that, they are also unified by more effective political messaging and organization — something they would typically lack on their own.

When these groups come together, they break down political and ideological barriers. Party lines no longer constrain them, and their messaging becomes mainstream. They reach individuals who would otherwise never engage with them or their rhetoric. This process corrupts everything around them as they dismantle the ideological boundaries that normally keep them isolated.

To counter this, several steps are necessary. First, we must examine and stop any foreign funding supporting these movements. Second, we need effective counter-information warfare initiatives involving the public and private sectors. There are very few such efforts at the moment, and those that do exist are in their infancy. They cannot counter highly organized and well-funded movements.

Public education and critical thinking skills are also essential. People must be equipped to identify bad arguments, distinguish between fact and opinion, and recognize bigotry versus rational analysis. Unfortunately, these skills are currently at an all-time low, leaving people vulnerable to disinformation and manipulation. Many don’t even realize they are acting with bias or that their statements are socially unacceptable or rooted in harmful generalizations.

For instance, I’ve had people ask me, “What do Jews think about this or that?” My response is, “Which Jews are you referring to?” Like any other group, Jewish communities are diverse and hold various opinions. You can track voting patterns or trends based on historical reasons, but you cannot say everyone votes or thinks the same way about every issue. That’s not true.

Jacobsen: One obvious red flag to watch for is when someone starts a statement with “the,” as in “The Muslims,” “The Jews,” “The Christians,” or “The atheists.” These groups are incredibly diverse internally, with differing social, community, and political dynamics. Making blanket statements about them is not only ridiculous but also biased. People often don’t recognize that they’re stereotyping because they view their question or statement as perfectly normal or rooted in common political discourse.

Do you find that state or non-state actors are more effective in combating antisemitic narratives?

Tsukerman: Governments are not generally particularly efficient at most things, and countering disinformation is certainly not one of their strengths. However, there are exceptions. Some European countries have implemented successful initiatives. Finland, for example, has a robust program for combating disinformation. Sweden also has relatively effective state and private efforts.

In the U.S., the situation is far less developed. Any official state efforts to counter disinformation are rudimentary or have been dismantled entirely. Despite its limitations and criticisms from both sides of the political spectrum, the Global Engagement Center was one of the few agencies attempting to address information operations and engage with the outside world. However, it has since been defunded, leaving a significant gap in the fight against disinformation.

A coordinated effort is needed to address these challenges, but the U.S. currently lags behind in this critical area.

During the Cold War, information bureaus were tasked with countering propaganda, at least internationally, if not domestically. They were far more effective at that time. But after the fall of the Soviet Union, those efforts were dismantled. So, on a government level, such initiatives are nonexistent now.

The government has attempted public-private partnerships with social media companies. Still, those efforts have been extremely controversial due to constitutional concerns about government interference in private speech. What about private efforts? Have social media companies been effective?

Social media companies have attempted self-regulation, but the results have been mixed. Often, their frameworks backfire because they’re either implemented poorly or provoke dissatisfaction from all sides. In some cases, their efforts have actually exacerbated the problem.

Jacobsen: You mentioned “deliberate boosting” of antisemitic and hateful accounts. What do you mean by that?

Tsukerman: Let me give you an example. There’s a figure named Jackson Hinkel. He’s a troll who promotes propaganda for Russia, Hamas, and other groups. Two years ago, he had only about 1,000 followers — a relatively obscure social media personality with no significant accomplishments or media presence.

Today, he’s verified on social media, has an American flag next to his name, and has over 2.8 million followers. This is someone who went from complete obscurity to a massive following, not because of genuine merit or noteworthy achievements, but because he aligned himself with Russian and Hamas propaganda networks.

Hinkle has a checkered past, moving from one radical activity to another before finding his niche amplifying antisemitic and extremist rhetoric. He’s now heavily promoted, even receiving significant exposure in a major New York Times profile. This raises questions about how such obscure figures gain sudden prominence.

Jacobsen: What’s behind this “boosting”?

Tsukerman: It’s often driven by entities seeking to promote “alternative perspectives.” This gives these individuals an aura of legitimacy, even martyrdom, feeding into conspiracy theories that they were previously suppressed or silenced. People like Hinkle have no substantial qualifications or meaningful contributions to public discourse. Yet, they gain wide exposure by being amplified — both by Moscow-aligned networks and social media algorithms .

This creates a dangerous feedback loop. Antisemites flock to figures like Hinkle, while others, who may not be inherently antisemitic but are ignorant or easily manipulated, start finding his content compelling. They begin questioning what they perceive as “state narratives,” which is precisely the intended effect of these propagandists.

Tucker Carlson is a good example of someone who doesn’t need boosting because he already has a massive platform and significant influence in certain circles. However, when someone like Carlson uses that platform irresponsibly , introducing or normalizing extreme ideas into mainstream discourse , it legitimizes those narratives.

Jacobsen: What did you make of Tucker Carlson’s interview with Putin?

Tsukerman: That interview was an unsettling example of how influential figures can serve as conduits for authoritarian propaganda. Carlson gave Putin a platform to spread narratives that appeal to the West’s fringe elements, further polarizing and undermining democratic discourse. It’s a stark reminder of how media responsibility matters, especially when dealing with figures like Putin, who are adept at weaponizing information for strategic gains.

Local regimes, such as the Ba’athist regimes in Syria and Iraq or Nasser’s government in Egypt, followed these narratives for political purposes. Once those ideologies became entrenched in the popular mindset, they became almost indistinguishable from the broader culture. It’s been decades, and there have only been brief, inconsistent attempts at reform, often disrupted by internal political squabbles. 

Jacobsen: What would it take to undo this deeply rooted antisemitism? 

Tsukerman: Undoing this would require a serious, long-term, and consistent effort. Some countries have attempted to revise their textbooks to remove antisemitic conspiracy theories, but the state media remains a bigger challenge. Many officials who benefit from these narratives are deeply entrenched in their positions. Reforming this system is difficult when governments juggle security issues, economic crises, and other pressing concerns.

For deprogramming to be successful, it would need to be supported by major powers like the U.S. and the European Union. Unfortunately, I haven’t seen a consistent commitment to such a project from any U.S. president in the last 20 years. Some administration members made brief reform efforts during Trump’s first term. Still, these were insufficient and often countered by conflicting initiatives from the same administration.

Jacobsen: Regarding the Soviet influence you mentioned earlier, some texts — such as The Protocols of the Elders of Zion. Besides The Protocols of the Elders of Zion, we have Adolf Hitler’s Mein Kampf, Henry Ford’s The International Jew, and The Talmud Unmasked by Justinas Pranaitis, though I must admit that one is less familiar to me. There’s also the broader range of Holocaust denial literature, exemplified by figures like David Irving.

This “rich and unillustrious” history of antisemitic works continues to shape hate movements. Even though these texts have been debunked extensively, they persist. The failure to eradicate them raises questions about the nature of this style of hatred and its resistance to rational analysis, evidentiary discourse, and debunking efforts.

Why do these ideas resurface, even after being thoroughly discredited? It’s like a game of whack-a-mole. You can debunk these ideas repeatedly, but they’ll keep popping up. 

Tsukerman: You can’t fully convince 100% of people all the time. Still, you can build a societal baseline of rational thinking that minimizes their impact.

Think of it like a vaccination. Not everyone will benefit from a vaccine — some might be medically unable to take it, and others might refuse it. However, society becomes better protected overall when most of the population is inoculated against a particular strain or illness. Similarly, we need to “vaccinate” society against the appeal of antisemitic ideas through education and critical thinking.

Jacobsen: How would such an educational “inoculation” work?

Tsukerman: It starts by building a foundation of critical thinking and deep historical understanding from a young age. Students must learn to grapple with complex narratives rather than absorb oversimplified propaganda. Doing so makes them more likely to question ideas, engage with diverse perspectives, and resist emotional manipulation and simplistic explanations.

This “base” of education must also be reinforced over time — much like booster shots in medicine. Critical thinking and historical study shouldn’t stop in childhood; they must be part of lifelong learning. Regular exposure to thoughtful discourse and factual information can counter the emotional appeal of propaganda and inoculate society against hate.

Jacobsen: Besides inoculating the population with basic critical thinking training and developing an anti-conspiratorial mindset, how do you boost public awareness? For example, periodic exercises or updates about new developments in information warfare. How can people be taught to recognize when they’re being taken for a ride, much like scams targeting vulnerable populations, such as senior citizens?

Tsukerman: That’s a great analogy. Scams show how easily people can fall for false narratives without realizing their origins. Many believe they understand what they’re hearing or reading but often don’t grasp the manipulation behind it.

The best thing governments, companies, and institutions can do is to be transparent and truthful. Admit mistakes, remain flexible, and be receptive to citizens’ concerns. Trust is easier to build when experts are humble, clear in their communications, and open about the evolving nature of their knowledge. Experts should emphasize that science and understanding are not static but continually advancing. Humility — admitting what you don’t know and acknowledging mistakes — goes a long way in cultivating trust and societal buy-in.

Conspiracy theories thrive in environments where the social contract feels broken. When people feel betrayed by their government, authorities, doctors, or the media, bad actors exploit these vulnerabilities. They offer narratives that align with existing feelings of resentment or doubt, preying on cognitive biases. People gravitate toward ideas that validate their emotional and intellectual frameworks rather than challenge those ideas skeptically.

Jacobsen: You mentioned Jackson Hinkel earlier as an example of a promoted individual. At another level, there are individuals and organizations whose antisemitism doesn’t depend on being boosted — they’re entrenched in conspiratorial thinking, bad logic, and pseudo-evidence. From your analysis, which personalities or organizations would you say exemplify the most virulent or entrenched forms of antisemitism?

Tsukerman: That’s a good question. There are certainly personalities and organizations that have professionalized their hatred, so to speak. One example is CAIR (Council on American-Islamic Relations). CAIR markets itself as the leading civil rights organization for Muslim Americans. However, its actual membership is relatively small, and it has actively suppressed efforts by other organizations attempting to serve similar roles.

CAIR has faced accusations of receiving funding from foreign entities linked to extremist ideologies. These financial ties often align with fundamentalist interpretations of Islam, which many Muslim Americans do not support. Despite these internal and external issues, CAIR has managed to create an image of legitimacy by building a network of associations, sister organizations, and affiliated groups. This makes it appear influential and representative of the broader Muslim community.

The problem is that there is no monolithic “Muslim community.” Muslims are incredibly diverse in terms of ethnicity, culture, and religious practices. Many feel unrepresented by CAIR but believe they have no alternative because of its prominence.

I can give you a clear example. I attended a conference. At this conference, a CAIR representative participated in discussions about religious inclusion and human rights. They portrayed themselves as the sole voice for Muslim Americans, leveraging their established reputation to dominate the narrative. However, some attendees, including Muslim participants, quietly expressed their discomfort with CAIR’s approach, feeling it did not reflect their views or experiences.

This situation highlights the broader issue: organizations like CAIR use their networks and media presence to amplify their influence, even when they don’t represent most of the communities they claim to speak for. It’s a calculated strategy that capitalizes on the lack of alternative voices while presenting a unified but misleading front.

Jacobsen: I really enjoy talking to experts and being educated by them. As I often tell them, I can’t replace their expertise as a freelance journalist simply surveying the landscape. That’s the whole point of conversations, book projects, etc.

Sometimes, I’ll go to a pub or nightclub and end up in interesting discussions. For example, I once went to a Latin nightclub, and a Saudi guy was there. We hit it off, had a couple of drinks together, and got into a conversation.

He started talking about the LA fires, which had just begun. He insinuated that the fires were caused by divine intervention—he nudged his head upwards, implying they were started by God Almighty as a punishment.

Here’s this Saudi, liquor-drinking Muslim in Vancouver, at a Latin nightclub with his brother, drinking heavily and yet holding this mindset of divine retribution against, I don’t know, Hollywood or something.

Compare that to someone like Imam Soharwardy, a Canadian Sufi Muslim. He’s a gentle person who founded the Islamic Supreme Council of Canada and led a 6,500-kilometer walk against violence to promote peace and nonviolence within his community. These two individuals represent vastly different expressions of Islam.

One is a Pakistani Sufi Muslim who doesn’t drink, as far as I know and leads a life of activism and peacebuilding. The other is a Saudi Muslim who goes out drinking with his brother and, instead of expressing sympathy for people affected by the fires in LA, immediately frames the disaster as divine punishment then has sympathy mixed into it.

Tsukerman: Right, and that speaks to the diversity within Muslim communities. To the extent that someone operates within a religious framework, they might view events as having divine significance. But even if an event is seen as divinely inspired, the human mandate — across all major religious texts — is to help those in need, not to stand by or wait for people to suffer.

I don’t know of any divine text that calls for passivity in the face of a natural disaster. The human response should always be to assist others, regardless of theological interpretations.

Jacobsen: Regarding organizations, you mentioned earlier that CAIR was linked to controversies.

Tsukerman: CAIR (Council on American-Islamic Relations) was an unindicted co-conspirator in the Holy Land Foundation trials. They were accused of illicitly sponsoring commerce through various networks. Although they were never prosecuted, a file sitting with the Department of Justice could be reopened at any time.

One of CAIR’s co-founders, Nihad Awad, made headlines recently by praising the October 7 terrorist attacks on Israel. This prompted the Biden administration to remove CAIR from its antisemitism task force.

Frankly, I don’t understand why CAIR was ever part of an antisemitism task force in the first place. They might have expertise in Muslim issues, but they’re certainly not experts on antisemitism or anything related to Jewish communities. That’s not their field.

Jacobsen: It does tie into your earlier point about governments often being ineffective

Tsukerman: This is another example of why governments aren’t always the most efficient or logical actors in addressing these issues. CAIR’s inclusion in an antisemitism task force raises questions about the decision-making process and the criteria for selecting participants. It reflects broader inefficiencies and missteps that are too common in government initiatives.

So, the issue is that they’ve monopolized the space. They’ve threatened other organizations and used cartel-like, monopolistic methods to ensure no competition emerges. This leaves communities, such as new immigrants from Bangladesh who don’t know anyone, with little choice but to turn to these organizations for help.

These groups create an illusion of legitimacy, but it’s more akin to a mafia structure — creating a racket, controlling a community, and claiming they are the only ones capable of defending it.

That’s precisely the problem. Their methods aren’t legitimate; they’re criminal and monopolistic in nature. You see this pattern with many similar organizations. They are highly organized, structured, and connected to international networks. They understand local societies well enough to establish effective networks of associates and supporters. However, their influence often extends into spreading conspiracy theories, which is not what they claim to be doing.

Their stated mission might be legal defence or assistance to communities, but their agenda often involves social subversion. They misuse funding for propaganda and accusations rather than genuinely helping those in need. That’s just one example.

Jacobsen: Can you elaborate on how other nations, like Russia, have used similar tactics?

Tsukerman: Russia has created parallel structures — essentially shell organizations or fronts — in various contexts. They target diverse audiences in different ways. For example:

  • They appeal to old Russian diasporas with nostalgic messaging.
  • They fund neo-Nazi groups to destabilize societies.
  • They support radical leftist groups, pushing extremist ideologies.

All of these efforts inevitably lead to antisemitism in some form. These organized campaigns are deliberate, sophisticated, and global.

We’ve also seen targeted efforts against specific industries and sectors, particularly influential figures with large platforms. Former athletes, comedians, or podcast hosts — people with big audiences but limited expertise on complex topics — are prime targets. Their followers aren’t expecting nuanced discussions on the history of antisemitism.

Instead, these influencers either platform individuals with antisemitic leanings without challenging them or amplify contrarian viewpoints that seem appealing for the sake of being “anti-establishment.” Contrarianism, for its own sake, can become a gateway for normalizing antisemitic ideas.

Jacobsen: That’s a concerning trend. Moving on, you mentioned human rights violations earlier. How should antisemitism be investigated as violating international human rights under frameworks like UN principles or the Universal Declaration of Human Rights (UDHR)?

Tsukerman: That’s an excellent question. Historically, the international community has been reluctant to treat antisemitic incidents as human rights violations. They’ve often been framed as issues of hate speech, bigotry, or intellectual discourse but not as violations of fundamental human rights.

Under existing frameworks, antisemitism should be considered a human rights issue. Suppose a state or actor deliberately targets an entire community based on ideological hatred. In that case, that constitutes a violation of their human rights.

For example, hate crimes motivated by antisemitism often involve deliberate campaigns against a group, including incitement to violence, atrocities, or even genocide. This falls squarely under international human rights principles. Such acts can and should be treated as violations of the UDHR, particularly when they escalate to incitement or organized efforts to harm or ostracize an entire community.

Jacobsen: So, in essence, antisemitism can amount to more than just hate speech — it can escalate into incitement toward genocide or mass violence?

Tsukerman: When antisemitism involves systemic, deliberate campaigns — especially state-sponsored ones — it goes beyond mere bigotry or speech issues. It becomes an international human rights issue that demands accountability under frameworks like the UDHR or international law.

The problem with the international community is that it’s only as good as its members. Let’s face it — when you have a large international organization, it becomes harder to enforce basic standards of lawfulness, democratic norms, and the rule of law.

We’re seeing a lot of corruption at the UN. Lobbies sometimes sway smaller or developing countries into voting for hateful or illogical resolutions. There’s also significant dissent and disagreement over basic definitions. How do we address that?

It starts with something small: defining the terms. For instance, what is antisemitism? You’ll never get anywhere without an agreed-upon, clear definition — especially in large forums with diverse members. Agreeing on what exactly you’re fighting is the first step.

Once you’ve done that, the next challenge is ensuring that member states are incentivized to adhere to the framework. Without accountability or enforcement mechanisms, all you’re left with are empty words.

Jacobsen: Within such frameworks, do you see risks in how certain historical atrocities are used for comparison? For example, attempts to compare the Holocaust with other atrocities can lead to conflation, diminishing the significance of both.

Tsukerman: That’s a great point. Comparing the Holocaust — a targeted, systematic campaign of genocide against millions of Jewish people — with other atrocities is often inappropriate and problematic. While it’s possible to make comparisons as an intellectual exercise, doing so in public discourse can diminish not only the Jewish suffering but also the suffering of other groups involved in those comparisons.

Jacobsen: Can you provide examples of such inappropriate comparisons?

Tsukerman: Absolutely. Two recent examples come to mind, and while controversial, they’re worth discussing.

First, there’s been a trend to bring up the Holocaust too easily in discourse, reducing its significance. For example, it’s often invoked to make ugly or hyperbolic comparisons, which can diminish the unique horror of that crime and devalue discussions of other genocides, such as those in Rwanda or Darfur.

Second, a more specific example involves Queen Camilla in the UK. At a Holocaust memorial service, she mentioned antisemitism and Islamophobia in the same sentence. This was highly inappropriate and in poor taste — not because Islamophobia isn’t an issue worth addressing, but because it has nothing to do with the Holocaust.

The Nazis collaborated with Islamist extremist groups during World War II, aiming to eliminate Jews, so bringing up Islamophobia in this context not only risks conflating unrelated issues but also opens the door to historical controversies that are irrelevant to the Holocaust itself. It was an unnecessary inclusion that detracted from the focus of the event.

Jacobsen: What do you think motivates these kinds of comparisons?

Tsukerman: Often, they stem from either a lack of understanding or a deliberate attempt to subvert the narrative. In some cases, they’re meant to devalue the Holocaust as a singular atrocity, portraying it as just one of many and erasing its specific significance. At times, this reflects antisemitic motivations — seeking to minimize Jewish suffering or deny the uniqueness of their persecution.

When these comparisons are made inappropriately, they shift the discourse away from meaningful discussions of historical atrocities and their lessons. Instead, they risk trivializing both the Holocaust and the other tragedies they’re compared to.

Armenian lobbies in the U.S. are quite distinct from the Pashinyan government in Armenia. These groups represent local Armenian-American communities in the U.S. for over a century. They’re not new migrants, and many of them didn’t even come directly from Armenia — they’re from other parts of the world but happen to be Armenian.

These lobbies often attempt to draw comparisons between the Holocaust and the events of 1915, the Armenian genocide. While historical tragedies deserve acknowledgment and remembrance, how these lobbies sometimes frame their arguments is problematic. They have, at times, employed antisemitic rhetoric when others don’t align with their political strategies or narratives.

There have also been controversies surrounding some of these lobbies, including allegations of embezzlement of humanitarian funds meant for Armenia. Some of these groups have been linked to organized crime or Russian-backed efforts, which complicates their activities further. Despite these issues, they have become highly influential in American politics.

Jacobsen: How does this tie into Holocaust comparisons specifically?

Tsukerman: The Armenian lobbies often use the Holocaust as a rhetorical tool to draw attention to their cause. This co-opting of Holocaust history for a different political agenda is deeply problematic. It’s not just offensive — it’s historically damaging.

It undermines the unique significance of both historical events, distorting the understanding of history and failing to treat each atrocity in its own right. Moreover, there is often a deliberate intent to appropriate the Holocaust’s cultural and historical weight to gain attention for their political aims.

Jacobsen: Shifting gears, what are your thoughts on the economic and cybersecurity implications of antisemitic rhetoric and conspiracy theories?

Tsukerman: Unfortunately, antisemitism sells. Popular media personalities like Candace Owens and Tucker Carlson wouldn’t normalize obscure conspiracy theories and extremist arguments if they weren’t profitable. Without money or an audience for these ideas, they wouldn’t pursue them.

Someone is paying for it, and someone benefits from pushing these narratives. In many cases, the funding likely comes from state actors, though not always. But make no mistake — if there weren’t a financial incentive, much of this antisemitic rhetoric wouldn’t persist. Books and other materials wouldn’t sell if there weren’t demand for them.

Jacobsen: So, how do we address the economic aspect of antisemitism?

Tsukerman: It’s a matter of understanding demand and supply dynamics. The demand side is critical. If people stop consuming this content, the supply will diminish naturally. Trying to shut down supply without addressing demand often backfires.

Look at the Soviet Union as an example. Anything taboo or forbidden became more desirable, fueling curiosity and conspiracies about why it was banned in the first place. By reducing demand — through education, awareness, and counter-narratives — you can reduce the market for these ideas.

Another key aspect is cutting off foreign funding for these narratives. Many people don’t realize that external actors push some of this rhetoric maliciously and don’t have the public’s best interests at heart. Identifying and exposing these foreign influences is crucial to curbing the spread of antisemitism and conspiracy theories.

Jacobsen: That’s the economic argument. What about cybersecurity? How do we see antisemitic narratives being boosted in cyberspace?

Tsukerman: Boosting happens in cyberspace, and it’s not just by Elon Musk or Russian trolls — it involves state actors from various countries. Qatar, for instance, plays a significant role. They use Western influencers and cybersecurity experts to craft complex narratives that ultimately boost antisemitic sentiments.

The most sophisticated tactic involves selecting “good Jews” — often hardcore anti-Zionist or self-hating types — and propping them up to justify antisemitism. The narrative becomes, “We’re not antisemitic; we’re just against Israel or religious extremism. Look at these Jewish people who agree with us!”

This is one of the worst forms of antisemitism, and it has historical parallels. Throughout history, so-called “court Jews”in monarchies were often employed to suppress their communities in exchange for favour from governments. What we’re seeing now is the same idea, where antisemites deploy individuals with internalized self-hatred to legitimize their rhetoric.

Jacobsen: You mentioned bots earlier. How do they factor into this?

Tsukerman: Bots are heavily involved in amplifying these ridiculous arguments. They’ve become more sophisticated over time. It’s not just Russia with its troll farms anymore — it’s a variety of countries investing in AI technologies.

Interestingly, some of these efforts are based in Europe. European groups, leveraging advanced AI, are running these campaigns. Because they’re European-based, they attract less scrutiny and are harder to trace. These campaigns are more complex and insidious.

Jacobsen: What about targeted campaigns to boycott anything Jewish — whether explicitly antisemitic or framed as part of a hypothetical noble cause?

Tsukerman: If people choose not to buy a product for personal reasons, that’s their prerogative. The problem arises when organized campaigns attempt to create economic pressure on institutions, including government entities, to engage in illegal discrimination against citizens or allied states.

These campaigns often invoke the apartheid South Africa comparison, but it’s an entirely inappropriate analogy. Apartheid South Africa was a unique phenomenon where a minority population oppressed a majority through explicit, codified policies.

Israel doesn’t fit that framework. It’s a country with Arab Muslim parties in the government. Yes, there are issues of discrimination that need addressing, and some politicians have said deplorable things. Policies can be criticized, and governments can always improve, but to compare Israel to apartheid South Africa is historically and factually inaccurate.

Jacobsen: So these campaigns distort definitions to justify hate campaigns?

Tsukerman: The goal is to weaponize flawed definitions to legitimize hate campaigns and push for illegal discrimination. State and non-state foreign actors often fund these organized movements. They’re not grassroots efforts but deliberate, well-funded initiatives to spread hate under the guise of legitimate political discourse.

The good news is that 27 U.S. states have enacted laws opposing these discriminatory movements. A federal framework has also been pushed, though it hasn’t materialized yet.

Jacobsen: What’s the next step?

Tsukerman: The next step is to unravel the funding sources behind these campaigns, expose the foreign actors involved, and ensure legal frameworks are in place to protect against discrimination. Public education on why these narratives are flawed is also critical. Without understanding the tactics and motivations behind these movements, it’s easy for people to fall prey to their rhetoric.

Jacobsen: Let’s discuss the characterizations and slurs used in antisemitic rhetoric. Beyond the overtly hateful terms, you have the less obvious ones — ”globalists” or “international banksters,” for example. Then there’s the idea of a hypothetical Zionist or dual control of the world. The notion that 0.2% of the global population somehow pulls the levers on everything, or separation in ‘Good Jews’ and ‘Bad Jews.’ What’s your take on this kind of narrative?

Tsukerman: Yes, I know exactly what you’re referring to. I always joke, “Where are my bags of gold in this conspiracy? How did I get left out?” By the way, if these supposed conspirators are so effective, why are things going so badly? The logic doesn’t hold up.

Jacobsen: What about antisemitic hacking campaigns? Are these targeting Jewish institutions or individuals?

Tsukerman: There have been hacking campaigns targeting Jewish organizations and institutions. However, we need to unpack this topic fully when we have more time.

Jacobsen: One angle I’ve found interesting is individuals who grew up surrounded by antisemitism or even converted to antisemitic ideologies in adulthood but later deconverted and became outspoken critics. These individuals, having lived it, know the language and the mindset. Do you see this group as effective in combating antisemitism?

Tsukerman: In theory, it sounds promising. You’re referring to people akin to ex-communists who became liberal critics of oppressive systems or former Maoists who switched ideological sides. But there are significant caveats.

First, many of these individuals lack a classical liberal mindset or a genuine, deeply rooted repulsion to oppressive systems. Some of them move from one extreme to another. After leaving antisemitic ideologies, they may embrace another form of extremism rather than adopting a truly balanced perspective.

Second, not everyone claiming to have “converted” away from antisemitism is genuine. Some are opportunists seeking attention. Others infiltrate Jewish communities under pretenses, gathering information to pass back to their original networks or governments.

Jacobsen: That’s concerning. Are there other limitations with this group?

Tsukerman: Yes. Many of these so-called converts are ineffective because they primarily preach to the converted — they appeal only to Jewish or Christian audiences already sympathetic to their message. Rarely do they engage with their communities or challenge antisemitic mindsets in their native languages or cultural contexts.

The critical question is: What value are they providing? Often, they reiterate what the audience already knows. “X, Y, Z regime is antisemitic and needs to go.” Great — we’re aware of that. What’s missing is actionable insight: how to effectively combat that regime or convince others in their communities to stop listening to propaganda.

Jacobsen: In most cases, they’re not developing strategies to challenge antisemitism in their home contexts.

Tsukerman: In my experience, very few of these individuals have been truly valuable in this regard. Worse, some sponsored by organizations do more harm than good. In some cases, they deliberately infiltrate Jewish communities, pretending to be allies while gathering intelligence to pass on to their original networks or governments.

We need to be cautious when evaluating the authenticity and effectiveness of these individuals. While few may provide genuine insight and support, many do not challenge their communities or provide strategies for meaningful change.

Jacobsen: Something I’m not too familiar with are antisemitic hacking campaigns. I assume these are black hat hackers, not white hat hackers, meaning they aim to cause harm rather than help. What do these campaigns look like?

Tsukerman: Yes, exactly. These are black hat hackers with malicious intent. There have been extensive campaigns, particularly involving Iranian, Russian, and Chinese hackers targeting Israel’s institutions. Interestingly, there have been counter-responses from Indian hackers who’ve hacked back at some of these groups.

Jacobsen: Leave it to the Indian hackers, they’re great.

Tsukerman: You have Russians, Chinese, and Iranians on one side and Indians countering them. 

Jacobsen: Then, Nigerians enter the mix, trying to scam you as the “son of a prince, and a  banker.” What about the U.S.? Do you see much hacking activity targeting Jewish organizations or activists?

Tsukerman: In the U.S., you hear less about outright hacking aimed at Jewish organizations compared to what’s happening globally. However, there have been incidents targeting Jewish institutions, Jewish activists, and pro-Israel advocates.

One particularly insidious tactic, especially prominent with Qatari actors, involves preemptive hacking. This means identifying activists or critics before they reach their peak influence, gathering compromising or embarrassing information about them, and then leaking it later when they’ve gained prominence. It’s preemptive talent spotting, and I’ve seen it in action.

Jacobsen: Is this widely known?

Tsukerman: Not really. It’s so targeted and specific that it often flies under the radar. The more well-known incidents tend to be simpler, like defacing websites with hateful messages. But these more sophisticated, intelligence-level patterns of hacking — particularly aimed at Jewish or pro-Israel individuals and organizations — aren’t getting the attention they deserve.

Jacobsen: What needs to be done to address this?

Tsukerman: We need data. First, detailed data must be collected to understand the scale and patterns of these attacks. From that data, we can build a framework to analyze the tactics used. Once we have actionable insights, or “NSATs” (next steps and tactics), we can effectively develop strategies to counter these attacks—whether through governmental action, NGO work, or individual advocacy.

Jacobsen: Beyond hacking, how do you see financial targeting of Jewish organizations? How do you differentiate between those targeted for political reasons — such as criticism of Israel — and those targeted explicitly for being Jewish?

Tsukerman: At this point, it’s often a distinction without a difference. Suppose someone is attacking all of Israel, not just specific government policies. In that case, they’re effectively targeting Jews and anyone associated with the state. Israel is recognized as a Jewish state, so such attacks disproportionately impact Jewish individuals and organizations.

Criticism of specific policies or leaders, like Netanyahu, is, of course, legitimate. But the real question is: What about the rest of Israel? Are these critics okay with Israel and its people’s existence? In my experience, I’ve yet to see an organization exclusively dedicated to criticizing specific Israeli political decisions without also smearing the broader society.

Jacobsen: So, in theory, such a distinction could exist, but it’s rare in practice? It’s one of those academic exercises — nice in theory but almost nonexistent in reality. 

Tsukerman: Most organized criticism ends up targeting Israel as a whole, which inevitably crosses into antisemitism.

Jacobsen: Let’s discuss international conspiracies involving Freemasonry, banks, and various institutions — specifically, the conflation of these ideas with antisemitic narratives. While media portrayals often perpetuate the same old tropes, I’m curious about the weaponization of financial stereotypes. These conspiracies often center around the idea of “global financial control” and are weaponized to harm Jewish individuals and communities. They’re pervasive and can target anyone, from wealthy public figures like Larry David and Jerry Seinfeld to regular Jewish families — whether they’re Orthodox, Conservative, Reform, or otherwise.

Tsukerman: One of the clearest examples of this was the case of Ilan Halimi in France. He was a 23-year-old Jewish man, a cell phone salesman, abducted and tortured by a violent gang called the “Gang of Barbarians.”

The gang specifically targeted him because they believed he was wealthy, purely because he was Jewish. They demanded a ransom of €450,000, more than most people earn in a lifetime. In the end, they killed him.

Jacobsen: That’s horrifying.

Tsukerman: It is, and it’s a stark example of antisemitism in its purest and most brutal form. This was not someone wealthy or prominent. He was just a regular person. Even the gang admitted they believed all Jews were wealthy, and that motivated the crime. Nicolas Sarkozy, the French Interior Minister at the time, acknowledged this explicitly.

Jacobsen: It’s striking that they even called themselves the “Gang of Barbarians.”

Tsukerman: Yes, you can’t make this up. They openly identified as villains, which is rare, but at least they were honest about their motivations. It’s a tragic case that illustrates how pervasive and dangerous these stereotypes can be.

Jacobsen: Beyond this case, how do these stereotypes manifest in other parts of the world?

Tsukerman: You see variations of this narrative in the Middle East and many developing countries. In some places, people don’t even know what being Jewish means, yet they parrot stereotypes like “Jews are rich” or “Jews control everything.” These ideas have become so entrenched that they’re often accepted without question, even in regions with no significant Jewish population.

There’s also magical thinking at play. People fail to connect the dots between the cultural emphasis on education and hard work in many Jewish communities and the resulting financial success for some individuals. Instead, they attribute success to conspiracies or luck, ignoring the historical context of discrimination and the resilience it necessitated.

At the same time, not every Jewish person is wealthy or successful. There’s a broad spectrum, just like in any other community. But these stereotypes persist because they’re easy, reductive explanations for complex realities.

It oversimplifies and dehumanizes. When people fail to recognize the diversity within Jewish communities and the effort behind individual achievements, they perpetuate harmful myths that fuel prejudice and, in extreme cases, violence.

Many people gravitate toward professions that provide financial stability and allow them to take care of their families. 

Jacobsen: Are there any major topics we missed? We’ve covered radicalization, extremism, geopolitics, propaganda, state and non-state actors, Israel, disinformation campaigns, human rights violations, antisemitism, protections, cybersecurity, economics, boycotts, hacking, financial targeting, and destabilization. Did we miss anything?

Tsukerman: We’ve covered a lot.

Jacobsen: Earlier, we touched on the AfD and the far right in Britain, but they don’t have much of a chance under Trump. 

Tsukerman: One additional point I wanted to mention is that a recent trend is seeing individuals who aren’t genuinely pro-Jewish or pro-Israel use fake appeals to advance their own agendas.

For example, Viktor Orbán in Hungary invited Netanyahu for a visit and boasted about how safe Hungary allegedly is for its Jewish community compared to other European countries. However, Orbán is deeply invested in Iran, does business with China, and sides with Russia. He also has no issue with the horrific crimes occurring in Ukraine. How can someone like that possibly be pro-Jewish?

I’m deeply skeptical of Orbán’s intentions. It looks like pure opportunism — a scheme to attract Jews to Hungary because many are politically influential in the U.S., and he likely sees them as useful for building political connections. It’s political cynicism at its finest.

Jacobsen: This ties into the broader category of “useful idiots.” Cynical actors like Orbán play both sides, creating the illusion of being allies while serving their interests.

Everyone seems to have this archetype of a Bond villain in mind. It reminds me of a German comedian’s joke on Conan O’Brien’s show. Conan asked if it bothered him–the interviewee–that Germans in American media are often portrayed as villains. The comedian immediately replied, “No.”

He said, “Have you Wiki’d Germany history before?” It was quick and to the point. That’s sharp humour — concise and accurate.

Jacobsen: We could dig into these tropes more. One area I’d like to explore in the future is how people who hold antisemitic beliefs define “Jewish.” What’s their conception of a Jewish person? That’s a fascinating and broad topic. It warrants its discussion.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much. It was great to connect with you.

Tsukerman: Excellent. Thank you so much for your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Chip Lupo on American Charitable Giving

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/20

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content.  Lupo discussed trends in charitable giving and community engagement in the U.S., emphasizing the $499 billion donated by Americans in 2023 despite a 2.1% decline from 2022. They highlighted how people increasingly contribute time and expertise, particularly in trades like construction and landscaping. Cities like Virginia Beach excel in volunteering due to safety and low poverty rates, while San Francisco leads in caring for the vulnerable, supported by strong policies. Challenges in low-income, high-crime cities like Memphis and Baton Rouge were noted. The conversation also explored foster care reforms, “Built for Zero” homelessness efforts, and weighted metrics in city rankings.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Americans donate a significant amount of money. In 2023, they donated $499 billion, according to data from Giving USA. How does that compare to other countries? This is an important opening question, though we may not have sufficient comparative data readily available. Still, $499 billion is a substantial figure.

However, when adjusting for inflation, this amount represents a slight decrease from 2022. Studies like these aim to broaden the definition of “caring” beyond monetary contributions. How has this trend of declining donations evolved in recent years? From what I can observe, there has been a steady decline post-COVID. A fair starting point for comparison would be from 2020 to the present.

Chip Lupo: The purpose of this study is to emphasize that caring involves more than just donating money. There are many other impactful ways to show compassion—often summarized as “time, talent, and treasure.” Volunteering time and sharing expertise are critical components of this broader definition. While the decline in donations is notable, Americans remain a compassionate people overall.

For example, there was a 2.1% decline in charitable giving from 2022 to 2023. Are people compensating for this gap by contributing more time rather than money? Yes, they are. Volunteering hours have increased, along with the sharing of professional expertise. For instance, individuals skilled in contracting, home building, landscaping, or other trades can donate their time and skills to help those less fortunate. This kind of contribution holds significant value.

Jacobsen: Lastly, why are Virginia Beach, Scottsdale, and Boston considered among the most caring cities? What specific factors make them stand out?

Lupo: Now, Virginia Beach—it’s largely because, well, they’re number one in the nation for volunteering hours. They also have a high share of residents who go out and fundraise or sell items to raise money for charity. It’s also a relatively safe area, and that’s a huge factor when it comes to volunteering.

People are not likely to go out and do fundraising or charity events in areas where there’s a high risk of crime. Virginia Beach has the second-lowest violent crime rate and the eighth-lowest property crime rate in the country. That shows people are looking out for each other, which indicates that they care about their neighbors. There’s also a low overall poverty rate and an extremely low child poverty rate.

Jacobsen: And what about cities like San Francisco? Why are they number one for caring for the vulnerable?

Lupo: Let’s pull that up here. San Francisco ranks 27th overall, but when it comes to caring for the vulnerable, they perform very well. That category encompasses a number of smaller metrics. Adoption rates are quite high in San Francisco, and they also have strong animal protection laws and a relatively low uninsured rate.

San Francisco also stands out with a high number of rehabilitation centers, which is key. They have a high share of sheltered homeless people and a notable number of pet shelters and rescue services per capita. Additionally, there’s strong availability of paid family leave.

Jacobsen: So, in the case of San Francisco, a lot of this seems policy-driven?

Lupo: Exactly. If local authorities make strong commitments toward volunteering and caring policies, residents are more likely to follow suit. And then you’ve got cities like Memphis, Tennessee; Baton Rouge; and Birmingham, which are at the very bottom of the list. 

Jacobsen: What’s happening there?

Lupo: Yes, those cities are at the very bottom of the 100 ranked cities. They tend to rank low across multiple areas. For instance, they have very high crime rates, both violent and property-related, which discourages volunteering and community involvement.

Let me check here… Yes, they also score poorly in caring for vulnerable populations. So, these cities face significant challenges when it comes to creating an environment conducive to community support and charitable activity.

The highest ranking among those cities is Baton Rouge, which sits at 50th in “caring for the workforce.” However, all of them—New Orleans, Memphis, Baton Rouge, and Birmingham—have very high crime rates, high poverty rates, and significant child poverty. There’s also a noticeable lack of commitment from local officials toward encouraging volunteering.

As we mentioned earlier, in high-crime areas, people are often more reluctant to go out and engage with their community. Instead, they stay indoors to avoid putting themselves at risk of becoming crime victims.

And they’re all located in the Deep South—low-income regions with persistent socioeconomic challenges. 

Jacobsen: Can we correlate the wealth of an area with the level of caring or volunteering that happens there?

Lupo: Yes, that’s a huge factor. The bottom four cities—New Orleans, Memphis, Baton Rouge, and Birmingham—are all in low-income states, particularly Louisiana and Tennessee. These areas struggle with economic hardship, which naturally affects charitable engagement.

Right above them is Detroit, Michigan, another area marked by high crime and low income. In contrast, the cities we mentioned earlier—Virginia Beach, Scottsdale, and Boston—tend to be safer and wealthier.

In places like Boston, for example, there’s a higher education level. With prestigious colleges and universities in the area, there’s a direct correlation between higher education and community engagement. However, Boston does face challenges with its high cost of living, which offsets some of its strengths. As we discussed earlier with inflation, when the cost of living rises, people often donate less money.

Still, people in Boston tend to engage with and look out for their community. So, yes, there’s a strong correlation between the income levels of an area and how compassionate or caring its residents can afford to be.

Jacobsen When these cities are economically poor, do religious organizations or nonprofits pick up more of the slack?

Lupo: I think so. In the Deep South, where religion remains an integral part of the community, you’ll find faith-based organizations playing a significant role. They, along with other nonprofits, often “pick up the slack” when it comes to providing care and compassion.

Jacobsen:  Are there limitations to what nonprofits, charities, and religious organizations can provide compared to government programs, and vice versa?

Lupo: Not necessarily. There’s the general principle of separation of church and state, but nonprofits—including faith-based ones—still have to comply with federal tax laws and regulations. At the local level, though, there’s often collaboration rather than conflict.

If local officials are supportive and encouraging, then you see a better partnership between religious organizations and nonreligious nonprofits. Together, they can address community needs more effectively.

Jacobsen: Foster care has replaced orphanages. Why did that happen? And is this trend good or bad?

Lupo: That’s a complex issue. The shift away from orphanages toward foster care came largely from growing concerns about the institutionalization of children. Orphanages were often seen as impersonal and ill-equipped to provide the emotional and developmental support children need. Foster care, on the other hand, places children in family-like environments where they receive more individualized care.

However, foster care isn’t without its challenges. It often depends on the availability and quality of foster families, and there’s significant variability in outcomes for children. While the trend is generally seen as positive, ongoing improvements are needed to ensure foster care systems provide consistent, high-quality support for vulnerable children.

I think it’s a good thing because foster care allows for more individualized attention. You can address cases on a case-by-case basis as opposed to applying a generalized approach. What’s the word I’m looking for here? It’s more… focused. Yes, it’s more one-to-one, and I think it’s easier to regulate and monitor situations when you’re addressing each case individually rather than managing a large pool.

Jacobsen: And when you were gathering this data, how big was the sample size?

Lupo: Let’s check the methodology here. For two things: the data was either based on metrics available at the state level, or in other cases, we used the square root of the population to calculate the sample size. That approach helps avoid overcompensating for minor differences.

Now, one thing we need to keep in mind, Scott, is that when determining the sample, we only considered the city proper. For example, in the case of San Francisco, the data only reflects San Francisco city itself, not the outlying areas like Palo Alto or Marin County. So the sample size was strictly based on the city’s population.

Jacobsen: And for the rankings—caring for the community, caring for the vulnerable, caring for the workforce—are these metrics weighted equally?

Lupo: No, they’re weighted differently. Yes, certain factors carry more weight. For example, violent crime rates were given a quadruple weight, property crime rates a triple weight, and alcohol-impaired driving fatalities were given half weight. So the weights varied—some were full weight, while others were double, triple, or quadruple, depending on significance.

Jacobsen: What factor did you find to be the most significant in changing a city’s ranking for caring?

Lupo: Some of the biggest drops were seen in the caring for the workforce rank. That’s largely economy-driven. When unemployment rates are high, people are out of work, and combined with inflation, there’s a lower likelihood of people donating money or volunteering time.

Now, you could look at this from another perspective: people who are unemployed might have more time to volunteer. So it’s a bit of a double-edged sword, as we’ve discussed before. Caring isn’t limited to income; individuals can still donate their time and skills to help their community, even when they’re out of work.

Jacobsen: Do you use Google search rankings by state or city as a metric as well?

Lupo: By the city. That’s a great question because Virginia Beach performed very well in this category. When you look at Google search interest for terms like “volunteer,” “nonprofit organizations,” “charitable organizations,” and “charitable donations,” people in Virginia Beach search for these terms more frequently than residents of other cities.

For example, Virginia Beach had the highest search interest, while Scottsdale ranked seventh. That indicates people in those cities are actively looking for ways to help others.

Jacobsen: That’s fascinating. One last question: what are Built for Zero communities in the U.S., and how are they defined?

Lupo: The term “Built for Zero” refers to a national change effort aimed at ending chronic homelessness, particularly for veterans. It used to be known simply as “Zero.” Built for Zero works with a core group of committed communities to develop data on homelessness, optimize local housing resources, and track progress against monthly goals.

The initiative focuses on creating systemic change to ensure communities can achieve and sustain functional zero for veteran and chronic homelessness.

Jacobsen: Chip, as always, thank you very much for your time.

Lupo: Anytime, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Piyush Puri on Media-for-Equity

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/20

Piyush Puri is a Founding Partner at Mercurius Media Capital (MMC) and a key member of its Executive Leadership and Investment Committee. MMC collaborates with U.S. media companies to accelerate startup growth through the innovative use of media capital. Additionally, Piyush serves as the Executive Vice President of BCCL Worldwide Inc. (BWI), the strategic investment arm of The Times Group, India’s largest multimedia conglomerate. He highlights the thriving American gig economy, driven by flexible work demands, digital platforms, and pandemic-induced remote work trends. Piyush explains how Airtasker, a platform leveraging a media-for-equity model—trading equity for advertising with partners—has achieved expansion in the competitive U.S. market without significant upfront marketing costs. MMC invested $6 million in Airtasker, recognizing its successful track record in Australia and alignment with growing on-demand consumer needs. MMC’s extensive media partnerships, including Sinclair, Televisa, and Willow, provide startups with broad market reach and credibility, rapidly driving job creation and marketplace growth. This approach draws inspiration from established models like the Times Group’s Brand Capital, delivering a scalable and cost-effective strategy for entering new markets.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let’s start with the obvious points or macroeconomic factors of the gig economy. Why is the American gig economy becoming so large and going to continue to grow significantly in the 2020s?

The gig economy in America is exploding, and it’s easy to see why. People want flexibility—especially the younger generation. A rigid 9-to-5 doesn’t fit the lifestyle many are after anymore. With apps and platforms making it super simple to find work or hire someone, gig jobs are now more accessible than ever.

The pandemic was a game-changer, too. Remote work became the norm, and suddenly, even high-skilled roles—like consulting and tech projects—started leaning into the gig model. On top of that, with living costs rising, side hustles have become essential for a lot of people.

For businesses, gig workers are a win. They help keep costs down and allow companies to scale up or down as needed. Consumers are also loving the convenience—whether it’s same-day delivery or hiring someone to assemble furniture.

Investors clearly see the potential. Platforms like Airtasker and Uber are getting plenty of funding, ensuring the gig economy keeps evolving. The way things are going, this isn’t just a passing trend. It’s reshaping work entirely, giving people more choice and businesses more agility in an ever-changing world.

Jacobsen: What is the media-for-equity model for Airtasker’s expansion in the gig economy of the United States?

The media-for-equity model is a strategic approach that Airtasker is using to expand its presence in the U.S. gig economy. In this model, Airtasker offers equity in its business to media companies in exchange for advertising and marketing services. This enables the company to secure significant media exposure without requiring upfront cash investments for large-scale campaigns.

This approach is particularly valuable in a competitive market like the U.S., where established players such as TaskRabbit and Thumbtack already have strong footholds. The media exposure helps Airtasker quickly build brand awareness and establish credibility, which is essential for attracting both users and gig workers. Partnerships with reputable media outlets also lend trust to the brand, an important factor when entering new markets.

The model is also capital-efficient. By conserving cash that would otherwise be spent on marketing, Airtasker can allocate its financial resources to other priorities, such as enhancing its platform or scaling operations. Moreover, the media campaigns can be tailored to specific regional audiences within the U.S., ensuring Airtasker resonates with diverse consumer bases.

Overall, the media-for-equity model provides a practical way for Airtasker to accelerate its growth while balancing costs and maximizing market impact.

Jacobsen: What factors made Airtasker Limited attractive to Mercurius Media Capital to invest $6 million in it?

Airtasker Limited secured a $6 million investment from Mercurius Media Capital due to its strong position in the rapidly growing gig economy and its proven success in Australia. The company’s scalable platform connects task posters with skilled workers, creating a self-reinforcing network effect that strengthens user retention and engagement. This demonstrated Airtasker’s ability to build a thriving marketplace with clear growth potential.

Airtasker’s innovative media-for-equity strategy for its U.S. expansion further enhanced its appeal. By exchanging equity for media exposure, the company efficiently built brand awareness while conserving capital for scaling operations. This approach aligned well with MMC’s focus on media-driven growth strategies. Additionally, Airtasker’s alignment with consumer trends, such as the increasing demand for convenience and on-demand services, positioned the platform to thrive in a competitive market.

With a strong leadership team, a proven track record of execution, and a clear strategy for international expansion, Airtasker presented a compelling opportunity for MMC to back a high-growth, consumer-focused business poised to scale effectively in the U.S. gig economy.

Jacobsen: Can you share any success stories or case studies from MMC’s previous investments that demonstrate the effectiveness of the media capital model?

As a relatively new fund established just a year ago, Mercurius Media Capital has made five strategic investments this year. While it’s too early to share case studies specific to MMC, the media capital model we employ has been tried and tested over two decades through the Times Group’s Brand Capital model, where it has consistently driven impactful results.

Take Airtasker, for instance. The company is a prime example of how the media-for-equity approach can propel growth. Airtasker leveraged the model to become successful in Australia, using targeted media campaigns to build significant brand awareness and establish itself as a leader in the gig economy. This success allowed the company to raise over $50 million to fuel its expansion into Europe and the U.S.

At MMC, we are building on this proven legacy, working closely with startups to deploy the media capital model as a cornerstone of their growth strategy. While our current campaigns are in their early stages, we are confident in the potential for similar success stories, backed by the same fundamentals that have driven results in the past.

Jacobsen: How do more extensive networks through MMC help startups scale up in terms of market reach and brand building? 

Mercurius Media Capital’s extensive networks, including partnerships with Sinclair, Televisa, and Willow, are crucial in helping startups scale their market reach and build impactful brands. These partnerships provide startups with access to premium advertising channels across TV, digital platforms, and social media. This level of exposure enables startups to launch campaigns that reach wide audiences without high upfront costs, establishing a strong brand presence quickly and efficiently.

Startups often lack the expertise or resources to execute large-scale marketing efforts. MMC bridges this gap by leveraging its network of marketing professionals and advisors, along with the media assets of partners like Sinclair, Televisa, and Willow, to design targeted, data-driven campaigns. These campaigns resonate with specific customer demographics, ensuring startups connect with the right audiences. This strategic approach maximizes returns on marketing efforts while driving customer acquisition at scale.

Additionally, MMC’s partnerships lend credibility to startups, making them more appealing to customers and potential collaborators. For companies entering international markets, MMC’s global networks – bolstered by partners like Televisa for Latin America and Sinclair for the U.S. – act as a launchpad for recognition and market penetration. This combination of visibility, trust, and strategic guidance empowers startups to scale rapidly and sustainably.

Jacobsen: How does Airtasker plan to leverage MMC’s $50 million in media capital to create new job opportunities?

Airtasker plans to utilize Mercurius Media Capital’s $6 million investment to significantly expand its presence in the U.S. market. By leveraging MMC’s extensive media partnerships with Sinclair, Televisa, and Willow, Airtasker aims to launch wide-reaching advertising campaigns across television, digital, and social media channels. These campaigns will increase awareness of Airtasker’s marketplace, attracting both customers seeking services and skilled workers looking for flexible employment opportunities.

Through customized media campaigns, Airtasker intends to tap into diverse regional markets across the U.S., connecting local communities with on-demand work opportunities. As the platform grows, the increased visibility will encourage more people to join as Taskers, expanding the types of services offered. This will not only provide individuals with supplemental income but also create full-time opportunities for those seeking greater flexibility in their work lives.

Additionally, Airtasker’s focus on hyper-localized advertising will help identify and address unique needs in various communities, ensuring a steady flow of jobs tailored to local demands. By driving both consumer demand and worker engagement, Airtasker’s partnership with MMC is positioned to play a transformative role in job creation within the evolving gig economy.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Piyush.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The National Flag of Canada Day

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/19

The National Flag of Canada Day celebrates Canada’s evolving identity by emphasizing unity, heritage, and national pride. Traditions like flag-raising and singing “O Canada” merge with modern celebrations, including a giant flag skated down the Rideau Canal by young athletes alongside Olympians. These young skaters symbolize Canada’s future, carrying the flag with pride. Joan O’Malley, who sewed the first prototype, was honored, connecting past and present. The event highlights Canada’s cultural diversity and collective values, with athletes reinforcing national pride. Canadian Heritage underscores the flag’s role in linking generations and reflecting democracy, inclusion, and justice.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does National Flag of Canada Day celebrate Canada’s evolving national identity?

Canadian Heritage, Government of Canada: For 60 years, the National Flag of Canada has represented values Canadians hold dear, such as democracy, inclusion, and justice for all. These fundamental principles, deeply rooted in Canadian culture, shape who we are and how we live together.  

Jacobsen: How does the event integrate traditions and contemporary celebrations?

Canadian Heritage, Government of Canada: The event integrated traditions such as a raising of the flag while “O Canada”  was sung with the contemporary celebrations of having the event on the iconic Rideau Canal Skateway and having a giant flag skated down the canal by young skaters from local sports clubs along with Canadian Olympic and Paralympic athletes.

Jacobsen: What symbolic meaning is behind the young skaters forming a flag on the Rideau Canal Skateway?

Canadian Heritage, Government of Canada: The young skaters represent the future of Canada, and they carried the National Flag of Canada on the canal as they skated with Olympic and Paralympic athletes to show their pride for their country and their respect for the flag, carrying those notions with them as they moved forward. 

Jacobsen: How will the Honourable Mona Fortier reinforce the government’s commitment to national heritage?

Canadian Heritage, Government of Canada: The Minister of Canadian Heritage is the Honourable Pascale St-Onge. We invite you to contact the office of the Minister of Canadian Heritage for this question. The Minister’s Press Secretary is Charles Thibault-Béland and can be reached at charles.thibault-beland@pch.gc.ca.

Jacobsen: How are the Canadian Olympic and Paralympic athletes emphasizing unity and national pride?

Canadian Heritage, Government of Canada: Athletes wear the Canadian maple leaf with pride during the Olympic and Paralympic games, representing Canada in world-class events. The games unite Canadians as viewers cheer on their athletes, and their country, emphasizing unity and national pride.

Jacobsen: What is the significance of involving the seamstress of the original flag in connecting the past to the present?

Canadian Heritage, Government of Canada: Joan O’Malley, the seamstress for the first prototype of the National Flag of Canada, connects the past to the present. She was recognized at the ceremony for having a personal and historical link to the National Flag of Canada.

Jacobsen: How does Canadian Heritage intend to use this event to engage the diverse facets of Canadian identity?

Canadian Heritage, Government of Canada: The flag is a symbol of unity for Canadians from coast to coast to coast and represents our collective culture and identity, our rich heritage, and the promising future we’re building together. With its bold red and white colours and striking maple leaf, the flag embodies Canada’s national identity, history, and values. It links Canadians across generations and backgrounds.   

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Anton Zelinskyi on Corruption, Integrity, and Ukrainian Judiciary

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/19

Anton Zelinskyi is a legal reform advocate in Ukraine, affiliated with DEJURE and serving as a member of the Public Integrity Council. His work focuses on judicial transparency, integrity, and combating corruption, employing tools like the Bangalore Principles and detailed case analyses. He advocates aligning Ukraine’s legal standards with European Union norms amid war and systemic challenges. Zelinskyi’s efforts reflect a commitment to fostering accountability and trust in Ukraine’s judiciary, inspiring progress despite significant obstacles. Zelinskyi emphasized the PIC’s role in evaluating judges’ integrity through detailed analyses and standards like the Bangalore Principles. There is an employment of tools including detailed analyses of judges’ dossiers and public coverage of judicial reform hurdles as points of progress. The High Council of Justice is not a real obstacle in judicial reform. For now, the primary issue lies with the old judicial elites that have not been cleansed from the Supreme Court. He highlighted Ukraine’s rise in Transparency International’s Corruption Perceptions Index, contrasting it with Russia’s declining rank due to systemic corruption. Despite these hurdles, Zelinskyi is optimistic, driven by citizens’ commitment to transparency, reform, and alignment with European Union standards.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So here we are today with Anton Zelinskyi. He’s affiliated with DEJURE, a legal and judicial reform-focused organization. Anton also serves as a member of the Public Integrity Council. This council plays a role in evaluating the integrity of judges as part of judicial reform and oversight efforts. These individual roles within larger organizations deal with integrity, transparency, and related issues. This is more of an ethics and accountability-focused interview. So, first and foremost, how extensive is the work of the Public Integrity Council?

Anton Zelinskyi: I was an analyst for the first and second compositions of the Public Integrity Council, and I have dealt with much analysis of judges, their dossiers, and so on. I have a good idea of what this work would entail, but there were many challenges in doing our work because we raised the quality bar. We make our decisions with detailed analysis. We check all the declarations, all the facts from the judges, their careers, and so forth. Sometimes, our decisions are 20 or 30 pages long and detailing the judge’s entire life in terms of integrity..

That’s why it’s considerable work. But on the other hand, we have some issues with the High Qualification Commission of Judges (HQCJ) because they were reluctant to provide us full access to the information. They asked us to go to their building to take photos from their computers to obtain this information, to take photos of massive paper parts of dossiers, and so on. It took much time, and in the end, the pace of our work was slow. So we checked 250 judges within a year [about 1500 are waiting for the assessment].

The work is challenging, but this year’s number of analyzed judges was not very large. 

Jacobsen: Regarding integrity vis-à-vis judges, how are we defining this in legal and ethical terms?

Zelinskyi: We follow the Bangalore Principles of Judicial Conduct and international standards. 

As a PIC, we have our own criteria from 2018. It’s a comprehensive set of criteria for deciding whether a judge poses integrity. In November 2023, we also agreed with the HQCJ on 18 core indicators of judge integrity and how we use them.  PIC criteria are broader than we agreed with the HQCJ. We reference both in our decisions. And, about a month ago, the High Council of Justice (HCJ) also developed its unified criteria. According to the law, we need to use them, as  a unified approach for the HCJ, HQCJ and the Public Integrity Council (PIC) in some way. Still, we just started this process, and you can find one or two decisions that also mention these unified criteria. [Basically, we cite all three documents, but they differ in scope: the PIC’s criteria cover a broader range of ethical violations, while the HCJ’s are, let’s say, more conservative.]

Additionally, there is also a Judicial Ethics Code in Ukraine. We don’t pay much attention to it because it was conveniently written by judges for themselves. They often cite it, as its wording makes it difficult to hold them accountable for anything.  

Jacobsen: Now, these are one set of rules or principles convenient for judges, written by judges. It sounds like a bank robber is writing the rules about criminal jurisdiction regarding robbing banks or lawyers writing laws about how lawyers could be prosecuted. Yes, there’s a conflict of interest there. How do you circumnavigate a too convenient principle for those to whom the ethics are applied?

Zelinskyi: The fact you mentioned, is a broader problem. We have big troubles also in the Bar, not only in judiciary.. So, in the old days, during Yanukovych’s time, the bar and judiciary self-governing organization, were made to pursue the only goal to cover up or rescue corrupt judges or attoreney, something like that. So, if we have questions for a judge regarding the integrity, they always say it’s in line with to our code of behaviour and ethics; we didn’t make anything that is prohibited. 

Jacobsen: What have you seen in your work as the most substantial change or reform to accountability, transparency, and codes of ethics for judges?

Zelinskyi: We changed a lot. A taxi driver asked me one time what has changed in judiciary for these years. So regular people don’t see any changes, but I see many of them. The reform has started in 2016, and we are cleansing the judiciary step by step. Over the last year, almost all judges who were corrupt, dishonest, and so on—representatives of the corrupt, old judicial elites—were recommended for dismissal by the HQCJ [and some of them have been already dismissed by High Council of Justice (HCJ)]. I see our work important as the Public Integrity Council has produced some results. We see that HQCJ agree with us in many cases. They pay attention to our conclusions, and there is public attention to it. That’s why they’re a bit afraid to do something shady. The statistics say that only about 45% of our conclusions were supported by the HQCJ [, but it’s a huge difference, as 5 years ago it was something like 4%].

But at the core, so called Maidan judges, [who persecuted protestants during the Revolution of Dignity] or other famous, notorious ones has been dismissed,  HQCJ agreed with our conclusions on them, and it’s a good sign that this body, HQCJ, is working in the right direction. So, our work makes a difference. 

For me personally, as advocacy manager of the DEJURE Foundation, struggle against the detrimental decision made by the Supreme Court in the summer 2024 was very important. The Supreme Court decided that 180 judges with low integrity don’t need to go through the whole process of qualification assessment.

There were some legal explanations for their decision. Still, they made a U-turn from all their decisions during these eight years. They said there is some legal ground that these judges should be appointed to the positions without having joint interviews with PIC and HQCJ members. Since then, we have done much work. We published many different articles. I attended many YouTube channels and generated much interest in the mass media.

Ultimately, HQCJ started this process to continue interviewing these judges; some of these low-integrity judges have already been dismissed. So it’s an important development that happened last year. I’m sorry for the long answers. The questions are difficult to answer.

Jacobsen: People who haven’t been in Ukraine don’t understand the context of constant curfews, air raid alarms in the middle of the night every night, sometimes running around the clock, especially in the last 12 months as far as I was last there. The frequency of strikes is much higher regardless of the city. And so you’ll have to take into context here: when you are trying to make legal, judicial, and other reforms, you’re doing them amid daily terror, with the public bombing civilian targets where no observable military targets are around. So it’s a very different context than if you’re in a country that wants to transition and make some reforms systemically throughout its judicial system in a more relaxed context. It is much different. So, to convey to people the difficulties of doing this, there is a modest chance of death every day, as well as for those who work with you or even the judges themselves. There’s this constant pattering of alarms on your phone, alarms in the apps you can download that tell you where various missiles and UAVs are coming from, or the air raid alarms you might hear in the distance.

Zelinskyi: Yes. It was strange for me before the full-scale war, like how people live in Israel. It’s constant bombing and so on. These shellingss were nightmares, and it was, of course, frightening for me. I can speak for myself, but it’s common for people to be frightened in 2022 [when full-scale war started] . But now it’s three years of war, and we have become accustomed to it. It’s an environment that you cannot change. And if we see, for example, in our Telegram channels, if I see something dangerous like drones attack alert, I don’t care about it.  We don’t care about Shaheds, but if it’s missiles or ballistic rockets or something like that, of course we go to the shelters. But I don’t see it as a big problem in our work

But overall, it’s common stuff for Ukraine; understandably, people are accustomed to it. It’s something that is almost okay now. So, we don’t pay much attention. It’s dangerous. It’s frightening, but the brain works this way, and people become accustomed to anything, even bad things. 

Jacobsen: For most people, once they are there, it takes about two weeks, and then you don’t care. The alarm alerts you get on your phone become like annoying texts.

Zelinskyi: It depends. There are stronger people, but there are people with anxiety and so on, and this doesn’t work for them. It cannot be changed if they’re anxious, but with time, some can. They were frightened two or three years ago, and they are frightened now. So it’s an individual thing, but I described how it changed over the years for myself. 

Jacobsen: What part of judicial reform is the most critical that has not been done so far? What are the barriers to it? 

Zelinskyi: It’s a good question because it has a straightforward answer. It’s the Supreme Court. We had the Supreme Court of Ukraine in 2016, Ukraine’s most powerful judicial body. We could argue that the Constitutional Court is part of the system. Still, we could only pay attention to the general jurisdictions without this special constitutional stuff. It would be the Supreme Court. What was done in 2016 is not a reform, basically only the name was changed.

So they deleted “Ukraine,” in the name and it became the “new” Supreme Court. The process of judicial selection was compromised. We have a good idea that there was some sharing of the answers to the practical tasks, testing, and so on, and all the corrupted judges were successful during this selection. To give you an idea, we had four high specialized courts, and all heads of these courts became heads of these parts of the new Supreme Court. So, the officials, the leadership of the old Supreme Court moved to the new one— it stayed the same.

It was a good idea to start with the most influential court because all other courts are obliged to be in line with the decisions of the Supreme Court. There was a fault in the beginning and all the other changes—the good selection for the High Anti-corruption Court, okaish, selection for the HQCJ and HCJ, all other reforms now depend on the decisions of the Supreme Court. There are many bad decisions of this court—I could talk a lot about them—but the most famous was this one in the summer. It was even mentioned in Ukraine 2024 Report by EU Commission

So, nowadays, we must make a second attempt to reform this court. We have some tools. The HQCJ, for example, has the right to check judges’ declarations of integrity. Part of this declaration is when the judges state that their property is from declared income, so they have enough money to buy it legally, and so on.

However, most of their property comes from other sources, not official salaries. You may remember, in 2023, there was a case when the Head of the Supreme Court, Kniaziev, was caught with a $2,700,000 bribe. As we know from the prosecutor’s speeches, he asked during the call to prepare 13 black packages with money—$50,000 to $150,000 each for other judges. And we know for sure that some of these judges received them During a search, the NABU and prosecutors went to their apartments.

They checked all their belongings and  found money connected to the case because the investigators knew the serial numbers of the banknotes [these banknotes were marked by investigators previously]. But in the end, these judges said, “Oh, I borrowed this money from my chief” and that’s it. So, no one was caught except Kniazev… but we clearly understand that in this case, there were at least 13 judges involved.

So it’s one of the examples. There are others, but it’s the most significant or famous one. 

Jacobsen: Then, a lot of human rights abuse arguments that are made about Ukraine and Russia during this war have to be taken into account in terms of balancing scales. The international community condemned the aggression of the Russian Federation on February 24, 2022, with General Assembly Resolution ES-11/1, basically condemning the aggression, calling for the withdrawal of all troops and the return of all annexed land.

Ignoring abstentions, the international community voted 141 in favour of condemning that resolution, so accepting it, and only five against it, one of which was North Korea. So, you have a scale there of 141 to 5. It’s similar to this and many other war contexts when trying to implement judicial reforms during a war. If you were to make a comparative case, you look at the development since 2016. That was the earliest date referenced in this interview so far.

Suppose you take that date and look at the reforms in Ukraine, from the Supreme Court down to judicial reform and ethics. How does that compare or contrast with the Russian efforts to combat corruption in the Russian Federation? As far as I know, there are respected indices or indexes of corruption within a country. I haven’t looked at or done a detailed analysis of them. I should continue this work. Regardless, each country may have a legal or judicial subsection of the index score. How does the effort to combat corruption in the Russian Federation under the Kremlin, particularly President Vladimir Putin, compare to President Zelensky and Ukraine?

Zelinskyi: We cannot verify any figures from Russia about its budget and so on because it’s an authoritarian country. Russia presents numbers about its population, financial system, and so on as it wants. Putin decides what numbers should be published, and they do it. All other organizations cannot check whether it’s true or not.

If we talk about Ukraine, there have been many steps toward battling corruption. We see a lot of scandals in Ukraine connected with corruption, and we often perceive this as a bad sign—”Ukraine is so corrupt; it’s so bad; it cannot be changed.” Many efforts have been made, and people say, “Nothing changes.” But from my perspective, it’s a good sign that we have these scandals. It means that our anti-corruption bodies are working fine. They are finding these violations. They identify corrupt judges and start trials. So it’s a good sign. It’s a sign of battling corruption.

I didn’t answer how important it is to make judicial reform during the war. It’s not just taxi drivers who ask me about it; it’s also soldiers. They return on leave from the front line for a week or two. They all ask about how we deal with corruption, what changes have been made, whether bad judges have been dismissed, what’s happening with government reforms, etc. It’s the very stuff they are fighting for.

They believe in a bright future for Ukraine in the European Union—one where this country protects human rights, has a prosperous economy, and so on. They are ready to put their lives on the line to give this opportunity to others who are not on the front line, to people like me who work in Kyiv. They believe we can change something, which greatly motivates me. I know I’m not very good at fighting on the front line, but I’m good at fighting corrupt judges, government corruption, courts, etc.

I do my part, and seeing the results is satisfying. My previous job was in an IT company, where I was an in-house lawyer. I had a good salary, little work, and a happy life with sports activities —until this new work ruined that comfort.

That previous job sounds wonderful. What more do you want? But I didn’t feel I was doing something meaningful for this country. After about a year at this new job, I realized it is very important for Ukraine.

Maybe it’s not so obvious to Europeans or representatives of the United States and Canada. But we see reforms from our positions. It’s closer to us, and we see the little results day by day. Of course, it’s not perfect, but the progress is visible.

The judicial reform is halfway done or something like that. Of course, we don’t see much initiative from our government. We could see a bit of effort from Zelensky as a president. However, all the real reforms are pushed from outside by obligations to Ukraine from the European Union or the United States in exchange for financial support. This is how it works.

When our government hears, “Oh, please do this reform, and we will give you $1,000,000,000,” they do it. 

Jacobsen: It’s also part of human nature. The human species had existed for around a quarter of a million years when we speciated from some prior ancestor. So, human nature does not change over a month, a year, or even a thousand years. The point of judicial reform and law generally is to identify individuals breaking norms and laws as much as possible. When those cases come up, as you noted, it shows that the system is working. It doesn’t mean you’ve reformed the system completely or, more importantly, human nature. That’s the key point.

Zelinskyi: There is a Ukrainian saying that 10% of people will never take a bribe, no matter what. Another 10% will take a bribe at every possible opportunity, and the remaining 80% will decide based on their environment. Is it good or not for them to take a bribe? So, we are creating an environment where it is clear that taking a bribe will lead you to jail.

You agree that corruption exists in Canada and the United States. Maybe it’s not on the same scale. Still, it’s naive to think corruption is only in Ukraine or that corruption in the United States is eradicated.

Jacobsen: The character and degree are the two main factors. By character, I mean the overall landscape of corruption—the considered types and contexts. In some theocratic societies, for instance, blasphemy is considered a crime. In other contexts, it’s considered an imaginary crime.

In another context, people might say, “Well, I don’t care if you think it’s imaginary. I believe in that God, and you’ve offended him. Therefore, you have to abide by that belief.” 

Zelinskyi: Can you elaborate more on the concept of an “imaginary crime”? What does it mean?

Jacobsen: By “imaginary crime,” for instance, let’s say you are an ex-Muslim. You do not believe in Allah. You do not believe in God. You do not follow the precepts of Islam, like the Five Pillars. You don’t believe in the Quran or Muhammad as a prophet. You don’t believe he flew to heaven on a winged horse. You don’t believe in paying zakat, etc.

So, you don’t believe you can offend something you think doesn’t exist? The idea of blasphemy is to offend a religious entity. More accurately, it means you’ve offended someone’s religious feelings. Because you can’t offend a religious belief itself—it’s an abstraction. When people say “you’ve offended religious feelings,” they are talking about offending a person. That’s more accurate.

But these are religious laws, and religious laws are based on a belief in a god or gods. Suppose you reject a belief in a god. In that case, you also reject the premise for believing that offending God constitutes a crime. In some countries, however, religious laws, like blasphemy laws, are imposed on non-religious people. These laws are extended to cover so-called “cyber blasphemy” or blasphemy in general, leading to jail sentences.

A famous example is Mubarak Bala, a Nigerian atheist. He was jailed for about half of a decade over a one-sentence Facebook post that mocked Muhammad. The case demonstrates how these laws are weaponized, even in modern contexts, to suppress dissent or non-religious beliefs.

He was the president of the Humanist Association of Nigeria. So, that’s one particular case that comes to mind. But there are many cases like that. There are countries—maybe 10 or so—where, if you are an atheist, the punishment is death simply for believing that or for having a lack of belief. 

Yes, that’s what I mean by “imaginary.” From the point of view of someone who doesn’t believe, these are imaginary crimes. But they don’t have the privilege to impose oppressive laws. It’s the religious communities within theocracies that impose their legal identity on the non-religious.

There are different contexts for this. There are different types and degrees of corruption, and corruption exists everywhere. Liberals have their style, and conservatives have their style. Religious and non-religious people have their styles. It depends. Autocracies and democracies both struggle with corruption, especially during wartime.

Zelinskyi: Yes, everywhere. To provide some context, in Ukraine, I wanted to explain why I asked about “imaginary crimes.” For Ukraine, it’s a distant problem. We have legislation that I wouldn’t describe as soft. Still, it’s very difficult to sentence someone, even in obvious cases where a judge is caught with money or there’s video evidence. They can hire a lot of advocates, and so on and prolong the case hearings for years.

That’s why I’ve heard, even from some Canadians or Americans, that Ukraine is a place where they can come to have fun, drink alcohol, and so on. They know there’s no strict punishment for that kind of thing. As for the situations you mentioned about imaginary crimes like blasphemy, nobody really cares about that here. Ukrainians don’t take it seriously. We’re cheerful people.

Jacobsen: You even have underground hookah bars.

Zelinskyi: Do you like hookahs? 

Jacobsen: I tried them a couple of times when I was there. The whole point wasn’t to report on the war but to get a sense of the culture. I tried to participate in daily life—got a Vodafone number, used WhatsApp and Telegram, and learned two or three words that could get me through most interactions. They’d say something at the grocery store or Vodafone place, and I’d tap my card. Then, they’d smile and say, “Oh, such a polite boy,” and off I’d go.

Zelinskyi: Ukrainians are friendly, and if you learn a few words in Ukrainian, they’ll be happy to help.

Jacobsen: You occasionally run into a babushka who tells you her life story as an orphan. The air raid alarms are going off, you hear an explosion three kilometres away, and she’s committed to telling her story until she’s finished.

Zelinskyi: Did she described her life to you in Ukrainian without a translator?

Jacobsen: I used Google Translate to try to understand, but her whole thing was, “This is Putin’s era. It’s just like the old days. Nothing changes with those people. That’s how they are.” It’s very Eastern European. It’s fatalistic.

North Americans, particularly Americans, have that sort of arrogant, “can-do” attitude—if there’s a problem, we can solve it, and we need to resolve it. The reality lies somewhere in between. Many problems are probably intractable. Still, while they may not seem solvable, many things have solutions if you’re willing to invest the time.

It’s interesting to see how these cultural differences play out. You get a sense that people are working with what they have. That’s it. Go to a small Canadian town, then to a small Ukrainian town. What’s the difference? Not much. They all have someone they hate, and they all have their gripes about the government or their local issues.

And yes, they all have their struggles. Since Ukraine is such an older country than Canada, you go to different places, and you can tell. Some people live in an early 20th-century context—like the 1910s or 1920s. You’ll see a farmer with big, arthritic hands, wearing worn-out clothes, whipping cattle with a stick to get them across the road.

You’re driving in your car because you got lost and are trying to navigate through checkpoints in Sumy. Then suddenly, you get to Poltava, a semi-modern city relative to Canada. It’s a completely different context. Most people in Canada, especially Vancouver or Toronto, haven’t been out of the city.

Many people in Vancouver, Toronto, or other big cities have probably spent 95% of their lives in the city and its outskirts. That’s most of what they know. You get that same sense driving around Ukraine.

Es, the same thing. Ukraine is such a big country, especially in Europe. Travelling from London to Paris is a significant trip for a British person. For me, travelling from the suburbs to downtown Vancouver by train and bus takes three and a half hours. It’s exhausting.

Zelinskyi: Canada is 9 million square kilometres—15 times larger than Ukraine. Ukraine’s reasons for limited travel are different. Of course, it’s obvious why people haven’t travelled much since 2022. However, before 2017, we didn’t have visa-free European access.

You had to pay for visas and submit many documents, and there was no guarantee you’d get approved. For people from villages, it wasn’t even a consideration. They didn’t have money. Salaries in Ukraine are small—many earn only a few hundred dollars per month. For example, my parents are teachers. They’ve worked in schools for the last 30 years. My father earns about $600 monthly, and my mother earns around $450.

Jacobsen: Is that paid every two weeks?

Zelinskyi: They get paid every two weeks, but my father’s and mother’s monthly salaries are $600 and $450, respectively.

It’s enough for them because they live in a small town. They have their own house, and they don’t spend much. So they buy some food, household items, and so on. It’s okay for them, but it’s not enough to make a trip to Europe when you need to pay €30 for a meal. For them, that’s not acceptable.

Most people in Kyiv, though, have salaries of $1,000 to $1,500. They have more opportunities, and life in Ukraine is cheap. That’s why $1,500 is a good salary for us. With that, we can buy almost anything except for cars or buildings because they are expensive. Cars aren’t produced in Ukraine, so their prices are determined by automakers, and the same is true for property, like apartments.

I hope that explains things, and I’m sorry for the long answer. The issue with Russia is different. Over 90% of the Russian population has never been outside Russia—except maybe to Belarus or a vacation in Egypt. They think they are prosperous, that everyone lives like that, and they don’t see any issues with Putin.

They don’t make the straightforward connection: Russia sells a lot of oil, gas, and other resources—so why are we living in such poverty? They don’t think about it. They assume everyone lives like they do. That’s one of the reasons they believe in Putin and support him—because of extensive propaganda. They believe what they see on TV every evening.

I don’t know if it’s historical or cultural. Still, even when my grandpa was in Russia, he said Russians drank vodka a lot—it’s a lifestyle. I’m not talking about Moscow or big cities, of course. But in rural Russia, it’s common to come home from work at a plant or factory, drink vodka, and watch television. If you watch television for years and are exposed to only one perspective, you start to believe it.

Do you have any other questions for me, or is that it?

Jacobsen: I have a question regarding corruption—Transparency International’s Corruption Perceptions Index—if we check Ukraine, its rank is 104. It has gone up by 36 ranks. That’s 104 out of 180 countries. This is data up to 2023.

Of 180 countries, Ukraine was ranked 103, and it’s now gone up 30+ ranks. With further efforts, Ukraine will likely move into double-digit rankings, so it’s not as bad as before. In contrast, Russia is ranked 141 and has dropped from 2022 to 2023. It’s been on a downward slide since 2020. That’s the general condition.

Regarding the United States and Canada—certainly. The United States is ranked 24th, but it may be worse with 2025 approaching and many disgruntled people. Canada is ranked 12th and has been reasonably stable.

The country that ranked number one in 2023 was Denmark. Denmark is the least corrupt society on a relative metric. But on an absolute metric, in terms of the Corruption Perception Index, Denmark ranks 90 out of 100. Few countries get an “A,” and probably no country qualifies as an “A+.”

They’re looking at social justice, economic justice, human rights, peace, and security. So, Denmark is number one, followed by Canada, the United States, Ukraine, and Russia.

Ukraine is moving up, Russia is moving down, and Canada and the United States appear to have stabilized somewhat over the last few years. 

Zelinskyi: Corruption in Russia is like oil in a car engine—almost everything is done with bribes. In some cases, they tried to fight corruption, but in the end, everyone was too frightened to do anything without bribes. In some regions, their economy completely stopped because their way of doing business or running the state economy depended on corruption.

Only if the leadership changes  their economy could shift away from this corruption dependence. Right now, corruption might be helping them to function.

Jacobsen: As for the most corrupt country in the world, according to Transparency International, the most corrupt countries are Somalia, Syria, South Sudan, Venezuela, Yemen, North Korea, Nicaragua, Haiti, Equatorial Guinea, Turkmenistan, Libya, Tajikistan, Sudan, Myanmar, the Democratic Republic of the Congo, Comoros, Chad, Burundi, Afghanistan, Eritrea, São Tomé and Príncipe, Cambodia, Iraq, and Honduras, and so on.  Thank you so much for your time. 

Zelinskyi: Thanks. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

BCACC’s GST Exemption for Mental Health Services

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/19 (Unpublished)

Joshua Karunakaran serves as the Manager of Public Relations and Communications at the British Columbia Association of Clinical Counsellors (BCACC). In this role, he oversees the organization’s public relations strategies and communications efforts. The GST exemption for Registered Clinical Counsellors (RCCs) in British Columbia ensures that 5.7 million British Columbians have more affordable access to mental health services. Previously, RCCs had to prove “equivalent qualifications” in a regulated province, which was an impractical process. The BC Association of Clinical Counsellors (BCACC) collaborated with a regulatory college to confirm substantial equivalency, securing a blanket GST exemption from the Canada Revenue Agency (CRA) on December 20, 2024. This exemption will save $22.5 million annually and enhance employer-sponsored benefits, expanding mental health coverage for British Columbians. BCACC CEO Michael Radano and policymakers welcomed the decision.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is the main takeaway from the exemption from charging GST?

Joshua Karunakaran: The biggest takeaway is that 5.7 million British Columbians now have easier access to quality mental health services through reduced costs. It also puts BC’s mental health practitioners on par with those in regulated provinces of QC, ON, PEI, NS, and NB. 

Jacobsen: How many Registered Clinical Counsellors (RCCs) in BC will be affected by the GST exemption?

Karunakaran: Approximately 8,000+ Registered Clinical Counsellors in BC.

Jacobsen: Why was the first GST/HST exemption ruling problematic?

Karunakaran: On July 15, 2024, the Canada Revenue Agency stated that certain psychotherapists and counselling therapists are no longer required to collect the goods and services tax (GST) or the harmonized sales tax (HST) on their services. CRA stated that psychotherapists and counselling therapists need not charge GST/HST if they “operate in a province with no regulatory body but have the equivalent qualifications required to meet the licensing requirements in a regulated province and practice psychotherapy/counselling therapy”. 

To prove that their “equivalent qualifications” meet CRA’s requirements, each psychotherapist in BC would have to get a regulatory college in a regulated province to review both their qualifications and practice. Reviewing the credentials of 8,000 Registered Clinical Counsellors (RCCs), each requiring 1-2 weeks of work is a near impossible task which would take 20+ years to accomplish.

Jacobsen: How did the BC Association of Clinical Counsellors (BCACC) resolve the equivalency?

Karunakaran: The BCACC worked diligently and collaboratively with a regulatory college in a regulated province to author a formal letter requesting to evaluate the requirements of becoming an RCC with those of a practitioner in a regulated province. After a detailed analysis of BCACC’s registration requirements, the college confirmed that for the purposes of GST/HST exemption, the qualifications of RCCs are “substantially equivalent” to those registered with the college.

The BCACC then sent this letter to the CRA seeking a blanket GST/HST exemption for all RCCs, an exemption that the CRA confirmed on Dec 20, 2024.

Jacobsen: How did the CRA confirm the GST/HST exemption in BC?

Karunakaran: The CRA communicated this through a formal letter to the BCACC, addressed to our CEO, Michael Radano.

Jacobsen: Are there other provinces that had the same exemptions already?

Karunakaran: Yes. Provinces of QC, ON, PEI, NS, and NB are regulated provinces and therefore GST-exempt.

Jacobsen: How will this exemption improve access to mental health services?

Karunakaran: According to the Canadian Mental Health Association (CMHA), by age 40, 50% of the population will have experienced a mental illness, and 1 in 5 experience mental health problems annually. The incidence of mental health issues has also been rising, particularly since the COVID-19 pandemic.

If we extrapolate that 1 in 5 British Columbians experience a form of mental distress requiring psychotherapeutic services in a given year, we estimate that approximately 1.25 million British Columbians may seek psychotherapy or clinical counselling annually.

BCACC’s Registered Clinical Counsellors (RCCs) comprise 90% of psychotherapists and clinical counsellors practicing in British Columbia. Currently, our membership has over 8,000 members practicing across BC.

Each year, our Find a Counsellor tool averages approximately 125,000 visits from individuals seeking counselling services. If a British Columbian sees a counsellor twice a month at an average rate of $150 per session, the total cost of counselling services amounts to approximately $450,000,000 annually. Eliminating GST from these services results in about $22.5 million in savings for British Columbians. This estimate only accounts for private practice sessions and does not include individuals accessing counselling through social programs or health authorities. If we were able to account for all psychotherapy services provided, the total savings could be close to $45 million per year.

Another crucial implication is that many British Columbians can only access a limited number of counselling sessions through their extended health plans due to monetary caps. RCCs often charge significantly less than other mental health providers. With their services now exempt from GST, employers adding RCCs to their benefits plans can extend mental health coverage, ensuring that employees have access to more sessions while maximizing the value of their plans. The same holds true for publicly funded programs and other mental health service providers working in agencies and health authorities across BC.

Jacobsen: What have the BCACC CEO and other executives said about the GST exemption decision?

Karunakaran: “The BCACC welcomes the CRA’s decision to remove GST on psychotherapy services. This ruling ensures that every British Columbian has the same level of access to mental health services as those in regulated provinces. We look forward to working collaboratively with the CRA to ensure a smooth transition. The association is currently working to distill the information to its members through regular communiques so that they, in turn, can communicate this positive development to their clients” – BCACC CEO, Michael Radano

“Great news that Registered Clinical Counsellors in BC no longer have to charge GST on psychotherapy. Thanks to my colleague

@LMathys for championing this issue. This change will help make services more affordable for people needing support”

Gord Johns, MP – NDP, Courtenay-Alberni 

Jacobsen: Josh, thank you very much. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Randall Dottin on Film, Gaming, Teaching, and Mentoring

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/19 (Unpublished)

Randall Dottin, Chair of the Filmmaking Department at the New York Film Academy, discusses the evolving landscape of storytelling in film and gaming. He emphasizes the impact of the gaming industry, the importance of sound design, and AI’s role in filmmaking. He highlights the need for aspiring creators to master storytelling, develop collaboration skills, and embrace new technologies. Dottin stresses the significance of mentorship, encouraging students to believe in themselves and build strong industry relationships. He reinforces that storytelling remains constant despite shifting audience expectations and industry trends. The conversation ends with an appreciation for his insights.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Randall Dottin. He is an award-winning filmmaker and educator, currently serving as the Chair of the Filmmaking Department at the New York Film Academy in New York City. He holds a BA from Dartmouth College and an MFA from Columbia University’s Graduate Film Division. His thesis film, A-Alike, won a gold medal at the 2004 Student Academy Awards. He has directed projects such as Fevah and the documentary series The House I Never Knew, which was supported by the Sundance Institute. He has also mentored aspiring filmmakers and his students have achieved success in film and television across the United States and internationally. 

Thank you for joining me today—I appreciate it. Now, my first question: How does the revenue disparity between the gaming industry and the box office reflect changing audience consumption habits? For context, the gaming industry generates approximately $400 to $500 billion annually, while the global box office brings in around $25 to $30 billion. How does the revenue disparity between the gaming industry and the box office reflect changing audience consumption habits?

Randall Dottin: Yes, first, people have always been—and always will be—wired for storytelling. The gaming industry has caught up by creating incredibly immersive experiences for those who choose to game. It offers an experience similar to being immersed in cinema. However, gaming provides even more interactivity because players make decisions in real-time. People want the experience of being inside a story while having control over it.

That’s why the gaming industry has become increasingly popular, attracting more participants. Additionally, we have to consider the impact of the pandemic. Many people were stuck inside, looking for ways to engage with stories and entertainment.

And, of course, the streaming boom has affected watching and seeing films in theatres. At the height of the pandemic, there were over 500 shows worldwide airing at any given time. Several factors have contributed to this disparity. However, people worldwide still love to sit back in a movie theatre and experience a story with great characters, a meaningful message, and surprises.

Even though storytelling is universal, it speaks to each person differently. Despite the disparity, the future may shift—one year, gaming might be more dominant, and another year, movies may regain their edge. Regardless, people love immersive story experiences. More choice is good because it inspires and motivates those who create, produce, and distribute movies to craft even better experiences for audiences.

So that’s what I would say. As a filmmaker, I’m not afraid of it—I welcome it because it’s all about storytelling.

Jacobsen: Different industries have different types and degrees of penetrance for newcomers and aspiring creators. What are your recommendations for breaking into each industry?

Dottin: The bottom line is that you have to understand storytelling. You should know how it works. I often tell my students that if they know how to write a story, how to determine whether a story works or doesn’t, and how to provide constructive feedback on a story that hasn’t yet reached its potential, then they will always be able to find work in the industry. That has been my experience, and I’ve also seen it hold true for others.

Know storytelling inside and out. Understand how audiences respond. Get a strong grasp on how you can affect viewers by using characters to create emotion. If you’re a gamer, immerse yourself in various games—study the great ones, analyze how they function, and understand how they were created. Learning how games are structured is important, whether video games or board games. Knowing the mechanics of gaming, in addition to the storytelling aspect, is crucial.

For filmmakers, just like gamers, it’s essential to understand the history of your medium. You need to watch a ton of movies and understand how they work, how they draw audiences in, how they convey their themes, and how to create compelling characters with contradictions that make them more dynamic. If you master these skills—whether you’re in gaming or filmmaking—you will be able to break into the industry.

Jacobsen: Everyone experiences imposter syndrome at some point. Newcomers, in particular, probably feel it more than most. What are some perceived barriers to entry that people in these industries tend to exaggerate in their minds?

Dottin: Yes, there’s always the barrier in the story we tell ourselves—the thoughts that say, “I’m not smart enough,” “I don’t have enough money,” or “I don’t have enough time.” One thing I always tell filmmakers, based on my own experience, is that there’s never enough money and never enough time. Whether you’re a filmmaker making a movie on your phone or Steven Spielberg, there’s never enough money or time.

Spielberg made Lincoln on a budget of $50 million. For Spielberg, that’s low. Meanwhile, Marvel movies today average around $200 million per film. When Spielberg was making Lincoln, he purposely set limitations for himself. He knew that, in terms of box office potential, there was a certain range the film could achieve. If it outperformed expectations and became a blockbuster, great—but he wanted to ensure that he was making a movie sizable enough to tell the story he wanted while remaining fiscally responsible. So, again, there’s never enough money, never enough time.

Another barrier we create is comparison. In this era of social media, people often compare themselves to others who are much further along in their journey. That’s not healthy. Everyone has their own experience as they make films and build their craft. You must focus on becoming a better version of yourself daily—that’s what truly matters. Some people convince themselves that they’re not ready and need a specific time or type of preparation before moving forward.

And look, preparation is important. The more you prepare and consistently put in the work, the more your competence will grow. That’s how you get ready to face the challenges ahead. In boxing, the hardest lesson is the punch you don’t see coming. You’ll take that punch—I’m saying you’ll fail at some point. But after that failure, after making a film or doing an exercise that doesn’t work, you have to get back up and keep going.

That’s the nature of filmmaking. One of my favourite professors in film school used to say that everyone has about 50 to 100 bad films in them. To become a good filmmaker, you must get those bad films out of your system. Suppose you commit to putting in the time and practicing with discipline. In that case, you will emerge on the other side with a mastery that allows you to express yourself fully. That’s how you make the movie of your dreams—because that great film is already inside you, along with those 50 to 100 bad ones. So, keep going. That great movie is coming. But you have to give yourself time, patience, and grace.

Jacobsen: I’m reminded of the unexpected hits—like that Richard Pryor joke about his time with Muhammad Ali, where all you see is the punch coming back. So that’s phenomenal. For those in film, watching a movie is different now than it was 30 years ago. Watching a film in a theatre today isn’t the same experience—it’s changed with IMAX, 3D, and other options. Similarly, video games have evolved into immersive environments with new technological advancements. What skills would you recommend people develop that were not necessary before but could now be valuable in adapting to current and future technologies in gaming and film?

Dottin: Yes, if you’re a storyteller or a gamer, you’re also a magician. Magicians, when they practice their craft, are always surprising their audience. They lead you toward an ending or punchline you don’t see coming. They make you look left when the trick that will blow your mind comes from the right.

For that reason, both filmmakers and video game designers should study magic. Magic is not traditionally taught in film schools, but every magic trick is a story. Every trick has a beginning, middle, and end. Every trick leads you in one direction before surprising you, leaving you wondering how it happened.

One of the things that made Orson Welles one of the greatest filmmakers of all time was that he was a magician. If you watch the first 10 minutes of F for Fake, you’ll see how magic and film combine to create an incredible experience. That kind of storytelling approach is invaluable for both filmmakers and game designers.

Understanding sound is also crucial. Sound design is one of the most underappreciated yet powerful tools in storytelling. Traditionally, film schools haven’t placed much emphasis on sound, but that’s starting to change. Schools like the New York Film Academy now offer more sound design courses. For a long time, film schools primarily focused on developing writers, directors, producers, and cinematographers, but sound is just as critical.

When Ben Burtt, who won Oscars for his sound design work on Star Wars, started, he essentially created the role of “sound designer” as we know it today. His work helped define Star Wars and shaped how audiences experienced the film. George Lucas has said that making a movie is 60 to 70 percent sound. More than ever, filmmakers must understand how sound enhances storytelling—it helps create the film’s reality and unique cinematic language.

The same applies to gaming, especially with the rise of virtual reality. In VR gaming, sound plays an enormous role in storytelling. Like in film, sound design helps create immersive experiences, adds emotional depth, and guides the player’s perception of the game world. It’s another way to introduce the unexpected—the magic.

So, I would tell both filmmakers and game designers to focus on studying magic and sound design. These two skills weren’t emphasized as much 20, 30, or 50 years ago. Still, they are becoming increasingly essential in today’s industry.

Jacobsen: What about the use of AI in virtual production? How do you see the development of those skills or the role of working with AI algorithms to enhance the talent and creativity already present?

Dottin: Yes, AI can be incredibly helpful, especially when shooting on a volume stage—the kind used for many scenes in The Mandalorian. If you’ve seen The Batman, the scenes set inside the building where the Bat-Signal is located—those with the sunset behind them or the Gotham skyline in the background—were all shot on a volume stage.

It’s an efficient tool for filmmakers because it removes many constraints of shooting on location. You don’t have to worry about daylight conditions or capturing scenes at specific times to get the right look. Volume stages are great, though they can be somewhat restrictive regarding the variety of shots you can achieve. Still, they help filmmakers work more efficiently.

I see AI as a tool. Many people view AI as something negative, even a threat, at least at this point. But AI is just another tool—Spellcheck is AI. Grammarly is AI. Some people use AI to brainstorm, generate different ways to explain ideas or assist with writing. I don’t use AI when writing fiction because I prefer to rely on my imagination. But if someone feels they need AI for that, I say go for it.

AI-generated images can also be useful, especially at the beginning of the previsualization (previs) process. However, as you go deeper into concept art and design, bringing in a human artist is important. An artist can provide nuance, depth, and complexity—things AI can’t quite deliver at this stage.

So, in my opinion, AI is a great tool. As long as it is used responsibly, it can be beneficial—whether in gaming, filmmaking, or other creative fields.

Jacobsen: As a mentor and educator, how have your mentorship and teaching styles evolved from the education you received back in the day?

Dottin: It hasn’t changed much. That’s a good question. The core of it remains the same. What I mean by that is that the principles of storytelling have been around for thousands of years. Those core principles are constant. How I teach directing or screenwriting—its foundation—has not changed. Every story is still about someone who desperately wants something but struggles to get it. The question remains: How do we create a story that evokes emotion?

How do we create characters that generate empathy and move an audience? How do we craft a story with a strong theme that resonates with viewers? These fundamental aspects of storytelling haven’t changed.

What has changed, however, is the audience. Today’s audiences are smarter and more media-savvy. They have less patience for stories that don’t work. They crave narratives that surprise them and evoke emotions they didn’t expect.

Teaching filmmaking is about creating experiences for audiences who already know the clichés, tropes, and the hero’s journey. Because audiences are familiar with these storytelling paradigms, students must also understand them. Whether we realize it or not, we are all wired for a story—we inherently recognize when something works and doesn’t.

Suppose we train ourselves in storytelling and its various paradigms and understand the processes and tools that help shape a compelling narrative. In that case, we can create stories that truly resonate with audiences. That’s what I emphasize in my teaching. I ensure that my students grasp these tropes, paradigms, and techniques to craft stories that engage rather than turn off a discerning audience.

Mentorship, for me, has also remained largely the same. Students don’t necessarily care about how much you know—they care about how much you care. That’s the bottom line. People want to feel you genuinely care about their progress, education, and growth. I believe that relationships come before tasks.

Building strong relationships allows you to collaborate effectively and produce great work—great films and stories. I always tell my students that 95% of my jobs in this industry, including my teaching position at the New York Film Academy, have come from my classmates. Almost every job I’ve had came through those connections.

So when I mentor students, I teach them about craft, but I also stress the human element. Being a great collaborator is just as important as mastering the technical side. That means giving insightful feedback on someone else’s script. That means showing up for a classmate’s shoot and working just as hard as a grip, a gaffer, or a camera assistant as you would if you were the director.

There’s an old saying that you get out of an education what you put into it. I believe that’s true, but I also believe that your peers—your cohort—will get what you put in from it. That sense of shared effort is just as important, if not more.

Mentorship is about instilling a strong belief in students—that they can do it. If they truly believe they can, then they can accomplish anything. At the same time, I stress the importance of collaboration because filmmaking is incredibly difficult to do alone.

Jacobsen: Randall, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it.

Dottin: No, thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mathew Giagnorio, ‘A Further Inquiry’ and ‘Modes of Inquiry’

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/18

Mathew Giagnorio is an Italian-Canadian podcaster, writer, and researcher based in Niagara, Ontario. With an academic background in philosophy and classics, he is passionate about fostering intellectual debate and evidence-based discussions. He is the founder of Modes of Inquiry, a podcast and A Further Inquiry, an online magazine and podcast that explore diverse perspectives, freedom of expression, and contemporary issues. Deeply influenced by his Italian heritage and family traditions, Giagnorio blends cultural pride with a commitment to liberal values. Inspired by his late mother’s encouragement to “never stop,” he channels his curiosity and resilience into creating meaningful content that connects audiences across Canada and beyond. Giagnorio reflects on the Italian community’s pride in traditions and its integration into Canadian culture. Giagnorio recounts his challenging early life in Niagara, where a childhood accident caused a brain injury and severe epilepsy, derailing his prodigious talents. Facing relentless bullying and educational struggles, he harnessed adversity to develop resilience and academic excellence. Embracing his Italian heritage, particularly his Pugliese roots, he cherished family traditions while adapting to modern life. Inspired by his great-grandfather’s critical spirit and philosophical heroes like Spinoza, he transformed pain into purpose. Giagnorio founded Modes of Inquiry and A Further Inquiry to champion free expression and evidence-based debate, celebrating learning, diversity, and the relentless pursuit of truth with steadfast resolve.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What was your early life like in Niagara?

Mathew Giagnorio: Well, that’s a good question, Scott. My early life in Niagara took a drastic turn at a young age. At five and a half years old, I slipped and fell on a wet surface at a restaurant with no sign indicating that the floor had been recently cleaned. There was no warning to watch out for the wet floor.

From that moment on, at five and a half years old, I had an acquired brain injury, which drastically changed my life. Before the injury, I was considered a child prodigy. I attended early childhood education programs, started speaking at a younger age than most peers, and was exceptionally inquisitive. However, after the injury, I began experiencing grand mal seizures, petit mal seizures, and other types of epileptic episodes. Most people with epilepsy have one type of seizure, but I endured the full spectrum.

This continued for nine and a half to ten years of my life, during which I also faced intense bullying throughout elementary school. I was an easy target—just a kid having seizures. My peers did not care; they only saw someone acting strangely. The bullying was relentless and made my primary school years extremely difficult. It was never a good experience.

Fortunately, I had a strong support system within my family. I never lost sight of who I was. I loved learning, but I hated the school environment. It always felt like I was stepping into a fire to retrieve something valuable. Despite the challenges, I worked on myself from a young age—figuring out what I wanted to do, what I wanted to read, what I wanted to focus on, and even how I wanted to present myself.

As a ’90s kid, most people around me were interested in style, hair, and clothing, but I had my unique approach. I sought ways to stand out and best represent myself and my ideas. I developed a deep fondness for menswear—not just as a personal interest but also as a form of armour in the world. The way I dressed became a reflection of my identity and a means of self-expression.

On a side note, I have been happily seizure-free and free from epileptic episodes since before I turned 14, for which I am incredibly grateful. Those years were a nightmare, but I do not look back wishing it had never happened. In many ways, the experience shaped me. It forced me to value the learning process because I had to relearn everything—how to read, write, and even write in cursive.

To illustrate the profound impact of my injury, consider something as simple as taste and memory. Most people take for granted that they know what they like and dislike. I, on the other hand, lost those reference points. I did not even recognize my food preferences. For example, as a child, I loved pineapple—almost to an obsessive degree. Then, after the injury, I found myself mouthing the word “pineapple” without understanding what it was or why I had once liked it.

Do I even recognize this? I didn’t even know what it was referring to. So, it was a horrible time. Amid the sadness and contemplation, my refuge became learning. My refuge became understanding.

But then, obviously, there is a limitation to learning, data, and information.

So, I ended up working on myself in such a way that I matured at a young age. I had to grow up quickly. I found myself always gravitating toward timeless and traditional things in their worth or value. But always, and still to this day, I have maintained an open mind. I have wanted to be someone who is never limited in their perspective or friendships and does not lead with a closed mentality.

Even when I went into high school, my life after that point was different. I was the guy everybody wanted to know. I started working out when I was 12 or 13, lifting weights and playing soccer. That became an outlet for me, a way to boost my morale and find another hobby. Because, let’s be honest—it was frustrating. There was much anger and much energy, all stemming from being bullied.

And no matter how much you stand up for yourself when you have two, three, or four people against one, you are going to take a beating. You are not going to win every fight. My mentality was that I did not want to go down that route perpetually. I did not want to be the guy who was always fighting back. I wanted to stand up for myself and push myself forward—to build character, integrity, and perseverance.

Those are valuable skills, no matter who you are, where you are in the world, and what you are going through—externally or internally.

I made a conscious choice: I would not let all this negative energy, frustration, or sadness consume my thoughts and dictate my days. Instead, I would allow myself to focus diligently on things that propel me forward, both educationally and personally.

That brings me to where I am today. When I look back at everything, I do not take any of it for granted. Every opportunity that I create, every person I am lucky to call a friend or colleague, humbles me.

I am more humbled by everything that has happened than by having a mindset of, Oh, of course, this is happening for me. Look at everything I have done to achieve it.

I could say that, but I still find myself saying, Wow. I remain humbled because I know what could have been had I not pushed myself. No matter what someone is going through, they can have a good network of friends and family around them. Still, if they do not have the will to push themselves forward, if they do not have the will to create who they are, then they will remain stagnant.

Everyone wants to discover who they are, but that is a lost cause. You have to create the person you want to be. And that comes from every situation you are involved in, every context you experience, and every obstacle you face.

Instead of simply overcoming obstacles, I am a big proponent of pushing through them—using those obstacles to my advantage.

Whatever might seem like a hiccup, a handicap, or a limitation in a particular time and place could be an advantage, depending on how you perceive it.

Even to this day, I still have some lingering issues from my head injury. But thankfully, it is nowhere near as bad as it once was.

But it is head to hand.

When it comes to writing—anyone who knows me well knows I am a walking conundrum. The most arduous things are often the things I love the most. Getting my thoughts from my head to my hand in writing is a challenge. And, to make it even harder, I most often write in cursive.

I had to relearn how to do that. It isn’t easy, but I have learned to love it. I have a vast collection of fountain pens, so I can enjoy the process and make sure I am always practicing. Although it is easier to express myself through speaking, even typing can sometimes be difficult. But I never allowed these obstacles to become real limitations.

I pushed through them, worked through them, and found ways to adapt. If there was a hiccup—if something was not my strength—then I asked myself, “What is my strength?” My answer was my oral abilities, my ability to express myself through speech, and my ability to take complex ideas, explain them to others, and also explain them to myself before articulating them clearly.

At the time, even doctors—renowned not only in Ontario or Canada but across North America—told my family that they should, quote, think of Matthew as a child who is dead. This is a new person.

According to them, there was no hope for me. If I was lucky, I might finish elementary school. But beyond that? High school was out of reach. College or university? It was not even a possibility. It was not in the deck of cards.

And yet, I proved them all wrong.

I graduated high school—not just barely, but successfully in every way: socially, academically, and personally. With a high GPA, I went on to university. I pursued my passion in the humanities, classics, and philosophy—something unheard of, given what had been predicted for me.

But then again, I never allowed other people’s labels or narratives to limit me. I wanted to be expansive.

I wanted to try.

I wanted to see it.

As with everything in life—yes, it may sound cliché—but you do not know what is possible until you try. I approached everything with the mindset that I could do it to the best of my abilities. I refused to half-ass anything. To this day, I still want to throw myself into things to see what I am capable of.

Jacobsen: Were there any particularly Italian family tales of travelling to Canada and becoming multigenerational Canadian families?

Giagnorio: Well, that is interesting.

Like many Italian-Canadian families, we have a lot of stories. I am a fourth-generation Italian—well, at this point, I suppose you could call me Canadian-Italian.

We had interesting stories about family members who came over and the odd jobs they did to get by. Every family has those tales—about somehow acquiring property, building homesteads, and establishing traditions.

The family gatherings were big—really big—and they always came with elaborate stories. We grew up hearing about these moments that connected us to our family, our traditions, and, in many ways, our cultural rituals.

I was fortunate enough to know my great-grandparents. At the same time, they were still alive, and we shared traditions passed down for generations. These were small, meaningful cultural rituals—little moments where they would say, You are now a part of this. We are now doing this together.

You are not just observing it and coming along—we are a family. We are doing these things together now. It was always done in a way where you were not only enjoying the traditions at the moment but also learning them so you could carry them forward. You were experiencing, observing, and preserving them for the future.

There were some interesting stories.

My family comes from Puglia, in La Provincia di Foggia, in southern Italy. In contrast, most Italian families in Niagara come from Calabria, so that was an interesting distinction in itself. Our regional language is different from the Calabrese dialect and certainly vastly different from standard Italian. It has a significant Greek influence, as well as Spanish influences. That always fascinated me—where we came from and the stories that came with it.

Even our last name captivated me from the time I was maybe 12 or 13 and certainly from 13 or 14 onwards. I became deeply interested in the meaning behind our surname after hearing stories from my great-grandfather. It comes from the Roman god Janus, and our family name is an Italianization of Janus and its meaning.

We still have family in Italy, and even a street named after us in our hometown. Our name is rare—it is not Rossior Esposito or one of the more common Italian surnames. It is exclusive to that one area in Puglia, and I took great pride in that, particularly in a regional sense.

I often say that I am four generations removed from Italy. While I may not have fully understood what it meant to be Italian broadly, I knew what it meant to be Pugliese. I took great pride in that regional identity. In Italy, they have a strong sense of campanilismo—a pride in one’s region or town—and I felt that deeply.

There is a language connection, a cultural connection, and a connection through food, drink, and the little ways we do things differently. That was always important to me.

My appreciation and excitement grew when I spoke with my Italian friends and realized that many of them were generically proud to be Italian but often did not even know the village or city their family came from. Many did not speak Italian at all. That made me even prouder that my family had preserved our heritage.

My great-grandparents upheld the language and the traditions. Their children did not speak much of it because they wanted them to assimilate and speak English, but I was incredibly eager to learn. Every Sunday, we would go to my great-grandparents’ house. After dinner, we would drink coffee, play scopa, and talk.

I had the unique opportunity to learn Neapolitan from my great-grandmother—whose family was from Salerno—and Barese, the regional language of Puglia, from my great-grandfather, who had learned it from his father. The fact that my family stood out even within the Italian community in Niagara always made me proud. We were different. We were not just part of the general Italian diaspora—we had something unique to preserve and pass down. That always intrigued me.

I took—and still take—great pride in that. I am proud to be Pugliese. I am proud of our region’s history. Understanding where I came from helps me understand where I am going.

When I look at my family’s journey—where my ancestors came from, often from poverty—I see resilience. If you go back far enough, the entire south of Italy was under a feudal system. To know that my family, after traversing the world, has made a good life for itself means something profound.

To me, that proves that no matter the obstacles, no matter where your starting point is, you can achieve anything—if you put in the effort and cultivate the mindset that says:

“Yes. I can.”

Jacobsen: How do you feel that your time here has impacted your identity while living in Niagara? You have touched on this indirectly.

Giagnorio: That is a good question.

I have thought more about this recently, especially in conversations with friends who do not live in Niagara or are not originally from here. People take unique traits and commonplace customs for granted while living in Niagara—especially in Niagara Falls.

For example, the number of coffee drinkers in Niagara Falls outranks the national average. That is a tall order, but it is an interesting cultural detail.

Growing up here influenced me in many ways, particularly in my desire to understand local history, the history of Italians in Canada, and their contributions. I remember feeling slightly frustrated at times when people would say something well-meaning but overly simplified, such as:

“If you have Italian blood, you must keep up the culture.”

It is not an obligation to preserve the culture exactly as it was, but rather to understand it. The real responsibility is to understand Italian-Canadian culture because it is distinct.

This perspective shaped how I perceive complexity, evolution, and the distinction between culture and heritage. Heritage is not static—it is the adaptation and modernization of culture over time.

I became fully aware of the balance between embracing progress while still valuing traditions and rituals. Being open to the new does not mean wholly rejecting the old. It is possible to integrate traditions meaningfully—where they may not be exactly as they were, but they still exist in a form that allows them to be preserved.

This reminds me of a famous quote from the Sicilian novel The Leopard (Il Gattopardo). The quote says:

“If we want everything to stay the same, everything must change.”

I am very fond of that line. It resonated with me deeply, not just in theory but also in practice.

If we want things to survive, we must adapt to the world as it is now.

A perfect example of this adaptation—one that seems universal among Italian Canadians—is how wine is diluted. In Italy, wine was traditionally mixed with water for children, and even during the Renaissance, it was considered safer for pregnant women due to its antibacterial properties. But Italian Canadians did something different.

Instead of diluting wine with water, as in the Old Country, they mixed it with Canada Dry ginger ale. I have always been fascinated by this. It is a small but telling example of how traditions evolve in new environments. There are so many facets of this that I find interesting.

For me, learning the Italian language, wanting to speak it fluently, and understanding the journeys that Italian-Canadians took became a way of wanting to understand Italian culture broadly, my regional culture specifically, and Italian-Canadian culture.

This included learning about both the joys and sorrows—the beauty, the festivals, the happiness, but also the struggles, such as the internment of Italian-Canadians during World War II.

I wanted to understand not just the story of my own family but the experiences of Italian Canadians on a broader scale. This was a deeper, more profound way to understand what it means to be both Canadian and Italian.

This holds true for anyone whose family has immigrated from another country. If you have been in Canada for multiple generations, it is important to understand what that means—what your family has gone through and what your people have endured.

This awareness has shaped me. I never feel far removed from my heritage. I want to understand it so I can appreciate the efforts, struggles, and contributions that came before me.

I also want to ensure that I never dismiss something simply because it is deemed “old-fashioned.” As I mentioned before, I believe that tradition and modernity can be merged.

That realization had a significant impact on me. It reinforced that life is not about unquestioningly embracing the new but about allowing the new to emerge while integrating the traditions of a people or culture.

This perspective also shaped my understanding of history. It made me want to explore history in a way that emphasizes continuities and connections, which are extremely important to me.

A lot of that comes from my background. To me, nothing is that far removed from something else. History is not a linear progression—it is more like a spiderweb of interconnecting points and departures.

This had a huge effect on how I view history, how I approach learning, and how I think about the past, present, and future.

Even my last name has had a significant philosophical impact on me.

Janus—the Roman god my surname derives from—is the god of January, the god of new beginnings, portals, and doorways. It is a dual-headed deity, symbolizing a balance between times. The younger, clean-shaven face looks toward the future, while the older, bearded face looks toward the past.

This is a constant reminder that I must live in the present moment. This is what is happening in the world. This present moment—this is reality. But I do not negate the future, and I do not dismiss the past.

Jacobsen: Have intellectual strands of Canadian and Italian niche culture influenced your views on freedom of expression?

Giagnorio: That is an interesting question. To some degree, Italian culture has not influenced me in that way. Still, my own family certainly has—especially my great-grandfather.

He only had a Grade 6 education, yet he was exceptionally insightful. He was largely self-taught—an overhead welder by trade—but I would put his intellectual aptitude up against anyone. He was a brilliant speaker, full of insight, and always asked thought-provoking questions.

One thing that always stood out to me was that, despite being born in 1920, he did not fully embrace Catholicism. That was profound to me.

Looking back years later, I realized just how unusual that was. He was critical and outspoken. I remember him telling me stories about how his friends in the community would mock him or dismiss his views—Oh, Joe…—and laugh it off. But he was serious.

He openly criticized the wealth of the Church, questioning why they wanted money from him when he was a working-class man—often struggling, at times below middle-class. He had no problem respecting tradition but believed it should be open to criticism. He did not see religion as something untouchable or beyond question.

That was fascinating, especially considering the period he grew up in when absolute acceptance, obligation, and devotion were the norm. For him, though, it was different.

He went to Church, but mainly for his wife. His criticism was not dismissive—it was thoughtful and academic. I say that as a compliment because he loved learning.

Despite only having a Grade 6 education, he spoke multiple languages and had a sharp intellectual curiosity. He constantly asked, Why? Why shouldn’t we question this? Why shouldn’t we criticize this? Who says we can’t?

In many ways, my great-grandfather was my first introduction to critical inquiry and free speech, as well as to Stoicism.

He was stoic—not in suppressing emotions, but in self-discipline, resilience, and wisdom. He knew how to feel, how to express emotion, how to love and be affectionate, but also when to be stern and assertive when necessary.

He was a full, well-rounded human being—a man who balanced strength and sensitivity, intellect and practicality. This had a deep impact on me in my early years, shaping my own understanding of what it means to be a well-rounded person in the world.

Jacobsen: Who are your intellectual heroes?

Giagnorio: Spinoza is one of my intellectual heroes. I am very fond of Spinoza. Christopher Hitchens is another. Yasmine Mohammed is an intellectual hero of mine. Ayaan Hirsi Ali as well.

Jacobsen: So, what led you to expand this pride and curiosity into the audiovisual realm for Modes of Inquiry and A Further Inquiry?

Giagnorio: Interesting. The basis for creating Modes of Inquiry came just after the pandemic. It was a difficult time for me—my mom passed away during the pandemic. She was everything to me.

I started Modes of Inquiry after several months of research and preparation. I wanted to figure out how to launch it and create it properly. A friend of mine, who has a background in radio work and DJing, encouraged me to try it. He said, “Just do it.” And I thought, “Why not? Let’s try it out.”

I started reaching out to people I knew. My academic background is in philosophy and classics; I love research—that’s my forte. I enjoy data and evidence-based work. I could divert the sadness and energy from those long, aimless walks and channel it into something positive. That positivity became Modes of Inquiry.

At the time, I referred to this as “junk energy,” like Christopher Hitchens described burning the candle at both ends. But I turned that “junk energy” into something meaningful. The joy and overwhelming response I received from this effort were exponential. It allowed me to connect with more people, expand my contacts, and gain recognition for my work in ways I hadn’t experienced outside of my academic or social circles. It continues to pay off.

Eventually, I thought, “I love writing—I’ve been published in places in the UK and Canada—why not try something on my own?” This idea connected to something my mom once told me. Before she went on a respirator, near the end of her life, she said, “Matthew, never stop. The world needs you, even if it doesn’t deserve you. Don’t stop.”

That has been my driving force—my fortitude. It’s pushed me to succeed for myself, discover my limits, create, and find joy in what I can do. I haven’t found my limits yet, and even when something doesn’t work out, I don’t see it as failure—I see it as learning how to reconfigure things.

This drive led me to launch AFI (The Further Inquiry). Initially, it was a solo project, but I decided to expand it into a magazine. I wanted to collaborate with people I knew, so I recruited Khadija Khan from the UK as the Editor of Politics and Culture.

And that brings us to the present.

Jacobsen: Some values there are freedom of expression and diversity of viewpoints. How does this approach allow for broad leverage regarding whom you can funnel into or recruit for publishing opinion pieces and news articles, or being guests on A Further Inquiry?

Giagnorio: That’s a good question. I enjoy fostering debate. I’d rather raise a pen and an argument than raise a fist. That’s a necessity we’ve lost.

I want to feature people who can present information and data and make a strong case—not just a series of opinions but well-supported, evidence-based arguments. It’s about showcasing what’s happening on the ground, whether it’s events in the UK, Canada, the US, or, more broadly, the Middle East.

At the same time, I avoid inviting fanatics. Fanaticism should not be conflated with heterodoxy or freedom of speech. If anything, freedom of speech allows fanatics to expose themselves for who they are, so you shouldn’t associate with them. This approach has enabled readers to explore their thoughts in ways they might not have been encouraged.

Jacobsen: How do you see these as cleansing agents—this combination of freedom of expression tied to liberalism and heterodoxy, positioned against extremism? While some might avoid certain conversations, you dive in at a fulcrum point to say, “Look at this and look at this,” providing not necessarily a balanced view but an evidence-based perspective.

Giagnorio: Well put—yes, it will be evidence-based. It has to be evidence-based. That doesn’t mean it will always be in the middle ground, but it will land where the truth lies.

As one of the mottos of Further Inquiry says, truth has no home. I’m reminded of what Oscar Wilde said to his son: the old Oxford model emphasized playing gracefully with ideas, which is a key feature here.

When you’re led by freedom of expression, guided by a liberal framework, and rooted in data, it becomes easier to discern truth from nonsense. This allows people to encounter ideas they might otherwise ignore, even if those presenting them don’t necessarily like each other.

It’s about exposing ideas to audiences who might not be aware of them, providing context, origins, and the controversies surrounding those ideas. This, in turn, fosters better ideation and the formulation of positive, well-grounded concepts.

When it comes to freedom of expression, I think we often forget it’s not just about my right to speak—it’s also about my right to listen and, indeed, my right to read.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts?

Giagnorio: Love is the only subject. Allow truth, love, and understanding to be guides in your life. 

Jacobsen: Mathew, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Giagnorio: Absolutely. It’s been a pleasure.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Omima Jabal on Human Rights and Sudan

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/17

Omima Jabal, a Sudanese humanitarian, volunteer in the Emergency Response Room (ERR), a grassroots initiative providing critical aid during the war between the Sudanese Armed Forces (SAF) and the Rapid Support Forces (RSF). Initially focused on disaster relief, ERR expanded its work in response to the war, providing food distribution, medical aid, and civilian protection while maintaining neutrality. Jabal explains that USAID funding cuts have severely impacted local civil society organizations, forcing projects to freeze and depriving communities of essential food, medical care, and protection. This shortage intensifies resource scarcity, conflict, and human rights abuses. Despite challenges, grassroots and women-led groups continue coordinating aid and advocating for flexible international funding. Jabal calls for urgent policy changes to ensure humanitarian assistance reaches vulnerable Sudanese communities and supports local initiatives amid instability.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: The Trump administration came into power following the U.S. election. One of its early policy changes was cutting funding to USAID. What impact has this had on the Sudanese people?

Omima Jabal: The effects have been significant and widespread, causing considerable harm. The decision has particularly impacted Sudanese civil society organizations (CSOs), many of which have relocated to neighboring countries. These organizations relied heavily on USAID funding.

As soon as the funding cuts were implemented, most CSOs froze their projects, halting ongoing initiatives. These projects had two key aspects: one focused on direct collaboration with grassroots groups, including the ERR and other community-led initiatives.

With USAID funding frozen, all projects dependent on this financial support came to a standstill. People on the ground are now deeply concerned about the resulting shortages, limiting access to essential daily needs.

Another significant impact is on individuals employed by Sudanese national organizations. Many of these employees are the primary providers for their families, whether in Sudan or abroad. Without funding, they can no longer support themselves, let alone their dependents.

Overall, this decision has significantly reduced Sudan’s already limited humanitarian aid. Previously, Sudan had been promised additional funding from USAID and other sources. However, with these cuts, those commitments have been withdrawn.

Given the rapidly deteriorating situation, this lack of funding places people at severe risk, affecting their ability to meet basic needs such as food, shelter, and medical care.

This is a major concern. As Sudanese people and as CSOs, we urge the U.S. government to reconsider this decision, as it has affected the lives of millions. This funding is critical for humanitarian efforts.

Jacobsen: How does the reduction in USAID funding contribute to an increase in human rights abuses for the Sudanese people?

Jabal: It ultimately comes down to funding. As mentioned, many Sudanese civil society organizations (CSOs) and grassroots groups depend on USAID funding. Cutting this funding creates a financial shortfall.

A lack of funds means a lack of resources, leading to multiple crises. The scarcity of resources can cause conflicts among people struggling to survive with few available resources.

Sudan is already facing a severe resource shortage. Without external support, competition over these scarce resources can escalate into violence.

Additionally, when essential aid—such as food and medical assistance—is cut off, it directly impacts people’s survival, leading to widespread human rights violations. The fundamental rights of the Sudanese people to receive humanitarian aid and support are being severely undermined by these funding cuts.

Jacobsen: What specific human rights standards should be in place to protect humanitarian workers and volunteers operating in active conflict zones?

Jabal: This is a difficult question we’ve been asked many times. There is no single way to guarantee the protection of aid workers on the ground, but some measures can be taken.

First, the international community must officially recognize these individuals as humanitarian workers, even if they are not affiliated with a registered organization.

Second, it is crucial to ensure that funding channels remain open and uninterrupted. This would allow aid workers to continue delivering assistance at different levels despite their challenges. However, there is no universal solution if we talk about concrete procedures to protect aid workers.

It ties back to the broader issue of protection, which I have discussed previously. If aid workers face immediate danger, they need to be relocated—either within Sudan or outside the country—depending on their willingness and the level of safety available to them.

Jacobsen: When gathering data in grassroots initiatives, what are the challenges regarding transparency, accountability, and data security? Given the context, these systems are not necessarily operating in secure conditions.

Jabal: Yes. That is one of the key challenges—ensuring information availability while maintaining security.

Volunteers working on the ground face significant risks, including threats of kidnapping. Women, in particular, are at heightened risk of sexual violence.

Another major issue is data availability. The necessary information exists, but due to the lack of internet access and limited resources, much remains inaccessible or is only available in physical form—written on paper rather than stored digitally.

Even when data is collected, accessibility is limited, and only a small fraction of the information reaches those who need it. Additionally, being an aid worker in Sudan is inherently dangerous. The risks of collecting and handling data make this work even more challenging.

Jacobsen: What about support from the Sudanese diaspora outside of Sudan, whether financial or through expertise? How do you build networks with those individuals?

Jabal: The Sudanese diaspora plays a crucial role in this crisis. At the beginning of the war, there was no support from international organizations or external funding—everything depended on the Sudanese diaspora, which became the primary channel for funding.

Even now, after USAID funds have been frozen, the Sudanese diaspora continues to work collectively to support people on the ground financially.

There is no single mechanism for managing Sudanese diaspora engagement. It largely depends on geographical areas. Diaspora groups are often organized based on location, forming networks within neighbourhoods or communities. This structure varies from one grassroots group to another. Their contributions are primarily personal donations, which grassroots groups manage directly.

Another major contribution from the diaspora is advocacy. They actively campaign for Sudanese communities, raising awareness and influencing international discussions. Overall, the Sudanese diaspora is a fundamental pillar in localizing aid and ensuring that support reaches those who need it. As Sudanese, we are working hard to strengthen these efforts and tailor aid distribution to the needs of local communities.

Jacobsen: Destruction is an obvious tragedy. However, the silver lining is the potential for reconstruction—an opportunity to build within a rights-based framework for civil society while ensuring sustainable and inclusive development.

What opportunities do you see despite the tragedy? Because in my interactions with you, you seem optimistic and solutions-oriented.

Jabal: Regarding this, grassroots groups today represent the future of Sudan. The high level of youth engagement in these groups and initiatives creates real hope for the development of Sudanese civil society. We have internal challenges within civil society, but grassroots organizations actively work to overcome these obstacles.

In some ways, they have already fostered an environment in which Sudanese national organizations and grassroots groups—whether ERRs, community initiatives, or other networks—are beginning to coordinate more effectively.

This coordination mechanism is key. The opportunity is to develop a structured and collaborative approach between Sudanese civil society and the international community. This will allow aid, solutions, and funding to be tailored to the real needs of the Sudanese people, with their input at different levels and across various regions.

Another major opportunity is using this coordination to strengthen the capacities and skills of grassroots groups. We are also preparing them for Sudan’s future by supporting them in implementing locally driven solutions.

Jacobsen: Given their unique vulnerabilities in these contexts, how should support for women and children and their rights be addressed?

Jabal: Protecting women and children is essential. The Emergency Response Room (ERR) has taken several steps to address these issues.

While we recognize the need to promote women’s rights, most grassroots groups are led by women and manage their needs in a highly organized and sophisticated way.

Women’s offices, women-led initiatives, and groups operate across different parts of Sudan. These groups focus on meeting the needs of women and children, particularly during the crisis. They do not just work for women; they also provide essential services for children, including psychosocial support and early healthcare systems.

They are also developing their skills and advocating for more gender-sensitive aid policies across various sectors.

Most grassroots groups consist of women who have been actively contributing since day one of the war. It is truly remarkable to see what women can accomplish. In general aid efforts, such as community kitchens, women are key contributors—they prepare meals, distribute food, and ensure people are fed.

In the healthcare sector, many women and girls serve as nurses and doctors, providing critical medical assistance across different areas and conditions. We also have designated safe spaces, Women’s and Girls’ Safe Spaces and Child-Friendly Spaces, which provide crucial protection and support.

The most important thing is to ensure that aid is gender-sensitive. This has been an ongoing discussion among various grassroots groups, but women have proven their capability time and time again. Many projects are now directly addressing the needs of women and children.

Women’s groups within grassroots movements will be essential in shaping Sudan’s future. Their contributions will influence the localization of aid, broader community development, and post-war recovery efforts.

Jacobsen: Returning to the earlier point about USAID funding being cut—what changes in international funding policies are necessary for community-based humanitarian responses to be more robust and effective, particularly in safeguarding the human rights of the Sudanese people?

Jabal: According to the Sudanese context, specific policies need urgent change, and we have been discussing them for a long time. This is critical.

One key issue is the flexibility of funding. The international community needs to reassess its approach to Sudan because its context is highly complex and varies significantly by region. For example, the situation in Darfur is not the same as in Khartoum, Kassala in the east, or the southern parts of Sudan.

Applying a rigid funding structure with predetermined criteria or fixed funding channels creates problems. More flexibility in how funds are allocated is needed. Another issue is the policies governing who is eligible to receive funding. As I mentioned, national organizations do not cover all of Sudan.

Certain areas are supported only by grassroots initiatives, community groups, or local organizations. Funding policies must recognize and accommodate these realities. Additionally, the definition of accountability needs to be reconsidered. Grassroots groups are accountable to their communities. Still, their accountability mechanisms do not always align with the international community’s.

This does not mean they lack accountability—it means the international community must adapt its expectations to suit the local structures better. Another necessary change is the creation of alternative funding mechanisms. Funding should not be limited to a single channel; multiple funding streams should exist. This would allow for greater adaptability and effectiveness in distributing aid.

By diversifying funding channels, international bodies can better assess the impact and efficiency of aid distribution. The international community currently engages in discussions primarily with government bodies and ministries.

However, in Sudan, control is divided between the SAF (Sudanese Armed Forces) and the RSF (Rapid Support Forces). Since SAF represents the government, international aid allocation discussions often exclude areas not under SAF control.

This means that some regions are left out entirely, and the only viable way to deliver aid in those areas is through grassroots initiatives that operate independently of government control.

Recognizing and supporting these local initiatives would improve aid distribution and effectively reach vulnerable populations. Another crucial factor is coordination among international organizations.

Although aid efforts are organized into clusters, these do not always function effectively. Each crisis requires tailored coordination strategies.

Instead of relying solely on standard cluster mechanisms, international organizations must work together dynamically, reassessing their approach for each crisis to ensure proper coordination of funds and resources.

So, in summary, the key changes needed are:

  • Greater flexibility in funding allocation,
  • Expanding eligibility criteria to include grassroots groups,
  • Aligning accountability measures with local structures,
  • Establishing alternative funding mechanisms,
  • Recognizing the importance of grassroots initiatives in conflict zones and
  • Improving coordination among international aid organizations.

Jacobsen: Large clusters of international organizations operate in crisis zones. These organizations can be massive and well-funded, but their size sometimes makes them inefficient for rapid response.

They tend to be comprehensive and bold in their approaches, but are there any initiatives focusing on smaller, more agile groups—such as small cohorts of organizations working together instead of large networks? Would such a model be more responsive to the localized needs of the Sudanese people who are most affected?

Jabal: That’s right. Some smaller mechanisms do exist.

For example, UNICEF has worked in Sudan since the crisis began, focusing on aid, education, and substitution programs.

The World Food Programme (WFP) is also active. However, as I mentioned, one of the biggest challenges is that these large international organizations do not cover all parts of Sudan or engage the community at planning levels.

For instance, in the beginning, UNICEF operated only in the government-controlled zones controlled by the Sudanese Armed Forces (SAF). Other areas were inaccessible, and UNICEF had no mechanism to work with them.

Later, UNICEF began collaborating with grassroots groups, which was an effective approach. Working through national organizations alongside grassroots groups demonstrated real impact. However, UNICEF has not yet engaged directly with grassroots groups to develop a tailored intervention strategy using smaller, more localized clusters.

The same is true for WFP. Due to the mandates and policies they follow, they face similar limitations. I previously emphasized that international organizations must improve coordination mechanisms within crisis zones.

They must become more creative and adaptive to the changing realities of Sudan, working in ways that respond flexibly to different regional needs.

Jacobsen: On a personal note, for those who want to know more about you as an individual—where do you find your strength? You are working under extreme circumstances. Some may find comfort in data and analysis; human rights discussions can be theoretical. 

Jabal: Where do I find my strength? Strength comes from understanding the situation and its complexities, even within a single area. The situation in Sudan is not uniform—within one state, you will find vastly different conditions.

For example, we have worked in states where control is divided between two conflicting parties—some areas are controlled by the Sudanese Armed Forces (SAF), while others are under the Rapid Support Forces (RSF).

One key strength of grassroots groups is their accessibility. They have access to areas that even the government or international organizations cannot reach. Another source of strength is their deep understanding of the local context.

We understand why certain interventions fail, and others succeed and how to adapt to each situation. This knowledge is invaluable.

Community accountability is another strength. Grassroots organizations are directly accountable to their communities, which builds trust. This level of accountability is not easily achieved, but it is crucial. 

Lastly, grassroots groups have a strong reputation among the people they serve. This trust and credibility within their communities make their work more effective. So, yes, these are some key strengths that sustain us.

One of the major challenges we face is the spread of hate speech. The war on the ground is one thing, but the war on social media is another serious issue. Platforms like Facebook and WhatsApp are being used to spread misinformation and incite violence.

There have been cases where people were killed because of a video circulating online. This is a serious concern. One of our worries is the role of Meta, the company that owns Facebook and WhatsApp.

They have a fact-checking program, but it has many complications. One challenge is language. Hate speech often spreads in Sudanese Arabic dialects or specific tribal and regional languages, which are not always recognized by fact-checkers.

Another issue is transparency—we do not know how many fact-checkers Meta employs to monitor Sudan-related content or how effectively they prevent the spread of harmful speech. A recent U.S. government decision to halt Meta’s fact-checking policies has made things even more difficult.

This has further reduced the ability to control the spread of misinformation and hate speech. The international community has not taken significant action on this issue. No concrete steps have been taken to address the harmful content spreading on social media, and this remains a serious and growing problem we face daily. I want to highlight that as one of the key challenges we are dealing with.

Jacobsen: Thank you. I appreciate your time again.

Jabal: Thank you so much, Scott.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome.

Jabal: It was nice talking to you. Have a good day.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Gord McKenna on Ethical Mining Practices in BC

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/17

Gord McKenna is the Chair of Landform Design Institute. He is a geotechnical engineer and geologist with 32 years of experience in mine operations and consulting for oil sands, coal, and metal mines. Gord founded McKenna Geotechnical Inc in 2017 to bring his landform design experience to a broader audience and provide independent geotechnical advice to geotechnical review boards, panels, and First Nations. Gord and his team have designed 20 reclaimed watersheds that cover 40 square kilometres and incorporate 30 wetlands and 90 kilometres of streams. He has been a lead contributor to several manuals on landform design, mine reclamation, and tailings, and co-authored 100 papers and book chapters. He has a bachelor’s degree in geological engineering from the University of British Columbia and a PhD in geotechnical engineering from the University of Alberta. Gord is also an adjunct professor at the U of A. McKenna discusses the challenges and advancements in mine reclamation. He emphasizes “mining with the land in mind,” stressing the importance of early planning to minimize environmental impact and ensure sustainable restoration. The institute’s Design Basis Memorandum (DBM) sets clear goals for land reclamation, aiming for global adoption by 2030. Collaboration with Indigenous communities and regulators is pivotal, although complex promises and unrealistic expectations often hinder progress. McKenna highlights successes in fostering long-term community relationships and adapting reclamation practices to evolving needs, advocating for accountability, adaptability, and realistic, science-based reclamation goals.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dr. Gord McKenna. We will discuss the Landform Design Institute, its work, and some recent developments focusing on mining. To begin with some context, why did you become interested and involved in mining in the first place? Mining is not typically the first career option that comes to mind for most people.

Dr. Gord McKenna: Right. In high school in Calgary during the 1980s, I developed an interest in engineering and initially thought I might pursue a career as a mechanical engineer—it was a typical teenage aspiration. I ended up attending the University of British Columbia (UBC). During my second year, I took a geology course that captivated my interest. Introductory geology courses are often called “Earth, Wind, and Fire” to draw students into geotechnical engineering or geology fields.

I ultimately decided to pursue geological engineering, which qualified me as a professional engineer and geologist. By 1987, however, the economy was struggling, and only three out of 24 students in my graduating class secured jobs. I received an offer from Syncrude Canada in Fort McMurray at their oil sands mine. I accepted it, and that first job set the trajectory for my career, as it does for many recent graduates.

Jacobsen: Now, moving on to today’s discussion: the new guidance document released by the Landform Design Institute, where you serve as chair. What is its primary purpose?

McKenna: Its primary purpose is to help miners, their consultants, regulators, and local communities—particularly Indigenous communities—work together to establish what mine reclamation will look like formally. This involves defining the appearance and functionality of the mine site after mining activities are complete. In some cases, the site transitions into a brownfield, but most projects I work on aim to restore sites into wildlife habitats.

The guidance document focuses on teaching stakeholders how to create a clear, shared vision. This includes general goals for the landscape, specific objectives, and detailed design criteria. By doing so, everyone involved can work toward the same long-term outcome, even if it is decades away.

Jacobsen: I attended a mining conference a few years ago, and I recall discussing a hiatus in mining activities, particularly in gold and other minerals and metals, followed by an anticipated boom. Is the current emphasis on mine reclamation tied to this economic resurgence?

McKenna: Not necessarily. Mine reclamation emerged as a new concept in the late 1960s and early 1970s. Planning for mine closures, including detailed reclamation and socioeconomic impact considerations, gained prominence in the 1990s. Today, nearly all mines have closure and reclamation plans. While these plans are often conceptual, they represent an agreement between the local community, regulators, and mining companies.

Reclamation efforts remain steady regardless of economic cycles, progressing as mining operations advance. Once specific areas of a mine are no longer in use, they are reclaimed progressively, ensuring a constant focus on environmental and social responsibilities.

And then, by the time mines reach closure, most have reclaimed about 20% to 25% of the area, and then they focus on reclaiming the rest. However, this is often done without a solid vision or clear objectives. As a result, even though much of the reclamation is technically well-executed, it is frequently not accepted by the local community or the regulator. This gap—between what the mine promises and what it delivers—is why we formed the Landform Design Institute and released the guide for creating a Design Basis Memorandum.

Jacobsen: What are the advisements for Indigenous communities regarding mine reclamation and collaboration?

McKenna: That’s the most interesting and challenging part. I’ve worked on it for most of my career without significant personal progress. The institute is working on a book compiling 50 case histories highlighting collaborations between Indigenous peoples, other local communities, mining companies, and regulators. These histories showcase joint efforts to create a shared vision, establish goals, and set clear objectives.

The state of practice today requires consultation with Indigenous communities, but it is often not very robust. There’s limited understanding of what could or should be accomplished and who gets to make those decisions. Engineers, including myself, are professionally obliged to meet the state of practice, but we should strive to push it toward the state of the art.

Rather than telling people how to collaborate, the institute focuses on documenting and sharing case histories—successes and failures—to help others learn and improve. By describing effective approaches and providing tools, we aim to arm practitioners with the resources they need to foster better collaboration.

Jacobsen: That’s an interesting point. How do things go wrong based on case histories, and how do things go right?

McKenna: Good question. Where things go wrong, I think—and I’ve seen this in my practice—is when mining companies have a separate division or department dedicated to government and Indigenous communications. These divisions generate much communication, which the companies are proud of. Still, this information is filtered down to reclamation specialists, designers, and operations teams.

In many cases, we are not allowed to talk directly to local community members, possibly out of concern that we might overcommit or due to time constraints. As a result, we often work based on assumptions about what the community might want rather than engaging in true collaboration. This approach is more consultative than collaborative, staying at a surface level.

For example, many of us assume that planting native vegetation and creating habitats for wildlife will be sufficient. However, in one recent case, we worked on a manual for designing pit lakes—mined-out pits that are sometimes backfilled with water to create lakes for fish or other uses. Without proper collaboration, we risk missing key insights or needs expressed by the local communities. Addressing these gaps is a critical focus of our work.

The first question from the First Nation we talked to was, “When can we drink the water?” We had always been so careful to say that we were not promising drinking water quality standards, only that we would meet aquatic guidelines—but not drinking water quality. And they reasonably responded, “Well, how can we use the land if we’re unable to drink the water?”

A couple of weeks ago, at a conference in Edmonton, there was a discussion about the Athabasca River in northern Canada. Someone commented, “When we’re on the river with our boats, we have to bring more water than gasoline.” They followed up with, “Gord, when will we be able to drink the water?” I had to admit, “I don’t know. It could be 100 years.” They asked, “Is that reasonable?”

This was a question or discussion we should have had 20 years ago. That’s an example of everyone trying their best but still falling short.

In a more positive sense, there are recent examples—some of which we hope to include in our book—of reclaimed lands being actively and collaboratively developed. These are areas where mine rock, also known as waste rock or tailings, is placed to form hills, often called landforms. Tailings are the ground-up rock remaining after the ore is mined out.

On these reclaimed lands, we’ve seen examples of quarterly visits with elders and youth from local communities alongside technical and operations teams. These visits foster long-term relationships, often lasting five to ten years. The goal is to gain real, actionable feedback, such as:

  • What would be good for this land?
  • What kind of vegetation should we plant?
  • Where should creeks that need rebuilding be located?
  • Can we add rock piles for rodents?
  • Where can we create wetlands?

These projects are not without challenges or constraints but benefit greatly from community input. What’s crucial is that everyone involved can see progress in these areas within months or years. This allows the community to walk the land and assess whether the reclamation efforts meet their needs.

We are gathering examples of such successes from our practices, conversations at conferences, and discussions with First Nations peoples. The goal is to distill these experiences into actionable insights—just a few pages—so others can replicate the best practices.

These are long answers to short questions.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Gord. 

McKenna: I hope this aligns with the tone and depth we’re looking for.

Jacobsen: This is good. What about disseminating the updated principles in the document for developing a Design Basis Memorandum (DBM) for landform design and integrating those principles into routine practice in the mining industry? This doesn’t happen overnight. Is it possible to target, or is it more realistic to aim for 2030 or 2040? How long does it take for an industry to shift toward implementing such practices comprehensively?

McKenna: When we started the institute in 2019, we set ourselves a mission—to make landform design a routine activity in mining around the world by 2030. So we’re about halfway through that timeline. We’re working to accomplish this mission in a few different ways.

One approach is to produce guidance documents. This DBM document is our second major publication on how to carry out landform design. The process is structured yet flexible—everyone will implement it differently—but the goal is to establish clear expectations, goals, and objectives. We also outline the steps to design, build, monitor, and maintain reclaimed landscapes to achieve those goals.

Over the past decade, we’ve delivered 50 courses, typically for groups of 10 to 40 participants. Recently, we launched an online DBM course to expand our reach globally. We’ve also lectured to thousands of undergraduate students in Western Canada and at conferences worldwide. Through these efforts, we’re disseminating knowledge and offering the “landform design way.” We’re sharing what has worked for us and lessons learned from what hasn’t and providing ongoing support to the global community.

Another key initiative involves documenting case histories. We’re working on a case history book focused on collaborations with First Nations, which we plan to publish in a few years. These examples help illustrate successful practices and provide a practical foundation for others to build upon.

One of the institute’s directors, June, remarked that getting the mining industry to adopt the DBM approach globally would mark a significant success in our mission. The DBM is already widely used in fields like construction and engineering—for buildings, shopping centers, and even camera systems. It’s a concise document, usually 10 to 40 pages, outlining what will be achieved, how it will be built, and its purpose. Although it has been sporadically used in mine reclamation since the 1980s, we aim to make it a standard practice.

While pursuing my PhD at the University of Alberta in the 1990s, Professor Nordy Morgenstern suggested I focus on landform design. I surveyed 77 mines worldwide—now up to 120—and asked them: “What are you promising, and what are you delivering? What is the gap between the two?” Our work with the DBM aims to fill that gap by clearly defining what’s being promised and creating a contract-like framework rather than relying on aspirational goals.

For example, some people envision retiring and building a cabin on reclaimed land, but they’re often dissatisfied with what they receive because it doesn’t match their expectations. Addressing these discrepancies is central to our efforts.

Jacobsen: You mentioned the principles of landform design. How have those evolved?

McKenna: When we founded the institute, we established 12 principles of landform design. These principles have been slightly refined over the years as we’ve gained more experience and feedback. They form the foundation of our work and guide the development of tools like the DBM and other educational resources.

We recently put out a nice calendar featuring the 12 design principles, which we’re trying to get delivered despite the Canada Post strike. We’re just waiting to get the last copies out. These 12 principles are straightforward guidelines for landform design. We thought, “If we can get everyone following these principles, that would be a meaningful success—a different way of measuring success in our mission.”

The principles include ideas like “mining with the land in mind,” tracking every drop of water in the landscape and working collaboratively to build with First Nations rather than building for First Nations. This represents a fourth approach we’re hopeful about. While 2030 might be a stretch target for making landform design a routine activity globally, I believe we’ll come close. I’m optimistic, and we’re excited about the DBM’s release.

Initially, we considered charging for the DBM. Still, after much internal debate, we decided to make it freely available to the world. We aim to support its adoption and encourage as many people as possible to use it.

Jacobsen: Who do you find the hardest to align with the guidance’s aims: Mining companies, regulators, or communities of various backgrounds?

McKenna: That’s a great question and something we need to continue working on. From the perspective of local communities, the landform design approach feels natural and obvious to them. At the mines, the technocrats—the biologists, geologists, engineers, and planners—often adopt our methods. Senior management is generally supportive as well.

However, middle management, which is the people making day-to-day decisions and controlling budgets, is often reticent. This hesitancy typically stems from a fear of spending tens, hundreds, or even billions of dollars on mine reclamation without clear acceptance criteria. They worry about completing the work but fail to meet the regulators’ requirements and never get liability released for the site.

The statistics show that fewer than 1% of mines worldwide receive regulatory sign-off for proper reclamation. Getting regulatory approval and having their bond money returned is the number one goal for many mining companies, but it almost never happens. This lack of clarity and certainty holds back middle management, who fear investing heavily in reclamation efforts that might not achieve the desired outcomes.

Rather than criticizing mine management, we’re trying a different approach. One of our projects involves documenting case histories of mines that have successfully fostered a reclamation culture. We interview managers and general managers to understand how they’ve supported this work, convinced shareholders of the value of investing in reclamation now rather than later, and achieved meaningful results.

By sharing these success stories, we hope to inspire others and provide concrete examples of how middle management can actively support mine reclamation. At the same time, some great examples are not as common as we’d like them to be. That’s the culture shift we’re aiming to foster.

Regulators are in an interesting position, and we’re trying to figure out how to support them in this process better. Typically, they have guidelines and procedures they are proud of and work hard to enforce in regulating mines and mine reclamation. However, despite their efforts, the system often falls short because regulators are unwilling or unable to sign off on good reclamation. There are always lingering concerns about residual risks, and they are hesitant to take on liability on behalf of the Crown, the state, or the federal government.

We recently had a case where one of our directors worked with a First Nation, a mine, and the regulator to develop a Design Basis Memorandum using our newly published document. The regulators expressed concerns about participating, saying, “If we agree to something that isn’t explicitly in the regulations or that conflicts with regulations or policies, where does that leave us? How can we properly regulate this?”

The institute needs to improve its outreach to regulators and explore how we can better support them. But there’s also a broader issue: the entire approach to mine reclamation needs to shift toward being a joint activity where risks are shared, promises are realistic, and commitments are delivered promptly. Some regulations and promises from the past are impractical from a geological or ecological perspective. Renegotiating these commitments will be challenging, particularly for regulators.

Jacobsen: What about situations where people make simply unrealistic requests due to regulatory constraints or the evidence base? As someone who isn’t a politician, you can’t promise the world to everyone—you need to be realistic. What kinds of land or mine reclamation proposals are often unrealistic, and which ones are more achievable?

McKenna: That’s a great question. As part of my PhD work, I visited 77 mines worldwide and collected about 200 promises made for reclaimed land. Many of these promises were entirely reasonable. For example, commitments to slope the land, apply a soil cover, and ensure the soil supports vegetation for farming or wildlife habitat are achievable. My boss often reminded me, “All we can do is shape the land, put some soil down, and plant starter vegetation.” Typically, this involves seeding or planting 2 to 10 species to get the process going. From there, Mother Nature takes over, and the ecosystem evolves.

However, I also encountered high-risk promises that were far less realistic. For instance, relying on complex numerical models to predict ideal in-pit lake chemistry, with assurances that the water would meet all environmental standards, is risky. Complex environmental models are inherently uncertain, and making bold promises based on them can lead to disappointment or failure.

The key is to set realistic, science-based targets that everyone agrees upon and to ensure those targets are within the realm of what can be delivered. It’s better to underpromise and overdeliver than to set expectations that cannot be met.

There are entire books about whether we should model certain complex environmental behaviours. Promising outcomes based on technologies we haven’t yet developed ma, making high-risk commitments, or going against natural processes is problematic. For instance, we sometimes promise there will be no erosion. Yet, as geologists, we know that all landforms—natural and artificial, including mining ones—will erode over time.

Similarly, we’ve promised in the past that reclaimed land would be “better than it was before.” This was particularly common in the oil sands for years, whether explicitly stated or implied. But First Nations communities in Northern Alberta have called us out on this. In the 1980s, regulations required replacing swampy lowlands with commercial forest uplands. This was seen as progress at the time. However, the First Nations, who value the swampy areas for moose hunting and other cultural activities, told us, “You’re going to make it better than the Creator made it? I’m interested to see how that works out.”

When we teach, we emphasize that we must be cautious with our promises as professionals. If we make commitments that can’t be met, are we liable? Could someone go to jail? These promises are rarely written in stark terms, like “make it better than before.” Instead, they’re often framed more subtly, such as ensuring productivity for farmland or forestry that is “at least as good as it was before” or guaranteeing the same number of moose or cow-calf pairs on the landscape. Other promises include water quality, which meets all objectives without requiring active water treatment.

The DBM document encourages making realistic and achievable promises—within human lifetimes and using technology available today. However, relying solely on current technology can stifle research and development (R&D), a downside we still need to navigate. If mines are required to follow rigid approaches, they may stop investing in R&D for better methods. I’ve seen this happen in several jurisdictions.

Committing to clear visions and goals for the reclaimed landscape while recognizing that these commitments function like contracts but must also evolve over time is crucial. Mine reclamation, especially at large mines, typically takes 10 to 100 years. It’s a long-term process that requires flexibility, adaptation, and accountability.

Decisions made 50 years ago—regarding land uses, technologies, and state-of-the-art practices—aren’t the same as those we’d make today, and today’s decisions won’t necessarily align with what people want 50 years from now. That’s why we must treat these plans as living documents, adapting them collaboratively over time while earning and maintaining trust.

At the same time, if a reclaimed area meets the goals agreed upon at the time of its planning, we shouldn’t make significant changes, like cutting down trees or reshaping the land, after all the work has been completed. As the saying goes, “a card laid is a card played.” However, if there are issues—like fish dying or pollutants being released—then, of course, changes must be made.

If the reclamation aligns with the DBM and achieves the agreed-upon objectives, we should all accept it as sufficient. Otherwise, miners may resist progressive reclamation and instead wait until the last possible moment, reclaiming everything only after mining operations cease.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Gord, for the opportunity and for sharing your time today. I appreciate your insights on mining, a field in which I have limited experience but am looking forward to covering more extensively in the future.

McKenna: You’re welcome. The main message to take away is “mining with the land in mind.” Reclamation decisions can’t all be deferred until after a mine closes because 90% of the outcomes will already have been determined by choices such as which valleys were filled, where creeks were moved, and other actions taken during operations.

The key is thoughtful design from the early stages, ensuring mining is conducted with the end in mind. Even in cases where we’re brought into existing operations, decisions made now can yield substantial savings, reduce risks, and foster greater community buy-in as the process unfolds. That’s the message we’re pushing: mining with the land in mind.

Jacobsen: Thanks again, Gord. Take care.

McKenna: Bye now.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jodi Lai on AutoTrader Awards 2025

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/16 (Unpublished)

Jodi Lai is an award-winning automotive journalist, Editor-in-Chief at AutoTrader.ca, and a recognized expert in the automotive industry. With over 15 years of experience, she is passionate about making car knowledge accessible and fostering inclusivity in the automotive world. Jodi has a Bachelor’s degree in Journalism from Ryerson University. She has earned accolades, such as the 2022 AJAC Journalist of the Year. She is a jury member for the prestigious North American Car/Truck/Utility Vehicle of the Year awards and hosts a bi-weekly podcast. Known for her engaging on-camera presence, Jodi advocates for unbiased, consumer-focused automotive advice. Lai highlighted that over 20 automotive journalists assess cars based on 12 factors including value, innovation, and reliability and more. Notable winners include the Honda Civic (Best Overall Car), Kia EV9 (Best Overall SUV), and Ford Maverick Hybrid (Best Overall Truck). Lai emphasized the growing importance of EVs and evolving award categories to reflect industry trends. The awards aim to simplify car shopping by providing unbiased expert recommendations, ensuring Canadians can confidently select vehicles that meet their needs.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Jodi Lai to discuss the AutoTrader Awards 2025. AutoTrader is Canada’s largest online automotive marketplace, and the AutoTrader Awards evaluate the top vehicles in 28 categories. That’s quite a large endeavour. Do you utilize algorithms to analyze such a wide range of categories?

Jodi Lai: We approach it by involving a group of over 20 automotive journalists who vote on the awards. It’s a very democratic process. We ask them to select their top picks in 28 different categories. When asking for their votes, I emphasize that they must consider 12 factors including value, innovation, engineering, and user-friendliness.

We analyze various factors to determine what makes a good car and, more importantly, what differentiates a good car from an award-winning car. These factors are weighted differently depending on the category. For example, we wouldn’t penalize a sports car for being fuel-inefficient because fuel economy is not its primary purpose.

We evaluate vehicles based on how well they fulfill their intended role. We’re looking for vehicles that not only meet but exceed expectations, raising the benchmark for their segment or even the automotive industry as a whole. Ultimately, we aim to identify overall excellence.

We conduct these awards because many people find new car shopping overwhelming due to the sheer number of options available. The awards are designed to help them either kickstart their research or simplify their decision-making process by providing expert recommendations. All of the winners represent vehicles that our experts would confidently recommend to their own family and friends.

Jacobsen: The evaluated factors include value, practicality, performance, safety, and innovation. Why do the experts prioritize these specific factors?

Lai: We assess vehicles based on how Canadian shoppers prioritize their purchases. These factors were identified through our research. They reflect the key considerations that Canadian drivers focus on, forming the basis of our scoring when determining the best vehicles.

Jacobsen: When did the current format of the AutoTrader Awards begin?

Lai: I joined AutoTrader in 2019, which is when the awards, as we know them now, were introduced. Before that, the awards followed a different format with a less comprehensive methodology. The current process makes the awards more relevant to a wider audience and significantly more thorough. Additionally, the evaluation process is now more rigorous and mathematically sound than the previous system.

Jacobsen: The Honda Civic was awarded Best Overall Car. What made it stand out?

Lai: The Honda Civic stood out because it excels in numerous key factors, including practicality, reliability, value, and innovation. It’s a vehicle that not only meets but surpasses the expectations of its segment. It’s a great all-rounder, offering a combination of engineering excellence, user-friendliness, and superior performance, which made it the standout choice for Best Overall Car.

The Best Overall Car is a category that essentially combines all of the other car categories, including sedans, and similar vehicles. The Honda Civic received the most votes from our jury.

They appreciate the Honda Civic because it is practical and user-friendly. It is also built locally, which is significant for people who want to support local manufacturing.

We recommend it easily because it has built a rock-solid reputation for reliability while also offering driver enjoyment and performance. Additionally, it comes in a variety of body styles and powertrains, such as performance or hybrid models.

There’s a Honda Civic for everyone. We often refer to it as “Canada’s car” because it is one of the most popular cars in the country, and it’s also built here, which is a great bonus.

Jacobsen: And the Best Overall SUV winner was the Kia EV9. As you can tell by how I pronounced that, I don’t drive much.

Lai: That’s OK. The Kia EV9 is an interesting winner because it is the first EV to win the Best Overall SUV category. In this category, all vehicles are eligible regardless of their powertrain.

It’s particularly impressive that the EV9 won in its first year of availability. This demonstrates that it’s not only impressive as an EV but also as an SUV in general. Even if you’re not specifically looking for an EV, we’re confident that the EV9 would meet the needs of many Canadians. That’s a big win for Kia and very impressive.

Jacobsen: The Best Overall Truck was the Ford Maverick Hybrid. I’ve worked on construction sites and horse farms, and trucks are popular in those settings. What makes the Ford Maverick Hybrid stand out as the best overall?

Lai: The Ford Maverick, including the hybrid model, was voted Best Overall Truck. Interestingly, while the F-150 is Canada’s most popular truck, our experts selected the Maverick because they felt it was better suited for more people.

Full-size trucks have become so large and expensive that they’re out of reach for many Canadians. The Maverick offers a more affordable, compact, and fuel-efficient option while still meeting most truck users’ needs.

This year, the Maverick Hybrid with all-wheel drive, which was previously unavailable, is available. All-wheel drive is important for Canadian drivers due to our four distinct seasons.

The Maverick is also a very clever truck with many innovative features. It’s built to work and is extremely user-friendly. It was the right truck because most people don’t need a full-size truck.

Jacobsen: And Canada’s most trusted car brand—you mentioned local manufacturing being a factor in some of the voting by the 20 experts and journalists. Toyota was recognized based on a third-party consumer survey. How did you conduct or commission the third-party consumer survey?

Lai: We used Ipsos Reid, which you might have heard of. They’re the third-party organization we rely on. We do this to remain as neutral and objective as possible.

We survey Canadians daily and ask them which car brands they trust the most. Toyota has won three years in a row, and we’ve only conducted this research for three years. That’s the only category in which our experts do not vote.

It’s significant because it reflects how regular Canadians feel about trustworthiness. Toyota has been manufacturing many of its vehicles in Canada for over 60 years, so it has had decades to earn Canadians’ trust and respect.

Toyota also has a stellar reputation for making reliable and robust cars. Canadians have come to trust them deeply over the years, so this is a meaningful win for them.

Jacobsen: The other categories include sedans, SUVs, performance cars, and hybrids. We’ll cover those shortly. Are any of these categories newer in terms of the awarding process?

Lai: Yes. When the AutoTrader Awards first started, when I joined in 2019, we grouped all green vehicles under one category called Best Green Vehicle.

However, as the years went on, the number of green vehicle options grew significantly, and our research showed that people shopping for EVs weren’t as interested in hybrids and vice versa. So, we divided the categories.

We no longer have a single Best Green Vehicle category. We’ve separated it into Best Hybrid, Best Plug-In Hybrid, Best Mainstream EV, and Best Luxury EV, the newest categories.

We also added Best Vehicle for Adventure a couple of years ago. This was another result of our research, which revealed that many people don’t know the specific type of car they want—they just know what they want to do with it.

That category became particularly relevant during peak COVID when Canadians started spending more time outdoors than ever. Sales of off-road-focused SUVs surged, so we introduced that category to serve our users better.

Jacobsen: Why is the Toyota Camry considered the Best Family Sedan?

Lai: First of all, a few family sedans are left. Many sedans have been discontinued because Canadian consumers generally prefer SUVs. But the Camry stood out to our jury because it’s brand new for 2025.

The Camry impressed our jury. Not only did Toyota revamp the entire look, making it very stylish, but it is now available only as a hybrid, which was bold. Sedans are already a niche market, so making it hybrid-only was smart. This allowed Toyota to integrate all-wheel drive without sacrificing fuel economy.

This hybrid system made great sense for Canadian drivers, especially with tighter budgets and increased focus on fuel efficiency. Our experts were very impressed with the complete package the Camry offers. It’s user-friendly, has a solid reputation for reliability, and provides great value. It was an easy choice for our experts.

Jacobsen: The Subaru Crosstrek was named Best Subcompact SUV.

Lai: Yes, the Subaru Crosstrek is a standout option in that segment because it’s larger than most competitors. Our experts loved its practicality, which sets it apart from other vehicles in the same class.

It’s also the only subcompact SUV that comes standard with all-wheel drive. In other vehicles within this segment, all-wheel drive is an optional feature that costs extra. The Crosstrek offers affordability and remains one of Canada’s most cost-effective ways to get all-wheel drive.

Additionally, it’s very family-friendly, practical, and easy to use. Some of our experts bought Crosstreks themselves, which is the best endorsement it could receive.

Jacobsen: The Porsche 911 won Best Premium Performance. Why?

Lai: Yes, and funnily enough, this is the first time the Porsche 911 has won the award for Best Performance Vehicle. It was an obvious choice for many of our experts because the 911 embodies sports car excellence like no other vehicle.

While other sports cars may be more powerful or visually striking, none are as iconic as the 911. It sets the global standard for sports car excellence, and our experts have consistently recognized that.

Of course, it may be out of reach for many Canadians, so we also have a mainstream performance category to cater to those who want a sporty, fun vehicle at a more accessible price point.

Jacobsen: The Toyota Prius won Best Hybrid. Can you elaborate, especially considering your earlier points about separating hybrid and electric categories?

Lai: The Toyota Prius has always been a strong performer, but with its recent overhaul, it’s better than ever. It’s no longer just a highly efficient and reliable car—it’s also stylish and enjoyable to drive.

Historically, the Prius had a reputation for being a “nerdy” and somewhat dorky vehicle. That’s no longer the case. The latest Prius looks great, is packed with advanced technology, and still maintains the reliability and fuel efficiency it’s famous for.

The updated model also offers all-wheel drive, which is a fantastic feature for Canadian drivers. This recent redesign elevated the Prius to a new level, making it the best hybrid on the market. It checks all the boxes without compromising anything, which we look for in a winner. It’s a fantastic choice for many Canadian drivers.

Jacobsen: Based on your knowledge of online sales trends, what do you see as a potential future category for awards next year or in some future year?

Lai: Electrification will become increasingly important as we move forward. We may need to divide the green categories even further. Over time, all categories could transition to being EV-focused.

The Canadian government aims for all passenger cars sold to be electrified by 2035, whether plug-in hybrids or fully electric vehicles. That’s an ambitious goal, and I doubt it will be achieved. However, if it does, we’d have to completely rethink how we structure the awards.

For instance, we might see categories like EV performance cars or EVs optimized for efficiency. New green or EV-focused categories will become more relevant as EVs become more mainstream.

Jacobsen: Who organizes and presents the awards each year?

Lai: That would be me! It’s one of the most important projects I have worked on all year. The whole reason I do my job is to provide Canadians with unbiased, expert car advice.

The awards represent the ultimate expression of that goal. They reflect the collective input of all our experts, who collaborate to determine the best cars across various segments.

Many people find car shopping incredibly confusing, and we hope the awards help them kickstart their research or give them reassurance that the car they’ve chosen is a great one.

Jacobsen: Well, Jodi, thank you for the opportunity and your time today. I appreciate an inside look at the best cars in each category for the year.

Lai: Thank you, Scott. If you have any other questions, feel free to reach out.

Jacobsen: Excellent. I appreciate it. It was nice to meet you.

Lai: Thank you so much, Scott. Have a good one.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Emergency Tools Can Save Lives

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/16

Kenny Kelley, CEO of Silent Beacon, is a former stuntman turned entrepreneur passionate about saving lives. His journey from high-risk Hollywood to founding the world’s only Bluetooth panic button that directly calls 911 showcases his dedication to innovation, safety, and empowering individuals in emergencies. Kelley designed Silent Beacon to protect high-risk situations, benefiting industries such as healthcare, education, and social services. The device boasts real-time GPS tracking, two-way communication, and a patented beacon-to-beacon alert system. After refining the initial version based on user feedback, Silent Beacon 2.0 offers extended battery life and enhanced mobility. Kelley emphasizes the importance of innovation, addressing challenges like irrelevant reviews, and adapting to evolving legislation on workplace safety.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Silent Beacon is a revolutionary emergency alert system featuring the only Bluetooth panic button that can directly call 911. It was founded by Kenny Kelley, our guest today, a former stuntman. The device offers life-saving solutions for high-risk situations.

Its features include real-time GPS tracking, silent alerts, and workplace notifications. These features enhance the safety of healthcare workers, individuals in danger, and first responders. It represents a new approach to personal and workplace safety. Were specific policies or mandates implemented in various workplaces that made this seem the right time to launch the product?

Kenny Kelley: We shifted our model from consumer-focused to business-focused for the 2.0 version, the new product that has been released. Yes, laws, such as Alyssa’s Law, require certain states to have panic buttons for teachers. For example, Texas and Florida have implemented this, along with seven other states. Legislation is also in progress in about 13 additional states, and this number keeps growing.

Additionally, there are laws targeting other industries, such as hospitality. For instance, Washington State has legislation requiring protections for retail employees. More legislation is being passed regarding panic buttons because of the growing emphasis on safety and the need for companies to ensure their employees can access help as quickly as possible in emergencies.

Jacobsen: How does Silent Beacon differentiate itself from other emergency systems?

Kelley: First and foremost, our product directly calls 911. Most of our competitors route users through a call center, which can be useful for some applications. However, most people prefer to speak directly to 911 in an emergency rather than through an intermediary. Additionally, our device offers two-way communication.

You can speak directly into it without waiting for 911 to receive a signal. It also alerts multiple entities and individuals simultaneously. For example, in a workplace environment, it could notify other people in the building, such as managers, owners, or even remote workers. It casts a wide net, alerting various stakeholders—other employees, 911, or security teams. This is a significant improvement over systems that send a single direct signal to a call center.

Moreover, we hold a patent for our beacon-to-beacon alert feature. This allows one Beacon to activate other beacons within the same emergency group. If someone in your group is in trouble, their Beacon triggers alerts on others. This enables you to access a phone or computer to identify who is in trouble and understand the situation’s specifics.

This information could influence your actions, such as deciding not to go to a specific office or location based on the alert. This level of connectivity and situational awareness sets us apart.

Jacobsen: What industries or demographics have found Silent Beacon most useful?

Kelley: Currently, 81% of our business is in healthcare. This is largely because nearly half of home healthcare nurses have been assaulted in the past two years, which is shocking, right? A recent poll showed that five or six out of ten nurses expressed no longer wanting to be in this profession due to the risks they face. Going into communities or interacting with people experiencing life-altering situations can be incredibly challenging.

For instance, there was a nurse who was tragically killed in Connecticut while visiting someone’s home. Because of incidents like this, many companies in Connecticut use our product. Many companies must send workers into environments where they may not feel safe. Still, by law, they must, as everyone in the United States has the right to healthcare.

Living situations may not be ideal in these cases, and navigating them can be difficult. Having a product like ours helps address these challenges. Social services is another significant area for us because those workers often deal with individuals who may have mental health issues.

Whole cities also use our product to ensure that their workers remain safe, frequently out in the community rather than in buildings. Education is another major vertical for us. So, healthcare, social services, municipal workers, and education are the four main sectors that benefit from our product.

Jacobsen: What types of attacks are these healthcare workers facing in their homes? What is the range of severity? What is the threshold? How common are murders?

Kelley: I cannot say how common murders are specifically in this context. However, I do know that in the United States, a murder occurs roughly every 32 minutes according to FBI.gov.. Nurses face danger every day, and the numbers are alarming: 81.6% of nurses report workplace violence annually, according to National Nurses United. This landscape is changing drastically due to COVID.

COVID has increased the need for healthcare workers to go into communities. At the same time, hospitals and rehab centers are focused on getting patients discharged and home. The overwhelming number of patients means there are not enough nurses or employees to manage the demand within hospitals.

As a result, home healthcare has become a critical area, and unfortunately, its associated risks are increasing. While this number grows, studies typically take two years to produce comprehensive results. Since COVID was only a few years ago, the latest post-COVID statistics may not be available.

Jacobsen: With the growing legislation around workplace safety, how does Silent Beacon cater to panic button mandates? We touched on this a little earlier.

Kelley: One of the great things about Silent Beacon is that it directly calls emergency services, whereas other systems often rely on intermediaries. It’s also a mobile solution. It piggybacks off your smartphone, connecting via Wi-Fi or cellular service. This makes it effective in mobile situations where legislation requires the device to be carried on your person.

Many older panic button systems are fixed, such as placed under a desk or at specific locations within a building. This solution allows for complete flexibility and mobility, which aligns with legislative requirements.

Jacobsen: What features can users expect from Silent Beacon for improved personal and workplace safety? Looking to the future, what can people anticipate?

Kelley: We aim to continue innovating by incorporating a mesh network within buildings and structures, expanding the distance users can be from Wi-Fi or cellular-connected devices. Innovation is key to our growth.

Since we piggyback off Android and iPhone, which collectively spend $60 billion annually on R&D, it would not make sense for us to create a standalone cellular device. It would quickly become outdated, and we could not keep up with their advancements.

Therefore, staying compatible with iPhone and Android is critical to our future success.

Jacobsen: What were some of the bigger challenges in developing the product?

Kelley:

Our 1.0 version was focused entirely on consumers. I was inspired to create it after experiencing a bad motorcycle accident. I thought, “I have all this technology in my pocket, but I cannot do anything with it.”

I was stuck on the side of the road with damaged gloves and could not access my phone. I wished for something to notify people, “Here is where I am—send help.” That was the initial idea.

However, the feedback for version 1.0 highlighted several issues. Complaints like “this doesn’t work” or “the battery doesn’t last long enough” helped shape 2.0. The most critical customer feedback guided our improvements.

For instance, people were dissatisfied with the seven-day battery life, so we increased it to 42 days. They found the speaker volume too low, so we enhanced the shell enclosure to amplify the sound. Concerns about range and other limitations were also addressed.

We also wanted to provide flexibility. For example, the device now fits a universal wristband, accommodating any 18mm pin. Customers can buy bands from Amazon or use ones they already own, giving them freedom instead of forcing them to purchase accessories exclusively from us.

These improvements were all driven by feedback, ensuring that 2.0 addressed the most common frustrations with our original product.

Jacobsen: What has been irrelevant feedback? Everyone always references five-star, three-star, and one-star reviews. Sometimes, five-star reviews are irrelevant, with comments like “good,” and one-star reviews can occasionally turn into long-winded rants where it’s clear the reviewer has not even used the product.

Kelley: Yes, that’s a great question. The FTC recently introduced new guidelines addressing fake reviews and testimonials. Companies can no longer buy social media influence or solicit reviews without the reviewer having genuinely used the product. Reviewers cannot be given anything as a reward for their review. Our lawyers spent a week reviewing these new regulations.

So, how do we deal with irrelevant reviews? Unfortunately, you cannot remove them. Platforms like Apple, Android, and Amazon do not allow reviews to be deleted. For example, we often get comments like, “I ordered five for my business, and they didn’t work.” However, the business versions of our products must be purchased directly from us. Buying consumer versions from Amazon and expecting them to work with our business solution is a misunderstanding.

In those cases, we try to reach out and explain that it may have been a user error, but we apologize anyway. It’s especially difficult with consumers because they may not fully understand the product or the process. Businesses, on the other hand, tend to grasp the system better and provide constructive feedback.

With individual consumers, I call them the “onesie-twosies,” it’s harder to manage. I understand their frustration because I’ve been someone who cannot figure something out and writes a poor review out of frustration. However, it is challenging to address these issues.

While reviews can vary, we take all feedback seriously and use it to drive meaningful improvements.

Jacobsen: The product itself is straightforward. What’s the rarest or most unusual context in which someone has used it?

Kelly: Great question! One of the craziest situations involved a little girl in her treehouse. She repeatedly hit the panic button for an entire hour.

We saw a constant alert coming from one location and thought it might be a major incident. When we investigated, she said, “I’m in the treehouse. I’m in the treehouse. I’m in the treehouse.” She kept sending the same message repeatedly, about a hundred times.

Jacobsen: So, that was the craziest use case?

Kelly: Yes, definitely!

Jacobsen: That’s all the questions I have. Kenny, thank you for your time today and for creating this device. 

Kelly: Thank you! Have a great weekend.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Sudan’s Economic Struggles & Conflict Dynamics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/15 (Unpublished)

Eddie Thomas, a researcher specializing in Sudan and South Sudan, discusses the transition from subsistence farming to market economies, the impact of conflict, and healthcare inequalities. He examines how wars have disrupted traditional kinship networks, pushing people into market dependency. South Sudan’s caloric intake has dropped, leading to malnutrition. Sudan’s healthcare disparities stem from colonial-era spatial inequalities and privatization. Border conflicts like Kafia-Kingi influence economic dynamics, and kinship networks are under pressure. Thomas advocates for universal healthcare and decommodification as solutions to economic instability and conflict. He acknowledges Sudanese revolutionaries striving for systemic change.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Eddie Thomas. He is a researcher specializing in Sudan and South Sudan. He has previously been affiliated with the Rift Valley Institute and XCEPT. Currently, he works with the ATAR Network. He has two decades of experience as a teacher, human rights worker, and researcher. He examines border conflicts, healthcare inequalities, and economic transformation. He has authored South Sudan: A Slow Liberation and reports such as Moving Towards Markets and The Future of Sudan’s Shattered Health System. His research, previously supported by the XCEPT program and the Rift Valley Institute, explored the consequences of market dependence, conflict-driven social shifts, and healthcare privatization in Sudan’s shifting and evolving political landscape. 

Thank you for joining me today. My first question is: How has the transition from subsistence farming to market dependence in South Sudan affected local economies and social structures?

Eddie Thomas: Subsistence is a term many people still use to describe agriculture in South Sudan. It is a peculiar term that arose during the Enlightenment and was the opposite of a new concept: improved agriculture, capitalist agriculture, agriculture for profit and high yield. Subsistence was used to describe forms of agriculture that were not oriented toward maximizing yield but rather toward managing consumption.

The subsistence systems in South Sudan were long-lived. They have only started to decline over the past 20 or 30 years. Even now, they are not defunct but are deteriorating. Before this shift, people primarily produced food for consumption or exchange within their social networks. They organized production around social relationships rather than markets.

This meant that people did not necessarily seek to maximize surplus or yield but considered other factors now recognized as equally important—such as sustainability, climate and ecological adaptation, and flavour and nutrition. These factors influenced agricultural production decisions.

However, South Sudan has experienced near-continuous conflict since the 19th century, particularly during the Turco-Egyptian rule and later under British colonial administration. It has had only brief periods of peace. War is a significant reorganizer of society and production. It is also an effective means of instilling a profit motive in people, as it introduces intense coercion to reshape society.

That is what happened in South Sudan. Wars gradually detached people from the land where they produced food, grew grain, kept livestock, or fished in rivers. These conflicts transformed them into something different. Initially, they might have become enslaved persons or military recruits—who were not much different from enslaved persons—or what are now referred to as displaced people, those forced off their land and compelled to live in unsuitable and uncomfortable conditions.

And all of these factors limited the ability of kinship networks and other social structures to survive and organize production. At the same time, people’s ability to manage their production was being undermined.

Other factors were coming into play. New groups of people were not interested in market commodities a hundred years ago. People didn’t seek to save money to buy available goods. Basic commodities such as soap or fishhooks were available but not central to people’s lives. However, the allure of commodities has grown significantly. Now, people desire handbags, stylish shoes, fashionable clothing, and smartphones.

People are increasingly drawn into market economies and commodities while facing new threats to their ability to remain on the land. Climate change has severely affected South Sudan, which is ecologically sensitive. The levels of flooding along major rivers and waterways are alarming. Some individuals are forced to reconsider their home locations due to the risk of flooding. Others must reconsider their livelihoods, as they can no longer sustain farming or herding. As a result, many are switching to fishing as a means of survival, adapting to the climate-induced displacement they are experiencing.

What has happened is that an older system—one not designed for maximizing profit or yield but rather focused on maintaining social and kinship networks—has been disrupted. This traditional system provided multiple layers of meaning to life through production. Work was once deeply tied to one’s sense of family, home, and even cultural traditions, such as the songs people sang while working.

I’m not trying to sentimentalize the past or suggest it was the only way of life. There were negative aspects to the “good old days.” However, the kinship-based and socially networked production systems helped hold society together. Today, many pressures on South Sudanese people are forcing them apart, breaking down social cohesion, and pushing them into fragmented, often antagonistic, enclaves.

One of the things I examined was how conflict is as much tied to these ongoing agrarian changes as it is to ethnicity or other cultural explanations sometimes given for violence. The countryside is undergoing a massive transformation, and this upheaval has become entangled with the conflict, potentially fueling its continuation.

Let me explain why. The first scientific nutrition studies in South Sudan were conducted in the 1950s by Gertrude Culwick, an English researcher employed by the colonial government. She conducted multiple studies in different parts of Sudan. Her work in the floodplains—vast, flat, muddy lands on the east and west of the Jebel, where the White Nile flows through South Sudan on its way north—revealed interesting findings. She found that people consumed between 2,000 and 3,500 calories per day, a substantial intake. However, the measures she used then differed from the ones we use today.

Because today, caloric intake would be averaged out, considering age differences and other factors. Gertrude Culwick may have used specific measurement criteria. However, adults in her studies still consumed a substantial amount of food.

Some studies suggest that people in South Sudan consume an average of 1,500 to 1,800 calories per day in the 21st century. This marks a dramatic reduction in caloric intake over the past 60 to 70 years. One key aspect of this transition is that it is a hungry transition. It may eventually lead to obesity, as market-based food systems have in many other countries, but at present, it is leading to undernourishment and malnutrition.

There is no direct link between marketization and better food systems. On the contrary, marketization—alongside war, displacement, and other disruptions—is not resulting in better nutrition. Instead, it is driving an increased demand for cash. In the past, many South Sudanese lived with minimal reliance on money, and it wasn’t easy during the colonial period to get people to work for wages because they simply did not need cash. Additionally, they did not wear clothes with pockets, making it impractical to carry money.

The colonial administration introduced money taxes to compel people to work for wages. As a result, people would perform a few days of labour annually to pay their taxes. Over time, market dependence increased, and people needed money not just for taxes but also for new necessities such as modern education and healthcare, both of which required cash. Additionally, they began to need money for food as they transitioned from solely producing food to selling portions and later repurchasing food from merchants once their stocks ran low. Essentially, their food supplies were becoming commodities.

I found an interesting trend in household surveys—though they are infrequent in South Sudan and must be interpreted cautiously. Surveys conducted during the peace years from 2006 to 2013 suggested that while many areas shifted toward market-based economies, many people reported that they had not used cash in the past seven days. This indicates a growing reliance on cash without consistent access to it.

In the areas where hunger was most prevalent, people needed money to buy food but often did not have it. These were the same areas where militia groups were gaining strength, and young men increasingly turned to alternative forms of work that provided access to cash or coercive means of obtaining resources they could no longer produce themselves. The militia system played a crucial role in dismantling traditional production methods and was instrumental in sustaining this economic transition. As workers defected from productive labour to military employment, money circulated more through soldiers than through conventional economic activity.

As hunger intensified, the need for money grew, pushing people into new methods of obtaining it, including selling labour and sending their sons to fight. This transformation perpetuated economic instability and reinforced the cycle of displacement and market dependence.

People also invested heavily in educating their children because they believed education was essential for navigating the emerging economy. Even families with very little money would sell their labour to afford school fees, hoping that education, even in under-resourced schools, could provide their children with a better future.

South Sudan’s progression toward a market economy is an important study area because it sheds light on how the rural crisis underpins many ongoing challenges. This rural crisis is sometimes misrepresented as a conflict between antagonistic ethnic groups, as that provides a simplistic explanation. However, the reality is more complex. The government, unable to adequately serve its people, often exacerbates divisions by taking resources away in a discriminatory manner rather than providing for its citizens. This creates friction among communities and pushes individuals into armed groups.

Focusing less on the military and more on the agricultural sector would help me better understand South Sudan’s challenges.

Jacobsen: What are the key drivers behind Sudan’s healthcare inequalities? Are these comparable to those of other countries, or are their causes and characteristics unique?

Thomas: Sudan’s inequalities are well known and have multiple dimensions. One of the most significant factors is spatial inequality. Some regions benefit from Sudan’s merchant and trade systems, where the wealthier populations reside and have access to services. Then, some regions generate wealth for these merchant systems—through agriculture, gold mining, oil extraction, and food production—yet remain significantly disadvantaged.

Most of this wealth-generating activity occurs far from the centers of trade. Historically, Sudan’s economic hub has been around Khartoum. At the same time, peripheral areas have suffered from lower life expectancy, higher child mortality rates, and other indicators of material disadvantage. These disparities were entrenched during the 19th century due to colonial aggression and the arbitrary drawing of colonial borders, which heavily favoured the central regions.

The healthcare system that emerged under these conditions had serious shortcomings. There was a strong bias toward providing better healthcare in wealthier regions, with greater access to medical personnel and facilities. In contrast, poorer regions suffered from stark disparities in mortality rates, particularly infant and child mortality.

Furthermore, Sudan’s healthcare system has historically been skewed towards curative rather than preventative care. Those living in the capital could access expensive medical procedures. At the same time, those in remote areas often lacked access to vaccines or basic preventative medicine. This structural imbalance has persisted, reinforcing the country’s deep-seated healthcare access and outcomes inequalities.

After the end of the colonial period, there was a global movement toward primary healthcare, aiming to expand medical services to poor and marginalized communities. The goal was to provide the best possible healthcare for all, leading to the development of some health facilities in underserved peripheral regions. There was also an effort to improve healthcare access for economically disadvantaged populations. Sudan had significant social inequalities, with rich and poor people living side by side in cities. This movement gained momentum in the 1970s and 1980s.

However, by the 1980s, a global financial crisis caused a significant shift in the financial landscape. One of the outcomes was a severe debt crisis across Africa. Many governments have been encouraged to take out loans to build productive infrastructure and social welfare services, including healthcare. Right-wing economic policies advocating for privatization gained prominence when the debt crisis struck. These policies argued that people should not expect free healthcare, leading to declining public health services.

During this period, Sudan initially experienced some growth in healthcare access, and free services were available in many places. When I first visited Sudan, one could walk into a healthcare facility and receive basic treatment, such as a bandage, without charge. However, this changed drastically in the 1990s when a new military government took over. Adopting hyper-privatization and austerity measures, they systematically cut back public health services.

A weak, developing healthcare system came under immense strain. Additionally, the government initiated conflicts in many regions where they imposed austerity, as such policies often required coercion and repression. This further eroded the health system. By the early 21st century, Sudan’s healthcare had become highly privatized and heavily concentrated in Khartoum, which retained the majority of medical personnel.

Most Sudanese doctors sought better opportunities abroad, particularly in Saudi Arabia or the UK. Those who remained in Sudan preferred working in private hospitals in major cities, where they could earn a livable wage, rather than in underfunded public hospitals in rural areas, where salaries ranged between $50 and $200 per month—insufficient for someone who had endured the rigorous training required for a medical career.

As a result, Sudan developed a highly centralized healthcare system focused on Khartoum, making access to medical services in other regions extremely difficult. When Khartoum fell in April 2023, this unequal system was effectively decapitated. Most specialist hospitals, clustered around the presidential palace where intense fighting occurred, were forced to shut down, leaving only a few operational facilities.

Healthcare provision then shifted into two main spheres. On one hand, private actors relocated their services outside of Khartoum. On the other hand, grassroots emergency response groups emerged during the 2018–2019 revolution and stepped in to provide urgent medical care. These mutual aid organizations had pioneered self-help models, running emergency rooms nationwide. However, they were ill-equipped to handle the massive healthcare crisis. Their resources were scarce, medical buildings were destroyed, and doctors were arrested and tortured.

Despite their efforts, these groups faced overwhelming challenges and became key targets of government repression during this turbulent period.

Jacobsen: How have cross-border conflicts and territorial disputes, such as the Kafia-Kingi enclave, shaped some of the political-economic dynamics of the region?

Thomas: I worked on Kafia-Kingi a few years ago but am unaware of recent developments except through friends and other contacts. However, Sudan and South Sudan have a relatively unique set of border conflicts because they are both recent and unresolved. Border disputes exist across Africa—there is a contested triangle on the Egypt-Sudan border and another between South Sudan and Kenya, where different interpretations exist regarding ownership.

Often, the more powerful state maintains control over disputed enclaves. This has been the case along much of the Sudan-South Sudan border, where Sudan, with its larger population, military, and financial resources, has retained its presence in key border areas.

Not all border disputes are resolved through war. Most are long-term disputes that gradually get negotiated. Sudan has maintained control over Kafia-Kingi, a mineral-rich enclave South of Darfur, which, by legal standards, should have been ceded to South Sudan in 2011. The rules established that areas administered by southern provinces in 1936 would remain part of South Sudan. However, Kafia-Kingi was the largest land area transferred from South Sudanese to North Sudanese provincial administration, an early post-independence decision.

There were several reasons for this transfer. Kafia-Kingi was sparsely populated, making it a difficult area to govern. Additionally, its mineral wealth made it highly valuable, prompting authorities in Khartoum to exercise greater control over the region.

When South Sudan gained independence, border enclaves became one of the many unresolved issues negotiators had to address. Other complex matters included national debt allocation, ownership of embassies such as the one in Nairobi, and South Sudanese citizens’ status in Sudan. These were sensitive topics requiring significant compromise.

As a result, negotiations on border enclaves were indefinitely postponed, and it is likely to take a long time before any resolution is reached.

Kafia-Kingi is particularly significant because it borders the Central African Republic and Chad. Despite being a remote and sparsely populated area, it has become a hotbed of activity due to arms trafficking, gold smuggling, and the presence of various outlaw groups.

It is now a highly contested zone, as one of the major gold mines fueling the war in Sudan is located within the enclave. The ongoing conflict between the Rapid Support Forces, the military, and their respective allies is partly driven by control over these gold resources.

Unfortunately, this beautiful and remote forested region has been brutally drawn into the turmoil of modern geopolitics, with its resources becoming central to an increasingly violent conflict.

Jacobsen: What are the major challenges foreign-funded healthcare initiatives face in Sudan? Supply chains, delivery, application, things of this nature.

Thomas: Foreign funding does not constitute a significant portion of Sudan’s healthcare economy. The most recent national health accounts, published about six years ago, estimated that foreign funding accounted for approximately 5% of the country’s total healthcare costs. Much of this funding came from global philanthro-capitalist organizations, such as the Gates Foundation and Gavi, which focused on vertical programs.

Vertical programs allocate funds for specific interventions—such as vaccines or malaria nets—rather than supporting comprehensive healthcare systems. While these programs can lead to progress on urgent public health challenges, they are limited in scope. Effective healthcare requires addressing multiple needs simultaneously, and vertical programs do not always integrate well with broader health initiatives. For example, malaria nets alone are insufficient in communities facing malnutrition, infectious diseases, and epidemic outbreaks.

Most foreign-funded healthcare in Sudan was channelled through the Ministry of Health, which managed the distribution of funds and resources. However, with the government’s collapse, these funds’ status remains uncertain. Efforts have been made to transition toward UN funding mechanisms. However, coordination with the Ministry of Health is still necessary at some level, as it maintains connections across the country.

The volume of foreign aid has likely contracted, given the logistical challenges of transferring funds, purchasing medical supplies, and distributing goods within Sudan. Though I do not have precise figures, I suspect foreign funding has not increased. An increasingly significant element of foreign-funded healthcare is diaspora remittances, which support emergency rooms providing critical care across Sudan.

Jacobsen: What about kinship networks in Sudan and South Sudan’s economies? Are these scaled in a way that helps at least some of the population and mitigates healthcare gaps?

Thomas: Kinship networks exist everywhere, don’t they? Powerful figures like Mr. Trump have kinship networks even in the United States. They are an integral part of social organization.

Economic and social life was historically structured around kinship-based production systems in many places. However, not all social orders were strictly kinship-based. Production was sometimes organized around alternative social networks, such as age groups. These networks were not necessarily based on family ties but on individuals coming of age together in a specific place—a pattern seen in many societies worldwide.

You see these types of networks everywhere—think of school reunions. People still attend them as useful networking events. For example, Harvard alums often connect with fellow graduates to secure job opportunities.

These networks have always existed, but previously, labour was not mobilized through markets. Instead, it was organized through reciprocal obligations that weren’t formally tracked or bartered. Let’s say, Scott, that you invite me for dinner tomorrow, then again the following week, and a couple of weeks later, a third time. I wouldn’t write you a check saying I owe you a dinner, but after the third invitation, I would likely feel an implicit obligation to return the favour. You, too, might expect that I reciprocate in some way.

That is a better way of understanding how these economies function than the concept of barter, which is largely an invention of right-wing economists who misunderstand social reciprocity. If you’ve invited me multiple times, I should contribute something. If you are significantly wealthier than me, I may not invite you back to my home out of embarrassment. Still, I will find another way to reciprocate—perhaps by helping you in some other manner.

These networks, however, are under immense pressure as people increasingly need money. Many are forced to relocate, live in refugee camps, or seek safety in displacement camps. In such environments, individuals must sell their labour and endure harsh conditions. The freedom to choose is greatly diminished, and they must adhere to external demands rather than act according to their social obligations.

Jacobsen: To move into a more constructive discussion, what policy recommendations could mitigate economic commodification and conflict in Sudan’s healthcare system or South Sudan?

Thomas: If you want a policy recommendation, why not aim for a global free healthcare system modelled after Canada or Cuba? If discussing real solutions, why not advocate for a universal healthcare system?

People are under tremendous pressure to access healthcare and education, enduring significant hardships to obtain these basic needs. Nearly everyone would prefer free healthcare and education. Suppose wealthy countries do not want people migrating across their borders. Why not invest in comprehensive social services in their home countries? By fully decommodifying healthcare and education, you incentivize people to remain in their communities rather than seek opportunities elsewhere.

That is a genuine policy recommendation. There are other policy approaches, but I often see them as non-solutions. For example, some propose micro-enterprise programs to empower women—yet these initiatives often result in marginal economic gains, with individuals earning just a few dollars a month. These approaches fail to address the root causes of economic disparity and healthcare inequity.

Those are the policy prescriptions of the aid industry, but they have been tried before.

Jacobsen: Do you have any comments on Omer Al-Bashir’s impact on healthcare access or medical services, particularly in rural areas?

Thomas: He was an arch-neoliberal, managing healthcare in rural areas accordingly.

Jacobsen: Who do you think is leading, organizationally or individually, a positive collective movement toward a better future for Sudan? Who is working towards reducing human rights abuses, improving healthcare, and ensuring people’s needs are met?

Thomas: Sudan has undergone a revolution. Brilliant revolutionaries have eloquently articulated Sudan’s crisis and proposed practical solutions. They have devised models of decommodified healthcare in a highly commodified healthcare environment. These individuals and movements are leading the way, and people should pay attention to what they have to say.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Eddie, I have no more questions. Thank you very much for your time today. It was nice to meet you. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Operation Come Home: Overdose Support in Canada

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/15 (Unpublished)

Operation Come Home (OCH) supports at-risk youth aged 16–25 through harm reduction, counselling, and overdose prevention. Executive Director John Heckbert highlights the role of peer staff in mentoring participants, managing caseloads, and leading workshops on substance use awareness. OCH ensures youth leaving hospitals or treatment centers receive continued support by partnering with sector organizations. A daily drop-in program provides resources and referrals for those struggling with addiction or mental health. By focusing on youth, OCH prevents exposure to adult homelessness and related dangers like drug trafficking and violence, helping them secure housing, employment, education, and family reunification.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is the role of individuals with lived experience in leading the Operation Come Home project?

John Heckbert: There are four peer staff in the project, who are supporting our program participants with counselling and assistance to help them achieve their goals in reducing and then ending their substance use.  Our peers will provide ongoing, consistent support to participants with significant substance use challenges.  They will each manage their own caseload of 20 clients and provide daily crisis assistance and support to others in our programs.  They will also lead workshops and sessions that provide information to youth that inform them of the dangers of substance use, and provide instruction in overdose prevention.

Jacobsen: How will Operation Come Home connect youth leaving hospitals or treatment centers with continued support?

Heckbert: To ensure clients leaving treatment centers are provided with ongoing, continued support, we have reached out to partners in our sector to generate referrals to our program.  Our goal is to ensure that all youth exiting treatment programs in Ottawa are aware of our services and able to access support through our counsellors.  To achieve this, we have prepared information that hospital staff and those in treatment centers can share with clients.  Wherever possible our team will meet these participants at our center or in community settings to bring them into our program.

Jacobsen: How are harm reduction, overdose prevention, counselling, and mental health services, integrated to support at-risk youth here?

Heckbert: Our team holds a daily drop-in program that is open 7 days per week, in which youth receive harm reduction resources, information about overdose prevention, and introductions to staff members and are encouraged to join programs that improve their well-being.   The drop-in is advertised throughout our city at other community agencies, homeless shelters, and with community postering.  Youth who come to OCH and indicate concerns about their substance use or mental healthy are encouraged to join our programs that provide support.  In many cases, youth pursuing other priorities within our organization, such as finding new housing, obtaining employment, or completing high school, will be introduced to counsellors who can provide targeted help with substance use or mental health counselling. 

Jacobsen: Why does OCH focus on ages 16–25?

Heckbert: Operation Come Home’s core mandate is to help at-risk youth aged 16-25.  In some programs, such as our employment or education work, we help youth up to age 29.  We help youth achieve permanent improvements in their well-being, and achieve their goals with reuniting with family, improving their mental health, ending substance use, obtaining housing, finding employment, or completing school.   Having these programs for youth is essential, as we are reducing our youth’s exposure to the adult homelessness system and adult harm reduction services.  This in turn reduces the risks youth face from drug dealers, human traffickers, violence, and other harms.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, John.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Pimiskâw Scholarship to Support Indigenous Students

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/15

Genevieve Decarie a Conseillère en communication for UQAT. The Pimiskâw Scholarship competition at UQAT supports Indigenous students by recognizing academic excellence, perseverance, and community involvement, while reducing financial barriers to higher education. The program was co-created with Indigenous students, UQAT’s First Peoples Service, Mamawi Mikimodan, and FUQAT, ensuring it aligns with Indigenous realities and values. The name “Pimiskâw,” symbolizing paddling a canoe, reflects perseverance and support during academic challenges. Nearly $75,000 in scholarships are available for 2025, with applications open from January 6–26. Organizations can contribute by donating through FUQAT. The initiative promotes access to education, retention, and the inclusion of Indigenous culture in academia, reflecting UQAT’s commitment to First Peoples.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does the Pimiskâw Scholarship competition support Indigenous students at UQAT?

Genevieve Decarie: This program will support several university career pathways and recognize the excellence, perseverance and commitment of Indigenous students. While helping to reduce social inequalities and promoting access to higher education, these scholarships are also intended to attract more Indigenous people to post-secondary studies, and more specifically to UQAT.

  • Excellence scholarships: aim to recognize the academic performance of students (in addition to results, various criteria will be considered such as attendance, progress, etc.).
  • Perseverance scholarships: Recognize the tenacity of students who have an atypical or challenging background, and who demonstrate determination by succeeding in their studies.  
  • Involvement scholarships: aim to recognize students’ involvement in the university and/or community environment (Note: paid work and involvement in the workplace will not be considered)

Jacobsen: How does the collaboration between FUQAT, UQAT’s First Peoples Service, Mamawi Mikimodan, and Indigenous students influence the Pimiskâw Scholarship program?

Decarie: The competition is the result of a close collaboration between the Fondation de l’UQAT (FUQAT), UQAT’s First Peoples Service (FPS), the Mamawi Mikimodan service and members of the Indigenous student community. This co-creation process has made it possible to design a program that responds to the realities of Indigenous students. 

For example, we consulted the members of the Indigenous student community and collaborated with them to develop a promising program that is adapted to their context, to better understand their needs and also to find a representative name for the competition, which would also highlight Indigenous language and culture. Through this initiative, we want to support them better and recognize the richness of their culture and their contribution to our university and our society.

Jacobsen: How does the Pimiskâw Scholarship initiative reflect UQAT’s commitment to First Peoples?

Decarie: The Pimiskâw Scholarship competition is yet another example of the long-standing collaboration between UQAT and Indigenous people over the past several years, but also based on UQAT’s principle of territorial recognition.This is a concrete demonstration of the University’s commitment to valuing the knowledge, culture and resilience of First Peoples by implementing means to promote and encourage access to studies and academic perseverance.

Jacobsen: What cultural symbolism is represented by the name “Pimiskâw”?

Decarie: The name Pimiskâw was chosen following a consultation with UQAT’s Indigenous students. It was proposed by Jérémie Brazeau, a member of the Kitigan Zibi Anishinabe community and a student in the Bachelor of Teaching English as a Second Language program, at the Mont-Laurier Centre. The word refers to the action of paddling a canoe. “Being a canoeist, I associate my return to school with a trip down a river. Sometimes we run into rapids, but our canoe and our efforts will get us to where we want to go. I associate this financial aid with the canoe that helps us throughout our school career”, explains Mr. Brazeau. Pimiskâw symbolizes the support and perseverance needed to overcome the challenges of academic life. 

Jacobsen: What is the total amount of scholarships available?

Decarie: This year, nearly $75,000 in scholarships are available

Jacobsen: How can organisations contribute to supporting the Pimiskâw Scholarship program?

Decarie: The Pimiskâw program exists because of generous donors who offer various scholarships to recognize excellence, perseverance and commitment. Any organization wishing to support this program and offer scholarships to Indigenous students is invited to contact the Fondation de l’UQAT, who manages the program. In the near future, we’d like to develop new scholarships to attract Indigenous students to programs where they are less represented. For example, in engineering, digital creation and psychoeducation.

INFO: fondation@uqat.ca

Jacobsen: What is the timeline for Indigenous students to apply to the scholarships?

Decarie: Indigenous students will be invited to submit their applications from January 6 to 26, 2025. The scholarships will be awarded in part at the Vallée-de-l’Or Scholarships Gala on April 2nd at the First Peoples Pavilion on the Val-d’Or campus, or according to the recipients’ home campus. Many Indigenous students are distance learners, some in their own communities. The Foundation will find an appropriate way to give them their bursary.

Jacobsen: How does the Pimiskâw Scholarship initiative aim increase access to post-secondary education?

Decarie: This program will support several university career pathways by reducing financial stress, enabling a better balance between family, work and study-related obligations, valuing post-secondary studies and encouraging student retention, etc.  

By reducing social inequalities and promoting access to higher education, these scholarships are also intended to attract more Indigenous people to post-secondary studies, and more specifically to UQAT.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Chinmay Jani on Air Pollution and Lung Cancer

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/14

Dr. Chinmay Jani is a clinical fellow in hematology and oncology at the Sylvester Comprehensive Cancer Center, University of Miami. With a strong medical background, he has published extensively on topics like lung cancer trends, COVID-19, and precision medicine. His work emphasizes global risk factors, such as tobacco, air pollution, and asbestos, impacting cancer mortality. Dr. Jani has completed his medical school at Gujarat University, ranking among the top in his medical school class, and completed his Internal Medicine residency and chief residency at Mount Auburn Hospital and Harvard Medical School. Fluent in multiple languages, he is an active member of global medical societies and a proponent of tailored public health policies and precision oncology. Jani discussed research on lung cancer mortality trends, focusing on tobacco, air pollution, and asbestos as key risk factors. Tobacco-related lung cancer deaths have declined globally but remain significant, with gender disparities evident. Air pollution, particularly PM2.5, has become a growing concern, showing increased mortality rates in countries like China. In contrast, household air pollution has decreased due to cleaner energy initiatives. Asbestos exposure continues to impact lung cancer rates, especially in the U.S., where mortality rates are double the global average. Dr. Jani emphasized the importance of targeted policies, public awareness, and precision medicine in addressing these challenges. For more information, see here.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here with Dr. Chinmay Jani, a clinical fellow in hematology and oncology at the Sylvester Comprehensive Cancer Center at the University of Miami Health System. First question: What were the primary objectives of the Sylvester Comprehensive Cancer Center on lung and related cancer trends study? 

Dr. Chinmay Jani: The primary objective of our study was to investigate risk factor-associated mortality trends for lung cancer. We focused on three main risk factors: tobacco, air pollution, and asbestos. We also stratified air pollution into household air pollution and PM2.5, fine particulate matter pollution. We analyzed how these trends have evolved over the past two or three decades in the ten most populous countries in the world. 

Jacobsen: Why work on the ten most populous countries?

Jani: That’s a great question. We have a robust global oncology department here at the University of Miami, led by Dr. Gilberto Lopes, also the senior author of this paper. He directs the department and guided us in conducting a global analysis of lung cancer mortality trends.

There are various ways to approach this type of research. Still, we selected the ten most populous countries because they account for a significant proportion of the global population. These countries also represent diverse geopolitical, economic, and environmental factors. For example, they include developed nations like the United States, developing countries like India and Pakistan, and regions like Nigeria in Africa. This selection provides a comprehensive perspective on how these countries, which substantially influence global economics, policies, and climate, manage lung cancer risk factors and mortality trends.

Jacobsen: How have tobacco-related lung cancer mortality rates evolved globally?

Jani: Overall, lung cancer mortality rates have been decreasing globally. 1990 the global mortality rate was approximately 27.3 deaths per 100,000 population. By 2019, this figure had declined to 25.2 per 100,000 population. However, I want to clarify that our study focused specifically on lung cancer mortality rates, not incidence rates.

Gender-based trends reveal an interesting disparity. Among males, mortality rates have significantly decreased, dropping from approximately 45 to 37 deaths per 100,000 population—a substantial reduction. Conversely, standardized mortality rates among females have increased, rising from 13 to 15 deaths per 100,000 population. While female mortality rates remain less than half of male rates, the upward trend among females contrasts sharply with the steady decline observed in males.

For the tobacco-related findings, I want to highlight that, proportionally, tobacco has had a significant impact on lung cancer mortality. Our study included trachea, bronchus, and lung (TBL) cancer mortality. Still, for simplicity, we often refer to these as lung cancers in this study.

In the 1990s, tobacco accounted for approximately 72% of lung cancer mortality globally, which means nearly three-fourths of the cases were attributed to it. By 2019, this figure decreased to 66%, which is still two-thirds. Over the past three decades, significant strides have been made in tobacco control policies. For example, we see fewer tobacco advertisements, smoking bans in public places in many countries, and health organizations refusing sponsorship from tobacco companies.

Despite these efforts, the reduction from 72% to 66% shows slow progress. This indicates the need for continued and intensified efforts to address this modifiable risk factor. Reducing tobacco use could lead to a substantial decrease in lung cancer mortality.

When we look at gender-specific trends, for males, the proportion of tobacco-related lung cancer mortality decreased from 81% to 77%, which is still above three-fourths. For females, it decreased from 49% to 44%, meaning almost half of the lung cancer mortality in females is still linked to tobacco. If we can further reduce tobacco use, we could significantly lower lung cancer mortality worldwide.

We also want to highlight that tobacco consumption habits are different in different parts of the world. For example, in Indian sub-continent countries, tobacco is usually consumed along with betel nut, which can have its own side effects and increase cancer risk.

Jacobsen: What role does asbestos exposure play in TBL cancer deaths? How do the U.S. mortality rates compare to global averages despite the ban on asbestos?

Jani: Our study yielded some very interesting findings on asbestos. Initially, we focused on tobacco and air pollution as key risk factors for lung cancer mortality. Later, we delved deeper into asbestos-related mortality, particularly after presenting our preliminary findings at the April AACR (American Association for Cancer Research) conference. Around the same time, a new law was enacted in the U.S. banning asbestos, which prompted us to analyze this data further.

To our surprise, lung cancer mortality attributed to asbestos in the U.S. is double the global average. For example, asbestos-related lung cancer mortality in U.S. males is approximately 11.9 per 100,000 population. In contrast, the global average is only 5.1 per 100,000.

Globally, some countries, such as India, China, Indonesia, and Pakistan, are seeing an increase in asbestos-related mortality. While the U.S. has seen significant reductions in asbestos exposure and related mortality rates due to stricter regulations, the current rate remains much higher than the global average, which is concerning. These findings underscore the need for continued vigilance and global efforts to eliminate asbestos use and exposure.

The numbers I’ve mentioned are specific to males, as they tend to have higher exposure to asbestos due to occupational risks. This disparity highlights the need for targeted policies to address these risk factors more effectively.

Jacobsen: So, male patterns are distinct.

Jani: There could be multiple reasons why this is happening. While our study did not establish causality, reviewing the literature and past studies provides some insights into the trends. The cumulative effect of asbestos exposure on health is far greater than initially expected.

Even though significant bans have been implemented, and asbestos has not been widely used for a long time, numerous earlier policies have been limiting its use. However, the cumulative exposure over decades has left a lasting impact. It is important to note that asbestos-related cancers often have a latency period of five to ten years or even longer before they manifest. Once lung cancer develops, the progression to mortality can also take years. This extended timeline means that the cumulative effects of past asbestos exposure are still evident today.

Jacobsen: How does the integration of molecular insights and precision medicine address lung cancer risk factors?

Jani: Another factor to consider is that although asbestos is no longer widespread, significant amounts remain in the environment. It is in older infrastructure, including houses, pipes, and other materials. These residual sources continue to contribute to lung cancer mortality, even though direct usage has declined.

Jacobsen: It’s an ambient leftover from prior infrastructure projects.

Jani: Exactly. That’s a very accurate way to describe it. 

Jacobsen: What are the key findings regarding the impact of air pollution, particularly PM 2.5, on global TBL cancer mortality?

Jani: We divided the data on air pollution into two parts. The first was ambient air pollution, particularly PM2.5, which refers to fine particulate matter pollution that is inhaled and contributes to lung cancer. The second was household air pollution caused by the use of solid fuels.

A positive finding from our study is that lung cancer mortality caused by household air pollution has significantly decreased across all countries and for both males and females. This trend is encouraging, especially in developing countries where solid fuels are traditionally used extensively. This reduction reflects the success of improved household fuel policies and cleaner energy initiatives.

However, the situation is quite different regarding ambient PM2.5 pollution. Globally, the impact of ambient air pollution has increased. The highest increase has been observed in China, where lung cancer mortality due to ambient particulate matter has risen dramatically. For instance, the rate of males has increased from 5.4 to 13.6 per 100,000 population—an almost 2.5-fold rise. For females, the rate has increased from 1.69 to 5 per 100,000 population, nearly tripling as well.

The data also shows a 25% increase in global lung cancer mortality attributable to ambient air pollution, making it the second-largest modifiable risk factor for lung cancer after tobacco. These findings indicate a pressing need for policies addressing ambient particulate matter. While significant efforts have been made to reduce tobacco-related lung cancer mortality, air pollution now demands similar attention.

We must focus on understanding the molecular mechanisms by which air pollution contributes to lung cancer and work on preventive measures to curtail its impact. By addressing this modifiable risk factor, we can significantly reduce global lung cancer mortality.

Jacobsen: How does the integration of molecular insights and precision medicine address lung cancer risk factors?

Jani: As we deepen our understanding of lung cancer, it has become clear that not all lung cancers behave the same way. Historically, the primary classification was between non-small cell lung cancer, such as adenocarcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma. With advancements, particularly the introduction of immune checkpoint inhibitors, we’ve learned that while some patients respond exceptionally well to these treatments, others do not.

This has prompted numerous studies to investigate the reasons for these differences. We have evidence that patients with certain targetable mutations respond differently to specific treatments. For instance, around seven or eight years ago, the NCCN (National Comprehensive Cancer Network) guidelines primarily recommended chemotherapy for stage four lung cancer, with immune checkpoint inhibitors just starting to emerge and only a few targeted therapies available.

Today, the landscape has changed dramatically. We now have treatments targeting mutations such as EGFR, ALK, ROS1, HER2, etc. This evolution highlights that while all these cases are classified as lung cancer, they behave differently and require different treatments.

This study could contribute to understanding how different risk factors, like tobacco or air pollution, might influence specific molecular alterations in lung cancer. Future research could explore whether these risk factors affect molecular changes differently and how this knowledge could guide precision medicine or precision oncology, tailoring treatments to individual patients based on their risk factors and molecular profiles. For instance, studying the impact of air pollution on molecular changes in lung cancer could open up new avenues for targeted therapies.

Jacobsen: What gaps exist in current lung cancer screening guidelines?

Jani: That’s an excellent question and an ongoing discussion and research area. The current U.S. Preventive Services Task Force (USPSTF) guidelines, which are widely used in the U.S. and referenced in other countries, focus primarily on smoking as the main risk factor for lung cancer screening. For a patient to qualify for screening and receive insurance reimbursement, they must have at least a 20-pack-year smoking history or have quit smoking within the past 15 years.

In our study, we found that 66% of lung cancer deaths were associated with smoking. However, this leaves 34% of cases unexplained by smoking history. Among females, more than 50% of lung cancer deaths occur in patients without tobacco as a risk factor. These individuals are not currently included in screening programs based on existing guidelines. Similarly, other risk factors, such as asbestos exposure or air pollution, are not yet incorporated into screening criteria or insurance reimbursement policies.

We need more research to refine risk factor models for lung cancer screening to address these gaps. Expanding screening guidelines to include additional risk factors and increasing the uptake of lung cancer screening would help diagnose cases earlier and improve outcomes.

Jacobsen: What policy measures and public awareness strategies are suggested by the researchers to address the increasing cancer risks?

Jani: Policy measures and public awareness strategies are essential to address cancer risks.

  1. Tobacco Control Policies: While progress has been made, stronger global efforts are needed to reduce tobacco use further. Policies should focus on stricter advertising bans, increased taxation, and broader implementation of smoke-free public spaces.
  2. Air Pollution Regulations: Air pollution is becoming the second-largest modifiable risk factor for lung cancer. Governments must enforce stricter regulations on industrial emissions, promote cleaner energy sources, and improve public transportation to reduce reliance on fossil fuels.
  3. Asbestos Ban and Cleanup: Although asbestos use is banned in many countries, legacy asbestos remains in older buildings and infrastructure. Efforts can be made for large-scale cleanup projects and raise awareness about the risks of asbestos exposure.
  4. Expanding Screening Guidelines: Screening criteria must include non-smoking-related risk factors like air pollution and asbestos. Policymakers should allocate resources to refine screening models and ensure insurance coverage for these expanded criteria.
  5. Public Awareness Campaigns: Education campaigns should inform the public about smoking, air pollution, and asbestos exposure risks. Outreach efforts should focus on high-risk populations, particularly in developing countries, where awareness may be lower.
  6. Research Funding: Increased funding for research on lung cancer risk factors, molecular mechanisms, and precision medicine is critical. This will allow researchers to understand better how environmental and genetic factors interact and develop more effective treatments.
  7. Global Collaboration: Cancer prevention strategies require international collaboration to share data, best practices, and resources. Addressing air pollution and tobacco use requires coordinated efforts across borders.

By implementing these measures and raising awareness, we can significantly reduce lung cancer risks and improve outcomes globally.

As I mentioned, the main policies that should be implemented include strengthening tobacco-related regulations and developing more targeted policies addressing air pollution and asbestos exposure. Understanding the associations between air pollution and lung cancer, particularly in developing countries like India and China, will enable policymakers to devise more effective strategies.

One simple example is related to burning waste in India. Over the past decade, the government of India has made tremendous efforts to increase awareness about the dangers of burning solid waste. While the use of solid fuels for cooking in households has significantly decreased, the practice of burning waste persists in certain areas. Although the government provides resources and alternatives, public awareness is still lacking.

Now that we have more evidence showing that these risk factors—like smoking, which causes not only lung cancer but also many other cancers—are detrimental, public awareness campaigns are crucial. If people become more informed, they are more likely to accept and comply with these policies. Creating awareness is, in my opinion, the priority. Once awareness is established, policies can be tailored to meet each country’s needs.

Jacobsen: Dr. Jani, thank you very much for your time today. I truly appreciate it.

Jani:  Thank you very much.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

AI-Powered Solution for Learning Disabilities

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/13

Dr. Coral Hoh is a clinical linguist and co-founder of Dysolve. This AI-driven platform supports students with learning disabilities, particularly dyslexia. Through innovative, game-based assessments and personalized educational plans, Dysolve has helped hundreds of students achieve grade-level reading within 1–2 years at a fraction of the cost of traditional special education programs. Dr. Hoh combines linguistics, cognitive science, and AI expertise to advance accessible, effective learning solutions while addressing ethical and privacy considerations in education technology. Hoh shared insights on their AI tool, designed to address learning disabilities like dyslexia by correcting language processing deficits. Unlike traditional methods that compensate for dyslexia, Dysolve aims to resolve it by achieving 90–100% student efficiency. Dr. Hoh emphasized the emotional and mental health benefits for children who overcome these challenges, noting significant transformations in behaviour and academic performance. With a focus on privacy and custom-built AI, Dysolve’s approach highlights collaboration across linguistics, mathematics, and software engineering to address this issue holistically. Dr. Hoh announced their goal of ending dyslexia entirely.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Dr. Coral Hoh, a clinical linguist and co-founder of Dysolve. Dysolve is an AI tool designed to assist teachers in personalizing educational experiences for students with learning disabilities. The assessment focuses directly on the students. You’ve helped students achieve grade-level reading, even those with dyslexia. How does this improve cost efficiency compared to various special education programs at the state level? And, personally, how did you become interested in linguistics, education, and related fields? 

Dr. Coral Hoh: How did I end up in linguistics? I come from a place where people are multilingual. Language is something we grew up with—I’m from Malaysia. When I went to college, I joined a program in linguistics, though it wasn’t explicitly called that. It was called English, but it was linguistics all the way through. Early on, I realized this was what I loved because it’s like being a forensic expert. You can’t see the brain directly, but by examining obvious clues—what a person says, how they respond, what’s missing, or what’s incorrect—you can infer what’s happening inside.

I began developing this method during my bachelor’s program. I continued refining it when I entered a Ph.D. program in linguistics at the University of Delaware. By then, cognitive science and AI were gaining popularity. Even back then, we were already discussing neural networks. After earning my Ph.D., I moved to upstate New York and began working with local communities. I discovered that many families were struggling with language learning problems.

I love working with children, but it became an emotional journey as I realized how big of a crisis this was for many families. Disabilities like dyslexia are common, and they can tear families apart. I ended up working with single mothers frequently, which is especially challenging for young moms when boys grow quickly. For example, a 10-year-old boy, based on research, can experience a growth spurt that leaves him taller than his mother within a year. At that point, it becomes difficult for a mother to command authority when she has to look up to her son.

This made me see the seriousness of the issue. When I delved into the research on dyslexia, I found it vague and inconsistent—it wasn’t operationalized in a way that could provide clear, measurable solutions. Even today, the definition of dyslexia lacks concrete clarity. I realized that even if I could help one or ten individuals, millions were affected. The only scalable solution was AI.

That’s why we built this AI program—to evaluate and determine the severity of language processing problems, which is what dyslexia is at its core. People use the term “dyslexia,” but at a fundamental level, we need to focus on the language processes in the brain.

When you do that, you can measure it for each person. Then, you set about correcting. That’s what Dysolve AI, the system we built, does. So it’s a combination of different fields working together.

And if you talk about my background, I had a foundation in linguistics, but it wasn’t enough because I didn’t do clinical linguistics or learn about the brain. Then, there’s the challenge of translating a linguistic model into something that can be coded. So, you have to delve into mathematical modelling as well. Fortunately, I spent most of my career collaborating with mathematicians and software engineers.

Jacobsen: So, how you were able to manage the translation?

Hoh: Yes. Outside of what we do, people often talk about AI requiring domain experts from various fields to solve problems. Then, you also need translators to bridge those fields. In our case, I handled that translation myself. I designed the system and am also the architect of the program.

Jacobsen: I see. You’ve provided your background and explained your reasons for getting into this work. You’ve also highlighted the humane aspect of addressing difficult social contexts, particularly for families and single mothers. What about defining dyslexia in concrete terms, as you mentioned earlier? The idea is to parse dyslexia into its relevant empirical parts, then code that into Dysolve’s architecture and use it to help individuals with this particular issue. How does that work?

Hoh: You summarized it. Discussing dyslexia as a language processing problem is about identifying what isn’t being processed correctly. Dyslexia often involves deficits in phonological processing, which is how we process speech sounds—phonemes, single sounds, groups of sounds, or phonological patterns.

Jacobsen: Is this well-established in the research?

Hoh: Over 40 years of research have shown that phonological processing is a major predictor of dyslexia. People with dyslexia often struggle with processing sounds, but that’s only one component of language. There are also larger units, like words, sentences, and semantics—the meaning of language. Unfortunately, these aspects tend to be ignored because sounds are finite, concrete, and easier to study than language’s more complex and abstract components.

Jacobsen: So, has the research largely focused on the phonological aspect?

Hoh: Exactly. While it’s valuable, it’s not enough. Dyslexia can affect any part of language processing. Addressing just the sound component won’t solve the problem fully.

Jacobsen: Are there case studies of individuals with pervasive dyslexia who face challenges across all factors associated with the condition? Do such individuals take longer to benefit from the program due to the ubiquity of their deficits?

Hoh: Yes, that’s common. Some individuals have pervasive dyslexia where all factors—phonological, semantic, syntactic, and more—are affected. It presents an overwhelming hurdle, and while the program helps, it takes longer for these cases because their deficits are so widespread.

So, especially early on, the students who came to us had severe problems. That’s why their parents were actively looking for a solution. It’s severe enough that they couldn’t just continue with other methods—they had to address this issue. Many of these students had significant language processing issues.

Since we actually count and measure their progress, we aim to get them to 90–100% efficiency. This is measurable because the program is game-based, and we track their performance accurately in each task. We assess accuracy along with the speed of response and delivery, which together define efficiency.

Many of these students started at 20% efficiency—very serious cases. They often had multiple conditions, such as ADHD, autism, and psychological issues, all overlapping. Addressing these challenges takes longer, and typically, if they’re working regularly each week with occasional breaks, it takes about two calendar years. For others, without such severe conditions, it generally takes about one calendar year.

When multiple language functions are affected, dyslexia can overlap with dysgraphia. Dyslexia involves difficulties with reading, while dysgraphia affects writing, particularly sentence composition. Rather than categorizing them strictly as “dyslexia” or “dysgraphia,” we see it as a continuum. That’s why focusing solely on sounds isn’t sufficient—you must also address sentences.

Jacobsen: What about data collection issues? A big cultural topic around AI right now is ethics. I recently spoke with someone working on semantics and AI, and part of the discussion involved how AI relies on large amounts of data—both real and synthetic. For data gathered from children, are there concerns about privacy and security? Or is the data you’re gathering less sensitive and unlikely to be misused?

Hoh: Yes, that always comes up when we mention AI—data privacy and security. The first thing people need to understand is that there are different types of AI. Ours wasn’t built by simply mining everything available. It’s much more selective and custom-built.

We didn’t use generic tools to develop this. The entire system, from top to bottom, was specifically designed for this purpose. Users build their own siloed database, and no one else has access to it. We don’t share data with third parties, so it’s different—the data are not distributed throughout the program system or beyond.

So, it’s different. I don’t particularly like the term “siloed AI” because some people see it as a negative concept. But in this case, it is compartmentalized—it’s not shared with third parties or anyone else.

Jacobsen: That’s a safe and reasonable way to approach it. The future of many technologies involves specific, actionable tasks. What about timelines? You mentioned two years for cases with multiple combined deficits and about one year for less severe cases. Are you seeing improvements from 20% to 90% efficiency as a linear progression, or does it tend to be more of a slow build followed by a hockey stick curve?

Hoh: It’s more of a hockey stick. If you look at the details, the graph fluctuates. When students get close to 90% efficiency in one type of task, Dysolve AI doesn’t stop there. It shifts focus to another area where they still have challenges, which can cause a temporary drop in performance.

Initially, there were ups and downs as the system worked through the various problem areas. This makes sense because the AI is methodically addressing all the deficits. Then, at some point, after the major areas have been resolved, the brain “clicks.”

When that happens, many pathways clear simultaneously. This often results in a sudden transformation that everyone notices—parents, teachers, and even the children themselves. It can happen in as little as a week. A child who was previously moody, resistant to work, or withdrawn becomes optimistic and cheerful and starts volunteering to read. It’s like seeing a completely different person.

Jacobsen: Do children experience improvements in mental health or well-being when they no longer face pervasive academic struggles?

Hoh: Absolutely, and that’s a crucial aspect of this work. It’s one of the reasons we wrote a book called Dyslexia Dissolved. The book is primarily for parents and includes 10 different cases to illustrate the various facets of dyslexia and related struggles.

For example, we talk about a boy who was bullied extensively. He was punched in the stomach at school because other kids realized he couldn’t read. One day, he fought back, but only his reaction was noticed, so he was labelled a bully. Depression is another common issue.

There’s also a case of a girl who was functionally mute. Her challenges weren’t just with reading but also auditory processing—being able to comprehend and organize words into sentences. She became numb, emotionally withdrawn, and stopped interacting with her family. She even refused to hug them and completely isolated herself.

If this had persisted into adulthood, it could have been devastating. Fortunately, we were able to help her. She graduated from college and even became a school leader in high school. That’s the power of addressing these issues holistically—academically, emotionally, and socially.

Even if it takes two years—or in some cases, less than one year—the transformation is remarkable. The whole person changes. Mental health improves, depression lessens, and we’ve even seen children with hypertension suffer from this issue. It’s overwhelming.

People often think of this as just a reading problem. But even when the book is closed, the problem doesn’t go away for them because it’s about language processing. If you consider how much of your waking hours are spent processing language—it’s constant—all the time.

This is a big issue. With about 20% of the population affected, it’s a huge one. 

Jacobsen: Do you see yourself collaborating with other teams or companies specializing in different areas of learning disabilities?

Hoh: That’s a good question. I see many ed-tech companies, and we’ve had early-stage discussions about potential collaborations. However, most of them focus entirely on education, while we also address the aspect of brain disorders. They typically create programs aimed at compensating for disabilities.

For over 100 years, people have been trying to compensate for dyslexia, this language processing problem. But what we’re doing is correcting it—ending dyslexia. This year, we’re excited to announce that this is the end of dyslexia. People need to use the program.

We’ve documented these cases in our book; those students are fine now. Just last year, a dozen former students came forward and shared that their dyslexia had been resolved. They’ve experienced significant transformations.

Jacobsen: Dr. Hoh, thank you for your time and this insightful discussion. I appreciate the opportunity.

Hoh: My pleasure. 

Jacobsen: Nice to meet you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

AI-Drive Aerial Military Defense Systems

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/12 (Unpublished)

Bill Irby is the CEO of AgEagle Aerial Systems Inc. (NYSE American: UAVS). Irby discusses AI in military operations, UAV advancements, cybersecurity, and regulatory shifts. He emphasizes human oversight in AI-driven defence systems and anticipates industry consolidation in UAVs. His expertise spans technology leadership, aerospace innovation, and defense market adaptation.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Bill Irby, a U.S. Naval Academy graduate, who has over 25 years of leadership in uncrewed air and maritime systems, ISR, actuation hardware, and communications. He was Vice President at Northrop Grumman, overseeing defense technology operations. As President of MTI and Steel Partners Holdings, he led industrial, defense, and logistics ventures. Irby chairs AUVSI and served on Ghost Robotics’ advisory board. He led VBAT transition into Shield AI’s and directed L3Harris’ Reconnaissance Mission Systems. Holding a Master’s from Johns Hopkins, he also serves on the boards of Secmation and LaunchPoint Electric Propulsion Solutions, advancing defense and aerospace technologies.

Bill, it’s great to meet you. Thank you for joining us.

Bill Irby: Great to meet you, too.

Jacobsen: Today, I want to discuss your AgEagle role. You joined in February last year, so while it’s not exactly a greenhorn onboarding, it’s still relatively new. Can you give us an overview of your role and work at AgEagle over the past year?

Irby: Certainly. I walked in just as a new strategic plan was finalized in February last year. I entered a room with the Chairman of the Board and four or five other executive leadership team members. I had the opportunity to hear the latest developments in the strategy and contribute to it at some level.

Shortly after that, we got to work. We took a fresh look at AgEagle’s strategy. When the company was founded, its primary focus was agricultural support with UAS.  Over time, it expanded into airborne data collection for several commercial customers, and ultimately into Intelligence, Surveillance, and Reconnaissance for defence applications. The company has done an excellent job growing in those areas.

In recent years, we have recognized the critical need to pivot toward defense, security, and safety markets. There is tremendous demand for unmanned aircraft systems (UAS) in the defence sector and global safety and security applications. We are committed to helping the company grow in those areas.

This growth has taken many forms. We have won new competitive programs overseas, raised new capital, and engaged in strategic initiatives to position the company for success. It has been a dynamic first year, and are still in growth mode, pushing to take AgEagle to the next level.

Jacobsen: How do you see AI-driven decision-making shaping modern military operations?

Irby: I have seen some of this in action, and naturally, the U.S. is at the forefront of this technology. It’s an important discussion. What exactly do we mean by AI?

There’s been much automation in the drone world for quite some time, but there’s a difference between automation and automated decision-making in the platforms you build. AI is a critical technology. With that said, there have to be controls on it. There have to be human-controlled boundaries placed on AI, defining what systems are allowed to do and not do on their own. AI’s control and oversight aspects are important because, in the defense and security world, you’re talking about life and death.

You cannot create fully autonomous machines with full decision-making capabilities in life-and-death circumstances. But I do see AI as a critical enabler. If you look at Israel and the Gaza conflict, a lot of what they were able to do involved uncrewed systems. If you imagine that type of environment being aided by AI, it would be very significant. So, I see AI as an enabling and emerging technology.

Jacobsen: What key innovations is the company developing to enhance UAVs for commercial applications and public safety operations?

Irby: Key items for us include ensuring that we continue to evolve our product line and making aircraft lighter, more durable, and more resilient.

When you look at UAV-related product lines, you will see that we also sell cameras used primarily for agriculture and photogrammetry, as I’ve mentioned. Interestingly, we sell these cameras to our competitors. They are part of a multispectral imaging line that provides full-motion video, full-colour, and day/night capabilities for various applications. Our camera line is branded as MicaSense, and its primary market is agriculture.

We are currently enhancing those cameras to focus on specific color bands within the spectrum for precise analysis that provides tangible benefits. For example, we conduct extensive crop health monitoring, soil and water content assessment, and insect infestation analysis, all supporting successful farming. We also have a new camera under development that will focus on one specific colour band to enable unique assessments for the farming community.

Jacobsen: What about evolving regulations internally in the U.S. and globally? Domestic regulations are easier to apply in practical terms. In contrast, differing frameworks might make international regulations more complex to implement. People can choose to ratify or ignore a particular document. Even those who ratify it may disregard it. 

Irby: I will mention three regulatory items that align with your line of questioning.

Internally, a U.S. government regulation was put in place last year prohibiting U.S. government agencies from purchasing any Chinese-made DJI product—specifically, any DJI quadcopter-type drone. There is a critical reason for that. The primary goal of this regulation is to ensure the safety and security of U.S. infrastructure and to prevent the unauthorized transfer of sensitive information outside the U.S..

We fully support this initiative. Additionally, this regulation can benefit American-made products by enhancing competitiveness within the domestic market. So, that’s the first regulatory item.

The second regulatory item involves new legislation currently under development, addressing Chinese-manufactured parts and components purchased by the U.S. government or private industry. A broad-sweeping regulation was introduced as a congressional bill last year. The bill passed in the House and was sent to the Senate. It has completed Senate approval.

This legislation intends to counter heavily subsidized Chinese industries that have unfairly competed in the U.S. market. It ensures that American companies can compete successfully without subsidized foreign competitors. Major concerns surround battery technology and other electronic components. China has historically used these technologies for data extraction from the U.S. We are not allowing that to continue.

The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) is the third regulatory item. Over time, I have observed FAA regulations evolve, particularly in relation to the European Union Aviation Safety Agency (EASA) compliance. EASA is the regulatory counterpart to the FAA in theU.S.. These are the two primary governing bodies overseeing flight and aerospace management in their regions.

The FAA has been developing regulations to ensure that drones can safely operate within U.S. airspace. I have closely followed this regulatory evolution for nearly a decade, particularly through my work with AUVSI. AUVSI has been collaborating with the FAA on behalf of the entire drone industry to advance standardized regulations.

One of the biggest challenges I have seen in this space is that drones were previously regulated region by region, state by state, and even municipality by municipality. That level of fragmentation could lead to chaos in U.S. airspace.

Fortunately, the FAA is moving quickly to implement a unified regulatory framework across all U.S. airspace. This shift will benefit manufacturers, builders, and operators as well as public safety. It is a regulatory evolution gaining momentum and making strong progress.

Jacobsen: What are the most significant advances in AI and predictive analytics in defence?

Irby: The biggest advancement is enabled navigation between systems, particularly in drone swarms. Suppose you think about multiple drones operating together. In that case, they can make coordinated decisions across platforms and fly as a swarm rather than as individual units.

Different systems can operate together, maintaining separation in the airspace while executing a shared mission, even if each platform is tailored for a specific function. These drones can communicate, sense one another, and navigate collectively. As discussed earlier in the interview, they can also make coordinated decisions, but always under human guidance.

To me, this is the most significant development, as it will fundamentally change the way defense operations are conducted.

Jacobsen: What about human-machine teaming, where humans act as the final safeguard to prevent catastrophic events or the taking of human life? How do you ensure seamless integration between drone swarms, individual drones, and human decision-making?

Irby: You have to program rules into the system—rules that must be followed before certain actions are executed. For example, before a weapon is released or any offensive action, including electronic warfare, is initiated, a human must be in the loop to make the final decision.

Machines cannot be allowed to make life-and-death decisions autonomously. However, AI can support the process through automated target queuing. For example, suppose a system processes video data and identifies an object or location of interest. In that case, it can analyze the target, classify it as an area of concern, and send that information to a human operator.

But the final decision must always be made by a human. That is my firm belief, and most reasonable people share that opinion.

Jacobsen: What about cybersecurity and addressing concerns related to adversarial AI and the new dimension of warfare involving cyber threats?

Irby: It’s always a concern; however, we incorporate cyber protections into our systems using state-of-the-art cybersecurity methodologies. This is a critical area, ensuring that our systems cannot be hacked or taken over by a threat.

Jacobsen: What are the biggest logistical and technological hurdles in scaling UAVs for widespread deployment, whether in the defence or commercial sectors?

Irby: The biggest challenge is the number of drone companies that have emerged recently.

UAS systems have proliferated rapidly, with new companies everywhere over the last several years. One phase of industry consolidation began about four years ago. The industry was expanding quickly, but many companies were either acquired or went out of business due to an inability to secure capital for further development.

We’ll see another industry consolidation phase over the next two to three years. There are too many competitors, and the market is not large enough to sustain all of them. As a result, consolidation will happen, which will be the biggest industry shift shortly.

Jacobsen: What about the future of fully autonomous UAVs in frontline military roles? Will that ever become a reality, or is it even plausible?

Irby: Technologically, it is possible. However, I believe we cannot allow fully autonomous UAVs to become a reality in frontline conflicts. We cannot permit machines to make independent decisions that put human lives at risk.

Jacobsen: Are there any other areas we should cover that I haven’t asked about?

Irby:  I’d just like to reiterate what a pivotal year it has been for AgEagle. We are committed to enhancing situational awareness by providing customer-centric, advanced robotics solutions and services.Our autonomous drone technologies are high value-add and solve mission-critical problems for our customers. We look forward to our continued growth and supporting the defense industry, and additional government and commercial sectors.

Jacobsen: Bill, thank you for your time and this opportunity. I appreciate it.

Irby: Thanks very much. Appreciate it.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Erika Castellanos, Global Action for Trans Equality

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/12

Erika Castellanos is a transgender HIV-positive woman from Belize residing in the Netherlands. A professional social worker, Erika joined GATE in April 2017 as director of programs. In 2022, Erika was appointed Interim Executive Director; in 2023, she became Executive Director of GATE. Castellanos, Executive Director of GATE (Global Action for Trans Equality), shared her journey from grassroots activism in Belize to global advocacy. She highlighted GATE’s success in removing transgender identities from the WHO’s mental health classifications. She emphasized universal challenges like stigma, discrimination, and access to healthcare. Castellanos underscored the importance of building coalitions across diverse movements, focusing on shared goals to foster dignity and equality. She also discussed advancements in HIV treatment, her personal experience living with HIV, and the transformative impact of U=U (undetectable equals untransmittable). Castellanos advocated for a universalist approach to human rights rooted in ethical responsibility.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Erika Castellanos to discuss GATE, its work, and its relevance in contemporary conversations. As the Executive Director, my primary question is: what was the origin of your interest in the work of GATE? How did you work your way up to becoming the Executive Director?

Erika Castellanos: Thank you. I want to start by sharing a little bit about myself. My name is Erika Castellanos, and I am originally from Belize. I currently reside in the Netherlands. I began my activism in the early 1990s during the height of the HIV epidemic in southern Mexico.

When I moved back to Belize, I started a project to bring people together to engage in advocacy and create change. I founded the first network of people living with HIV. A few years later, I began working on issues affecting trans and gender-diverse people in Belize due to the legal challenges and criminalization of our identities.

2017 after moving to the Netherlands, I joined GATE (Global Action for Trans Equality) as the Director of Programs. My work involved overseeing the projects we implemented, particularly strengthening the health programs. I brought my background in health initiatives and advocacy to connect our work to the global level. In 2022, I became the Interim Executive Director, and in 2023, I officially transitioned into Executive Director.

The journey from working at the national, regional, and global levels has been fascinating. It has also helped me understand the diverse needs and perspectives of different groups in various settings. My biggest lesson is never to compare one community’s experiences with another in a different country. The issues faced and how they are experienced are always specific to individuals.

Jacobsen: That’s an important point. How do you approach things from a theme-based perspective? A country’s topical issues are highly individualized due to its unique history, demographics, and legal or policy barriers.

Castellanos: Yes, you’re right. While individual experiences can vary greatly, at the thematic level, we can identify broader trends. We can draw distinctions among regions or groups of countries without overgeneralizing or stereotyping their conditions. However, this is a delicate balance. Even within regions or countries, there are often significant differences. For example, a country with federal states may have legal systems that operate semi-independently, which complicates drawing broad generalizations.

Regarding the issues certain marginalized communities face, some challenges are universal, regardless of the country. These include stigma, discrimination, access to healthcare, and issues related to gender identity, laws, and recognition. There is no country in the world where I can confidently say, “This country has perfected it.”

Jacobsen: Do you find political conservatism, social conservatism, religious conservatism, or gender conservatism to be more significant barriers to fair and equitable treatment of individuals in different countries, whether in Belize or the Netherlands?

Castellanos: It’s a complex issue. Different forms of conservatism—whether political, social, religious, or gender-based—can intersect and create significant barriers. These barriers affect access to healthcare, education, employment, dignity, and housing. The impact of these factors can vary in each country, but they all contribute to broader challenges for marginalized communities.

Jacobsen: All these issues are influenced by the factors you’ve mentioned. In some countries or regions, the scale of these influences differs. Still, they are all important factors that affect access to universal human rights and the level of freedom of movement that individuals can enjoy. How do you build coalitions and networks of allied organizations that, on paper, would not necessarily appear to be allies? In other words, how do you work with organizations that might not seem like natural partners but, with a little finesse on particular topics, can collaborate to advocate for more dignified treatment, lobby politicians, or push for policies and laws that promote greater equality and fairness? It’s a tricky question.

Castellanos: It is a tricky question, and there isn’t one universal rule on approaching it. Often, we become consumed by our differences. We create subgroups based on particular similarities and forget the shared humanity that connects all of us. We need to stop emphasizing our differences and focus on our similarities to build coalitions with groups that are not the usual allies or traditional partners.

For instance, you can bring together movements like the climate justice movement, the children’s rights movement, and the trans rights movement. On the surface, their missions may not align, and their specific language or objectives may not resonate. However, when we take a step back and examine the broader goal, we realize that all these movements are working toward improving the quality of life—whether it’s protecting the environment to ensure a sustainable future, advocating for the rights and well-being of children, or providing gender-affirming care to ensure the dignity and health of trans individuals.

We must build on these shared goals and act on the belief—often said but rarely practiced—that we are stronger together. Working together allows us to amplify our strengths while setting aside differences. Differences should not divide us; they should be celebrated as a testament to the unique qualities each of us brings to the table. In my opinion, the world would be a boring place if we were all the same.

For me, the key is to step back and ask: What is our end goal? What is the outcome we are all striving for? When we recognize that many of us are working toward the same outcome—ensuring people are happy, living good-quality lives, enjoying stable jobs, and raising healthy families—it becomes easier to find ways to collaborate.

Jacobsen: I appreciate that perspective. What would you consider your most successful campaigns and advocacy efforts through GATE? What would you attribute the success of those initiatives to?

Castellanos: One of the most significant achievements through GATE was the revision of the International Classification of Diseases (ICD-11) by the World Health Organization (WHO), which removed transgender identities from the chapter on mental health disorders. This followed a similar milestone years ago when homosexuality was removed from that chapter.

This was a groundbreaking success because, under WHO guidelines and the ICD-11, trans people are no longer classified as mentally ill. They no longer require a mental illness diagnosis but are instead recognized through the lens of human diversity. This shift was monumental in the history of our activism. It opened doors for individual autonomy and access to essential services. It also facilitated legal recognition, enabling trans individuals to enjoy basic rights, such as attending school, opening bank accounts, obtaining driver’s licenses, and owning homes as equal citizens within their countries.

Those are the kinds of opportunities that are equalized and opened when we remove these pathologizing practices of mental health diagnosis. That success was achieved through years of hard work collaborating with partners, feminist organizations, and leading member states worldwide. It also involved bringing people together to advocate for change. Importantly, we do not always need to be the sole champions for trans people—having other voices join us in championing the way forward is a key element of success.

Jacobsen: You’ve also done significant work around HIV awareness and education. What is the current state of this issue? I am active on the activist side and less likely to be engaged with the research. How is progress on the front of destigmatization, socially and through the mediation of symptomatology for those affected? And what about advancements, perhaps even on the frontier of potential cures?

Castellanos: Science has advanced enormously in recent years. I was diagnosed with HIV in 1995. I come from a time and place where there was little medication, and I attended funerals almost every other day as friends were dying. At that time, there was little to nothing we could do because medication was unavailable. When the first antiretrovirals (ARVs) came through, we celebrated.

Despite the severe side effects of those early medications, they brought hope. Over the years, we have seen incredible advancements. What was referred to as a “cocktail” of numerous tablets has now been reduced to one daily for many people. That is remarkable. Today, we are seeing the development of long-acting treatments, such as injections that can be taken every two months or every six months, as well as medications that might only need to be taken once a week or once a month. These breakthroughs were unimaginable 10, 15, or 20 years ago.

We are on the verge of ending HIV as an epidemic. I am cautious when using the term “ending HIV” and always clarify it as “ending HIV as an epidemic” because that should be our goal. The world, humanity, and the United Nations have set goals to achieve this by 2030. Unfortunately, we are significantly off track, primarily due to inequalities—inequalities in access to newer tools, newer medications, and the systemic inequalities that continue to drive the epidemic.

Despite these challenges, I am confident that as new tools are developed, people living with HIV will live longer and enjoy better quality of life. I remain hopeful for a cure. We have already seen several cases of a cure. Still, these are not yet replicable on a mass scale due to the treatments’ severity. However, just having those cases gives hope to all of us living with HIV.

Another major development that has brought immense hope in recent years is U=U—undetectable equals untransmittable. Scientific evidence has proven that when someone has an undetectable viral load, they do not transmit the virus. This is a huge breakthrough on many levels, including reducing stigma, self-stigma, and fear.

I am married and have two children. My husband is HIV-negative, and we have been together for years. He has remained HIV-negative because I am on treatment and undetectable. I want to see my children grow up, have their children, and see my grandchildren. U=U gives me this hope and peace of mind. I know I can live without the fear of transmitting the virus, which is transformative.

Until recently—and I say this rightly so—when two adults have consensual sex, HIV transmission was often considered the responsibility of both individuals, not just one. Even so, as a person living with HIV, I remember always carrying a small fear in my mind. U=U (undetectable equals untransmittable) has given me peace of mind. The scientific evidence behind it and the fact that the WHO has publicly supported it has changed how we view HIV. It also emphasizes the urgent need to put people on treatment. If we want to end the epidemic, we must ensure treatment is accessible and affordable for everyone—not just for those in wealthy, high-income countries.

Jacobsen: I live in Canada. While Canada doesn’t always get things perfect, it tends to do fairly well on progressive human rights issues. Canada typically avoids extremes, whether falling into obsequiousness on one side or denialism on the other, particularly regarding important identity issues. How do you see human rights as part of a unified vision, not only through GATE but also through your own life? Specifically, how do you approach a universalist perspective on human rights—one rooted in the principle that while we’re happy to see individuals anywhere enjoy their full rights, we also strive for everyone, everywhere, to experience the same?

Castellanos: That’s an excellent question. Many good things are happening in various parts of the world. I would love to see more progressive countries that embrace, respect, and uphold human rights serve as models for others to replicate. One of the big questions I still wrestle with—and for which I don’t yet have a complete answer—is ensuring that marginalized groups are protected. By marginalized groups, I don’t mean just trans people; it could include indigenous communities, people who use drugs, people with low incomes, or others who are vulnerable in different ways.

I see it as an ethical responsibility—when we have privileges that others do not—to bring at least one person along with us, hold their hand, and ensure they can enjoy the same freedoms and rights. Even in countries that are often considered progressive, there are still marginalized groups experiencing significant challenges. For example, there isn’t a single country where I feel women are in the best possible position. Inequalities persist—whether it’s in salaries, opportunities, or representation. In some places, it’s indigenous communities; in others, it’s the LGBTQ+ community.

Living by principles of respect and shared ethical responsibility is essential. Upholding human rights for everyone is a duty we must all share. Despite the challenges, I remain hopeful. The world can be scary at times, but it can also be profoundly inspiring when you hear good news—a policy breakthrough, a government change, or a community shift. These moments give hope to individuals and the rest of the world. We need more examples of good things happening.

Jacobsen: Erika, thank you for the opportunity and your time today. 

Castellanos: Thank you as well. Have a great evening.

Jacobsen: You too. Take care.

Castellanos: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Canadian Global Alignment With Sustainability Standards

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/11

Bruce Marchand is the Interim Chair of the Canadian Sustainability Standards Board (CSSB), leading the organization in advancing sustainability reporting aligned with international standards. Under his guidance, the CSSB launched the first Canadian Sustainability Disclosure Standards (CSDSs), fostering transparency and informed decision-making through high-quality disclosures. Bruce emphasizes aligning global frameworks with Canada’s unique context, ensuring market readiness and public trust. Committed to inclusivity, he supports integrating Indigenous perspectives into sustainability standards. His leadership reflects a dedication to advancing Canada’s sustainability framework, addressing climate-related risks, and enhancing corporate accountability in a rapidly evolving global landscape. The Canadian Sustainability Standards Board (CSSB) launched the Canadian Sustainability Disclosure Standards (CSDSs) to address growing global demands for consistent sustainability reporting and to reduce reporting burdens for organizations. CSDS 1 and CSDS 2 align with international standards from the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) while incorporating Canadian-specific modifications, such as transition reliefs. Developed through extensive consultation, these standards prioritize Canadian public interest and Indigenous engagement. Voluntary unless mandated, adoption is driven by regulatory bodies and market forces. Feedback from the Exposure Drafts phase significantly influenced the standards, ensuring global alignment and responsiveness to Canada’s unique needs.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What prompted the Canadian Sustainability Standards Board (CSSB) to launch the Canadian Sustainability Disclosure Standards (CSDSs)? 

Bruce Marchand: The CSSB was established in 2022 as a Canadian response to growing global demand for timely and comparable decision-useful sustainability information from primary users (investors, lenders and creditors). 

At the same time, many companies already reporting on sustainability are looking to reduce their reporting burden and are welcoming an international baseline standard that consolidates other frameworks.

This led to the creation of the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) in 2021 at COP26. In June 2023, the ISSB finalized IFRS S1 General Requirements for Disclosure of Sustainability-related Financial Information and IFRS S2 Climate-related Disclosures. The CSSB was formed to address those needs by advancing Canadian Sustainability Disclosure Standards that align with the global baseline standards developed by the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) – but with modifications needed to serve the Canadian public interest.

The CSSB created and issued CSDS 1 (based on IFRS S1) and CSDS 2 (based on IFRS S2) help ensure that Canadian organizations can meet international expectations while addressing Canadian needs. 

Jacobsen: Why weren’t these present earlier?

Marchand: As noted, sustainability reporting has evolved significantly in recent years, driven by growing demands for consistent and comparable sustainability-related information. 

The timing reflects the need for alignment with the ISSB’s work and the extensive consultation required to ensure the standards meet Canada’s public interest needs. 

The CSSB’s creation in 2022 provided the standard-setting structure in Canada to address these demands in a thoughtful and robust manner.

How do CSDS 1 and CSDS 2 align with the International Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB)?

CSDS 1 and CSDS 2 are closely aligned with the ISSB’s global baseline standards, ensuring Canadian organizations benefit from international consistency. 

However, the CSSB has introduced targeted modifications – consisting of transition reliefs – to address Canadian public interest considerations, such as the readiness of companies to disclose this information.

Jacobsen: What were the key factors for the development of the Criteria for Modification Framework in Canada?

Marchand: The Criteria for Modification Framework ensures that any deviations from the ISSB’s global baseline standards address Canadian-specific needs while maintaining international comparability and consistency. 

It was developed with significant input from diverse parties, reflecting the importance of balancing global alignment with the needs of Canadian interested and affected parties.

Jacobsen: What is the rationale behind the transition relief modifications in the final standards?

Marchand: The transition relief measures introduced are designed to address challenges Canadian organizations preparing this information face, such as capacity and resource constraints, data quality, and the ongoing development of international data methodologies. 

For example, additional time is provided for Scope 3 GHG emissions reporting and quantitative climate scenario analysis. These measures help ensure preparers have the time to build systems and processes to deliver meaningful disclosures without compromising quality.

Jacobsen: How do the standards address the needs of Indigenous Peoples in Canada?

Marchand: Indigenous feedback was critical to the development of CSDS 1 and CSDS 2 and the Criteria for Modification Framework. The CSSB acknowledges the importance of further engagement and has identified advancing the inclusion of Indigenous Peoples as a key priority in its proposed 2025–2028 Strategic Plan. 

This reflects a commitment to meaningful collaboration and the integration of Indigenous perspectives in future work.

Jacobsen: What is the role of regulators and governments in CSDS adoption across Canadian industries?

Marchand: CSDS 1 and CSDS 2 are voluntary unless mandated by regulators or governments. 

The CSSB works closely with regulatory bodies, such as the Canadian Securities Administrators and the Office of the Superintendent of Financial Institutions, to support adoption. Market-driven forces, like investor demands and supply chain requirements, are also expected to drive widespread use of the standards.

Jacobsen: How did the feedback to the CSSB Exposure Drafts phase influence the final standards?

Marchand: Respondents’ feedback significantly shaped the final standards. 

For example, feedback on the alignment of sustainability reporting with the timing of financial statement reporting and on Scope 3 GHG emissions led to an extended transition period for each of those areas. Concerns about scenario analysis informed the phased implementation for quantitative requirements. The CSSB’s Bases for Conclusions document outlines how respondents’ input informed specific decisions, ensuring the standards serve Canadian public interest while aligning globally.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Bruce. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jason Van Hierden on VCORE Education

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/10

Jason Van Hierden is the President of VRCORE Education, which has partnered with the International Space Station National Laboratory (ISSNL) to launch “ISS: Curiosity in Orbit,” a VR program transforming school gymnasiums into immersive space labs. Funded by the Center for the Advancement of Science in Space (CASIS) and debuting in September 2025, the program targets underserved schools in Alberta and Texas. Students explore physics, biology, and chemistry through hands-on experiments, eliminating logistical barriers and fostering STEM learning—Hierden talks about leveraging VR for education. Initially focused on VR arcades, Vcore pivoted to educational VR post-COVID, introducing Magic School Bus-style experiences to schools. These immersive sessions aim to inspire interest in STEM and history, offering collaborative and independent activities. Hierden discussed plans to expand VR content for full-time school labs, address workforce skill gaps, and partner with NASA to explore space logistics and experiments like crystallization and 3D printing in zero gravity. He emphasized the cultural and systemic challenges in education, particularly in the U.S., compared to Canada.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let’s make sure we have the facts correct. Today, we’re here with Jason Van Hierden, the president of Vcore Education. Vcore Education is focused on transforming classrooms and engaging students, particularly in STEM and other areas. How did you get into VR, and how did you transition into the educational field?

Jason Van Hierden: It all started with virtual reality arcades in 2016 when VR was brand new, and everyone wanted to experience it. A friend of mine thought an arcade would be a great idea. So, we set up one location, which was a massive success—it became incredibly busy. We achieved a full return on investment in just four or five months. After that, we began expanding to additional locations. Eventually, we grew to six locations across Western Canada before the COVID-19 pandemic hit. We didn’t close any stores during COVID-19, but we realized there were flaws in the business model. That’s when we decided to pivot to VR education. Since COVID, we’ve closed four of our six locations, leaving just two. About three years ago, we launched the education initiative. Now, we bring VR headsets into schools and transform their gymnasiums into Magic School Bus-style educational experiences.

These experiences are designed to engage entire classes simultaneously. It’s been a fun and rewarding transition. 

Jacobsen: Regarding this Magic School Bus model, are makeshift stations set up in different parts of the gymnasium, or is the process more fluid, with students moving through and completing each segment in sequence?

Hierden: It depends on the teacher’s plans. When the experience begins, all the students are in a general world experience. In this setting, they can interact with both the environment and each other. Then, we move on to what we call activity bubbles. In these, three to five students work together in their gymnasium section, collaborating on activities and manipulating assets. For example, they might be tasked with arranging the planets in the correct order, physically picking them up and placing them.

Another example is creating ecosystems. We could ask students to create a rainforest on one side of a mountain range and a desert on the other. They manipulate weather patterns and other factors to achieve these environments. This kind of activity fosters teamwork and collaboration.

Finally, we have individual stations. Here, each student works independently in their virtual world. They cannot see other students and must independently complete an activity or objective. Meanwhile, the teacher—who is also in VR—monitors and controls the activities for the entire class.

Jacobsen: Bill Nye discussed the concept of the reverse classroom, where students would attend school briefly for an overview and then complete their coursework independently at home, at their own pace. Would this model serve as a middle ground for that?

Hierden: That’s an interesting idea. I’ll have to look up the concept of the reverse classroom—it sounds like a lot of fun! 

Jacobsen: My phrasing might be more of a colloquial interpretation.

Hierden: I’m intrigued by the concept. Now, the way that we see it, right now, we’re just a VR field trip. We come into a school and do a 60- to 75-minute experience with students, but that’s only because we don’t have enough content to support a full-time VR lab in schools. We’ve got about five or six hours of content for each grade. For a school to spend $100,000 for six hours of content in a year—that’s too much.

Once we’ve developed four to five hundred hours of high-quality content for each grade, we anticipate schools will start setting up VR labs. This will allow students to learn much more extensively using VR.

Jacobsen: And why focus on STEM? Why should we focus on underserved communities in Alberta and Texas?

Hierden: Fair question. Focusing on underserved communities is largely because many grants are available for that. We can partner with the government to help schools afford this and provide these field trips.

STEM is low-hanging fruit. These are the easiest experiences to develop. From a business perspective, the development cost is lower, and the returns are higher. That said, we want to expand into areas like history. For older grades, we’d love to recreate experiences like storming Normandy Beach.

Imagine students all starting on one side of the gymnasium, storming Normandy Beach together, and then moving through the gymnasium, experiencing the trenches. VR can provide an emotional connection to history, which you just don’t get from watching a YouTube video or reading a book, especially because it’s a shared experience with the entire class.

Jacobsen: There’s also a program involving the ISS. How do you give students a sense of zero gravity—or convey the wonder of being in space—while they’re participating in that experience?

Hierden: In some VR experiences, participants can simulate zero gravity by holding onto the side of the ISS and throwing themselves off, making it feel like the ISS is floating away from them—or vice versa. However, we can’t replicate that because our students need to remain in the same physical location, both in the real world and virtually, at all times.

They can’t move virtually without physically moving, so we don’t focus on simulating zero gravity. Instead, we focus on allowing students to perform experiments similar to what astronauts do on the ISS, but in virtual reality. For example, they can pull cabinets out of the walls and conduct experiments in those cabinets—whether it’s biology, physics, chemistry, or something else. That’s more of our focus than the sensation of zero gravity because it’s simply not feasible in our setup. The students are firmly planted in a gymnasium.

Jacobsen: And there’s a skills gap in the job market between what students learn in high school and what’s required. How does VR address this gap? There is a disconnect between what students choose to learn in universities, what the market needs regarding jobs, and the skills people graduate with. How are you addressing these deficits or, more accurately, this mismatch between worker skills and job market demands?

Hierden: Our relationship with industries like NASA and the ISS is still somewhat distant. For example, NASA is interested in increasing its space-related workforce. At this stage, we’re offering students immersive experiences that, hopefully—and we can’t track this too well yet—will inspire them to pursue space-related careers.

As we continue to build out this platform, we’ll be able to do much more. For example, we’ll analyze how quickly students pick up certain skills and their personalities, proclivities, and interests. We aim to provide personalized career recommendations by the time they finish school. Out of 250 potential jobs, we could identify the top 10 roles that best align with a student’s abilities and interests.

We could even act as a liaison between students who show exceptional aptitude in certain areas and organizations like NASA. We could say, “Hey, NASA, this student is highly skilled. You should consider hiring them for an internship or sponsoring their university degree.” However, our platform needs to grow and mature significantly before we can conduct this kind of student analytics.

Jacobsen: What types of jobs are NASA and other organizations projecting as the most in-demand roles in the late 2020s and early 2030s? What are they most hungry for?

Hierden: The biggest area NASA is focused on is space logistics. This involves figuring out how to transport an object—let’s say, a widget—from a small town in Wisconsin to the International Space Station. Or, looking ahead, how to move that widget into a space manufacturing plant, which NASA plans to have operational in the 2030s and 2040s.

While there’s no shortage of people applying to become astronauts—since it’s such an attractive job—space logistics doesn’t have the same appeal. NASA is asking us to help illustrate what’s involved in this field. For instance, what does it take to move a widget from Earth to space? What factors need to be considered, such as G-forces, packaging, placement in the rocket, delivery methods, and more? These logistics are critical, but they’re not roles many people are currently pursuing.

Jacobsen: Do we know the average number of people served by their local educational system? Those served significantly more than average, and those were underserved. Do we have data on how these groups transition into higher education and STEM fields or choose not to pursue them? Is there a significantly different gap between these categories?

Hierden: The gap isn’t as stark in Canada. However, in the United States, it’s extremely pronounced. Many parents will move to specific school districts to give their children a better chance of getting into certain colleges or universities. For example, in New Jersey, statistics show that over 60% of students graduating from high school don’t possess reading and writing skills at a proper grade-four level. It’s a significant problem.

Jacobsen: Have reading, writing, and arithmetic scores in the United States been declining for a long time?

Hierden: From what I understand, yes. The United States used to rank extraordinarily high in global education rankings, but they’ve slipped significantly. Countries like Singapore and China are now outperforming the U.S., which is somewhat embarrassing for a country with such resources.

Jacobsen: How are Americans addressing this gap?

Hierden: Honestly, from what I see, they’re spending money on it, but it’s not resolving the issue. They’re paying teachers more, building nicer schools, and so on, but the outcomes aren’t improving. It’s more of a cultural issue, though that’s more of a personal perspective than something I’ve deeply researched.

Jacobsen: What kinds of experiments can people conduct on the ISS, curiosity in orbit?

Hierden: These are still under development, so we haven’t finalized what they’ll include. However, one idea involves creating crystallization in space, which differs from how crystals form on Earth. Here on Earth, gravity compresses crystals as they form, which can impact their structure. You can achieve perfect crystal formation in zero gravity because there’s no need to support the structures against gravity.

Another concept explored is space manufacturing, specifically 3D printing organs in zero gravity. Without support, you can 3D print organs like hearts much more efficiently. These organs could then be sent back to Earth for medical use. Within 10 to 15 years, you could receive a 3D-printed heart manufactured in space.

Jacobsen: Any further thoughts based on today’s conversation?

Hierden: Nope.

Jacobsen: OK, this is the part where we part ways now.

Hierden: Awesome. Thanks a ton, Scott.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. Take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Teen Coaching for Mental Health

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/09 (Unpublished)

Jesse LeBeau, the Founder of the Attitude Advantage Program, emphasizes that parents must model healthy behavior, as teens absorb actions more than words. TAAP’s 12-week coaching program builds confidence, resilience, and self-esteem, helping teens overcome anxiety and social pressures. One-on-one coaching fosters trust, providing support beyond traditional therapy. TAAP’s 27-week school program engages students through interactive assemblies, teaching essential life skills. LeBeau stresses that failure is vital for growth and urges parents to encourage perseverance. Schools and communities can collaborate with TAAP to support teen mental health. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Half of mental health problems begin at age 14; what are critical steps can parents take to support teens? 

Jesse LeBeau: The biggest thing that parents can do is WALK THE WALK. Your kid is a sponge and sees EVERYTHING you are doing, whether you realize it or not. The ‘do as I say, not as I do’ type of parenting is a cop-out for parents and will go in one ear and out the other.  If you are yelling at your kid to get off the phone at the dinner table, but you are on your phone, it doesn’t matter what you say. They will think you are a hypocrite and not listen. It all starts with you. In almost all of the families we work with, when we do a deep dive into why a teen is struggling with anxiety, stress, depression, anger management, etc., we can almost always trace it back to a parent who is anxious, stressed, depressed, can’t control their anger, etc. If you are serious about your teen’s mental health, you need a teen cell phone contract; get yours here

Jacobsen: What is TAAP’s 12-week online teen coaching program?

LeBeau: We help teens build unshakeable confidence and grit/resilience and master their attitude in 90 days.  All the research, data, and experts show that if you can improve a teen’s self-esteem and confidence, you can positively impact virtually every aspect of their life…whether it’s anxiety, depression, substance abuse, or more serious issues, the kids who truly believe in and love themselves care less about what their peers think of them, whether it’s in person (or online) and they are drawn to the circle of friends that build them up.  They are likelier to be leaders than followers, and this self-belief (and confidence) propels them to success in every area of their lives. 

So, after we learned how critical self-esteem is for a teenager’s well-being and development, we put together a program 100% dedicated to helping teens build incredible confidence, and the results have been amazing.  We do weekly group calls, personal lessons, tests, indexing, and 1-on-1 coaching, and lean into teens’ strengths instead of focusing on all the things they are unhappy with in their lives like therapy does. The key is making it fun so kids want to show up and get results. It doesn’t matter how much mom or dad wants an outcome for them; they have to want it for themself.  The saying goes, ‘You can lead a horse to water, but you can’t make it drink.’ The kids who get the most out of our program are the ones who feel like they are getting to choose to participate, and they are hungry to improve their lives for the better!

Jacobsen: How does this help with confidence, resilience, and a positive mindset?

LeBeau: If we can help any teen with these three things, we can greatly impact their life. Confidence can’t be given with positive affirmations or compliments. Confidence is earned by achieving things. Small wins add up over time; eventually, a young person has a stack of undeniable proof that they can do difficult things. They have to learn to fail and see that it’s not the end of the world and that they can get through it. Life is all about failing. The most successful people have failed repeatedly, but they keep going and can persevere long after most others have chosen to quit. A parent’s job is to prepare their child for the road ahead, not run ahead of their child on the road, and prepare for the road for their child by clearing out obstacles. 

Jacobsen: Why the preference for round-the-clock support rather than intermittent/periodic

LeBeau: Teenagers need mentors who feel comfortable sharing what’s going on with their lives and who aren’t their mom or dad. Even kids with the best relationships with their parents don’t want to share everything with mommy and daddy. It isn’t always because they are trying to hide something bad. Many times, they are such a good kid that they don’t want their parents to worry about them, be stressed, or get involved in a situation they don’t have time for. You’ve probably seen that photo of the iceberg where 90% of it is underwater, and you can’t see it from the surface. That 90% under water is what is happening with most teens, and their parents aren’t aware of what is happening. We build rapport and trust in our program through being open and vulnerable as coaches, and as a result, the kids reach out to us with what’s going on in their lives when it happens in real time. It’s a beautiful thing.

Jacobsen: What are the benefits of one-on-one sessions with a dedicated life coach?

LeBeau: Life coaching for teenagers offers specialized support to help teenagers build essential life skills and personal growth strategies. Coaching sessions often focus on topics such as:

  • Self-Confidence and Resilience: Empowering teens to strengthen their self-worth and face personal challenges with courage.
  • Goal Setting and Achievement: Teens learn to set realistic goals and use effective strategies.
  • Social and Emotional Skills: Whether one-on-one or in a group setting, teen coaching focuses on the interpersonal, social, and emotional skills critical for life long after graduation.

When exploring the idea of coaching versus therapy, it’s important to understand a teen coach’s role in your child’s personal growth. Acting as mentors and allies, the right teen coach is vital to your child’s success inside and outside the coaching program.

The right coach will provide an encouraging, non-judgmental space for your teenager to explore their talents, build resilience, overcome loneliness by working on relationship-building and social skills, and develop the assertive communication skills they need to make it through life.

Teen life coaches are specifically trained to meet teenagers where they are. They get on their level, tell real-life stories they can relate to, and encourage them to overcome hardships without fearing criticism or ridicule. A strong teen life coach will empower your child to take ownership of their own lives and success.

Working with a teen coach is similar to therapy, but the biggest drawback of that approach is that parents don’t get to be a part of the process. It also teaches kids to focus on all the negative things they are unhappy with in their lives, reinforcing a bad habit…ruminating on everything they don’t like repeatedly. 

What we do is the total opposite; we TEAM UP with you (the parents) and work together to help them find the thing they are most passionate about and lean into that. 

This leads them to build more confidence and focus on where they want to be in life instead of focusing on all the negative things in the past as therapy does. 

The other big difference with us is that most kids are a lot less turned off by coaching versus therapy for many reasons. As coaches, we are open and vulnerable with the kids, creating a real relationship with trust and rapport. We expect the kids to be open and honest in return, which they usually are because they feel seen, heard, and genuinely cared about.

For more information on coaching vs. therapy, visit here

Jacobsen: How does the more extensive 27-week school program on social-emotional learning resonate with students?

LeBeau: The big reason our school curriculum is such a hit is because we make it fun. We have music, intro videos, crowd participation, emotional storytelling, basketball tricks, etc.  I’m sure you’ve heard the expression, ‘a spoon full of sugar to make the medicine go down.’  That’s what we do with our kick-off school assemblies. We give kids what they WANT so we can give them what they need. Once they are bought in, we can greatly impact their life.  

We do a high-energy assembly at their school in person to get them fired up and emotionally connected to our founder Jesse’s underdog story. He’s given this talk to over a million kids and knows how to connect with them. They identify with going through hard times in their own lives. Once they have an in-person experience with someone famous and interested in them, they are more open to the weekly lessons their teachers walk them through. They are taught timeless life lessons you don’t normally learn in school, which are important for building confidence, grit/resilience, and learning to master their attitude. Everything taught in the TAAP School program is evidence-based and backed up with research and data. 

For more on the program, you can check it out here. 

Jacobsen: What are some examples of real-life lessons helping teens overcome challenges?

LeBeau: Life is tough. So, toto be prepared for this and succeed in life, kids need to learn to overcome and do toughthings.  One of the best things that can happen to your teenager (within reason and if leveraged strategically) is for them to fail. Things like they got rejected when they asked that special someone to the dance, they didn’t make the sports team, they didn’t get the grade they wanted, etc. A smart parent will use these difficult moments to teach a lesson.

Guess what? Things didn’t work out. But it’s not the end of the world. No one died. You can ask someone else to dance. You can practice and try it out again next year. You can ask for a second shot at the test. It sucks seeing your kid struggle, but if you swoop in and rescue them every time a little discomfort happens, you are hurting them more than you are helping them. In general, the big winners in life fail the most; they keep going and see it as the necessary steps to get closer to where they want to go. Celebrate failure and focus on your child’s effort versus the outcome. It will make a big difference in helping your kid stand on their own two feet and thrive no matter what challenges life throws them! 

Jacobsen: How can parents, schools, and communities get involved?

LeBeau: The best place for parents to learn more is https://theattitudeadvantage.com/welcome/

We visit schools every month nationwide, and we are on a mission to help teens TEAM UP and find their tribe so they can live healthier and happier lives!

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Jesse.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Healthy Super Bowl Sunday

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/09

Dawn Menning, Nutu App’s Registered Dietitian, talks about Super Bowl Sunday ranks as the second biggest eating day in the U.S. after Thanksgiving. To help consumers enjoy the game while maintaining wellness goals, the Nutu App offers a Nutu Score, guiding users with personalized meal suggestions, portion control, and activity tips—without calorie counting.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How can people have game-day treats without hurting wellness goals?

Dawn Menning: 

  • Avoid skipping meals earlier in the day to avoid overeating.
  • Make a healthy dish you and others can enjoy that fits with your wellness goals.
  • Look at all the choices before you eat, that way you can make sure you’re only eating what you truly enjoy.
  • Monitor portion sizes to avoid overeating.  Before going back for more, check in with yourself to see if you are truly hungry.
  • Skip or limit alcohol, choose water or sparkling water instead.
  • Go for a walk before or after the game.  Engage in your regular physical activity.

Jacobsen: How does Nutu Score work to help users balance food intake and activity?

Menning: By using the food logger ahead of time, you can see how the foods you choose impact your Nutu Score and your health.  Once you select an item, you will be provided with a meal modification (if applicable) and a suggestion for physical activity to lower your Nutu Score. 

Jacobsen: What are smart snacking tips for traditional Super Bowl foods?

Menning: Try to fill up on vegetables first then look to lean protein options that are baked and not fried. Use a plate rather than just eating randomly as you’re likely to lose track of how much you eat when grazing.  Don’t stand by the buffet, you’re more likely to snack mindlessly.  

Jacobsen: How does the Nutu App guide users in practicing portion control?

Menning: If you select a food item that doesn’t fit into your healthy eating goals, you’ll be provided with a suggested modification to reduce portion size.  The more food you add you’ll see your Nutu Score go up and this is an indicator to limit the portion size or choose a healthier option.  To lower your score, physical activity will be needed to balance this. 

Jacobsen: Why is hydration important on Super Bowl Sunday?

Menning: Reaching for water first can keep you on track with your eating habits and helps with digestion.

Jacobsen: What are some insights or practical advice for making a balanced Super Bowl menu?

Menning: 

  • Replace frying with baking or air frying.
  • Hummus or guacamole with cut veggies instead of creamy dips.
  • Replace sour cream in recipes with plain Greek yogurt.
  • Fresh fruit instead of sugary fruit dips.
  • Nuts instead of fried chips or snacks.
  • Turkey or chicken burgers instead of ground beef.
  • Ditch sugary drinks for water or sparkling water.

 Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dawn.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Work of the Combat Antisemitism Movement

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/09

Sacha Roytman, a 38-year-old married father of three, holds a bachelor’s degree in Interactive Communications from the Interdisciplinary Center (IDC) Herzliya and a master’s degree in Political Marketing from the IDC School of Government, Diplomacy, and Strategy. Over the course of his career as a social entrepreneur, Sacha has dedicated himself to securing and nurturing Jewish life worldwide, collaborating with a wide range of government officials, religious and community leaders, cultural influencers, sports executives, educators, artists, and business figures. Sacha, born, raised, and educated in Belgium, was deeply influenced by his Holocaust survivor grandparents, whose stories of resilience and heroism against all odds deeply inspired him. Sacha also personally experienced antisemitism growing up in Brussels, which shaped his worldview and led him to the realization that the “Never Again” vow requires personal responsibility and active social involvement. Roytman highlights the importance of coalitions to counter interconnected hate ideologies, the role of the U.S. in setting global precedents, and the value of stories of de-radicalization as tools for societal change and combating prejudice.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Sacha Roytman is the Chief Executive Officer of the Combat Antisemitism Movement (CAM), based out of Tel Aviv, Israel. With over a decade of global experience, he excels in advocacy, strategic planning, and building international partnerships. He has previously served in other roles as Director of Digital Advocacy for the World Jewish Congress and played a pivotal role in establishing the IDF’s Digital Media Department. Additionally, he co-founded the Israel Wine Collection, which contributes to initiatives promoting Jewish impact and heritage.

The Combat Antisemitism Movement is a global coalition dedicated to eradicating antisemitism by uniting over 700 partner organizations and engaging with over 4 million individuals from diverse backgrounds. It employs three main approaches: advocacy and policy development, educational initiatives, and community engagement. So, regarding the main question about organizational work and your role, what do you see as a central pillar in the themes that continually arise globally around antisemitism, and what is a key way to combat how it manifests?

Sacha Roytman: You ask a very broad question, which I can answer at length, but I would say that we are living in an era when we truly see a conflict of civilizations these days, and Jews are at the front line. Civilizations are more complicated than the classic ones of the Western world, mostly based on the theory of clashing civilizations. We also see a clash of ideologies, a clash of civilizations, and a clash of religions.

Somehow, and historically, it has always been the case that Jews are the first to pay a price. That is the general context. We see that in the Middle East, with Israel being presented as the problem of the entire Middle East by certain people. Then, antisemitism was present in the Ukrainian-Russian conflict and was used to start the conflict. On the one hand, Putin accused Zelensky of being a Nazi, and on the other, everyone is accused—the concept of Nazism plays a big part in accusations in all conflicts. Even a few days ago, the Nazi salute of Elon Musk was presented as a penalty.

This reflects the end of the war against Nazism, antisemitism narratives, and anti-Israel narratives, which are omnipresent. Somehow, it is very easy to use these narratives because Jews are a very tiny nation of 15 million people—0.2% of the world population. Since we are a religion that exists everywhere, in 104 countries, there is always a Jew somewhere doing something that is presented as bad.

This is why we first see this global movement that consistently blames Jews. Historically, we keep our religion; we are among the oldest people in the world with a global presence. We have preserved our identity, heritage, and religion, and today, we have Israel helping us to preserve these things. Jews seem stronger than ever, despite antisemitism and Israel being under attack, because we now have our own country and army.

There are all the reasons right now to attack Jews—not directly, but through Israel. This is the second narrative of anti-Zionism being the new antisemitism. We see it everywhere. It is easier to manipulate anti-Zionism and claim to be against the only Jewish state, but this raises questions about what that opposition truly means.

The third narrative is the convergence of ideologies. From the right wing to radical Islamism to the extreme left, we see everything coming together on common ground when it relates to Jews.

We can see in the demonstrations the same slogans, very similar slogans, between pro-Palestinian radical left groups, radical Islamist groups, and right-wing groups. Though the imagery might differ slightly, they use the same terminology, but the core messaging is the same. We see the swastika being used, both by neo-Nazis and by radical Islamists, as a symbol. The convergence of ideologies is not new—we’ve been aware of it—but since October 7, it has probably become the most significant narrative we’ve seen.

The last part is the fact that the Western world is defending itself, and Israel is a part of this Western world. We see this reflected in the elections in the United States and Europe and in changes in Latin America, such as Argentina. After World War II, a utopian dream of a peaceful world was achieved by creating the United Nations and striving to make all nations equal. While it’s a very noble vision—and one we support—it cannot work when extreme ideologies are embedded in the system.

We are now living in a post-utopian, post-naive period where people are realizing that extreme countries and ideologies—such as those from Russia, Iran, or other Muslim states—make globalization challenging. This is where we see a clash of civilizations, essentially divided into two groups: the Western group and the anti-Western group, which includes Russia, China, Iran, and other major Muslim nations. In the middle, however, we see promising initiatives like the Abraham Accords. These are opportunities created by different administrations, showing that not everything is bleak.

The spread of ideologies is global, and social media makes it very easy for these ideologies to travel. For instance, a conflict originating in Russia can quickly influence other regions, as social media is accessible to everyone. There’s no single starting point anymore. Activism and hate messaging can be placed everywhere, and with the right strategy, anti-Western values, anti-Western messaging, and hatred—whether directed at Jews, America, or Europe—can be easily spread.

Today, we don’t see one central focus point. Nations like Russia, for example, spread hatred against Jews for political purposes. This doesn’t necessarily mean they are antisemitic; rather, they use antisemitism as a means to achieve broader goals, such as destabilizing the Western world. This is often done in partnership with nations like Iran. At the same time, such efforts have seen mixed results, as in the United States, the change in administration there has led to policies that actively defend against hatred and support Western values.

Ideologies infiltrate the Western world on three levels: first, through media and social media; second, through immigration and grassroots-level efforts, building new social structures in various countries and spreading these ideologies; and third, through finance. For instance, large financial investments from Qatar fund universities, companies, and other entities to influence narratives, curriculums, and ideologies. These three factors combined form a powerful mechanism for spreading hatred.

Now, what can counter this? First, the public vote. Public voting is one of the best tools to combat foreign funding and interference in public narratives. We’ve seen examples in the Netherlands, the United States, Germany, Austria, and France, where voters are pushing back against the three major elements I mentioned: immigration, media, and funding. People are expressing a desire to preserve their national identities and heritage.

Second, law enforcement plays a crucial role. Law enforcement needs to detect new ideologies that aim to destabilize societies. 

Law enforcement is equipped with the tools to detect both online and offline activity, to be aware of changes in ideologies, and to understand what constitutes modern forms of antisemitism. For example, we try to address this through research and by identifying new forms of antisemitism. A good example is the use of the red triangle in demonstrations. Hamas uses this symbol to target the Israeli army, but when the same red triangle appears in a demonstration in the UK or the United States or is placed on the home of a Jewish person, it becomes a clear signal of targeting. We work to show law enforcement these changes and emphasize the need to protect communities.

Third, we aim to equip local leaders. It is very difficult to create change at the federal government or nationwide strategy level—it takes much time, and we do not have that time. We have found that mayors and municipal leaders are often very eager to make an impact. They want their cities to be free of hate crimes and to protect all citizens. Sometimes, they do not know how to address these issues. If we can educate them about antisemitism, its history, interfaith relations, and related topics, they are often ready to stand up and take action because protecting their citizens is why they were elected.

On the national level, governance often becomes a political game, making it much harder to implement real change quickly. This is why we decided that local government is one of the best venues for us to make a difference.

The second venue for our work involves interfaith cooperation. We collaborate extensively with formal organizations such as the Vatican, the Muslim World League, and other major groups. However, we realized that many of these organizations do not know how to engage with grassroots communities effectively. As a result, we shifted our model to focus on working with interfaith groups at local and regional levels.

You can work with any church, mosque, or group open to collaboration. Sometimes, it is just a matter of reaching out to them. Of course, we are too small to reach everyone, but this is the only way to create meaningful change—by building a shield against hatred through relationships and celebrating each other. For instance, next week, we are hosting an interfaith event at a Muslim center in New York City, where a large Muslim community will learn about the Holocaust. This is where our efforts are focused. While working with large formal organizations globally is almost impossible, local events and celebrations allow us to connect with hundreds of people, and this strategy works very well.

However, the problems grow larger every day. The world is increasingly becoming polarized into a black-and-white mindset, which is not healthy. We see two clear sides forming, and the center—what I would call the moderate or balanced middle—is disappearing. This is evident in elections, where voters increasingly support extreme parties rather than centrist ones. Without a strong center, conversations diminish.

What concerns me most is the idea of a world without dialogue, where there are only two opposing sides unable to listen to each other. Each side may hold some truth and some falsehood, but without cooperation, we cannot fix anything. This worries me. On the other hand, it is crucial to ensure that the choices we make are deliberate and thoughtful.

Your side cannot afford not to fight back. Yes, you need to be able to speak, but when you’re under threat, you cannot just respond nicely. We need to be very strong and have a strong response. We’re excited to see what may happen in the United States with the new administration—not as a political question, but because the previous administration didn’t succeed in certain areas. We hope the new administration will be able to address these gaps, make significant changes, and implement what the prior administration was unable to deploy.

America is very important; the world follows America. When the U.S. determines its policies, it often sets the tone for how the world approaches key issues. We’re already seeing signs of change within just a few days of the new administration, and the types of policies being developed are interesting to analyze and understand about our issues. This is where we are right now.

Jacobsen: Do you find the more toxic elements of antisemitism are emerging more in the online space now or more traditionally in physical spaces? It’s happening on multiple fronts, but in the 2020s, with the rise of social media, is that the area where you’re seeing the biggest uptick?

Roytman: I think it’s becoming harder to separate the online and offline spaces. Let’s leave aside bots and fake accounts and talk about real people. Real people are online because they’re not well-educated offline. This is why I always emphasize education first. The global level of education is declining, particularly among the middle class, lower class, and those unwilling to invest in it. The tragic irony is that education has never been more accessible.

On the one hand, education is available to everyone; on the other hand, fewer people are becoming educated. This creates a dangerous situation where uneducated individuals now have platforms to express themselves. The second part of this problem is that small, marginal groups—who in the past could only speak antisemitic rhetoric in private or small gatherings of 100 or 200 people—are now able to spread their ideology online and reach uneducated individuals. When these two groups meet, they create a fire of hatred.

Online spaces have become breeding grounds for this hatred due to two factors: declining education and platform accessibility. It’s not social media itself that’s the problem, but how it enables the spread of this discourse. The question then arises: What responsibility do platforms bear? This is a complex issue, especially in America, where freedom of speech plays a major role.

What’s critical is being able to define antisemitism. For example, Holocaust denial is a serious issue. Even if you cannot block it outright, you need to define it clearly as antisemitism. Unfortunately, this is a major gap today. The American government has yet to adopt the IHRA definition of antisemitism, and internet platforms have not either. It’s not about creating legislation to block everything; it’s about being able to identify and define antisemitic discourse clearly. Once we do that, we can address it on an educational level rather than through punitive measures.

This is what we’re striving for. Yes, the online space is terrible, but it’sthat’s because the offline world isn’t doing well either—it’s not the other way around.

When things grow online as a fire, they eventually move back offline. The cycle perpetuates itself, with online hatred fueling offline behaviour. We’re seeing this now with more people participating in demonstrations. Why? Because they are less educated and have access to marginal ideologies that are becoming more mainstream. In the past, these ideas were confined to private spaces and inaccessible to the average person. Today, anyone can access these ideologies daily, leading to the societal downgrade we’re witnessing.

What’s most frustrating is that we have more access to knowledge than ever in history, yet society is regressing in critical thinking and education. This is what deeply concerns me.

Jacobsen: Access is not necessarily the main condition; it is a necessary but not sufficient condition. Some fringe ideologies you alluded to often involve historical secret organizations or conspiratorial thoughts. As I’ve seen, a recurring theme revolves around banks or similar ideas. When I spoke with Dr. Alon Milwicki of the Southern Poverty Law Center, he noted that conspiracy theories almost always draw back to blaming the Jewish people. That is typically the common thread—they all seem to pull back to that narrative.

So, with these marginal ideologies, which are not necessarily in the mainstream but are given mainstream platforms periodically, how do you see this playing out in daily life for people? For instance, individuals not deeply invested in education might be given equal time online on relevant subjects with educated people on these topics. They then buy into conspiratorial, historical, or contemporary ideas, go home, and continue their regular lives. How do you see this impacting their daily interactions, working relationships, or even their participation in workshops or organizational meetings like the Combat Antisemitism Movement?

Roytman: It impacts everything—their behaviour, antisemitism itself, and the number of hateful acts. These individuals are often educated online, and this influences offline actions. There is a clear relationship. In most of the hate crimes we’ve seen in the past decades, individuals were indoctrinated online. They sought information and education online, making the online world a key part of organized hate crime, hate speech, antisemitism, and anti-Western ideologies. This is no longer up for debate—online platforms are central to this.

What we need is responsible leadership. While I don’t believe we can entirely change the way antisemitism exists—that’s not our role—we can influence how educators address these issues, how law enforcement detects antisemitism, and how they are trained to recognize hate crimes. We can help open the eyes of the media so they report antisemitism more accurately and ensure legislators understand what constitutes an antisemitic crime and what doesn’t. It’s about ensuring that society, as a whole, is aware of the growing dangers of hatred and knows how to address them.

We cannot fight this alone as a community. We are too small, and history has shown us what happens when we try to stand alone. The goal is to educate society about the dangers of rising hatred and empower those who need education to act. Antisemitism will always exist. The goal is not to eradicate it—that’s unrealistic. Instead, it’s about controlling it and ensuring it doesn’t escalate to an uncontrollable level.

There will always be antisemitic groups and messages, just as there will always be people who harbour racist beliefs. We can’t entirely remove these sentiments from the world, but we must control them. Right now, the situation is out of control—there are too many attacks on Jews every day all over the world. This unchecked violence is dangerous. If it continues to grow, it could lead to even greater violence, which society may eventually normalize and accept.

The key to change lies in educated and responsible leadership. When leadership at all levels takes these issues seriously and acts responsibly, we can see meaningful change in our society.

One more comment: It sounds very negative, but we see so many allies in this fight, so many people who want to see a society that respects everyone. They want a world free of hatred. They truly see the Western world under attack, which is how we feel. They genuinely believe that Jews are on the front line right now, and they want to protect the Jewish community because they understand that eradicating antisemitic ideology can lead to eradicating other deep forms of hatred.

Usually, a Nazi is also a racist or Islamophobic. Similarly, an extreme radical Islamist is often anti-women’s rights and anti-LGBT rights. There is a correlation. Just as we see a convergence of antisemitic ideologies, we also see a convergence of these groups of hatred—they are not isolated.

This is an opportunity to create coalitions with other groups who recognize that they are also threatened. Together, we can fight back. There are many opportunities, and we see many great people engaging with us, willing to fight, express their opinions, and reject the status quo as a solution.

Jacobsen: Have you seen any cases of individuals who were strong antisemites but later had a change of conscience? What’s that like when you witness such cases?

Roytman: We’ve encountered many cases of extremism. We’ve worked with former Nazis, neo-Nazis, and even former jihadists who realized that something was not right. We love these stories because they are the stories we need.

If we want to change a generation of white supremacists into being less hateful, they need to see someone who has gone through that transformation. That’s very exciting work—de-radicalization. It’s incredible to see people change their minds, recognize that they were in a place of hatred that perpetuates itself, and move to a place of peace, which also perpetuates itself.

This is a significant thing now, and we’re seeing real differences. It’s exciting for us to see and to work around that.

Jacobsen: Excellent, Sacha, thank you. I appreciate it. I’m glad we were finally able to make this happen.

Roytman: Thank you very much.

Jacobsen: Okay, we’ll be in touch.

Roytman: Yes, bye-bye.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Best Places for Valentine’s Day

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/08

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Valentine’s Day spending reaches $14.2 billion annually, with the average person spending $186 on gifts, jewelry, flowers, and dining. The top cities for Valentine’s Day—San Francisco, Seattle, San Diego, Las Vegas, and Denver—rank highly in budget, activities, and gift accessibility, despite some weather concerns. Meanwhile, Detroit, San Bernardino, Hialeah, Baton Rouge, and Toledo rank lowest due to high costs and limited attractions. Budget plays the largest role in rankings, as Valentine’s Day plans are more flexible than weddings. Cities with poor accessibility and affordability struggle, making stay-at-home celebrations a practical choice for many couples.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: The report opens with a quote: “Money can’t buy love.” Then it continues: “But it certainly can express it.” Charming. Americans spend approximately $14.2 billion on Valentine’s Day gifts each year, including jewelry, greeting cards, and special items.

The average person spends about $186 on that day. That seems like a lot! So what is the primary driver of this multi-billion-dollar industry—beyond just its intended purpose in American culture?

Chip Lupo: Looking at Valentine’s Day spending, you’ll likely see some parallels to wedding-related rankings—maybe not in the exact rankings, but in some of the underlying financial trends. The biggest drivers are greeting cards, jewelry, and—as we discussed earlier—the markup on flowers, which is significantly higher around Valentine’s Day.

For many florists, this is their most profitable time of year. Their financial success often depends on how well they do on Valentine’s Day.

Of course, there are romantic dinners. Many people choose to go out, and restaurant prices spike.

Another factor is inflation, which directly affects people’s willingness to spend. While $186 may seem a little on the high side for the average person, many still spend a significant amount if they celebrate Valentine’s Day traditionally.

Jacobsen: The top cities for Valentine’s Day—ranked based on budget, activities, gift accessibility, and weather forecast— are:

  • San Francisco
  • Seattle
  • San Diego
  • Las Vegas
  • Denver

There isn’t a huge difference in scoring between these cities, and it’s not as lopsided as the wedding rankings. But there is a clear pattern in the top five—aside from maybe Las Vegas, which ranks lower in budget friendliness.

In some of these cities, the weather forecast isn’t ideal. However, their rankings in gift accessibility, activities, and overall affordability are so strong that they compensate for any weather-related drawbacks, leading to higher rankings.

Lupo: Right. In the four key dimensions—budget, activities, gift accessibility, and weather forecast—the top two cities rank highly.

As you mentioned, Las Vegas ranks lower in budget-friendliness but compensates in other areas. San Francisco holds the number one spot despite its unpredictable weather. Seattle, as you know, experiences rain approximately every fourth day. Yet, it still ranks high due to its strong performance in the other three categories.

This offset is due to factors like activity options. Similar to weddings, you ideally want to be in an area where everything is accessible.

Key considerations for activities include:

  • Diverse restaurants
  • Cafés per capita
  • Number of attractions
  • Nightclub options
  • Amusement and entertainment venues

Access to as many of these venues as possible is crucial, especially on Valentine’s Day when demand is high.

Plenty of options prevent disappointment for couples waiting until the last minute. Otherwise, they might find themselves on the outside looking in.

Gift accessibility is another key factor. This includes:

  • Jewelry stores
  • Florists
  • Chocolate shops (a personal favourite of my wife)
  • Greeting card stores
  • Wellness and spa centers per capita

That last one is interesting. A spa day for your significant other can be a great Valentine’s Day gift. Now, budget is where Las Vegas struggled, ranking 36th out of 100 cities.

Budget factors include:

  • Cost of a three-course meal for two
  • Average movie ticket price
  • Average beverage price
  • Beauty salon cost
  • Massage cost
  • Taxi fare cost

Taxi fares are particularly important if you’re planning a night out.

Jacobsen:  That’s at least $100 if you go to and from an event. Sober costs vs. drunk costs—they add up. Some people prefer to stay home.

Lupo: Another factor is the lowest available price for three-star hotel rooms. This becomes even more important if you’re looking to book a suite. And yes—good luck finding an affordable hotel in Las Vegas on Valentine’s Day.

Jacobsen: What else can we ask here? Detroit, San Bernardino, Hialeah, Baton Rouge, and Toledo were the worst-ranked cities—although this ranking was out of 100 rather than 180-. This is almost the reverse of the top five in many ways.

These cities perform significantly worse on key metrics like budget, activities, and gift accessibility. However, they may have middle-to-high rankings when it comes to weather.So, weather alone is not the determining factor for Valentine’s Day.

It comes down to getting the right mix:

  1. A reasonable budget
  2. Good activities
  3. Strong gift accessibility

That’s what I’m seeing here.

Lupo: Yes, and I’m looking at the numbers now. It’s almost a total flip—the bottom five cities are:

  • Toledo
  • Baton Rouge
  • Hialeah
  • San Bernardino
  • Detroit (which ranks dead last in budget-friendliness)

But take a look at Hialeah, Florida. It has one of the highest costs, yet its weather ranking is great—not surprising since it’s in South Florida. Hialeah is a suburb of Miami.

If you’re living in Hialeah and planning a Valentine’s Day getaway or a romantic weekend, chances are you’re making that 20-minute drive to Miami, where there are far more attractions and things to do.

That’s what hurts a place like Hialeah. The weather is fantastic, but accessibility to activities and affordability is poor. Now, Toledo, Ohio, has the same issue. The budget ranking is terrible, and the weather isn’t great, given that it’s in Northeast Ohio. Budget concerns are dragging down these bottom-ranking cities.

Let’s break it down further—take Detroit, for example.

  • 99th in the cost of a three-course meal
  • 99th in average movie ticket price
  • 99th in average beverage price
  • 96th for a three-star hotel room
  • 94th for taxi fare costs

Yes, Detroit doesn’t rank above 90 in any major cost category. Now, San Bernardino ranks 80th for the cost of a three-course meal, which makes sense because it’s in Southern California. Hialeah, 97th. That’s not exactly good news for budget-conscious couples.

Suppose you’re planning Valentine’s Day on a budget. In that case, you might be better off taking that money and travelling somewhere more affordable. Or, as we tend to do—stay home. That’s always an option.

Jacobsen:  So maybe we’ll fit in one more question before wrapping up—methodology. This ranking is significantly lopsided and more diverse than most others I’ve seen. Instead of just two or three categories, there are four categories.

One category—weather forecast—was weighted 10 points, while the budget was weighted 50 points.

The USD 186 people are spending shows that budget is the most significant factor, but none of the subcategories within the budget are drastically off—everything falls within 5 or 10 points. Why allocate half the total weighting to the budget while the other three categories are split 20, 20, and 10 points?

Lupo: When we talked about wedding expenses, the weighting was different because, with weddings, people expect to pay more. When planning a wedding, you already know you’ll spend significant money.

But with Valentine’s Day, you have more flexibility—you can adjust your plans based on budget. For weddings, you’re essentially “all in” from the start. But depending on cost, you have more room to scale your plans up or down on Valentine’s Day.

That’s why budget carries more weight in this ranking—people are more cost-conscious about Valentine’s Day than weddings. However, categories like activities, gift accessibility, and weather still matter:

  • Activities—You want access to restaurants, cafés, and entertainment options.
  • Gift stores and florists—Essential for last-minute shopping.
  • Weather (10%)—Most people only plan for one day. If it happens to rain or snow, you adjust accordingly.

For example:

  • If you’re in Seattle, bring an umbrella.
  • If you’re in the Midwest, get your snow tires ready.
  • If you’re in South Florida, sunscreen is a must!

Jacobsen: I agree. Let’s wrap it up there and call it a day.

Lupo: Outstanding, man. All right, Scott.

Jacobsen:  Thank you so much—I appreciate it! I hope you have a great day.

Lupo: You too, Scott. Take care! Talk soon.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Insoo Park on Radon Testing

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/08

Insoo Park founded Ecosense Inc. after losing his best friend, Andrew, to cancer in 2016. This life-changing event inspired him to leave his 17-year semiconductor career to address radon-induced lung cancer risks. Ecosense developed the EcoQube, a highly sensitive, Wi-Fi-enabled radon monitor named one of TIME’s Top 100 Inventions of 2021. The EcoQube provides real-time updates, making radon detection accessible and affordable. Through campaigns and partnerships, Ecosense raises awareness of radon risks and promotes prevention. Validated by leading institutions, Ecosense’s technology ensures accuracy and reliability, empowering homeowners with advanced tools for radon monitoring and timely mitigation.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What inspired you to found Ecosense Inc.? 

Insoo Park: After a life-changing event, losing my best friend, Andrew, all of a sudden to cancer in 2016, I decided to leave my career in the semiconductor industry where I spent 17 years with three startups to start doing something more meaningful. After two and half years of study about the radon detection market, I decided that a highly sensitive real-time digital radon detector would protect many people from radon-induced lung cancer deaths.  

After a life-changing event in 2016—losing my best friend, Andrew, suddenly to cancer—I decided to leave my 17-year career in the semiconductor industry, where I worked with three startups, to pursue something more meaningful. Over the next two and a half years, I immersed myself in studying the radon detection market and discovered a critical need: a highly sensitive, real-time digital radon detector to help prevent radon-induced lung cancer deaths.

Today, my company’s mission is clear: to raise awareness that radon-caused lung cancer is entirely preventable with accurate radon testing (the Ecosense way) and timely mitigation. We aim to empower our customers to build a radon-free lifestyle—easily and without hassle.

Jacobsen: What has been the evolution of technology for detecting radon? 

Park: Radon detection technology has evolved from basic methods like charcoal canisters and alpha track detectors to more sophisticated, modern digital solutions. Charcoal canisters, while affordable, provide only a one-time snapshot of radon levels and are affected by factors like humidity. These tests must remain undisturbed during sampling, meaning they don’t reflect the radon levels you encounter daily. By contrast, Digital Continuous radon monitors (CRMs) are the most effective option, offering real-time data and tracking fluctuations in radon levels over time. They seamlessly integrate into everyday life, continuously sampling radon as long as they remain powered. The good news is that while CRMs were once exclusive to radon professionals and prohibitively expensive, they are now widely affordable, offering consumers professional-grade accuracy and convenience. This continuous monitoring provides a detailed understanding of radon exposure, making CRMs an indispensable tool for year-round protection against cancer-causing radon, ensuring accurate detection and effective timely mitigation.

Jacobsen: Why would radon testing be relevant for Canadians, specifically?

Park: Radon is a significant health concern in Canada, and recent changes by Health Canada emphasize the importance of testing:

  • Radon is the leading cause of lung cancer in non-smokers.  
  • Canada has the third highest radon exposure in the world.  
  • Health Canada recently (November 2024, during Radon Action Month) approved consumer-grade electronic radon monitors for long-term testing (minimum 3 months). This makes it easier for homeowners to take action and potentially use the testing results for financial assistance programs.
  • Radon levels fluctuate throughout the day and across seasons, influenced by environmental factors like temperature, humidity, and air pressure. Ongoing monitoring is crucial, as a one-time test isn’t enough to capture these variations.
  • What do fluctuations in radon levels mean? Radon levels can change due to weather patterns, soil conditions, building ventilation, and even daily activities within the home. Continuous monitoring helps you understand these fluctuations and take appropriate action.
  • Testing is the only way to know your radon levels, as it’s a colorless, odorless, and tasteless gas undetectable by human senses.
  • Canada has relatively long, cold seasons and many mountainous areas, which are often prone to elevated radon levels.
  • Testing is crucial because radon is invisible and unpredictable. You can’t see it, smell it, or taste it. These graphs below illustrate how radon levels can vary dramatically between day and night, and even more so between winter and summer. In Canada, with our long cold seasons, this variability is especially important to consider: 

Jacobsen: How does Ecosense’s technology differ from traditional radon monitors? 

Park: Ecosense’s technology stands out from traditional radon monitors due to its unmatched sensitivity, advanced real-time detection capabilities, and user-friendly features. Unlike traditional detectors that often rely on passive methods or provide delayed results, Ecosense devices use patented sensors with a counting efficiency of 30 counts per hour, far exceeding the industry standard of 2 counts per hour—making them 15 times more sensitive. This exceptional sensitivity ensures faster and more accurate radon readings, allowing users to detect changes in radon levels almost immediately.

In addition, Ecosense devices integrate seamlessly with smartphones, offering convenient access to real-time data, historical trends, and instant alerts. Compact, user-friendly, and professional-grade, Ecosense’s technology redefines radon monitoring by setting a new standard for precision, speed, and reliability in protecting homes and families.

Jacobsen: The EcoQube was named one of the Top 100 Inventions of 2021 by TIME. What is the significant development of technology in it? 

Park: The EcoQube radon monitor, named one of TIME’s Top 100 Inventions of 2021, represents a significant technological advancement in radon detection. It is light, compact, and built with professional-grade sensitivity, exceeding industry standards by 15 times. Unlike other consumer-grade radon detectors that provide a 24-hour rolling average, the EcoQube updates every 10 minutes and calculates an hourly rolling average, making it the most reliable option for quickly and accurately responding to fluctuations in radon levels. This frequent updating ensures real-time monitoring and provides a more precise picture of radon trends.

The EcoQube also features Wi-Fi connectivity, enabling users to check radon levels remotely and share data with family members or radon professionals. The EcoQube app further enhances the user experience by visualizing this data in easy-to-understand graphs, making it simple to monitor radon levels over time. With its affordability, accessibility, and ease of use, EcoQube has made radon monitoring not only more accurate but also more accessible to a wide range of consumers.

Jacobsen: What are the health risks associated with radon exposure? 

Park: Radon exposure is a serious but often underestimated health risk, as it is the leading cause of lung cancer among non-smokers. When inhaled, radon gas decays into radioactive particles that can become trapped in the lungs, where they release radiation that damages lung tissue.

To put this into perspective, exposure to 4 pCi/L (picocuries per liter), the EPA’s action level for radon, is roughly equivalent to the risk of smoking about 8 cigarettes per day. It’s important to note that the risk of radon exposure is cumulative, with long-term exposure increasing the overall risk.

Radon is colorless, odorless, and tasteless, making it nearly impossible to detect without a specialized device. As a result, many people are unaware they may have this “silent killer” in their homes. This lack of awareness is dangerous, as the common misconception that “if you can’t see it, it’s not a danger” often leads to delayed action, leaving many at risk without realizing it.

Jacobsen: How might Wi-Fi-enabled remote access empower homeowners to monitor and address radon levels?

Park: Wi-Fi-enabled remote access to the EcoQube radon monitor empowers homeowners by allowing them to monitor radon levels in real-time from anywhere, using a smartphone. This means they can track fluctuations in radon levels and receive instant alerts when levels exceed safe limits, without having to be physically present in the home. Remote access ensures that homeowners can take proactive steps, such as triggering their ventilation to go on, activating mitigation systems or scheduling professional inspections, without delay. Additionally, the ability to share data with family members or radon professionals makes it easier to collaborate on addressing potential health risks, leading to more informed decisions and timely action. This technology offers peace of mind and allows homeowners to stay on top of radon exposure.

Jacobsen: How does Ecosense work to make advanced radon detection technology accessible and affordable?

Park: Ecosense makes advanced radon detection technology accessible and affordable by combining high-quality sensor with user-friendly design and cost-effective pricing in mind. Unlike traditional radon detectors, which can be large, expensive, and often require professional installation, Ecosense devices are compact, easy to use, and offer Wi-Fi connectivity for remote access and real-time monitoring via smartphone apps.

Ecosense achieves affordability by streamlining its technology solely dedicated to radon gas and focusing on essential features such as 15x greater sensitivity compared to industry standards — while keeping production costs manageable. Ecosense devices have undergone third-party validation, proving that they perform similarly to professional-grade radon equipment typically priced in the tens of thousands of dollars. This validation confirms that Ecosense delivers highly accurate, reliable radon detection on par with expensive professional devices. In doing so, Ecosense brings cutting-edge radon detection to the consumer market in an affordable, practical form ensuring that consumers can effectively monitor and mitigate radon risks without the financial burden of traditional high-cost equipment.

Jacobsen: Radon-induced lung cancer remains a leading cause of cancer in non-smokers. How does Ecosense aim to raise awareness?

Park: Ecosense aims to raise awareness about the risks of radon-induced lung cancer through its Radon-Free Campaign, which actively supports lung cancer survivors and advocates by amplifying their voices. As part of this initiative, Ecosense donates radon detectors to individuals and organizations, helping them monitor radon levels in their homes and communities. 

The company collaborates with libraries through the Ecosense Library Lending Program to provide free access to radon detection devices and educational resources, empowering more people to take action. 

Additionally, Ecosense partners with non-profit organizations focused on lung cancer prevention and awareness, further expanding the reach of their message and encouraging widespread adoption of continuous radon monitoring. Through these efforts, Ecosense is helping to educate and protect communities from the dangers of radon exposure, while giving a platform to those affected by radon-induced lung cancer.

Jacobsen: Ecosense’s products have been validated by the University of Michigan and Kansas State University. How important is this independent validation? 

Park: Independent validation is crucial for ensuring the accuracy and reliability of radon detectors.

  • The University of Michigan and Kansas State University are leading institutions in radon research, and their studies carry significant weight in the field.
  • Their studies confirm that Ecosense’s patented technology performs comparably to top-of-the-line, research-grade detectors.
  • This gives consumers confidence that Ecosense’s products are accurate and trustworthy.
  • It also demonstrates Ecosense’s commitment to quality and transparency.
  • In addition to university validation, Ecosense also has a strong track record in third-party studies, such as the recent intercomparison studies conducted by the Canadian National Radon Proficiency Program (C-NRPP) in 2023.  You can find the results here and more detailed study results, where all of the Ecosense consumer-grade monitors ranked top performance

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Insoo.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

FTX Europe and German Catholic Media

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/07 (Unpublished)

Patrick Gruhn, former head of FTX Europe and founder of Perpetuals.com, is a legal and tech expert expanding into faith-based media. He repurchased FTX Europe and later sold it to Backpack Exchange. Gruhn, who also leads a German Catholic TV network, aims to bring fairness to crypto trading. He advocates for regulatory oversight and safer financial products. His latest venture, Perpetuals.com, focuses on self-clearing, regulated perpetual futures. Gruhn emphasizes strategic management across industries, comparing media and crypto operations. Passionate about fair trading and long-term business sustainability, he continues to innovate in finance, technology, and media.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Patrick Gruhn. He is a legal and tech expert, the former head of FTX Europe, and the founder of Perpetuals.com. He co-founded Digital Assets AG (DAAG), which FTX later acquired. Following FTX’s collapse, Gruhn repurchased FTX Europe and sold it to Backpack Exchange.

He now leads a German Catholic TV network expanding beyond crypto, merging technology with faith-based media. His expertise spans digital assets, fintech, and media leadership. Recently featured in Nasdaq, NTV News, and CoinTelegraph, Gruhn remains an influential figure in finance and media. He also made headlines for purchasing a Titanic gold pocket watch for nearly $1,500,000.

What inspired you to buy the Titanic gold watch?

Patrick Gruhn: That was a gift for my wife because it is hard to find something she truly loves. She is not usually a big fan of gifts. For example, we don’t typically exchange Christmas or birthday gifts. Instead, we donate to charitable causes.

However, I wanted to find something truly special as a thank-you to my wife after everything she has been through with me. We left Germany together. We met in Germany and later moved to Switzerland for five years, which was already a challenge.

Culturally, Switzerland is quite different from Germany. At the time, we had little children—one was two and a half years old, and the other was a newborn. Then, we moved to Canada for six months while waiting for our U.S. visa. Finally, we immigrated to the U.S. It was difficult, especially with small children. We now have four children in total.

I wanted to find something meaningful to her, and she has always been fascinated by the Titanic. Additionally, when we became a couple, I was 16 years old. We met in high school in Germany, and around that time, Titanic was released in cinemas. So, the Titanic holds historical significance for her and personal significance for us as a couple.

Even beyond the movie, she is deeply interested in the Titanic’s historical facts. Now, we live in Oregon, where the Astor family, who owned this watch, played a key role in founding Astoria—the oldest town in Oregon, originally known as Fort Astoria.

These connections made the watch incredibly special for us—perhaps not for anyone else, but certainly for us. That was the reasoning behind purchasing it as a gift for my wife.

Jacobsen: What motivated your transition from FTX Europe to running a Catholic TV network in Germany?

Gruhn: I have owned the Catholic TV network since February 2011. It is a nonprofit organization that I acquired in February 2011, and it was struggling at the time.

Interestingly, running a Catholic TV network is similar to managing derivatives and the crypto space.

First, the network broadcasts in multiple countries—Germany, Austria, Switzerland, and Liechtenstein—which requires a cross-border broadcasting license.

Second, since it operates subsidiaries in multiple countries as a nonprofit organization, it involves complex international tax regulations and nonprofit tax law.

Finally, from a technical standpoint, modern television broadcasting is entirely digital, much like financial technology.

Gruhn: So, for live broadcasts, for example, you usually have UDP streams or something similar. The point is that it’s similar to high-frequency trading. You have to process data in real time with low latency. So, even from an IT perspective, operating live broadcasts is similar to running matching engines or high-frequency trading market-making algorithms. It has a lot of similarities, including the legal aspects, such as intellectual property rights.

Most crypto assets are considered intellectual property because they are intangible but real. The same applies to movies, background music, and other forms of digital content, where intellectual property is a key factor. In many ways, the structure of managing digital media and crypto trading shares common legal and operational challenges.

I had been helping this TV network for several years before I acquired it in February 2011. At that time, the organization struggled with the complexity of operations, which was overwhelming. I stepped in and cleaned everything up, and now it runs quite successfully.

I have a good team. My employees and co-managing director largely manage day-to-day operations. My role is more on the strategic management side. But, yes, I have owned the network since February 2011 and have been involved with it since February 2006.

I started working with them in February 2006, helping with live streaming and technical solutions. That’s how I got in touch with them. I acquired the network when they faced a financial and operational crisis and needed help.

Jacobsen: How do you see Perpetuals.com shaping the future of digital asset trading?

Gruhn: After the FTX disaster, I realized one major thing was missing. As FTX Europe, we were fortunate to have been largely unaffected by the core issues because we had our own segregated IT infrastructure in Europe. We also had segregated funds, meaning we never transferred customer funds to the U.S. or the Bahamas. However, we did use the Bahamian exchange for trade execution. That’s where the crypto assets were sent, and that’s where the matching happened.

That dependency on the Bahamas exchange ultimately trapped us in the FTX bankruptcy process. That is precisely why we have now built Perpetuals.com as a fully independent exchange.

This time, we have a full exchange license in Europe under the Multilateral Trading Facility (MTF) framework. This means we can operate our exchange with self-custody and self-clearing mechanisms. We now have our own clearing house, offering 24/7 clearing without relying on third parties, and we are fully regulated.

Under the MiFID II framework, regulated trading venues in Europe must comply with strict operational and IT requirements. We also undergo detailed IT audits and comply with a new IT regulation in Europe called DORA (Digital Operational Resilience Act), which significantly enhances investor protection and security.

After witnessing what happened with FTX, it became clear that regulatory oversight was severely lacking. No one expected such a collapse, but regulators allowed things to spiral out of control. Even today, many crypto exchanges operate their derivatives platforms in Singapore, where there is no meaningful regulatory oversight because crypto derivatives are practically exempt.

Of course, this lack of oversight is appealing from a business perspective—companies save costs on compliance and other regulatory obligations. However, it exposes customers to significant risks. That’s why we built Perpetuals.com differently, ensuring full compliance, transparency, and security under European financial regulations.

But this is what makes it possible. Sometimes, I’m convinced of this, and sometimes I’m not. I’m not always a big fan of regulation—especially as a lawyer and someone working in crypto. Nevertheless, sometimes you need rules to protect people from themselves.

With Sam Bankman-Fried, it was simply too easy for him. If there had been more stringent oversight, a four-eye principle, and the same regulatory checks in exchanges like ours, what happened with FTX would not have been possible so easily. It was made too easy for him.

In Germany, there’s a saying—and I’m sure there’s a similar one in English—if you make things too easy, you essentially create theft. If it’s that easy for someone to commit a crime, then sooner or later, someone will take advantage of it.

We have created a self-settlement, self-trading, and self-clearing exchange for all derivatives, including real perpetual futures and other products. This is what the crypto industry needs if we want to prevent another FTX-like disaster. Suppose we want crypto to become more accessible to traditional investors and everyday people. In that case, we need to eliminate the risk that their exchange might collapse overnight.

Jacobsen: What regulatory measures do you believe are necessary to restore trust in the industry?

Gruhn: The most important thing—and where lawmakers often go wrong—is understanding that we need rules. Still, they must be tailored to crypto’s technological nature.

Historically, most banking laws were created due to fraud or other financial crimes. That means some regulations are necessary. However, many politicians try to apply traditional financial regulations to crypto without considering the technical differences.

If technology can solve a problem that would typically be addressed by governance or regulations, we should use it instead. IT-based solutions are more reliable and efficient.

For example, a smart contract can automate processes that would otherwise require human oversight. Suppose a smart contract can enforce an agreement. In that case, it is better than having an intermediary manually check whether it was executed or using a third party as an escrow service.

We need a regulatory framework that provides basic protections and oversight while allowing technology to replace traditional financial mechanisms where possible.

With Perpetuals.com, our exchange eliminates the need for a clearinghouse. Traditionally, an exchange only facilitates trading in Europe, while a separate clearinghouse handles margin, clearing, and settlement. But with today’s technology, we can combine those functions into one.

We use stablecoins, tokenized instruments, and tokenized stocks, allowing us to handle everything ourselves. We built a private blockchain specifically for this purpose. This blockchain provides the same advantages a clearinghouse typically would—ensuring accurate settlement, tracking ownership at any given time, and eliminating reliance on third-party clearinghouses.

This approach reduces costs and removes risks. A clearinghouse itself can fail, especially in a financial crisis. By integrating these processes directly onto a blockchain, we increase transparency and security, which is critical for the future of digital asset trading.

So that’s what regulations should aim for—identifying where smart technology can be utilized and allowing people to use it.

The biggest issue right now is that regulations often do not allow the full potential of technology. Instead, businesses are forced to create paper-based policies and train employees on procedures that could easily be automated with technology. This inefficiency slows progress and adds unnecessary complexity.

Jacobsen: What do you find more difficult to operate—media or crypto?

Gruhn: Whoa, that’s a difficult one. Both are challenging and fascinating in their own ways.

It’s hard to judge which is more difficult. In crypto, you deal with a high potential for fraud. Every single day, I receive phishing attempts on my crypto wallets. People know my LinkedIn profile, and I constantly get scam attempts, phishing emails, and fraudulent proposals asking me to invest in questionable schemes.

So, in crypto, you encounter bad actors more frequently.

At the same time, working in media is also challenging today because the world has become more complex. The media industry has evolved significantly, and how information is distributed, consumed, and regulated has changed.

I wouldn’t say one is more difficult than the other—both have unique challenges, and you have to navigate them accordingly.

Jacobsen: How has your faith helped you in these leadership roles?

Gruhn: Everyone should have faith because we need something greater than ourselves—beyond our ego.

In my management roles, my faith has helped in many ways. For example, suppose I’m upset or angry about a mistake someone made. In that case, I follow the Christian virtue of patience and reflection. Instead of reacting immediately, I stay quiet for the day. I wait until I attend Mass, reflect on the situation, and only then do I speak with the employee or business partner involved.

That practice of deliberation before reaction has helped me make better decisions in leadership.

Another way faith influences my leadership is through Catholic work ethics. In the Catholic tradition, we are taught to do our work as well as Jesus did when he was on Earth. If he built furniture, he certainly didn’t build a chair that collapsed under pressure. He did everything with excellence.

There’s also an analogy from European cathedrals. Many of these cathedrals have beautiful, intricate artwork placed in locations where no human could ever see it—on the highest towers or deep within the structure. They weren’t built for human admiration but for God.

The idea is that true craftsmanship and dedication go beyond immediate recognition. It teaches us that work should be done for short-term gains and with a long-term vision.

From a leadership and entrepreneurial perspective, this mindset helps build lasting companies. It encourages thinking beyond the present moment and planning for the future, which sustains success over time.

Jacobsen: Is there a similarity between the strategy or operations of a crypto company or website and those of a media company? Or are they completely different?

Gruhn: I don’t know. There are differences in day-to-day operations.

For example, you must manage wallet security and IT infrastructure in crypto. In contrast, in media, you deal with live broadcasts and IT security for streaming. So, the hands-on tasks are different.

However, I’m strategic, and management principles apply across all industries. After I sold my first company, I worked for a few years as an interim manager, overseeing various companies, including some in the electricity sector in Germany.

Through those experiences, I saw that strategic management is a generalized concept that applies across industries, whether it’s crypto, media, or energy.

Strategic management is about understanding the necessary tasks, assembling the right team, and executing a clear vision.

For example, you want a secure wallet system. In that case, you need experts who can tell you what security measures are necessary. If you want redundant live broadcasts from Rome, you need professionals to set up the infrastructure. But beyond the technical details, you must connect these tasks to a broader strategy.

Success in any industry comes down to asking:

  • Where do we want to go, and why?
  • What is the market opportunity?
  • What is missing for our audience or customers?

For our nonprofit TV network, we analyzed what our audience was missing. We saw that people wanted live broadcasts of the Pope and events from Rome, so we set a strategic goal: Provide live broadcasts from Rome.

We needed to build partnerships, negotiate contracts, and set up the necessary technical infrastructure to achieve this. We installed cameras in a church in Rome, and now, we broadcast live from that church once a week.

So, we identified a strategic need and then mapped out the necessary steps to achieve it, from legal agreements to technical execution.

Crypto works the same way.

We looked at the European market and realized something was missing: Perpetual futures. Foreign companies only offered these products illegally, which meant European traders lacked a regulated alternative.

That’s why I co-founded Perpetuals.com with Robin and Naya. Our strategic goal was to create a fully compliant, self-clearing perpetual futures exchange for Europe.

Once we defined that goal, we mapped out the necessary steps—building the technology, obtaining regulatory approvals, and setting up clearing mechanisms.

So, whether it’s a live broadcast from Rome or a regulated futures exchange, the strategic process is the same:

  1. Identify what is missing.
  2. Set a clear objective.
  3. Define the required steps.
  4. Bring in experts to execute the technical details.

The industry may be different, but the strategic thinking remains the same. So, strategic management is the key. It applies to all industries, whether crypto, media, or finance.

Jacobsen: What’s next for you in the digital finance and media landscape? Are any new ventures on the horizon?

Gruhn: Yes.

We are about to go live with Perpetuals.com. I can’t reveal everything until the official launch, but I can give you a little teaser. We are introducing several new products alongside perpetual futures.

One issue in crypto that most traders don’t realize is the lack of fairness in the market. If you look at a simple question—what would someone have made if they had invested $5,000 in Bitcoin ten years ago?—the answer would be a significant return.

Now, compare that to the reality for most average crypto traders today. If you ask them how much they’ve made from a $5,000 investment, many will say:

  • “I lost it.”
  • “I lost half of it.”
  • “I made $500.”

Why? Because the crypto market is not built for fairness, and part of that comes from the lack of regulation.

Currently, many crypto exchanges engage in front-running and preferential treatment for market makers. Certain insiders gain access to privileged information that would be considered illegal insider trading in a regulated financial market.

That’s what I want to change.

I want to create a fairer trading environment in which retail traders are not systematically disadvantaged. Right now, retail traders compete against high-frequency traders and institutional market makers, who have unfair advantages in terms of execution speed, privileged access, and exclusive insights.

Additionally, we are developing new financial products that are safer for retail traders.

I love perpetual futures—I recently wrote an academic paper about them—but they carry risks, especially for retail users.

So, we are introducing new products that allow traders to speculate on Bitcoin’s price movements with built-in risk protections.

For example, we will offer products with:

  • Guaranteed stop-loss mechanisms—no slippage, no unexpected liquidation.
  • Protection during extreme market volatility—so traders don’t lose their entire portfolio in a sudden market crash.

If we want crypto to become mainstream, we must ensure it is fair and safe for retail traders.

We have already seen how predatory some financial products can be, especially in Europe with CFDs (Contracts for Difference).

  • In Canada, CFDs are regulated but still available.
  • In the U.S., CFDs are banned for retail traders.
  • In Europe, many CFD providers exploit retail traders, with 80% losing money.

CFD providers often profit directly from client losses, which creates a predatory system. We want to change that.

That’s why, with Perpetuals.com, we are developing new financial products that will make trading safer and more transparent.

Jacobsen: Patrick, thank you very much for your time today. It was nice to meet you.

Gruhn: Thanks for having me.

Jacobsen: Thank you. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

UN Trust Fund to End Violence Against Women

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/07

Abigail “Abby” Erikson is a licensed clinical social worker with over 20 years of experience dedicated to advancing the rights of women and girls. A passionate advocate for ending violence against women, Abby brings extensive expertise in sexual and reproductive health, gender equality, and addressing gender-based violence in both development and humanitarian contexts. As UN Women’s lead technical expert on ending violence against women and girls, based in Fiji, she provided strategic policy and programmatic leadership. Prior to this, she held roles at the International Rescue Committee and Planned Parenthood Federation of America. In January 2023, Abby assumed the role of Chief of the UN Trust Fund to End Violence Against Women (UN Trust Fund). Under her leadership, the UN Trust Fund continues to empower women’s rights organizations through advocacy, knowledge-sharing platforms like SHINE, and long-term, flexible funding. The conversation explores the global funding gap, the expertise of women’s rights organizations, and emerging challenges such as technology-facilitated violence. Erikson emphasized the UN Trust Fund’s commitment to amplifying local women’s voices and fostering impactful partnerships to address violence against women and girls.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Ms. Abby Erikson, Chief of the UN Trust Fund to End Violence Against Women (UN Trust Fund). We will discuss the UN Trust Fund, including the recent announcement of substantial grants—amounting to $16 million—awarded to 36 women’s rights and civil society organizations for initiatives aiming to prevent and respond to violence against women and girls across 41 countries and territories. How can organizations support the advocacy efforts and initiatives of the UN Trust Fund?

Abby Erikson: First, I would like to provide a brief overview of the UN Trust Fund and its vital work to end violence against women and girls. The UN Trust Fund was established in 1996 as an outcome of the landmark 1995 Beijing Platform for Action, which outlined a comprehensive strategy to achieve gender equality and advance women’s rights. Its creation, through a resolution adopted by Member States at the UN General Assembly, recognized that violence against women and girls is one of the most significant barriers to gender equality and women’s empowerment. Today, the UN Trust Fund is administered by UN Women, the United Nations agency dedicated to promoting gender equality and women’s empowerment.

For nearly three decades, the UN Trust Fund has served as a critical funding mechanism, providing grants to women’s rights and civil society organizations working to prevent and address violence against women and girls. To date, it has supported over 700 organizations across the globe. Most recently, in response to its latest Call for Proposals, which closed in February 2024, the Trust Fund announced nearly $16 million in grants, reaffirming its unwavering commitment to addressing this urgent global challenge.

Regarding the question of how organizations and individuals can support the advocacy and initiatives of the UN Trust Fund, we hope to inspire global recognition of the need to act against violence and to encourage collective engagement in our mission. While more than 95% of the Trust Fund’s resources come from contributions by UN Member States, we also welcome donations from individuals and the private sector. Contributions made through our online donation platformdirectly support grassroots organizations that are leading change in their communities.

Furthermore, the UN Trust Fund collaborates with a diverse range of partners across the UN system, Member States, civil society, and the private sector to amplify shared goals. These goals include advancing gender equality, empowering women, and eliminating all forms of violence against women and girls.

Unfortunately, violence against women and girls remains one of the most pervasive human rights violations globally. It is disheartening to recognize that, nearly 30 years after the Trust Fund’s establishment, the need for its work is as urgent as ever. It remains the only global grant-making mechanism dedicated exclusively to ending all forms of violence against women and girls.

Recent global data reveals that approximately 140 women and girls are killed every day by someone within their own home. To spotlight this alarming reality, the Trust Fund’s 2024 16 Days of Activism against Gender-Based Violence campaign focused on raising awareness and mobilizing action to address this crisis.

At the same time, we are confronting a growing number of interconnected crises, including armed conflicts, climate emergencies, and political instability. These challenges have not only exacerbated violence but also contributed to setbacks in advancing women’s rights and broader human rights agendas. Emerging forms of violence, such as technology-facilitated gender-based violence, have added another layer of complexity. This type of violence disproportionately targets women in leadership roles and public life, posing new and evolving threats. While technology and artificial intelligence have enormous potential to create positive change, they have also introduced significant challenges that require urgent attention.

The persistent pushback against women’s rights to live free from violence is deeply concerning. It underscores the critical importance of redoubling our efforts to ensure safe, equal, and peaceful communities—foundations upon which every individual deserves to thrive.

Jacobsen: How did the UN Trust Fund select the 36 women’s rights and civil society organizations when awarding grants during its latest funding cycle?

Abby Erikson: At its core, the UN Trust Fund supports civil society organizations—particularly women-led and women’s rights organizations—to implement multi-year initiatives aimed at addressing violence against women and girls. These initiatives often encompass a range of critical activities, including providing safe houses, social support, healthcare services, and advocating for legal and policy reforms to drive prevention and systemic change.

The UN Trust Fund’s Call for Proposals process is both rigorous and highly competitive, underscoring the immense global demand for resources to tackle violence against women and girls. Since becoming Chief of the UN Trust Fund in 2022, I have witnessed firsthand the scale of this demand. In my first year, we received proposals totaling over $750 million, but we had only $11 million available to disburse. The following year, the funding requests doubled to $1.5 billion, yet we were able to award just $16 million in grants.

To put this in perspective, we receive thousands of applications from organizations in countries eligible for Official Development Assistance (ODA). Unfortunately, the gap between the need and the available resources of the UN Trust Fund remains stark, with fewer than 1% of applicants ultimately receiving grants.

The selection process itself is thorough, impartial, and designed to ensure accountability and fairness. Neither I, as Chief, nor the UN Trust Fund Secretariat is directly involved in choosing grant recipients. Instead, the process is overseen by regional committees composed of UN representatives, civil society members, and other stakeholders. Proposals that successfully pass the initial scoring phases are further evaluated at the regional level, with final selections made by a global committee.

Our selection criteria emphasize initiatives that adopt an intersectional approach. This means prioritizing organizations working with women and girls who experience overlapping forms of discrimination and marginalization, such as those living with disabilities, belonging to minority ethnic or lower-income groups, or facing other systemic barriers. By doing so, we strive to ensure that no one is left behind in our efforts to resource and empower communities.

These priorities reflect the extraordinary potential of women’s rights organizations operating on the front lines. These organizations have deep insights into the specific needs of their communities and are uniquely positioned to drive impactful change. It is inspiring to envision the transformative outcomes we could achieve if we had the resources to fund all these remarkable initiatives. Until then, we must remain focused and strategic, making the most of the limited resources available to us.

Jacobsen: What specific challenges affect women and girls in crisis? The definition of “crisis” differs from country to country.

Abby Erikson: You’re absolutely right about the varied definitions of crisis. While we often think of large-scale crises such as war, conflict, major climate emergencies, natural disasters, or global pandemics, there are also localized or “micro-crises.” These can include issues such as failing health systems or other contained yet deeply significant challenges for the affected populations.

What is clear across all contexts is that crises amplify vulnerabilities, particularly for women and girls. Evidence consistently shows heightened risks of violence against women and girls during wars and conflicts, including conflict-related sexual violence and intimate partner violence.

In these situations, women’s rights organizations and local civil society groups play a critical role. They are often the first responders, adapting rapidly to meet emerging needs. During the COVID-19 pandemic, for example, the vital expertise of these organizations became especially evident. They were on the front lines, addressing multiple, compounding crises within their communities, often stepping in to fill gaps left by the international aid system.

We must rely on local women’s rights organizations and civil society groups to effectively support communities and, crucially, adequately resource them. 

In many countries where we support civil society organizations, there is an enabling environment, which might include laws and policies that support gender equality, address racial bias, supports women’s groups, and outline responsibilities for tackling these issues across government departments—such as health, education, and women’s ministries—alongside civil society.

However, it is important to note that we operate in a wide range of contexts. Some areas face chronic crises or vulnerabilities, while others have relatively strong enabling environments but continue to grapple with significant challenges. This diversity creates opportunities for hybrid partnerships between governments, the UN, civil society, and other stakeholders, enabling us to collaborate effectively in addressing these issues.

Jacobsen: How does the UN Trust Fund address the funding gap for women’s rights organizations in a challenging global context?

Abby Erikson: Women’s rights organizations play a critical role in addressing violence against women and girls, as well as advancing gender equality and social justice. Yet, these organizations face persistent funding challenges. The UN Trust Fund operates under significant financial constraints, particularly as the demand from women’s rights and civil society organizations far exceeds the resources available.

To address this gap, we focus on maximizing the impact of our funding by prioritizing high-need, high-impact initiatives. In parallel, we work tirelessly to mobilize additional resources from Member States, private sector partners, and individual donors. Advocacy is also a core part of our strategy, as we strive to raise global awareness about the transformative work of women’s rights organizations and the necessity of long-term, flexible funding for their success.

Bridging the funding gap requires collective action. Through partnerships and resource mobilization, we aim to ensure that these organizations can continue their critical work. Every dollar directed toward women’s rights and civil society organizations contributes to building safer and more equitable communities, even in the face of overwhelming global challenges.

It’s important to note that the UN Trust Fund can only fund a small percentage of the demand we receive. However, this funding gap extends far beyond our work—it is a systemic issue across the feminist funding ecosystem, encompassing women’s funds, gender equality, women’s empowerment, and broader social justice initiatives.

To address this, the UN Trust Fund focuses on advocacy and evidence-based approaches. We highlight the critical importance of providing long-term, flexible funding to empower women’s rights organizations to respond effectively to unmet needs. For example, we have extended the duration of our grants from two years to four years. This shift helps grantee partners build stability and strengthen their organizational resilience. By funding initiatives such as strategic planning and resource mobilization strategies, we aim to break the cycle of short-term funding and equip organizations for sustainable impact.

This is a pivotal moment. In 2025, we mark the 30th anniversary of the Beijing Platform for Action, which remains a foundational framework for gender equality and women’s empowerment. It is an urgent time for the global community to come together, leveraging all platforms and advocacy opportunities to spotlight the evidence, best practices, and lessons learned from women’s rights and civil society organizations. 

This year, the UN Trust Fund is doing everything possible to amplify the voices of our grantee partners, showcase their evidence-based successes, and advocate for increased funding to meet the scale of today’s challenges. Across sectors such as health, education, and infrastructure, instability, disasters, conflicts, and pandemics have eroded much of the progress achieved in gender equality. We are collectively in a phase of resetting and rebuilding.

As we move forward, this year will be a test of the global community’s ability to unite and act decisively to address these disparities, ensure progress is not reversed, and reaffirm our commitment to leaving no woman or girl behind.

Jacobsen: What can media platforms, influencers, or individuals contribute to amplifying this advocacy and funding opportunity to end violence against women and girls? How does the UN Trust Fund ensure that knowledge is collected from grassroots initiatives to inform global policy and programming?

Abby Erikson: The first and perhaps most crucial step is to follow and support the incredible work of the UN Trust Fund and its grantee partners, who are striving to end violence against women and girls in their countries, regions, and even on a global scale. Educating ourselves and fostering a shared understanding of why these issues persist—and how they can be effectively addressed—is vital. Media platforms and influencers also have a key role to play in spreading positive messages and creating a culture where violence against women and girls is not tolerated.

The UN Trust Fund works closely with its grantee partners to document the challenges they encounter and understand the contexts they operate in. Through this collaboration, we identify and amplify effective strategies, drawing on their practice-based expertise and on-the-ground knowledge. This work has resulted in the co-production of numerous knowledge products with our grantee partners from across the globe.

We also support our grantee partners’ capacity to share their insights with the world. The UN Trust Fund supports their participation in international forums and gatherings. These exchanges are vital for fostering collaboration and disseminating solutions.

The UN Trust Fund also facilitates knowledge exchange among grantee partners through initiatives such as SHINE—an online platform that enables communication in approximately 50 languages. SHINE is a hub for collaboration, allowing grantee partners, practitioners, policymakers, researchers, and experts to share best practices on ending violence against women and girls and collaborate with one another.

As a multilateral fund within the UN system, the UN Trust Fund bridges the gap between Member States, private sector donors, and committed individuals, connecting them with local women’s rights organizations worldwide. This partnership strengthens efforts to end violence against women and girls.

One of our critical roles is mandated reporting through platforms such as the Commission on the Status of Women and the Human Rights Council in New York. These reports highlight the achievements of our grantee partners and showcase how the UN Trust Fund brings together multi-sector partners to prevent and end violence against women and girls. Accompanying these reports, we often organize events and initiatives to ensure that the work of our grantee partners is recognized and shared effectively on a global scale.

Working on issues like intimate partner violence, sexual assault, rape, and other forms of violence is profoundly challenging. Yet, I am continually inspired by the expertise, tenacity, and perseverance of the women, men, girls, and boys who dedicate themselves to improving their families, communities, and societies, creating an environment of equality for all.

I am deeply honored to be in my role, to work alongside my incredible team, and to witness this inspiring work every day. The best investment we can make is in women’s rights organizations. Wherever we direct funding, we know women are on the front lines, making an extraordinary difference.

Jacobsen: Thank you. I appreciate it.

Abby Erikson: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Indigenous Services Canada on Jordan’s Principle

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/06

Jacinthe Goulet is a Communications Advisor specializing in Media Relations at, and a spokesperson for, Indigenous Services Canada. Based in Revelstoke, British Columbia, she brings over a decade of experience in communications and public affairs. Jacinthe holds a Bachelor of Fine Arts in Film/Video and Photographic Arts from the University of Ottawa and has completed studies with the Faculty of Native Studies at the University of Alberta. She is a certified yoga instructor and an active volunteer, empowering women and youth through initiatives such as Plan Canada’s “Because I am a Girl” campaign and arts education programs. Jacinthe is fluent in French and English. Goulet talked about the Canadian Human Rights Tribunal’s (CHRT) summary ruling regarding Jordan’s Principle, which ensures First Nations children have equal access to public services. Goulet highlighted the government’s judicial review of the CHRT ruling to resolve legal issues and emphasized ongoing consultations via Tribunal-assisted mediation. She outlined steps to improve service delivery, address a growing demand for requests, and collaborate with Indigenous leaders. ISC aims to transition from federal oversight to a community-based model for Jordan’s Principle, with $8.8 billion in funding and potential increases to meet First Nations children’s evolving needs.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What specific legal issues prompted the government to file a notice of application for judicial review of the Tribunal’s summary ruling? What is the aim in requesting a pause on review processes?

Jacinthe Goulet: On November 21, 2024, the Canadian Human Rights Tribunal (CHRT) issued a summary ruling with reasons to follow related to the non-compliance motion and cross-motion on the implementation of Jordan’s Principle.

We submitted a response to the Tribunal on December 10, 2024. As outlined in our response, we are ready and willing to begin Tribunal-mediated consultations regarding Jordan’s Principle. However, there are important legal issues around some aspects of the summary ruling. In order to make sure these can be properly resolved, on December 20, 2024, we filed a notice of application for judicial review with the Federal Court of the Tribunal’s decision. We have also requested an abeyance, or pause, on the judicial review, while we await the full reasons to come from the Tribunal.

We will continue in our work to implement Jordan’s Principle. Parents, guardians and communities should continue to submit requests to Jordan’s Principle for First Nations children. We will continue this important work so that First Nations children can have equal access to public services they need.

Jacobsen: Jordan’s principle is something to ensure “all First Nations children living in Canada can access the products, services and supports they need, when they need them.” How will Tribunal‑mediated consultations be conducted?

Goulet: Jordan’s Principle is intended to ensure that First Nations children have substantively equal access to government services, taking into account their distinct circumstances, experiences, and needs as First Nations children. In its November 21, 2024, Summary Ruling, the Canadian Human Rights Tribunal Panel ordered Canada to consult with the other parties on various matters, in the manner of their choice. The parties have consented to consult through Tribunal-assisted mediation. 

Tribunal-assisted mediation sessions took place January 9-10, 2025. The Parties are set to have further discussions on January 17, 23 and 24 (additional dates can be scheduled upon agreement by the mediator and the parties. The mediation sessions are led by a Tribunal member who is distinct from the Tribunal members sitting on the Panel that made the Summary Ruling. Mediation is a confidential process in order to allow the parties to speak openly and frankly in an attempt to reach an agreement. Please contact the Canadian Human Rights Tribunal for further information on the mediation process.

As stated in the November 21, 2024, Summary Ruling, following consultations, the parties will return to the Panel with consent orders or, if that is not possible, each party will provide their respective views and interim options to be decided on by the Panel. 

Jacobsen: How can the federal government address concerns for clearer processes for delivery of essential services to First Nations children?

Goulet: Our top priority and our intention remain the same; making sure First Nations children have equal access to the products, services and supports that they need. Canada is working to ensure Jordan’s Principle meets its objectives. 

Due to the significant increase in the numbers of requests, we are reviewing our processes at regional and national levels to be more consistent and clearer on the required documentation and the services First Nations children can access through Jordan’s Principle.

Jordan’s Principle has grown at an extremely fast pace over the last few years. From 2021-2022 there were 614,350 approved requests, compared to over 2.8 million approved requests in 2023-2024, a 360% increase. The CHRT has ruled that Canada needs to co-develop interim criteria and guidelines with the current parties in this process. Canada will work at the pace it sets with the parties.

Indigenous Services Canada is taking immediate steps to address the backlog, including: prioritizing the identification and processing of urgent requests; increasing decision-making capacity to reduce wait-times for requestors; immediate reassignment of existing Jordan’s Principle resources to a surge team to focus on urgent requests; and focusing on service delivery and design to speed up request processing and identify opportunities for more effective and efficient service delivery. 

This is a valuable initiative, that provides valuable services to First Nations kids. We must work together to ensure those with urgent needs are getting equal access to the care they need.

Jacobsen: How is Indigenous Services Canada ensuring First Nations parents and guardians know the documentation required to access services under Jordan’s Principle?

Goulet: Information about the process to send a request, including the information or documentation needed, is available under “How to send a request” at https://www.sac-isc.gc.ca/eng/1568396296543/1582657596387#sec5

The call centre is open 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, or regional focal points are available to help families start a request through Jordan’s Principle or for more information.

Jacobsen: Does the government project additional funding, beyond the current $8.8 billion, to meet demands for Jordan’s Principle services?

Goulet: The Jordan’s Principle initiative has an annual reference level (or baseline) of $772.8 million per year approved by the Department of Finance until the end of the 2027-28 fiscal year (April 1 to March 31). The baseline level is the amount ISC begins with each fiscal year to cover annual costs of approved requests as well as the operational costs of administering Jordan’s Principle. If necessary, ISC may seek additional in-year funding through the federal budget process or through off-cycle budget requests. Decisions on funding levels are made by the Minister of Finance and the Prime Minister and are subject to Parliamentary appropriations.

Jacobsen: What are the positive ways in which the 8.2 million approved products, services, and supports impact First Nations children’s lives?

Goulet: Jordan’s Principle has provided funding for a wide range of health, social and educational products and services that respond to the unique situation and distinct needs of each First Nation child.

Parents, guardians, representatives and/or First Nations communities submit requests that identify type of products, services and supports that are needed on behalf of First Nations children.

In the current fiscal year (April 1, 2024 to November 30, 2024), the top five categories of requests approved by Jordan’s Principle were to support the following:

  • Medical Travel (20,128 requests or 23%), 
  • Economic Supports (19,553 requests or 22%),
  • Education (9,144 requests or 10%), 
  • Travel (7,202 requests or 8%), and
  • Mental Wellness (6,255 requests or 7%).

In the current fiscal year (April 1, 2024 to November 30, 2024), the top five categories of requests funded by Jordan’s Principle were to support the following:

  • Education ($353.3 million or 27%), 
  • Mental Wellness ($256.6 million or 20%),
  • Social ($256 million or 20%), 
  • Health Services ($135.5 million or 11%), and
  • Economic Supports ($88.3 million or 7%).

Jacobsen: What is the government’s strategy to work with regional and national partners—including Indigenous leaders—for ongoing reforms to be informed by community voices?

Goulet: Jordan’s Principle is meant to fill gaps that First Nations children may experience in government services that are available to all children. Supporting children is the right thing to do and Canada will step in to make sure kids have equal access to the services they need, no matter where they live.

ISC engages in collaborative efforts with hundreds of First Nations communities and organizations, including Indigenous leadership across Canada, to address the specific needs of their First Nations children through group proposals to Jordan’s Principle. 

In the case where there are gaps in services or supports, Canada will always step in to support First Nation’s children. However, Jordan’s Principle is supposed to be used when necessary; it shouldn’t negate provincial or territorial responsibility. We must use public dollars in responsible ways. 

Our government has stood with First Nations since 2015, announcing $8.8 billion in Jordan’s Principle funding. We will do everything we can to support children, no matter what it takes.

ISC’s long-term vision of Jordan’s Principle is to move from the current request-driven, federal decision-making based approach to a more systematic and holistic, community-based approach to continuity of care for First Nations children, with specific operational parameters and increased First Nations’ self-determination and control. This vision is better aligned with the pathway to self-determination than the current federal model.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Jacinthe.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Tzeporah Berman, the Fossil Fuel Non-Proliferation Treaty Initiative

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/05

Tzeporah Berman, BA, MES, LLD (honoris causa), is the International Program Director at Stand.earth and Chair of the Fossil Fuel Non-Proliferation Treaty Initiative. With over thirty years of experience in environmental campaigning and policy, she co-founded ForestEthics and served as Greenpeace International’s Global Climate and Energy Program co-director. Tzeporah has received numerous accolades, including the 2019 Climate Breakthrough Project Award and the 2015 YWCA Women of Distinction Award. Her work has protected over 40 million hectares of old-growth forests and influenced global climate policies. An influential speaker and author, she advocates for a global treaty to phase out fossil fuels and promote equity, justice, and sustainability. Berman outlines the treaty’s goal to globally phase out fossil fuel production by enforcing regulations aligned with Paris Agreement targets. This initiative aims to stabilize energy markets, shift global power dynamics, and achieve sustainable development by reducing emissions and fostering renewable energy investments. Key challenges include resistance from countries profiting from fossil fuels and the necessity for international cooperation. Effective communication strategies have secured broad support, emphasizing equity, justice, and fairness. Additionally, the treaty seeks to transform corporate social responsibility by prioritizing genuine emissions reductions over ineffective offsets, ultimately aiming to change societal norms regarding fossil fuel use.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Tzeporah Berman. She’s the founder and chair of the Fossil Fuel Non-proliferation Treaty Initiative. She’s based out of Vancouver, British Columbia. First, what are the probable outcomes of the Fossil Fuel Non-proliferation Treaty Initiative on global markets and international relations?

Tzeporah Berman: It’s a very big question. If we are successful, the Fossil Fuel Treaty will help design and manage a phase-out of fossil fuel production globally. Right now, it is left up to the marketplace. How much gets produced, when, and by whom?

If the Fossil Fuel Treaty is successful, it will create greater regulations and constraints on production that align with Paris goals, which will affect global energy markets.

Our theory is that we shouldn’t leave the fate of the future to the so-called free market. Climate change is one of the free market’s single greatest failures. We need to regulate production.

If countries agree to do that and cooperate under the treaty, then that will limit supply and impact who’s producing and how much. So, it will have a significant impact on global energy markets. I think it will also change the dynamics in international relations.

Right now, a lot of profits are made through fossil fuel production, and the structure of power dynamics globally is based in large part on colonial systems and who has the money. If we constrain the production of fossil fuels and, therefore, constrain the profits made by the incumbents, then that starts to shift what we value.

It also starts shifting international relations and who’s powerful in significant ways.

Because the production and distribution of fossil fuels underlies our economic and political systems, these aren’t tinkering on the edges about replacing this megawatt with that megawatt. This is about a redistribution of power in every sense of the word.

Jacobsen: What is a managed or responsible decline of fossil fuel production within sustainable development models?

Berman: For 30 years, we have been trying to address climate change by managing demand and managing emissions. That’s what the majority of our climate policy globally at every level of government is about. It’s about how much people get to pollute and how we reduce the demand for fossil fuels.

The result is that while we’ve had some great success implementing demand-side measures in many jurisdictions that are successfully reducing emissions, emissions continue to rise globally.

Right now, the UNEP and Stockholm Environment Institute, in the production gap report, note that we’re on track to produce 110% more fossil fuels than can ever be burned and maintain a stable 1.5 degrees Celsius. That production would be by 2030.

We need to align production with demand destruction and our climate goals because what we build today will be what we use tomorrow. The theory that we could reduce the demand, reduce the cost and price of renewables, and increase the price of carbon to constrain fossil fuel production to manage the decline isn’t working.

It’s not working largely because the markets are distorted by trillions of dollars in fossil fuel subsidies each year and because of various decisions made by a very small group of countries, most notably under OPEC.

So, a well planned phase out of fossil fuel production is essential to sustainable development goals because fossil fuel expansion is the greatest threat to meeting all 17 of our sustainable development goals.

So we produced a report on that for Stockholm plus 50 and looked at the research worldwide on every major sustainable development goal, whether you’re looking at gender, poverty, water, health, or many other issues.

Fossil fuel expansion is at the root of the impacts and the threats to meeting those sustainable development goals, leaving climate aside entirely just fossil fuel air pollution alone is the leading cause of premature death worldwide, with over 8 million people dying last year just from air pollution alone the majority of which came from fossil fuels.

If we regulate and start to manage a decline in fossil fuel production, then that will help us meet every other one of our sustainable development goals. And let’s not forget that fossil fuels are also responsible for 86 percent of the carbon trapped in our atmosphere, causing the fires, floods, and extreme weather that result from climate change.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges in the implementation of the fossil fuel non-proliferation treaty?

Berman: The primary challenge to implementing a fossil fuel treaty at this point is that a small group of countries stand to benefit significantly from the continued expansion of fossil fuel production, and they don’t want to let that go. Of course, not a single country in the world doesn’t recognize that climate change is one of the greatest threats to global and national security and stability. However, every country likes to believe they can be the last barrel sold, and we can still align production with Paris’s goals and ensure a phase-out. The problem is, of course, it’s not at all true when you add that up.

It’s a typical tragedy of the commons problem, and that’s why we need international cooperation and countries to collaborate. We do not expect at this point in the fossil fuel treaty that major producing nations, especially the ones that are planning the greatest expansion such as Canada, the United States, and Australia, these wealthy northern countries are responsible for the majority of fossil fuel expansion that is planned on the planet in the next five years. We do not expect that they or other incumbents such as Saudi Arabia or Russia will join a fossil fuel treaty. That weakens the impact in the short term. However, when we studied six other international treaties, what we found is that many of the most difficult and intransigent issues and treaties were created by a small group of high-ambition countries that started to create rules that have consequences for countries not being in the group.

So, when we consider the fossil fuel treaty, we’re looking at mechanisms and agreements such as market access agreements, trade agreements, tax agreements, and debt relief agreements that would create benefits only for the club of countries negotiating and signing on to the treaty. The treaty has impact. One is that it will start to change the rules of the game of fossil fuel production and expansion.

One of the agreements under the treaty that we’re looking at, for example, is that all countries that have endorsed the treaty commit to purchasing only fossil fuels from other treaty countries in the transition period.

So what that would literally mean is that you’re saying to Colombia, for example, we’ll need to buy some of your oil and gas between now and 2050, but we’re only going to buy from you because you’ve committed to aligning production with Paris goals and helping design a treaty.

That provides more certainty of production and price for both the buyer and the seller. It creates a new OPEC. So, being in the club of countries designing the fossil fuel treaty would have benefits, and there would be negative consequences for countries that aren’t.

But the other big area besides the specific mechanisms is the question of how we shift the social norm about what is acceptable behaviour within foreign policy and what we’ve seen with other major treaties, whether it be the landmine treaty or chemical weapons ban for example or even nuclear non-proliferation with both nuclear treaties is that you had small groups of countries that started to form the rules and support from around the world through campaigns and communications for what they were doing.

The campaigns to end landmines and the nuclear-free cities campaigns in the 70s. This work started to shift what was acceptable, and those treaties created new social norms. So even though, for example, Russia or Saudi Arabia doesn’t join the treaty, they stop stockpiling the weapons because it has become unacceptable in other areas of bilateral or multilateral conversation and within foreign policy to stockpile those weapons.

Today, fossil fuels are our weapons of mass destruction. They are the greatest single cause of death and threat to global security and health. So, we need countries to understand that stockpiling and expanding the production of fossil fuels is simply unacceptable.

This is almost an entire flip in social norms that will have to happen because many of us grew up with a constant drumbeat from the fossil fuel industry and incumbents that expanding fossil fuels was essential to prosperity. We need to flip that social norm, and that’s part of what we’re trying to do with the diplomatic, campaigning, and communications efforts of the fossil fuel treaty.

Jacobsen: How does climate activism compare with historical environmentalism regarding types of strategies?

Berman: That’s an interesting question. The first couple of decades of climate activism didn’t learn from other environmental movements and environmental successes because climate activism was, in part, born out of science and policy logs. It was a movement based on targets, on numbers, on what was going to happen in the future, and the result was that the narrative and conversation were very inaccessible to the majority of people.

They couldn’t see carbon, climate impacts in their daily lives, or a relationship between their lives and these targets that groups were saying were essential for governments to set. So, it was very difficult to build a political movement around emissions targets and benchmarks, which were an invisible threat. When the pipeline and coal plant campaigns started emerging, the campaigns ‘ work became much more tangible and directly reflected the lessons learned from the forest movements in the ’70s through the ’90s.

Place-based organizing with impacted people has multiple sets of tools, including litigation, regulatory focus pro, tests and movement building and has significantly strengthened the climate movement around the world to make it more accessible. Today, the climate movement and certainly the movement for the fossil fuel treaty, which I know closest of all, is more diverse than any other environmental movement in history. We see doctors, faith leaders, scientists, Indigenous people, frontline community leaders, world-leading scientists, mayors, and presidents of nations standing together to call for something and working together to raise awareness because climate change affects every aspect of our lives.

There are many different entry points. Over the past 10 years, the issue has opened up, and people can see the real impacts in their daily lives. The movement has started to focus more on tangible projects and opposition to those projects rather than just emissions and policy targets. We’re starting to see a strong and more diversified movement.

Jacobsen: What are your near-term goals for shaping public discourse and policy?

Berman: The most important goal in shaping the discourse is to shift fossil fuels from being a siloed conversation within technical energy phase-out and maybe decarbonization conversations and elevating the need for a fossil fuel phase-out and the plans for a fossil fuel phase-out to be a part of every conversation that we have because the climate challenge is a direct result of our fossil fuel use and production. It will not be resolved without a fossil fuel phase-out that affects every aspect of our lives. 

Unfortunately, we have conversations politically and in popular communications about affordability, health, education, and economic stability. Then we have this smaller conversation about the decarbonization effort, fossil fuels and energy systems or climate change. Still, those issues are directly linked to the climate impacts we see today in the challenge of a fossil fuel phase-out. Yesterday, I went to buy a bottle of olive oil from my favourite Greek store here in Vancouver, and the tin that was $40 last year is $108 this year. The woman at the till said so many olive groves all across Greece and Italy either went up in flames or the trees fell over during the floods, so we don’t have olives. There’s a direct correlation between these different aspects of our daily lives. What’s happening in the climate? The answer comes down to the fossil fuel phase-out.

The most critical thing we can do is have our eyes wide open and have this conversation about managing the decline of our use and production of fossil fuels, which is at the core of all of the other policy and political conversations.

Jacobsen: How effective are the communication strategies employed and used in the fossil fuel non-proliferation treaty initiative?

Berman: Our communication strategies have been quite effective. We’ve grown very quickly over the past four years. We started with almost no money and two full-time staff people proposing an entirely new global treaty and a conversation around the world during COVID.

Today, 16 nations are working on a fossil fuel treaty. We have a network of 3,800 organizations in every corner of the globe. The campaign is active in 40 to 50 countries at this point. Hundreds of cities have endorsed through motions.

Three thousand of the world’s leading scientists have now endorsed the concept of the fossil fuel treaty. This month, we passed the threshold of a million individuals who have signed on to the treaty. So, for that growth in the time that we’ve had with the resources that we’ve had, it has to be that our communications are effective.

From the polling, two things are in our favor. One is that although the actual treaty and the issues will be very complicated, we have been able to simplify the choice at hand. While climate change is complicated, it depends on how much we produce and use three products: coal, oil, and gas.

Ultimately, we need to work together to stop producing the bad stuff so we can focus our money and elected officials on fast-tracking the good stuff. It’s quite simple, and it speaks to people’s values. The fossil fuel treaty is about fairness.

It’s about justice and equity in the transition. Our communications also benefit people by being almost like a big reveal. For decades, the fossil fuel industry has made its products invisible in climate policy and negotiations, to the extent that the words “fossil fuels” don’t even exist in the Paris Agreement, nor do the words “oil,” “gas,” and “coal.”

That’s part of the reason we haven’t been able to reach our climate targets successfully. People really wanted an answer to why it’s not working. Well, it’s not working because we’re not even talking about, let alone focusing on, reducing the products that are harming us.

There’s an answer there: a motivation around fairness, a simple choice we’re asking, and a shared global demand. Whether you live in Mozambique, in the rainforest in Ecuador, in the tar sands in Canada or anywhere on the globe, you can ask your elected official to support a fossil fuel treaty. We haven’t had one big global demand that makes us feel greater than the sum of our parts, that makes us feel like we’re not alone at home campaigning or working on climate change, but in fact, we’re part of something much bigger.

We haven’t had that—maybe not since Paris 10 years ago. So, the momentum and the shared global demand—what we’ve seen in our polling and our focus groups—are that people are saying, finally, big, bold demand and ask and vision that is commensurate with the scale of the problem.

People are tired of you telling them that the planet is on fire and that they should wear a sweater or save to buy a Prius. It’s not enough.

Jacobsen: What is the foundational ethic in arguing for a transition from fossil fuels?

Berman: Equity, justice, and fairness. Those ethics are essential to arguing for a fossil fuel treaty. Renewables are now cheaper in every corner of the planet than fossil fuels.

Electrification is faster than the transition to fossil fuels. The pickup of electric cars has been off the charts. One in five cars sold on the planet this year will be electric. We will phase out fossil fuels because it makes sense. It’s cheaper, it’s safer, and it doesn’t kill people. A solar spill is just a sunny day, unlike an oil spill, many of which I’ve lived through.

The question is, how fast will it happen, and how many people will be left behind? How much damage will there be? Those are the core questions today. We are already experiencing the impacts of climate change. Every ton of carbon we save from entering the atmosphere, every LNG project or coal plant we save from being built, will save lives. Right now, the most vulnerable people are in countries that haven’t benefited from the fossil fuel era and haven’t created the problem.

If those countries struggling under crushing debt are going to move forward on a fossil fuel phase-out and not end up caught into the fossil fuel system now to feed their debt, which is what we’re seeing. Ecuador is drilling in the heart of the Amazon rainforest to feed its debt. If those countries will move forward and have strong economies that are safe in the future, a fossil fuel treaty or some of the mechanisms we’re discussing under a fossil fuel treaty is absolutely essential.

This question of who gets to produce fossil fuels right now, if it is the dangerous resource that we know that it is, and we can only use limited quantities of it on this planet, who should get to produce and use it is ultimately an equity issue and a fairness issue. Right now, the countries producing the most of it and planning to expand the most of it are the countries that created this problem and are the countries that have very rich economies as a result in part of the fossil fuel era. A fossil fuel treaty ensures equity, fairness, and justice.

Jacobsen: What needs to be done to promote more corporate social responsibility practices?

Berman: This is such a big question, too. I’m going to zero in on one issue. Right now, the majority of the world’s corporations and banks are claiming to have climate plans by buying their way out of the problem through offsets and carbon credits, even though in the last five years, the majority of offsets and carbon credits have been debunked as useless and certainly fraudulent.

The science is very clear. We need absolute emissions reductions and a decline in fossil fuel production, and we need to stop investing in fossil fuels.

Many banks and corporations find that difficult or don’t want to do it because they still stand to make enormous profits off their production or use of fossil fuels. They create corporate social responsibility plans on climate change and sustainability through the idea that they can buy forests and other credits and continue to pollute. Even if it were a system that was working, the time for that is long past.

With a planet on fire, we don’t need one tool in our tool belt now. We need everything we can get. That means we need companies to commit to no new fossil fuel investment and an absolute decline in emissions and production of fossil fuels, along with investing in local community initiatives to protect nature and ensure our greater standing.

They don’t get to choose, and they don’t get to buy one off against the other.

Jacobsen: What needs to be done to promote more corporate social responsibility practices?

Berman: Right now, the majority of the world’s corporations and banks are claiming to have climate plans by buying their way out of the problem through offsets and carbon credits, even though in the last five years, the majority of offsets and carbon credits have been debunked as useless and fraudulent.

The science is very clear: We need an absolute decline in emissions and production of fossil fuels and a stop to investing in them. 

Many banks and corporations find that difficult or don’t want to do it because they still stand to make enormous profits from their production, use, or investment in fossil fuels. They create corporate social responsibility plans on climate change and sustainability through the idea that they can buy forests and other credits and continue to pollute. Even if it were a system that was working, the time for that is long past.

We don’t just need one tool in our tool belt right now, with a planet on fire. We need everything we can get. That means we need companies to commit to no new fossil fuel investment and an absolute decline in emissions and production of fossil fuels, along with investing in local community initiatives to protect nature and ensure our greater standing.

They don’t get to choose, and they don’t get to buy one off against the other. I think this modeling system under net zero, which allows them to buy offsets and credits and claim to be sustainable companies or to have good climate change policies, will be seen as one of the greatest scandals and frauds of the 21st century. 

Jacobsen: Are there any final points?

Berman: Here are the things that we didn’t get to. One of the things that a fossil fuel treaty will do if we manage the phase out of  fossil fuel production is stimulate investments in renewable energy technologies and infrastructure and elevate and support the rising demand for clean energy, which will, in turn, lower costs through innovation and economies of scale. That’s a critical piece regarding global energy markets, which I didn’t get to. The fossil fuel industry, or the fossil fuel era, has been characterized by boom and bust moments.

It is very volatile, and these are volatile products. So, one of the impacts on global energy markets will be to ensure less vulnerability and more stability, which will have reverberations throughout the economy for planning, community stability, and economic stability. I think we have seen a direct correlation between many wars and power held in the hands of a very small number of people and, at times, very destructive and fascist governments. That power, that money, or that war is a direct result of fossil fuels. We will start to see that shift as our fossil fuel dependence decreases. We’ll see enhanced influence for countries that prioritize renewable energy development, which by its very nature has less potential for weaponization and more potential for stability and diversification of power within nation-states and between nation-states.

And then finally, one of the big barriers, because one of your questions was about barriers, and one of the big barriers or problems that we’re seeing arising, which has to be overcome, is the potential for legal disputes over devalued fossil fuel assets. So, the question of stranded assets is huge. And, of course, we’re already seeing governments facing liabilities under investor-state dispute settlement mechanisms. We will see a rise in that in the years to come. So, the connection between straight and ISDS agreements and how those issues will be resolved as fossil fuel assets are mothballed are huge questions.

There will be a period of increased market uncertainty, which could deter investments in industries relying on fossil fuels. Then, they may risk the knock-on effects of stranded assets and capital shifts. But in some ways, that’s why it’s so important to have a cooperative timeline agreed to for a managed decline of fossil fuel phase-out so you can plan for those shifts. There is no question that we’ll see greater instability in a fossil fuel phase-out if it isn’t planned and there isn’t as much cooperation between states. Yep. That’s all I had.

Jacobsen: Laura, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Berman: You’re welcome.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Addressing the Growing Demand for Cancer Care in Canada

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/04

The acquisition of 522 University Avenue by UHN is a transformative move to meet Canada’s increasing cancer care demands. This facility will bolster UHN’s innovation in cancer prevention, early detection, and treatment. It will support growth at the Princess Margaret Cancer Centre and Toronto General Hospital by reallocating teams and launching new programs. Key initiatives include an Early Cancer Detection program, Prostate Cancer Centre, and a centralized Cancer Digital Intelligence team leveraging AI and analytics. The space will expand outpatient capacity by 20%, add inpatient beds, and strengthen collaboration with academic partners, serving as a vital training hub for future experts.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is the significance of the acquisition of 522 University Avenue for UHN’s cancer care work?

University Health Network: The acquisition of 522 University Avenue is a pivotal step for UHN in addressing the growing demand for cancer care in Canada. This addition to UHN’s footprint will increase our capacity to drive innovation and research in cancer prevention, early cancer detection, diagnostics and treatment.

Jacobsen: How will the new building support programs at the Princess Margaret Cancer Centre and Toronto General Hospital?

University Health Network: This new space will support the growth of programs at both the Princess Margaret Cancer Centre and Toronto General Hospital. By strategically relocating specific teams and launching new programs, the facility will help us meet the rising demand for cancer care and enhance our ability to offer cutting-edge treatments for cancer prevention and curability in the decades to come.

Jacobsen: What new services and programs are planned for the facility at 522 University Avenue?

University Health Network: The newly acquired building will house several key programs, which could include enhanced supportive care, an Early Cancer Detection program, a new Prostate Cancer Centre, and a centralized Cancer Digital Intelligence team. These initiatives will leverage advanced data analytics and artificial intelligence to optimize care, ensuring UHN remains at the forefront of cancer treatment and research.

Jacobsen: How will UHN address increasing demand for cancer diagnosis and treatment?

University Health Network: With the new building housing these teams, there will be more space at the Princess Margaret Cancer Centre to expand cancer care services. This added capacity is expected to increase outpatient volume by 20 percent and provide an additional 10 to 20 inpatient beds. These improvements will help manage the growing number of patients, while ensuring that UHN maintains its commitment to world-class cancer care and treatment.

Jacobsen: Will artificial intelligence and digital analytics play a factor in the cancer care programs?

University Health Network: Artificial intelligence and digital analytics will play a significant role in UHN’s cancer care programs. The building will house a centralized Cancer Digital Intelligence team that will leverage advanced data analytics and AI to optimize care.

Jacobsen: What impact does UHN have on collaboration with partner academic institutions and as a training ground for health care learners?

University Health Network: The acquisition of 522 University Avenue will provide new opportunities for research and education, especially for students at UHN’s Michener Institute. It will help bridge gaps in cancer research and care, while also offering a vital training ground for the next generation of cancer experts.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Arlan Richardson, Promises in Modulating the Aging Process

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/03

Dr. Arlan Richardson is a Professor of Geriatric Medicine and the Donald W. Reynolds Endowed Chair of Aging Research at the University of Oklahoma Health Sciences Center. With over 40 years of experience, he has authored over 300 peer-reviewed publications and mentored over 50 scientists. His pioneering work includes research on dietary restriction and gene expression, oxidative stress, and rapamycin’s effects on aging. Dr. Richardson has received numerous accolades, including the Nathan Shock Award and the Irving Wright Award of Distinction. His current focus is on oxidative stress, necroptosis, inflammation, and dietary restriction in aging using genetic mouse models. Richardson discussed the evolution of aging research over the past 50 years. Key findings include the benefits of dietary restriction and rapamycin in animal models. However, translating these to humans remains a challenge. Richardson emphasized the importance of addressing aging itself rather than focusing solely on curing individual diseases like cancer or heart disease, as these yield limited lifespan increases. He highlighted the societal challenge of obesity and stressed that combining caloric restriction with exercise could improve healthspan. Moving forward, advancing human trials and reliable anti-aging interventions are essential goals.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Arlan G. Richardson, a distinguished American biochemist renowned for his extensive research on aging. He is a professor in the Department of Biochemistry and Molecular Biology and holds the Donald W. Reynolds Endowed Chair of Aging Research.

Anyway, in your decades of research in the field of aging, what developments have become more factual and moved away from being considered science fiction? Conversely, what areas still appear as intractable as they were when you began your career?

Richardson: That is an excellent question. When I started in the field in the 1970s—over 50 years ago—while I was very excited about studying aging, I seriously doubted whether we would ever discover a way to manipulate the aging process. It didn’t matter whether it was a model; it wasn’t even a human model.

When people ask me when we would find something to slow aging, I would always say, “Probably in 10 years.” Even though I didn’t believe it would happen even within my life time, I figured that in 10 years, nobody would remember what I had said.  S

At that time, dietary restriction was the only known way to manipulate lifespan. I conducted many studies on this topic. We believed that if we could understand what dietary restriction was doing, we could target drugs to replicate its effects.

One of our significant findings was that dietary restriction almost reversed many problems associated with aging, such as disrupted biological pathways and the onset of age-related diseases. Dietary restriction delayed these issues. Animals subjected to dietary restriction lived longer and remained biologically younger. However, applying dietary restrictions to humans was a significant challenge because we all know that maintaining a strict diet for more than a year or two is extremely difficult for most people.

About 90% of people fail to sustain weight loss through dieting. I am an example of this myself. Given these limitations, I did not believe that, within my career, we would develop a drug capable of increasing lifespan and slowing aging.

What surprised me was the discovery in 2009 that rapamycin—a drug used in organ transplant rejection and some cancers—was shown to slow down aging in animal models. That was a significant milestone in the field of aging research.

Jacobsen: What areas should people be aware of regarding cautionary notes? Because, as with anything, there can be extraordinary promises that are technically grounded in the laws of physics or biology without necessarily negating their possibility. In finance, banking, or wellness, there’s always the potential for scams, fraud, or extraordinary claims that exceed the evidence.

As an expert, what are the main things people should be wary of—things known to be scams or frauds or that simply do not work?

Richardson: From a scientific standpoint, when discussing the ability of certain manipulations to work—whether in laboratory animals or life in general—the big question is whether these results will translate to humans. This is a significant issue because most of the manipulations that show promise in preventing conditions like cancer or Alzheimer’s disease in animal studies often fail to work in humans.

One consistent problem I see involves claims made about various supplements. These are often marketed as having effects on humans, even though there’s no solid foundation to support these claims, especially in animal studies. That doesn’t mean they won’t work in humans, but if something doesn’t show efficacy in animal studies, the likelihood of it working in humans is significantly reduced. On the other hand, just because a treatment works in animal models doesn’t guarantee it will work in humans. Does that make sense to you?

Jacobsen: Yes, it does. Please continue.

Richardson: Our studies are typically performed under what we call pristine conditions. The animals used are not exposed to infectious diseases or other external factors humans face daily. This raises the question of whether the results from these studies will translate to humans.

The most reliable advice remains the same: eat less and exercise more. This has been known for a long time, and everyone understands it. Yet, people often seek shortcuts—concoctions of drugs or supplements that claim to increase lifespan. If there’s no robust scientific evidence to back these claims—and in most cases, there isn’t—you must approach them cautiously.

Jacobsen: What are some things where experts are still on the fence? For instance, areas with enough evidence to suggest a modest effect but not enough to recommend them as regular practices for everyday life?

Richardson: A variety of laboratories have documented the observation of rapamycin. If you look at animal models, the best intervention is dietary restriction, which I’ve already discussed. The other significant intervention is rapamycin. While rapamycin is not a dietary system, its effects mimic some aspects of dietary restriction.

We know that rapamycin increases lifespan in animal models. However, people often overlook the need for consistent and rigorous scientific replication. Multiple labs have repeated the observation of rapamycin’s effects. The challenge is translating these findings to humans. Rapamycin does have some adverse effects, which has led to a reluctance to conduct large-scale clinical trials in humans.

Another major issue is how to test potential anti-aging compounds in humans. For instance, Neil Barclay at Albert Einstein College of Medicine has been thinking about this challenge and has proposed some ideas. Still, human lifespan studies are impractical due to the extended timeframe required. Instead, we need to identify compounds that do not require lifelong administration but can be introduced later in life to slow aging, prevent diseases, and maintain physiological function.

One area of interest is the development of compounds that can reduce appetite without the negative effects associated with traditional dietary restrictions. These compounds could reduce adiposity and have anti-aging effects. Preliminary animal studies suggest significant potential, but we are just beginning to explore their limits regarding anti-aging effects in humans.

Jacobsen: Who would you consider the leaders in this field?

Richardson: Dr. Steven Barthelon at UAB and Tim Kirkland, previously at the University of Texas and now at Cedars-Sinai. Both have made significant contributions to anti-aging therapies. Another prominent figure is Dr. Sara Espinoza, a leading geriatrician at the University of Texas Health Science Center in San Antonio.

Jacobsen: On the whole, are supplements effective or ineffective?

Richardson: Based on studies with animal models, most vitamin supplements and related products are ineffective in extending lifespan or improving health outcomes.

Jacobsen: What about treatments that fall in between, such as over-the-counter options or medications typically prescribed for specific conditions? For example, you mentioned something like Ozempic, which has gained popularity. I recall working at a horse farm where some higher-income clients purchased and used it. They reported weight loss and some health improvements. Others have looked into metformin or anti-inflammatory treatments. Are these effective?

Richardson: Medications like Ozempic (semaglutide) and metformin have shown potential in specific contexts. Ozempic, for instance, was originally developed for managing diabetes but has demonstrated benefits for weight loss, which can indirectly improve overall health. Similarly, metformin has been studied for its potential anti-aging effects, but its efficacy is not yet definitive. Both require more robust clinical studies to determine their broader applicability for aging and longevity. Reducing chronic inflammation is another promising avenue, but the science is still evolving.

Metformin, in addition to its effects on diabetes, may also reduce the risk of cancer and other age-related conditions in humans. Interestingly, it did not significantly affect lifespan when studied in mice and rats. On the other hand, interventions like GLP-1 receptor agonists, such as Ozempic, which were originally developed for diabetes and are now used for weight loss, hold potential as anti-aging interventions. This is mainly because their mechanisms of action mimic some effects of caloric restriction.

We know caloric restriction has universal benefits in animal models, including vertebrates, dogs, and non-human primates. It consistently shows positive effects on lifespan. Even in human studies, such as a two-year caloric restriction trial, while lifespan effects weren’t measured, improvements were observed in insulin sensitivity, cardiac health, and other physiological markers.

Jacobsen: This raises questions about the impact of specific choices: whether to take Ozempic or metformin, exercise or not or follow a calorically restricted but nutritious diet. These are not just binary choices but matters of degree. How do increments of caloric restriction—say 10%, 20%, or 50%—impact health and longevity? Additionally, does the effect depend on the nutritional quality of the restricted diet?

Richardson: There’s been some debate, but reducing calories is key, regardless of the specific nutritional components. Exercise also plays a role, but it’s challenging to disentangle its effects from caloric reduction. The best approach is a combination of both.

In animal models, caloric restriction typically involves a 30–40% reduction, which is substantial. Some studies suggest benefits even with a 20% or as little as a 10% reduction. Based on this data, I believe a 15–20% reduction could be effective in humans. However, reductions exceeding 40% could lead to negative side effects.

You also asked about the duration of caloric restriction. In animal studies, many benefits have been observed over their lifespans. However, other studies, including ours, indicate that even applying caloric restriction during certain life stages—early or late—can yield benefits. My recommendation would be to focus on caloric restriction for overweight individuals. A more conservative approach would be appropriate for those at a normal weight.

The broader context is also important. Obesity has become a significant societal issue. Historically, life expectancy has increased dramatically—from around 40 years in the late 1800s to nearly 80 years today. This improvement is due to advancements in healthcare, nutrition, and living conditions. However, the obesity epidemic poses a significant challenge, potentially reversing some of these gains by increasing the prevalence of diseases that compromise health and productivity.

Jacobsen: On a sociological and health note, as well as within media, there are debates about the portrayal of weight and health. Some individuals, including influencers, argue—rightly, in my opinion—that overweight individuals should not be shamed. I completely agree with that.

At the same time, another perspective suggests that we should not encourage unhealthy lifestyles in general culture. I also agree with that. These two views are not necessarily contradictory. However, there are cases where some influencers who are quite overweight have died young, which highlights the importance of not promoting unhealthy habits. So, while individuals should be happy with themselves, we must also be cautious about inadvertently normalizing unhealthy lifestyles. What are your thoughts?

Richardson: I completely understand where you’re coming from. I once weighed 260 pounds, and now I’m around 180. I’ve experienced firsthand the sensitivity surrounding weight issues, but I also understand that being obese is not healthy. Similarly, not exercising is also detrimental, as I’ve often discussed.

Ignoring the fact that obesity poses serious health risks is not the solution. That said, I completely agree that it’s unfair to assume that people who are overweight lack willpower. It’s like telling an alcoholic they need more willpower to stop drinking—it doesn’t work that way.

For example, I’ve taken certain medications that have significantly curbed my appetite. Now, I can sit with my wife, eat a satisfying meal, and stop there. Previously, I would eat multiple helpings, and within hours, I’d be back at the refrigerator.

From a compassionate perspective, we should acknowledge that many people who are overweight don’t want to be. Still, they often face significant biological and psychological barriers. Recognizing and addressing those challenges is key, in my opinion.

Jacobsen: What parts of aging will be the hardest to overcome with science and research? What areas will present the toughest challenges for reaching strong, evidence-based conclusions in the future?

Richardson: The toughest challenge will be determining whether an intervention truly has an anti-aging effect on humans. This is a complex issue, and experts like Dr. Nir Barzilai might offer differing opinions.

One of the most remarkable developments over the past 50 years is discovering multiple ways to slow aging, particularly in animal models like mice. Evolution has demonstrated the ability to manipulate lifespan across different organisms, so extending lifespan is no longer as surprising as we once thought.

The real challenge lies in translating these findings from animal studies to humans. Testing interventions for aging fundamentally differs from testing treatments for diseases like cancer. You can administer a cancer therapy and observe its effects over a few years. With aging, it’s much harder to measure the impact of an intervention in a relatively short timeframe.

Until we solve this problem—finding reliable, evidence-based ways to test anti-aging interventions in humans—the ability to translate findings from mice to humans will remain limited. We need solid evidence that a given intervention can improve healthspan by enhancing function, reducing disease progression, and slowing the effects of aging.

Jacobsen: Is there anything else I haven’t covered that you think we should discuss?

Richardson: One important thing to consider is that most of our current research is focused on curing specific diseases, like cancer or heart disease. This approach—treating one disease at a time—has been incredibly powerful in the past. For example, we’ve seen the success of vaccines in addressing diseases like Ebola.

That said, some people now spread misinformation about vaccines, but that’s another topic entirely. The point is, even if we cured cancer and heart disease today, the increase in life expectancy would only be around 8 to 10 years, according to predictions. However, curing those diseases doesn’t necessarily improve the quality of life in a significant way.

The reason is straightforward: if you don’t die of cancer or heart disease, another disease will eventually emerge, and these later-stage conditions often come with significant costs—both financial and emotional. For example, Alzheimer’s disease is a prime example. It’s extremely expensive to manage and takes a heavy toll on family members who provide care.

If we want to have a real impact on quality of life, we need to focus on slowing the aging process itself. Addressing aging would have a broader and more profound effect on quality of life than curing individual diseases. Animal models treated with caloric restriction show this clearly. Animals at the equivalent of 90 human years that have undergone caloric restriction look and behave much younger than their ad-lib-fed counterparts. Their fur is healthier, they move more, and they exhibit overall better vitality.

From these models, we know that slowing aging benefits health and lifespan. The real question is whether these findings can effectively be translated to humans. That’s where the next big breakthroughs need to happen.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Arlan, thank you for the opportunity and your time today. It’s been a pleasure.

Richardson: Thank you so much. You take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Chip Lupo and the States With the Most Racial Progress

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/01

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo discussed racial progress and integration in the United States. They analyzed disparities between African Americans and whites across 21 indicators, emphasizing employment, wealth, education, and civic engagement. New Mexico, Hawaii, and Arizona excelled in integration. At the same time, Mississippi, Texas, and Wyoming showed progress in specific areas like health, education, and poverty reduction. Employment and wealth were prioritized due to their domino effect on other categories. However, challenges persist in health care, particularly in the Deep South. Lupo highlighted geographic and economic factors influencing disparities, concluding that progress remains uneven across states.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Oh my gosh, once again, we are here with Chip Lupo from WalletHub. How long have you been with WalletHub as an analyst?

Chip Lupo: I’ve been with WalletHub since 2018, primarily as a writer. About a year and a half ago, I transitioned to a writer-analyst role.

Jacobsen: Okay, great. Today, we will discuss racial progress, focusing on the states that have made the most significant strides and those that have lagged. To start with a broad question, how are you quantifying racial progress?

Lupo: That’s a great starting point, Scott. To identify the states that have made the most racial progress, we measure the disparities between African Americans and whites across 21 key indicators of equality in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. These indicators span median annual household income, standardized test scores, voter turnout, and homeownership rates.

Jacobsen: I see. Regarding the top three—New Mexico, Hawaii, and Arizona—they’ve achieved the most racial integration. How did they manage that?

Lupo: These states have made notable progress. All three rank highly in employment, wealth, education, and social and civic engagement. This progress is largely due to effective public policies that create more opportunities for minorities in education or business. For instance, Hawaii ranks first in social and civic engagement.

However, there is still room for improvement in health care. In Hawaii and Arizona, there are significant gaps in the quality of hospitals and access to health insurance. On the other hand, New Mexico consistently ranks high across all four dimensions: employment and wealth, education, social and civic engagement, and health care. While Hawaii and Arizona rank well in most areas, healthcare remains a critical area for improvement.

Now, let’s talk about employment and wealth. All three states rank very highly in this area. For instance, New Mexico ranks 6th, Hawaii 2nd, and Arizona 4th. Indicators such as median household income show that racial income gaps are narrowing in these states. Unemployment rates are also levelling off, which is promising for achieving a better balance in employment.

Additionally, homeownership rates are improving, or at least the racial gaps in homeownership are shrinking. Poverty rates are declining, business ownership rates are increasing, and the representation of minorities in executive positions is growing. These advancements can largely be attributed to sound public policy and educational initiatives, which help raise awareness and support efforts to close racial disparities.

Arizona has seen an influx of new residents, which could be contributing to its progress. People moving to Arizona may be coming from states where racial disparities are not improving as much as they would like.

Jacobsen: Despite these positive trends, about 44% of Americans feel somewhat or very pessimistic about racial equality in the United States. This raises an important question: are public perceptions aligned with the data? In other words, even though the public may feel pessimistic, does the data indicate a more optimistic reality?

Jacobsen: It’s somewhere in the middle. And again, by state, you can feel some of this optimism in certain states, while in others, not so much. Let’s take a look at the bottom of the rankings.

Lupo: Sure. At the bottom, the District of Columbia ranks last at 51st. For discussion purposes, we’ll set D.C. aside and focus on the remaining states. Some lowest-ranking states include Wisconsin, Iowa, Minnesota, Montana, Michigan, Illinois, Nebraska, North Dakota, Ohio, and South Dakota.

Geography plays a role here, whether we want to admit it or not because these are upper Midwestern cold-weather states. That geographic trend was particularly noticeable. Additionally, many states in the Deep South are in the bottom half of the rankings, such as Missouri at 32nd, my home state of South Carolina at 34th, Arkansas at 38th, and Louisiana at 40th.

Jacobsen: Do geography and climate influence these rankings significantly?

Lupo: Yes, they do. Geography and climate impact the economy, influencing integration and progress.

Jacobsen: This study separates integration and progress into distinct metrics. Why were those categorized differently?

Lupo: That’s a good question, Scott. Integration refers to the assimilation of races into society, which has been an ongoing process since the 1960s. Racial progress takes a more comprehensive approach by combining various measures to assess how well integration works—or where it’s not working.

Integration metrics look at how well different racial groups blend into society. In contrast, racial progress metrics highlight areas needing improvement and assess overall effectiveness.

Jacobsen: Three states stood out in this study—Texas, Wyoming, and Mississippi. Can you elaborate on their performance in terms of integration and progress?

Lupo: Absolutely. Each state has made specific strides:

  • Texas: Significant progress was achieved by closing healthcare gaps between whites and African Americans.
  • Wyoming: Reduced the earnings gap, reflecting economic progress.
  • Mississippi: Closed the poverty gap by 27 percentage points since 1970.

Jacobsen: How would you characterize their performance in integration and progress overall?

Lupo: One area where all three states rank highly is education. Wyoming is 1st, Texas is 4th, and Mississippi is 7th in education metrics. Key indicators include:

  • Public high school dropout rates (the gap is narrowing).
  • Standardized test scores.
  • Share of adults with at least a high school diploma.
  • Share of adults with at least a bachelor’s degree.

All three states are performing well in these areas, which is crucial.

Jacobsen: What about their weakest areas?

Lupo: Mississippi shows a noticeable drop in its social and civic engagement rank, coming in at 25th. Key indicators here include:

  • Share of single-parent households.
  • Share of the adult population on parole.
  • Voter turnout rates (an important area for improvement).
  • Share of veterans.

Mississippi’s lower ranking in this category suggests that more work must be done to foster civic participation, particularly to get more people to the polls.

Jacobsen: That’s another interesting one. How did Mississippi do in that category?

Lupo: They did pretty well. Texas, on the other hand, is ranked 16th there. So, Mississippi still has some work to do regarding social and civic engagement, particularly in encouraging minorities to vote. This could be addressed through better campaigning, education, or awareness programs.

Jacobsen: What about the categories being weighted? Employment and wealth dominate, followed by a tie between education, social and civic engagement, and health.

Lupo: That’s correct. Employment and wealth have a full weight of 5.71 points, while education and social and civic engagement are each weighted at 5 points. Health, however, is weighted lower at 2.86 points.

Jacobsen: Why is health weighted less than the other categories?

Lupo: That’s because there are more subcategories within health. For example, there are seven different subcategories in health alone. The emphasis on employment and wealth stems from these gaps being the most discussed and widely recognized.

The theory is that narrowing the income gap creates a domino effect: better income can lead to improved education opportunities, better access to health care, and a higher quality of life. That’s why employment and wealth are given more weight—40 points versus 20 points for the other dimensions. Closing the income gap is foundational for addressing inequalities in other areas.

Jacobsen: Based on this study, how would you assess racial progress and integration in the U.S.?

Lupo: There’s still a long way to go, especially in rural and Deep South states. Key areas needing improvement include the quality of hospitals, health care, and access to affordable insurance.

The data shows narrowing gaps in some areas, but when you look at healthcare rankings, many low-income states in the Deep South rank poorly. This confirms that healthcare remains a critical area for improvement.

Jacobsen: We’ve covered the categories, rankings, weightings, and broader trends. Is there anything else to add?

Lupo: No, I think that’s everything. We’re starting to streamline these discussions, which is great.

Jacobsen: All right. Thank you very much for your time today. I’ll get started on this.

Lupo: Thanks, Scott. Anytime.

Jacobsen: You too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WalletHub: Best-Worst Cities for Active Lifestyles

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/02/01

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo discusses WalletHub’s 2025 study on the best and worst U.S. cities for an active lifestyle. Top cities like Honolulu, New York, and San Francisco excel in recreational facilities, while North Las Vegas ranks lowest. Factors include access to amenities, affordability, air quality, urban planning, and Google fitness search trends. Cities like Garland and Anaheim highlight suburban challenges, with residents often seeking activities in larger cities. Lupo emphasizes urban areas’ dominance in promoting active lifestyles due to better infrastructure. The study’s weighting of metrics like basketball courts and playgrounds reflects their popularity and impact on physical activity.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here again with Chip Lupo to discuss WalletHub’s study titled “Best and Worst Cities for an Active Lifestyle in 2025.” This study identifies U.S. cities where Americans have the best opportunities to maintain an active lifestyle this year. According to the study, the top cities for an active lifestyle are Honolulu, Hawaii; New York, New York; and San Francisco, California. The lowest-ranked cities are North Las Vegas, Nevada; Irving, Texas; and Fort Wayne, Indiana. Before delving into specifics, what factors contribute to these cities ranking at the top or bottom in promoting an active lifestyle? What stood out about the top three cities? This evaluation focuses solely on the city proper, excluding surrounding metropolitan areas. As we continue, this distinction will become clearer.

Chip Lupo: Interestingly, all of the top ten cities, from Honolulu in first place to Cincinnati in tenth, ranked highly in WalletHub’s “sports and outdoors” category. This category includes metrics such as the number of basketball hoops, soccer fields, swimming pools, tennis courts, public golf courses, and ice-skating rinks per capita. Being densely populated, these cities meet the demand for such facilities. While some cities had lower rankings in the “budget and participation” category, they still performed well overall. For instance, San Diego, ranked eighth overall, was 31st in the budget and participation dimension, considering factors like average monthly fitness club fees, cost of sports apparel, average bowling costs, number of sporting goods stores per capita, and the percentage of physically inactive adults.

Jacobsen: Regarding the lower-ranked cities, it’s notable that Las Vegas is ranked fourth overall, yet its neighbouring suburb, North Las Vegas, is at the bottom, ranked 100th. What could explain this disparity?

Lupo: This disparity may be because residents of North Las Vegas seeking recreational activities prefer to travel to Las Vegas rather than utilize facilities in their suburbs. This highlights the differences in resources and opportunities between a major city like Las Vegas and its surrounding areas.

Jacobsen: The study encompasses various factors, including the availability of sporting goods stores, public golf courses, fitness trainers, aerobics instructors, and playgrounds, which cater to different age demographics. Playgrounds, for example, are primarily for children. Does this study consider the entire lifespan of physical activity when evaluating cities?

Lupo: The study takes a comprehensive approach covering all age groups. It evaluates amenities like playgrounds and soccer fields that benefit youth and adults. While there are specific metrics for inactive adults, the study includes all demographics.

Jacobsen: Do different age groups require varying levels of physical activity? Is this a factor to consider when interpreting the results?

Lupo: Yes, different age groups have varying physical activity needs, and the study’s comprehensive approach accounts for these differences, providing a holistic view of how cities support active lifestyles across all demographics.

Jacobsen: The frequency of their provisions, like playgrounds versus golf courses, would also differ. Could it be a one-to-one mapping? Let’s start with the top five cities. In a place like Honolulu, primarily a resort area, there might not be as much emphasis on family-friendly activities. Instead, the focus could be on activities tailored to tourists and vacationers to keep them active while away from home. Would you agree?

Lupo: Yes, and the same applies to New York and San Francisco. These are also diverse areas, ethnically speaking. The diversity pushes for various activities to cater to different ethnic groups. You have to consider the overall population and various activities that suit their needs.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. Another factor to consider is the cost of fitness facilities. For instance, there is a huge difference in monthly fitness club fees between places like Garland, Texas, and Anaheim, California—up to 16 times the difference in average cost. How does that disparity affect people’s ability or even desire to get a gym membership and use it?

Lupo: Garland, Texas, is an interesting case because it’s essentially a suburb of the Dallas–Fort Worth area. Anaheim is similar—it’s about 40 miles outside Los Angeles. Individuals seeking more adventurous or dynamic activities are often venturing outward. These areas are largely commuter towns, so residents frequently leave their home areas to access entertainment or fitness opportunities in the larger cities. It’s the same dynamic we discussed earlier with Las Vegas and North Las Vegas.

Jacobsen: That’s an important point. You mentioned Irvine, California, earlier. Could proximity to cities and the distances between activities within a city factor into the physical activity levels of adults? For example, could these distances make people decide to stay home and spend more time online instead of engaging in physical activities?

Lupo: Absolutely. Irvine is an excellent example. It’s in Orange County, a suburban area of Los Angeles. Public transportation is a significant issue in Southern California, and traffic congestion discourages people from travelling to nearby cities. In Irvine, you might spend much time driving into and out of Los Angeles. As a result, people may prefer staying home, telecommuting, or working out at home rather than dealing with the hassle of travel. All of these factors contribute to physical inactivity in such areas.

Urban planning, transportation infrastructure, and local amenities all substantially shape people’s activity levels. We’re talking about these large, sprawling areas where public transportation is a significant problem. It’s a college town, so there is much walkability. Many students don’t have cars for various reasons. So, at least within university environments, it’s a walkable area. In this particular study, only a few factors were given double weight: basketball hoops per capita, baseball and softball diamonds per capita, and average monthly fitness club fees.

Jacobsen: Those factors and the share of physically inactive adults were given double weight. Additionally, fitness centers per capita, hiking trails, and playgrounds were double-weighted. Hiking trails are particularly interesting because they offer Americans access to physical activity for free. Were there any metrics considered for triple or quadruple weight?

Lupo: Not that I’m aware of. The ones that received double weight, especially basketball hoops and baseball diamonds, are among the most popular recreational facilities. Whether you’re renovating or constructing these facilities, they’re relatively easy to maintain once built. There’s also a high demand for them, so they were prioritized in the weighting. Soccer fields follow closely behind in popularity, but basketball and baseball facilities tend to dominate.

Jacobsen: Air quality is another factor I’ve been thinking about. Does poor air quality impact people’s willingness to go outside for physical activity? Or is it more about whether their health is directly affected while exercising outdoors?

Lupo: It’s a bit of both. As we discussed with traffic issues, people might avoid going outside or driving far to exercise. If the air quality is poor, they’re likely to stay indoors, exercise at home, or find recreation closer to home to avoid prolonged exposure to unhealthy air. For example, the recent fires in Los Angeles have made air quality unbearably poor. Southern California has struggled with air quality for years, and events like this only make things worse. It will be interesting to see how this affects outdoor activity over the coming months.

Jacobsen: Another fascinating aspect is the inclusion of Google search trends in methodologies. Google accounts for over 90% of all searches, so when we’re talking about search engines, we’re talking about Google. The inclusion of search terms like “workout at home,” “ab workouts at home,” “chest workouts at home,” “leg workouts at home,” “bodyweight workout,” and “dumbbells resistance bands” is intriguing. These searches aren’t the physical act of getting out and doing something but indicate a major precursor to physical activity.

Lupo: While these searches don’t directly measure outdoor activity, they provide insight into how people adapt their fitness routines. Search trends like these show a shift in behaviour, with many opting for at-home workouts due to factors like convenience, cost, or external conditions such as poor air quality or traffic. It’s critical to understand how people maintain active lifestyles in different environments.

Jacobsen: Either they’re searching to buy something for someone else or to buy it for themselves. Could there be a context under which these searches are so significant that you would have given them double weight rather than full weight?

Lupo: I think so, particularly during COVID, when people had little choice but to stay home. This is becoming a trend, much like working from home. More and more people are shifting toward home-based fitness. If nothing else, these searches show at least an interest in working out at home. You can build your gym and customize it to your preferences. It’s yours once you pay for the equipment—no monthly gym fees.

If you relocate, you take your equipment with you. You don’t have to worry about finding another gym or whether a gym chain has a location in your new city. It’s about maintaining interest and staying active but also reflects practicality.

Jacobsen: Before we wrap up today, do you have any final notes to make as an inclusive statement on this particular study?

Lupo: Sure. Let’s take another good look at the top ten. As we’ve mentioned, these are, for the most part, urban areas—sprawling urban areas, to be precise. To reiterate an earlier point, the study evaluates only the city proper. You’ll notice that while the top 10, 12, or even 15 cities for active lifestyles rank well, the outlying areas often don’t fare as well. This is because residents in those areas are likelier to enter the major city to access physical activities or recreational opportunities.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Chip, thank you as always. 

Lupo: No problem. Talk to you later.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Marketing, Predictive Analytics, and Fast-Moving Consumer Goods

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/31 (Unpublished)

James McCarthy, Vice President of Marketing at RedCloud Technologies, discusses marketplace technology, AI-driven insights, and digital payments. He highlights the need for specialized fast-moving consumer goods (FMCG) marketplaces, emphasizing supply chain transparency and demand prediction. AI enhances efficiency by helping brands, distributors, and retailers optimize inventory and reduce waste. Digital payments streamline transactions, but challenges remain in integrating them fully. McCarthy also addresses the 18% inventory gap and the resilience of independent retail despite e-commerce growth. RedCloud Technologies aims to leverage AI and data-driven solutions to enhance market penetration and consumer engagement through bundling strategies and predictive analytics.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with James McCarthy. He was recently appointed—last fall- as Vice President of Marketing at RedCloud Technologies. He has extensive experience with major companies such as Microsoft and Vodafone. Thank you, Vodafone Ukraine. It is incredibly helpful for security and has the cheapest data I’ve ever had.

RedCloud Technologies announced his appointment on social media and expressed excitement about the news. Today, we’re discussing your role, focusing on the future of marketplace technology, AI-driven insights, retail distribution, the rise of digital payments, and unlocking global supply chains. So, how is marketplace technology evolving? What role does AI play in shaping that future?

James McCarthy: Before diving into AI, I’d like to address a few other key aspects regarding the future of marketplace technology in the future of marketplace technology. First, there is currently a lack of marketplaces tailored to fast-moving consumer goods (FMCG), which include perishable and non-perishable products that people buy and consume daily.

Typically, B2B marketplaces are not designed for high-volume, fresh, and perishable goods. However, getting these products into the hands of retailers, who then make them available to consumers, is crucial. The first step in advancing marketplace technology is to create platforms that empower retailers, providing them with more choices to stock their shelves with the products their customers demand.

The key to the future of marketplace technology lies in building specialized marketplaces that serve the unique needs of specific groups around the world.

At RedCloud Technologies, we have identified a niche market in the independent retailer space for FMCG. Our platform enables retailers to access multiple supply options based on product, price, and sourcing flexibility. Some suppliers offer delivery with varying fees, while others provide better pricing. The goal is to give retailers the power to choose their suppliers more flexibly and efficiently.

AI’s role is closely tied to empowering brands, distributors, and retailers. AI helps independent retailers source the best products from the most suitable suppliers at the best prices, ensuring their shelves remain stocked and their customers are satisfied.

AI enables sellers to connect with new buyers, efficiently meet market demand, and optimize operations. Additionally, AI helps businesses collect and analyze trading data to anticipate market trends, reduce waste, and optimize pricing strategies by offering insights in real time.

Ultimately, AI enhances marketplace efficiency by making it easier for brands, distributors, and retailers to trade transparently and fairly. It ensures inventory arrives at the right time, place, and price so consumers can access the necessary products.

We envision this kind of marketplace, which is precisely what we’ve built for the FMCG sector.

Jacobsen: We are at the early stage of this. AI depends on big data, so the more purchases and transactions occur, the more precise the predictions will likely become. In a way, the amount of waste will be reduced—not exponentially, but significantly, at least in the early stages, over time.

McCarthy: Yes, if you look at the problem with waste, it traditionally occurs in the middle of the supply chain. The issue is often in distribution.

Brands can sometimes over-manufacture, but the distribution network often fails to understand regional demand accurately. As a result, the wrong quantities of products are shipped to the wrong locations. If the goods are durable—such as canned soup—this is less of an issue, as they can be redistributed.

However, for perishable products, which comprise a large portion of FMCG, getting the right products to the right place at the right time in the right quantities is essential to maintaining freshness. Logistically, this is difficult without precise demand forecasting from consumers and stores.

The primary driver on the issue of waste is the lack of communication within the supply chain. Companies struggle to anticipate and predict demand without proper connectivity, leading to poor decision-making.

Too many products are sent to one location while another experiences shortages, creating an inventory gap. We estimate that the global FMCG market is worth around $11 trillion, but approximately $2 trillion represents an inventory gap—where products fail to reach consumers because they are unavailable on store shelves when needed.

This is a massive problem. When supply chain inefficiencies occur, they not only lead to empty shelves but also result in products being stocked in places where they should not have been, causing waste and profitability issues.

Jacobsen: Brands are missing approximately 18% of additional potential profits because consumer demand exists, but supply chain inefficiencies prevent fulfillment.

McCarthy: Correct. It’s an estimate, of course—no one has mapped the full end-to-end process with complete accuracy—but it is likely a valid approximation.

This issue is particularly pronounced in emerging markets, where retailers tend to be smaller and more geographically dispersed. Unlike large-scale operations that manufacture and ship directly to major retailers like Walmart, these markets operate with a far more fragmented distribution network.

The inability to align supply with demand creates a significant challenge. In emerging markets, store shelves are often empty simply because deliveries do not arrive on time. Conversely, stores may stock products consumers do not want—simply because those are the only available products.

This presents a major challenge. Brands struggle to meet their full demand potential, retailers cannot access the products they need, and distributors—who operate on thin margins—must navigate complex logistical decisions while maintaining profitability.

Jacobsen: How do digital payments impact this sector?

McCarthy: Digital payments represent another friction point in the supply chain. It is crucial to create orders on a marketplace and ensure seamless payment for the right product at the right time. This enables buyers to access lending services, while distributors and brands benefit from payment guarantees and insurance. This ensures that when they deliver products, they receive payment, which has several implications.

From a retailer’s perspective, a key challenge is affordability. Many small retailers cannot purchase in large quantities to secure better pricing. Instead, they are forced to buy in small batches at higher prices. However, with digital payments and financial instruments, retailers can establish structured agreements with suppliers for a set number of weekly units. This creates more predictable commercial terms and guarantees payments for both parties.

For small independent stores, the challenge is even more fundamental. While some may accept digital payments through contactless terminals, their businesses are not necessarily digitally integrated. This creates difficulties in tracking revenue for each product sold, associating payments with supply agreements, and ultimately understanding business profitability. Managing the business efficiently becomes a significant challenge without a clear link between consumer sales and supplier costs.

Jacobsen: I see a couple of key points of contact here. One is consumer uptake and demand—ensuring the right supply is available. Another is the adoption of digital payments and their integration into the system.

These issues fall under the larger umbrella of customer or consumer engagement. How do you enhance consumer engagement with consumable goods and digital payment technology? Can these processes be integrated for optimization?

McCarthy: That’s an interesting question. We are seeing a steady increase in digital payments, even in emerging markets where cash has traditionally been dominant. Cash usage is declining significantly in most markets, and contactless transactions are becoming the norm. What do you mean by engaging consumers with products?

Jacobsen: Sure. The most obvious gap between supply and demand is the 18% inventory gap, where consumers want unavailable products on shelves. The challenge is getting the right supply to the right locations and leveraging technology to predict demand more accurately. Additionally, integrating payments into this system could further streamline the process.

The payment side is a bit trickier, but I can give a practical example. In Vancouver, we have a transit system called SkyTrain, which uses a Compass Card. To use it, you must first purchase the card, load funds onto it, and connect it to a bank account for automatic reloads.

In contrast, in Ukraine, public transit payments are much more direct. You tap your Visa card to enter it without an intermediary system like a stored-value card. After tapping, you descend into the subway via long Soviet-era escalators to reach the station.

So, different systems create varying levels of efficiency. Some require extra intermediary steps, while others provide a more seamless, bank-connected experience. There are likely ways to streamline digital payments in retail to make consumer engagement smoother and more intuitive.

McCarthy: Oh yes, that’s correct., If you look at the datasets,  based on the data we collect, our marketplace allows us to gather a significant amount of first-party information on how transactions and trade are happening.

Regarding consumer demand, we can analyze retail store throughput—how much product moves through them. We can also assess trade volume geographically for specific product categories and determine what types of products are selling and in what quantities.

This data allows us to make supply chain predictions based on factors like seasonality, helping us estimate future demand for various product categories and subcategories. Additionally, since we track which brands are being shipped, we can provide valuable insights to brand customers, helping them predict demand for their products.

However, what we do not track is the consumer point-of-sale transaction. When a customer purchases an item with a contactless card, we do not capture the sell-through data at the cash register.

Since we do not own or operate the point-of-sale (POS) systems, that part of the data remains outside our scope. However, we do know what products are being supplied to each store. Assuming that everything supplied is eventually sold, we can make informed estimates about consumer demand at a macro level.

Jacobsen: Is AI enabling more transparent and resilient supply chains?

McCarthy: Yes, it is. Primarily, AI helps sellers identify underserved market segments and discover ways to meet their needs more effectively.

Regarding resilience, AI is critical in helping the supply chain anticipate demand, ensuring that businesses can maintain sufficient stock levels to fulfill consumer needs.

Resilience is a particularly interesting challenge. It essentially means structuring supply chain operations to enable predictability, allowing businesses to plan, stock appropriately, and respond effectively to fluctuations in demand.

Let me clarify: Resilience is the outcome of predictability.

Jacobsen: What strategies should brands adopt to leverage digital platforms for better market penetration?

McCarthy: Brands need to analyze and predict consumer demand at a much more granular level—not just through supermarket chains and traditional distribution channels but also through local communities and specific consumer groups.

Rather than relying solely on tier-one distribution data, brands should strive for end-to-end visibility into how products move through the supply chain. By understanding who is buying their products at the final stage, they can gain much better insights into sales performance and demand forecasting.

Jacobsen: I’ve heard a lot about traditional retail potentially declining—things like shopping malls becoming obsolete as more consumers shift to online ordering. Is that trend having an impact on the market as well?

McCarthy: Not really. In some markets, there may be an impact, but when it comes to day-to-day consumer goods—particularly fast-moving consumer goods (FMCG)—local convenience stores, small supermarkets, and corner shops remain an integral part of the community, especially in urban areas.

You might do your weekly grocery shopping online and have it delivered, but you’re still likely to visit your local shop to pick up extra milk, bread, or other last-minute items you forgot to add to your online order.

In many countries, the relationship between independent retailers and their local communities remains very strong. This is especially true when these small retailers can stock the right products that their customers need.

Providing them access to a broader selection of brands, including leading ones, is essential to ensuring they can meet local consumer demand. This strengthens the value of independent retail at the street level.

Jacobsen: How can retailers use AI-driven insights to personalize customer experiences and drive sales?

McCarthy: One way to do this is through bundling. We’ve been working with some of our customers to recommend combinations of products that complement each other and match consumer buying habits. Bundling strategies help retailers optimize product offerings. By analyzing data on consumer behaviour, we can identify which products are frequently purchased together and recommend bundling them in-store.

This allows retailers to create promotional offers encouraging customers to buy complementary items, enhancing their shopping experience and increasing sales.

We’ve seen some strong results with this approach. It’s all data-driven, ensuring the recommendations are based on purchasing patterns.

In the future, we envision a space within our marketplace where these bundles will be automatically generated and recommended, which is exactly our direction.

Jacobsen: James, thank you for your time and the opportunity today.

McCarthy: My pleasure.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Prof. Stanley G. Payne on Fascism and Authoritarianism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/31

Dr. Stanley G. Payne is Professor Emeritus of History at the University of Wisconsin–Madison and a globally recognized expert on fascism, authoritarianism, and 20th-century European history. He earned his Ph.D. from Columbia University in 1960 and has authored numerous influential works, including A History of Fascism, 1914–1945 and Fascism: Comparison and Definition. Known for his comparative approach, Payne’s research explores the origins, ideologies, and impacts of fascist movements, with a focus on Spain and Europe. His groundbreaking scholarship has significantly advanced the study of political ideologies, shaping modern understandings of authoritarian regimes and European political history. Payne explains the historical context and enduring legacy of fascist politics. Fascism emerged in advanced nations with organized nationalism and modern systems, distinct from communism’s reliance on force and violence. Fascist movements used alliances and systemic manipulation to achieve power, unlike communists who seized power through coups or revolutions. Modern political movements share superficial similarities with fascism but lack its foundational elements. Leaders like Giorgia Meloni and Marine Le Pen succeeded by distancing from neo-fascist traits, reflecting how fascist strategies influence today’s political landscape without replicating its essence.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with the eminent historian and scholar, the prolific academic Stanley G. Payne. You are an expert in Spanish history, fascism, and 20th-century European political movements. You are an emeritus professor at the University of Wisconsin–Madison. You received a Ph.D. from Columbia University, an M.A. from Claremont Graduate School, and a B.A. from Pacific Union College. Some of your key works include Franco and Hitler: Spain, Germany, and World War II, published in 2008; Cuarenta Preguntas fundamentales sobre la Guerra Civil, published in 2006; The Spanish Civil War, the Soviet Union, and Communism, published in 2004; A History of Fascism, 1914–1945, published in 1995; Fascism in Spain, 1923–1977, published in 1999; and The Franco Regime, 1936–1975, published in 1987. As with every superhero story, there is always an origin. What sparked your interest in fascism, and how did this develop into your world-class expertise over time?

Prof. Stanley Payne: Well, it has a long history. Like all scholars, I had to write a master’s thesis and a doctoral dissertation. My advisors directed me to the fascist movement in Spain, which had never been studied on a scholarly level. We are talking about the late 1950s, a very long time ago. None of this work had been done yet; there was no research. I took up the topic as a project during graduate school. I wrote a book on the early history of the Spanish fascist movement.

I became interested in fascist parties, even though my main focus was on Spanish history. I began reading extensively about other European fascist movements and eventually wrote two books on fascism as a broader topic. One was a more political science-oriented account focusing on definitions. At the same time, the other was more fully empirical and had a general history of fascism. Over time, this developed into a specialization in fascist studies, which finally emerged as a recognized scholarly field toward the end of the 20th century. Now, there is even a fascist studies association, although I am not a member, as I think that might be gilding the lily a bit too much.

Jacobsen: Here is a big-picture question: What is fascism’s character? Additionally, what defines the key figures involved in fascist movements?

Payne: Fascism was a European revolutionary movement of the early 20th century that became increasingly popular during the interwar period, though it was never predominantly popular. It was primarily a phenomenon of the era of world wars in Europe between 1914 and 1945. This period of fascism represented the most extreme aspects of European nationalism.

Fascism was an authoritarian nationalist movement with several distinctive features. These included charismatic leadership, a focus on authoritarianism, and even, to some extent, a distinctive economic policy that emphasized militarization. It also had what we might call a “therapeutic” doctrine of violence, as opposed to a “necessitarian” one. This unique combination of characteristics defined the fascist movements of that era.

Of course, the problem with fascism is that when you outline its characteristics, most of them—though not all—overlap with communism. Fascist characteristics were first exhibited in Russia in 1921, but fascism evolved into a very different kind of West European nationalism. Its enemies labelled it as a right-wing movement, and, in some sense, it was indeed a right-wing movement, but it was quite different from communism. However, the overlap in authoritarian movements is very significant.

When people say, “Oh, this and that characterize fascism,” they are not necessarily wrong. The issue is that “this and that” are often characteristic of communism and other authoritarian movements. To specify what is uniquely fascist, you have to identify the aspects of fascist movements that are distinct from communism and other forms of authoritarianism. This narrows the scope considerably and demands much more precision.

It isn’t just about dictators—there are all kinds of dictators. It isn’t just about authoritarianism—there are many forms of authoritarianism. It isn’t just about nationalism—there are numerous types of nationalism. Fascism was a specific kind of European radicalism that emphasized a non-rationalist, anti-materialist approach rooted in the European Cultural Revolution of the 1890s. This movement had a unique cultural and philosophical background, characterized by vitalism, non-rationalism, anti-materialism, and distinctive aesthetics. However, its defining feature was a particular approach to violence and militarization.

It wasn’t merely about being authoritarian. Communists were often more authoritarian than fascists. While communists could be just as aggressive as fascists at times, their actions depended on circumstances. Fascism’s doctrine of violence, however, was more therapeutic and fundamental in its ideology than in communism.

After the end of the fascist era, the term “fascism” has been widely discussed. In the post-fascist period, the term is almost always used pejoratively as a means of stigmatization. It has become a term of political labelling rather than a reference to genuine fascism, which was a historical phenomenon that could not be recreated after 1945.

In the past few generations, when people refer to fascism, they’re not talking about Mussolini and the Italians, who were a minor political authoritarian phenomenon without much importance. What they actually mean is Hitlerism and Nazism. If that’s the case, why don’t they say Nazism? Why do they consistently use the term fascism?

The reason fascism remains such a potent term of stigmatization in the post-fascist era is multifaceted. First, fascism, unlike communism or socialism, doesn’t have a clear definition or meaning. Communism means something. Socialism means something. Liberalism means something. But a fascist? Presumably, that refers to a “fash.” And what does that mean? Nothing in any language other than Italian. As a result, the term is completely malleable, capable of being shaped to mean whatever someone opposes or dislikes.

Moreover, there’s the aesthetics of the term itself. If you say “Nazi,” it sounds odd but not particularly sinister. If you say “fascist,” it sounds much more menacing. The double sibilants give it a sinister tone. “Fascist” becomes a politically charged and ominous adjective, making it especially useful as a term of stigmatization.

Jacobsen: It’s a boo word in many ways.

Payne: It has lost all cognitive content. Eventually, after 1945, the term “fascism” began to lose its cognitive content. It’s what linguists call an empty signifier—a word for which you supply the meaning. The meaning is not inherent in the word itself.

Jacobsen: So, it is less about the direct cognitive meaning that ended in 1945 and more about the colloquial intent of the term when it is thrown around, typically as either a social or personal epithet—”fascist.” Could we delve more into what they mean when referring to authoritarianism or authoritarian tendencies in the current period? Is that a more accurate usage?

Payne: Yes. It can mean virtually anything undesirable and is usually unrelated to Mussolini because no one knows much about Mussolini. They mean Hitler. When people talk about fascism and the breakdown of democracy, they don’t mean Italy in 1922 because most people know nothing about that. They’re referring to Germany, the Weimar Republic, and the rise of Hitler. Of course, they don’t typically know much in detail about that either. Still, it’s an idea broadly understood in a general sense.

Jacobsen: So then, outside of terminology, in terms of the actual structures, processes, and outcomes of these movements, what threads do we see connecting communism, fascism, authoritarianism, Hitlerism, Nazism—these ideological and personality-driven movements that you’ve previously stated had a therapeutic character in some ways? What was the ailment they aimed to address?

Payne: The therapeutic aspect lies in the perception of violence and its use. Communism was always extremely violent, practicing violence on a massive scale—even during peacetime, more so than Hitlerism. However, communism viewed violence as a necessary evil. The communist idea was that violence isn’t inherently good but must be employed against enemies to achieve its goals. In that framework, violence was justified as a necessary evil to be used, often on a massive scale. However, it was something to be hidden.

What was different about historical fascists was their emphasis on the glorification of violence and militarism. Coming out of World War I, fascism was born from the massification of militarism and violence. Fascists promoted militarization as intrinsically valuable because it fostered discipline, idealism, morality, unity, and a sense of collective purpose—working for the common good. This was presented as a positive national culture to be developed.

This distinction sets fascism apart from communism. While communism also used violence and militarization on an even larger scale, it did not openly glorify these practices as fascists did. Fascism, in a sense, was more transparent—it didn’t disguise its qualities the way communists excelled at doing. Fascists were overt, openly glorifying aspects that most people would consider inherently negative or destructive.

That said, it wasn’t always straightforward. Even in Italian and German fascist regimes, leaders often had to disguise their actions because they were dealing with general populations that had not been fully “fascistized.” These regimes sometimes had to pretend to be something other than what they were. Still, these tendencies and characteristics remained fundamentally distinct from those of communism.

Jacobsen: So, these values—meticulousness, discipline, embracing military structure, and respecting military order—are the values. As they were implemented, what were the actual outcomes?

Payne: Well, they were implemented, and the logical outcome was destruction and annihilation, to the extent that it has never been possible to reconstitute a significant fascist movement after 1945. There have been attempts at imitation. It’s true. There have been some efforts at neo-fascism in various places. However, they always fail because the culture of Europe and the world has changed so much, and the examples of extreme militarism have proven so destructive that post-fascism no longer dares to invoke them.

Even authentic neo-fascist movements cannot officially label themselves as neo-fascist. They don’t dare. Most so-called neo-fascists are not even truly neo-fascists. They aim to borrow elements from authoritarianism or extremist nationalism that can be repurposed in other contexts.

Each historical period and its corresponding phenomena must be studied and analyzed on its own terms. Politically, authoritarianism is a common and recurring temptation—a perpetual temptation. It is, historically, the normal style of politics. As a result, authoritarianism always reappears in one form or another. The challenge for political analysts is to study each successive form of authoritarianism in detail, examining it for what it truly is, without imposing anachronistic or ahistorical labels that confuse more than they clarify.

You should strive to be as specific as possible about the political phenomena you’re dealing with in the present moment. If you’re talking about new political phenomena, don’t pretend it’s a recreation of 1930. What happens in 2030 will not be a recreation of 1930; it will reflect the unique characteristics of 2030.

Jacobsen: What about two things, both centred around worship? First, the worship of personality. Second, individual worship practices in small communities as used for political purposes—essentially, theocratizing a state or using religion for political ends. How have these two phenomena historically played roles in fascist movements? Do they play roles in authoritarian movements today?

Payne: Not in quite the same way. In the first half of the 20th century, it was typical to sacralize extremist political movements and turn them into substitute religions—not political religions, because that’s a contradiction in terms, but something akin to religions. You saw this in the Soviet Union and fascist Italy. At one point, they even said, “Fascism is like a religion.”

At other times, they would acknowledge, “Well, of course, the Catholic Church is a religion. We are not a religion.” Both statements were true in their own ways.

Jacobsen: Because they said, it’s like a religion.

Payne: Fascism was somewhat like a religion, but it couldn’t be a real religion. Mussolini didn’t pretend it was an absolute religion, as he officially recognized and signed a concordat with the Catholic Church, which was considered the real religion. In National Socialism, however, the situation was different. The culture of German Romanticism—what is called the völkisch or populist culture of Germanism—antedated Nazism for a long time, going back into the 19th century.

In Germany, there were very cult-like forms of this culture, even more so than in fascist Italy. Similar dynamics could also be observed in the Soviet Union, albeit in different forms. The most religious-like political movement, however, is found in communist North Korea. There, a secular religious cult, Juche—the national doctrine of Korean communism—has been officially established as a form of religion.

It’s fascinating that North Korea was the part of Korea most heavily Christianized by Western missionaries before 1945. In Juche, Christian elements are transposed into a secular political cult, with the ruling Kim dynasty becoming almost pharaonic in stature—more like gods than political leaders. North Korea exemplifies a regime where the ruling family embodies absolute power and functions as a kind of divine center.

This sacralization is not unique to historical fascism. It can also be found in other forms of authoritarianism. Certain elements central to fascism are broader phenomena, not exclusive to fascism. However, this is often overlooked or misunderstood.

Jacobsen: Do you think the missionary zeal, along with the attempts at conversion and successful conversions, softened the population for Juche?

Payne: No. The Soviet military takeover made Juche possible. It was a straightforward Soviet power play. Much like Hitler, Stalin was an ideologue, but he was a more rational political strategist. Stalin had learned from Lenin that politics is the art of the possible, requiring supreme opportunism, even if it meant temporarily betraying one’s own nominal principles.

Stalin’s approach relied on using ideologies like Hitlerism as icebreakers for violent political takeovers, then following up to consolidate power. The Soviet entry into North Korea set the stage for the emergence of Juche. There might be an indirect, bastardized, pseudo-Christian influence in the development of Juche in North Korea, but whether this softened the population is debatable. It depends on how we define “softening.” We need a longer discussion to explore that.

Jacobsen: What about Franco and Spain from 1923 to 1977?

Payne: Franco didn’t have the same issue because he had a real religion. Franco was always a devout Catholic. He declared, “We’re going to have a very Catholic regime.” After initially dabbling with fascism—a complicated phase that we may not have time to delve into here—he realized during the later stages of World War II that fascism was doomed. It was a losing ideology.

Franco began transforming Spain into a monarchy, with himself as a pseudo-king or regent for life. His approach was rooted in traditional legitimization, not revolutionary ideology. Franco’s regime became the most overtly Catholic regime in the world, using real religion as the cultural and moral foundation rather than relying on any form of cultural or political religion.

Franco’s Spain was characterized by Catholicism as the core of its identity, contrasting with regimes that relied on substitute or quasi-religious elements for cultural cohesion.

Jacobsen: So you’re referencing a transposition from Soviet Stalin’s cynical political maneuvering. What about the transposition of real religion about fascism? How does that work out? It’s different, but it seems broader in terms of the level of dogma.

Payne: Fascism, as distinct from Soviet communism, operated in a European context—an institutionalized, civilized, and more sophisticated setting—quite different from the more backward and chaotic context of Russian Bolshevism. In Europe, there had to be more careful and calculated approaches to Christianity.

In the Soviet Union, communists were enemies of Christianity from the outset. However, Lenin was a skillful opportunist. When the Bolsheviks first seized power, it was not through a nationwide takeover but by controlling key cities like Moscow and St. Petersburg. The communists solidified their control of Russia during an enormous civil war that cost 15 million lives—far more than Russia’s losses in World War I. World War I was relatively mild compared to the Civil War, even though it led to the collapse of the tsarist regime.

Lenin understood that launching an all-out assault on the Orthodox Church during the Civil War would be impossible to win. Thus, he postponed the attack until the war was over. Once the communists secured power, they began systematically dismantling the Orthodox Church.

In contrast, the Italian and German fascists, if we include the Nazis as fascists, operated in more politically complex contexts. Unlike Russia, which collapsed after World War I, Italy and Germany retained their institutional frameworks. If Mussolini or Hitler had attempted a coup d’état similar to Lenin’s, they would have been swiftly crushed by their respective armies.

Hitler initially did not grasp this reality. His failed coup in 1923 taught him the importance of adjusting his tactics. Fascist movements had to make alliances, form political deals, and come to terms with existing power structures, including the influence of Christianity.

After Mussolini became dictator, he negotiated a Concordat with the Vatican, establishing a formal relationship between fascism and Catholicism. However, this created a fundamental contradiction. Fascism aspired to be totalitarian, yet recognizing the autonomy of the Catholic Church undermined this goal. Fascism invented the term totalitarianism but never achieved its full realization. It simply wasn’t strong enough.

The Germans, under Hitler, followed a similar path. Hitler negotiated a Concordat with the Catholic Church and made arrangements with the dominant German Protestant Church, akin to the Lutheran tradition. He attempted to create a symbiosis between National Socialism and German Christianity.

This symbiosis, however, was not about equality. National Socialism sought to become the predominant force, granting Christianity only a limited sphere of autonomy. Hitler went even further than Mussolini in making Nazism a political religion in Germany, albeit within this symbiotic framework.

Unlike communism, which relied purely on raw power and avoided alliances, fascist movements depended on forming alliances to achieve their objectives. This necessity for collaboration made fascism a more complex, albeit contradictory, ideological and political system compared to Soviet communism’s monolithic approach.

Payne: Since fascist movements never had the raw power that communists wielded from the outset, they were forced to rely on political deals, especially in their early stages. This included making arrangements with the predominant forms of Christianity. However, these deals often didn’t work out well for the Christians, nor did they always work out entirely well for the fascists, particularly from the Italian perspective.

Jacobsen: Before the 1900s, were there any proto-fascist movements that could be identified or pointed to?

Payne: This is a matter of interpretation. Some historians argue that, yes, you can identify what is sometimes called the “roots of fascism.” Where do you find these roots? If you look at Italy or Germany in the 19th century, there aren’t any clear examples. However, in France, you can see the origins of modern European radical nationalism.

The French invented much of modern European radicalism, including radical nationalism, before these ideas emerged in Germany or other countries. During the early years of the French Third Republic, in the 1870s and 1880s, radical nationalists began to express ideas that resembled some aspects of fascism. While they didn’t encompass the full range of fascist ideology, these movements could be considered the first proto-fascist expressions. If you were to find early examples, they would be in France, not Germany or Italy.

Jacobsen: Have we learned any lessons from the fascist movements of the 20th century, and have we avoided repeating those mistakes?

Payne: I think so. We’ve learned the dangers of neo-fascism very well, to the extent that no neo-fascist party has been able to establish itself since 1945 firmly. Those kinds of movements haven’t been replicated.

Since the end of World War II, democracy has become the dominant political form in the Western world. Almost all political movements in the West now identify themselves as democratic, regardless of their ideology, and no one openly imitates fascism.

There’s a saying attributed to Huey Long, the “Kingfish” of Louisiana and a formidable Democratic Party politician during the early 1930s. Long was said to be the only rival Roosevelt truly feared because of his ability to appeal to the masses, perhaps even more effectively than Roosevelt. According to this attribution—which I’ve never been able to verify and may have been invented by a journalist—Huey was asked in 1934, “Will fascism come to America?”

Payne: And he said, “Oh, of course, fascism will come to America, but here we’ll call it democracy.” This takes us into a very convoluted argument, but it highlights a key point: fascism did not emerge in primitive countries. It developed only in relatively advanced nations, which already had organized nationalist movements and modern political systems.

Otherwise, there’s no need for something as complex and seemingly contradictory as fascism. In primitive societies, you simply have dictatorships—such as African or Latin American-style dictatorships. There’s no necessity to take the full fascist route. Fascism, emerging in more advanced and sophisticated nations, required complex forms and a more intricate path to power.

One enduring legacy and danger of fascism is not necessarily its ideology but its strategy—the fascist style of taking power, which is not overt. Consider Hitler’s attempted coup in 1923. He came within an eyelash of being shot dead during that effort. He was walking arm in arm-with a colleague when a bullet struck the colleague and could just as easily have hit Hitler. He was pulled down by the fall of his comrade, which dislocated his shoulder. While not wounded by a bullet, Hitler was injured—and extraordinarily lucky. He had been lucky throughout his early life, surviving World War I and this failed coup attempt.

Hitler learned from the failed 1923 coup: Don’t attempt coups. Lenin never attempted a coup, understanding that a fascist party—or any similar movement—would be swiftly crushed if it tried such a thing in a functioning state. Italy, for example, had a victorious and united army after World War I. It would have been invincible against a coup.

Therefore, fascist movements had to find allies to come to power. No fascist party in a fully developed political system could seize power on its own; it needed alliances, and those alliances had to be ones the fascists could dominate. The only two successful examples were Mussolini in 1922 and Hitler at the beginning of 1933.

In both cases, they used and worked the system. Violence and force, the tools of communists in more broken-down or primitive systems, could not be the primary strategy in advanced constitutional democracies. Fascists had to navigate within the existing political framework, forming and leveraging alliances.

Mussolini and Hitler demonstrated this approach by forming alliances that enabled their rise to power. This strategic manipulation of democratic systems remains a cautionary tale. A danger to democracies lies in the ability of movements or leaders to exploit alliances and use democratic systems against themselves.

Payne: Alliances are crucial in determining who leads and who benefits within them. In advanced democracies, no political alliance has ever fully replicated the characteristics of fascist alliances, but that strategy remains a notable threat. Fascist movements come to power not through coups but by working within the system and forming alliances. This fundamentally differs from the communist strategy, where movements almost always come to power through force and violence—a historical and political constant.

Fascist parties, in contrast, achieve power by navigating the system. This strategy, though devoid of current fascist actors, is still relevant. For example, after the fall of communism, the Cuban government adopted what they called “21st-century socialism.” While Cuban communism originally came to power through civil war and direct violence, the global political climate of the 21st century no longer permits such overt methods. Today, alliances and systemic manipulation are required, which mirrors the fascist strategy more closely. In this context, the Cuban regime began to emphasize this strategy as a practical necessity for functioning in more advanced political systems.

The legacy of fascist politics is, therefore, this practical strategy: working the system from the inside out. Movements that emulate fascist tactics often lack the power for civil wars, insurrections, or coups. Instead, they must operate politically, using alliances and systemic influence to achieve their goals.

Jacobsen: Are there any political movements or quasi-political movements in Western Europe or North America today that share some characteristics—or even many—with fascist movements leading up to 1945? If not, do they share traits we associate with authoritarianism?

Payne: The candidates for comparison today are predominantly right-wing forces. However, being right-wing is not synonymous with being authoritarian or violent. Right-wing movements may or may not exhibit charismatic leadership or authoritarian tendencies.

Take, for example, Giorgia Meloni, the Prime Minister of Italy. She is not a neo-fascist. Her political organization had to deliberately “de-neo-fascistize” itself to become effective and lead a parliamentary coalition. She operates within the political system and has no intention of overthrowing it.

The Alternative für Deutschland (AfD) is a constitutional political party in Germany. While it is very much right-wing—anti-immigration, pro-populist, nationalist, and so on—there is nothing inherently neo-fascist about it. It operates within the framework of German constitutional democracy.

Similarly, Marine Le Pen’s party underwent significant de-neo-fascistization in France to achieve its current size and influence. This process of distancing from overtly fascist traits is a recurring pattern. There’s a rule of thumb here: the more successful a putative neo-fascist party becomes, the more it must abandon the significant characteristics of historical fascism.

In short, while some political movements may share superficial similarities with fascism or authoritarianism, their methods, goals, and frameworks remain fundamentally distinct from the movements that defined the early 20th century.

My rule of thumb is that the more genuine fascist characteristics a given party has, the smaller and insignificant it is; the more a given party frees itself of genuine fascist characteristics, the larger and more successful it is, like Marine Le Pen and Meloni.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Prof. Payne.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Updates from Canadian Border Services Agency

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/31 (Unpublished)

Rebecca Purdy (she/her/elle) is a Senior Spokesperson for the Canada Border Services Agency (CBSA). The Canada Border Services Agency (CBSA) intercepted three prohibited devices at Vancouver International Airport on April 26, 2024 as part of its mandate to screen goods entering and leaving Canada. While investigative details remain undisclosed, the CBSA collaborates with law enforcement agencies, including the RCMP, to combat smuggling and organized crime. Under Canada’s Border Plan, the government is investing $1.3 billion to enhance border security and immigration systems. The CBSA employs intelligence-led screening, detection tools, and international partnerships to prevent illegal goods and criminal activity while ensuring the safe and efficient flow of trade and travel across 1,200 ports of entry.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What were the circumstances of the Vancouver International Airport interception on April 26, 2024?

Rebecca Purdy: On April 26, 2024, Canada Border Services Agency (CBSA) border services officers at Vancouver International Airport Commercial Operations intercepted and seized three prohibited devices in a courier package. The CBSA has a mandate to screen goods entering and leaving Canada. All goods must be declared and each declaration is subject to a risk assessment. Border Services Officers are trained in examination techniques and use a risk management approach, state-of-the-art detection technologies and indicators to determine whether further examination is required.

Jacobsen: What actions were taken by the CBSA and the RCMP during the investigation?

Purdy: The CBSA does not comment on investigative steps in specific cases. For publicly available information on this case, please refer to the news release and the court record.

Jacobsen: On other subject matter, how does Canada’s Border Plan aim to address resource allocation issues at ports of entry? What mechanisms does the CBSA use to screen and intercept illegal goods? How do we detect and prevent illegal drugs from entering Canada under the new Plan?

Purdy: Canada is investing $1.3 billion to bolster security at the border and strengthen the immigration system, all while keeping Canadians safe. Information available on the plan is available here: The Government of Canada’s Border Plan: significant investments to strengthen border security and our immigration system – Canada.ca.  

For additional information, including traveller statistics and seizure statistics, please see the 2024 Year in review: CBSA protecting Canadians and supporting our economy news release and the accomplishments by the numbers (for the period between January 1 and October 31, 2024). 

Every day last year, billions of dollars in goods and services and about 400,000 people crossed the Canada-U.S. border. The CBSA is Canada’s first line of defence at 1,200 ports of entry across the country. Day in and day out, approximately 8,500 CBSA frontline personnel play a crucial role protecting our communities by preventing dangerous goods and people from entering Canada. Across the country, the CBSA employs over 200 criminal investigators who investigate individuals and businesses that commit serious offences against Canada’s border and criminal legislation. Abroad, the Agency employs approximately 60 international officers at 40 missions in 35 countries who help push our borders out. The CBSA strategically dedicates its resources to address the threats that Canada faces while supporting the flow of legitimate trade and travel across the border. The CBSA works in an operating environment that changes on a daily basis and we are ready to respond and adapt as needed.

As smugglers are increasingly utilizing more sophisticated concealment methods in smuggling attempts, the CBSA employs a number of tools to stem the flow of illegal and prohibited materials in and out of Canada. The Agency remains vigilant in the interdiction of prohibited firearms, weapons and illegal drugs to ensure they remain off the streets and out of local communities. Guided by intelligence, our officers use contraband detection tools such as handheld devices, small-scale and large-scale X-ray machines, and detector dogs. We prioritize and risk-assess importations and exportations of goods entering and leaving Canada to make sure they are properly declared and meet import/export requirements. We support efforts to combat organized crime by using a risk-management approach to identify and intercept shipments containing contraband or goods obtained through crime.

The CBSA works regularly and closely with domestic and U.S. law enforcement partners, including the RCMP and other Canadian police agencies, provincial and territorial governments, U.S. Customs and Border Protection, U.S. Homeland Security Investigations, the United States Coast Guard, the U.S. Drug Enforcement Administration, and the U.S. Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms and Explosives in a joint effort to seize drugs and guns and prevent those who engage in criminal activity from entering Canada and to assist with investigations. The Agency regularly shares relevant information on border and national security issues with its national and international law enforcement partners as well as other government departments in Canada, to ensure the health, safety, and security of Canadians. The CBSA carefully monitors global trends and patterns to ensure that its frontline border services officers are well-equipped to identify and prevent illegal goods from entering and exiting Canada. 

Criminals try to exploit the border both ways. U.S. authorities count on us in the same way we count on them to share information and identify threats to our countries. It is a tried and tested partnership that has kept our countries safe for decades.

With the collaboration of our partners, we support national security and public safety, while facilitating the free flow of legitimate trade and travel. 

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Rebecca.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Justin Weller on Politics and the Underprivileged’s Education

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/31

Justin T. Weller is the Founder of Urbana Tomorrow, and the Founder and executive director of Urbana Youth Center. Justin T. Weller is the founder of Urbana Tomorrow, a business group in Urbana, Ohio, that spans real estate, construction, event spaces, media and retail. A native of Urbana, advocate, community builder, entrepreneur, and member of the LGBTQ+ community, Justin’s business prowess and personal dedication to enacting change in his rural community have fueled the idea that a better tomorrow is always possible. In high school, co-founding the marketing and media company TrueChat led Justin to develop and host a podcast called The State of Us. The podcast focused on cutting through the noise to bring attention to pressing issues, and it was syndicated on AM and FM radio stations across much of the United States and Canada for 12 years. After studying psychology, political science, and public relations at Xavier University, Justin committed himself to entrepreneurship full-time. While continuing to lead TrueChat, he founded Urbana Tomorrow to manage an event venue at his family’s farm and invest in blighted properties in the Urbana area. Weller talks about his entrepreneurial journey at 14 with a cattle business and transitioned to media with TrueChat, aiming to elevate rural voices. His insights stem from hosting “The State of Us,” advocating for discourse over division. Weller discussed the decline of local media, its impact on community cohesion, and his efforts at the Urbana Youth Center. Serving over 700 members, the center tackles barriers like hunger and education gaps. Recognized as a Disney Magic Maker in 2021, Weller credited his team and emphasized small acts’ transformative potential, stressing the media’s role in fostering understanding.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Justin T. Weller, a native of Urbana, Ohio. He is an advocate, community builder, and entrepreneur committed to revitalizing rural communities. You began your entrepreneurial journey at 14 with a beef cattle business, followed by the founding or co-founding of TrueChat. Two questions arise: what was the nature of your entrepreneurship in beef cattle, and how did that transition directly into marketing and media while you were still in high school?

Justin Weller: That’s a fair question, and many people would wonder the same. How does one go from ranching to media and marketing? It’s not a standard transition. This reflects a recurring theme throughout my life: from death comes life, and from doubt comes perspective. Running a cattle business teaches you invaluable lessons about perseverance, overcoming hardship, and managing a business.

When you care for animals that depend on you, their well-being directly impacts the success of your business. During that time, I committed to honouring the natural world as much as possible, ensuring animal welfare and health. Reflecting on those experiences, I see that everyone has a role to play in improving the world. Many industries have existed for generations, and it’s our responsibility to think about improving them. Often, we get caught up in the idea that we need to change the entire world, but sometimes, changing one person’s world is enough.

While the cattle company wasn’t massive, it was successful. We served several clients and directly contributed to their health and well-being through the products we provided. My transition to media occurred because, as I was growing up and managing this cattle business in rural America, particularly in the Midwest, a lot was happening worldwide. There always is, but this was during the financial crisis of 2008. Before, during, and after that period, I was learning and experiencing significant economic and political challenges. These events made me feel we were at an inflection point, and I believed we needed new voices, messages, and fresh perspectives.

This led me to the realization that in a hometown like mine—often overlooked and dismissed as “flyover country”—there was untapped potential. These are the states you pass over to reach places considered more significant, a misconception I strongly challenge.

Jacobsen: That is sometimes the sentiment. Sometimes, that’s the way people here feel. One of the places we see that is in the media market. Over the last two decades, the number of local media sources has reduced by more than half and continues declining. That’s a serious issue. One of the places this is evident is in schools. A very common occurrence used to be that local sporting events and extracurricular activities received a lot of media coverage.

Weller: They were a great way to encourage people to participate in extracurriculars and keep the community involved in what was happening at the school. Urbana is not a massive media market, as you may have gathered. As we saw less and less of that coverage, I am old enough to remember when we had a local access channel that people regularly watched on TV.

My best friend and I were asked to comment on a basketball game. We played football but weren’t involved in a sport during the winter season, so we agreed to comment. I said, “Sure,” just as a fluke, but we both enjoyed it. I immediately thought, “It’s a shame this isn’t available for more school events.” At the time, there were maybe one or two broadcasts a season, so the coverage was very limited.

We set out to figure out how to provide this service more regularly to the community in a way that intersects with the 21st century. That, of course, led to a media company. We started with internet radio, as we couldn’t use the word “podcast” since nobody knew what that meant. That was the transition from small-town media to creating something meaningful for the community.

Jacobsen: Oh, being in media, I did about 27 months at a horse farm—many stalls to muck. The worst was five days of cleaning 65 stalls back-to-back, followed by second pickings, about nine hours of work each day. It was gruelling, but one thing I noticed is that there are many similarities between so-called white-collar and blue-collar labour. The difference is the setting. In the barn, the “watering hole” or the water trough, whereas it’s the water cooler in an office. But people make up for those deficits in interesting ways. Did your interest in communication and media influence your decision to run as an independent candidate for mayor of Urbana in 2019?

Weller: Oh. When I started TrueChat, I had no idea what it would become. I was in high school, and our ambitions were modest—we just wanted to do something good for our hometown. But it quickly grew into something more. My best friend and I were committed to addressing the anger and frustration in America, which felt like it was reaching a boiling point. It was very unclear what would happen next.

We strongly felt that young people’s perspectives must be shared. We wanted to advocate for more common sense and less cruelty, more respectful discourse, and less hatred. This led me to spend the next 12 years hosting a podcast called The State of Us, which ultimately became a nationally syndicated AM and FM radio show. When we stopped, we were reaching 20 U.S. states. The show focused on perspective—discussing the issues and having conversations that no one else was willing to have.

Jacobsen: So what ultimately led to this philosophical pondering of your awakening?

Weller: It came from spending so much time researching everything happening worldwide that mainstream media wasn’t covering. I said, “Gee, some of this is important, and I didn’t even know it was happening.” At the same time, I was trying to figure out what I thought about it and having those conversations.

If anybody spends 2,000-plus hours trying to learn about something and understand the issues that impact this nation, you’re bound to come up with questions—and probably some ideas about how you’d do things if it were up to you. So yes, that program I ran for 12 years was probably the greatest educational experience I’ve ever had. It gave me perspective not just on the state of the world but also on the state of the Midwest, rural America, and small towns.

It all culminated in the 2016 election when I told listeners during an episode, “If you don’t like the way the table is set, you have to turn over the table.” In other words, you have to be part of the solution. You can’t just complain from the sidelines. Later that day, as I listened to the episode before release to make edits, I had a “smack myself in the face” moment. I heard myself say that and thought, “Here I am, sitting in downtown Cincinnati, in a skyscraper overlooking a professional sports stadium, as far away as possible from my cattle days.”

I had to ask myself, “What are you doing? You left your hometown. You left everything behind because you didn’t want to deal with it, and now you’re not trying to improve it.” That realization marked the beginning of my journey to move back to my hometown and try to make a difference. I tried to do that by running for mayor as an independent against a two-term incumbent Republican in a place that votes about 80% Republican 80% of the time.

Some people called that crazy—and they were probably right—but it started some important conversations here.

Jacobsen: How would you describe the feel of media in Urbana? When talking about radio, television, or podcasts hosted out of Urbana, would you say they’re influenced by the “cultural soil,” so to speak? Do they have a particular character?

Weller: Yes, and part of what bothers me most about the decline of local media is that it often translates into the death of the community. Local media talks about the culture, the undertones, and the unique way a place feels when you’re there. We forget how much of that revolves around what’s happening where you are.

As local newspapers, radio stations, and TV stations consolidate, voids are created in places like Urbana. We’re fortunate to have a local newspaper still. Still, we’re a community that serves about 25,000 to 30,000 people, and only about 1,100 subscribe to the paper. That’s a major issue because most of the population doesn’t have access to a unified source of information about what’s happening.

The closest thing to that is Facebook, but I don’t need to tell anyone that there’s nothing unified about the information on Facebook. More than anything, the flavour is disconnection—of being adrift. People feel disconnected from what’s happening, which leads to many cliques, groups of people relying on what they can gather from each other. There’s value in that, but the problem arises when we don’t all start from the same facts.

It becomes very difficult for different groups to interact positively when this group’s facts and that group’s facts aren’t the same. They might not even be talking about the same story. Our local newspaper does a good job of maintaining a journalistic approach to what they write. However, if they had more than two reporters, they could do even more.

They used to have, I believe, 20 people in the newsroom alone—though that was years ago. Now, they have two: the managing editor and someone for the sports section. It’s a tough job to cover all the happenings in Urbana and Champaign County with so few resources. They do a solid job of staying down the middle, but I’m not sure people here want “down the middle.” Sometimes, that approach challenges what a group is telling or advocating for, which makes things even more complicated.

I continue to advocate for and press for a resurgence of local media. It will likely need to look and feel different. Still, the decline of local media has contributed as much to our division as a nation as anything else.

Jacobsen: How is the work at the Urbana Youth Center progressing in terms of providing evidence-based, ethical programs to help kids and students who may not have the same access to resources and education as other families?

Weller: The Urbana Youth Center is a perfect story. Its origins are a perfect example of the concept that “from death comes life.” I had run for mayor and came closer than anyone thought I would—possibly even closer than I believed myself. But when you don’t win, you’re faced with a choice: what will you do now? Is it over? Am I done trying to make a difference, or is there more to be done?

That’s where new life emerged from that defeat. I decided that as long as I knew there were people in this community who needed help, I had a responsibility to do something about it. That perspective came from overcoming self-doubt. Anyone considering running for office knows those doubts: Am I good enough? Can I do it? Will I do a good job? Can I win?

And then, after losing, more doubts emerge: if I didn’t win, am I meant to do anything? The answer is yes. Maybe I wasn’t meant to do that particular thing. Still, I can now do something else—perhaps even more important.

The Urbana Youth Center is the most important thing I’ve done to contribute to society. I didn’t fully realize that at the time. It was part of my campaign platform to establish a youth center, and I was aware of the stats: one in two kids in this community is classified as disadvantaged by the state of Ohio. That means they’re not set up to have the same opportunities as the average kid.

In Ohio, most kids were on free or reduced lunch programs. We also knew that about one in three didn’t have either of their biological parents living with them at home. So we understood the numbers, but the numbers don’t convey the human element of situations like that.

The human element became clear once we did all the work to start the youth center. These kids began showing up in droves—to hang out and be in a place where adults genuinely cared about them. However, the students had to overcome much doubt because so many have lived lives where trusting adults has proven dangerous. It doesn’t work out in their favour when someone promises them something.

Naturally, the students approached the youth center with skepticism. We provide them with a new perspective. We operate with open hearts, open minds, and open doors. We meet them where they are and work to build trust. We can only talk to them about new opportunities and connect them with programming to improve their world.

That ties back to something I mentioned earlier: for those who feel called to make the world a better place, there’s often this overwhelming focus on doing something grand—changing the entire world. But “grand” doesn’t always mean large-scale. It can mean a dramatic change for just one person. A grand act of kindness doesn’t need to affect millions to matter.

Changing one person’s world is just as significant. And the truth is, you don’t know how many other lives that single person might go on to affect. If one person destined to live in a cycle of poverty manages to break that cycle, their impact could ripple outward. Beyond their increased earning potential—contributing an additional half-million to a million dollars to the economy—they could lift others, changing even more lives.

We must not undervalue the importance of helping just one individual. Of course, the youth center aims to do this on a larger scale. We serve over 700 registered members, meeting them where they are with spaces to hang out, homework and study assistance, and pathways for dropouts to earn their high school equivalency diplomas, known as GEDs in other states.

We also provide books, art programming, food, and hygiene products. We aim to address the full scope of barriers that can hold these kids back from success. Education understandably takes a backseat when you’re hungry or don’t have proper clothes to wear. That’s just a basic reality of being human. Suppose you don’t have food or feel unsafe. In that case, your priority isn’t going to be your education or your future—it will be figuring out how to get through today.

Jacobsen: I understand you received Disney’s Magic Maker recognition in 2021. Can you tell me more about that?

Weller: Yes. There have been three or four moments in my life that I can only describe as truly extraordinary.

There are moments of humility—things you never expect to happen that do. I was nominated for the Disney Magic Maker recognition. So were, I don’t know, 30 or 40,000 other Americans. It’s great to be nominated, and that matters, but it’s one of those things where you think, “Oh, I’ve been nominated,” and then you don’t think about it again.

They were only choosing 50 people, and I thought, “There have to be 50 people out there who are making magic happen in ways I can’t even imagine.” But then I got an email from Disney’s Corporate Citizenship team. They said, “We’re going through the applications and narrowed it down. We want to schedule a time to talk with you and learn more about what you’re doing at the youth center and with Urbana Tomorrow.”

So I set it up, and we spoke. I didn’t know—because they wouldn’t tell you this—that they had already decided before that call. As you’d expect from a company like Disney, they extensively researched my background and work. They had already spoken to many other people before reaching out to me.

At the end of the call, they said, “We’re pleased to inform you that our team has reviewed everything, and we’ve selected you as one of 50 Magic Makers across America. In recognition, we’d like to bestow this award upon you and offer you a complimentary vacation to the Magic Kingdom. We’ll cover your airfare, hotel, and entry to all the parks for a week.”

They asked me what I thought about that, and I just had to sit there for a moment and think, “Is this happening?” Of course, it was. I felt incredibly grateful. I told them I would give more credit to the team at the youth center than to myself. No one person can do what we do there. It takes a team; it takes a community.

We’re fortunate to have amazing people at the youth center who work tirelessly daily to help these kids. Many do this work for substantially less than they could earn in private-sector jobs. So, yes, it was a humbling honour to receive. It also motivated me to work even harder to live up to that recognition at the youth center daily. We’re continuing to make Disney proud of their selection.

Jacobsen: Justin, do you have any final thoughts or feelings about today’s conversation?

Weller: Well, I want to thank you. We talked about the media, and we need good people dedicated to spending their time, energy, and passion on responsible journalism. It’s important to get the word out—not just about urgent things, but also the important things.

I’ve tried to keep those items in perspective this year. Urgent matters are often in your face, and you feel critical because they happen now. Sometimes, they are important, but we often sacrifice what’s truly important to address the urgent.

What you’re doing—keeping attention on the important things—is valuable. We need people doing that. We need them to do it in a trustworthy way that brings attention to issues that might otherwise go unnoticed. So, I appreciate that you’ve taken the time and believed I might have something important to say. It means a lot.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Justin. I appreciate the opportunity to have this conversation.

Weller: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

United Hatzalah, Faith, and Philanthropic Aims

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/31 (Unpublished)

 Mark Gerson is an entrepreneur, philanthropist, and best-selling author dedicated to bridging faith and culture. He co-founded United Hatzalah, Israel’s volunteer EMT network, and leads Torah Tuesdays with Eagles Wings, a global Christian organization supporting Israel. Mark is the author of the forthcoming book, God Was Right: How Modern Social Science Proves the Torah is True, and hosts The Rabbi’s Husband, featuring discussions with leaders like Tucker Carlson and Senator Cory Booker. He specializes in faith-driven leadership, social science validations of religious texts, and ethical business practices. United Hatzalah, with 8,000 volunteer EMTs, ensures rapid first response in emergencies, saving lives daily. African Mission Healthcare partners with Christian hospitals across 19 countries to provide essential medical care and infrastructure. Gerson’s upcoming book, “God Was Right,” argues that modern social science validates Torah ethics, promoting happier, healthier lives. Through his podcast “The Rabbi’s Husband,” he explores biblical inspirations across diverse leaders. Gerson emphasizes aligning faith with business for ethical, impactful leadership.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How has your experience co-founding United Hatzalah shaped views on the intersection of faith and philanthropy?

Mark Gerson: I have co-founded and Chair two charitable organizations — United Hatzalah of Israel and African Mission Healthcare. United Hatzalah is Israel’s system of crowd-sourced volunteer first response.  It is based on the fact that ambulances, even in the most advanced cities, will take an average of ten minutes to someone who calls 911.  This is no one’s fault — it is driven by the fact that ambulances are too big to be fast and too expensive to be ubiquitous. 

However, a victim of pre-hospital trauma — someone who calls 911, maybe someone who is choking, bleeding, having a heart attack, a stroke or is giving birth suddenly — does not need an ambulance immediately.  He needs a trained and equipped first responder at his side, ideally within 90 seconds. 

So we built, over 20 years, an organization that has 8,000 volunteer EMTs and paramedics — who are ready, at all times, to drop whatever they are doing (working, eating, sleeping, celebrating, whatever) to rush to someone in their immediate vicinity who is in need.  Each volunteer carries on him/her, at all times, a full medic kit that we provide — so that the volunteer is always ready for everything: from a car accident to a child drowning to someone choking to a heart attack to a woman giving birth suddenly. 

Because we are crowd-sourced — because we are able to locate the closest first responder and dispatch him to the scene immediately — we have the best response times in the world.  We respond to an average of 2,200 calls a day — and save dozens of lives every day. 

I co-founded African Mission Healthcare in 2010 with my great friend Dr. Jon Fielder, who has been a missionary physician in Africa for his career.  We partner with Christian missionary physicians at Christian hospitals in Africa to provide clinical care to the poor, enable training of physicians and other medical professionals, build infrastructure (from oxygen to physician housing) and do hospital administration.  We have 31 hospital partners in 19 countries. 

Many of the doctors we work with have devoted their entire lives to serving the poor — and doing so in medical conditions that are unimaginable to any physician in the West (operating without piped oxygen or consistent power, among other things) and living in conditions that I don’t think I could deal with for literally a weekend. They do so because they are inspired by their Christian faith to serve those who Jesus called in the Book of Matthew, “the least among us.” 

This intersection of faith and philanthropy, where both organizations sit, has taught my wife (a Rabbi) and I a great deal.  We have seen how faith can bring out genuine greatness in people — how a devoted Jew (regardless of how ritually observant) will be excited to rush from his Shabbat table, wake up in the middle of the night or dash around the corner to render care to someone he doesn’t know.  And this devotion (which is not unique to Jews in United Hatzalah; we have many Christian, Muslim and Druze volunteers as well) does not even stop there — there are so many instances where, like what happened last week, a volunteer will return to the home of a patient he took to the hospital to clean it up…so that the patient can recover in a clean and welcoming environment.  

And we have seen the same devotion with our Christian missionary partners (and now often friends) in Africa — we have seen how these people, who could be making excellent livings in the West, devote their entire lives to serving the poor due to their faith. 

The missionary physicians we know through African Mission Healthcare and the volunteers we know through United Hatzalah are the best people we know — the people we want our children to be like — and we are blessed to be able to be their philanthropic partner. 

And everyone who gives to either organization (or a similar organization — like Samaritan’s Purse) should regard themselves as partners — and never say (or think!): “It’s only money.”  Both the missionary physicians and the United Hatzalah volunteers have said that without the financial support of philanthropists — they’d be working with Band-Aides. 

Jacobsen: God Was Right: How Modern Social Science Proves the Torah is True is an upcoming book. What is social science affirming the ethics of the Torah?

Gerson:I have been studying the Torah every day for probably 15 years now — I start my day by running six miles on the treadmill, where I listen and watch Torah commentary, and then study subsequently.  The first thing I really understood about the Torah is what kind of book it is.  It is not a history book or a science book or a cookbook or even a lawbook — it is, as the Torah says of itself in Deuteronomy, a guidebook.  

As a guidebook, the Torah exists to help us live happier, healthier and more fulfilling lives — in the most practical ways.  As such, it makes hundreds of primarily psychological, social and political claims — about who we are and who we can and should be personally and communally.  Many are completely counter-intuitive — such as that we can choose to be anti-fragile, we can change our character (and who we are) by following one simple rule, our choice of clothing is existentially important (and for reasons that have nothing to do with modesty or temperature control), and on and on. 

For several thousand years, people have assessed the Torah using faith and experience.  Now, thanks to the advent of technology — we have science: specifically 21st century social science.  The 21st century social scientists, whose work ranges from obscure journals to best-sellers, have asked the same questions that the Biblical Author did.  

I realized that the claims of the Torah can now be validated or invalidated socially scientifically.  In the book, I go through the Torah claims on dozens of subjects — from diversity to routine to fear to future orientation.  It turns out that the Torah is absolutely right in all of its asserts; in other words, the Torah has now been proven true.

Many of the chapters also address where society and culture are in conjunction with the claims of the Torah and the findings of modern social science.  There, we are often going in the opposite directions— and I address that as well. 

Jacobsen: What lessons have The Rabbi’s Husband taught you, in hosting? 

Gerson: With the Rabbi’s Husband podcast, I did around 150 or so interviews with leaders from a variety of fields — Senators and NFL players, Pastors and Rabbis, physicians and Congressmen — about their favorite Biblical passage.  I learned just how the Bible — and often singular Biblical stories, laws and passages — can drive, intrigue and inspire a wide variety of people.  I think the most popular episode was Tucker Carlson’s — when we discussed whether Adam was right to trust Eve about the fruit, and its statement about gender relationships.

Jacobsen: How can faith and business align to create ethical and impactful leadership? Gerson: The Torah is the greatest guide for everything — including ethical business leadership.  Here are just a few things:

Leviticus 19: “You shall have honest scales and weights.”  A business leader who follows this principle will be sure to always have accurate accounting, fair billing, transparent performance metrics, honest advertising and clear claims about product risks and specifications.  

Deuteronomy 24: “You shall give him [your worker] his wage on his day and not let the sun set over it.” A business leader will always pay his workers immediately and completely. 

Leviticus 19 and 23: This commands that the landowner must leave a part of his field where the poor can reap.  A business leader following this principle will identify how he can allocate some of his products and services — in addition to money — for the benefit of the less fortunate.  And he will also do so with care for the dignity of the recipient — as this is why the poor are to reap themselves (rather than to get handouts from the landowner).

Jacobsen: What insights come out of Torah Tuesdays and Eagles Wings in interfaith collaboration?

I teach Torah every Tuesday at 12pm EST on Zoom to primarily Evangelicals — through the remarkable Christian Zionist and philo-Semitic parachurch ministry Eagles Wings.  We go through the Torah line by line, extracting the practical teachings and lessons for our daily lives.  I love the insights that the Pastor hosting the session (and the Pastor/hosts change each week) often bring from the New Testament and from their Christian experience.  And it is such a pleasure to be able to study the text in such depth.  We do about a book of the Torah (Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, Deuteronomy) every year.  If anyone wants to join, email me at mgerson@godwasright.com — and we’ll send you the Zoom link! 

Jacobsen: What is relevant and irrelevant in the interpretive frame from the Torah in navigating contemporary life? People orient the truths of religion and emphasize and de-emphasize in civilizational seasons. Ours seems no different.

Gerson: Great question — as everything in the Torah is completely relevant for navigating contemporary life.  The Torah is the guidebook for just that.  Every question, concern, challenge, opportunity that anyone has can be enlightened by the Torah in some profound and very helpful way.  That is what “God Was Right” is about! 

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Mark.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Global State of Optimism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/30 (Unpublished)

In 2023, LG Electronics launched a global survey to embody their “Life’s Good” philosophy centered on brave optimism. The survey revealed surprisingly high levels of optimism worldwide, countering prevalent pessimistic views. Utilizing these insights, LG initiated the “Optimism Your Feed” campaign on TikTok, collaborating with Professor Casey Fiesler to promote positive content through curated playlists that influence user feeds. Additionally, LG plans to integrate survey findings into future marketing and product innovations, emphasizing that optimism is a deliberate and active choice. Addressing Gen Z’s concerns, LG fosters informed optimism and aims to merge technology, optimism, and happiness through smart innovations and Affectionate Intelligence.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What inspired LG Electronics conduct a global survey on optimism?

LG Electronics: In 2023 LG wanted to tell the world what Life’s Good really meant. In LG’s eyes, Life’s Good means believing in the power of optimism. Not blind optimism, but brave optimism. Optimism that spurs you to want better from your life every day. But this isn’t just an empty brand gesture, it’s a real way of thinking at LG, and a fundamental belief of the company. With that in mind, LG wanted to understand better optimism around the world, which spurred the inaugural survey.

Jacobsen: What were the most surprising findings of the survey?

LG Electronics: The most surprising fact was that optimism levels around the world were, generally, high. It can often feel easy to feel pessimistic about the world and think the rest of the world must feel the same, but in actual fact people were positive and optimistic about their own futures and the world around them.

Jacobsen: How does LG plan to leverage the survey results to enhance consumer experiences if at all?

LG Electronics: In the journey to increase optimism, this is the launch point for LG to continue spreading optimism globally through immersive experiences and product usage. Our initial studies found that optimism was waning in the world. The results of this study have given us a number of insights into what gets in the way of people feeling more optimistic, and where it feels right to do so LG wants to help people feel more optimistic.

Jacobsen: Can you elaborate on the “Optimism your feed” campaign and the impact on social media users?

LG Electronics: Recognizing the intricate and often rigid nature of social media algorithms, LG collaborated with Professor Casey Fiesler, a luminary in social media research. Rather than attempting a direct overhaul of TikTok’s algorithm, the strategy was ingenious: ‘hack’ the existing system by signaling a preference for optimistic content. This subtle manipulation aimed to shift user feeds organically toward positivity.

LG introduced OYF, a revolutionary tool designed to perpetuate optimism within the digital landscape. This innovative campaign delivered a meticulously curated TikTok playlist teeming with positive, uplifting content.

Each interaction with the playlist—be it a view, like, share, or accumulated watch time—fed into the algorithm, incrementally tailoring users’ For You Playlist (FYPs) to reflect more hopeful and joyous content.

Jacobsen: How do entertainment and AI drive optimism among consumers

LG Electronics: Our survey found that over 50% of people surveyed were very, to extremely optimistic about AI in the future. This isn’t to say AI is driving their optimism, but that it is not a major barrier to them feeling optimistic.

Jacobsen: Given the findings about Gen Z’s concerns about optimism potentially being harmful, how does  LG address these concerns? I only agree insofar as one defines this as sole narrow form of pollyannish stance on happiness. But who truly believes that?

LG Electronics: LG’s point of view on optimism believes that it is a brave choice to see the optimistic values when the world pushes pessimism. The choice aspect of this is the most important part, particularly with the reservations Gen Z might have. You are right in that a polyannish approach to life is foolhardy, but that isn’t the optimism LG believes in. LG’s belief in optimism is that it is a choice, and requires an understanding of what is going on in the world, and a willingness to do something about it. Optimism is a brave choice, and an active choice.

Jacobsen: How does LG plan to incorporate findings from this survey into future marketing or product innovation?

LG Electronics: We plan on using the findings of this survey as a launching pad for future campaigns. LG deeply believes in optimism, and this survey gives us many reasons people don’t feel optimistic. The trick is finding authentic places where LG can help.

Jacobsen: What are LG’s next steps in exploring the intersection of technology, optimism, and happiness?

LG Electronics: Everything LG does is in service of making people believe that ‘Life’s Good’. We’re constantly exploring how to make life better with intuitive, smart innovations. Our belief that AI should be more human is why it’s called Affectionate Intelligence at LG. And we’re excited to see how all these elements come together in the future.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ontario Nurses’ Association in Negotiations

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/30 (Unpublished)

Erin Ariss is a registered nurse and the Provincial President of the Ontario Nurses’ Association (ONA). With decades of emergency department experience, she is a dedicated advocate for nurses and public health care. Ariss has been instrumental in addressing issues such as access to personal protective equipment during the pandemic and promoting workplace safety. The Ontario Nurses’ Association (ONA) and the Ontario Hospital Association (OHA) are in contract negotiations under a nondisclosure agreement, but their proposals are starkly opposed. ONA prioritizes improved RN staffing ratios to address overwhelming workloads, enhance patient care, and reduce nurse attrition. Ontario has the worst RN-to-population ratio in Canada, leading to ER closures and delays. ONA warns that hospital CEOs’ proposals could trigger a mass nurse exodus. The negotiations are crucial as ONA seeks an agreement rather than arbitration, which has determined contracts for 14 years. ONA questions the origins of OHA’s far-reaching proposals, raising broader concerns.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are the main issues with the current contract negotiations between the Ontario Nurses’ Association (ONA) and the Ontario Hospital Association (OHA)?

Erin Ariss: We cannot get specific as both the OHA and ONA are negotiating under a nondisclosure agreement. However, what we can say is that our two organizations have come to the table with proposals that couldn’t be more opposite.

Jacobsen: Why are RN staffing ratios a top priority for front-line members of ONA?

Ariss: The number-one priority of our members is better workloads that would allow them to provide the best-quality patient care they can. The impossibly heavy workloads they have experienced for years now have taken a large toll on them, and our patients are not receiving the best care that they both need and deserve because of time constraints. Nurse staffing ratios have been introduced elsewhere and have been shown to reduce the rates of complications and death in patients, and resulted in lower attrition rates for nurses. Overall they are a cost savings. They are win-win.

Jacobsen: How does ONA President Erin Ariss characterize the understaffing in public hospitals?

Ariss: Ontario’s understaffing is the worst in Canada. An annual report (CIHI) shows Ontario has consistently had the worst RN-to-population ratio in the country for almost a decade. That has led to ER closures, delays in care, hallway medicine and cancelled surgeries.

Jacobsen: What might be the potential consequences based on the proposals of hospital CEOs?

Ariss: It’s not an exaggeration to say the proposals put forward by hospital CEOs would result in an exodus of nurses and health-care professionals from our hospitals across the province. It will make things much, much worse. 

Jacobsen: Is this similar to the consequences to proposals from the Ford government)?

Ariss: We do not bargain with the government in the hospital sector. But the proposals from the OHA are so far-reaching, we question where they came from.

Jacobsen: Why is this round of negotiations significant given the last negotiation happening 14 years ago?

Ariss: The last negotiation happened two years ago. That ended in arbitration, as did every other round of negotiations for the past 14 years. ONA is pushing for the OHA to reach an agreement for its 60,000+ nurses and health-care professionals in negotiations, NOT send the matter to an arbitrator again, who will impose a contract.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Erin.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dominique Simeone on the International Esperanto Movement

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/29

Dominique Simeone is a committed advocate for the Esperanto movement and a passionate freethinker. Born in Italy, Simeone’s early exposure to multiple languages (Italian, French, German, Flemish, and English) laid the groundwork for a life dedicated to linguistic exploration. Their involvement with organizations such as SAT-Amikaro reflects a conviction that Esperanto fosters global communication and understanding. Simeone’s belief in a non-imperialist approach to language underscores a desire to bring people together—culturally and ideologically—through inclusive dialogue. Simeone recounts discovering Esperanto through a radio broadcast in Paris and learning it quickly, requiring just 200 hours for proficiency. She details political movements, language imperialism, and Esperanto’s role as a gateway language. Simeone contrasts its straightforward rules with more complex tongues like French and English. China’s openness is noted, while France’s early embrace ended in 1923. Simeone affirms Esperanto’s non-imperialist value for diverse groups, stressing its freethinking ethos and capacity for broad global communication.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dominique Semion. We’re going to discuss Esperanto. As I mentioned in our earlier correspondence, I have not researched Esperanto as much as I would have liked intellectually, but I find it a fascinating subject for those unfamiliar with it.

Esperanto is the most widely spoken constructed international auxiliary language, created in 1887 by Dr. L. L. Zamenhof to promote global understanding and unity through a neutral, easy-to-learn linguistic platform. On that note, how did you first encounter Esperanto? What were your initial thoughts when you came across it?

Dominique Simeone: I was near Paris on a Friday when I heard a radio broadcast by an artist discussing Esperanto. That’s how I first started learning about Esperanto. Afterward, I went to Paris to join an association where I could formally study the language.

Jacobsen: What was your experience like learning the language?

Dominique: Oh, it was really simple. I lived with my mother then and used quite an individualistic method. I would read texts and learn a large number of words—around one hundred per lesson, for example.

I built a strong vocabulary to develop a deep understanding of the language and communicate effectively with others.

Jacobsen: How did conversations in Esperanto compare to conversations in, for example, Parisian French?

Dominique: Oh, it felt natural when speaking with other Esperantists. You mentioned that Dr. Zamenhof envisioned Esperanto as a neutral, international language. Still, I was involved in the political movement within Esperanto. We discussed political issues with French Esperantists both within and outside the Esperanto movement. We also engaged with people outside the movement to discuss political problems and work on resolving organizational challenges.

In Paris, I served as president of SAT-Amikaro, the French branch of the World Non-National Association. During our meetings, we discussed issues such as the association’s finances, publicity, and general management, which were crucial to maintaining the organization’s effectiveness.

Jacobsen: What were the requirements for being part of the political movement around Esperanto? What were the goals and vision of the political movement among Esperantists?

Dominique: It depends. For example, in SAT, you have anarchists, communists, and socialists—they’re all on the left side of the political spectrum.

But you have all kinds of groups. For example, in a group, you might find Maoists or Christians, as well as people from those movements who agree with you, if you see what I mean. However, we act as part of the political movement.

For instance, my friends in the communist group promote Esperanto within the Communist Party. That’s the aim of their group. I, on the other hand, act in the broader international movement.

I also connect with freethinkers worldwide who support Esperanto and are willing to promote the language within their respective groups.

Jacobsen: How long would it take to learn Esperanto if someone studied it through a structured course and progressed from beginner to fluency?

Dominique: You need about 200 hours to achieve a fairly good level in Esperanto.

Jacobsen: That’s not bad.

Dominique: By comparison, it takes approximately 2,000 hours for French or English to reach the same level.

Jacobsen: What makes Esperanto so efficient for teaching and learning? If it’s so efficient, why do many people resist learning it?

Dominique: Many people are studying Esperanto and attending conferences about it. However, they tend to focus on their own lives and adopt an individualistic approach to living.

When you tell them, “If you learn this language, you’ll be able to connect with thousands of people,” they often feel hesitant or even afraid.

Additionally, there’s linguistic imperialism in most countries. This applies to English, French, and other dominant languages. These languages are imposed on others, and there’s resistance to accepting another language, like Esperanto, on an equal footing.

For example, Esperanto was taught in schools and universities in France at the beginning of the 20th century. However, in 1923, a law introduced by Léon Bérard removed Esperanto from the educational system. That policy still influences people’s attitudes toward Esperanto in France today.

Jacobsen: Which cultures are most willing to embrace Esperanto, teach it, and integrate it into their cultural framework?

Dominique: It’s difficult to say, but China stands out.

In China, there’s a large community of Esperantists. You can learn Esperanto in primary schools and universities.

Jacobsen: Do people in China receive subsidies, bursaries, grants, or scholarships to learn Esperanto? Or do they have to pay out of pocket?

Dominique: Ah, yes, okay. That I don’t know.

I know that at the university level, you likely pay tuition fees just as you would at universities in France. However, I am aware that some university courses in Esperanto are available. These lessons cover various subjects taught in Esperanto, such as commerce, trade, and other topics.

Jacobsen: Have there been cases where Esperanto was coerced or forced onto people in the way English or French have been during the height of French and British imperialism? In conversations about anti-imperialism and anti-colonialism, we often discuss how languages like English or French were forced onto people. Sometimes, people were made to give up their native languages, or economic incentives were used to make English or French seem unavoidable.

Over time, English and French became lingua franca—languages of trade, economics, and international politics. While organizations like the United Nations use translators to ensure accessibility, these major languages still dominate globally.

Have there been any cases where Esperanto has been used similarly—not by its founders’ intentions but perhaps by overzealous advocates who tried to export it coercively?

Dominique: For some people, one of the projects for Esperanto was to impose it at the head of organizations or even nations. However, the main focus now seems to be different. For example, in Paderborn, Germany, Esperanto is promoted as a “gateway language” to help people learn other languages.

So, Esperanto is no longer just Esperanto by itself; it’s presented as a tool to facilitate relationships between people. For instance, it can make it easier for someone to learn Arabic or other challenging languages.

Jacobsen: For example, Esperanto takes about 200 hours to achieve proficiency, while English takes roughly 2,000 hours to reach a similar level. Which language takes the longest to master, and why?

Dominique: I’m not a language specialist, but I believe Esperanto is easier because its grammar is very simple. For example, the stress is always on the penultimate syllable, and there are only about 17 grammatical rules. This simplicity allows learners to make significant progress quickly.

In contrast, languages like French are much harder to learn. French has many rules and exceptions, which make it difficult to assimilate the language quickly.

Jacobsen: Have any adaptations to Esperanto made it more efficient over time?

The language’s original structure was neutral and simplified, as it was a constructed language rather than an evolved one. However, like many systems in linguistics—such as Noam Chomsky’s grammar framework—adjustments often occur over time. Did Esperanto undergo similar changes, or has it remained faithful to its design from the late 1800s?

Dominique: The structure of Esperanto’s grammar was fixed in 1905 during the first Congress. The rules have not changed since then, and Esperanto linguists believe that the grammar does not need modifications now or in the future.

Jacobsen: How many people speak Esperanto now? For example, in France. That might be a more relevant question.

Dominique: In France, there may be 2,000 to 5,000 people.

Jacobsen: Are there annual conferences, events, or symposiums for Esperanto speakers?

Dominique: I think there’s some sort of Esperanto meeting happening every day. However, there are also larger, organized events in various countries.

For example, in France, Espéranto-France, which is part of the neutral movement, holds a congress once a year. Similarly, SAT-Amikaro and SAT both organize annual congresses.

Additionally, most countries have similar goals and hold their annual congresses. The largest organization in the neutral movement, UEA (Universala Esperanto-Asocio), hosts a global congress each year in a different country. This is the biggest Esperanto event, with around 2,000 attendees and representation from approximately 65 languages.

Jacobsen: In developmental psychology, it’s often said that language learning becomes significantly harder after age 16, particularly when aiming for native-like fluency.

Does this barrier exist for Esperanto, or is it an exception to this general rule?

Dominique: The key to learning any language is having a foundational level of education. Even people who are 30 or 40 years old can still learn Esperanto well.

If someone has had formal schooling and a basic educational level, there’s no problem learning Esperanto at any age. It’s a language that can be acquired at any stage of life.

Jacobsen: If you could go back and change your educational history, would you still learn French first, or would you prefer to learn Esperanto first?

Dominique: No, I learned French, but my first language was Italian because I was born in Italy.

Later, I attended a European school, where I learned German. I also picked up Flemish by speaking with people on the streets. After that, I learned English.

Jacobsen: Many multilingual individuals often say they feel like a slightly different person when they speak each language, as though each language brings out a different aspect of their personality.

Do you experience this? Does a different version of yourself emerge when speaking Esperanto than Italian, Flemish, French, or English?

Jacobsen:When you speak Esperanto, do you feel like a different version of yourself compared to when you speak other languages?

Dominique: Yes, but I am part of the international and constructed language movement when I speak Esperanto. However, I remain a freethinker regardless of the language I am speaking.

For instance, I am a freethinker in French, Flemish, and Italian. The language itself is a tool—it’s something I use—but it doesn’t change who I am. No matter the language I speak, I remain a freethinker.

Jacobsen: What critical questions about Esperanto aren’t asked but should be asked in good faith to help people better understand the language and decide whether they should learn it?

Dominique: Esperanto could greatly benefit people who work in associations, factories, or the economic sector.

The language allows them to connect with others worldwide—for instance, in countries like China or Russia. Through Esperanto, they can exchange ideas and discuss work-related matters across borders.

It is also an excellent way to improve one’s understanding of other languages, especially European ones. It acts as a bridge, facilitating better communication and relationships across different cultures.

Jacobsen: We’re running short on time. How can people get involved with Esperanto? Why should it interest fellow freethinkers—whether they’re humanists, atheists, agnostics, or advocates of free speech and social justice?

Dominique: Yes, there’s a strong case for Esperanto. Historically, in the 18th and 19th centuries, English was often considered the language of freethinkers, especially as England led the world in many areas at the time.

But now, if you want to connect globally—say, with people in China or South Korea—Esperanto can be incredibly useful. For example, I once contacted a friend in South Korea to request a journal article. He didn’t speak French or English, but he did speak Esperanto.

The article was written in Esperanto first and then translated into French. This demonstrates how Esperanto can create meaningful connections worldwide without relying on dominant or imperialist languages.

Using Esperanto offers a neutral, non-imperialist way to foster relationships and promote communication globally. While you could use French or English, Esperanto provides a more egalitarian alternative.

Jacobsen: Simeone, thank you very much for your time today. 

Dominique: Yes, thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Andrew Christensen on Integrative Behavioural Couple Therapy

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/28

Andrew Christensen is Distinguished Research Professor of Psychology at the University of California, Los Angeles (UCLA). At UCLA, he conducts research on couple conflict and couples therapy and teaches couple therapy. He is a licensed clinical psychologist in the state of California and has a part-time private practice devoted to couples counseling and therapy. Dr. Christensen is devoted to the advancement of evidence-based treatments for couples in distress. Along with the late Neil S. Jacobson, he developed Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy (IBCT), an empirically supported treatment for couples. Since 1993, he has been studying the effectiveness of couple therapy, especially IBCT, usually with federal grant support. In 2010, the US Department of Veteran’s Affairs adopted IBCT as one of its evidence-based treatments for couples.  Since then Christensen has been training VA therapists in IBCT and evaluating the impact of this therapy in the VA. Along with Neil Jacobson and Brian Doss, Christensen wrote a self-help book for couples based on IBCT: Reconcilable Differences (translated into French, Greek, Korean, Italian, Polish, and Portuguese). He also wrote a book for therapists on IBCT: Acceptance and Change in Couple Therapy (translated into Korean), which was recently revised and titled Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy. With Brian Doss of the University of Miami, he developed an online intervention for couples: OurRelationship (available in English and Spanish). Christensen discussed his co-development of Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy (IBCT) with the late Dr. Neil S. Jacobson. Created in the 1990s to address limitations of traditional Behavioral Couple Therapy, IBCT emphasizes emotional acceptance and evocative change over rigid, rule-governed strategies. It helps couples navigate conflicts like demand-withdraw dynamics while fostering mutual engagement and emotional safety. Christensen highlighted IBCT’s effectiveness, demonstrated through rigorous studies, including a five-year follow-up, and its adoption by the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs. He also discussed IBCT-inspired innovations, like the OurRelationship online program, and the therapy’s emphasis on safety and self-reflection. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Andrew Christensen, a distinguished research professor of psychology at the University of California, Los Angeles (UCLA), specializing in clinical psychology. Christensendiscussed Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy (IBCT), which was co-developed with the late Dr. Neil S. Jacobson. What inspired the development of this new methodology? How did it evolve in collaboration with Dr. Jacobson? 

Dr. Andrew Christensen: Neil and I began developing IBCT in the early 1990s because of the limitations of earlier approaches to helping couples. We were trained in behavioural couple therapy (BCT), also called behavioural marital therapy. Over time, the term was updated to encompass all types of romantic couples, whether married or not. While BCT was effective for some couples, many did not benefit significantly. Additionally, even among those who experienced positive outcomes, there was often a risk of relapse.

We developed IBCT to address these shortcomings in what was, at the time, the most widely practiced and empirically supported treatment for couples: Behavioral Couple Therapy (BCT). BCT encourages positive change by teaching couples to communicate better and solve problems more effectively. However, it lacked an important element: emotional acceptance.

There are limits to how much individuals are willing or able to change.. Certain aspects of a person’s character are deeply ingrained and shaped by genetics and life experiences. Interestingly, some traits we later wish our partners would change are often the same qualities that initially attracted us to them.

For instance, consider a couple we’ll call Jack and Jill. Jack might have been drawn to Jill’s vibrant, emotional energy—her ability to feel deeply and express herself passionately brought excitement to their relationship. Meanwhile, Jill might have been attracted to Jack’s calm, steady demeanor, which provided stability. However, as time passes, Jack might feel overwhelmed by Jill’s emotional fluctuations. At the same time, Jill might grow frustrated with Jack’s perceived lack of enthusiasm or spontaneity. This scenario highlights how positive traits can also have a downside. Often, we are drawn to our partner’s strengths but later wish they would change the challenges associated with those traits.

This understanding led us to focus on emotional acceptance as a cornerstone of IBCT. Some characteristics in a partner are unlikely to change substantially, especially not quickly or dramatically. While change is possible over time, emotional acceptance is vital for addressing those enduring aspects of a partner’s personality. This focus on acceptance became a defining feature of IBCT.

Another important factor was the approach to change. Traditional BCT relied on a “rule-governed” approach, which involved teaching couples specific communication techniques and providing guidelines for effective interaction. For example, couples might be instructed to use “I” statements to express their feelings more constructively.

So rather than saying, “You always do this,” you say, “I feel X when you do this particular Y.” Or, rules about listening. For example, you listen and don’t interrupt your partner. Before sharing your piece, you summarize what your partner has said so they know you’ve understood them, even if you don’t agree. These are the kinds of communication rules we taught, along with rules for problem-solving. We also encouraged specific behaviours.

We would give assignments to do positive things for each other. This is a rule-governed approach to change, which can be helpful. However, integrative behavioural couple therapy (IBCT) incorporates those strategies while introducing completely different ones. To explain that, let me step back and discuss the challenges of rule-governed change.

For instance, partners can be sensitive to whether something feels genuine. A common complaint in couples is, “You’re not affectionate enough,” or “I want you to be more sexual with me,” or “I want you to be more complimentary,” or “I want you to be more interested in what’s going on with me.” These desires are difficult to address through rule-governed behaviour. Assigning couples to have sex twice a week, kiss every night, or offer a positive comment daily—whether they feel it or not—often backfires. Partners may resist doing these things or feel that even if the other complies, it’s not heartfelt but rather done because the therapist or the rules dictated it.

Part of the joy in relationships comes from feeling that our partner genuinely wants to be affectionate, sexual, or complimentary. A heartfelt apology or compliment feels meaningful, while a mechanical gesture often feels hollow or hurtful. These issues highlight the limitations of rule-governed behaviour.

To address this, we focus on a type of behaviour change that is more evocative than deliberate. Deliberate change involves intentional, direct efforts, such as assignments or learning communication techniques, where the therapist essentially says, “Here’s how to do it right—now go do it.” In contrast, evocative change aims to shift the emotional climate in the room, fostering more genuine positive change.

We help couples reduce defensiveness and openly discuss their feelings and vulnerabilities. However, this only works when both partners feel emotionally safe—safe enough to admit limitations without fear of criticism or attack. For example, suppose one partner acknowledges a personal flaw. In that case, they need reassurance that the other won’t use it as ammunition against them.

Creating this emotional climate isn’t as straightforward as giving assignments. Still, it allows couples to express thoughts and feelings they may have never shared—or even fully recognized—before. Sometimes, a partner’s emotions are filtered through a single lens, such as anger. They might express anger instead of revealing deeper feelings of hurt or disappointment.

By fostering a safe and open environment, the therapist can help uncover and address these underlying emotions, leading to more genuine connection and understanding between partners.

Jacobsen: You’ve mentioned the importance of emotional acceptance and evocative change. Could you explain how these elements combine in Integrative Behavioral Couple Therapy (IBCT)?

Christensen: Certainly, often, in couples, you hear their anger and resentment. However,  underlying that anger may be disappointment or hurt that hasn’t been expressed. We can create an environment where partners feel safe to discuss these deeper emotions. In that case, it opens the door to more honest and empathetic discussions. This can lead to evocative change, where partners soften toward each other, treat each other with more tenderness, and shift the emotional climate of their relationship. This, in turn, can spontaneously lead to greater affection and emotional closeness.

To summarize, these are the two key innovations IBCT brings compared to traditional Behavioral Couple Therapy (BCT): an emphasis on emotional acceptance and evocative change strategies. Traditional BCT and Cognitive Behavioral Couple Therapy focused primarily on direct, intentional, and rule-governed change. IBCT builds on that foundation with these additional elements, creating a more comprehensive and flexible approach.

Once we developed IBCT, we secured federal grants to conduct rigorous research. First, we completed a pilot study, followed by a large clinical trial conducted at UCLA and the University of Washington, where Neil Jacobson was based. These studies demonstrated the effectiveness of IBCT, not only in the short term but also in the long term. We conducted the longest follow-up study of a major clinical trial in couple therapy, spanning five years. The evidence strongly supports the benefits of IBCT for couples.

In 2010, the U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs adopted IBCT as one of its evidence-based treatments for couple distress. Since then, I have consulted with the VA and helped train therapists in IBCT for about 15 years.

IBCT was the foundation for an online program called OurRelationship (ourrelationship.com), developed under the leadership of Dr. Brian Doss, a professor at the University of Miami but with my assistance. This program was designed to make IBCT principles accessible to more couples cost-effectively. The online program has been tested through multiple randomized clinical trials and has proven effective in improving relationships. It can be done entirely self-guided or with the support of a relationship coach. Working with a coach enhances effectiveness and increases the likelihood of completing the program.

The program consists of 6 to 8 hours of activities organized into three phases: OU, and R, corresponding to ObservationUnderstanding, and Response—the acronym OUR.

  1. O Phase (Observation): In this phase, partners work individually to complete empirically supported questionnaires and receive personalized feedback about their relationship. They identify one or two core issues that need attention. At the end of this phase, partners come together, guided by the program, to share what they’ve learned.
  2. U Phase (Understanding): Partners again work individually to explore why the identified core issue/s are problematic for their relationship. This phase involves a deeper analysis of the challenges from both perspectives, which we call the DEEP analysis. Specifically, the programs helps partners identify natural Differences between them that contribute to the problem, Emotional sensitivities in each that add emotional fuel to the problem, External stressors that make dealing with any problem more complicated, and finally, the Pattern of interaction in which they get stuck, which doesn’t solve the problem and often exacerbates it. After the partners complete this DEEP analysis of the problem,, the program facilitates partners’ sharing of their findings with each other.
  3. R Phase (Response): In the final phase, partners explore ways they and their partners can make changes to address the core issues. The program guides them through creating a plan for these changes, which they share.

The program has undergone clinical trials sponsored by the Administration for Children and Families in the United States. It has shown effectiveness even at a one-year follow-up. It provides couples a structured yet flexible way to work through challenges and strengthen their relationship.

Jacobsen: I understand that the U.S. military has also adopted the OurRelationship program. Could you elaborate on its use among active-duty personnel and any challenges you’ve observed during the therapeutic process?

Christensen: The U.S. military has adopted OurRelationship program, which is now available to all active-duty personnel. The military recognizes that deployments and military life can create significant stressors on relationships. OurRelationship serves as an effective intervention for couples because it can be completed  online  with or without a coach, and thus provides a cost-effective way to help couples improve their relationships.

So, Scott, that’s an overview of IBCT and OurRelationship. I realize I’ve been talking at length—hopefully, not too much! Two things come to mind regarding your question about challenges. First, there are  clients that are not appropriate for IBCT.. Second, there are couples that present challenges in conducting IBCT. .

Jacobsen: What are some of the couples that are not appropriate for IBCT?

Christensen:. One common issue is when the partners have different agendas for the relationship. For example, if one partner wants to  leave the relationship while the other wants to work on it, it creates an obvious challenge.  IBCT is for couples who want to improve their relationship, even if they question whether it can be improved.  IBCT is not separation therapy or divorce therapy.

There are also exclusion criteria for IBCT. One key exclusion is intimate partner violence (IPV). If there is a level of IPV that poses a danger, the couple is not ready for IBCT. Couple therapy can be intense and evoke strong emotions, and we never want to contribute to violence inadvertently. As part of the assessment phase in IBCT, we evaluate the level of IPV and make a determination of whether it is safe to work with the couple..

It is possible to work with couples experiencing low-level violence if both partners are committed to ending the violence and taking responsibility for their actions. However, if there are dangerous levels of violence, the couple must address that issue first before entering therapy.

Other exclusion criteria include situations where one partner is actively suicidal or psychotic, as these require individual treatment before couple therapy can be effective.

Jacobsen: Apart from exclusion criteria, what challenges do you encounter with suitable couples for IBCT?

Christensen: High-conflict couples are a common challenge. When these couples start discussing their problems, the conversation can quickly escalate into an argument. Therapy should never devolve into a screaming match. In such cases, IBCT therapists must be directive to ensure the environment remains safe and that both partners have an opportunity to speak. If things escalate, the therapist may choose to see each partner individually until they calm down and can be brought back together.

Another challenge is when one partner insists that the primary problem lies with the other and that they have little or no role in the issues. Despite our efforts to broaden their perspective, this mindset can hinder progress. For therapy to succeed, both partners must recognize their roles in the relationship dynamics and be open to change.

These are just a few of the challenges we face, but IBCT is designed to work effectively even with these difficulties, as long as the couple is willing to engage in the process.

Jacobsen: Conflict in therapeutic sessions can sometimes seem influenced by gender dynamics. Are there any tendencies or patterns you’ve observed that are linked to gender? Additionally, do these dynamics differ in same-sex relationships, or do the patterns remain consistent regardless of gender?

Christensen: Yes, this is an important question. Alongside my work developing and studying couple therapy, I’ve long been interested in conflict patterns and have published extensively on this topic. A very common dynamic we see is the demand-withdraw pattern. In this pattern, one partner takes on the demanding or pursuing role—wanting to talk about issues and often being more critical—while the other partner assumes the withdrawing or shutting down role, avoiding the discussion altogether.

This pattern is prevalent in both heterosexual and same-sex couples. However, in heterosexual couples, it often has a gender linkage: men are more likely to adopt the withdrawal role, while women are more likely to take on the demand role. That said, these roles can be reversed depending on the context of the conflict. For example, in a young heterosexual couple, the man might take on a demanding role in matters related to sexual intimacy. At the same time, the woman may adopt the withdrawal role. Conversely, she might take on the role of demand in other areas of the relationship while he takes on the withdrawal role.

We’ve conducted cross-cultural studies showing that this gendered pattern also appears in other cultures, indicating that it’s not just a Western phenomenon. However, in same-sex couples, while the demand-withdraw pattern exists, it’s not gendered by definition. It simply reflects how couples, regardless of gender, navigate certain conflicts.

Jacobsen: Are there other common couple dynamics patterns similar to the demand-withdraw pattern?

Christensen: Absolutely. While the demand-withdraw pattern is one of the most frequently observed, it’s not the only one. Another common pattern is when both partners adopt a move-against stance, where they are both argumentative, critical, and escalating conflicts. This can lead to a cycle of mutual criticism and hostility.

On the other end of the spectrum, there’s a mutual withdrawal pattern, where both partners shut down emotionally and avoid engagement. This often results in awkward silences and unresolved tension. While less common than the other patterns, it’s still a significant challenge when it occurs.

There are also variations of these patterns. For instance, some couples exhibit what we call an anxious pursuit and withdrawal pattern. In this dynamic, one partner, often driven by anxiety about the relationship or fear of infidelity, becomes intrusive, asking questions like, “Where were you?” or “Who were you talking to?” Feeling overwhelmed by this pursuit, the other partner withdraws further, exacerbating the cycle. This is similar to the demand-withdraw pattern but with a more anxious, less confrontational pursuit.

What’s interesting about these patterns is how they vary in complexity. While I’m describing them in somewhat simplified terms here, the reality is that these dynamics often overlap and shift depending on the context of the relationship and the specific issues the couple is facing. In IBCT, we focus on helping couples identify these patterns and work toward more constructive engagement.

Jacobsen: Do you find that addressing these patterns early in therapy helps reduce session resistance or conflict?

Christensen: Yes, absolutely. One of the core principles of IBCT is helping partners see that relationship problems are co-created. This doesn’t mean they’re equally responsible—one partner might play a larger role than the other (although it is fruitless for a couple to argue about who has the larger role)—but it does mean that problems are inherently relational and best resolved by working together. Helping couples recognize this often reduces resistance and fosters a sense of shared responsibility.

Jacobsen: You mentioned earlier how patterns can shift during conflicts. How do these dynamics evolve or escalate during therapy sessions?

Christensen: Certainly, you may have a couple where one partner demands and the other withdraws. However, this dynamic can escalate. For example, the withdrawing partner may eventually blow up, shifting into a demanding role. In contrast, the previously demanding partner moves to withdraw or shut down. After such an escalation, both partners may withdraw entirely for a time. These patterns can develop and shift depending on the context and intensity of the conflict. I hope that explanation clarifies things.

Jacobsen: It does. Thank you. What about patterns you observe near the end of therapy? For instance, when predefined goals have been met, and the couple achieves a healthier homeostasis in their relationship, perhaps only requiring occasional checkups, what typically characterizes that stage?

Christensen: In IBCT, the goal is mutual, open, and constructive engagement. By the time we’re approaching termination, partners can typically share their thoughts and feelings openly while being curious and receptive to their partner’s perspective. The emotional tension that initially brought them to therapy has significantly diminished.

Often, a clear sign that therapy is nearing its end is when a couple no longer has significant issues to address. For example, I had a session just yesterday with a couple. We might consider termination soon because they had nothing substantial to discuss. They had a good couple of weeks, managed their issues independently, and didn’t feel the need to bring anything major to therapy.

That’s an encouraging sign. Therapy shouldn’t devolve into casual discussions about movies or unrelated topics. When couples consistently report they’re handling challenges independently, and we can observe that pattern over several weeks, it’s a good indicator that they’re ready to move forward without regular sessions.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. Given our time constraints, my last question is this: In what situations would you recommend that couples either not continue their relationship or delay entering one until certain relational or psychological patterns are resolved?

Christensen: The primary criterion for us in IBCT is safety, particularly physical safety. Unfortunately, a significant percentage of distressed couples experience some level of physical violence. Ensuring physical safety is paramount in couple therapy. Suppose a couple cannot maintain a physically safe relationship. In that case, I recommend they pause or end the relationship, as it’s too dangerous to continue without first addressing this issue.

While physical safety is non-negotiable, emotional safety is more nuanced. Even in the best relationships, there are times when partners may not feel entirely emotionally safe—for example, when bringing up a sensitive topic or expressing criticism about something a partner or their family member did. Emotional safety is more subjective and situational. In therapy, part of our work is to help couples develop greater emotional safety over time. Still, it’s rarely a binary issue like physical safety.

If physical violence is present and unresolved, however, the couple must prioritize safety before continuing the relationship or therapy.

Jacobsen: Apart from dangerous situations for the couple, how does IBCT approach the decision to end a relationship? Do you offer guidance, or is it more about helping clients reach conclusions?

Christensen: The decision to end a relationship is, ultimately, an existential decision. In IBCT, we don’t advise couples to stay together or separate because that responsibility lies with them. It’s a deeply personal decision that each partner must make for themselves. That said, we can discuss the pros and cons with them and reference what the literature suggests.

For instance, let me give you an example, Scott. Imagine one partner wants to leave the relationship because it’s no longer satisfying. They’ve tried therapy but feel they’re not improving enough and believe leaving is the best option. Meanwhile, the other partner desperately wants to save the relationship. They might cite various arguments—such as the potential impact on children—to justify staying together. One might say, “It’ll be better for the children if we stay together,” or, “Leaving would mean abandoning the family.”

Jacobsen: What’s IBCT’s stance in such situations?

Christensen: We emphasize that leaving or staying is their decision—not ours. Unless the relationship is harmful or dangerous to one or both partners, we don’t take responsibility for advising them to separate or remain together. Our role is to provide insights, help them explore the implications of their decision, and support their process of reflection. As to the particular question of the impact on the kids, we might explain that the nature of parental relationship is paramount in terms of the children’s functioning.  Parents can separate or divorce and have a functional co-parenting relationship or a horrible co-parenting relationships; similarly, the couple can remain together and have a good or bad co-parenting relationship.  What is particularly harmful is when there is violence between the parents (and between parent and child) and when parents try to ally with the children against the other parent so the child feels pulled between the two and pressed to see one parent as the good guy and the other as the bad guy.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Dr. Christensen, for sharing your expertise today. I appreciate your time and insights.

Christensen: You’re welcome, Scott. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

How can you keep your skin healthy?

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/27 (Unpublished)

Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya, MD, PhD, is a dermatologist with 20 years of skincare, cosmetic procedures, and dermatological research expertise. She specializes in evidence-based treatments, including sunscreen, retinol, and antioxidants, while addressing conditions like acne, rosacea, and aging skin. Passionate about patient education, she emphasizes the importance of lifestyle, diet, and personalized care. Dr. Kazlouskaya is also experienced in advanced therapies like exosomes, microneedling, and lasers, making her a trusted authority in modern dermatology. Kazlouskaya discussed effective skincare, focusing on essentials like sunscreen, retinol, and vitamin C while cautioning against overusing active ingredients or following unproven trends like beef tallow or period blood in skincare. Kazlouskaya highlighted the role of diet and lifestyle in skin health, including the impact of insulin resistance and treatments like Ozempic. She explained different patient demographics, from cost-insensitive individuals seeking comprehensive treatments to those resistant to interventions like injections. They concluded by planning future discussions on hair, nails, and advanced skincare procedures.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya, MD, PhD. We will discuss dermatology, in which she has 20 years of expertise. Let’s start on a positive note by focusing on effective techniques and technologies that are not.

So, what are people doing right regarding skin health and skincare?

Dr. Viktoryia Kazlouskaya: Before we begin, may I ask a quick question? Are we focusing on home skincare or discussing skincare and procedures in general?

Jacobsen: Let’s focus on home skincare first. We can move on to specialties once we’ve established that as a foundation.

Kazlouskaya: The number one mistake people make is using too many products. Skincare is a multi-billion-dollar industry, and it is ubiquitous. It’s on social media and the internet; every dermatologist seems to be developing their products. This encourages people to overuse, overpurchase, and overconsume. Unfortunately, this is harmful, as it can lead to serious consequences.

A small study published in dermatology literature showed that overusing too many active ingredients can make the skin more sensitive and more prone to conditions like acne and rosacea. This overuse can worsen these issues, damage the skin barrier, and make the skin more vulnerable overall.

So that’s the first point. The second issue related to the first is that very young people unnecessarily use too many active ingredients. For example, if someone does not have acne, there is no need to start using retinol during their teenage years. Doing so can damage the skin barrier and lead to dryness.

The same goes for exfoliation, particularly with acids. Overuse of exfoliating acids is completely unnecessary and can harm the skin.

The third point is that people don’t always need to spend much on skincare. Affordable options often work just as well as expensive ones. Of course, this isn’t always true—there are pricier products with unique formulations that can be more effective—but it is not universally the case.

Typically, over-the-counter products from well-known brands are not particularly helpful and are often overpriced. Many of these products contain excessive fragrances and botanical extracts, which can be irritating. On the other hand, some medical-grade products can be excellent, albeit more expensive.

Overall, however, there is usually no need to overspend. Studies have shown that some inexpensive moisturizers are less irritating because they contain fewer ingredients, reducing the risk of irritation. This information is backed by peer-reviewed research. If needed, I can provide links to these studies for reference.

Jacobsen: Regarding the cost differences between name-brand products and more affordable options with fewer fragrances and additives, are there any name-brand products that stand out as genuinely better—not simply because of their branding, but due to the higher quality of their ingredients?

Kazlouskaya: Yeah, there are many brands right now, and many are doing a decent job selecting ingredients. A couple of brands have been known for decades, and we, as dermatologists, often recommend them. Smaller brands are also trying to select safe ingredients and find effective combinations.

So, do you need some names?

Jacobsen: Should we give them free advertising? What if we rank products based on efficacy, from high-end to low-end? Without focusing on particular name brands, what do we know helps people with their skin? And conversely, what do we know doesn’t help at all?

Kazlouskaya: Okay, first, we must clarify what we’re discussing—anti-aging, general skincare, or specific concerns.

Let’s start with sunscreen. This is the number one helpful product because collagen is degraded by UV exposure if you’re not using sunblock or protecting your skin. This also exacerbates many conditions.

Sunscreen is essential not just for maintenance but also for conditions like rosacea. Scientific studies have shown that sunscreen can improve rosacea by up to 15%, even without medication. Similarly, sunscreen can help with acne-related post-inflammatory hyperpigmentation, which can be more distressing than the acne itself.

There’s no easy cure for hyperpigmentation, and while cosmetic treatments exist, wearing sunscreen during acne treatment can prevent these problems altogether.

There are two types of sunscreens: synthetic and natural. Natural ingredients include zinc oxide or titanium dioxide. Both types are effective. Some people fear synthetic ingredients, thinking they’re toxic chemicals, but there is no scientific evidence supporting this concern. However, natural sunscreens containing zinc may be preferable for sensitive skin due to a lower risk of reactions or interactions with other skincare products.

So, sunscreen is the number one product everyone should use. All other products are optional, even retinol for anti-aging.

Retinol, a modified vitamin A molecule, is the second most effective ingredient. It promotes skin regeneration, stimulates collagen production, and has extensive research supporting its effectiveness in maintaining skin health. Suppose you start using retinol in your 20s and continue consistently. In that case, you have an excellent chance of keeping your skin youthful throughout your life.

Another essential category is antioxidants, which protect the skin from free radicals, UV damage, and environmental stress. Vitamin C is the most notable antioxidant. It plays a significant role in collagen synthesis, skin protection, pigmentation, and texture enhancement.

The top three scientifically supported skincare ingredients are sunscreen, retinol, and vitamin C. Using just these three will ensure your skin looks healthy and radiant.

After these essentials, the focus shifts to addressing specific concerns. For example, if you have acne, there are proven treatments. Similarly, targeted molecules can help with oiliness or other issues.

Guide me towards more specific areas, and I can elaborate further.

Jacobsen: Let’s discuss skin dryness, acne, pigmentation, or any skin malfunctions that develop over time, such as sunspots, moles, etc.

Kazlouskaya: Okay. If you have dry and sensitive skin, focusing on moisturizing is essential. Everyone is fond of hyaluronic acid, but pure hyaluronic acid isn’t effective unless it’s layered with more occlusive ingredients. Using a hyaluronic acid serum can evaporate from your skin, making it feel drier. It’s most effective when combined with other molecules in a cream, and nearly every cream on the market today contains hyaluronic acid. Alternatively, you can use it as a serum for targeted areas or your entire face. Still, you must follow it with an occlusive product to prevent evaporation.

Glycerin, petrolatum, panthenol for healing, and ceramides, which mimic our natural fats, are the best moisturizer components. These ingredients help restore the skin’s normal barrier.

For oily skin or skin with sebaceous filaments (those tiny black dots often mistaken for blackheads), we recommend using acids such as salicylic acid to dissolve oil buildup, as well as alpha-hydroxy acids (AHAs) and beta-hydroxy acids (BHAs). However, it’s crucial not to overuse these acids, as they can dry out the skin, worsen acne, and even trigger new breakouts.

In the anti-aging category, we now have interesting molecules studied less than retinol, vitamin C, and sunscreen, but they are still promising. One example is bakuchiol, which is less potent than retinol but safe for use during pregnancy and breastfeeding. It increases skin turnover, thickens the epidermis, and improves skin texture, offering a plumper look.

We’re also entering a new era with ingredients like growth factors, peptides, and exosomes. These are trending right now and are highly sought after. They work because they’re small molecules that participate in skin regeneration. However, choosing products from reputable brands with clinically proven formulations is important, as not all molecules penetrate the skin effectively. These products are often priced in the higher range, costing several hundred dollars for a quality formula.

Another emerging trend is addressing mature skin, particularly for women in their 50s experiencing estrogen deficiency. Products targeting estrogen-depleted skin are still limited, but some companies are developing compounded estrogen molecules or estrogen-like ingredients that mimic estrogen’s activity on the skin. This is a growing field and represents a new direction in skincare.

Jacobsen: What about products or treatments that are widely used but lack evidence or don’t work?

Kazlouskaya: Many at-home treatments don’t have sufficient evidence to support their effectiveness. I’m also cautious about oils in skincare. They’ve become trendy, but they aren’t always helpful. While some evidence supports certain oils, they can clog pores, provoke acne, and cause allergic reactions, especially for sensitive skin. Oils often contain fragrances, which can be irritating.

Another questionable trend is using beef tallow in skincare. For those unfamiliar with beef tallow, it is fat derived from animals. While it’s gaining popularity in some circles, I’m unaware of strong evidence supporting its benefits for the skin, and it may not be suitable for everyone.

Animals have fat inside, stored between their organs, and if it’s from beef, it’s called beef tallow. It’s a huge trend right now. I was interviewed about it at least three times last month, and one news magazine has already published an article about it.

But it’s everywhere—on TikTok and Instagram—so it’s a hot topic. Essentially, it involves putting animal fat on your face.

Will it work? Who knows? There’s some indication that fat might have anti-inflammatory properties, but we don’t have sufficient data to support its effectiveness.

Another trend I’ve noticed is castor oil. It’s becoming very popular here in the U.S. What trends are you seeing in Canada?

Jacobsen: Oh, I don’t even know. This is a new topic for me, so I don’t know if people in Canada follow similar trends to those in the United States but in a less extreme way.

People do things that might work to some degree but are exaggerated for appearance’s sake, such as surgical procedures like facelifts or other cosmetic surgeries. Those are trendy, but they’re also very expensive.

Kazlouskaya: In skincare, I feel that home remedies or DIY treatments, like putting unusual substances on your face, don’t work. For example, some people are now putting period blood on their faces.

Some studies suggest that period blood might contain exosomes, which can have regenerative properties. However, period blood is also full of bacteria and can become a breeding ground for harmful pathogens. Even though it’s being promoted as a trend, it’s risky and not evidence-based.

This is just one example of how much advertising is driven by untrained individuals—not specialists—looking to gain likes, shares, or income from social media. This kind of misinformation can be very dangerous. It’s not just ineffective in some cases but outright harmful.

Jacobsen: What’s being proposed now, that’s new and experimental and shows promise but isn’t sufficiently supported by evidence yet?

Kazlouskaya: Exosomes are a big development right now. These small vesicles facilitate cell communication, carrying growth factors and molecules that promote healing, reduce inflammation, and support various cellular processes. Essentially, they act as signalling agents between cells.

Exosomes are very trendy because of their potential benefits. They are even being studied as intravenous treatments for neurodegenerative conditions, but this research is still in its early stages. In skincare, a few companies produce exosome-based products derived from human fibroblasts.

However, it’s crucial to ensure that the source of these fibroblasts is safe. They must come from clean donors—individuals free of diseases or cancers. These fibroblasts can come from sources like skin cells or umbilical cords. Properly sourced and purified exosomes have the potential to be very helpful.

A few companies produce high-quality exosome products that work well, but this area is still developing. These products are not FDA-approved, and while some people attempt to inject them as treatments, this is 100% unregulated and not FDA-approved.

On the other hand, using exosome products topically in the form of creams or serums is not prohibited. This makes it a bit of a “Wild West” situation, as some people take risks by using or promoting them beyond their intended purposes.

We also use exosomes after procedures like microneedling, but more regulation and research are needed. Many products come from outside the United States, and we don’t fully understand their potential long-term effects or risks.

Jacobsen: Who are the main demographics that are more likely to come to your office?

Kazlouskaya: There are two primary demographics. One group is young, working professionals with medium to high incomes who want everything done to maintain a polished look. The other group comprises women in their 40s and 50s seeking skin maintenance and rejuvenation treatments.

Jacobsen: So, it’s about professionalizing their appearance and maintaining skin health.

Kazlouskaya: Interestingly, younger populations are increasingly seeking these treatments. They are very knowledgeable about cosmetic procedures. For example, I got my first Botox treatment in my 30s, and at that time, it didn’t feel very safe. But now, people in their early 20s are already getting procedures like microneedling, fillers, and Botox.

Today, these treatments are so normalized that they’re almost like ordering coffee at Starbucks—just a casual part of life.

Jacobsen: One related area I’d like to touch on is diet. An old North American phrase is, “You are what you eat.” What about the relationship between diet and skin health?

Kazlouskaya: Diet is worth discussing, as it plays a significant role in skin health. Let’s explore that further.

Diet is a significant factor, and I see its effects often. Insulin resistance and prediabetes can lead to noticeable changes in the skin, such as increased pigmentation, roughness, and other issues. These conditions are often challenging to address with just creams and procedures. Lifestyle changes, including diet, play a crucial role.

A healthy diet rich in fruits, vegetables, and proteins is essential because our skin and hair predominantly comprise protein. If you’re protein-deficient, your skin won’t look its best. For example, one in seven women in the United States has polycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS), which is now a leading cause of infertility. PCOS has specific skin-related symptoms like hair thinning, acne (especially in the lower face and later stages of life), darkened skin patches, stretch marks, and other signs.

PCOS is often linked to insulin resistance. Lifestyle changes like exercising more, eating healthier, and getting better sleep can significantly improve skin health. Even reducing salt intake can help minimize facial swelling.

I’ve had clients who underwent multiple cosmetic procedures but only saw temporary results. However, after adopting a healthier lifestyle—going to the gym and eating well—their skin transformed within six months. These changes occurred even though I knew they weren’t consistent with their skincare routines. Simply changing their lifestyle made a noticeable difference.

Another emerging factor is the rise of obesity treatments like Ozempic. This is creating a new wave of challenges in the skin industry. Fat is a tissue that stores and produces hormones and other compounds. When people lose fat rapidly, as they often do with Ozempic, it can disturb hormones on a micro-level. This can lead to changes in skin quality, including hair loss, which is particularly difficult to address.

Many of these individuals seek help for skin care and treatments, and I expect this trend to grow as more people use Ozempic. In places like New York, it’s almost as common as taking vitamins—everyone seems to be on it.

Jacobsen: When consulting with people—how do motivations factor into the conversation? Can you differentiate between good and bad motivations for seeking advice or help? How does the medical code of ethics come into play?

Kazlouskaya: As a business owner and physician, balancing the business side with the ethical duty to benefit patients can sometimes be challenging. Of course, you want patients to pursue treatments. Still, at the same time, you must recognize that some treatments may not be beneficial for everyone.

I maintain this balance by prioritizing the patient’s best interests. I never recommend or perform treatments that won’t benefit me.

There are different types of people who come in for treatments. Some want everything done. They’ll say, “I don’t care about the cost; I want to address this wrinkle or pigmentation issue. What treatments do you have?” The cost is not a concern for these individuals, so we can provide the most advanced treatments and develop a comprehensive plan to address their concerns.

Then, some people are entirely against injections. Even when you know that injections are necessary for significant improvement—like when aging is already advanced—you still need to respect their wishes. You have to explain that injections or surgery might provide the best results. Still, if they are unwilling, you can offer alternatives with the caveat that the results may be less effective.

Another group includes people who have done nothing for their skin throughout their lives and come in their sixties saying, “I just have a little bit of laxity.” These patients often have never even used a cream. When you examine them, you see sagging skin that requires significant intervention. It’s difficult to make them understand that, at this stage, achieving significant results is challenging, and even surgery might not fully resolve their concerns.

Everyone is unique, and you must navigate their beliefs and expectations. In the past, dermatologists were very assertive in their recommendations, but now, it’s more about working with the patient’s preferences.

The younger population is very different. They want to participate actively in their treatment plans. They rarely jump into any suggestions without researching, reading reviews, and seeking feedback. It’s a very collaborative process with them.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Viktoryia.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Sangeetha Venugopal, M.D., M.S. on Smoking and MDS

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/27

 Dr. Sangeetha Venugopal, M.D., M.S., is a distinguished physician-scientist specializing in hematology at Sylvester Comprehensive Cancer Center, part of the University of Miami Miller School of Medicine. As an assistant professor of hematology, Dr. Venugopal focuses on advancing research and improving clinical outcomes for patients with blood disorders, particularly myelodysplastic syndromes (MDS) and their precursor conditions. Venugopal is recognized for her groundbreaking research linking tobacco smoking to increased genetic mutations and disease progression in MDS. Her recent study, presented at the American Society of Hematology (ASH) annual meeting, highlighted the significant role of smoking cessation in mitigating disease risk and improving survival outcomes for MDS patients. She briefly talks about how tobacco smoking contributes to MDS pathogenesis, showing a dose-response relationship between smoking intensity and genetic mutations (ASXL1, SF3B1, U2AF1, ZRSR2). Smoking accelerates disease progression, reduces survival, and necessitates smoking cessation counseling as part of MDS management. Future research will explore the impact of early-life smoking on later MDS development.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Can you summarize the key findings of your study from the ASH annual meeting?

Dr. Sangeetha Venugopal: Summary: We have shown that tobacco smoking potentially contributes to the multi-step molecular pathogenesis of MDS.

We demonstrated a dose-response relationship with smoking meaning the heavier someone smokes, the chances of accumulation of mutations are high,

Tobacco smoking is associated with disease progression of MDS and impacts survival adversely.

Jacobsen: What genetic mutations are associated with smoking in MDS patients?

Venugopal: ASXL1, SF3B1, U2AF1, and ZRSR2

Jacobsen: How did your study establish a dose-response relationship between smoking intensity and genetic mutations?

Venugopal: After adjustment for sex, age and disease group, the number of mutations increased significantly with the pack-year (PY) smoked (p=0.006), and those at the 75th and 90th percentiles of PY had 1.8 and 3.5 times the number of mutations, respectively, compared to non-smokers, indicating a dose-response relationship. i.e.,those in the 90th percentile of pack-year smoking had double the number of mutations compared to those in the 75th percentile

Jacobsen: What are the implications of the findings for the clinical management of MDS or its precursor conditions?

Venugopal: When anyone gets diagnosed with MDS or precursor condition who also smoke, must be counselled to quit smoking. Because this study clearly shows that tobacco smoking is associated with disease progression and impacts survival adversely.

Jacobsen: What role does smoking cessation counseling play in the treatment plan for patients with MDS? 

Venugopal: When anyone gets saddled with a new diagnosis of cancer,first question to come up is dietary and lifestyle modification. At the outset, physicians discuss about maintaining a healthy lifestyle and smoking cessation is an important lifestyle modification

Jacobsen: How does your study contribute to the existing body of knowledge regarding smoking and blood cancers?

Venugopal: We know that smoking is an epidemiological risk factor. This study shows that smoking is also associated with disease progression and impacts survival adversely

Jacobsen: What are the next steps in your research?

Venugopal: To evaluate if smoking at an young age contributes to the development of MDS at an older age.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Venugopal.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Peter Dankwa on Tribalism and a Humanist Response

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/26

Peter Nyarko Dankwa is a member of the Humanist Association of Ghana. He is outspoken about spreading humanism and critical thinking. He uses his blog, Peter’s Box, to promote humanism and critical thinking. At a Toastmasters meeting in 2019, Peter delivered a speech titled ‘No Monkey Games,’ which was inspired by humanist values. He has held several leadership positions in Toastmasters International, from the club to the district level. Peter holds a bachelor’s degree in Aerospace Engineering. He is a passionate chess and Rubik’s cube coach.

In ‘Whispers in the Dust’ Peter talks about his short story on Tribalism’s destructive effects. Inspired by online tribal banters in Ghana, Peter personifies Tribalism to highlight its militating impact on humanity. The story follows Tribalism rejecting help due to prejudice, leading to his downfall. Dankwa discusses parallels with other group identities, such as nationalism and religion, where prioritizing group identity over humanity causes division. 

He collaborated on this story with one of Ghana’s prolific writers, Ama Pomaa (the author of A Time to Part and The Ones We Find).

In his last blog post ‘Left Out’, Peter passionately decries the senselessness of stigmatization of left-handed people in Ghana after having experienced first-hand discrimination for using his left hand in a social interaction. 

Dankwa’s next post ‘Jungle Justice’ explores the dangers of mob action, inspired by tragic incidents of prejudice and injustice in Ghana. He believes the rise of mob justice in Africa, can be linked to distrust in the corrupted justice systems.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Okay, today, once again, we’re here with Peter Dankwa from Ghana. You have a short story that illustrates the fall of Tribalism. Tribalism can indeed be problematic. So, Peter, what inspired you to write this short story?

Peter Dankwa: Whispers In The Dust was inspired by the sickening tribal bantering that creeps up on my social media feed. It was my humanistic attempt to address the pitfalls of tribalism in an ever-growing tribalistic Ghanaian society. One might wonder why strangers who might probably never meet each other in the real world, would gleefully tear each other apart on social media for the sole reason of their tribal identity. 

Appealing to our shared humanism, I sought to dissect the misappropriation of tribalism under the knife of reason and critical thinking. And what better way to present it than through storytelling? That was how I came up with Whispers In The Dust – a form of protest writing particularizing the dangers of tribalism. 

Hopefully, reason shall prevail at the end of my fictional story. 

The storyline shows that while we may belong to specific tribes, elevating tribal identity above the fundamental values of our shared humanity is militating to our existence. To demonstrate this, I decided to personify Tribalism as a character and show how it manifests in everyday life, ultimately harming himself due to his tribalistic nature.

The story begins with Tribalism (the character) going about his day and meeting people from different walks of life. Each time he meets someone, conflict arises because he’s arrogant, cocky, and believes his tribe is superior. Eventually, he ends up in a healthcare facility, but his insulting behaviour alienates everyone who might have helped him. Even when Death offers to be patient with Tribalism, he snobs death. You can imagine what happened to him.

The story illustrates how destructive Tribalism can be when taken too far.

I would add that Tribalism, as an evolutionary strategy, isn’t entirely negative—it can foster a competitive spirit that motivates tribes to become better. But once it crosses the line and overshadows humanity and core virtues, it becomes a serious problem. That, in a nutshell, is the message of the story.

Jacobsen: Also, I mean, is this a perspective that could be applied if you personified a nation-state or something similar, where someone takes pride in their country—which is understandable—but elevates that above the broader perspective of humanity? Over time, as nation-states have essentially occupied most of the world’s territories, people derive an identity from them. It has its advantages but also significant disadvantages when taken too far. Could similar analogies be made to other group identities that people adopt?

Dankwa: Yes, you couldn’t have put it any better! The principle is the same – the very one you will find in Whispers In The Dust. You can observe this same pattern across religions and races, where people feel threatened by the identity of others or fear their identity will be diminished if they don’t take the spotlight. This pattern appears in many areas of life where people prioritize their tribe or ethos over humanity. Religion is one of the most apparent examples of this. In religion, it often becomes a case of “us versus them.” That’s the underlying theme. There is rarely a point where people reason based on a shared community. Instead, it’s about asserting, “We have our ideals, and you must accept them, or you’re our enemy.” This issue spans many areas.

So yes, you’re correct that this principle transcends Tribalism and applies to many contexts, including patriotism. Patriotism isn’t inherently bad, but when it begins to undermine someone else’s identity—especially when that identity has no bearing on you—it becomes problematic. I struggle to understand why someone else’s identity should affect you so profoundly that you build your life around protecting your own.

The principle of “live and let live” should be the norm. However, it often escalates to a point where, perhaps due to our evolutionary psychology, people revert to a tribal mindset. In ancient times, tribal wars were common, but now those conflicts have shifted into debates and rhetoric. Sometimes, these expressions are subtle, but they still reflect the underlying concept of Tribalism. 

Jacobsen: Maybe there’s some game-theory consideration here. When I think about competition between nations—particularly in areas like science and technology—or competition between tribes in terms of mastering their crafts in earlier times, there seems to be a zero-sum mentality at play. In a zero-sum game, if one party gains, another, by definition, loses.

When you move away from zero-sum thinking to a “grow the pie” perspective, competition becomes more constructive. For instance, if nations or tribes compete in ways that benefit everyone—such as discovering new science, inventing technologies, or engaging in trade that benefits both parties—they can maintain pride in their identities while fostering collective growth. This approach reflects expansion rather than contraction or stagnation.

This may tie into evolutionary psychology. When people adopt zero-sum thinking regarding their identities, it often becomes unhealthy. On the other hand, when identity is approached expansively, it can lead to positive, constructive outcomes.

Are you planning any other stories that will involve this character of Tribalism?

Dankwa: I have another story for February 1st titled ‘Jungle Justice – The Dread of Kabutey’. 

I seek to address the problem of jungle justice with this story. For far too long the canker of mob justice has plagued Africa and has seared the conscience of many. Just this week I chanced on a video circulating on social media where some pedestrians were stoning a man who had allegedly stolen an item. Let me spare you the horrific details of that. You might have lost your appetite had you seen it. How are people in the 21st century committing such acts and then justifying them?

I believe the problem partly lies in the mistrust of the people in the justice system. Many people here struggle with the system’s fidelity. When cases arise where perpetrators are arrested but then somehow released, it creates a sense of insecurity and distrust. People begin to feel that justice won’t be served unless they take matters into their own hands. This eye-for-an-eye mentality feels, to them, like a way to ensure justice, but it’s deeply problematic.

One significant issue is that the mob’s victim could be innocent. Once a mob murders someone, there’s no way to undo that act or bring back their life. For example, I have a friend who grew dreadlocks as a form of protest after his friend was murdered in a mob action simply because of his appearance.

This friend of his had dreadlocks, and there was a perception in the community that people with such hairstyles were criminals or vagabonds. When a call went out about a thief on the streets, and no one could identify the culprit, they simply looked for someone who seemed “different.” They saw his dreadlocks, noticed his slightly unconventional attire, and concluded he must be the thief. Tragically, they murdered him.

A humanist friend decided to grow dreadlocks himself as a form of protest. His message was to challenge these stereotypes and show that a person’s appearance doesn’t define their character. He wanted people to understand: “I’m the same person you know. I’m not evil simply because I have dreadlocks.”

This issue and his story inspired me to write another piece that explores the dangers of mob justice and challenges the prejudices that lead to such tragedies. 

Jacobsen: Yeah. I mean, it’s a different flavour in North America. You see the same psychology manifesting. We all know the case of Mubarak Bala, who was jailed in what appears to be an act of social retribution based on a complaint from S.S. Umar & Co. The complaint stemmed from one Facebook post labelled as being, quote, “provocative and annoying. ” I remember communicating with him the night before his arrest because we were working on an Ask Mubarak series for a Canadian Atheist publication. We completed seven sessions and were working on the eighth, or something like that.

But yeah, this kind of social retribution is quite common. The difference is that the strength of institutions determines the extent to which people feel they need to take matters into their own hands. Stronger institutions provide a better buffer against this.

Okay, well, thank you for your time today.

Dankwa: Thank you, too.

LEFT OUT

I sighed deeply in relief when I walked inside the house after work on Friday night. This Friday night was special, unlike the others. My leave began today, and I’ll be gone from work for a month. I gleefully unlocked the door, yet a sense of discomfort lingered in the pit of my stomach.

I replayed the scene that had just transpired on the street a few seconds ago in my head. Why didn’t she greet me back? Every time I reconstructed the scene, I asked the same question. Why didn’t she greet me back? I made up an excuse. She did not see me. But I’m sure we made eye contact. So why didn’t she return my greeting?

Was she begrudging me? On what, exactly? We’ve always welcomed each other without incident. Hmm. Anyway, I greeted her today, and she did not return the greeting.
As I entered my room, I tossed my bag onto the bed, along with my earlier dilemma. Let the weekend and my leave begin! Next week, I will be in Singapore for the International Humanists Conference.
‘Good evening. Is there anyone home?’ I heard Dad’s voice behind my door. He would do this every time he returned home from town.
‘Good evening, Daa,’ I answered perfunctorily.
‘Afi says you…’ He sounded muffled.
I inched closer to the door to better hear him. ‘What?’
‘You know Afi, right? “The house after our next-door neighbour?”
When I heard the name Afi, the unsettling feeling in the pit of my stomach rumbled.
‘Yes, I know Afi.’

Dad smiled wryly, perhaps to make it seem anodyne. ‘She wasn’t happy that you greeted her with your left hand. When I met her on my way home, she registered her displeasure.
When I heard that, I held unto my indrawn breath a little longer. I felt my chest expand. The unsettling feeling erupted into sulkiness, though I was relieved that I finally had some closure to my earlier dilemma.
With laboured breathing and disapproving eyes brows, I let out a litany of arguments. ‘Ah! Didn’t she see that my hands were full?’
I had my laptop backpack slung over my right shoulder. That same right hand held my camera bag, which was heavier than the tripod pouch I was holding with my left hand. It felt natural to wave to her with my left hand. So did I.

I was correct. She saw me! At least she saw me make an attempt to greet her. And she didn’t return it? I was enraged that she didn’t upraid me right away while I was still in her view. Perhaps she didn’t want to be late to her destination. She had just driven out of her compound in her car.

I continued ranting. Why didn’t she inform me right away so I could learn from my mistake? You know what? I am equally offended! I greeted you with a smile. Would you rather I greet you with my left hand or not greet at all? You ignored me, drove by me, and reported to my father. Was she expecting a vicarious apology from my father?

Ah, I get it. Dad will somehow magically explain why using my left hand was inappropriate and unacceptable.

Read more at https://peesbox.com/left-out/

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Siamak Agha, Plastic Surgery’s Nips and Tucks

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/26

Dr. Siamak Agha, a Cambridge-trained MD/PhD and pioneer in plastic surgery, has spent over 20 years transforming the field with innovative techniques like the three-dimensional facelift and high-definition tummy tuck. His research in gene therapy earned two international patents, and his surgical expertise was honed during a seven-year residency at the University of Pittsburgh Medical Center. As the founder of The Aesthetic Centers in Newport Beach, California, Dr. Agha caters to local and international patients, offering state-of-the-art care and virtual consultations for those seeking transformative, natural results. He has been featured in People Magazine, E News, Bravo TV, and Yahoo Entertainment. Agha shared insights on his holistic approach to plastic surgery, emphasizing the artistry and science required for optimal outcomes. He highlighted advancements like high-definition tummy tucks, circumferential thigh lifts, and innovations in three-dimensional techniques for natural results. Dr. Agha discussed AI’s potential in analyzing aging and the evolving patient trends toward refinement and natural aesthetics. Addressing scarring, cultural variations, and patient motivations, he stressed the importance of balance, patient-centered care, and realistic expectations.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re with Dr. Agha, MD, PhD, from Cambridge University. You completed your residency at the University of Pittsburgh Medical Center. You are a board-certified plastic surgeon with over 20 years of experience. You specialize in aesthetic rejuvenation, breast reshaping, and body contouring. Is that accurate?

Agha: Absolutely.

Jacobsen: So, Dr. Agha, why did you specialize in plastic surgery?

Agha: It’s an interesting story. My father was an obstetrician-gynecologist and a devout Christian. He was always busy, and I rarely saw him. From an early age, I knew I didn’t want to pursue OB-GYN because I saw firsthand how he was never home.

However, I was exposed to plastic surgery during medical school and quickly realized how unique and versatile the field is. Plastic surgery is the ultimate form of general surgery. As a plastic surgeon, you perform reconstructive procedures, assist trauma surgeons, and collaborate with other specialists, such as cardiac and orthopedic surgeons.

Nearly every medical discipline may involve or require plastic and reconstructive surgery at some point. The ability to help people feel better about themselves, improve their self-confidence, and enhance their quality of life is immensely rewarding.

Plastic surgery is also incredibly comprehensive—genuinely “head-to-toe” surgery. We operate on the face, hands, breasts, body, and even toes. We incorporate elements of orthopedic surgery, soft tissue surgery, oncologic surgery, and more. It’s a fascinating field because it blends creativity with technical precision.

Jacobsen: What do you find most exciting about the field?

Agha: The constant evolution of the field keeps it exciting. New techniques and technologies are emerging all the time. Even after completing my formal training 20 years ago, I’ve had to stay up-to-date with innovations. There’s always something new to learn, whether it’s surgical techniques, advancements in transplantation, or minimally invasive procedures.

Jacobsen: Since completing your training, what are the most significant advancements in plastic surgery?

Agha: Plastic surgery has seen remarkable progress over the years. For example, hand and face transplants are now possible, which was science fiction just a few decades ago. These procedures require immense collaboration and expertise, but they’ve transformed lives.

We’ve also seen significant advancements in post-weight-loss body contouring surgery, breast reconstruction techniques after mastectomy, and minimally invasive procedures like injectables and laser treatments.

Another area of innovation is regenerative medicine. Plastic surgeons now use stem cell therapies and tissue engineering to restore form and function in ways we couldn’t before.

It’s worth noting that many people need to realize how integral plastic surgeons are to other fields. For instance, the first successful kidney transplant was performed with the help of a plastic surgeon. Plastic surgery is foundational to many life-changing procedures and continues evolving incredibly.

Jacobsen: That’s fascinating. Have you noticed other disciplines incorporating elements of plastic surgery?

Agha: Absolutely. For example, ENT (ear, nose, and throat) specialists increasingly perform facial plastic surgeries, such as rhinoplasty and facelifts. Dermatologists are also becoming more involved in aesthetic procedures, like Botox and fillers. While this collaboration is great for advancing patient care, it also underscores the importance of proper training and expertise in achieving the best outcomes.

You have ophthalmologists performing oculoplastic procedures, oncologic surgeons specializing in breast cancer and breast reconstruction, and other disciplines venturing into cosmetic surgery. But truly, a board-certified plastic surgeon is also a board-certified reconstructive surgeon. As you mentioned, numerous reconstructive advancements, such as hand and face transplantation, have been making headlines. 

Jacobsen: That brings us to the present moment. In many fields today, we see jargon terms thrown around, and artificial intelligence (AI) is becoming a major part of the conversation. For example, AI detects diseases through scans or images to assist medical doctors. How do you see AI influencing plastic surgery, particularly on the cutting edge of where the field might evolve through the rest of the 2020s?

Agha: AI plays a role, but it may take time to impact the surgical side of plastic surgery. Instead, AI will likely contribute more to understanding the process of aging and rejuvenation. For instance, AI can help identify genetic differences in how people age. Why does one person’s skin age faster than another’s? What nutrients or components do they need to maintain healthy skin, organs, and overall health?

AI will also help us understand the role of the microbiome and how it affects aging and general health. Right now, AI is geared toward analyzing the biology behind aging and how we can reverse or slow it.

Regarding surgery, the role of AI will depend on the advancements in robotics and whether patients will accept robots performing procedures. AI and robotics excel in some types of surgery, such as tumour removal, because they are more mechanical: determining precise dimensions and executing minimally invasive incisions to remove the tumour.

However, plastic surgery is different. It’s as much an art as it is a science. The artistic element involves making nuanced judgments based on cultural variations, aesthetics, and an innate sense of design and proportion. Unless we can teach robots that artistic sensibility, AI won’t fully replace the human plastic surgeon.

Artistic ability plays a major role in plastic surgery outcomes. Only some plastic surgeons may excel in that area. All plastic surgeons are trained to perform the surgery. Still, not everyone will become a great surgeon because the artistic element is harder to teach. Every surgery involves artistic decisions: shaping, proportioning, and contouring to meet the patient’s unique goals.

Jacobsen: Let’s discuss the artistic and cultural variations you mentioned. If you travelled to different regions, what differences in desired aesthetics would you typically observe?

Agha: Oh, there’s significant cultural variation regarding aesthetics. For example, in Korea, calf reduction surgery is very common. Koreans, generally speaking, may have more developed calf muscles, specifically the gastrocnemius muscles. A popular procedure in Korea involves resecting part of the muscle to create a slimmer calf.

In the Middle East, rhinoplasty is extremely common among men and women. Countries like Turkey and Iran are renowned for having some of the world’s top rhinoplasty surgeons, and the demand for nose-reshaping procedures is very high.

Even here in North America, I see cultural differences. For instance, when patients come to me for buttock enhancement, preferences often vary based on cultural background. My Latino patients, for example, often desire a lower, heavier buttock shape—what I refer to as the “J.Lo butt.” In contrast, my Caucasian patients typically want a more centrally heavy buttock, while my Black patients may prefer a different aesthetic altogether.

These preferences highlight how cultural beauty ideals can shape surgical goals, even for specific parts of the anatomy. It’s fascinating to see how diverse these desires can be.

It underscores the importance of understanding plastic surgery’s science and cultural artistry.

Jacobsen: That is super interesting. Has that trend changed much over your working years, or has it been fairly consistent?

Agha: No, it changes all the time. Right now, I’m seeing a significant shift in patient preferences. Many people are opting for implant removal and smaller breasts. The trend is moving from large breasts to smaller, more natural sizes. Similarly, there’s a shift from bigger to smaller buttocks, though patients still want them to look perky.

One issue with standard plastic surgery, which I have been working to evolve in my practice for the past twenty years, is that most procedures are treated as two-dimensional. In plastic surgery, you often lift and tighten, but humans are not two-dimensional.

We have vertical skin, horizontal skin, and projection, the third dimension. As people gain weight or age, their skin expands three-dimensionally—it stretches vertically and horizontally and increases in depth. However, most traditional plastic surgery techniques address only vertical or horizontal laxity. The third dimension, projection, is often overlooked, and there aren’t many methods to create it.

Most of my practice has been focused on incorporating that third dimension, especially for female patients. For men, this matters far less. Men generally want to look linear, masculine, and V-shaped and prefer a flat chest and a defined structure. They don’t want large breasts or prominent buttocks, so those procedures are relatively straightforward.

However, women aim to create curves, projections, and natural contours. We aim for a nice projection of the breasts, well-shaped buttocks, and overall balance. That’s where the third dimension comes in, and many of the procedures I perform focus on creating that three-dimensional result.

Jacobsen: So, what specific patients are coming to you for these days?

Agha: A big trend I’m seeing now is implant removal. When implants are removed, the breasts look flat because the implants stretch the breast tissue over time. Let’s talk about how implants work.

For example, when you place a large implant in someone with an A-cup or small breast, it stretches the breast tissue horizontally and vertically, but it also thins it out. Over time, the breast tissue becomes like a pancake sitting over a large implant. While this can look great for many years, removing the implant leaves you with a stretched, deflated pancake sitting flat against the chest.

If you approach this issue with standard techniques, you would typically remove the excess skin and pull the tissue together. However, this does not recreate projection; it flattens the tissue further.

I do breast reshaping instead. I take every element of the excess breast tissue and strategically pull it together. Imagine the breast tissue as a wide, stretched-out area. You create projection by narrowing the tissue, shortening it, and bringing it together in a specific way. It’s about reshaping and suturing the tissue to achieve depth, contours, and natural projection.

So it’s far more refined than standard lifting procedures. Anyone can lift a breast, but creating projection, depth, and shadows requires a specialized approach. That’s what differentiates my practice from others. Patients come to me specifically for these refinements because they know I can achieve superior results. I often get patients travelling from Canada, the UK, and other parts of the world for these advanced techniques.

My practice’s evolution focuses on pushing beyond standard procedures. It’s about lifting and creating natural projections, balanced proportions, and aesthetically pleasing results.

Jacobsen: When performing sutures, I assume one concern in surgery is the risk of scarring. How do you minimize the appearance of scars when performing sculpting and aesthetic procedures?

Agha: Scarring is an inevitable part of surgery. For instance, you can sculpt a patient using liposuction, but if the patient is older, has lost significant weight, or has skin laxity, the skin won’t shrink properly after liposuction. In such cases, you have to remove the excess skin, which means making incisions, which results in scars.

Scars are permanent—there’s no way around that. My philosophy is that since a scar is unavoidable, we should place it perfectly. Proper placement makes all the difference.

I position the scars meticulously when performing body or reverse gravity lifts. For example, I tell my patients, “I guarantee you’ll be able to wear a thong, and your scars will be hidden.” I ensure the scars are placed strategically. For a butt lift, I position the scar precisely at the junction between the lower back and the upper buttocks—exactly where a thong would naturally rest.

For a tummy tuck, I design the scar so low that it includes part of the pubic skin, allowing for a pubic lift. Patients often ask, “Will my scars be visible?” I respond, “Yes, when you’re naked and looking in a mirror or when your partner sees you. But otherwise, no—they’re positioned low enough in the pubic area to remain hidden.”

You can’t eliminate scars, but you can make them symmetrical, thin, and strategically placed at anatomical junctions. For instance, scars can be placed at the junctions between the abdomen and the thighs, the abdomen and the breasts, or the lower back and the buttocks. This careful positioning hides a significant portion of the scar, making it less noticeable.

When scars are well-placed and minimal in appearance, patients are generally more focused on the correction than the scars themselves. Scar placement and symmetry are critical. A jagged, asymmetrical, or uneven scar detracts from the overall result, and patients understandably don’t appreciate it.

Another philosophy I follow is what I call “naked beauty.” My goal is for my patients to look good when they’re naked. When they see themselves in front of a mirror, they should feel confident and say, “Wow, I look great.” That’s the ultimate aim of my work.

They may have an incision, but if it’s symmetrical, thin, and placed at the right junction, patients often don’t notice it anymore. 

Jacobsen: What about complications during surgery? I imagine they don’t occur often with skilled surgeons, but what types of complications might happen in rare cases when they do arise?

Agha: Complications depend on the type of surgery being performed. For example, facelift patients typically have fewer complications compared to someone undergoing their seventh or eighth breast surgery—and yes, I’ve had those cases. I’ve even had patients come to me for their ninth buttock or breast surgery.

In such situations, the tissues are disrupted and damaged multiple times, and the normal anatomy is distorted. This significantly increases the risk of complications.

One thing I’ve learned from my mentors—universal across surgical residencies—is the saying, “If you don’t want complications, don’t operate.” The reality is that if you operate on enough patients, complications will eventually occur. However, with proper training and experience, complication rates remain low.

During my residency, my mentor insisted that we know at least six ways to perform every surgery. Before every procedure, we had to write these approaches on a whiteboard and discuss them. This training instilled the habit of planning surgeries meticulously the night before, thinking through every possible scenario.

For straightforward surgeries like breast augmentations, complication rates are very low in the hands of a well-trained surgeon. However, revision surgeries or complex procedures like anti-gravity lifts inherently carry higher risks. These risks often depend on factors like the patient’s ability to heal.

Healing is incredibly individualized. Everyone’s ability to heal, fight infections, or recover from surgery varies. Healthy patients tend to heal better, which lowers the likelihood of complications. Larger surgeries, like full-body makeovers or extensive revisions, depend more on the patient’s overall health and ability to heal properly.

So, complications are not solely dependent on the surgeon’s skill and training. They also hinge on the patient’s ability to follow postoperative instructions and their body’s capacity for optimal healing. When all these factors align—skilled surgery, patient compliance, and good healing ability—complication rates are significantly lower.

Jacobsen: What about patients who might benefit from counselling or self-esteem support instead of surgery? For example, someone who wants a breast reduction, breast enhancement, or buttock modification for reasons tied to self-esteem. It’s their body, choice, and money in a private clinic. But have you ever encountered cases where counseling could have addressed their concerns instead of surgery?

Agha: Yes, that’s an important consideration. For some patients, plastic surgery might not be the best first step. If their concerns are primarily tied to self-esteem or emotional challenges, a conversation or counselling could help them gain confidence without surgery.

However, surgery can help others meet their personal goals and improve their quality of life. It’s essential to assess each case individually. During consultations, I spend significant time understanding why a patient wants a particular procedure. If I believe their motivations are not rooted in realistic expectations, or if surgery doesn’t truly address their concerns, I recommend taking more time to reflect or even seek counselling first.

For many patients, achieving their desired physical changes can boost their confidence and align their appearance with how they see themselves, positively impacting their lives. Ultimately, it’s about helping patients make informed decisions that suit their unique circumstances and goals.

Jacobsen: When it comes to plastic surgery, is there a conversation around who truly needs it versus those who might not?

Agha: Absolutely, there is. Some people don’t require surgery but still desire it. Fortunately, those cases are rare, especially in this country, where plastic surgery is a cash-based, self-paid service. It’s a luxury surgery. I always tell patients, “This is luxury surgery. Do you have to have it? No. Do you need bigger breasts? No. Do you need smaller breasts, a flatter tummy, or a brow lift? No.”

Most patients don’t need plastic surgery—they desire it. If they’re willing to pay for it and it will benefit them, then we do it. However, I sometimes have to say no if I believe it won’t benefit them, if the issue is minor, or if their expectations are unrealistic.

Jacobsen: So you turn people down?

Agha: Yes, I do. I have frank conversations with patients. I tell them, “The risk-to-reward ratio doesn’t justify doing a big surgery to achieve a very small improvement.” For example, just yesterday, I spoke with a physician who looked great already. I told her, “This will be a significant surgery for minimal improvement.” Ironically, she still wanted to move forward, and that’s her prerogative.

If patients feel strongly that the procedure will make them feel better about their body, improve their confidence, or help their relationships, it’s their decision. In those cases, plastic surgery becomes a quality-of-life decision.

Jacobsen: How would you define what is more necessary versus more frivolous regarding aesthetic surgery?

Agha: That’s a difficult question because these surgeries aren’t for me—they’re for the patients. If it makes someone feel good about themselves, helps them wear a bikini for the first time in years, or lets them feel comfortable being naked in front of their spouse, then it’s worth doing.

The more interesting question is this: What part of plastic surgery is “vanity surgery,” and what part is “quality-of-life surgery”? There’s a big difference.

Jacobsen: What would you consider vanity surgery?

Agha: Vanity surgeries are procedures like making a slightly smaller nose or slightly bigger breasts—changes primarily about appearance. However, some patients have a different story.

For instance, someone might come in after losing 200 or 300 pounds and have loose skin everywhere. They tell me they’re embarrassed to be naked in front of their spouse, they haven’t had a sexual relationship in over a year, they experience chafing, or they even deal with skin infections.

When you remove that excess skin, it’s life-changing. People feel confident, start dating at 55 for the first time, or their marriage improves. These are real stories I’ve witnessed. That’s not vanity surgery anymore—that’s quality-of-life surgery.

Jacobsen: That’s powerful.

Agha: It is. These procedures have a profound impact on people’s lives.

Jacobsen: Let’s talk about how you approach plastic surgery differently.

Agha: Right now, plastic surgery, as it’s traditionally trained in residencies, is still largely two-dimensional. We’ve evolved those techniques to focus on creating projection, profile, and a true three-dimensional result.

For example, when patients come to me for a mommy makeover, most people think that means breast surgery and a tummy tuck. I don’t look at it that way. I don’t look at patients as just a list of procedures.

I focus on what we can do to create a more refined version of the body. Often, I assess the patient holistically—the front, back, and sides—because patients tend to fixate on their front. However, the sides and back are integral to the overall result. For example, if someone looks great from the front but their sides are too wide or too full, it will affect the overall appearance.

My philosophy is 360-degree enhancement and refinement, especially for the female body. I emphasize creating projection, curves, and fullness where desired. Over the past 20 years, I’ve worked to evolve various surgeries to achieve this comprehensive approach to shaping the body.

Jacobsen: American television, and even Canadian to some extent, is filled with doctor-focused talk shows. Shows like The Doctors are popular. Do these shows accurately portray plastic surgery in terms of how it’s done, experienced, and its overall impact?

Agha: Not at all. Shows like these are designed for entertainment, not education. Television prioritizes drama. They focus on patients with dramatic backstories because that keeps audiences engaged. The surgery is often just one aspect of the show, and the storytelling takes center stage.

My issue with these shows is that you rarely see the truth after. You’ll see the patient’s “before” story, the drama around their life, and perhaps a glimpse of the immediate postoperative result. But you don’t see the patient three or six months later or how the surgery impacted their long-term life.

Plastic surgery is about transformation, and that transformation takes time. Television doesn’t show that—it’s not about educating people; it’s about selling ads.

Jacobsen: That’s a good point. Television is ultimately a business, and producers decide what makes the final cut.

Agha: The goal is ratings and revenue, but it does not accurately depict the field.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts or reflections on our conversation today?

Agha: I’d love to talk more about aging.

Jacobsen: Sure, let’s dive into that—it’s a great topic.

Agha: Thank you. Aging is something we see more and more in my practice. Many patients start with facial work as they age—facelifts, for example. They often have already had breast and body work done, such as a mommy makeover earlier in life.

By the time they come to us, especially those travelling from out of state or overseas, they’re not looking for basic breast or tummy procedures anymore. Instead, they present with an aging body that no longer matches their face. For instance, they may have a beautifully rejuvenated face, but their body shows signs of aging.

This mismatch can be particularly frustrating for patients and is a common issue. Since many plastic surgeons don’t perform larger, more comprehensive body refinement surgeries, these patients often come to us for solutions that involve addressing the entire lower body.

Jacobsen: So, your practice is seeing a demand for full-body refinement surgeries to complement previous procedures like facelifts or breastwork?

Agha: These patients want their bodies to reflect the same level of youthfulness as their faces. It’s about achieving harmony between all aspects of their appearance.

Regarding those surgeries, I often perform some of our pioneering procedures, such as the circumferential thigh lift. This procedure lifts the thigh’s front, outer, and sometimes inner aspects while incorporating buttock refinement, lift, and sculpting. It’s designed to rejuvenate the entire lower half of the body.

I want to highlight this because many people aren’t even aware of these procedures. Traditionally, these surgeries were reserved for patients who had significant weight loss and excess skin. However, more and more, I’m seeing patients seeking body refinement—thigh, buttock, and overall lower-body sculpting—not because of extreme skin laxity but because they want a body that matches their face, aspirations, goals, and self-esteem.

By combining comprehensive procedures—such as the circumferential thigh lift, butt lift, sculpting, tummy tuck, and high-definition tummy tuck—we can achieve these goals for patients.

Jacobsen: High-definition tummy tuck? That’s interesting. What is it?

Agha: Of course. A high-definition tummy tuck is a procedure I pioneered in 2007. I submitted the technique for publication in the Plastic and Reconstructive Surgery Journal to share it with other surgeons, but it wasn’t accepted. As a result, I trademarked it instead.

The concept behind the high-definition tummy tuck is to create a natural-looking abdomen. In a standard tummy tuck, the skin is completely lifted off the muscle, releasing all the attachments between the skin and the muscle. While this smooths the abdomen, it also eliminates the natural contours and shadows that define a toned abdomen.

We preserve those natural attachments with the high-definition technique, allowing the skin and fatty tissue to maintain their original placement. This preservation creates a natural appearance with defined contours and shadows, giving the abdomen a more athletic and aesthetically pleasing look.

Jacobsen: Does the technique maintain the natural structure rather than flatten everything?

Agha: Exactly. By preserving these attachments, we avoid the overly flat, unnatural appearance that sometimes results from traditional tummy tucks. The high-definition tummy tuck delivers a more sculpted, realistic outcome that aligns with the patient’s body shape and aesthetic goals.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Agha.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Eva Quiñones, Hate for Atheists and Framing Humanism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/25

Eva Quiñones Segarra resides in the municipality of Río Grande. She studied from third grade at a Catholic school in Guaynabo, receiving the religion medal at her graduation in 1984, despite having stopped believing a few years earlier. She pursued agricultural sciences at the University of Puerto Rico at Mayagüez, specializing in livestock industries. She later enrolled in the School of Law at the Interamerican University of Puerto Rico, graduating with a Juris Doctor in 2001. Quiñones discusses her experiences as a humanist in Puerto Rico, including receiving hate mail and death threats, which she reported to the FBI without action. She highlights the limited organization and acceptance of atheism and humanism locally, despite hosting a regional convention in 2014. Quiñones details challenges in affiliating with larger groups, emphasizing support from figures like Dan Barker. She describes upcoming Latin American humanist conferences, logistical issues, and efforts to foster global unity against politicization. Additionally, she shares personal stories about her atheist son facing religious bullying in school and her growing positive media presence. Initiatives like student essay contests aim to promote humanist values.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What about the hate mail you receive? What has that been like over the years?

Eva Quiñones: I’ve had to call the FBI once due to death threats. They did not feel immediately believable—I don’t generally fear for my life in Puerto Rico. But I did send those messages to the FBI, and they called me, asking, “Can you explain this?” After explaining, they told me they wouldn’t do anything about it. They didn’t consider the threats severe or actionable. I thought, “Okay, fine.”

Over the years, I’ve received three or four threats. I inform authorities so they have it documented in their files, even if they don’t act on it. The FBI keeps a file on it, but that’s as far as it goes.

Jacobsen: How did discussions about atheism and humanism develop in Puerto Rico?

Quiñones: Before 2011, no one was talking about these things. There were some small atheist activities, but I never knew about them, and we still aren’t very organized. My group has lost some popularity for reasons I’ve mentioned before—it’s not considered prestigious to talk about religion right now.

But we did have our moment. For example, we hosted an American Atheists regional convention here in 2014.

Jacobsen: There’s an A.A. chapter in Puerto Rico, right?

Quiñones: We don’t have an official chapter. We were affiliated at one point, but they haven’t paid much attention to us in recent years. David Silverman was very enthusiastic and heavily involved with us. I tried to maintain that relationship, but they didn’t stay engaged.

However, Mandisa Thomas and her group have been involved. Dan Barker from the Freedom From Religion Foundation has been massively supportive. He even spoke at one of my events in Puerto Rico, as did David Silverman. Humanists International was also involved with us to some extent, but American Humanists needed more interest.

It didn’t sit well with people here when they decided to rescind certain awards, like the Humanist of the Year from 20 years ago. We thought it was petty and insignificant, especially since they’d never shown much interest in us.

For a while, there were attempts to involve Latinos in humanist initiatives in a meaningful way. I was contacted—not directly by American Humanists, but by one of their Latin American representatives—to be part of a subdivision. However, it fell apart because there were too many conflicting opinions, and nothing could be solidified into a basic position statement. It’s impossible because we are all so different. Latin American countries have different dynamics, and Latin Americans in the U.S. have different needs and perspectives than those in Latin America.

Plus, American Humanists have yet to show interest in us. There was no outreach, no invitations to collaborate. But other groups were involved, and we accomplished many great things together. I have to give credit to Dan Barker and Annie Laurie Gaylor. David Silverman, until his departure, was very supportive of us. Anything we needed, he was in.

Jacobsen: It sounds like building worldwide unity is difficult.

Quiñones: Yes, but humanism has the potential to unite people because it’s based on ethics, science, free-thinking, and compassion—universal values. Leaders do have to be careful nowadays, but it is possible to create global unity. Many attempts have been made, but they often get politicized, making it challenging. You’ve heard the phrase “herding cats,”right?

Jacobsen: Yes, that’s a common analogy.

Quiñones: It’s difficult and nearly impossible, especially with the current wave of wokeness. Humanism isn’t “woke.” It has a central mission.

Jacobsen: How would you define wokeness? And is there any similarity or overlap with humanism?

Quiñones: There are similarities and overlaps because human flourishing isn’t achieved in just one way. Many factors contribute to flourishing, and individuals within minority groups are affected by their interactions with majorities in particular ways. Humanism can provide guidance and reasoning for addressing these interactions.

So, there is overlap in that humanism can help guide interactions between minorities and majorities and promote better understanding. Humanism emphasizes caring for the individual, whether they’re part of a minority or not. There has to be some overlap, but humanism doesn’t impose acceptance.

Jacobsen: That’s insightful. You’re defining humanism in terms of its approach, which is newer to me. Humanism, as you describe it, doesn’t impose—it asks critical questions, seeks evidence, and applies that evidence to improve human well-being at the individual level, which can then extend to groups and societies. On the other hand, wokeness starts ideologically. It builds forward from there, often collecting grievances rather than working from a positive framework. It’s almost as if both come to similar conclusions but apply solutions differently.

Quiñones: Exactly. Humanism already acknowledges our collective—humanity, people.

Jacobsen: So, that’s our collective. Yes, it’s about avoiding re-racializing one another in the process. When you re-racialize in a “benevolent” way, it’s still problematic. Benevolent racism can be seen as a counterpart to malevolent racism. The nasty kind is the overtly negative, harmful type we often see.

Quiñones: I see. But your collective—your tribe—is humanity.

Jacobsen: You mentioned that events for Latin American free thought organizations happen every three years, right?

Quiñones: Yes, that’s correct. These events happen once every three years. The upcoming one this year will be held in Mexico. The first event was in 2018 in Arequipa, Peru. The second was supposed to happen in 2020, but COVID-19 postponed it, so it was held in September 2022. Now, in 2024, it’s happening in Mexico City. The 2022 event was in Pereira, Colombia, the country’s coffee capital. I appreciate that place every day, all day.

Jacobsen: It’s called the Coffee Axis, right?

Quiñones: Yes, the Coffee Axis—A-X-I-S. Not the “Axis of Evil,” but the axis of coffee growers.

Jacobsen: So, they’re the good guys by default?

Quiñones: They’re pretty great, yes. Unfortunately, I couldn’t attend the 2022 event because I was hospitalized.

Jacobsen: Oh no. What happened?

Quiñones: I had an abscess and an infection that required antibiotics. It wasn’t life-threatening, but it was significant. I’m okay now, but I was more upset about missing the event in Colombia at the time. I had everything set up—Airbnb, transportation, plane tickets. It was expensive, too. But such is life.

Jacobsen: I’m glad you’re okay now.

Quiñones: Thank you. So, the upcoming event in Mexico will be held at the Escuela Nacional de Antropología e Historia (ENAH)—the National School of Anthropology and History. Anthropology, history, and archaeology are significant in Mexico due to its beautiful and extensive pre-Columbian history, with different civilizations in the region that now includes Mexico, Guatemala, and Honduras. Archaeologically, it’s an important area. And Mexico takes pride in its history, which I will enjoy because I love museums.

I love that stuff. So yes, the event will happen, and it will be three days long. It starts on November 13 and runs through the 15th, Wednesday through Friday.  There will be a wide range of speakers from various Latin American countries, including Mexico. There will be well-known journalists, scientists, and thought leaders. Of course, I will speak about nuclear energy, which is interesting considering Mexico’s significant oil production and its role as a petroleum user and exporter.

We’ll have three days of activities. A reception on Tuesday the night before, and a group tour to Puebla is planned for Saturday. I’ll be flying back to Puerto Rico on Sunday. I’m travelling with my partner, son, and another group member here in Puerto Rico. In total, there will be four of us travelling, along with other Puerto Ricans living in the U.S. who will also be attending. There will be speakers from Peru, Colombia, and Argentina, which will be a significant event.

Mexico is known for its prominent atheist movements; about 15 years ago, they hosted an “Atheist in Congress” event, the largest atheist gathering I’ve heard of globally, with around 2,000 people attending. Mexico City is immense—it’s incredible. Puerto Rico could fit into the metropolitan area of Mexico City five or six times over. I’ve never been to Mexico, so I’m excited to meet my best friends from across Latin America and reconnect with those I’ve met at previous events.

Jacobsen: Have you met many of them before?

Quiñones: I’ve met many of them multiple times in the U.S. through other groups. I’m sure you’ve heard of David Tamayo from Hispanic American Freethinkers. He’s a close friend and has been very supportive. We’ve helped each other many times, and he’ll be there, too. It’s going to be a big gathering of freethinkers and atheists. Mexico is a wonderful country, and I’m happy to participate in this event.

Jacobsen: Were other cities considered potential hosts for this conference before Mexico was chosen?

Quiñones: Yes, there were. At the end of the last day of the first conference, I led the conversation about which countries were interested in hosting the next one. Costa Rica, Colombia, and Chile were all potential candidates. I collected all the feedback, and we eventually voted and decided on Colombia for the next event.

I didn’t want to hold the conference in Colombia, even though it was chosen. When I voted, I voted for Costa Rica. First, Costa Rica is the only country in Latin America with a formal agreement with the Vatican to be a Catholic country by governmental decree. So, what better place to hold the event than in a Catholic country? However, with Colombia selected, I still wanted Costa Rica as an option. I’ve been there before, and it’s a beautiful country that everyone should visit.

I preferred Costa Rica because my friends Carlos and David Tamayo cannot visit Colombia. Despite being Colombian, David has certain security clearances from his job that prevent him from visiting specific countries, including Colombia. He had reminded me, “Remember, I can’t visit Colombia.” So that was another reason for my preference.

However, Colombia was chosen as the focal point. David said, “Don’t worry, we’ll go for the next one.” After the second conference, even though I couldn’t attend due to my hospitalization, I was part of the group that evaluated the next host city. We chose Mexico because of their experience hosting high-level events. I knew the organizers and trusted their commitment and expertise. Mexico won the vote.

We’ll decide on the next city on the last day of this conference in Mexico. We’re considering Argentina or Chile to bring it further south and distribute the events more evenly throughout Latin America. I will never propose Puerto Rico because the hotels here are expensive, and the currency exchange rate makes it costly for people from other Latin American countries.

Jacobsen: That makes sense.

Quiñones: People often ask, “Why not host it in Puerto Rico?” I always respond, “You won’t be able to afford to travel here.” Plus, there are visa issues with the U.S., which adds complications. Even some Peruvians cannot travel to Mexico without hurdles.

Jacobsen: Why can’t they?

Quiñones: They need a formal invitation from an organization stamped by the government. They have to submit a proposal explaining why they must travel to Mexico, and then they might get a visa. The Peruvian attendees face challenges, and the organizers have been working hard to issue the necessary documents for travellers from Latin America.

This differs from the European Union, where Schengen agreements make it easier to travel between countries. In the EU, countries agree to the Schengen Area, allowing people to cross borders without visas—like going from France to Germany. But that’s not the case here.

We also deal with that issue. It gives you a sense of the organization needed for meetings in Latin America.

Jacobsen: Yes, I imagine it’s a huge task. I plan to travel to visit different communities. That would be an interesting project—an investigative photojournalism trip to explore humanist communities in various countries. It could be a very cool project.

Quiñones: One of the things we’re doing at the conference is a student essay contest, similar to what Dan Barker has done in the past. We received much interest from students, and my group is sponsoring the cash prize for the winner. I’ll be presenting and reading the winning essay.

Jacobsen: How much is the prize?

Quiñones: First place will receive $300, and second and third place will receive $100 and $50, respectively. The first-place essay will also be published in a highly regarded scientific journalistic magazine. We want to make an impact and are passionate about initiatives like this.

Dan Barker hosted a similar contest here, and we received so many entries—about 150—that we had to split them among six judges for evaluation. It was much work, but involving high school students is rewarding.

Jacobsen: That sounds like a great initiative.

Quiñones: It is. I have a 20-year-old son, and when he was in first grade, there was a thunderstorm, and his teacher said, “That’s God moving furniture around.” My son replied, “Gods don’t have furniture.”

Jacobsen: Good one! What else can a first-grader say?

Quiñones: Even in religious communities, they often find such comments from kids amusing rather than offensive. I’m glad they did in that case. The school was evangelical, although it was supposed to be non-religious. They didn’t pray excessively, but God was present everywhere. Don’t worry—I took him out of that school.

Later, in fifth grade, a Catholic teacher humiliated him for not standing up during the prayer said over the intercom.

One day, a girl defended my son, saying, “He doesn’t need to stand up. He doesn’t believe in that.” The school called me, and it turned into a big deal. The counsellor even had the nerve to say, “Tell your kid not to talk about not believing in God at school.”

I responded, “Let me start by saying he never does. This came up because he was asked. Will you tell all the other kids not to talk about their belief in God at school?”

Jacobsen: Good question.

Quiñones: That ended the conversation. My son doesn’t talk about his beliefs unless he’s asked. It’s different when someone answers a question versus initiating the topic. And as you and I know, especially with American evangelicals and Catholics, it’s typically taught with a different frame of mind.

At this other school, he attended, there was a girl whose parents were Muslim, and she was being bullied. One day, I noticed her clinging to the teacher and asked, “What’s going on? Why is she clinging to you like that?” The teacher, a Christian Puerto Rican woman from Connecticut, explained that a little group of evangelical kids was bullying the girl. This was third or fourth grade—young kids.

The bullying was because the mother was Muslim, wearing a veil and speaking a different language, and the girl herself had an accent. The teacher told me it involved 15 or so kids. I immediately asked, “Is my kid part of that?” She said, “No. He’s nice to her and tries to engage with her.”

I told her, “Remember, that boy is my atheist kid. He’s not into any of this religious nonsense.” The teacher’s eyes widened, and she nodded, saying he tried to calm the girl. But, understandably, the girl didn’t want to talk to him or be friends with anyone because all the kids seemed the same to her. She knew she was different, and it made her cautious.

The fact that other kids bullied her because of religion at that age—eight or nine years old—is sickening. I was proud when the teacher said, “Your son is not involved. He tries to approach her.”

Jacobsen: That’s something to be proud of.

Quiñones: Absolutely. I told the teacher, “Don’t forget—he’s an atheist.” I even gave her my card. So when people ask, I say, “Yes, I am,” and they nod in understanding.

I don’t see anything shocking about it. The opposite would be shocking. I’m often called to appear on TV, and I always say, “I’m the atheist; I’m the humanist.” It’s easier to say “atheist” because people generally know what that means. When I say “humanist,” I have to explain it. But I’ve done TV interviews where I’ve explained humanism, and people get it. I know how to frame it culturally to resonate with people here.

I do a lot of TV and radio, and I’ve noticed that I’m also asked to comment on other topics because people know I’ll provide a non-religious perspective. Many in the media find that refreshing. I’ve been featured on the highest-rated radio show in Puerto Rico numerous times and have built a good relationship with the journalist who hosts it. If I have something to say, I text him and tell him to invite me. He usually sets me up for a 15-minute segment that week.

He teases me about religion for the first 10 minutes, but then he gives me the floor to deliver my message. That’s where I get the death threats, but it’s also where I receive the highest engagement. My clips often have the most comments on the station’s page. The first time I appeared, there were 3,000 comments, and 99% of them were negative—calling me a crazy woman, using slurs, and saying awful things.

Over the years, though, I’ve seen a shift. Now, about 50% of the comments are supportive. People say, “She’s not crazy; she makes sense,” and you can see religious and atheist individuals debating in the comments, defending me. It shows change. Fewer than 50% of the comments are negative, calling me names like “crazy woman” or worse in more colourful Spanish terms.

You can see the change. People get it. People understand if you sit down and patiently explain humanism, secularism, rational thinking, or ways of approaching life without relying on God or the Bible. My favourite example is this: what do you do when you lose your keys? You look for them. You might mumble, “God, help me find them,” but you won’t find them if you don’t look. You have to act. You can thank God afterward, but you’re the one who put them in your hands.

Most religious people live like that, and they get it when I explain it this way. Recently, I was on TV talking about euthanasia and dying with dignity. I’ve done this two or three times already. I start by saying that euthanasia and dying with dignity are not religious issues.

Take that out of your minds right away. Most religious people are for it. Why would God tell one person it’s a sin and tell others it’s a compassionate act? Why would the same God give conflicting messages?

Remove God from the equation, and let’s have a discussion. One religious individual from one sect doesn’t represent the religious beliefs of everyone in Puerto Rico. There are many different spiritual perspectives, and only some are representative.

I often clarify why my viewpoint holds more weight than the specific religious opinions of the person I’m debating. I say, “You’re speaking from your religious framework in your Church. I’m not. My perspective is different, based on principles that aim for better reasoning and outcomes.” That’s what I do.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Eva.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

How to Expand Business in Hospitality

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/25 (Unpublished)

Sean Taylor is an accomplished hospitality executive with over 14 years of experience as CEO, currently leading Taylor Hospitality based in Charlottesville, Virginia. He specializes in change management, project management, and business consulting, focusing on enhancing hotel and club profitability. A graduate of Elon University, Sean emphasizes the importance of ECHO Teamwork: Execution, Caring, Honesty, and Ownership. He has successfully managed high-profile properties like the Virginia International Raceway and The Franklin (formerly Capital Plaza Hotel). Sean is also a thought leader, publishing guides on operational excellence and driving revenue growth in the hospitality industry. Taylor emphasizes their values, ECHO Teamwork: Execution, Caring, Honesty, and Ownership, as central to their restoration efforts. The hotel caters to both business and leisure travellers, offering events like comedy nights and murder mysteries. Notable past guests include Jimmy Carter, Sandra Day O’Connor, Tiger Woods, and Michael Jordan.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let me ensure I have my facts correct. Taylor Hospitality has added the Capital Plaza Hotel in Frankfort, Kentucky, to its portfolio. This is part of a broader strategy to expand its regional presence. The hotel is strategically located on the Bourbon Trail, near the Kentucky Capitol, and offers spacious accommodations along with iconic attractions, such as the Buffalo Trace Distillery.

Today, we are joined by CEO Sean Taylor, who is focused on restoring the hotel’s historic charm. Let’s explore this in more detail. Additionally, the hotel has partnered with Wyndham’s Trademark Collection and has incorporated a Kentucky horse and bourbon theme. Two questions arise: What does the partnership with Wyndham Trademark entail, and how is the Kentucky horse and bourbon theme reflected in the hotel’s design? I am familiar with the Kentucky Derby, but I would love to learn more about this theme.

Sean Taylor: Our partnership involves contracting with Wyndham to soft-brand the hotel as part of their Trademark Collection. This partnership ensures the property is managed under Wyndham’s operations, sales, and marketing platforms. We formed an investment group to purchase the property, which required significant attention. Several million dollars are being invested in the property to bring it up to modern lodging and hospitality standards that today’s travellers expect.

The hotel is conveniently located next to the Buffalo Trace Distillery, a world-renowned bourbon producer. It is on the Bourbon Trail, which spans Lexington, Frankfort, and Louisville — regions known for producing some of the best bourbons globally. The location is also ideal as it is directly adjacent to and across the street from the Kentucky State Capitol. Since Frankfort is the state capital, the area attracts significant government and business activity, and we are thrilled to be a part of that.

Jacobsen: What is the significance of adding the Capital Plaza Hotel to your portfolio?

Taylor: This is a major acquisition for us. The property features 163 guest rooms and 30 luxury apartments on the top floors, in addition to 15,000 square feet of meeting and event space. This large property allows us to expand our capabilities and pursue additional large-scale hotel projects. While we remain committed to the boutique hotel market, this will be one of our largest boutique properties.

Jacobsen: What key themes are incorporated to enhance the hotel’s restoration?

Taylor: This will be a comprehensive renovation and restoration project. All guest rooms will be completely revamped, and two new restaurants will be added to the overall operations. There will also be updated meeting spaces and a new ballroom. A highlight of the project is transforming the pool area into a speakeasy venue where guests can enjoy bourbon in a unique and memorable setting.

The main lobby will be fully redesigned, creating a modern and updated look. In addition, significant structural and foundational maintenance issues that have been neglected in the past will be addressed. We are allocating substantial capital toward preventative maintenance and upgrading all facilities to ensure the property meets and exceeds today’s hospitality standards.

Jacobsen: What makes the Capital Plaza Hotel a flagship destination in the region?

Taylor: Its location in the heart of Kentucky and proximity to key attractions like the Buffalo Trace Distillery and the Kentucky State Capitol makes it a standout property in a beautiful and vibrant area.

Jacobsen: If you’ve ever been in that area of Kentucky, the Bourbon Trail is unique. The Bourbon Trail right now is where Napa Valley was 10 years ago in terms of becoming a destination for alcohol tourism. Some of the best bourbons in the world are distilled right on the Bourbon Trail. Frankfort sits at the center point, surrounded by all these fabulous distilleries. You could make the Capital Plaza, which you are renaming to The Franklin, a central hub where guests can stay and branch out to visit a variety of distilleries, all within a 30- to 40-minute drive.

What values guide your goals around restoration, partnership building, and raising the region’s profile?

Taylor: We have company goals and values called “ECHO Teamwork.” While we do a tremendous amount within the restoration space, our values are centred around people because everything revolves around them.

ECHO stands for:

  • E: Execution – Do what you say you’re going to do and do it in a caring manner.
  • C: Caring – Treat people with care and respect.
  • H: Honesty – Operate with the highest level of integrity. This is crucial, especially when managing other people’s money, as trust is foundational with our owners, investors, and clients.
  • O: Ownership – Own the business, operations, and experience.

Finally, everything revolves around teamwork. It’s about ensuring all the moving parts work in harmony, with everyone pulling their weight to deliver a high-quality experience and make the property perform at its best.

Jacobsen: How do you ensure high-quality service across your properties, especially those under new ownership or in restoration?

Taylor: Good question. We are very much a decentralized company. While we have a home office, most of our workforce operates in the field at our properties. From a service perspective, one property’s quality directly impacts our other properties’ reputation.

We focus heavily on training. We have a digital university that all team members join upon hiring. They are immediately given access to training modules so that by interacting with customers, they understand our standards and what their role requires. This ensures they have a high level of competency before engaging with guests. Our frontline team must be fully prepared, so they’re not learning on the job while interacting with customers. Training is at the heart of what we do daily to ensure our guests’ experiences are second to none.

Jacobsen: You mentioned the distillery and the Bourbon Trail, which reflects an integration with local culture. Is this integration a common practice in your business model?

Taylor: Absolutely. At all our properties, especially in hospitality and hotels, we are responsible for promoting our venues, tourism, and the local area. We actively partner with local businesses, including restaurants, service providers, ski resorts, fly-fishing guides, hiking tour operators, etc.

The goal is to build relationships that drive more people to the area. Whether they come for an activity or service, we also want them to stay in our hotels and dine in our restaurants. This collaborative approach ensures that our properties and the surrounding community benefit from increased tourism and economic activity.

Jacobsen: So, you actively promote the area to drive tourism. What about business travellers versus more regionally local people travelling for a stay? How do you cater to their needs during their time with you?

Taylor: Our sales directors at all locations have two distinct responsibilities. They manage both sides of the coin: group and business travel and the leisure market. These are two completely separate markets. For business travellers, we contract with companies and organizations to host their business events or meetings at our venues or to accommodate their general business travel needs while they’re in the area.

Our sales directors do an effective job of driving this type of business. At the same time, they are equally responsible for finding ways to attract more leisure travellers. This is where collaboration within the team is crucial. The operations team must be on board to create events and programs that entice people to visit our hotels.

For example, at our property in Elkins, West Virginia, the Tiger Hotel hosts events such as comedy nights and murder mystery dinners. They’ve even partnered with a local theatre to perform plays within the hotel. It’s a win-win for everyone. The community and the hotel benefit, as these events bring in business during slower periods. Meanwhile, our marketing and sales teams work hard to promote these events through social media, email campaigns, and other outreach.

The goal is always to raise the public’s awareness of functions and events. This way, when people think about visiting a town, they’ll think of our hotel because they’ve seen so much about it—whether through social media, emails, or recommendations from friends who have attended and enjoyed our events.

Jacobsen: Last question: Who have been some of your famous clients?

Taylor: Oh, wow, famous clients. Over the years, let me think. We’ve hosted Jimmy Carter, Bill Clinton, George Bush, Sandra Day O’Connor, The Eagles, Jimmy Buffett, Tom Watson, Arnold Palmer, Jack Nicklaus, Tiger Woods, and David Duval, to name a few.

In basketball, we’ve had Michael Jordan and Mike Krzyzewski, and I could go on forever about college basketball and professional golf. For example, Ernie Els, Lee Trevino, Freddie Couples, Chi Chi Rodriguez, and Andy North stayed with us.

At one of our properties, 150 PGA Tour members were regulars. This was in Orlando, so it attracted many golf professionals. We’ve also hosted royalty, like the Queen of Saudi Arabia and many Saudi princes.

Other notable names include Ralph Lauren, Terry Bradshaw, and Roger Staubach. The list of interesting people who have stayed at our properties is like a who’s who of the industry.

Jacobsen: That’s impressive! Thank you for sharing. It’s noon here now, so I’ll let you go. Sean, it was a pleasure speaking with you.

Taylor: Thank you so much for your time.

Jacobsen: I’ll have a transcript ready in about four hours and send it to you.

Taylor: That sounds great.

Jacobsen: Perfect. Take care!

Taylor: You too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

California Healthcare Worker Strike

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/24

*Interview conducted December 26, 2024.*

The National Union of Healthcare Workers in the United States. They highlighted systemic issues during the October 2024 strike by Southern California’s mental health workers, including appointment delays, cancellations, and inadequate staffing. They criticized Kaiser’s insufficient contingency plan and its failure to meet state-mandated mental health care standards. They noted NUHW’s push for legislative reforms, such as SB 221 and SB 855, to enhance mental health care access. The union’s demands include equitable pay, restored pensions, and sufficient time for therapists to manage non-appointment tasks, addressing chronic understaffing and high turnover. They also emphasized the vital role of therapist-patient relationships and urged systemic changes to ensure parity between mental and physical health care services. NUHW’s efforts aim to hold Kaiser accountable and improve care for its 9.4 million California members.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How has Kaiser Permanente responded to the ongoing strike? 

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Kaiser has responded to this strike similarly to how it responded to a strike by mental health therapists in Northern California, for which it was cited for illegally canceling 111,803 individual and group therapy appointments. 

State law requires Kaiser to continue providing mental health care during a strike, just as it would be required to maintain medical care. But since the strike in Southern California began on Oct. 21, NUHW has filed complaints against Kaiser documenting instances of the HMO:

Forcing patients onto 30-day appointment waitlists; Cancelling psychotherapy groups for thousands of patients; Failing to adequately staff its hospice services; and Sending patients with severe conditions to an outside provider unequipped to care for them.

Kaiser’s state-mandated contingency plan for providing timely and appropriate mental health care during an ongoing strike by its behavioral health professionals was also woefully inadequate, without any detail for how the state’s largest HMO is providing critical mental health services for its 4.8 million members from San Diego to Bakersfield.

The 3-page document submitted to the California Department of Managed Health Care just prior to the start of the strike, provides no information about the volumes of replacement services Kaiser anticipates having to provide and no information about how many workers from outside of Kaiser can be relied on to provide it. The plan itself is barely over a page with a one-page introduction.

Jacobsen: What about the allegations of inadequate mental health care?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Last week, four Kaiser patients spoke about their inadequate access to clinically appropriate mental health care in a recorded zoom press conference

More than 500 Kaiser mental health patients have submitted their stories to kaiserdontdeny.org since October 2024 and more than 3,000 have submitted since 2018.

Facing two state investigations, Kaiser agreed to a $200 million Settlement Agreement that included a $50 million fine for violating California mental health parity laws and agreed to pay an additional $150 million to support mental health initiatives throughout the state last year.

The giant HMO, which has 9.4 million members in California, had been previously fined for similar violations, but this time Kaiser acknowledged its mental health services were understaffed and that patients were suffering because of it.

Kaiser understaffed its clinics, which resulted in appointment wait times that exceeded the 10-business day standard set by NUHW’s landmark law SB 221. https://californiahealthline.org/news/article/california-law-aims-to-strengthen-access-to-mental-health-services/

Instead of abiding by the law, Kaiser has started programs to cut appointment times for some patients to less than 30 minutes, far shorter than clinical standards.

Jacobsen: What is the National Union of Healthcare Workers demanding to address the staffing and care issues?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: NUHW sponsored SB 221 and SB 855 to improve access to mental health care and has filed dozens of complaints with state agencies against Kaiser. Our strike in Northern California in 2022 contributed to Kaiser’s $200 million settlement agreement between Kaiser and the California Department of Managed Health Care, which included a record $50 million fine. In the current contract negotiations, we’re fighting to make Kaiser treat mental health care on par with its other services. Our demands are a prerequisite for Kaiser to satisfy the terms of its Settlement Agreement and “transform” its mental health delivery services. 

We’ve also connected with Kaiser patients directly via kaiserdontdeny.org to hear their stories of mental health care delays and denials and have shared their stories with regulators. We work hard to amplify the voices of the most impacted which are the workers and the patients.

Seeking Equity for Mental Health Care: to improve staffing levels and reduce turnover that disrupts patient care, Kaiser’s Southern California mental health professionals are seeking a contract that includes the same working conditions as their fellow Kaiser mental health providers in Northern California and comparable pay and benefits as their colleagues who don’t work in mental health. However, despite being under a state order to undertake “transformational change” of its mental health delivery services, Kaiser has so far rejected the workers’ three primary proposals.

Patient Care Time. Southern California workers are seeking the same amount of time (7 hours per week) to perform critical patient care duties that can’t be done during appointments as their counterparts working for Kaiser in Northern California. The lack of time to respond to patient calls and emails, prepare for appointments and devise treatment plans is a major reason why therapists leave Kaiser, contributing to the HMO’s chronic understaffing issues.

Fair Pay. Workers are seeking to close the gap between themselves and therapists that provide medical care at Kaiser, who make up to 40 percent higher salaries.

Restoration of pensions. Workers are seeking to restore pensions that nearly all Kaiser employees still receive, but were taken away from newly hired mental health professionals in Southern California starting a decade ago. More than 70 percent of Kaiser mental health professionals in Southern California do not have a pension, and Kaiser data shows that they are twice as likely to leave Kaiser.

Jacobsen: How does Kaiser’s mental health therapist-to-patient ratio compare to industry standards?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Not an apples to apples comparison because Kaiser is fairly rare in having an in-house network directly employed by Kaiser itself. What we do know is that in comparing Kaiser’s two California regions, Kaiser staffs a significantly higher ratio of therapists in Northern California than in Southern California. That means more Northern California patients get the benefits of Kaiser’s integrated model of care instead of being sent outside the Kaiser system.

Jacobsen: What are the long-term effects of high turnover among mental health professionals at Kaiser?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Mental health depends greatly on the relationship between the therapist and the patient. If Kaiser members are bounced from therapist to therapist, as indicated by many patients who’ve reached out with us to share their stories that relationship never forms, OR that relationship is severed because Kaiser can’t retain therapists, it makes it harder for patients to make progress.

Jacobsen: How does Kaiser’s refusal to restore pensions contribute to the ongoing staffing crisis?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: Kaiser eliminated pensions for mental health professionals in Southern California starting in 2015. Currently, more than 70 percent of mental health professionals at Kaiser in SoCal do not have pensions. Those workers were twice as likely to leave employment with Kaiser as their colleagues that still do have pensions according to Kaiser’s own employment data. That data is here in this fact sheet: https://nuhw.org/wp-content/uploads/Kaiser-Fact-Sheet.pdf

Jacobsen: What steps can be taken to ensure parity between mental health and physical health services within Kaiser Permanente?

National Union of Healthcare Workers: There are two tracks. When it comes to state enforcement, Kaiser is required to submit a state-approved Corrective Action Plan to address the deficiencies cited by the state investigations that led to the settlement agreement. Kaiser was supposed to have had this plan approved by the state early this year, but it still hasn’t received approval. Here is a fact sheet about the Settlement Agreement: https://nuhw.org/wp-content/uploads/Kaiser_PsychSocial_Strike_SettlementFAQ_Leaflet_1_20241021-2.pdf

The state needs to ensure that Kaiser produces a Corrective Action Plan that truly results in a systemic overhaul and improvement of its mental health delivery system and that Kaiser puts it into practice.

The other track is with workers. Kaiser’s Corrective Action Plan will never be worth the paper it’s printed on if it doesn’t finally start treating mental health care as equally important to its medical services. The contract provisions being sought by the striking workers are prerequisites for making that happen.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jessica Henning & Liz Sadler, Wichita Oasis

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/23

Liz Sadler and Jessica Henning talk about Wichita Oasis, part of the Oasis Network founded in the 2010s. Liz shared how the group originated from Skeptics in the Pub, while Jessica emphasized its role as a progressive, secular community. Wichita Oasis offers activities focused on community, education, and service, such as movie nights, speaker events, and local outreach. Despite challenges like COVID-19 and maintaining diversity, the group has grown steadily, providing an inclusive space for nonreligious families. Both highlighted the importance of filling the void left by leaving religion, fostering meaningful connections without a religious framework.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Liz and Jessica from Wichita Oasis. This group emerged in the 2010s as part of the Oasis Network, which grew alongside the Sunday Assembly. The Ethical Society of St. Louis and similar movements preceded them slightly but also gained attention during the New Atheist wave.

So, how did you two get involved with Oasis in Wichita, and how has it evolved? Liz, would you like to go first?

Liz Sadler: Wichita Oasis started when someone in our local community, who had heard about the Oasis Network, approached a group I was part of called Skeptics in the Pub. They were interested in starting an Oasis chapter in Wichita and asked if anyone would like to help. A few members from Skeptics in the Pub joined to help start it.

I wasn’t a founding member, but I’ve been involved since its inception. While I’ve attended from the beginning, my level of involvement has varied over time. I’ve actively participated since it was established.

Jacobsen: So, your connection with Oasis started in a skeptic-adjacent space.

Sadler: Yes, that’s right.

Jacobsen: Was it also an opportunity for your family?

Jessica Henning: Definitely. My husband and I were looking for a community to fit into as a family. We attended Oasis a few times, along with other groups, to see where we felt most comfortable. Initially, it wasn’t the best fit because our child was younger, but now that he’s older, it has worked out wonderfully.

We were searching for a space to be ourselves. This progressive, like-minded community met regularly but wasn’t centred around church or religion. It was important that our son could make friends with other children from nonreligious or open-minded families.

Jacobsen: That sounds like a meaningful experience. I remember a story from an old friend of mine, Dale, who’s in her seventies now. When her daughter had a young child, I saw them altering children’s books to remove religious content. They lived in an evangelical community and didn’t want religious narratives to shape her granddaughter’s worldview unintentionally.

I thought it was excessive then, but looking back, I can understand their perspective. Anyway, that’s a tangent. To bring it back, what does Oasis mean to you?

Henning: Oasis has been about filling the gap many people feel when they leave religion—especially Christianity, which often provides an integrated community and support system. When people leave that environment, they often wonder, What now?

Oasis has provided us with a welcoming, inclusive space to build relationships and find support without the religious framework. For my family, it’s been a place to connect with others who share our values and build a community where we truly feel we belong.

Jacobsen: Even though, at least from one story, it was simply going from skeptics to connecting with another community.

Henning: Yes. Adulting is hard for me, and it’s nice to have a network and a place to go where the people are fantastic. I’ve made good friends there. There are only a few places I enjoy going to that offer that. Wichita has some great places—if you’re into music or D&D, there are many clubs for different things—but finding a community with a little bit of everything is rare.

We play board games, go to movies, and do many things together as a community without centring around just one specific activity or topic. It’s great for that. As I said, Wichita has many places and other groups with great people. There’s even a progressive First UU Church, a good fit for some people.

But for us, it was a little too religious or spiritual. It was about finding a place to be myself, connect with like-minded people, and be my whole self—not just one aspect of myself tailored to fit a particular group.

Liz Sadler: To piggyback off that, much of the same is true for me. I started attending because the skeptic’s group was something I went to monthly. Then, this other thing, Oasis, started up. I thought, “Okay, I’ll check that out too,” and I started going.

At first, the crowd consisted mostly of the same people, but over time, it shifted, and now it’s mostly different folks. I stopped going to the skeptic’s group but kept going to Oasis. The intent behind Oasis feels different—it’s more about being a community than a club.

When you approach it with that mindset, it feels less rigid and more genuine. We have few big opportunities to have each other’s backs, but when they’ve come up, we’ve stepped up. For example, during a terrible freeze, someone’s pipes burst. Her dad was able to fix it but needed money for materials. We organized a fundraiser, raised the funds quickly, and sorted it.

That’s what Oasis is about. There’s no single thing that defines us. Sure, many of us are nerds and neurodivergent, but that’s not the focus. We’re here to be a community of people who share similar values. I keep going because it’s what I do now—where my people and friends are.

Jacobsen: That’s healthy because you’re following a path that aligns with how people often find and engage with communities.

When I did a group interview with the Atheist Society of Kenya—their founder, executive director, and several members—a lot came out of that discussion. For many African humanists and atheists, their experiences are starkly different. They’re often called satanic, possessed, witches, or worse, and those accusations can have serious consequences.

Harrison Mumia, for example, shared that he lost his job at a bank because he publicly endorsed atheism.

Henning: That shows up for me, too—thinking about those broader challenges.

Jacobsen: For the resources they have, given the challenges African free thinkers typically face, the Atheist Society of Kenya managed to grow to about 120 members. That’s all right, considering the circumstances.

Henning: Wow.

Jacobsen: Our stories are so different. Wanting to be your whole self is a very different narrative from losing your job at the bank and being called satanic. I’m glad you two have had a much easier time and were able to integrate and find a community for yourselves in a positive way.

What kinds of activities do you do in your Oasis?

Sadler: I’ll let Jess take that one because she handles more of it than I do.

Henning: Sure. We do a mix of activities focused on community building, education, and service projects. For community building, we do things like movie nights, board game days, and Jackbox game sessions.

On the educational side, we bring in speakers or discuss relevant topics. For example, we’ve had a firefighter give a talk on fire safety, and a nurse teach us how to recognize the signs of a stroke—which, incidentally, came in handy for someone recently.

Jacobsen: That’s great!

Henning: Yes, it’s been very helpful. So, we mix educational programming with community-building activities. We also do service projects, like park cleanups or working with the McKinney-Vento program at our local school district. Through that program, we’ve created snack bags for homeless teens attending local schools.

So, those three elements—community, education, and service—are the foundation of our programming.

Jacobsen: That’s fantastic. Learning about fire safety or stroke recognition is much more practical and useful. It reminds me of a Midwest comedian, Jeff Allen. He’s not as prominent as Jeff Foxworthy but well-known in certain circles.

He talks about how he came to his Christian faith through the Book of Ecclesiastes of all things. That’s such an unusual and deeply reflective book.

Henning: It’s one of my favourites.

Jacobsen: “Meaningless, meaningless…”

Henning: Exactly!

Jacobsen: “It’s all meaningless.” His account is that God reached him through Ecclesiastes. His joke is, “God reached you through Ecclesiastes?” That’s less practical than fire safety, stroke identification, and trash pickup. Those are much more useful. How big is your community, and what does it look like?

Henning: It has varied in size over the years. When it first started, and I attended on and off, there were 40 to 50 people. Over time, there were natural ebbs and flows. Then COVID hit, which made things difficult because everything had to move online.

I wasn’t involved much during that period, but the community tried to stay connected through Zoom calls and similar efforts. When we returned to meeting in person, the group had dwindled to about 10 to 15 weekly attendees.

We’re back up to around 20 attendees each week, though it’s different from the 20 people every time. Overall, a larger group of about 30 to 35 attend semi-regularly. We’ve been growing over the last two years, particularly following the elections, bringing more people looking for community and local engagement.

Jacobsen: Would having a dedicated building with tax-exempt status or government and grant funding for community activities help Oasis grow and offer more services?

Henning: We’re already a 501(c)(3) nonprofit benefiting from tax-exempt status. People who donate can take a tax deduction, which is helpful. But we’re still small and need to leverage more of those privileges.

We don’t have a building or salaried employees, so we volunteer everything. We could grow significantly with a dedicated space or even one salaried staff member. 

Sadler: With more resources, we could host more events, bring in additional speakers, and expand our outreach efforts.

For example, we could have someone manage email lists, make calls to spread the word about events, and plan activities. That would help us draw in more people.

Jacobsen: You could find someone like a retired accountant named Beth who’d be conscientious about everything.

Henning: [Laughing].

Jacobsen: Does the local Kansas culture influence Oasis’s style? Does it affect the music you play, the topics you discuss, or anything else?

Henning: Wichita feels like it’s trying to be progressive, but it’s still very center-right politically, even for a bigger city. We’re not like Austin, Texas—a blue dot in a sea of red—but we’re working on it.

People seek out Oasis here to find a sense of progressiveness and like-mindedness. I spoke with one member who moved from California. She didn’t feel the need to join a group there because the culture already aligned with her values, and she found it easy to make friends. But here in Wichita, the culture is more conservative, so groups like Oasis provide a much-needed space for people to connect.

Sadler: Kansas culture doesn’t specifically influence how we pick speakers or plan events. Still, it does shape why people are looking for a community like this in the first place.

When picking speakers, we focus more on whether their message aligns with our goals of community-mindedness or education. Does it fit within our values? Would people be interested in hearing them?

We don’t spend much time worrying about what everyone else might think. If you don’t attend Wichita Oasis, you may not even know it exists, so I’m not too worried about potential blowback. There have been some people who’ve reached out.

Jacobsen: I might be one of the few people who’ve reached out to Oasis chapters, Sunday Assemblies, and Satanic Temple groups to ask if they’d be interested in doing interviews.

Sadler: There was a time at our previous location when we discussed ways to attract more people. Someone suggested putting flyers on neighbourhood doors.

However, we hesitated because we didn’t know the neighbourhood well. It might have been a religious area, and we were concerned that seeing the word “secular” might lead some to think “Satan worshippers.” For some fundamentalist groups, “secular” is still a dirty word.

Ultimately, we decided not to pursue that option, partly because we weren’t sure it would be effective and partly because we wanted to avoid potential backlash.

Henning: We’ve tried to include local speakers to highlight the history of Wichita and Kansas. For example, we had someone from Humanities Kansas talk about the women behind the Brown v. Board of Education lawsuit, which originated in Kansas.

That kind of history is fascinating and helps us connect to the culture and community around us. However, I wouldn’t say Kansas culture plays a huge role in shaping our programming.

Jacobsen: Do you get any hate mail? If so, what does it say?

Henning: The worst hate mail we’ve received is, “If you meet every week, aren’t you a church?” Which is… a weird critique.

Jacobsen: That’s an odd take.

Henning: If it’s not their vibe, that’s fine. But no, we rarely get negative feedback. Most people are positive or neutral when we explain who we are and what we do.

Jacobsen: That’s nice. You’re leaning into Unitarian Universalist territory, where almost no one has beef with them.

Henning: [Laughing] Almost no one in the universe seems to have an issue with them.

Jacobsen: Do you collaborate with local religious groups of a more progressive persuasion or other freethought groups when you want to organize larger events or activism in the area?

Henning: Yes, we’re trying to get back into that. It petered over time, but we have a meeting next month to bring some progressive groups together to discuss a few projects—Project 2025 being one of them.

Right now, we share events that other groups will enjoy. For example, if a particular speaker is coming that might interest other groups, we’ll share that information.

Charles, from the humanist group, is always wonderful. They have a monthly humanist meeting at the Unitarian church, and he always shares those events with our group. Hence, we know what’s coming up. A bit of informal collaboration is happening, but we’re aiming for more intentional collaboration in the future.

Jacobsen: It’s interesting how you mentioned this effort had tapered off for a while. Over the past few decades in the United States and Canada—where I’m based—the trend, if you draw a line of best fit, has been a consistent increase in the number of atheists, agnostics, humanists, and progressively non-theistic individuals.

So, aside from COVID, what would you attribute this dip in participation to? Given the growing nonreligious demographic in the U.S., you’d expect more people to join.

Henning: COVID changed everything about how people interact—it shifted the culture, even for hobbies and social groups. It disrupted the landscape, and it took us a while to adapt and find where the need was.

Even as people started emerging from COVID-19, there was still much fear about meeting in person. Navigating those challenges as a volunteer-run group with access to the latest research or resources made things easier. We’ve had to be cautious about how we approached returning to normal.

Sadler: I wouldn’t call COVID a blip for Oasis—it was a brick wall. We had to immediately switch to doing everything online. But by the end of the workweek, people were already burned out from Zoom and didn’t want to join yet another online meeting for Oasis.

We stayed online for over a year, and it wasn’t until August 2021 that we started meeting in person again.

Another hurdle was that the place we were leasing moved just as we considered returning to in-person meetings. So, we had to find a new venue, which delayed our ability to transition back to in-person gatherings even longer.

Those combined challenges—fear of meeting in person, burnout from virtual events, and logistical issues with finding a new location—made it harder to rebuild the community after COVID.

The thing we realized was that we had to go back in person.

[Sadler’s cat joins the call.]

Sadler\: They say hello!

Henning: [Laughing] Hello, Mila. We realized we needed to return in person because our Zoom attendance was circling the drain. It wasn’t a case of everyone moving online for a while and returning in person. Some people returned, but fewer and fewer showed up online over time. When we transitioned back to in-person meetings, we started rebuilding from there. 

You going to come up here, Mila, or what?

Jacobsen: [Laughing] You’re reminding me of that scene from National Lampoon’s Christmas Vacation—the cat in the box from the grandmother.

Henning: I’ve only seen that movie once, so I don’t remember it well.

Jacobsen: Oh, there’s a part where they hand the box over to Clark Griswold, and it starts shaking like crazy. The mom brought random stuff—like Jell-O, an old cake, and even the cat—in little boxes.

Henning: [Laughing] That’s great. 

Jacobsen: So, back to Oasis—what else should I ask? Much of online secular culture tends to be male-dominated. For instance, the ex-Muslim community was predominantly men for a long time, though that has started to shift. How do you see gender dynamics in Oasis and the local secular community, especially regarding community building?

Henning: That’s a good question. Wichita has an atheist group, and while it tends to lean male, our Oasis community is closer to gender parity. We’re not doing anything special or unique. Still, Wichita has a lot of badass women, so that helps!

Jacobsen: [Laughing] There you go! We also have to set realistic expectations. We talk about the 50/50 gender balance, but hitting 40/60 is often a reasonable green zone for many communities. Context plays a big role, however. For instance, in one of the African groups you mentioned, the approximate number of women in their group was zero. That’s true—different societal and cultural pressures affect these dynamics.

Henning: Yes, we’re pretty gender diverse, which is great. However, I’ve always been frustrated that we’re not more racially diverse. We’ve been trying to address that shortcoming, but I need to figure out how to fix it.

Do we need to market to wider groups? We’re working on that, but I still feel uncertain about the best way to make our community more inclusive racially. I’ve always felt frustrated by this.

Jacobsen: That’s a common issue. I’ve heard similar frustrations from people like Dan Barker, Mandisa Thomas, and Bolaji Alonge in Nigeria.

Henning: Yes, it’s pervasive. We all need to work on it as secular communities continue to grow and evolve.

Jacobsen: So, he’s in Nigeria. He’s an artist and photographer. Mandisa and Dan Barker went to Nigeria for an arts festival—the first for secular groups in the country. There aren’t many people like that.

There’s Ayanna Watson, Mandisa, Sikivu Hutchinson, and Candace Gorham, the new president of the American Humanist Association. But there are few leading voices in these spaces.

Even as important as she is, even Sikivu Hutchinson gives much credit to Anthony Pinn. But in general, the number of prominent voices is an issue. Another challenge is that the African American population in the United States, from an outsider’s view, is overwhelmingly religious. The pressure to stay in the community—or to stay quiet if you’re outside of it as an atheist—is much greater.

So, it becomes layered in several ways. Not every case, obviously, but the trend lines point to those challenges. I’m glad at least to have tried to reach out.

What do you think? Is there anything I missed? 

Henning: Are you part of a secular, atheist, or nonreligious community?

Jacobsen: Well, internationally, for a while, yes. I was on the board of Humanist Canada and part of Young Humanists International, which is affiliated with Humanists International.

We were transitioning from the International Humanist and Ethical Union (IHEU) to the International Humanist and Ethical Youth Organization (IHEYO), so I had many international friends and still do. Throughout the year, I keep intermittent contact with people doing important work in writing, journalism, art, and activism.

Locally, however? Not really. I grew up in Fort Langley, British Columbia, Canada. That’s where Trinity Western University is located—the largest private university in Canada. It’s an evangelical Christian university.

Henning: So, something similar to Liberty University in the United States but on a Canadian scale?

Jacobsen: Correct. It’s evangelical in orientation and gets some benefits, like tax exemptions. It was about five minutes from where I lived.

They had a Supreme Court case regarding a proposed law school, which they lost 7–2. The issue was that students, staff, administration, and faculty needed to sign a covenant stating they wouldn’t engage in premarital sex, LGBTQ+ relationships, drinking, or any behaviour contrary to evangelical beliefs. Essentially, anyone who doesn’t believe as they do is condemned to “conscious eternal torment,” in their own words.

After the court case, they made the covenant mandatory for everyone except students, making it optional for them. Of course, cultural pressure still pushes students to sign.

Henning: That sounds intense.

Jacobsen: It was the community I grew up in. I joke that I either ended up in the wrong profession or that alternate universes passed me by. I was meant to be an evangelical youth pastor playing acoustic guitar or a member of the Mormon Tabernacle Choir. [Laughing] I know how I look!

But, alternate realities aside, I went into journalism and interviewed many atheists.

Henning: How did you connect to secularism, given that background?

Jacobsen: My experience was disparate. Growing up in that environment, there wasn’t any local secular community—it was hush-hush. I gained access to these ideas and communities when I started writing and getting involved in journalism.

Of course, I blame the British. [Laughing] Before this, I was focused on ethical and sustainable fashion journalism.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time. I appreciate you telling me about Wichita. If I’m ever in the area, I’ll send an email so we can meet for coffee.

Henning: Sounds good!

Jacobsen: Thank you again!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Prof. Sari Van Anders on Feminism, Gender, Sex, and Desire

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/22

Dr. Sari van Anders is the Canada 150 Research Chair in Social Neuroendocrinology, Sexuality, and Gender/Sex and Professor of Psychology, Gender Studies, and Neuroscience at Queen’s University. Dr. van Anders has published about 100 papers with research that sets out new ways to conceptualize, understand, measure, and map gender/sex, sexual diversity, and sexuality and also provides unique tools and theories for feminist and queer bioscience, especially within social neuroendocrinology and studies of testosterone. Dr. van Anders’ work has been recognized with the 2013 Janet Taylor Spence Award for Transformative Early Career Contributions from the Association for Psychological Science, the 2014 Frank Beach Young Investigator Award from the Society for Behavioral Neuroendocrinology, the 2016 and 2020 Distinguished Publication Award from the Association for Women in Psychology, the 2019 George A. Miller Award for an Outstanding Recent Article on General Psychology from APA Division 1, the 2012 Ira and Harriet Reiss Theory Award from the Foundation for the Scientific Study of Sexuality, the 2016 Committee on Women in Psychology Leadership Award from the American Psychological Association, the 2022 Distinguished Scientific Contribution Award from the Society for Sexual Orientation and Gender Diversity (APA Division 44), and more. Dr. van Anders has also been named one of 50 Distinguished Sexual and Gender Health Revolutionaries from the University of Minnesota’s Program in Human Sexuality and a Member of the Royal Society of Canada’s College of New Scholars. Dr. van Anders is committed to progressive transformation efforts for academic spaces and beyond. Van Anders emphasized that testosterone, often linked to masculinity, reflects social experiences, not innate biology. Her work explores how societal roles, heteronormativity, and household inequities influence sexual desire and hormone levels. Rejecting binary and deterministic frameworks, she highlights the dynamic interplay of gender and sex. The steroid-peptide theory further examines how hormones like testosterone and oxytocin shape behaviours outside traditional gendered assumptions. Her goal is to advance inclusive, empirical, and justice-oriented research, transforming societal understanding of gender/sex.

Scott Douglas. Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Sari van Anders. How did you become interested in gender, sex, and the various aspects of this deeply human topic?

Prof. Sari van Anders: I have been interested in feminism for most of my life. When I went to university, I became curious about understanding evolution, sex, and gender. Over time, I developed a stronger interest in feminist science and eventually worked to integrate all of these areas. Surprisingly, I also found myself drawn to the study of hormones.

If you are interested in hormones and psychology, it almost inevitably leads back to gender, sex, and sexuality. I became fascinated with how these areas interconnect.

Jacobsen: How do you integrate feminist and queer theories with psychology and sex? That’s a broad area, so how do you connect these elements? How do you approach this formally?

van Anders: During my undergraduate and graduate studies, I read extensively about feminist science studies and emerging queer scholarship. Most of this reading was self-directed. There wasn’t much available on how to conduct feminist science; it was largely focused on theoretical critiques of science.

I used those critiques and my growing scientific practice to develop an approach.To that end,  I incorporate feminist and queer perspectives into how I study and select research topics. Not every project integrates all of these elements, however. For instance, some projects focus on topics like porn or desire, but they are always explored through a feminist and queer lens.

Some projects involve hormones, while others do not. I am particularly interested in how social contexts—related to sexuality, gender, power, and oppression—shape our experiences, including how they influence our sexuality and even our hormones. I’m also intrigued by the fundamental ways we conceptualize gender, sex, sexuality, and hormones like testosterone.

Much of what we think we know—our theories, concepts, and categories—is based on non-empirical foundations or biased starting points. My goal is to create empirical theories and knowledge that address injustice and are inclusive and applicable to everyone, not just those who fit normative standards.

Jacobsen: How do societal roles—whether imposed overtly or subtly—affect sexual desire and, in turn, influence hormone production? Does this alter levels of testosterone, estrogen, or stress hormones? How does this process work?

van Anders: We’ve done some work on how sexual context might impact testosterone. I’ll give you two examples. The first example is that we find sexual thoughts increase testosterone. When people are assigned to have sexual thoughts, their testosterone levels increase.

This finding challenges the common assumption that hormones drive sexuality—that testosterone levels are the cause or influence on desire and sexuality. While I’m not saying there’s no relationship in that direction, the reverse relationship is much more strongly supported by empirical evidence. Sexual contexts are more likely to influence testosterone.

Of course, people of various genders and sexes do not access or encounter sexuality in the same way. Some people are taught that sexual thoughts are normal and normative, while others are taught that sexual thoughts are sinful, dirty, or appropriate only for people of another gender/sex. Accordingly, even something as seemingly simple as sexual thoughts is heavily gendered.

I’ve also done work on how gendered experiences themselves might change testosterone in a more general sense. Most people know that, on average, men have higher testosterone levels than women. However, there’s not much research on testosterone levels in non-binary people, so I’ll focus here on binary genders and sexes.

People often assume that testosterone differences between men and women reflect innate sex differences. However, some of my work calls that assumption into question. For example, could our gendered experiences overlap with phenomena that are evolutionarily salient for testosterone? Society pushes people to engage in activities aligned with gender norms, and ironically, those activities often increase or decrease testosterone in ways that align with those norms.

What we think of as sex differences may reflect, at least in part, gendered experiences. This is one of the reasons I use the term “gender/sex.” If we look at something like testosterone, we assume it reflects innate biological or evolved sex differences. However, my research, along with that of others, suggests that testosterone may reflect social experiences.

For instance, the higher testosterone levels observed in men on average may not necessarily represent a purely natural process. Instead, they might reflect how we live and adhere to gendered expectations.

Jacobsen: What does this mean for the categories or terms we use? Could we be heading toward a future where terms like “gender” and “sex” become outmoded, especially if there’s this fluid overlap between what we currently consider innate biological or evolved traits?

van Anders: Yeah, that’s a great question. Many of us work to make clear how gender and sex are often entangled—intertwined or tied up with each other. This doesn’t mean that inequities in roles, such as in the home or workplace, can be justified as evolved differences. Historically, some have argued that women have “just evolved to be nurturing,” so it’s not an inequity that they do more caring labour, for example. But that’s not what this is about.

This isn’t about justifying inequities by arguing that they’re biological, so we don’t need to address them. Instead, the concept of gender/sex is about acknowledging how our biological bodies are not immune to gendered processes.

Traditionally, people tend to put sex, nature, and hormones on one side and gender, culture, and nurture on the other. Gender/sex, and this way of thinking, is about recognizing how intertwined and entangled they can be.

As for the future, do I envision a time where we no longer use terms like “gender” and “sex” or where terms like “man,” “woman,” and “non-binary person” become irrelevant? I don’t anticipate that happening. At least for now, gender/sex is deeply embedded in many people’s lives—whether they are binary, non-binary, transgender, cisgender, or something else. Gender is a significant part of the lived experiences of many, though not everyone; some people are agender.

I envision instead a broader understanding of the overlap between gender and sex. For example, many aspects of what we think of as “sex” or “nature” —immune function, hormones, neural processes, bone density, and cardiac function—are shaped by social experiences. When we study differences in health patterns across genders, we often find these differences reflect lived experiences, oppression, and life trajectories rather than purely genetic or in-utero processes.

Jacobsen: I sense that this creates a constellation of data where there’s significant overlap or “mushiness” between categories but also areas where they remain somewhat distinct. Where would you identify the greatest areas of mushiness and the greatest areas of distinctiveness within the categories we traditionally use?

van Anders: One of the interesting things is how we define gender, sex, and related categories such as “man,” “woman,” “girl,” “boy,” or “non-binary person.” These definitions have shifted over time and continue to evolve. For instance, in some cultures, a woman who has never given birth might not be considered a “full” woman, while in other cultures, that characteristic is irrelevant to the definition of womanhood.

This variability shows us that what qualifies someone for a category—whether related to gender or sex—changes over time. Even with things like testosterone or traits as seemingly trivial as liking the colour pink, there have been shifts in whether these are seen as aspects of gender, sex, or neither. Historically, and even now, pink has been placed in both categories—or seen as just a colour unrelated to either.

The dividing lines between these concepts are constantly shifting and highly dynamic. What goes into each category and where the lines are drawn is not static.

As for where there might be clear-cut distinctions, that’s more of an empirical question. In terms of hard lines between gender and sex, there’s very little of sex that gender cannot influence. To use a metaphor, sex is a pie with many fingers in it. However, there are aspects of gender where it might not be necessary to consider sex.

For example, when addressing gender inequities in pay, we don’t need to bring evolved differences to explain disparities. At the same time, completely excluding biological realities, such as pregnancy, lactation, or chestfeeding, has historically led to further inequities for those affected. So, while gender analysis might suffice in many areas, ignoring or excluding sex entirely can be problematic.

I wouldn’t call the lines between gender and sex “mushy,” as that term often implies unfounded or overly flexible boundaries. Instead, I would describe them as dynamic and porous—reflecting a deep interactivity between the two.

Jacobsen: Deep interactivity.

Van Anders: Yes.

Jacobsen: Rather than mushy. What about heteronormativity and its psychological effects—how people internalize societal expectations about what they’re supposed to do, which then interacts with the psychology of what they think they have to do? This external and internal interplay, acted out over the developmental lifespan, could impact hormone production and even gross anatomical differences in the brain. How is research progressing in understanding this dynamic?

van Anders: We research heteronormativity, and one of the areas we’re particularly interested in is its impact on desire. This is a topic where all my interests converge. People often assume that desire reflects testosterone levels and is something innate—either you have a strong drive, which reflects high testosterone, or you don’t. Similarly, if someone has low desire, people might think it’s due to low testosterone, requiring a pill. Others might suggest mindfulness or stress reduction, which can also play a role.

However, our research has been examining how gender inequities in the household, often tied to heteronormativity, significantly impact desire. This isn’t a new idea—feminists, especially women, have long argued that inequities in daily life influence sexual desire. Yet, there’s a persistent “zombie idea” that desire is purely hormonal or physiological, which remains oddly resistant to evidence against it.

Our research and others’ findings suggest that gender inequities in household labour directly reduce desire in women partnered with men. This supports some of the theories we’ve developed. We’re also exploring related areas, such as gender differences in leisure. For example, no woman aspires to spend her life making dental appointments for her kids or cleaning the countertop for the millionth time.

Hormones come into this as well. Heteronormativity can create problematic dynamics for women in relationships with men, as it often positions women as caretakers or even “mothers” to their male partners. This dynamic isn’t beneficial for anyone—being in a parental role isn’t conducive to a sexual relationship with the person you’re in that role with. This positioning might reduce testosterone levels in the women, which in turn reduces desire.

So, there are potentially two main pathways to lower desire: one involves perceived unfairness and exhaustion from unequal household labour, and the other involves physiological mechanisms triggered by experiencing one’s partner as a dependent. Heteronormativity affects sex lives in significant ways that could be addressed, and many women report experiencing these challenges in managing relationships with their male partners.

Jacobsen: What is the steroid-peptide theory of social bonds?

van Anders: The steroid-peptide theory of social bonds examines how hormones like testosterone (a steroid), and oxytocin and vasopressin (peptides) individually and collectively help us understand various behavioural phenomena and contexts. Typically, hormone researchers—and our culture more broadly—focus on how hormones influence behaviour. However, an important perspective is studying hormonal responses to behaviour to understand those behaviours better.

For example, testosterone is often studied about masculinity, maleness, manhood, and boyhood. However, there are many behaviours associated with masculinity that do not increase testosterone. Similarly, there are behaviours often associated with femininity, womanhood, or femaleness—such as some parental behaviours—that can increase testosterone.

The steroid-peptide theory helps us make sense of these findings by moving beyond traditional frameworks that equate testosterone with masculinity. Testosterone is connected to a wide range of functions, including immunity, cardiac health, and parenting, that researchers have historically overlooked due to entrenched assumptions.

Likewise, oxytocin is often stereotyped as the “cuddling hormone” associated with goodness and sweetness. Yet, it’s also linked to phenomena like in-group favouritism, which can contribute to biases such as racism, heteronormativity, or transphobia. This theory explores hormonal responses to behaviour outside of narrow or outdated frameworks, offering a more nuanced and empirical understanding of how these hormones operate.

Jacobsen: Where do you see this research moving in the future? Are there any theoretical frameworks or technologies that could help us pinpoint the differences and directions of interaction more precisely, such a complex field intersects the organism, social constructs, and individual psychology.

van Anders: Yeah. There’s so much to explore. In some ways, these are specific, discrete, experimental, and empirical research questions. However, in other ways, they are part of larger theoretical frameworks.

For example, I’ve often emphasized the importance of looking at testosterone beyond its association with masculinity. That doesn’t mean ignoring that it can sometimes be tied to phenomena associated with masculinity, but expanding our perspective opens up opportunities for research in psychology, health sciences, ecology, and more—areas that are crucial for us to explore.

I also developed a theoretical framework called Sexual Configurations Theory, which helps us engage with gender and sex—concepts that matter deeply to people—but in ways that move beyond binaries and biological determinism. Biological determinism assumes that gender equals sex and sex equals genes, which is a limiting perspective.

This framework allows individuals to locate themselves within a model that includes gender/sex but in a much more expansive and inclusive sense. The goal is to leverage feminist and queer science frameworks to conduct research that is more empirical, accurate, and just.

Jacobsen: All right, thank you very much for your time today.

van Anders: Okay, thanks so much. If there are any follow-ups, just let me know.

Jacobsen: Thank you. Have a good day.

van Anders: Bye-bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Rich McClellan, Crafting Unique Rides Via Elite Customs

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/22

When it comes to blending creativity, precision, and innovation in the world of automotive customization, Rich McClellan is a name that stands out. As the founder of Elite Customs just south of Nashville in Franklin, Tennessee, Rich brings years of expertise and an unyielding passion for transforming vehicles into personal works of art. From luxury cars to bespoke interiors, Elite Customs has become a go-to destination for those seeking to bring their unique vision to life. In this engaging Q&A, Rich shares insights into his journey, the evolution of Elite Customs, and what it takes to excel in the ever-changing world of high-end automotive design.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How did Elite Customs begin?

Rich McClellan: Elite Customs was founded in 2015, born from my years of experience in the customization industry and deep passion for the craft. After learning everything I could from working in various shops, I saw an opportunity to create something different—a place where clients had a voice in the design process. I couldn’t pass up the chance to strike out on my own and bring that vision to life.

When I met my wife Samantha (Sam) in 2018, she wasn’t familiar with the custom car world but quickly fell in love with it. She saw it for what it truly is: a canvas for endless creativity and self-expression. Back then, the local industry lacked much of a feminine perspective, and Sam saw an opportunity to fill that gap. In 2022, she made the bold decision to close her own business and join Elite Customs, bringing her keen eye for design and fresh ideas into the mix.

We started humbly, working out of a 1,200-square-foot, two-car bay. Within six months, demand pushed us to expand by another 1,200 square feet. Another six months later, we upgraded to a 4,000-square-foot shop. A year after that, we moved into a 5,500-square-foot space in the heart of Cool Springs. Today, Elite Customs thrives in a 12,000-square-foot facility, and we’re already planning our next expansion. Every day, we wake up excited to hit the ground running and do what we love.

While cars are our specialty—particularly luxury and high-end vehicles—we’ve worked on everything from boats to RVs. Our services are as diverse as our projects, from body modifications and custom interiors to state-of-the-art audio and lighting upgrades. At Elite Customs, we make it our mission to turn dreams into reality, no matter the canvas.

Jacobsen: What inspired you to focus on luxury and high-end customization?

McClellan: Luxury and high-end customization are my passions because they demand a higher level of precision, creativity, and innovation. Every project is an opportunity to treat the vehicle like a canvas, ensuring every detail is perfect. It’s also a space where clients come with bold visions, giving us the chance to push boundaries and create something truly extraordinary. The challenge of combining form and function seamlessly drives me daily.

Jacobsen: What part of auto-customization is the hardest when capturing a customer’s aesthetic?

McClellan: One of the toughest challenges in auto customization is narrowing down a customer’s vision to a cohesive theme. Many clients come in with scattered ideas—they might know what they like but struggle to understand how auto aesthetics work as a whole. Our job is to listen, collaborate, and guide them toward one or two unified styles that reflect their personality and vision.

Sam has been instrumental in making this process seamless. With her background in interior design and an incredible eye for detail, she has a talent for translating vague ideas into clear, intentional design plans. She knows how to blend textures, colors, and finishes in ways that elevate the final product while ensuring it feels personal. Her ability to clarify the design process has been a game-changer for Elite Customs.

Jacobsen: How has Sam’s influence reshaped Elite Customs?

McClellan: Sam has completely transformed the way we approach customization. Before she joined, our focus was heavily technical, but she brought a fresh perspective rooted in personal style and design. Her background in interior design has helped us better connect with clients, especially women and first-timers, who now feel more comfortable expressing their ideas. Sam’s ability to blend textures, colors, and finishes has elevated our work, and her influence is evident in every project we undertake.

Jacobsen: How do the aesthetics of California and Las Vegas influence your work in Tennessee?

McClellan: California’s aesthetic is all about individuality and breaking the rules. It’s where low-riders and old-school styles shine, and truly anything goes—it’s the Wild West of customization. Vegas, on the other hand, is defined by its opulence. It’s all about glitz, glamour, and making bold, larger-than-life statements. The pace is fast, and the designs are all about grabbing attention.

When I began working in Tennessee, I noticed that the Southeast has a more understated approach. It doesn’t follow the trends of the West Coast but instead embraces a style rooted in the state’s natural beauty and culture. Over time, I’ve introduced a philosophy of “fashion meets function” to my work here. It’s about creating bold, stylish designs that still make sense for everyday use. You can have a badass custom truck without going full-on “boss hog.” The key is pushing the limits, respecting the local culture, and finding ways to reinvent the wheel. This approach has resonated with clients ready to embrace a blend of creativity and practicality.

Jacobsen: What’s your approach to handling challenging clients or projects?

McClellan: It all comes down to communication and transparency. Customization is a collaborative process, and we take the time to understand our client’s vision while setting realistic expectations. One memorable challenge involved a client who couldn’t decide on a color scheme for their car’s interior. Sam worked closely with them, creating mockups and samples to bring their vision to life. The extra effort was worth it when we saw their excitement with the final result.

Jacobsen: How do you stay ahead in an industry that’s constantly evolving?

McClellan: Innovation is key. To stay ahead of the curve, I stay connected with industry trends, attend trade shows, and invest in cutting-edge technology like 3D printing. Building a network of professionals worldwide has also been invaluable for sharing ideas and solving unique challenges. The industry moves fast, and staying ahead means always being willing to adapt and learn.

Jacobsen: What made the project with Jelly Roll and the 1964 Lincoln Continental so special?

McClellan: Working on Jelly Roll’s 1964 Lincoln Continental for the 2023 CMAs was my dream project. I’ve always had a personal connection to that car—I own one myself—so when Jelly Roll gave us complete creative freedom, it felt like the perfect opportunity to merge his personality and music with my passion for classic cars.

Every detail of the build was carefully thought out to reflect Jelly Roll’s style and heartfelt lyrics. Sam played a huge part in creating the color story and ensuring the textures worked harmoniously. However, one of the most talked-about features was her idea to incorporate intricate engraving throughout the car. A particularly meaningful touch was removing the rearview mirror to highlight Jelly Roll’s famous lyric: “I took the mirror off of this old Ford, so I only see in front of me.”Considering Lincoln is Ford’s luxury division, it added another layer of depth to the design.

Of course, every project has its controversies; for this one, it was the wheels. People always have opinions, which is why these projects are so exciting—they spark conversations and leave an impression.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges in scaling customization?

McClellan: One of the biggest hurdles in scaling up auto customization is overcoming misconceptions about the industry. Too often, people associate customization with over-the-top, impractical builds—like hot tubs in minivans or fish tanks in trucks—thanks to reality TV. That’s not what we do. At Elite Customs, we focus on elevating and personalizing vehicles by improving their existing features thoughtfully and practically.

Another challenge is managing client expectations around timelines. The “Hollywood-edited timeline” often creates unrealistic ideas about how long a quality build takes. Completely dismantling a vehicle, executing precise customizations, and reassembling it with attention to every detail is a time-intensive process. Rushing can lead to overlooked details or cutting corners, which is never an option for us. Customizing your car the right way takes time, but the results are always worth the wait.

Jacobsen: What Are the Top Trends in Luxury Car Customization for the 2020s?

McClellan: The 2020s have brought exciting trends to the luxury car customization space. Clients are gravitating toward metallic finishes, jewel tones, textured materials, and bold, colored leathers. Personal branding is also taking center stage, with people opting for unique, signature designs rather than recognizable logos. Lighting—once an overlooked feature—is making a strong comeback with innovative options that transform interior and exterior aesthetics.

But staying ahead in this industry requires more than just following trends. As cars evolve and technology advances, so must we. Around the shop, the joke is that the quickest way to challenge me is to say something can’t be done—I’ll move mountains to prove otherwise. Meanwhile, Sam continues to expand our business boundaries, particularly with first-time clients. Her favorite moment is watching someone realize the endless possibilities of customization and start dreaming up their unique build. Those first sparks of inspiration are what drive us forward.

Jacobsen: How does Elite Customs collaborate with country music stars and athletes?

McClellan: Elite Customs has had the privilege of working with a roster of talented country music stars and professional athletes. From Jelly Roll and his wife Bunnie to Keith Urban and Eric Church, we’ve collaborated with some of the biggest names in music. One of our recent projects was a custom vehicle for comedian Nate Bargatze, a build that brought laughter and creativity together in a unique way.

We’ve also partnered with various professional athletes, including NFL players like Michael Griffin and Kevin Byard, NHL legends Pekka Rinne and Roman Josi, and even former Olympians. Each project has its own challenges and rewards, but our commitment to crafting designs that reflect each client’s individuality and style is the consistent thread.

Jacobsen: How do you balance classic car culture with modern customizations?

McClellan: Preserving the integrity of classic car culture while incorporating modern elements is an art form in itself. For me, the key is respecting the car’s original design and craftsmanship. I study its era’s shapes, lines, and aesthetics and use those as the foundation for updates. From there, it’s about thoughtfully integrating modern amenities—advanced technology or updated materials—without compromising the car’s vintage charm.

It’s a delicate balance that requires time, patience, and a genuine appreciation for the vehicle’s history. Over the years, I’ve fine-tuned this skill, always learning and adapting to ensure that every project stays authentic to its roots while meeting the client’s vision. The result is a build that honors the car’s past while pushing it toward a timeless future.

Jacobsen: What has been your most rewarding project to date?

While the Jelly Roll 1964 Lincoln Continental project holds a special place in my heart, restoring a classic Mustang as a surprise for a client’s father was another standout. The emotional reaction from both the client and their dad was incredibly rewarding and reminded me of why I started this journey—to create meaningful, lasting connections through our work.

Jacobsen: What’s the process for working with Elite Customs from start to finish?

McClellan: First, we start with a detailed consultation. We want to understand the client’s vision, budget, and timeline. Then comes the design phase, where Sam and the team craft sketches, mockups, and material samples for approval. Once finalized, we source parts and begin the build. We keep clients in the loop with regular updates, and every project goes through meticulous quality control before delivery. It’s a seamless process that ensures the client’s satisfaction every step of the way.

Jacobsen: How do you balance artistic vision with practical functionality?

McClellan: Striking this balance is what makes customization both challenging and rewarding. A car has to look amazing, but it also needs to perform reliably. For example, when integrating custom lighting, we focus on aesthetics without compromising safety or usability. It’s about enhancing the vehicle while respecting its original purpose.

Jacobsen: What role does storytelling play in your projects?

McClellan: Every project at Elite Customs tells a story. Whether it’s a vehicle passed down through generations or a new build reflecting someone’s personality, storytelling adds depth and meaning. The Jelly Roll Lincoln project, with its lyrical engraving and personal touches, is a perfect example. These stories turn vehicles into more than just machines—they become symbols of identity and expression.

Jacobsen: What advice would you give to clients considering their first custom build?

McClellan: Be open-minded and trust the process. Customization is a journey, and collaboration is key. Share your ideas and inspirations, but allow your customizer to guide you toward the best solutions. The results are always worth the effort when you see your dream come to life.

Jacobsen: How do you ensure each customization reflects the owner’s unique style?

McClellan: At Elite, the key to creating personalized designs is taking the time to truly understand each client. Our consultations are longer because we want to dive deep into their preferences, style, and vision. This time investment not only helps us deliver a highly customized product but also enhances the luxury, personalized experience we aim to provide.

It’s all about listening carefully, finding the common threads in their ideas, and offering feedback to refine their vision. Being in this industry requires a love for both cars and people. That passion sets Elite apart—everyone is welcome here, and we’ve built a reputation for making the customization process as exciting and comfortable as possible. When a client tells us they enjoyed the process and the outcome exceeded their expectations, we know we’ve succeeded in turning them into a lifelong enthusiast. That’s always the ultimate goal.

Jacobsen: What’s the most surprising request you’ve received?

McClellan: A coffee aficionado once asked us to install a fully functioning espresso machine in their luxury SUV. Although this was an unusual request, it perfectly reflected their lifestyle. The challenge was to make it look seamless, resulting in a feature that felt as natural as the car itself.

Jacobsen: What advice would you give aspiring auto customizers?

McClellan: For anyone looking to enter this industry, my first piece of advice is never to be afraid to push the limits of what’s possible. Customization is about breaking boundaries and stepping out of your comfort zone. Inspiration is everywhere—whether it’s home design, fashion, or music. If you hit a creative block on a build, step back and take a moment to let the vision come to you.

Another crucial lesson is that no one succeeds alone in this business. Collaboration is essential. I can’t tell you how often we’ve relied on our global network of experts and professionals to troubleshoot an issue or explore a new idea. Building those relationships and knowing when to lean on others is vital. Referrals are a big part of our industry, and for years, I’ve lived by the mantra: “It’s not WHAT you know; it’s WHO you know.” Building a strong network and being willing to collaborate will set you apart and help you grow in this field.

Jacobsen: How do you see the future of customization evolving?

McClellan: Sustainability and technology are shaping the future of customization. Clients are asking for eco-friendly materials and features, and technological advances like AI and smart systems are opening up new possibilities. At Elite, we’re excited to be part of this evolution and to continue pushing the boundaries of what’s possible.

Jacobsen: What’s next for Elite Customs?

McClellan: We’re expanding into electric vehicle customization to meet the growing demand for personalized EVs. Additionally, we’re exploring collaborations with designers outside the auto industry and planning to launch a line of exclusive accessories. The goal is to keep innovating and finding new ways to bring our client’s visions to life.

Rich McClellan and Elite Customs continue to redefine automotive customization, blending artistry, functionality, and innovation. Whether it’s a bold luxury build or a heartfelt restoration, Elite Customs delivers projects that exceed expectations. Ready to turn your vision into reality? Contact Elite Customs today, and let’s start your journey toward creating a vehicle that’s as unique as you are.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Iliya Valchanov on Team-GPT and Use Cases for AI

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/21

Iliya Valchanov is the CEO of Team-GPT, an AI-powered platform serving 50,000 users globally. With over 1.4 million students on Udemy, he is a renowned educator specializing in AI and online learning. A serial entrepreneur, Valchanov has co-founded multiple initiatives and startups, reaching millions of users. Holding a degree from Università Commerciale Luigi Bocconi, he has published works featured in Forbes and Inc.com. Valchanov actively champions data security and compliance in enterprise AI solutions. A leader in the AI space, he focuses on scalable, ethical innovation and creating tools that integrate seamlessly into workflows, transforming how teams operate. Valchanov talks about integrating AI into enterprise workflows. Team-GPT serves 50,000 users across industries, offering tools like a Design Basis Memorandum (DBM) for structured content creation, prompt libraries, and native integrations with platforms like Microsoft and Salesforce. Valchanov emphasized the importance of realistic AI promises, data security, and compliance, particularly for enterprises handling sensitive data. Founded in 2023, Team-GPT leverages transparency, SEO, and free educational resources to grow its user base. Looking ahead, Valchanov envisions AI’s exponential integration into workflows, targeting 100,000 active users by 2025 while emphasizing ethical, practical, and scalable AI applications.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does Team-GPT facilitate the discovery and deployment of AI use cases for enterprises in a data-secure manner? Let’s address this.

Iliya Valchanov: Team-GPT currently serves approximately 50,000 users across various enterprises. Through our experience, we’ve discovered that GPT and large language models are incredibly versatile, providing value across multiple departments and use cases. Initially, we asked ourselves: what are the real use cases? How many exist? Are they confined to specific fields, like marketing, or do they span all business areas?

We’ve identified over 1,000 distinct use cases on our platform. These cover marketing, sales, IT development, data science, HR, compliance, and more. Typically, these use cases revolve around chat interfaces, specific prompts, and contextual customization.

However, we learned that chat functionality alone isn’t always sufficient. To address this, we developed additional user interfaces. For example, one of our most innovative tools is called Pages, a text editor designed for long-form content creation. This tool allows users to move beyond chat and into a structured writing environment that aligns with their goals.

Another key benefit is our prompt library, which is designed for diverse use cases. Imagine someone creating a social media post or survey. They can select their desired use case, and our system guides them through a structured process. For example, to create a LinkedIn post, the user inputs a topic, and the system generates a detailed, customized prompt—longer and more specific than typical chat input.

Additionally, we provide prebuilt prompts tailored to specific professions. For example, educators can click a button to access tools designed for their unique needs. These enhancements significantly enrich the chat experience.

Our text editor becomes invaluable for writing-focused tasks, such as drafting blog posts. Users can input topics, such as “Team-GPT Raises $4,500,000,” or paste content directly from their resources. The platform then helps them refine and structure the content into professional-quality output.

Jacobsen: You can choose the length, and it generates content based on the context I just provided. I can edit the text in a text editor—delete, add, or even use AI to paraphrase, shorten, expand, or translate.

Valchanov: Exactly. All of this is AI-first. You can also achieve this with a prompt. Our vision is that as AI integrates into workflows, it will fundamentally change how we write, communicate, and execute tasks. For example, your recording interview might later be synthesized using AI.

For us, this would represent a native integration of any AI-driven note-taking tool you’re using to create a page with a given context. We’re building all kinds of tools to support this. Let me show you an example: I can drag and drop a screenshot into our platform if I have a screenshot. From there, I can extract text from the image, initiate a chat, and perform various other actions.

At Team-GPT, we’ve identified thousands of use cases from our users. For instance, if someone uses chat to create an article, we suggest they try our page creator, which is a more efficient tool. Similarly, for those automating customer support, we’re integrating with their customer support chatbots. This integration provides a novel interface where inquiries are received, processed, and resolved seamlessly.

Chats are a universal, user-friendly interface, but we’re creating many other tools that better address specific use cases.

Jacobsen: Do you find different use cases or challenges when partnering with organizations like Johns Hopkins University or Salesforce?

Valchanov: Yes, the main difference lies in the data sources. The examples I showed you are generic—they rely on foundational models and user-provided context. However, when working with larger organizations, they typically have their systems of record. These could include Microsoft OneDrive, Google Drive, SharePoint, Notion, or Salesforce.

These organizations often require native integrations that pull context from their internal systems. Enterprises, for example, often use the Microsoft ecosystem—SharePoint, Teams, and so on. In contrast, startups like us lean towards platforms like Slack and Notion. Universities, on the other hand, are almost always tied to Microsoft systems. This distinction is one of the primary differences between large organizations and smaller ones.

Jacobsen: How does integrating AI into workflows increase productivity?

Valchanov: There are several ways. First, people spend significant time searching for the right information. Even when the information exists within the organization, users often don’t know where to find it—or if it exists at all. AI can address this challenge by surfacing relevant information efficiently.

Second, AI increases productivity by streamlining repetitive tasks, enabling faster decision-making, and enhancing team collaboration.

Jacobsen: And there’s no question about it. But, typically, the issue is reusable context. How do you use the same context repeatedly for different purposes? This context could include information about your organization, processes, branding, or marketing identity. Marketing teams, for example, need a marketing identity. Sales teams need the sales playbook. Finance teams require the latest spreadsheets and data. Productivity increases when you have the right context and use AI to act on it.

Jacobsen: When was the company founded, and how did you achieve the 50,000-user base or attract such talent?

Valchanov: We founded the company in April 2023. During the first couple of months, we focused on growth hacking. We actively posted on LinkedIn and ran a “building in public” campaign, which we still maintain. All our financials, marketing campaigns, and activities are documented and shared publicly on LinkedIn. This transparency helped build trust with our users.

We were also very early adopters of this approach. Later, we started creating a lot of content. My background is in online education, and when starting I already had over 1 million paying students. We created an AI course on how to use ChatGPT effectively, which attracted some of our existing students. The course was hosted exclusively on our platform as a lead generation campaign. Users came for the course—offered for free—and stayed for the Team-GPT platform.

We created how-to guides, blog articles, and similar resources from there. Most of our traffic comes from SEO, with users finding us through Google.

Jacobsen: Do you find your Google presence stronger now than in your first year? Or has growth stagnated or risen steadily over time?

Valchanov: Like most SEO efforts, it has accumulated over time. The more you do, the more traffic you generate. If you stop working on SEO, you’ll feel the impact about six months later. For instance, we paused SEO for a year and a half, and our traffic is growing again. We receive thousands of organic clicks daily, all highly relevant to our offerings.

Since the industry is still emerging, we often get spikes in traffic when major players like OpenAI, Anthropic, or Microsoft announce something new. These announcements generate more interest in the field. Less than 1% of the world population uses AI tools, so there’s significant growth potential ahead.

Jacobsen: What is the role of data security and compliance in your adoption strategy for enterprises?

Valchanov: Many enterprises face challenges with data security and compliance. Their IT and compliance departments often distrust OpenAI and are reluctant to share data due to fears that OpenAI might train its models on it—a valid concern. For example, all OpenAI servers are located in the U.S., which doesn’t comply with regulations for many companies outside the U.S.

European enterprises, for instance, cannot use ChatGPT because it doesn’t meet compliance requirements. Compliance considerations include data residency—ensuring data is stored within the EU or North America without transiting between continents. For financial institutions, it’s often unacceptable for data to interact with OpenAI systems.

We emphasize to our clients that their employees are likely already using ChatGPT, so they need to implement secure and compliant solutions. Our product allows companies to deploy our system on their servers, whether on-premises or private clouds, and we enable them to interact securely with any model.

Jacobsen: So if a client doesn’t want to interact with the OpenAI model, they can use custom models within your system, and all of this remains contained within their network?

Valchanov: Exactly. When the data never leaves the client’s network, they can be confident it’s private and secure.

Jacobsen: Do you think data privacy and process will increasingly influence the adoption of systems like Team-GPT or AI models in general?

Valchanov: Absolutely. One of the biggest issues right now is: where does the data go? Does OpenAI have access to my data? This concern is at the core of our value proposition.

We emphasize to clients that they own their data—it’s entirely theirs. Our product is designed with this principle, particularly for enterprises that handle intellectual property, sensitive information, personally identifiable information, healthcare data, or financial records. These organizations will likely continue prioritizing private and secure environments for their data.

In contrast, smaller organizations may default to accepting that their data is stored with larger companies, much like what we see with Google. Google has extensive knowledge of users’ activities—every search, every interaction—and most people have come to accept this. However, there are alternatives, like DuckDuckGo or other privacy-centric browsers, for those who value data security.

Jacobsen: What do you see as a crucial point people need to understand when you’re educating them about these products, processes, and general data security?

Valchanov: A significant challenge is the lack of clarity around how AI works and its boundaries. We encounter a wide spectrum of beliefs: some people think AI can’t do anything useful for them, which is incorrect, while others believe AI can perform near-magical feats, which is equally unrealistic.

When I start a conversation with someone, I often don’t know where they fall on this spectrum. They might be skeptics or overenthusiastic believers. One of the key tasks is managing their expectations—explaining what is currently possible, what isn’t, and what they can realistically expect from AI models.

For example, tools like ChatGPT aren’t strong at performing complex mathematical operations. People need to understand these limitations. However, this won’t remain the case indefinitely. Models like o1 and o3 (and beyond) are already showing improvements in mathematics, but we’re not fully there yet.

The industry is evolving so rapidly that capabilities are constantly shifting. This pace of change creates confusion for decision-makers trying to stay informed about what’s feasible today versus what might be achievable soon.

Jacobsen: Not only did they not know the capabilities to begin with, but these capabilities are also changing every day. What was true yesterday may no longer be true today.

For example, when you have a two-year sales cycle, which is typical for financial institutions or government deals, the landscape can shift dramatically. At the start of negotiations, certain functionalities might be impossible, but by the end, many of those same functionalities may be feasible. It’s a very confusing field in that regard. I’ve been listening to Eric Schmidt, the former CEO of Google, and Jensen Huang, the CEO of NVIDIA.

Both present a reasoned perspective on these systems’ vast capabilities and potential while discussing risks and rewards and how to maximize the latter while minimizing the former. This is a highly relevant conversation. What will the capabilities of Team-GPT as it builds on models like O1 and potentially O3? I’ve seen some graphs where O3 significantly outperforms earlier iterations like O1, even in low-power modes. What are your thoughts on this?

Valchanov: I think Silicon Valley attracts some of the brightest minds in mathematics and computer science. If there are problems they excel at solving, they’re often mathematical or technical—such as coding, data science, or algorithm development.

The fact that the earliest AI systems focused on creative use cases, like content creation or article writing, was more of a coincidence and an outlier. I expect Bay Area experts to solve highly technical use cases—like those for coders, data scientists, or mathematicians—exceptionally well because they deeply understand those domains. On the other hand, I believe they’re less likely to excel in use cases like generating text and images or creating engaging stories.

In this regard, I foresee mathematical and reasoning capabilities improving at a super-fast pace while advancements in creativity may take significantly longer. AI may not achieve a high level of creativity for quite some time.

Jacobsen: I’ve observed a distinction in how AI is often discussed, particularly in English. These systems process massive datasets through deep learning and neural networks, enabling them to generate new information based on prior models or datasets. However, this isn’t comparable to what we call organic creativity. It’s more akin to generativity, as described by thinkers like Chomsky.

When people discuss creativity in AI, they often reference this notion of generativity. If we consider AI systems creative in any sense, it’s a form of lower-level creativity. That said, I envision a future where AI achieves higher forms of creativity once its operations and algorithms are further refined. What do you think?

Valchanov: That’s an excellent observation. These AI systems are indeed generative but in a way that’s constrained by their datasets and models. They don’t have the organic creativity of humans, which stems from complex, unstructured cognitive processes.

As you said, current AI creativity is a lower-level form. While it may someday evolve into something more profound, that will require breakthroughs in algorithm design and operational frameworks. Until then, AI’s creative abilities will likely remain limited, but its utility in technical and reasoning tasks will continue to grow exponentially.

Jacobsen: What would you project your user base to be by the end of 2025? For instance, in terms of total users and the partnerships you expect to have? Currently, you’re working with Salesforce and Johns Hopkins University. What other areas do you see as potential for your prompt-based system?

Valchanov: For us, the focus is on mid-market and enterprise clients—companies with more than 200 to 300 employees. The productivity improvements and cost savings for these organizations are enormous. While smaller organizations benefit from the boost, it’s less impactful than a company with 1,000 employees, for instance.

I haven’t set KPIs for 2025 yet, so I can’t give you an exact number in terms of total users. However, having 50 to 100 large companies—each with more than 300 employees—would be a significant milestone for us. It’s not just about acquiring users but activating them.

For example, we currently have organizations with thousands of employees, but only 50 people are actively using the system. In one case, we have an organization with 4,000 employees, but only three use the platform. They’ve been paying for three months, and now the client asks, “How do we roll this out meaningfully to all 4,000 employees?” It’s a complex challenge because you’re disrupting workflows to introduce new technology.

Another company started with 15 users. A year later, they had 60 active users. They aim to onboard 300 people by the end of Q1 and 1,000 by 2025. That organization has 5,000 employees, so onboarding 1,000 people in a year would be a significant achievement.

Long story short, I hope we reach more than 100,000 potential users by 2025. It would be an incredible achievement if we activated 50,000 to 100,000 of them. However, activation takes time and effort.

Jacobsen: Thank you for sharing your insights. I find this area particularly interesting and startups should invest more time and money in it. Everyone seems to want to invest in AI, primarily out of fear—ironically, fear of AI’s potential power. In my opinion, this field will remain a powerful area for growth well into the 2030s and beyond.

Valchanov: I agree 100%. It will likely take 15 years or more to integrate AI into workflows fully. I’m very excited about the possibilities, even though we don’t know what to expect. I’ve heard projections that humanoid robots could outnumber living humans by 2040 or 2050. With advancements in large language models, interactions are becoming much more dynamic and meaningful than ever before.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you so much for your time. I’ll start editing this today, and I should have something ready for you soon.

Valchanov: Thank you! Have a great day.

Jacobsen: You too. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Scott Maclean, ADHD Diagnosis and Assistive Technology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/20

Scott Maclean discussed his journey with ADHD, diagnosed in his early 50’s, and how it has shaped his life, relationships, and coping strategies. He shared insights into developing the Visual Timer, a tool addressing time management, procrastination, and task overwhelm, which integrates neuroscience principles. Maclean emphasized the need for practical solutions for ADHD and broader challenges like procrastination in fast-paced societies. He expressed interest in collaborating with researchers, creating a podcast, or writing a book to share his experiences. Maclean highlighted the importance of breaking down neuroscience into actionable tips and tools to help individuals manage their lives effectively.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Scott Maclean. We will discuss a few issues that are quite prevalent in society today. These challenges may not be exacerbated by technology. Still, regardless of their source, people often experience them and cope in various ways. I want to start by asking about your life journey into middle age and discovering that you have ADHD. What were the coping mechanisms you used before your diagnosis, and how have things changed since gaining that knowledge?

Scott Maclean: Yes, it’s interesting. I recently turned 55 and was only recently diagnosed with ADHD. The diagnosis has shifted my perspective and changed my life significantly. It has allowed me to understand many things I couldn’t figure out before—how my brain works, how it operates differently, and the coping mechanisms I developed to fit into society. That adjustment process has been fascinating.

The reality is that my brain doesn’t function the same way as most people’s. For a long time, I internalized that difference as a personal flaw. I thought I wasn’t good enough. I had trouble concentrating, procrastinated constantly, avoided tasks, and often overcompensated in social situations. I struggled with impulse control issues typical of ADHD, which sometimes made social interactions even harder. 

Since being diagnosed and starting medication, I’ve been able to reflect on the neuroscience behind ADHD. I’ve done much research and studying to understand how the brain works for neurodivergent individuals. This learning process has allowed me to revisit my past, understand why I behaved the way I did, and explore what changes I need to make to improve my life moving forward.

As part of that journey, I began looking for tools and resources to help people with ADHD. As a father of two young children, I’ve faced significant challenges with time management and routines for myself and my family. Simple tasks like getting the kids to bed, leaving the house on time, or encouraging them to do homework became major stress points. I tried using timers and other available tools, but they weren’t effective enough. This led me to explore creating better solutions.

As a result of my research—particularly into neuroscience—I developed the Visual Timer, which launched about eight weeks ago in October on Amazon. It’s currently the number one new release in its category and is selling well. This success suggests that many others face similar challenges with time management, focus, procrastination, and task overwhelm, and they are searching for tools to help them navigate these issues.

Jacobsen: When people face task overwhelm, do they sometimes resort to unhealthy coping mechanisms, such as substance abuse or overusing prescription medications beyond what doctors recommend?

Maclean: Yes, that does seem to happen, unfortunately, for some individuals dealing with the struggles of ADHD.

I can now draw a direct line between many of the challenges in my life—like my marriage breaking down, career inconsistencies, and general instability—and my undiagnosed ADHD. What came with that realization was an understanding of my codependency. After my marriage broke down, I began to see how ADHD had shaped my coping mechanisms, including my choice of a partner.

I ended up in a codependent marriage because I had convinced myself that I wasn’t able to cope on my own. I believed my brain wasn’t working the “correct” way. So, my initial coping mechanism was to find a partner who could take care of me. It wasn’t a disability, per se—I was a fairly normal, functioning person, and so was she. But from a psychological perspective, there was clear codependency. She was very control-oriented—an alpha female—and I was happy to let her take the reins on day-to-day tasks.

On the surface, I appeared to be functioning normally. But as with many relationships, there was an imbalance. That dependency model ultimately created problems. When the marriage ended, I panicked because I realized I had to take care of myself—and, on top of that, become a single dad to two children.

During that time, I was self-medicating with alcohol, which became dangerous and psychologically damaging. I started seeing psychologists and counsellors, reading self-help books, and listening to podcasts to understand what was happening. Everywhere I turned, though, I was treated for depression.

I even asked psychologists directly if they thought I might have ADHD or another mental health condition. Still, they consistently told me, “No, you don’t have it.” This went on for years.

Eventually, I gained control of my drinking and have been sober ever since. Sobriety gave me the mental clarity to revisit the issue and challenge the medical professionals. I returned to my doctor and said, “Listen, something isn’t right. Despite what everyone is telling me, there’s something else going on.”

Finally, I got a referral to see a psychiatrist. It took months to get an appointment because psychiatrists are so busy, which says a lot about the state of mental health care in society.

When I finally saw the psychiatrist, she had a checklist of ten items he looked for in diagnosing ADHD. She told me, “You check off eight of these, so you have ADHD.” From there, we quickly moved into discussions about treatment.

It was only after this diagnosis that the doors opened for me. I began to understand what ADHD is, what it means for me, and how I can manage it moving forward.

I went into the intellectual side of it as much as possible with my ADHD brain. Fortunately for me—despite the misfortune of not being diagnosed earlier—the Internet, as you put it, seems to be everywhere. There’s a wealth of information out there.

There are also many products claiming to help with ADHD. I explored them and thought, “That’s not going to work for me,” or I tried them, and they didn’t work. This was mostly because I’m visual, as many people are. A common statistic floating around the Internet is that 65% of people are visual learners.

But with ADHD, my brain was moving at such a fast pace that I couldn’t focus for long periods. I needed to understand this to break things down and find better solutions. Otherwise, I was scared of living a life that felt less than it could be—or worse, being tempted back into self-medication, which I knew was highly dangerous.

Jacobsen: How many prototypes did you go through when you started developing your product?

Maclean: The process took over 18 months since I hand-drew my idea on paper. Looking back now, it’s fascinating how much effort goes into turning an idea into reality.

To answer your question, I went through three physical prototypes. The first was a non-working, 3D-printed model to determine the size and shape of the screen. From there, we began developing actual working models and refining them. Beyond those were countless digital or hand-drawn iterations and documented concept versions.

Interestingly, despite my lack of artistic skills, my first drawing contained all the core functionality I wanted. Later, I used AI tools, like MidJourney, to finalize the design.

Jacobsen: How does your product’s timing and colouring system anchor executive function? How does it help users stay engaged or relaxed?

Maclean: It’s the only timer on the market with a 360-degree LED light system synchronizing with an audible chime and a high-definition LCD countdown screen. These three elements work together seamlessly.

The second important feature is the “first and final warning” system, which alerts users as they approach the end of the allocated time. This combination helps the brain understand what’s happening and relax.

The cognitive aid comes from the constant colour and sound cues, which provide a structured framework for your task. Time becomes visualized and sits in your peripheral vision, so you don’t need to fixate on numbers counting down on a screen. The calm colours are a gentle reminder, signalling, “Hey, your time is managed—you can focus.”

You’re travelling relative to whatever time you’ve set. The colour and the sounds give you a subtly off-to-the-side anchor to time, reducing the demands on your brain and executive functions—such as working memory and sustained attention. This lets you focus more on the task because the timer provides constant, useful feedback.

For example, when the timer starts and glows bright green, it switches your brain on to the task.  As it transitions to yellow at 25% of the remaining time, it gives you a proactive way to check in on your progress. It’s a moment to ask yourself, “How am I doing? Do I need to speed up? Am I behind? Or can I relax because I’m doing well?”

That’s the first warning. 

At 5% of your time remaining, the colour changes to red, signalling the final warning. This is the timer telling your brain, “Hey, it’s time to wrap things up.” For people like me who struggle with task transitions, this advanced warning helps me mentally prepare to finish the task and move smoothly into the next one.

When the final alarm goes off, there’s no surprise—what I call “alarm shock”—because you’ve been gently prepared for it. This was a major challenge with other timers that all have one-off alarms.

For example, there’s a timer with a manual coloured disc that moves clockwise, much like a traditional analog clock. I’d set it, but my brain would quickly get distracted. I’d forget about the timer entirely until the alarm startled me. It didn’t offer any proactive cues or feedback.

Another issue was that while I might have understood the timer’s function, my kids didn’t. They couldn’t grasp what “15 minutes left” meant in the abstract. The timer was too passive, providing no engagement or useful warnings until the alarm went off. The key difference with my product is that the lights, sounds, and gradual warnings help the brain. They provide telecoms, subliminal, and sound cues to help the brain relax and stay on task. Knowing a break is approaching, I’m reassured I can stay focused on the task without constantly checking the timer.

Jacobsen: Looking ahead, what would you like to do regarding media? Would you consider starting a podcast, creating a YouTube channel, or conversing with professionals who research the areas you’ve explored—albeit informally—to refine your product further?

Maclean: Yes, I’d love to explore those avenues. I’ve become fascinated by the neuroscience behind visual learning, for example. I’m still developing my understanding of it. Still, I see great potential in collaborating with professionals to improve the product and help more people manage ADHD in various ways and degrees.

Having developed the product along these lines, there’s much more room for deeper understanding. As you mentioned, new information and research are constantly coming online, evolving our thinking. More effort should be put into supporting and advancing that work. I’m interested in collaborating with and supporting those out there doing this research.

At the same time, I’d like to tell my own story more than I currently do. Perhaps through writing a book or creating a podcast, I could reach others who are similar to me—or even those who aren’t but who face similar challenges with mental health or issues like procrastination and overwhelm.

Even for people who don’t consider themselves to have mental health challenges, many in our fast-paced Western world—whether in Australia, North America, Canada, or elsewhere—are overwhelmed by procrastination and the difficulty of focusing. That’s the problem I want to address. I’ve started with the timer, which has been very successful. It’s selling well and has a great story behind it.

But there’s so much more information and research that could be done. It could inform other products or raise awareness. By breaking down neuroscience into practical, easy-to-understand tips, we could help people manage their lives better. Whether through tools, products, or simple advice, there’s still much work to be done in this area.

Jacobsen: Scott, I want to thank you for your time today and your patience yesterday.

Maclean: No worries. I appreciate that, and I hope this helps make things easier for others struggling with similar issues.

Jacobsen: Absolutely. For what it’s worth, I understand this personally. At least one person close struggles with some of these challenges.

Maclean: That means a lot. 

Jacobsen: Thank you again for your time and for sharing your insights.

Maclean: You’re welcome. I appreciate your time and patience with me as well.

Jacobsen: Take care.

Maclean: Perfect. Thank you! Take care, buddy.

Back-to-school season is here, and with it comes the chaos of morning routines, homework battles, and bedtime struggles. Enter the VISUAL Timer—a simple yet revolutionary tool designed to simplify routines and eliminate nagging for parents everywhere.

Created by Scott Maclean, a single dad with ADHD, the VISUAL Timer uses 360° color-coded LED lights to guide children through tasks independently. Its engaging, neuroscience-backed design transforms time management into a fun and empowering experience for kids.

Why It’s Perfect for Back-to-School:

  • Visual Progress Awareness: Color-coded cues (green, yellow, red) help kids stay on track without constant reminders.
  • Stress-Free Transitions: Proactive warnings foster calm and cooperation during busy mornings and evenings.
  • Neurodivergent-Friendly: Ideal for kids with ADHD or Autism, offering a non-disruptive way to manage time-related anxiety.
  • Affordable: At under $30, it’s an accessible solution for every family.

Real-Life Impact:
Take 8-year-old Noah, who used to struggle with getting ready for school. With the VISUAL Timer, he now completes his tasks independently, guided by its intuitive color cues. His parents report calmer mornings and a happier household.

We’d love to provide you with a sample timer for review, high-res images, or an interview with Scott Maclean to dive deeper into the neuroscience and story behind this game-changing tool.

Let’s help your readers take the chaos out of back-to-school routines and bring calm to their homes!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WalletHub on Elder Abuse Protections

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/18

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo discuss elder abuse protections in the U.S., emphasizing the growing elderly population, projected to double by 2060. They highlight disparities among states, noting that Wisconsin, Vermont, and Massachusetts excel in elder abuse prevention due to strong funding, robust regulations, and innovative solutions like elder abuse shelters. Conversely, rural states like South Carolina, Utah, and South Dakota lag due to policy gaps and fewer resources. They explore financial fraud as a prevalent form of elder abuse, stressing the need for better funding, local lobbying, and societal changes to protect vulnerable populations. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here again with the wonderful Chip Lupo. We will discuss elder abuse protections, an essential and often underappreciated topic. It’s a serious and sensitive issue that hasn’t been discussed enough. I’m glad you all took the time to research this critical subject. So, how much is elder abuse costing Americans annually? Let’s put a dollar figure on it.

Chip Lupo: Elder abuse is a significant problem, Scott. One reason we need to address this issue is that the U.S. population is aging as people live longer. The number of Americans aged 65 and older is projected to nearly double, from 49 million in 2016 to 95 million by 2060. Acting now is crucial to ensure a better quality of life for our aging population.

Jacobsen: If we consider the extent of suffering for individuals across different cities, what does the scope look like in the United States? With tens of millions of people aged 65 and older, how prevalent is elder abuse? What are we looking at?

Lupo: Different states have varying measures in place to protect older people. In states with higher retirement populations, protections tend to be stronger, but exceptions exist. For instance, Wisconsin ranks number one in elder abuse protection. While Wisconsin isn’t traditionally considered a retirement state, its older population is relatively high due to younger people leaving for job opportunities elsewhere. As a result, Wisconsin has developed robust resources to protect its elderly population.

On the other hand, states like South Carolina (my home state), Utah, and South Dakota rank lower in terms of elder abuse protections. These disparities are often driven by policy and resource allocation.

Jacobsen: Now, why are states like Massachusetts, Vermont, Ohio, and Virginia at the top regarding elder abuse protections?

Lupo: The answer often comes down to funding and infrastructure. For example, Vermont has the second-highest ombudsman funding per elderly resident and the second-highest number of elderly care organizations offering services.

In many cases, adequate funding is a key factor. Another critical aspect of elder abuse that often gets overlooked is financial fraud. Elderly individuals are prime targets for scams, including phone, mail, and online fraud. For instance, Vermont has one of the lowest average financial losses per fraud case targeting older people, highlighting the effectiveness of its preventive measures.

So, safeguards are in place to address complaints and minimize the financial losses due to fraud. However, for those in states that don’t offer a strong framework for protection, there is often a lack of prevention, significant neglect, and exploitation. 

Jacobsen: Why do these particular states and cities face such conditions, and what do the numbers show?

Lupo: In those situations, it’s often policy-driven. Much of it comes down to the resources available and the quality of care in nursing homes. States that rank well generally have measures in place to ensure the quality of nursing homes and other resources.

The data shows that states at the bottom of the rankings often lack these safeguards. This includes fewer assisted living facilities, fewer certified volunteer ombudspersons, and less overall funding for elder care. It boils down to the types of organizations in place, their quality, and the resources to manage them effectively.

Jacobsen: What kinds of resources are most effective?

Lupo: The states or cities with higher investments in prevention and elder care stand out. I’m glad you brought that up, Scott. One significant reason Wisconsin ranks at the top of the list is that it is one of only 22 states with elder abuse shelters. These shelters function similarly to those for at-risk teens or battered spouses.

These shelters provide mistreated elderly individuals a place to escape abusive situations, access counselling, and find temporary shelter until their complaints are resolved. It’s a relatively new development but an important one. States at the top of the rankings often have these resources and the funding to manage them effectively.

Jacobsen: Are there any sociocultural factors at play? You mentioned earlier the role of employment opportunities and the migration of younger people as younger individuals leave for better job prospects, cities or states age. Are there other sociocultural factors that influence these numbers?

Lupo: Sociocultural factors certainly play a role, especially in lower-ranked states like South Carolina, Utah, and South Dakota. These states are more rural, with traditional family structures where elderly individuals are often left to fend for themselves. This trend is consistent across the bottom half of the rankings.

nother factor to consider is gender. Men tend to die younger than women by a few years in most countries, including the U.S. and Canada. This gender gap in lifespan impacts elder care dynamics, as women are more likely to live alone in their later years and may face additional challenges related to neglect or abuse.

Jacobsen: So, I can think of this from several levels. For instance, if women live longer, there will be more older women, making them more likely to be exploited simply because of their numbers. Are those kinds of dynamics at play as well?

Lupo: They are. While it’s not directly addressed in this study, it’s a known issue. Men traditionally die younger than women, and in some of these traditionally bound states, women are often left to fend for themselves. Sometimes, when men die earlier, they don’t leave their spouses with adequate resources to live on. There’s often a lack of financial preparation, and that becomes a significant factor, especially in rural states like South Carolina, Utah, and South Dakota, which rank at the bottom of the elder abuse protection list.

In many cases, the surviving spouse may find themselves in a dire financial situation, which makes them vulnerable to fraud. Fraudsters actively target individuals in such circumstances, preying on their vulnerability and exploiting their situations.

Jacobsen: That’s sad. What about cases of credit card fraud, business scams, and robocalls? What are the most frequent forms of elder abuse that aren’t physical but are more financial or social?

Lupo: Those include everything you’ve mentioned, plus Social Security fraud. Many state attorneys general have programs to educate older people on scams. For example, they emphasize that agencies like the IRS or the Social Security Administration will never call you directly. Instead, they will send official correspondence on agency letterhead.

Phone scams are the most prevalent because many elderly individuals still use landline telephones and haven’t embraced cell phone technology. For instance, my father-in-law, who is 84 years old, still uses a landline and constantly receives calls. Some are just sales pitches for Medicare plans, but others are fraudulent, like threats to cut off power unless gift cards are purchased. Fortunately, my father-in-law is well-educated and savvy enough to spot scams, but many others aren’t as fortunate.

Elderly individuals with dementia or other cognitive impairments are especially vulnerable, as scammers exploit their reduced ability to detect deception.

Jacobsen: What can people notice regarding changes in behaviour and personal care as potential indicators—not necessarily confirmations—of elder abuse? How can someone make an objective assessment of the elders in their lives?

Lupo: And that triggers something, Scott. One of the things that moves these states to the top of the rankings is that they actively crack down on elder abuse. They are very strong in minimizing misconduct in nursing homes. For example, there are strict requirements for inspections, and they enforce severe penalties for nursing home employees who abuse elderly residents. States like Wisconsin, Massachusetts, and Vermont have robust safeguards in place.

They are very punitive—yes, that’s the word—in dealing with misconduct in nursing home facilities.

Jacobsen: Should there be legal restrictions against caregivers financially benefiting from the death of a person they were caring for?

Lupo: Let’s take a look at what some of the experts say on this. One expert mentioned that elder abuse often results from family members or caretakers in in-home settings—it’s not limited to nursing homes. Policies should be expanded to address these in-home situations.

States at the top of the rankings greatly regulate and monitor nursing facilities, but perhaps more attention should be given to in-home care. Just as we do for domestic violence cases, we need to ensure protection for elderly residents who might face abuse, whether financial, emotional, or otherwise. So yes, states should do more to crack down on this issue.

Jacobsen: What about the weight given to elder abuse, gross neglect, and exploitation complaints? Why is it given triple weight at 24 points?

Lupo: Let’s look at that. It’s given that weight because these complaints represent a broad range of issues directly affecting older people. Most of these complaints are made to the state’s long-term care ombudsman, who oversees elder care programs. These complaints often include elder abuse, gross neglect, and exploitation, which are serious concerns for residents aged 65 and older.

It’s weighted so heavily because it targets that demographic, making it one of the three key metrics in the prevalence category. Wisconsin, for instance, has excelled in this area. Let’s check which state has the best prevalence in terms of elder abuse.

Now, if you go to our survey, you can sort these numbers. The rankings have little double triangles that you can click on to sort. Let’s see… Louisiana has the best prevalence ranking, followed by Florida, Michigan, New Hampshire, and Indiana.

Prevalence covers a range of issues. It’s not just limited to complaints; it also includes the fraud rate and the estimated financial loss per reported fraud. This is a key metric, so 40 points out of the 100 go toward prevalence. The breakdown is 40 points for prevalence, 30 for resources, and 30 for protection. More emphasis is placed on prevalence because it specifically targets residents aged 65 and older.

Jacobsen: What kind of actions can we take between 2016 and 2060, given that the number of individuals aged 65 and older will double from 49 million in 2016 to a projected 95 million in 2060?

Lupo: Right. Now is the time to act, as we mentioned earlier. This is largely policy-driven. Beyond that, individual behaviours need to be adjusted when protecting older people. However, more lobbying at the local level is essential. As I’ve said before, you must first create change in City Hall to create change in Washington.

It’s critical to lobby local politicians and lawmakers to ensure the implementation and funding of well-supported programs. With the 65+ population expected to reach 95 million by 2060, we must ensure funding keeps pace with inflation. We cannot set a static budget number. Instead, adjustments must be made for cost-of-living increases to ensure these programs remain effective and well-funded over the coming decades.

Jacobsen: Okay, that’s it for today, Chip. 

Lupo: Bye. Talk to you tomorrow.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

New Years Resolution’s for 2025 and Better/Worse Cities

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/17

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo discusses WalletHub’s research on New Year’s resolutions and financial challenges for 2025. Americans prioritize saving money, with Seattle, San Francisco, and Scottsdale ranking as the best cities for achieving resolutions, while Gulfport, Newark, and Jackson rank lowest due to low incomes and high crime. Lupo emphasizes creating realistic budgets that account for inflation, using tools like apps or simple methods. They explore connections between financial and physical health, stress, and debt management. Other topics include financial literacy, credit unions, and identity theft, highlighting proactive steps like monitoring finances and teaching fundamental money management skills early.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here again with the marvellous Chip Lupo. We are going to discuss one of the many topics researched by WalletHub. I appreciate their research because it is thorough and clean, employs reasonable metrics, provides interesting breakdowns, and offers clear answers—whether on a Zoom call or through submitted questions.

This is useful information for anyone who comes across it. When looking at New Year’s resolutions, the top financial resolution for Americans in 2025 was to save more money. Regarding the best and worst cities for keeping those New Year’s resolutions, the best were Seattle, Washington; San Francisco, California; and Scottsdale, Arizona. The worst cities were Gulfport, Mississippi; Newark, New Jersey; and Jackson, Mississippi.

Why were these cities ranked as the best and worst, particularly with Mississippi having two of the worst-ranked cities in the state?

Chip Lupo: Let’s start with the bottom cities. Gulfport, Mississippi; Newark, New Jersey; and Jackson, Mississippi were mentioned. If we expand the list, we find Detroit, Michigan; Memphis, Tennessee; and Shreveport, Louisiana.

This part of the country is predominantly in the Deep South, except Newark, New Jersey. Low incomes and high crime rates characterize these areas. Cities like Detroit and Newark fit this pattern. The bottom-ranked cities are mostly geographically concentrated in the Deep South.

The combination of low-income states and large metro areas with deteriorating inner cities—such as Memphis, Detroit, and Newark—contributes to these rankings. The data supports this. For example, if we look at metrics related to financial resolutions, the bottom three cities rank very low. At a glance, the highest ranking among these cities is 53rd for school and work resolutions.

However, these cities perform poorly when it comes to financial and health-related resolutions—the two most common New Year’s resolutions. Generally, the top New Year’s resolutions are health-related, including eating better, exercising more, and losing weight. Financial resolutions, such as budgeting better, spending less, or securing a better-paying job, are typically second.

Due to the economic challenges over the past four years, financial resolutions are gradually catching up to health-related resolutions in importance. It would not be surprising if they soon become equally prioritized.

That said, the bottom-ranked cities continue to perform poorly in both health and financial.

Now, let’s look at the top-ranked cities. The top three—Seattle, San Francisco, and Scottsdale—score highly for health resolutions. San Francisco ranks first overall in this category. These cities also perform well in financial resolutions, with Scottsdale, Arizona, ranking lowest among the three at 27th.

Jacobsen: Americans also face a significant debt problem. For various reasons, this issue was politically consequential during the last election. Credit card debt has been highlighted as a major factor. Was creating a realistic budget the number one financial resolution for Americans?

Lupo: Making a realistic budget and sticking to it are two different things. A related study found that only about one out of ten people we surveyed were making a realistic budget and sticking to it.

In a separate part of the survey, a percentage of people felt that keeping a budget was too complicated. However, keeping a budget can be as simple as using a method that my mother and my father-in-law still use: a pen, a pad, and a calculator. You write down your expenses and income and then do the math.

That said, there is plenty of technology available. WalletHub, for instance, has a budget app. If you resist using pen and paper or opening a spreadsheet, you can visit our website—or many other financial websites—that offer apps to do the work. You just key in the numbers, and it provides you with alerts, such as when you’re getting close to going over budget or when certain expenses are trending upward.

So, it’s easier said than done when it comes to keeping a budget realistically and sticking to it. One thing you can do to adjust for inflation—which does impact people’s budgets—is to plan for it. For example, when budgeting for something static, like utility bills that don’t fluctuate based on interest rates, you could average a year’s worth of utility bills.

I do this. I budget a set amount based on an average. Here in Columbia, South Carolina, we pay more in the summer months because of the heat, and we run the heater more during winter storms in January and February. However, utility costs level off in the cooler months, like spring and early fall. By averaging the costs, you balance out the higher expenses in extreme seasons.

That’s just one tip for budgeting. The key is to stick to it. Make sure your budget is realistic. Many people kid themselves, thinking, “Oh, I won’t spend X amount on food this year,” but chances are, they will. Be honest and account for those expenses. Don’t strip your budget so tightly that you risk your livelihood. Be realistic about how much you’re willing and able to spend.

Jacobsen: What about people’s earned income? Are there any resolutions around getting better work or upgrading their education to secure better-paying jobs? Do these goals come up in the resolutions as well?

Lupo: They do. When it comes to earned income, people need to evaluate their situation. Usually, at the top of the list is getting a better job or picking up a second part-time job to make ends meet.

Another factor to consider is location. If you live in an area with a very high cost of living, you might consider relocating to a more affordable area. However, with the current state of the housing market, this can take time. Relocation and career advancement are often long-term goals, but they’re definitely part of many people’s resolutions to improve their earned income.

Jacobsen: What about identity theft? Due to extensive digital tracking systems, that’s a significant problem, particularly in wealthier societies. However, scams also occur frequently via phone and online platforms. Certain vulnerabilities seem to arise in richer countries. What are the concerns around identity theft for people in the United States? How does it influence their New Year’s resolutions when it’s a common worry?

Lupo: It’s not just an issue in wealthy societies—it can happen to anyone, particularly older people, who seem to be prime targets for scammers.

If someone wanted to create a New Year’s resolution related to identity theft, it would involve practicing due diligence, such as regularly monitoring their bank accounts, credit card accounts, and credit reports. Most people only check these after something happens, but being proactive is key.

Start by regularly reviewing your credit reports, bank statements, and credit card statements. You could set up a weekly, biweekly, or monthly schedule, but the important thing is consistency. If something suspicious arises, you can report it immediately and take steps to address it.

Jacobsen: Why are people interested in joining credit unions, improving their financial literacy, or focusing on their physical health related to financial health? These concerns seem existential for many people.

Lupo: The connection between physical and financial health is significant. When debt is burdened, it often leads to stress, which affects sleep, eating habits, and overall well-being. The two are interconnected.

The key consideration regarding credit unions is membership. Membership requirements vary. Sometimes, it’s as simple as living in a specific country, while others may be tied to military service or employment. Credit unions often provide better rates than traditional banks, especially on car loans, mortgages, and personal loans, making them an appealing choice for people serious about improving their financial situation.

Financial literacy, meanwhile, is becoming a growing topic of concern in the United States. We recently surveyed about back-to-school shopping and found that 95% of parents believe financial literacy should be taught in public schools. While I agree, it should begin at home and be reinforced in schools.

Teaching children about finances at an early age—such as with a mock checking account—can help them develop the skills to manage their money effectively. In school, an elective course called consumer economics taught skills like writing checks, balancing chequebooks, and understanding simple interests.

Learning these fundamentals is similar to learning a sport or a musical instrument: you start with the basics. When people are well-grounded in these fundamentals, they are better equipped to handle their financial lives in the long term.

Jacobsen: Yeah, this is a big issue. It has also been politically consequential for Canadians. For those unfamiliar, inflation refers to the general increase in the costs of goods and services.

How does inflation factor into 2025? This issue is also politically and socially significant for Americans.

Lupo: Right. This ties back to creating a realistic budget and sticking to it. When listing your expenses, don’t assume that costs in January 2025 will remain the same in December 2025.

Plan with the assumption that the costs of everything in your budget will increase. The challenge is predicting how much they’ll increase—or, in some cases, decrease. A common example in the U.S. is fuel prices, which fluctuate significantly from the beginning to the end of the year.

When accounting for inflation, set your budget realistically, assuming a gradual cost increase. As we discussed earlier, averaging out utility bills is a good strategy. Similarly, keep track of inflation monthly and adjust your budget as needed.

It’s important to allow for flexibility. Don’t make your budget so rigid that there’s no room to adapt. You need some wiggle room to handle inflation effectively. If certain expenses decrease, treat that surplus as an opportunity—for instance, reinvesting it to pay off high-interest debt, such as a mortgage or credit card bills.

Jacobsen: I think that’s it for today, Chip. Thank you very much for your time.

Lupo: Fantastic. All right, Scott. Thank you.

Jacobsen: Thank you as well.

Lupo: Take care.

Jacobsen: You too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Jeffrey Egler on Resilient Health in Fires

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/17

Dr. Jeffrey Egler, MD, is a double board-certified physician in Family and Lifestyle Medicine. A graduate of Drexel University School of Medicine, he completed residency at the University of Colorado and a fellowship in Faculty Development at UCLA. With expertise spanning adult medicine, pediatrics, surgery, and obstetrics, he also served as Assistant Clinical Professor at USC. Dr. Egler holds a master’s in Spiritual Psychology and certification from the Institute of Functional Medicine. An advocate for holistic health, he integrates evidence-based and functional approaches to optimize patient well-being. He is affiliated with AAFP, ACLM, IFM, and A4M. Egler talks about strategies to protect Angelenos from the health impacts of wildfire smoke and environmental toxins. Dr. Egler emphasized limiting exposure by staying indoors, using HEPA air purifiers, and wearing N95 or P100 masks when outside. He suggested saline nasal sprays, IV nutrient therapy with antioxidants like vitamin C and glutathione, and functional medicine approaches to mitigate oxidative stress. For vulnerable groups, tailored care and clean indoor environments are critical. Dr. Egler also recommended optimizing nutrition, hydration, and detox strategies, incorporating therapies like cryotherapy and HBOT, and prioritizing biomarker testing for resilience.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What immediate actions should Angelenos take to protect themselves from smoke inhalation?

Dr. Jeffrey Egler: As an Angeleno, the first and most important step to protect yourself from smoke inhalation right now is to limit exposure. Stay indoors as much as possible, keeping windows and doors tightly closed to prevent outdoor pollutants from entering your space. It’s also a great time to refresh any weather stripping in your home that needs repair. Using an air purifier with a HEPA filter is highly effective for reducing indoor air contaminants and improving air quality, too. If you absolutely must go outside, wearing a properly fitted N95 or P100 mask is critical. These masks filter out fine particulate matter that can deeply irritate your respiratory system. I also recommend using a saline nasal spray to gently cleanse your nasal passages, helping to remove any irritants you may have inhaled.

For a proactive approach to countering the oxidative stress caused by smoke exposure, consider replenishing your body’s defenses with IV nutrient therapy. At Next Health, we offer customized IV therapy options, including antioxidants like vitamin C and glutathione, which are key players in neutralizing harmful free radicals and supporting your immune system. This comprehensive strategy can make a significant difference in protecting your health during times of poor air quality. Stay vigilant, take these precautions, and prioritize your well-being during these challenging conditions.

Jacobsen: What can help mitigate the effects of smoke exposure and support lung health?

Egler: To mitigate the effects of smoke exposure and support your lung health, it’s important to focus on reducing inflammation and enhancing your body’s natural defenses. Antioxidant support is a key step—nutrients like N-acetylcysteine (NAC), vitamin C, and glutathione play a critical role in neutralizing free radicals produced by smoke exposure. These antioxidants help protect lung tissue from oxidative stress and promote recovery.

Incorporating breathwork and respiratory care into your daily routine can also provide relief. Simple deep breathing exercises can improve oxygen exchange and help expel irritants from your lungs. Using a humidifier in your living space adds moisture to the air, soothing irritated respiratory passages and reducing discomfort.

For a more advanced approach, consider Hyperbaric Oxygen Therapy (HBOT), which we offer at Next Health. This therapy delivers concentrated oxygen to your tissues, promoting healing and significantly reducing inflammation caused by smoke exposure. Another option to address systemic inflammation is cold therapy, such as cryotherapy, which can help calm your body’s inflammatory response and boost overall recovery.

Jacobsen: How can residents optimize diets and hydration to counteract increased environmental toxins from the LA fires?

Egler: To counteract the increased environmental toxins from the LA fires, optimizing your diet and hydration is essential for supporting your body’s natural detoxification processes. First and foremost, stay well-hydrated by drinking plenty of filtered water throughout the day. Proper hydration helps flush toxins from your system and supports kidney function. Adding electrolytes, like mineral salt or high-quality coconut water without added sugar, can further enhance hydration by ensuring your body maintains the right balance of minerals during this stressful time.

Incorporate anti-inflammatory, nutrient-dense foods into your diet to help combat oxidative stress. Focus on antioxidant-rich fruits like berries, leafy greens like kale and spinach, and spices like turmeric, which has powerful anti-inflammatory properties. Omega-3-rich fish, such as salmon or mackerel, can also provide essential fatty acids that help reduce systemic inflammation and support lung health.

For a more tailored approach, consider consulting with a functional medicine provider at Next Health. Our experts can work with you to create a personalized detox diet plan that aligns with your unique needs, incorporating supplements or specific food strategies to boost your body’s resilience. By prioritizing hydration and nutrition, you can equip your body to better manage the effects of environmental toxins and maintain optimal health.

Jacobsen: What advice do you have for those with pre-existing respiratory or cardiovascular conditions around fires?

Egler: For individuals with pre-existing respiratory or cardiovascular conditions, such as asthma, COPD, or heart disease, it’s especially important to take proactive steps to protect your health during these devastating fires. Start by closely following your prescribed management plan and ensuring that any rescue medications, like inhalers, are easily accessible. This preparedness can be life-saving if symptoms are triggered by poor air quality.

Everyone should leverage biomarker testing to gain a data-driven understanding of how your unique body is responding to environmental challenges. These tests can monitor inflammation and oxidative stress levels, helping to tailor your health strategy and address any potential risks before they escalate.

Another option to consider is ozone therapy, which enhances oxygen delivery throughout the body and can significantly reduce systemic inflammation, providing a supportive boost for your respiratory and cardiovascular systems. By combining these approaches, you can better safeguard your health during periods of heightened environmental stress while ensuring you remain resilient and well-equipped to manage pre-existing conditions.

Jacobsen: How does a functional medicine strategy address the health challenges posed by wildfire smoke and ash?

Egler: A functional medicine strategy is uniquely equipped to address the health challenges posed by wildfire smoke and ash by focusing on root cause identification and personalized solutions. Wildfire exposure introduces toxins and increases oxidative stress, so the primary goal is to support the body’s detoxification and immune response.

Detoxification support is essential for eliminating harmful pollutants from the body. Detox IV drips, rich in antioxidants like glutathione and vitamin C, can provide immediate relief by neutralizing free radicals and promoting cellular repair. Oral supplementation with antioxidants and binders, such as activated charcoal, can further aid in removing toxins from the system.

Strengthening the immune system is another critical component. Supplements like zinc and vitamin D can help bolster immune resilience, ensuring your body can better combat the inflammatory effects of smoke exposure.

At Next Health, our comprehensive wellness plans are designed to address inflammation, oxidative stress, and overall recovery. These personalized strategies combine advanced therapies and expert guidance to ensure your body is fully supported in mitigating the health impacts of wildfire exposure, promoting long-term resilience and vitality.

Jacobsen: What are practical tips for reducing the long-term risks associated with air pollution?

Egler: Reducing the long-term risks associated with air pollution requires a proactive and multi-faceted approach. Start by investing in your home’s air quality with high-quality air purifiers, particularly those equipped with HEPA filters, to minimize exposure to harmful airborne particles indoors. Clean, pollutant-free air is a crucial foundation for protecting your health over time.

Regular detoxification can also play a key role. Seasonal detox protocols, such as IV therapy to replenish antioxidants like glutathione and vitamin C, and sauna sessions to encourage sweat-based toxin elimination, are effective ways to support your body’s natural cleansing processes.

Lifestyle optimization is equally important. Focus on maintaining a nutrient-rich diet filled with antioxidant-rich fruits, vegetables, and healthy fats to combat oxidative damage. Engage in regular physical activity indoors during periods of poor air quality, and consider incorporating targeted supplements to further protect against inflammation and free radical damage. At Next Health, we offer tailored wellness plans to help you build long-term resilience, combining personalized detox strategies, advanced therapies, and nutritional support to keep you thriving despite environmental challenges.

Jacobsen: How can families support children and elderly members who are vulnerable to the impacts of the fires?

Egler: This question hits home for me as I serve as the functional medicine doctor for my own children, one of whom has asthma and has been especially impacted by the environmental toxins. Supporting children and elderly family members during fires requires thoughtful measures to address their unique vulnerabilities. Begin by creating a safe indoor environment. Use HEPA filters to maintain clean air, limit exposure to outdoor air by keeping windows and doors closed, and ensure everyone stays adequately hydrated to help flush toxins from their systems.

For more tailored care, consider pediatric or geriatric consultations with functional medicine providers. These specialists can address specific needs, whether it’s enhancing a child’s developing immune system or managing chronic conditions in older adults, with personalized strategies to mitigate the impacts of smoke and pollutants.

Wellness services can also be invaluable for recovery. IV therapy and antioxidant supplementation, such as glutathione and vitamin C, can provide critical support by combating oxidative stress and promoting overall resilience for vulnerable family members.

To empower families further, Next Health offers educational webinars and resources to help you stay informed about best practices for protecting loved ones. By combining safe environments, specialized care, and wellness resources, you can effectively support your family through the challenges of fire season.

Jacobsen: How can Los Angeles residents build health resilience?

Egler: Building health resilience as a Los Angeles resident involves taking proactive steps to support your body against environmental and lifestyle stressors. Start with routine biomarker testing to gain insights into inflammation levels, toxin exposure, and antioxidant capacity. This data provides a clear picture of your health and allows you to address potential issues before they escalate.

Optimizing core health pillars is equally vital. Prioritize quality sleep, effective stress management, balanced nutrition, and regular physical activity. Next Health’s 12-spoke Wellness Wheel framework is a powerful tool to help you identify any areas of weakness and create a plan to strengthen them, ensuring a holistic approach to resilience.

Incorporating therapies like cryotherapy and sauna sessions into your routine can further enhance your body’s defenses. Cryotherapy reduces inflammation, while sauna use promotes detoxification by encouraging sweat-based toxin elimination.

Finally, consider joining as a Next Health member to make health optimization part of your lifestyle. These personalized programs integrate advanced diagnostics, cutting-edge therapies, and expert guidance to help you build a strong foundation of health and resilience, enabling you to thrive in the face of Los Angeles’ unique environmental challenges.

By adopting these strategies, Angelenos can not only protect themselves during wildfire season but also invest in long-term health resilience. At Next Health, our mission is to empower you with cutting-edge tools and guidance to thrive in any environment.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Egler.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Pimiskâw Scholarship to Support Indigenous Students

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/18

Genevieve Decarie a Conseillère en communication for UQAT. The Pimiskâw Scholarship competition at UQAT supports Indigenous students by recognizing academic excellence, perseverance, and community involvement, while reducing financial barriers to higher education. The program was co-created with Indigenous students, UQAT’s First Peoples Service, Mamawi Mikimodan, and FUQAT, ensuring it aligns with Indigenous realities and values. The name “Pimiskâw,” symbolizing paddling a canoe, reflects perseverance and support during academic challenges. Nearly $75,000 in scholarships are available for 2025, with applications open from January 6–26. Organizations can contribute by donating through FUQAT. The initiative promotes access to education, retention, and the inclusion of Indigenous culture in academia, reflecting UQAT’s commitment to First Peoples.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does the Pimiskâw Scholarship competition support Indigenous students at UQAT?

Genevieve Decarie: This program will support several university career pathways and recognize the excellence, perseverance and commitment of Indigenous students. While helping to reduce social inequalities and promoting access to higher education, these scholarships are also intended to attract more Indigenous people to post-secondary studies, and more specifically to UQAT.

  • Excellence scholarships: aim to recognize the academic performance of students (in addition to results, various criteria will be considered such as attendance, progress, etc.).
  • Perseverance scholarships: Recognize the tenacity of students who have an atypical or challenging background, and who demonstrate determination by succeeding in their studies.  
  • Involvement scholarships: aim to recognize students’ involvement in the university and/or community environment (Note: paid work and involvement in the workplace will not be considered)

Jacobsen: How does the collaboration between FUQAT, UQAT’s First Peoples Service, Mamawi Mikimodan, and Indigenous students influence the Pimiskâw Scholarship program?

Decarie: The competition is the result of a close collaboration between the Fondation de l’UQAT (FUQAT), UQAT’s First Peoples Service (FPS), the Mamawi Mikimodan service and members of the Indigenous student community. This co-creation process has made it possible to design a program that responds to the realities of Indigenous students. 

For example, we consulted the members of the Indigenous student community and collaborated with them to develop a promising program that is adapted to their context, to better understand their needs and also to find a representative name for the competition, which would also highlight Indigenous language and culture. Through this initiative, we want to support them better and recognize the richness of their culture and their contribution to our university and our society.

Jacobsen: How does the Pimiskâw Scholarship initiative reflect UQAT’s commitment to First Peoples?

Decarie: The Pimiskâw Scholarship competition is yet another example of the long-standing collaboration between UQAT and Indigenous people over the past several years, but also based on UQAT’s principle of territorial recognition.This is a concrete demonstration of the University’s commitment to valuing the knowledge, culture and resilience of First Peoples by implementing means to promote and encourage access to studies and academic perseverance.

Jacobsen: What cultural symbolism is represented by the name “Pimiskâw”?

Decarie: The name Pimiskâw was chosen following a consultation with UQAT’s Indigenous students. It was proposed by Jérémie Brazeau, a member of the Kitigan Zibi Anishinabe community and a student in the Bachelor of Teaching English as a Second Language program, at the Mont-Laurier Centre. The word refers to the action of paddling a canoe. “Being a canoeist, I associate my return to school with a trip down a river. Sometimes we run into rapids, but our canoe and our efforts will get us to where we want to go. I associate this financial aid with the canoe that helps us throughout our school career”, explains Mr. Brazeau. Pimiskâw symbolizes the support and perseverance needed to overcome the challenges of academic life. 

Jacobsen: What is the total amount of scholarships available?

Decarie: This year, nearly $75,000 in scholarships are available

Jacobsen: How can organisations contribute to supporting the Pimiskâw Scholarship program?

Decarie: The Pimiskâw program exists because of generous donors who offer various scholarships to recognize excellence, perseverance and commitment. Any organization wishing to support this program and offer scholarships to Indigenous students is invited to contact the Fondation de l’UQAT, who manages the program. In the near future, we’d like to develop new scholarships to attract Indigenous students to programs where they are less represented. For example, in engineering, digital creation and psychoeducation.

INFO: fondation@uqat.ca

Jacobsen: What is the timeline for Indigenous students to apply to the scholarships?

Decarie: Indigenous students will be invited to submit their applications from January 6 to 26, 2025. The scholarships will be awarded in part at the Vallée-de-l’Or Scholarships Gala on April 2nd at the First Peoples Pavilion on the Val-d’Or campus, or according to the recipients’ home campus. Many Indigenous students are distance learners, some in their own communities. The Foundation will find an appropriate way to give them their bursary.

Jacobsen: How does the Pimiskâw Scholarship initiative aim increase access to post-secondary education?

Decarie: This program will support several university career pathways by reducing financial stress, enabling a better balance between family, work and study-related obligations, valuing post-secondary studies and encouraging student retention, etc.  

By reducing social inequalities and promoting access to higher education, these scholarships are also intended to attract more Indigenous people to post-secondary studies, and more specifically to UQAT.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Rob Scott, Chief Innovator of Monjur and IT Attorney

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/17

Robert Scott is a thought leader in managed services and cloud law serving as the Chief Innovator for his latest venture, Monjur, with a mission to redefine legal services. Robert has been recognized as the Technology Lawyer of the Year by Finance Monthly and carries an AV Rating as Preeminent from Martindale Hubbell. He represents major corporations in strategic IT matters including cloud-based transactions, managed services contracts, data privacy, and cybersecurity risk management. Robert is licensed to practice law in Texas and holds memberships in several professional associations, including the Dallas Bar Association and the Managed Service Providers Alliance Board. He regularly shares his insights on the MSP Zone podcast and is a frequent presenter in the industry. He discusses how organizations across industries are increasingly adopting data processing agreements (DPAs) in response to data protection regulations like GDPR, HIPAA, GLBA, and state-specific laws (CCPA/CPRA, CPA, CTDPA, SHIELD Act, CDPA). Well-drafted DPAs clarify roles, reduce breaches, strengthen defenses, and demonstrate compliance to regulators. However, hidden risks include imprecise or conflicting terms and risk-shifting provisions that belong in broader contracts. Proactive management, such as Monjur’s subscription-based DPA update service, is essential to staying aligned with emerging regulations. Cybersecurity risk management is a critical component, requiring clear breach response protocols and security obligations. Effective DPAs bolster market credibility by safeguarding trust and operations.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What factors drive the recent increase in data processing agreements across industries?

Rob Scott: The rise in data processing agreements is largely tied to the growing number of regulations around data protection and privacy. Laws like GDPR in Europe, HIPAA and GLBA in the U.S., and CMMC for government contractors have pushed organizations to take a closer look at how they handle data. In the U.S., we’re also seeing state-specific laws such as California’s CCPA/CPRA, Colorado’s CPA, Connecticut’s CTDPA, New York’s SHIELD Act, and Virginia’s CDPA driving the need for clear agreements. These frameworks are designed to protect data and create accountability, and businesses are increasingly recognizing the need to formalize their practices to meet these standards.

Jacobsen: How does the increase in data processing agreements safeguard organizations?

Scott: Well-drafted DPAs clarify roles and responsibilities, ensuring that everyone involved understands how data should be handled. This reduces the risk of mismanagement or breaches and gives businesses a strong defense if something goes wrong. They also demonstrate to regulators that companies are taking privacy and security seriously, which is a critical component of compliance.

Jacobsen: Are there any hidden risks from this?

Scott: Absolutely. One issue I often see is that end-user-provided DPAs include risk-balancing provisions that really belong in the Master Services Agreement or other primary documents. This can create conflicts and unnecessary liability. Additionally, businesses sometimes sign agreements without fully understanding the implications of vague or overly broad terms, which can expose them to compliance risks or enforcement actions. It’s all about aligning the DPA with the broader contractual framework to avoid surprises down the road.

Jacobsen: How can companies navigate the complex legal landscape of data compliance?

Scott: It starts with a strategy. Companies need to prioritize understanding their obligations under various laws and regulations and then align their internal policies accordingly. Partnering with experts who can demystify the complexities is crucial. It’s also important to build flexibility into your approach, as the legal landscape is constantly evolving.

Jacobsen: What are common legal loopholes in data processing agreements?

Scott: One common problem is failing to clearly define roles—like data controllers versus data processors—which can cause disputes over responsibility. Another is overlooking indemnity clauses or jurisdiction-specific requirements, leaving businesses exposed to risks they didn’t anticipate. These gaps can lead to significant liability if not addressed properly.

Jacobsen: How has Monjur redefined legal services in the context of IT?

Scott: Monjur has taken a proactive approach to legal compliance with services like our DPA update offering. For a small monthly fee, we manage our clients’ data processing agreements as a service. This means that as new laws are enacted or existing ones are updated, we dynamically revise their DPAs to ensure they remain compliant. It’s a hands-off, worry-free solution tailored for small businesses in IT and software, helping them stay ahead of regulatory changes without disrupting their operations.

Jacobsen: What role does cybersecurity risk management play in negotiation?

Scott: It’s critical. Cybersecurity risk management has moved from being a background concern to a primary focus in every negotiation. A strong agreement will address breach notifications, security requirements, and even audit rights. These terms ensure that all parties are actively working to minimize vulnerabilities.

Jacobsen: How do data processing agreements, done right and done wrong, impact a company’s operations or reputation?

Scott: When done right, DPAs build trust and protect operations. They show clients and regulators that you’re serious about compliance. On the flip side, poorly constructed DPAs can lead to compliance failures, breaches, and reputational damage that’s hard to recover from. It’s not just about avoiding penalties—it’s about maintaining credibility in the market.

Jacobsen: What are the current trends for managed services and cloud law that companies should be aware of?

Scott: Two big trends are shaping the landscape right now. First, shared responsibility models in cloud agreements are becoming the norm, which requires companies to clearly define their obligations. Second, AI governance is quickly becoming a key focus. As businesses rely more on AI tools, they need to understand how these technologies fit into existing compliance frameworks.

Jacobsen: Is there a way to balance the benefits of cloud-based transactions with privacy and security risks?

Scott: Yes, but it requires intentionality. Companies need to be transparent in their agreements, invest in robust security measures, and stay proactive about compliance. The balance comes from viewing privacy and security as integral to the business, not as barriers to growth.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Rob.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Pamela Rutledge, Social Media Use and Positive Psychology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/16

Dr. Pamela Rutledge is a renowned media psychologist combining 20+ years of experience as a media producer with deep expertise in human behavior. She serves as the Director of the Media Psychology Research Center and is Professor Emerita of Fielding Graduate University’s Media Psychology program, where she develops courses on social technologies, audience engagement, and brand psychology. Her work spans design, development, and audience impact, helping clients like 20th Century Fox, Warner Bros., and the US Department of Defense build actionable consumer strategies and consumers create healthy relationships with media. Recognized by the American Psychological Association for her contributions, Dr. Rutledge has co-authored Exploring Positive Psychology: The Science of Happiness and Well-Being and contributed to notable works on media psychology. An expert source for outlets like The NY Times and Good Morning America, she also authors “Positively Media” for Psychology Today and is Editor-in-Chief of Media Psychology Review. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Social media is the name of the game for so many people now. What is the positive psychology orientation on social media use compared to the general use by, apparently, most people–so healthier and unhealthier uses of it?

Pamela Rutledge: Social media is getting a lot of attention right now, with people worrying about the negative effects. Social media, however, is any technology that enables us to connect socially across the internet. It has a lot of different platforms and uses, from connecting with friends and entertainment to finding useful information, building skills, and increasing productivity. How we use social media determines whether the impact is positive or negative. In spite of the current moral panic, social media effects vary widely from positive to negative based on individual differences.

Positive psychology focuses on the cultivation of skills and values that increase our sense of well-being, not just momentarily feeling good—what psychologists call hedonic happiness–but also longer-term satisfactions or eudaimonic happiness. Eudaimonic comes from the Greek concept of flourishing or living well, which emphasizes a meaningful life rather than simply seeking pleasure. We tend to stereotype social media use as short-term emotional fixes, but many interactions and content can foster a sense of meaning, purpose, and growth, contributing to a deeper sense of well-being and satisfaction with life.  Well-being and satisfaction, however, are a combination of both types of happiness: positive emotions and well-being or life satisfaction.

Positive emotions are pretty straightforward. They include things like happiness, joy, optimism, and hope.  However, well-being is more complicated and is a result of our ability to meet our basic needs.  These needs can be summarized by three things: 1) social connection and belonging, 2) agency—or our ability to take action and not feel helpless in our environment, and 3) competence, or our ability to act effectively when we take action. It’s easy to see how interacting on social media is motivated by these intrinsic drivers of human behavior: social media allows us to connect, take action, and see evidence of our actions. 

However, positive psychology also focuses on values as well as intrinsic motivations. Values are deeply held beliefs about what is important and meaningful in life, guiding our choices and actions toward a fulfilling and meaningful existence. They are a compass, influencing our decisions, behaviors, and interactions with the world around us. Culture and cultural norms play a significant role in shaping our values—our family, friends, and community influence what we believe is good, right, and important. The definitions of happiness, the prioritized values, and how life should be lived can vary significantly across cultures and social groups. 

People learn values through socialization. Family is one of the main sources of values, as children learn values directly from parents and other family members through observation, modeling, and explicit instruction. Similarly, friends, colleagues, and groups implicitly communicate values by reinforcing accepted behavioral norms required for group membership.

Media, including books, movies, music, and social media, also expose people to values and beliefs, shaping their understanding of the world.

Jacobsen: If people are using social media from super young ages and seeing them used from a young age, what is the impact on the development of personality?

Rutledge: Personality development is influenced by many factors: biological, intellectual, social, cultural, and situational. Social media is just one source of influence, and research in this area is correlational, not causal.  In other words, things may be related, but that doesn’t answer the chicken-and-egg question of whether one causes the other or if there are other factors involved. 

Social media, however, exposes users to images and lifestyles that can lead to negative social comparison. Social comparison, by the way, is a normal response to social situations and part of our survival instinct. Assessing our roles in a social environment was a critical factor in our survival and, in many senses, still is. Our ability to read what others want, empathize with their situations, and understand group dynamics is central to our ability to navigate our social world. 

Much of the concern about social media comes from assuming that it triggers negative social comparison in all users, thus damaging self-esteem and body image. These types of generalizations are vastly overstated.

Jacobsen: Does excessive social media use make people more self-involved digitally impair or improve empathy and narcissistic tendencies, lead to a idealized sense of self rather than a genuine one, impact the perception of everyone on individuals’ lives other than their own and potentially, lead to something like a constant validation loop? 

Rutledge: Before I answer each of those questions, I want to emphasize that social media use does not have a binary influence: this or that, all or nothing. No social media effects impact ALL users, and not all effects are the same. In fact, there are many different forms of social media with different participation and consumption behaviors (e.g., Instagram, TikTok, YouTube, video games, WhatsApp, forums, blogs, etc.).

Almost all social media research is self-reported and correlational. A correlation is a relationship, but it is not causal or directional.  All research is based on probabilities of something happening, not a certain outcome (e.g., “is likely to,” not “is”). So, a study that says excessive social media use is more likely to make people more self-involved would also say that more self-involved people are more likely to use social media excessively. This is true of concerns over mental health, narcissism, idealized self and identity development, inauthentic sense of self, and reliance on social validation of others. Research findings vary a lot based on how the researcher asks the questions and defines the variables.  For example, what is “excessive” social media use? 

But let’s focus on some fundamentals. Social media is relatively new, so people don’t innately have the skills to manage an always-on digital world with limitless information and access to a wider public than we can even conceive.  Our brains were not designed for this, which makes all of us, not just young people, vulnerable and reactive unless we learn the skills to anticipate our innate, primal tendencies and step into self-manage. Our brains are wired to notice change, to focus our attention on things that are out of the ordinary, to attend to interruptions (warnings), especially if they have a social component, to seek an understanding of our social and physical environment, and to adapt our behaviors to be fit in with our desired social groups.  All these innate tendencies were essential to our survival back in the Savannah.

When talking about kids, combine these innate factors with normal biological and neurological changes over their lifespan, and it helps understand the development tasks that shift motivations as people mature. For example, the normal developmental tasks of adolescents are identity development and the building of a social life outside the nuclear family. Recognizing this, it makes sense that teens would be focused on social media, connecting with friends, and keeping up with pop cultural trends to maintain social capital. Teens also do not have a fully developed prefrontal cortex, so they are less able to value longer-term goals and outcomes in favor of near-term rewards. 

The best approaches for keeping kids healthy and safe online are to give them training and the tools to understand and navigate the digital space and establish an open and trusting line of communication between parents and kids. Suppression and bans only make technology more desirable while making it less likely kids will come to you when there’s a problem. 

When young people can reflect on their technology use and its effect on their lives through the lens of digital literacy, they gain valuable skills essential to success on and offline.  For example, digital literacy teaches how persuasive technology manipulates attention, the psychology of positive and negative social comparisons, how to identify information sources and validity, how to search for information effectively, how to manage privacy settings, strategies for dealing with conflict, bullies, and trolls, and how to translate personal values, like respect, compassion, and empathy, to online behavior. Armed with digital literacy skills, young people are much less likely to have problematic social media use and much more likely to be able to avoid or at least handle trouble, misinformation, scams, and bullies.

Jacobsen: Does excessive social media use make people more self-involved or more other-involved? 

Rutledge: Social media can do both, depending on the context, how people use it, and their self-awareness. People who are vulnerable to the opinions of others may become preoccupied with fitting in, whether that’s looks, clothes, or gaming skills. On the other hand, social media can make people aware of social issues around the world, expanding someone’s view of self and others.

Jacobsen: Does media consumption digitally impair or improve factors like empathy and narcissistic tendencies? 

Rutledge: Social media consumption has been related to both.  Social media has been associated with an increased ability to understand and share others’ feelings and increase compassion, encouraging perspective-taking. However, empathy has been shown to decrease when social media is linked with polarization by reinforcing preexisting beliefs and reducing cognitive flexibility. It has also been linked to diminished empathy through desensitization to tragedy through constant exposure.

Jacobsen: How does online presentation, typically, lead to a idealized, curated form of the Self rather than a genuine, realistic one?

Rutledge: Online presentation typically leads to an idealized, curated demonstration of the self rather than a genuine, realistic one. People are motivated to show a positive and desirable public image, often leading them to select and edit the content they share carefully. This phenomenon is not unique to social media. People also curate their looks when they go to many offline activities, e.g., job interviews and parties, to present a desirable version of themselves that aligns with social norms and expectations. 

The pressure to conform can lead to idealized standards of appearance, lifestyle, and achievement that, if internalized, can lead to increased social anxiety and can negatively impact self-esteem and self-worth.  However, online platforms can also provide opportunities for self-expression and aspiration that have a positive impact.

Jacobsen: How does this impact the perception of everyone on individuals’ lives other than their own?

Rutledge: Without critical thinking, people may see social media like Instagram as an accurate representation of life rather than an artificial (and often filtered) construct. This can activate negative emotions, such as jealousy or feeling inferior, or it can be inspirational, depending on the user’s focus. The key here is critical thinking, knowledge of technology, like filters, and recognizing the human tendency for social comparison to provide context for content interpretation.

Jacobsen: Do these, potentially lead to something like a constant validation loop? They have to keep up with the next hot or popular trend.

Rutledge: The “constant validation loop” describes a cycle where people seek constant external validation through likes, comments, and shares on their posts, leading to an unhealthy reliance on social media for self-worth. When we receive positive feedback online, our brains release dopamine, creating a sense of pleasure and reward, reinforcing the behavior, and motivating us to seek more validation. Instant feedback offers a quick boost to our self-esteem, but the feeling is not sustained. Similarly, when we constantly measure our lives against the often idealized lives of others, it can increase feelings of inadequacy, also leading to a greater need for validation to fill the void.

Social validation is not restricted to online experiences. We see it every day in schools, the office, and community organizations—who has the most money, the best clothes, the fastest car, the smartest children, etc. The potential negatives of an unhealthy reliance on external validation include low self-esteem, addiction, anxiety, depression, and dissatisfaction with self or life. 

There are, however, strategies to recognize and manage this tendency.  These include building awareness of how your social media use and need for validation impact your well-being, setting boundaries (like blocking negative triggers) and limiting the time spent on social media platforms, focusing on internal validation by cultivating self-compassion, appreciating your strengths and accomplishments, finding activities that make you feel happy and fulfilled, such as spending time with loved ones, pursuing hobbies, or engaging in physical activity. 

Jacobsen: How does anonymity in some areas of the internet impact treatment of self and others, so social interactions?

Rutledge: Anonymity plays a significant role in crowd behavior, often leading to people acting differently than they would alone or in smaller, more identifiable groups. This is deindividuation, where people lose their sense of self-awareness and personal identity within a crowd, reducing their sense of responsibility and increasing conformity to group norms. The more people want to belong to a group, the more likely they are to suppress their individual sense of self and conform to the group norms.

Motivations for seeking anonymity online vary. Individuals with negative or developing self-perceptions may be drawn to anonymity because it gives them the freedom to explore different personas to fulfill self-related or identity needs. Individuals struggling with self-consciousness, social anxiety, and low self-esteem also tend to prefer anonymity online. In contrast, people with darker personality traits use anonymity online to satisfy more antisocial goals, like deceiving or bullying others. 

Jacobsen: How can social media be used to encourage prosocial behaviours?

Rutledge: Digital literacy is the first step in promoting prosocial online behaviors. It emphasizes the responsible use of technology and online safety and encourages critical thinking. When it comes to young people, parents can model the kind of behavior they’d like to see their kids emulate, from device use to treating others with respect.

Prosocial behavior involves actions that are intended to help or benefit others. There is no line between online and offline in today’s world. Digital citizenship is just an extension of the behavior we want to see and teach in person. Prosocial actions can be encouraged at home, at school, and at work by emphasizing the importance of a range of actions, from simple acts of kindness, such as sharing or comforting a friend, to more complex behaviors like volunteering or standing up against injustice. 

Publicly valuing prosocial behavior can shift social norms and culture and has numerous benefits. It not only promotes positive relationships and a sense of belonging but also fosters emotional well-being and resilience. People who engage in prosocial behavior tend to have higher levels of happiness and life satisfaction.

Jacobsen: What have been the largest cultural impacts of social media technology to date, and will likely be those large cultural changes stemming from them in the near future?

Rutledge: Social media has significantly influenced culture by shaping social interactions, communication, expectations, and societal values. 

Global connectivity has allowed people from different cultures and backgrounds to connect, share ideas, and collaborate. The rapid dissemination of information on social media has transformed how news is shared and consumed. This immediacy can lead to greater awareness of global and social events, but the volume of information also leads to information bubbles and the spread of misinformation.

Changes in how people communicate have driven expectations toward shorter, visual forms of communication like memes, gifs, and videos and rapid response.

Exposure to curated representations of others’ lives can lead to feelings of inadequacy and negative social comparison, impacting self-esteem and mental health for some users but providing opportunities for connecting with people that were previously beyond our reach.

Social media platforms allow anyone to create and share content, leading to a diversification of voices and perspectives that challenge traditional media narratives and also to the spread of conspiracy theories and misinformation with the potential for influencing political landscapes and bad actors.

Digital literacy and accountability are necessary for us to benefit from the positives and limit the negatives.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Pamela.

Rutledge: My pleasure.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WalletHub on Best and Worst Cities for Singles

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/15

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, editing, and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo discussed the dynamics of dating in the U.S., noting that 46% of adults are unmarried. Dating costs have risen due to inflation and location-based economic factors. Cities like Atlanta, Las Vegas, and Seattle attract singles with fun and recreation, even if economics are challenging. Tinder’s popularity, broadband access, and smartphone usage significantly impact dating opportunities. Economic pressures, particularly in low-income areas, influence dating activity, while wealthier cities face demographic challenges. Cultural and economic trends in thriving metro areas like Seattle, Atlanta, and Las Vegas shape their appeal to singles.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, once again, we are here for the third day in a row with Chip Lupo, a WalletHub analyst. This discussion is a bit more lighthearted compared to the topic of elder abuse we covered last time.

I deal with a lot of human rights abuse issues, which can be quite heavy most of the time. So, it’s refreshing to discuss a lighter topic like this. According to the U.S. Census Bureau, 46% of the U.S. adult population is unmarried. This category includes those who have never been married, divorced, or widowed.

This statistic has created interesting American dating and marital landscape dynamics. Additionally, date-related activities have risen in price over the years due to inflation and other economic factors. So, what explains this trend of 46% of adults being unmarried in the United States? And why has dating become so prohibitively expensive?

Lupo: To address the second part of your question, dating has become more expensive primarily due to inflation. Depending on where you live, the cost of living may be higher, contributing to the expense. Whether it’s a trip to the movies, a sporting event, or a museum, factors like travel costs and the overall cost of living play a significant role. This can make dating quite costly, particularly in cities with abundant activities for singles.

The best cities for singles typically balance affordability with fun and recreation. As you mentioned, the unmarried demographic is diverse, encompassing those who have never married and those who are divorced or widowed. What appeals to one segment of this group may not resonate with another.

WalletHub’s research ranks the best cities for singles based on economics, fun and recreation, and dating opportunities. The top cities include Atlanta, Georgia; Las Vegas, Nevada; Seattle, Washington; Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania; and Tampa, Florida. These cities rank highly, especially for their fun and recreational offerings, which often outweigh economic considerations.

You’re correct in observing that these cities emphasize fun and recreation, which offsets the financial challenges. The best cities tend to achieve a balance, but fun and recreation often take precedence. For instance, Atlanta and Las Vegas rank first and second in the fun and recreation category. However, Atlanta is slightly more expensive overall.

Dating opportunities. Now, this is an interesting dynamic, especially regarding dating opportunities. That boils down to factors such as, first and foremost, the share of the single population. There are some cities — and we’re talking strictly about cities, not the surrounding metro areas — where this dynamic plays out differently. This limitation negatively affects some high-population cities that are closer to larger urban areas.

Dating opportunities also consider the share of the single population, gender balance, and online dating opportunities. By “online dating opportunities,” we mean the share of households with broadband internet, enabling residents to access dating websites or apps. Mobile dating follows a similar logic and measures the share of residents who own a smartphone.

An interesting metric is Google search traffic for “Tinder.” Tinder is a social media outlet, and this metric measures the percentage of residents in a city who search for Tinder the most. If a city scores relatively high in these two areas, it can offset low economic scores. For instance, you mentioned Seattle, Washington. Its economics rank is 173rd out of 182 cities, yet it ranks 5th in dating opportunities and 9th in fun and recreation. This balance makes a difference.

Let’s look at another example. Last week, I talked to someone in Florida who wanted to know how their cities fare. Miami, Florida, was particularly interesting. It ranks 3rd in “things to do,” yet 176th in economics. It’s a very expensive place to live.

Despite being so expensive, Miami still manages to rank 15th overall. Miami could easily make the top 10 or even the top 5 if it were more affordable.

Jacobsen: When breaking down the weighting of factors, the main categories are economics, fun and recreation, and dating opportunities. The first two categories are each weighted at 25%, while dating opportunities are weighted at 50%. Interestingly, dating opportunities have the fewest subcategories but carry the most weight. These subcategories include the share of the single population, gender balance, online dating opportunities, mobile dating opportunities, and Google search traffic for the term “Tinder.”

Why are those subcategories, such as metrics 31 through 35, given so much weight when considering the overall picture of cities and singles?

Lupo: Dating opportunities are the most critical criteria for single people seeking a significant other. Single individuals want to know if they’re in an environment surrounded by like-minded, single people. For example, if you’re single and living in a place like Scottsdale, Arizona — I’m just throwing this out there — or any other city known as a retirement haven, it might not be ideal if you’re in your twenties and surrounded by an older single population.

This is why dating opportunities are so important. They directly influence whether a city attracts singles looking for meaningful connections.

JWhat chance do I have of meeting someone in my city based on gender balance and the shared single population? And, of course, factors like internet and phone access—would I be able to join certain dating sites? Would those sites be accessible? 

Jacobsen: It seems like these factors weigh more heavily than the others. Also, using Tinder as a search metric is particularly interesting since so many dating apps are available. Why was Tinder chosen, and were other apps considered for inclusion in that metric?

Lupo: Well, I can’t say for sure, Scott, but from what I understand, Tinder is considered the gold standard for social media among singles. I assume it’s the most interactive, though that’s a guess. Its metrics carry double weight in the analysis, so there must be something significant about it.

Jacobsen: Let me clarify for the audience. There are no financial conflicts of interest regarding this research, correct?

Lupo: Correct.

Jacobsen: Is there a point where economics becomes an overwhelming factor in dating opportunities? The top-ranked cities for singles don’t always do well in economics. However, they still provide plenty of opportunities. People are taking advantage of these opportunities despite the economic challenges. Do you notice a point in the statistics where economics significantly affects how willing people are to use dating apps or go on dates?

Lupo: There is such a point, but it’s more reflective of the overall economics of the city. For instance, a city like Tampa, Florida, has a relatively strong economy and an economics rank of 110. In contrast, Portland, Oregon, ranks 150. If you’re in a low-income city or state, the breaking point for economic pressure comes sooner than in a place with higher income or strong 

Even in cities like New York City or Washington, D.C.—which have extremely high living costs—higher wages can sometimes offset the economic challenges. Washington, D.C., for example, ranks 179th in economics, but because it’s a world health hub with relatively high incomes, some of those pressures are mitigated. However, if you’re single, a student, or earning a lower income, the breaking point could still come much sooner in high-cost cities like D.C.

Jacobsen: Why do we find that people still aren’t going on dates in some wealthy cities?

Lupo: That’s an interesting question. Even in rich cities, economic pressures still exist for certain demographics, especially students or young professionals who aren’t yet earning high wages. Social and cultural factors also play a role in influencing whether people feel comfortable or inclined to date actively.

Again, it depends on the environment and how you define “single.” Someone who is divorced, for instance, might be more eager to get back into the dating scene, especially in places like Washington, D.C., or New York City. If for no other reason, perhaps to keep up appearances.

That would be my guess as well. By the way, I just checked—New York City ranks dead last in economics at 182nd but ranks 4th in fun and recreation. So, there’s a balance there. Folks in New York have to decide: there’s much to do here, but at what point does affordability limit those opportunities?

Jacobsen: Right. I’ve used Tinder before, and New York might have one of the biggest user bases for the app. People find a way regardless of the cost. Are there any cultural consistencies between Seattle, Atlanta, and Las Vegas?

Lupo: Cultural? Well, one consistency is that these three cities are thriving metro areas. Their populations have exploded over the last 10 years, making them up-and-coming hubs that continue to grow. Economically, at least for Atlanta and Seattle, there’s solid job growth. I don’t know about Las Vegas beyond the gaming industry.

Still, these cities share a common thread. People flocking to them from other areas are attracted by opportunities and quality of life. While the economic rankings differ—Seattle ranks 103rd, and Las Vegas is 140th—they all have plenty of things to do. These sprawling urban areas offer various activities, making them attractive for singles and families.

Jacobsen: Hey, Chip, I appreciate your time today.

Lupo: Oh, glad to be here! It’s always a pleasure.

Jacobsen: Thank you. I appreciate your insights. I’ll keep an eye on my emails, and if I come across anything else of interest, I’ll reach out so we can talk again.

Lupo: Absolutely. Thank you so much. Take care.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Lupo: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Daniel Shea and Nasrudin Salim on Chatoyance

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/14

Daniel Shea, M.Sc. is the founder and CEO of Chatoyance. Shea possesses a Master’s degree in Computer Science from the University of New Hampshire, with several years of industry experience in software engineering. He has published freelance articles on foreign exchange market strategy analysis and has published software analyzing fractals in the foreign exchange markets. Leveraging his experience with software design and financial markets, he started Chatoyance with the intent of transforming the way independent investors approach the foreign exchange market. 

Nasrudin Salim is the Co-Founder, COO and CTO of Chatoyance. He has worked in the financial trading and banking industry specializing in machine learning and previously headed the ML operations team in DBS Bank, led AI architecture in OCBC Bank, the 2 of the largest banks in Singapore and Asia and was VP of Engineering in Almanak which uses AI agents for on-chain trading in web3. His specialty is in building machine learning and AI systems at scale and also in real-time processing.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: When did you two meet?

Daniel Shea: We first met in 2012 in a high IQ society called Torr. Nasrudin had posted an internal message to the group about his recent experiences trading on the foreign exchange market, and I followed up with my own. We discussed more offline, then started working on independent trading projects with each other. One such project was a platform that allowed us to automatically mirror each other’s trades via a central server with which our separate trading platforms would communicate. We then realized we could scale this up to a wider audience, and Chatoyance was born.

Nasrudin Salim: In 2012, I was an 18 year old back then, having started trading at the age 14 with my parent’s money. I did a bit of bitcoin and forex and found success during a time when the market was not as volatile and full of trading agents and bots like today. I posted some insights into a high IQ society called Torr which had a minimum IQ requirement to join at 146, percentile at the 99.87th. Dan replied to some of my posts and we realized we both approached trading from a systems engineering perspective. At first we did simple trading projects, and then later we came to the idea of building a sort of trade sharing collective. Dan did most of the work initially as I didn’t know how to code much back then but grew rapidly later. We started building custom integrations to mirror each other’s trades on the popular platform MetaTrader 4. Then eventually it was about mirroring everyone in a group, not just one-way but bidirectional as many-to-many communication.

Jacobsen: What was the origin of the idea for Chatoyance?

Shea: Chatoyance initially started as a social trading platform which, as mentioned, was itself started as a means for us to share trades in real-time. This gradually evolved into a platform that generated trading strategies based on predefined characteristics using genetic programming. Though these two services would seem quite distinct, there are some core similarities, chief among them being the idea that many strategies operating in parallel outweigh a lone strategy over time and that there is a constant need to reevaluate and cycle out strategies as market conditions evolve.

Nasrudin Salim:  Early on, we thought, “why limit these mirrored trades to just us?” Both of us were layering signals, blending sentiment and quant metrics. The strategy seemed scalable and liquidity was deep. The original concept was basically a distributed, real-time signal exchange. It was like a sandbox where multiple strategies or traders could compete, evolve, and reinforce each other. As the system matured, we introduced genetic programming to shape custom strategies on the fly. So, from the start, the seed idea was that multiple concurrent approaches can minimize single-strategy fragility. That’s how Chatoyance was born.

Jacobsen: How has the business and technology, and software, landscape for Chatoyance’s focus changed in the last ten years?

Shea: There is certainly more competition in this space now than there was one decade ago. This is likely due to the lower barrier to entry and a hype cycle when it comes to AI. Some of the core tech has changed over time to reflect advances in the field. But another change has been the interest in different asset classes over time. Our software is designed to accommodate currency pairs, equities, commodities, cryptocurrencies, and more, but interest from clients has shifted over the years. Forex was the initial interest one decade ago. These days, equities and cryptocurrencies are asked about more regularly.

Nasrudin Salim: The stack is radically different. A decade ago, market data pipelines were heavier and less real-time. Now, I have a cheap feed of tick-level crypto, forex, equities and also options data and can run complex ML models, even LLMs directly on live streams. Cloud infra matured, open-source AI toolkits exploded, and more competition due to now a lower barrier to entry. We’ve seen forex become less sexy and crypto become standard for high-risk plays. I had to ensure the underlying architecture scales to new asset classes fluidly. We’re definitely dealing with a more fragmented but also more flexible ecosystem.

Jacobsen: How is machine learning and AI built into the business?

Shea: The core product that we offer to clients is a service that automates the construction of trading strategies based on current market conditions. Additional tiers involve full portfolios, that is to say many strategies of different trading styles or risk tolerances per the desires of the client, and strategies that evolve as market conditions change over time, owing to the fact that any strategy which works in the short term is unlikely to hold for long. This is ultimately done by leveraging AI. That is said with the full acknowledgement that the term “AI” can be quite loaded and overused these days, often used to placate certain audiences. Despite the current implications of the term, there is indeed no better term to describe what is being done. With that said, just about anyone could develop an application that outputs strategies by the end of a weekend-long hackathon. The breadth of technical indicators used, entry and exit strategy logic employed, optimization criteria supported, money management strategies considered, and robust filtering logic included all coalesces to form a more comprehensive offering than competing organizations.

Nasrudin Salim: We apply ML from the ground up. Every piece of the puzzle from market microstructure to anomaly detection, dynamic portfolio rebalancing. We mix between simple algorithms, genetic optimization to traditional machine learning, then to reinforcement learning and now LLMs. The key is continual learning. Strategies adapt as new conditions emerge and so do the humans who now build how these strategies are going to adapt. Like including meta-learning concepts, model ensembles, and reinforcement signals. The result is that you’re not stuck with stale logic. It morphs as volatility regimes shift or as new liquidity venues pop up.

Jacobsen: How does Chatoyance build more social trading into the trader networks?

Shea: The first iteration of Chatoyance was a more social experience. The idea was that there would be different trading rooms, and members of these rooms would automatically copy each other’s trades through our software. There would be safeguards in place, such as the option of enabling private rooms, muting certain traders so they could only receive trades but not contribute any to the group themselves, and so on. The idea was that, if you had a room of traders each interacting with the markets, the collective gains would outweigh the collective losses, resulting in everyone benefiting from the participants’ engagement.

The business model was that users registered with an affiliated broker, and thus commission was collected on each trade. Since a single trade was replicated for each user in a trading room, this meant a single action from a user could result in wider commissions due to each member simultaneously opening or closing the trade.

In practice, this was not quite the case. Often, people would join trading rooms and wait for others to make the first move. Those who were more experienced did not feel a motivation to contribute trades without some clearer incentive. Some ideas, such as profit sharing on commission, were proposed, but ultimately, if someone is skilled at swing trading the markets, they are more likely to go into fund management themselves than potentially risk it all on some other member running a huge drawdown.

So the idea was ultimately scrapped after several months. However, the idea of many traders bringing their own strategies to a collective single trading room has a spiritual line to our later concept of automated strategy generation with distinct trading personalities, together constructing an automated portfolio.

Nasrudin Salim: We learned that simple social mirroring wasn’t sticky. Traders either lurk or they just want someone’s edge without giving their own. So instead, we integrated the “social” element into a collaborative network of AI-driven strategy modules. Each “node” in the network is like a trader with a personality. From maybe momentum-focused, or mean-reversion-heavy, and they collaborate by sharing signals and outcomes. It’s less about people copying each other and more about these agent-like strategies feeding into each other’s learning loops, evolving collectively to handle shifting regimes. It’s social trading, but via synthetic participant strategies rather than pure human interaction.

Jacobsen: How do you do risk management?

Shea: Risk management is particular to the client, but there are many levers to pull when assessing one’s risk tolerance. Risk management can range from high-level goals, such as drawdown thresholds and Sharpe ratio targets, to finer-grained details such as exit strategies, money management strategies, partial entries and exits, and more. Many times, people will state that they want a high-risk high-reward strategy, but suddenly get cold feet at the first sight of what that risk entails. There is an element of getting to the heart of one’s true risk tolerance before crafting a template that generates appropriate strategies.

Nasrudin Salim:  Risk management is programmatic and multi-layered. For crypto, for example, I might impose real-time volatility-adjusted position limits. For a more traditional asset, we might weigh by a blend of sector correlation risk and liquidity depth. The user sets broad tolerances like max drawdown or desired sorting ratio. From there, the ML system translates that into execution-level heuristics. The idea is we fuse top-down constraints with bottom-up adaptive strategies.

Jacobsen: How do fractals play into financial markets?

Shea: Fractals are one indicator among many that are baked into the product. The algorithm may use fractals depending on market conditions, but may not. The interest in fractals in particular comes from an old technical indicator that was published to the MQL Marketplace (https://www.mql5.com/en/market/product/4131). However, in the current iteration of the product, it is not highlighted any more prominently than additional indicators, ranging from the standard basket (ADX, ATR, CCI, EMA, MACD, RSI, etc.) to the more esoteric (candlestick patterns, Fibonacci retracements, Elliott Waves, etc.) depending on the interests of the client.

Nasrudin Salim: Maybe fractal-based signals matter in certain trending conditions or where micro-structure has repeating patterns. if the system thinks fractals add incremental predictive power given current conditions, it’ll use them. As one of the architects of Chatoyance, I add it as just another tool that our systems could use, and the choice is autonomous. If not, it won’t. We never rely on a single tool. Everything competes on a data-driven meritocracy.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges facing technology-driven financial companies?

Shea: At least from the conversations I have with others in this space, I notice that there is often an overreliance on technical indicators at the cost of fundamentals. This makes sense from a programmatic perspective as engineers can readily integrate these into their models. With that said, the fusion of technicals and fundamentals is necessary to arrive at a more holistic view of the market, all of which serves to only improve the outputs of the algorithm.

Nasrudin Salim: One of the big ones is bridging the gap between what’s quantifiable and what’s real. Pure technical systems might ignore underlying credit conditions, macro news, or liquidity crises until it’s too late. Also, data noise, market manipulation, and wild regulatory shifts can break your models. It’s crucial to design adaptive frameworks that don’t assume static conditions. We’re constantly at war with overfitting and model drift. Especially in cryptocurrency where a lot of the movements originate from insider activity and information found in web3 ‘Cabals’ that exists as Telegram group chats, which can only be joined through connections or NFT purchases.

Jacobsen: What are the guiding principles of Chatoyance?

Shea: It is deceptively simple to say that one’s financial goals are just to “make lots of money.” As discussed earlier, people may feel confident moving forward with a high-risk high-reward strategy at first, only to recoil at the first drop. This isn’t entirely unexpected; after all, a safer market experience would be to invest in a set-and-forget whole market ETF. To pursue these strategies is to expect higher reward at the cost of higher risk. However, even in this more narrow range of higher risk tolerance, there is a wide window of consideration and opportunity. We ultimately aim to reconcile this risk-reward trade-off on a per-client basis and arrive at a portfolio that doesn’t fail to impress.

Nasrudin Salim: We want to democratize robust strategy generation. It’s not just “make money fast.” it’s “craft a strategy that aligns with your true risk appetite and thrives under evolving conditions.” We want to give clients a toolkit that doesn’t lock them into a fixed view of markets. Instead, we shape a pipeline that constantly checks itself like adjusting parameters, evaluating signals, pruning weak strategies, doubling down on robust ones.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Shea: Thank you for giving us the opportunity to highlight what we have built! This space moves slow and then fast all at once. The journey has been edifying, humbling, and exhilarating. We have many years behind us and are looking forward to many more.

Nasrudin Salim: Happy to share what we’re up to. It’s been good to lay it all out.

Chatoyance Pte. Ltd. (“Chatoyance”) The materials and data contained on this website and any related mobile application are for information only and shall in no event be construed as an offer to purchase or sell, or the solicitation of an offer to purchase or sell, any securities in any jurisdiction. Chatoyance does not make any representation, undertaking, warranty, or guarantee as to the timeliness, completeness, correctness, reliability, or accuracy of the materials and data herein. Certain statements made on this Site may not be based on historical information or facts and may be “forward looking statements”. Actual investment results may differ materially from these forward-looking statements due to a number of factors, including future changes or developments in the business of a company featured on this Site or other political, economic, legal, and social conditions. All opinions, forecasts, or estimates expressed herein are subject to change without prior notice. Chatoyance and its affiliates accept no liability or responsibility whatsoever for any direct or consequential loss and/or damages arising out of or in relation to any use of opinions, forecasts, materials, and data contained herein or otherwise arising in connection therewith.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Vlada Polishchuk, Canadian Development Manager: Dignitas Fund

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/13

Vlada Polishchuk, Canadian Development Manager for Dignitas Fund, talked about her mission and efforts. Dignitas operates in Ukraine and the U.S., focusing on training, supplying drones, and providing humanitarian aid like mobile laundry units. Polishchuk’s role involves fostering collaborations, raising awareness, and exploring Canadian expansion. She highlighted the challenges of declining donations after years of conflict and the need for innovative approaches to fundraising. Despite political shifts, established donor trust has been key. Polishchuk expressed concerns over worsening conditions in Ukraine and emphasized the urgency of global support to counter aggression and safeguard broader regional stability.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your role?

Vlada Polishchuk: I volunteer with Dignitas Fund as the Canadian Development Manager.

Jacobsen: What does that role involve, and what is the scope of Dignitas?

Polishchuk: Currently, Dignitas operates through two charitable organizations: in the United States as Dignitas Ukraine, and in Ukraine as Dignitas Fund. Essentially, we are one team of motivated people. We are now taking steps to explore the potential for establishing operations and collaborations in Canada.

My role involves

  • fostering potential collaborations,
  • facilitating the exchange of experiences and
  • raising awareness about the work of Dignitas.

Jacobsen: When it comes to Dignitas Canada, is Canada the home base or an extension of Dignitas?

Polishchuk: We currently operate primarily in Ukraine and the U.S. In Canada, we would function as an extension of the organization. However, we are actively exploring developing a stronger presence here.

I would love to see a fully established Dignitas Canada one day.

Jacobsen: What about products? What kind of products do you provide, what do they do, and how is this funded?

Polishchuk: Our product management efforts are focused on supporting Ukrainians. We supply drones, and we have launched initiatives to enhance training efforts. For example, our Flight to Recovery program empowers veterans through simulation and FPV drone training.

Additionally, we have implemented projects like providing mobile laundry units to aid those in need. Our work is focused on the first responders and defenders of Ukraine, as well as Ukrainian veterans, with an overall focus on helping Ukraine win this war through technological advancements. These efforts aim to save lives, strengthen defences, and protect people, with the ultimate goal of achieving victory for Ukraine and safeguarding its sovereignty.

Jacobsen: Are the operations in Ukraine different from those in the U.S.?

Polishchuk: Yes, the operations differ significantly. Dignitas conducts training programs in Ukraine, particularly in the eastern regions and other key locations. Most of our operations are centred in Ukraine, focusing on direct support and on-the-ground initiatives.

Our primary focus in the U.S. is fundraising. We are now expanding these efforts to Canada and seeking investors and collaborators.

Jacobsen: How is the search for investors going in Canada?

Polishchuk: The search has been progressing well. I joined Dignitas about a month ago, and it has been an active and productive start. I’ve met many interesting individuals—some from Canada, others from Europe or Ukraine.

Even though my primary focus is on Canada, I’ve found myself connecting with a global network of people. It’s fascinating to see how interconnected this work is. Many of my contacts have ties to Ukraine or other parts of the world. I’m optimistic that we will see positive outcomes from these efforts within the next month or so.

I can’t disclose more than that, but it’s exciting. I’m confident that, by doing so, we will raise awareness about what we are doing and make a significant difference in the direction of things.

Jacobsen: What are the struggles that come up in fundraising? Every organization with someone trying to make contacts for investors will probably get more “no’s” than “yeses.” So, how do you pursue this?

Polishchuk: Absolutely. Overall, Maria Berlinska, one of our cofounders, has been working on raising awareness about drones since around 2014 or 2015.

At that time, people were like, “What are you talking about?” because discussing drones felt like something new and unfamiliar. I wouldn’t say people took it seriously back then. It was challenging to move in that direction.

Dignitas is well-established in Ukraine and known in the U.S. In terms of fundraising, we have many established investors who trust us. We ensure transparency and inform them about our progress and plans to maintain engagement.

However, after three years of the full-scale invasion, we have observed a decline in donations and support. This motivates us to be even more creative and push harder to meet our goals.

Jacobsen: Does the political context of various Western countries influence your strategies for outreach to funders? For instance, if a new prime minister or president exists in one of the major funding countries, does that factor into your planning?

Polishchuk: With our currently established network, I don’t think it significantly affects our context. We have built trust with our donors and prioritize transparency about our costs, plans, and ongoing efforts.

Polishchuk: Our focus is on deepening and expanding our work. The people who donate to us are already on our side, supporting what we do regardless of political shifts in their countries.

Jacobsen: Does the leadership in countries, such as new presidents or prime ministers, influence your efforts?

Polishchuk: It doesn’t make that big of a difference for our trusted donors, but influences how we target large scales in terms of people. Our cause can be positioned relative to different leaders and so influences support.  

If the leadership takes an approach that does not prioritize Ukraine’s fight for resources and strength to push back against aggression, it impacts public opinion, actions, and even digital donations on a larger scale.

We’ve also observed a decline in the frequency of conversations about Ukraine. People are becoming desensitized to what’s happening. However, the intensity of the attacks or the frontline situation has remained the same. The situation has worsened.

For example, last year, in 2023, when I was in Ukraine, the Pokrovsk and Kostiantynivka regions were relatively safer. You could still travel there, breathe, and feel a moment of normalcy despite the chaos. Now, these areas are at the center of the conflict, frequently appearing in the news. The scale of destruction is insane, and Russian forces are progressing at an alarming speed.

It’s heartbreaking to see places I have warm memories of—charming towns and villages—now devastated. The scale of the destruction is staggering. It’s clear that if we slow down our efforts, things will only worsen.

I’m curious about what 2025 might look like if we don’t push as hard as we can and take this situation seriously. From my point of view, this isn’t just a threat to Ukraine—it’s a threat to other countries as well.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Vlada.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Chip Lupo, The Neediest States in the U.S.

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/12

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing and proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Lupo talks about 2024’s neediest cities in the United States. WalletHub analyzed 182 cities using 28 key indicators of economic disadvantage, such as child poverty, unemployment, food insecurity, and health metrics. Cities like Detroit, Gulfport, and Brownsville rank poorly in economic well-being and health indicators. Faith-based nonprofits, like the Salvation Army, are critical in providing support. Lupo emphasizes significant gaps between cities, such as a 30-times difference in homelessness rates. Seasonal needs spike in winter and summer due to extreme weather. Solutions require local leadership and grassroots action to address these issues effectively.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here again with Chip Lupo of WalletHub. We will be talking about 2024’s neediest cities in the United States. So, how do we define neediness in the United States?

Chip Lupo: Okay, Scott. We analyzed 182 U.S. cities—these are the largest cities by population—based on 28 key indicators of economic disadvantage. This includes everything from child poverty, food insecurity, and uninsured rates to other factors that help us understand where Americans need the most support.

Jacobsen: And when they’re looking for support, what are the main social supports? What are the main economic supports? What are the main religious or institutional supports? In other words, what are some concrete ways these needs are being met, with specific examples?

Lupo: It’s interesting you bring that up because there seems to be a trend where people are increasingly turning to faith-based institutions for support. In many urban and low-income areas—which we’ll discuss in more detail—there’s a perception that government policies have not provided sufficient help.

When we talk about economics specifically, we mean child poverty rates, adult poverty rates, unemployment rates, homelessness rates, bankruptcy rates, and foreclosure rates. So, people often look within their communities or turn to faith-based institutions for assistance. Initial government efforts may have been well-intentioned in many of these areas but have yet to catch up over time.

Jacobsen: And now, with overall religion in the United States declining—whether in terms of total numbers, attendance, or adherence to faith-based practices—are we still seeing an increasing reliance on these institutions? Or are they as impactful as they’ve always been regarding social provisions?

Lupo: They’re about as impactful as they’ve always been. However, we’re not necessarily talking about formal religious institutions like churches. We’re referring more to faith-based nonprofit groups—organizations like the Salvation Army.

These types of charitable organizations, which are faith-based to some extent, are relied upon more frequently now. Of course, because the demand for their services is so high, many of these groups are stretched thin. They depend heavily on donations and volunteer support to keep their operations running and to serve these communities.

Jacobsen: What do you notice about some of the neediest cities, like Detroit, Michigan, Gulfport, Mississippi, and Brownsville, Texas?

Lupo: These cities consistently rank poorly in two main areas: economic well-being and health and safety. We touched on economic well-being earlier—factors like poverty, unemployment, and foreclosure rates.

Regarding health and safety, we’re looking at indicators like the uninsured rate, the share of severely overcrowded homes, and the percentage of adults who needed to see a doctor but couldn’t afford to. Other indicators include depression rates, suicide rates, and crime rates.

The three cities you mentioned—Detroit, Gulfport, and Brownsville—consistently rank among the lowest in economic, health, and safety indicators. Their rankings in these areas place them among the neediest cities in the United States.

Jacobsen: What are you weighing more—economics or health and safety—for neediness?

Lupo: Those two are equal; they’re the two main dynamics. Now, within each, we have metrics that carry different weights. For example, with economic well-being, we assign triple weight to metrics such as child, adult, and homelessness rates. We give full weight to metrics such as unemployment and underemployment.

That’s key because, in many of these areas, people may have jobs, but those jobs are often several levels below their qualifications. For example, you may have a master’s degree in a specific field but can’t find work there. As a result, you take a lower-paying job or something far below what your qualifications merit.

We also assign full weight to high school dropout rate and median credit score indicators. Consumer bankruptcies receive half weight, while economic security also receives half weight.

In the health and safety dimension, uninsured rates and food insecurity rates get full weight. This is critical in what are now being called food deserts—areas where access to quality produce or supermarkets is severely limited. In many cases, crime in these areas is so rampant that supermarkets close or relocate because they can’t sustain business under those conditions.

We also assign full weight to indicators like the share of severely overcrowded homes and the share of adults who needed to see a doctor but couldn’t afford to.

But, to answer your question directly—on a scale of 100, economic well-being gets 60 points, and health and safety gets 40 points. So, it does tilt slightly more toward economics because it’s likely a more accurate gauge of neediness in these areas.

Jacobsen: And how are the worst-performing cities looking in terms of child and adult poverty rates?

Lupo: Let’s see. For child poverty rate:

  • Detroit, Michigan ranks 2nd worst,
  • Gulfport, Mississippi, is 8th from the bottom, and
  • Brownsville, Texas, is 14th from the bottom.

For adult poverty rate:

  • Detroit has the highest rate,
  • Gulfport ranks 8th highest, and
  • Brownsville is the 10th highest.

Detroit also has the highest underemployment rate.

Jacobsen: How long have you been conducting this particular neediness study?

Lupo: To my knowledge, I can recall that we’ve been doing it for at least 2 or 3 years, as far as. It may go back even further. I’d check with Diana on that one, but we’ve conducted this study as far back as 2020.

Jacobsen: And what about unemployment and uninsured rates? How do these factor into the degree to which some of these worst-performing cities are addressing the needs of their citizens?

Lupo: Okay. For unemployment:

  • Detroit has the highest unemployment rate at almost 7.5%.
  • Gulfport ranks 121st, which is relatively good out of 182 cities.
  • Brownsville ranks 19th worst.

For underemployment:

  • Detroit ranks 1st for underemployment, meaning it’s the worst.
  • Gulfport performs better in this metric, and Brownsville has a very low underemployment rate.

Now, regarding Brownsville—being in the South Texas area, there’s a lot of agriculture and farming, so underemployment may not be as significant an issue there. People are likely employed in agricultural jobs that fit their immediate skills, even if they’re not highly specialized roles.

So, to recap, Detroit is the most concerning city with high unemployment and underemployment rates, while Brownsville and Gulfport show mixed results depending on the metric.

Jacobsen: Gulfport ranks 171st, and Brownsville ranks 181st. So, they’re not as bad in terms of underemployment as they are for unemployment in those areas. Now, let’s see what else we can look at here. When you’re looking at the highs and lows of neediness in the United States, are the gaps significant across the spectrum, or is there simply a rank order,, and the gaps are relatively close overall?

Lupo: The gaps are pretty sizable. Let’s look, for example, at the the child poverty rate. Cleveland, Ohio, has the highest child poverty rate, while Pearl City, Hawaii, has the lowest. That’s a 13-times difference. So, a child in Cleveland is 13 times worse off than one in Pearl City, Hawaii.

For adult poverty rate, Detroit has the highest rate, which is 6 times worse than in Pearl City, Hawaii.

When it comes to homelessness, the difference is even more dramatic. There’s a 30-times difference between Honolulu, Hawaii, which has the highest homelessness rate, and Overland Park, Kansas, which has the lowest.

Depending on the metric, we’re seeing some significant gaps between the cities performing the worst and those performing the best. This highlights the discrepancies in economic well-being, health, and safety across the country and raises the question of how we bridge those gaps.

Jacobsen: Some of your research focuses on actionable. If people want to reduce the neediness in their city, what policies or social programs seem reasonable to implement based on the data?

Lupo: It begins at the local level. Residents need to petition their local leaders or legislatures to revamp existing policies. If those leaders aren’t addressing the issues, residents need to vote them out and bring in new leadership to prioritize these challenges.

I don’t know if you’ve been following the situation in Chicago, but there’s been significant tension between citizens and city officials over illegal immigration. The city wants to raise taxes to fund services for an influx of immigrants, but residents have had enough. They’re confronting the mayor and assembly members, saying, “You need to look out for us first and not raise taxes to support people who are here illegally.”

We’re starting to see more backlash in impoverished, high-crime communities. Residents are stepping up, making their voices heard, and demanding action. Change has to start at the grassroots level—you can’t petition Washington for solutions until you’ve addressed issues at city hall. Any meaningful improvements in these communities must begin locally and work their way up.

Jacobsen: I have time for one more question. What should we ask here? Are there differences—these are annual studies—but are there seasons in which Americans overall are more needy than others, like the winter or summer?

Lupo: Well, based on the data, this time of year—the holiday season—tends to highlight neediness the most. It’s a season of giving and charity, which brings these issues to the forefront even more.

But in a place like Detroit, for example, where winters can be brutally cold, there’s a significant degree of homelessness, and the need for shelter, warmth, and clothing becomes far more urgent.

Similarly, during the peak of summer, during heat waves, people need air conditioning, access to hydration, and cooling centers to survive. So, yes, I would say that winter and summer—the two peak seasons—are when neediness seems to be the greatest.

Jacobsen: Well, Chip, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it, as always. 

Chip Lupo: Oh, absolutely! That was great.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Denise Berkhalter, NFTE World Series of Innovation

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/11

Denise L. Berkhalter, APR, is the National Director of Communications for the Network for Teaching Entrepreneurship (NFTE). A Mississippi native, she brings nearly three decades of experience in mass communication, including roles as a digital news editor, newspaper editor, reporter, freelance writer, graphic designer, and public relations professional. Berkhalter discusses how young innovators contribute to global change through programs like the World Series of Innovation (WSI). Berkhalter highlights the creativity and curiosity of youth, fostering entrepreneurial skills, global responsibility, and problem-solving through challenges linked to UN SDGs. The program promotes inclusivity with multilingual resources and real-world context evaluation. Supported by sponsors like Citi and MetLife Foundations, WSI provides mentorship and free participation, encouraging solutions for issues like education and clean water. Participants learn practical skills, design thinking, and teamwork, often impacting their communities post-competition and continuing as changemakers globally.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do you see young innovators contributing to long-term global changes, like those of the SDGs from the UN? 

Denise Berkhalter: Young people bring fresh ideas and energy to solving big challenges like poverty, inequality, and climate change. Programs like the World Series of Innovation help them focus on these global problems by giving them tools and a structure to think creatively. For example, in WSI, students are encouraged to come up with solutions that align with the SDGs. After the competition, many participants said they understood the SDGs better and felt more confident they could make a difference​​.

Jacobsen: What qualities do WSI Imagination League youth bring to the competition? 

Berkhalter: Even at a young age, children aged 5 to 12 have incredible imagination and curiosity, which makes them perfect for innovation challenges like WSI. They approach problems with fresh, creative ideas because they aren’t afraid to think outside the box. At this age, kids are naturally curious and good at asking “why” and “what if,” which helps them explore solutions that adults might not think of. Participating in WSI also allows us to set the stage for entrepreneurial thinking early on. Through the competition, these young participants begin to understand how to solve problems creatively, work collaboratively, and present their ideas confidently—skills that will serve them for life.

Jacobsen: How does competition foster not only entrepreneurial skills and global responsibility? 

Berkhalter: The competition teaches young people how to turn ideas into action, just like real entrepreneurs. They learn how to research problems, develop solutions, and pitch their ideas to judges. But it’s not just about business – the competition also connects their ideas to real-world issues, like hunger or clean energy, so they think about how their work can help others. For example, one challenge asked students to create ideas to bring quality education to more kids, encouraging them to think about the bigger picture​.

Jacobsen: How does the availability of multiple languages enhance inclusivity? 

Berkhalter: As of 2024, the WSI program is available to participants, educators, and others in five languages. This ensures accessibility for diverse participants, fosters inclusivity, and enables a broader demographic of young innovators to contribute.

Jacobsen: What kind of impact have previous winners had on their communities? 

Berkhalter: Winners often implement their innovations to create tangible community impacts which has led to meaningful discussions and solutions tailored to local needs, demonstrating the potential of youth-led initiatives​​.

Jacobsen: How do global sponsors like Citi Foundation and MetLife Foundation help?

Berkhalter: Global Sponsors play a crucial role in the competition by funding challenges, providing strategic guidance, and creating opportunities for students to participate at no cost. Their support not only focuses the challenges on real-world problems but also strengthens the program by ensuring access to resources, mentorship, and opportunities. This enables the competition to expand its reach, enhance sustainability, and benefit more global young innovators.

Jacobsen: How do you balance fostering creativity and innovation with practicality? 

Berkhalter: The program uses tools like the Lean Canvas model, which helps students focus on key questions like “Who is my solution for?” and “How will it work?” This keeps their ideas creative but also ensures they can actually make them happen. It’s about teaching students to dream big but stay grounded in what’s possible​.

Jacobsen: What challenges have you encountered in fairly addressing innovations from different cultures?

Berkhalter: It can be tricky because what seems like a great idea in one country might not work in another. Judges have to think about each idea within the context of the student’s culture and community. For example, a solution for clean water in a rural village might look very different from a solution in a big city. The program works to make sure every idea is judged fairly by considering these differences. To support this, we have developed a rubric that emphasizes innovation, with creativity as its foundation. Volunteers receive comprehensive guidance to ensure they understand that students are developing their ideas based on diverse lived experiences. This ensures evaluations remain sensitive to the unique contexts and challenges students are addressing.

Jacobsen: Can you share any insights into how competition helps participants evolve beyond the event? 

Berkhalter: The competition is more than just one moment. Students learn skills they can use in the future, like problem-solving, teamwork, and communication. They also build confidence in their ability to create change. Many students go on to start businesses, join other programs, or get more involved in solving problems in their communities​.

Jacobsen: What is the role of design thinking plays in shaping solutions for global challenges? 

Berkhalter: Design thinking is central to WSI’s approach, guiding students through ideation, prototyping, and testing solutions. This iterative process ensures that their ideas are user-centered and address real-world needs effectively​​.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Denise.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Anastasiia Romashko, Ukrainian-Canadian Media Production

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/10

Anastasiia Romashko, assistant producer and social media manager at Kontakt Ukrainian Television Network, discussed the challenges and dynamics of the Ukrainian-Canadian media landscape. She highlighted difficulties refugees face, including language barriers for older generations and educational adjustments for younger ones. Cultural integration remains complex, with Ukrainian-Canadian media largely isolated from mainstream outlets, except for limited collaboration with Omni TV. War-related stories dominate interests, often interwoven with personal hardships. Romashko noted differences in coverage, emphasizing Ukrainian media’s sharper, more direct approach compared to Canada’s broader, less detailed perspective. Despite challenges, cultural maintenance and storytelling are vital for the Ukrainian diaspora.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is your role in the Ukrainian-Canadian media landscape?

Anastasiia Romashko: I am an assistant producer and social media manager at Kontakt Ukrainian Television Network.

Jacobsen: What does being an assistant producer for media involve?

Romashko: Usually, I contact different people. If we are looking for individuals for our materials, they could be Ukrainian personalities or Canadians connected to Ukraine or doing something for Ukraine. It varies. We usually arrange interviews with them or organize some reports that we can film for our content network.

Romashko: What are the most difficult stories to report on? And what are the easiest?

Jacobsen: The easiest stories are definitely about hobbies. It is easier if they are not doing something directly related to Ukraine or are in Ukraine—such as people who play the violin, ballet dancers, or perform similar activities.

However, every story carries some level of pain or disappointment from the individual’s perspective, as most fled the Ukraine war. Even if we conduct mostly lighthearted interviews or report on something enjoyable, they often share a story about the war or how they fled Ukraine.

Most of them were very successful in Ukraine before they moved to Canada. Now, they have lost everything and are no longer doing what they were doing in Ukraine or Europe. That is hard to hear. Some of them begin to cry, and we often don’t know how to respond because we cannot fully understand their feelings.

Jacobsen: When someone starts crying during an interview, do you interrupt their emotion or give them space to express it for tone?

Romashko: Based on our experience with such emotional situations, we usually… I’m not the interviewer. I don’t conduct the interviews myself. I assist with the production or post-production.

Typically, we give them the space to express their emotions because it would feel odd to say something like, “It’s fine, don’t worry, don’t cry.” That’s understandable, so we allow them to express themselves and their feelings.

From an interview perspective, it’s important because it helps the interviewer connect with the person on an emotional level. Of course, there is a reason for their feelings, so you can’t stop them. You have to let them process and express themselves.

Jacobsen: Regarding the Ukrainian diaspora, with the large numbers of Canadians who have Ukrainian heritage, what is the number?

Romashko: It’s almost like 200,000, close to 300,000.

Jacobsen: So, a huge number of Canadians are Ukrainian. What topics interest them? In other words, what subject matter is pertinent to their concerns as Canadians and those with Ukrainian heritage?

Romashko: The main issue that interests people is the war, which is still ongoing. Secondly, there’s the topic of people recently arriving from Ukraine to Canada.

They face challenges not necessarily with communication but integrating into a society completely different from what they were used to in Ukraine. This includes differences in behaviour, societal norms, and general adjustment.

Jacobsen: What about things like English as a second language? Is that a barrier to integration for refugees or asylum seekers?

Romashko: It’s mostly a barrier for older people. They usually had less exposure to English than younger generations. For those aged 20 to 40, we had more English instruction in schools or opportunities to travel to Europe. Still, for older people, those aged 50 or above, or for someone’s grandparents, it takes much work to learn a new language.

That’s a big problem, and many older people feel uncomfortable here because they cannot connect or communicate with others as they could before. For example, a colleague shared a story about her parents, who moved back to Poland. They had tried living with her but found communicating too difficult. They felt so alone and isolated because she was the only person they could talk to. They didn’t have friends or relatives to interact with, which made them feel lost. Ultimately, they decided to go back.

It’s much easier for younger people. Even if they don’t know English initially, it’s easier for them to learn because English speakers surround them. There’s no way they won’t pick it up eventually.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges for young people? What are the challenges for older people when they first arrive in Canada in an ongoing war outside of language?

Romashko: The main challenge for younger people is education. For instance, if they are still in school or university, they must adjust their studies when they arrive. They need to find their place in a new academic environment, which can be overwhelming.

Another challenge is making friends. When you move from your home country, you leave behind your friends, school, and teachers, which makes life comfortable and familiar. Here, they have to start over, building relationships in a place where they initially know no one except their parents. That is challenging.

The main challenge for older people is finding work. It can be difficult due to language barriers, differences in work experience, or even a lack of career opportunities, making integration much harder for them.

That’s the main one. 

Jacobsen: How integrated is the Ukrainian media landscape, specifically the Ukrainian-Canadian media landscape, into the mainstream Canadian media? How is the integration there? Is there an exchange of information, stories, and expertise? Or are you more isolated as Ukrainian-Canadians?

Romashko: We’re generally more separated from Canadian television and media centers. The only connection we’ve established is with Omni TV, which is part of the Rogers Media Group. Omni TV is technically an international channel where various nationalities can broadcast their reports or other content.

That’s the only platform where we have some presence. Occasionally, there are conferences like this one, where we meet people from other Canadian media organizations. However, there needs to be a stronger connection with mainstream Canadian media overall.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts about this war, the media, or cultural maintenance?

Romashko: The media, the war, as well as the media in Canada specifically, are quite different here. Even though I’ve learned a lot about the war in Ukraine and attended various conferences about it, Canadian media approaches it differently than Ukrainian media.

Ukrainian media tends to be sharper and more direct in covering what’s happening in Ukraine. Here in Canada, the coverage is more of an overview, focusing on cultural and political events rather than directly highlighting the war actions.

That’s an issue.

Romashko: Thank you very much for your time.

Jacobsen: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Tauya Chinama on National-Regional Humanist Partnerships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/08

Tauya Chinama is a Zimbabwean-born philosopher, Humanist, apatheist, academic researcher and educator. He is also into human rights struggles and active citizenship as the founding leader of a Social Democrats Association (SODA), a youth civic movement which lobbies and advocates for the inclusion and recognition of young people into decision-making processes and boards throughout the country anchored on Sustainable Development Goal 16 (Peace, Justice, Strong Institutions). He is also the acting president of Humanists Zimbabwe.

Chinama discusses the challenges faced by humanists and freethinkers in Zimbabwe and surrounding countries, focusing on religious overreach and the lack of religious tolerance. Chinama highlights that Zimbabwe’s population, predominantly Christian, often views other religions negatively due to media portrayal. Humanists aim to promote religious pluralism and advocate for religious freedom while recognizing the importance of education and awareness. Chinama discusses the progress of organizations like Atheists in Kenya and the registration challenges Zimbabwean humanist groups face. He emphasizes the importance of dialogue, mutual respect, and collaboration in advancing humanism.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we will focus on national and regional issues, particularly in Zimbabwe, and some of the common challenges faced by humanists and freethinkers in the region. Specifically, we’ll discuss countries like Zimbabwe, Zambia, and South Africa and examine Zimbabwe’s national problems concerning religious overreach. Additionally, we’ll explore how Zimbabwe can collaborate with humanists in neighbouring countries to establish a broader base for advocacy and action.

Tauya Chinama: The primary issue in Zimbabwe is a need to understand better what it means to be tolerant and respectful to religious liberties and freedoms. Many people in Zimbabwe believe that the majority religion (Christianity) is the ‘true’ one. For example, about 85% of the population in Zimbabwe identifies as Christian. As a result, when people encounter other religions, such as Islam or Judaism, they often regard them as false. This perception might stem from how these religions are portrayed in the media.

For example, when you mention Islam to an average Zimbabwean, they often associate it with terrorism and violence, likely because media outlets like Al Jazeera, BBC, and others frequently report stories about suicide bombings and conflict without showing the positive aspects of the religion. Similarly, some pastors, especially in Zimbabwe, still blame Jews for the crucifixion of Jesus in their preachings, which negatively influences the views of many Christians.

Although Hinduism is practiced by a smaller population in Zimbabwe, mainly among the Indian community, especially in places like the Belvedere suburb of Harare, it is often misunderstood. Many Zimbabweans accuse Hindus of idolatry without a clear understanding of their religious practices. The core issue here is a lack of education and awareness.

Humanists and freethinkers are responsible for raising awareness about the diversity of religious worldviews and the importance of religious pluralism. As humanists in Zimbabwe we aim to be objective about different religions, worldviews, cultures and philosophies by being willing to present both the positive and negative aspects of each. However, in Zimbabwe, it is often only acceptable to highlight the positive sides of Christianity. At the same time, any criticism of the religion is seen as blasphemous, and those who do so are often ostracized.

Our political leaders tend to reinforce this problem by aligning themselves with the majority religion for political popularity. This creates a challenge when trying to foster respect for human rights and religious freedoms because populist politicians prefer to cater to the majority rather than protect the rights of minority groups.

Humanists aim to take an objective approach to examining religion, advocating for religious freedom and liberty without promoting one religion over another. This issue is rooted in the colonial era when one religion was often favoured.

Jacobsen: Nevertheless, registered groups, like the Atheist Society of Nigeria and Atheists in Kenya, have achieved official recognition by their governments, offering a model for how Zimbabwe could also create space for non-religious or minority religious groups to gain recognition.

So, there could be practices for registering organizations that other African activists, humanists, skeptics, and similar groups could consider to legitimize their work. They could even use that status to apply for grants. Could we share expertise on these processes, particularly how to gain governmental approval and respectability to benefit various African humanist and freethinker groups?

Chinama: Yes. In Zimbabwe, religious organizations and churches are usually registered, and any civil society organization must be registered. However, the Zimbabwean government is currently working on a bill, the PVO (Private Voluntary Organizations) bill, regarding how to register these organizations. The bill has taken a long time to pass into law, but it might be enacted soon.

Previously, organizations in Zimbabwe could exist in three forms: as a PVO, trust, or Universitas Personarum. PVOs and trusts must be registered through the Ministry of Social Welfare Services. The Universitas Personarum does not necessarily need to be registered. It is formed when people come together and agree on a particular cause, and it is recognized by law. This is the easiest method, and I have personally used this approach.

That is how the organization I co-founded in 2020, SODA, operates. It’s called Universitas Personarum, and it allows us to engage with government institutions and other entities because we are recognized by law. However, the government is attempting to remove the trust status. They claim that civil society organizations meddle too much in politics and want to regulate such activities. They are trying to make organizations clarify their objectives, especially when they are accused of being anti-government.

The government is also trying to cut off external funding, arguing that it influences organizations to serve the interests of the countries providing the funds. Despite these challenges, the Humanists Zimbabwe continues to operate as an organization for non-religious people and has been recognized by Humanists International. We have been pushing to advance our work, and we are one of the influential organizations in the southern region of Africa. However, other organizations are more advanced than us though.

For example, Atheists in Kenya Society (AIK) is one such organization. The last time I heard about them, the president of Kenya invited them to a national prayer breakfast. Although it sounds amusing that non-religious people are invited to a prayer breakfast, it shows their progress in being recognized and called upon for national events. It may sound funny, but being invited to prayer breakfast for non-religious people is a significant achievement.

We need to reach a point where we are invited to such events. The last time I met with the cultural counsellor of the embassy of Iran in Zimbabwe, I asked him how he felt about the fact that at national events here in Zimbabwe—whether it’s Independence Day, Heroes Day, or other state events—they normally open with Christian prayers. They don’t seem to care if there are Muslims, Jews, or non-religious people present. I asked him how he felt as a diplomat when a Christian prayer was forced upon him and his religion was not recognized.

He said that it worries them, but diplomats are not there as advocates when they are in other countries. They  ought not to be actively participating advocacy divorced from their country’s business, so they go with the flow. I realized that people are often forced to accept what the majority does, even if they disagree. We should care about the rights and freedoms of the minority. Suppose the practice of the majority’s rights infringes on the rights of the minority. In that case, we need to sit down and figure out how best to recognize and accommodate the minority. Otherwise, we may be causing unnecessary suffering.

Jacobsen: And which regions, countries, or organizations seem to have more well-developed communities for freethinkers? What lessons can be gained from them?

Chinama: The country that is a little ahead in our region is South Africa. In South Africa, even in their education system, they respect religious diversity. That’s why they’re called the ‘Rainbow Nation’. If there’s to be a prayer, everyone can say what they want—Hindus, Muslims, and others. Another challenge we face as a region is the difference in our command languages.

For example, in Mozambique and Angola, they use Portuguese, while in Tanzania, they use Kiswahili. However, they are transitioning more towards English. These language barriers make it difficult for a region to collaborate effectively. So, we need to find a common language to make collaboration easier. But, at the moment, South Africa is above everyone else regarding respect for religious liberties.

Jacobsen: I’ve heard that marriage officiants are given certification in South Africa. Are there any other African countries doing this?

Chinama: Yes, in marriage officiants are state certified on the side of the Humanists there are several humanists marriage celebrants in Uganda, and here in Zimbabwe, we have one as well. Unfortunately, he’s still trying to find people who want to utilize his services. The Secretary General of Humanists Zimbabwe, Mxolisi Blessed Masuku, is a marriage celebrant. The last time I met him, I tried to convince him to consider becoming a Humanist chaplain, but he was hesitant. He said he would consider it.

I was also talking to the secretary of the faculty of Theology, ethics, religious studies and Philosophy at the Catholic University of Zimbabwe. I asked if they would accept humanists in their certificate program for training chaplains, and they told me that it was fine and that I could just come. They are willing to assist everyone. So, next year, I will need to fundraise and do the certificate in chaplaincy. I hope to inspire others to follow.

If I become a chaplain, I would move around local universities, train humanist chaplains, and try to expand these services into our defence forces, whether the police, correctional services or the army. We don’t have humanist chaplains in our educational institutions or security forces, but we need these services. We can’t criticize religious groups for their shortcomings without offering alternative solutions. It’s time we prove that what religions can offer, humanists can offer even better.

I plan to become a chaplain. It won’t be too difficult for me, as I once trained to be a priest, so I understand this role well. Recently, I saw Dr. Leo Igwe from Nigeria become a chaplain, and I’m sure he is making progress. If we have more humanist chaplains, it will help greatly. I can inspire others to join me, and we could create a tailored program for African humanist chaplains.

The American Humanist Association also trains humanist chaplains. I contacted them, and they said they used to train chaplains, though it’s been a while. The person I spoke with promised to raise the issue at their next meeting and see how they can help. I remember looking at  young humanist leaders nominees of 2022, and I came across a lady who was a humanist chaplain in the Canadian military. I don’t recall her name, but a few humanist chaplains are in Canada.

Jacobsen: Yes, Marie Claire Khadij in the Canadian Armed Forces became the first humanist chaplain in the military in 2022. There’s also Marty Shoemaker in British Columbia. There are at least two others. There are only four registered humanist chaplains in Canada, but they are making a difference.

Chinama: Yes, I recall she was the first humanist chaplain in the Canadian army. I’ll have to check the name again. It’s mentioned on the Young Humanists International website page. They usually nominate young people working on humanism and other related fields. I was also a nominee in 2023 for that program, we can certainly do something similar here in Africa.

Jacobsen: What would be the first and easiest step for building bridges among African humanists? I’m calling from Canada to do these interviews and get some exposure. But I’m also sensitive to the fact that activists in any particular country are working on their projects. They want to ensure things are done more on their terms than not, even though they’re grateful for our exposure and help.

Chinama: Yes, platforms like this are helpful. We could organize online webinars where people from different countries in the region can speak out, share experiences, and manage to recognize the similarities and difficulties we face, as well as celebrate our successes. In addition to virtual webinars, in-person meetings at the regional level might also be necessary.

For instance, we can meet in Zambia, then next time in Zimbabwe, Botswana, Mozambique, or South Africa. Eventually, we could do this at a continental level. Southern, Eastern, Western, and Northern African representatives could meet in a particular country. I know this can be taxing, especially coming from third-world countries where we have various jobs that occupy most of our time. We may have little money to spare for humanist activities, so we must make sacrifices and look for resources wherever possible.

One of the biggest challenges for humanism in the southern hemisphere is that many of our economies are still developing, so there are significant struggles. 

We also need to work on sustainability. Someone could buy land and start farming to fund humanist activities, or we could build a school. All these projects require funding, but we should brainstorm ideas for the region. For now, we can start with virtual webinars.

You mentioned a group talk last time, and some of the topics we could discuss at a regional level would include how to build a humanist movement, sustainability, and self-reliance. There are also practical activities, such as advocacy for alleged witches, psychosocial support from humanist organizations, and platforms like ‘Talk to a Humanist.’

We have the Young Humanists group and the Humanists Zimbabwe in Zimbabwe. Many exciting things are happening in Zimbabwe that are contributing to the development of humanism. When it comes to government, there are elements in the curriculum that don’t explicitly carry the label’ secular Humanist,’ but they imply it nonetheless.

Jacobsen: Evolutionary theory is fundamental to a naturalistic understanding of the world and how reality operates in biology, especially regarding the evolution and origin of the human species. How is evolutionary theory taught in Zimbabwean schools? What other topics need advocacy at the federal level in Zimbabwe to support a better, more secular, humanistic educational system for all?

Chinama: The challenge in Zimbabwe is that while the current curriculum is good, we have a heritage-based curriculum intended to run from 2024 until 2030. The curriculum itself is solid, but the problem lies with its implementation. Many teachers need to be well-trained in teaching certain topics. Evolutionary theory, for example, needs to be taught more effectively. Some people here confuse evolutionary biology with historical social darwinism and tend to make fun of it.

For instance, people often joke, saying that we came from baboons, which is not what evolutionary theory claims. I normally explain that we didn’t come from baboons; humans, bonobos, orangutans, and chimpanzees share a common ancestor. We are cousins, not descendants of these primates. However, the misunderstanding is widespread; even biology teachers sometimes need help to grasp and teach these concepts correctly.

We need a more humanistic approach to teaching, especially regarding topics like evolution. The primary and secondary curriculum is good, but we must improve our teachers’ training. To influence this kind of change, we would need financial resources, strong advocacy efforts, and access to media outlets to spread awareness and understanding.

Jacobsen: What have you found the biggest lesson in your activism in Zimbabwe? Every leader whom I consider you, with whom I have interacted, has gone through moments of significant self-doubt and challenge. What moments triggered that for you, and what lessons did you gain from it?

Chinama: The greatest lesson I’ve gained is that, as a person and leader, when you want to push for what you think is best, the number one thing is dialogue. But how do you engage in dialogue? You can only have a meaningful dialogue with someone once you learn their language and put yourself in their shoes. So, the first thing is understanding why people do what they do.

By putting myself in their shoes, I can then engage in dialogue with them, giving them time to talk while giving myself time to listen. This approach works wonders, even though it may only work on a small scale. When you meet someone and allow them to express themselves, and then you express yourself, it builds mutual respect. When you show someone you can listen to them, they are likelier to listen to you.

I’ve realized that human beings can listen, dialogue, and sit down and discuss issues. Yes, I’ve seen people try to be confrontational, but I’ve also learned that confrontation often makes people defensive. I’ve learned this over time, which I aim to perfect. It’s made me want to research more about people’s backgrounds to understand how they’ve come to be who they are and how the systems they follow have shaped them.

Religious people have told me I would make a good pastor several times. When you reach that point—when a religious person sees a humanist as someone who could be a good pastor—you’ve already made an impact. You’ve given that person something to think about. They may go away, reflect on what you’ve discussed, and come back to you a year later.

Jacobsen: Thank you for your time today for that session.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mikey Weinstein on Activism for a Secular Military

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/07

*Full biographical sketch at the end of the interview.*

Michael L. “Mikey” Weinstein is the undisputed leader of the national movement to restore the obliterated wall separating church and state in the most technologically lethal organization ever created by humankind: the United States armed forces. Described by Harper’s magazine as “the constitutional conscience of the U.S. military, a man determined to force accountability”, Mikey’s family has a long and distinguished U.S. military history spanning three consecutive generations of military academy graduates and over 130 years of combined active duty military service in every major combat  engagement our country has been in from World War I to the current Global War on Terror. Mikey is a 1977 Honor Graduate of the United States Air Force Academy. Mikey has been married  for 47 years to his wife, Bonnie. He is the proud parent of three sons, one daughter, two granddaughters, and one grandson. His oldest son and daughter-in-law are 2004 Graduates. Seven  total members of Mikey’s family have attended the Academy. His father was a distinguished graduate of the United States Naval Academy. Mikey served for more than 10 years with the Judge Advocate  General (“JAG”) Corps. A registered Republican, he also spent over three years working in, and for, the West Wing of the  Reagan Administration as legal counsel in the White House. In his final position there, Mikey was named the Committee Management Officer of the much-publicized Iran-Contra Investigation in his capacity as Assistant General Counsel of The White House Office of Administration, Executive Office of the President of the United States. Mikey has held numerous positions in corporate America as a senior executive businessman and attorney.  After stints at prominent law firms in both New York City and Washington D.C., Mikey served as the first General Counsel to Texas billionaire and two-time Presidential candidate H. Ross Perot and  Perot Systems Corporation. He left Mr. Perot’s employ in 2006 to focus his fulltime attention on the nonprofit charitable foundation he founded to directly battle the far-right militant radical evangelical religious fundamentalists: the Military Religious Freedom Foundation. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What kind of hate do you get now, individually or through the MRFF?

Mikey Weinstein: If my last name were Smith and I was a plumber instead of Weinstein—obviously Jewish and a lawyer—I don’t think we’d see 99% of the harassment we go through.

My wife has written two books, published in L.A., that include the hate mail we receive, which is unbelievably vile. Every single day, we still get a flood of grotesque, hateful threats that we have to live with. But we’re not going to let that impact our sailors, soldiers, Marines, Guardians—what they’re called in the Space Force—or any of our other clients. We’re built to handle it.

You can imagine, though, if we get this level of harassment, how hard it is for an 18- or 19-year-old service member to stand up. I remember one of our key cases: a Navajo sailor on one of our huge aircraft carriers—small cities with 4,000 or 5,000 sailors aboard. A fundamentalist Christian chief petty officer was relentlessly proselytizing him.

Jacobsen: Chief petty officer? Only that rank? Not like a lieutenant colonel or something?

Weinstein: No, just a senior NCO. This sailor’s Navajo faith is about 10,000 years old, yet he was mercilessly evangelized. We disciplined and reassigned the chief petty officer to another part of the ship. About a week later, we received a message via Window Rock, Arizona, the capital of the Navajo Nation. It was from the parents of that 19-year-old sailor.

The message still gives me chills. It was brief, just a few words. But it became our mantra: “Please tell Mr. Weinstein and the Military Religious Freedom Foundation thank you for being the voices we are not allowed to speak with.” I think about that every day, multiple times.

Most of our clients are Protestants, followed by Roman Catholics. Only 5% of our nearly 91,000 clients are non-Christians. We have over 1,100 staff at the foundation, both paid and volunteer, similar to many civil rights organizations. Our representatives cover most U.S. military installations worldwide, with a network of about 1,000 people. Roughly 84% of our staff are Christians themselves. So this narrative from the religious right, claiming that “Mikey and his people eat good Christians for breakfast, lunch, and dinner, with snacks in between,” is complete nonsense. However, it does create a security issue for us. We live with cameras, infrared surveillance, and everything else for protection.

And by the way, Article VI, Clause 3 of the Constitution states that no religious test shall ever be required for any position in the federal government. The last time I checked, being a member of the U.S. military qualifies as a federal position. Under the guise of ensuring “spiritual readiness” for our military members, they’re trying to impose a religious agenda. We recently broke a story about Lieutenant General Ryan Eifler, the most senior personnel officer in the U.S. Army. As Deputy Chief of Staff for Personnel, he oversees all Army personnel worldwide. He has disturbing ties to the New Apostolic Reformation—a group I’d describe not just as Christian nationalists but as Christian extremists working hard to create a modern-day Gilead, a fundamentalist Christian nationalist state like in The Handmaid’s Tale.

He’s also associated with people deeply involved in the January 6, 2021 events. So, it’s a dangerous situation. You can deny it, but facts are stubborn things, Scott. You can argue all day that something doesn’t exist, but if I put my hand over an open flame, it will burn.

Sometimes, people ask, “How pervasive, how systemic is this problem?” So, since we’re on Zoom, I’ll take advantage. I usually ask them to pick up a pen or a pencil and hold it up.

Jacobsen: Okay, I’m listening.

Weinstein: Then I ask, “Why did it drop, Scott?”

Jacobsen: Gravity, Mikey.

Weinstein: Exactly. How pervasive and systemic is gravity on planet Earth, Scott?

Jacobsen: Completely.

Weinstein: There you go. So, that’s what I tell them. If you go to the International Space Station, you won’t have the same gravity issues. But here on Earth, it’s inescapable. That’s how fundamentalist Christian dominionism and nationalism have become embedded in the very DNA of our military. It’s in the air conditioning of what we often call the “Pentecostal Gong” of the Pentagon.

When I speak around the country, people say, “I served in the Marines for 20 years, and I never saw that.” I’ll ask, “Where are you from?” They might say Nashville, Toronto, Vancouver, Boise, New York, or Denver. I’ll follow up with, “Did you ever personally witness a rape, an armed robbery, or a murder in those cities?” They usually say no. So, if they never personally witnessed it, does that mean it doesn’t happen? Right?

Many people avoid discussing this because it touches on privilege. If you’re a straight, white, Christian male, you have a tremendous advantage over others. Acknowledging that privilege, which is unearned, often sparks outrage. But we see its effects daily.

I grew up as a military brat; my dad graduated from the Naval Academy and took his commission in the Air Force, and I grew up on Air Force bases. I had never encountered anti-Semitism before—I was involved in school, sports, and everything. However, I faced it directly during my first semester at the Air Force Academy. I was physically assaulted twice and knocked unconscious, and they never found the perpetrators.

It was almost like a taunt; they didn’t catch anyone, and there were no consequences. Thirty years later, the same experiences were revisited in my children. That was the thread I started pulling, Scott, to see where it led. And as I kept pulling, the sweater unravelled. Before I started this work, the Academy loved me.

I was Ross Perot’s general counsel—he ran for president, an Academy grad. I was also a lawyer for President Reagan in the White House. I donated much money to the Academy. Still, then I became the “bad boy” because we stood up for people who were being crushed for not being the “right” type of Christian.

As I mentioned, we have over 24 different varieties of Baptists among our clients. We’ve defended individuals from every major faith tradition here except Scientology. I’m still waiting for Tom Cruise to reach out, but he’s not in the military. 

Jacobsen: He’s more of a film star nowadays, right?

Weinstein: I think he is—a bit of a maverick.

Jacobsen: That’s right! 

Weinstein: So, it’s a hard fight. Technically, we report to the IRS that my workweek is 105 hours—a schedule of 7 AM to 10 PM daily. This morning, it started at 4:25 AM with calls for help from a military base overseas. This happens a lot.

And I’m not playing a violin here. I’m not saying, “Oh, I’m so wonderful, such a tough guy, with such a tough life.” No, I’m the most flawed person I know, but we’re fighting something that must be fought. If you look back to Machiavelli’s The Prince, when you aim at the prince, Scott, you better kill the prince.

So, yes, we’re aggressive and militant. Still, our militancy supports the bedrock separation of church and state within the U.S. military. Even though some people crossed us three times within six weeks, like when a certain commander first took over, he did eventually do something positive. We called that out with cautious optimism. He’s not a 20-star general; he’s a three-star general, and maybe he’ll never get a fourth star, but at least it’s something.

Other military branches have nothing equivalent to Air Force Instruction 1-1, Section 2.16. So, we must rely on other regulatory provisions or the Constitution itself. In most cases, our biggest weapon is media exposure. We don’t necessarily need reporters; we have direct access to outlets like Daily Kos and sometimes get picked up by others like L.A. Progressive. However, we still engage with traditional media. Some ask why we even talk to outlets like One America News, Newsmax, Fox, or Breitbart.

It’s simple: we can’t just speak to outlets that already understand this. The Humanist and American Humanist are great platforms, and they’re not tied to these belief systems. We don’t criticize anyone’s beliefs. We don’t care if you believe in Spider-Man or the Flying Spaghetti Monster. Our focus here at the foundation is clear: we address when, where, and how superiors deploy their faith or lack thereof.

In over 20 years of this work, we’ve only encountered one instance of misconduct from an atheist superior and addressed it immediately.

The overwhelming majority of the time, we haven’t had issues with Muslim supremacism, and we’ve rarely encountered problems involving Jewish or LDS Mormon beliefs. Almost 99.9% of the time, the issue arises from Christian dominionists or Christian nationalists. And it doesn’t stop, nor will it stop, until we see punitive measures that make people reconsider their actions—similar to how someone might avoid speeding on the highway if they know it’ll result in an $80,000 fine.

If you look at this election season, we’re up against entities pushing the “Make America Great” agenda, where terms like diversity, equity, inclusion, and critical race theory are targeted. Critical race theory, for instance, merely acknowledges systemic issues and historical injustices, yet opposing it is branded as patriotic. Then there’s the label of “woke,” which is equated to Marxism or socialism. Meanwhile, we already have social systems: public schools, Medicare, Medicaid, the postal service, police, and fire departments—all funded by taxes. So, debating whether something is “socialistic” misses the point. The point is that people are people, and their rights deserve respect.

To tell a member of the U.S. military that they lack integrity, character, discipline, honour, intelligence, or worthiness because of their faith or lack thereof is no different than telling someone they’re lesser due to their skin colour or gender. As I’ve said, it’s as simple as a hamburger or a hot dog—it’s not complex.

After nearly 20 years of this work, we’ve reached a point where we’re well-known. When we contact someone, especially on behalf of multiple subordinates—most Christians—they know why we’re there, and they don’t like it. Our clients include Sikhs, Muslims, Jews, atheists, agnostics, humanists, and secularists. We represent everyone.

Senior commanders who blow the whistle on their organizations have been an interesting phenomenon over the past 8-10 years. In a shadowy fashion, they reach out to me or the foundation, pointing out issues. They need to respond to us reactively rather than proactively trying to address it independently. We don’t shame them for that. I could say, “Yes, Admiral, General, you’re the one with stars on your shoulders—why don’t you do something?” But they know we’ll address it often because they trust us to handle it effectively.

If their chain of command does not fault them, then “Hurricane Mikey” and “Hurricane MRFF” roll in. We get it—sometimes they had to do what they had to do. But little do people know that commanders, generals, and admirals bring us many of these issues.

So we bite our lips. I don’t lecture them about it or say, “Hey, we’re not a line item in the budget like you are.” We don’t run on chocolate sauce; we run on dollars. We’re just a cherry on top. They’re the ones who will retire as generals or admirals with pensions, and there’s a reason they have those stars on their shoulders. But we don’t shame them; we’re glad they come to us. This started about a decade ago.

There’s a famous movie, Casablanca, with Humphrey Bogart. I don’t know if you’ve heard of it. In the film, his character, Rick, runs a casino in French-controlled Morocco during World War II. It’s a restaurant, a nightclub, and an illegal gambling spot. At one point, the gendarmes come in and accuse Rick of running gambling. He says, “What? Gambling? I’m shocked, shocked!”—knowing full well it’s happening. That’s how it feels when these generals or admirals whistle on their organizations.

When their old bosses come around and ask, “What happened? I didn’t know this was going on!” Well, we help fix it.

By the way, with a name like Jacobsen, are you Jewish, either ethnically or otherwise?

Jacobsen: That’s astute! “Jacobson” has roots in Reform Judaism, founded by Israel Jacobson in 1810.

Weinstein: Early in the 19th century. 

Jacobsen: Reform Judaism began in Germany around that time. My family background came up in my DNA results—100% Northwestern European with a trace of something my grandmother used to call “gypsy.” So, some of our family might have roamed a bit. But you’re right about Israel Jacobson; he started around 1810 in Germany. Israel Jacobson, spelled with an “o-n” rather than “e-n.”

Weinstein: I’d like to know if there’s any relation. 

Jacobsen: Given my last name, I would like to know if there is some Jewish heritage, but 23andMe mainly shows nationality. Given the European background, it could indicate Ashkenazi heritage, but it’s hard to know for certain.

Weinstein: Right, it could be Ashkenazi, but who knows? All our blood is bonded—we’re all connected. I’m not here to argue whether the world is 6,000 years old, as some of the people we challenge believe. Like I say, I don’t care what someone’s beliefs are. Every morning, I wake up to about two dozen messages from some of the largest Christian organizations in the country, all proselytizing to me.

I also get texts from individual Christians with Bible verses, often from Proverbs or the New Testament, urging me to convert. I always tell them, “It’s not about your beliefs. We don’t care about anyone’s views; it’s only about the time, place, and manner they think they can impose them on subordinates.”

Jacobsen: This was a great conversation.

Weinstein: Glad to hear that. Thanks, Scott. Appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Bye, and talk again soon.

Michael L. “Mikey” Weinstein  is the undisputed leader of the national movement to restore the obliterated wall  separating church and state in the most technologically lethal organization ever created by  humankind: the United States armed forces. Described by Harper’s magazine as “the constitutional  conscience of the U.S. military, a man determined to force accountability”, Mikey’s family has a long  and distinguished U.S. military history spanning three consecutive generations of military academy  graduates and over 130 years of combined active duty military service in every major combat  engagement our country has been in from World War I to the current Global War on Terror. Mikey is a 1977 Honor Graduate of the United States Air Force Academy. Mikey has been married  for 47 years to his wife, Bonnie. He is the proud parent of three sons, one daughter, two  granddaughters, and one grandson. His oldest son and daughter-in-law are 2004 Graduates. Seven  total members of Mikey’s family have attended the Academy. His father was a distinguished graduate  of the United States Naval Academy. Mikey served for more than 10 years with the Judge Advocate  General (“JAG”) Corps.  

A registered Republican, he also spent over three years working in, and for, the West Wing of the  Reagan Administration as legal counsel in the White House. In his final position there, Mikey was  named the Committee Management Officer of the much-publicized Iran-Contra Investigation in his  

capacity as Assistant General Counsel of The White House Office of Administration, Executive Office  of the President of the United States. Mikey has held numerous positions in corporate America as a  senior executive businessman and attorney.  

After stints at prominent law firms in both New York City and Washington D.C., Mikey served as the  first General Counsel to Texas billionaire and two-time Presidential candidate H. Ross Perot and  Perot Systems Corporation. He left Mr. Perot’s employ in 2006 to focus his fulltime attention on the  nonprofit charitable foundation he founded to directly battle the far-right militant radical evangelical  religious fundamentalists: the Military Religious Freedom Foundation.   

Mikey has appeared innumerable times on all of the major cable and terrestrial TV news networks  and is a frequent guest on national radio networks as well. His constitutional activism has been  covered and profiled extensively in the print media including the Associated Press, The New York  Times, the Washington Post, the L.A. Times, the Denver Post, The Guardian, and many other  national and international newspapers and periodicals including Time magazine.  

St. Martins Press in New York released Mikey’s book, “With God On Our Side: One Man’s War  Against an Evangelical Coup in America’s Military” in October 2006. The paperback version was  released in February 2008 with the Foreword being written by Ambassador Joseph Wilson IV. The  book is an expose on the systemic problem of religious intolerance throughout the United States  armed forces. At this time, Mikey also made his international film debut in the Hollywood adaptation  of James Carroll’s New York Times best selling book detailing the 2,000 year bloody history between  the Church and the Jews, entitled “Constantine’s Sword”, and directed by Oscar nominee Oren  Jacoby. 

In January, 2012, Mikey’s latest book “No Snowflake in an Avalanche: The Military Religious  Freedom Foundation, its Battle to Defend the Constitution, and One Family’s Courageous War  Against Religious Extremism in High Places” was released. It details MRFF’s prominent case studies,  struggles, and the violent reactions to MRFF advocacy.  

Mikey was named one of the 50 most influential Jews in America by the Forward, one of the nation’s  preeminent Jewish publications. He also has received a nomination for the JFK’s Profile in Courage  Award and received the Buzzflash Wings of Justice Award. In addition Mikey was honored by a  distinguished civil rights organization, Jews for Racial and Economic Justice, with the Rabbi Marshall  T. Meyer Risk-Taker Award for those who have taken risks in the pursuit of justice. 

In December 2012, Defense News named Mikey one of the 100 Most Influential People in U.S.  Defense. As a distinguished “Opinion shaper” exercising a hard-fought influence over the U.S. Armed  Forces, Mikey’s influence has been recognized as exceeding that of former General David Petraeus  himself by a publication that represents “the world’s biggest military newsroom.” Defense News is a  Gannett publication – as are USA Today, The Arizona Republic, Detroit Free Press, The Indianapolis  Star, The Cincinnati Enquirer, and many other prominent newspapers across the nation. Gannett  Government Media consists of Defense News, Army Times, Air Force Times, Navy Times, Marine  Corps Times, Armed Forces Journal and Federal Times.  

Reviled by the radical fundamentalist Christian far-right, Mikey has been given many names by his  enemies including “Satan”, “Satan’s lawyer”, “the Antichrist”, “That Godless, Secular Leftist”,  “Antagonizer of All Christians”, “Most Dangerous Man in America” and “Field General of the Godless  Armies of Satan”.  

On November 7, 2011, Americans United for the Separation of Church and State presented Mikey  Weinstein with AU’s first ever Person of the Year Award. In their press release, AU describes MRFF  as “the leading voice protecting church-state separation in the military.”  

On November 13, 2014, for the sixth consecutive year, the Military Religious Freedom Foundation  was officially nominated again for the 2015 Nobel Peace Prize (its seventh total nomination).

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Karen Martin, BSN on Hospice Care and Faith

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/06

Karen Martin, BSN, a former hospice nurse, talks about her experiences in end-of-life care and prison ministry. Martin shares insights on hospice care’s evolution, emphasizing its shift from a personal vocation to a business model. She highlights the importance of love, peace, and preparation at the end of life, encouraging families to focus on the present and cherish moments. Martin also discusses the healing power of poetry, journaling, and mentorship, noting that people value relationships and forgiveness over achievements. In prison ministry, she parallels her approach to hospice, offering empathy, faith, and support to those struggling. She is the author of Everyone Dies: Journey of a Hospice Nurse.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Karen Martin, BSN. You have a collection of stories that you gathered from your notes as a hospice nurse. My first question, of course, is: How was your time as a hospice nurse?

Karen Martin: Oh, I loved every moment. It was probably the hardest thing I’ve ever done, but it gave me far more than I could have ever given to anyone. It has been a truly rewarding experience.

Jacobsen: Has hospice care changed much from the start of your career to now? Or has the focus remained the same?

Martin: Yes, it has changed—and I wish I didn’t have to say that. When I started, our census was typically around 20 to 25 patients. We were on call for long stretches—sometimes a full month at a time. Now, it’s much different. Most hospices manage between 100 to 150 patients, with separate on-call nurses. While that’s positive in some ways, it does change the personal nature of the work.

Hospice has increasingly become more of a business than a personal calling, which changes how care is delivered. I could go into the financial and political side of things, but the shift has made hospice feel less intimate.

Jacobsen: How do you address that shift, especially as the workload grew from 25 to 125 patients? That’s a significant increase. What impact does a more “business-oriented” approach have on the spirit of hospice care?

Martin: That’s a great question. Before I retired, I hired, trained, and educated nurses, especially about the admission process and patient care. I always told my nurses, “If you don’t have a heart for this work, you’re not meant for it.” I emphasized that every family is unique and incredibly important.

You must be in the right profession if hospice care is solely about numbers and business. Shifting that mindset back to hospice care’s personal and emotional core helped many nurses stay focused. There are draining times—being on call and handling difficult cases—but if you see hospice work as a vocation, it changes everything. When you view it as an opportunity to bring peace, comfort, and dignity to families, it helps you stay grounded. I also educated staff on burnout. While burnout is real, the calling to serve is so powerful that it can often outweigh administrative frustrations.

Jacobsen: As a journalist, I interview people and learn about their lives, but it seems like it takes a truly special person to deal with death daily in such a caring role. What allows someone to handle that kind of work consistently?

Martin: That’s a very thoughtful question. I don’t think I could have done it without God. My faith was number one—it gave me the strength I needed in every situation. My husband was number two—he supported me during those long, sleepless nights when I was out in the field, caring for patients. His understanding and encouragement were incredible.

There was also a real sense of camaraderie among the hospice staff. We supported one another, lifted each other during hard times, and shared in the understanding that we were making a meaningful difference. I can’t count the many thank-yous and heartfelt acknowledgments I received from families. Those moments kept me going—they reminded me why I was called to this work.

Over time, I learned that life is precious and that every day is a gift. If you live with that perspective, hospice work is no longer about focusing on the sadness of death. End-of-life care is difficult, yes, but it can also be beautiful. Death can bring peace and dignity and be filled with love and gratitude.

And the families working together at the end of life, caring for someone, is phenomenal to observe and be a part of. 

Jacobsen: What are your biggest lessons on love, despair, and loss in those moments?

Martin: Do you mean from the perspective of the person dying, the family, or something else?

Jacobsen: All of those.

Martin: Well, I started every visit by telling the family that there is no such thing as a perfect family. It’s incredibly difficult when someone is dying, especially if it’s a young mother or a young person in the family. In those cases, the family dynamics often escalate by 100%. Let them know that their journey is their journey. I promised to walk alongside them, never to judge them, and to help them in any way I could.

I don’t know if you’ve read my book, but many situations would change dramatically in the moments or hours before death. It becomes easier if the family is on board with what is happening. I often had to remind them that no single person can care for someone 24/7 alone. Taking it one day at a time became a cornerstone of my approach.

When I entered a home, I would say, “I will walk this journey with you, but we will take one step at a time. We won’t worry about what might happen five months from now. We will focus on today, and I will be here with you daily.” That approach reassured families and helped them stay grounded.

For example, if a patient could walk one day but were bedbound the next, I would make an extra visit. I would ensure they were comfortable and teach the family how to care for their loved ones. Walking that journey without looking too far ahead made it more manageable for everyone.

As you might already know, within hospice care, you often deal with preparatory grief. Families start preparing for the loss long before the death occurs. I don’t want to say that makes it easy—because it’s never easy to lose someone you love—but it can make it easier. Families get the opportunity to say goodbye. They can say “I love you,” address regrets, and have those important conversations.

Compare that to sudden loss. If someone were to tell me, for example, that my husband had died today, I would have so many thoughts of “I wish I had done this” or “I wish I had said that.” However, with hospice, families often get the time to resolve those feelings beforehand, and it’s beautiful to witness that kind of closure.

Jacobsen: What should people avoid when preparing for death? Specifically, when they are emotionally overwhelmed or unprepared—what mistakes should they try to avoid?

Martin: That’s an excellent question. One of the biggest things to avoid is pushing emotions away or trying to deny the reality of the situation. Sometimes, families want to “hold it together” so much that they shut down emotionally, which doesn’t help anyone.

Another thing to avoid is neglecting self-care. People often feel guilty about stepping away for a moment or taking time for themselves, but no one can effectively care for a loved one without first caring for themselves.

Avoid creating unnecessary conflict or revisiting old grievances. I’ve seen families bring up long-standing arguments during these times, and it only adds stress to an already emotional situation.

Finally, avoid “future-tripping”—worrying excessively about what will happen in days, weeks, or months. It’s natural to fear what’s ahead, but it takes away from the time you have now. I always encouraged families to take it one day, or even one hour, at a time.

Focusing on the moment allows you to be fully present with your loved one and appreciate your time together. It’s in those moments that the most meaningful conversations and connections happen.

Jacobsen: What should people do when someone is dying? 

Martin: There isn’t necessarily a “right” or “wrong” way, but what advice would I give: Any preparation you can make for your loved one is incredibly helpful. That includes legal documents like power of attorney, advance directives, or a will. It is important to know what your loved one wants for their funeral, what they love, what brings them comfort, and what doesn’t.

I’ve already written out my funeral plans. I don’t care if they follow them to the letter, but I know it’ll make things much easier for my family when the time comes.

It’s harder to answer what not to do because everyone is different. But this: try to walk the journey as a joy rather than a burden, as hard as that may sound.

Let me share a personal example. My brother-in-law is dying of Parkinson’s, and my sister has such a beautiful attitude about it. She cherishes every moment they have together, and he appreciates everything she does for him. That’s the heart of it—not sweating the small stuff. Don’t get overwhelmed by thoughts like, “How will I do this? This is too much for me.”

It’s like any major task or project. Tackling 100% of it all at once will feel impossible. But if you take it one day or even one hour at a time, it becomes more manageable. I encourage people to focus on the day before them, enjoy the moments, and view life as a gift—even in hospice care—rather than a death sentence.

Jacobsen: How does poetry help people deal with that process?

Martin: Oh, I love poetry. I’ve found it phenomenal in helping me through the hardest times. Writing a poem lets those emotions flow out. Sometimes, the feelings I share in my poetry are even deeper than what I include in my stories. Poetry has a way of capturing things that ordinary words often cannot.

Whether you write traditional rhyming poetry, free verse, or other forms—what’s it called again? Oh yes, haiku—it doesn’t matter. Any poetry can help. If you’re poetry-minded, it can be incredibly healing.

Even journaling can be a powerful tool. Many of my families kept journals. When I would visit, they would tell me exactly what had happened over the past two or three days, and that journal helped us all stay on the same page. It also gave families a way to process their emotions.

Sometimes, journaling can feel time-consuming, and a few families told me they didn’t want to look back at it. But eventually, they often do, and they cherish those memories. Everyone is different—some prefer journaling, others prefer poetry—but for me, poetry has been profoundly healing in every aspect of my life.

Jacobsen: What do people typically want to be remembered for when they die?

Martin: That is such an interesting question. I’ve cared for people from all walks of life—millionaires, billionaires, people at the top of their careers, and others who lived quieter lives.

None of that matters. 99.9% of people know they aren’t taking anything with them. At the end of life, they want to be remembered for the love they’ve given, the joy they’ve shared, and the hopes they’ve held for their family. Those with regrets often spend their final days apologizing, confessing, and asking for forgiveness. I’ve noticed that if they don’t, they tend to have a much harder death.

The poignancy of dying brings what’s truly important into focus: making peace—with their families, themselves, and others.

Jacobsen: What do people typically say as their final words? Are there common themes in what people express near the end?

Martin: I see it in two ways. People who aren’t ready to go—spiritually or mentally—often have a harder time. In contrast, those who are at peace tend to say the most beautiful things.

They often see things or talk to loved ones who have already passed. They’re peaceful. They want their family around them. Some people request joyful, upbeat music. Others want something quiet and serene. Everyone is different, so it’s hard to generalize.

But most people don’t care about their achievements or material success at the end of life. They truly want to be remembered for their kindness, love, and the peace they brought into the world.

Jacobsen: So their achievements mean much less to them at that point?

Martin: Yes. Absolutely. I’ve cared for people from all walks of life—CEOs, doctors, highly successful professionals—and they’re just like you and me at the end of their lives. Death levels us all.

I’ve had people confess things they’ve carried for years. Many highly accomplished individuals find peace only when they make amends with others and themselves. I say “go to heaven” because that’s my belief. But I’ve cared for people from many faiths—Hindus, Muslims, and others. My role is never to convert them. I respect everyone’s faith and beliefs.

Most people want peace with their family, peace within themselves, and peace with their God. However, they define that relationship.

Jacobsen: How do you use these experiences from hospice care in your prison ministry?

Martin: Oh, wow. Prison ministry is a completely different experience—but there are parallels.

When I enter the prison, I tell the women, “There’s no such thing as a perfect family. I’m just as broken as you are, only in a different way.” That levelled the playing field. It helped them see that we’re all human and trying to help one another.

My goal is to help them find Jesus so they can have peace and maybe walk away from their addictions or destructive cycles. I’ll help them in any way I can.

The ministry might look different, but at its core, it’s about pointing people toward faith, love, and hope. That said, I don’t sugarcoat things. We talk about the hard stuff—how difficult it is to be in prison, the regrets they have, and the challenges they face. We face it all together.

I have a young woman now—she’s 21 years old—and she’s going to be in prison for 40 years. I’m going to visit her next week. My heart aches for her, and I cannot imagine what she must be going through.

So, you must have a heart for prison ministry and hospice work. You have to love people and find joy in reaching out to others and helping them in their hardest times—whether that’s being in prison or having a loved one who’s dying.

Jacobsen: One of the lighter aspects of your story, something not as difficult as prison or as tragic as hospice care, is your work in women’s mentorship programs at your church. Different demographics require different kinds of support. What do you find women need most in church mentorship?

Martin: Oh, wow. That’s a great question.

Again, it comes down to reaching out to people who are struggling. At my age, I do much mentoring with younger women in the church—women who may be wrestling with their faith or asking, “What’s life all about? What’s my purpose?” I let them know I was once in that same place and understood.

The key is walking the journey with them. It’s not about having all the answers—because I don’t. Sometimes, it’s just about being someone who can listen and say, “That must be so difficult.” It’s about showing empathy, not necessarily fixing everything.

For example, when a young father comes to me and says, “Why is my wife dying at 35? Why is this happening to us when we have four children?”—a hard question. That’s a very hard question. I don’t always have the answers, and it’s okay to admit that.

What I can do is listen, care, and pray for them. That gives them even a small hope to move forward.

Jacobsen: Karen, thank you for the wonderful conversation today.

Martin: Not a problem. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: I will continue to pray for you and your family as you navigate death and dying as well.

Martin: Thank you. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Is there anything else you’d like to add?

Martin: No, I think that’s it for now.

Jacobsen: We’ll be in touch. Thank you so much.

Martin: Bye.

Jacobsen: Bye-bye.

Martin: God bless you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Harrison Mumia and Atheism in Kenya

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/05

The Atheists In Kenya Society (AIK) is a nonprofit organization founded by Harrison Mumia on February 17, 2016. It promotes the rights and visibility of atheists in Kenya and advocates for secularism and rational inquiry. AIK is affiliated with Humanists International and actively engages in legal and social activism.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We’re here with Harrison Mumia. When you hear stories of people coming out as atheists in Kenya and consider the political situation in Kenya, particularly regarding religious influence on politics and society, what stories come forward? What common themes may people need to learn about in Kenya?

Harrison Mumia: Thank you so much, Scott. We’re happy to have this conversation. In Kenya, the public is generally skeptical of atheism because it is still a relatively new concept in our societal landscape.

We see a public that does not necessarily reject the idea that people like us exist, but they portray us as individuals who are misguided or who do not fully understand ourselves. In our interactions with politicians and the public, we frequently comment as a society on political events in Kenya, always striving to maintain a rational and fair approach.

We consistently respond to political matters to ensure that governance is logical and adheres to principles of good leadership. However, the feedback we receive often reflects skepticism. Many people believe there is something inherently wrong with us.

A small percentage of Kenyans agree with us regarding our position as an organization that does not believe in God or the supernatural. However, the majority still need to be convinced of our perspective. That said, we are making progress. Through dialogue, there is slow but measurable acceptance.

This acceptance is very gradual. For example, some politicians have acknowledged us and even supported certain ideas we advocate for, particularly on social media. Prominent lawyers in Kenya are also taking note of our work.

Nevertheless, Kenya is a highly religious country. The Catholic Church, Protestant movements, and the Muslim community wield significant influence in public life, and their views are given considerable weight.

Despite this, we are working hard to ensure our voice is heard. We issue press statements regularly and actively participate on social media to share our perspectives. This helps people see that we have a legitimate voice in public discourse. While skepticism persists, a small but growing minority is beginning to accept our presence.

Jacobsen: What about challenges within families? How do people navigate coming out as non-religious in family structures with greater intimacy and pressure? Families often have specific expectations for men, women, the young, and the old.

Mumia: Many non-religious people prefer not to disclose their position to their families because religion is deeply embedded in Kenyan family traditions.

For instance, family ceremonies, such as weddings, are almost always expected to have a religious component. Most parents strongly believe that religion must be central in such occasions. Our education system also includes a substantial religious component, and even in some public-sector jobs, religion is a factor.

These deeply rooted cultural and societal norms make it difficult for individuals to openly identify as non-religious without facing significant challenges or backlash.

Our education system, particularly in universities, often incorporates a religious component. For example, there are universities in Kenya where you must belong to a specific church or religion to gain admission. This reflects our history as a nation and our deeply rooted religious traditions.

Because of this, many Kenyans are reluctant to disappoint their family members by revealing their religious positions, especially if they are openly atheists. We understand that they often cannot come out openly to their families. This is why we have WhatsApp groups where people can engage and share their thoughts without publicly coming out.

I see a generational transition within Kenya. The younger generation is more open to identifying as atheists, although they tend to do so individually rather than in large groups. On the other hand, the older generation remains deeply conservative and tied to religious traditions.

So, there is a transition happening, albeit slowly. Despite this, the fact that we have a recognized space in Kenya and some degree of legal recognition is a positive starting point. The government’s awareness of our existence is a step forward. That, in itself, is progress in the Kenyan context.

Jacobsen: What about the Constitution or policies that are passed? Is the Constitution formally secular? Are there policies that support secularism? Yet, in practice, that doesn’t necessarily happen.

Mumia: Our Constitution is secular. However, the preamble states, “We, the people of Kenya, believe in the God Almighty.” This explicitly affirms God’s supremacy.

Jacobsen: We have that, too—’affirming the supremacy of God.’

Mumia: Yes, but in Kenya, it gets even more specific. The preamble refers to “God Almighty, the creator of everything.” Religious beliefs influenced the framers of the Constitution, and we understand that.

However, the Bill of Rights is highly progressive. Article 32 of our Constitution guarantees freedom of religion, freedom of belief, and freedom of conscience.

On another note, Scott, a significant legal judgment is coming next week. Two years ago, a religious individual sued us, and the court is set to rule on our constitutionality as a society. The judgment will clarify our legal space in light of the Constitution.

The court will deliver its decision next Tuesday. I will share the link if you want to join and listen to the judge’s ruling. It’s an important case, as it addresses our existence and rights as a society.

If the religious groups lose the case, it will be a significant step forward for Kenya in affirming religious freedom. We are optimistic about winning because they initiated the lawsuit. We are the defendants in this case and expect them to lose.

If they lose, it will mark a huge milestone for the legal and constitutional interpretation of non-religious people’s rights in Kenya. So, we’re eagerly awaiting this. We’re making progress.

Jacobsen: There was a comment from a member named Fiona, who made an astute point: “The constitution doesn’t matter, if a certain group of people feel ‘oppressed’ by our existence.” What happens, in this case, in terms of social reprisals? You live in a secular society, and the Constitution is secular. Yes, there’s the ongoing legal situation, but what about individuals who feel “oppressed” by your existence as atheists, believing that your mere presence is somehow imposing on their beliefs?

Mumia: That’s a very interesting point. From my perspective, in Kenya right now, I’ve never seen an atheist being arrested, beaten, or attacked by the government or any forces. I’m the most public atheist in Kenya—everyone knows me. I can travel to any part of the country freely.

I’ve been invited to forums and universities, and in just two days, we’re hosting a public end-of-year party. We’ve publicly announced the location; any Kenyan is welcome to attend. We’ve never faced any physical threats or attacks, and I haven’t had any atheists write to me saying, “Mumia, I’m in danger because I’m an atheist.”

The main challenges atheists face in Kenya are within their families. For example, someone might lose a relationship with their parents after coming out as an atheist. But in terms of general societal interaction, we haven’t seen oppression the way Nigeria has in the Mubarak Bala case.

If such incidents did occur, they would reflect poorly on the government. Kenyans are agitating strongly for fundamental freedoms, including the right to protest and express dissent. While Kenya is a religious nation, many Kenyans are also rational. If a government overreach or repression were to happen, many people would side with us.

For example, you might recall the Gen Z protests. That movement demonstrated how strongly Kenyans value their rights and freedoms.

The Gen Z protest, for example, was not organized by anyone in particular. Despite this, Kenyans gathered outside parliament to protest the finance bill, which introduced heavy taxation that many Kenyans opposed.

Our society supported the demonstrators during these protests, and we received positive feedback. Many protesters appreciated our stance, which was evident on social media.

Let me tell you something, Scott. As long as we continue advocating for human rights and fundamental freedoms, we have the potential to change how society views atheists and our organization. By demonstrating that we care about the same issues as others, we humanize ourselves in their eyes.

Our goal is to show them that we’re just human beings who care about the same things they do. So far, I haven’t seen any violence directed at atheists in Kenya. It’s not like in countries such as Saudi Arabia or Nigeria, where atheists face severe consequences. That would never happen here.

We regularly post memes and commentary on social media, some of which critique religion. Despite this, I’ve never faced threats or heard of anyone saying, “We’re going to arrest Mumia for this.” Kenya is more liberal in this regard.

If there were issues, they would likely be resolved in court, where we have lawyers to defend our position. That’s the environment we operate in, and that’s how I see it.

Jacobsen: What about the case of street preachers, Jehovah’s Witnesses who knock on your door, or a family member or friend who happens to be an aggressive believer? They might say, “The preamble to our Constitution says there is a creator who made you. How could you deny His existence?”

Mumia: Yes, we have Jehovah’s Witnesses here. They still go door-to-door, knocking and sharing their pamphlets. I’ve had them come to my door and hand me literature about their beliefs.

In addition, we often see press conferences by religious leaders who refer to the Constitution’s preamble. They proclaim Kenya as a God-fearing nation because the preamble mentions “the God Almighty.”

However, their assertions begin and end there. They cling to the preamble, but it doesn’t hold much weight for us. To us, it means nothing. We are more focused on defending our fundamental rights and freedoms.

Beyond Jehovah’s Witnesses and a few other groups knocking on doors, the pushback we encounter comes in the form of public statements, such as press conferences where religious groups assert that Kenya is a God-fearing nation. We object to these claims every time they are made.

While we respect their right to express their views, we firmly believe that the preamble has no bearing on our rights or freedoms as non-believers. That’s where we focus our efforts.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Harrison, thank you again.

Mumia: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Robyn Blumner: On the Center for Inquiry Now

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/04

Robyn Ellen Blumner (born May 14, 1961) is an American attorney, civil rights advocate, journalist, and CEO of the Center for Inquiry. A graduate of Cornell University and New York University School of Law, she served as a director for the ACLU in Utah and Florida, focusing on civil liberties and rights. She later became a syndicated opinion writer for the Tampa Bay Times, earning recognition as a Pulitzer Prize finalist. Currently, she also leads the Richard Dawkins Foundation for Reason and Science, where she promotes secular values and science education. Blumner is an outspoken atheist and champion of secular humanism.

Blumner discusses her journey into atheism and humanism, starting in childhood and becoming more prominent after her column “I’m an Atheist, So What?” drew massive response. Joining the Richard Dawkins Foundation led to her role at the Center for Inquiry (CFI), merging both organizations to promote science, skepticism, and secularism. Blumner highlights CFI’s initiatives: challenging pseudoscience, supporting secular celebrants, defending church-state separation, and rescuing atheist activists abroad. She views these efforts as essential defenses of Enlightenment values. Despite opposition from Christian nationalism and pseudoscience advocates, Blumner remains focused on the work..

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Robyn Blumner. We will discuss all things related to American humanism and scientific skepticism. Where should we start? What is your personal, superhero-like origin story in scientific skepticism and secular humanism?

Robyn Blumner: We can go back to when I was 11 or 12 years old when I first realized that I was an atheist. I was raised in a Jewish household, but it didn’t stick. Let’s put it that way. I was questioning the existence of God and the biblical stories I was taught from an early age. Finally, sometime between the ages of 11 and 12—I can’t pinpoint the exact moment—I said, “I’m no longer a believer.”

I became an atheist, and I would sit quietly, but I refused to drink the Kool-Aid any more. That all happened at a fairly young age, but for a long time, I was the only atheist I knew. That changed by the time I got to college, where I met many more like-minded individuals. Eventually, my entire family became atheists, one way or another. They either arrived at it organically or decided they were atheists, including both of my parents. But it took quite a while before I found others who were kindred spirits.

That said, atheism wasn’t a central part of my identity growing up. I wasn’t necessarily seeking out humanist or secular groups. I would mention it if there were an appropriate opportunity without causing unnecessary offence to others.

Fast forward to 2004, when Sam Harris came out with The End of Faith. However, even before that book—about a week or two earlier—I wrote a column for the St. Petersburg Times newspaper in Florida, where I was a columnist and editorial writer, titled I’m an Atheist, So What? 

That column was my way of publicly coming out as an atheist to my newspaper readership. I was syndicated across the country, so it appeared in newspapers in several cities.

I was inspired to write it because of an incident at a Tampa City Council meeting, where a council member invited an atheist to give an invocation. Instead of listening to the atheist, two council members stormed out of the room in disgust, standing in solidarity with the idea that atheists cannot be moral people. I felt it was my duty to defend the atheist who gave the invocation publicly. It was a beautiful sentiment emphasizing church-state separation and respecting each person’s liberty to have freedom of conscience—to believe or not believe as they saw fit.

Jacobsen: That must have been quite a moment. How did people respond?

Blumner: I received more letters in response to that column than for any other I had written—hundreds and hundreds of them. A small portion told me I was damned and going to hell.

Jacobsen: Naturally. 

Blumner: But most letters were from people thanking me for voicing what they had been thinking for most of their lives. One man wrote that he had been reading newspapers for over 70 years and had never seen his perspective reflected in a mainstream publication.

It was heart-wrenching to see how this small outreach to the atheist community resulted in such a tsunami of responses. It was like this giant exhale of relief as if somebody had finally stepped into the limelight. It voiced the truth of their understanding of the nature of reality. What it showed me was that this was an important endeavour. It didn’t take long after that for the New Atheist movement to gain traction. You had the books of Sam Harris, The God Delusion by Richard Dawkins; God is Not Great by Christopher Hitchens, and Dan Dennett’s books.

At the time, I was still with the newspaper, but in 2013, I was approached about the job to take over the Richard Dawkins Foundation. That meant my husband and I would have to quit our jobs, move from newspapers, and relocate to Washington, D.C. I had been a huge fan of Richard Dawkins—notfor The God Delusion, which I thought was a beautifully written polemic on why faith doesn’t have a rational basis, but also for his evolutionary biology books. They made me love and understand that subject at a much deeper level than I had after taking biology in school.

I was attracted to the position because of the man at the helm, so I took it, and we moved to Washington, D.C. Within two years, the Center for Inquiry (CFI) approached the Richard Dawkins Foundation to see if we’d be willing to merge with them. CFI is a much larger organization with a legacy spanning almost 50 years.

It was a good fit. The two organizations had overlapping missions—promoting reason, science, and secularism. At the time, Ron Lindsay, my predecessor and the president and CEO of CFI, had announced his plans to retire. So, it was a wonderful symbiosis, having the Richard Dawkins Foundation merge with CFI and then having me step into the leadership role. That brings us to the present day.

Jacobsen: That’s quite the origin story. Now, here you are, 20 years after that first coming-out article, leading, ironically, a tripartite set of organizations and as one of the most prominent women in these movements. How does it feel, 20 years later, reflecting on how an article sparked heartfelt responses, both positive and negative, and then taking on a huge role advocating for scientific skepticism, humanistic values, and secularism? I’m sure you’ve received both love and hate waves in this position.

Blumner: Few people get to do professionally what they would choose to do as volunteers, and I’m one of those lucky few. Earlier in my career, I earned a law degree.

I was head of the ACLU in Utah and the ACLU in Florida before transitioning to a columnist and nationally syndicated editorial writer. So, I have a background in progressive advocacy and civil liberties litigation. I always thought that working for the ACLU would be the apex of my career in representing my values through an organization. It turns out I was wrong. This is, without a doubt, the apex of my career in representing my values through an organization.

The Center for Inquiry promotes reason, science, and secularism. The entire package of Enlightenment values is the secret sauce to humanity’s progress and happiness. There’s no better way to structure society—based on the evidence of world history—than to promote reason, science, and secularism in a society. I love the Center for Inquiry, the work we do, and the values it represents. While some antagonism comes my way, I have a bit of a force field around me because I love what I do so much that it’s hard to penetrate this feeling of fulfillment with discouraging words and hostility.

Jacobsen: I have to ask because I’ve interviewed many women in this movement, too. I did an article a while ago that was quite popular. It was a play on The Unbearable Lightness of Being, titled The Incredible Politeness of Being: Women in the Secular Communities. It was long. I got commentary from some prominent voices then and now.

I’ve quoted interviews before. In one recent interview with Mneka Mbanje from the Zimbabwe humanist group run by Tauya Chinama. She mentioned she was supposed to travel to the World Humanist General Assembly in Singapore but couldn’t due to some factors. I asked her if the critique, criticism, and hostility she receives as a humanist woman in Zimbabwe is more substantive than what men experience. She said, “Very much gendered.”

In your experience, either in conversations with other women in the movement orfrom banter, do you find that the hostility you receive is gendered compared to men? Do you find it a gendered experience in terms of the kind of hate you get?

Blumner: I don’t, no.

Jacobsen: You don’t? Interesting.

Blumner: No, I don’t. First of all, I don’t get much hate—maybe because I’m not looking for it. I’m not reading the Twitterverse, and I don’t go seeking out the postings of antagonistic voices. I’ve got work to do, and I don’t have time for that. I used to have a personal credo when I was a columnist.

If I wrote a column and you didn’t agree with it, I’d be interested in your critique, but not in ad hominem attacks. If someone sent me an email—and this was before many comments were posted online—I’d only read up to the first insult.

Blumner: Once I encounter an insult, I delete the message. I’m not interested in your point of view if you can’t communicate civilly. The way I interact with the online atmosphere is that I generally ignore it. It may be that ugly stuff is being said about me, but I don’t know about it. .

Jacobsen: Two things: First, that’s a wise policy. Second, it may indicate a healthier societal development when hate and love are equal-opportunity responses.

Blumner: yes, that’s so true. There’s a lot of anger in cyberspace and much ugliness spread by largely insignificant people. When you read what they say, you give them too much credit and worry about it. I don’t do either of those things.

Jacobsen: Good approach. Now, shifting focus, let’s discuss getting involved in more positive and constructive societal endeavours. Specifically, regarding the Richard Dawkins Foundation for Reason and Science and the Center for Inquiry, what is the importance of each in their respective domains? How can people get involved by donating money, donating expertise, volunteering, or writing articles for newsletters, blogs, publications, and journals?

Blumner: Let me tell you a bit about the Center for Inquiry’s (CFI) origin story. It was founded in 1976 by Carl Sagan, Isaac Asimov, James “The Amazing” Randi, and Paul Kurtz—the house Paul built. Kurtz was a philosophy professor at SUNY Buffalo, and the Center for Inquiry’s headquarters is still in Buffalo, though we also have a building in Los Angeles. Many of our 31 staff members work remotely across the United States.

The founders created an organization called CSICOP—C-S-I-C-O-P—the Committee for the Scientific Investigation of Claims of the Paranormal. As the name suggests, the impetus was to combat the “Age of Aquarius” nonsense that was catching fire then. Think of psychic powers, ESP, telekinesis, talking to the dead, and weird alternative medicine. All this woo was capturing the attention of even educated people without the scientific community rising to challenge it.

The organization was founded to challenge these forms of pseudoscience. CSICOP eventually became the Committee for Skeptical Inquiry. Paul Kurtz also helped found the Council for Secular Humanism, an organization that promotes atheism and secular humanism.

These were not distinct missions because religion is another form of pseudoscience. Pseudoscience is when nonsense gets wrapped up in the garb of science—claims about the natural world grounded in wishful thinking or received wisdom rather than evidence or science. So, religion is a form of pseudoscience. It’s grounded in faith, not evidence.

It makes claims about the natural world that turn out not to be true over and over again. So, it fits well within the Committee for Skeptical Inquiry portfolio. However, Paul Kurtz created another organization, the Council for Secular Humanism. Those two entities worked side by side. The Committee for Skeptical Inquiry published Skeptical Inquirer magazine, and the Council for Secular Humanism published Free Inquiry magazine.

We still have tens of thousands of subscribers to those magazines today. I encourage anyone interested in these subjects to subscribe because you won’t find a better range of interesting, thoughtful opinions in those areas than in these magazines. Then, the Richard Dawkins Foundation for Reason and Science merged with us in 2016, which completed the picture we have today.

We go way beyond publishing magazines. I see the job of CFI as promoting Enlightenment values. We have a legal department; bringing church-state separation cases, and challenging medical quackery. Right now, one of our biggest cases is a suit against Boiron, the largest homeopathic manufacturer in the world. We’re claiming Boiron uses deceptive marketing practices when selling their products. If you look at their labelling, they essentially claim that what you’re getting is real medicine when, in reality, it’s a sugar pill—a placebo. That’s the only effect homeopathy has on a patient.

We have a legal program and a lobbying program. Our lobbyist works in state legislatures across the United States, lobbying against ideas like Louisiana’s law forcing the Ten Commandments onto the walls of every classroom in the state.

We also have a program called Secular Rescue. We save the lives of atheist activists overseas, dozens of them each year. We teach teachers how to teach evolution through our Teacher Institute for Evolutionary Science. We have an incredible range of programs that promote reason, science, and secularism.

Jacobsen: What are some of the other current activities of the Center for Inquiry?

Blumner: One of our programs focuses on promoting secular celebrants. In every state in the United States, religious leaders automatically have the legal right to solemnize marriages, but secular individuals often lack this right. To address this, we have pursued legal action in multiple jurisdictions to secure the right for humanists to solemnize marriages. We also provide a program to certify secular celebrants, who receive certification from us after completing a training program, demonstrating they are qualified to solemnize marriages and officiate various services and ceremonies, such as funerals, graduations, and other celebrations.

Most importantly, we seek the legal right for secular celebrants to marry people. Many individuals prefer to choose between something other than a religious leader or a city clerk, so our program certifies secular celebrants, whom we then represent in lawsuits to challenge state laws that restrict humanist officiants from solemnizing marriages. We have filed such a case in Texas on behalf of a secular celebrant there and won the right for secular celebrants to officiate and solemnize marriages in Illinois. Similar efforts in Michigan and other states have equalized rights between religious leaders and secular celebrants. This effort remains part of our active legal program.

As I mentioned earlier, another legal initiative involves litigation against Boiron, one of the largest manufacturers of homeopathic products, for alleged deceptive marketing practices. Boiron claims that its homeopathic remedies are effective treatments for various illnesses. Evidence shows these claims are unsupported, except for a possible placebo effect. Basically homeopathic products are modern-day snake oil. They cannot work because they contain no actual medicine.

While this work is intensive and expensive, it is deeply rewarding. We are especially hopeful about the Boiron case, and while it may take years, we are committed to seeing it through.

In addition, we have a program called the Teacher Institute for Evolutionary Science (TIES), which provides science teachers with resources to teach evolution and address criticisms effectively. Many teachers, especially in middle schools, are underprepared to teach evolution and may avoid it altogether. Through TIES, we provide these educators with knowledge, tools, and confidence so that they are equipped with materials, labs, and tests to offer a robust educational experience to their students. We have hosted teacher development workshops in every U.S. state, including states where resistance to evolution education can be strong, such as Alabama, Arkansas, Mississippi, and South Dakota. So far, we have reached more than 3,500 teachers nationwide, which will benefit generations of students.

Additionally, we run an initiative called “ScienceSaves,” which promotes appreciation for science’s invaluable contributions to our lives. We are working to establish March 26th as National Science Appreciation Day in the United States, honouring the day in 1953 when Dr. Jonas Salk announced the success of the polio vaccine.

The idea is that science needs an advocate these days. There’s a lot of misinformation, pseudoscience, and distrust of science.  Not enough people truly understand how vital science is to their longevity, health, prosperity, and happiness. So, we remind people of what science has contributed to their lives. One of our initiatives is an annual college scholarship contest. We ask high school seniors planning to attend college the following year to submit a 30-second video describing how science has helped them or someone they know or love. We then jury these videos and select winners, along with honourable mentions.

We also encourage participants to share their videos on their social media platforms, creating a peer-to-peer science advocacy effort that has been extremely successful. 

We have the only full-time paranormal investigator in the world, Kenny Biddle. He frequently receives queries about ghost sightings or other supernatural or paranormal claims, which he thoroughly investigates.

Kenny spends much of his time dismantling videos purporting to show something supernatural and demonstrating how specific techniques, fraudulent techniques, are executed. He’s incredibly skilled and engaging, drawing a diverse audience of believers and skeptics. Even those who believe in ghosts are interested in seeing him debunk these claims, and he’s remarkably effective at challenging those beliefs. So, that’s part of what we do.

We also have a podcast called Point of Inquiry. During the year, we host Skeptical Inquirer Presents, which are free online lectures open to the public. Our CFI West Executive Director, Jim Underdown, has a web series called SkeptaLab: The Bunk Stops Here—you can Google SkeptaLab, and the episodes will come up. In each episode, he uses Los Angeles celebrities to explore a different supernatural or paranormal claim, such as telekinesis, astrology, dowsing, and U.F.O.s.

In an entertaining 20 minutes, Jim walks viewers through how people might get confused or misled into thinking pseudosciences are real. He enlists scientists to explain the underlying physics or chemistry to reveal the truth. Additionally, Jim oversees our $500,000 paranormal challenge, which has been ongoing for 20 years.

The challenge is similar to the late James Randi’s $1,000,000,e We set aside $500,000 instead. It’s open to anyone claiming psychic or paranormal abilities. Participants can test their skills under controlled conditions, with tests agreed upon in advance. Suppose they can demonstrate an ability like moving an object with their mind, predicting the next card in a deck, or locating a hidden water bottle among 20 cups. In that case, we’ll pay them the $500,000. So far, our money remains safe.

So that gives you an overview of the work of the Center For Inquiry. 

Jacobsen: What about Free Inquiry

BlumnerFree Inquiry is a project of the Council For Secular Humanism, the arm of CFI that focuses on atheism and humanism work. It is an excellent magazine that explores the latest humanist thought and atheist advocacy. 

Jacobsen: What about international outreach? I am Canadian—a foreigner to Americans. You have affiliates like the Center For Inquiry Canada. How does outreach contribute to advancing knowledge, education, and humanist values?

Blumner: That’s a great question. We do have branches around the world. For example, we support a humanist orphanage in Kenya. The orphanage assists children whose parents, or the children themselves, have been accused of witchcraft, forcing them to flee. This orphanage provides a haven and pays school fees so that these children can receive an education. We also have a C.F.I. in Argentina and one in France.

These branches often rely on dedicated humanist leaders within their countries to carry the mission forward.. CFI Canada used to be a part of the Center For Inquiry. It was once integrated within our organization, but at some point before I came on board, a decision was made for CFI Canada to become independent. This separation mainly allowed Canadians to donate tax-deductible funds directly to CFI Canada rather than to an American nonprofit without tax advantages for Canadians.

While we support CFI Canada’s success, we are no longer aligned as a single organization. 

Jacobsen: What about conferences and events, such as C.S.I.C.O.N. 2024?

Blumner: Yes, C.S.I.C.O.N. 2024 just took place—I returned from Las Vegas a few days ago. It was a fantastic conference. Many videos will be available online soon, so look out for those. We honoured astrophysicist Brian Cox with the Richard Dawkins Award for 2024, and he gave an incredible talk about black holes and singularities.

Neil deGrasse Tyson delivered a keynote address as well. Neil is an extraordinary speaker whose public presentations overflow with insight and charisma, and we are always thrilled to have him at our conferences. We also hosted climate scientist Michael Mann, who addressed the serious state of our planet and updated us on what the “hockey stick” graph now shows.

To clarify, C.S.I.C.O.N.stands for the Committee For Skeptical Inquiry Convention. It’s always been centred on skepticism work.

Much focus these days revolves around medical quackery and pseudoscience. So much quackery is being sold as medicine, and many consumers are misled, confused, and deceived into buying treatments that don’t work. This topic comprised a large portion of the presentations at the recent event. CSICON also serves as an opportunity for professors in critical thinking and debunking misinformation to share their insights. We constantly seek effective tools to help people trapped in conspiracy theories and misinformation find a way out.

Jacobsen: Now, as you’re running this organization—which encompasses three entities in one—you have publications, media, conferences, events, advocacy in education, and international outreach. A lot is happening at once within the organization. What aspects of your work tend to receive the most pushback from those who oppose promoting science, reason, secular values, humanism, or critical thinking?

Blumner: The strongest opposition typically comes from those who want the country to be explicitly Christian in nature, law, and practice. The Christian nationalist movement has been gaining momentum recently, with allies in the federal judiciary in the United States. We’re seeing an unfortunate regression in enforcing the Establishment Clause of the Constitution, which mandates the separation of church and state. It’s disheartening that the clear line between church and state, firmly established since the mid-20th century, is now blurred. The U.S. Supreme Court seems ready to elevate religious belief as an overriding right that trumps other constitutional interests.

Under the Court’s current jurisprudence, a neutral law that applies to everyone could automatically have an exception for religious beliefs. This is, perhaps, the most distressing recent development in constitutional law. We’ve seen this in the Dobbs decision, which reversed Roe v. Wade, eliminating the federal right to abortion in America. The notion that a cluster of cells smaller than a pinhead is equivalent to a human being like you or me is a theological stance, not a scientific one. For the Court to undercut the right to privacy and place a woman’s rights on equal footing with an embryo and fetus—effectively denying a woman’s right to bodily autonomy and her ability to make personal medical decisions—is a travesty.

And it’s grounded in religious dogma, not law, which is distressing. We will continue to fight, and hopefully, one day, new jurists will arrive at different conclusions. 

Jacobsen: What do you consider secondary concerns to the immediate issue of Christian nationalist encroachment into secular life in the United States? If Christian nationalism is number one on that list, what would be number two?

Blumner: We’ve observed an increase in identitarian political leanings infiltrating scientific endeavours, which poses a danger to the scientific method. For example, we’re seeing the suggestion that traditional or indigenous medical practices are equal to Western scientific medicine entering scientific institutions, medical schools, and curricula. In places like New Zealand and, increasingly, Canada, there’s a push to recognize Indigenous knowledge as equivalent to Western science despite it often being grounded in creation myths and storytelling rather than clinical testing or the scientific method. While certain outcomes from indigenous knowledge might be beneficial, a scientific claim should only be presented as truth within science once it is rigorously tested.

For the integrity of scientific truth, it’s crucial to set aside political biases and evaluate claims with the same rigour applied to all scientific inquiries. Creationism, for instance, asserts that life’s diversity stems from supernatural sources rather than evolution and natural selection. Whether that’s framed as God or Jesus or a mythological figure from an indigenous culture, it remains creationism and not science.

Jacobsen: If you had ample personnel and funding—say, a hundred staff and unlimited resources—what sort of outreach would you prioritize for public awareness, benefiting the general public, and growing secular humanism and scientific skepticism?

Blumner: I’d allocate more resources to lobbying efforts. It’s challenging to effectively moniter the activities of 50 state legislatures with our current lobbying capabilities. Much of the problematic legislation could be countered with stronger lobbying power. For example, in Louisiana, there’s now a requirement to display the Ten Commandments in every classroom. In Oklahoma, public schools are set to teach the Bible. Additionally, naturopathic groups are pushing to receive medical credentials, which is both absurd and dangerous.

We’re fighting a 50-front war with a tiny army. I would love to expand our lobbying staff. As you suggested, we need an advertising campaign to help people understand the importance of science, the dangers of pseudoscience, and what it truly is. People also need to see that Christian nationalism is not at all what America’s founders envisioned for this country—quite the opposite.

This is an attention economy; we need resources to capture more attention. 

Jacobsen: Who are some of your biggest allies in these efforts?  I know, for instance, that when people want to place giant tablets of the Ten Commandments on a courthouse lawn, The Satanic Temple might respond by erecting a statue of Baphomet, claiming their religious freedom as a form of protest. Which organizations, groups, or individuals do you find to be consistent and reliable allies?

Blumner: We certainly welcome allies from all sides. Some groups align with us on one issue but may oppose us on another. The Satanic Temple, for example, has a knack for humorous and impactful stunts, capturing public attention with its “hoist you on your own petard” approach. It’s truly mastered the art of clever P.R. What makes CFI unique among secular groups is our focus on challenging pseudoscience. We are pro-vaccine, track medical quackery, and even take legal cases on those issues. When we’re in legislative discussions, we’re not just countering religious legislation but also monitoring the actions of the alternative medicine lobby.

Jacobsen: Among late secular humanists and scientific skeptics who have died, who stands out to you as a hero or an inspiration?

Blumner: Christopher Hitchens has to be at the top of that list. I’ve never seen anyone as skilled as Hitchens at verbally dismantling an opponent. He was also a brilliant, impactful writer. Other heroes include Robert Green Ingersoll, Thomas Paine, Thomas Jefferson, Mary Wollstonecraft, and John Stuart Mill. The writers of the Enlightenment are my greatest heroes. Then there’s Bertrand Russell, a more recent and brave atheist. Losing Dan Dennett recently was a tremendous loss to our movement. There are many giants whose shoulders we stand on.

Jacobsen: What would you choose if you had a small bookshelf and could only include a few books to guide people?

Blumner: Steven Pinker’s Enlightenment Now would be at the top. Richard Dawkins’ The God Delusion, the Selfish Gene, and Carl Sagan’s The Demon-Haunted World would also be essential. It’s a solid list.

Jacobsen: Here’s a foundational question. Do these recurring counter-movements against secular humanism, scientific skepticism, reproductive rights, human rights, and similar issues primarily attack what we see as the continuation of the Enlightenment’s substantive work? I don’t necessarily mean just the values themselves but also the practices—whether it’s lawsuits over homeopathic pseudoscience, proper education for middle school teachers on evolution, challenges to religious fundamentalism infringing on reproductive rights, and so forth. The many issues discussed in this interview all seem to touch on this. Short version: Foundationally, do you see these attacks as assaults on what we consider an extension of Enlightenment values?

Blumner: Yes. We stand for reason, science, and secularism—fundamental values of the Enlightenment. Much of what we do flows from those principles, including protecting individual rights and freedom of conscience. Suppose someone wants America to be a Christian nation. In that case, they’ll discard freedom of conscience, impartiality in the law, and the democratic principle that individuals have a right to dissent. This seriously threatens the American experiment, which we’ve helped successfully export elsewhere.

Sadly, many Americans don’t fully grasp this danger. People worldwide sometimes seem more alarmed at America’s trajectory than many of my fellow Americans.

Jacobsen: Is there anything else you’d like to address that we still need to cover?

Blumner: You did a fantastic job covering the full scope. Thanks for the thorough discussion!

Jacobsen: Nice to meet you.

Blumner: Nice to meet you. Bye-bye.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Steven Stosny, Ph.D. on CompassionPower and Relational Health

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/03

Steven Stosny, Ph.D., is the founder of CompassionPower in suburban Washington, DC. Dr. Steven Stosny’s most recent books are Empowered Love and Soar Above: How to Use the Most Profound Part of Your Brain under Any Kind of Stress. He has appeared on “The Oprah Winfrey Show,” “The Today Show,” “CBS Sunday Morning,” and CNN’s “Talkback Live” and “Anderson Cooper 360” and has been the subject of articles in, The New York Times, The Washington Post, U.S. News & World Report, The Wall Street Journal, Esquire, Cosmopolitan, O, Psychology Today, AP, Reuters, and USA Today. He has offered hundreds of workshops all over the world and has presented at most of the leading professional conferences. A consultant in family violence for the Prince George’s County Circuit and District courts, as well as for several mental health agencies in Maryland and Virginia, he has treated over 6,000 clients for various forms of resentment, anger, abuse, and violence. He has taught at the University of Maryland and at St. Mary’s College of Maryland.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Physiologically and psychologically, what is anger, and what is the purpose, evolutionarily, of anger?

Dr. Steven Stosny: Physiologically, anger prepares us to fight, with a burst of adrenaline and by sending action signals in the form of peptides to the muscles and organs of the body. It evolved as a survival emotion, activated by a real or imagined threat to life and limb, loved ones, property, or territory. Psychologically, it protects the ego. The bigger and more fragile the ego, the more frequent the anger.

Jacobsen: How do compassion and self-empowerment work into the work of cognitive-behavioral therapies?

Stosny: Compassion is an emotional regulator, incompatible with resentment and anger. We can’t be compassionate and angry at the same time. Self-empowerment puts focus on the ability to improve, appreciate, connect and protect, whereas the blame inherent in anger almost always makes matters worse. 

Jacobsen: What does the study of emotional regulation tell us about the treatment of domestic violence and family dynamics for relationships and intimacy?

Stosny: Emotional regulation means transforming an emotion likely to motivate behavior against one’s best interests into an emotion that enables behavior in one’s long-term best interest. Physical or verbal aggression against loved ones is self-destructive. Compassion for loved ones is transformative. 

Jacobsen: Why the emphasis on self-empowerment for clients rather than more traditional therapist led approaches?

Stosny: Anger is a cry of powerlessness. Traditional treatment for abusers urges them to give up power when they feel powerless. When empowered to regulate their own emotions, they have little interest in exerting power. Family relationships must be about value, not power. They like themselves better when valuing loved ones than when devaluing them.

Jacobsen: How can self-empowerment and the development of more emotional self-regulation make for healthier relationships with deeper intimacy?

Stosny: By definition, intimacy is letting down defenses, which you cannot do in the presence of anger and which becomes easier when compassionate. Healthy relationships are marked by safety, respect, compassion, and kindness.

Jacobsen: What are limitations still in your theoretical foundations in the CompassionPower model?

Stosny: The limitation is that it takes practice to gain self-regulation skill and change a lifetime of blame, denial, and avoidance into a future of improve, appreciate, connect, and protect. Some people want a quick fix.

Jacobsen: What are some common myths about anger that you encounter, and how do you address them in your work?

Stosny: That it means someone is trying to threaten you or valued persons or things. The perception of threat is necessarily tied to a perception of vulnerability. The more vulnerable we feel, the more threat we perceive. In modern times, we have attached anger to protecting the ego. Anger tells us more about a fragile ego than actual intended threat.

Jacobsen: Can you share simple techniques people can use to practice emotional regulation in their daily lives?

Stosny: There are no simple techniques to regulate anger, only to distract from it, which produce more anger in the long-run.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Gary Whittenberger, Reducing Gun Violence in the United States

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/02

Gary Whittenberger is a retired psychologist and freelance writer known for his thoughtful contributions to discussions on psychology, philosophy, science, and religion. Holding a doctorate in clinical psychology from Florida State University, he worked as a psychologist in federal prisons for 23 years. Whittenberger is an active member of the freethought community and co-directed the Tallahassee Freethinkers’ Forum. He has authored several works, including God Wants YOU to be an Atheist, and has written for Skeptic Magazine, Free Inquiry, and other publications. His articles often tackle complex topics such as personhood, free will, and gun violence prevention.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Quick backdrop questions, what have the work in clinical psychology, in federal prisons, and freethought activism, taught about the American culture’s psyche around guns–the heart of the matter?

Dr. Gary WhittenbergerScott, I want to thank you for this opportunity to talk about my article “A Comprehensive Program for Reducing Gun Violence in the US” which appeared in the October/November 2024 issue of Free Inquiry magazine.  Also, I compliment you on the great work you are doing with The Good Men Project.  We need more journalism, analysis, and commentary like that.

Turning to your question:  I think Americans have an obsession with guns which is unhealthy.  I think it has roots in the founding of a new country, exploring and settling the western frontier, and rebellion against old governments, all of which occurred a few centuries ago.  Fear and anger at levels higher in our country than what are found in other countries stimulate the ownership, purchase, and use of firearms.  Part of the solution is to lower these emotions and part of it is to reduce the access to and the number of firearms in the country.

Jacobsen: In the Uvalde case, what were the failures of law enforcement?

Whittenberger: Law enforcement officers failed to confront the shooter as soon as they could have and should have.  In my opinion, whenever there are at least two officers who have firearms on the scene, they should call for backup but begin to engage the shooter.  This response needs to be stipulated in policies, laws, and training.  Officers who do not have the willingness or courage to act to defend others in stressful situations should not be in law enforcement.

Jacobsen: How can gun regulations balance with Second Amendment rights?

WhittenbergerAs I said in my article, the Second Amendment needs to be amended.  Although American citizens should have a right to possess, own, and use guns, this right should not be absolute.  The right should be regulated, restricted, and limited for the common good, especially to minimize unjustified aggression.  I have suggested that ordinary citizens be limited to three firearms.  Nobody needs an armory.  I think “military type” guns should be held from the public.  I believe that five different groups of persons should be prohibited from having guns.  Any ethical, well-trained, and responsible firearms user has no good reason to oppose these reforms.

Jacobsen: What is the importance of considering mental health in approach reduction of gun violence?

WhittenbergerI think it is extremely important, but I don’t agree with the more conservative pundits who think it should be the only approach to reducing gun violence.  The more guns there are in a society, the more unjustified gun violence there will be.  The more guns are accessible to people likely to misuse them, the more unjustified violence there will be.  Yes, treating mental health problems is necessary, but not sufficient.  We need to identify, diagnose, and treat mental health problems early, during childhood, and this is why we need so many more social workers, counselors, and psychologists to work with children in our schools.

Jacobsen: What community intervention efforts can mitigate gun-related violence?

WhittenbergerI think politicians, office holders, nonprofits, and all citizens of a community should strongly advocate for and support gun control policies, as I have outlined in my article.  We all need to commit ourselves to slightly reducing our freedoms to possess, own, and use guns in order to reduce gun violence and promote the common good.  Give up a little in order to gain so much more!  I support buy-back programs conducted by cities and counties.

Jacobsen: What other training or preparedness might help law enforcement agencies?

Whittenberger:Law enforcement agencies need to improve both their employee selection procedures and their training.  Officers need to use their agency-issued firearms in a prudent, rational, ethical, and legal manner.   Over-use and under-use of firearms by officers are both problems which need to be corrected.  We saw in the Uvalde situation that officers took up to 75 minutes to mount their counter-attack, which was way too long.  On the other hand, we have seen in other kinds of situations that officers are too prone to use their firearms too quickly to resolve a situation.

Jacobsen: What other reasonable and unreasonable approaches to the reduction of gun violence are being proposed other than, for example, pray?

WhittenbergerI think I have mentioned most of the reasonable approaches in my article.  Banning firearms for private citizens in the US would be an unreasonable approach.  I think more than half the citizens do have legitimate uses for the ownership of firearms for protection, hunting, and target practice, but ownership of firearms by some citizens, of military-grade guns, and more than three guns is not reasonable.

Jacobsen: What would be a reasonable estimate of efficacy of these proposition to reduce gun violence?

WhittenbergerI think full implementation of the practical steps I have recommended would reduce gun violence by 90%.

Jacobsen: What might be some criticisms of your approach?

WhittenbergerA common criticism is “Implementation of your recommended gun regulation program would lead to the banning and confiscation of guns among private citizens.”  This is a slippery slope argument which is used to scare people and arouse resistance to gun regulation.  My approach is a common sense and gradual approach which would not be fully in place for about 75 years.  And yet, reductions in gun violence will gradually dissipate over that time period.   Responsible users of firearms should be willing to sacrifice just a little of their freedom for the common good which comes from a reduction of gun violence in our society.

Jacobsen: What might be barriers to implementation at the state of the federal level?

Whittenberger:   Extreme selfishness, fear, the NRA, and owners of large numbers of guns would be barriers to implementation.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Gary.

Whittenberger:   You are welcome.  And thank you for bringing wider exposure to my article and my many ideas about gun control.  Gun violence is rampant in our society and we need to solve the problem!  “Thoughts and prayers” for victims just don’t cut it.  Please continue your excellent work with The Good Men Project.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Alex Craiu on the War in Ukraine

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/01

Alex Craiu lives and works in Ukraine as a war correspondent. He studied in the United Kingdom and California, United States, with a documentary and cinematography production degree. He works as a freelancer and independent journalist. In 2017, he successfully completed an internship with the BBC in London and later started creating videos for social networks, collaborating with various publications. He travelled to most regions of Ukraine, except those fully occupied, and presented online the current situation in Ukraine, including in conflict zones. Currently based in Kyiv, Ukraine, he analyzes and documents people’s lives during the war.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: You’re still living in a danger zone. I am not. So, yes. Have you done anything brash or risky since we last attempted that brief vacation into Russia? 

Alex Craiu: The way this started is interesting because everything that’s been happening over the last few weeks ultimately boils down to the fact that I’m still alive—full stop. That is quite an achievement given the current circumstances, especially in light of what has recently transpired across Ukraine. We’re talking about numerous attacks I’ve read about or witnessed here in Kyiv. Unfortunately, we’ve seen an increasing number of casualties in Ukraine lately, which is somewhat predictable, as attacks tend to become more frequent during the winter months.

There are some advantages to being here, however. So, to answer your question, remaining in Ukraine during these months, when there are indicators of predicted instability, is inherently risky—something many people, especially in the West, would consider quite dangerous. The area where you are isn’t within artillery range but is largely within the range of ballistic missiles and drones.

Kyiv is about 200 kilometres from the nearest Russian-controlled territory, so we tend to be targeted by attacks. It’s important to remember that these Shahid drones—specifically the Shahed-136 model—are often launched in groups.

We’re dealing with many Shahid drones launched simultaneously. These drones could be more precise, but they are relatively cheap and can cause considerable destruction. Here in Kyiv, we’ve been experiencing an uptick in attacks over the past few days. This coincides with recent reports about North Korean munitions reportedly being used in the region around Kursk, near the Ukrainian border. All these events are converging, but the primary concern here in Kyiv, what’s most visible, is the extensive damage to residential buildings caused by these Shahid drones.

Jacobsen: How have you found covering the war as a journalist in this context? I know we travelled to several sites, but I’m unsure if that was an unusually high travel for war journalism or just typical for your work.

Craiu: Travelling to Sumy Oblast was unusual because I don’t usually cover events so close to the front lines. Others can do that much better. At the same time, my focus tends to be on the everyday life of Ukrainians living in larger cities.

For example, in Kyiv, Kharkiv, and Zaporizhzhia. Yes, these places are relatively closer to the front line but far from it or right next to the Russian border, like Sumy. So, it was quite an unusual trip for me. However, what followed was an incredible opportunity to visit the exclusion zone of Chornobyl.

And we’re talking about the town of Pripyat, which everyone knows about, and a visit to the nuclear power plant. This was also rather unusual because, right now, this zone—although it used to be quite a tourist-friendly place before the war—has an increased risk due to the presence of nuclear waste. In the event of an attack, it could contaminate a large area. So what followed those trips to Sumy Oblast and Poltava was not a miniseries of unusual destinations. 

Jacobsen: As a journalist, I was just grateful to have the opportunity to visit. I couldn’t turn them down, regardless of how fatigued I was from being in areas with an increased level of danger. Now, Kyiv itself has more defense systems.

The Patriot systems are reserved for higher-priority threats like ballistic missiles. But it’s among the safer areas because it’s far south and west of the front lines, usually over 200 kilometres. Yet, there’s still a sense of unease among the public. When I was there, people lived with a certain tension, generally speaking. Living there longer, do you also get that sense of living in the midst of a war?

Craiu: Interestingly, speaking from a personal standpoint, I’ve found that the longer I spend in Ukraine, the more my fear has deepened. That fear grows with a better understanding of the risks. This understanding comes with researching, living in a place like this, and gathering information. It has shown me that instability is probably one of the most unsettling aspects of Ukraine. To expand on this, I use the word instability because I still regard Kyiv as a highly unstable place. For instance, concerts are organized in some parts of the city, and on the same night—as was the case about two to three weeks ago—a 15-year-old girl was killed in her flat in Kyiv, doing nothing but living her ordinary life, by a Shahed drone—a senseless death, a complete waste of human life, in a capital many regard as safe.

We saw this summer that Ukraine became more popular with tourists. Some were likely tourists, though many were not. People gained a sense of security that was instantly shattered by the random attacks, which can happen any day without warning.

Jacobsen: What about the context of reports of 8,000 North Korean troops at Ukraine’s border, based on U.S. statements at the United Nations? This is coming from legitimate sources like the A.P. wire and A.P. News.

Craiu: Yes, currently, Ukraine estimates around 12,000 Russian troops on the border, so they consider this additional number significant. Yesterday, I was on the streets of Kyiv, asking people what they thought about it. The general sentiment was a concern. Initially, I wondered if people might be neutral or see it as unimportant. Still, they regard this development as potentially risky and troubling for Ukraine. We’re not just talking about more troops near the border; we’re also discussing the involvement of another country, like North Korea, which could lead to further escalation.

So, there’s the political side of things and the military aspect. The fact that we have 10,000 foreign troops fighting alongside Russia against Ukraine underscores the likelihood that Ukraine may soon need another mobilization to repel those attacks. 

Jacobsen: The 11th emergency special session of the United Nations General Assembly opened on February 28, 2022, at the U.N. headquarters to address the Russian Federation’s invasion of Ukraine. The voting record showed 141 in favour, five against, and 35 abstentions, with non-members not holding voting rights at this level.

So, it was a 141-5 vote condemning the Russian Federation’s aggression against Ukraine, accompanied by various stipulations on what constitutes that aggression. Among those who voted against it were Belarus, Eritrea, Russia, Syria, and North Korea. This aligns with a pattern; North Korea and Russia have been openly aligned in their stance, functionally supporting aggression against Ukraine, as demonstrated by this voting record over two years ago.

Jacobsen: What is the general conversation in Kyiv regarding these North Korean troops? How does this expand the concept of this war beyond Ukrainian borders?

Craiu: First of all, the fact that North Korean troops are reportedly siding with Russia and joining Russian forces in their fight against Ukraine raises questions about future developments. This includes the possibility of more troops being deployed or other countries allied with Russia potentially joining forces to fight Ukraine. Depending on the number and resources these allies provide, this could alter the war’s course.

One conversation happening in Kyiv is whether Russia’s use of North Korean troops might provoke a stronger response from the West. This could potentially lead to Ukraine being allowed to use Western-supplied weapons to strike deep into Russian territory—a restriction currently in place due to fears of escalation. All eyes are on the U.S. and other NATO countries that have provided weapons to Ukraine but have limited their use to strikes within Ukraine’s borders only.

Given recent events, if escalation is being openly discussed, Ukrainians expect a shift in current policy, one that might allow such strikes in Russia. This is a significant topic of conversation. Additionally, regarding Russia’s troop numbers and resources compared to Ukraine, there’s also talk of a possible new mobilization in Ukraine. This overlaps with ongoing protests over soldiers on the front lines, many of whom have been there for over a year without rotation.

And they don’t get a chance to return home or have the option of being released. This is something I’ve spoken with many people about, and there’s a general fear among those being drafted into the army that they’ll be forced to fight until they physically or psychologically can’t continue. These are the main concerns I’m currently seeing. The fact that Russia has an additional 10,000 troops on its side certainly complicates things for Ukraine.

Jacobsen: Do you want to comment on the claims that Elon Musk and Vladimir Putin have been in regular contact via phone calls, as reported by A.P. News?

Craiu: Well, we’re seeing some interesting actions from Elon Musk lately. This is a personal comment. Many have pointed out the unusual events he’s attended, like those supporting Donald Trump. Now, there’s the issue of Vladimir Putin. Although Elon Musk is certainly a smart individual, there’s a high degree of unpredictability with him so that anything could be possible. But generally speaking, I’m observing some rather bizarre behaviour coming from Musk. That’s my two personal cents on this.

Jacobsen: So, my question—as a Canadian journalist in Ukraine—is regarding the EU allies moving forward in late October with the $50 billion of frozen Russian funds being loaned to Ukraine to support their war effort. What are some of your thoughts on this? I’m assuming you’re positive, but there may be complications that you’re more aware of than I am since you’ve been doing this longer.

Craiu: Well, from what I’ve seen in general discussions, not everyone favours using those frozen assets from Russian oligarchs to support Ukraine. This is likely because people are questioning the morality of such a decision.

It will help Ukraine. If we were talking about Western assets frozen in Russia and used to fund their war effort or continue the offensive against Ukraine, this would hardly spark a negative response from the general public. As a state, Russia isn’t concerned with the morality of its actions. So, the fact that we’re even debating this in Western countries highlights our values and adherence to morality in our actions.

This is a completely fair and necessary action that will greatly help Ukraine. We’re talking about $50 billion—that’s an enormous amount of support. 

Jacobsen: Thank you again for your time, Alex.

Craiu: Yes, I hope you’re doing well. Good luck with everything. Keep in touch.

Jacobsen: Have a good day.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

THE GOSPEL ACCORDING TO MARK DRISCOLL: MASCULINITY, CONTROL, AND REINVENTION

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/09

Today I’m joined by Ashley Darling, a former member of both Mars Hill Church and Trinity Church in Scottsdale, Arizona—two congregations shaped by the distinct theology and culture of New Calvinism under Pastor Mark Driscoll. This movement fused rigid doctrine with a stylized vision of masculinity, casting male dominance as both the spiritual mandate and an evangelistic strategy.

In our conversation, Darling examines the gender politics and cultural dynamics of New Calvinism, interrogating how Driscoll’s rebranding of “biblical manhood” sanctified control, authority, and aggression as divine virtues. She speaks candidly about the systemic harm to women—ranging from normalized abuse and enforced silence to lasting psychological trauma. Darling also details how Driscoll leveraged public relations and theological rhetoric to rehabilitate his image in Arizona, sustaining a model of leadership cloaked in repentance but resistant to accountability.

(Mark Driscoll/Facebook)

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Ashley, can you help unpack those two ideas for us—what is New Calvinism, and how was masculinity used in its missionary efforts?

Ashley Darling: Yes. These are connected but distinct ideas. New Calvinism was a movement that emerged in the early 2000s, characterized by a resurgence of Reformed theology among younger evangelicals. It was deeply influenced by thinkers like John Piper, Tim Keller, and later, Mark Driscoll and Matt Chandler. At its core, it affirmed traditional Calvinist doctrines like predestination, total depravity, and the sovereignty of God. Still, it presented them in a modern, culturally engaged, and often emotionally restrained way.

Although New Calvinism didn’t outright ban women from theological discussions, it was rooted in a complementarian framework that assigned distinct roles to men and women. Leadership, especially in the church and home, was reserved for men. That theology, over time, shaped the culture of churches associated with the movement.

One thing that attracted many men to New Calvinism was its emphasis on structure, clarity, and what some saw as a more rational, no-nonsense theology. It avoided the emotionalism or ecstatic spirituality often found in charismatic churches. Instead, it offered something more intellectual and systematized. For many men, particularly those who felt alienated by more emotive expressions of Christianity, that was compelling.

Mark Driscoll, in particular, combined intellectual Reformed theology with a hyper-masculine, confrontational style. He was one of the few high-profile pastors to openly challenge the “feminization” of the church. He encouraged MMA-style aggression and rugged manhood and positioned male headship as essential to both spiritual and cultural renewal. In doing so, he created a platform that attracted young men seeking purpose, authority, and a sense of identity.

Jacobsen: And when we talk about masculinity being used as a kind of missionary tool, or even as branding—how did that function in his church, and why was it so effective, especially in contrast to churches with predominantly female congregations?

Darling: That’s a great question. At its core, it was marketing, and Mark Driscoll knew it. His background in communications played a role. He understood that he had to speak their language to build a church that attracted young, unchurched men. He framed Jesus not as gentle or meek but as a fighter, a carpenter, a man’s man. He used masculine imagery to frame spiritual leadership, fatherhood, and theology.

In evangelical churches, it’s common for women to outnumber men. Driscoll flipped that by appealing directly to male identity. And here’s the strategic part: if you get the men, statistically, the family often follows. So, it was also a pragmatic approach to church growth.

But we have to be honest—there was also a financial incentive. If you follow biblical tithing, converts tithe ten percent of their income, supporting the institution. So, targeting men wasn’t just theological but structural and economic. Driscoll’s model was successful, but it came with a cost.

At Mars Hill and Trinity Church, the desire for strong leadership sometimes evolved into authoritarianism. When power becomes a defining theological virtue rather than humility or service, it can open the door to abuse.

Jacobsen: And so, if you could expand on the role of power and how it was framed within these churches, there were men who already felt they had power and seemed to be reinforcing it among their peers or even over their wives. But there were also others, as you’ve noted before, who carried deep emotional wounds. How did Driscoll’s approach speak to both groups?

Darling: Yes. For the men who already felt they had power—those who were always trying to assert it in front of their guy friends or over their wives—Driscoll’s message validated them. It confirmed, “Yes, I am doing this right by lording my power over those I see beneath me.”

But it also spoke powerfully to another group—men who carried deep, unprocessed father wounds: emotional neglect, constant criticism, or the sense that they were never good enough. For them, Driscoll’s framework offered an emotional escape. Instead of confronting that pain, they could trade emotional vulnerability for power. That’s a compelling exchange, especially for men in the church who were taught to suppress emotion.

Mark Driscoll brought “authenticity” and “honesty” to this equation. He would say things like, “You men are weak. You’re effeminate. You’re failing in your God-given duty to lead your family.” It was deliberately confrontational. And in marketing terms, he was hitting the pain point. The classic strategy: “You don’t have X because you’re not Y.”

Whether it’s fitness or finances, that’s a familiar technique—aggravate the pain, then offer a solution. Driscoll applied that same model to masculinity and spirituality. He would shame men; even at its best, that system was still driven by shame.

But it worked because many men responded, “Yes, I need to stand up. I need to be a man of God.” And Mark Driscoll came in offering “truth,” no sugarcoating. That was compelling for many guys, especially in contrast to what I would call the Hillsong movement.

Hillsong churches were deeply emotional at the time. You’d walk in and be enveloped in lights, music, tears, and speaking in tongues. Every service felt like a spiritual spectacle. Mark Driscoll stood in violent contrast to that. He rejected it outright.

He said, “F*** that.” That kind of emotional display? That’s effeminate. That’s for the women. Let them have it at their conferences. But we—we’re men. We come into church to be strong. He painted Jesus as a badass, sword-carrying man and called other men to embody that same energy.

It was, honestly, considerable big dick energy—aggressively so. And it appealed to the broadest base of men in the church then. Even those outside the church found a sense of safety in it. They could come to church and not feel like it was a weakness or like they were caving to their wife’s demands. They could go and feel better about themselves.

However, it was ultimately a self-serving model. You weren’t going to church to worship. You would get your ego stroked to feel like you were the big man on campus, at home, and in public.

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Pastor Mark Driscoll (@markdriscoll)

Jacobsen: Critics of this, to give them their due, have called this a form of “performative masculinity.” Would you agree? And how would you unpack that critique?

Darling: Yes, I would agree. It has to be performative.

Because underneath all that posturing, there’s pain that’s never addressed. The model doesn’t leave space for vulnerability. So the performance becomes the substitute for authenticity. You put on the role of the strong man, the leader, the protector—but you’re never really invited to be known for your weakness. That’s not biblical masculinity. That’s branding.

Jacobsen: Because for men, especially married men, the highest standard of manhood in the church, regardless of denomination, often remains marriage. That remains the pinnacle of masculine identity. So when these men come into church with their wives and begin lording their manhood over them, it gives them a clear sense of identity, power, and self-worth. But that dynamic doesn’t function without women participating in it. The other side of the equation must also be emphasized for it to be effective.

Darling: For that model to function, women had to be taught to “fall in line.” So Mark Driscoll would either say directly or have his wife, Grace Driscoll, say things to women like, “Submission is beautiful. It’s not less than; it’s just different.” That message was a significant theme.

One of the most dangerous teachings, particularly for married couples, was the idea that women owed sex to their husbands. That was emphasized repeatedly. And it was incredibly harmful, especially for women who were already in abusive relationships with their “good Christian husbands.” Women who were already enduring physical or emotional violence were now being told that God obligated them to offer their bodies, regardless of consent or safety.

And that’s the core issue. It wasn’t just a pastor’s opinion—it was positioned as divine truth, framed as if God Himself was saying it. To that point, one of the key indicators that Mars Hill had cult-like characteristics was how closely Driscoll’s words were placed alongside, or even equated with, the voice of God. That stems from the New Calvinist framework. Within that structure, if you were the pastor, you weren’t simply someone who interpreted or explained Scripture. You were seen as a mouthpiece for God. That was the role.

So when Driscoll stood at the pulpit and said, “You’re not a man if you’re not leading your wife in this way,” or “If she thinks she’s in charge, something’s wrong,” or “If your wife isn’t happily and enthusiastically giving you sex at every opportunity, you’re failing as a husband”—you believed that was coming from God. Because he was the pastor, and in that environment, the pastor’s voice carried a sense of divine authority. That’s where it became hazardous.

Jacobsen: Let’s dig into that last point a bit. What happened when someone started to question these ideas? Do you not necessarily question the pastor directly, or even the junior pastors, but within the community setting or your own home, say, to your husband?

Darling: You would be ostracized. The response was: Why would you question that? And this is where Calvinism gets cold, rigid, and binary. It’s all black and white.

Ironically, many people in New Calvinist circles consider themselves scholars, deep theological thinkers. For example, my ex-husband had his master’s degree in theology from Liberty University, which is well-known in the United States for its religious studies programs. He was drawn to that intellectual framework.

So, if you tried to raise a concern or disagree, you weren’t met with openness. If they acknowledged your point, it would come as “I can see how you would think that. If I were in your position, I might think that too.” But it always ended with, “Let me introduce you to higher thinking.”

That was the default response. It wasn’t a dialogue but a subtle form of dismissal wrapped in intellectual superiority.

You learn to go along with it because they would talk to you in circles. Ultimately, dissent was framed as dissent against God. Mark Driscoll elevated himself to the voice of God within his community and implicitly empowered that same mindset in the men under his teaching.

These men were commanded to be the spiritual leaders of their homes. That meant they were expected to teach their wives and children about theology, interpret Scripture, and set the tone for the household’s spiritual life. It positioned them as the final authority, not just regarding leadership but regarding access to spiritual knowledge.

So, if you, as a woman, wanted to explore something outside the narrow teachings of New Calvinism—maybe a different theological perspective or a more inclusive spiritual framework—and you brought that up to your husband, it was framed as rebellion. Because those men had been taught that they were God’s designated mouthpiece in the home, disagreeing with them was often treated as disagreeing with God Himself.

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Pastor Mark Driscoll (@markdriscoll)

Jacobsen: What about something you mentioned earlier—charismatic continuationism? That’s a phrase people may not be familiar with.

Darling: Yes, so charismatic continuationism is the belief that the spiritual gifts described in the New Testament—like speaking in tongues, prophecy, and healing—continue to this day. That’s in contrast to “cessationism,” which holds that those gifts were given in the early church to authenticate the gospel and were later withdrawn.

There is considerable debate within Christian circles about this. Most Calvinists, including traditional Reformed churches, are cessationists. They believe those gifts ended with the apostolic age. However, the charismatic and Pentecostal traditions affirm that those gifts are still active and accessible.

Mark Driscoll pivoted on this. Toward the end of his tenure at Mars Hill, and especially during his relaunch at Trinity Church in Arizona, he began embracing more charismatic elements. He partnered with Charisma Media and released Spirit-Filled Jesus, emphasizing prophetic impressions and phrases like “God told me…” So, he transitioned from a hardline Reformed stance to something more hybrid—part Calvinist, part charismatic.

Jacobsen: Let’s place this in context. Most people today know Driscoll as the pastor of Trinity Church in Scottsdale, Arizona. But before that, he was the founder and public face of Mars Hill Church in Seattle. Can you walk us through the timeline of Mars Hill’s rise and fall and its rebirth, so to speak, in Arizona?

Darling: Sure. So Mars Hill Church was founded in 1996 in Seattle and gained momentum in the early 2000s. By 2010–2012, it was one of the fastest-growing churches in the U.S. Mark Driscoll had become a national voice in the New Calvinist movement. This was before the advent of short-form content like TikTok or Instagram Reels, so the primary way to access his teachings was through YouTube sermons or podcast downloads from the Mars Hill website.

He wasn’t charismatic in the Pentecostal sense—not initially. His sermons were aggressive, bold, and highly structured, drawing in a large number of men with the appeal of strong, unapologetic leadership.

That said, many women also found his message compelling—but for different reasons. To put it bluntly, if you were a “pick-me girl,” you probably loved Mark Driscoll. Because if you played by the rules—if you submitted, stayed sexually available, and supported your husband without question—you were praised. You were worthy of being “picked.” And I say that with self-awareness. That was me.

Jacobsen: So Mars Hill collapses, but Driscoll reemerges in Arizona. After his resignation in 2014 following multiple allegations of spiritual abuse, authoritarian leadership, and financial misconduct, Mars Hill dissolved. A few years later, Driscoll resurfaced in Scottsdale, Arizona, founding Trinity Church. Why Arizona?

Darling: I can only speculate, but it’s a red state with many transplanted evangelicals, a high rate of churchgoing households, and very little institutional memory of what happened in Seattle. It was a fresh start for him, but not necessarily a fresh approach.

Jacobsen: Quick clip point of clarification here, Ashley. “Pick me” is an American colloquial term. It is sharp and evocative—but for those outside the U.S. context, can you define it? What exactly is a “pick-me girl”?

Darling: Sure. A “pick-me girl” is someone who craves male attention so much that she’ll say or do whatever she thinks will appeal to men. She’ll agree with anything they say and laugh at all their jokes—her whole vibe is, “Pick me! Pick me!” It’s a kind of performative femininity centred entirely around male approval. And within the church context, that identity can easily align with specific teachings on submission, modesty, and obedience to male authority.

Jacobsen: Now, moving from that to a broader theological frame—let’s talk about the link between doctrine and praxis, specifically around the concept of “father hunger” and what, from an external perspective, might look like hypermasculinity. Internally, it’s often framed as “authentic manhood” or “biblical masculinity.” Is that a fair characterization? And what’s the relationship between those ideas and the gender constructs taught in this theology?

Darling: Yes, that’s a fair framing. So, stepping back, in the 1990s, culturally, we were starting to see a lot more visibility and public acceptance of LGBTQ individuals, especially in the wake of the AIDS crisis in the ’80s. That decade had pushed many queer people into hiding. However, by the 1990s, a shift had occurred through television, film, and legal protections toward greater social inclusion.

And the church, especially evangelical Christianity, tends to be reactive to culture rather than proactive. As this shift was occurring in society, the church responded defensively. This was also the rise of the so-called “apologist era,” and debates began to center around what were perceived as the two most significant threats to Christian morality: abortion and homosexuality.

At the same time, churches began realizing that closeted gay people were already part of their congregations. So, new questions emerged: Does your church affirm LGBTQ individuals? That divide became very public very fast.

Now, a lot of the cultural stereotypes—especially in America—frame gay men as “effeminate.” In conservative evangelical circles, any perceived proximity to that stereotype, even among straight men, being soft-spoken, gentle, artistic, and emotionally expressive was utterly unacceptable. It wasn’t just about sexuality. It was about masculine identity.

So when Mark Driscoll came on the scene, what he offered was a kind of aggressive, exaggerated masculinity that repackaged the most toxic aspects of male behaviour as holy. He said: “This is what it means to be a man of God.” He took this idea of “father hunger”—men’s deep, unresolved pain from emotionally absent or abusive fathers—and filled that void not with healing but with dominance.

He told men that the church didn’t have to be emotional or “feminine.” It could be tough, loud, and gritty. For many men who had felt alienated from the church due to its emotional tone or were afraid of being perceived as soft or effeminate, this was a revelation. They were being told: “You belong here. You can be strong. You can be in control.” So in a way, it was a rebranding of the church—away from its emotional, nurturing associations and toward something hard-edged and “manly.”

There was even a joke in Christian circles back then: “Church is for women.” It was a place where people cried, hugged, and became emotional. That was seen as feminine. Driscoll blew that apart and said, “No, church is for warriors. Church is for fighters.” Many men bought into that vision, not necessarily because it was spiritually true, but because it permitted them to express power, anger, and dominance under the guise of godliness.

Mark Driscoll says, “This is what a real man looks like.” He wasn’t crying. He wasn’t emotional—except when it came to anger. And that made many men sit up and go, “Oh. So, the worst parts of toxic masculinity are the best parts of being a holy man? Cool.”

It was this unspoken permission: “I don’t have to change anything about myself. I can take all these traits I already have—anger, control, dominance—and amplify them. Not only does that make me more masculine, it makes me more holy.”

For many men, that was deeply affirming. Because we’re all human, we want to feel in control. That’s a primal need. We want to avoid death and feel like we have some agency in the world.

This brand of Christianity—Driscoll’s version—offered both. Eternal security: “You don’t have to worry about dying because you know what the afterlife holds.” And immediate control: “Here’s how to take charge of your life and household.” That combination? It was brilliant marketing. And that’s how he got them.

Jacobsen: Let’s talk more about “head of household” or household headship—this idea that men are meant to provide, protect, and lead. These aren’t unique ideas to Mars Hill or even to Driscoll. Figures like Steve Harvey, who blend Christian themes with cultural commentary, promote the same beliefs, especially in communities where traditional gender roles are emphasized. Women in those settings are highly motivated to adopt the model because the church exerts such a significant social influence. But if we narrow it down—let’s say, within the Anglo-American evangelical framework—what does household headship mean in practice? What does it look like today?

Darling: Yes, “head of household” is aurally loaded. It has deep traditional roots. Historically, it referred to the man as the provider, the protector, the one who sets the moral and financial direction of the home. It was always paternalistic, but Mars Hill stripped away any nurturing aspect and repackaged it as more about dominance and control.

This wasn’t about care or stewardship—it was about power. And that’s important. The phrase had existed for a long time, but Mars Hill and Trinity Church reframed it in a way that felt like reclaiming something “lost.”

Historically, yes, men were the hunters and providers, while women stayed home to tend to domestic responsibilities. However, as society changed, women entered the workforce, gained independence, and made financial decisions—these shifts were perceived as a threat to traditional Christian gender roles.

In response, a cultural and theological backlash ensued. The message became: “Men, step up. Take back the leadership of your homes. Reclaim your role.” Simultaneously, you had second-wave and third-wave feminism rising, and women were saying, “Actually, no. I’m the one leading this home. I make the money. I make the decisions.”

There was this deep tension—this ideological clash. What emerged from that was a surge of Christian literature, sermons, and workshops all focused on gender roles: what they “should” be, how to “restore” them, and how to “discipline” the home into biblical order.

The result was a kind of spiritual cold war happening in households. Women were increasingly independent, but men were being told that their very godliness depended on asserting control. That dynamic is still playing out today in churches across America.

Jacobsen: So there’s this kind of back-and-forth—men saying, “I want to be in charge,” and women responding, “The hell you are.” It created tension, right? A kind of ideological tug-of-war.

Darling: What we saw in the early 2000s—through figures like Mark Driscoll, Matt Chandler, Francis Chan, and others—was a collective attempt to reassert control within that gender dynamic. These were the intellectual pastors, the theological heavyweights of the New Calvinist movement. They asked: “How do we make this compelling for men to step up and lead again?”

The answer was to incentivize them. The message became, “If you take charge, you’ll be rewarded with power and sex.” So they went to women and preached, “Relinquishing your power is the most godly thing you can do. Give up your autonomy. Give up your consent.” That was the transactional framework: men lead, women submit.

They preached both sides of that coin. Women were already craving love and affirmation from their husbands. And when you sat in a Driscoll sermon and heard him gush about his wife, it was easy to get pulled in.

Jacobsen: There’s a whole TikTok trend mocking that, right? Pastors are standing at the pulpit saying, “My wife is so hot,” over and over again. It’s performative.

Darling: Yes, 100 percent. There is a specific genre on TikTok where people parody this. Mark Driscoll would get up and say, “My wife—she’s so hot. I love her. God, she’s beautiful. My wife is hotter than yours.” And he meant it. There was even a moment where women in the congregation echoed that, like a weird sort of competition.

And women bought into that narrative. Because here was this pastor—moderately attractive, sure—but married way out of his league, and worshiping the ground his wife walked on in public. Women saw that and thought, “God, if my husband listens to this guy, maybe he’ll talk about me that way too.”

That’s how they got the women. That’s why I say if you were a “pick me” girl, you were highly susceptible to that theology. You were already willing to trade some autonomy for perceived love and admiration.

Jacobsen: The way I’m hearing it, from the social and theological trends of that brand of evangelicalism and the feminist responses, there’s no balance, no mutuality, no conversation. “I’m in charge.” “No, I’m in charge.”

Darling: It’s this classically American pendulum swing—from one extreme to another. There’s no room for nuance—the more complex the framing on one side, the more extreme the reaction on the other. You had hardline feminism developing in response to hardline patriarchy. Then, even more reactionary masculinity is being built to defend that patriarchy.

Jacobsen: And then Mars Hill collapses. And Trinity Church rises.

Darling: Yes, the whole dynamic was—and still is—deeply unhealthy. What’s fascinating and disturbing is how forgiveness was used to justify Driscoll’s return. He had built something enormous, then burned it down. Yet, within a few years, he re-emerged in Arizona, planting Trinity Church as if nothing had happened.

Jacobsen: So the question becomes: what’s the social mechanism by which someone can crash a movement of that scale and then be accepted again—by a new congregation—as if the past doesn’t matter?

Darling: That’s exactly it. There’s a deeply embedded notion in evangelical circles of “grace” that, when weaponized, allows spiritual leaders, especially male ones, to escape accountability. They’ll say, “He’s repented. We’ve forgiven him. Let’s move on.” But the people harmed by his leadership? They’re often still reeling. Still silenced. Still dismissed.

So you see, it’s not actual repentance or restitution—it’s rebranding. He’s back with a name change, a location shift, a few new catchphrases, and boom. The theology remains unchanged, as does the model. Only the platform has.

Pastors are excellent at crisis PR. They know how to slip out of almost any situation. And that’s precisely what Mark Driscoll did—he victimized himself throughout the entire collapse of Mars Hill.

Instead of taking responsibility, he spun the story and said, “This is spiritual warfare.” That’s a classic Christian playbook move: when accountability surfaces, blame Satan. Say that the backlash is demonic opposition. That tactic works every time—it deflects criticism and repositions the leader as the one under attack.

We were trying to hold him accountable. We were saying: “You can’t treat your staff like this. You can’t treat your wife like this. You can’t scream at people and call it leadership.” But he refused to accept responsibility. Many of us were sending emails, trying to speak out and create some form of collective accountability within Mars Hill, because we knew what was happening wasn’t right.

Still, some people remained die-hard defenders. And here’s where it gets alarming: some people will sit in church, and if a pastor gets up and says, “I had sexual relations with a 15-year-old, but I repented,” they’ll applaud. They’ll say, “Yes, thank you for your honesty. We forgive you.” The amount of blanket, uncritical forgiveness in the church can be toxic.

That’s what happened with Driscoll. He launched a massive PR campaign, framing himself as a spiritual warrior under attack. He claimed that those of us trying to hold him accountable were tools of the enemy. That is textbook cult leadership. It follows the same trajectory as almost every other cult: the inner circle gets wise to what’s happening, toxic behaviours come to light, and when they’re exposed, the leader deflects everything.

They say, “I didn’t know,” or “None of this is true. Could you believe it? This is an attack on our mission.” They paint themselves as martyrs, and that’s precisely what Driscoll did.

Jacobsen: It wasn’t just a collapse—it was a rebrand. And he needed time to plan that.

Darling: Yes. It took him a minute to start a new church because he had to do market research. He had to ask, “Where do I still have support? Where will people still come and listen to me preach?”

The answer was Republican states, places with a strong evangelical base and some cultural insulation. Arizona was a strategic choice. It’s a red state with conservative values, but it’s still on the West Coast and has a veneer of progressiveness in certain pockets. For Driscoll, that was the perfect happy medium.

And yes, some people from his Mars Hill days—including myself—lived in Arizona. He knew that. He likely counted on people coming out of curiosity, or even offering him grace and a second chance.

So, his reemergence wasn’t just accidental. It was a well-orchestrated crisis public relations campaign, and it worked. He rebuilt. He rebranded. And he still has a substantial following, especially among men who continue to buy into the same rigid, patriarchal model he’s been selling for years.

Jacobsen: I don’t think it came up directly in our earlier conversations, but I’ve been writing about Trinity Western University—a kind of Canadian counterpart to Liberty University. That finance-based, fundamentalist institutional world—that’s the environment I grew up around.

Darling: That makes sense. It’s a parallel path. The structures are similar—the theological rigidity, the emphasis on hierarchy, the idealized gender roles, and the blending of religious power with institutional branding. Whether in Canada or the United States, these conservative evangelical subcultures unfold similarly.

Jacobsen: I recently wrote an article based on Reddit commentary and mainstream articulation. In one thread, someone mentioned a disturbing account of sexual assault on a Christian campus. One commenter said, “I know at least five women who have been raped on campus, but they’re afraid to say anything—so they don’t.”

For women in that kind of community, especially those who are married and are being told that submission is a divine command, how many would you say are dealing with PTSD from sexual assault but are either hiding it or feeling unsafe talking about it?

Darling: A lot. There are many women in that position. Dr. Jessica Johnson conducted extensive ethnographic research on Mars Hill Church, focusing on the experiences of women within the congregation. Dr. Rose Madrid-Swetman was a pastor and adjunct faculty member at The Seattle School of Theology & Psychology who provided pastoral care to individuals who left Mars Hill Church.

She interviewed women who had been in those marriages—women who had internalized the Mars Hill theology and were dealing with severe emotional trauma. Some of them were still married. Others were divorced. But the core theme was the same: these women were conditioned to stay silent.

Even now, on social media, you’ll see waves—every so often, the “hate train” for Mark Driscoll comes back around, and more women come forward with their stories. They talk about being married to men who fully bought into that theology—hook, line, and sinker. Some of these men were emotionally or sexually abusive. And their wives were told to stay, to submit, to serve.

And yes, some women are still in that environment, still saying, “My pastor will protect me.” But many have left, and they’re just beginning to process what they’ve experienced.

Jacobsen: That’s horrifying.

Darling: Yes. It is. It’s important. It needs to be heard.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much. This conversation—it’s been a long time coming. I’ve been waiting for this opportunity for, I don’t know, probably seven years.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

HOW AMERICA’S ALLIES ARE WATCHING IT FALL BEHIND

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/06/03

George Carrillo is the co-founder and CEO of the Hispanic Construction Council (HCC), an organization dedicated to advancing Hispanic professionals in the construction industry through workforce development, advocacy, and access to business resources. A U.S. Marine Corps veteran and former sheriff’s deputy who specialized in child and domestic abuse cases, Carrillo went on to serve as Oregon’s Director of Social Determinants of Health. His career—bridging frontline service, community advocacy, and senior policymaking—offers a rare and layered vantage point on the intersections of labor, public health, economic equity, and national security.

Carrillo brings a resolutely mission-driven approach to public service. His work highlights the structural forces that shape opportunities in America, including racial and economic disparities, fragmented public systems, and the often-overlooked consequences of policy decisions on marginalized communities. Whether in the context of health equity or workforce inclusion, Carrillo consistently centers the need for strategic coordination and the empowerment of underserved populations to build societal resilience.

In our conversation, Carrillo offers a pointed critique of the Trump administration’s politicization of national security—specifically, the replacement of experienced National Security Council officials with loyalists. He warns that this approach weakens interagency coordination, erodes diplomatic continuity, and undermines public safety. Beyond the personnel shifts, Carrillo draws attention to deeper systemic damage: cratering morale among career civil servants, diminishing institutional accountability, and the normalization of authoritarian posturing in democratic governance.

At the same time, Carrillo is not without examples of what principled leadership can look like. He praises countries such as Canada for their commitment to international cooperation and civic integrity. Rooted in a belief that service should reflect enduring national values, Carrillo often returns to the words of John F. Kennedy as a compass point. For him, public service is not simply a job—it is a lifelong commitment to equity, dignity, and national integrity.

Taken together, Carrillo’s experiences—as a Marine, a law enforcement officer, a state policymaker, and a civic leader—form a holistic understanding of how democratic institutions succeed or falter. His insights offer a sobering, urgent, but ultimately hopeful vision for public service at a time when its very foundations are under strain.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Thank you for joining me today. So, what are the immediate strategic risks of replacing seasoned National Security Council officials with political loyalists?

George Carrillo: Yes. Particularly concerning is that national security and foreign policy decisions require continuity, expertise, and coordination across agencies. When these roles are filled by political appointees with limited relevant experience, as in certain instances during the Trump administration, it can undermine the national security strategy.

National security is inherently complex. Effective operations require collaboration between federal agencies, such as the FBI, CIA, Department of Defense, and the Department of State. These entities must coordinate intelligence gathering, operational logistics, and diplomatic communication, often in rapidly changing environments.

You need individuals with operational, diplomatic, or military experience who understand interagency processes and can act with precision and foresight. Appointing individuals without such knowledge, including some with media or partisan political backgrounds, introduces strategic risks. For example, some NSC appointees under Trump, such as political operatives and media personalities, drew criticism for lacking relevant expertise.

Recent reports from within the Department of Defence indicate ongoing concerns about leadership vacancies and policy instability. Such disarray can have real implications for defense readiness and diplomatic positioning.

This trend represents a significant risk to national safety. Leadership choices at the federal level can have a direct impact on Americans’ security. This was evident during the Trump administration, which saw high turnover in national security roles and tensions with career officials. There is concern that a second Trump term or similar leadership style would repeat these patterns.

This political oscillation between administrations and parties should not interfere with the integrity of the executive agencies. Regardless of whether a Democrat or Republican is in office, key national security positions should be filled by individuals with demonstrated qualifications and leadership capacity.

These agencies, particularly those involved in defense and intelligence, require professionals who can lead under pressure and possess a deep understanding of the mission. The national defense relies on structured, multi-agency collaboration. When politically driven change management interrupts that structure, it can compromise the effectiveness of entire operations.

Having worked in government myself, I’ve seen that every time a new administration enters—whether at the state or federal level—there’s often significant disruption. This constant churn undermines stability, and with instability comes a loss of institutional credibility.

Jacobsen: Given the volatility of today’s international order—with recurring crises and sudden geopolitical disruptions—how does a diminished level of institutional competence hinder our ability to adapt and respond swiftly? In what ways does this erosion of expertise slow down decision-making and make those responses less effective?

Carrillo: It opens us up to attacks—whether on foreign soil or at home. The lack of cooperation and the breakdown in intelligence gathering severely limit our ability to defend ourselves against future threats.

Trump’s selections for cabinet positions and national defense leadership are highly disarrayed. The individuals hired under Peter Hegseth—his pick for Secretary of Defense—raise significant concerns. There is an absolute lack of clarity and coordination, making us vulnerable to exploitation.

If we are attacked overseas, we could face a difficult situation. The question becomes: How are we going to respond? Is the intelligence we are gathering credible? Do we have the mobility and logistical readiness to mount a proportionate and timely response? These are the uncertainties we are dealing with.

Jacobsen: When institutional competence erodes, intelligence failures aren’t just more likely—they become more dangerous. In your view, what are the most critical intelligence gaps that are likely to widen? While lowered competence can be discussed in broad strokes, it often takes on specific shapes. Where do you see the most acute vulnerabilities forming—particularly in areas where the American public could face the greatest risk?

Carrillo: One significant risk is our current understanding of Russia’s threat, particularly to European nations, and how that threat could directly impact the United States.

Another is our relations with Arab countries. What Trump is doing now is deeply concerning. He has accepted gifts from foreign nations, which raises questions about the ethics of those exchanges and how they might entangle him or align him with specific actors in the Middle East. That compromises our credibility and complicates our diplomatic relationships.

And then there’s the threat that the American people often do not see: Who is planning an attack on the United States right now? We know that plans are constantly being developed against us globally. Are we properly allocating resources to get ahead of those threats? Many of us, including myself, do not have confidence that the current leadership is truthful or transparent about what is happening domestically and abroad.

(White House)

Jacobsen: What are the implications for NATO? The European Union seems to be taking more assertive steps toward military and defensive independence from the United States, even within NATO member countries. What are the consequences of the deeply rooted intelligence, defense, and military ties among NATO countries?

Carrillo: You can see it on their faces whenever Trump talks—NATO allies are visibly concerned.

I agree with the president on a few points, such as the expectation that all NATO countries should contribute their fair share financially. That is a legitimate discussion.

However, the alliance goes far beyond finances. NATO’s core tenets include intelligence sharing, operational coordination, and a collective commitment to defend one another against shared threats. Those require mutual trust and strategic stability.

Currently, I want to believe that the United States will continue to stand by its NATO partners and that our commitment will be guided more by principle than by dollars and cents. But with this administration, it is hard to predict. What NATO needs now is to keep moving forward with unity and purpose, regardless of the unpredictable nature of U.S. leadership.

NATO needs to demonstrate, especially within Europe, that it will not allow Vladimir Putin to continue acting as the aggressor, seizing territory from Ukraine. The burden is also on the United States to determine how we will participate. Will we stand by our oldest and most reliable NATO partners, or will we retreat and try to avoid conflict, which often only delays and worsens future crises?

What I see in President Trump is the repetition of past mistakes. We are reliving the same missteps that led to greater global instability, similar to the hesitation that preceded the United States’ entry into World War II. Many historians argue that had we joined sooner, the war would have ended faster with fewer casualties.

I also see shades of Richard Nixon’s approach—this idea of isolating ourselves while trying to posture as dominant. The result is a looming disaster regarding NATO solidarity and military readiness as we weaken our alliances through trade wars, aggressive rhetoric, and a general shift toward authoritarian-style leadership.

He operates under the mentality, “We’re the United States—no one can touch us.” That is arrogant. I do not think our NATO allies, nor should they, appreciate it. I believe Europe will need to respond with strength and signal that there is new leadership in the free world, possibly emerging from within Europe itself.

Ideally, the United States should remain the leader of the free world, but currently, we are not demonstrating a presence that inspires trust or confidence.

Jacobsen: While attending the 69th Commission on the Status of Women at UN Headquarters in New York, what struck me wasn’t just what the United States said—but what it didn’t. On American soil, the most revealing insights came not from official remarks but from informal conversations. I met a group of Canadians—each of us had arrived independently—and we found ourselves voicing the same unease: “Are we safe here?” That question lingered, even for me. I later spoke with three women—two African, one a Muslim Canadian—and each shared legitimate concerns about personal safety while in the U.S.

That, I think, is telling. My second key takeaway was about how the world views the United States. Increasingly, the global community is no longer seeking a hegemon. There is a growing recognition of America’s duality—its strengths and its profound flaws. Rather than a rigid top-down leader, people see the U.S. more like a windbreaker goose in a V-formation: not commanding from above, but guiding from within. Yet under the current administration, there’s a sense that the lead goose is drifting to the rear while Europe is quietly taking the front—particularly on issues like human rights and moral leadership within their respective spheres.

Given all this, what’s your sense of how Americans see the world right now? Do they recognize this perceptual shift from abroad, or are they still imagining themselves in the lead?

Carrillo: It depends on who you ask, to be honest.

From a global perspective, the United States is not currently well-regarded; however, this depends on the context.

What worries me most is the way we are forming relationships right now with authoritarian leaders like Vladimir Putin and Kim Jong-Un. That signals a troubling shift in values and alliances. It alienates our traditional partners and undermines the global trust that the United States once commanded.

We seem to speak nicely about authoritarian leaders while speaking terribly about our democratic allies. That is deeply concerning—not just for Americans but the world. When the so-called leaders of the free world appear to be cozying up to autocrats, it sends the wrong message.

I did not necessarily agree with the previous approach, which avoided dialogue altogether. We should continuously pursue conversation and bring people to the table. However, I do not believe Trump’s approach is the right one. It is a snowball effect: now, he is changing how we engage with foreign partners and talk about foundational values like human rights and dignity.

At the same time, domestically, using the phrase “diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI)” is suddenly seen as negative. So the question becomes: “What do we stand for as a country anymore?” We are losing sight of our core American identity.

Jacobsen: Canada?

Carrillo: Yes—Canada. I appreciate the current prime minister’s approach. It is professional but firm. His recent response to President Trump was a good example of maintaining dignity while showing strength. That kind of leadership earns respect.

Many may consider Canada to be the most stable and respectable leader when people think of North America today. Canadians know how to represent themselves and foster authentic partnerships. Meanwhile, the U.S. can come off as arrogant, as though having the biggest economy or the strongest military entitles us to dominate.

But every great nation in history has eventually crumbled. George Carlin once joked, “Because you have the most flavours of Rice-A-Roni doesn’t mean you’re the greatest.” Exactly.

That is how I feel as an American. I can only imagine how others around the globe now perceive us.

When I served in the military, people genuinely saw America as a beacon of hope. I do not think that perception holds in the same way anymore.

Jacobsen: What words come to mind when you think about the current makeup of the administration? I am trying to remember the Japanese term for the “front face” a group shows to the public.

Carrillo: You might think of tatemae—the public face, as opposed to honne, the private truth.

In any political system, yes, there will be internal disagreements. However, just as in a family, those discussions should occur behind closed doors. You have media relations and public events to present a unified front because you represent millions. It is not just politics—it is diplomacy and responsibility.

As for the second Trump administration, the words that come to mind are rebellious and vindictive. That perception stems not only from Trump’s mugshot following his criminal conviction but also from the language he uses, like discussing the military toward domestic protests or threatening political opponents.

These are dangerous narratives in a democratic society. This increasingly feels like a revenge tour—not a campaign rooted in service or vision. One of the most important values instilled in the military is the concept of accountability.

Donald Trump was petulant in front of world leaders during his first term. (Bundesregierung)

Jacobsen: We’ve seen cases where Signal groups of prominent journalists and publishers coordinate the release of classified or sensitive material to the public—and in many instances, there appears to be little to no accountability. Misleading statements are sometimes made in advance. And then, once the facts emerge, no one is held responsible. The issue simply fades from view, swept under the rug.

Contrast that with the military context. As you know, U.S. service members operate under a dual legal system: civilian law and the Uniform Code of Military Justice (UCMJ). The UCMJ tends to be far less lenient—particularly in a country like the United States, where the legal system is already highly punitive. If a service member breaks the law, they can face consequences under both frameworks.

So what would happen if a higher-ranking officer—say, a major or above—were to violate the law? How would that accountability process unfold in the military, and how does it compare to the virtual impunity we often see in civilian or media settings?

Carrillo: You’re right. In the military, there’s a higher standard, period. And because that standard is higher, if you make a mistake, especially as a ranking officer, you are held accountable under the UCMJ. The system does not spare you. It is intended to maintain discipline, order, and trust within the chain of command. You can lose your rank and pension and even face imprisonment. There is absolute and enforceable accountability.

What we see now in the civilian sphere, particularly among political appointees and cabinet-level officials, is that they are not held to the same level of accountability. In most cases, the worst that happens is dismissal or quietly resigning.

However, there has been virtually no accountability system in the Trump era, not even for Trump himself as Commander-in-Chief. That is where the Supreme Court got it wrong, especially in its recent ruling that a sitting president cannot be prosecuted for actions taken while in office. Trump has interpreted that as a blank check to do whatever he wants, unconstrained.

Now, he governs almost entirely by executive order. Even when those actions violate the Constitution, they become a matter of legal debate rather than immediate consequences. And in that legal gray zone, no one can stop him in real-time. There’s no enforcement mechanism.

Take the case of Kilmar Abrego Garcia, an undocumented immigrant who was deported. A federal court ordered the administration to bring him back, and Trump’s team ignored the ruling. There has been no consequence for that defiance. Nothing could be done.

We are in a constitutional crisis, even though the administration may deny it. We are allowing a sitting president to violate the Constitution he swore to defend. The judiciary’s failure to enforce clear limits has created a precedent of unchecked executive power.

Jacobsen: How does all this impact the morale and retention of career national security professionals?

Carrillo: Right now, morale is incredibly low. There has been significant turnover, and what is particularly disturbing is the number of positions being cut, especially within our national security infrastructure. And interestingly, these cuts are being made across all agencies.

They’re trying to funnel more money into certain agencies, but many career professionals realize it is time to retire. If you are not politically aligned with the president, you likely will not have a job—you will be dismissed.

This is happening across the government. The people doing the real work—career civil servants—have continuously operated independently of partisan politics. I recall being in public service: it didn’t matter who was president. We never talked about politics. We focused on the mission and the job at hand.

But now, regardless of job performance, people are targeted for their political affiliations. That is not how a professional, nonpartisan civil service should function. Dismissing people based on party loyalty rather than merit threatens the integrity of government institutions.

Jacobsen: Let’s close on a lighter note. What are some of your favourite presidential quotes?

Carrillo: From Trump?

Jacobsen: From any president.

Carrillo: One of my favourite quotes is from John F. Kennedy: “Ask not what your country can do for you—ask what you can do for your country.” That quote has stayed with me throughout my life.

I have worked in government, served in the military, worked as a police officer, and later in social services. I have always tried to give back, represent underserved communities, and defend the ideals this country is supposed to stand for.

That quote captures the spirit of public service. It has guided how I live my life: How can I give back? How can I serve my country or my community?

Jacobsen: George, thank you so much for your time and expertise. It was an absolute pleasure to meet you.

Carrillo: Thank you. I appreciate it.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

ANTISEMITISM ISN’T JUST A BUG IN THE SYSTEM. IT’S BEING AMPLIFIED BY IT.

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/30

As Australia headed into its 2025 federal election, a darker undercurrent pulsed through its digital platforms. CyberWell, a watchdog group specializing in online antisemitism, uncovered a disturbing trend: antisemitic narratives were not just circulating—they were being algorithmically amplified to more than 257,000 users. Using proprietary monitoring tools guided by the International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance (IHRA) working definition of antisemitism, CyberWell flagged 548 posts between November 2024 and April 2025. Of those, 80 were confirmed antisemitic.

The responses from social media platforms varied starkly. X (formerly Twitter) removed just 5% of flagged content, citing permissive “civic integrity” policies, while Facebook removed nearly 90%. Classic antisemitic conspiracies—like the Kalergi Plan—reemerged in digital camouflage, retooled into memes and coded language to evade detection.

CyberWell argues that such normalization of Jewish hatred poses a direct threat to democratic norms, public safety, and civil discourse. They advocate for mandatory IHRA-based moderator training and stronger enforcement. Platforms like YouTube and Facebook, which maintain clearer policies and trusted partnerships, demonstrated more robust moderation. But as the data suggests, uneven enforcement leaves critical gaps—ones that extremists are all too eager to exploit.

(Eradicate Hate Global Summit)

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How did CyberWell identify and verify the posts?

Tal-Or Cohen Montemayor: CyberWell utilizes a combination of social media listening tools and a proprietary monitoring system to identify posts that are highly likely to be antisemitic, according to the IHRA working definition. Between Nov 11, 2024 – April 22, 2025, CyberWell’s monitoring technology flagged 548 posts in English on Facebook, X (Twitter), TikTok, and YouTube that included keywords related to the Australian federal election and had a high likelihood of being antisemitic.

Of the 548 posts, CyberWell selected a sample for manual review. In total, 80 posts were confirmed as antisemitic according to the International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance’s (IHRA) working definition of antisemitism by CyberWell’s research team. The high level of engagement around a select sample of just 80 posts indicates that the exposure of deeply anti-Jewish narratives ahead of the election period in Australia is far worse than what CyberWell’s research indicates.

Jacobsen: Elon Musk’s X platform removed only ~5% of flagged antisemitic election content compared to 54.2% in 2024. What explains the dramatic drop in moderation?

Montemayor: The significance of removal between X and other platforms is largely due to their policy approach to election-related content. Much of the hate speech that intersects with election issues is mistakenly perceived by X and their moderators as political expression and, therefore, allowed on their platform. X is the platform with the most permissive “Civic Integrity” policy, and it appears that much of the antisemitic election-related content is categorized under this policy as far as they are concerned. This extraordinarily low rate of actioning open Jewish hatred is not something we have encountered before.

Additionally, the gap between X’s rate of removal of antisemitic election content and their average rate of removal in 2024 highlights a key issue when relying on user reporting and escalation to major social media platforms, particularly to X: response time. The average rate of removal of reported antisemitic content by X in 2024, as collected by CyberWell, is a snapshot at the end of the calendar year, giving the platform many months to respond to our reporting. X’s average rate of removal of the antisemitic Australia election dataset collected by CyberWell is approximately 5% reflects the rate of removal three to five days after reporting it to X. While platforms take days to respond to user reports, the engagement algorithms continue to push and suggest content, especially ahead of events of wide public interest like a national election.

Jacobsen: Your report mentions the use of classic antisemitic conspiracy theories, such as the Kalergi Plan and alleged Jewish control over political parties. How have these narratives evolved?

Montemayor: The dominant antisemitic theme that election antisemitism centers around is conspiracy theories about Jewish global control and influence. These narratives characterize Jews as manipulative puppeteers who secretly control governments, political leaders, and the electoral process itself. Antisemitic conspiracy theories—such as the Kalergi Plan and claims of Jewish control over specific political parties—have evolved online by merging with contemporary political narratives and global events.

On social media, this very old anti-Jewish idea is often repackaged using coded language, emojis, and memes. The conspiracy theories suggesting secret Jewish control frequently surface in discussions about major political events, such as federal elections, where antisemitic tropes are embedded within broader ideological discourse. This blending allows hate actors to evade platform policies and challenges enforcement in practice while spreading this harmful narrative to mass audiences during times of increased social sensitivity and tension. This is extremely dangerous for the Jewish community in Australia, which is already experiencing a marked rise in violent and targeted attacks.

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Everyone Hates Elon (@everyonehateselon_)

Jacobsen: How have these gained traction in digital political discourse during election cycles?

Montemayor: CyberWell will be releasing a comparative analysis of antisemitic narratives during election cycles, examining how these anti-Jewish trends have gained popularity and audience during the UK, U.S., Canadian, and Australian elections towards the end of the summer.

However, we can share that in each of the four election cycles, classic antisemitism criticizing disproportionate Jewish power and conspiracies of covert control are the most prevalent types of Jewish hatred in election antisemitism across the board. This indicates that the dominant antisemitic theme in this dataset centers on conspiracy theories about Jewish global control and influence.

Notably, this form of classic antisemitism, consistent with the second example of the IHRA working definition, closely aligns with the core principles of major social media platforms’ hate speech and hateful conduct policies. This content includes offensive generalizations, harmful stereotypes, and conspiracy theories targeting a “protected group,” including those defined by religious affiliation or belief.

Since these carve-outs and protections are already recognized by most large social media platforms in their policies, it is reasonable to expect that platforms would enforce their policies against this type of content effectively. In practice, however, enforcement of election-related antisemitic hate speech appears to be significantly lower than typical enforcement rates against online Jewish hatred.

Political rhetoric focused on candidates and party platforms, including those that are irate and critical, are an important part of freedom of expression and political speech. However, the targeted violence against the Australian Jewish community and other Jewish communities across the globe has proven that online conspiracy theories and hatred has real-world consequences.

Jacobsen: How does CyberWell’s application of the IHRA working definition of antisemitism help distinguish rhetoric?

Montemayor: The International Holocaust Remembrance Alliance’s (IHRA) working definition of antisemitism is a globally recognized consensus definition, rooted in multi-disciplinary expertise, that CyberWell uses as a discourse analysis tool. The eleven examples featured in the IHRA working definition provide a framework for a lexicon focused on identifying particular beliefs, conspiracy theories, and narratives that are the cornerstones of Jewish hatred. We apply the definition as a tool for narrative analysis context. It not only helps us monitor specific narratives online but also organizes and allows us to track spikes in particular tropes, accusations, slurs, and narratives.

View this post on Instagram

A post shared by Everyone Hates Elon (@everyonehateselon_)

Jacobsen: What are the strengths and weaknesses of the IHRA definition of antisemitism? How can social media companies improve enforcement during elections?

Montemayor: A major strength of the IHRA working definition is that it provides a comprehensive consensus definition of antisemitism that addresses the multifaceted nature of Jewish hatred as it has evolved over time and up to the modern day.

The IHRA working definition through the eleven categories laid out in the definition covers the evolution of Jewish hatred from its historical roots in religious antisemitism, race-based Jewish hatred during the Holocaust to its most modern iteration, political antisemitism via vilification of Jews as agents of the Israeli state, demonization of the concept of Jewish self-determination and using the state of Israel or the Israeli identity as a touchstone for promoting classic and openly anti-Jewish tropes, biases and hatred. However, as one of the most complex forms of hatred, even this working definition needs updates.

For example, CyberWell’s research of online antisemitism, particularly the October 7 denial campaign, has revealed that purposeful denial of atrocities or attacks committed against the Jewish community is a form of current antisemitism. The denial or ‘false flag’ narrative, either blaming the victims for the attack or erroneously claiming that they set up the attack, has also been used to delegitimize and dismiss the attacks against the Jewish community in Australia from Sydney to Melbourne. The recognition of Holocaust denial and distortion as a form of antisemitism, featured in the IHRA working definition, should be applied to the purposeful denial or distortion of atrocities committed against Jews for being Jews.

Some social media platforms have gone on the record stating that they use the IHRA working definition as a reference point when updating their policies, but the truth is the practitioners and enforcers of the policies, the content moderators, often outsourced by major platforms to third party providers around the world, are unfamiliar with the IHRA working definition and there is no indication that it is part of their regular training material.

A more comprehensive application of the IHRA working definition within the existing policies of the social media platforms, making sure the definition is part of content moderator training and implementation of recommendations from off-platform experts like CyberWell, including reliance on specialized datasets and keywords around events like the elections, would significantly impact better enforcement of digital policy on social media.

Jacobsen: There is a growing normalization of antisemitism online and offline in Australian society. What are the urgent consequences of this normalization?

Montemayor: The normalization of antisemitism—both online and offline—erodes social tolerance and creates an environment where hate speech, hostility, and violence against Jewish citizens is more likely to be accepted or ignored. It emboldens extremist actors to act criminally and violently, legitimizes dangerous conspiracy theories that erode trust, and fosters a climate of fear within Jewish communities. When antisemitic rhetoric goes unchecked, it weakens democratic norms and desensitizes the public to open bigotry and hatred. This is why many Jewish communities are experiencing increased incidents of harassment, threats to community safety, and the risk of real-world attacks—the increased violence is fueled by online radicalization and algorithmically charged hate speech. The platforms must be responsible for systematic and effective enforcement of their own digital policies in order to stem the tide of increasing violence.

Jacobsen: Facebook and YouTube demonstrated stronger enforcement. Why are they more proactive? Are they more successful?

Montemayor: Unlike the other platforms, YouTube takes a more defined stance by including specific policies on hate speech related to elections and civic integrity. The platform explicitly prohibits hate speech and harassment in the context of elections. Reflecting this policy, YouTube had the fewest antisemitic posts in the dataset. While the removal rate stood at 0%, this is attributable to the fact that only one video was identified during the monitoring period.

Overall, CyberWell’s research across platforms suggests that the more explicit a policy is, the more effectively it is enforced. This is true in terms of technological resources, such as pre-emptive AI removal through classifiers and human content moderation, which reviews users’ reports of violating content. While Facebook does not currently include explicit clauses in their policies targeting election-related hate speech, Facebook demonstrated the highest rate of content removal, taking down 89.47% of the reported posts. It is also worth noting that CyberWell is a trusted partner of TikTok and Meta, but not an official partner of YouTube. This may support stronger response mechanisms by Meta for reported antisemitic content.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Tal-Or.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

GOSPEL OF DENIAL: HOW CHURCHES CONTINUE TO FAIL CLERGY ABUSE SURVIVORS

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/23

Today, I’m joined by Katherine Archer, Father Bojan Jovanović, Dr. Hermina Nedelescu, and Dorothy Small for a wide-ranging discussion on clergy abuse—its psychological toll, institutional roots, and pathways to reform.

Katherine Archer is the co-founder of Prosopon Healing and a graduate student in Theological Studies. She will begin a Master’s in Counseling Psychology in the fall. Her work focuses on clergy abuse within the Eastern Orthodox Church, blending academic research with nonprofit advocacy. Archer champions policy reform addressing adult clergy exploitation, advancing a vision of healing grounded in justice, accountability, and survivor support.

Father Bojan Jovanović, a Serbian Orthodox priest and Secretary of the Union of Christians of Croatia is known for his searing critiques of institutional failings within the Church. His book Confession: How We Killed God and his work with the Alliance of Christians of Croatia underscore a commitment to ethical reform and moral reckoning. Jovanović advocates for transparency and internal dialogue as essential steps toward restoring trust in religious life.

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu is a neuroscientist at Scripps Research in San Diego whose research probes the neurobiological underpinnings of human behavior, particularly in the context of substance use and trauma. Her current work explores how trauma, including sexual abuse, is encoded in the brain’s circuitry and how community-based interventions can address PTSD and addiction in survivors of clergy abuse.

Dorothy Small is a retired registered nurse and longtime survivor advocate with SNAP. A survivor of both childhood and adult clergy abuse, Small began speaking out long before the #MeToo movement gave such voices a broader platform. A cancer survivor and grandmother, she now writes about recovery, resilience, and personal freedom, amplifying the strength of survivors and the urgency of institutional accountability.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: In 2024, journalists faced unprecedented threats, with at least 124 killed—the highest number recorded to date—though some sources report 122. The violence in Gaza accounted for a significant share of these deaths. Beyond physical danger, journalists today confront a host of pressures: online harassment, legal intimidation, surveillance, the erosion of press freedoms, and increasing self-censorship. I’ve experienced several of these realities myself. That is the nature of this work.

Each of you here has encountered similar challenges through very different lenses: as a distinguished member of the Serbian Orthodox clergy, a young adult woman within the Orthodox community, a Catholic youth, and a neuroscientist. These identities frame the most critical points of contact within each of your narratives. You all chose to speak out—something most people never do. So let me ask: Once someone breaks that silence and becomes outspoken—whether about their own experience or on behalf of others—what happens? What shifts and consequences follow when the truth is no longer kept quiet?

Katherine Archer: When I was 21, I came forward and reported a clergyperson for what I experienced as a violation of trust and an abuse of pastoral authority. If I had to choose one word to describe how I felt in the aftermath, it would be annihilation. The Orthodox Church upholds the use of icons in worship and annually celebrates the Triumph of Orthodoxy–a commemoration of the end of iconoclasm, or the historical period when people smashed and destroyed icons.

I have often felt a deep dissonance between the reverence given to painted wood as the representation of the human person and my own experience, as a living person, coming forward with a painful and vulnerable account of harm involving a priest. Over the years, I have spoken with many survivors who shared similar feelings after trying to report experiences of abuse within Orthodox Christian communities—whether through conversations with fellow parishioners, clergy, or through official channels.

It is a beautiful and moving tradition to process around the church holding icons on that particular Sunday in Lent. Yet it is profoundly more difficult to carry the weight of someone’s story, confront painful realities, and respond compassionately to a living human reporting such things.

Father Bojan Jovanović: When I first spoke the truth, my truth experienced a paradox: liberation and humiliation in the same breath. I talked about the attempted sexual abuse I survived within the Serbian Orthodox Church and about an even more harrowing reality — the knowledge that a child had been raped and murdered in a monastery. The facts were clear, but the world I spoke them into could not receive them.

Instead of being a space of light and confession of sin, the Church became a prison of denial. Some immediately tried to silence my voice, to “protect the Church,” as if the truth were the threat and not the crime. Others looked at me with discomfort, as if I were the one disrupting the order. Theologically, I felt like a prophet bringing truth, only to be met with stones. Psychologically, it was only the beginning of confronting the deep trauma I had suppressed and wrapped in silence for years.

Hermina Nedelescu: I received supportive responses from most individuals and institutions. In contrast, the response I experienced from the Greek Orthodox Church of America was, in my view, deeply disappointing and lacking in basic compassion. From my experience, their response felt—and continues to feel—fundamentally inhumane.

Dorothy Small: Reporting the sexual assault by my grandfather, just shy of age six, resulted in a slap across the cheek by my grandmother and a swear in French. Ultimately, it resulted in no further abuse by my grandfather. However, almost a year later, living under the same roof as the predator, my grandmother brought me to a Catholic orphanage to be adopted. At the last minute, I was adopted by an aunt and uncle. They were abusive. I feared them. But they were familiar. I feared the orphanage far more. It was unknown. Plus, I feared nuns.

Reporting the schoolteacher helped to stop the harassment my best friend was receiving. It also caused me to be blamed and scorned by my parents. I only had one friend who stood beside me. Ultimately, I ended up moving across the country to escape a small town and the state where I lived. I could not recover from the emotional consequences of living in that state. It took about three or four years for the emotional pain to ease. My parents contacted the principal of the school, mandating that the teacher had until evening to reveal what he did with me to his wife, or my adoptive father would pay him a visit to his home. He had to tell his wife.

Reporting the priest led to a massive fallout. On a work visa from a foreign country, he was pulled from the ministry in the diocese here and remanded to his bishop, where he returned to active ministry. I was banned by the pastor of the Church from all ministry for reporting him. If I had not, I could have continued ministry even though they knew what happened. Silence would have been rewarded. I lost a few close friends due to the publicity of the lawsuit and their discomfort being associated with me. I feared retaliation beyond being shunned, ostracized, and ridiculed, which led to my retreating at home for six weeks, afraid to leave. Some told me that I was hated and accused of seducing the priest.

Once loved and accepted by my church community, I fell sharply from grace. There was also a backlash from my adult son. I ended up walking away from the community that was like a family. It caused marked spiritual confusion and distress for well over five years.

Jacobsen: How were people helpful in this coming-out experience?

Archer: The community of survivors and advocates is incredible. I have come to know some incredibly fierce, strong, and benevolent people. I am moved by people like law professor Amos Guiora and some of the attorneys we have spoken to, who are empathic but knowledgeable and have a fierce resolve to help survivors see justice.

I am excited about the community I will join in the fall to start working towards my Master’s in Counselling Psychology, with professors willing to engage with complex ideas and not turn to binary thinking or platitudes. I do not think a person needs a vast community, but since we are wired to connect with others, some community is necessary for healing. It can be a community of another person, holding a story with respect and tenderness and unwilling to inflict further harm. That is a true “triumph over iconoclasm,” by the way.

Jovanović: Individuals — not institutions, not the majority, but individuals — became lighthouses in my night. These people did not demand proof but listened to my heart. Psychologists, friends, and a few believers who truly understood Christ’s message of love and justice — helped me rediscover my humanity. Their support was not in words, but in the silence where I could cry without shame.

From a theological perspective, it was through these people that God drew near to me. Paradoxically, it was only after I left the institution that called itself His house that I felt God’s presence in my pain. Through them, I understood that faith is not unquestioning loyalty to an institution, but the courage to break with evil in the name of truth, even when that evil is draped in robes.

Nedelescu: Colleagues, mentors, and even strangers responded with empathy and moral clarity, affirming that speaking out was valid and necessary. Some institutions took immediate steps to understand what happened and offered to help in any way possible, whether through documentation, emotional support, or a safe space to be heard. Those responses reminded me that despite my suffering, individuals and institutions are committed to accountability, dignity, and survivor support.

In contrast, the only institution that responded in a reactionary and, in my view, deeply disappointing manner was the Greek Orthodox Church of America. That response had a severe emotional impact on me and compounded the trauma.

Small: With my grandfather, I suppose that although initially, it met with a shocked reaction from my grandmother, there was no further incident the remainder of the time I stayed with them. The positive thing about the schoolteacher was the response I received from the superintendent. I expected to be chastised. Instead, he listened as I berated myself. He interrupted and told me never to speak harshly and negatively about myself again. I was just talking about myself and the way I was spoken to at home. The teacher, however, only received a verbal warning. He did not lose his position.

With the priest, the victim advocate for the diocese was very kind and supportive. One woman from my parish ended up standing beside me throughout everything, even though she did not understand anything about dealing with someone with so much trauma and symptoms, as well as clergy abuse of adults.

After the lawsuit was mediated, I found a spiritual director ed, who became a strong support person. The lawyer I retained was phenomenal. He had a degree in clinical psychology as well as in law. I also contacted SNAP, which is a nonprofit organization for those abused by clergy. I also had a therapist initially, but she did not understand the complex nature of clergy abuse. I ended therapy.

Jacobsen: How were people unhelpful in this coming-out experience?

Archer: People who will not access a body of knowledge on trauma, consent, or abuse, including spiritual abuse, have said atrocious things to me over the years. I was abused by a man starting when I was 14, so I have been in this space of being a “survivor” (and actually, I do not always like that word) for a long time. However, over time, with healing, ignorant words feel like tiny ant bites as I move towards the people committed to modeling authenticity in their lives and growing and learning.

When people say atrocious things, I think, “Thank you for showing me who you are so I can move far away from you.” So, the unhelpful people have ultimately been helpful, after all, in allowing me to disconnect and attach to healthier people and communities. There are healthy communities; we do not have to feel stuck in sick communities.

Jovanović: The unhelpfulness of people was most deeply expressed in their silence. It was not just the words of denial — the quiet distance, the turning away, that wounded me the most. Some even tried to convince me I had misunderstood what had happened, that “people like that do not exist in the Church,” as if I had imagined my trauma.

The abuser did not inflict the most significant pain, but by those who knew, suspected, or heard, and did nothing. Their theological passivity, their silence in the name of “peace” and “God’s order,” is what spiritually broke me the most. They failed to see Christ in me as the wounded one. They trusted those in vestments more than the truth of a broken soul. Moreover, that, in my most profound conviction, is the greatest betrayal of faith.

Nedelescu: How the Greek Orthodox Church of America has responded has, in my view, been profoundly unhelpful—and continues to be. Rather than expressing empathy or taking responsibility, I experienced their response as involving victim-blaming, narrative distortion, and a general attitude that felt fundamentally inhumane. From my perspective, their actions appear more focused on protecting the institution than on acknowledging the harm I experienced at the hands of one of their high-ranking employees.

That kind of ongoing institutional response doesn’t just fail survivors—it intensifies the harm and reinforces the very silence we are trying to break. It is profoundly disheartening to witness such reactionary and defensive behavior from individuals in positions of authority who, in my view, knew—or should have known—that serious harm had occurred and failed to act to mitigate it.

This aligns with what Professor Amos Guiora, a leading expert on sexual assault and enabling behavior, defines as the “enabling phenomenon.” As he writes, an enabler is “an individual able to reasonably know another individual has been harmed and/or is likely to be harmed yet fails to act to minimize the harm to that individual.”

Finally, the words of Diane Langberg resonate with me: “Systems that cover up abuse through deception, coercion, or abuse of power mimic the perpetrator and revictimize the victim. Tragically, many lives have been sacrificed on the altar of secrecy for the sake of the church or the mission.”

Small: The comments made by those who just did not understand the abuse of adults by clergy were tough. My grandmother struck my face with an open hand. My grandfather threatened me after the assault that if I told, he would tell everyone I was lying and I would get into trouble. No one would believe me.

Much is the same when I reported the priest as an adult. Many stood beside him and turned away from me. I think just the fundamental lack of knowledge and understanding, as well as the impact on their religious practice, made it more complicated than if what happened were with a stranger or anyone but a priest as far as the school teacher admitting to my parents, who discovered evidence in my room, that the teacher caused me to hear some of the most horrific things any person who calls himself a father should ever say to any teenager.

His words took deep root. He was a sadistic bully who left a lifetime of damage in his wake. The consequences of being raised by the aunt and uncle, as well as devastating early childhood loss, left me vulnerable to subsequent abuse, culminating in what transpired with the priest at age sixty.

Jacobsen: Thank you all for continuing to break new ground by offering distinct perspectives on this less-discussed darkness in the community ecosphere around abuse.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

FROM RUINS TO RESIN: A CURATOR’S FIGHT TO SAVE UKRAINIAN HERITAGE

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/18

Today, I’m joined by Tetyana Fiks, a Ukrainian cultural manager and curator based in Kyiv, whose work highlights the power of art in times of conflict. Born and raised in Ukraine, Tetyana has played a central role in promoting Ukrainian culture on international platforms, with significant contributions to projects such as the War Fragments Museum, the Bouquet Kyiv Stage Festival, and Kyiv Art Sessions.

The War Fragments Museum, which exhibited at the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development (EBRD) in London, uses epoxy resin-encased war artifacts to convey the personal stories of Ukrainians affected by war. Through this work, Tetyana emphasizes culture as a universal language that fosters empathy, identity, and resilience. She delves into the ethical considerations of preserving and displaying wartime artifacts, the production challenges her team has faced, and the crucial role of partnerships in sustaining these efforts.

Her involvement with the Bouquet Kyiv Stage Festival and Kyiv Art Sessions further reflects her dedication to making Ukrainian art accessible to global audiences. Through storytelling, artistic expression, and memory, Tetyana Fiks continues to champion Ukraine’s cultural resilience in the face of adversity.

(Facebook)

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do soft disciplines—such as the arts and cultural fields—contribute to the development and preservation of a society’s identity? And in what ways can these disciplines be effectively conveyed to international audiences as instruments of cosmopolitan diplomacy?

Tetyana Fiks: Do you mean in Ukraine specifically or in general?

Jacobsen: In general, we’ll narrow it down to Ukraine shortly. You’ll see where I’m going with it.

Fiks: I ask because we’re living through extraordinary times in Ukraine. So everything feels different here. But for me, culture is an international language. Everyone can understand cultural expressions—paintings, music, performances- no matter where you live. Culture allows us to communicate across borders and deliver important messages.

As a cultural manager, it’s essential for me to share these messages through Ukrainian culture and to highlight them internationally—especially because Ukrainian culture was suppressed and overshadowed by Russian culture for a long time.

Now, even many Ukrainians are discovering their own culture anew, so it is not only important—it is vital. Culture can also be a kind of weapon in that it shapes identity and perception, which we need to understand.

Jacobsen: How would you compare and contrast your experiences—not just with different cultures themselves but with how they evolve? Culture is not a fixed thing. It’s shaped by what people do.

Fiks: Are you referring to the cultures in Ukraine, the UK, or the U.S.?

Jacobsen: Primarily Ukraine and London since both are relevant to your work. But if you want to also reflect on the U.S., we can include that. How do these cultures feel and express themselves from within? And how are they perceived from the outside? Having that dual internal and external perspective can help you see where misunderstandings arise when cultures are interpreted out of context.

Fiks: I prefer not to discuss others’ mistakes in interpreting cultures. But yes, when you’re positioned between different cultural spheres, you notice how culture is often misunderstood. Each society has its own cultural rhythm, values, and symbols. Understanding those—both from the inside and the outside—is crucial for meaningful cultural exchange.

For culture, freedom is crucial. No matter if you’re an artist or an art manager, you should feel free in what you’re doing because art is about freedom. Of course, not all artists can work freely, but still—whether it’s Ukrainian culture, British culture, or the culture of any other country—they’re all different because culture is always tied to a specific context. It’s heritage. It belongs to a place and its people.

But in general, culture is important for me—and, of course, for many others. As I said before, it’s an international language. Whether it’s Ukrainian or Spanish, it’s interesting to me. When I go to another country, visiting a museum is the only way to understand it truly.

Only after that do I feel, “Yes, now I understand this country.” That’s how I connect emotionally and intellectually with a place and its people.

Jacobsen: You mentioned that Ukraine is experiencing a special moment in time, and that’s an important point. How do you bring culture forward uniquely during such extraordinary times?

Fiks: It’s a very interesting time because now the world knows about Ukraine. But often, the only thing people speak about is the war. And, of course, people are tired of hearing about war. We are tired too—but we have no choice. People outside Ukraine have a choice.

So we—my project, my colleagues, my team—try to speak about the war through the language of art. For example, we try to address the war through artistic means with the War Fragments Museum. We realized that people can understand the message when it’s conveyed through a beautiful piece of art.

It doesn’t hurt you at first glance. It becomes painful to read the story behind the piece and understand what it represents. But visually, it’s still a work of art. And that’s powerful. It’s the best way—not just for our project, but many artists and cultural managers are doing this. They are talking about the war and saying, “Look what we are going through,” but they are doing it in a way that isn’t overwhelming or traumatic for the audience.

So, if you want to speak now about Ukrainian culture and art, you must address the war. But if you’re a cultural manager, you cannot harm people emotionally with your work. You must find a way to deliver the message without being too harsh—at least try.

Jacobsen: What is the process of collecting and preserving war artifacts in the cubes?

Fiks: So, it’s a resin. So yes, you can damage a cube, but you can’t break it easily. That was important for us because the resin is long-lasting. It will survive for many years.

We collected all the artifacts and stories in February 2022 and 2023. We also went on expeditions to different cities and villages—some of which were occupied or near the front line—because we wanted to show the stories that most people would never see in the news.

It was important for us that these stories and these people not become just statistics—because they have names. The cities have names, and we wanted to make them visible. So we collected the stories. We talked to people. We spoke with soldiers who had gone through captivity. These experiences will always stay with us. Our team still remembers every story, every face, and every person we spoke with.

It was painful, but I’m glad we did it. It changed us—my team and me—and gave us a deeper understanding of the project. At first, we didn’t think we would go on expeditions. We thought we would write to volunteers and ask them to send us their stories and artifacts.

We received maybe 20 artifacts this way, but then we realized that was not enough. That could not be the core of this project. If we wanted to truly be part of it—and for the project to become part of us—we needed to go. We needed to talk to people and find these stories ourselves. And we did that. I’m grateful we did because it transformed the project.

Jacobsen: How do the artifacts from places like Kherson, Mariupol, or Sumy differ in terms of what they represent—historically and emotionally—compared to artifacts from other cities?

Fiks: I can’t compare artifacts. Even two artifacts from Mariupol—I can’t compare them. Each cube contains someone’s life. And every life is unique. You cannot compare one to another.

That’s why each cube is important. Of course, you might expect that artifacts from Mariupol or Lviv would be different—and they are. But they all carry a piece of the war inside. A war of this scale spreads across the entire country. Maybe Lviv is not on the front line, while Kharkiv is—but all the artifacts are still about war. They are about people. And that’s why I won’t compare any artifact or story.

Jacobsen: How do you balance historical documentation with emotional storytelling?

Fiks: We try to keep that balance because it’s important. Facts matter. Facts are things you can verify—true and check them online. But emotions matter, too, because this project is about people.

And no matter where you live—whether it’s the U.S., Canada, the UK, or Spain—when you read a story about a woman giving birth under missile strikes, you can imagine that. Or when a father buries his 13-year-old son next to the house because he can’t leave his home—you can imagine that, too.

I don’t even know how to describe it. But it’s personal. And as a human being, you understand this. It’s not about philosophy or abstract ideas. It’s about the basic things we all need—eating, living safely, giving birth in normal conditions. These are universal experiences.

(Click to enlarge)

Jacobsen: How does the museum aim to combat—using that word carefully—war fatigue or the desensitization that can come with prolonged exposure to war and suffering?

Fiks: Honestly, I think we’ll only truly understand that after the war is over. Right now, yes—we are tired. But it’s more than tiredness. It’s real fatigue.

Still, we know we have to keep going. We have to fight. We must support those on the front lines—our soldiers, our military. And we can’t allow ourselves to say, “Oh, I’m tired, I’ll do nothing.” We don’t have that luxury.

Everything you’re saying—yes—is something we must face once this war is over.

Jacobsen: Have you received contributions directly from soldiers? So you go there and gather stories in person—someone finds an artifact in the rubble of an administrative building, a primary school, or something belonging to a loved one on the front line. Maybe that soldier is now injured and cannot return to combat. Have you had moments where people heard about your project and gave you something, saying, “I want this to be preserved in resin and remembered”?

Fiks: Yes. I was amazed when Azov soldiers—who had been in Mariupol, were captured, taken to Russia, and eventually returned—shared their stories with us. We interviewed them after they were released from captivity while they were still in the hospital.

They gave us the one thing they had kept with them during captivity in Mariupol. I told them, “This is something you could give to your children or grandchildren—priceless.” But they said, “No. We want this to be part of history. We want it to be in a museum. We want this story to be told.”

I was deeply moved. When I say “I,” I’m also speaking on behalf of my team because this is a team project. We felt a huge responsibility. They gave us something that is beyond value. And then it became our mission—not to make the project famous—but to speak through this project, to speak with it.

So yes, we have these stories—especially from soldiers of Azov—and I’m very grateful we had the opportunity to talk to them. It was important for them to tell their stories, and it was important for us to listen.

Jacobsen: Soldiers have protocol. Politicians have messaging strategies. First responders have procedures. Doctors have ethical guidelines. For cultural managers and museum professionals, what is the protocol for the ethical and responsible handling of artifacts—even if those artifacts are embedded in resin and cannot be shattered, only damaged?

Fiks: The question of ethics was crucial for us. We had to ask ourselves with every story: “Is this, okay? Are we doing the right thing?”

Because we are living through the war, too, we are under missile strikes. We are not sitting in another country, calmly evaluating everything from a distance. No—we’re here. We’re under pressure and stress, like everyone else.

So we thought about it a lot. But we truly tried to make the project as ethical as possible. And I believe we succeeded—because we haven’t received a single message from any soldier, any official, or any private person saying, “Your project is unethical,” or, “You shouldn’t be doing this,” or, “You’re misrepresenting our stories.”

That tells me we’ve managed to approach this with the care and respect it demands.

But it was a hard question for us. With every story, we asked ourselves: Is it okay to share these things? Is it ethical? We questioned ourselves constantly.

(War Fragments Museum)

Jacobsen: What is the importance of collaboration and partnerships? As you noted, museums do not come together alone—there’s a team. But what about teams working with other teams? How do you build partnerships? How do you maintain them? And how do you determine which ones are appropriate, especially for a project as sensitive as this?

Fiks: Of course, collaboration is important. In every field, it matters—but especially in cultural work. We collaborate with museums and galleries within Ukraine, and we also collaborate with partners outside of Ukraine. But for us, there are some key principles.

The most important is that the organization or person supports Ukraine. They cannot have any ties to Russia. That’s essential—because we cannot present the stories of Azov soldiers, for example, while collaborating with someone with connections to Russia. So our partners must support Ukraine, have no relationship with Russia, and not travel to Russia, among other things. Those are our non-negotiables.

Jacobsen: What has been the short-term impact of the exhibitions and the museum?

Fiks: That’s correct—our project is not just about the museum. We have two goals. One is to exhibit the resin cubes in Ukraine and internationally. The second is to raise funds through them. People can purchase a cube from our website, and the proceeds go to one of three charitable foundations we support.

Out of 300 cubes, we now have about 130 left—so we’ve already sold more than half. But we decided to reserve 30 to 40 cubes to donate to museums in Ukraine and abroad. We want this to become part of historical memory.

I should have said this initially: our project is about memory. Memory is essential to every nation because it shapes the future—it shapes future generations. We created this project for them to help them understand what happened. So yes, we will keep several cubes for permanent collections, but we are also using the rest to raise support. That balance is working well so far.

(War Fragments Museum)

Jacobsen: What is your favourite cube?

Fiks: Oh, I can’t say that I have one favourite. But I really loved one—it has burned wheat inside.

Jacobsen: Burned wheat?

Fiks: Yes. It came from the Mykolaiv region. During the harvest season, there were heavy strikes in the area. The fields were burning—but farmers kept working to save the grain. Because in Ukraine, grain is everything. It is our bread—our symbol of life.

There are many photos of grain fields on fire, yet farmers continue to gather what they can. One of those farmers sent us a handful of scorched grain. The grains were whole but darkened by the fire. We turned that into a cube.

I loved that cube. It was sold in just one day.

But truly, I can’t say I have a favourite. These cubes are part of us. This isn’t just a project about art—it’s about war, about our people. And it will always be part of us. I don’t have a favourite cube or a favourite story. All of them are part of us, the team.

Even when someone buys a cube, I’m always happy—because it means we can help the foundations we support. But when I’m packing the cube, I always pause. I feel, “Okay…I understand I have to let it go,” but it’s still hard for me every time.

Jacobsen: The way the cubes are shaped—do you design them, so they are faceted in a way that allows light to reflect through them? So you can see the object more clearly no matter what angle you view it?

Fiks: They all have the same shape and size—15 centimetres by 15 centimetres. We have professional partners who manufacture them. This isn’t something just anyone can do. It takes a lot of resources, expertise, and time.

The epoxy resin we use was developed specifically for this project. It’s very difficult to produce a cube of this size that is still so transparent, so we waited a long time for this resin to be developed. Once we had it, we worked closely with our partners to figure out how to embed the objects to make them look like they’ve always been there.

But it wasn’t easy—it was a long and complicated process. I’m really glad we succeeded in producing the cubes exactly as we envisioned them. It’s a full production, not something that can be done in an office setting.

Jacobsen: I noticed in the online photos, especially from the angles at the vertices of each cube, that there’s a reflective quality—almost like the object inside is mirrored or glowing. Was that something you specifically requested from the resin and cube designers, or did that effect emerge?

Fiks: That effect wasn’t something we planned. It became apparent while we were already producing the cubes. We didn’t predict or request it in advance—but it turned out beautifully.

Jacobsen: How long are these cubes expected to last? Since this is a custom-made epoxy resin, does it have a longer shelf life than standard epoxy once it’s set?

Fiks: Yes. These cubes are designed to last forever. As I’ve said before, you can damage them but not break them. That was part of the idea. They will work like amber capturing history inside them.

Jacobsen: That also sounds like a metaphor.

Fiks: It can be seen as a metaphor. But yes, they are full solids. They will last. I hope they will last forever.

Jacobsen: What was Evgeni Utkin’s role and vision in founding the War Fragments Museum?

Fiks: Evgeny is a special person for all of us on the team. Before the full-scale invasion, he brought us together for another project. Without him, we would never have met or created the War Fragments Museum.

He supported us throughout the entire process—during the preparation period, during production, and once the cubes were ready. He helped in many ways, and I couldn’t list them all. He’s an incredibly important figure in this project. Without him, it wouldn’t exist in the way it does now.

Jacobsen: Were there any moments when the project nearly didn’t happen?

Fiks: There was one serious challenge. When we started producing the cubes, we had a donor and specific milestones to meet. But then a rocket struck the production site where the cubes were being made. We had to postpone everything.

Still, we overcame that delay and finished production in time to meet our project milestones. So yes, it came close, but we made it happen. That was the one major incident. Thankfully, everyone was alive.

Jacobsen: Is there a particular quote from any of the stories—an excerpt or phrase from the descriptions that stand out to you?

Fiks: A quote? I’m not sure I understand the question.

Jacobsen: Ah, yes—so the cubes, as I understand, come with descriptions or accompanying stories. Is there one of those—not necessarily your favourite—but one you’ve been thinking about recently? Something that continues to resonate with you because of its poignancy?

Fiks: Yes, now I understand what you mean. I still carry some sentences from those stories in my mind. I remember certain lines. Not just one—I have a few of them that stay with me and that I think about often.

But they are painful, so I prefer not to say them aloud. I think everyone who’s interested should visit our website and find their own quote. Your quote will be different, depending on your circumstances, your thoughts, and your life. Everyone interested should find their own.

Jacobsen: Tetyana, thank you so much for your time today. It was a pleasure to meet you, and I appreciate your expertise.

Fiks: Thank you so much, Scott. It was nice to meet you, too. Thank you for having me.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

WHO WATCHES THE WATCHERS? A CONVERSATION ON DIGITAL RIGHTS AND DECENTRALIZATION

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/16

Today, I’m joined by Alexander Linton, a leading voice in the fight for digital privacy and a central figure behind Session, a privacy-first messaging app developed by the Australian nonprofit Oxen Project. With a background in communications and over five years of work on the Session project, Linton has emerged as a staunch advocate for end-to-end encryption, decentralized networks, and open-source development.

As the public face of Session’s outreach and education efforts, he promotes a platform designed to minimize metadata and safeguard user anonymity—principles that are increasingly under siege in today’s surveillance-driven digital landscape. Linton writes and speaks regularly on the future of privacy technologies, legislative overreach, and digital autonomy, grounding his advocacy in the belief that privacy is not a privilege but a basic human right.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Your background is in journalism and media. How did you transition into digital rights and technology?

Alexander Linton: It was a relatively smooth transition.

The media is such an exposed group these days. Journalists are constantly in the spotlight when it comes to digital rights. So many examples exist where media workers have had their data or communications compromised. So, if you’re passionate about media or journalism, that passion often translates well into working in digital rights. Of course, you end up on the other side of the table. Instead of reporting on issues, you’re now helping build the tools that protect people from them.

That said, I’ve always tried to prioritize human needs when developing technology. I honed this perspective while working directly with people, especially when producing stories or researching sensitive topics. This mindset carries over to building and promoting privacy tools.

(Oxen)

Jacobsen: Broadly speaking, what does “digital privacy” mean in something as diverse, expansive, and porous as the Internet?

Linton: That’s a good question. There are a lot of ways to approach digital privacy, and it matters both on a personal level and at a societal level.

On a personal level, digital privacy touches our lives constantly. Something as simple as seeing a targeted advertisement for something you didn’t realize you needed — but that an algorithm already knew you did — is a basic example of how privacy issues play out daily.

But more insidiously, digital privacy affects the kind of content we see, the information we’re exposed to, and the narratives that shape public opinion. It can influence voting behaviour, shift belief systems, and ultimately rewire society. That’s when the concept of digital privacy moves from being a personal issue to a collective one.

The consequences are systemic. These platforms collect and aggregate data on a massive scale — and over the last two decades, our appetite for technological innovation has far outpaced our commitment to protecting privacy. We’ve ended up in a position where privacy has been sidelined in favour of convenience, speed, and profit.

And now, we’re starting to see the ripple effects of that. From the erosion of trust in institutions to increased surveillance and manipulation, the cost of ignoring privacy is becoming increasingly visible—not just individually but also in how our communities function and societies cohere.

Jacobsen: I keep coming back to the question of whether threats to digital privacy are best understood as a matter of who or what. On one hand, threats are always evolving—becoming more sophisticated as defenses struggle to keep pace. And the usual suspects are still in play: governments, corporations, individuals. But there’s also a less visible tier of actors—lone wolves who operate in the shadows, outside even of collectives like Anonymous, which, for all its controversy, often champions worthy causes.

So how should we be framing this? Are threats to digital privacy primarily about who is behind them—or what systems, technologies, or failures are enabling them?

Linton: Those things go hand in hand, but at the end of the day, it’s who — because it’s us that is affected when privacy deteriorates. And when we talk about at-risk groups like journalists, hacktivists, whistleblowers — or anyone who might be especially sensitive to privacy — a lot of the time, these are people who are well-resourced, or at least more motivated and better equipped to protect themselves than the average person. However, privacy works best when it’s collective.

Suppose you’re the only person practicing privacy out of a group of a hundred. In that case, you stand out — and that can actually make you more vulnerable. You get a kind of “herd immunity” effect with privacy.

Ultimately, while digital privacy benefits everyone, it is especially important for the vulnerable—people in our communities who may be at risk. Whether they’re vulnerable because of their work, who they are, or where they live doesn’t matter. What matters is that improving digital privacy can strengthen and protect those people—and their rights.

(Oxen)

Jacobsen: People see buzzwords thrown around, which, unfortunately, shouldn’t be buzzwords like “closed source” and “open source.” OpenAI took its name from the idea of open-sourced AI. What does “open source” mean?

Linton: Sure. Open source refers to publicly available source code of a piece of software. That means anyone can inspect it, audit it, and, in many cases, contribute to it. It also means anyone can recompile it themselves to ensure the software they’re running actually matches the publicly available code. This is important for building trust, verifiability, and security in software. It’s also important to encourage collaboration, fairness, and transparency when developing technologies that shape our lives.

Now, in the example you gave — OpenAI — AI is clearly going to be a major force in society in the future. So everyone who has a stake in that future (which is all of us) must be able to see what’s happening and potentially shape its direction. The closed source is the opposite: the source code is hidden, and you cannot verify how the software works or whether it’s doing what it claims.

You can’t take pieces of it and build your tools. Generally, this is done so that a company can protect its intellectual property and profit from whatever that technology is.

A simpler definition…It’s quite tricky, but the basic idea is that open source means I’m going to show you how I’m making this thing. Regardless of what it is—it could be your iPad—I will show you all the detailed steps and little pieces that go inside so that, if you wanted to, you could build your own iPad, and it would work exactly the same.

A closed source is when you go to the shop and buy the iPad, which works—but you have no idea how it works or what’s inside. That’s the core difference between open source and closed source.

Jacobsen: How does Session differ from other secure messaging apps like Signal or Telegram?

Linton: The basic principle we’re working with is that the technological systems we use today are essentially critical infrastructure for protecting our rights—things like freedom of speech, privacy, and even freedom of assembly. Encrypted messaging apps are incredibly important tools for maintaining those rights.

The problem is that the systems we rely on today place our rights in the hands of individual companies—or, in some cases, one very rich person. We trust them to continue protecting those rights. Everyone has an agenda, and politics or profit can shift. What’s acceptable or protected today might not be tomorrow.

Suddenly, the speech you thought you had, the communication you believed was private, could be stripped away.

The idea behind Session is to address this risk through disintermediation — removing the reliance on a single company or person to uphold your rights. Instead, we use a decentralized system operated by the people whose rights are at stake. It’s a much more equitable and democratic approach. But technology hasn’t typically worked this way, which is what makes Session different.

So the first way that Session is different is that it’s decentralized. While we have a foundation — responsible for issuing grants and contributing to Session’s open-source development, we don’t run the network that stores and routes messages.

That’s a significant difference between something like Session and something like Signal.

Now, don’t get it twisted — I trust Signal and the people who work there. They’re good people, for sure. But this is a philosophical difference — a different approach.

Technologically, as you mentioned earlier, there’s also additional metadata hardening that Session does, which most messaging apps don’t go through. For example, Signal requires a phone number when you sign up. Even though that number may not be shared or logged for long, Signal can still see who you’re messaging, when you’re doing it, and your IP address.

That kind of information is valuable in the era of surveillance capitalism. Now, to their credit, Signal chooses not to exploit it—which is great.

But Session takes a different approach. Because we operate using a decentralized network, we can use onion routing—a concept championed by the Tor Project—to protect metadata such as IP addresses and prevent the timing correlation of messages.

(Oxen)

Jacobsen: That’s powerful. This is a good point for distinguishing between P2P, onion routing, VPNs, double VPNs, and dedicated IP. They’re each distinct, but they matter to people thinking seriously about privacy.

Linton: Absolutely. I can definitely do that. Let me backtrack a little to where I was — Tor.

Tor invented onion routing, which basically means that your message is wrapped in multiple layers of encryption and sent through several nodes in a network. The first node peels off one layer of encryption and sees only the address of the next node.

Typically, there are three nodes in a route. The first node sees the sender’s IP but has no idea where the message is ultimately going. The final node sees that a message is being delivered to someone, and it sees the recipient’s IP — but it has no idea where the message originally came from.

In practical terms, this means that no single part of the network ever has access to the full picture. Your conversations—and the sensitive metadata that surrounds them—are obscured by design. That’s only possible because of Session’s disintermediated and decentralized architecture.

This process happens in Session by default, but users can also add a layer of protection by using VPNs.

A VPN — or Virtual Private Network — works on a simpler principle. It acts as a middleman. If you’re using WhatsApp, for example, instead of WhatsApp seeing your actual IP address, they see the IP of your VPN.

That’s better, but there are trade-offs. While the platform doesn’t have your IP, it still has your account data — like your phone number and possibly your contact list — which can still be used to identify you and the people you’re talking to.

There are variations like double VPNs, where traffic is routed through two VPN servers for added privacy, and dedicated IPs, which assign a unique IP to you — often for business or stability reasons — but which may be less private in terms of anonymity.

P2P — or peer-to-peer — involves direct user connections, sometimes exposing IPs unless wrapped in privacy layers.

Unlike all of these, onion routing is built specifically for anonymity, distributing trust across the network. That’s why it’s so important in privacy-preserving tools like Session.

Still, a VPN can often be a useful anonymizing tool, but it’s definitely a step down from onion routing when it comes to minimizing metadata.

Another major difference in our system is that because we don’t have a central company routing messages or managing accounts, we can’t use an identifier like a phone number — which is more of a legacy system — to handle addressing or account creation. In fact, there’s no way to create an account at all on Session because there’s no central authority with which to register.

Instead, we generate a key pair on the user’s device. If you’re familiar with public-key encryption, that means private and public keys. Your private key is used primarily for decrypting messages, while your public key is what other people use to encrypt messages sent to you.

You share your public key, and anyone can send you a message that only you can decrypt with your private key. It’s generated locally, so you never need to register anything with anyone. Using some clever mathematical techniques, we can use this public key for addressing inside the decentralized network.

You never need to use a personal identifier like a phone number, which, as a journalist, I’m sure you know can be quite sensitive information to give out when using a messaging service.

Those are the main ways Session differentiates itself from something like Signal, WhatsApp, or Telegram.

Jacobsen: So, how can people protect their privacy? What’s on the cutting edge of the need to protect privacy? I’ve encountered things like double VPN and “onion over VPN,” which essentially add extra layers to the onion. They are helpful but slow things down, especially the double VPN setups. What are your recommendations? And what are you seeing in the future?

Linton: Absolutely. So, first of all, we have systemic problems in how we build technology — and those problems don’t just come from how the tech itself works. They also come from our government structures, how tech companies are regulated (or not), and how funding works in the tech space. All of this contributes to the privacy issues we see today.

Now, all of these tools—VPNs, onion routing, encryption—are fantastic, and the people working on them are absolutely brilliant. But often, it feels like we’re applying Band-Aid solutions to a structural wound.

We often shift the burden of solving this systemic issue onto the consumer. The individual is expected to outsmart the system—and that’s not fair. People often end up isolating themselves by using privacy tools. For example, you’re stuck if you want to use a secure messaging app, but none of your friends are on it.

Okay — that’s the end of the rant. So, what can people do? What are some practical steps? My advice is always to start small and build up. This is a big issue, and it’s easy to throw your hands up and say, “Well, my privacy is already compromised. My data’s already out there. What’s the point?”

But there is a point. Start with the things you use every day. If you use email constantly, find an email provider that supports encryption and has strong privacy-focused policies. If you use messaging apps a lot, find one that is end-to-end encrypted at a minimum—and ideally, one backed by a nonprofit structure like Signal or Session.

If you’re big on social media, say you use Twitter, and maybe look into alternatives like Bluesky or a federated platform like Mastodon. Use what aligns with your own digital habits.

If you’re concerned about network privacy, there’s an ongoing debate about VPNs and whether they’re just privacy theatre. It really comes down to this: do you trust your ISP, or do you trust a VPN company more? The answer depends on your country, your ISP’s practices, and the legal obligations in your jurisdiction.

That said, onion routing is a huge step forward from VPNs in protecting anonymity and minimizing metadata. It’s the more robust, privacy-first option, especially when integrated by default, like in Session.

However, most of the time, when you use a VPN, you don’t even notice it’s running — unless a website blocks you. Things often get noticeably worse if you use an onion network like Tor. Some websites break completely, you get blocked more frequently, and page load times can be significantly slower.

Even further along the spectrum, there’s a concept called a mixnet, which is an even more advanced type of obfuscation overlay network than onion routing. Mixnets group packets together and send them through the network with delays, making it impossible to deanonymize the data using timing attacks.

Timing attacks are a surveillance method only highly sophisticated adversaries can carry out. To monitor when packets are sent and received, you’d need access to the physical Internet infrastructure, such as fibre cables, routers, and middleboxes. Based on that timing, it becomes theoretically possible to deanonymize users, even using a privacy-preserving network like Tor.

Researchers have shown that timing attacks can work, in some cases, even against Tor. Mixnets, like the one used by Nym, address this specific vulnerability.

However, as you might expect, using a mixnet can cause an even bigger impact on user experience. The trade-off between privacy and convenience becomes more extreme.

So, we’re looking at an unsustainable situation in which we ask everyday users to make serious sacrifices in usability to protect their privacy. That’s not a reasonable long-term model.

We need a more privacy-forward approach — giving people privacy by default rather than making them jump through hoops. Tools like mixes are important, but ideally, people shouldn’t have to think about them at all.

Jacobsen: What ethical frameworks are presently in place — or in development — for digital privacy in an era of narrow AI and increasingly sophisticated good and bad actors?

Linton: I’m not as familiar with the AI side of things. But in terms of frameworks that address human actors — both good and bad — there’s a general principle of aiming for “the most good for the most people.”

Let me give an example of digital privacy: Privacy tools like encryption have immense value. They protect the people who uphold democratic society—activists, journalists, lawyers, and human rights defenders.

They also offer essential safeguards for people living under oppressive regimes or anyone vulnerable for social, political, or personal reasons.

So, when we ask whether we should build and deploy privacy tools, the answer becomes clear: yes. The benefits—the very real protections they offer—far outweigh the hypothetical risks. Privacy strengthens the fabric of a just society.

We should advocate for and implement it as broadly as possible, not only as a technical matter but also as a moral imperative.

Jacobsen: Are there any final points people should definitely know about digital privacy that we haven’t already covered?

Linton: Yes — two quick ones.

First, as you said earlier, people often encounter a lot of buzzwords: encryption, onion routing, end-to-end encryption, and open source. These are important concepts, but they’re only parts of the puzzle. We really want to address privacy at its root. In that case, we need to reckon with the broader system of surveillance capitalism.

That system—extracting data for profit—poisons a huge part of today’s tech industry. The good news is that there are better ways to design systems. We can embrace alternative governance models and open-source practices that are more accountable, equitable, and privacy-respecting. That’s where real structural change begins.

Second—and on a more optimistic note—it’s easy to feel pessimistic or helpless about digital privacy. But it’s not too late. Tools, communities, and developers are working to build better systems. The future isn’t written yet, and if we act with purpose and clarity, we can still shape it to protect our rights.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Alexander.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

CAN CAPITAL BE FAITHFUL? THE GLOBAL IMAN FUND’S QUIET REVOLUTION

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): СокальINFO

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/05/16

Ghalib Salam brings more than 27 years of experience in business development to his new role as Vice President at Global Growth Assets Inc., where he oversees the Global Iman Fund, a Sharia-compliant and ethically focused mutual fund recognized multiple times with the FundGrade A+ Award. The fund invests primarily in technology, healthcare, and consumer sectors, guided by the rigorous screening standards of the Dow Jones Islamic Market Titans 100 Index. Prior to this role, Salam served as Director at the Royal Bank of Canada in Toronto, building a track record of leadership across Canada’s financial sector.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: The Global Iman Fund has received the FundGrade A+ Award multiple times. Could you explain what sets the fund apart and what this recognition represents?

Ghalib Salam: Sure. The Global Iman Fund is part of Global Growth Assets Inc., an investment fund with over $850 million in assets under management (AUM) and in operation since February 1998.

Global Growth Assets Inc. is part of the Global Family of Companies, a multifaceted financial organization founded in 1998, with over $3.6 billion in assets under management and administration.

The Global Iman Fund is a mutual fund that adheres to Sharia-compliant investment principles and offers socially responsible investment opportunities. It provides investors with long-term growth through a diversified global investment portfolio that meets ethical and faith-based investing standards.

The Global Iman Fund is available through various distribution channels, including financial advisors, banks, and online platforms.

Jacobsen: The Global Iman Fund has received the FundGrade A+ Award for several consecutive years. Could you elaborate on the significance of this recognition and what it reflects about the fund’s long-term performance and positioning?

Salam: The award recognizes high-performing investment funds based on risk-adjusted returns, consistency, and overall portfolio strength. The ranking methodology evaluates funds against industry benchmarks across multiple tolerance levels.

Funds that receive this distinction are recognized as high-grade, actively traded funds well-received by dealers, financial advisors, and investors.

Jacobsen: What does the investment portfolio of the Global Iman Fund focus on? You alluded to shared principles. How do those principles feed into the portfolio itself?

Salam: Let me share the mechanics of how we select the portfolio. We are the fund manager, and we also have a portfolio manager—UBS is our portfolio manager. There is a Sharia Council that devises a portfolio as part of the Dow Jones Islamic Market Titans Index, selecting 100 publicly tradable companies that comply with Shariah investment principles. UBS then selects specific entities from that portfolio. The composition of investments varies over time, but the approach remains long-term, focusing on sustainable growth.

The portfolio is diversified across different industry sectors. Approximately 37% of the fund is technology-centric, around 14-15% is in service and communications, and close to 13% is allocated to consumer services, with another 13% spread across other industries. These are the high-level concentrations in terms of sector segmentation.

Jacobsen: If you were to break down the size of each of those 100 companies, would you deal with a top-heavy structure where a few large companies dominate, or would the investments be more evenly distributed?

Salam: Yes, indeed. In the case of the Global Iman Fund, these are global companies. More than 80% of our portfolio is U.S.-based, with the remainder comprising approximately 15% European companies and around 5% Asia-centric investments. The fund is entirely U.S. dollar-denominated, providing investors with stability and liquidity.

So, talking about specific names, much of this is publicly available information, but for the benefit of this interview, I’ll highlight some key holdings. Our portfolio combines technology, consumer services, and healthcare-focused investments. We hold shares in Amazon, Apple, Nvidia, Google, Alibaba, and Eli Lilly. As you can see, we focus strongly on technology and consumer-driven industries.

Before diving into specific companies, it’s essential to understand why the Sharia Advisory Board selects these 100 entities. A key principle is that income from non-compliant (or “impure”) sources must not exceed 5% of total revenue. Impure sources mean revenue must not be derived from industries such as alcohol, tobacco, pork and pork-related products, banking, insurance, conventional financial services, weapons, defense, entertainment, gambling, adult content, and casinos.

The portfolio is carefully structured to align with Sharia-compliant ethical investment guidelines.

Jacobsen: Could you elaborate specifically on the technology sector? Companies like Microsoft, AMD, Google, and Nvidia are heavily involved in semiconductors, AI, and cloud computing—volatile but high-growth industries. Do you expect this to be the most profitable sector of your portfolio over the next five years?

Salam: As an investment fund manager, it’s difficult for me to make specific forward-looking statements on expected profitability, as our portfolio managers at UBS are the key decision-makers regarding equities selection and holding periods. However, I can say that these companies are positioned at the forefront of technological advancements, especially in areas like AI, data processing, and semiconductor manufacturing.

The long-term outlook for these sectors remains strong, but their volatility requires strategic portfolio balancing. Our portfolio managers assess market conditions and sector performance to ensure that our investments align with our long-term growth objectives while remaining within the risk parameters defined by the fund’s mandate.

However, I can give you the due diligence rationale behind selecting any asset in the portfolio. One of the key questions might be—why is 38-39% of the fund tech-centric? The reason is simple: that is where the market shift is happening. This transition is accurate, and technology continues to dominate growth sectors globally.

The due diligence process carried out by our portfolio manager involves multiple steps. First, they analyze public disclosure documents, interview management teams, and investor relations representatives, and compare peer group performance metrics. After completing these assessments, they engineer the portfolio, ensuring all investment criteria are met. Once selected, each asset is subject to an ongoing risk management framework designed to mitigate exposure and maintain portfolio balance.

Regarding market volatility, we recognize that no investor operates in isolation—we are part of a broader investment community. We embrace market shifts as they happen, ensuring the portfolio remains structured yet flexible enough to withstand fluctuations while avoiding extreme risk concentration. The goal is to preserve stability while still responsibly leveraging high-growth opportunities.

Jacobsen: Regarding mutual funds like the Global Iman Fund, what should investors understand about the risks and disclaimers involved? And conversely, what are some potential advantages such investments can offer?

Salam: Regarding risk, all investments—including mutual funds—involve the possibility of losing money or failing to generate expected returns. The degree of risk varies from fund to fund, but investments with higher potential returns generally carry higher risks. Investors must carefully assess their risk tolerance before making investment decisions.

Investing in mutual funds like the Global Iman Fund involves a range of considerations. One major factor is concentration risk—when a portfolio leans heavily into specific sectors or a limited group of companies, it can become especially vulnerable to downturns in those areas. Likewise, exposure to emerging markets introduces political, regulatory, and economic uncertainties that can heighten volatility. Market fluctuations are inevitable; while the fund is structured to weather short-term shifts, investors should be prepared for periods of instability.

Additional risks include liquidity challenges, where exiting an investment quickly may not always be feasible, and regulatory shifts, which can reshape compliance obligations as financial laws evolve. For international investors, currency risk is also a factor—the fund is primarily denominated in U.S. dollars, so shifts in exchange rates can affect returns for those operating in other currencies. These factors underscore the importance of a well-informed, diversified investment approach.

There are many other potential risks, but these are some of the most significant factors I want to highlight here.

Jacobsen: What about the potential benefits of investing in this type of fund?

Salam: Our fund’s disclaimer and investment information are publicly available through our website, where we provide an official prospectus. This document is purely for informational purposes, outlining the terms, conditions, and potential risks of investing in the Global Iman Fund. Investors are always encouraged to review the prospectus carefully and consult financial advisors before making decisions.

Again, as a mutual fund administrator, we cannot guarantee that all the information is always complete or current due to the nature of the investment risks we discussed earlier. Market conditions and regulations are subject to change without notice. Mutual funds are not guaranteed investments—their value fluctuates frequently, and past performance may not necessarily be repeated. For this reason, we strongly recommend that potential investors read the prospectus carefully before investing.

Additionally, all documents, whether portfolio manager-driven or included in the prospectus, typically contain forward-looking statements. These statements are predictive and rely on future events and conditions over which we have no control. Investors need to understand that forward-looking statements are made with due caution. However, investment decisions should not be solely based on these statements, as market conditions and external factors can impact outcomes.

When you asked about possibilities and benefits, the number one benefit I can highlight is that Sharia-compliant investing is highly attractive for investors who prioritize ethical and socially responsible investment strategies. While Sharia compliance is an Islamic qualification for investing, we also have a significant number of non-Muslim investors who seek funds that align with their ethical and social values. Many investors are drawn to Sharia-compliant funds because they offer a clear conscience. They know that investments are made under strict ethical guidelines that exclude industries like alcohol, tobacco, gambling, and conventional financial services.

Another benefit is that our fund has consistently delivered strong yields. While I won’t quote specific numbers here, its performance has been at par or above par compared to other mutual funds in the marketplace. Furthermore, our risk management strategies ensure that performance remains stable while maintaining a high-quality portfolio that offers substantial long-term value for investors.

Today, we hold two key distinctions. We are the oldest Sharia-compliant mutual fund in the market and, as of today, the largest.

As awareness of Sharia-compliant investing grows, we benefit from a first-mover advantage. While we do not actively influence investment decisions, we are in a strong position to attract investors looking for a proven and ethical financial product—one that is not necessarily Muslim-centric but instead appealing to all individuals who prioritize ethical responsible investing.

Jacobsen: Great. Thank you for your time today—I appreciate it.

The views expressed by Global Growth Assets Inc. and its partners reflect market conditions at the time of publication and are subject to change. These opinions may differ from those of other associates or affiliates and do not constitute investment advice. Mutual fund investments may be subject to commissions, trailing commissions, management fees, and expenses.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jared Gleaton, Psychology and Healthier Eating

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2025/01/01

 Jared Gleaton, a school psychologist turned food critic and author has a unique approach that combines his expertise in psychology with his passion for food. After losing 176 pounds in one year, he created the popular series “Jared Gleaton Eats,” exploring the psychological art of eating. His book, A Feast for the Senses: The Psychological Art of Eating Well, delves into people’s emotional connections with food. As a sought-after guest speaker, Jared shares insights on weight loss, food psychology, and culinary trends. He is open to collaborations with brands, journalists, and podcasters, promoting healthy living and mindful eating.

Gleaton discusses Oklahoma’s evolving food culture, transitioning from deep-fried dishes to fine dining, featuring Laotian and Indigenous cuisines. They explore fast food’s global influence, contrasting it with healthier and mindful eating trends. Jared shares insights on changing habits through self-reflection and moderation, drawing from personal experiences with weight loss and injuries. The conversation emphasizes food as a catalyst for exploration, growth, and life change, advocating for diet balance and quality.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Jared Gleaton, a school psychologist, food critic, author, and host of “Jared Gleaton Eats.” You’re calling from Oklahoma, and I have a good question: What is the food culture like in Oklahoma?

Jared Gleaton: Well, it’s going through a culinary renaissance. It’s diverse, and we have come a long way. I’ve lived here for 30 years; I’m originally from Maine. It was all about deep-fried everything for the first 20 of those years. We loved to put ranch dressing on every food you could think of. But about ten years ago, a chef named Lisa Becklund from Seattle started doing fine dining dinners, which changed things.

Fine dining restaurants and modern American cuisine began popping up all over Oklahoma. Now, we even have a James Beard Award-winning chef, and one of our restaurants, serving Laotian food, was recognized by USA Today as one of the top 10 in the United States. We’ve also got fine dining options featuring Indigenous cuisine. We’ve come a long way quickly, especially over the last five years.

Jacobsen: How does the fast-food culture compare to this renaissance you’re talking about?

Gleaton: Well, fast food is still a big part of the culture here, and many of us grew up with it. The trend we’re trying to break is the dominance of chains like McDonald’s, Wendy’s, Whataburger, and even Five Guys. Fast food remains popular, especially because of its portion size and price. People tend to think they’re getting a good deal—more food for their money—but we slowly realize that farm-to-table, fresh ingredients and high-quality meals are worth much more than what you get at Taco Bell.

Jacobsen: You’d be surprised at how far fast food has spread. I’ve done a lot of different kinds of journalism, from fashion to church-state separation to a recent trip to Ukraine. I mention this because something surprising happened during that trip: In eastern Ukraine, in Kharkiv, 25 kilometres from the Russian border, I saw McDonald’s restaurants. They were as modern as any you’d find in Canada, with digital displays and all the latest technology. It wasn’t just there; other cities had McDonald’s and even KFC. This shows how fast food culture has spread from the United States to many parts of the world.

Many people don’t realize that the U.S.’s real power lies in its culture—often called “soft power”—which gets exported to many countries. Do you think this culinary renaissance in Oklahoma, and maybe in other parts of the U.S., could inspire healthier portions and palates that might spread to other countries, as opposed to the less healthy aspects of American dietary culture?

Gleaton: That’s a really interesting point. You’ve touched on something significant—culture, marketing, capitalism, and how these things make it easy for other societies to adopt certain habits. Let’s break that down further.

And that’s fast food, where the reach and the finances are considerable. But I would argue that if that’s what’s going into Ukraine and other places, it’s similar to how, for example, Coca-Cola is massive in Italy—either Coca-Cola or Pepsi, one of the two are huge there. The old-world, traditional fine dining, Michelin-starred, healthier lifestyles that were staples in European countries for decades are starting to change. It began on the coasts—on the East and West Coasts of the U.S.—but now it’s starting to hit the heartland of the United States, including places like Oklahoma.

It’s also impacting food trends within the U.S. We have that rich culture from countries like France and Italy, all the way up to Germany and England, and even Japan, which has incredible quality. As much as the U.S. is exporting McDonald’s and KFC, those countries are importing culinary techniques that are starting to gain recognition in places like Oklahoma, Kansas, and Missouri. I hadn’t realized it initially, but it’s obvious in hindsight.

One interesting point someone brought up is the idea of wealthy, advanced industrial economies like Japan. Japan became wealthy and high-tech without facing the same levels of obesity or unhealthy habits seen in many other countries. I don’t know Japanese culture deeply, but from what I understand, it’s centred around discipline, moderation, and perfection. You have examples like Wagyu beef, some of the best seafood in the world, and even their pork and chicken are exceptional.

It’s remarkable for an island country like Japan. Their entire culture is so different. In the United States, we had the Great Depression after World War I, followed by World War II, which pulled us out. During the Depression, the mentality was “finish everything on your plate,” and portions were small. But that mentality stuck, even as portion sizes grew larger. The idea became about getting more food for your money.

Then came the complete commercialization of food—remember T.V. dinners?

That’s right. T.V. dinners evolved into boxed dinners, which also have a price. The culture of moderation wasn’t taught because, you could speculate, the Depression created these lasting stereotypes. The focus shifted to how much food you could get for $20 rather than the quality or taste of the food.

And through marketing—think about it—billions of dollars go into designing food packaging and advertising in grocery stores. That becomes the culture, and it’s wildly different from places like Japan, where the tradition and history of food are central. There can be dietary deficiencies in Japan, sure. Still, in North America, particularly the U.S. and Canada, we have cultural overlap, largely driven by commercialization.

Jacobsen: What are we typically missing nutritionally in our diets?

Gleaton: Well, balance. If you’re following a fast-food culture, they’re not focusing on macronutrients or the quality of carbohydrates, fats, and proteins. Everything is deep-fried; everything is processed. It needs to include nutrition, balance, and moderation. What does your body need? How do you get the highest quality and best flavour from what your body requires to make it enjoyable?

All those wonderful sensations in your taste buds translate to your brain, signalling that something tastes incredible. But right now, those childhood favourites often trigger that response—like that blue box of Kraft macaroni and cheese. It tastes good, right? I advocate diving into the psychological aspect—conversing with yourself and reflecting. Do you like what you think you like, or have you been conditioned all your life to like certain foods and never discovered others because you’ve been trained otherwise?

Jacobsen: So, how do you instill healthier habits in kids? As people get older, they tend to become more set in their patterns of thought and habits. What challenges, along with the first question, arise for adults when trying to reprogram certain habits of thought and diet?

Gleaton: Humans are pattern-seeking creatures. We’re creatures of habit and routine. One of the cruellest things about the nature of time is that we’re constantly changing, even on the smallest levels—we might not see the changes, but they’re happening—and yet we resist that change. The first step I always recommend is self-reflection and conversing with yourself. This doesn’t only apply to food but to any aspect of life.

We don’t learn as much from our successes as we do from our failures, and it’s important to have the ability to stop and ask, “Why haven’t I liked this food all my life? What event caused me to think I don’t like it?” Finding the strength to say, “Let’s try it a different way” or “Let’s approach it from a new perspective” is key. If we can find that strength within ourselves, we can apply it to any part of our life, but it can start with food. After all, food is essential to who we are—it’s culture, our story.

Jacobsen: Why does healthier eating get the reputation of being not just difficult but almost Sisyphean in the effort required to make it a daily habit, compared to fast food? Fast food still requires you to go out, order, and wait for your meal. That’s the same effort as grocery shopping, picking up more greens, and eating healthy at home.

Gleaton: Perception is reality. Occam’s razor applies here: the mind perceives that one task takes a certain amount of time and another offers a certain level of quality, but it comes back to our upbringing and makeup. We have these routines and patterns that started in early childhood or developed along the way, and they shape our perceptions. The mind simplifies these routines, and fast food often feels easier, even when, as you said, the overall effort might be comparable.

It’s hard to break out of those habits. We must see a meaningful reason to change, whether because we’re adventurous or due to health reasons. But it’s also about the conversations we have around food in general. We love extremes. We hear things like “healthy food is expensive” or “healthy food doesn’t taste as good.”

For example, I make beautiful green beans sautéed in three or four tablespoons of butter. Sure, that’s not healthy. But if you reduce it to one tablespoon, just enough to coat them, and add a little salt, it’s delightful. It’s all about having that conversation with yourself and moderating what you do with the ingredients you have. That’s hard because we tend to go from one extreme to another.

“Diet” has gained a negative connotation because it is often seen as restrictive. That’s why many diets fail—people take it to the extreme, denying themselves things they crave, almost like addictions. Are you psychologically ready to overcome those cravings? Maybe the conversation should be about moderating those cravings so you can still enjoy them, but in smaller portions, savouring the moment and the pleasures you’ve enjoyed all your life, but in moderation.

Gleaton: What tends to be a turning point for people to start making those changes?

Jacobsen: It’s hard to generalize, but for me, it was losing my father. At that point, I was up to 370 pounds. I had zero moderation with food, and I couldn’t even see certain parts of my body, like my feet when I went to the bathroom. I knew my dad was always worried about my weight. Instead of using food as a coping mechanism, I used his concern as a strength. I knew I loved food—it’s a passion of mine—but I needed to re-explore my relationship with it.

For me, it was about health. It was also driven by my father’s passing and having an honest conversation with myself in my early thirties that I was no longer young. I carried around 300 pounds in my teens and twenties, and it wasn’t until I injured my back and never fully recovered that I realized I needed to make a change. After I lost the weight, the pain disappeared.

But it took a single life event to change my perspective, and even then, you still need drive, motivation, and determination. You must also forgive yourself for the little mistakes you’ll make, especially if you embark on a weight-loss journey.

Jacobsen: Yes, I’ve had two back injuries. Workers’ compensation covered them, and I got help with recovery. I was working at a horse farm, which was a big wake-up call.

Gleaton: It’s a big wake-up call. Once I lost the weight, the pain was reduced by 70%. But I also realized it takes work to strengthen your lower back muscles. I had to get an exercise ball and do strange exercises to strengthen my lower back. It’s one of those things that’s tricky—unlike building up your biceps, for example.

Let’s do some curls—it’s not like a chest press. It would help if you did pelvic thrusts to target those lower back muscles, for lack of a better term. It can feel weird at first. There are all these different exercises, and everyone finds something different to latch onto. It’s unique to the individual.

Jacobsen: When you go into restaurants in Oklahoma, how do you evaluate the restaurant itself? I’m thinking about how you’re greeted, the ambiance of the restaurant, and the entire experience, from looking at the menu to interactions like, “How are you today?” etc.

Gleaton: It depends on the type of restaurant. Is it fine dining? Fast food? Casual? I evaluate based on the genre. I expect that extra service layer if it’s fine dining with a strong reputation. Has the silverware changed between courses? What’s the menu like? What does the staff know about the food?

It’s less formal for casual dining, and I adjust my expectations accordingly. Lately, I’ve adopted a new approach when I visit restaurants. I’ll look at the menu but no longer order from it. Instead, I’ll ask the waiter or manager to bring me whatever they feel best represents the restaurant’s essence for a set amount of money. It doesn’t matter what the dish is—cook it how it’s meant to be cooked, and I’ll enjoy it.

By doing this, I’ve broken out of the box of sticking to the menu or my usual preferences and discovered new flavours and proteins I wouldn’t have tried before. That’s my process—it’s the “anti-menu” approach. I also enjoy tasting menus, where you get five to ten courses and can explore something new.

I greatly advocate experiencing restaurants through the five senses—taste, smell, sound, sight, and touch. Each bite you take has its sound; you might not realize it, but you can hear the texture. The texture, taste, appearance, and smell play into the sensory experience. I always notice the smell when I walk into a restaurant. Sometimes, it’s steak or smells fishy or smoky, which sets the tone. The first impression shapes your expectations for the meal.

Think about temperature—if a restaurant is too warm, instead of focusing on having a good time, you’ll subconsciously think, “This is too warm.” Or if it’s too loud, especially for people in the States (and I’m not sure if it’s the same in Canada), anxiety is at an all-time high. Crowds can trigger anxiety if you walk into a loud restaurant; your anxiety spikes, which dulls your senses. Even if the food is fantastic, you might be too focused on the discomfort to enjoy the experience fully.

Jacobsen: It’s a negative experience. But if you can recognize that, you can come up with a plan to overcome that anxiety. What about fast food restaurants? It will be a simpler evaluation, but what are you looking for?

Gleaton: What I’m looking for in a fast food restaurant is: did they put the burger together properly? Is it warm? Is the cheese melted? Is the chicken crispy? These are all things you can have expectations for, even with fast food.

The price point doesn’t matter. I can’t tell you how many times I’ve walked into McDonald’s over the years, and those famous fries—when they come out fresh from the fryer, they’re perfect. But the texture, flavour, and smell change if they’ve been sitting there for a while. The same goes for their burgers. I was at McDonald’s a couple of months ago, and the cheese wasn’t melted—it was a little cold, which impacted the experience. You can still expect a certain level of quality, even from fast food, to hit all those taste buds. Otherwise, you get the typical “oof, fast food” experience.

Jacobsen: When you’re hosting “Jared Gleaton Eats,” what do you keep in mind when choosing guest topics, and how do you project your voice and personality about things that matter to you?

Gleaton: My primary focus is food reviews on YouTube, which is what “Jared Gleato Eats” is about. I love to invite people to come with me. My focus is on the ambiance, the service, the food, and describing the experience to my audience. You can see the food, but if I say, “It’s wonderful” or “It’s great,” that doesn’t tell you anything. But I describe the initial notes of fatty beef, giving way to the middle notes of salt and pepper with beautiful end notes of garlic. In that case, you can imagine being right there with me, tasting the food and deciding if it’s something you’d want to spend your money on.

Jacobsen: What has been your favourite meal?

Gleaton: There have been so many, but I can tell you about my most memorable meal and my true introduction to gastronomy. It was molecular gastronomy with my sisters at Alinea in 2014. Alinea is known for creations like their green apple taffy balloon—they inflate the taffy with helium, and you eat the balloon, even the string! Another memorable dish was their stained glass made from raspberries. They bring out what looks like a strawberry, but it’s foie gras—there’s no fruit at all. They transform food in a way that tricks your mind into asking, “What is this?” It redefines everything.

What made it especially important was that it was an expensive meal, and my sister Mariah wanted to go. At first, I was against it—I wanted to go to Spiaggia or some other well-known Italian place in Chicago. But she convinced me, and it changed my life. Since then, it’s been an ongoing exploration into the unknown.

Jacobsen: So this exploration of the unknown is where food meets art.

Gleaton: Absolutely. Food meets art. Food meets life. Food meets change. It can catalyze so many wonderful things, yet food often gets a bad rap—especially regarding emotional eating. I’m an advocate for mindful eating. Instead of eating a whole tub of ice cream, take one bite, close your eyes, savour the flavour, and be content with just one or two bites. Food is life. Food is life.

Jacobsen: If you could pick any project to work on that conveys healthier living—something that encourages people to explore unknown territory, is reasonably priced, doesn’t take up too much time, and is still good for their health—what would that project be?

Gleaton: The project would encourage people to close their eyes and try something new whenever they visit a restaurant. It’s about exploration—getting outside your comfort zone and applying that strength to other areas of your life. Maybe there’s something you haven’t tried before but wanted to. Maybe there’s a book you didn’t think you’d enjoy because it wasn’t your usual genre, but you give it a chance. How wonderful if it all starts with something as simple as a restaurant?

Jacobsen: Jared, thank you for the opportunity and your time today.

Gleaton: I appreciate it. Thank you, Scott.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Daniel Frazier, Being a Dad and a General Manager

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/31

Daniel Frazier is the Director of Operations and General Manager at The Pharmacy Burger in Nashville. Starting as a host in 2014, he quickly climbed the ranks, moving to server and Lead Server within a year and transitioning to part-time management in 2016. By 2017, Frazier became Assistant General Manager and took on additional roles as Beverage Director and Bar Manager, deepening his expertise in the global beverage industry. Promoted to General Manager in 2021 and Director of Operations for all locations in 2022, Frazier focuses on creating an electric, welcoming atmosphere that resonates with staff and guests alike.

Frazier discussed the restaurant’s growth since its 2011 opening and its community-focused mission. Starting as a host in 2014, Frazier highlighted the shift from retail to restaurant life and the team’s camaraderie. He shared insights on serving families, maintaining a balanced beer garden environment, and managing customer expectations. As a father, he emphasized the importance of considering children’s needs and provided advice for families on a budget, recommending strategic menu choices and prioritizing quality over frequency of dining out. Frazier underscored valuing both money and time for dining experiences.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Daniel Frazier, the Director of Operations and General Manager of The Pharmacy Burger Parlor & Beer Garden in Nashville, Tennessee. I am Canadian, so I am a foreigner. What can you tell me about the importance of The Pharmacy Burger, especially as someone who started as a host in 2014?

Daniel Frazier: Yes, The Pharmacy has been open since December 2011, so we are approaching the completion of our 13th year. The restaurant opened as the country was coming out of the recession. At that time, there weren’t many restaurants opening or at the point where those processes were beginning to turn again. The opening was in East Nashville, a neighborhood that had faced significant challenges. The owner wanted to create a place that would be great for the community—where families from the neighborhood and surrounding areas could come to feel safe, enjoy themselves, have great food, and build a sense of community. I believe we have accomplished that over the years, creating a destination for out-of-town visitors representing the city and a beloved local spot for those who live nearby and for the wider community.

As you mentioned, I started hosting in March 2014. I began working at the door while playing in bands and trying to make a career out of music. My job at The Pharmacy was separate from my musical aspirations. Still, not long after I started working there, my focus on music stopped. However, I loved the people I worked with. I worked in retail for years at Kohl’s department store, which is common for many people. I wouldn’t recommend it. Transitioning to restaurant life was a significant change, especially moving from a large corporate environment to a smaller, more family- and coworker-oriented setting.

If I had worked in a smaller retail boutique, the experience might have been more pleasant. But I quickly learned that the people at The Pharmacy genuinely cared for each other. While I will only partially contrast my time at Kohl’s with my time at The Pharmacy, the restaurant had a unique energy. The coworkers enjoyed each other’s company, and there was a shared sense of purpose as we worked to serve our guests each day. It couldn’t have been better.

Most of us were in our twenties, so there was plenty of joking around alongside the work. There were also managers we preferred more than others. Some had a more authoritarian approach, and we made the best of that. It’s the same in any restaurant—I’ve worked in several, and it’s common. Sometimes, having a strict manager can even strengthen the bond among team members. It wasn’t pleasant to work under, so I’ve tried not to emulate that style. Still, a certain camaraderie developed when you had someone imposing strict oversight. So, while it wasn’t all negative, even if we didn’t enjoy someone making up health code regulations—such as insisting on wearing socks—it created some amusing moments. While it’s generally good to wear socks, it depends on the type of shoe, I suppose.

But there are many things where you think, “This is strange.” You end up with that. My early time there clicked with me, and I enjoyed this environment. I loved this atmosphere, which has stayed the same for almost 10 years, since or after 10 years. Now, I am a father.

Jacobsen: How has that changed your perspective on the service industry? I’m curious because you have many families at restaurants.

Frazier: You do. It has shaped my perspective. My daughter is going to be 2 years old, which has reoriented my thinking in the service industry. It has mostly stayed the same as what we do but has shifted my intentions. There’s often a feeling among servers that taking care of families with young children can be frustrating because kids can be difficult to handle, and there’s usually more cleanup involved. I always had compassion, but now it’s different.

I’ve heard of places where servers would request not to have children seated in their sections, though we would never honor that request. Some restaurants don’t accommodate high chairs in certain sections due to limited space so that sometimes happens naturally. But it has been about ensuring that families feel welcome, having food options that kids will enjoy, and ensuring they have a good time. We have a large outdoor beer garden space, which is not a playground, so we have to manage it. There can’t be running or excessive horsing around. However, kids can explore and play in little bushes and nooks.

Having a child myself, I now see how much a space that captures a child’s imagination can enhance the dining experience. It makes a big difference. Having food that kids are excited to eat is important, too. We’ve had times when we’ve gone out and ordered something we’ve had before, and she doesn’t want it for whatever reason. Especially with little kids, they can’t always express their desires. You do the best you can. But kids don’t usually turn down fries or similar items. Typically, burgers and hot dogs make them happy, so it feels good to provide that for them.

Being a dad has been amazing. People need to emphasize more how much fun it is. We often hear about the difficulties of parenting, and it is challenging. Still, it’s honestly the most fun I’ve ever had.

Jacobsen: When you serve beverages at a restaurant, not all of them are nonalcoholic. Is it ever a concern or a risk when you have alcoholic drinks in an environment that also caters to families and children?

Frazier: Yes, it is something we think about. We have a beer garden and serve local beverages, especially local beers we love. We also offer many imports, including German and Belgian beers. Because we’ve maintained a certain beer garden atmosphere, we don’t see overindulgence as some other places might. We’ve tried to keep that balanced vibe.

This is not where you come to get hammered, as they say. You’re here to enjoy a beverage—sometimes, people come in and drink. Still, it’s usually two beers on a sunny afternoon or having a beer with a burger and fries. For a long time, we didn’t even serve liquor, so it was much more difficult to overindulge on just beer, especially during the course of one meal, unless someone arrived already intoxicated. We have liquor now, as we’ve adapted and added cocktails. This required additional staff training to watch for signs of overindulgence.

People taking shots is rare here. If someone is doing that, they usually don’t have kids with them. If they do, it’s our staff’s responsibility to ensure there’s someone at the table who isn’t drinking and can drive. This is even more important when there are children present. While we do have a bar, we are primarily a beer garden. In Germany, beer gardens often have families and kids, creating a welcoming and upbeat environment.

If we get more rowdy people, it’s usually in the evening, after most kids go home for bedtime. At that point, you’ll find younger groups, bachelorette and bachelor parties, mingling in the garden, and things naturally work themselves out. We make sure not to over serve people, but we rarely cut someone off—maybe only once or twice a year.

Jacobsen: What is the character of a Nashville, Tennessee restaurant customer?

Frazier: That’s a great question. Nashville is a hub of distinct neighborhoods. A West Nashvillian and an East Nashvillian are similar now, though they might have been a few years ago. Back then, a West Nashvillian was typically older. At the same time, an East Nashvillian often moved to the neighborhood right after college. I was part of that wave over about five to seven years when many college graduates moved into East Nashville.

This trend has shifted slightly, with people moving to different neighborhoods. Many of us, myself included, have kids and have stayed in the neighborhood. It’s interesting to see how there was a mini-migration. I realize I need to answer your question directly, but it’s connected to how the consumer profile has evolved. Ten years ago, the average age of customers was younger—maybe by about seven years. The average age slowly increases as people settle in these neighborhoods. Those who were in their early twenties back then have aged along with us.

Some 28-, 29-, and 30-year-old professionals are moving in with and without families. That consumer is different from the 22-year-old who’s looking for a cheap burger and a beer. The 28-year-old professional, even if they don’t have a family, often has more expendable income and refined tastes. They have specific things they are looking for, so catering to them is important. For us, we’ve managed to stay at a lower price point because we want to offer high-quality service and ingredients while remaining accessible to both families on a budget and those looking for more. Yes, they’ll likely pay more than they would at fast food, but not significantly more if they’re not ordering alcohol.

You can come in, sit down, and receive good service at our location or downtown. We offer a better burger than fast food, with elevated service and specialty handmade drinks, without breaking the bank. Suppose you’re someone looking for something a bit more elevated. In that case, especially if you’re enjoying a beer, we have some of the best selections, along with fun and tasty cocktails. You can sit down, have a casual and quick meal, and still enjoy a great experience without a multi-course meal. That’s where our niche is.

Jacobsen: What would you advise dads to bring their families to a restaurant? What should they do to make it a good, non-chaotic experience that is enjoyable for both kids and parents?

Frazier: That’s a great question. It depends on the child’s age, but this advice is universal until the child is at least five years old. First, know where you’re going and research the food options to ensure your child will enjoy something, especially if it’s a new place. Also, know whether they will need to stay seated the entire time or if they can walk around before the food arrives. It’s always good if they can walk around and explore a bit to burn off some energy before sitting down for the meal.

If you’re dining solo, you might be stuck at the table, but if both parents are present, it’s great to let one parent walk around with the child while waiting for the food. This helps release energy and usually sets the stage for a successful meal. When sitting in a high chair, put the child in as late as possible, ideally when the food arrives. Every child is different, so if your child is happy sitting and waiting, you don’t need to worry. For us, we usually put her in the high chair with food, which helps a lot. If she’s placed in the chair too early, like 15 minutes before the food arrives, she gets restless and agitated, thinking, “I’m tired of sitting here.”

Her attention span is often gone once the food arrives. So beyond that, I suggest bringing a toy or a book to keep them entertained if there’s something small. If you know there will be a wait to be seated or for the food, it might feel silly, but bring a snack. Check the restaurant’s rules, but having a small pouch or some gummies can be helpful. Kids can go from happy to cranky very quickly when they’re a little hungry, especially if the wait is 20 minutes when you expected 10.

In your bag with diapers or essentials, have a snack, a book, or a few small items. If the restaurant provides activities like coloring pages, that’s great, but only some kids are interested. So, I always suggest being prepared. Also, go with the flow. If your child wants to walk around and there’s no reason they can’t, walk with them and explore together. They’ll often be ready to sit and eat when the food arrives. That’s how we’ve succeeded in public spaces for the most part.

Another tip is not to stress too much if your child is loud. The biggest thing I’ve found is that parents often feel they’re making others uncomfortable when their child cries or makes noise. But people usually don’t care as much as you think. It bothers you more than bothers them, so try not to worry too much. As long as you’re attentive and handling the situation warmly, it can put others at ease. If people see you calmly managing it, they’ll feel reassured that everything is fine. Of course, if your child is in genuine distress, take care of it. But, overall, not worrying excessively about noise can help.

Kids are kids. They express their emotions to the fullest—especially two-year-olds. That’s just what they do.

Jacobsen: Last question. Many families are facing tighter budgets due to inflation. How should they strategize about what to pick on the menu?

Frazier: That’s a great question. Are you asking about our menu specifically or menus in general?

Jacobsen: Both, from the perspective of a parent, a dad, and someone who has worked their way up to general manager and has seen these challenges.

Frazier: Yes. Suppose you’re on a budget but still want to enjoy a nice meal. In that case, I’d recommend skipping alcoholic or fancy nonalcoholic beverages. These add significant costs to your bill. While we love it when people come and celebrate with drinks, cutting that out is an easy way to save if your budget is tight.

Secondly, consider ordering dishes that can provide leftovers for another meal. For example, if you’re trying to stretch your budget, order something to make a great meal the next day. Only pick items that will reheat well if you have a strong preference. For instance, when choosing between a quesadilla and a chimichanga at a Mexican restaurant, the quesadilla might hold up better for a next-day meal. Wrap it up and enjoy it later.

Take it home, and there’s lunch for the next day. $12 for two meals is okay compared to $10 for one meal, even if it’s cheaper sometimes. However, $10 for one meal is more expensive in the long run. So, those are small strategies to keep in mind.

Beyond that, make it make sense and make it count. If you’re going to dine out, it’s better to wait and splurge on a nicer experience rather than eating out two or three times and feeling unsatisfied. I’d rather have one great meal where I order everything I want, take my time, and truly enjoy it, rather than going out multiple times and penny-pinching, which can leave you with a sense of regret or feeling like you didn’t budget well.

Additionally, stick to brands and places you trust and research before trying new spots. When your budget is tight, having a bad experience is frustrating. As much as possible, check reviews or ask for recommendations. Go to places that have treated you well or have a reputation for good service and quality. As a dad, I value finances, but I also value my time. I don’t want to go somewhere that wastes my time—the waiting time or the overall experience. If the time spent at a restaurant isn’t worth it, even with no wait, it’s best to avoid that place.

As a restaurant manager, I aim to make customers feel their money is well-spent. But more than that, I want them to feel their time was valued. Dining out takes longer than eating at home—you must travel, sometimes wait to be seated, and then wait for the food. While you’re not cooking at home, everything at home is already there and more organized. So, make sure the time you spend at a restaurant is worthwhile. If a place doesn’t respect your time, it’s better not to give them your business.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Daniel, thank you so much for your time today and for sharing your insights, which come from years of experience working in restaurants from the ground up.

Frazier: It does. It does.

Jacobsen: We’ll be in touch. 

Frazier: That sounds great. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Graham Powell & Dr. Dave Thomas on Mobile Medicine

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/30

Graham Powell and Dr. Dave Thomas discuss their project to develop mobile CT scanners. Dr. Thomas, who has worked on this idea for 17 years, highlighted that 25% of trauma deaths are preventable, emphasizing the importance of rapid imaging. While CT scanners exist, current solutions aren’t designed for quick, mobile use. Powell mentioned efforts to secure funding, including support from a Dubai-based sheikh. Dr. Thomas discussed the benefits of CT scanners over other imaging methods, noting their speed and effectiveness. The team aims to create a practical, deployable system that could save lives in various emergency scenarios.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Graham Powell and Dr. Dave Thomas to discuss ECUs, CT scanners, and a proposal for making them mobile. So, what was the initial inspiration for the idea, Graham? 

Graham Powell: That came from Dave. Dave has been working on this for about 17 years. He led an emergency department for many years, witnessing countless cases that could have benefited from quicker imaging. As we’ve discussed before, about 25% of trauma-related deaths are considered preventable, making this an area of significant impact. The fact that Dr. Fassbender pioneered the concept of a CT scanner in an ambulance in Germany around 2008 shows that the technology has been available for some time. However, widespread adoption could have been faster, and Dave felt a strong need to address this gap.

Now, 17 years later, Dave has amassed a large amount of data and continues working to bring this idea to reality. We’ve been collaborating on this for about nine months. I’ve known Dave for over 40 years—we met on my 21st birthday—and we’ve shared many experiences.

I’ve followed his journey from his early days as a medical student to becoming a doctor through immigration to Australia and developing a hospital in Mackay. Now that he’s semi-retired, he has more time to focus on advancing this idea for change.

Jacobsen: Are there notable cases where this technology could have made a difference, like Princess Diana’s accident?

Powell: Dave has reviewed the medical reports from that accident and was shocked at how long it took to get her to the hospital. She sat in the car for about 20 minutes while people took photos and talked to her. The medical response was basic and didn’t identify her left lung as the source of significant bleeding, which led to her losing too much blood. This type of preventable delay falls within the 25% of trauma cases we discussed.

In this context, we’re referring to physical trauma rather than psychological trauma. Another example is King Faisal of Saudi Arabia, who was shot and not treated quickly enough, resulting in excessive blood loss and death.

These are just some of the cases we’ve looked at. Still, the same principle likely applies to about 25% of gunshot and severe trauma incidents. Unfortunately, in North America, we frequently hear about school shootings and other violent events. While changing laws can be complex and slow, improving how emergency services respond to trauma could help save lives.

Jacobsen: So, this technology—most people think of an emergency involving an ambulance. You’re imagining a vehicle on a road, ground transport. What about in the air? What about at sea? Could this transportable CT scanner be used in those contexts as well?

Powell: Yes. Currently, air ambulances primarily use helicopters almost exclusively. However, drone taxis are expected to debut next year in Dubai, indicating that technology is advancing rapidly. 

The advantage is that while helicopters can travel long distances, drones only need to fly short distances. Hence, the battery impact is less significant. The main concerns are weight and size. We’re in an era dominated by artificial intelligence, so the drone taxis being promoted for next year in Dubai will be autonomous. You can summon them, and the AI will locate you and dispatch a drone to pick you up. This means there wouldn’t need to be pilots navigating or separate medical experts interpreting the telemetry.

We are close to using drone technology in this way, and public perception will soon shift from thinking of accidents as requiring a road ambulance to envisioning flying vehicles coming to pick people up. One advantage of a traditional ambulance is that it has more space for less critical cases and can accommodate four or more people. I don’t know how close we are to that capacity with a drone. However, helicopters will still be available for larger groups. So, the public perception of emergency care and recovery is set to change soon.

Especially in larger countries, we have moved from doctors communicating over a radio system across Australia to more advanced technology. The idea of quickly picking people up and taking them to the hospital is becoming more common. For example, motorized ambulances may remain standard in Britain due to the country’s smaller size. If we put a CT scanner in an ambulance, it would be more traditional.

Given the short distances, as long as we have the technology to communicate and share information with experts, the slight delay of 10 to 15 minutes to get to a hospital would be less significant. This would still be feasible even with current restrictions in Britain.

Jacobsen: Yes, but one barrier to any new technology is finance. How do you envision getting the capital to build a prototype and move this product from an idea to an actual product?

Powell: I have friends with foundations who are interested in the concept. I’m going to be talking to them next week about that. We have a solid business plan that aligns with what people seek, and we can discuss that. I also have a sheikh based in Dubai coming to London next Monday. He wants my assistance in starting a charity, a peace movement that has been active for quite some time.

Since I am in charge of defining the parameters for creating the charity, including our intentions and how it will be managed, I am confident that I can shape it in a way that supports the development of this technology. It doesn’t conflict with a peace movement; it would be much more impactful for a peace movement to have tools to save lives in non-peaceful environments. He’s a powerful, religious leader who meets with figures like the Pope and other world leaders.

You might think that our project is all about formalities and exchanging gifts. Still, our project would offer a practical way to improve real-world situations. I don’t expect any recognition or awards for this. My main interest lies in saving lives.

I’m hoping he will understand my perspective when I speak to him in London next week. You have military cases—the Diana case and the Faisal case—numerous examples of notable figures and service members who could have been saved with telemedicine.

The sheikh’s secretary is from Lebanon. His secretary recently returned to Lebanon, and he’s been in contact with me. You can imagine how the current situation there is affecting him emotionally. This leader’s influence extends to regions like Syria, Lebanon, Israel, and Jordan. Given the current political climate, these areas are highly relevant to our discussion. They must know countless individuals—not just figures like King Faisal or Princess Diana—who have died due to trauma.

Jacobsen: Dr. Dave, as a medical expert, can you explain the advantages of this technology over current solutions?

Dr. Thomas: Basically, it saves lives. If you had a CT scanner on every street corner, you could save up to 10 million lives annually. The leading cause of death under 55 is trauma—being hit by a vehicle or injuries sustained in combat. Trauma, while not common in everyday thought, is catastrophic when it occurs and can be fatal.

When we talk about older populations, strokes and heart attacks become the leading causes of death. These are also time-sensitive conditions that require a CT scanner for quick diagnosis and treatment, such as thrombolysis for strokes. The sooner a patient can get scanned, the better their chances of survival.

CT scanners, however, are not pocket-sized, if you get my drift. But advancements in technology make it possible. While current mobile scanners exist, they are designed for something other than the rapid, in-and-out use we envision. We need a solution to scan and transport the patient to the hospital quickly.

Because after the scan, you will most likely have to take them to a hospital. In some cases, you won’t have to. For example, my friend had severe chest pain and was taken to the hospital. When they scanned him and diagnosed sarcoidosis, they sent him straight home.

Jacobsen: What about cost feasibility? Why choose a CT scanner over other types of scans?

Dr. Thomas: Well, when you say “other,” MRI scans are too slow to be of practical use in emergencies. PET scans are primarily for cancer diagnostics, and while ultrasound is good, it doesn’t match a CT scanner’s image quality or speed. You can get a comprehensive, full-body image with a CT scan very quickly. 

Regarding Princess Diana, here there are some interesting details. She was bleeding into her lung, which would have been an immediate concern because it was life-threatening. But she also had a fractured humerus.

So what? People might think, “I don’t care; it’s just a broken arm.” But if that arm is moved while fractured, it can sever the radial nerve. Then, when Princess Diana woke up, she could have had a paralyzed arm—something that was preventable. Trauma is complex, and it’s crucial to consider multiple injuries.

I’ve seen that happen before. It happened to a friend of mine. The focus was on his chest, and they missed his arm injury, resulting in a paralyzed arm. It would help if you addressed both injuries. If you do, the patient can go home with a healthy arm and chest.

Jacobsen: What are your short sales pitches for this idea, Dave and Graham?

Dr. Thomas: Today’s world is entering an era where this kind of technology should become the norm. It’s time to move forward and create something that can save more lives. Ethically, it’s the right thing to do.

Powell: Mine is straightforward: time-dependent conditions need a CT scan, which is lifesaving, and complex cases require global expertise for better outcomes. That’s the main takeaway.

Jacobsen: Dave, Graham, thank you for your time today. I appreciate it.

Powell: Thanks, Scott.

Dr. Thomas: Cheers, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Stephen Paul, Sunday Alternative in Reading, United Kingdom

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/20

Stephen Paul is a British community organizer and leader of The Sunday Alternative, a secular congregation in Reading, UK. The Sunday Alternative, formerly known as Sunday Assembly Reading, is part of an international movement that celebrates life through community gatherings featuring music, talks, and social activities. Under Stephen’s leadership, the group emphasizes inclusivity and community engagement, offering events like coffee mornings, games nights, and pub quizzes. Stephen’s efforts have fostered a welcoming environment for individuals seeking a sense of community without religious affiliation. 

Paul shared insights on the development and challenges of secular communities like his. He emphasized the shift from New Atheism’s confrontational phase to fostering humanism through inclusive, activity-based gatherings. Unlike religious groups with established support and venues, secular assemblies face unique challenges in sustainability and acceptance, with volunteers and small-scale participation key to maintaining intimacy. While American assemblies often focus on atheism and rationality due to a more religious culture, Paul’s Reading community centers on shared values, philosophy, and creating spaces for diverse backgrounds. The focus remains on meaningful human connection and community well-being.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are with Stephen Paul of the Sunday Alternative in Reading, United Kingdom. I’m always delighted to speak with anyone who lives in a place named after something related to literature, books, or reading, so it’s great to have you here.

Stephen Paul: It’s pronounced “Redding,” not “Reading.” I apologize for the confusion. Before the Internet, it was quite an issue as a place name because if you looked up “Reading,” you often found results for “Redding.” It was a real challenge.

Jacobsen: Interesting. So, what is your background in terms of Sunday Assembly? Did you have a philosophical background? How did you get involved in this philosophical and community-based movement?

Paul: It started when I was about 17 or 18, during my O-level history classes on the Enlightenment. Those were my first steps into exploring atheism. I didn’t come from a religious background. We were nominally Church of England, but it was somewhat superficial—we never attended church. It has always interested me as I have gone through life. Then, I became quite engaged with the emergence of the New Atheist movement led by figures like Richard Dawkins and Christopher Hitchens.

It was all interesting and exciting initially, but I found the movement increasingly negative over time. I realized I was spending too much time on the Internet, arguing with people and feeling bad about myself and others. Around that time, I heard about the Sunday Assembly in London. It made me think there was a better way to promote humanism—through kindness rather than confrontation.

The Sunday Assembly loosely resembled a Church of England service, but with hymns replaced by 1980s pop songs and sermons swapped for TED-style talks, community activities, and shared experiences over tea and cake. It felt like a more positive approach. 

 I didn’t start the Reading group, but I was present at the very first meeting.

Tom, one of the founders of the Reading Assembly, was a Christian who found he didn’t fit in with traditional churches. Even though he loved Jesus, he noticed that many churches leaned toward homophobia, misogyny, or classism. He wanted a place where values could be shared without aligning with beliefs. I, on the other hand, was moving from the opposite direction.

It was a nice meeting point where you could share values without prominently displaying your belief system. 

Jacobsen: How did this compare to the religious beliefs in the communities where you grew up and the individualist movement of the New Atheists in the 2000s and 2010s? From what I observed, it became less about asking questions like “Why are we here?” and more about “How are you?” It fostered a more personal, community-oriented atmosphere. Is that what you were getting at?

Paul: Yes, it is. I had a good friend at the time, and we became close through the New Atheist movement. But I noticed he was slowly becoming more and more paranoid about Muslims taking over Reading, even though he didn’t know any. His social media became increasingly right-wing. There wasn’t any use in this. I always believed in using philosophy and science to establish basic truths, but beyond that, it only achieves a little.

So, I’ll go slightly sideways on this. I’ve been involved in veganism for 33 years. There was a guy named Lawrence I used to know well who sat on the Vegan Society committee and was a druid.

He had a big robe and a big beard and was initially quite intimidating to meet, with a strong smell. Anytime you asked him a question about what the Vegan Society should be doing, he would say, “I’m going to speak to the goddess.” This goddess—I can’t remember which one—lived on a Welsh mountain, so he would spend the night on the mountain and come back down.

His solutions and suggestions were good—they were kind and thoughtful. What he meant by “I’m going to speak to the goddess” was that he needed time alone to think. I felt we might have been judging people based on a superficial reading of their religion, assuming they were doing the things Richard Dawkins and Christopher Hitchens criticized in terms of their thought processes.

But I started to doubt whether that was the case. It seemed more valuable to be gentle with people and not push them on the specifics of their belief systems. When we push anyone hard on their beliefs, they often reach a breaking point. As I implied, the other significant side of me is my veganism. I’ve met many nice humanists, but when you push them on the topic of animal rights, they start using the same irrational arguments they would use against religious people.

We’re all susceptible to irrational, emotional ways of arguing. Organizations like the Sunday Assembly focus on something different. They create a welcoming environment that shares values, not necessarily belief systems.

Jacobsen: Aside from the general overview you provided earlier, what does a regular service look like for you on a Sunday?

Paul: Sunday Assembly was our parent organization. However, I changed the name to Sunday Alternative because “Sunday” and “Assembly” sounded too Christian. I felt we were getting confused with the “enemy,” so to speak. We came up with a Sunday Alternative. We also moved away from their standard format: two songs, an inspirational speaker, some announcements, and two more songs followed by tea and cake.

It worked well for the founders, Sanderson Jones and Pippa Evans because they had big personalities. One was a successful improviser, and the other was a stand-up comedian. They had the charisma to match, initially attracting a congregation of 300 to 400 people to an assembly. However, a turnout of 50 would be significant in Reading, which is much smaller. We usually range between 25 and 35 on a normal day, so we’ve shifted from being a show to more of a community gathering.

So, we don’t have a speaker. We would have an activity. An example of a typical Reading Sunday Alternative assembly would look like this: You gather for tea and cakes for half an hour. Arrive early if you don’t know anyone—that’s the best way to make friends. At 11 o’clock, everyone is brought into the main area, and a simple game is played.

The types of games are similar to those you might do at an improv lesson. It might be a clapping game or a name game designed to make people feel relaxed in the space. Then, we sing two songs, usually 1970s, 1980s, or 1990s rock and pop. After that, we have the main activity.

A nice example we did recently involved a congregation member, a woman named Reka, a language professor. She split us into smaller groups at individual tables and taught us a simple card game from a set of instructions. We practiced the game and then put the sheets away. She informed us that we could no longer talk about the game but still had to play it.

We played one round, and then people moved to different tables based on whether they were winners or losers. We played the game again but should have realized that each table had slightly different rules. For some people, the ace was high; for others, it was low. So, conflicts arose when playing the game—one person would pick up the cards as the winner, while another would push back, believing they were the rightful winner. Since we couldn’t speak, confusion ensued.

Eventually, it was revealed what the game was about: understanding our personality types and our communication limitations. It demonstrated how we jump to conclusions. We would have noticed the rule discrepancies if we had all been as observant as we believed we were—being humanists and skeptics. However, most people assumed they were correct. Some people didn’t mind losing to what they perceived as cheating, while others did. So, you leave that assembly with greater insight into your nature and others.

We often conduct these types of activities. We also focus on topics like neurodiversity and mental health because they are relatable and impactful for many. Talking about those subjects makes sense, unlike discussing satellites, which might be interesting but not something most people have at home.

We aim to keep our themes centred on people, psychology, and philosophy rather than hard sciences like physics or chemistry.

Jacobsen: Does anything ever turn into a movie night where you watch something like Monty Python or other culturally relevant films that everyone might be familiar with, even if they haven’t seen?

Paul: That’s a tricky one because we have many members who are immigrants with different cultural references.

So, we must be careful with that sort of thing. I mean, Monty Python is quite niche. We have people who come along and are English speakers, but they have different cultural backgrounds. For example, I have a good Austrian friend who’s been here for 20 years, and he needs to learn who The Beatles, Queen, or David Bowie are.

Even though he’s been here forever, we must be mindful that if we base an assembly around too many local cultural references—it just doesn’t work. Yes, our band includes on two Hungarians, a Romanian, and a woman from an Iranian background, even though she was born in Britain. It’s not just a group of standard white guys with rock songs. It’s challenging to create a welcoming space for everyone when they come from different backgrounds.

One thing you quickly notice is that someone from an ex-Muslim tradition might see the assembly differently than someone from an ex-Christian background. This is challenging to navigate because we need to learn more about each other’s cultures to get everything right.

Jacobsen: It sounds like a challenge. Are the leaders or organizers usually the same, or is there a rotation of people?

Paul: Initially, we used to hold elections and put the process out there. But, on the whole, people didn’t care. So, it’s generally a group of people willing to put in the effort to make things happen and who end up being the leaders. We abandoned the elections because there wasn’t enough interest. No real power is involved, and no money is moving around.

Yes, an assembly can be thought of as a well-organized party. You go to a friend’s house, and they’ve planned the gathering details. So, trust comes from the idea that if you can keep it going, why not continue?

We involve as many faces as possible. Our last assembly was a 10th anniversary, and at least half the room got up to share their reflections on what the assembly meant to them. The leadership feels more like a management role than a traditional priest or pastor role.

Jacobsen: What are the main challenges of maintaining a community there? And since it’s such a young organizational setup, what insights do you have about the sustainability of these communities?

Paul: Yes, Sunday Assembly is a large organization that grew quickly. It was getting much press as the “atheist church.” Still, the lack of an economic model ultimately undermined it. It was challenging to figure out what that model should be, especially in the UK. In America, there are quite a few assemblies, and people are used to a culture where if someone asks for a $20 donation, they’ll put it in the collection tin.

In England, that doesn’t happen. And if you ask Scandinavians for donations, they’ll ask, “Why? Why would you do that?” because they expect the state to cover such expenses through higher taxes. So, sustainability was challenging. Some assemblies started to fall apart after a few years.

It fractured into different organizations that share the same terminology, but there’s no overarching control anymore. My solution to sustainability was different: while the London Assembly gives away free cakes and biscuits, we charge for ours. We make nice cakes, serve good coffee, and don’t make a big deal about asking for money.

We found that the less we asked, the more people gave, which is counterintuitive. For sustainability, we only manage because the rental space we use is inexpensive—£10 an hour. Yes, keeping it small helps.

One of the reasons I don’t bring in speakers is because some of them charge fees. If a speaker wants, say, £100 to show up, that’s an issue. By keeping our activities within our community, we maintain lower costs and make the events more meaningful. 

Jacobsen: Another challenge is that religious groups often receive government subsidies, tax exemptions, and access to land and buildings. In contrast, secular groups don’t receive the same level of support, if any. Should there be a status for organizations like Sunday Assembly or the Oasis Network to help them achieve sustainability on more stable ground? From a Reading perspective, what are the main challenges?

Paul: The main issue is finding venues. Churches dominate most shared spaces and are difficult to secure. Churches have buildings specifically designed to create the right atmosphere for the community. At the same time, secular groups are left scrambling for space. The London Assembly, for example, currently uses a comedy club. It works, but it’s a different experience from walking into a church—it creates a different vibe.

It would make a huge difference if we had the same support or a history of purpose-built buildings. We aren’t seen in the same light as religious groups. Religious organizations automatically receive a certain reverence from councils or other bodies. At the same time, we’re recognized only as a community group, which could be anything–like a knitting group?

That’s how we would be seen by the council—not as a legitimate alternative to a religious setting. That said, I am interviewed locally by the BBC as a representative of the non-religious community. When I speak with priests, they usually support what we do, as we often discuss things like community retention and creating a welcoming environment.

Most church leaders know they’re doing the same thing we do. But when you speak to their congregation, you often hear, “Why do you do that? What’s the point? Jesus or God isn’t in the room with you.”

When I’ve spoken to priests, they often say, “Ah, we do the same thing.” But unless someone runs one of these organizations, I don’t think people realize we’re doing the same work—creating a community space. What’s important is the mental health benefits people gain from being together and sharing experiences.

But, as you mentioned, it’s not recognized in the same way as religious groups.

Jacobsen: How big is the community now?

Paul: Well, we mainly run through Meetup, and there are about 1,400 people on there, but not all of them show up. As I mentioned, there are usually around 35 people. I don’t actively seek more attendees because, in the past, when we reached around 50 people, the room became overcrowded.

People ended up sitting on guitar amplifiers and each other’s laps. When we moved to a larger venue, the intimacy was lost. The people at the back had a different connection than those at the front. We’re not doing the big church thing—there are no flashy lights or big productions. It’s meant to be on a human level. We can’t push it beyond 35 people and maintain a meaningful connection without becoming a show. I never wanted it to be a show.

Jacobsen: Do people generally come from far away, or are they mostly from the local community?

Paul: People come from local towns. Yes, the range is about 10 miles. The Sunday Alternative has its main assembly once a month, which is my focal point—that’s where the emotional connection happens. We also have coffee mornings that attract similar numbers, around 35 people. These tend to be newcomers to the town looking to meet others.

There’s also a book group connected to the assembly, a music appreciation group, pub quiz nights, and a highly sensitive person café. Some people participate in everything, while others focus on one specific activity.

You have to understand that attending a Sunday assembly can be intimidating for introverted people. Singing and playing games on a Sunday morning isn’t everyone’s idea of fun, so one activity alone can’t hold the community together. It needs variety. Some people want more challenges, while others prefer something less demanding. The assembly is more than just the main event; it’s about creating a broader community where everyone can find their place. I hope that answers your question, though I might have strayed slightly.

Jacobsen: It does. Where do you see this developing in the short term for the rest of the 2020s? Will it continue meeting the needs of different communities, such as introverts, extroverts, or those without faith or a mild naturalistic belief?

Paul: On the whole, we don’t get many hardcore atheists because they often don’t want to engage with anything that resembles a church setting. I find it sad that religion has captured all the community-oriented words, like assemblies and community, making it hard to market ourselves to committed atheists. My friend Tom was an exception. He was a Christian who came along and stayed until he moved out of town. We do get Christians who attend out of curiosity. But when they see Jesus isn’t present, they often say, “This is nice, but there are better places to be on a Sunday morning.”

We do attract many ex-Christians—many. We also get a fair number of people who identify as “spiritual,” though I’m never quite sure what they mean by that. They use the term because they’re unsure where they stand.

I don’t plan to market the assembly to grow beyond its current size. Expanding further wouldn’t be sustainable. COVID hit all the assemblies hard, and many didn’t survive. We came close to it. We still need more volunteers. Sometimes, I feel we keep the momentum up until something changes. If you look back 10 years ago, atheism and secularization were big topics, at least in America and to some extent here.

It’s not a big topic anymore, so we generate less press. That could be a good thing. It was a victory in many ways because what needed to be normalized became so. Yes, atheism, agnosticism, and related ideas became part of common knowledge and conversation—the biggest victory. That’s less the case in America when I speak to my colleagues there.

They focus more on atheism within their assemblies and campaign more on rationality. There’s more at stake there compared to the UK, where the situation is different. The UK is generally more secular, with fewer people attending church regularly. Yes, the push is stronger in America because it’s a more religious population, and there’s more to push against. They also seem to have a bigger presence from the LGBTQ+ community for similar reasons.

In the UK, most people aren’t attending church anyway, so it’s quite a different environment. When I explained what the assembly does, some people ask what’s the difference from jointing, say, a sewing or running club. But the issue with those is that you must be interested in sewing or running The assembly isn’t tied to any specific activity. It’s a space that can be anything, which is what community should be—it shouldn’t be tied to one activity–being in a room with people who do different things creates a diverse community.

That’s what we try to create. I don’t see us growing much bigger, and I don’t want it to grow. Could it be too much work? Yes. The more people you involve, the more potential issues arise. For example, in Sunday Assembly America, an incident involving inappropriate behaviour caused significant damage to their community. I’m always cautious of that kind of thing. Large organizations can turn into power struggles.

Jacobsen: And big personalities can complicate things.

Paul: Yes, exactly. 

Jacobsen: Not all the time, but there have been noteworthy cases. There’s always a place for a gentle, continuous renewal of critique and skepticism, especially when surveys show beliefs in supernatural or conspiratorial ideas. However, when movements overreach for too long, people start looking for alternatives like Sunday Assembly or the Oasis Network. That’s why they were formed in the first place, as you said. There’s a time and place for these things: the 2.0 phase from the 2000s and 2010s. Things have changed. This was lovely.

Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Paul: Thanks for reaching out.

Jacobsen: Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Philip Odonkor on Smart Cities & Informatics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/27

Dr. Philip Odonkor is an Assistant Professor at Stevens Institute of Technology’s Charles V. Schaefer, Jr. School of Engineering and Science, leading the Design Informatics Lab. He earned his PhD and MS in Mechanical Engineering from the University at Buffalo, SUNY. Dr. Odonkor’s research encompasses urban informatics, design optimization, cyber-physical systems, and sustainability. He received the prestigious NSF CAREER award in 2024 for advancing energy equity in urban areas. A co-founder of Grid Discovery, he is an active member of IEEE, ASME, and ACM. His work has been featured in Time Magazine and on the TEDx stage.

Odonkor discussed the intersection of informatics, smart cities, and sustainability. He emphasized that cities are complex socio-technical systems with inherent inefficiencies, particularly in energy use due to historically piecemeal infrastructure development. Odonkor detailed how data science and machine learning, especially reinforcement learning, can optimize energy consumption and improve urban living. He highlighted challenges like balancing privacy with data collection and integrating cultural values into algorithmic models. Odonkor noted varying global privacy attitudes and projected rapid electric and autonomous transportation advancements by 2025. He stressed the importance of long-term, adaptive urban planning.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dr. Philip Odonkor, and we’ll discuss informatics, smart cities, and sustainability—a range of topics he specializes in. Let’s begin with the basics. What is the link between informatics and sustainability in cities?

Dr. Philip Odonkor: That’s an insightful question. Cities are inherently complex environments where people interact daily. While we typically notice the visible aspects of cities—residents, buildings, and transportation systems—examining cities closely reveals them as intricate socio-technical systems.

This viewpoint is central to my work. Complex systems often come with many inefficiencies. In most cities, you can observe inefficiencies in resource management, public services, and energy use. Cities have evolved over many decades, often adding infrastructure piecemeal to meet growing demands, leading to various inefficiencies.

As cities expand, energy systems are retrofitted to support the increased load, which can result in unsustainable practices and higher emissions. This is where informatics and data science—my focus areas—play a vital role. We can better understand how cities function and identify ways to improve efficiency using data. For instance, I analyze how buildings use electricity and seek methods to optimize energy use, ensuring that each unit of electricity contributes more effectively than it currently does. We can enhance sustainability and other critical urban metrics by addressing these inefficiencies.

Jacobsen: How do democratic systems impact long-term city planning? Democratic societies often operate within election cycles, limiting the ability to plan long-term projects. The focus on election terms can restrict the scope of planning, leading to infrastructure projects that may be segmented or delayed, resulting in inefficiencies as they progress through different political agendas. How do you consider this when redesigning energy systems and infrastructure?

Odonkor: I adopt a long-term perspective when seeking solutions in my work. Rather than focusing solely on short-term outcomes, I consider what we want cities to look like in 20 or 30 years. With this vision as a target, I work backward to determine the steps needed to bridge the gap between current systems and the desired future state. This approach helps guide decision-making and prioritize improvements. Although the process is complex and gradual, short-term strategies are integrated into this larger vision to make incremental progress toward a sustainable and efficient urban future.

There are two different scopes you can look at this from. I approach it from a long-term perspective, which helps smooth out some of the issues that might be apparent when looking at it from a short-term view. 

Jacobsen: We live in an era of big data and systems that can process vast amounts of information. It would be beneficial to understand how to make sense of it all. Additionally, smart people build algorithms that can analyze and interpret this data. How do you gather data about a society or a city, and how do you make it understandable so you can use it effectively?

Odonkor: Those are great questions. How do I gather the data? Looking around your home or city, you’ll notice many devices capturing various metrics. For instance, some cameras, such as ring doorbells or surveillance cameras, record video. Across cities, we have sensors that capture data like temperature and noise, providing insights into city functions at any given time. This collection of sensors is part of the Internet of Things (IoT). IoT sensors are generally small, low-power devices that capture real-time data.

In recent years, there has been a significant increase in the number of these devices, making data collection much easier than before. However, the main challenge lies in handling this data. Just having data does not automatically lead to solutions. It often requires extracting insights from the data or combining multiple datasets to derive valuable information. This is where my research comes in—understanding what types of data to combine, when, and on what time scale to draw meaningful insights.

One way I approach this is through machine learning and artificial intelligence. I use machine learning extensively in my work, particularly a method known as reinforcement learning. Reinforcement learning allows us to program an algorithm to analyze data and understand the decision-making processes that generated it. For example, we have data about a home. In that case, the algorithm tries to determine what control actions led to certain patterns of electricity use.

Programming these algorithms aims to learn how a home uses energy. Once we achieve that, we can modify the algorithm to experiment with different actions and identify which changes could improve energy consumption within the home.

That way, I can start automating functions within your home so that it behaves as you would control it, but more efficiently. I understand what you prefer and don’t, and I can adjust things so everything appears normal. However, behind the scenes, processes are happening more efficiently.

Jacobsen: How do the niches within cities factor into this? For example, take Vancouver, which is near where I live. It has pockets of different subcultures, activities, and institutions, like universities scattered throughout the city. Do machine learning and AI algorithms naturally consider those variations part of their process?

Odonkor: No, not naturally. You can think of machine learning as an open canvas—you must tell it what to focus on, prioritize, and its objectives. Some machine-learning versions can attempt to figure things out independently. Still, in this domain, we guide the algorithms throughout the process.

It’s interesting that you bring this up because part of my work involves tuning algorithms to consider aspects beyond energy efficiency. For example, we design algorithms that balance efficiency while considering energy equity issues. Suppose we optimize energy usage in one area. Can the algorithm assess the demographics and decide where to prioritize energy distribution to balance overall usage? We also overlay this approach with considerations for access to renewable energy resources.

You can focus these algorithms on different topics. One of our key goals is to get these algorithms to incorporate energy equity issues, not just efficiency. If we only focus on efficiency, we create environments that might be efficient but not necessarily pleasant or livable. People want to live in spaces that are efficient, enjoyable, and suitable for their needs.

Jacobsen: Different cultures and subcultures value certain aspects differently, including the acceptability of inefficiency or the aesthetic and feel of a space. That can vary by country, state, or even county. When looking at inefficiencies, do you consider them as positive utilities related to local values? It’s not about inefficiency being inherently negative but understanding the direction and context of those values. Is there a way to fine-tune machine learning to account for these differences?

Odonkor: That’s an intriguing question, and while we haven’t fully implemented this yet, it’s a significant point. Different cultures indeed have varied perspectives on what constitutes inefficiency. For example, in the Western world, power outages are viewed as wholly negative, and we strive to minimize them. However, in developing countries, people may have adapted to power outages as part of daily life. While they may be inconvenient, they aren’t viewed as catastrophic in the same way that they are here.

Instead of telling the machine learning algorithm that minimizing power outages should be the primary objective, we could program it more flexibly. Power outages may be tolerable under certain circumstances, or the algorithm can shift power distribution to account for variables like weaker infrastructure.

You allow the machine learning algorithm to tolerate inefficiencies if they result in a collective benefit. These tweaks seem important, especially considering aspects like energy equity. This flexibility across societies and cities could be advantageous if properly implemented. 

We focus on maintaining optimal conditions in most research. However, as you mentioned, there can be utility in so-called inefficiencies, and exploring how machine learning algorithms can leverage these for the greater good is something we are investigating.

Jacobsen: What do people across different cultures typically value when it comes to their vision of a smart city? Clean air, clean water, green spaces—what are the primary and secondary considerations?

Odonkor: That’s an excellent question, and part of the challenge is that there needs to be a universally accepted definition of a smart city. A smart city can mean different things to different people, influenced by what they’ve heard or experienced. In fact, when I teach a class on smart cities, many of my students start out needing to learn what the term truly encompasses.

One recurring theme is the desire for efficiency. People envision smart cities as efficient and livable places. Livability usually means having clean air, reliable transportation, reduced homelessness, and other similar factors. However, one significant concern that comes up repeatedly is privacy.

Balancing privacy and data collection is a complex issue. As I mentioned, my research relies heavily on data captured by various sensors, which is essential for training machine learning algorithms. The more data we have, the better the outcomes. However, generating all that data requires compromising privacy. People want the advantages of a smart city, but not at the cost of their privacy. Finding a middle ground remains an open question we are still trying to solve.

We’ve seen some smart city initiatives struggle or fail because they couldn’t adequately address privacy concerns. A notable example is Sidewalk Labs. I’m not sure if you’re familiar with it—it was a Google-affiliated company attempting to build a smart city project in Canada. It faced significant pushback due to concerns about privacy and data security, and ultimately, it did not move forward because it couldn’t offer sufficient guarantees that people’s privacy would be protected.

Jacobsen: When considering the digitization of everything and the integration of sensors everywhere—visual or otherwise—how do encryption, security, and privacy play into these systems? If the sidewalk has a physical sensor, how do you ensure those are highly encrypted to address privacy concerns? In societies where privacy is not a given right, have some projects infringed on that privacy? This turns into a cybersecurity issue. How do we protect all this digital infrastructure? It may be an open question.

Odonkor: It is indeed an open question. The reality is that we may never reach a point where these systems are 100% secure. We see this even with the most trusted digital systems, such as banking systems, which only guarantee partial protection. However, there have been significant advancements in encrypting data. The solutions will not be limited to smart cities alone; they will likely involve broader applications, such as protecting banking or sensitive health data. These technologies will continue to evolve and be applied in various smart city contexts.

The main challenge is that smart cities are highly complex. They consist of multiple interconnected systems, and any time you have such a distributed system with numerous moving parts, one weak link is enough to create significant issues. Complex systems like this will inherently have weak points, a major challenge for smart cities. However, there is a lot of research in this space. While I don’t specialize in cybersecurity, I am confident that progress will lead us to a point where we are “safe enough” within smart cities.

Jacobsen: Regarding privacy, in some countries, how is this approached?

Odonkor: Yes, that’s an important consideration. In countries like China, for example, technologies that monitor citizens are already in place. While monitoring can have protective and security benefits, it’s also true that these technologies have dual uses. Due to the governmental structure in such countries, it’s easier to install and operate these systems.

In contrast, in the United States, for example, implementing widespread systems like facial recognition often requires more support. So, the global landscape varies depending on societal structures and attitudes toward privacy and governance. We’ll continue to see these differences in how smart city technologies are deployed based on societal norms and legal frameworks.

Jacobsen: What is the most feasible development in smart cities by the end of 2025?

Odonkor: One exciting area is transportation, specifically the electrification of transport. We’re seeing a surge in micro-mobility solutions, such as electric bikes and scooters. On a larger scale, we’re seeing the integration of electric buses and the gradual emergence of autonomous vehicles. An interesting challenge is merging electric autonomous transportation with traditional transportation and navigating the resulting efficiency gains and challenges. This area is evolving quickly, and I’m excited to see how policies adapt to these advancements. Cities are caught off guard by this shift toward electric micro-mobility, so watching how they respond is fascinating.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Philip, thank you so much for your time and insights today.

Odonkor: You’re welcome, Scott. 

Jacobsen: Cool, thank you. It was nice meeting you.

Odonkor: Thanks, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Billy Busch, ‘Family Reins’ and Anheuser-Busch Legacy

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/27

Billy Busch, founder of the Busch Family Brewing & Distilling Company, is an heir to the iconic Anheuser-Busch legacy, synonymous with American enterprise and the pursuit of the American dream. Raised on the family’s sprawling estate, Billy’s childhood was one of privilege and tradition, shaped by his father’s rigorous standards for leadership. A graduate of St. Louis University and a former professional polo player, Billy achieved the pinnacle of the sport by winning the U.S. Open Polo Championship. He starred alongside his wife, Christi, a film producer, on the MTV reality series The BuschFamily Brewed, offering a glimpse into their family life. Together, they reside on a 700-acre estate in St. Louis, Missouri, continuing the Busch family tradition of entrepreneurship, storytelling, and community legacy. Busch shares lessons learned from his family’s multi-generational business. He reflects on his great-grandfather Adolphus Busch, whose ambition, innovation, and quality focus revolutionized the brewing industry through pasteurization and the refrigerated railroad car, establishing Budweiser as The King of Beers. Billy also highlights his father’s expansion efforts and brilliant marketing with Busch Gardens. Now, he continues the family tradition with his brewery and distillery, emphasizing innovation and hospitality. An avid equestrian, Billy enjoys life on his 700-acre estate, blending hunting, farming, and family time. He is the author of Family Reins: The Extraordinary Rise and Epic Fall of an American Dynasty.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Billy Busch, the founder of the Busch Family Brewing and Distilling Company and an heir to the iconic Anheuser-Busch legacy.

As a multi-generational family deeply involved in American entrepreneurship, enterprise, and business, what is the biggest family lesson about sustaining a legacy in American business?

Billy Busch: Oh, there are a few key takeaways. What I learned from my great-grandfather, Adolphus Busch, was his ambition to prove himself and create something great here in America. He immigrated from Germany to the United States in 1857 to build a better life and live the American dream.

Adolphus was the 21st of 22 children. His father was a successful businessman, but with such a large family, my great-grandfather knew little inheritance would be left. So, he decided to make his way. That’s why he immigrated to the United States, settling in St. Louis, Missouri, along the Mississippi River, where significant commerce and business activity existed. This choice made sense because he had grown up along the Rhine River in Germany and understood river-based trade and transportation.

When Adolphus arrived in St. Louis, he was optimistic and determined to succeed. He eventually met Lilly Anheuser, the daughter of Eberhard Anheuser, who owned the struggling Bavarian Brewery on the Mississippi River. Seeing potential in Adolphus, Eberhard offered him the opportunity to join the brewery and help turn it around. My great-grandfather accepted the challenge.

Adolphus Busch was an incredibly driven, gregarious, and innovative entrepreneur. He worked tirelessly to grow the business, and his marketing skills were unmatched. In 1876, he developed the recipe for Budweiser, which would become the brewery’s flagship product and earn the title The King of Beers.

His innovations largely drove Adolphus’s success. He was the first brewer in America to pasteurize beer, a breakthrough that extended the beer’s shelf life, allowing it to stay fresh for longer periods. This innovation enabled him to transport beer to far-off markets, something unheard of then.

But there’s more. Adolphus also recognized the importance of keeping beer cold to maintain its quality. He pioneered using the refrigerated railroad car, allowing him to transport beer over long distances while keeping it fresh.

Between pasteurization and refrigeration, my great-grandfather revolutionized the brewing industry. Before these innovations, breweries operated primarily on a local scale because transporting beer was difficult. Adolphus’s vision and ingenuity turned a small, struggling brewery into a national powerhouse. They helped establish Anheuser-Busch as an iconic American brand.

So the lesson I learned—well, I’ve learned two great lessons from him regarding innovation. If you’re going to start a business today, you have to be very innovative. You have to develop ideas that make you unique and carry you forward. It takes you from the norm and puts you in a position that helps your business grow. That’s what my great-grandfather was able to do.

Of course, he had a great product. Quality has always been so important, and that sense of quality has lasted through the generations. My father, who I watched grow the business, was the third generation and the fourth leader of Anheuser-Busch. He became the CEO and president of Anheuser-Busch in 1946 when his older brother passed away prematurely.

At that time, there was only one brewery in the United States, located in St. Louis, Missouri. My father built nine additional breweries across the country. He also established Busch Gardens theme parks around those breweries. That was a brilliant marketing strategy because families could visit the brewery, see the animals, and enjoy the experience. When their kids grew up and were old enough to drink, they remembered those great times at Busch Gardens and SeaWorld—back when we owned SeaWorld. Those experiences built a strong connection to the product and helped the brand grow.

It made Budweiser the household American beer. Quality, great marketing, and innovation were the key ingredients.

I also discuss this in my book Family Reins: The Extraordinary Rise and Epic Fall of an American Dynasty. My uncle, Adolphus Busch III—my dad’s brother—was a patriot and a patriarch. He led the brewery through World War II, during which time 90% of the marketing and advertising went to supporting America’s efforts in the war.

He even shut down all distribution on the West Coast to move munitions and military supplies more efficiently. His loyalty to the country was unmatched. In those campaigns, 90% of the marketing supported America, and only 10% promoted Anheuser-Busch and Budweiser.

But what happened? Lo and behold, it worked out beautifully. People began to associate Budweiser with America itself. It became America’s beer. That’s how Budweiser earned the title The King of Beers.

I learned so much from those stories. My father was focused on building the brewery during his era. From 1946 to 1975, he grew production from 3 million barrels to about 40 million.

It was all about Anheuser-Busch. It was about living and breathing the brand. My father even opened our family farm—where I grew up—to the public. People could come, drink a Budweiser, and enjoy themselves.

We lived it. Day in and day out, we lived in Anheuser-Busch. And that’s what it takes to build something great, like my family did.

And I’m proud it went for five generations when most companies only last three generations in a family.

Jacobsen: The big thing you mentioned at the start of the conversation was that there would be little inheritance in a family of over 20 kids. So, the foresight to go out and make your name or create your legacy becomes essential. Are you doing that with the distillery moving forward?

Busch: Yes. I grew up watching my father and seeing the principles he used to help grow the business. I learned a lot about the brewing industry. I was involved in the marketing side of the business, as well as the entertainment side. I grew up at Grant’s Farm, maintaining and keeping it beautiful for the public.

I also worked in the distribution side of the business, selling beer to retailers in Texas and Florida. Although I never worked directly at the brewery, brewing was in my blood. I have always loved the business and wanted to continue it.

I also wanted to continue the legacy of what my forefathers started. Of course, that legacy was Anheuser-Busch. Unfortunately, the company was sold in 2008 to a foreign company, InBev, and is no longer in family hands.

So, I wanted to keep that legacy alive. I started the Busch Family Brewing and Distilling Company, and now we’re making beer. We produce several different styles of beer and whiskeys. We sell it right here on our farm and invite people to visit. They can enjoy the beautiful property and the farm atmosphere, sample our beers, and eat great food.

It’s a place for families and people of all ages because we have animals there—similar to what you’d find at Busch Gardens—which reflects how I grew up. It’s just a natural extension of my family’s tradition, and it makes perfect sense for me to do this.

I truly enjoy it. I love the hospitality aspect of the brewing business, and I’m also deeply involved in the brewing and manufacturing processes, which I find incredibly rewarding. We’re also expanding our distribution locally here in the St. Louis area.

Jacobsen: Many businesspeople look for ways to blow off some steam. Working 80 hours a week—while it may be a passion—is not always the most fun thing to do. You had a career and even won a championship in one of the major tournaments, didn’t you? How did you get involved in polo, and why choose it? It’s both a way to blow off steam and, at the same time, not because it’s so competitive.

Busch: You’re right. It’s a competitive sport. But my father was a big equestrian. He had horses of all kinds—hunters, jumpers, and driving horses.

Of course, he was the brains behind the Clydesdale eight-horse hitch back in 1933 when they first introduced the Clydesdales. That hitch was a gift from my dad and his brother to their father, thanking him for keeping Anheuser-Busch alive during the 13 years of Prohibition when alcohol couldn’t be sold in the United States. They used the hitch to drive the first case of beer to the White House, presenting it to President Franklin D. Roosevelt after Prohibition was repealed.

As you can see, my family has always been involved with horses. I grew up on a farm, and I’ve been riding my entire life. My dad played polo when he was younger and with some of the best American polo players in the world. My older brother got into it, and I followed in his footsteps.

I love polo because it’s such a fast, exhilarating game. You’re on a horse going 35 miles an hour. I love contact sports—you’re always bumping, pushing, and trying to get to the ball. It gets physical at times, which suits me perfectly because I played football in high school and some in college.

Since I already knew how to ride, polo just made sense. And, yes, we won some of the major tournaments throughout the country. Specifically, my brother and I won the U.S. Open in 1991, the grandfather of all polo tournaments in the United States, with two pros.

It was a wonderful accomplishment. Winning the U.S. Open is incredibly difficult, and I realize that more and more now as I look back. Polo has always been tough, and it’s only become harder. I’m so grateful we had the opportunity to win that tournament in 1991.

Jacobsen: When I worked on a horse farm, the manager competed at the Nations Cup level in show jumping. Her aunt had even ridden for Team Canada in show jumping twice. I did a series of interviews as part of an ongoing book project on that world, and one thing I came across was how horses have become a precious commodity. Horse prices have skyrocketed as more people accumulate wealth, particularly in Western Europe and the United States. A decent Olympic show jumper now costs around €5 million. How have you seen the equestrian world—particularly in polo—change since 1991?

Busch: Well, let’s say you’re 100% right. The prices have gone up tremendously, even in the polo world. A good polo horse today costs you an easy $150,000.

And if you’re playing at the high-goal level—the highest level of polo—you need 8 to 10 horses per game. That’s just for one player. It’s a huge investment.

Today, you’re looking at well over $1 million for the horses alone. Things were very different when my brother and I won the U.S. Open 1991. First of all, we were the only two sponsors on our team. We were what’s called patrons—essentially sponsors—not professional players. We weren’t getting paid to play; we were paying the pros to play for us.

We were fortunate to have some sponsorship from Anheuser-Busch back then. We played for the Bud Light team, which helped offset some costs. But in those days, a good horse cost about $30,000. Today, that same horse costs around $150,000.

Hiring a professional player back then cost about $100,000. Today, you can only hire a top-level pro for $2 million. When my brother and I won the tournament in 1991, we spent around $150,000 to compete and win.

Of course, a little luck was involved—and I’ll take luck any day. Other teams spent much more than we did, but we succeeded with far fewer resources. Because we were playing as patrons, we didn’t have to hire as many pros. My brother and I were also able to split some of the horses we owned, which further reduced the costs.

Today, if you want to win the U.S. Open, you’re considering spending well over $10 million.

Jacobsen: That’s incredible. So, this brings me to two questions. First, what has been the attraction for billionaires—at least the ones I’ve met—to become so interested in horses, especially since horses stopped being our primary mode of transportation more than 125 years ago?

Busch: That’s a great question. Here’s the thing—people with wealth often gravitate toward land. They’ll buy farms or ranches; you naturally have horses when you have land like that. You can’t have a farm or ranch without them, can you?

And there’s no better way to explore and experience your land than by riding a horse. You can see and appreciate so much more of the property on horseback. It’s a completely different experience.

The relationship between a horse and its rider is also second to none. Horses are powerful, intelligent animals, and people develop a connection with them quickly. That bond is something truly special.

Jacobsen: And what about you? What do you do in your time on a 700-acre estate? You’re coming from such a major family legacy.

Busch: Well, life on the farm is always busy and rewarding. I spend much time working on our brewery and distillery business. I love having people on the farm, where they can experience the land, enjoy some great food, and sample our beers and whiskeys. It’s about hospitality and sharing the legacy.

Outside the business, I ride horses, care for the property, and enjoy everything the land offers. There’s always something to do when living on a large piece of land like that. Whether it’s maintaining the property, taking care of the animals, or just riding around and enjoying the beauty of the place—it keeps me grounded.

They can carry you all day long, and it’s just amazing what horses can do. They can go over rough terrain, through creeks, and thick woods—you can get through anything with them, even more so than on a motorcycle, a four-wheeler, or one of these side-by-sides they have today. For people who can afford them, horses are much fun, and people truly enjoy them. They also keep you grounded in a way.

As for what I do on our 700 acres, I love it. We’ve always been big hunters in our family. My son, Billy Jr., is really into hunting apparel. He has his line of hunting gear called Geist Gear. It’s a German word that means ghost, so you’re like a ghost in the woods wearing his gear. He’s got everything you can imagine: coats, hats, gloves, waders, boots—gear for every kind of hunter’s got you covered whether you’re hunting deer, turkey, ducks, or anything else.

If you want to check it out sometime, Scott, go to geistgear.com. It’s good stuff.

We’re big hunters. We love being out on the farm. We hunt ducks, deer, turkey, and dove—all the kinds of animals you find here in the Midwest. We’re also big conservationists and outdoorsmen. My father was the same way.

I still ride horses; we ride quite a bit as a family. With all seven of our kids, my wife Christy and I occasionally get them on horses and ride across the farm together.

Another thing I love to do is hitch up a four-in-hand team of Belgian horses and a couple of Clydesdales. It’s a pair of Belgians, and a pair of Clydesdales hitched to a wagon we got from the Amish in Ohio. The wagon holds about 14 people, and we’ll drive it around the farm. It’s a great way to get together, have fun, and spend quality time as a family.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Billy, thank you so much for the opportunity and for your time.

Busch: Yes, I appreciate it. It’s my pleasure, Scott. Thank you for having me on.

Jacobsen: Okay, we’ll be in touch. Thank you.

Busch: Okay, Scott. Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Minister Nectaire OlivevilO, The Satanic Temple Arizona

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/27

Minister Nectaire OlivevilO, elected as congregation head of The Satanic Temple Arizona in June, shared his Protestant upbringing and gradual shift to atheism driven by a passion for science. He discussed the Temple’s principles, emphasizing resistance to arbitrary authority inspired by “Paradise Lost” and “Revolt of the Angels.” They highlighted coalition building with interfaith and secular groups, advocating for scientific understanding, compassion, and bodily autonomy. OlivevilO explained how conversations with skeptics reveal cognitive biases and the importance of bidirectional consent, reinforcing the Temple’s commitment to reason and ethical principles.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: After many, many, many, many, many, many, many, many years, I am back with the Satanic Temple of Arizona. Previously, I was interviewing Michelle and Stu. What has changed over the years that I’ve been away?

Minister Nectaire OlivevilO: A lot has happened. We’ve gone through several generations of council leadership within the congregation, a few cycles of chapter heads, a regent, and eventually, I became one of the elected individuals. In June, I was onboarded as the congregation head of Arizona. 

Jacobsen: When were you first introduced to TST or that style of philosophy? Did you grow up religious, for instance, or in any other religious context?

OlivevilO: Not strictly. I grew up in a household with Protestant parents. On my mother’s side, there was a mix of Methodist and—I believe—Lutheran. On my father’s side, I do not remember what his religious background was. When we visited my maternal grandparents on weekends, we would alternate between different churches. It was not a monoculture of church experiences. When we visited my dad’s mother’s church, it was another different church.

Growing up, I was fascinated by dinosaurs and Legos. I would read paleontology books for kids and popular paleontology books for the general public. I was deeply into science. When I went to Sunday school, they talked about the flood and the ark, which lost me completely. It felt absurd, and I decided I was done with it. 

Jacobsen: Did that moment of disbelief cause any confrontations with people, or was it an internal realization?

OlivevilO: It was entirely internal. I no longer wanted to attend Sunday school; my parents were fine. I would read novels in the pews instead. Eventually, once I had a Walkman, I would listen to music during services. They were okay with that, too.

My parents never forced indoctrination or imposed religious beliefs on me, and I recognize how privileged I am for that. Many people have endured significant religious trauma due to their upbringing, but I was fortunate not to have that experience. My sister was similarly unaffected by it. My atheism continued without conflict. When I learned the term “atheism” in high school, I would have identified with it if I had thought about adopting a label. However, I did not consciously choose an identity then.

I knew the Bible held no value for me. I tried reading it once, but when I got to the genealogies, I stopped, thinking, “I don’t have time for this.” It felt pointless. I didn’t care about who begat whom. That’s where my attempt at reading the Bible ended.

Despite not reading the Bible cover to cover, I was exposed to its content through various sources. For the past 15-plus years, I’ve read atheist blogs, listened to atheist podcasts, and engaged with counter-apologetics. I have delved into the Skeptics Annotated Bible and heard its contents discussed repeatedly through platforms like The Atheist Experience and more recent shows like Talk Heathen. These have been excellent resources for having meaningful conversations with religious people and understanding their beliefs. It is fascinating and engaging work.

\And the folks who call in often expose their cognitive biases immediately. If they’re evangelizing and trying to make claims, their biases show up immediately to the hosts. Many people don’t go into that stuff and have other reasoning, and it doesn’t have the Bible intersection. But yes, from observing these conversations between skeptics and religious people, there’s much exposure to the Bible that I’ve had.

Yes, that’s much of it as far as religious backgrounds are concerned. So, getting to TST is when I connected to or when I first heard about TST. It probably would have been the Pink Mass. That’s the first thing I heard on Evan Etta’s blog when he covered that. So, the blasphemy—I left at that and enjoyed that. But the coverage of that and something you mentioned earlier, I forget the name of the event, but the BDSM babies.​​

That was another one of the things covered in those sorts of media. But those articles included the tenets and went down the list. It’s like, “Hell, yes!” Awesome. Dig it. Do that. Awesome. So, you hear this from Satanists all the time. These things click, and you realize, “Well, I guess I’m a Satanist.” So, I enjoy that—turning a thing on its head.

With blasphemy, you’re taking something sacred and turning it on its head. With this identity with Satanism, you’re taking the attribution of atheists being called Satanists because Christians don’t accurately name the thing that they’re seeing and calling out. It’s embracing Satanism when it has been thrown at you as if it were a weapon. “Got it. Yes. It’s me. Now what?” 

Jacobsen: The taking away of the power of that accusation is empowering. I can see that in other folks, too. So, it is a form of attributing an epithet to something of a benevolent self-identity, self-identification in a way. “This is my term for self-liberation. The devil is a metaphor for the liberation of humanity from an authoritarian god. When you see me as an atheist within your framework, you know that is the worst possible thing.” I’m going to take that on. Here’s what I mean.”If people get past the first reaction, it’s a way to continue the conversation more healthily.

OlivevilO: I guess it’s a “yes, and.”

Jacobsen: Yes, it is. So, it’s the improv comedy principle. What did you learn from those calls from people? When they expose their cognitive biases, as you’re saying? What comes up? What are those biases? And how do you notice them grappling with those pointed out now? That’s an uncomfortable place to be.

OlivevilO: Yes. And it should be an uncomfortable place to be. When callers recognize that they’ve got a contradiction, the people I’ve noticed recognizing that will say, “Oh, I’ll think about that, and I’ll call back about that after I’ve had a chance.” Resistant people tend to have calls that drag on for a long time. The hosts try to bring the person back to the beginning, using several approaches to get them to acknowledge that they have inconsistent ideas. But then, that cognitive dissonance doesn’t even get a chance to kick in as other assumptions the person has prevent them from analyzing their own beliefs. Fundamental attribution error—that’s a pretty common one.

Special pleading. Those are the most common ones. So, fundamental attribution error—well, there are multiple ways it can show up. I saw that one thing happened, another happened, and I assumed that this caused that rather than them being coincidental. This happened, and that happened. Things are only sometimes connected. This thing is only sometimes caused by that thing. So, diversity of plant, animal, and bacterial life—yes. Your book says that a god did that, but all the other information also says this is how things happen. There’s so much more evidence supporting this second explanation.

Jacobsen: Have you had anyone change their mind on one of those calls?

OlivevilO: Well, I want to be clear: this hasn’t been me. This is me consuming things. Yes, I was referring to shows that the atheist community of Austin puts on. They do a great job cultivating an open community interested in these conversations and bringing in religious people to share their ideas.

And that’s great. That cross-pollination of ideas is necessary. We’re people. We’re a social species. We trade ideas. We bounce things off each other. One of the positive ways humans use that is through the scientific revolution—starting to examine these things and figure out why. We build up that base of knowledge through reason and evidence and examine it with one another to average out those cognitive biases that contribute to things. By checking with many people, I see that some have certain biases, and others have different ones.

And where there’s consensus and evidence, you can start to build and look into the next set of things. We know this now. Then what does that mean? What else can we find out? What else can we learn? That scientific approach, that openness to investigate ideas that we think are true and trying to verify whether they are or not. There’s much overlap between science and these sorts of inquiries into people’s beliefs. They are two sides of the same coin of inquiry, and we enjoy that. We engage in that exchange within this congregation, primarily through coalition building.

So, we work with a couple of coalitions. One of them is the Arizona Faith Network. It’s an interfaith group. There are folks from Christian churches, Hindu individuals, a couple of different Buddhist traditions, and UU people. It’s everybody. They do much good stuff. One of their organization’s projects is with heat relief.

Heat relief is a major cause of death in houseless communities or houseless populations in Arizona. That’s one of their big projects. They also do volunteer work, such as poll watching and other activities. But that organization and our participation with them give us a chance to hang out with these other faith leaders, get to know one another, and help our congregations interact with other people—whether they’re congregating with us or vice versa—in a way that’s positive for the entire community of Tucson, Arizona, or wherever the specific projects may be at the time.

Then another coalition that we’re in is a secular one, the Secular Coalition for Arizona. That is a multi-faith group, but many are non-theistic. There are some religious groups within the coalition now. That was only sometimes the case, but some religious groups have joined the coalition in the last couple of years. You know, once, their focus—because they’re a chapter or I don’t know their structure specifically—but I believe they were the first local branch of the Secular Coalition for America.

They do a lot of legislative work. They’ve had a lobbyist at the Arizona Capitol for years and advocate heavily in education. They stream a weekly education presentation, frequently on church-state separation and sometimes on education and other scientific topics that may not have a political bent. Lawmakers always find a way to put undisputed things into the legislature and turn them into political issues. It happens. 

Jacobsen: What do you believe?

OlivevilO: Science is the best method for learning things. We should have compassion for other people, animals, and living things. It doesn’t have to be limited to the animal kingdom.

The whole world is a web; we should have compassion and understanding of how things affect the real world and try to minimize the negative effects—large scale, small scale, interpersonal scale, everything. I’ll suppose that things flow from that. I deeply identify with the tenets covering many aspects of my worldview. They’re always subject to change; they can be updated. So it’s not that I need to say, “I believe this thing and its tenets over here.” I currently identify with them. My positions align with them. They cover many of my philosophy but can’t possibly cover all of a person’s philosophical views.

And let’s see. You asked the classic ACA question, “Why?” Yes. First, science has been shown to work consistently and reliably to advance and expand our knowledge. So, why? Because it works. It shows evidence that it does work.

Why compassion? How did we reword the Golden Rule? It was—he might have called it the Silver Rule or the Platinum Rule. “Don’t do to others as you would like done to you,” but don’t do as they want you to do unto them.

Jacobsen: “Do unto others as you would have them do unto you.” Consent, bodily autonomy, all these things. Non-harm.  So, someone may be a masochist, and they may want you to harm them. Still, the harm principle would say, “Well, at that point, that’s a limit where those two principles meet together, and you don’t engage in what they would.” Unless it’s some BDSM or something like that.

OlivevilO: If somebody wants to be harmed, I don’t have to harm them. I can withdraw myself from that. I don’t have to participate in that. But I can ask them, “Hey, what do you want?”

Jacobsen: And that’s a subtle point because when people critique it, they’ll assume, “Well, if that’s what they want, then you have to harm them.” Oh, no. But the thing is, it’s not only the harm principle and the platinum rule in terms of “Do what they would want done to you,” but also bidirectional consent. You can also say, “I don’t want this either,” and then not do it. So, it’s a bolt in the critique. You only sometimes know once you play with the words, see how they work, and determine objections.

OlivevilO: We talked about before with the unitarian and universalist principles and the humanist principles. The core ideas embedded in the tenets and these other principles have overlapped. There are multiple ways of saying the same idea. I’m saying a lot of the same ideas. They’re not necessarily in all those or entirely representative of those other principles. 

Jacobsen: Based on their principles since their start, what is the big takeaway for The Satanic Temple or The Satanic Temple Arizona?

OlivevilO: The big message, to boil it down to a single thing, is the resistance to arbitrary authority. You see that in the character of Satan, written in “Revolt of the Angels” and “Parse Lost.”

So, in “Paradise Lost,” Lucifer wages a big war against Heaven to try and take down this literal theocratic dictator who’s giving all these commands and making all these demands of the world, including humans. Satan sympathizes with humanity and stands up for them. That’s even in the Bible, with Satan saying, “No, you won’t die if you eat from this tree.” He’s providing accurate information to humanity, inspiring some of the fifth tenets of scientific understanding.

The struggle for ice comes from that Satanic spirit of being willing to fight in whatever fashion that fight takes. On that sidebar, the Satans undergo two different ways in their fight against God in the two books I mentioned. There’s the frontal assault in “Paradise Lost,” but in “Revolt,” Whisper decides not to take that frontal assault, not to overthrow because he recognizes that there’s a long game. Providing enlightenment and inspiring enlightenment in humanity is the long-game victory plan in that book. So, the struggle for ice, the second tenet, that’s in there too.

All the tenets come from various facets of Satan’s character. God tells humans various things—various sexual structures. “You can’t do that. You have to circumcise. You have to do all these things.” I see opposition to all these arbitrary rules. Each of them is Lucifer standing up to those rules and saying, “No, we don’t have to do that. You’ll be fine if you don’t.”

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it. Yes. I hope to get more interviews, and we can spread the good news.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Michael Sapienza, Colorectal Cancer and Fundraising

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/26

Michael Sapienza is the CEO of the Colorectal Cancer Alliance, a leading nonprofit dedicated to eradicating colorectal cancer through prevention, patient support, and research funding. A former professional musician, Sapienza was inspired to shift careers after losing his mother to the disease in 2009. He has since become an influential advocate for cancer awareness and research. Under his leadership, the Alliance has launched major initiatives, including LEAD FROM BEHIND and Project Cure CRC, aiming to raise $100 million for innovative colorectal cancer research. Sapienza’s mission-driven approach has significantly expanded screening efforts and enhanced patient support across communities.

Sapienza highlighted the urgency of colorectal cancer, which ranks as the second leading cause of cancer-related deaths in the U.S. and is particularly lethal for men under 50. He stressed the need for early screening and awareness, citing barriers like rural access and socioeconomic challenges that hinder screening rates. Sapienza emphasized underfunding in colorectal cancer research compared to breast cancer and discussed initiatives like Project Cure CRC and the LEAD FROM BEHIND campaign with Ryan Reynolds, which boosted screening rates. He noted Dr. Dammie Brown’s contributions and initiatives like BlueHQ for patient support and education.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Of the types of cancer that exist, how prevalent is colorectal cancer? How high is it on the priority list?

Michael Sapienza: Colorectal cancer is the second leading cause of cancer-related deaths for both men and women combined in the United States. Globally, it is also among the most common cancer killers.

Unfortunately, for individuals under the age of 50, it is the leading cancer killer for men and the second-leading cancer killer for women. While it is highly prevalent, it is also one of the most preventable cancers, especially for those eligible for screening.

Jacobsen: What are the factors that contribute to a higher risk of developing colorectal cancer?

Sapienza:. First, if you are 45 or older and have no family history of colon cancer, that is when you should start getting screened. Screening methods include colonoscopy, a fecal immunochemical test (FIT), or a Cologuard test. However, if you have a family history, screening should begin 10 years before the age at which your relative was diagnosed or at age 40, whichever comes first. For example, if my mother had been diagnosed at age 40, I would have started screening at age 30.

Regarding risk factors, signs to watch out for include blood in the stool, changes in bowel habits, unexpected weight loss, and similar symptoms. However, it is important to undergo screening before symptoms appear, as symptoms can indicate an advanced stage of the disease. Screening is essential for individuals age 45 andover.

Jacobsen: Now, why is it the leading cancer killer for men and only the second for women? What is the distinction?

Sapienza: At this time, we do not fully understand the reasons. This statistic refers to young-onset colorectal cancer, defined as cancer occurring in individuals under the age of 50. While it is increasing more rapidly in men under 50 compared to women, the exact reason is unknown. However, if you were born after 1990, you are twice as likely to develop colorectal cancer before the age of 50 compared to those born before 1990. This represents a significant increase in young-onset colorectal cancer, and the reasons for this rise remain unclear.

Potential factors include increased use of antibacterial products, overuse of antibiotics, and a higher intake of sugary drinks than vitamin-rich beverages common in previous generations. Although these are hypotheses, the trend is likely multifactorial. The increase is not confined to the United States; it is observed in many Western countries. We suspect it may be related to environmental factors, diet, and other contributing elements.

One aspect that may be contributing is the change in the human microbiome. Our microbiome evolves as we grow, influenced by exposure to different environments and substances. When altered, the microbiome can weaken our natural defenses, allowing polyps to develop in the colon. These polyps can become cancerous over time.

Jacobsen: Who is more likely to go in for screenings, men or women?

Sapienza: That is a good question. Generally, women are more likely to undergo screenings, but this varies depending on demographics.

So, unfortunately, Black men are much less likely to get screened than their white male counterparts. But Black females do get screened. It depends. However, the most underserved population is the Alaskan Natives.

Jacobsen: Why?

Sapienza: It is likely due to the distance in terms of access to endoscopy suites, where one can get a colonoscopy and education. But mainly, the rural aspect makes it difficult. There are still tribes in places without running water and other basic amenities, which contributes to the inability to have a colonoscopy or even another type of test.

Jacobsen: What about the economic differences and geographic differences? How do those factor into this as well?

Sapienza: It’s interesting to consider whether you live in a city in rural America or another country. There are different risk factors. In a rural area, it may require driving 100 miles to reach an endoscopy center for a colonoscopy. This means taking time off work, paying for gas, and other costs associated with the trip, which deters people from following through with screenings.

In the city, there are other reasons. Are you a single mom or dad who needs that income? You might not be able to do the prep the night before and get screened the next day, or you may need someone to give you a ride home or face a co-pay with your insurance. There are numerous barriers related to payment and insurance.

This is not just an issue for underserved Black Americans or Hispanic Americans. Many white rural Americans face similar challenges and barriers. Additionally, affluent, insured middle-class individuals aged 45 to 58 may be less likely to get screened. They are often busy, with children approaching college age or already in college, and may be in the prime of their careers. The Alliance works extensively to increase screening across these different populations.

Jacobsen: Why is there a target of $100 million through initiatives like Project CURE CRC?

Sapienza: Colon cancer is one of the most underfunded cancers. Suppose you compare the federal spending in the United States. In that case, breast cancer receives about $1.1 to $1.3 billion, whereas colorectal cancer receives $353 million. More people die of colorectal cancer than breast cancer, which highlights a significant funding discrepancy.

Jacobsen: And is the ecosystem of research in the colon cancer space comparable to that of breast cancer?

Sapienza: No, not at all. The entire ecosystem of research for colon cancer is nowhere near where breast cancer research is. For example, the Estee Lauder family donated $100 million in 1994, generating approximately $4 billion in various treatments and leading to 300 new FDA approvals. Meanwhile, colon cancer patients diagnosed with metastatic cancer are still receiving the same frontline treatment they did 20 years ago.

Our board decided to create an initiative to raise significant money and make a substantial impact. This led to the announcement of our $100 million commitment. In December, we gathered top scientists in Miami Beach to plan our proposal request (RFP). We launched the first RFP in March, announced our first grant in June, and funded about $10 million, with more applications and projects in progress. We are reconvening experts in Miami to explore innovative approaches and draw insights from other diseases.

Jacobsen: What is the “Lead From Behind” initiative?

Sapienza: Lead From Behind is a celebrity-driven initiative to break the stigma surrounding colorectal cancer and encourage people to get screened. We partnered with Ryan Reynolds’ agency, Maximum Effortand collaborated with Ryan Reynolds, a Canadian, on the initial campaign. He’s really helped us to bring awareness to screening and prevention.

Jacobsen: Ah, yes, he came straight out of our highest end Canadian famous Ryan manufacturing facility. 

Sapienza: He, along with Rob McElhenney from It’s Always Sunny in Philadelphia, participated by filming their colonoscopies. The campaign generated about 16 million video views and 3.8 billion media impressions.

We have continued with several related campaigns to spread awareness and keep the conversation going. This cultural outreach has proven effective; a study conducted by Axios and Zocdoc showed a 36% increase in colonoscopy appointments during the 100 days following the launch in 2022 compared to the previous year. We refer to this as the “Ryan Reynolds effect.” We were thrilled with the success and continued collaborating with him to raise awareness.

Jacobsen: Dr. Dammie Brown, Senior Vice President of Mission Delivery—what has she contributed?

Sapienza: Dr. Brown has been essential in overseeing our mission delivery programs, including screening navigation initiatives. She has extensive experience launching multiple screening programs in Africa and working on similar programs in Los Angeles. She also brings a wealth of expertise from her time at pharmaceutical companies worldwide, focusing on pipeline development and patient engagement.

Dr. Brown contributes significantly to the research component of Project Cure CRC and has deep knowledge of patient support. Her business experience has also enabled us to develop various products and improve our mission programs.

Jacobsen: What is BlueHQ, and what is Dr. Brown’s role with it?

Sapienza: BlueHQ is a portal for all our patients to access resources and support. Dr. Brown is collaborating closely with our Senior Vice President of Data Intelligence and IT to develop this platform, ensuring it is approached with a business-minded perspective. You may already know this from speaking with other organizations, but many nonprofits are run differently from businesses. They are often managed as traditional nonprofits but must operate more like businesses to be effective. We are focused on creating products that help people rather than on making a profit from them.

Dr. Brown’s experience managing profit and loss (P&L) in large companies like Genentech, Roche, and Novartis has been invaluable. This expertise is crucial for developing practical tools such as an app that can be integrated into a healthcare system. As you may know, the U.S. healthcare system, unlike Canada’s, is neither the most efficient nor the highest quality, and it certainly does not provide universal access.

Jacobsen: What should people understand about the reasons to support colorectal cancer research, and how can they get involved? Are there other types of cancer they should be mindful of for their screenings?

Sapienza: Yes, cancer is a major cause of premature death. First, if anyone has questions about screenings, they should visit quiz.getscreened.org. We have a quiz that helps people determine if they are at high risk. Second, if you have a family member who has been diagnosed with colorectal cancer, visit colorectalcancer.orgg for support resources, including treatment navigators, financial assistance, and psychosocial support. If you are interested in learnign more about Project Cure CRC, to donate or submit a proposal, visit colorectalcancer.org/cure.

It is essential to be aware of when you should be screened for various cancers, such as breast, colorectal, lung, and prostate cancer. The HPV vaccine is also crucial. Knowing when to be screened for these major cancers is vital, as each has specific age guidelines and screening recommendations.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts or feelings after today’s discussion?

Sapienza: No, I talked fast enough. Didn’t I?

Jacobsen: Your coffee kicked in. You’re in D.C., where people need to be verbally fluent. I love D.C. I visited for the first time when I came to the United States earlier this year. I traveled from Montreal to New York, Boston, D.C., Atlanta, New Orleans, Chicago, Los Angeles, San Diego, Irvine, and Seattle, among other cities. I have to say, D.C. has the best landscapers. I did landscaping at a horse farm and other places for several years–and I can tell you–they do mulching right.

Sapienza: That is so funny. That’s what you noticed? Where exactly?

Jacobsen: Downtown. I believe the Smithsonian Museum is there as well. I walked by there. There were some protests about the ongoing book bans—essentially another period of literary repression happening in the United States. I don’t panic too much because this tends to happen periodically in the U.S. I remember walking around and seeing that. 

Thank you so much for your time today.

Sapienza: Of course, Scott.

Jacobsen: It was good to meet you.

Sapienza: Good to meet you too. If you ever need anything or are in D.C., let me know.

Jacobsen: Absolutely. That would be fun.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Padideh Jafari on Family and Divorce Law

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/25

Padideh Jafari, Esq. is a seasoned Family and Divorce Law Attorney with over 22 years of experience, serving as the Founder of Jafari Law & Mediation Office. Established in 2003, her firm specializes in family law, including divorce, mediation, child custody, and domestic violence cases. Renowned for her skillful litigation and mediation, Padideh has a deep understanding of complex divorces, particularly those affected by stark differences in values, such as political and religious beliefs. Known for her compassionate approach and unwavering advocacy, Padideh strives to support families, protect children’s well-being, and guide clients through challenging legal processes with integrity and expertise.

Jafari shares insights on high-conflict divorces, emphasizing the importance of compromise, communication, and trust in marriages. She highlights the “silver bullet” tactic, where false allegations are used in divorce cases, often impacting men. Mediation and collaborative law are recommended for amicable resolutions, especially when children are involved. Financial issues are noted as a major factor in divorces, with wealthier clients navigating the process more smoothly than those less affluent. Padideh maintains her sanity through hobbies, faith, and setting boundaries, advocating for clients while prioritizing healing and child-focused outcomes.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Padideh Jafari, and we’re going to be discussing divorce and the law—first question: a quick backdrop. How did you become interested in this topic? Divorce isn’t necessarily anyone’s first topic of choice.

Padideh Jafari: Yes, I wanted to be a lawyer ever since I was 5 years old. I went through the process of schooling, graduated, and, of all things, became a divorce attorney. I wanted to help people. In divorce cases, you can make an impact, especially when children and child custody issues are involved. Right now, I’m involved with various men’s groups and learning about tactics known as “silver bullet” strategies. No one sets out specifically to become a divorce attorney, but sometimes it falls into your lap. I have the right temperament for it, I suppose, and I’ve been doing this for 22 years now.

Jacobsen: What is the silver bullet strategy? I’ve never heard of it before.

Padideh: The silver bullet strategy is a tactic where a spouse, typically the wife, may use false allegations and restraining orders against the husband to have him removed from the home. In California, for instance, such an emergency restraining order can last up to three weeks. However, the duration varies in other states. Men then have to respond to these allegations and prove their innocence, which can be more challenging than in the criminal system, where one is presumed innocent until proven guilty. When a domestic violence allegation is filed, the accused is often treated as if they are guilty. Judges frequently grant emergency restraining orders that last for several weeks, as seen in California.

If children are involved, and the father has been removed from the home, he is unable to see his children. This starts a process where the mother may then file for divorce while the father deals with false allegations. This is a significant issue being discussed in men’s groups as they see it happening to friends, brothers, and coworkers. These groups are engaging in conversations about how to prevent such scenarios.

Jacobsen: How do you mediate disagreements that seem irreconcilable yet find, legally, areas for potential resolution?

Padideh: If one spouse is highly conflicted, reconciliation is difficult because it requires both parties to acknowledge their role in the breakdown of the marriage. Without that acknowledgment, even the best therapist cannot help. Our law firm specializes in handling high-conflict, narcissistic divorces, where reconciliation is often not possible.

If someone is a narcissist or has a mental disorder or other Cluster B personality disorder, there’s no bridging that gap. An apology isn’t going to be enough. It takes changed behaviour, and the spouse needs to see that changed behaviour over a long period. This is particularly true in the areas where we work, like Los Angeles County and Orange County.

I have a background in psychology, so these cases are very important to me. I represent the underdog, the innocent spouse, as I like to call them, and the victim of these types of selfish, abusive marriages.

Jacobsen: How do differences of opinion play into this? For example, when one spouse is Muslim, and the other is Hindu, or one is Republican, and the other Democrat, or one is more traditionalist and the other more egalitarian—how do these differences play out when real-life issues arise?

Padideh: That’s a good question. I want to note that sometimes when people get married young, in their early twenties, they may have certain political views. I don’t know about you, but when I was in college at Loyola Marymount University, politics wasn’t something I was thinking about. As I grew older, my political views became more defined, and I became more vocal about them.

We often see that people who marry in their early or even mid-twenties experience changes in their political beliefs over time. If you’re in a marriage where your spouse’s political views do not evolve, or if they are not respectful of your political views, it comes down to respect. The main thing is that it’s not just about their overall political stance but also about specific political issues.

For example, suppose one spouse supports reproductive rights, and the other is anti-abortion. In that case, it’s going to be difficult to bridge that gap. Or, if one spouse is strongly supportive of LGBTQ+ rights and the other is not, disagreements can arise that are hard to reconcile. Immigration is another big topic, especially in California, where discussions are frequent. When one spouse supports immigration and the other opposes it, there’s going to be friction.

The key is respect, communication, and understanding that neither spouse should try to change the other. If both partners are respectful and willing to listen to each other’s views, they can stay together and grow as a couple. It’s when one or both dig their heels in the sand and refuse to budge that problems arise.

This is the only way. If someone says, “I’m for immigration” or “I’m against immigration,” and insists that their spouse must agree or else—that kind of request does not work in a marriage. Marriage is about, as I always say, compromise, communication, and trust. If any of these three are lacking, the marriage will not be on stable ground and is likely to fall apart.

One other point I wanted to mention is that sometimes a spouse may disagree with their partner but choose not to be vocal about it. That is even worse because it leads to resentment building over time. Resentment in a marriage will, without fail, lead to divorce 10 out of 10 times.

It’s better if spouses are opposites on an issue or political candidate but can talk and communicate about it. That’s healthier than silently thinking, Oh my gosh, I’m afraid I have to disagree with my spouse, but I’m not going to voice it because they’ll get upset.

Jacobsen: How does illness play into this as well? Something that may not be changeable in any immediate sense—how does that affect the long term, as part of life, as people age?

Padideh: People often forget their marriage vows, especially the part that says, in sickness and in health. We see an increase in what’s known as gray divorce, where individuals over the age of 50 are divorcing, and these cases often coincide with health issues coming to the forefront.

We hear things like, “I don’t want to stay with you; you have cancer; you’re going through chemo or other severe health problems.” Why does this happen? It ties back to the resentment I mentioned earlier. In healthy marriages, this type of abandonment doesn’t occur.

A great example is Pierce Brosnan and his wife. She had throat cancer, gained weight, and went through the entire treatment process. He didn’t care—he stayed by her side. People commented, saying, “This is Pierce Brosnan, Mr. 007, who could be with many women,” but he chose to stand by his wife. That’s a testament to honouring the vows “in sickness and in health.

As a divorce attorney, I see that many people forget those vows. For some, marriage is a contract, while for others, it’s a religious covenant between them and God, making them more hesitant to leave their spouse. For those who view it as a contract, they think, “Well, I can just get divorced; the grass is greener on the other side.”

With the influence of social media, people are constantly seeing what they believe is greener grass. They have instant access through Instagram, Facebook, TikTok, and dating apps, which reinforces the idea that they could find someone new. Whether they’d truly be happier with someone else is another question. Still, the perception that other options exist is always there.

Jacobsen: One of the things that frequently comes up in surveys as, if not the number one, then almost number one reason for divorce is finance. It’s a major factor in every marriage. There is evidence that people on the wealthier end in the United States might emphasize things like love and meaning. Meanwhile, those who are poorer tend to have a more realistic perspective rooted in evidence, which is finances, as it’s a much more immediate concern for them. So, when finance comes up as the top reason or close to it in surveys, it seems that poorer people are more realistic because financial stress is right in front of them.

How does finance play into divorce, and how does it impact divorce concerning different socioeconomic demographics in terms of stress levels?

Padideh: You’re right. Finances play a huge role in both marriage and divorce. If you and your spouse cannot be on the same page about finances, the marriage is not going to last.

Think about it. Suppose one person is constantly spending due to a shopping addiction or gambling, and the other spouse is careful with their money, saving and being thrifty. In that case, that conflict will eventually lead to divorce. I’ve seen this happen many times over my 22 years of practice. So, yes, less affluent people are more aware of financial stress. But here’s another thing to consider:

When people who have money or wealth get a divorce, the process is generally easier for them. They can afford separate attorneys, forensic accountants, therapists for themselves and their children, and even minors’ counsel to represent their children. The process can be smoother for those with financial resources. However, if you don’t have money, you may have to rely on self-help legal services or find a pro bono attorney.

So, finances not only affect the marriage itself but also play a significant role in the divorce process. It’s a two-pronged challenge: dealing with a financially irresponsible spouse or choosing to get divorced and face being a single-income household. We see many mothers going through this dilemma, feeling as though they are already single parents handling everything for their children. They must then consider if they can handle a divorce, knowing they might not receive substantial alimony or child support, especially if their husband is middle or lower income.

Financial issues manifest throughout the entire divorce process—before filing, during the marriage, after filing, and even post-separation. Single mothers, in particular, often struggle to make ends meet. They may need to turn to church pantries and other resources because they cannot make it alone.

So yes, finance is a significant issue and factor in both marriages and divorces.

Jacobsen: How can people going through a divorce—whether it’s gender-specific or not—use strategies to make things more amicable if that’s the ultimate goal? I know that a small percentage of people will use the divorce process as a form of punishment. In regular circumstances involving a high-stress event or process, how can things be made more amicable, healthier, and lead to at least a reasonably equitable resolution?

Padideh: What you mentioned is known as legal abuse. As high-conflict divorce attorneys in Los Angeles and Orange County, we see legal abuse frequently. It’s sometimes called financial abuse as well. To minimize this, I refer to it as the push and pull—where the spouses are pushing and pulling, with each wanting to win. Their egos are heavily involved because they’re now in the divorce process. The best approach is mediation.

Mediation can be done through a private mediator, where the couple works with one lawyer acting as the mediator. The mediator drafts all necessary documents and facilitates discussions, often via Zoom these days, to reach a resolution that benefits both parties. In California, if the couple opts for mediation, they may never have to step foot inside a courthouse. Unfortunately, mediation isn’t effective in cases involving high conflict or when one spouse is narcissistic, and the other is not.

A narcissistic spouse tends to use power, control, legal abuse, and financial abuse to punish the other spouse, particularly if they feel abandoned. In a selfish divorce, the narcissist always sees themselves as the victim, regardless of any wrongdoing on their part, such as infidelity.

That said, there are strategies for those who want to proceed amicably. Mediation and private mediation are options. Another option is collaborative law, which has become popular. When I started my practice 22 years ago, collaborative law was gaining attention, and I was part of that movement. In collaborative law, each spouse has their attorney, and professionals such as forensic accountants can be brought into meetings as needed. The two spouses and their attorneys sign an agreement not to go to court. If the process fails and the couple decides it’s not working, they have to find new attorneys.

In this scenario, signing that document increases the stakes, encouraging a win-win resolution for everyone involved. I always tell my clients that if they prioritize their child and are genuinely child-focused—not just claiming to be—they are more likely to choose mediation or collaborative law. This approach reflects a desire not to fight with the spouse, who is the mother or father of their child, in court. It creates a situation where the mediator helps frame the issues and asks, “How can both of you walk away with what you want?” Even if compromises are made, there is still peace of mind.

Parents need to remember that they will see each other again. I tell my clients that after leaving mediation or court, especially if it’s a litigated case, they will continue to interact. If they share a child, that other parent will be at every soccer match, gymnastics event, or swim competition and will be involved when the child needs a car, graduates, or has children of their own. You might think you’re divorcing them, but they remain part of your life.

So, I always tell my clients to keep their child’s best interest in mind. Children want peace. With my background in psychology, I can say confidently that children crave a peaceful environment.

Children do not want their parents badmouthing each other or fighting. Mediation and collaborative law can achieve that goal and provide a stable environment for the child.

Jacobsen: What about you? For those who are doing this work, how do they keep their sanity?

Padideh: I get asked that a lot, even by clients sometimes. As a divorce attorney, you’re either compassionate and empathetic, understanding the issues quickly—often after the first, second, or third meeting—or you are not. I tell my clients to keep their child first. Divorce is essentially the financial breakdown of a marriage, as it is a contract by nature.

Yes, emotions are involved, and I advise my clients to go to therapy. Some attorneys might say therapy is unnecessary, but I believe in healing and recovery. The statistic is that 86% of people who have been married and divorced get married again within five years. If they are going to remarry, it’s important they heal and recover from their previous marriage and divorce, gaining the ability to self-reflect, which is what a good therapist facilitates. A good therapist does not focus on the other spouse; they help the individual understand their part in the breakdown of the marriage.

In divorce law, especially in Los Angeles and Orange County, you find two types of attorneys: those who care and those who don’t. The ones who don’t care will file anything their client requests, may be sloppy, lack compassion, and might even exhibit narcissistic tendencies. They aim to win at all costs. If you ever see a divorce attorney advertise themselves as “shark” or a “bulldog,” steer clear. Winning at all costs is not the goal, and a good divorce attorney will tell you that nobody wins in a divorce. Every person involved—spouses and children—loses something.

Think about it. Everyone sacrifices something and ends up with a different lifestyle than they anticipated at the start of their marriage. To keep my sanity, I approach cases from a psychological perspective and choose my clients carefully. I always advocate for the innocent spouse or the one who has been victimized, championing the underdog. My faith helps me stay grounded, and I maintain perspective.

I also have hobbies, like horseback riding and hiking with friends, to break up the routine. Since COVID-19, working remotely has become common, but I make a point of shutting down all technology by seven or 7:30 in the evening, and I don’t work on weekends unless there is an emergency.

I tell my clients to keep things in perspective. If they are fighting over something they want so badly, I remind them it’s not worth it. They are paying me, and their spouse is paying their lawyer; they could buy the item new instead. It’s time to let go and move forward. Bringing anything with sentimental value from a toxic marriage into a new home is often better left behind.

I am rare in this space, as I said. There are my type of attorneys, and then there are the others. When we come together on a case, it’s like a battle because we handle divorce cases in the legal system in completely different ways.

Jacobsen: Padideh, thank you so much for your time today.

Padideh: I appreciate it. That’s fine. Thank you so much.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Cities’ Economies and Women’s Choices

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/24

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing, combined with proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Women’s city choices are influenced by economic stability, health access, and safety. Top cities like Columbia, MD, offer high wages and low poverty rates, while cities such as Cleveland and Detroit struggle with high poverty for women. Entrepreneurship and diverse job sectors enhance urban life quality. Addressing the gender pay gap is crucial.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What economic factors impact women’s choice in the city?

Chip Lupo: Women’s choice of city is influenced by a combination of economic, health, and safety factors that directly affect financial stability and well-being. Cities that offer higher wages, lower unemployment, and better access to health care are typically among the most attractive.

For example, Columbia, MD, stands out with its high median earnings for women, along with strong economic conditions and safety measures. Cities with a higher percentage of women-owned businesses such as Anchorage, AK also create favorable environments for women to thrive economically.

Additionally, low female uninsured rates and long-life expectancies further contribute to a city’s appeal by enhancing overall quality of life and health outcomes for women.

Jacobsen: What are the best and worst cities for women?

Lupo: In 2024, Columbia, MD, Fremont, CA, and Huntington Beach, CA top the list of best cities for women, as each offer strong economic opportunities, high health care access, and safety. On the other hand, Jackson, MS, Gulfport, MS, and Brownsville, TX rank among the worst. These cities struggle with high unemployment, low wages, and limited access to resources that impact women’s well-being.

Jacobsen: What factors go into these separations between best and worst?

Lupo: The separations between the best and worst cities for women are driven by a combination of economic, health, and safety factors. High-ranking cities tend to offer higher median wages for women, lower unemployment rates, and better access to healthcare, which directly influence economic stability and quality of life.

For example, Columbia, MD, stands out for its high wages and low female poverty rates. At the other end of the spectrum, cities such Jackson and Gulfport, MS are saddled with higher poverty rates, limited business ownership opportunities, and inadequate health insurance coverage, all of which contribute to poorer outcomes for women.

Jacobsen: What cities are better and worse for women in terms of the poverty rate?

Lupo: When it comes to the poverty rate for women, cities such as Pearl City, HI, Overland Park, KS, and Fremont, CA offer the best conditions, with some of the lowest poverty rates for women in the U.S. These cities provide a combination of high wages and low unemployment, which contribute to a higher standard of living for women.

In contrast, cities like Cleveland, OH, Detroit, MI, and Gulfport, MS have the highest poverty rates for women, where women face significant economic challenges. The gap between the best and worst cities is stark, as poverty rates in Pearl City, HI, are seven times lower than in Cleveland, OH.

Jacobsen: What are wise types of jobs for women to search in the city environment?

Lupo: Urban areas offer strong job opportunities for women in fields such as healthcare, technology, finance, education, law, and media. These sectors not only provide stable, in-demand roles but also emphasize leadership diversity and career advancement. Choosing jobs within these industries can create pathways to successful and rewarding careers.

Jacobsen: Does the gender pay gap play into women’s decision-making for city choice?

Lupo: The gender pay gap significantly affects women’s choices on where to live. Since women earn only 84% of what men make, they may seek cities that offer better economic opportunities and support systems. Cities with higher median earnings, low unemployment, and reduced poverty rates among women, including Columbia, MD and Scottsdale, AZ, offer financial stability that can offset the gender pay gap. Moreover, cities that prioritize women’s health and safety, especially those with accessible healthcare and low uninsured rates, empower women to make choices that enhance their economic independence, security, and well-being.

Jacobsen: How does women’s entrepreneurship improve life quality for women in the city environment?

Lupo: Women’s entrepreneurship enhances quality of life in city environments by empowering women to achieve financial independence and secure leadership roles, which are often scarce in traditional workplaces. Cities that support women entrepreneurs offer more opportunities for women to generate income on their own terms, help reduce the gender pay gap, and foster innovation.

Furthermore, cities with robust networks for women entrepreneurs, such as Columbia, MD, and Fremont, CA, provide vital resources and infrastructure that not only bolster women’s economic standing but also contribute to their overall well-being and societal representation.

Jacobsen: How can local governments make cities better for women to live?

Lupo: Local governments can make cities better for women by focusing on economic opportunities, health, and representation. Supporting women-owned businesses and narrowing the pay gap boosts financial independence. Improving access to affordable healthcare and enhancing safety in public places directly affects quality of life. Finally, placing more women in leadership roles ensures policies reflect women’s needs and perspectives.

Jacobsen: Why is Columbia, MD ranked as the best city for women in 2024?

Lupo: Columbia, MD, ranks as the best city for women in 2024 because of its outstanding showings in economic, health, and safety categories. Most notably, Columbia offers financial empowerment and stability with the country’s highest adjusted median wages for women.

Additionally, its top-three ranks in both economic and health safety metrics mean women here enjoy robust job security, access to quality healthcare, and lower risks of poverty. This environment fosters opportunities for women to thrive, making Columbia a model city for supporting women’s economic well-being, physical health, and safety.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Chip. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Brent Atkinson, Couples Research Institute

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/23

Brent J. Atkinson, Ph.D., Dr. Atkinson is Professor Emeritus of Marriage and Family Therapy at Northern Illinois University. , and Director of Post-Graduate Training at the Couples Research Institute in Geneva, Illinois. He is the principal architect of Pragmatic/Experiential Therapy for Couples, an approach that translates new scientific findings about the brain into practical methods for improving relationships. Atkinson practices at the Couples Clinic in Geneva, Illinois.

Atkinson discusses integrating neurobiology and relationship science to improve couples’ interactions. He emphasizes the importance of individual skills for relationship success, noting how common issues like finances and communication can create conflicts. Atkinson highlights critical findings, such as the harm of contempt and the importance of resilience and compassion in partners. He explains reconditioning automatic responses through mindfulness and structured practices. Atkinson also touches on cultural and biological influences, addressing challenges in diverse relationship dynamics, including same-sex couples.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Brent Atkinson, a prominent expert on couples therapy. You are the principal architect of Pragmatic Experiential Therapy for Couples (PET-C), an approach that integrates neurobiology and relationship science insights to develop practical strategies to enhance relationships. In 1983, while completing your doctoral internship, you became dissatisfied with the conventional approaches to addressing the challenges people experienced in their relationships. Over the past four decades, as co-founder of the Couples Clinic and Research Institute in Geneva, Illinois, what have you found to be the main issues that couples generally face?

Dr. Brent Atkinson: A wide variety of issues can arise in relationships. The most common challenges are well-known, such as dealing with in-laws, managing finances, deciding how time should be spent, and balancing personal time versus time spent together. We work with couples facing a full range of issues.

Jacobsen: When you first experienced dissatisfaction in 1983, how did you envision integrating research and practice? Over four decades, significant advancements in research have taken place. Additionally, many researchers become increasingly interdisciplinary as they deepen their expertise. How has this trend evolved?

Atkinson: The past four decades have seen dramatic changes in my field. When I first started, the field needed a solid empirical foundation. Over the years, landmark studies have emerged. For example, John Gottman and his colleagues pioneered research that identified potential predictors of relationship success and secured federal funding to support their work. This funding enabled them to build a laboratory to observe couples’ interactions, collect physiological data such as heart rates and stress responses, and monitor behaviours. They even had couples stay in apartments fitted with video cameras in every room except the bathroom to analyze daily interactions.

They tracked participants over 15 years to see if their initial observations could predict relationship outcomes. Remarkably, they discovered that by measuring the presence or absence of certain core abilities, they could predict the fate of relationships with over 90% accuracy. This level of predictive accuracy is rare, even in medical science. For example, predicting lung cancer risk in chronic smokers does not reach this degree of precision. This groundbreaking research highlighted that some of the best studies in psychology were emerging from the field of relationships.

When I began, I was frustrated by the lack of empirical support for therapeutic methods. There were many theories, but more solid data was needed. Now, we have pinpointed a core set of abilities that research has shown to be essential. These are not optional skills—couples need to develop them to sustain healthy, long-term relationships, and we now know exactly what those abilities are.

We also know what the alternative behaviours are that do not work. This has become a fairly precise endeavour. I assist people by asking them questions and observing what is happening, specifically looking for the presence or absence of the necessary elements. 

It’s important to note that, contrary to popular belief, the most critical abilities are not “couple” but individual abilities. You cannot on your partner to help you with these crucial skills. In fact, you must execute these skills precisely when your partner makes it most difficult for you.

These essential skills are particularly important when you don’t like the way your partner is thinking or acting. Those who maintain healthy relationships tend to have a combination of toughness and tenderness that helps guide their partner. Unfortunately, most people do not possess these skills. Estimates suggest that only about one in four Americans has the full set of required abilities, which helps explain why the divorce rate remains around 50%. While it has dropped slightly in the past decade or two, many people who stay married are either content or simply making the best of their circumstances.

Jacobsen: What are these practical skills? How do they manifest for those who want a long-term relationship and know how to apply them effectively?

Atkinson: There are connection-related abilities that enable the fostering of deep friendships. Then, there are skills for navigating differences, which is usually usually where I begin with couples. Often, couples are so frustrated with one another that simple acts like holding hands or making eye contact can be difficult. The skills related to disagreements can be divided into two sets.

Atkinson: One category includes openness and flexibility skills. These involve choosing how to respond when disagreeing with your partner’s thoughts or actions. You can either assume your partner is wrong, unreasonable, or acting poorly, or you can suspend judgment. You might consider that you are not on the same page and that neither of you is necessarily wrong.

This tendency to judge a partner as being misguided, inferior, or out of line when they are not is known as erroneous fault-finding. Avoiding Erroneous Fault-Finding is one example of an openness and flexibility skill. Another is the ability to step back during disagreements and find something, even just partially understandable from your partner’s point of view. People who can do this are often headed in a positive direction in their relationship. These abilities are self-serving also: finding something reasonable in what your partner is saying greatly increases the chances that they will reciprocate by finding validity in your perspective.

The other set of skills pertains to a situation everyone encounters at some point: what happens when you feel that you’re being open and flexible, but your partner is not reciprocating? You’re putting in the effort, being as sweet as can be, but your partner remains closed-minded and inflexible. You’re trying your best, but it feels one-sided. Your partner may not seem to be trying at all.

So, what do you do? Unfortunately, there is much bad advice about this situation. Much of it is advice I grew up with—my father was a minister and would have told me to “take the high road,” to not “stoop to that level,” and to “be the bigger person.” However, the problem with this approach is that, among all the things researchers have found to be damaging to relationships, one of the worst is when one partner places themselves on a higher plane than the other, considering themselves more relationally adept, mature, or a better partner.

Jacobsen: So, what happens if you’re trying to be reasonable and your partner is not?

Atkinson: If you keep taking it without standing up for yourself and you’re trying to be the “bigger person,” it’s only a matter of time before you start feeling contempt toward your partner. And at that point, you become the one causing more harm than your partner, whom you’ve judged selfish or unreasonable. The second set of skills involves knowing how to stand up for yourself.  You require openness and flexibility from your partner. These standing-up skills only work if you’re willing to give openness and flexibility first. Still, it is often necessary to stand up without turning it into an attack.

In other words, you shouldn’t approach it with, “You’re such an awful person, so now I have to stand up to you.” That won’t get you anywhere. Instead, it’s more effective to have an attitude like, “I don’t blame you for wanting your way, but there are two of us, and we need to work this out.” That demonstrates a skilled way of standing up for yourself, or at least a part of that process.

Jacobsen: Do you find gender differences in how these skills are applied? For instance, do men and women in America tend to lean on different skills? Are they more effective in certain areas than others regarding handling disagreements?

Atkinson: There are differences. Regarding the skills I’m describing, there has been significant discussion about gender differences in behaviour and relationships. When it comes to conflict and handling disagreements, studies indicate that, in heterosexual relationships, women are more prone to what researchers call “harsh startups,” where they bring up a topic critically or abruptly.

Jacobsen: And what about men?

Atkinson: Men, on the other hand, are more prone to something equally problematic: they often struggle to accept influence from their female partners. While some men might appease their partners superficially, true acceptance of influence involves acknowledging, “My partner has a valid point,” rather than resisting, “I’m not going there.” This inability to genuinely accept influence can be just as damaging to the relationship as harsh startups.

Jacobsen: Are there differences in how people handle these skills?

Atkinson: Yes, there are some differences. Regarding what you mentioned, there is a write-up about my work in the Encyclopedia of Couple and Family Therapy. Early in my career, when this research was emerging, I was engaged with it. I was applying it in my life—I’m married and trying to figure out how to make things work smoothly.

We discovered that you can have perfect knowledge of what you need to do and be extremely precise in understanding but still be unable to implement it effectively. This is because when you most need these skills—when you disagree with how your partner is thinking or acting—your brain activates preprogrammed response systems, such as fight, flight, or freeze. However, there are more nuanced responses than just those, and in those moments, your rational, logical, conscious mind is often not accessible to prompt you to behave in ways that do not come instinctively.

I focused on helping people understand the needed skills in my practice’s first 10 or 15 years. I was disappointed that people couldn’t implement that skills when they became more knowledgeable. I realized that more than just education ws needed. While most people do not know the full range of behaviours that can harm relationships, having information alone is insufficient. Breaking long-standing habits requires reconditioning rather than just knowledge.

Jacobsen: How does reconditioning work?

Atkinson: It’s about developing new habits and repeating them frequently to become embedded in your nervous system and start to feel automatic. 

Jacobsen: Does mindfulness play a significant role?

Atkinson: Yes. Mindfulness is a foundational practice that reliably produces positive brain changes. It can reduce nervous system agitation, help people operate less anxiously, promote healthier living, and even contribute to a longer life. We recommend that everyone visiting our office begins mindfulness training, and now good online programs are available. While in-person classes have their advantages, online options are more accessible.

We take mindfulness a step further. Over the years, I’ve encountered individuals who practice mindfulness but are still easily triggered by their partners. We use mindfulness principles but adapt them for real-life application.

Jacobsen: I’ve heard of the term state-dependent learning. Is that relevant here?

Atkinson: Yes, it is. An automatic response pattern must be active when practicing a new behaviour. People need to feel frustration to practice managing it differently. If they only practice calming mental techniques when they are not upset, they will lose access to those techniques when they become upset.

Jacobsen: How do you help people practice this?

Atkinson: We have people engage in daily exercises. Let me start with one practice that we use in our office.

In any relationship, there tends to be one person who is more of a complainer and another who acts as the defender, positioned on the opposite side of the interaction. 

We ask the person who tends to be the complainer to use their phone, which they usually have with them wherever they go. When something happens that irritates them—whether their partner says or does something, or even when they’re upset just thinking about their partner not following through on something—we have them activate the voice recorder on their phone and act as if they are leaving a pointed voicemail for their partner.

We end up with recordings that capture their immediate reaction, or “canned attitude.” We then meet with their partner separately, without the complainer present, and play the recordings at a volume where the complaint or criticism is audible. We observe the partner’s nervous system response as they listen to these recordings and help them become aware of the typical, often counterproductive, thoughts that arise. We also guide them in noticing their physiological reaction.

Jacobsen: How do you motivate them to engage in this process?

Atkinson: Motivation is a significant challenge, as most people come into couples therapy more focused on wanting their partner to change rather than themselves. However, through the therapeutic process, we help individuals understand that their partner will become responsive to them when they develop the full set of needed relationship skills. People with these abilities both encourage and require their partner to treat them well over time.

Once we have a motivated individual listening to their partner’s complaints, we slow the process down. We help them first become aware of their automatic, knee-jerk reactions. Then, we brainstorm to create a practice script of thoughts and behaviors that would be more beneficial if they could replace the unhelpful automatic ones.

Jacobsen: What kind of techniques do you use for this reconditioning?

Atkinson: One effective technique involves a type of slow breathing I recommend called resistance breathing. The person takes a deep breath and then purses their lips to create resistance as they exhale. Studies show this technique helps lower heart rate and calms the nervous system. The aim is to interrupt the automatic responses that drive someone in the wrong direction when they disagree with how their partner is behaving.

This process must be repeated frequently, well beyond the scope of a typical weekly 50—or 60-minute therapy session. Daily practice is essential to recondition the nervous system, especially when the person is feeling upset. It’s about practicing to build new, automatic responses that can replace the old, unhelpful ones.

Another practice we use involves having a person reflect on past upsets with their partner. After an argument has passed, we encourage them to use that memory as a resource because most people can easily become upset again just by recalling a previous disagreement. The person revisits the memory and practices new reactions, going through the process of developing more constructive responses. What are your thoughts or reactions to what I’m describing?

Jacobsen: This is quite interesting. It sounds more grounded in a science-based approach, which was only sometimes emphasized in the past. There’s a strong focus on physiology and the tangible fact that the adult brain is capable of soft rewiring—it happens constantly. You mention the importance of pausing before forming new habits and how mindfulness practice can support these continuous pauses necessary for long-term change. This seems to be an intermittent cognitive process, predominantly a behavioural one, where the pattern must repeatedly change.

Atkinson: Yes, it’s a step-by-step process. Although we emphasize physiology and mental processing first, before communication, ultimately, the goal is to communicate differently with your partner. From decades of experience, we’ve found that people often learn techniques that seem great in theory, like phrasing things diplomatically, but they still internally hold negative thoughts or assumptions. Real progress lies in the internal process—what you tell yourself and your assumptions.

Over the past several decades, studies have shown that heightened physiological responses are not helpful during disagreements. While they are common, the best action is to take a break, calm yourself down, and then try to continue the conversation. So, while communication with your partner is important, addressing physiology and cognition is the first step.

Jacobsen: I want this series to focus less on the negative aspects of relationships and more on what can be done proactively. Of course, acknowledging problematic patterns is important, but only as far as it helps us understand what positive actions to take. You mentioned earlier that only 25% of people have the full skill set necessary for a healthy relationship. For those who lack these skills, what are they typically doing wrong, and what can they do to improve?

Atkinson: There are a few significant pitfalls that people often fall into. Let’s start with two major ones. Some behaviours harm relationships, and it doesn’t take a relationship expert to recognize them. Physical violence, threats of violence, and infidelity (in relationships where there’s an agreement to be faithful) are clear examples. Some couples may have different agreements regarding fidelity, but violating that agreement is damaging for those who do. Other behaviours include lying and speaking negatively about your partner behind their back.

These are obvious issues; we refer to them as the “heavy hitters” because they can do significant damage with one action. However, the big news in relationship science over the past 40 years is recognizing a whole other category of destructive behaviours that are often more subtle. These include patterns that might not seem severe on the surface but have a cumulative negative impact over time.

Jacobsen: Can you elaborate on these types of behaviours?

Atkinson: Yes. Many people are surprised to learn that certain behaviours they grew up with damage relationships. 

One example I mentioned earlier is erroneous fault-finding—acting as if your partner is doing something wrong when they aren’t. It’s important to understand that approximately 69% of partner conflicts are rooted in basic personality differences. These are differences in values or priorities where there isn’t necessarily a “right” or “wrong.” Research has shown a fairly wide range of ways to have a successful relationship.

Other damaging behaviours include criticism, dismissiveness, defensiveness, acting superior, and failing to stand up for yourself when necessary—only to blame your partner for being selfish or controlling.The ability to respectfully stand up for oneself is as vital to a healthy relationship as avoiding selfishness, but that isn’t widely known.

There are two major categories here. First, there are the “heavy hitters” I mentioned earlier—things like physical violence, threats, infidelity, and lying. These can quickly ruin a relationship, and they have no grace period. For example, you can’t cheat on your partner and slowly phase out the other relationship while expecting everything to be fine. The trust is already broken.

On the other hand, there is a grace period for every day “disagreement-related offenses.” These subtle, cumulative offenses create a “death by a thousand paper cuts” effect. In struggling relationships, you often see the heavy hitters andthese everyday offenses at play.

Jacobsen: What happens once couples recognize and address these negative patterns?

Atkinson: The first step in therapy is often to help each partner become aware of how they disrespect each other and begin treating each other with more respect. We can move forward once we reach a baseline where antagonism and contempt have been reduced.

But it’s essential to remember that most of us don’t get married to avoid conflict. We get married because we want the good stuff—to feel cared for, to know we are the most special person in the world to someone, and to feel that our partner enjoys spending time with us. So, while much therapy is focused on increasing respect and reducing negative interactions, the ultimate goal is to cultivate a positive, fulfilling relationship where both partners feel loved and valued.

We want people to have fulfilling relationships. We often see that partners have different ideas about how much connection is enough. This is a subtle yet common issue. We often see one partner who feels dissatisfied and has a history of complaining that their partner isn’t available enough. Meanwhile, the other partner feels content, saying, “I’m satisfied with our connection.” This can lead to thoughts like, “My partner seems kind of needy—maybe they need more friends or something like that.” Essentially, the partners have different levels of desire. One partner wants more connection, and the other feels satisfied with the current level.

The partner who wants more togetherness wishes their mate would be more motivated to connect more frequently. However, how they often try to inspire that connection tends to push the partner further away. For instance, globally, people often criticize their partner for not being motivated enough to connect. This approach has never been successful in human relationships. It reliably has the opposite effect: the partner may comply to avoid criticism, but this is not fulfilling for the person seeking connection—they want genuine, heartfelt engagement.

On the other hand, the partner who feels satisfied often tries to convince their mate that their expectations are too high or that they’re being too needy. This approach also backfires, making the other person feel anxious or angry.

Over the years, we’ve found that dropping judgment about the other person’s level of desire for intimacy is crucial. We’ve also studied how people who successfully spark interest in their partners do so. We begin by coaching each partner on strategies to get more of what they want without pushing the other away. Gradually, they start to move toward each other.

For some people, their brains don’t naturally put them in a state conducive to connection, especially if their partner has a robust desire for togetherness. They can go through the motions of being warm or tender but often without true satisfaction for their partner. The same brain we rewire to change reactions during disagreements can also be trained to produce the moods necessary for a healthy connection. Through daily practices, people can prime their brains to naturally put them in the mood for connection more often.  Throughout therapy, we involve both partners in these practices.

Jacobsen: What cultural factors contribute to pressures hindering long-term relationship success?

Atkinson: Cultural factors play a significant role in shaping how people approach relationships. Societal norms can create pressures to behave in ways not conducive to building strong, lasting partnerships. For example, the idea that needing connection is a weakness can lead people to suppress their desires or view their partner’s needs as excessive. Cultural expectations around independence, gender roles, and emotional expression can also push individuals into patterns that ultimately undermine their relationships. Understanding and addressing these pressures is an important part of therapy, as it helps individuals develop healthier, more authentic ways of relating to each other.

Jacobsen: Over the last 40 years, have you noticed any American cultural trends that have contributed to relationship challenges, either increasing or decreasing?

Atkinson: Absolutely. Americans are known for their hustle-and-bustle lifestyle, being in a constant “doing mode” rather than a “being mode,” as mindfulness advocates describe it. This fast-paced way of life puts people on a treadmill that can lead them to pass by their partner without truly connecting. One partner might say, “Hey, how about some downtime? How about a kiss?”. At the same time, the other is preoccupied, thinking, “The wolves are at the door—I’m trying to keep everything afloat here. I don’t have time for footsie or a kiss.” This pace of life often prevents people from slowing down, sitting with their partner, paying attention, and enjoying the little moments.

The cultural climate, not just in the U.S. but globally, has also been influenced by the level of contempt we see in everyday interactions, especially in the media. This pervasive attitude can seep into relationships and be highly destructive. Even short of outright contempt, there is a cultural assumption that someone must have done something wrong if you’re upset. This mindset overlooks the reality that there can be many equally valid perspectives depending on personality and preference, which sets people up for conflict.

Jacobsen: Are there differences based on cohorts, such as people in their twenties versus those in their thirties or forties, when they first partner up? And what about those who partner up for the second or third time?

Atkinson: Yes, these factors do come into play regarding the stability, longevity, and health of relationships. Regardless of when people partner up, there tends to be a rough patch around the seven-year mark—hence the term “seven-year itch.” Another difficult period often comes between 16 and 20 years, which can coincide with the empty-nest phase for some couples. This pattern holds true whether someone partners up in their twenties, thirties, or beyond.

However, getting married or partnering up in one’s early twenties can be particularly challenging because people often undergo significant changes. The early twenties are full of growth and personal development, which can lead to shifts in values and goals. Additionally, there’s the well-known dynamic where opposites often attract in relationships—someone who is open and expressive may be drawn to a strong, silent type. Initially, this can be exciting and appealing, but those differences can become tension sources over time. What was once intriguing can end up being what drives partners apart. So, while early attraction to opposites can be alluring, it can also become challenging over time.

The qualities that initially seem captivating can become friction points as the relationship progresses. Understanding and navigating these differences is essential for maintaining a healthy, lasting relationship.

Jacobsen: Do opposites attract, do similars attract, or is it somewhere in between?

Atkinson: Yes, that’s a great question. When it comes to demographic variables such as socioeconomic status, religion, and other cultural factors, similars attract. There’s data to support that. However, opposites are often attracted when we look at deeper, more fundamental aspects—especially biological ones. Each of us has a nervous system that seeks homeostasis in unique ways, and what is calming for one person’s nervous system may be agitating for their partner’s.

Nature often prefers diversity, so when it comes to biological and neurological traits, opposites tend to attract. For example, someone might calm themselves by reaching out to others when stressed, calling a friend and saying, “You won’t believe what just happened to me.” On the other hand, another person’s first response to stress might be, “I need space. Give me a moment to process what’s going on.” These two types are often drawn to each other. But when stress hits both simultaneously, it’s a setup for conflict: one person wants closeness, while the other needs space. Neither is doing anything wrong, but their nervous systems respond differently.

Another example is how some people thrive on structure and predictability, finding it calming, while others find it suffocating, like being trapped in a straitjacket. People tend to be attracted to partners who differ in these areas, too. The more biologically rooted the differences are, the more likely people are drawn to partners who are different from themselves.

This idea has been replicated many times, but the initial study that popularized it was the “sweaty T-shirt study” conducted in Switzerland. In this study, men wore the same T-shirt for three days in August to get it good and sweaty and then sealed the shirts in Ziploc bags. Women were asked to come in, sniff the shirts, and rate them from “disgusting” to “I kind of like that; it’s manly.” The study found that women were more attracted to the scent of men whose immune system genes differed, suggesting an evolutionary preference for diversity.

While shared values and cultural background can help partners relate to one another and establish common ground, biological differences can create that initial spark and attraction. This blend of similarity and difference makes relationships intriguing and complex.

It also reflects nature’s wisdom in the idea that opposites attract; diversity in immune system genes can enhance the overall robustness of a couple’s offspring and improve their chances of thriving. While being with someone different from you has challenges, it can lead to a stronger partnership as you navigate life together.

Jacobsen: Are there patterns in communication styles, down to the choice of words or their frequency, that impact relationships? For example, do self-referential words like “I,” “me,” or “mine” affect relationships? Has this been studied?

Atkinson: Yes, different therapeutic approaches often encourage using specific words, such as “I” rather than “you,” to foster better communication. These “I statements” can help prevent blaming and promote self-responsibility in discussions. However, researchers have found that partners only sometimes use these statements in real-life, healthy relationships. While they are useful in therapy, they are not required for successful relationships. On the other hand, certain words to avoid include put-downs or phrases that convey contempt.

Jacobsen: That makes sense since words play such a fundamental role in communication. Although much communication is nonverbal, words can significantly impact, especially during intense moments. While words can be powerful, people may only focus on word choice in the heat of a moment in particularly memorable exchanges. Researchers who place cameras in couples’ homes to observe their interactions have likely cataloged language use to some extent. Still, it has yet to be the primary focus of most research. 

Atkinson: Using subjective, first-person statements is only sometimes prominent outside of a therapeutic context.

Jacobsen: So, is it more about observing emotions and nonverbal cues?

Atkinson: Yes, researchers have learned to focus on the emotions each partner experiences and how they are communicated, which is often done nonverbally. However, there are verbal correlates. For example, here’s a surprising finding: we initially assumed that partners who were easily upset would struggle in relationships. It made intuitive sense that frequent emotional upsets would be detrimental, leading to larger conflicts over time. However, we found that there are happily married or partnered couples where both people get upset often. When researchers coded their interactions, we saw that their ability to handle these emotions constructively, rather than the frequency of the emotions themselves, played a significant role in the health of their relationship.

Researchers have indeed developed elaborate coding systems for emotions. Surprisingly, anger does not correlate with poor relationship outcomes, but disgust does. You can be angry—even seething with rage—which isn’t inherently bad. You might think or say, “I’m so mad at you right now,” and that’s different from expressing disgust or contempt, such as, “You and your whole family—I should have known what to expect.” The latter statement is full of contempt and disgust.

So good old-fashioned anger isn’t necessarily damaging. Anger can inhibit a person from engaging in the productive parts of a conversation—like finding something understandable in their partner’s point of view—but it’s not inherently harmful. Researchers have found that couples where both partners were labelled “volatile” can still do well if they are good at repair. These couples may express anger but engage in reparative behaviours and approach their next conversation with less anger.

However, disgust is different. A person expressing disgust tends to use name-calling and put-downs. It’s not just the words themselves; the feeling of disgust drives these words and causes harm. The impact of that underlying contempt is most damaging to the relationship.

Jacobsen: That’s a fascinating distinction. What about research into open relationships or relationships among different sexual orientations, such as those involving gay men and lesbian couples? How do these factors influence how they can achieve healthy, long-lasting relationships? Are the core patterns the same?

Atkinson: Studies indicate that the foundational patterns needed for healthy relationships are pretty much the same across different types of partnerships. However, the challenges they face can differ. For instance, gay and lesbian couples often deal with unique stressors related to extended family acceptance and societal judgment, which may not be as prominent for heterosexual couples. Decisions about whom to come out to and how to navigate social acceptance can add complexity.

Despite these stressors, the basic skills for handling disagreements and fostering positive communication apply universally. These skills are relevant in romantic partnerships and all types of relationships, including international relations, where disputes can arise. It’s interesting to see how these abilities extend beyond couple dynamics to broader relational contexts.

To reiterate, the biggest finding—the most destructive factor researchers have identified—is contempt. When someone perceives their partner as talking down to them or conveying superiority, it can evoke deep rage and resentment. This is often the death knell for a relationship if it isn’t addressed early in therapy.

If contempt cannot be corrected, we tackle it within the first few weeks of therapy. With intervention, the relationship is likely to recover. Fortunately, we can often guide couples to rewrite their narratives about their relationships, moving toward a healthier dynamic.

That concept extends beyond romantic relationships. It’s interesting when we consider societal contexts, too. For example, “America is the greatest nation in the world” is a controversial statement. The truth of it may not only be debatable but the statement can also convey an unintended sense of superiority to the rest of the world. That mindset can create unnecessary friction, similar to how contempt damages relationships.  The idea is that contempt and superiority impacts relationships at all levels, not just marriages or partnerships.

Jacobsen: Do you have any favourite relationship quotes for a lighter closing?

Atkinson: Oh, you’ve put me on the spot! I’m drawing a blank now, but I’d be happy to think of some and email them to you later. It was a pleasure speaking with you, Scott. 

Jacobsen: Thanks so much for your time today. 

Atkinson: Thank you, and have a great day. Goodbye.

Relationship Quotes from Atkinson:

Love cannot be negotiated.  It must be inspired.

The way you respond to the worst in your partner largely determines whether you’ll get something better in the future or not.


You can’t make your partner change; you can only make it more inconvenient for them to stay the same.

Effective partners know how to stand up for themselves without putting their mates down.  

People who succeed in their relationships require that they be treated with respect while making it very easy for their partners to do so.

Attempts to persuade your partner to be reasonable when your partner hasn’t the least bit of interest in doing so will likely fuel your partner’s unreasonableness.

The unwillingness or inability to stand up for yourself and require equal regard without making a big deal of it when your partner is being selfish or controlling is just as harmful to the relationship as is your partner’s selfish or controlling behavior.

All of us want connection with our mates, but not all of us need the same type or amount.

Criticizing your partner for not putting enough time and effort into connecting with you will make them want to connection with you even less.

Biting your tongue isn’t enough (Criticism is communicated nonverbally every time you believe your partner is doing something wrong or performing in a sub-standard way).

Most people who are in distressed or depleted relationships are trying to get more responsiveness from their partners in ways that are highly predictive of partner unresponsiveness.

If you want responsiveness and caring from your partner, then you need to learn to think and act like people who almost always get responsiveness and caring from their partners (and you need to stop thinking and acting like people who rarely get the kind of responsiveness and caring they’d like to have.”

It’s not how much time is spent connecting that determines how good the relationship is — it’s the quality of the connection. High quality happens when both people are equally invested in connectedness. When one partner is more invested than the other, quality drops.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Matthew Johnson, Life Transitions and Relationships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/22

Dr. Matthew Johnson is a researcher specializing in the development of couple relationships. He is a co-investigator of the Edmonton Transitions Study (ETS), a longitudinal study tracking Edmontonians’ life transitions from ages 18 to 50, with a focus on mental health, marital timing, and subjective well-being. Additionally, Dr. Johnson analyzes data from the German Family Panel (pairfam), exploring topics such as household dynamics, partner support, and immigrant couple relations. His work bridges developmental psychology and relationship science, offering insights into the evolving dynamics of intimate partnerships. Dr. Johnson welcomes dedicated graduate students eager to contribute to the study of couple relationships.

Johnson shared insights from this 40-year longitudinal research on over 900 Edmontonians, examining life transitions, including marriage and parenthood. Findings reveal that high-quality relationships positively impact mental health, with lasting love and stability being achievable norms. Sacrifice within relationships fosters mutual commitment and satisfaction, while poor mental health can strain partnerships. Immigrant couples, despite challenges, develop similar relationship trajectories to native-born couples when matched socioeconomically. Trends like declining marriage and birth rates align with broader Western patterns. Johnson emphasizes that addressing relationship challenges proactively is vital, as unresolved issues often persist or worsen.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Matt Johnson, co-investigator for the Edmonton Transitions Study, alongside Drs. Harvey Krahn and Nancy Galambos. This longitudinal study follows over 900 Edmontonians across eight waves, ages 18 to 50. Dr. Johnson, what do the findings reveal when examining these transitions, particularly from committed intimate unions to raising children?

Dr. Matthew Johnson: The Edmonton Transitions Study is a comprehensive examination of human development. It began in the mid-1980s with 983 high school seniors from the Edmonton area. These participants have been followed up to eight times over 32 years.

Initially, the study focused on transitioning from school to work during a particularly challenging time. The mid-1980s recession in Canada brought record-high youth unemployment rates, sparking significant interest in how young people would navigate the transition into a hostile job market with limited opportunities. The original intention was for the study to be short-term, tracking participants from age 18 to 25, the critical period for entering the workforce.

As research interests evolved, the study expanded. By the late 1990s, the research team, now including new members, decided to follow up with participants again. At age 32, the study resumed, broadening its scope to include family and personal life, education, and employment. Subsequent waves of data collection occurred in 2010, at age 43, and in 2017, when participants were 50. Plans are underway for the next wave, scheduled for 2025, at which point participants will be, on average, 58 years old. This will increase the study duration to 40 years.

The Edmonton Transitions Study has produced approximately 90 scientific publications, contributing valuable insights into employment, mental health, relationships, and family dynamics. Longitudinal studies of this scope and duration are rare, particularly in Canada, making it one of the longest-running studies of its kind.

Jacobsen: What initially drew you to this study, and what findings stand out most?

Johnson: My specific area of expertise is relationships, which drew me to the study. It offers a unique opportunity to examine how relationship dynamics evolve over decades, from formative years in late adolescence and early adulthood (ages 18 to 20) to midlife partnerships. Some of the most compelling findings relate to mental health. For example, individuals who experienced improvements in mental health between ages 18 and 25—such as reduced depression, better anger management, and increased self-esteem—tended to report higher-quality intimate relationships in midlife. These relationships were marked by joint decision-making, mutual support, and greater confidence in their longevity.

Jacobsen: How do individuals’ projections of their future well-being compare to the reality of their subjective well-being decades later?

Johnson: When considering how individuals project their well-being into the future and later reflect on it, an intriguing question arises: how accurate are these projections in shaping subjective well-being decades later? While we have not specifically examined this question, we know that memory bias significantly influences retrospective well-being assessments.

Jacobsen: When asking people about their past experiences, how do you account for the potential bias in their recollections?

Johnson: That’s a great point. When people reflect on the past, their memories are often biased. To address this, we focus on what’s happening in the present. For example, we ask questions like, “How depressed do you feel now?” or “How able are you to control your anger now?” This allows us to capture their experiences rather than relying solely on retrospective accounts.

That said, in our most recent survey, we also asked participants to forecast their future—what they’re most looking forward to as they near retirement. This aligns with your question: Are people’s forecasts about their future well-being accurate, or do they exhibit similar biases to those present when reflecting on the past?

Jacobsen: How does marital timing predict future subjective well-being?

Johnson: One key area we’ve studied is how the timing of life transitions—such as marriage—affects future outcomes. Cultural and societal norms often dictate when people “should” accomplish major milestones: finishing education, starting a career, moving out of their parent’s home, getting married, and having children.

When we examined the timing of marriage, we categorized individuals as transitioning early, on time, or late relative to their age group. Our findings revealed that transitioning to marriage on time or late is associated with better future well-being than transitioning early. Early transitions to marriage often occur before individuals have established key aspects of their adult lives, such as completing education or settling into a career. These premature transitions frequently coincide with parenthood and other responsibilities, setting people on a trajectory that may not be as fulfilling in the long term.

Jacobsen: What about individuals who never make these transitions, such as marriage or parenthood?

Johnson: A population segment only sometimes follows the traditional life course. In the Edmonton Transitions Study, some participants have not married or had children, and we’ve also looked at these cases.

We found that, compared to those who did not marry, individuals who got married reported greater happiness, were less depressed, and had higher self-esteem in midlife.

Relationship science more broadly supports this, showing the protective effects of being in a relationship, particularly a high-quality one. Of course, selection effects are at play—people who enter high-quality relationships often differ meaningfully from those who don’t. These differences may partially explain why being in a relationship is associated with better outcomes.

Jacobsen: Can you explain the balance between selection effects and the protective effects of being in a relationship, particularly in terms of how it influences mental health?

Johnson: Absolutely. There is a selection component—people who form healthy relationships often already have better career paths, health, and well-being. These qualities make them more attractive as partners. However, the protective effect of being in a relationship is also robust and enduring. Being in a relationship provides insulation against life’s hardships and can manifest in various ways, such as improved mental health.

Jacobsen: What about immigrant couples? How do their relationships develop over the long term, and what challenges do they face in adapting to a new country?

Johnson: That’s a fascinating question. The immigration process represents a significant upheaval involving adapting to a new culture, potential language barriers, and substantial life changes. While I didn’t examine this through the Edmonton Transitions Study, I did explore it using data from another source: the German Family Panel.

The German Family Panel is the largest study of family relationships worldwide. It began with 12,000 participants covering three generations, including their partners, children, and parents. This study followed these families over 14 years and provided a unique opportunity to examine immigrant couples.

In this context, I could compare immigrant couples to native-born couples living in Germany. We matched them based on education, income, socioeconomic status, and relationship length. By creating these matched comparisons, we could isolate differences that might be specifically due to immigration rather than disparities in wealth, career type, or education levels.

We found that, for the most part, immigrant couples developed their relationships similarly to native-born couples. Despite the challenges of adapting to a new culture, immigrant couples demonstrated comparable relationship trajectories when matched on key socioeconomic factors.

Jacobsen: How do immigrant couples compare conflict, satisfaction, and self-disclosure to native-born couples?

Johnson: The amount of conflict they faced was comparable, their satisfaction levels were similar, and the types of self-disclosure they engaged in were very similar. While there were a few differences, the bigger takeaway was the striking similarity between immigrant and native-born couples.

One important caveat to that study is that most immigrant couples had moved to their new country several years prior. We might observe more pronounced differences if we studied and followed newer immigrants over time. However, I am aware of no studies to collect longitudinal data on newly immigrated couples.

Jacobsen: Regarding longitudinal data, what trends have you observed over the decades, particularly in Canada, such as declining marriage and birth rates?

Johnson: Yes, these are important trends. While I have yet to study Canada in detail specifically, Canada broadly follows trends seen in other Western nations, such as declining marriage rates and decreasing birth rates. Canada does have some unique characteristics compared to its peers, particularly its high proportion of immigrants and larger Indigenous population compared to other G7 nations. However, the overall trends of lower birth and marriage rates align closely with those of Western countries.

Jacobsen: Do factors such as political affiliation, religious beliefs, or socioeconomic and educational differences play a smaller or larger role in subjective well-being within marital situations?

Johnson: Great question. Certainly, beliefs, values, socioeconomic status, and education influence how relationships unfold over time. While I have yet to examine this in detail in my work, the broader field of relationship science has explored these dynamics.

As politics have become more polarizing, these factors may play a larger role. However, most couples tend to partner with individuals who are more similar to them than different. Even when there are apparent differences, such as political affiliations, deeper analysis often reveals shared underlying values, philosophies, and beliefs. Still, differences do arise and need to be negotiated within relationships. If managed well, they can avoid becoming liabilities.

Jacobsen: How significant are social and personality factors, such as reciprocity and a willingness to support or sacrifice for a partner, in determining the health and longevity of a relationship?

Johnson: Sacrifice is a particularly interesting relationship process because it’s a potent signal of commitment. When one partner sacrifices for the other, it demonstrates a willingness to prioritize the relationship over individual needs. This kind of reciprocity—supporting each other during stressful moments and being willing to make sacrifices—plays a critical role in the health and longevity of the relationship. Partners that consistently demonstrate these qualities tend to have stronger, more enduring marriages.

Jacobsen: Sacrifice seems to play a significant role in relationships. Why do you think it’s so impactful?

Johnson: Sacrifice is impactful because it signals commitment. Why else would someone forego their interests unless they saw a future with their partner? When one partner sacrifices, the other often reciprocates, creating what scholars call a “mutual cyclical growth process.” In this process, one person’s sacrifice can encourage the other to do the same, fostering a positive cycle of mutual regard.

This is noteworthy because most cycles in relationships tend to be negative. For example, couples can fall into patterns of negative interactions—arguing, having conflict, or even recurring disagreements about specific topics. These patterns often spiral downward. Sacrifice, however, stands out as an exception. It’s a process that partners can implement to promote positive behaviours and strengthen their relationship.

When sacrifices are made and maintained over time in a balanced way—avoiding a “tit for tat” mentality or becoming overly one-sided—they are linked to more satisfying relationships and higher commitment. A benevolent, mutual sacrificial process is a hallmark of strong, enduring partnerships.

Jacobsen: What about the link between marital satisfaction and mental health? Is marriage overall conducive to long-term mental health?

Johnson: There are certainly some protective effects of marriage on mental health, but the quality of the marriage is far more important. If someone asked me whether it’s better to get married or to be in a good relationship—marriage or not—I would say the bigger effects come from relationship quality. Being in a high-quality relationship is conducive to good mental health. It reduces stress and brings numerous other benefits.

Conversely, poor mental health can strain relationships. The two domains—mental health and relationship quality—are mutually reinforcing. There are even treatment protocols for depression, anxiety, and other mental health problems that involve both partners in addressing the issue. This underscores how closely linked these areas are.

Jacobsen: What is the average age for first marriage in Canada for men and women?

Johnson: Canada’s average age for first marriage is now over 30. While I don’t know the exact numbers, it’s around 31 for women and 33 for men. However, you’d need to verify that with a reliable source like Statistics Canada—they provide precise answers to these questions [Ed. Information from StatsCan here: https://www150.statcan.gc.ca/n1/daily-quotidien/221114/cg-b006-eng.htm.]

Jacobsen: Do you have any insights on why people typically get married in Canada?

Johnson: No, I don’t have specific data on that. However, societal norms, expectations, and family influences play a significant role. Marriage is a part of our culture, and it’s also widespread across human societies. Couples often formalize their intimate unions in some shape or form, and in this context, we call it marriage.

Jacobsen: Matt, what is the big message from your research on intimate partnerships over the decades?

Johnson: Great question. I was invited to give a talk about a year ago, and I reflected on this extensively. When I look across all the work I’ve done—and situate it within the broader context of relationship science—the key takeaway is this:

For the past 15 years, the field has shifted from viewing relationships as constantly growing, changing, and reacting to life’s challenges to recognizing that many relationships remain relatively stable over long periods. This isn’t to say couples don’t face challenges, but most can navigate these and maintain happy, satisfying relationships.

I teach a course on intimate relationships at the University of Alberta. I start by showing students data supporting this idea. My goal for the semester is to convince them—based on scientific evidence—that lasting love is possible. Studies show that satisfying relationships can and do last for most couples for decades. That, to me, is a central message: lasting love is possible.

Another important takeaway is that stability is more common than change. If there are issues in your relationship, they won’t naturally resolve themselves. The more natural course is for those issues to persist or even deteriorate. Some researchers argue that deterioration is more common than improvement. Therefore, if things aren’t great, you need to take action to improve them. On the flip side, if your relationship is in a good place, it’s reasonable to expect it will stay that way—so long as you continue doing the things that keep you close, connected, and able to adapt to life’s challenges.

Jacobsen: Matt, thank you so much for your time today. I truly appreciate it.

Johnson: My pleasure. Take care, Scott.

Jacobsen: Sounds good. Take care, Matt. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Wendy Walsh, Gen Z Off Dating Apps

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/21

Known as America’s Relationship Expert, Dr. Wendy Walsh is an award-winning television journalist, radio host & podcaster, and the author of three books on relationships and thousands of print and digital articles. More than 1.5 million people follow her sage advice on social media. She holds a Ph.D. in Clinical Psychology and teaches in the Psychology Department at California State University Channel Islands and has been the host of “The Dr. Wendy Walsh Show” on iHeart Radio’s KFI AM 640 since 2015. Walsh is also a former Emmy-nominated co-host of “The Doctors,” as well as former host of the nationally syndicated show “EXTRA.” She was named a Time Magazine Person of the Year in 2017 after speaking out about harassment at a major news network.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What are the main reasons 99% of Gen Z are tired of dating apps?

Dr. Wendy Walsh: They are tired of becoming victims of paradox of choice. The more choice the human brain is given the less likely they are to make a choice, and when they do make a choice, they are less likely to value that choice. They get stuck scrolling instead of dating.

Jacobsen: How have dating apps failed to meet the expectations of Gen Z?

Walsh: Few of them left their phones to go on an actual date!! Besides paradox of choice, there’s another psychological phenomenon that happens with dating apps. People message a number of potential mates and become satisfied by the texts themselves. Messaging with a number of people at the same time create a combined emotional satiation, that for many is enough. They lose the desire to go out on a date. I call it dating apathy!

Jacobsen: Why are nearly 40% of Gen Z women using dating apps more as a casual pastime?

Walsh: As mentioned, paradox of choice and emotional satiation with texts. Dating apps are not designed to find you a mate. They would lose all their customers if people were actually finding mates and leaving the app. The gamification of mate selection makes people addicted to the app Instead of romance.

Jacobsen: How prevalent is the issue of fake profiles?

Walsh: Fake profiles are very prevalent, as are married people pretending to be single, and pure romance scammers, out for money. However, they most likely target, older, divorcees, and widows and widows who may not be as tech savvy as Gen Z.

Jacobsen: What alternatives are people using for potential partners outside of apps?

They are using apps like LinkedIn and Instagram. Also, there’s a new trend —- wait for it —- it’s very exciting. It’s called flirting in public!!! Gen Z is finally learning how to do it.

Jacobsen: How does the pursuit of external validation through swiping impact mental health?

Walsh: Whether it’s the number of views and likes on social media, or the number of matches on a dating app, technology has created a false idea of how to calculate our own self-worth. When humans rely on this kind of validation, that can vary from day-to-day, it can play havoc with mental health, causing anxiety and depression.

Jacobsen: How do the dating app experiences of Gen Z men and women differ?

Walsh: Men and women use dating apps very differently. Men essentially swipe right on every single woman to see who likes them. Women take time to scrutinize profiles, examining photographs, reading into the words they wrote. Women are far more selective.

Jacobsen: What are likely the future of dating apps?

Walsh: The dating apps that will be most successful will be the ones that help people get into the real world very quickly. They may be dating apps that provide fewer matches to prevent paradox of choice. They may include video conferencing, or group dating in the real world. They also will eventually have to provide identity verification, and background checks. In the past, they’ve refrained from doing that because they felt it made them more liable. But they’re going to have to protect users more.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Walsh.

Source: Dr Wendy Walsh

Attribution: https://www.datingadvice.com/

More about Wendy: https://www.datingadvice.com/about-us/wendyw

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Scott Barry Kaufman, Human Potential and Psychology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/21

Dr. Scott Barry Kaufman is a renowned psychologist, speaker, and best-selling author dedicated to fostering creativity and self-actualization. Known for his pioneering work in intelligence and human potential, he challenges traditional measures of success, advocating for a personalized approach that emphasizes individual journeys over standardized assessments. Dr. Kaufman hosts “The Psychology Podcast,” one of the most popular in its field, and is among the top 1% most cited scientists globally. With teaching stints at Columbia University, University of Pennsylvania, and NYU, he has published extensively, including the influential Transcend: The New Science of Self-Actualization, redefining Maslow’s hierarchy for modern times.

Kaufman shares insights from his career dedicated to exploring human potential beyond traditional metrics like IQ. He emphasizes that the mindset—whether one views themselves as a victim or empowered—can greatly impact achieving goals. Kaufman discusses how cultural shifts toward competitive victimhood influence behavior and contrasts this with the empowerment needed for true self-actualization. He reflects on his evolution from viewing intelligence as solely multiple to recognizing general intelligence’s role. His new book, forthcoming in April, highlights how personal narratives shape potential and resilience amidst challenges.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Scott Barry Kaufman. He has an extensive and impressive background in intelligence research and humanistic psychology. He is an author and educator with a broad reach in significant psychological constructs. What was the first time you became genuinely interested in both the conceptual and academic aspects of intelligence, creativity, and human potential?

Dr. Scott Barry Kaufman: I have been interested in this topic for as long as I can remember. As a child, I was placed in special education due to an auditory learning disability, and many people dismissed me as unintelligent. However, I worked hard to prove that I was capable. Much of my career as a scientist has been dedicated to finding alternative ways of measuring potential and identifying people’s greatest sources of self-actualization and human potential—beyond traditional IQ tests or cognitive abilities, which have often been the primary focus of K-12 education.

Jacobsen: I enjoy interviewing individuals who dedicate their lives to focusing on one or two key topics. Since you have concentrated on creativity, intelligence, and potential, what are the currently accepted or established perspectives or definitions of human intelligence and creativity?

Kaufman: There is no single answer, as scientists rarely agree on everything. That’s different from the answer you wanted to hear. <laughs> I once explained on Sam Harris’s podcast that intelligence is learning, understanding, and perceiving what is. Imagination is the capacity to envision, learn, and perceive what could be. Creativity involves the deep integration of intelligence and imagination.

Jacobsen: How do you approach self-actualization, especially when coaching individuals seeking assistance in becoming more self-actualized? Is this rooted in Abraham Maslow’s work?

Kaufman: Yes, it is. When I began my career, I believed intelligence was the most crucial aspect to address for potential. However, as I expanded my focus to include creativity and self-actualization, I realized it is not our role to prescribe or limit what people can achieve. Instead, it is our responsibility to help individuals discover what they most want to actualize and provide them with the resources to contribute positively to society.

I have developed various scales and conducted numerous studies to explore how people can achieve self-actualization. My research on creativity and openness to experience, a personality trait I have studied extensively, is highly relevant to understanding self-actualization. Openness to experience is likely the best personality predictor of self-actualization.

Jacobsen: Are there ways in which someone’s personality structure could be less aligned with openness to experience when it comes to self-actualization, as opposed to more aligned?

Kaufman: It depends on what one wants to actualize.

Jacobsen: That’s an excellent point. 

Kaufman: For instance, if someone harbours hatred and resentment and seeks to actualize the potential to oppress others, openness to experience might not be the most relevant predictor. But that is not the kind of self-actualization I am referring to. Overall, creative actualization tends to be generative and improve the world. 

Jacobsen: When you’re doing this work with people, how are they typically defining making the world a better place? Or is it as individual as a fingerprint?

Kaufman: I don’t focus on that metric as much as the belief that if we help people with their purpose, exploration, and motivation for giving more love to the world, the world will be a better place. I have developed a reimagining of Maslow’s hierarchy of needs and created a coaching program called Self-Actualization Coaching.

We’re launching a six-month program next year, a full certification program for coaches. With Self-Actualization Coaching, we focus on the needs for safety, security, connection, and self-esteem, which form the “boat” itself. We also help people open their sails and move toward their most valued port with a spirit of exploration, love, and purpose. Growth is the deep integration of exploration, love, and purpose. Not everyone has to make a grandiose impact on the world, like starting a new nonprofit or scaling up the kazoo. I am a big advocate for “being love” and creating synergy with one’s being in a good way for oneself and the world. 

Jacobsen: Do you use any of the mentalism of “The Amazing Dr. Scott” in Self-Actualization Coaching?

Kaufman: That’s a hilarious question. I sometimes get clients who say, “Show me a trick. Read my mind.” I would love to put on a stage show called Unlock Your Mind with The Amazing Dr. Scott, where I show people in the audience that they are using only a small part of their full capacity. That’s a project I’m interested in and am working on securing funding for.

Jacobsen: Does the Human Potential Lab work inform the Self-Actualization Coaching work?

Kaufman: The Human Potential Lab is the solo series of my podcast, where I try to educate the audience publicly. I hope all these efforts feed into an integrated system. If my goal hierarchy is cohesive, then at every level of analysis, each goal should contribute to my top-level aim of increasing human potential. I hope they’re all synergistic.

Jacobsen: How do you view that work from a humanistic psychology model? You have the work around self-actualization, academic research, and studies in intelligence and creativity. How does a humanistic psychology frame bring much of this together, if at all?

Kaufman: The field of humanistic psychology? Well, there isn’t a significant field of humanistic psychology anymore. It was quite influential in the sixties, but it has since diminished. However, there are still psychotherapists with a humanistic orientation and some training programs in the country. The general philosophy of humanistic psychology is that we want to understand what makes people feel fully alive. We are interested in the experiential nature of their being and how it contributes to well-being, contribution, and social action. Some psychologists still embody that spirit, but it is no longer a dominant movement. I would say it’s a small minority within the field of psychology.

Compared to humanistic psychology, positive psychology receives much more funding, has more conferences, and has more practitioners in my field. However, I have a deep love for humanistic psychology. I identify as a humanistic psychologist. Humanistic psychology values the dignity and worth of each individual. That is something distinct from focusing solely on happiness or achievement. It has an inherent value of its own.

Jacobsen: Do you think it’s a broader view of human potential than happiness or achievement?

Kaufman: Yes. It’s a philosophy. Maslow saw it as a philosophy. He wanted a broader movement. I would love to believe that I am part of a modern-day human potential movement grounded in science. In my view, that is what the modern-day human potential movement should look like. 

Jacobsen: Regarding what you mentioned about the human potential movement, what are some critiques or criticisms you receive that have an evidentiary basis compared to those that are less grounded in evidence and more rhetorical?

Kaufman: I don’t get much criticism. I don’t know. No one criticizes me. I am trying to understand what that means. Maybe it means I need to be more famous. <chuckles> I don’t know. I am fortunate to have the respect of my colleagues. I work hard to build an evidential basis for my arguments. I’m careful when making bold claims. I would face criticism if I were more flippant, impulsive, or grandiose in my claims, but I prefer to build things bit by bit.

Kaufman: The Self-Actualization Coaching program has been years in the making, following iterations of smaller three-day courses that we put on. So, my careful style makes it less open to criticism. A good scientist will take in new evidence and change their opinion.

Jacobsen: What beliefs or ideas have you held as true or tentatively true in the earlier parts of your career but have since changed or adapted based on new evidence?

Kaufman: One significant example is that I initially believed human intelligence was only multiple—that Howard Gardner was correct, and multiple intelligences were all there was. I thought there was no such thing as general intelligence. I changed my mind after researching IQ and realizing both are true. We each have a unique profile of cognitive strengths and weaknesses but differ in general intelligence– this includes our ability to integrate and hold information in working memory and our capacities for visual-spatial reasoning, verbal comprehension, and basic cognitive functions that influence multiple abilities. That is one area where I changed my view.

I also changed my mind about the biggest predictor of human potential. I have a book coming out next April where I argue that while most of my career has been focused on ability, intelligence, and creativity, the biggest predictor of potential is the story you tell yourself about your setbacks and experiences. Whether you maintain a victim mindset or feel empowered to continue and have hope despite setbacks seems to be a much more powerful factor in reaching your goals than I previously focused on. 

Jacobsen: Do you think general culture leans more toward a victim or empowerment mindset when people face the ups and downs of life?

Kaufman: I believe our culture is currently entrenched in a victim mindset, which is part of why I followed this cultural trend and wrote this book. Everyone tends to view themselves as the victim of the opposing side. Additionally, it is rarely acknowledged that multiple victims can exist simultaneously. We are living in an age of competitive victimhood. It has become a privileged position to be seen as the victim rather than the perpetrator.

Everyone competes for that coveted spot of being perceived as the victim. Of course, there are real victims, and that is true. However, many people understand the power that comes with being perceived as the victim. Does that make sense, Scott Jacobsen?

Jacobsen: That makes sense, Dr. Kaufman. Regarding that, I have heard and been told differing opinions about North American culture becoming more narcissistic over the last few decades. If that is true, in your expert opinion, is it related to the phenomenon you mentioned about victimhood, or is it unrelated?

Kaufman: It’s a great question. I have yet to conduct an in-depth analysis myself. Still, I have read works by those who have, such as Bradley Campbell, who wrote extensively about different cultural dynamics, including honour and victimhood cultures. There has been a rise in victimhood culture in the United States, which has not necessarily been observed globally or in previous periods of American culture. So, yes, there is a rise. And I’ll leave it at that for now.

Jacobsen: Let’s do a quick recap. You have the Self-Actualization Coaching program. You have the Human Potential Lab. You are in the top 1% of most cited researchers globally in psychology. You practice mentalism under the title “The Amazing Doctor Scott.” This seems to follow in the “The Amazing James Randi tradition.” You are also classically trained as a vocalist and cellist, showcasing a broad range of professional and personal development.

Kaufman: I would say more like “The Amazing Kreskin,” who was a mentalist, in particular.

Jacobsen: You are someone who has engaged in building a lot of professional and personal potential in various ways. What areas would you want to expand your potential outside of your upcoming book in April if you had the time?

Kaufman: Probably in the romantic relationship domain. Is that too personal?

Jacobsen: No. This is an open space. You can say whatever you want.

Kaufman: Well, I want to be a good man. 

Jacobsen: How are you defining a good man? What would you consider a good man to be in a perennial sense or the current era?

Kaufman: I would define it as someone who respects women. Beyond that, it’s about being a good human. There isn’t anything specifically unique to being a good man beyond the traits that any person would strive for to be good, such as being a responsible citizen and taking ownership of their own body and mind. That’s an existential definition.

Owning the space you take up, in a humanistic psychology kind of way—that’s what it means to be a good human. However, being a good man boils down to respecting women.

Jacobsen: What are some of the ways you see, as a psychologist, that women are disrespected in America today, particularly in emotional or psychological terms?

Kaufman: Well, when it comes to leadership positions, that’s a significant area. I have a separate research program focused on the “light triad” of leadership versus the “dark triad” of leadership, and we find significant sex differences. For example, the upper tail of the dark triad—traits like narcissism, Machiavellianism, and psychopathy—tend to be dominated by men.

It’s interesting and worth examining how we create more opportunities for both men and women who are natural, empathetic leaders. There’s a paradox because those who do not desire power are often the people we would most want in positions of power. Yet, they are the least interested in pursuing it. Conversely, those most interested in power often differ from those we want to lead, which presents a complex issue I grapple with in my research.

Jacobsen: Part of your response noted how gender plays a role in the dark triad, with men being more prevalent at the higher end.

Kaufman: ye but there are dark triad women.

Jacobsen: Right. So, I’ll take that as partially overlapping but mutually distinct distributions.

Kaufman: Yes, exactly.

Jacobsen: With that gender difference, is it significant enough, and is there sufficient evidence to argue for heredity over environment, or vice versa? What aspects of American cultural pressures tend to foster and bring out these traits in men more than women?

Kaufman: There is a strong focus on the bottom line and doing whatever it takes to achieve it. However, we are witnessing significant cultural shifts in various organizations. I am currently working on a major project focused on human-centered leadership and what that looks like.

I’m excited about that project because it’s set to unfold over the next couple of years. Much of it will involve a significant cultural shift to make the bottom line include employees’ self-actualization. That’s a substantial change right there.

Jacobsen: Last question: What is your favourite quote from any psychologist?

Kaufman: I have a favourite by Abraham Maslow: “One can choose to go back toward safety or growth. Growth must be chosen again and again; fear must be overcome again and again.”

Jacobsen: Great. Scott, thank you so much for the opportunity and your time today. I appreciate it.

Kaufman: Thank you. Was it a valuable interview?

Jacobsen: It was.

Kaufman: Sweet. Sweet. Thanks for thinking of me, Scott. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: I appreciate it. Thank you, Scott. We’ll be in touch.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Adam Potash, A Better Healthful Path

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/20

Adam Potash is a trained chef and health coach passionate about transforming lives through sustainable weight loss and nutrition. A graduate of Johnson & Wales University, his journey began with a love for cooking and evolved into a mission to help others achieve optimal health. After culinary success working with elite clients, Adam pursued health and nutrition studies, creating The Approach, a sustainable weight loss program. Combining intermittent fasting, balanced eating, and emotional support, Adam has helped over 10,000 clients lose weight and improve their health. His goal is to empower others to lead healthier, happier, and more confident lives.

Potash shares insights into his journey from culinary school to promoting healthier lifestyles. Inspired by witnessing his grandmother’s health decline due to poor nutrition and excessive medication, Potash emphasizes the transformative power of food. He highlights the Mediterranean diet, intermittent fasting, and prioritizing fresh, simple ingredients as keys to sustainable health. Potash criticizes food fads and restrictive diets, advocating for lifestyle changes over quick fixes. Working with athletes and private clients, he focuses on balanced meals that fuel performance. His advice includes avoiding grazing, eating nutrient-dense vegetables, and cooking with love to enhance health and enjoyment.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Adam Potash or Potash. How do you say that properly: “Pot-Ash”?

Adam Potash: You said it right the first time.

Jacobsen: You have this orientation toward health, nutrition, and weight loss. So, how did your grandmother’s story of illness build up and lead to this particular concern about health and weight loss? Now, that one’s straightforward. So, the term illness can be ambiguous.

Is it cancer, or is it an improper diet? Therefore, is the person physically ill due to lifestyle habits, or is this normal aging combined with other factors? Present that story to me because I think you’re onto something.

Potash: Right, it could be a combination of a few different things—age, illness, and poor nutrition. Listen, in my field, we tackle everything from a nutritional aspect first and foremost.

And yes, you’re right. This is what prompted my journey toward getting healthier myself. Seeing my grandmother deteriorate, for lack of a better word, with one medication, then another, and another to counteract the previous one became this big rabbit hole. I was younger at the time—I must have been 17 or 18 years old when she passed—but I saw this whole thing transpire and said, “There’s got to be a better way.”

Shortly after she passed, I enrolled in culinary school because I wanted to do something related to food. That eventually transitioned into cooking healthy food and cooking for pro athletes and others. I wanted to make everyone around me healthier, and the best way to do that was through food. That happened over a few years—cooking, cooking healthy, and eventually helping people transition to better health.

Jacobsen: Quick question on personal interest stuff.

I worked in restaurants. I used to work in four simultaneously, then did janitorial work overnight for two. Those were seven-day weeks, putting in nine hours a day. It was an intensive time, but I got to see a lot of different styles in how people run restaurants—from pubs to more bistro-style places and an Italian-Jewish-owned and run restaurant.

It could have been more fine dining, but it was aimed in that direction. So, where did you get your experience in terms of seeing a variety of restaurants? How did you observe operations, the quality of materials used to prepare meals, and their health standards? What did you see that made you think, “I could use those ideas a la carte and develop my program”? 

Potash: Yes, my career started as a server, working in the front of the house. But I always had this crazy interest in the back of the house.

The short story of how it all transpired is this: I went on a boating trip with the chef of a place where I was a server. It was called Gordon Biersch.

It was a brewery. The chef asked a few of the servers if they wanted to go on a fishing trip. I said, “Sure, I’ll go.” It was my day off. I caught the only fish that day, and it was this grouper.

It was about a 24-pound grouper, right? All day, we’re out there—nothing, nothing. Finally, we’re about a mile from shore, so I hook this grouper.

Of course, whoever’s closest to the line gets it. I fought it for about an hour. The whole scene was there, and we returned to the restaurant. The chef cooked it up in five, six, or maybe seven different ways. From that moment, I was hooked. That was my turning point when I decided, “I’m going to be a chef.”

From catch to feast in a matter of an hour was unbelievable. That started everything.

And, listen, going back to your question about seeing the operations of things—nothing was ever healthy. No matter where you went—this is going back 20 or 25 years—nothing was ever healthy.

When I started cooking for myself, I limited so many ingredients. I cooked. Julia Child has a quote—I’m butchering it, but it’s something like this: “If you cook simple and basic, everything is going to be good.” That’s basically what it comes down to.

If you cook with good ingredients—fresh ingredients—it’s going to come out well. You don’t need to complicate things. That’s the lesson I learned from a young age and as a young chef: make things simple and make them taste good.

Jacobsen: What makes a simple and good meal?

Potash: It sounds like a different question, but we have so many options for food in North America—particularly in the United States—ranging from processed food to unprocessed food, high-calorie food to low-calorie food, nutrient-dense food to not-so-nutrient-dense food, and so on.

How do you consider this when you’re running a restaurant? You’re saying, “This is the menu. This is the schema for what I want people to consume at my business or restaurant.”

I will give you the cheesy, cliché answer: it honestly comes down to love. If you’re putting love into your dishes, it will come out good.

I still cook for parties, private clients, and events. My ingredients and meals involve less than 30 different steps. I use five steps, but those are done perfectly—they’re seasoned right, taste good, and that’s it. If you can do that, you can’t lose.

Jacobsen: What are those five steps?

Potash: Well, obviously, it starts with good, fresh ingredients—whether it’s freshly caught fish or something similar.

Then, it’s about cooking it properly. For example, I cook a lot pan-seared and then finish it in the oven. Not to get too technical, but I do that because I want a nice sear and crust, and then I want it to cook fully from a convection style.

Cook it all the way through or cook it from a broader perspective rather than just using direct heat. That’s how I do most of my cooking. Letting things rest is also very important. Many people cook and then want to eat immediately, but you must let things relax for a moment.

Always have a good sauce. If you ever come to one of my parties or to someone I’ve cooked for, they’ll tell you That sauces are legit. A good sauce doesn’t have to be unhealthy. It could be something like chimichurri, pesto, or similar. A nice sauce complements the dish beautifully.

And honestly, the last step is presentation. Everybody eats with their eyes first, so you must put a little effort into how the food looks.

Jacobsen: Is that called plating? Is that the proper word for it?

Potash: Yes, plating—exactly. I always go with a nice white plate. In my house, we have clean, white plates. It’s like a blank canvas.

Jacobsen: So, let’s say you have this simplified method. When looking at the North American palate and the ingredients available, what do you consider some of the more nutritious meals? How can people incorporate that into healthier living, even if it’s not necessarily a formal meal plan?

Potash: Yes, so we all know by now that the Mediterranean diet will be the healthiest, right? You can’t get away from that concept. It’s about using local ingredients and focusing on a pescatarian-type diet.

I base my cooking on this. I was born and raised in Miami, South Florida, so we always had fresh, local fish—whether it was mahi, grouper, snapper, or something else. That’s the healthiest way to start meal prepping or planning.

It doesn’t have to be fish, but locally sourced-ingredients are always better.

Now, intermittent fasting—I follow a pescatarian Mediterranean diet and practice intermittent fasting. The baseline is a 16-hour fast daily, though I can go up to 20 hours depending on the day. I’m not too strict about it; it’s more of a range.

Jacobsen: What benefits do you see from intermittent fasting?

Potash: Oh my gosh, the sky’s the limit—it offers endless benefits.

It can improve your skin, clear up acne, make your hair fuller, and strengthen your nails—those things people first notice. But it doesn’t stop there. It also provides digestive benefits and helps women dealing with menopause, menopause-related weight gain, and PCOS.

Truthfully, the list goes on. Doctors are now even using intermittent fasting to treat cancer patients because it generates new, fresh cells in the body and removes old, damaged ones.

The benefits—if you’re not intermittent fasting—you’re honestly not feeling or looking your best. It gives your body the rest that it needs.

Jacobsen: Now, when two individuals look at diets, there will be skeptics and even cynics. How do we separate good diets from faulty ones? For instance, some diets are more about branding, like an all-red-meat diet, compared to the Mediterranean diet, which intuitively makes more sense because it has more balance overall.

As an expert, I believe the Mediterranean diet provides a better presentation, covers more food groups, and has a broader palate. How do you ensure there’s enough rigour to prevent a diet from being just a fad with yo-yo effects and short-term results?

Potash: What I always recommend—and for anyone thinking about a diet—is to look at how restrictive it is. For example, you mentioned the carnivore diet or the keto diet. Those immediately become extremely restrictive. Anytime something is highly restrictive, it gets categorized as a “diet.”

Usually, those are short-term and sustainable. You might see results immediately, but sustainability is where it fails. That’s when you get into the yo-yo diet effect—yes, it worked, but you can’t maintain it forever.

On the other hand, when we talk about intermittent fasting or the Mediterranean diet, these are lifestyles, not diets. They’re not restrictive. For example, I go out to eat; I enjoy food with my friends, buddies, and wife—we’re always eating. But it’s good food, healthy food. I never feel restricted or deprived by what I’m choosing.

I’m not putting myself in a bucket of, “Oh my gosh, I can only eat meat,” or, “I have to avoid carbs completely.” That’s not sustainable long-term.

Jacobsen: Could someone potentially do a short-term radical shift and then transition to something more sustainable? Say they want rapid changes first but then move to a longer-term solution. Is that possible, or is that too unreasonable for most people?

Potash: Yes, so I was going to say—it’s generally unreasonable if you do it yourself. When you’re on your own, you become your critic, and there’s no accountability piece to it. You start making up your own rules as you go along.

I’ve been doing this for over 15 years, and that’s what I see people do. They make up their own rules. For example, I know people who do alternate-day fasting. They start applying new rules like, “Oh, I’ll do it tomorrow,” or, “I’ll do it the next day,” or, “I didn’t do it today, but that’s okay.”

There needs to be more consistency and a base to work from, and that’s where it falls apart.

There’s no baseline. So, we teach the 16:8 method because it is the most consistent thing you can do. It’s not depriving or restrictive. You’re eating within an 8-hour window, which you can do daily.

Another great thing about an intermittent fasting schedule is that you can shift it. Some days, you might do 16 hours; other days, you might do 18. You can adjust it according to your schedule. This makes it much more of a lifestyle than a strict, harsh diet.

That’s my approach—set a baseline as a floor, then give yourself a range. If I can go a little longer the next day, no problem. Have an extra cup of coffee and keep going.

Jacobsen: What do you find people typically lack nutritionally—both macronutrients and micronutrients?

Potash: As an executive chef who runs restaurants, I can tell you that people often need to catch up on the basics. Running a restaurant is no easy job—it’s consistently high-stress. Transitioning from front-of-house to back-of-house surprised some people because you deal with difficult customers in the front. Still, the back-of-house can be even more intense. Every position, aside from prep work before service, is constantly stressful.

Jacobsen: So, what macronutrients and micronutrients are people typically missing when looking at nutrition? How can they fill those gaps?

Potash: Listen, we’ve gotten so far away from vegetables. Even when we consume vegetables at restaurants, it’s often not in their purest or healthiest form. The trend now is Brussels sprouts, right? But those sprouts are usually deep-fried and covered in something unhealthy.

We’ve moved so far away from basic, nutritious vegetables. Often, vegetables are treated as an afterthought—the last thing people eat. If you’re at a restaurant, you’re typically filling up on steak or mashed potatoes first. If there’s room left, maybe you’ll eat the asparagus.

My rule of thumb is to start with the good stuff—the more nutritious items. Fill up on those first, then move on to the other things. Save the carbs for last, so you’re not eating as much. Carbs, for the most part, have very little nutritional benefit.

This doesn’t mean vegetables must be plain or steamed, but we must return to basics. Everyone knows about the trend of fried Brussels sprouts. My advice is to go back to simple, clean vegetables. That’s one of my biggest tips when it comes to nutrition.

Jacobsen: What’s the most extreme individual food fad you’ve seen outside of fried Brussels sprouts?

Potash: Food fad? That’s an interesting one. Food fads are everywhere. Fried calamari has been around for quite a while now, especially with all the different sauces—it will never go away.

There are so many unhealthy food fads. For example, many steak places pop up everywhere, and it’s the same no matter where you go. There’s no creativity anymore when it comes to these steakhouses.

I have four different steakhouses within a three-mile radius of my house. And they all serve the same thing—you get your asparagus, filet, and potatoes. Nothing stands out or feels creative anymore.

There needs to be more creativity, at least where I live in South Florida. People in the kitchen seem afraid to try something new.

Jacobsen: When cooking for athletes and celebrities, how does that differ in terms of their requests per meal or meal plan? How different are they from the rest of us?

Potash: Not much, believe it or not. These athletes—I don’t want to say “basic” because that sounds negative—but they are basic because they focus on health. They want food to help them perform better on the field, on the pitch, or wherever they compete.

They’re open about food. They want something simple and convenient and don’t want to use their brainpower worrying about nutrition. They leave that to someone like me.

My job is to ensure that they’re getting well-balanced meals that provide everything they need to fuel their bodies. I’m not measuring macronutrients to the gram, but I understand how to create meals that include a variety of nutrients—the full”rainbow” of food.

They want to focus on their performance: running faster, hitting harder, or excelling in their sport. The last thing they want to worry about is their food. They leave it to professionals to ensure they’re eating right.

Honestly, I haven’t encountered too many picky athletes. They want to know they’re eating well and fueling their bodies.

Jacobsen: So, what do you see as the major health issue for North America? Many of your clients have lost weight significantly since starting this meal plan and program. Beyond the obvious issues of being overweight or having a higher-than-healthy BMI for their height, what do you notice coming up?

Potash: Listen, we’ve been getting more overweight year after year for the last 100 years. A few factors contribute to this.

Number one is breakfast. Kellogg’s introduced breakfast as a marketing concept, adding a meal we weren’t eating before.

Then, if you go to the grocery store these days, everything is snack-sized—snack this, snack that. We’ve become tremendous grazers.

The problem is that our stomachs aren’t designed like those of cows or horses for daily grazing. Our bodies want to digest food and then rest, but we’ve completely eliminated that rest period.

Now, you eat breakfast, go to the office, and someone hands you a treat and grabs it. Then someone else has a snack at their desk, and you eat that too. It’s this constant grazing.

People think, “Oh, it’s not much. It’s just a bite.” But that grazing raises your insulin levels and doesn’t allow your digestive system to take a break.

This constant grazing leads to kidney, liver, and gallbladder issues—it overworks our entire system.

If people need to make one major health change, stop grazing. Eat your meals within a specific time frame and then be done.

Jacobsen: Are there any other areas we missed? We covered everything from restaurants, diets, food trends, and health concerns.

Potash: Yes, you touched on a lot of different points. I appreciate that.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts based on the interview today?

Potash: No, this was great. Whoever your readers are, it’s good they’ll get a little education from this. It’s great.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Adam, thank you so much for your time.

Potash: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Christen Kaplan and Elizabeth Inman, Love a Wholistic Life

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/19

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does the CDC’s statistic that two in five U.S. adults are living with obesity reflect broader societal trends? 

Christen Kaplan and Elizabeth Inman: First, let’s look at what the definition of overweight or obesity means. The World Health Organization (WHO) defines overweight and obesity as having “excessive fat accumulation that presents a risk to health.” So, what does this mean for American adults? It means that obesity is a leading public health problem in the United States. The latest data from the CDC indicates that approximately 75% of adults aged 20 and older fall into the overweight and obese categories and  1 out of 10 of those are considered morbidly or severely morbidly obese. This is a serious concern because the five leading causes of preventable death in the United States are heart disease, stroke, respiratory disease (COPD), type 2 diabetes, and cancer which are all conditions linked to lifestyle choices and excessive weight gain. 

According to the Joint Economic Committee Congress of The United States, obesity alone costs the U.S. healthcare system almost $283 billion annually on obesity-related direct health costs and is a major driver of federal healthcare spending. This includes money spent directly on medical care and prescription drugs that are related to the lifestyle conditions associated with extreme weight gain. Lastly, another important statistic from Human Resource & Payroll estimates that conditions associated with excessive weight gain have caused an additional $435.5 billion in economic costs to U.S. businesses and employers in 2023. Included in these expenses are medical costs to employers, higher disability payments, higher workers’ compensation program costs, and absenteeism at work. All of these economic societal trends severely affect the way our society functions.

Jacobsen: How does Love a Wholistic Life approach obesity differently?

Kaplan and Inman: At Love A Wholistic Life, we believe that education is the key to empowerment. Our holistic approach takes a comprehensive look at the body, examining its physical, emotional, and mental dimensions. Rather than simply focusing on weight loss, we prioritize uncovering the root causes of obesity. We recognize that excessive weight gain often signals deeper lifestyle conditions, emotional struggles, or unresolved issues. Research indicates that around 75% of excessive eating is emotionally driven, turning into habits that obscure underlying feelings. Many individuals’ resort to food as a means of escape, coping, or numbing rather than addressing their emotions head-on. 

By providing our clients with the tools and resources they need, we help them address these underlying factors, fostering sustainable change rather than temporary fixes. Our program emphasizes education and self-discovery, equipping individuals with knowledge about their bodies and behaviors. Through personalized and online coaching, we guide our clients in developing healthier habits and making informed choices that support their overall well-being. Our clients learn to approach food and lifestyle with intention and mindfulness. This holistic journey not only promotes weight loss but also enhances overall quality of life, empowering individuals to thrive in all aspects of their health.

Jacobsen: How might Love A Wholistic Life address the root causes of lifestyle diseases? 

Kaplan and Inman: Addressing the causes of lifestyle diseases involves understanding their multifaceted origins and understanding what the definition of a lifestyle disease means. A lifestyle disease is a health condition primarily influenced by an individual’s lifestyle choices and behaviors rather than by genetic factors or infectious agents. These diseases are often preventable and can be linked to factors such as poor diet, lack of quality sleep, stress, lack of physical activity, tobacco use, recreational drug use, overconsumption of prescription drugs, and excessive alcohol consumption. Common examples of lifestyle diseases include cardiovascular disease, stroke, type 2 diabetes, obesity, inflammatory disease, and certain types of cancer. Lifestyle diseases typically develop over time due to cumulative unhealthy habits and can often be managed or mitigated through lifestyle changes. We find that the best approach is addressing these conditions through education. By teaching our clients what it means when they have been diagnosed with these lifestyle diseases, we explain what is going on in their bodies when they have a lifestyle disease, how they got the disease in the first place, and how they can use healthy lifestyle choices to control and possibly eliminate these conditions. Using natural approaches such as proper nutrition, getting active, and reducing or eliminating foods and behaviors that sabotage their health is key to improving and even reversing lifestyle disease. Basically, we teach people how to understand their body from the inside out as opposed to just thinking about it from just a weight loss perspective. In addition, we educate our clients to be advocates for their health by asking their healthcare professionals questions until they have a full understanding of what is happening in their bodies.

Jacobsen: What experience of loss has shaped your experience to wellness? 

Kaplan and Inman: As children, we watched our parents grapple with the harsh realities of lifestyle diseases. Our mother’s struggle with prescription drug addiction and our father’s battle with severe obesity left deep scars on our family. It wasn’t just their health that suffered; the emotional toll reverberated through every aspect of our lives. We learned early on how devastating these conditions could be, not just for the individuals but for the entire family. As we transitioned into adulthood, we hoped to leave behind the struggles of our youth. Yet, in a cruel twist of fate, lifestyle diseases reared its ugly head yet again. At just 52, our oldest brother was taken from us far too soon due to heart disease, kidney failure and other complications associated with type 2 diabetes. His passing served as a stark reminder that these issues know no bounds—they can affect anyone, regardless of age or circumstance. Each of these experiences became a powerful lesson, igniting a passion for nutrition and wellness within us. We realized that understanding the roots of these diseases was essential not just for our own health, but for breaking the cycle within our family. We immersed ourselves in learning about healthy living, exploring how nutrition, exercise, and mental well-being intertwine. Our journey transformed from one of pain to one of empowerment.

We began advocating for healthier lifestyles, not just for ourselves but for others in our community. We became passionate about sharing our story, hoping to inspire change and raise awareness about the importance of nutrition and healthy lifestyle choices. In doing so, we discovered a renewed sense of purpose— turning our past struggles into a beacon of hope for ourselves and those around us. We are committed to breaking the cycle of lifestyle diseases, proving that change is possible and that every step toward health is a step toward a brighter future.

Jacobsen: What are key principles of plant-based nutrition? 

Kaplan and Inman: To truly grasp the key principles of plant-based nutrition, we first need to understand what the term “food” encompasses. According to Oxford Languages, “food” refers to any nutritious whole or minimally processed items primarily derived from plant sources, including fruits, vegetables, whole grains, legumes, nuts, and seeds. Plant-based nutrition advocates for a diverse range of food choices to ensure a wide array of natural options that are low in calories yet high in fiber, antioxidants, nutrients, vitamins, and minerals. It encourages the inclusion of healthy fats from sources like avocados and olive oil, as well as plant-based proteins from beans and legumes. Additionally, it promotes limiting added sugars and processed foods. For our clients, we emphasize that these foods play a crucial role in their bodies, not only supporting growth but also nourishing every cell and organ. This nutrient-rich approach helps our bodies thrive, bolsters the immune system, and provides essential protection for overall health.

Jacobsen: How do you define a healthy relationship with food? 

Kaplan and Inman: A healthy relationship with food begins with the understanding that it serves as more than just sustenance; food has the power to heal and nourish our bodies on multiple levels. Recognizing this transformative potential can shift our perspective and highlight the importance of choosing a nutrient-dense diet rich in fruits, vegetables, beans, nuts, seeds, and whole grains. When we view food through the lens of healing, we start to appreciate its role in enhancing our well-being. Each bite becomes an opportunity to nourish not only our bodies but also our minds and spirits. Foods packed with vitamins, minerals, and antioxidants can help reduce inflammation, boost our immune system, and support our mental health. For example, vibrant fruits and vegetables provide essential nutrients that contribute to overall vitality, while whole grains offer sustained energy and promote digestive health. Furthermore, embracing this philosophy encourages mindfulness in our eating habits. It invites us to cultivate a deeper connection with our food—considering where it comes from, how it’s prepared, and the impact it has on our health. This awareness can foster more intentional choices, steering us away from processed foods laden with unhealthy additives and toward whole, nourishing options that support our well-being and guide us through our journey to good health.

Jacobsen: What role does empathy play in your work with clients?

Kaplan and Inman: In our opinion, empathy is one of the most vital qualities for success in our business. The ability to genuinely put ourselves in our clients’ shoes—both emotionally and situationally—allows us to grasp their unique perspectives and challenges. This deep understanding gives us a comprehensive view of their needs, enabling us to address their health issues in a more personalized manner. Empathy also empowers us to meet our clients exactly where they are in their journey. By acknowledging their emotional state, we can address not only their physical well-being but also their mental and emotional health. This holistic approach fosters a supportive environment where clients feel heard and valued. Our commitment to empathy goes beyond transactions; we strive to build meaningful relationships. In the process, we’ve not only gained clients but have also cultivated amazing long-term friendships. We take pride in being more than just their nutritionist and wellness coach; we aim to be a trusted ally in our clients’ lives. Their stories and experiences inspire us to continually improve and adapt our services, ensuring that we are not just meeting expectations but exceeding them. 

Jacobsen: What role does empathy play in your work with clients? 

Kaplan and Inman: In our opinion, empathy is one of the most vital qualities for success in our business. The ability to genuinely put ourselves in our clients’ shoes—both emotionally and situationally—allows us to grasp their unique perspectives and challenges. This deep understanding gives us a comprehensive view of their needs, enabling us to address their health issues in a more personalized manner. Empathy also empowers us to meet our clients exactly where they are in their journey. By acknowledging their emotional state, we can address not only their physical well-being but also their mental and emotional health. This holistic approach fosters a supportive environment where clients feel heard and valued. Our commitment to empathy goes beyond transactions; we strive to build meaningful relationships. In the process, we’ve not only gained clients but have also cultivated amazing long-term friendships. We take pride in being more than just their nutritionist and wellness coach; we aim to be a trusted ally in our clients’ lives. Their stories and experiences inspire us to continually improve and adapt our services, ensuring that we are not just meeting expectations but exceeding them.

Jacobsen: What are the most common misconceptions people have about nutrition and tackling obesity? 

Kaplan and Inman: One common misconception is that all carbohydrates are alike, but that’s simply not true! There are actually two main types of carbohydrates: simple and complex.

 Simple carbohydrates are often found in ultra-processed foods like soda, baked treats, packaged cookies, fruit juice concentrates, and many breakfast cereals. These carbs provide a quick boost of energy but can also spike blood sugar levels. Because they lack fiber and essential nutrients, simple carbs are often referred to as “empty calories.”

 On the other hand, complex carbohydrates are found in whole grains, beans, fruits, and vegetables. They offer a more gradual release of energy, leading to a slower, steadier rise in blood sugar over time. Complex carbohydrates are not only beneficial for sustained energy but are also easily processed by the body, providing essential nutrients that support overall health.

Another common misconception is that all fats are unhealthy. That is also not true. In fact, healthy fats, such as monounsaturated and polyunsaturated fats, are found in foods like avocados, wild-caught fish, nuts, seeds, and extra virgin olive oil. These fats provide protein, fiber, and essential vitamins, playing vital roles in building cell membranes, aiding blood clotting, supporting muscle movement, and promoting heart and brain health.

 In contrast, unhealthy fats include saturated fats and trans fats. These fats are typically found in animal-based foods such as fatty cuts of meat, dairy products, and tropical oils like coconut and palm oil, which are often used in fried foods, baked goods, and processed snacks. These unhealthy fats can negatively impact cholesterol and blood sugar levels, increasing the risk of heart disease, diabetes, and obesity.

 Some of our clients have held the misconception that taking a daily multivitamin allows them to eat less healthy foods without consequence. While multivitamins can be beneficial for filling certain nutritional gaps, they are not a substitute for a well-balanced diet. A nutritious diet rich in fiber, protein, antioxidants, and healthy fats provides a range of essential nutrients that multivitamins simply cannot replicate. Whole foods offer synergistic benefits that enhance nutrient absorption and overall health. For example, fruits and vegetables are packed with antioxidants that help combat oxidative stress, while whole grains provide fiber that supports digestive health. Additionally, healthy fats from sources like avocados and nuts contribute to brain health and hormone regulation.

Relying solely on supplements can lead to deficiencies in key nutrients and may not provide the same health benefits as consuming a variety of whole foods. Ultimately, a balanced diet is crucial for maintaining optimal health, supporting bodily functions, and reducing the risk of chronic diseases.

Jacobsen: How do you measure success in clients? 

Kaplan and Inman: Success often holds different meanings for each of our clients. Since we primarily work with individuals struggling with obesity and lifestyle diseases, their definitions of success depend on the personal goals they set. Some clients focus solely on weight loss, while many aim to reduce their reliance on prescription medications. Common concerns among our clients include regulating blood pressure, lowering glucose levels, and reducing cholesterol. We measure their success by assessing how well they transition into positive lifestyle changes that are sustainable beyond our support. As they achieve their personal goals, we empower them with the tools and knowledge necessary to maintain a lifestyle that promotes a healthy quality of life.

 Adopting healthy lifestyle changes, such as proper nutrition, is not merely about eating the right foods; it also involves understanding why our bodies require these nutrients and recognizing the detrimental effects of the Standard American Diet, which often leads to lifestyle diseases. Clients must embrace the reality that their choices can have either a positive impact on their health or lead to negative consequences. While some clients find that they can maintain their progress with little to no ongoing support after just a few months in the program, others face a longer journey and require our guidance until they feel confident managing on their own. The rise of “quick-fix” prescription weight-loss drugs has made our job more challenging, often undermining long-term success for many in the overweight and obese community. This is a constant battle for us, but it’s one we are committed to fighting for the well-being of our clients.

Jacobsen: Thank you very much for the opportunity and your time, Christen and Elizabeth.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Matthew Casella, AI Driven Robotics in the Hospitality Sector

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/19

Matthew Casella, President of Richtech Robotics Inc., discusses the company’s focus on AI-driven service robotics tailored to the hospitality sector. Originating with founders Wayne and Michael Huang, the company leverages Autonomous Mobile Robots (AMRs) to optimize operations in underserved industries. Based in Las Vegas, Richtech partners with businesses like Boyd Gaming and Walmart, deploying solutions like ADAM robots to enhance customer experience. Casella highlighted their Robot-as-a-Service (RaaS) model, blending automation with human interaction, reducing costs, and increasing efficiency. Advancements in AI, including NVIDIA’s technologies, have propelled innovation, enabling rapid training and deployment of versatile robotic solutions.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Matt Casella, President of Richtech Robotics Inc., a Nevada-based provider of AI-driven service robotics. Your company specializes in something universally appreciated—hospitality and service. It seems like a strong market choice. So, why AI-driven service robots, and why specifically focus on the broad spectrum of the hospitality and service industries?

Matthew Casella: Richtech Robotics focuses on commercializing robotic solutions tailored to the hospitality and service sectors. The company’s origin story dates back several years to its founders, Wayne Huang and his brother, Michael Huang. Wayne has always been driven and passionate about the hospitality industry.

His journey began with formal training as a chef. While initially pursuing a career in the culinary arts, he later transitioned into technology, focusing on the interactive visual display market. This shift eventually led him to the Autonomous Mobile Robot (AMR) market, which opened the door to integrating robotics into the hospitality and service industries.

One of the key early applications of AMRs was in the restaurant industry. This use case became a foundational aspect of Richtech Robotics’ strategy, demonstrating how robotic solutions could enhance operations in food service.

From there, Wayne and the team expanded their focus to the broader hospitality and service sectors, recognizing these areas as underserved by existing robotic solutions. While robotics had gained traction in factories, warehouses, and logistics, they needed to be more utilized in hospitality. This gap presented an opportunity to bring robotic innovation to an industry ripe for transformation.

Jacobsen: Did Nevada seem like the most versatile place to establish your headquarters?

Casella: Yes, for several reasons, Las Vegas was a strategic choice for our headquarters. Its status as the hospitality capital of the world was certainly a key factor. Additionally, it positioned us near potential partners and clients. For instance, one of our long-standing clients is Boyd Gaming, for whom we’ve deployed our Matradee robots across several of their restaurant properties. These robots have significantly enhanced operational efficiency and customer experience.

Jacobsen: In popular media, robotics has long been a focal point, from Japan’s advanced robots to Elon Musk’s Optimus robots more recently. Experts predict that autonomous robots will eventually outnumber humans performing various specialized tasks. How do you see Richtech Robotics shaping this future?

Casella: Our mission centers on specializing in tasks that can and should be automated. Our solutions are designed to complement human capital rather than replace it. All of our robots are classified as collaborative robots, or cobots, meaning they work alongside humans rather than independently of them.

Our robots are purpose-built to interact with the general public and fulfill specific tasks, allowing businesses in the hospitality and service sectors to optimize their operations. By automating routine or repetitive tasks, our technology enables human employees to focus on higher-value activities, such as direct customer engagement and personalized service. This synergy between human workers and robots enhances efficiency while maintaining a human-centerd customer experience and more value-add tasks.

So, a great example is delivery. The restaurant delivery space, we’ve continued to broaden the delivery applications of robotic products because that is a task that understandably should be automated.

When you think about a restaurant use case and a server, does a server need to walk five or six miles during a shift, going back and forth between the dining room and the kitchen? Or could that process be enhanced by a robot? For example, a robot could take dirty dishes from the dining room back to the kitchen or bring prepared food from the kitchen out to the dining room, meeting a server who could then hand the meals off to customers at their table.

This would allow the server to interact with and engage more customers, cover more tables, and probably increase their tip revenue while providing a better customer experience. That’s what we’re focused on. This is what makes the hospitality business so interesting when it comes to robotic and AI solutions.

Jacobsen: Why is that?

Casella: In hospitality, every operator wants to offer a different experience than everyone else. The experience itself is part of what they’re selling. These operators want to ensure they can deliver a unique, fulfilling, and engaging experience for their customers. By opening up a toolkit of robotics and AI solutions, we’re helping them achieve that goal. I see this as the next generation of hospitality.

Jacobsen: You’re describing cooperative ergonomic relationships between robots and people in the restaurant industry. What about fully automated restaurants?

Casella: That’s a great question, and it ties into what I was saying earlier. The operators of these businesses will fall across a spectrum. Some will implement fully automated experiences, whether a drive-through, a ghost kitchen, a dark kitchen, or a full-service restaurant. These businesses may lean toward complete automation.

Then, some operators want to blend automation with human interaction, as they view their people as an important part of their offering. They may ask for guidance on integrating both elements effectively.

Finally, some prefer to keep automation entirely behind the scenes. These operators might not want to show guests how automated their kitchen is. This diversity of approaches will continue as operators seek to offer tailored experiences to their customers.

Jacobsen: But these types of businesses and programs are expensive, aren’t they?

Casella: Yes, they can be. However, it’s important to consider the return on investment. Robots can reduce operational costs, improve efficiency, and help businesses reallocate their human capital toward high-value tasks, all while enhancing the customer experience. For many operators, the long-term benefits outweigh the initial costs.

Jacobsen: Robots are not cheap. The Optimus unit, for example, is estimated to cost around $30,000. I assume that’s a base price, excluding specialized programming or additional features. How do you finance, secure investments, engage in financial activities, and maintain investor relations for a business like this? That was a loaded question with multiple parts.

Casella: Yes, that is a loaded question on a number of fronts, so I’ll try to break it down and address it as much as possible. First, it’s true—this is a capital-intensive business on our end, and it also requires an investment on the customer’s end. One of the strategies we’ve implemented, particularly over the past 12 months since going public, is transitioning to a Robot-as-a-Service (RaaS) model.

Instead of requiring a large upfront capital expenditure (CapEx) from customers, we offer a subscription-based approach that fits into their operating budgets. This creates a monthly recurring cost structure that gives customers confidence that Richtech Robotics will ensure their robots operate at 100% efficiency. It also guarantees that we’ll continue supporting them in the long term.

This model smooths out our revenue. Instead of relying on one-time sales, we establish recurring revenue streams with 3-to-5-year contracts, depending on the robot. This is not only attractive to investors—who value recurring revenue—but also strategically sound from a business perspective. Transitioning as much of our portfolio as possible to a RaaS model is our key focus.

Jacobsen: How does this impact the cost curve of robotics compared to human labour?

Casella: Over time, we expect the cost of robotics to decrease as the technology matures and becomes more purpose-built. While robots aren’t necessarily getting more expensive, human labor costs continue to rise, especially in states like California, where I am today.

From a customer’s perspective, the comparison comes down to task automation. For example, how many labor hours can a robot automate? Customers can then redirect higher-cost human employees to more value-added tasks while utilizing lower-cost robotic labor for repetitive or time-intensive jobs. Unlike human employees, robots can operate 24/7, 365 days a year, significantly reducing the cost per hour over time.

The cost curve is shifting in our favor.

Jacobsen: I heard about the ADAM installation at One Kitchen in Rockford, Illinois. Was this a test case?

Casella: Yes, it started as a test case, but we’ve quickly moved beyond that. We recently announced via a press release that we’re taking the next big step. We’ll own and operate 20 of these One Kitchen locations across Texas, Colorado, and Arizona.

We’ve gone beyond the initial test case, which is an exciting development for us. This partnership achieves several important goals for Richtech Robotics, and we’re thrilled about the opportunities it presents.

It gets us in the door at Walmart locations. That could be a strategic partnership down the road. Each of the Walmart stores we’re targeting generates substantial annual revenue, these are high-traffic locations with significant volume.

These restaurants will be positioned directly opposite the cash registers in these Walmart locations, meaning every customer checking out will see our ADAM robot as part of the One Kitchen offering. For us, this is a meaningful step. It’s an important milestone where we can demonstrate the efficiencies of a robot-powered restaurant. 

From a business standpoint, this move reflects our dual strategy: we aim to be both a robotic service provider and a robotic hospitality operator. We’ve been clear about pursuing both paths and pushing forward on both fronts.

Jacobsen: Robots still need to get fully automated repair systems. How do you ensure these systems have appropriate maintenance and repair solutions?

Casella: We currently work with a third-party service company that has been in the repair business for a long time and, in recent years, has moved into robotic repairs. We contract with them to ensure that they can service our robots nationwide in case of an immediate repair need. Currently, we have robots operating from coast to coast, so working with a reliable partner is critical.

As we continue to grow, we plan to strategically open new offices and locations in key markets where we can establish our own repair staff. That said, much of the maintenance required for our robots is software-related. Many issues can be resolved remotely, streamlining the repair process and minimizing downtime.

Jacobsen: What updates do you see on the horizon for AI? I recently watched a talk by Jensen Huang, the CEO of NVIDIA. He mentioned that the shift from CPUs to GPUs represents a monumental leap. He suggested that development is no longer just exponential, as described by Moore’s law. It is closer to a “logarithm on a logarithm,” essentially an exponential on an exponential. If that’s true, how does such rapid advancement impact the AI-driven service industry?

Casella: Jensen Huang is undoubtedly a leader in this space, and his observations highlight the pace at which AI and hardware are advancing. If the exponential growth of GPUs and AI capabilities continues at this rate, it will profoundly impact the AI-driven service industry.

For us, it means smarter, more efficient robots that can process data faster and handle more complex tasks. It also means enhanced AI algorithms, enabling robots to interact more naturally with humans and adapt to changing environments in real time. These advancements could lower costs, increase robot versatility, and open new applications. There is a lot  to consider to remain adaptable and ensure our solutions leverage these breakthroughs to deliver real value to our customers. This is an exciting time for the industry, and we’re eager to see how these developments shape the future.

I believe that Jensen Huang provides the structure—the scaffolding—on which  millions of businesses will be built. This will allow the toolkit of robotics and AI to continue growing exponentially. This has allowed us to enhance the experience our robots provide to customers.

Thanks to our technology working in tandem with NVIDIA, the conversations ADAM can have with customers are now robust. For example, the support he can provide, such as drink recommendations, has become increasingly sophisticated. This progress is all powered by advancements in AI.

Using tools like NVIDIA’s Isaac Sim, we can train ADAM rapidly. We can prepare him for virtually any environment. For instance, as you mentioned, ADAM’s ability to recognize all the ingredients or tools around him is improving at lightning speed.

The potential applications of this technology are limited only by our imagination. There’s much speculation about what’s coming down the road and how soon it will arrive. Those advancements are coming quickly, but at Richtech Robotics, we focus on getting robots into the world today.

We’re not waiting for what robots might do in five years—we’re deploying them now and filling in the gaps by providing meaningful solutions to help our customers automate their businesses.

Jacobsen: How did the presentation of your corporate overview go at the LD Micro Main Event in October 2024?

Casella: It went very well. We’ve been working with our IR firm, Core IR, and they’ve been an excellent partner in helping us connect with the right types of investors and bankers. It’s critical to communicate our story to people excited about what we’re doing, who understand the market, and who recognize what an investment in Richtech Robotics means and what they can expect from us.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Matt, thank you for the opportunity and your time today to discuss AI-driven hospitality.

Casella: Thank you very much, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Jaclyn Margolis, the Return to the Office

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/18

Dr. Jaclyn Margolis is an Associate Professor of Applied Behavioral Science at Graziadio Business School, Pepperdine University, where she also serves as Department Chair for the Applied Behavioral Science and Organizational Theory and Management Department. Her research focuses on teamwork, leadership, and employee well-being, with a particular interest in how employees find joy in their work, collaborate effectively, and manage stress. Dr. Margolis’ work has been published in leading academic journals, including Organization Science, Human Relations, and Academy of Management Annals. Her research and writing have also been featured in outlets such as Psychology Today, Business Insider, and Fast Company.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What primary reasons are behind the recent push to return to the office?

Dr. Jaclyn Margolis: It seems companies are hesitant to fully embrace remote work because they’re concerned about how it might affect company culture, and they believe that in-person work leads to better collaboration and productivity.

Jacobsen: How is this shift to in-office work impacting employee morale?

Margolis: It’s been really challenging for many. Remote work, along with the flexibility it offers, has had a positive impact on many people’s lives, making it hard for employees to let go of it—especially when they don’t see clear benefits to going into the office. Many of my students have shared that when they’re in the office, they socialize more but get less actual work done. This aligns with what research shows: remote work can help people focus on their tasks, while in-person work can help reduce feelings of isolation.

Jacobsen: What are the strategies strategies are companies like Amazon Web Services have been implementing?

Margolis: What I’ve been reading about AWS seems to reflect what a lot of companies are going through as they try to balance employee and management expectations and figure out a new norm. First, there was a shift from remote work to a hybrid model. Now, some companies, including AWS, are introducing a firm in-office mandate. It’s no surprise that many employees are pushing back. It’s tough for them when they see remote work working just fine, only to hear management say it isn’t.

Jacobsen: What challenges might organizations face in enforcing in-office work policies?

Margolis: In the short term, employees might follow these policies just to keep their jobs. But in the long run, frustration with management and the policies could cause your best people to either do the bare minimum or look for a new role. As the saying goes, people don’t leave jobs, they leave managers. If managers are out of touch with what employees actually need, the long-term effects will probably show.

In general, enforcing blanket policies worries me because they assume everyone is most effective in the same way. The truth is, the benefits of in-person work, like remote work, are a bit more complicated. They depend on the type of work being done and the individual’s preferences. A one-size-fits-all approach doesn’t take into account that some projects need a hands-on approach, while others don’t.

Jacobsen: How does the move to return to the office affect productivity and collaboration?

Margolis: A fascinating paper was recently published that tackles this question. It’s a meta-analysis, which means it reviews all the research on the topic, making it the gold standard for answering these kinds of questions. The authors found that remote workers were more satisfied with their jobs, and their supervisors rated their performance higher compared to office-based workers—which goes against what many companies are saying to justify their return-to-office mandates. The research also looked at how the amount of time spent in the office versus at home affected these factors, such as working two days a week in the office versus full-time. The findings again showed that remote workers actually had slightly higher satisfaction and performance. The only real downside they found was a sense of isolation. All in all, the data suggests that a lot of the concerns about remote work might be much ado about nothing.

Jacobsen: How could a return to the office influence recruitment and retention efforts?

Margolis: Employees are pretty smart when it comes to weighing their whole benefits package. For many, there’s a real cost to commuting into the office. So, it’s not surprising that some employees are willing to give up raises—or even take pay cuts—in exchange for the option to work remotely. It makes sense that offering flexibility in how and where people work is seen as a major perk. I wouldn’t be surprised if jobs with flexible work options end up getting a lot of applications.

Jacobsen: What long-term implications could this shift have on workplace culture?

Margolis: It really depends on the company and how the change is introduced and carried out. If it’s done in a way that makes employees feel disrespected or alienated, it’ll be hard to recover from that. Trust is easy to break and tough to rebuild. On the flip side, if the change is handled thoughtfully and employees are given a voice, it can be an opportunity to strengthen the culture.

Jacobsen: How can leaders ensure employees feel supported and motivated when transitioning to a more office-based work environment?

Margolis: Let me start with an example of what not to do. It’s been widely reported that AWS CEO Matt Garman claimed nine out of ten employees he spoke to about the full return-to-office policy were on board. However, many employees have expressed that they find that statistic shockingly inaccurate and not at all reflective of their own experiences or those of people they know. In trying to build consensus, it seems Garman’s comments made leadership come across as out of touch.

So, what will work? Employees need to feel heard and understand the real reasons for being back in the office. The value of being in the office really depends on what you’re doing there. Leaders need to ensure that employees experience this reality. Coming in just to sit alone or join Zoom calls is likely to feel like a waste. But if employees know they’re coming in for meaningful, in-person interactions, it can make a difference—and might even make them more excited to be there.

Jacobsen: What role do company size and industry play in the decision to bring employees back to the office?

Margolis: They are important. Fit is going to be key here—what works best for your company and the work you do. Some companies and industries are more suited to remote work, while others really benefit from in-person collaboration. That said, there are new models that are changing the way we think about all this. Take healthcare, for example. Going to the doctor used to always mean an in-person visit. Now, doctors communicate with patients in all sorts of ways—through messages and video calls, along with the traditional in-person appointments.

Jacobsen: What are a hybrid work model’s potential benefits and drawbacks?

Margolis: Most people like the hybrid model because it feels like the best of both worlds—you get some in-person time while also having flexibility. But for that to really work, companies need to be thoughtful about how they set up hybrid expectations. For example, if a company wants employees in the office to support collaboration, but teams are on different hybrid schedules or in different offices, it’s probably not going to be effective.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Dr. Margolis.

Margolis: Thanks so much for the great conversation—it’s such a fascinating topic that’s always changing.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Tone Southerland, Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/17

Tone Southerland is a healthcare IT expert and the current PCC Domain Representative to the IHE International Board. With a career spanning over two decades, Tone has been deeply involved in shaping healthcare interoperability, particularly through his work with IHE (Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise). His expertise lies in navigating the complexities of healthcare data integration, policy, and security. Tone is passionate about ensuring that patients and providers have seamless access to accurate and timely health information. He has been a key figure in developing frameworks like TEFCA, and is committed to transforming healthcare quality through technology.

Southerland discusses the complexities of healthcare interoperability compared to other industries like finance. Southerland explains the challenges, including the human aspect of healthcare, complex workflows, and the role of government policies. He highlights the importance of healthcare data accessibility, security, and privacy, and then touches on HIPAA’s role in safeguarding patient data, Medicare fraud, and the efforts to protect against misuse. Southerland emphasizes the potential of interoperability in improving patient care and enabling whole-person care by integrating diverse data points. He also discusses the significance of the Connectathon and the potential of healthcare IT advancements.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How are you today?

Tone Southerland: I’m doing great. I’m excited to chat about IHE (Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise).

Jacobsen: Excellent. So, the first question is: Why is the healthcare industry slower in adopting advanced technologies compared to sectors like finance?

Southerland: Yes, that’s a great question, and it’s one that’s been asked a lot. Healthcare is different from other industries, and there’s much more complexity involved. Three key factors make it challenging.

First, there’s the human aspect of healthcare, which is difficult to codify into data that can be easily transferred and consumed electronically between systems. For example, when I visit my doctor, we have a relationship andhey know things about me that are difficult to express in coded medical terminology. This aspect of care is represented as  “narrative text” in clinical notes. While there are ways to exchange that narrative, the human element will always remain essential in healthcare.

Second, the workflows in healthcare are more complex than in industries like banking or insurance. In those industries, the workflows are relatively finite. The tasks are straightforward, whether transferring money, buying stock, or granting account access. In healthcare, patients move between vastly different care settings. For instance, if you go for a radiology appointment, the workflow is controlled: you have an initial consultation, undergo scans, wait, and the radiologist reads your scans. But afterward, you’re referred back to your primary care doctor or to a specialist, and they continue interpreting the results, explaining them, and possibly sending you elsewhere for further care. Your healthcare journey might also transition to home care, adding even more complexity. That’s what IHE focuses on—standardizing workflows across these diverse care settings.

Third, policy plays a big role in how quickly healthcare interoperability progresses. Government policies and incentives encourage electronic health record (EHR) vendors and healthcare providers to exchange data and participate in electronic data collection. In some cases, there are penalties for not moving quickly enough. While these policies are complex, much progress is being made.

Jacobsen: Why is interoperability such a pressing issue in today’s healthcare landscape?

Southerland: I’ve been working in this field for about 18 to 20 years, and I was excited when I started—I’m still excited about it now.

I saw much opportunity then. I see many opportunities now. But I also see that through my lens as a technologist, not a clinician; clinicians I engage with still need help with some of the same issues when accessing data. They may have access to data, but how well can they use that data?

This year, a study published in the National Library of Medicine examined this issue. They surveyed about 2,000 physicians. Of those, 70% indicated they have access to healthcare data. Still, only about 23% said they have easy access, and only 8% said they have very easy access to the right data. So, they may have access to data, but do they have access to the right data in a way that they can use it effectively to improve health outcomes for their patients?

That’s a big challenge, and why healthcare interoperability is so important. IHE—Integrating the Healthcare Enterprise—is working to solve this problem. Our goal is to get the right data to the right doctor for the right patient at the right time, with the relevant level of detail, so that they can provide better care. Additionally, part of any data exchange is security and privacy.

Jacobsen: How do security and privacy concerns factor into this?

Southerland: It’s huge. Suppose you’ve followed any cybersecurity news over the past 10 to 20 years. In that case, you’ve noticed that security threats have only worsened. On the bright side, defenses have also improved, so it’s always a constant battle—what technology can we implement to protect data from hackers, and how do we stay ahead of new hacking methods?

This is an ongoing challenge. When discussing security and privacy, it’s important to distinguish between them. Privacy is about consent—do I consent for someone to access my data, and to what degree? Consent can be granular. For example, I might only want to share information about my allergies but not my mental health data. I may choose to share it with one doctor but not another. I might allow my mother access, but not my spouse.

Consent can become complicated. IHE provides mechanisms to manage consent through various consent-based profiles, but that’s only one piece of the puzzle.

The security piece is about protecting the data itself. This includes encryption algorithms that safeguard data stored on servers. That technology has been around for a while and continues to evolve. What has become more prevalent in the last 10 to 15 years is the HITRUST framework, which requires healthcare organizations storing protected health information (PHI) to implement policies, procedures, and processes to protect that data. But there’s a human element as well.

It’s not just about having the right encryption; it’s about training your staff. Are they following least privilege principles? Are they adhering to OWASP’s top 10 security guidelines? There are many moving parts, but frameworks like HITRUST and SOC2 help ensure that organizations working with sensitive data protect it adequately.

Jacobsen: What are the risks of a data breach? When those instances happen, how do doctors, patients, and companies react to them? How do they manage damage control? Could you provide a real-world example of why this is important rather than just listing ways to protect oneself?

Southerland: Yes. HIPAA oversees all of this.

HIPAA, which became law in 1996, introduced regulations that set limits on how patient data should be protected. Provider organizations are required to report breaches, especially when a minimum threshold of patients’ data is involved. This is a deterrent because organizations don’t want to be on the front page of the news for a data breach. These breaches are published on the CMS (Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services) site. Then, news agencies pick them up and share them further.

This incentivizes organizations to be on top of their security measures. As interoperability has advanced, there’s been a focus on limiting the shared data. For example, does all the data need to be stored or shared? Or do I only need to share the relevant information for the care I’m receiving? Going back to consent, patients may want to say, “I don’t want to share my mental health data because that’s sensitive. I only want to share the rest of my clinical record to receive help with my cancer, diabetes, or other conditions.”

Jacobsen: Should we be concerned about having all of our healthcare information in the cloud?

Southerland: That’s a nuanced question. Yes, we should always be concerned about our banking information, healthcare data, etc. It’s the reality of the world we live in. It’s stored on a server whenever we put something on social media.

Privacy today is very different from 80 or 100 years ago. Back then, having someone photograph you could be considered a privacy violation. Today, the game has changed.

We should have faith in the servers storing our data in the cloud. The four major cloud providers—Google, Microsoft, Oracle, and AWS—all have HITRUST certification as part of their solutions. So, when healthcare organizations leverage these cloud platforms, they incorporate these rigorous security programs into their overall security policies.

There’s even an argument that data is safer in the cloud. Cloud providers have dedicated teams to monitor and protect the data from hackers. Running your own servers—renting space at a local facility and managing the servers—takes extraordinary work, specialized skills, and knowledge. Knowing that I can rely on a provider like Microsoft Azure or AWS, knowing they operate under HITRUST guidelines, gives me more peace of mind as an IT professional working on healthcare solutions involving protected health information.

Jacobsen: How does IHE’s work impact healthcare providers and patient care?

Southerland: There are a lot of different use cases here. We’ve discussed providers having the right information at the right time. Doctors often discuss relevant information—they don’t need too much information. Too much information is almost worse than not having any at all. Often, clinicians will push it aside and start over because it’s information overload.

They need to get an understanding of where their patient is. Not only do they need to understand the clinical aspects of the patient, but this is also where we’re starting to see interoperability in IHE help. We need to start looking at other buckets of data, such as social determinants of health. For example, what social factors are happening in the patient’s life? Do they have financial or other daily stresses?

We know that stress, in general, can negatively affect health. Are they in an abusive situation? That’s going to impact their overall health. Do they lack access to exercise facilities or healthy food in their neighborhood, especially in impoverished areas? These factors play a strong role in a person’s overall health. IHE and other standards organizations focus on social determinants of health and other types of healthcare data that contribute to whole-person care.

Jacobsen: What is North America Connectathon Week, and why is it significant for healthcare IT?

Southerland: This coming year it’s happening in Toronto in February. It’s a week-long event where healthcare IT vendors come together. These vendors provide solutions for doctors, provider organizations, and hospitals. During the week, they test interoperability between their systems based on IHE profiles. I’ve been attending these events for 15+ years.

It’s a robust testing environment. There are testing monitors who validate system transactions, and there’s also great interaction between vendors. It’s the best quality assurance (QA) software testing lab globally for interoperability. Solving problems through emails or scheduling conference calls can take weeks or months. At Connectathon, everyone is in the same room. You have focused time to solve the same problems in minutes to hours.

There’s such a strong sense of collaboration at Connectathon Week. You have companies that are normally competitors working together. That’s the goal—we’re looking past market competition because if we can’t make our systems interoperable, we all fail. There isn’t one big health record system that will take over the country or the world. We all have to interoperate, and that collaboration is key to success.

Southerland: There’s also much other content there that talks about healthcare events and initiatives, like TEFCA (Trusted Exchange Framework and Common Agreement), a national health information network initiative in the U.S. Connectathon Week is  also international. For example, we have members and participants  from Europe – France, Germany, Japan, and others – sharing their initiatives so we can learn from other parts of the world.

I’m in the U.S., so that’s where my primary focus is, but I want to know what’s happening globally because we are all trying to solve many of the same problems. 

Jacobsen: What is the Connectathon seal? How does this have significance for military vendors?

Southerland: The Connectathon seal has been in the works for quite some time. It’s a recent certification that we’ve just introduced. If you look back at the history of IHE Connectathons, which started in the early 2000s, they began as part of a grassroots testing initiative to bring systems together, as we discussed earlier. Over the years, the events have become more robust and have moved toward a more formal conformity assessment approach.

In IHE we actually developed a conformity assessment scheme about 10 years ago. I’ve always seen this program as a sort of stepping stone to the new Connectathon Seal. It incorporated ISO certification processes, and the Seal builds on that. The idea was to give more substance to interoperability testing

The Connectathon seal takes this to the next level. It gives vendors something to put on their product that says, “I went through a rigorous interoperability testing process. I did all the required things. I passed the tests, and my system is ready to go.” This allows vendors to make a statement “about their product. When a provider organization, such as a hospital, is purchasing an EHR, lab system, or other healthcare technology, they can have confidence that this system has base-level interoperability capabilities.

Jacobsen: Can you elaborate on how IHE interacts with healthcare providers, patients, and business organizations to overcome barriers in data sharing while ensuring security and privacy, as discussed earlier? You mentioned that it’s not just data in the cloud that’s stolen but data in general, especially in today’s information era.

Southerland: There are many ways we could approach this topic. One of the biggest challenges is consumer access to data and data access for treatment. HIPAA regulations define different “purposes of use.” For example, HIPAA provides treatment-based access to data, as well as access for research and other healthcare industry reasons.

Consumer access, on the other hand, is regulated by the Federal Trade Commission (FTC). The FTC governs consumer apps, while HIPAA governs healthcare apps. There are different actors in this space, and they face barriers. The barriers faced by a healthcare provider differ from those faced by an individual patient or a large organization.

A lot of work has been done to bridge the gap and protect patient data. As a patient consumer, this ensures that I can’t just do wildcard searches and get a content match by guessing someone’s name or address. Much discussion and work has been done within the U.S. national exchange frameworks, like CommonWell Health Alliance and TEFCA to address this.

Scaling back to the broader part of your question, IHE does well in partnering with local and national governments. We have something called national extensions built into our Profile templates. These Profiles are implementation guides for healthcare standards. To clarify, IHE doesn’t create healthcare standards;  We provide implementation guidance on how to use existing standards to solve interoperability problems.

We approach this from an international perspective, but the national extension sections within the Profiles allow for further customization based on a particular region’s needs. For example, due to different governmental policies, France might use different healthcare code sets than the U.S. – IHE allows for that flexibility through national extensions. We’ve also created regional deployment domains that oversee deployments in various countries.

Here in the U.S., we have a group called the Sequoia Project, established as the RCE—recognized coordinating entity—for TEFCA. I’m sorry; I know a lot of acronyms.

Jacobsen: That’s right. IT folks love acronyms.

Southerland: I spent a lot of time programming and grew up in that world. Now I’ve moved out of it, but I still need acronyms. The Sequoia Project is responsible for delivering the TEFCA program in the U.S., and they partner with IHE USA and IHE International to help with that. TEFCA (Trusted Exchange Framework and Common Agreement) is the Federated National Exchange Program, and it’s all built on IHE profiles.

Other elements are incorporated, but the foundation is IHE profiles. Within TEFCA, there’s something called Qualified Health Information Networks (QHINs), which basically operate as health information exchange (HIE) networks participating within TEFCA. So far, seven organizations have been designated to serve in this role. These networks undergo rigorous testing and certification processes to ensure they’re able to safely and effectively exchange data with other QHINs. They have participants that share data through their QHIN, and the QHINs acts as a gateway to exchange data across the broader ecosystem.

The system-to-system and gateway-to-gateway connections are all built on IHE profiles. So, to answer your question about how IHE helps with this, we partner with regional and local deployments to promote and advance the use of our profiles.

Jacobsen: Now, this isn’t necessarily positively framed; it is neutrally framed with the appropriate acronyms, initialisms, organization names, and real-world examples. What about the entities that are predatory when it comes to user data, organizational data, or patient data? What are the most significant and dangerous predatory actors in this space?

Southerland: That’s a good question. I’m considering how to phrase it carefully.

There are organizations out there looking to misuse healthcare data for all kinds of fraud. This is common knowledge. For instance, Medicare fraud is a big issue. In some cases, claims are filed, and payouts are made for deceased patients. Fraud like this happens.

Trust frameworks are among the mechanisms that IHE and others have built to protect against such fraud. Carequality is a great example. When you sign up to participate in Carequality, you become a network steward with legal obligations to protect the data. Given the context of this interview and its focus on IHE, that’s probably as far as I want to go, but it’s an important question.

Jacobsen: Any thoughts or feelings based on today’s conversation?

Southerland: Today I think we should have discussed the significance of healthcare interoperability. We touched on it briefly, but I’d like to expand on that.

Jacobsen: What is the potential now, and why must we focus on it? 

Southerland: First, it’s important to understand that it has much potential. I would have said the same thing if you had asked me 15 years ago. But what does that mean? It means there are still many challenges to overcome in healthcare IT and interoperability. We’ve already overcome a lot, but there’s more to go.

I break it down into three stages. The first stage is building systems that can collect data. The second stage is integrating those systems—data from disparate systems and systems from different vendors and companies. In the third stage, we analyze the data, apply big data concepts, and use it on a population health scale. This is where we get into clinical research, curing diseases, and identifying trends over large populations. We can use that information to set the next generation of best practices in healthcare.

In the next 10 years, I believe we’ll see a major focus on the whole person. We talk about social determinants of health, and that’s one piece of it, but more is needed as a patient; more is needed to know what medication fits what clinical problem. I need to factor in all the other elements of my life. What’s my diet like? What’s my environment? My doctor might ask me questions during my visit, but the system must be more comprehensive and cohesive to collect and use all the facts relevant to my care. You go from one specialist to another—an orthopedist and a chiropractor—and get different answers. It leaves the patient confused about what’s best for them.

Interoperability with all that data together in a way that makes sense to the patient. It will enable patients to have better conversations with their doctors, and it will enable doctors to make better assessments because they’ll have access to the relevant data. And that’s what we’re trying to achieve in healthcare interoperability: it’s having the right data at the right time for the right patient, ultimately to improve health outcomes.

Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Southerland: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Sammy Ramsey on ‘Terrestrials’ and Insects

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/16

Dr. Sammy Ramsey is the founder and director of the Ramsey Research Foundation. He graduated with a Bachelor of Science in Entomology from Cornell University in 2011 and focused his research on Predatory & Parasitic Insect Behavior. He cultivated an interest and expertise in the close relationships between insects and other creatures (symbioses) and dedicated his doctoral research to understanding a parasite killing honey bees globally (Varroa destructor). He completed his formal education in Dr. Dennis van Engelsdorp’s Honey Bee lab at the University of Maryland, College Park. Honeybee and native bee health is declining worldwide, with record loss rates in honeybee populations becoming routine (higher than 40% of annual losses reported for 2018). These insects are so integral to crop production that challenges to their health threaten food security worldwide. Ramsey emphasizes the importance of effective science communication, drawing from personal experiences and his entomology expertise. He highlights the need for empathy and storytelling to engage audiences, making complex topics relatable. Dr. Ramsey connects with diverse audiences by sharing anecdotes, such as overcoming his childhood fear of insects and discussing the surprising nutritional properties of roach milk. He also underscores insects’ evolutionary advantages, genetic adaptability, and teamwork in eusocial systems. As a contributor to the kids podcast  Terrestrials from Radiolab & WNYC, he challenges listeners to rethink assumptions about insects, fostering curiosity and appreciation for their resilience and diversity.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Dr. Sammy Ramsey. In public science education, figures like Carl Sagan and Neil deGrasse Tyson have made significant contributions. What key lessons do you aim to share when you’re in the public eye, whether on broadcasts or other platforms, educating people about science or related topics? Many spend years earning doctorates and specializing in their fields. How do you communicate your expertise in a way that’s accessible to those who may not have the same level of expertise or familiarity with scientific language?

Dr. Sammy Ramsey: Language has always been incredibly important to me. I’m increasingly recognizing that, as scientists, we often need to receive more communication training. We’re selected for our positions because we’re skilled researchers who can get the work done in the lab. However, communicating that work effectively is only sometimes a priority in our field. Sharing findings beyond scientific journals is not typically considered part of our job.

This issue became especially apparent during the pandemic when people needed to trust, listen to, and believe scientists. Unfortunately, many people didn’t know us or feel a connection with us. People are far more likely to trust someone they are connected with or understand.

As a result, during this life-threatening event, many individuals turned to TikTok or celebrities with no scientific training for information. This became glaringly clear when my mom shared a video featuring the actor Tyrese Gibson in our family group chat.

Do you know who Tyrese is?

Jacobsen: No.

Ramsey: Have you seen the Fast and Furious movies?

Jacobsen: Yes, I have.

Ramsey: He’s one of the bald guys in those movies. He used to be an R&B singer—famous for his toned physique and dramatic performances. Now, he’s something of an internet celebrity, making viral videos.

In one of his videos, he claimed that if someone thought they had COVID-19 or had been exposed to it, they should boil a pot of water, sprinkle in some salt, place a towel over their head, and inhale the vapours. He said this would burn and cure all COVID-19 particles out of their noses.

Jacobsen: Wow.

Ramsey: That video had over a million views and tens of thousands of comments. People said things like, “Thank you so much for sharing the truth!” or “This is so helpful! Now I know what to do.” Seeing how much trust people placed in him despite his lack of scientific expertise was shocking.

Ramsey: It just continues to reveal to me that when we, as scientists, spend our time siloed in a laboratory and don’t engage in communicating science, we can’t expect that when an emergency arises, we can suddenly run out into the streets yelling, “Hey, listen to me! Trust me, I’m a doctor!” It’s become an important part of my work, not just to communicate science myself but also to help others do the same.

I’ve taken on the role of a science communicator, similar to the Neil deGrasse Tyson style you described. I work to engage people by making science accessible and interesting. At the same time, I’m training other researchers who are doing incredible work, helping them understand the importance of communicating their findings effectively.

It’s been a great experience. I’ve had the opportunity to develop my course in science communication. In just two years, it’s become a popular course, and seeing its impact has been rewarding. Before the next major scientific crisis occurs, we’ll have trained more scientists to communicate their work effectively.

Jacobsen: Your specialization is entomology, so you’re dealing with insects and bugs. How do you foster their appreciation for insects when communicating this to kids? Kids often either crush bugs out of fear or follow a ladybug around the yard out of fascination. How do you channel that childlike curiosity into something more like an empiricist’s curiosity?

Ramsey: I love that you mentioned “empiricist curiosity” because that’s exactly what’s most effective in engaging people with this subject. I often share my story—how I was terrified of insects as a kid and transitioned from that fear to an obsession.

When I was seven, my parents noticed that my fear of insects had become irrational. I had recurring nightmares about bugs and even struggled during recess because of them. They decided to do something about it. They took me to the local library and left me in the insect section.

My mom told me, “People fear what they don’t understand. Learn about these insects, and it’ll change things.” She had no idea just how much it would change things. Later, as an adult, she admitted she had no real plan—she was trying anything that might work.

Well, it worked—exceptionally well. On the way home from the library that summer, I told my parents, “I’m going to be an entomologist when I grow up.” I always followed that path.

What drew me to insects was their resilience. I was always the tiniest kid—40 pounds in second grade, and by the time I got to college, I still didn’t weigh 100 pounds. Insects, being some of the smallest organisms on the planet, seemed relatable to me strangely.

Despite their size, insects are the most successful organisms on Earth. They’ve figured out how to thrive in nearly every terrestrial niche, and every ecosystem depends on insects in one way or another. Their small size doesn’t limit them; it’s part of their strength. That realization made me fall in love with them.

The oceans are the only part where insects have yet to take over fully. They are the most diverse group of organisms on the planet. When I teach insect biology at the university, the first lecture begins with this: “You are now in a class where we are going to study diversity.”

That might confuse students because they signed up for entomology, but entomology is the study of diversity. There is no more diverse group of organisms on this planet. If you were to gather all the species of mammals, birds, fish, and reptiles and combine them into one group, there would still be fewer of them than in just one family of insects.

One family of insects! That is one of those mind-boggling facts that helps students appreciate how remarkable these organisms are, just as I did when I was a child.

When I talk to kids about insects, I try to take them back to where I was at their age. I want them to understand that their size does not diminish their capacity to impact the world even though they’re small humans.

Kids have a unique perspective in many ways. They see the world differently than adults, who often assume their perspective is the most accurate. I show kids all the fascinating things people miss about insects because they don’t look at them up close. Adults tend to see insects from a metaphorical 30,000-foot view. By helping kids explore this “microcosmos,” I connect with them on a deeper level.

Jacobsen: Is it part of the diversity because insects have existed longer than mammals and have short life cycles, allowing for much more rapid changes over time?

Ramsey: Exactly. Insects can evolve much more quickly than what we call K-selected organisms. When you think about life history strategies, we plot them on a selection curve. Some organisms follow a “live fast, die young” model, with populations that grow quickly but have shorter lifespans.

On the other hand, mammals typically follow the opposite strategy. It takes them a long time to reach sexual maturity, and they live much longer. Because of this slower generational turnover, evolution has less opportunity to act on mammals than insects, where rapid generational changes drive faster evolutionary processes.

Ramsey: What has truly made insects the most populous and diverse group of organisms on this planet is teamwork. Eusociality—the capacity for organisms to work together toward a common goal, with overlapping generations raising their offspring collectively—is the most successful life cycle on the planet.

Bar none, nothing even comes close. Ants, bees, wasps, and termites have dominated ecosystems worldwide by adopting this approach. They’ve even become the envy of other animal groups. You can see this in mammals, where naked mole rats have also adopted eusocial behaviour. But they’re the only mammals to do so, whereas insects have cornered the market on this strategy. It has allowed them to thrive in countless ecosystems. The sheer biomass of ants alone is staggering. Ants outweigh us as humans by a significant margin.

Jacobsen: That’s incredible. How large do these ant mounds or eusocial collectives get?

Ramsey: Some of these ant colonies are over a hundred miles wide—just ants. Think about how insane that is. One species, the Argentine ants, has effectively shown it can take over the world. There are more than 16 quintillion individual insects on this planet. That’s mind-blowing. Many of them are ants, bees, and wasps, all thanks to their ability to work together in these eusocial systems.

Jacobsen: Have there been genetic studies on how diverse insects are—not only in their structure but also in their genetics? Are they more diverse than us or other species?

Ramsey: Yes, I’m working on one of those projects now. Have you heard of the Human Genome Project? Francis Collins, who led that project, was one of my heroes growing up. I even thought his book The Language of God was fascinating.

So, it’s no surprise that, as a scientist, I started a similar initiative in my lab called the Honey Bee-nome Project. The goal is to sequence and compare the genome of every honeybee species. We’re currently about 60% of the way through.

We’ve already collected nearly every honeybee species for sequencing, and we plan trips to Borneo, the Philippines, Sri Lanka, Nepal, Malaysia, and Indonesia to gather the remaining species. By studying honeybees’ genetic diversity, we can uncover much about what has made them successful.

We’re looking into what genetic changes underpin their ability to thrive in diverse environments and what genes are most highly expressed under stress or danger. There’s still so much to learn from their genomes about how they adapt and excel.

Seeing how much information we can learn from insect genomes is fascinating. One of the most remarkable things is the incredible flexibility in their genetic makeup. We see similar flexibility in plants. Many plants have doubled their genes multiple times—some even have up to eight copies of each gene.

What does this mean? We’re often in trouble if humans mess up one of our gene copies. We typically get one copy from our mother and one from our father, giving us only two sets of alleles. If something goes wrong, we only have a few backups.

In contrast, plants with eight copies of a gene can afford to “experiment” with six of those copies. They can allow strange mutations to occur. If a mutation results in a gain of function, it can be utilized. If it’s harmful, it doesn’t matter because there are other intact copies to rely on.

Insects demonstrate similar flexibility in their genomes. Due to their short life cycles, they have more time for evolution and possess unique genetic systems. For example, eusocial insects have a haplodiploid genetic system, which allows them to choose the gender of their offspring. Males have half the genetic code, while females have the full complement. By deciding whether or not to fertilize their eggs, they can control the gender ratio in the colony.

In addition, eusocial insects have fascinating systems of genetic management. For instance, queens can store sperm from multiple males and selectively use sperm from those they deem more beneficial for the next generation while ignoring the rest. These genetic systems allow insects to adapt to and navigate a constantly changing world efficiently.

As we face the dramatic impacts of climate change, we often worry that we’re destroying the planet. But we’re not destroying the world—we’re destroying our capacity to live in it. The insects, however, will be fine. When we’re gone, they’ll carry on, thriving in the conditions we leave behind.

Their incredible genetic flexibility and adaptability remind us of the importance of resilience in the biological world. Comparing insects to mammals reveals that many traits insects possess have worked phenomenally for them. This is a humbling realization, as we often consider ourselves the dominant and most important species.

Jacobsen: How did you get interested in “Terrestrials”?

Ramsey: I got involved with Terrestrials after doing an episode with them. I’ve been obsessed with NPR for a long time and have participated in several NPR shows and podcasts. One of those was Shortwave. After I did an episode with them about murder hornets during the pandemic, Maddy Sophia, the host of Shortwave, spoke to others at NPR about my approach to science communication.

She recommended me to Lulu Miller (co-host of WNYC’s Radiolab), leading to my first Terrestrials episode. Initially, the episode wasn’t supposed to be about roach milk. Still, when I mentioned that roaches could produce milk, Lulu was fascinated. It completely took over the episode and shifted its focus.

After that, they asked me to become their official entomology correspondent. Now, I’ll contribute interesting insect-related stories and even some insect-related music every season of Terrestrials. My love for music aligns well with the show, which integrates music into its episodes. It’s been a perfect fit—a little match made in heaven.

Jacobsen: What is the coordination and collaboration process with the “Terrestrials” team? They rely on your expertise in insects, and you rely on them for musical production and storytelling. How do you ensure the key bits of information—like the details about roach milk—are communicated effectively?

Ramsey: For me, the process is a reflective one. Empathy is incredibly important to me as a scientist—the ability to put myself in another person’s place and think about how they experience the world. When I think about communicating science, I reflect on all the science communication I’ve encountered that was boring or missed the mark. Sometimes, even when the subject was fascinating or important, the delivery failed to engage me because they didn’t highlight the parts that could capture my attention.

I always ask myself: What would be most engaging if I were in this person’s shoes? How do I ensure that the most compelling information is at the forefront of our conversation?

When I discussed the ability of insects to care for their offspring, I thought, “What’s the most fascinating fact I can share?”I landed on the fact that some insects can produce milk—not just producing it, but excelling at it. Insect milk is over five times more nutritively dense than the most complex mammalian milk. That’s bound to surprise people, especially since this milk comes from roaches, an insect most people aren’t thrilled to learn about.

Sharing a positive fact about roaches—an insect with such a lowly reputation—creates a memorable moment. I anticipated people would react with, “Ew, how do you get milk from a roach? Do roaches have nipples?” which is exactly what I was asked. I used that as a springboard to compare roach milk to almond, macadamia, and soy milk. I pointed out that you can’t exactly milk an almond, but we still call it milk. So, I encouraged people to open their minds.

Interestingly, roach milk is far closer to traditional milk than plant-based alternatives because it’s produced by the organism to nourish its offspring. It’s a white, viscous fluid specifically designed to feed roach babies. That kind of detail grabs attention—people can’t help but stop and listen.

Since that episode aired, several friends, colleagues, and even strangers on social media have told me they stumbled across it by chance. They were flipping through channels, heard about roach milk, and stopped. They told me it was one of the most interesting, unexpected things they had heard.

Those moments remind me that my instincts for engaging people are usually spot on. While human beings are all unique, certain things consistently capture attention. If you start with something surprising or unexpected, you can always hold someone’s focus.

From there, it’s essential to draw people into a narrative. Storytelling is one of the most effective tools for communication because people remember stories far better than isolated facts. It’s why, when someone asks you, “How was your day?”you can easily recall events in sequence: This happened, then this, then this. Evolutionarily, we’re wired to process the world through stories.

Embedding the information I want to convey within a narrative makes it more engaging, interesting, and memorable.

Jacobsen: If you were to analyze human beings and insects, what makes an insect an insect? And what differentiates humans from other primates?

Ramsey: Good question. Several key traits define insects. From a scientific perspective, it starts with their number of legs and the location of their skeleton. Insects have six legs, which makes them unique as hexapods in the animal kingdom.

They move using something called the “alternating tripod” system. Three legs are always on the ground, giving them incredible stability while in motion. We, as humans, don’t have that. Instead, we use a pendulum-like motion when walking, swinging one leg at a time. This means we technically fall during part of each stride, which is why humans can trip and fall. Insects, however, don’t trip—they’ve figured that out, and I’m proud of them!

Another key feature is their exoskeleton, which acts as a suit of armour protecting their entire body. In contrast, humans protect critical organs like the brain and heart with an internal skeleton—our skull and rib cage. Insects don’t do this piecemeal; they protect their whole body with their exoskeleton.

This combination of traits—the exoskeleton, six legs, and sometimes wings—has made insects the most successful organisms on the planet in terms of diversity and adaptability. Their body plan is unparalleled in its effectiveness.

Jacobsen: What are you most looking forward to for “Terrestrials” in 2025?

Ramsey: For 2025, I’m excited to tell another compelling story about “Terrestrials.” We’ve already talked about roach milk and explored the Honey Bee-nome Project, including the search for a rare honeybee species in the Sundarbans of Bangladesh.

I’ve challenged listeners to rethink their assumptions about roaches and honeybees. Instead of seeing them as simple or singular creatures, I’ve highlighted the incredible diversity within these groups.

For the next season, I want to take another topic that people assume they know everything about and show them how much more there is to learn. Whether it’s about a familiar insect or an entirely new one, I want to scratch beneath the surface and reveal the depth and complexity of the insect world.

Jacobsen: Dr. Sammy, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Ramsey: Of course! I’m glad to be here. Thanks so much, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Henry Rock on City Startup Labs

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/15

Henry Rock founded City Startup Labs (CSL) to empower young Black men through entrepreneurship, inspired by his experiences in Black-owned media. Over time, CSL expanded to include women and introduced the ReEntry Entrepreneurship Program, addressing the needs of justice-impacted individuals. Training emphasizes business, cognitive, and professional skills, aligned with leading workforce recommendations. Success is measured not just by low recidivism, but by employment, stable housing, career advancement, and improved financial health. Collaborations, such as with Atrium Health, enable fair-chance employment and mentorship. Rock encourages adopting community-centered restorative justice and nurturing creativity to support entrepreneurship for those often overlooked.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What inspired the founding of City Startup Labs (CSL)? 

Henry Rock: The idea for City Startup Labs stemmed from a desire to get young Black men into the game of entrepreneurship. I had the luck of working in the golden era of Black media during the 80’s and 90’s and I worked for and with some amazing African American entrepreneurs. I was able to see up close the power of Black business ownership. Also, going back to the early to mid-2000’s, I had seen any number of efforts to “empower” women as entrepreneurs, and rightly so. But I felt that this demographic of young Black men was being overlooked. I still think that’s the case today. (my 2013 TEDxTalk outlines that original thinking)

Jacobsen: How has this organization evolved over the years? 

Rock: We launched in collaboration with the Urban League in 2014; then went co-ed in 2017, as we attempted to accommodate the desire of Black millennials (both men and women) to be in a cohort of like-minded, ambitious, aspiring entrepreneurs. Then in 2018-19 we launched the ReEntry Entrepreneurship Program (REEP) as a direct response to the Raj Chetty socio-economic mobility study and the subsequent Leading on Opportunity Report, both of which highlighted factors that thwarted people within mostly Black and Brown Charlotte communities from being able to improve their socio-economic status. CSL took the position that there is potentially a role that formerly incarcerated people, as entrepreneurially-minded catalysts, might play in improving these communities. We designed specific training based on what prior millennial cohorts experienced, but also married it with business and professional core competencies and digital tech services credentialing as well.

Most recently, we’ve decided to move into developing social ventures that can be co-owned and operated with CSL by justice-impacted individuals to meet market demands. Our first venture is what we call ReConnex (Reentry Connections), which will be a digital device repair business piloted in one of the aforementioned communities in Charlotte (deemed Corridors of Opportunity). This will allow us to leverage an award received from the State of North Carolina’s Digital Champions Grant to start this for-profit social venture.

Jacobsen: What are the cognitive skills taught through the CSL programs? 

Rock: We teach business and professional core competencies, which cover social/emotional intelligence, problem solving, critical thinking, human centered design to name a few. We have also aligned our work with McKinsey’s 2021 study regarding the foundational skills needed by employees to be effective in dynamic workplaces. Interestingly, entrepreneurship is considered one of those skill sets, as it encompasses a number of those cognitive tools. 

Jacobsen: For justice-impacted individuals, how does the ReEntry Entrepreneurship Program (REEP) approach their unique challenges? 

Rock: We start by acknowledging that in the final analysis not everyone is cut out to be an entrepreneur, however, everyone can become a valued asset to the companies they work for. This is actually no different than the point of view that we have taken from the beginning. Nevertheless, we have an appreciation for the unique challenges that come with being justice-impacted. However, many of the conditions that have contributed the circumstances that have led to justice involvement, are the very ones historically faced by Black Americans and have led to their over-indexing in the criminal justice system. While entrepreneurship can be an anecdote, to get there, we have consistently focused on the development of three asset classes — human, social and economic capital. We posit that if we’re successful in this development, our constituents will have a better chance of improving their socio-economic mobility outcomes.

Jacobsen: What factors contribute to the low recidivism rate (3%) among CSL participants? Are there any potential confounding factors there? 

Rock: Fundamentally, we’re in the people potential business. Practically, we call this 21st Century workforce development, which is a triangulation of those asset classes. The development of the human capital starts with what we call Cultivation – an exploration into who we are and why we are where we are. Then we open the window to see what’s possible when the tools that we provide are applied. Tangible possibilities can be a powerful motivator and a counterpoint to desperation. We seed social capital through Accountability Partners and/or business coaches and mentors. With these, our participants have someone who can support them on their journey. We also know that reaching the goal of financial stability (economic capital) starts with a clear plan on how to achieve it, including personal financial management and in many cases starting at square one or on the first rung of the ladder. Oftentimes, it boils down to a reimaging of how they see themselves and the choices they get to make.

Jacobsen: How has Advocate/Atrium Healthcare developed over the years? 

Rock: The relationship with Atrium grew out of a series of meetings in 2020 with the then SVP of HR. In 2021, he requested that we develop a specific effort to help Atrium lean into becoming a fair-chance employer, at the behest of Charlotte’s Mayor. That request resulted in Restorative Pathways — our Reentry Workplace Readiness initiative, which includes both employer and employee workplace readiness efforts. Our emphasis has been on offering a starting point for a career in the healthcare industry, rather than merely a job. We recently completed our 9th overall cohort, which included two that were facilitated in Winston Salem, NC, with over 100 justice-impacted individuals completing our training and onboarded into roles as teammates at Atrium Health.

Jacobsen: What have been the outcomes for participants in healthcare roles? 

Rock: A majority of the roles have been “entry level,” ranging from drivers and customer service to patient transport and environmental technician. Other roles have included IT, materials handling (which includes working in operating rooms) and CNA (certified nursing assistant). Any number of promotions have occurred. Participants have also secured housing and vehicles, along with healthcare benefits, which have been elusive for most. 

After six months on the job, teammates have the opportunity to compete for new roles. As a part of their onboarding process, following their training with us, they are assigned a mentor, as well as a career coach, who is helpful in navigating their journey in this field.

Jacobsen: How does the Restorative Pathways program prepare people for workforce reentry? 

Rock: Some of what was stated above answers this.

Jacobsen: How does CSL measure success in its programs outside of recidivism rates? 

Rock: Our impact can be seen in jobs secured, new business creation, or business traction gained, and professional development. But also, the other things that accumulate over the years of this work, like buying that first home or leasing their own apartment, buying a new car, building a savings account or being the provider for the family for the first time. Taken together, this is what success looks like for CSL. (also see our 10 Years of Impact report)

Jacobsen: What advice seems reasonable for others to establish similar programs to support entrepreneurship and workforce readiness for justice-impacted individuals? 

Rock: I would start with this idea of community-centered restorative justice; meaning that there are communities that have experienced harm, all throughout the country, in any number of ways, including neglect, economic dislocation and disruption, crime, etc., and they are in need of reconciliation. While on the other hand, we have folks – returning citizens, who need to have trust restored and often return to these same communities. We see that our returning citizens have a bias for service, a desire to give back, make amends or right the ship through being of service to others. This shows up over and over again in the tendency to want to start non-profit businesses (which we try to dissuade them from doing – we prefer that they consider social enterprises instead). What if we were to cultivate, foster, develop and unleash this untapped talent (i.e., value) in ways that can provide the reconciliation these communities desperately need?  What if we uncovered and nurtured the creativity and innovation that I believe exists within all of us, and guided and supported it? Finding imaginative ways to do these things is the best advice that I can offer.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Clive Hannah, Toronto Oasis and Its Community

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/13

Clive Hannah is an organizer with Toronto Oasis, a secular community focused on human connection and shared values. Hannah manages the organization’s website hosting and organizes the Toronto Adults with ADHD Support Group. He also volunteers with MasterHeart, a men’s group that emphasizes personal growth and camaraderie. Notably, he facilitated the transition of Toronto Oasis meetings to an online platform during March 2020, ensuring continuity and engagement through virtual gatherings. His leadership extends to hosting discussions and spearheading events.

Hannah described his journey from childhood doubts during he First Communion to eventually leaving Catholicism and joining the Toronto Oasis Group, finding acceptance outside religion. He recounted searching for secular communities since 2012 and discovering Oasis in 2017, which fulfilled his need for connection. As an organizer, he emphasized balancing fun with community involvement and coordinating inclusive activities. Hannah highlighted his work on community outreach, connecting with humanist organizations. He discussed the challenges and varied responses in the secular community. He expressed hope for expanding Oasis’s impact and securing funding.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Clive Hannah from Toronto Oasis. I have been aware of this organization for about six years now. I have interviewed many people, but not extensively within Oasis communities. What has your experience been like as a volunteer?

Clive Hannah: Meeting so many different people has been very grounding. Our group is public so anyone can join; it’s not closed. Meeting people from different backgrounds and faiths has been fascinating, which has helped me step out of my news bubble.

Discussing certain topics prompts me to reflect on why I think a certain way, my position, and where that perspective comes from. That has been enlightening. We cover many topics related to social justice issues and observe how different people respond to them. When you are part of a community and engage in discussions, other aspects of the community come forward, especially in presentations and lectures. We dedicate the first half-hour of our meetings to community-building.

We have a “Joys and Concerns” segment and a greeting session where members can mix and mingle. After that, we dive into our main topic and hold a discussion. The initial half-hour helps unite us, allowing us to explore a topic as a group.

Jacobsen: What topics and concerns tend to arise in your discussions? Do they lean more toward intellectual subjects or compassionate, community-based themes?

Hannah: Our group tries to maintain a skeptical approach, but we discuss various topics. We have even talked about UFOs. We encourage topics that anyone in the community wants to explore and approach them from a skeptical perspective, focusing on building community.

Jacobsen: Do you ever have a book club or similar activities?

Hannah: Yes, we do have a book club. One of our members has been running it for quite some time.

We are also working on shifting our focus towards activism. We are part of a larger group called the Oasis Network based in Houston and Kansas City. Having grown up Roman Catholic, I seek the sense of community that comes from the church but without the associated dogma. We do a good job of achieving that balance.

Jacobsen: How would you compare this experience to other communities besides the sense of community?

Hannah: We have five core values, one of which is “Be accepting and be accepted.” That’s a significant difference from other communities. We aim to be inclusive and welcome people of all faiths and backgrounds. We enjoy engaging with them in a shared community while staying true to our skeptical roots and promoting open discussions. However, it’s not about changing people’s opinions.

Jacobsen: How do you navigate that balance? In a Catholic Mass or service, there is a structured set of music, scripture readings, presentations, and rituals, which often encourage people to behave in a specific way that may not always be authentic.

Hannah: Navigating that line involves encouraging open discussions and accepting diverse viewpoints without imposing any particular belief system.

Jacobsen: In an Oasis group, how do you structure activities outside the community talk and the presentation? You have this value of “be accepting and be accepted.” How do you ensure this is maintained?

Hannah: We do have our code of conduct, which includes being respectful, not rude, and allowing others the chance to speak. This is important. A few organizers facilitate our discussions to ensure they remain productive and do not escalate.

One of the main ways we maintain order is by staying on topic. We don’t allow the introduction of unrelated subjects, which usually helps enrich the conversation.

Jacobsen: How big is the community now?

Hannah: We have become much smaller since the pandemic, but we typically have about 20 to 30 people attending our Zoom meetings. We transitioned completely online after the pandemic. Before when we met in person, we had around 30 to 40 attendees.

Jacobsen: And did these communities start in the 2010s or the 2000s? I am trying to remember.

Hannah: Our Toronto Oasis started in 2016 before I joined.

Jacobsen: What do you think is the long-term sustainability of these communities? That might be a critical question in conversations since you don’t have the benefits of tax-exempt land or government grants, which other organizations might receive.

Hannah: Yes, that’s true. We have done well with donations. We rented space at the University of Toronto campus when we had a physical location. We had enough members and support through donations to cover our expenses. I felt fortunate, but reaching a critical mass of participants is essential to maintaining sustainability.

Jacobsen: What is your own story of leaving Catholicism and becoming, let’s say, not so Catholic?

Hannah: It goes back to when I was around seven, during my First Communion. There is a point where the priest asks, “Do you believe in Jesus?” At that age, I said, “No, I don’t.” I felt confident in my parents, who did believe, but they allowed me to have my own views. However, I was put off by the sacraments and rituals of the Catholic Church.

My parents told me, “We already bought you a suit and planned a party—just say yes.” So, I did, but I held onto my true values despite going along with it. However, I wasn’t confident in my beliefs until my early twenties, when I went through a period of soul-searching.

One moment that stood out was when a friend invited me to a Hindu ceremony. I saw a picture of Jesus on the altar, which surprised me. It broke my perception because, in a Catholic church, you would never see another god. But the Hindu faith said, “Yes, we’ll include your God.”

There was a different level of acceptance that I felt was missing from my Catholic upbringing, and that led me to keep searching for something even more accepting. Eventually, that journey brought me to the Toronto Oasis group.

Jacobsen: How do you feel life changes within a theological system versus outside?

Hannah: The biggest challenge is finding a new community. Growing up, my family was deeply embedded in the Catholic community. Even other activities my parents participated in were connected to the Catholic Church. Toronto is an example of a place where, if you want to step away from your religious culture and community, there is another option. You can still feel accepted and bond with others, but it’s not based on shared beliefs; it’s simply because you’re human.

Jacobsen: How do the community leaders present themselves compared to religious figures who might wear elaborate dress and hold positions of unquestionable authority?

Hannah: I’m one of the organizers within our group. I emphasize with my fellow organizers that we must keep things fun and maintain a sense of community. We can’t separate ourselves from the group; otherwise, it feels like a job or a chore. We take turns handling our duties so everyone can relax and be part of the community. That approach is essential for sustaining the connection and sense of community.

Jacobsen: What are you hoping to bring to the community in 2025? Do you have specific activities or membership drives in mind, especially considering the benefits and limitations of being online?

Hannah: One benefit of going online is that we’ve attracted more people internationally. Participants are joining from Europe, the U.S., and beyond while maintaining our Toronto base. One of our other organizers is focused on initiatives like supporting food banks and exploring ways to serve the larger community. Food banks are just one example, but there are other ideas we’re working on.

Jacobsen: How do you find the process of coordinating and organizing these events, ensuring they’re both enjoyable and structured enough to meet people’s expectations?

Hannah: Our approach aligns with the core values established through the Oasis Network. We don’t want to over-facilitate or make sure everything happens rigidly. It’s about embracing the mystery of things and letting them unfold naturally. The feedback we’ve received indicates that this approach is different from other secular groups in Toronto, which often lean more toward intellectual discussions. I want it to be more community-based, focusing on enjoying each other’s company.

Jacobsen: That could include something as simple as going to a Tim Hortons or McDonald’s and chatting for an hour.

Hannah: Yes, exactly. We have what we call “Meet and Greet,” where we go to a restaurant for a couple of hours and talk about anything, but with the underlying idea of returning it to our shared sense of community.

Jacobsen: Yes. So, it’s less of a “why are we here” group and more of a “how are you doing” group.

Hannah: Especially with the “Joys and Concerns” segment, where we want to hear the highs and lows of your week. We don’t want to be an overly cheerful group; we create space to acknowledge both the spoken and the unspoken. What isn’t said can be just as important as what is shared. Someone could have a low moment, like talking about the death of a friend. Sometimes, we follow that with up to a minute of silence to give people space to feel and process that moment.

Jacobsen: What about coordination with other groups on occasion? There are humanist groups and many other groups around in Toronto.

Hannah: Many of our community overlaps with the Humanist Association of Toronto, but we serve different purposes. We’ve never felt that our groups are at odds with each other. It’s fascinating that Toronto Oasis offers something slightly different that provides unique value to the community. We’re not trying to compete with other groups like Atheists and Friends or CFIC.

Atheists and Friends are interesting because they meet at a pub once a month. I’ve been there a few times, and while it’s a different experience from what Oasis provides, I enjoy both. People must experience or study these new communities because they are based on something other than holy texts. They might have a book club focusing on seasonal books or well-written works relevant to certain subjects.

Jacobsen: Your volunteer who runs the book club—has that been an interesting dynamic?

Hannah: Although he has not done it recently, his approach was unique. We don’t all read the same book. Instead, we share what we’re reading and discuss it. He doesn’t stop there; he’ll ask if anyone watched an interesting movie or read an article—anything impactful they’d like to share. I think this speaks to our accepting mantra.

Jacobsen: There should be government grants or other support for secular groups like these. Yes, having Atheists and Friends, Oasis and Sunday Assembly shows the variety of experiences available. It’s exciting to see this diversifying landscape. This is a step beyond the simple “we’re here, get used to it” mindset, aiming for equal societal status while building sustainable communities. How do you see the orientation of these groups changing compared to the 2000s?

Hannah: It’s very different now. I enjoy that different community members, not just the organizers, offer topics for discussion. This allows me to discover my opinions and think, “Where did that come from? Why do I feel this way?” It’s not just about religious beliefs; we have other beliefs that we dismantle together.

Jacobsen: Many of your ethics align with humanist values, which is why we believe in certain principles and the universalism behind them. It’s important and enlightening. What have you seen other Oasis groups doing that you’d like to start?

Hannah: We are involved with other Oasis groups and recently attended a conference in Kansas City. They purchased a former church for their meetings, funded entirely through donations. We could reach a similar critical mass in Toronto and establish a permanent location. Having a foundation in a neighbourhood would bring more people and strengthen the community.

Jacobsen: How do you differentiate yourselves from other Oasis groups?

Hannah: The best part is that we feel the same in spirit, even if we have our unique community dynamics.

In Kansas City, the Oasis meetings are recorded and shared on YouTube and Facebook Live. I’ve watched some of them and thought, “Oh, this feels like one of our meetings here in Toronto.” I enjoy that sense of sameness rather than differentiation.

Jacobsen: How large is the Oasis Network now?

Hannah: It’s about seven or eight chapters. We’re one of only two in the Toronto area. There’s Toronto Oasis and West Hill United in Scarborough. The rest of the chapters are based in the U.S.

Jacobsen: How does being the only Canadian group among predominantly American chapters feel?

Hannah: It has posed some challenges. We’ve had to step up and say, “Hey, we’re Canadian here,” when discussions lean too heavily on U.S.-centric topics like, “Go talk to your senator.” We strive to change the language to make it more inclusive and international.

Jacobsen: Have you tried applying for funding to cover expenses like a Zoom premium account for unlimited call lengths?

Hannah: No, we haven’t. A certain level of effort is required to reach that stage, and while we’re open to the idea, we’re not there yet. When we grow larger, we’ll consider it, but not now. The goal would be to eventually attain that tax-exempt status.

Jacobsen: Did I miss any important points, or have we covered most key details?

Hannah: Yes, I’d like to add that when I first came across Toronto Oasis, it was through my partner, who was a guest speaker. I attended a meeting and thought, “Wait, what’s happening here?” That was around 2017. Before that, in 2012 or 2013, I was searching for secular groups but didn’t even know the right terms, like “secular” or “humanism.” I was still early in my journey for a community. When I didn’t find what I was looking for, I gave up and thought, “Well, I tried.” Then I found Toronto Oasis and realized it was exactly what I had been looking for four years earlier.

I joined for a few weeks, stepped away for a while, and then realized I missed it. Since then, I have attended every meeting. I’m also part of a men’s group, which serves a different purpose but makes me feel connected to the community.

Jacobsen: What’s the nature of the men’s group, and how does it differ from the general Oasis community?

Hannah: I also help organize that group, Powerful and Loving. We talk about masculinity and femininity and how to balance them. It’s about holding both sides, advocating for yourself, maintaining agency, and related topics. These aren’t discussions we have in Oasis, so it adds a different level of connection for me.

Jacobsen: Are there things guys talk about in the men’s group that they won’t mention in the general group?

Hannah: For sure. Discussions about sex and money are big topics that most men tend to keep private.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time, Clive. I appreciate it.

Hannah: You’re welcome. Thank you, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Billy Peterson: Wealth Management and Happiness

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/12

Billy Peterson is a seasoned author, world champion jockey, and successful financial advisor. His latest book, From the Starting Gate: The Winning Strategies for Wealth, Health, and Happiness, provides readers with actionable advice on wealth-building and holistic well-being. As the founder of Peterson Wealth Services, managing $425 million in assets for over 400 clients, Peterson is a trusted voice in financial education. His podcast, Harnessing Your Wealth, further showcases his expertise, especially in navigating economic uncertainty. His career journey from racetrack success to financial freedom serves as the foundation for his motivational and insightful works.

Peterson discussed the importance of financial literacy and long-term investment strategies, discouraging speculation, especially with cryptocurrencies. He highlighted the connection between financial well-being and health, arguing that financial stress can lead to chronic conditions. Peterson encouraged avoiding unnecessary expenses, focusing on investing in established businesses, and staying patient during market downturns, using historical examples like Walmart’s growth to illustrate the potential benefits of disciplined investing.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Billy Peterson. We’ll be discussing From the Starting Gate. You’re an expert in wealth and wealth management, and many people typically associate financial well-being with some level of happiness. With this latest work, let’s start with an overview. What message are you trying to convey to your audience regarding wealth management and its connection to happiness?

Billy Peterson: Thanks for having me, Scott. My background is in financial services. I’ve spent 28 years helping people manage and build wealth—accumulating and preserving it. Over the years, I’ve learned that most people don’t understand the basic tenets of financial literacy. It’s not something that’s widely taught in schools. We learn more about math, art, or social sciences than we do about managing money, which we all need to deal with throughout our lives.

Financial well-being significantly impacts every area of our lives. It has a significant influence on our happiness and health outcomes. If we’re constantly worried, anxious, and stressed over making ends meet, affording necessities, or dealing with massive debt—issues many people face today—that stress can take a toll on our health. This is common knowledge, but it’s not as present in our everyday awareness as it should be. People tend to brush it off, saying, “Yes, I get it,” but they don’t fully grasp how closely it’s tied to the rise in diseases and chronic conditions in our society.

Most people want to attribute these conditions to something tangible—something they can see, touch, or study in a lab. But there’s no definitive study for how the mind regulates the body, partly because we don’t fully understand how the mind operates, and it varies from person to person. Some doctors are beginning to recognize this, and it goes back to Freud’s work on the levels of the mind, especially the subconscious. When we’re in a state of fear, anxiety, and stress—whether about money or other things—it affects how our body functions and the chemicals produced within us.

Too much of these negative chemicals can lead to disease and chronic pain. These factors heavily influenced why I wrote this book. I’ve had extensive experience in these areas, and one key principle I emphasize is avoiding speculation and understanding true investment. I view speculation as a high-risk investment—something to avoid.

Jacobsen: So why should people avoid speculation, and what should they understand about long-term investment strategies?

Peterson: That’s a great question. Humans are herd animals. We stay in groups and follow what others are doing, especially if it works. But in doing so, we often repeat the same mistakes repeatedly.

A great book called Devil Take the Hindmost delves into the manias and speculative periods throughout hundreds of years of human history. We look back on these events and think, “How could people have been so foolish?” Yet, we continue to see the same patterns repeated time and time.

We’re living it right now with everything happening—speculation and cryptocurrencies. Hundreds of thousands of cryptos exist, and everybody has a different take on them, such as developing a new coin. You can’t touch, feel, or see but buy it because people want it. Now, what is it going to give you? What utility does it offer? All it is is hoping that someone else will want it more than you do. That’s 100% what it is. It’s supposed to be a currency. It’s supposed to have a limited supply.

And, of course, I know Bitcoin is a big deal, and it’s here to stay—everyone’s talking about it. It’s everywhere. Governments even own it. So it’s become a normal part of our society. However, I ask this: when the proverbial shit hits the fan, what do people want? They want to get their hands back on their cash. They want their money in their hands.

People ask me, “How will that work when we have a major economic collapse?” And sooner or later, that’ll happen—another recession. How are they going to grab all their money? What’s happening to Bitcoin? Where do you get it? You can’t. It’s supposedly in your account, in some digital storage vault.

I understand the technology is there, and I understand it’s cool. But people are speculating on it. They don’t use it as a currency; they’re trying to use it as an investment.

Now, go back and study something as goofy as it sounds—tulip bulb mania. This happened way back in the 1600s during the Dutch Golden Age. The Dutch people were so fascinated with tulip bulbs that they invested their entire life savings. This is common knowledge, a historical fact. People lost everything. But for decades, people were investing in tulip bulbs, and it became so normal that tulip bulbs were worth more than any coins in their pocket or whatever currency they were using at the time.

People were speculating on what those bulbs would become as they flowered. Tulip bulbs are the best equivalent of owning a home in today’s society. Think about how silly that sounds now. But I’m telling you, 100 years from now, people will look back and say, “What in the hell were people doing with this crypto stuff? What were they thinking?” I don’t know what will bring this craze back to reality, but there is so much speculation in our society. I’ve been in this industry for 28 years and have never seen anything like this.

The point is that people are in this mindset that they can retire easily—no work, patience, or discipline. They think they can roll the dice, throw money into the right crypto, and, bam, they’ll retire as multimillionaires. I see it so often, and I’m telling you, this will end badly—just like all the other manias did.

Another factor that needs to be discussed more is government involvement in cryptocurrencies. Governments want to know how much money is in the system, where it’s going, and how to trace it.

Jacobsen: Governments may crack down on cryptocurrency, even though some are involved. Do you see that as potentially one of the factors that could “bring things down to earth” for this mania?

Peterson: Good question. I look at it like this. I always apply common sense to these things because people, especially in the media, often make the rest of us seem out of touch, uneducated, or not up with the times. They did the same thing with the real estate boom and bust. They did the same thing with dot-com stocks in the 2000s—if you can recall that—when tech and Internet stocks skyrocketed. Warren Buffett, one of the most famous investors in our history, shunned those investments. He told people to stay away from them because there were no earnings behind those companies.

They did the same thing to him, saying, “He doesn’t get it. The older man doesn’t understand. This is a different scenario.” And yet, most of those companies went to zero. A few survived and are doing well now, but that’s the same thing I’m saying about what might happen to cryptocurrencies. Something is going to trip the switch. Something will pull one of the cards out of this deck, and they’re all starting to crumble. We are still determining exactly what it’ll be, but it could be government intervention.

When I talk about common sense, do you think any government would want its currency overtaken by a digital currency that everyone preferred over, say, the U.S. dollar? What would happen to our government if the U.S. dollar became second tier to Bitcoin? The whole premise behind Bitcoin is that people don’t want government intervention. They don’t want the government to manipulate it. And in some ways, I agree. Our government has screwed up many things they should’ve kept their hands out of. Government, by and large, tends to mess up more than they help in many areas. The proverbial bias: and yes, I’ll admit that.

Jacobsen: Yes, I understand. This might be a different focus of our conversation, but it’s something on many people’s minds. This is an open space for free-ranging conversation. It was meant to be focused, but I always wonder how these will necessarily turn out. That’s part of the fun—this is a relaxed, authentic space. 

So, let’s say people are anxious. They come to you because they know your background—you’ve written books and know you’re a financial expert. You’ve been managing wealth for clients with portfolios that can reach nine figures. The number I was given recently was $425 million.

To regular people, that number is almost incomprehensible. It’s so large that it doesn’t have a grounding—it’s hard to compare to real-life situations. So, how do you pitch to people to invest in the long term and have patience so their future selves can be less anxious and better prepared for the inevitable storms of life?

Peterson: Scott, I was given this opportunity. Everyone has a role in life. When people find their passion and love what they do, they often want to help others—not just benefit themselves. I have benefited greatly from what I do, which is helping people create, sustain, and enjoy wealth and do the right thing with it.

But I didn’t just stumble into this. My career began because of one pivotal moment when I was 14. I grew up—and still live—in the same small town. It’s primarily a farming community. My dad is a farmer; his dad was a farmer, and his dad was before him.

Everyone in my family farms or ranches. They know how to work with the land and animals. We’d go to the coffee shop every afternoon, and all the local farmers would be there. I went with my dad every day at 4 o’clock. By then, I had already started my career as a jockey. I was exercising horses, riding in races, and winning money.

For a 14-year-old back in those days, I was doing pretty well, but I didn’t fully realize it. I thought I was working hard and making good money for my age. Then, one day, an older gentleman, who surprised me, asked, “Billy, what are you doing with your money? You’re doing pretty well.”

I was proud to tell him I was putting most of it in the bank. But he said, “That might not be the best thing to do.” I looked at him and asked, “What do you mean, Mr. Tucker?” He said, “Come back here tomorrow, and I’ll explain.”

So, I thought about it. I did. The next day, I sat there while the usual conversations about politics, sports, and the country’s state went on, hoping he would remember. Sure enough, he did. He said, “Now sit down here next to me.”

He opened the newspaper—newspapers were a big deal back then. I still read the physical papers. He opened the finance section and scrolled down to the mutual fund section. He circled one and said, “This is a mutual fund.” I didn’t know what a mutual fund was, but he explained it to me in layperson’s terms—terms a rancher could understand.

He said, “This is an investment company that will take your money and invest it for you. All you need to do is sit back and be patient. Keep adding to it if you can.” He gave me an investment application form and told me to fill it out, send in some money, and, most importantly, check the box that says, ‘I want to contribute every month.’

So, I did. I submitted my application for $1,000 and checked the box to add $100 monthly. At that age, it was a big commitment, but I knew I could do it. And I did.

Then, I became passionate because I was watching my money grow. As the years passed and my contributions increased, people started asking me what I was doing. I studied and read the Wall Street Journal instead of some comic books.

I was reading things that enlightened me about the world, investing, and how capital markets work. So, when I went to college, I studied finance and economics. At the same time, I was still a professional racehorse jockey. People in the industry started asking me how I managed my investments and what I was doing.

I began helping them, and it became a natural fit for me. It might not seem that way at first glance—a jockey becoming a financial advisor—but that’s how it transpired. I found my calling and realized it wasn’t so difficult. I didn’t have to work physically hard; I could invest in great companies, support their growth, and make money while they built their businesses, created more earnings, and did good things for the economy.

That’s the story of how I started investing. It’s not hard—you have to begin and not be afraid when things get bad. That’s actually when you should increase your contributions. I still teach that to students today.

I run a free boot camp where I teach 500 students every year. I bring them to a local university, and along with my staff and other volunteers, we spend a full day teaching high school students about financial literacy, debt avoidance, taxes, and much more. That’s my way of giving back because Mr. Tucker shared his knowledge with me. I am obligated to pass that knowledge on to many people.

Jacobsen: To your point about being both a jockey and a financial advisor—that’s not so unusual. I once worked at a show jumping farm owned and run by a former Olympic show jumper for Canada. They trained Tiffany Foster when she was younger—she’s an excellent show jumper from Canada. Many people at that farm were business professionals in fashion, law, and more.

So, you find people in various professions who also engage in equestrian activities, whether for recreation or competition. Tiffany is involved in some fashion or decor-related business, too. Horse people are dynamic.

Although horse racing differs from show jumping or dressage.

Peterson: there are many disciplines within the equestrian world. You’d be amazed at the various avenues and offshoots you can explore with horses.

Jacobsen: If you talk to show jumpers about three-day eventing, they’ll say, “It’s crazy.”

Peterson: No kidding. We’re going to the Breeders’ Cup races in Del Mar, California, in a few weeks. People worldwide—the Sheikhs, the kings and queens, and the wealthiest individuals—will attend. This is called the sport of kings for a reason. The best horses and the most influential people worldwide will gather in Del Mar for those two days of races.

Jacobsen: It’s wild, especially with people like His Highness from the UAE—he loves horses. And Canada had just one gold medalist in show jumping, Eric Lamaze.

But when you look at these life stories, it’s a roller coaster. You get much drama. It could fill volumes of books. That’s off-topic.

What is the most significant state of mind people should have when investing long-term or for financial stability? How can they lower their anxiety and avoid stress-related illnesses caused by financial despair?

Peterson: That’s a great question. It’s tough. Too many people have the mindset that they can’t afford to invest. That’s very shortsighted. You can afford to invest if you prioritize it in your budget. You have to cut back on certain things. Skip that $6 latte today, or resist the temptation to stop at the convenience store and spend $20 on snacks for the kids. It happens so often.

It’s so easy to spend money these days. You can tap your phone—you don’t have to think about it. You don’t have to pull out cash, which is much harder to part with. But when you’re tapping your phone, it feels like, “I’ll deal with that later, no big deal.” So we run up debt. We have more consumer credit card debt in this country than ever. It’s scary. And I understand the big reason is inflation.

We’ve had crazy inflation in the last few years, and the numbers they report don’t reflect the true picture. They say costs have risen 20% over the last four years, but that’s inaccurate. The real numbers are closer to 40% or 50% for daily necessities.

Wages haven’t kept up with inflation, so real wages are lower than before. But that doesn’t mean you can’t invest a certain percentage of your income. Always pay yourself first. And when you invest, don’t chase something that sounds too good to be true. So many people have lost everything trying to get rich quickly, thinking it will happen overnight. Investing is easy, but it takes time to build wealth.

What makes it meaningful is that you’re in it for the long haul. It’s like starting a business. I admire and respect entrepreneurs—they become some of the wealthiest people in the world. However, not everyone has the desire or the capacity to handle the stress, worry, and time it takes to build a successful business.

So why not buy into a business that’s already established? Most people don’t even realize that’s possible—that’s what the stock market is—the capital markets. But when people hear “stock market,” they think it’s a gamble, like going to Vegas.

Peterson: That’s not at all what it is. The market is where you can buy shares of any publicly traded company or sell them whenever you want, which is great because you can get your money back quickly. However, that’s also one of the biggest pitfalls for people. When the news gets scary, they listen to those around them—especially the goofballs on TV—who say the world is ending or the sky is falling. So, they panic and want to pull their money out quickly. The market has already dropped, and they sell when they should be doing the opposite.

They should be buying—buy when things are down, and the news is the worst. That’s when you can get great companies at deeply discounted prices. Some top companies in our models and portfolios include Apple, Costco, Home Depot, Amazon, NVIDIA, and Tesla. These are strong companies with great business models and barriers to entry.

Let me give you a quick example with Walmart. It’s a “boring” company, one most people have shopped at at some point. If you had bought 100 shares of Walmart when it went public in 1972, at the initial public offering price of $16.50 per share, you’d have invested $1,650. If you had just forgotten about that investment, today, those 100 shares would be worth more than $36 million, and you’d receive nearly $500,000 in dividends annually.

And this isn’t even one of the craziest growth stories in history—this is a boring company selling discounted goods. But that’s the power of capital markets. You don’t have to create the business yourself—you can invest alongside great companies and become wealthy.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Peterson: Absolutely. Have a good day.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Alexandra H. Solomon: Couples Authentically Explored

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/11

Over the last three decades, Dr. Alexandra H. Solomon has become one of today’s most trusted relationship voices. A professor, therapist, speaker, author, retreat leader, and media personality, Dr. Solomon is passionate about translating cutting-edge research and clinical wisdom into practical tools people can use to bring awareness, curiosity, and authenticity to their relationships. Her work on Relational Self-Awareness has reached millions of people around the world.

Dr. Solomon studied Psychology and Women’s Studies at the University of Michigan and received her PhD in Counseling Psychology and a graduate certificate in Gender Studies from Northwestern University. During graduate school, she was awarded the Dr. John J.B. Morgan Fellowship and worked at The Family Institute at Northwestern University as a research and clinical fellow.

Dr. Solomon spent many years as a clinical assistant professor in the Department of Psychology at Northwestern University and a faculty member in the Master of Science in Marriage and Family Therapy program at The Family Institute at Northwestern University. She was the principal investigator in The Family Institute’s Family Business Project. She is a faculty member in the School of Education and Social Policy (SESP) at Northwestern University and a licensed clinical psychologist at The Family Institute at Northwestern University.

In addition to serving as an ad hoc reviewer for leading journals like the Journal of Marriage and Family Therapy (JMFT) and Family Process and writing articles and chapters for leading academic journals and books in the field of marriage and family, she is the author of two bestselling books, Loving Bravely: Twenty Lessons of Self-Discovery to Help You Get the Love You Want and Taking Sexy Back: How to Own Your Sexuality and Create the Relationship You Want. She also writes a popular blog for Psychology Today.

Dr. Solomon maintains a psychotherapy practice for individual adults and couples. In 2024, she founded the Institute for Relational Self-Awareness (IRSA). She is a founding expert on the Mine’d app and serves on the clinical board of Dame Products. She provides clinical training to clinicians and graduate students and teaches the internationally renowned undergraduate course Building Loving and Lasting Relationships: Marriage 101. Her newest offering is a comprehensive, self-paced e-course, Intimate Relationships 101.

Dr. Solomon regularly presents to diverse groups, including the United States Military Academy at West Point, Microsoft, and the American Association of Marriage and Family Therapy (AAMFT). She is frequently asked to discuss relationships with media outlets like The Today Show, O Magazine, The Atlantic, Vogue, and Scientific American.

When she isn’t working, she loves long walks, sweaty workouts, and Yahtzee. She lives with her husband, Todd, and their teens in Highland Park, Illinois.

Solomon talks about her career studying relationships and intimacy. Solomon shares her upbringing in a complex family, which influences her fascination with love and relationships. They discuss how couples therapy requires understanding both partners, their interpersonal dynamics, and the cultural context. Solomon emphasizes the importance of evolving within long-term relationships and advocates for couples to embrace their growth. They also explore societal expectations around monogamy, the rise of non-monogamy, and the impact of relationship breakups, including the grief and shame often associated with them.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Alexandra Solomon from the Institute for Relational Self-Awareness, IRSA. She’s calling in from Chicago. So, how did you first get interested in relationships, intimacy, couples, and so on? You’ve been doing this for close to three decades now?

Professor Alexandra Solomon: Not quite three, but getting close. More than two. Yes, this has truly been my life’s work. The deepest version of the story is that I grew up in a home watching my parents struggle in their relationships in a complicated blended family that faced challenges in several ways.

So I had that influence—what I was watching and experiencing in my home—and I grew up during the early days of Oprah, Phil Donahue, self-help, and Dr. Ruth. My whole life, I was fascinated by the world of love, sex, and relationships. But I had it in my head that I had to become a medical doctor. Luckily, I had a breakthrough in college and realized that I could make studying relationships my life’s work, which has suited me well.

There’s a way in which the expertise I’ve developed is in honour of the little girl I used to be, who felt so overwhelmed and confused by what her parents were going through. Now, I can be of service in my life today. I’m deeply grateful for my career and all the places it has taken me for individuals who have gone through difficult family circumstances and have become licensed clinical psychologists—which, for those listening, is considered elite within the field of psychology because these programs are a) difficult to get into and b) rigorous, compared to many other programs. It’s not to diminish other programs, but these have a certain mythology around them.

My program had five people in it. I was in a cohort of five, and to this day, I still feel immense gratitude for the professor who saw my application. I went straight from undergrad and worked incredibly hard. I had written a rigorous undergrad honours thesis, but did she ever take a chance on me? I hope I’ve done right by her because, yes, these clinical psychology PhD programs are hard to get into, and they are brutal.

Jacobsen: So, before we dive into more of the main topics, which we’ll cover in session 2, what did you realize while doing that program—that intensive training—about your family history? I’m sure many people who go through these programs, especially those with challenging circumstances, gain a lot of self-insight.

Jacobsen: Yes, that is truly the heart of any good training program preparing people to become clinicians. My program prepared me to become both an academic/researcher and a clinician. However, that clinical aspect—any program worth its tuition—will ask students to examine their history. Any responsible therapist has done their work. The best clinical training programs treat the clinician as their subject.

It’s not that there’s a world of therapists over here and a world of patients over there. No, we’re all on these journeys and must understand our histories. I gained a lot of insight into the impact of not being willing to take responsibility for your behaviour.

I put myself into therapy when I was probably 20. I was trying hard to take responsibility for myself in a way that I don’t know that I saw the grown-ups who raised me taking responsibility for themselves. I understood that we get to be works in progress and on our healing journeys. The grown-ups I saw growing up were acting out their pain rather than turning towards their pain and trying to heal it.

Now, I’m the mom of two young adults, and who knows? They may well sit in their own therapy offices someday and talk about the ways I acted out my pain rather than healing it. But I feel pretty confident that one of the things I modelled in our home, as my husband and I were raising our kids, was taking responsibility for ourselves, our moods, and our words. I’ve spent many years apologizing to my kids when I’ve been thoughtless or sharp-tongued and tried to come back and make things right.

Jacobsen: Do you think many of these family issues stem from a certain pain point for that parent?

Solomon: Absolutely, yes. When I am working with—I don’t do therapy with children. Still, when I’m working with a couple, we often talk about the challenges they’re facing with their kids. There are disagreements between parents, or parents are stressed about things their kids are doing or not doing. My first question is, I want to hear from both partners. I want to hear about their childhoods. I specifically want to know what was going on in their life when they were the same age as their kid is now.

Because there are certain ages and stages of parenting that are particularly difficult for parents, one of the reasons can be that this is the point at which their father left the family or the point at which they, God forbid, suffered sexual trauma. So, that thing the parent went through, which they may have shoved aside or pushed away, gets reactivated when their child reaches that age.

Jacobsen: When you’re talking about self-awareness, for someone like myself who is not an expert, I think of these things as internal work. That awareness is like circling back on itself. As opposed to regular couples therapy, which is between two people, this awareness also involves a circular process within the individual. Does that complicate couples therapy when you’re adding self-awareness into the mix?

Solomon: There is a core feature to that. You’re asking good questions for someone who isn’t an expert. That’s an excellent question. I’m currently developing a certification course for couples therapy, and that’s the thing I find most exciting and most challenging—how to train someone to become a competent couples therapist. I’ve been doing this for 15 years, training graduate students to become couples therapists at the Family Institute at Northwestern, so this is not my first time doing it. But at this point, every time I teach, I can reevaluate and reflect on, “Why do I believe what I believe?”

Why do I do what I do? And you’re exactly right. When I am sitting with a couple, there are four things I keep in mind: the psychology of partner A, the psychology of partner B, the interpersonal process that happens between them, and, fourth, the cultural backdrop that shapes everything that all three of us are thinking and feeling. So, there are four lenses of analysis in couples therapy. It isn’t very easy, and my husband Todd and I have been in couples therapy over the years. I have distinct memories of it, and one memory is sitting with a couples therapist—and let me tell you, it’s a pain to be a couples therapist for other therapists!

So, I do not envy the various providers. But when I’ve been in the role of a couples therapy recipient, I had the experience of one of our therapists. I could tell she was a good psychologist but didn’t know how to hold the system. She could understand Todd’s psychology, and she could understand Alexandra’s psychology. Still, I didn’t feel like she held the relational process we were going through.

Then, I have another memory of a therapist who was able to shape and refine the dance that Todd and I got into. So, that is a distinct skill set—how do you hold both the individuals and the couple?

Jacobsen: Now, I’ve heard much commentary around a rise in narcissism in the general culture, as well as the difficulty in treating Cluster B personality disorders. Yet, in contrast, I’ve heard proactive, constructive conversations around authenticity as a deterrent to narcissism and as a way to reduce the emergence of problematic psychological traits in oneself.

When you are in this therapeutic process with these four factors, do you try to elicit more authentic responses between the couple so they can develop more natural, genuine, healthy, and integrated relationships within the partnership?

Solomon: Yeah, I do. That’s a whole different conversation for us to have about this so-called rise in narcissism, which I have some concerns about. We must be having a larger, more general conversation about narcissism, and I’m here for that. But I worry that we are watering it down. When there’s much information out there, there’s also a responsibility to use it carefully and not just stick a label on your partner, like, “You are a narcissist.” Certainly, narcissistic tendencies exist, and we all have the risk of slipping into those tendencies—deflecting, defending, saying, “It’s not me.”

One of my roles as a couples therapist is helping create an office environment that feels safe enough for people to hold up a mirror and look at their behaviour gently and compassionately, which evokes self-compassion in the client.

Certainly, I have had very resistant clients—arms crossed, saying, “No way. I’m not looking at myself.” But I’ve also had the experience where someone reluctantly comes into my couples therapy office. They might be coded as narcissistic because they are deflecting, defending, afraid to take responsibility, and maybe have never been asked to do so.

That has been my job—to leverage my experience, heart, and alliance with that client to help them safely start looking at the “why.” Some people can have quite offensive-looking behaviours—deflecting, defending, and defensiveness. Those are offensive behaviours. But when I can see through that and understand the pain that drove that behaviour, it’s not making an excuse for it but contextualizing it. When I can reach for that pain and understand who they were as a little boy and why that way of coping was a survival strategy in their home when they were little, then we can start to peel back the layers. We can start to learn some new skills.

Then I can help that client tenderly reparent that little boy. I can invite the partner to look differently at those patterns that have been so hurtful, and we can start to create a different dynamic.

Jacobsen: So what do you do when dealing with more cognitive, intellectual clients, and clients who talk like regular people but don’t necessarily speak in terms of abstraction? When you’re trying to get the point across about noticing a problem, wanting to communicate that to them, and working out a process to reintegrate to a better place of homeostasis for the relationship?

Solomon: I am responsible for modifying my approach to meet clients where they are. One of the ways I do that is by using their language—playing their language back to them and then building on it.

Another way might be sharing something and checking in, ensuring they understand what I’ve offered. Just because something makes sense in my head doesn’t mean it makes sense in somebody else’s head. Something else I might do, even if I have a strong feeling that I’m on a track that’s going to be accurate or resonant, is to say, “I might be out in the left field with this, but let me run it by you and see what you think.” I get super, super circumspect with something.

That’s at the heart of empathy. Empathy is sometimes reflecting someone’s current feelings toward them. Still, there’s another level of empathy:

  • Taking someone’s words and description and advancing it
  • Deepening it
  • Taking it to the next place

That’s an attuned empathy—I see where you’re at, I match that, and I raise it slightly.

Yes, those are some of the thoughts off the top of my head in terms of how I work. Certainly, it’s different to work with someone who has years of therapy under their belt compared to someone who’s working things out in real-time. This might be their first time thinking about it, and that’s not necessarily an age thing.

I’ve had 25-year-olds where it’s their first time in therapy, and I’ve had 55-year-olds where it’s their first time in therapy. So, there’s a learning curve. I’ve been in this world for so long that I forget what a particular way of thinking and talking is, and it takes a while to help people get oriented and comfortable with it.

Jacobsen: What clients can be difficult, if not impossible, to work with—individually or as a couple?

Solomon: Do you mean for me or the field in general? I can tell you what the research tells me. 

Jacobsen: Good insight. So, individually, but with some side commentary on the field. I’m aware of some comments from various experts who say, “Cluster B personality disorder is code for, ‘difficult patient.’”

Solomon: Yes, the research says that the most difficult couples to work with are—I know the top 3. The top three that couples therapists will tell you are:

Number 1 is lack of love. It’s hard to work with a couple with such big walls built up—years of disconnection, they haven’t touched in years, and there hasn’t been softness or vulnerability for a long time. That reawakening is difficult. Sometimes, what can make that easier is if we can find a place in their story where they used to feel that way, then at least we’re trying to reawaken something that used to be there. But there are couples where it never was, and that’s a relationship founded in companionship, creating different markers for health and goodness. That’s one.

Number 2, the research shows, is active addiction. When one or both people are struggling with active addiction, that makes couples therapy hard. Many people would say that couples therapy is contraindicated—that people ought to manage their addiction first, prioritize working on the individual addiction, and then do the couple’s work. However, many addiction programs include relational treatment as part of it because the research shows stronger long-term results and lower relapse rates when there has been couples or family therapy as part of addiction treatment.

And number 3 is infidelity, which is another difficult one. I have a bit of a specialty in working with couples recovering from infidelity. At any given time, about three-quarters of my couples are infidelity recovery cases. So yes, those cases are difficult, but I also love that work. I feel well-suited to hold on to everyone’s humanity. I don’t necessarily struggle with the one who has transgressed.

It’s easy for me to hold on to gentleness, to their dignity, even as I can feel critical about what they did and how much harm they caused their partner. I do have a harder time with couples where there’s a lot of emotional dysregulation. Those cases are difficult because I play traffic cop, putting up my hand and asking people to stop and talk to me, not their partner. That’s not my most comfortable place to be. I can do it, but it makes me feel a little sweaty and shaky, and it takes me a while to come down after a session like that.

Those sessions may not cause the same activation for other therapists, but that’s my sense.

Jacobsen: Are there certain trends in relational issues that are cultural? For instance, if we looked at Canada, the United States, and Mexico, are there certain trends in North America that come up more often than in other cultural contexts? Or does every bad relationship show the same general signs, regardless of culture?

Solomon:  It’s not that cultural factors make things worse in one area of the world compared to another. 

Jacobsen: That’s interesting. 

Solomon: I don’t think of any particular line of research that rings a bell for me around that. The first thought that comes to my mind is a trend that I suspect is more prevalent in the U.S. than in some other parts of the world—couples wanting to figure out how to move from sexual monogamy to consensual non-monogamy, ethical non-monogamy, or polyamory. There’s also a set of couples where one partner wants to “open up” the relationship. In contrast, the other wants to remain monogamous, creating almost a mixed-orientation relationship.

It’s been about a decade now. Still, for much of my career, I didn’t know a single thing about consensual non-monogamy. All I knew was that it happened in the sixties—many couples tried it, things got a little weird, and everyone decided that was not the way to do it. That was all I learned in my training; it wasn’t even a topic. Couples and monogamy were like peanut butter and jelly. It was, “These things go together; it’s natural; it’s baked into the equation.”

But over the past ten years, my field has started having this conversation, and it’s super important. I’m glad we’re having it because no matter where a couple lands, they should be discussing the boundaries around their relationship. How do they define fidelity? What priority do they place on it? What are the risks and consequences of monogamy? What are its strengths and benefits? Do they want monogamy? Why do they want monogamy? Do they want to be open? Why do they want to be open? How do they protect their relationship in either scenario?

When something is explored rather than assumed, everyone can become more deeply committed to it and understand more about themselves—why they want to advocate for a particular relational architecture. So, it’s a pretty exciting time in that way. That’s an emerging trend.

Jacobsen: That makes intuitive sense. We’re psychologically complex creatures, so I’d expect a constellation of relational types rather than just one. Evolutionarily, even. There’s one category for the majority, but also for a minority—what if relationships aren’t for them or only for short periods? They might be categorized as serial monogamists or people for whom lifelong singlehood is their temperament.

Not as a judgment, but as a description: some people don’t do relationships well. 

Solomon: That’s another important shift I’ve seen throughout my career. I came into this field after drinking the Kool-Aid. There’s a hierarchy in relationships, where the number one relationship in an adult’s life is their romantic, intimate partnership—and everybody should want that.

Everyone should look for their partner. The goal is one love story. You find your person, you marry your person, and you die next to them, God willing, many, many, many years later. That was the notion I had. It’s been baked into my field.

My field is marriage and family therapy, or couple and family therapy. We call that “matrionormativity”—what is normative is wanting and prioritizing romantic love. It’s fascinating to see the number of books that have come out in the last few years that make the case for questioning this idea. Along with that, there’s a whole bunch of research showing that we have a collective bias against single people. There is a headwind for single people.

This research isn’t old. Research in the last 10 to 15 years shows that when you ask people in a survey—when you give a survey participant a description of a person and say that this person is single with certain qualities—those people are deemed to be more selfish and more immature than the same made-up characterization of a person in a relationship. We have a collective stereotype against single people, which we’re finally starting to unearth, examine, and ask why. Along with that comes an elevation of friendship.

People ask, “Wait, why have we always put spouses above friends? What’s the consequence of having done that?” I was giving a talk at a conference to therapists about how to help clients going through a breakup or divorce. The first question from the audience was, “What about friendship breakups?”

This collective “Yes!” was because friendship breakups are incredibly painful. Yet, they’re a form of what we call disenfranchised grief. When somebody goes through a divorce, they’re likely to get the support of family and friends because, collectively, we know divorce is hard and stressful. But who supports someone going through a friendship breakup, which can be an exquisite and gut-wrenching loss?

We’re in this interesting moment where we’re starting to elevate friendship collectively, asking, “Why the heck do we care?” Why would we say someone is a better person just because they’re in a relationship rather than single? And we’re starting to wonder if maybe we’ve overloaded our romantic relationships—expecting too much from them—and not enough from friendships. So, it’s a cool moment.

Jacobsen: A few thoughts come to mind there, and they’re a constellation of different questions. On the first one, it’s almost as if we’re in the sixties and seventies again, where people took the cultural deck of cards and threw it in the air. We have more cards in the deck being thrown up, with more cards added as they fall, metaphorically. We’ll be seeing more and more discussions, open discussions academically, along with the evidence coming in. How will that evidence evolve to give us a clearer picture of these different modes of being? Are there any early indications?

Solomon: Well, the one indication we have is not early—we have 80 years of data from Harvard. Harvard has been conducting a longitudinal study about happiness, and they’re now in their fourth wave of principal investigators because they’ve been doing it since the 1930s. They’ve been looking at various indicators to see what ties to happiness—income, physical health, career goals, family, etc. They’ve found, over and over again, that it’s the quality of people’s relationships that determines the quality of their lives. And that’s not just romantic relationships; it’s also the depth of friendships, connection with adult siblings, etc.

That’s what has shined through in that data—our relationships make life good. So why do we spend so much time stressing about our jobs and Instagram followers when the goodness in life is in the people we get to love and those who love us? So, I guess that’s what I would say about our indications. However, research is always limited by the framing of the researchers.

We also have a cool new wave of researchers asking questions about relationships and framing the evidence differently. A lot of our research has been about marriage. But what marriage? Cis, white, hetero, middle-class marriage. So, we’ve needed a new generation of researchers to ask different kinds of questions.

Jacobsen: So, the biggest life stressors are breakups, divorces, and the like?

Solomon: Yes, when individuals go through these, it’s a subjective experience with many physiological, psychological, and mental health impacts. 

Jacobsen: Yet, at the same time, that frame of mind is based on a cultural frame. As you noted, the reverse of the bias against singlehood is this pedestal we’ve created for monogamy and the idea of finding a “soulmate” or “twin flame”—these mythologies we throw around. That subjective experience can be amplified, increasing negative effects when it doesn’t match societal expectations.

You’ve lost that potential attainment—or what you thought was attainment. So, could we see a reduction in the stressfulness of these life events with a broadening of the landscape or a freeing up of–let’s say–structures on an individual’s sense of individuality and authenticity in life?

Solomon: At the very least, what we might do is liberate people from the experience of shame in their loss. Part of what makes a breakup or divorce so painful is the shame attached to it. If you have, “failed” in what society has told you is the most important, it’s easy to slip its grief into shame.

There will always be grief. Whenever we lose people, even if we have a robust network of people who matter to us, losing any one of those connections will still bring grief. But if we can shift the cultural framing, maybe, we can reduce the additional layer of shame that comes with it.

We’re still these fancy mammals. We get hardwired to each other. Our nervous systems become interdependent with those who matter to us, so pain and loss will always exist. There’s always going to be grief. But grief plus shame is a much worse, much more painful experience than grief without shame.

Jacobsen: How do you advocate for the success of couples who almost self-stereotype? I see this across political and social lines. They have these ideas in their mind—you can tell by how they talk and interact with their spouse in session. They’re thinking: “I have to be the best homemaker,” or “I have to be the best breadwinner.” More recently, “I have to be the best boss babe,” or, “I have to best male advocate,” and so on.

My biases lean more toward the latter, which are mine. So how do we, in those sessions, advocate for people to be authentic to their temperament, which could be a mix of all those things?

Solomon: Well, yeah. And by the way, add to that the idea that someone might have different “eras”—to borrow Taylor Swift’s language. Swift could have a boss babe era but then step out of it and want a cozy, comfortable, simple era. And that’s one of the things about a long-term relationship.

We marry a person at time without knowing who they’ll be at time later. That’s the challenge. I don’t even know—my husband and I am probably in our fourth or fifth “marriage” together. We know we’re “recreating” what this marriage of ours is about.

That’s what truly is in couple therapy. I don’t think a couples therapist helps a couple in their search for their true selves as much as a couple therapist helps create a strong enough container where they can be their evolving selves together—where they keep cheering for each other and figuring out how to optimize their self-expression while honouring the relationship. It’s about optimizing and having the space to keep growing because none of us are ever done evolving.

You’re right. That’s what I see when I work with a couple in year 25 of their marriage, and they’ve never seen a therapist before. I guarantee you, a lot of what we’re doing is talking about the grief of unfulfilled promises—who you said you were going to be but never were—and then a lot of forgiving.

I love it when I get to be with a couple early on in their relationship because we can create a vision for the relationship that allows a lot of permission. It doesn’t feel like shackles; it doesn’t feeling like “you have to be this to me.” Instead, we can “create a marriage where the agreement is to support each other’s growth” because, truly, who knows what will happen?

Even if nothing unexpected happens—like an illness, a job loss, or family stress—many things change along the way.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time. I appreciate it.

Solomon: Yes, you’re a really interesting conversation partner. This is a good space for you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Nora Mahmood: President, Humanist Society Singapore

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/10

Nora Mahmood is the President of Humanist Society Singapore. Mahmood talks about the organization’s experiences hosting the General Assembly for Humanists International. Mahmood discussed the challenges and successes of organizing the event, highlighting the sense of connection among global humanist communities. She emphasized the importance of promoting humanism while respecting religious sensitivities in Singapore’s multicultural context. Mahmood also expressed her vision for greater collaboration between humanist groups in Southeast Asia, Africa, and India, hoping for more online conferences to foster global connections. The conversation concluded with future plans for attending events, including a trip to Luxembourg.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Nora from the Humanist Society Singapore. How are you doing today?

Nora Mahmood: Good. I am looking forward to this meeting.

Jacobsen: Excellent. So, I want to focus first on what happened positively. Singapore hosted the General Assembly for Humanists International, putting you in the limelight. How did it go? What were some of your key takeaways from the experience?

Mahmood: It was quite an experience. It was the first time we hosted such a large conference. We’ve had events like the Asian Humanist Conference, but that was on a smaller scale. That event was back in 2015 and lasted only a few days. But when we bid to host this event, we had our doubts. However, everyone on the committee unanimously said, “Let’s go for it.”

If other countries like Australia and New Zealand can do it, why not us? So, we took the opportunity and won the bid. Initially, it wasn’t very comforting because it was such a challenge. But we eventually came together as a team, and everyone played their part.

For the first time, people from all different countries came together. It was overwhelming, exciting, and yet nerve-wracking because we didn’t want to disappoint anyone. We wanted to ensure that everyone who came to Singapore would have an unforgettable experience.

What we learned from organizing such a big event is invaluable. It was a great experience, and we’re glad we did it. It’s a challenge, but you’ll never know what’s possible if you don’t take that first step.

Jacobsen: One of the big things I kept hearing from people in interviews was how much they appreciated Singapore’s approach to interfaith and interbelief dialogue. I couldn’t attend, though I have always wanted to visit Singapore and other parts of the world that I have yet to explore.

Last year, I was in Copenhagen with Remus Cernea, one of the keynote speakers. Unfortunately, we were doing war correspondents in Ukraine, so I worked on journalism in a war zone. I apologize for not being able to attend.

However, many people I spoke with came away from the General Assembly in Singapore with a sense that there are legitimate ways to engage in interfaith and interbelief dialogue, not just with others but also in how we do our outreach and advocacy for humanism. People were attentive to Singapore’s thoughtful distinctions, especially in deradicalization efforts.

Not only did attendees gain an appreciation for the global pluralism of the humanist community, which is common at these kinds of conferences, but they also developed an appreciation for Singapore’s unique methodologies. How you approach humanist values within a cultural context was a consistent and interesting comment from many.

Mahmood: Yes. As you mentioned, interfaith dialogue is a big thing here in Singapore. We’ve gone through racial riots, and we’ve learned from that experience. So, we have initiatives like the Racial Harmony Act and other related measures. Yes, you can be critical of religion. Still, you must be careful about what you say to ensure that you’re not mocking or putting another religion down.

Even as humanists, we promote humanism rather than criticize other religions when we advocate for our beliefs. We must be careful with our words because they are sensitive, and people can easily get offended.

Jacobsen: Yes, I agree. A Singaporean approach to managing religion sounds fascinating. How does Singapore manage these religious sensitivities?

Mahmood: Well, there’s a management of religion here, and yes, there are many articles about it. It’s an important part of our social fabric.

Jacobsen: It’s an interesting context, especially since I’m from Canada, and the United States is even more of a different demographic context. In Singapore, as far as I know, when it comes to religious demographics, everyone is a minority, which creates a much more delicate balance. There’s also more government intervention to maintain pluralism.

Mahmood: Exactly. That’s why the government plays a significant role in promoting harmony. 

Jacobsen: Now, transitioning to the Humanist Society Singapore, how do we approach advocacy outside the conference context? We focus on promoting humanism and maintaining our community, which are challenges in outreach and sustaining membership.

Our membership fluctuates, but we’re focused on something other than membership drives. It’s not about numbers but the quality of the people joining us. Coming from a Muslim background, I used to hear a lot about “the fastest-growing religion” or “the most members.” Still, after joining the Humanist Society, I moved away from that mindset. It’s not about numbers for us; it’s about the people who stand with us.

Our membership is quite small, but it’s gradually growing. We’ve noticed that when we host events, non-members often attend, which tells me something. Some say they can’t become members for personal reasons but still participate in our events. That shows us that we have support beyond just formal membership.

Jacobsen: How do you approach advocacy?

Mahmood: We hold workshops and events like the Humanist Café, a bi-monthly event. We’re more of a support group, and we discuss various issues. For example, how do you, as a parent, raise your children in a non-religious environment? When your children go to school and mix with other kids from religious backgrounds, how do they handle it? How do you, as a parent, teach your children to navigate that kind of environment?

We also address challenges in life, particularly for non-religious individuals. How do we face life’s challenges without religion? One topic I’m very passionate about is end-of-life issues, which are important even for religious people. How do you handle that?

We just finished our own Humanist Café on embracing aging. Typically, when people age, they tend to become more pious. But what about those of us who are not religious? As we age, what do we look forward to? What support can we offer each other? So, we hold workshops where we discuss these kinds of topics.

As I mentioned, we don’t criticize other religions in these conversations. We focus on our issues and how we, as humanists, handle these things. I come from an Islamic background where we spent much time condemning why other people didn’t believe what we believed.

I grew up with that, but now we don’t engage in that environment. We focus on ourselves and how we can lead by example. We set aside discussions about why other religions do this or that. We don’t have to focus on that. Instead, we focus on showing our values through our actions.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. You provide a sense of community by focusing on your values and actions. Even with the fluctuation in membership, you aim to maintain a quality environment for committed members rather than focusing on having the largest numbers, like the Islamic example of “the biggest religion” or “the fastest-growing religion.” You’re more concerned with the quality of people’s orientation toward humanism rather than the quantity of members.

What areas would you like to see new activities or initiatives for the community, such as engaging in policy work or similar actions, but have yet to pursue? In a Singaporean context, where people are mindful of how they couch their language in public, how would you navigate advocating for a particular policy or cultural change if that were relevant?

Mahmood: Yes, we were invited to join a bioethics committee when they held a public discourse to get input from the humanist perspective on bioethics, bioengineering, and related topics. This is something we’re all passionate about. If you look at our chat group, we often discuss transhumanism, the question of what makes someone human, and so on.

We participated in that talk and shared our perspectives. However, our government’s policies are mostly secular, so there is little conflict for us. We follow the procedures and ensure they align with our values as humanists.

Jacobsen: That answers my question. How about areas where people want to provide funding or scholarships for young people or ways to support young individuals in growing into the movement? You mentioned navigating the space where you have a small secular community, yet in schools, many of the kids and parents are religious. They may not necessarily be devout, but religion is still a conversation in the home, and it’s a negotiation in public. How do you handle that?

Mahmood: As with other secular organizations, some provide scholarships and grants for young people to attend events like the General Assembly or engage in activities, after which they write a report or give a presentation. This happens in other humanist groups. Is that something you’ve considered?

That is something I’d like to explore in the future. But as I mentioned, we are small, especially regarding funding. We don’t receive any government funding. Humanists International helped cover some of the costs even for the General Assembly. We’re small and need more resources to sponsor someone to attend these events. But that might change in the future.

When I talk about numbers, I don’t focus on them. For example, in the last census of 2020, the number of non-religious people went up to 20%. We are now the second-largest group in Singapore, with Buddhism being the largest, followed by the Christian and Muslim groups. That increase caught much attention.

Suddenly, the TV media wanted to interview us. I’m waiting for the next census to see what happens. If the numbers continue to rise and we reach parity with the Buddhists, we’ll be in the spotlight even more. But as the numbers grow, other groups might start feeling threatened.

Jacobsen: Right; the more the non-religious numbers increase, the more attention you get, which could lead to tension with other religious groups.

Mahmood: Exactly. Groups like Buddhists, Christians, and Muslims may start to see it as a threat, especially when studies show that more young people are leaving religion and identifying as non-religious. They’ll start doing youth camps to retain their members. So, while numbers seem good, they can cause other groups to feel uneasy.

Jacobsen: That mirrors the experience of the ex-Muslim community, particularly in North America and elsewhere. They grew a lot in the late 2000s and 2010s, especially online. Initially, it was mostly men because they had more freedom of movement and income. Still, more women are coming into that space now. I’ve covered some of that as well.

In terms of HSS, how active is your online presence? Do you have discussion groups, presentations, or articles available online? Are you primarily an in-person community or expanding more into the online sphere?

Mahmood: We started as a small group doing meetups. That’s how it all began—a meetup group. We’d have sessions where a small group of friends would meet in person. Historically, we started with mostly small in-person meetups. Then came the AWARE Saga, which involved the women’s group AWARE (Association of Women for Action and Research).

AWARE is a women’s group in Singapore. If you still need to do so, look up the AWARE Saga. It was a situation in which a group of conservative Christians attempted to take over AWARE, which is supposed to be a secular organization. This conservative faction hijacked the group, and that was a pivotal moment for us.

Jacobsen: Oh, I see. So, did that event trigger something within your group?

Mahmood: Yes, exactly. When we saw that happening, we realized it could happen to any secular organization. That’s when we decided we needed a collective voice to be recognized and taken seriously. You must be registered as an official organization in Singapore to have that voice. That’s how we came together.

We started mostly online, using social media and digital platforms. However, we also hold some in-person workshops.

Jacobsen: I see. I am looking at it now. During that time, the church, such as the Church of Our Saviour, was promoting conversion therapy. Statements like “homosexual practice is contrary to God’s word”—sound like hardline rhetoric we often hear from fundamentalist preachers in North America.

Mahmood: Yes, this fundamentalism played a role in our formation as a society. When we first tried registering as an organization, our registration was put on hold because the authorities needed to figure out how to categorize us. They were curious about this group of irreligious people, which was new to them.

Eventually, after some intervention and many discussions, we were approved. But we started small. We still need to get our own office or building. We joke that we’re the “homeless humanists” of Singapore.

Jacobsen: That’s funny—the ‘HHSS, Homeless Humanists of Singapore.’ So, what’s your vision now?

Mahmood: My vision has always been to have a humanist center, a physical space for us. But right now, we focus on being active on social media, maintaining a website, and using platforms like Telegram for group chats. We realized social media is essential, so we’ve made ourselves present online to raise awareness. We’ve also started organizing more workshops, seminars, and Humanist Café meetups to create visibility.

Our Humanist Café is held on the first Friday of every month. It’s open to anyone curious about humanism, and we invite people to come and talk with us.

We also have an online session every third Friday of the month, from 7 PM to midnight, where people can reach out to us if they can’t attend our in-person events. We’re working on a series of community workshops starting in December to introduce the public to humanism and explain what we’re all about.

Jacobsen: If I could make it happen, as a journalist, I would reach out to The Straits Times and ask, “May I submit an interview with the humanists?” It would be interesting to get the word out more rather than having it pop up by accident when, say, the Pope visits, and people on the periphery ask, “What do the humanists think?” Then it’s published somewhere else, like in a South Korean publication.

Mahmood: That would be great! AC Grayling came to Singapore, and Dr. Lawrence Krauss did, too. When Dr. Krauss came to give a talk at NUS (National University of Singapore), he first asked, “Is there a humanist society in Singapore?”

Jacobsen: Really? Did he ask that?

Mahmood: I’m not sure if it was Dr. Krauss or AC Grayling, but one of them asked, “Is there a humanist society in Singapore?” That’s how we were called in. If not for that, no one would have asked. But we got some attention since these famous people came to Singapore for a conference and inquired about us.

Jacobsen: Wow, that’s incredible! So, you got pulled in when someone famous asked about the humanist society. It’s funny how we always bump into each other in similar situations. My first General Assembly was in Iceland. Did you or other Singaporeans at the General Assembly—or even at the one in Singapore—get a common sense of comfort, like, “I’m not the only one”? And did you feel like the people there seemed a bit more grounded? I don’t mean to insult anyone who isn’t a humanist, but there seems to be a certain comfort when you meet other humanists.

Mahmood: Yes. When we have humanist gatherings, there’s an undeniable connection. Even someone who’s not a humanist but attends the meeting can sense the shared values and ideologies. It makes it easier for us to connect. There’s a natural warmth or familiarity, even though you might meet for the first time.

Someone might say, “You all seem to know each other so well,” and I tell them, “No, this is the first time we’re meeting, but the connection is there.” It’s because of those shared values that we have an immediate bond. It’s been eye-opening for us.

Jacobsen: I will pull an AC Grayling and Lawrence Krauss on you. Is there a skeptic society? Are there Unitarian Universalists or an Ethical Culture group in Singapore? I ask because I need to figure it out.

Mahmood: Yes, there is a skeptics group in Singapore. They do join us once in a while. There’s also a Singapore Philosophy group; some members are in both groups. We do interact, and they invite us over for events. We have a good relationship with them.

Jacobsen: Very cool. I’ve heard of skeptics’ work in other regions.

Mahmood: They recently talked about transhumanism, and most of us joined in. It’s a collaborative effort.

Jacobsen: What do you hope people take away, not from the General Assembly, which we’ve already covered, but from the fact that you can find humanist groups almost anywhere in the world? Here I am, a stray Canadian in a small town, talking to the president of the Singapore group in her morning, in the middle of the week.

Mahmood: I hope there’s more connectivity and collaboration. My vision for HSS (Humanist Society Singapore) is to be a beacon for the humanist movement in Southeast Asia. We work closely with the Malaysian, Indonesian, and Philippine groups. Despite the geographical distances, we use Zoom and online platforms to stay connected.

I would love to see more online conferences where we exchange ideas even in different time zones. We can still come together and discuss topics dear to our hearts. For example, I want to work with African humanist and Indian national groups.

Jacobsen: So, you hope to work with the African and Indian humanist communities?

Mahmood: Yes, Singapore and India are both secular countries, but we approach secularism differently. It would be fascinating to explore those differences. Can Singapore and India host an online conference together? It’s in the pipeline, but we’re waiting on India to finalize some plans. Of course, it can be tricky with Zoom, but I’m optimistic.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts?

Mahmood: Thank you for this opportunity to talk to you. I appreciate your write-up on us and look forward to meeting you in person. Visit Singapore—or Luxembourg, even! We’re planning to go to Luxembourg next year. My team has decided to go as a group, so I’ll start saving up! We’ll meet in Luxembourg.

Jacobsen: That sounds exciting! Thank you so much; I appreciate it.

Mahmood: Thank you! Bye!

Jacobsen: Bye, have a great day!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Sulagna Misra, M.D.: On Misra Wellness and Direct Patient Care

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/09

Dr. Sulagna Misra, MD, BCMAS, is the founding physician of Misra Wellness®, a Direct Primary Care (DPC) practice that focuses on weight loss, men’s health, integrative medicine, primary care, and aesthetic medicine. She is certified in Integrative Medicine, Internal Medicine, and Aesthetic Medicine, offering a broad range of medical and aesthetic services. Born and raised in New York City, Dr. Misra previously practiced at Mount Sinai Hospital before transitioning to a role as an Integrative Medicine practitioner and Laboratory Director in Midtown Manhattan. Now based in Los Angeles, California, she strongly advocates patient-centered care, emphasizing the importance of the doctor-patient relationship in healthcare. Dr. Misra promotes price transparency and provides personalized consultations on patient education and ongoing communication. Guided by her tagline “Feel, Heal, Reveal,” she supports patients on their journey to optimal health and wellness. She has been featured in Forbes, US News and World Report, Men’s Health,Yahoo, Newsweek, International Business Times, and S.F. Examiner. Misra discusses the challenges of healthcare systems, particularly Medicare and Medicaid, which restrict patient care choices. She emphasizes the benefits of Direct Primary Care (DPC), advocating for price transparency and a more personalized doctor-patient relationship. Misra also critiques the growing role of nurse practitioners, AI, and corporate medicine, highlighting the need for reform in healthcare structures to improve patient outcomes.

Sulagna Misra, M.D.: You’re the first to ask for my consent to record. Everyone else assumes I’m going to say yes. Thank you. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I’ve learned from interviewees that asking for consent, such as free, prior, and informed consent, is not uncommon but not common.

So, I’ve established certain policies, with a few exceptions depending on the particular theme, case, topic, etc. Today, let’s get to the topic at hand with Dr. Sulagna Misra. You’re a founding physician of Misra Wellness, correct? Registered? So, what inspired you to pursue medicine, and why did you found Misra Wellness?

Misra: All right, I have a long history with medicine. First, I come from a family of doctors, so medicine is generational for me.

That’s a big factor. The second thing is that I didn’t want to become a doctor—true story. I fought it. I did the “good doctor’s daughter” thing because I’m Indian. Culturally, that’s largely expected. My mother and I had disagreements. I was a singer, dancer, and artist, and that’s the path I wanted to follow.

I was writing my music and didn’t study for my MCATs because I didn’t want to go into medicine, so I didn’t perform well. I went to NYU and majored in biochemistry, and my mother and I had an agreement. She was also a singer, and we both had opportunities to be on the radio.

I want to work with a producer in New York. I’m originally from New York. I was born in L.A., raised in New York, and then moved back to L.A. I’ll tell you more about that later. 

Jacobsen: You give off New York vibes.

Misra: I’mmuch a New Yorker. I hope I’m not losing that. All my music was stored on my computer, and I got accepted to a Caribbean medical school. I planned on starting in September, but they offered early enrollment in May. At that time, I was a licensed real estate agent.

I got my real estate license and planned to make money while pursuing my artistic passions. But instead of following that plan, my mother said, “Go for one semester to the Caribbean, to Ross University. If you hate it, come back, sing, and do other things. If you love it, stay with medicine.”

So, I went. However, I didn’t back up my music files because I’m not tech-savvy. Then, my computer crashed, and I lost all my music. On top of that, my mother was diagnosed with cancer.

She had ovarian cancer. She was young and a doctor herself. I didn’t even know about it because I was in the Caribbean. The call I got after my computer crashed was from my uncle, saying, “Hey, your mother has stage 3B ovarian cancer.”

She had everything removed. She’s out now, but she was hospitalized, and I was , “Oh my god.” I wanted to fly back but couldn’t do anything for her.

I couldn’t help her because I didn’t understand cancer. So, I decided they only needed me there for 12 to 16 months since it was the Caribbean. Then I could continue everything in the U.S. So, I thought, let me finish my program here, and then I’ll return to help my mom. Because without understanding the pathophysiology of the body—normal and abnormal—you can’t fight cancer. I couldn’t help her.

So, to help her, I changed my residency to be able to live at home and take care of her while attending residency at Staten Island University Hospital, where she was from, Staten Island, which is now Northwell. Instead of the six months they gave her, I helped her live for five years. I got her out of Staten Island University Hospital, where they misdiagnosed her, overmedicated her, and all of that. We got her into Sloan, and she was treated at Sloan Kettering.

Unfortunately, it was aaggressive cancer, and she passed. When she passed, my father also passed. My grandparents had passed, too, so I had six deaths back to back to back. It was so overwhelming for me. I needed a fresh start.

So, I left. I was working in private practice then because I had left Mount Sinai. I wanted continuity of care. I hated seeing patients come in and out of the hospital without being able to prevent them from returning. That’s when I decided I wanted to do outpatient medicine. I didn’t want to be a hospitalist anymore.

I wanted to be the doctor that patients saw regularly. So, I worked for Integrative Medicine of NYC. When my dad died, it was as if my body fell apart. I needed time to grieve, but that’s not allowed as a doctor, so I had to leave. I had to take care of my mom’s affairs, and eventually, I moved to L.A. to start fresh.

That’s where Misra Wellness was born. 

Jacobsen: How do you bring integrative, internal, and aesthetic medicine together? And how do we define each of those terms for non-medical people? 

Misra: I have a tagline: “Feel, Heal, Reveal.”

That came from a love of rhyming since I was a songwriter. But it also reflects my philosophy of wellness. No matter where you are on your journey to wellness, I’ll meet you there. Part of wellness involves dealing with internal issues—feeling and healing internal trauma or medical issues. Then, the “reveal” is whatever your optimal version is.

I integrate medicine by following Maslow’s hierarchy of needs, which I apply to almost everything. Maslow’s pyramid is a structure,  the food pyramid, where you work from the base up. The foundation includes essentials:  sleep, food, and shelter. For some people, it can also include sex.

Not everyone includes sex in the pyramid because, for some people, sex can be traumatic or associated with pain, so it needs to be higher on the pyramid and carefully addressed. That’s also how I approach integrative medicine. I also teach about this on a national VuMedi platform. It’s a physician education platform where I teach other physicians how to build their dream practice and prevent burnout based on my experiences. It’s hard for me to separate internal, integrative, and aesthetic medicine because everything is interconnected.

For example, let’s take weight loss—medical weight loss—a huge field, especially in obesity medicine (pun intended). When we start medical weight loss, patients begin to see results and finally feel heard and better; they want more for themselves. They want better financial flexibility and better working hours. The time they spend mindlessly eating,  sticking their head in the fridge—I know because I used to do that—becomes extra time.

And that’s where deeper issues come up,  suicidality, depression, and anxiety. What is your brain doing with all that extra time? That’s where integrative medicine, internal medicine, and aesthetic medicine come into play. They’re all related. When people start feeling better, they want more for themselves.

So, when my patients step on the scale and finally see progress, they often want more. They want financial advice, an organizer to help declutter their home, a therapist, or aesthetic treatments. Maybe they want something on their face treated, which they were too ashamed to show. They say, “I can show up, step up, and be seen, and I want to be seen differently.” It’s beautiful. That’s  one aspect.

Jacobsen: There are many aspects. What do you find is the hardest thing for people to get through?

Misra: Acknowledging it. The first step to any change is acknowledging that you need help and that there’s a problem. So, acknowledging that your weight is a problem, your energy is a problem, your sleep is a problem, your libido is a problem, your social support is a problem—that’s the only way to start identifying how to create a solution. That state is called a precontemplative state.

When you’re still aware that a change needs to be made and aren’t initiating the change, the doctor can only meet you there if you say something. That’s why I emphasize communication and regular contact, which is why I practice direct primary care. Direct primary care is a medical movement where doctors don’t accept insurance and offer affordable monthly memberships.

Jacobsen: Can you give me more detail about direct primary care? I’ve interviewed an epidemiologist named Dr. Gordon Guyatt several times, even recently. He works on evidence-based medicine, and he emphasizes the role of values and preferences. People can determine, at a societal level, the kinds of health care they want access to and choose from what is available. If you value equity in Canada, you prefer national health care and a pharmacare approach. In the United States, where autonomy is of great value, people tend to prefer privatized medicine more. Does that factor into the direct primary care (DPC) mindset and framework?

Misra: Yes, it does. DPC started with a group of family medicine doctors addressing the lack of access to physicians in rural America, particularly in the Midwest. In those states, DPC doctors might exchange services for membership fees. For example, if you raise chickens and have fresh eggs, your doctor might accept fresh eggs as payment for that month.

Or, if you have cattle and butcher, they might accept fresh steak. That’s how the movement began. DPC aims to remove administrative burdens and insurance from the equation. Insurance, in many cases, is fraudulently practicing medicine. It’s racketeering. They raise premiums and deny care even when doctors write medically necessary prescriptions.

For instance, doctors might prescribe a medication, and insurance will say, “Nope, you don’t meet the standard,” even though the patient does medically. This is why DPC is gaining traction—beyond burnout, there’s also moral injury for doctors. It’s frustrating when we say, “You need this medication,” and the corporate entity or insurance we work for says, “No, you can’t have it because it doesn’t meet our criteria. We don’t want to spend money on preventative care; it’s too costly.” Insurance isn’t working in your best interest.

But if you pay the doctor directly, we work on your behalf. People often think doctors are rolling in money because insurance premiums are increasing, but that’s not true. Doctors are losing money. We’re receiving less and less in reimbursements. For a time, I accepted Medicare and tried to have a hybrid practice with DPC and Medicare.

However, my Medicare reimbursements dropped so much that I spent more than I earned. I was literally in the negative. I had to stop accepting Medicare. So, you’ll see more doctors leaving the system because they’re not getting paid—especially primary care doctors. Our work is preventative; we’re not performing surgeries or procedures where the money is. Yes, this factors into DPC.

Jacobsen: Is this also tied to the larger issue? I’m not talking about individual cases.

Misra: They are all tied together. There’s also a significant financial burden regarding end-of-life care, where medical expenses are the number one reason for bankruptcy in the United States.

This is why I’m shouting from the rooftops. I’m human, and I need care too. Right now, I’m going through my medical challenges, and the nightmares I’m encountering are shocking. I shouldn’t be going through this—I’m a doctor. I know how to navigate the system. Why is this so difficult? If I, as a doctor, face these issues, I can’t imagine what my patients are going through. They often don’t even understand what’s happening.

And I’ve realized that many other doctors don’t fully understand what’s happening. We’re getting shouted at because we’re the system’s front face. The insurance companies aren’t saying, “Hey, we deny your claim.” No, the doctor delivers that message: “Your insurance denies this.” But the truth is, you chose your insurance plan, and you negotiated that contract with them. We didn’t negotiate that. We’re  dealing with the results of your negotiation.

When you remove insurance from the equation, you discover the actual cost of things—which is what direct primary care does. For example, compare the prices under a Blue Shield platinum PPO plan or an Aetna platinum PPO plan versus the prices I can negotiate through direct primary care. Sometimes, I save patients hundreds of dollars. Suppose you’re on a men’s health plan where we’re doing your PSA, hematocrit, testosterone (free and total), estrogen, and sex hormone-binding globulin tests. In that case, insurance may charge you a significant amount. But through DPC, it could cost much less. So, where is that extra money going?

This is important now because open enrollment started two days ago. Suppose people know about direct primary care and realize they can get preventive care and access to a doctor for a low monthly membership fee. They can avoid running to the E.R. or urgent care whenever they have an issue. We can help triage them. For instance, I had a patient before you, and I had to tell him, “Look, your situation sounds urgent. Here’s what you need to do.” Without me, he had an HMO plan and needed to figure out where to turn. He might have ended up going to the E.R. unnecessarily.

It wasn’t an ER-level emergency, so he probably would have been sent back to his primary care doctor. He would have been bounced around. when you go to the hospital or these places now, you’re not even seeing doctors anymore because non-physician practitioners have been given the legal right to practice medicine by corporations and insurance companies, who think it’s cheaper. But in reality, healthcare costs are skyrocketing, and they’re making a mess of things.

Insurance companies offer something akin to a “bureaucracy” in healthcare. They’re breaking the RICO Act at this point. This is racketeering. They operate based on fear—fear that you’ll get cancer or be in a motor vehicle accident. They should be operating under a preventive care model, but they’re not. most patients don’t even realize this. For example, let’s say you, Mr. Jacobsen, have a cough but also need your regular annual physical.

My cough annoys me, so I’m going to my doctor for my regular physical and will bring up my cough. “No. No. No. No. You can’t do that because we can’t bill for a good visit and a cough simultaneously.” So what do you do? What’s more important to you? It’s  a game—medical gymnastics—what doctors are doing now.

Instead of performing these medical-gymnastics, which are leading to burnout, moral injury, and so much more—including suicidality—we’re facing the highest suicide rates. We didn’t have the highest rates before COVID, but we do now.

Dentists used to have the highest suicide rates. Now, doctors are leading, and many are leaving medicine altogether. It’s a massive problem. This is an epidemic. People are dying, and people are sick—for no real reason.

Jacobsen: I interviewed a doctor who left due to M.D. burnout in the U.S. He’s now working in Quebec and praises the conditions and improvement in his health since moving. Maybe I’ll link to that—it could be an interesting connection. 

Misra: I’m noticing much rage toward the system.

Jacobsen: Right. How has this become such a malignant problem? 

Misra: It has grown completely out of control. I’ve heard from many qualified professionals that this is an issue, but you’re addressing it head-on.

Jacobsen: The people I’ve heard were more cautious while you’re talking about it directly.

Misra: Yes, because doctors are so afraid to speak out. We’re trained in an abusive system. I’ll say it as it is—it’s a hierarchical, abusive system. If you speak up, you’re punished, and we carry that with us. When applying for positions, it’s , “There are two positions and 5,000 of you. Go.” They pit us against each other to fight for those two positions. So, we’re trained not to be collaborative.

We collaborate only around a patient, but we’re trained to compete with each other. That lack of collaboration is part of the problem. We needed help, and they gave us nurse practitioners when we asked for help.

That was great for a while—until nurse practitioners started thinking, “What’s a doctor doing? I can do that.” Then the insurance companies and corporations agreed, saying, “We think you can do it too. We’ll pay you more than you made as a nurse but less than a doctor.” They d that because it saved them money.

Misra: And now, a lawsuit drives me up the wall in New York. Nurse practitioners are suing, saying, “Hey, we do the same work as physicians, but we don’t get paid the same. since we’re mainly female, this is a hate crime.” What about the actual female physicians in New York who aren’t getting paid the same as male physicians because of gender inequity and pay disparity?

We’re not suing, and that’s an actual hate crime. However, nurse practitioners are suing because they’re 80% female.

Jacobsen: Side question—I’ve seen this come up too. Some groups have lobbied or sued to use the title “physician.” I believe this was naturopaths in the United States.

Misra: Yes, naturopaths cannot use the title “physician.” The good thing is that the title “physician” is reserved for M.D.s, D.O.s, and MBBS graduates. The term “doctor” has been watered down. So when you go into the hospital and see someone with a stethoscope and a white coat labelled “doctor,” they could be a doctor of nursing practice (DNP).

That means they didn’t even have to go to college for some of these nurse practitioner programs. I don’t hate nurse practitioners—they have a role—but they’ve blurred the scope lines. They don’t know what they don’t know because they haven’t attended medical school. For example, I’m an internist and integrative medicine physician. You wouldn’t see me performing groin surgery unless it was an emergency,  if someone was bleeding out and we were stranded on an island with no other options. In that case, I’d try to save a life.

But I know what I can and cannot do and when to call on my colleagues’ expertise. That’s what nurse practitioners don’t know—they don’t know their limitations. They don’t realize that not everything is solved with an antibiotic, a steroid, and IV fluids. There’s much more to it, and they’re unaware of that.

So, you go in with a cough, thinking you’re seeing a doctor, but it’s not a doctor. They might say, “Let’s have you see an ENT because we don’t know.” They might do an X-ray but still have no idea what’s causing the cough. They don’t know that the cough could come from your brain, diaphragm, lungs, or even an OCD tick. It could be psychiatric, lingering from a post-viral cough, or—worst case—an indicator of cancer.

They don’t know. So they sent you to the ENT, which hired a nurse practitioner. That N.P. might not know how to scope you properly because they’ve never gone to medical school and don’t recognize the signs of cancer. Then they’ll say, “Your cough seems fine. Maybe you should see a lung specialist.” You go to the pulmonary N.P., and still, you’re not seeing a doctor.

Six months later, the cough worsens, and you start coughing blood. All this time, you thought you were seeing doctors, bouncing from specialist to specialist. But none of them were doctors, yet you’ve been paying as if you were receiving care from a physician.

By the time you’re hospitalized, it’s too late. Occasionally, a doctor finally steps in, looks at your case, and goes, “Oh my god,” and fixes everything because that’s what we do—we catch things. But with fewer doctors in the system, we’re scaling ourselves out. Doctors are leaving the system.

Jacobsen: It sounds  a dangerous situation for patients unaware of these distinctions.

Misra: We’re burnt out. We’re becoming entrepreneurs. Look at me—this is what’s happening. It’s all connected. “Practitioner” is a bad word—it doesn’t mean you’re a doctor. “Physician” means you’re a doctor. A Doctor of Nursing Practice (DNP) is not a physician. They’re not medical doctors; they’re doctors of nursing practice.

What do they learn? Nursing theory and nursing lobbying. Let’s put nursing theory and lobbying aside and do a medical exam. So, they’re replacing real doctors. But they’ll start complaining, too, when A.I. steps in because it’s moving fast. A.I. will replace us all eventually. For doctors, A.I. is a tool we use to write notes faster and create emails more quickly using specific language. We don’t replace ourselves with A.I. However, nurse practitioners will get replaced by AIbecause it’s safer for AI to do what it does than for nurse practitioners to keep doing what they’re doing.

The DEA is also conducting its investigation. All these separate investigations are happening because we don’t have the data yet—it all got worse during COVID-19. Have you heard about Dunn and Cerebral?

Jacobsen: No, I’m not familiar.

Misra: Oh my god, let’s go. Dunn and Cerebral were two telemedicine companies that were pushing Adderall. They were the reason for the Adderall shortage. They started hiring nurses and some doctors who didn’t fight back, and they were telling them to prescribe Adderall without even following up with patients. It was all about pushing the prescriptions. This created a shortage.

So, people with legitimate ADHD couldn’t get their medication during the COVID-19 shortages. When I was doing men’s health during that time, most of my male patients were on Adderall. I’m like, why the hell are you on Adderall? You have hypogonadism. You’re not producing testosterone. That’s what we need to fix, not put you on Adderall.

Now, we have to wean them off the Adderall they’ve become addicted to. It isn’t pleasant. the poor ADHD patients who need it couldn’t get their meds. It isn’t good.

Jacobsen: I can see why you’re worked up. This is serious.

Misra: I get worked up because this is not what I signed up for. None of us did. As doctors, we’re promised two things: the ability to care for others and save lives and job stability. Both of those promises have been taken away. Insurance companies and the corporate takeover of medicine are destroying everything. Hospitals are falling apart, and insurance companies  UHC and OptumRx are fraudulently practicing medicine.

Jacobsen: Do you think there will be a rapid revolution in how medicine is structured? For example, could racketeering be addressed with the rise of DPC and limits on insurance overreach?

Misra: The problem is that for words  “racketeering” and “fraud” to be used, someone high up and famous must be hurt. That’s when people will start paying attention. Someone famous. Someone in government. A celebrity. But these people can afford doctors, so doctors will leave and create our system. We’re already working on it.

Jacobsen: And what about recruitment? Bad news travels fast. Doctors are leaving the country, or individuals are moving toward DPC and restructuring, right?

Misra: Yes. 

Jacobsen: So, what happens if you scare off potential new doctors who are already U.S. citizens or even those coming from overseas with visas  the H-1B? The U.S. has traditionally pulled in talent worldwide, creating a massive brain drain toward America. Still, people might need guidance to pursue that path.

Misra: I’m a civil surgeon and do immigration physicals for the Department of Homeland Security. Some of the doctors I see come to me for U.S. residency. I perform independent medical exams to ensure they meet the requirements. I ask them, “What are you going to do once you get your residency and immigration status?” Do you know how many of them tell me they’re going back to their home countries?

I’m , “You’re not staying here? You’re working here and leaving as soon as you get your paperwork?” It’s because things are so bad here. I see it.

Jacobsen: Which state do you think is the worst regarding the upcoming physician shortages?

Misra: Everywhere, but especially the rural areas. When nurse practitioners were given more autonomy, they promised to provide coverage in rural areas. But that’s not what happened. Instead, many opened med spas, IV drip clinics, or aesthetic treatment centers. They didn’t go to rural America. You can be an N.P. urologist one day, a cardiologist the next, and then move on to pediatrics or pulmonology in the ICU without any consistent specialization. It isn’tcomforting.

Jacobsen: So what does this mean for the average citizen’s access to medical care? The wealthy can afford good care in good times and bad. What does this look like in a system that should provide quality care for everyone, especially in a privatized healthcare system?

Misra: The best way to illustrate this is to run through a typical insurance visit. Let’s pretend you’re seeing a doctor.

Jacobsen: Sure, let’s do it. I’m all ears.

Misra: Let’s say you have a cough or a UTI. 

Jacobsen: Let’s go with a cough. 

Misra: You come to your primary care doctor.

Jacobsen: I’ll give you an example: I was voluntarily released from the military after getting a body check on my ribs, and I had trouble breathing for a while.

Misra: So, you have trouble breathing. The first thing you’d probably do, depending on whether you have an HMO or a PPO, is look at your insurance card and ask yourself, “Do I need to go to my primary care doctor, the ER, or urgent care?”

You probably need a doctor to call directly, so that’s the first hurdle. Then, if you contact your primary care doctor, they’ll ask, “Can you breathe?” If yes, they’ll tell you, “You’re not going to the E.R. or urgent care. We’ll book you for an appointment, but it might be four months out.”

If you have a broken rib, that’s what they’ll do. They’ll check for that immediately. But even if it’s bad,  a broken rib, if it’s not displaced or causing complications, it should self-heal. But what if you have two broken ribs? You don’t know whether it’s going to self-heal, and you don’t know whether it’s something more serious.

So, you’re left guessing. It could be your lungs, it could be a muscle pull, it could be something minor—or it could be something serious,  cancer. But in a traditional system, you’re told, “Your next appointment is in four months. Can’t wait that long? We might call you if something opens up.” So, you wait. Maybe you get better, maybe you get worse.

By the time you finally see the doctor, it’s been months.

Jacobsen: And that’s your typical insurance-covered visit, right?

Misra:  With Direct Primary Care (DPC), it’s different. You have a membership, and when you’re not feeling  you can text or email your doctor and ask to be seen that day. You can say, “I’ve got some side pain; I might have a broken rib. What do you think?” Your doctor gives you a requisition form for an X-ray, which might cost $25, schedules the appointment, and follows up the next day or so—done. Mic drop. That’s the difference.

Jacobsen: What are the critiques of DPC, and how are insurance companies responding to these criticisms?

Misra: There are challenges, especially with Medicare-age patients. Medicare covers certain services, and they won’t allow you to go outside that coverage. That’s what Medicare Advantage plans are for, but the reimbursements for those plans and traditional Medicare are complicated.

All of this complexity is intentional—it’s confusing, so people don’t ask questions. But Medicare doesn’t allow you to opt out of its system. With DPC, we’re trying to emphasize that we’re not insurance, but policy changes are still needed.

Misra: I  to say we’re “assurance” instead of insurance. You’ll see your doctor—that’s my plan. However, Medicare and Medicaid can be problematic because they’re government-run systems, and a systemized system doesn’t allow you to go outside.

Why? Because they want to save money and keep everything within the business. Medicare is an issue, but we have hybrid programs, and there are ways around it. Medicaid can also be challenging.

Catastrophic care coverage can help lower your premiums if you have catastrophic emergencies,  a motor vehicle accident or cancer. We’re addressing many of the problematic questions as we go along. it’s not a direct primary care movement; there’s also a direct specialty care movement happening alongside it.

Specialists are now leaving hospitals and realizing, “Hey, the patient can pay me $2,000 directly instead of the hospital charging $10,000 and reimbursing me only $1,000.” All you need to do is ask your doctor, “How much will that procedure cost out of pocket?” Whether it’s surgery, giving birth, or getting a vasectomy—how much will it cost? One of my favourite examples is colonoscopies. They’ll cover the colonoscopy but not the anesthesia. Who’s going to get a colonoscopy without anesthesia? 

Jacobsen: No way.

But that’s how it works. In some places, they’ll cover the colonoscopy, but your deductible for anesthesia might be $2,500. you’re thinking, “I’m not doing that.” But what if I told you I could get the colonoscopy and anesthesia for $1,500?

Another issue is data protection, which is becoming increasingly important as A.I. advances and telemedicine becomes more common. COVID changed the playing field, so I emphasize data protection. Cyberattacks are on the rise, and keeping patient data secure is critical. Even my dentist had special training in encrypting and securing patient files.

Most of us use secure electronic medical record (EMR) systems. For example, my EMR uses Google, and it’s HIPAA compliant. It has telemedicine built in, and I can text patients through it while staying HIPAA compliant. Everything stays within the system. There are ways to stay compliant, and you also need cyberattack insurance. That’s another reason medicine is expensive.

That’s why companies  Amazon and Walmart, when they tried to get into healthcare, eventually shut down their medical divisions. They realized “Primary care is hard.”

Jacobsen: Regarding direct primary care, what else happened with COVID?

Misra: COVID-19 damaged the patient-doctor relationship. The little trust that we had was destroyed. A lot of patients are now comfortable with telemedicine. My approach is to always meet the patient where they are. Some patients still need to go to a doctor in person, which is as close as they want. Others might turn to a national telemedicine company for partial treatment. I’ve worked with several companies, and they need more in what they can do.

It’s frustrating because, for instance, I might be treating someone with testosterone therapy. If it leads to hypertension, I can’t treat the hypertension within that system. It’s frustrating for both the patient and me. Essentially, you’re not getting complete care. You get partial care, and then they tell you to see your primary care doctor. Direct primary care (DPC) doesn’t operate that way. I might be treating someone for men’s health, but if I notice their blood pressure rising, I’ll address it. If it’s not included in their membership, we can modify the membership to include it. This is because some integrated medicine and DPC aren’t covered by insurance, and patients pay out of pocket. Kaiser, for example, doesn’t cover these services, and certain insurance plans won’t either. Unless you’re seeing an endocrinologist, many doctors won’t address it.

In direct primary care, we can manage these additional needs. For instance, I had a patient I was treating for one issue today, but we encountered a potential emergency. This patient was too scared to go to the hospital, partly because they knew they might no longer see a doctor at the E.R. Many must realize that ERs are separate, for-profit entities, even though they’re affiliated with hospitals. Their main concern is only sometimes providing the best treatment for the patient. The decision to admit someone to the hospital is also often handled separately. The E.R. and the hospital are part of a different system, and they shouldn’t really be tied together because of the financial conflict of interest.

A lot of ethically questionable things happen in this system. When you go to the E.R., you might not see a doctor, as many doctors are leaving E.R. medicine for direct primary care, aesthetics, or other fields. Patients are still determining what will happen or whether they should go to urgent care instead.

The patient had an urgent issue beyond my management scope in this case. They were in a different location than usual, so I was trying to arrange for imaging. Knowing those options ‘ limitations and potential costs, the patient wanted to avoid going to urgent care or the ER. But because we’ve built a relationship of trust through direct primary care, they were willing to meet me halfway and agree to imaging. I coordinated the imaging and potential emergency room care in case the results were concerning.

This level of care coordination is only possible with non-direct primary care. In other systems, patients are often sent to the ER and discharged without follow-up or communication. That’s not how direct primary care works.

Today, I had a typical case in DPC with an insurance patient. Still, their insurance is limited to a specific healthcare system, and I’m outside of that system. We could only use the insurance for imaging if the patient went to that system’s E.R. Even if they went to urgent care, there’s no guarantee they’d get the necessary imaging. Often, patients are sent to the E.R. anyway after paying the urgent care fee because the urgent care center can’t handle it.

DPC doctors can help triage whether a patient needs urgent care or an E.R. visit, saving time and frustration. This is one of the benefits of DPC, and it’s why I do what I do. I don’t accept insurance, but I advised this patient to ask about the out-of-pocket costs for the imaging. Initially, they wouldn’t tell me, but we eventually got the information after my nurse followed up.

So they told me the out-of-pocket cost. The out-of-pocket cost might be less than their deductible if they pay with insurance. The crazy part was that the appointment for my stat order was scheduled two weeks from now. It was a stat order, and they gave an appointment two weeks later.

What if something serious happens, like the patient dropping dead? It’s incredibly frustrating. So I had to call in and emphasize that it’s a stat. It’s stat because if something is found, we’ll need to send the patient to the E.R. I’m coordinating all that.

It’s maddening. But because I intervened, this patient is now going to be seen. I was supposed to see this patient, but that appointment opened up since they’ll now be going for imaging. I’ll see them later if needed.

Earlier in the response, interest was raised about cultural issues affecting both doctors and, more importantly, patients. The trust level has dropped post-COVID. Before COVID, doctors weren’t at the highest risk for suicide. But now, we are. 

Regarding the social factor of trust, I’ve had my doctor appointments where we discussed how bad things have become. We’re all pulling our hair out, asking, “What do we do?” What will eventually happen is that doctors will leave the system and create their own. Patients will be left with nonphysician practitioners.

You’re not seeing doctors anymore, but you’re being charged as if you are. 

Jacobsen: Is this a consequence of the long-term privatization of healthcare? 

Misra: It’s a consequence of insurance companies having too much power. It’s a consequence of the corporate takeover of medicine. It’s a consequence of venture capitalism putting profits over patients.

Healthcare can’t operate like other industries—it is expensive, and doctors have to triage care and money. There’s an order of operations. Medicine has reached this point because it used to be the opposite—too free. Insurance. Insurance and the government stepped in to say, “No, this is what things should cost,” because of perceived price gouging by the medical field.

So instead, they started price gouging. There has to be a balance between this and where we are now. I’m not saying direct primary care is the answer. It’s an answer for some of us right now, and so is direct specialty care, which is a parallel movement. But back to the original point—trust.

Jacobsen: When there’s pervasive distrust, several questions come up as subtext. First, why? What factors preceded this level of distrust, leading to high levels of mistrust that were then exacerbated by COVID, which resulted in virtually no trust? When did the trust start failing?

Misra: I know when I started noticing a shift around 2014 or 2015.

It might have started even earlier. My mom passed away in 2010, and I was heavy in grief at the time, so I wasn’t paying close attention to these shifts. I was shrouded in a cloud. However, my colleagues noted that direct primary care (DPC) had emerged before that in rural America, showing there was already a need to break away from administrative encroachment.

When too many people are involved in something that’s supposed to be an intimate, collaborative experience, it becomes chaotic. Everyone starts saying, “Where’s my piece? My piece needs to be bigger.” Meanwhile, the patient is hemorrhaging, and the physician is desperately trying to stop the bleeding. It’s a problem when you try to monetize something that involves ethics and integrity. If we don’t consider that, physicians may start charging fees comparable to those of attorneys because the level of thought and care we provide is immense.

When did trust break? It happened when doctors stopped being respected. Corporations and insurance companies started thinking, “What doctors do is easy, and we can get others to do it for less.” That mentality set in, and then COVID-19 exposed those cracks. It was already a problem before the pandemic, but COVID-19 has worsened. And we could have handled it better. We handled it at all.

I thought it was just a different version of the flu. We didn’t know what it was and still needed to understand it fully. We’re living with it now. During that time, even doctors were struggling. We had these masks, and doctors would say, “My PPE is broken, it’s ripped.” Maybe a hypoxic patient grabbed at your face, and suddenly you’re exposed. I can tell you how we used to handle breathing apparatuses before COVID-19, but that’s likely gone now.

We used to do fit testing. When we entered a room with a T.B. patient, you weren’t allowed in if you didn’t have a complete seal around your mouth. That went out the window with COVID, which was highly contagious, just like T.B. But T.B. is deadly, and so was COVID. We couldn’t maintain those standards anymore. You might have had one or two negative pressure rooms in the hospital.

We couldn’t even take care of ourselves, let alone our patients. And patients noticed. They could tell that we didn’t know what was going on. That bred more distrust. Then we imposed all these restrictions, telling people not to move or do anything. And whenever we did have to move or respond to something, there was chaos. People got angry and protested en masse, and then COVID surged again. We didn’t handle it well as a society or as a government. It was a horrible time, and we’re still living through it. We’re traumatized by it, and we’re sitting in that trauma right now. There’s so much we could discuss about this.

Jacobsen: So, what are the standard critiques of direct primary care (DPC)? What do you hear from patients or insurance companies?

The hardest part is convincing people that we provide better care because we’re less restricted. It’s a market challenge, but once people experience it, they don’t return. They don’t.

I educate through a platform called VuMedi. It’s a national physician education platform, and my channel focuses on direct primary care and medical innovations. Direct primary care allows me the time to explore these innovations. You were asking something—what was it? Oh, criticisms. Yes, right.

So, I don’t want to name names, but I’ll explain the context. The person who gave me this opportunity—I don’t get paid for it; it’s free for physicians because it’s an educational platform to share knowledge—was initially skeptical. They didn’t get it but saw I was passionate about it, so they gave me a channel and said, “Let’s film it a couple of times and see what happens.”

Then, this person attended a conference or health fair and saw not just one but two or three direct primary care doctors there. They realized, “Oh, this is what she’s talking about. She’s not some crazy woman I gave a channel to.” After that, this person tried to make an appointment with their doctor because they weren’t feeling well—whether it was an annual check-up or something else.

The next available appointment was in October, and the following was in December. They remembered what I had said about direct primary care and signed up with a DPC doctor within a month—all in two weeks.

The difference is this: You call to make an appointment with your regular doctor, and it’s all about whether your insurance is current. “Did you pay for everything? The doctor isn’t available until January, but your insurance might change by then, so you’ll have to call back.” By the end of it, you haven’t accomplished anything.

Now, with DPC, you can text your doctor directly. “Hey, my throat hurts. I don’t feel well.” Your doctor can respond, “I can do a virtual appointment today at 4, or see you tomorrow, or maybe get an X-ray and then follow up.” That’s a plan.

That’s the difference. With DPC, you’re paying for access, experience, and more personalized care. And since the movement is growing, we are still determining where it will take us.

Direct specialty care has now become an analogous revolution, a movement. It’s pretty cool. 

Jacobsen: What are the reasons for people who leave direct primary care and return to another or the traditional system?

Misra: Oh gosh. It’s because being an entrepreneur takes work. Being a “doctorpreneur” is even harder because we aren’t taught business skills. Asking for money while providing medical care—doesn’t come naturally to us. It’s hard for doctors to say, “If someone is dying on the floor, we’ll help—but only after they pay us $100,000.” That’s how most of the world works, but it isn’t easy for us. So, you have to be passionate about what you’re doing.

Direct primary care is sometimes a stopover before people leave medicine entirely. I say that all the time. Direct primary care can be a transitional phase for people who realize, “I tried it, but I don’t like it.” They may prefer the traditional system where things are fed to them, and they do what they must, even though it’s abusive. When you’ve been abused, it’s sometimes easier to stay in that system because it’s familiar. That’s basic psychology. It takes work for people to leave.

It’s hard to leave a pioneering, revolutionary space. Convincing people to become your patients and building a patient base in a system that’s yet to be the norm is also difficult. Yes, some people need to improve in direct primary care and close their practices. But many are thriving, making seven or eight figures.

Jacobsen: What’s a DPC Dino?

Misra: We call them DPC Dinosaurs because they’re dinosaurs pretending to be direct primary care. Think of companies like One Medical and Parsley Health. They’re big names, and they ride the direct primary care wave. But real DPC is when the doctor enters the room and already knows how your wife is and what’s going on in your life because we’re in such frequent contact that we know our patients on a personal level.

In traditional healthcare, the doctor might walk in and say, “So, this is what’s going on with your cancer,” and the patient is like, “What cancer? No one told me I have cancer!” I hate being that kind of doctor.

Jacobsen: What about the risks of inaccessibility for low-income patients? And what about the potential for cherry-picking patients?

Misra: That’s a valid concern. However, many direct primary care doctors charge less than $100 monthly and offer service exchanges because we are free of insurance constraints. For example, patients can pay with eggs, steak, or even a gym membership. This bartering system is popular, especially in rural America, where direct primary care first took root.

We serve underprivileged communities. We work with uninsured patients because we want to lower costs. I’m constantly negotiating prices. Part of the reason I have my educational channel is to bring people on and say, “Hey, here’s free exposure for you, but can you offer a discount or a code to make things more affordable for the DPC movement?” That’s part of what I do.

We also have GPOs—group purchasing organizations—to save money. Who doesn’t want to save money? Even if you want to pay $5,000 monthly, you can get a concierge DPC doctor at that rate.

Jacobsen: You mentioned the movement is growing, but it still needs to be determined as more doctors shift to direct care. At the same time, the traditional healthcare system in the U.S. needs help with retention and recruitment. Long-term, that’s unsustainable. What about scalability?

Misra: Yes, scalability is a major issue. The U.K. is facing significant problems, too. We’re in a strange phase where direct primary care is growing, but so is the overall instability in American medicine. It will be challenging to scale DPC to meet the growing demand while maintaining its core principles.

I love DPC because we always advocate for not having people spend much money. We discuss financial freedom and how much money you should spend before starting your practice. I advise against buying all the tools and toys right away. Start small and use what you have here and here. I did a video on this again: use your brain, your heart, your mouth, your prescription availability, and your physical exam skills. That’s what we want.

Jacobsen: What about the variability in quality? Are there issues with quality assurance for each doctor?

Misra: That’s an issue with every doctor you go to, and it’s probably worse with the insurance system. Quality improves with DPC because many DPC doctors offer meet-and-greets. You can talk to the doctor and decide if they’re right for you. If they’re not, you save your time. But if you click with them, you say, “I like this doctor; I want to work with them.”

Jacobsen: What about regulatory and legal uncertainty?

Misra: You said it—it’s uncertain. We’re working on some policy initiatives. I wrote something in A.I. recently and was asked, “What’s happening with DPC policy right now?” I answered, “It’s too soon; we need data.” So, in my video, I made a call to action: “Hi, we need data.”

Jacobsen: What about the exclusion of employer-sponsored financing?

Misra: It’s interesting because large-scale employers are recognizing the savings. Ernst & Young, Prudential, and other health insurance companies, like Blue Shield, are partnering with DPC doctors to get better care for their employees. What does that tell you? They’re seeing the savings and benefits of going directly to the doctor.

Jacobsen: Could it also be that if you aren’t up to snuff, you could be out of business quickly? Your patients will only stick around if you meet a certain quality standard.

Misra: Yes, and that’s a real concern. I have some pretty healthy patients now who are thinking about leaving, but they know they’ll need care eventually. It’s like this: you’re paying for access. Are you going to leave Costco?

Jacobsen: Depends on what I need.

Misra: Exactly. It depends on what you need. But your DPC doctor can handle most of what you need, even if you don’t know what you’ll need in the future. We can predict some of what you need every few years.

Jacobsen: What’s the hardest part of being a docto? You’ve started your own business and made the transition to DPC. What’s been the toughest part?

Misra: The hardest part of being a doctor is staying a doctor right now. I mean that with all my heart. Every day is a struggle because it’s heartbreaking. My colleagues are suffering. I had my own doctor’s appointment early this morning, and my doctor had to cut it short because they had to attend a funeral. One of our colleagues died—killed themselves. It’s happening so often. And not only are doctors dying from suicide but some are being murdered, too.

I had someone at a meet-and-greet who said, “I have ADHD, and I need my ADHD meds.” My response was, “I don’t prescribe ADHD meds for certain patients because I once had a knife to my throat.”

Jacobsen: The United States has a culture of scientific ignorance, especially considering its wealth and access to high-end education. It’s a weird paradox. Absolutely, and this paradox was pointed out a long time ago by Carl Sagan and others in the scientific skeptic and humanist communities. A consequence of this ignorance is that when individuals experience a negative outcome, which can happen occasionally even with the best care, they look for someone to blame. Psychologically, it’s a defence mechanism, so they blame the doctor.

Yes, for instance, they take too much Tylenol, their blood thins, they faint, and then they blame the doctor. It’s a complete mix-up of cause and effect—or at least the chain of events. And yes, in tragic cases, it’s very real. It’s not like watching House MD get shot on T.V.; this happens in real life.

Misra: Something I always say about weight loss treatments fits into this dichotomy. We, as doctors, know that we’re the first generation dealing with a large population of obese individuals who are both micronutrient and macronutrient deficient. What’s in our food? What are we doing?

That’s part of the paradox. When discussing lean muscle mass loss with medications like Wegovy or Ozempic, the real question is: What patient population are we starting with? Many of these patients don’t have much muscle to begin with, and on top of that, they’re eating less. We’re already dealing with micronutrient-deficient patients, and now they’re losing even more nutrients by consuming less. Of course, they’ll lose lean muscle mass—they’re losing everything.

This is why the craze with med spas, compounding, and trends like Ozempic is so frustrating. We, as doctors, know better, just like how people misuse Ivermectin or other off-label treatments.

Ozempic became a huge trend. Everyone started taking it, even though it’s intended for type 2 diabetes. Ozempic is for type 2 diabetes, but the dosage doesn’t go up to the levels used for obesity anymore. They’ve changed it, and now insurance companies are asking for their money back if patients took Ozempic for non-diabetic reasons. Insurance companies send emails saying, “We need our money back because you took it for the wrong indication.”

Jacobsen: Do you want to dig into anything further? I need more help diving deeper because we’re venturing into territory where my non-expert view would lead to wrong assumptions. So I’ll leave it at that. Out of everything we’ve discussed, what do you think needs to be said but has yet to be voiced, especially on platforms that don’t typically allow for such honesty about the current state of doctors?

Misra: We are suicidal. We are leaving medicine. If you can’t find a doctor, it’s because there are fewer of us left. I will say this kindly: you must be kind to your doctor. We’re trying to be professional, but you don’t know what’s happening behind the scenes. Medicine is complicated, and your insurance’s explanation of benefits intentionally confuses doctors and patients.

When angry about your insurance, take it out on them instead of your doctor. You negotiated that insurance; you chose it. We didn’t. We want to work for you and be better for you.

Here’s another thing: many doctors have out-of-pocket costs cheaper than you pay for insurance. Insurance is racketeering—I’m going to say it. Whether I want that published or not, it’s the truth. It’s fearmongering, and it’s getting worse. Insurance companies are committing medical fraud by denying care. When a doctor prescribes something with clear medical justification backed by evidence, that prescription should be honoured. By denying it, patients are suffering and even dying.

This situation creates a moral injury for doctors. We are burning out because we constantly battle a system that denies care. It’s not that we don’t want to help—there may be bad doctors, but many of us are doing our best. We’re part of the problem, but the system is breaking. People don’t realize how bad it is because we keep up a professional front until we die. This is a crisis, and it needs urgent attention.

Jacobsen: Thank you.

Misra: Thank you for making time for me and for listening. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. So, goodbye from Canada, and have a good day. Enjoy the weather. It’s been raining the last few days, but hopefully, it’s not too bad where you are.

Misra: It’s pretty hot here. Honestly, there’s no place with perfect weather right now.

Jacobsen: Iceland. Iceland is a good option. 

Misra: I’ve heard great things, but I have yet to be.

Jacobsen: New Mexico is too hot for me. I’m too fair-skinned.

Misra: Same here. I even burn where I am now, so I’m staying put.

Jacobsen: Sulgana, thank you so much. I appreciate it.

Misra: You’re welcome. Bye!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Professor Chris Doran: Christianity’s ‘Creation Care’

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/08

Professor Chris Doran is a Religion & Philosophy Division professor at Pepperdine University, where he created the Sustainability Minor in 2016 and the Sustainability Major in 2021. With a PhD in Systematic & Philosophical Theology and an MDiv from Pepperdine, Doran integrates science and theology in his work. His book, Hope in the Age of Climate Change, explores the role of Christian theology in addressing climate challenges. Doran also leads study abroad programs in New Zealand and advocates for LGBTQ+ students, contributing to discussions on LGBTQ+ issues within Christian contexts. He is also an avid runner and scuba diver.

Doran talks about Pepperdine University’s sustainability program, focusing on creation care and Christian responsibility for environmental stewardship. Doran, a professor since 2007, combines his biology and theology backgrounds to address climate change and sustainability across disciplines. They discuss integrating faith with environmental concerns, especially the pushback Doran encounters from Christian communities. Doran emphasizes the importance of intergenerational dialogue and humility in engaging younger generations who prioritize climate issues and advocate for collaborative efforts with secular communities.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Dr. Christopher Doran to discuss Pepperdine University’s program focused on sustainability and its orientation around creation care, or Christian responsibility for stewardship, based on values of compassion and justice. There is much to unpack here, especially with the many theological concepts involved. Let’s start by focusing on the pragmatics. What is the program? Why was it founded? And why at Pepperdine? 

Professor Christopher Doran: I’ve been a full-time professor here since 2007, but it’s also my alma mater. I attended school here in the mid-90s and earned a biology degree. So, my scientific mindset is always engaged. I then earned a graduate degree in theology, and I’ve been trying to integrate these two disciplines—science and faith—throughout my adult life. I’ve been exploring how they have worked together seamlessly in many parts of Christian history. However, in more recent Christian history, particularly within American Protestantism, we often drive a wedge between the two, whereas in earlier periods of Christian history, there wasn’t such a divide.

Regarding my work in sustainability at Pepperdine, when I was at Berkeley doing my graduate studies, interdisciplinary work was the norm. When I returned to Pepperdine to start teaching, our disciplines were somewhat siloed. We had science in one area, economics in another, and political science in another. However, as I began thinking about creating this program, responding to students’ needs, and addressing global challenges, I realized that we needed to think across multiple disciplines simultaneously to meet the complexities of climate change and sustainability. So, several colleagues and I developed this program to address as many interdisciplinary concerns as we could identify related to issues like climate change, water, biodiversity, population growth, and more.

Jacobsen: Was the book Hope in the Age of Climate Change: Creation Care, This Side of the Resurrection tied into this program regarding its release and writing?

Doran: Yes. When I was hired in 2007, the dean, who has since retired, encouraged me to write my textbook if I couldn’t find one that suited the course. It took me a while to reach the point in my career where I felt comfortable writing a book, but eventually, I did just that. I surveyed the landscape and noticed that within my tradition, the Churches of Christ, not many people were thinking or writing about this topic. I wanted to address the issue from a couple of angles. One was to think about the concept of the resurrection, which is deeply meaningful to my faith and tradition but has yet to be discussed regularly. The other was creation care, which is important to many Christians but often needs to be explicitly addressed. In my life, I saw an intersection between these two themes and aimed to explore that intersection in the book.

In the sustainability program at Pepperdine—both the major and minor—the book and other theological materials serve as a theological linchpin for how Christians might approach these issues differently than non-Christians or secular individuals. It offers a way to leverage our beliefs into new ways of thinking about problems and engaging in the global marketplace with ideas that may differ from those of secular individuals or other faiths. This allows Christians to contribute to the public conversation in a way that brings new perspectives that might not otherwise emerge.

Jacobsen: How do you find the reception of these ideas in the global marketplace of thought? Are the orientations similar, or are they different? Of course, it won’t be entirely distinct—there’s probably some overlap, like mutually overlapping bell curves.

Doran: Yes, there’s much overlap. Many faith traditions, in particular, talk about caring for the environment or caring for creation in different ways, using their particular religious language or traditions. Here in Malibu, there are many secular traditions, city government officials, and others who don’t necessarily operate with their faith at the forefront because of their context. However, we share many of the same commitments—keeping the beaches and water clean and worrying about landslides and wildfires here in California, for example. I find the space where that overlap exists to be energizing because we are working on shared commitments, even though we may have different religious backgrounds.

In the areas where there are differences, I’ve sometimes noticed that Christian audiences give me the most pushback on certain kinds of sustainability or climate change discussions, possibly because I’m seen as aligning too much with secular folks or placing other concerns ahead of, for example, saving souls or using more overt Jesus-centered language. I see much overlap in these areas, but interestingly, I can have more productive policy discussions at a Malibu City Council meeting than when I speak about these issues in a church setting. At church, the conversation often doesn’t get to policy, as people are more focused on whether I’m going theologically in the right direction. So, you find yourself navigating a tricky middle ground in a way.

Jacobsen: What theological value do you think is most crucial as a linchpin for conveying this message—whether in Malibu’s policy discussions or back at the church?

Doran: I wonder if there’s a single linchpin. However, one of the big ideas I often talk about is that religious values or your spiritual identity—however you want to frame it—shape many of your daily decisions. So, for example, if you think of yourself as a good person or a good Christian, you likely have a set of values operating in your mind that influence your actions as you navigate life in the 21st century. When someone like me comes along and says, “Climate change is doing this,” or “We face sustainability challenges in that area,” it can sometimes affect your sense of identity.

You might think, “I thought I was a good person—I didn’t intend to harm someone halfway around the world because of that vacation I took or the carbon gases I’m emitting as I drive to work.” One approach, from a Christian point of view, is to ask how we can reconcile this with our identity. How do we think through concepts of sin, confession, or repentance? As we work through these ideas, we can maintain our Christian identity while acknowledging that we aren’t perfect. We’ll have to make certain trade-offs, but as we do, we must consider whether we’re harming the poor and dispossessed—the “least of these,” as Jesus often referred to them in Matthew’s Gospel.

Do I want to harm those who can’t protect or advocate for themselves globally? That’s a big question for me. It’s about challenging our sense of identity. How do I remain a Christian if I engage in practices that might pollute? On the other hand, there’s also an identity challenge because many secular and non-Christian voices are pro-environment, pro-working on climate change, and so forth. This can create an “identity kerfuffle” for some people, who struggle to see how they can work with people outside their faith tradition on common issues, even when the goals overlap.

Jacobsen: Well, it’s hard. It may be easy in the academic world. Still, it’s hard in the journalistic world, especially with social media and the increasing polarization—I’m excluding even the political polarization in that comment, just broad-based polarization.

So, it’s harder for individuals who commit offences as the “fence” has narrowed. It becomes a tougher balancing act, and you receive more criticism from either side. When talking about care for creation, we can introduce theological concepts, particularly Christian ones, such as the Fall, living in a fallen world, personal responsibility, and the language of dominion—not dominion in the sense of an autocratic human rule over the earth but in terms of actual sustainability and care.

With these concepts and realities for many Christians, how do you bring this message to a church audience and convey that the ethic of sustainability, and what you’re working toward in terms of environmental stewardship, is legitimate, relevant, and important in the current age, especially with climate change and climatic disruption like what we’ve seen in North Carolina, for example? How do you not sell it but frame it appropriately and with the necessary sensitivity for a church audience so you don’t alienate yourself too much?

Doran: Yes, it’s a tough line to walk, particularly with all the polarization you mentioned at the beginning of your comment. One of the things I try to do with churches is to ask questions like, “What do you think you’re doing now in terms of stewardship? How is your church being an environmental steward?”

I often find more silence and awkward glances than answers when I ask that question. What happens a lot is that churches love to believe they are good environmental stewards, but when you ask what they’re doing on a day-to-day basis, there’s not always a clear response. Once we move past the silence and awkwardness, someone might say, “Well, we recycle,” or “We did an energy audit to ensure our air conditioning system is more efficient.”

After that, we can dive into more detailed discussions, connecting the dots between their theology and behaviour. I might point out, “You say that God created the earth, and you’re supposed to care for it, but perhaps your spending or actions in other areas don’t reflect that.” The goal is to bring those two aspects—their beliefs and their actions—closer together.

That’s the most sensitive way to engage with churches on this issue. Most, if not all, churches want to believe that their beliefs align with their actions. My job is to ask probing questions and help them see how they can bring their actions and beliefs into greater alignment. Ideally, when people outside the church community observe what the church is doing, they can say, “Yes, this church is environmentally conscious and serious about these issues.”

One thing Christians in this age tend to resist is the idea of outsiders criticizing them. There’s this mindset: “You don’t understand; you’re an outsider.” But when it comes to environmental issues, sometimes those outsiders may have a better perspective on what we’re doing and how we’re positioning ourselves than we’re willing to admit. That can be hard to accept because many churches don’t want to receive critique from the outside, and I understand that.

However, that critique could sometimes help build bridges with others in the community, leading to collaborative projects. Suppose churches were more open to accepting support, advice, and critique. In that case, they could have broader, more in-depth conversations about shared goals, such as wanting clean air, clean water, and nutritionally dense food for their children. How can we work on those goals together?

Jacobsen: Different churches operate differently, textually speaking. For example, some churches may see part of masculinity as driving a Hummer. I’ve seen jokes where men who drive Teslas are seen as not quite gay but somewhere along a line of femininity. Yet, electric cars have a lower carbon footprint, which is part of sustainability.

Many peripheral issues are related to sustainability, environmental care, and stewardship ethics. How do you navigate those discussions when they arise? I’m unsure how often these topics arise in your church, as I’m not there.

Doran: Yes, probably less so in my church here in California than in other churches. However, when I’ve worked with groups in Texas or the Upper Midwest, for example, particularly farming communities, farmers can get a bad rap for not always using the most sensitive language about climate change. But they want their farms to continue for future generations. They want to hand down their farms to them if they have kids.

As hard as it can be, my goal is to use language that doesn’t shame or eco-shame people. Instead, I ask, “What are you doing in your life that has a generational impact?” Family farming is significant for many males, particularly in the U.S., where most farmers are still men. Unfortunately, family farms are becoming a smaller demographic, but those who still run them know what’s happening on their land. They know the weather patterns are changing, they understand erosion, and they’re aware of biodiversity loss. They may not know these concepts from a scientific, lab-based perspective like we might teach at Pepperdine, but they know them from firsthand experience.

It’s important for those of us who live in urban environments to acknowledge that everyone is experiencing climate change. Still, people experience it differently depending on where they are in the country or the world. Those who drive pickup trucks and work on farms may have much more to say about it than we do in the cities, but we’re often not speaking the same language.

We must ask ourselves, “Do we want to pull the rope in the same direction?” How does resurrection provide hope regarding this ethic of care for the environment, sustainability, and stewardship?

Jacobsen: Yes, I’m curious about that connection.

Doran: The first book I wrote is Hope in the Age of Climate Change. A pastor of mine, a million years ago, said that when we preach, we often preach to ourselves more than to the audience, and you get these autobiographical lessons.

At some level, this book was personal for me. I grew up in an abusive, divorced family, and I was working through a lot of theological ideas throughout my life, especially about what constituted child abuse and how to find hope as a skeptical and cynical child and young adult. My Christian faith, specifically the belief in the resurrection, gave me a sense of hope in a radical way that Christians are supposed to believe. I bring that perspective to the table, especially with many of my Gen Z students, who often live in despair due to social media, climate change, or various global events.

I offer not a pie-in-the-sky hope but rather an active one encouraging behaviour change and collaboration. There is no passivity to the hope Christians talk about. You’re not sitting around waiting for God to swoop in like Superman and save the day.

Jacobsen: From the clouds, yes.

Doran: There’s work to be done, and there’s hope to be found in doing that work. Research outside of theology shows that the more we work with others on environmental issues, the more hopeful we become. As social creatures, as humans, we find meaning and purpose in working together. So, part of what I do in this program and my work with churches is to connect people who feel like environmental concerns have placed them outside their social groups. I help them find others working on the same issues and ask, “What can you do together?” Doing things together sends a far more hopeful message than going it alone.

Jacobsen: In large part, Gen Z, Millennials, and others today live in a much more comfortable society than even 100 years ago—whether in terms of lifestyle, quality of life, lifespan, healthspan, or access to education. So, I understand this notion of despair when we project some environmental models forward. Yet, there are solutions, and there are lots of options for those solutions. I don’t understand despair in the sense of doing nothing, which ensures the worst outcome. It’s a completely nonsensical position.

Even though we live in relative comfort, we have these disparate opinions, and we often fail to recognize how fortunate we are to be born at this time. Additionally, through things like rage farming and social media, we’ve created a culture of despair or fault-finding, amplifying negativity on a large scale. It’s all digitized and recorded forever, creating a misleading image of reality. I blame journalists, too, for how reality is sometimes represented, focusing too narrowly on problems rather than widening the lens to see the bigger picture outside the Carping Culture.

You want to avoid looking at these problems with a telescope or a microscope. You want to widen the lens. In my opinion, science is a hammer—a tool for acquiring knowledge about the world. But how do we take that scientific knowledge, especially about the environment and sustainability, and turn it into an ethical imperative for care? How do we give it a moral compass?

Doran: That’s a great question. When I was in grad school, we worked on that topic all the time—not necessarily environmental ethics specifically, but broader ethical questions about living in a better world. How do we leverage science in that way? Let me back up a bit to explain.

As someone who studied biology, and with some of my mentors now being my colleagues, I often joke that they speak “lab language.” They don’t speak direct English or citizen language—in other words, they don’t speak English. They speak “lab-ese,” as I often call it. And this has yet to start in the last 20 or 30 years. It probably dates back to the 1940s and ’50s, when scientists started becoming segregated from average citizens, especially through government contracts.

This has major ramifications, including the decline in trust in the scientific process and scientists across the Western and English-speaking world. So, much trust needs to be rebuilt, and it’s up to scientists to reach out to average citizens and explain—in regular, clear English—what they are doing.

I often discuss this with my science colleagues. From the church or broader community perspective, the challenge is this: We use science to get on a plane and fly to see our grandmother or to get in a car and drive to work. However, we often raise our hackles when scientists argue that we must change our behaviour due to climate or environmental concerns.

That’s when scientists step over from their purely scientific domain into an ethical domain, which can get complicated for average citizens. We use science every day, but when we’re told to change our behaviour, we suddenly start questioning why these scientists are telling us what to do.

But the broader question is moral: do we want clean air? Do we want clean water? Do we want good, nutritionally dense food? These are the three main things I often use in my classes. If we can answer “yes” to those questions, science becomes a tool to help us achieve those goals.

From there, we need to start thinking about the economic, political, and other trade-offs to consider if we want cleaner air, cleaner water, and better food. That’s the order I follow. As a theologian, I view many problems as moral or theological. However, society must decide whether we want clean air, clean water, or good food. Once we decide “yes” to those questions, science can help us get there, and then we’ll need economists, politicians, and others to guide us through the rest because those issues have massive ripple effects beyond science.

Jacobsen: Those are fabulous points. A lot of these scientific or engineering findings have obvious ethical implications. To make the point clearer, let’s use an example of clean air and nutritious food. This is a scientific question—an empirical question. Do seatbelts, airbags, and crumple zones in car architecture, which are designed to absorb most of the impact, save more lives and reduce injury rates more effectively than no seatbelts, no airbags, and cars made of hard steel, where the passengers and drivers are the softest parts? Well, I’m pretty sure the findings over the last few decades have shown that making those changes—adding airbags, seatbelts, and crumple zones—saves more lives, reduces injuries, and lessens the severity of injuries.

That seems straightforward. You’d want to implement seatbelts and airbags to save lives and reduce injury rates. And for the most part, we’ve done that. The same applies to air quality, food, and sustainability. These environmental issues may seem more distant because they’re less immediately impactful—using that term deliberately—than a car crash or the deaths that result from one.

I had a friend who was a passenger in a car when I was a kid. They were drunk, driving too fast in my hometown, and they died in a car crash. That’s a direct consequence. Accidents happen, but you can reduce the probability of such outcomes. So, who do you get more pushback from—policy people or religious communities?

Doran: That’s a good question. I assume you mean when I’m talking about environmental or climate issues—who do I get more pushback from?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Doran: It depends. It varies depending on where I am. In California, I get more pushback from religious communities than from politicians. In other parts of the country, it’s the opposite—I might get more resistance from politicians than from religious groups.

This is a local and regional issue because while federal funding may be available for certain environmental initiatives, implementation happens at the regional or local level. So, reactions and pushback differ by area.

The most common pushback I get from the Christian community is the concern that the environmental issues I’m discussing distract from other Christian commitments, like saving souls or keeping Jesus at the center of one’s life. People ask, “Are you distracting from our primary mission?”

This concern is sincere but often reflects a false dichotomy—the idea that saving souls is the only thing Jesus was about. However, as far as we can tell, Jesus had a healing ministry. He was concerned with people’s well-being.

Jacobsen: Yes, he healed lepers.

Doran: Jesus helped lepers reintegrate into their communities, enabling them to be part of society again. This aspect of Jesus’ ministry has been de-emphasized or even forgotten, particularly in American Protestantism, where the focus often becomes solely on the “pie-in-the-sky” mission of saving souls. And to the detriment of that part of Jesus’ healing ministry—reconnecting people to their communities. At some level, environmental issues are about whether we can live whole, healthy, fully communal lives in our only home.

Jacobsen: Now, regarding pushback, from the 2000s to the 2010s, there was this rah-rah New Atheist orientation or a more private atheist stance of “destroy all religion, religion has nothing good to offer,” etc. How do you integrate with secular communities that are not like that—those who are willing to listen to what you’re saying and recognize that we have a common cause? We may not share the same philosophical foundation, but we share the same concerns.

Doran: I’ve lost track of the number of times I’ve spoken with more secular communities or worked on group projects where someone has said, “I wouldn’t have left my church if I had met a Christian like you.”

Jacobsen: Wow.

Doran: And I’m always trying to understand exactly what that means. At some level, I don’t think it means I’m super special, but it shows that talking about these concerns in the way I do has somehow alienated people from their previous faith communities or their understanding of what Christian churches and Christianity could be about. It likely wasn’t the only cause, but it was part of their decision to leave something they once considered an important part of their faith journey.

So, it’s crucial to be as authentic and sincere as possible. I went to graduate school, read many books, and dived into the subtleties and nuances of a faith journey. I think that approach resonates with those on the secular edge because they recognize that there’s a lot more nuance than some brash evangelical or other Protestant voices may present.

When I work with local groups, like the City of Malibu, it doesn’t matter what your religious commitment is while picking up trash, planting trees, or working on a community project. No one cares about your beliefs until afterward when you might go to lunch together and start talking or have dinner later and ask where people come from and why they do what they do. The common experience of doing something together is what builds relationships. After that, conversations about beliefs, identity, and background naturally follow.

For example, I’ve picked up trash on the beach or worked in a community garden in my neighbourhood. That’s the foundation of interfaith work—it starts at the individual level.

Jacobsen: Conferences and academic settings are useful but tend to be more about mutual presentations from something like the Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy.

Doran: Yes, you’re right. 

Jacobsen: Have I missed anything?

Doran: No, I think we’ve covered everything.

Jacobsen: Cool.

Doran: Do you have any final questions?

Jacobsen: Do you have any messages for Christians skeptical of a sustainability orientation within theology? Do you have any olive branches for secularists who are determined never to collaborate with what they stereotype broadstroke as misogynistic, totalitarian, Christian nationalist movements?

Doran: Well, let me answer the last question first and then make sure I remember the first one.

Jacobsen: You like to reverse the order of answers!

Doran: Yes, I do.

Doran: There’s some recency bias. 

Jacobsen: Yes.

Doran: So, for those in the secular community who have formed stereotypes about Christians—and Christians have done the same to the secular community—it might be good for all of us to get off our high horses and start asking more direct questions to individuals, rather than beginning with stereotypes and moving forward from there.

That’s a lesson for secular folks as much as it is for Christians. It’s fascinating to me when I interact with atheists and other secular people on environmental issues. I often get comments like, “I’ve never heard a Christian like you,” or “I wish I had heard this before.” There’s something we can all learn from that.

I try not to stereotype atheists or secular folks, either. If we could model a way of talking to individuals rather than stereotypes, that would be a healthy first step.

As for your first question—what could we think about for other Christians? One of the things I often mention when speaking to communities is that, as research from the Pew Research Center and others shows, environmental issues or a lack of understanding of science are often among the top ten reasons Gen Z and millennials leave the church. I’m not saying that Christian churches should address these science issues just because of that.

But I often tell church leaders to think hard about what they’re saying or not saying in front of their congregations because young people are picking up on whether you think they should be. If young people believe climate change is an issue—and I certainly do, even though I’m a Gen Xer, not a millennial or Gen Z—then I think churches should ask, “Do we take young people seriously?” And if we do, and we don’t stereotype their concerns, what might that do?

We need to model humility and consider what young people are thinking about and what they take seriously. I’m a big fan of intergenerational churches. I’m not a fan of churches that don’t have people of all ages—from 90-somethings to babies in the nursery. There’s much value in the humility that comes from different generations listening to each other. If older folks like me aren’t modelling that humility, I don’t know why I should expect younger folks to do it.

That would be one thing I’d offer:

  1. If people in your community say climate change or sustainability is a big issue for them, ask them why.
  2. Ask them why, and try not to stereotype them.
  3. Listen carefully to why they think it’s such a big deal before you say anything.
  4. Just ask, “Why?”

Jacobsen: Dr. Doran, Chris, thank you for your time today. I hope it was fun for you, too.

Doran: Cool. Thanks so much, man. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Absolutely, Chris. Nice working with you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

S.T. Joshi: The Downfall of God

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/08

S.T. Joshi (b. 1958) is a leading authority on H. P. Lovecraft, Ambrose Bierce, H. L. Mencken, and other writers, mostly in the realms of supernatural and fantasy fiction. He has edited corrected editions of the works of Lovecraft, several annotated editions of Bierce and Mencken, and has written such critical studies as The Weird Tale (1990) and The Modern Weird Tale (2001). His award-winning biography, H. P. Lovecraft: A Life (1996), has already become a collector’s item. An expanded and updated version, I Am Providence: The Life and Times of H. P. Lovecraft, was published in 2 volumes in 2010.

But critical, biographical, and editorial work on weird fiction is only one aspect of Joshi’s multifaceted output. A prominent atheist, Joshi has published the anthology Atheism: A Reader (2000) and the anti-religious polemic, God’s Defenders: What They Believe and Why They Are Wrong (2003). He has also compiled an important anthology on race relations, Documents of American Prejudice (1999).

Joshi discusses The Downfall of God: A History of Atheism in the West, which examines the decline of religion from classical antiquity to the present day, driven by science, secularism, and cultural changes. He explains that despite recent efforts by figures like Justice Samuel Alito to reverse secular trends, religion’s influence continues to wane. Joshi humorously critiques religion’s inconsistencies, stating it’s no longer credible, and highlights the importance of defending secular gains.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with S.T. Joshi. First things first, and most importantly, we are going to plug a particularly significant book that will be part of a series, The Downfall of God: A History of Atheism in the West. The first question that comes to mind is, why write an entire history of atheism in the West? Second, why focus only on the West? Those are two distinct questions, and both deserve answers.

S.T. Joshi: First of all, I have been studying atheism for most of my life. Curiously enough, I became a more or less dedicated atheist probably in the 1970s when I was a teenager, reading the work—not the fiction, but the essays and letters—of H. P. Lovecraft, the great American horror writer. He wrote thousands of letters, and he was himself a vigorous atheist, defending that position in his correspondence. I was not raised in any religious tradition, thankfully, not even my own native tradition of Hinduism. My father told my mother, “Let our children decide for themselves what they want to believe in if they want to believe in anything, including religion.”

We were not discouraged from believing in anything, but we were allowed to figure it out for ourselves. Ultimately, I became convinced of the atheistic point of view, starting with Lovecraft and later with other writers like Bertrand Russell and Friedrich Nietzsche. Over time, I began compiling collections of writings on atheism starting in the early 21st century, but I realized that there was no comprehensive history of the subject. I interpret atheism not only as the specific advocacy of disbelief in gods—which is still relatively rare in the West and elsewhere—but also as the general decline of religion’s influence on society, government, law, culture, literature, and music. This is why the book, which will be in two volumes, covers antiquity up to 1600 in the first volume.

The reason this book is so large is that tracking the advance of secularism and the decline of religion is an enormous and highly complex subject. I had to study many different aspects of culture. As for why I focused only on the West, the simple answer is that it reflects my background, despite being from the East, so to speak—I am South Asian, but I am more familiar with European languages. I don’t know Chinese, Japanese, or other Asian languages, and it would have been logistically difficult and incredibly time-consuming to write a world history of atheism, which was my original intention. So, I decided to focus on the West because there is so much to cover, and I felt I could do that well, given my background and expertise. That’s why the book is the way it is.

Jacobsen: Another quick question about the book: What were your major thematic findings when looking at history through the lens of atheism in the West? That’s a fascinating subject—it’s a vast one.

Joshi: Indeed it is. I began with classical antiquity, though I actually started with the Neolithic period, examining how anthropologists and others believe religion was “invented,” if you will, in primitive times. However, my primary focus was on Greek and Roman antiquity, a field I studied extensively at Brown University and Princeton.

So I had a good background there. But moving on from late antiquity through the Middle Ages and the Renaissance, that was a field I had not studied as ardently or in as much detail as I probably should have. I had to do a lot of background research to understand the culture of those eras. I found that even when Christianity, in particular, was dominant throughout the medieval age, cracks appeared. There were schisms and disagreements, even among Christian philosophers and theologians, that set the stage for things like the Renaissance, which began the process of secularization in the West and has continued on to the present day.

Jacobsen: Now, let’s talk about the purpose of this. It’s fascinating. I appreciate it, and we’ll make sure to hyperlink that particular book. Is it on Amazon, or is it available through a publisher?

Joshi: It is available on Amazon. It’s published by Pitchstone Publishing. You can also order it through their website. Technically, it’s not going to be released until November 12th. This will probably be published around that time, so the timing is perfect.

Jacobsen: So, Justice Samuel Alito—he has had a strong alignment with conservative Christian views, which has influenced his judicial decisions. He’s faced criticism, including for flying an upside-down American flag, which was seen as a signal during Joe Biden’s election. What are you seeing in this presentation from Justice Alito, with these flags flown upside down, this “Appeal to Heaven” flag, and various other signifiers of dissent from the political rulership of an elected democratic leader, along with apparent appeals to Christian nationalism?

Joshi: Alito represents a fairly substantial number of Christians, I believe, who feel besieged by people like us. Why do they feel that way? Who knows? Perhaps because they recognize—as I have chronicled in painful detail in my book—that Christianity is, in fact, on the wane. Religion, in general, is on the decline, and they don’t like that.

And so, they are using every possible method within their power—and they still have considerable levers of power—to reverse that trend. But quite frankly, it’s like King Canute trying to command the waves. It’s futile and useless. That’s why I don’t even take Alito’s stance seriously. I poke fun at it because I find that ridicule is a good weapon against religion in general and people like Alito in particular.

Jacobsen: How do you make the distinction, comedically, between making a joke and making a joke with a substantiated point?

Joshi: I like to think that I always make a joke with a substantiated point. What I argue is that Alito is not merely expressing an opinion—he is obviously entitled to his opinion, as everyone is—but he is using that opinion to, shall we say, tip the scales toward his side. In my judgment, he is doing so illegitimately because it defies many centuries of American jurisprudence regarding the separation of church and state. But as I say, even he and his colleagues on the Supreme Court can only do so much in that regard. I am not concerned about the emergence of a theocracy in this country.

It will not happen because the great majority of Americans do not want it to happen, and they will make sure it does not. But in a sense, do we as humanists or secular humanists make a logistical error—or even, I don’t know, a marketing error—when we create this fear around Christian nationalism if it’s not something that will necessarily come true? Are we tallying up fears over a fantasy? One should always be vigilant in these matters, as a series of accidents could result in certain bad things happening from our perspective.

So yes, one should always defend one’s position. The problem with secularists, in general, is that we do not organize well. It’s like herding cats—because we think.

Jacobsen: The perennial comparison.

Joshi: It is. I love cats. I’m a cat devotee. In fact, I’m a proud, childless cat gentleman, if I may say so. So, defending our position and not retreating from the gains we have made over centuries is certainly important.

But I don’t believe we need to become hysterical in this fight. I remember reading a book by Rod Dreher some years ago called The Benedict Option, which came out around 2016. He’s a conservative Christian, and he basically argued that Christians are so besieged by us horrible secularists that all they can do is retreat into their little communities and wait out the storm while the barbarians—and he specifically calls us that, barbarians—do their thing and eventually die out, apparently.

And then, perhaps after centuries, Christians can come out of their little enclaves and reclaim the earth. Well, if he thinks that way, good luck to him. The problem with this general attitude is that Christians in general, and indeed religious people in general—at least those who are not fanatics—do not live their religion, and they haven’t for centuries. I don’t say that they are hypocrites for doing so. I don’t say, “Oh, you profess belief in God, but you don’t act on it.”

It is difficult to act on a belief in a benevolent God, especially in our society. There are so many other distractions that can take one’s attention away. The fact of the matter is that the great majority of religious people, especially in the West, attend church for one hour a week. For the other 167 hours, they act as if there is no God. That’s fine—that’s just the way things are. That’s why I don’t believe there’s any monumental concern that we’re going to lapse into a theocracy.

Jacobsen: What about situations where we see an apparent religious motivation for the overturning of Roe v. Wade, which has been a large concern for a lot of feminist women and progressive political figures? How does that fit into this narrative?

Joshi: In my most cynical moments, when the legality of Roe v. Wade was being decided in 2022, I came close to uttering a prayer—the closest I could ever come to doing so.

I said, “Supreme Court, please, please, please overturn Roe v. Wade.” Why? Because the backlash that I knew would happen did happen, and it is still happening. In that sense, the overturning of Roe v. Wade is the gift that keeps on giving, and it has damaged the reputation of the Supreme Court. It has energized the political and non-religious left and even the religious left in some regards, and it is certainly fueling a large part of our current Democratic presidential campaign.

So what is there not to like? It is unfortunate that there are certain states where abortion is either illegal or difficult, but that will change over time. I would be surprised if, in a relatively short period, abortion becomes legal again across this country. 

Jacobsen: So, a filmmaker, Lauren Windsor, approached Alito and Chief Justice John Roberts to argue for a return to godliness in the country. Roberts was noncommittal, but Alito agreed. How did that play into this?

Joshi: She was deliberately trying to elicit those opinions to paint both justices as religious fanatics. She succeeded in snagging Alito, while Roberts wisely stayed noncommittal.

Jacobsen: Mindful of time, here’s one quick question: What do we get wrong about Alito? Are there any myths that we, as secularists, hold about him?

Joshi: I don’t know him personally, obviously. I don’t know much about him. But it’s clear that he, along with others on the Court, particularly Justice Thomas and perhaps Amy Coney Barrett, believe that their religion is under threat, and they feel obliged to stand up for it.

Now, they are free to stand up for it in terms of advocacy, or however they choose to go about it. They are not free to twist our laws to give their religion a boost. Their exalted position does not, and should not, allow them to do that, and they have been rightly criticized for it. Let me be blunt—they will pay the penalty for it, not in any overt violence or anything like that; nobody wants that. However, many of their decisions will be overturned once the Supreme Court becomes a saner institution, and I am confident that will happen someday.

Jacobsen: Do you think the Supreme Court’s current position, being out of lockstep with much of American public opinion, especially regarding polls, is a major driver in the decline of religiosity in the United States? So people who identify with specific tenets, who identify with the label Christian, Muslim, etc., and with the fervency with which people believe, with metrics like how often they attend or how long they attend—what about them? Is the Supreme Court a major driver in that general attitude?

Joshi: I don’t know if the Supreme Court is a major driver of that general attitude. If you read the second volume of my history of atheism, which won’t come out until at least next year, you will see that the decline of religion has been fairly steady since the 16th century for a whole lot of reasons—science, the criticism of the Bible, and just the general advance of secular civilization in so many different aspects, including literature, the arts, culture, and music.

So, putting that in a broad perspective, what is happening in the Supreme Court is just a little blip in the grand scale of things. I do not see how it is possible to reverse the tide of secularism because, quite frankly, religion is simply not credible anymore, and it hasn’t been for several centuries. There is no need to resort to religion to explain any phenomena of the universe. Even people who are not well-educated in literature and the sciences understand that because they don’t see how religion is doing anything.

It always amuses me when Christians refer to their God as a benevolent God and then turn around and say that certain bad events, like hurricanes and tornadoes, are “acts of God,” which would suggest, quite frankly, that God is a malevolent creature—or at least inexplicable to our understanding. This unwittingly turns most Christians into agnostics. If you believe in a God but have no understanding of what that God is like, you are basically an agnostic. So there it is. It is simply impossible to take religion seriously anymore, which is not to say that religion won’t be a nuisance for quite a bit longer. We should always be careful and vigilant in pointing out these nuisances whenever we can.

Jacobsen: Mr. Joshi, thank you. Nice to meet you, and thank you so much for your time today.

Joshi: I appreciate it. Sure thing.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Muneeb Mushtaq: Aromacology, Drake, and Entrepreneurship

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/07

Muneeb Mushtaq is a serial entrepreneur and the CEO of Airzai, a tech-enabled health and wellness company. With a focus on leveraging AI and machine learning, Airzai is transforming the fragrance industry with its smart-home diffuser, Airzai Aroma. Before this, Muneed founded and led AskforTask, one of Canada’s largest on-demand service platforms. He is a keynote speaker and contributor to Forbes and Thrive Global publications.

Mushtaq discusses Airzai’s creation, inspired by a need for healthier, AI-driven fragrance experiences in a market dominated by synthetic products. Mushtaq highlights Airzai’s premium approach and its differentiation through quality. He shares insights on securing funding, partnerships, and his journey as an entrepreneur. Mushtaq emphasizes the importance of managing energy and how it can lead to personal and professional success.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here to discuss Airzai, and we’re joined by Muneeb Mushtaq. There are many aroma, oil, and diffuser devices around, so what inspired this particular one tied to AI? How does Airzai carve out its own niche, not just in a crowded market but also in a market that’s not necessarily novel?

Muneeb Mushtaq: Yes, thanks, Scott, for having me. That’s a great question. I’m just diving right into it—before we discuss why AI was involved, we need to take a step back. I’m sure you’ve used candles in your life, right?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Mushtaq: Candles have existed for hundreds, if not thousands, of years. They’re one of the most ancient tools. Initially, they were made from natural wax. Still, as humanity progressed and evolved, like with most things, they became more synthetic. This was done to increase production efficiency and enhance the properties of the candles. Now, almost 90% of the candles on the market contain synthetic materials that can harm users.

The same goes for diffusers. They have been around for less long than candles. However, most work by adding a few drops of essential oil to water, creating a pleasant experience. Many products in the market are healthier than they seem. That’s where Airzai comes in—we’re focused on building a better, healthier experience driven by AI for people using these products.

We make many daily decisions based on emotions. By improving the quality of experiences, like with Airzai, we help people make better choices with wellness products supported by AI technology.

Jacobsen: So, before we get into the technicalities of the device, to the original question, then, what inspired you to create a diffuser, an aroma diffuser, in a market that’s not entirely saturated but not entirely novel either? It’s one of those interesting middle-ground markets where you can find a niche and develop a bit of a new market.

Mushtaq: Absolutely. It comes from my experience as a serial entrepreneur, having built and sold two companies. I try to find a product category ripe for disruption but not entirely new—so we’re not reinventing the wheel. We took a segment that had been stale for a long time, where not many people were paying attention, and decided to create some disruption. Airzai is a product born out of my passion for scent and my experience in tech. What started as a passion project has now turned into a venture, and we’re quite excited about what we’re bringing to the market.

When you bring a product to the market, you can distinguish yourself at the extremes in one of two ways. One is through quantity, where you can distribute many products at a lower cost than competitors. Alternatively, you can distribute one of the highest quality products to a more select audience and build a brand based on quality.

Jacobsen: When you look at this product, I know the price, after tax, is over $600 Canadian. In a tight economy, when people are budgeting carefully, how do you make the sale or the pitch to people and distributors, convincing them that this is a product they want and may need to add more quality to their lives?

Mushtaq: Great question. The way we see it, Airzai is priced well above where the market stands for regular diffusers. That’s why we say Airzai is not just a diffuser—it’s a lifestyle. It’s something that integrates into your daily life.

When you look at any product category, some items serve the utility you need. For example, you can buy a vacuum cleaner for $20 at Walmart, but then you have Dyson, which costs $600 to $700. What’s the difference between Dyson and a no-name vacuum cleaner? They both clean floors, but the difference lies in the engineering, the experience, the science behind it, and the added utility you get from it. Every time you use that Dyson, it delivers more value.

Coming back to Airzai, this industry hasn’t seen a Dyson-level product or a premium experience. Airzai is designed for people who appreciate high-quality design and premium experiences and, above all, prioritize health benefits and healthy living. They understand that they don’t want to introduce toxins into their environment. Instead of just scenting their room, they want something that brings health benefits.

Mushtaq: So, when you pile up all these things, the value for money far surpasses what the user is paying. That’s reflected in the demand we’re seeing. The first two batches we’re launching are completely sold out. Our beta users are loving the experience. For example, Jonathan from Miami uses a Nespresso coffee machine and a Nest thermostat. He falls into the category of preferring high-quality products over just utility.

In his words: “Mushtaq, I wish this product had existed long ago. It’s just seamless. I don’t have to clean it. I don’t even have to think about it. It just works. Whenever the scent ends, I reorder at the tap of a button, or I can even automate it. The system knows when my scent is running low and places an order for me when I’m in subscription mode.”

So, this whole experience really defines what you’re paying for. We’re confident that anyone who becomes an Airzai customer will not be disappointed.

Jacobsen Douglas Jacobsen: Now, you did get an endorsement or something of that nature from Drake, a prominent artist. How did that come about?

Mushtaq Mushtaq: Yes, well, Drake is one of our investors. As I said, it’s a venture now, though it started as a passion project. Building something great and truly focused on bringing the market to its desired experience naturally attracts the right audience. When we got introduced to Drake’s team, the discussion was organic. He loved the product, and it just made business sense, given the scale of the project. So, we ended up partnering, and I’m grateful to have him on this journey with us. We’re excited to see how far we can take this together.

Jacobsen: When people think of a regular diffuser, they’re not thinking of a lifestyle product—they’re thinking of something more basic, like a device for vague aromatherapeutic activity. They might think of candles or just putting oil into a slot for a coarse aroma distribution throughout a room. How does AI make this more systematic, ergonomic, and precise regarding human control?

Mushtaq: Yes, let me revisit one term you used for the audience: aromatherapy. We all know what aromatherapy is. It’s been around for a long time. Ancient Chinese cultures, for instance, practiced aromatherapy with ingredients like white jasmine, one of the key ingredients in our scent called “Serene Sleep.”

Aromatherapy has long been used to bring physical and psychological benefits, like calming the mind and body or aiding in healing. Some essential oils can even be applied to the skin for pain relief. So, aromatherapy has been around for ages, but at Airzai, we work with aromacology. Aromacology is the study of how scents affect emotions and behaviour. Through AI, we can personalize and optimize scent experiences for individual users, tailoring the effects based on preferences, needs, and the space in which the scent is used.

Jacobsen: Now, that’s a new term that hasn’t yet been explored in more detail. The future lies with scent science, especially aromacology. Could you explain what aromacology means and how it relates to emotional states?

Mushtaq Mushtaq: Absolutely. Aromacology is the study of how scents impact emotions or the emotional state of human beings. Looking at it from a bigger perspective, it’s about enabling a scent to bring someone the emotional state they desire. That could be feeling relaxed and energized, getting better sleep, or improving meditation.

AI helps us achieve this by collecting data about how scents impact emotional states, both on an individual level and across different demographics. By utilizing AI technology, we can aggregate data and train models to ensure the experience is so personalized that it feels custom-made for each user. The AI doesn’t just understand your current mood—it can predict your mood and offer a scent experience to help you achieve your desired emotional state.

Much innovation is happening in this space, which has been overlooked for a long time. We’re excited to be pioneers in disrupting this space. Thanks to the availability of advanced AI technology and expertise, we can finally use it to deepen the science of scent.

Jacobsen: What other areas or markets could this device and technology partner or integrate with other products, systems, or distribution? For example, you buy an Airzai product and then get a complementary product, or is it more about focusing on one specific type of oil?

Mushtaq Mushtaq: Yes, the oils we use are non-refillable, but we’re looking at complementary products that align with the biohacking trend, which is about improving longevity and quality of life. People are focusing more on preventative measures to live better lives.

For example, red light therapy is gaining popularity. If you’re doing a 10- to 15-minute red light therapy session or a cold plunge, having an additional sensory element like a scent can take the experience to the next level. We’ve tested this in different settings, and the results are amazing.

You also have devices like the Apple Watch, which tracks your heart rate, blood oxygen levels, sleep, and activity. By integrating scent experiences with these devices, we can further enhance the user experience. There’s much opportunity to work alongside these devices to bring true value to people.

When you look at other products on the market, there isn’t a company as forward-thinking in introducing scent and the olfactory system into areas that impact our quality of life—like sleep, recovery, workouts, eating health, and overall well-being. As time passes, we’ll introduce exciting partnerships that truly add value for our customers.

Jacobsen: You have a lot of seed funding for this project. Many people may need to realize that while much money is available for various initiatives, getting that funding is another endeavour altogether. When you’re raising, or at least when you have a couple of million dollars in seed funding, how do you manage that, especially in a slightly saturated market? It’s not entirely novel or a brand-new market, but it still seems promising.

Mushtaq: The way I look at funding is that, of course, in the startup world, there’s a lot of talk about how much you should raise when you should raise it, and what the right amount is to raise. I advise and work with many startups to share my knowledge about it because I’ve also successfully raised funds for my past two startups.

When we started this project, Airzai, one thing was clear: because it’s a hardware project and we’re building the technology in-house, there would be much R&D needed to develop this product. Not only is it a hardware project, but it also requires software interactions and integrations. And we must remember that implementing AI is a complex and demanding task, especially when building the whole structure around it.

It truly matters how much development is needed and the dynamics involved in bringing the product to market. It was always clear that we wanted to be the market leader. Attracting the right partners, engaging with them, and involving them in the project at this stage was vital. I’m happy that we got that done successfully, and the product we’re bringing to the market now will truly reflect that.

I want to quickly address entrepreneurs thinking about raising money or figuring out how much to raise. It comes down to how big your vision is. When you aim high, looking to create a global brand and make an impact, you need that fuel to get there. So, it’s about more than just getting the right amount of money; it’s also getting the right partners who believe in your vision and can support you in bringing it to reality.

Jacobsen: That’s a good point. Many people don’t realize how much of an underappreciated skill raising any seed funding is, let alone raising seven-figure sums. It’s an impressive feat to have accomplished.

So, you’re calling from Dubai now, but you’re a Toronto boy—or, more precisely, a Canadian like me. Is the work you’re doing in Dubai part of an extension of Airzai, or is it for something else entirely?

Mushtaq: Yes, thanks for bringing that up. First, I completely agree with your comments about fundraising. It’s difficult, and people who haven’t been entrepreneurs or started a company often need help understanding the complexities and hardships of raising capital. It’s a sales job—you’re selling your dream to someone. That’s the first thing. The second challenge is that you’re selling something that exists in the future.

So, it’s not like you’re just selling a car, where the moment they invest, they immediately reap the benefits. Nor is it like the stock market, where you see daily fluctuations. It’s an investment in a future—a distant future. That’s why I love sharing my knowledge, experiences, and even failures, along with how I learned from them and the methods I’ve developed after countless setbacks.

I always tell people that we currently have 35 people on our cap table, but that’s the result of pitching to, well, I’ve lost count, but maybe over 250 people—probably between 200 and 300. It’s not just a numbers game, however. When you realize that you need someone as an investor and pitch directly to them, you start converting. I always say that this requires much effort. Still, in the end, when you have the resources to support your dreams and bring them to reality, that should motivate you to stay persistent and follow through.

I grew up in Canada and went to the University of Toronto, but I’ve now decided to call Dubai my second home. I’ve been spending much time here, and this region has a lot of opportunities and excitement, especially post-COVID. I’ve always believed in the potential of this region. I have many local Emirati friends, and we even have investors from here. So, it was natural for me to situate myself in Dubai.

I believe that people should expand beyond the city or country they grew up in. There’s so much potential, opportunity, and beauty outside our upbringing. It would be a shame not to explore that if you have the means to do so and see the possibilities that come with it. Dubai has been an amazing place for me to grow and contribute, and I’m very bullish on the future of this city.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts or feelings based on today’s conversation? We can also hyperlink to the website for more information.

Mushtaq: In my final thoughts, I’d first like to say great questions! It was short and sweet, and I had a great time chatting about what we’re building and bringing to the market.

Ultimately, what I always tell people—and I’ll share this here as well—is that when we understand the importance of how energy flows in our lives, we tend to elevate ourselves. My request to those listening is that aside from everything we’ve discussed about the product, I hope this conversation motivates someone to take action, chase their dreams, and build something meaningful.

Finally, pay attention to your energy levels. We often ignore this, but it’s crucial to living a more balanced and fulfilling life.

When we’re elevated, focusing on our energy, and at that level where we not only have high energy for ourselves but can contribute that energy to the people around us, it creates magic in our lives. So, if someone can take away something from this podcast, I will thank them for their time listening to us having a good conversation. But more than that, do an energy audit.

One lesson I always teach people is to become the CEO of their lives—their Chief Energy Officer. Focus on your energy. When you manage your energy, you unlock greatness in your life. I hope someone takes this to heart and implements it, and I’m sure they will see amazing results. Thank you so much for the opportunity and your time today. It’s been an absolute pleasure.

Jacobsen: Thank you! 

Mushtaq: Appreciate it, man. Thank you so much. Take care.

Jacobsen: You too! Have a good one.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Professor Benjamin Karney: Key Points on Relationships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/06

Professor Benjamin Karney is a Professor of Social Psychology at UCLA and the co-director of the UCLA Marriage and Close Relationships Lab. His research focuses on the impact of external stressors on intimate relationships, especially in early marriage. Karney has extensively studied low-income, Latinx, Black, and White newlywed couples and military marriages.

Karney discusses couples’ challenges in maintaining intimacy, noting that external factors and personality traits, such as conscientiousness and neuroticism, influence relationship success. He emphasizes the importance of being responsive to a partner’s individual needs. Karney also highlights the difficulty of maintaining perspective in relationships and advises giving partners the benefit of the doubt while recognizing that not all relationships are worth sustaining.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here with Professor Benjamin Karney or Ben Karney. What do you prefer?

Professor Benjamin Karney: Ben is shorter. Both are accurate.

Jacobsen: I’ll go with Ben because it’s shorter. I remember interviewing James Flynn before he passed. I asked him, “What do you prefer to be called?” He said, “What do you prefer to call me?” I said, “Jim.” So, Jim, it was.

Karney: Ben is fine. Ben is what my friends call me.

Jacobsen: Ben is great. So, what is your role at the university? Why did you choose this particular area of expertise and research? Then, we can dive into the main discussion.

Karney: So, those are two questions. The shorter answer is that I am a psychology professor and the chair of the social psychology area within the psychology department. I’m also the co-director of the UCLA Marriage and Close Relationships Lab. I’ve been studying intimate partnerships in couples for about 35 years. What got me into the field was caring a lot about intimate relationships and noticing that they seem difficult for even good, thoughtful people to maintain.

I was young when I got into it, and I remember thinking, “Gee, I hope I don’t get divorced.” Everyone in the world hopes that, and yet many people do. So, there’s a real mystery around intimacy, especially in marriage. People enter marriage thinking, “I want this to work,” and they give it their all. Yet, many people get divorced anyway, which is an undesired outcome.

And that’s mysterious. People don’t predict they’ll get divorced. Nobody gets married hoping or thinking they’ll get divorced, yet so many do. So, that means something unexpected happens in intimacy that people themselves don’t fully understand. That’s one of the reasons I wanted to study it.

And 35 years later, I’m still working on it. It’s an enduring question. That’s how I got into it.

Jacobsen: Your work is recognized. You have over 20,000 citations, a significant metric for the impact of your research in academia.

Karney: I hope that’s true. I don’t fool myself into thinking that my work will solve divorces or breakups. Still, I do hope it helps people feel more informed about relationships. If no one else has been helped, I know I have been. I am more informed. However, it didn’t save me. I’ve been married, but I was married once before and got divorced—as a marital researcher.

I knew the field. I knew all the literature. I knew all the things you’re supposed to do. I had already written a book on intimate relationships. I’d written the book on intimate relationships, but my relationships could have been better. My first marriage could have been better.

Jacobsen: And what are some of the lessons from your work? 

Karney: One of the big lessons, in particular, is that not everything about your intimate relationship is within your control. There are many forces external to the couple that are easy to overlook but play a very important role in a couple’s ability to maintain intimacy over time.

Jacobsen: I have two questions. First, I want to consider intrinsic and extrinsic factors. So, let’s start with an expert opinion: Are there some people for whom relationships are not suited in terms of their temperament over the arc of their lives?

Karney: Yes, undoubtedly. Much research shows that some people are better at intimacy than others. The individual’s stable qualities are associated with more success in intimate relationships.

The question you asked is, are there some people who don’t want relationships? And, undoubtedly, there are. Some people don’t want relationships for various reasons. Either their personal experiences with relationships have been negative, so they decide, “I don’t want it anymore.” Or their personal experiences with closeness and dependence on others have been so fraught and painful that they’ve learned to avoid other people.

There are plenty of people who don’t want relationships. Others want relationships but, for various reasons, aren’t well-equipped to handle what relationships require. People with a history of depressive episodes have a harder time in relationships. People struggling with substance abuse have harder times in relationships.

People who are prone to feeling negative emotions—those who are stably negative—are also known as having high negative affectivity or neuroticism. On average, people who score high on that trait tend to have worse relationships. People have different attachment styles, and those who are insecurely attached have a harder time in relationships.

Some qualities affect your ability to have a positive or negative relationship. Some people are great at relationships and generally do better in any relationship because they are easygoing, don’t tend to dwell on negative emotions, are generally not defensive, and are mentally healthy.

They may have had good experiences in the past, so they trust relationships overall. A long list of stable individual qualities contributes to more or less relationship success.

Jacobsen: Now, shifting to a more constructive and positive frame, which will be a useful part of this series: What are some of the bases for those traits intrinsic to the individual, not necessarily external forces?

Karney: If we focus on individual qualities that contribute to successful intimacy, we first need to define it. 

Jacobsen: What is intimacy? What is the challenge? What is the process by which an individual quality can either facilitate or inhibit intimacy? 

Karney: There have been many definitions of intimacy. Where I come from, as a social psychologist, intimacy has been defined as a process in which partners are appropriately responsive to each other’s disclosures. I credit this to a famous social psychologist named Harry Reis—R-E-I-S. He’s a genius, still alive, and a leader in the field.

Some decades ago, he developed the intimacy process model. He said intimacy isn’t about how much I share with you or how well you listen to me. No. Intimacy is a dyadic process where one partner discloses something—it could even be a nonverbal disclosure—and the other responds somehow. Intimacy is furthered when that response makes the first person, the discloser, feel understood, validated and cared for.

That process differs for each couple because the things that make me feel understood, validated, and cared for might differ from those that make me feel understood, validated, and cared for. When intimacy is working, each partner understands the other well enough to respond in a way that makes the other person feel understood, validated, and cared for. Let me give you an example.

I come home from work and say, “Boy, I had a rough day at work today.” Now, you have an opportunity to respond. You might say, “You had a rough day at work. Come here on the couch. Tell me all about it. I will wrap you in a blanket of love and care for you. I’ll give you a back rub. I’m here for you.”

Now, for some people, that would be the perfect response. It’s exactly what they want—to be soothed and blanketed with love. If I’m that person, your response makes me feel understood, validated and cared for. Intimacy is enriched. But there might be other people for whom that is the wrong response.

When I say I had a bad day at work, I might need to decompress alone, to be in my “cave,” needing some space. I suggest you handle things around the house so that I can have time to myself. In that case, if I’m that person and you respond with, “Let me blanket you with love,” you are making the problem worse. I’m already feeling overwhelmed, and now you’re overwhelming me. I do not feel understood, validated, or cared for.

The intimacy process model says it’s not behaviour that leads to intimacy. Intimacy sometimes looks different for every couple. It’s about being responsive to your partner’s needs and way of being. Being responsive to your partner is the key to intimacy—being aware of what your partner personally needs in the moment.

Jacobsen: So, if that’s intimacy, what qualities make someone good at that?

Karney: All right, let me dive into that.

So, there are lots of different ways to approach that. You can approach it from the lens of personality theory. Personality theorists say, “Hey, people have different traits.” You may have heard of the Big Five personality traits.

The idea is that there are five big personality traits, and some of them are more associated with successful relationships than others. For example, I am highly conscientious, a personality trait that captures doing what is appropriate. In that case, I will consider what would be appropriate. I’ll be attuned to your needs, to your ups and downs.

Being highly conscientious makes me better at being responsive to you when needed. Indeed, highly conscientious people tend to have better relationships. Now, imagine that I have a different personality trait—neuroticism. Neuroticism is a general tendency to feel negative emotional states.

Let’s say I come home after a bad day at work, and I’m high in neuroticism. It might be hard for anything you do to penetrate my general tendency to feel bad. You might be unable to make me feel understood, validated, or cared for. No one in the world might have that ability because my tendency to feel negative mood states is so strong. In this case, what might make another couple feel closer doesn’t make us feel closer because my personality doesn’t allow it.

Or, your personality might affect how you respond to me when I come home and say I’m stressed. Let’s say you’ve had great experiences with closeness and intimacy. You’re comfortable with closeness and intimacy—a disposition you carry. When I say I’ve had a bad day, your response might be that you need me, and that’s great. You love being needed. It feels good to be needed, so you lean in, figure out what I need, and give it to me.

But what if you’re a different person? What if you’ve had relationships with overbearing people or relationships where you were abused, taken advantage of, or exploited in the past? You carry that history with you, which might make you wary of people asking you for things. It might make you mistrust people with needs. So, when I come home and say, “Whoa, I’ve had a bad day,” you hear that I need something. You might think, “Oh no, don’t come to me with your needs.” Your personality or history might lead you to respond with, “Well, that’s your problem,” or “I’ve also had a bad day—what do you want me to do about it?” That response wouldn’t make me feel understood, validated, or cared for.

If we understand the process, we can imagine how the individual differences both partners bring to the situation can either facilitate or inhibit it.

Jacobsen: On balance, are there more functional or dysfunctional ways to have a relationship?

Karney: There’s an infinite number of functional ways and an infinite number of dysfunctional ways. But your question reminds me of a famous quote by Tolstoy—I believe it’s the first line of Anna Karenina. The line is, and I might be misquoting it, “All happy families are alike; all unhappy families are unhappy in their way.” This quote gets cited a lot in my field because, generally speaking, it’s wrong.

It’s the opposite—the truth is that unhappiness in a couple typically looks the same. You’ve probably heard of John Gottman and his “Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse.” If you’re in an unhappy relationship, you’re likely to experience withdrawal, anger, contempt, or rigidity. That’s exactly right. All unhappy couples are withdrawn, angry, contemptuous, or rigid, but you can be happy in many ways. There are many ways that couples figure out how to be happy.

Some couples say, “Hey, we will do separate things, and that’s okay. We’re going to live parallel lives.” Some couples are intertwined like two pieces of yarn, and that’s what they need to be happy. And that’s okay. There are many different ways to be happy in a relationship. But unhappy relationships all look very familiar and similar.

Jacobsen: Last question. What is a significant or the most significant factor for people to work on—something that isn’t part of their intrinsic personality structure, something they didn’t get from inheritance or early development—that can help increase the odds of staying together in a long-term relationship if that’s what they want?

Karney: I appreciate the question: A relationship is worth sustaining if it’s what you want. Not everyone wants that. And I’m not a therapist—I’m a scientist. I’m not really in the advice business. But if I had to offer advice based on my research, I’d say: You can’t control what happens to you, but you can try to attend to it.

It’s easy to focus on what our partners are doing now. Suppose our partner is letting us down, disappointing us, or frustrating us. In that case, it’s easy to get mad at them because the context that might explain their behaviour is usually invisible to us. Maybe our partner had a bad day. Maybe they had a bad experience 20 years ago that makes it hard to do what they’d love to do today.

Trying to keep that context in mind is a heavy lift. It takes work. But making the effort to give our partners the benefit of the doubt can be worthwhile—at least in decent relationships. In a terrible relationship, you shouldn’t give your partner the benefit of the doubt. If your partner is abusing you, you don’t need to do that—you should get mad.

But in a regular, decent relationship, it’s useful to make an effort to ask yourself, “Why is my partner disappointing me? Where is that coming from?” Suppose you can remember that your partner is a good person with a good heart who may have just had a bad day or experience. In that case, it’s often easier to return from anger, get over it, and move on with the connection.

Jacobsen: Ben, thank you for your time today on this quick blitz call.

Karney: It’s a blitz! If you need anything else, reach out.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thanks so much. Take care.

Karney: Bye-bye. See you, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Attorney Leah Wise: Texas, Accidents, Women’s Empowerment

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/05

Leah Wise is the founder and owner of Leah Wise Law Firm, PLLC, the first Latina-owned personal injury law firm in South Texas. Renowned for her success in securing millions of dollars in settlements for her clients, Leah has earned national recognition as one of the top lawyers in the field. In addition to her legal practice, she owns Leah Wise Enterprises, LLC, a real estate investment firm, and CrashGal Couture, LLC, a clothing brand. Leah is deeply committed to community service, co-founding “Latina Feature Friday” to spotlight Latina-owned businesses and leading mentorship programs for aspiring Latina lawyers and entrepreneurs. She also established the Leah Wise Latina Student Hardship Fund, donating $50,000 to support Latina law students at St. Mary’s University School of Law. Leah’s passion for women’s empowerment and gender equality is reflected in her professional and philanthropic efforts nationwide. GoBankingRates, USA Today’s Modern Woman Magazine, Retail Boss, InStyle, Bustle, and Best Life.

Wise discusses her pursuit of law to advocate for her community after being inspired by her work in the Texas State Legislature. She founded her practice in 2016, specializing in personal injury law. Wise emphasizes the importance of securing insurance and advocates for women entering male-dominated fields, highlighting the challenges and rewards of practicing law while balancing business ventures in fashion and real estate.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re talking with attorney Leah Wise. You graduated from high school in 2008 and are a Texas native. Please give us a quick background. What initially sparked your interest in pursuing law?

Leah Wise: I graduated from The University of Texas at Austin in 2012. At the time, I felt a bit lost. I was still determining where my life was headed and what I wanted to do. I needed more clear direction. So, I began working at the Texas State Legislature for a senator named Wendy Davis. During that time, I had the opportunity to observe various legislators on the Senate floor. I was deeply inspired by how these legislators advocated for their communities and passed meaningful legislation. I knew then that I wanted to be an advocate as well. I had no desire to run for office, but I wanted to advocate for my community.

The best way to do that was to attend law school and advocate for my clients. After working for a year in the state legislature, I started law school at St. Mary’s University School of Law. I graduated in 2016 and opened my practice the day after passing the bar exam.

Jacobsen: Excellent. I also saw a note about your work with crash cases.

Wise: Yes, that’s right. People probably don’t think about crashes and significant 18-wheeler accidents as something they want to dwell on, but that’s a significant part of my professional life.

Jacobsen: How do you approach car accidents, wrongful death cases, and similar matters?

Wise: It’s incredibly challenging. Almost 100% of my clients come to me during the most difficult time in their lives. They’ve been injured and unable to work, and when they can’t work, they can’t provide for their families. The accidents they’ve been involved in are often through no fault of their own, whether it’s a motor vehicle accident, an 18-wheeler accident, or a work-related incident.

As an attorney, it’s my job to secure justice for them and act as a counsellor. They are going through extraordinarily difficult times, often the most challenging periods. It can be emotionally taxing for me, but it’s also incredibly rewarding because I am passionate about helping these individuals. In the end, my work is almost always rewarding. My clients are good, hardworking, honest people, and it brings me great joy to help them through these difficult times. Knowing that I helped them return to a great life is incredibly fulfilling.

Jacobsen: When you’re actively working on a case, things can go well or poorly. How can things go wrong, and how can they go right?

Wise: I’ve had several cases go poorly, but the reasons often have nothing to do with me as their lawyer. One of the biggest issues is the high number of uninsured drivers in Texas. Sometimes, my clients are injured in accidents caused by uninsured drivers. When this happens, I ask my clients if they have their insurance, as we might be able to recover through their policy. Unfortunately, sometimes they don’t have insurance either. In such cases, our hands are tied because the likelihood that the person responsible for the accident has any significant financial resources is very low. We conduct our research and due diligence, but most of the time, if they don’t have insurance, it’s because they are living paycheck to paycheck. We could pursue a claim against the defendant. Still, it’s unlikely to result in significant compensation that would make my client whole again.

Nine times out of ten, the answer is no. When I say cases can go bad, it’s usually because there’s no insurance involved, and there’s no money to be secured to pay for my client’s medical bills or lost wages. Often, the clients themselves are also living paycheck to paycheck. They have a small savings. Now they’re out of a car, they’re injured, and there’s nobody to recover from. These incidents are heartbreaking, so I advocate on my social media channels: Get insurance! Get insurance! It’s so, so important to have uninsured motorist coverage. When an uninsured motorist hits you, your uninsured motorist coverage will kick in to cover your injuries and medical bills.

And suppose you have full coverage on your vehicle, which is called collision coverage. In that case, your vehicle will be covered, too. I always advise opting for as much insurance as you can. It hurts to pay that premium every month, but with the number of uninsured drivers in Texas, it’s worth it. The difference would be staggering if people compared the insurance cost to not having it and getting injured.

Jacobsen: Could you elaborate on that? I understand you’ve amassed some national recognition for settlements, some reaching up to nine figures.

Wise: Yes. I’ve seen cases where clients are catastrophically injured and sent to the hospital. I’ve had clients with seven-figure hospital bills and millions of medical expenses. When you don’t have health insurance, you don’t have car insurance, and the person who caused the accident doesn’t have insurance either, it’s a bad situation.

While paying for insurance might seem like a lot—$300 a month—it’s, in my opinion, so worth it. Hospitals can sometimes write off bills, but if they file a lien, there’s a legal requirement to pay it. And if there’s a third-party payout, those proceeds often go toward settling that lien. It’s a difficult situation, and I always say it’s better to be safe than sorry.

Jacobsen: What are the most frequent cases you see, and are there any rare cases that people wouldn’t necessarily expect?

Wise: Car accidents happen every single day, unfortunately. That’s by far the most common type of case we get. They’re happening right now—people are in accidents all the time. The likelihood of a car accident is high, which is scary. It’s like life insurance—people don’t want to think about it because they believe they will live forever. But the reality is that the chances of being in a car accident at some point in your life are very high.

Thankfully, cases involving defective products are less common. Many regulations now require companies to ensure that products are made safely, so defective product injuries are rarer. Work accidents are also less common because regulations ensure that employees are appropriately trained for their roles.

Car accidents, however, happen every single day, and we receive calls regularly.

Jacobsen: You’ve done some support initiatives. I understand you’ve started a fund or scholarship specifically for people from Latin backgrounds facing hardship. Please tell us a little about those.

Wise: Sure. I recently pledged $50,000 to the Latina Hardship Fund at St. Mary’s University School of Law. Each semester, $5,000 is awarded to a student in need who is facing hardship. These students often reach out to me to express their gratitude. Some of their stories are incredibly heartbreaking—women in domestic violence situations, women fleeing violent partners, or women struggling to make ends meet while in law school and raising children.

It’s deeply rewarding to be able to give back. While in law school, I was fortunate not to face such dire circumstances, but it still wasn’t easy. I struggled to make ends meet myself. I never went without food, so I don’t want to overdramatize my experience, but being able to help these women who are in even more difficult situations and still striving to better themselves and their families through education is incredibly fulfilling.

I’ve also awarded an LSAT prep course to the Minority Women Pursuing Law student organization at UT in Austin two years in a row. Many aspiring law students need to learn how they’ll pay for an LSAT prep course, so I’m happy to support them with that. We plan to do it every year in the future.

Additionally, we’ve raised funds for feminine hygiene products in underserved and low-socioeconomic areas. Many school-aged girls need access to these products, which forces them to miss school or work. This is a significant global issue, and we’re working to raise awareness about it. Philanthropy is a big part of what my law firm does.

Jacobsen: You also have a fashion line, CrashGal Couture. So, you have a diversified portfolio of businesses. What led you to expand into fashion? 

Wise: Yes! CrashGal Couture is something I’m very passionate about. It’s a way to express my aesthetic taste. It’s been an exciting journey to branch out into different ventures beyond law, and fashion is a natural extension of my creative interests. I love fashion. I feel that fashion is my creative outlet—my favourite way to express myself. I enjoy all different forms of fashion: women’s and men’s. It’s my passion project, and I have much fun with it. It’s my creative outlet.

I don’t currently sell men’s fashion. My clothing line is 100% women’s fashion. In the future, we’ll expand into plus-size and men’s fashion. We’re only two years old, so we’re still growing. It’s been a fun, rewarding, and creative outlet.

Jacobsen: You also have a real estate company. I need to become more familiar with this. Please provide me with some details.

Wise: Yes, I’ve started investing more in real estate. Recently, I bought an old strip club here in my city. We’re renovating it into a co-working space, which will also house my law office. I also own a few other investment properties. Learning the ins and outs of real estate, investment, and renovation has been a roller coaster. It’s a completely different world from law, but I enjoy it.

When the tenants left the strip club, they left everything behind—the poles, outfits, shoes, makeup, glitter—everything you’d expect in a strip club. We even made some fun content about what we found inside. Some former employees and dancers have stopped by, and I’ve become friends with them. It’s been a cool experience. For example, the former house mom, who takes care of the dancers much like a house mom in a sorority, came by and shared some incredible stories. We even did a tell-all interview with her, which was much fun. We also talked about myths about sex workers. It was all very empowering.

We’re aiming to finish renovations by January. The co-working space will open, and my law office will be on the top floor. I’ve got a few other real estate projects going on as well.

Jacobsen: So, fashion, real estate, law—you’re still managing to be recognized as one of the best attorneys in your area multiple times. How does that recognition feel, and how do you mentally project your success across these different ventures?

Wise: It feels great. What makes it even more special is that personal injury law, the area I specialize in is predominantly male. Most personal injury attorneys are men, so it was a tough industry to break into as a woman. I’m proud of that.

Jacobsen: For other women looking to follow in your footsteps, the key is mastering one trade, like law, and then moving on to other genuine interests, like fashion or real estate. How do you balance and structure all these different business ventures?

Wise: Exactly. It’s about mastering one area first—like law in my case—and then branching out into other areas of genuine interest. Fashion is a passion, and real estate is another exciting venture that ties back into my law practice in some cases, such as the strip club renovation. Balancing these requires careful planning, but it’s all incredibly rewarding.

It feels really special to have received that award and recognition. Regarding juggling all these different ventures, I followed what you said. I spent about five years mastering the law firm and lawyer work—that’s all I did before branching out into other things. Getting my law practice off the ground was the most time-consuming part of my career, especially since I didn’t have any savings when I started.

I wouldn’t say delving into these other areas is easy—because it’s not—but every day brings new challenges. I’m familiar with starting a business, managing taxes, payroll, marketing, bookkeeping, and accounting—all things I learned while growing my law practice from 2016 to 2020. I’ve been able to take that knowledge and apply it to these other ventures, which makes them a little less difficult—though still challenging. The skills I’ve learned as a lawyer have transferred into these other industries.

I also have a great team, which is super important. I can delegate, and I know the things that need to get done will get done. Delegation is key when managing multiple projects.

Jacobsen: Delegation and business practice—along with mastering one thing at a time before branching out—what would be your tips for women starting in law, particularly those heading into personal injury or other challenging fields? I know one woman who worked at a horse farm here in Canada—she was a divorce lawyer as far as I know, which sounds like a nightmare. She often went to the horse farm to ride, and I understand why!

Wise: If she were a divorce lawyer, she would have a much harder job than me! Kudos to her. When I first started my practice, I took on a few divorce cases, and they were incredibly difficult and heartbreaking—especially when children were involved.

For women starting in law, it depends on what you want to do with your legal career. If you’re going to work at a law firm with an 8-to-5 schedule, that’s great—it’s safe and provides much security, knowing you’ll get a paycheck every week or two. There’s much comfort in that.

However, if you plan to start your practice, get comfortable with making mistakes. Even as a new lawyer in a big law firm, you will make mistakes—that’s just the reality of any professional career. But being an entrepreneur and your boss is unique because things can go well in one moment, and then the next, everything can change. Everything is constantly evolving. Even now, one minute, things are great, and then, suddenly, it feels like it’s all going downhill.

We might secure a multimillion-dollar settlement, and then the next hour, there’s a client yelling on the phone because their car isn’t fixed, and somehow, it’s our fault because the body shop isn’t moving fast enough. So, it’s a constant roller coaster of ups and downs. A big part of being a business owner and a lawyer is always putting out fires. People don’t come to you when things are going well—they come to you because they’re in a business dispute, were arrested for a crime, injured in an accident, going through a divorce, or fighting for custody. These are all difficult situations where people need legal representation.

They’re being sued, or there’s a broken contract. As a lawyer, you’re constantly dealing with emergencies. Your clients come to you in difficult circumstances, and you need to counsel them emotionally while practicing law to secure justice. You have to be prepared for the emotional roller coaster of the legal field. If you’re worried, you’ll always feel like a “baby lawyer,” that’s fine. Even 10- or 20-year lawyers are still learning something new every day. So don’t feel like you have to master everything—none of us do. We’re all learning constantly.

Jacobsen: What are some common mistakes that clients come to you with, especially in terms of unrealistic expectations? Let’s set aside the question of insurance levels for the moment. What misunderstandings do people have about the role of a lawyer—professionally, ethically, and practically?

Wise: That’s a good question. Sometimes, there are funny misconceptions. For example, some clients think I can arrest people or act as a prosecutor to imprison them. I must explain, “Wait a second, I’m a private attorney. I don’t control the criminal justice system.” For example, if a drunk driver hits someone, I’m handling the civil case. The district attorney’s office deals with the criminal side of things, but clients sometimes think I can handle both. They’ll say, “Let’s make sure he gets put behind bars,” and I’m like, “I get it, but that’s the DA’s job, not mine.”

Another common misconception is that clients think if they’ve been in an accident, they’ll automatically get a million dollars, no matter what. However, in Texas, for example, the minimum insurance policy is $30,000 if one person is involved and $60,000 if more than one person is involved. So, it’s important to manage those expectations.

That’s the legally required minimum amount of insurance. Most people will buy the minimum because it’s the cheapest. If you’re spending money on insurance, you’ll likely choose the most affordable option. So, we often deal with policies that max out at $30,000 or $60,000, and clients need help understanding that.

They’ll say, “But my arm’s broken,” or “I have a traumatic brain injury. I need a million dollars!” I understand. However, the reality is that this person’s insurance policy has a maximum recovery of $30,000.

Jacobsen: Right, but people see these million-dollar settlements on TV.

Wise: They’ll see advertisements of people getting a million dollars from a settlement. Still, it’s usually an 18-wheeler with a higher insurance policy in those cases. This case might have a policy that only covers the minimum amount required by Texas, so that’s the most we can recover. It’s much-educating clients from the start. This isn’t a million-dollar case.

If it were a commercial vehicle or a catastrophic construction accident involving a billion-dollar company, they would carry much larger insurance policies. Those are the cases you see advertised on TV and billboards. But many clients need to realize that. They think every car accident could result in a million-dollar settlement. There’s much misinformation out there, and I don’t blame people—it’s not their job to know the law. My role often involves educating them about what’s realistic.

I also explain, “I’m not a prosecutor—I can’t put people behind bars,” and “Not every case is a million-dollar case.”

Jacobsen: How can women entering law, particularly in fields facing a male-dominated environment, navigate potential culture shock? It depends on the firm, community, and individual background. Men entering nursing, for example, might experience culture shock. Similarly, women entering male-dominated fields of law can feel out of place.

For women entering these spaces, particularly in areas where 70-90% of the field may be male-dominated

Wise: It’s important to understand that they might bring a different perspective. But that difference can also be their strength. It’s about finding ways to integrate and contribute while standing firm in who you are. It may take some adjustment, but resilience and persistence are key to making an impact in these environments.

Jacobsen: What are some of your tips for women entering male-dominated spaces? What will likely be different for them—positive and negative—and what will be the same, so they know what to expect?

Wise: Many women struggle with impostor syndrome when entering a space dominated by men. I get it—I’ve been there. You’re a 26-year-old female lawyer surrounded by 50- or 60-year-old men, and you question your ability. But it’s okay, it’s normal. Don’t think there’s something wrong with you for feeling that way—we all feel that way.

I remember once a bailiff tried to kick me out of the courtroom because he thought I didn’t belong there. He said, “Ma’am, you must step out because this area is for lawyers only.” This was in 2017, a while ago. You’d think things would have changed by now, but I didn’t get upset. I calmly said, “I am a lawyer, so I’m staying here.” He felt embarrassed and apologized. It was a valuable lesson for him.

There will be moments when you’re mistaken for the paralegal or support staff, even if you’re a partner. My favourite response is to be better—more prepared and the best person in the room. It might take a little more preparation, but that makes those moments so reaffirming. Once you’ve done it, it gets easier to keep doing it.

My advice is to get out of your head. Remember, you have the same bar card as all the men in the room. You all took the same bar exam, and you did the work to get here. You deserve to be there. It’s about holding your ground in that space so more women can join it. I feel proud of that.

Jacobsen: Have I covered everything? What do you think?

Wise: Yes, we’ve covered everything.

Jacobsen: Leah, thank you for the opportunity and your time today. I appreciate it.

Wise: Thank you for having me!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Pat Love: Marriage and Family Dynamics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/04

Dr. Pat Love is a renowned relationship expert, therapist, and educator with over 40 years of experience in marriage and family therapy. A Distinguished Professor at Texas A&M, she co-founded the Austin Family Institute and authored seven books. Dr. Love’s approach is grounded in science, making complex research accessible and practical. Featured on Oprah, The Today Show, and CNN, she specializes in helping couples reconnect and build resilient relationships through education, skills, and simple, transformative shifts.

Love talks about her work as a marriage and family therapist, the importance of understanding, vulnerability, and relational thinking in therapy. She highlights transforming criticism into requests, addressing underlying emotional needs, and integrating research into therapy. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I’m going to start with a personal question. What do you find most fulfilling about being a marriage and family therapist? Is it helping couples become happy with each other again?

Dr. Pat Love: Yes, that’s a big part of it. Additionally, a secondary fulfillment comes from a common scenario in couples therapy: you often have a ‘dragger’ and a ‘dragged.’ One person brings the other into therapy. I love that dynamic.

When I see the ‘dragged’ person, initially resistant, I realize, “Wait, this could actually help me?” or “I didn’t expect it to be like this,” that transformation is magical. They go from being reluctant, barely saying a word, to realizing I’m here to support the relationship. I start every session the same way: “How can I help? What would be different if you left here feeling that this was worth your time, money, and effort?” I aim to get a positive, measurable, and specific outcome, the couple’s goal. Granted, that goal may change over time, so I ask the same question in every session because the reason for coming to therapy can evolve.

I strive to give each person what they came for. It’s especially rewarding when the person who didn’t want to come or thought, for example, that because I’m a woman, they would be ganged up on realizes that it’s not like that at all. I’m very aware of that concern, as are most couples counsellors. When they realize that they get to turn, speak, be understood and validated, and see tangible progress, that’s when the real change happens.

Another thing that helps is my research-oriented approach. I read the research and integrated findings into the therapy, making it practical and strategic. I also don’t follow a strict hourly session model. Instead, I do what I call ‘intensives.’ When a couple comes in, we use the time we need. I tell them to block off at least three hours, and if we don’t need it, we won’t use it. If we reach a good stopping point, we’ll stop. You’d be surprised how many couples appreciate this approach, especially when half of them ask, “How much will this cost, and how long will it take?” Resolving things quicker is appealing, particularly to the reluctant participant.

So, in summary, I find fulfillment in two things: helping couples achieve what they came to achieve—whether that’s to be happier together or, in some cases, to split amicably—and seeing the transformation in the person who was initially resistant, who feared they would be vulnerable or ganged up on, realizing that therapy isn’t what they expected. Those are the two most fulfilling aspects for me.

And also, third, to me, relationships are a puzzle. It’s a mystery. It’s no coincidence that I love watching and reading mysteries because I always want to figure things out. Here’s what they want—what’s preventing them from getting it?

And how can I bring them into congruence with what they want? So, it’s a big puzzle for me, and I love trying to help them. Once, they gave me permission by saying, “Here’s why we came.” If they say, “We came here because we want to be happier together.” In one way or another, I tell them, “I’m on the side of the relationship until you fire me.” So, whatever I do, I’m working with your contract. I like working that way because it gets them to buy in. When they say, “We want to be happy together,” they start behaviours in my office.

And I say, “Now, how does this fit your goal of being happier together?” So I use their contract, willingness, and presenting issue as leverage, but I do it overtly. I don’t know if I went off-topic, but that’s what I love about it. It’s a big puzzle, and I help people be happier and appreciate each other. Also, the reluctant person sees counselling as a friendly process.

Jacobsen: You’ve done this for longer than I’ve been alive.

Love: Yes.

Jacobsen: So, that’s a large reservoir of experience, and the most important part of that experience and knowledge is its application—knowing what to look for. It’s a much more efficient process. It is probably a global process, too, where you can see the big picture more immediately. So, when you’re looking at the emotional state of that partnership and the attachment styles of the people coming in, what do you notice over time have been things that are more amenable to therapeutic intervention, with their consent and those that are a little more intractable in some ways?

Love: Some people have emotionally left and come to either prove a point, save face, or say, “Do your best to try to revive this dead body, but I’ve already left.” 

Jacobsen: So, the opposite of all that is indifference.

Love: Yes. And I get asked to figure out, “Well, what makes relationships work?” So, I did a lot of research and read all the literature I could find, and I enjoyed that part. I did a thorough job of it. If you look at Maslow’s hierarchy, there is no difference in relationships. Safety and security are foundational—it’s the basis.

Jacobsen: So, any form of abuse, for either partner or both, immediately puts them, or at least one of them, at the lowest rung.

Love: Yes, but you would think that would mean, “This is over,” but it doesn’t. Because even though the abuse and harm are present, it doesn’t always mean the relationship ends. When they’re hurt, some people try harder, hang on, and are more afraid of leaving than staying. Also, your chances of dying once you leave go up—that’s a valid statistic—exponentially. But yes, safety is crucial. You developed a coping strategy if you didn’t grow up with safety. You could look at my childhood and say, “Well, that wasn’t safe.”

You had the police called. There was abuse, violence, alcoholism, and food insecurity. All those things were present. Well, as a child, I developed a coping strategy. Part of it was, “Oh, it’s not that bad.” Denial wasn’t just a river—it was real. So, you carry that into adulthood. This is probably a tangent we don’t need to go off on, but let me put it in a soundbite: the coping mechanism that saved your life psychically as a child can become highly inconvenient in adulthood, but it still lives in you. So, you could look at me and say, “Why are you with an abusive person?”

But my coping strategy is so strong that I would say, “Well, you don’t know them like I do. They’re not always like that. Look at my good life, and I don’t want to break up my family.” And all those things are true. So yes, safety is a big issue. Going back to your original question, what makes counselling work or not work?

Are there people with whom it just doesn’t work? If somebody’s already emotionally left the relationship or is specifically infatuated with someone else, it’s like pushing a chain. But that becomes evident quickly because it doesn’t take long to catch on if you’ve been in this field a long time. Now, does that mean I won’t work with them?

No, not at all. A colleague of mine, Bill Doherty—you might know Bill—he wrote a whole book on discernment therapy. It’s all about how to work with a couple where one person is having an affair or is ambivalent while the other is committed. There’s a whole book about that. So, it doesn’t mean I wouldn’t work with that person, but it becomes evident soon enough. And that’s important information for the partner who thinks they’re married or committed, only to realize that the other person isn’t cooperating with the counselling. And this counselling isn’t cheap, by the way.

So, that’s a long answer to your question. But if they’ve already emotionally checked out, that’s the short answer. 

Jacobsen: Let’s say we have a couple who need a tune-up. Best-case scenario—how do you work with those softballs when they come into your office?

Love: They usually won’t come to me because it would cost too much. But if they have a lot of money, they might. So, I work with everybody the same way. I start by asking, “How can I help?” You be that person. I’m going to say, “Scott…”

You’re two people. How can I help? If you left here and said, “Wow, that was worth it,” what would be different for y’all?

Jacobsen: I’ll promise this: I was given the name Chad by Dr. Elinor Greenberg to get the point across about Gestalt therapy for narcissism. So, I’ll be Chad and also Charice. So, yes.

Love: So, Chad?

Jacobsen (as Chad): I’m a little miffed because my wife used to bake cookies every time I came home. Everything else in our relationship is wonderful and loving. Still, there are no more cookies, and I think I’ve slighted her. In turn, I feel slighted. There are no more cookies at the end of the day, and I love my peanut butter chocolate chip cookies.

Jacobsen (as Charice): He stopped kissing me before he left for work in the morning so I could send a message by not baking cookies to show him how I feel.

Love: Yes. Is it that simple, Chad? If y’all left here and said, “Wow, that worked. It was worth the time, money, and effort,” what would be different in the next 24, 36, or 48 hours?

Jacobsen (as Chad): I could consider my wife’s concern that I’m not expressing loving sentiments in her love language.

Love: What would success look like for you personally, Chad?

Jacobsen (as Chad): Cookies.

Love: Is it that simple? What do cookies say to you? What do they mean to you?

Jacobsen (as Chad): I feel like I’m being cared for.

Love: So, here’s what I would do now. I would look at Charice and say, “Now, did you know that cookies were that important to him? Did you know that?”

Jacobsen (as Charice): I had no idea.

Love: Then I would get Chad to look at her. First of all, nobody would ever come to me with these specific issues.

Jacobsen: No, of course not, but this is a best-case scenario.

Love: But the concept is there. I would try to understand what the cookies mean to you, Chad, and get Charice to realize what that means to you. I’ll have you talking to each other about that immediately. I’d have her repeat to you what she’s understood to prove that she gets where you’re coming from. Though to be honest, this would probably be a different issue—it’s probably going to be about sex.

It could be spending money. It could be keeping the house clean. It could be paying attention to your family. But the cookies represent the presenting problem, so to speak. If people say, “I want to be happier, and this is a tune-up,” I try to get to the underlying meaning. They’re saying they want to feel more in love, more loved, and more connected.

People tend to connect around their vulnerability, so I suggest getting beneath the cookies to see what they mean to you. Then, I’d get her to understand how that simple act—whether a package of Nestlé’s or something homemade—makes such a difference. I bake cookies for everyone, and I put extra nuts in them. Everyone thinks I’m an amazing cookie maker, but it only takes about 20 minutes.

So, how long does it take to make those cookies? But the cookies symbolize how I work to get people to a place of vulnerability and understanding. We also touched on security earlier, and relational thinking is another aspect of what makes relationships work.

Do you think as a single person, or as someone married or committed? Relational thinking is different from single-mindedness. You don’t make unilateral decisions that affect your partner. When you decide, consider the impact on your partner or the relationship. That’s relational thinking, and it’s a predictor of happiness and longevity. A couple seeking a tune-up could benefit from being more relational in their thinking. For example, how long does it take to make cookies, and what else am I doing with my time? Why wouldn’t I do that if making these cookies touches his heart and symbolizes so many other things?

So, it’s about getting beneath the surface to the meaning of what each act represents. And does that align with your goal, which is to tune up the relationship? Does that help?

Jacobsen: Yes, it does. So, you’re looking at the surface-level action and the meaning. The meaning and, as you described, the motivations behind it—both good and bad.

Love: Yes. So, what would that look like? Because it’s almost like that infinity symbol—what do you think, Chad? Are we talking cookies every day? And you’ll probably say no, once a week, because who wants cookies every day? You’d get tired of them. But what would once a week mean to you, Chad?

God, I’d feel loved. I’d feel generous. I’d feel more sexual. I’d feel more connected.”

Love: And then Charice starts to realize, “Wow, all of that is connected to this.” So, it’s not a secret how I work. I want couples to take every single skill I know home with them. I’d teach them how to transform criticism—like, “You never make me cookies”—into a request.

For example, “I’d love it if you made cookies. Here’s what it does for me. This is how it touches my heart, and this is how it moves the ball forward for us to boost our relationship.” That aligns with why they came to therapy. It’s a simple process. 

Jacobsen: What key changes can individuals make in their relationships to be more flexible, spontaneous, or authentic?

Love: It all depends on the contract. It all depends on the criticism. When someone criticizes, I ask, “What would you prefer instead? And what would that look like?” Then, I ask for examples. “What’s one example of that? What’s a second example? What’s a third?” When you get to three examples, the partner has a choice: they can do one of those things or offer an alternative.

If you want to make a change, adding positives is easier than eliminating negatives—period. The end. People come into therapy, and in the beginning, you often hear a lot of complaints. And if no one ever complains, and the person can’t even get a word in at home, I’ll give them space to express themselves in this safe context. But if they start going back and forth with the same arguments, I’ll ask, “Have y’all had this conversation before?”

If they say, “Oh, yes, we’ve had it,” I’ll tell them there’s no point in paying me to have the same conversation again. I’ll ask, “What do you want instead? What would that look like?”

And they might say, “I want her, him, or them to understand.” And I’ll say, “Great! I can help you do that.” Then, I get them to talk, and I have the partner reflect it back, reflect it back, and reflect it back until they can say, “Let me see if I’m following you. Let me see if I’ve got that. Let me see if I’m understanding you.” I tell them upfront that understanding is not the same as agreeing.

Most of us think that if you and I are in a relationship, I don’t have the right to ask you to always agree with me. I’m not saying that doesn’t exist in some relationships, but generally speaking, I have the right to expect you to be interested and try to understand me. Do you see the difference?

Jacobsen: Yes, that makes sense.

Love: A lot of it is about seeing the world from another point of view.

Jacobsen: Yes.

Love: A lot of people want to be understood. We like people who understand us, but we love people who see the best in us. Oftentimes, to see the best in you, I have to understand you well, take the time and curiosity to get to know you, and acknowledge how we might be different. Because the human brain is so subjective—we think about ourselves all the time and view things through our own experience. So, it takes a lot of curiosity, compassion, and generosity to step into someone else’s world and say, “Wow, that’s a different brain. I hadn’t thought of it that way.”

My buddy, Steven Stosny—if you haven’t interviewed him yet, you should. He’s one of my dearest friends. We wrote a book together. He wrote the male part, and I wrote the female part. Honestly, it was like talking to an alien half the time. I would ask, “Steven, do men really think that?” But I learned so much—he’s brilliant and amazing. I love him.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much, Dr. Love, for your time today. 

Love: Thanks, Scott. We appreciate you. Bye-bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Professor Ritch C. Williams: Mostly Straight Adults

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/03

Professor Ritch C. Savin-Williams, an emeritus professor of developmental and clinical psychology at Cornell University, specializes in sexual and gender development among adolescents and young adults. He holds a Ph.D. from the University of Chicago and has written ten books, including Mostly Straight: Sexual Fluidity Among Men and Bi: Bisexual, Pansexual, Fluid, and Nonbinary Youth.

His research focuses on the sexual continuum, resiliency, and mental health of sexual-minority youth, challenging traditional identity development models. Also a licensed clinical psychologist, Savin-Williams has consulted for major media outlets and served as an expert witness on LGBTQ+ issues. Savin-Williams discusses his research on sexual minorities, noting a discrepancy between public health literature’s negative portrayal and the fulfilled lives many LGBTQ+ individuals lead.

Savin-Williams notes that his transition into clinical psychology gave him deeper insights into the lived experiences and challenges in contrast to the overemphasis on pathology. He highlights the fluidity of sexual identity, especially among younger generations, and previews his upcoming book on the mental health of non-heterosexual youth.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Ritch C. Savin-Williams. We will discuss your expertise, focusing more on orientation and identity than technology. I plan to do this as part of a larger series of interviews on various aspects of sexology. You transitioned into clinical psychology training in your forties, correct? What sparked your interest in making that switch and pursuing retraining?

Professor Ritch Savin-Williams: Most of my work has been in basic science research on sexual minorities. As I read the literature — initially limited but eventually more comprehensive — I noticed that what I was experiencing with real people in real time, whether they were gay, lesbian, bisexual, pansexual, or otherwise, often differed significantly from what I was reading, particularly in public health and clinical psychology journals. Initial research tended to emphasize problems like suicidality and homelessness. Still, many people I worked with lived happy, fulfilled lives and felt a sense of strength and community.

I realized certain individuals were in trouble, but I wanted to get closer to their lived experiences rather than just sending out surveys or questionnaires where people remained anonymous. For me, that has been more fulfilling. I had always wondered what it would be like to be a clinical psychologist. I had chosen the research path instead of the clinical one, and I still believe that was the right decision. However, I wanted to add a clinical component to my research and talk to real people face-to-face. I decided to combine my research background with the clinical skills I had developed during my clinical training. I began seeing clients and conducting in-depth interviews in my research universe. This was incredibly rewarding, and I hope for the clients as well. It provided me with insights into people’s real lives, far removed from the generalizations in the public health and clinical literatures.

Jacobsen: What were some of your early findings when dealing with individuals one-on-one and observing them living fulfilled lives that didn’t match the health literature? How did this challenge your views on public health research at the time? 

Savin-Williams: In the mid-1980s, I attended a conference in Minneapolis. I wasn’t presenting because I hadn’t published anything but went as an observer. There were about a dozen presenters, and every single one of them talked about how difficult life was for sexual minority youth. I found myself comparing their presentations to my own experiences as a faculty advisor for the gay student group at Cornell. The students I worked with were some of the most creative, artistic, and vibrant people I’d ever met. I liked them a great deal. However, I couldn’t reconcile the bleak picture painted by the public health professionals with the lives of these students. I couldn’t deny the validity of what the social workers, clinicians, and public health experts were presenting — they had an audience — but I felt that the audience was biased toward seeing sexual minorities as fundamentally troubled.

I supported helping LGBTQ+ people in need, but I felt the public health narrative was going too far in portraying this as the universal experience of all gay people. Instead of saying, “This is what happens to some gay people,” they were expanding it to, “This is what it means to be gay.”

As a result, they pushed for federal funding to investigate and provide services. While I supported this intention, I disagreed with the framing that seemed to pathologize the entire community. But when I tried to counter it by providing a larger context, I was pretty much shut down.

Indeed, maybe it was a decade later, when I tried to present this perspective, I remember being booed by other researchers who were mostly public health professionals. I understood, and I did say, “Not all gay people are healthy.” It would not be very smart to claim that, and it would go against everything I had read and experienced. However, their desire not to see gay people as potentially healthy or as major contributors to society was strong.

I didn’t feel the need to name gay adults in history who had made spectacular contributions to the world, though I felt like doing it. It seemed unseemly if you will. Besides, my focus was on youth. They might have said, “Yes, adults are different,” but that was not my focus.

Jacobsen: So, what decade was that period when you were shut down? A decade later, when were you booed? Let’s have a timeline in mind. I’m aware of the social commentary from the American Civil Rights era — the pain of being a gay man coming out in the 1940s and 1950s.

Savin-Williams: This was probably in the mid-1990s. Let me back up a bit. I attended a conference sponsored by the American Psychological Association, and they asked me to write an article summarizing the state of gay youth in America. Small task, right? I summarized every study I could find on gay youth. There weren’t many, but certainly several dozen. All of them showed horrific outcomes for being a gay youth in America. I summarized that literature, but I added a paragraph — which no one has seemed to read, I’m convinced — that essentially said, “We need to remember that these studies are not based on a representative sample of gay youth. Rather, by definition, they focus on youth in trouble. That’s why we can study them.”

That study I wrote was published in a major psychological journal and became my highest-cited article for 20 or 30 years. I don’t want to deny the whole thing, but it’s out there; it’s public. What frustrated me was that no one wanted to read that paragraph, the one that would cause them to question everything I was summarizing. So that’s part of what was going on. That context was out there when I presented at a conference and was booed. Then, the person who was supposed to respond to my presentation spent his entire time attacking me, accusing me of denying that gay youth needed help and trying to end all grants for assisting them. I decided not to fight. I’m not much of a fighter. I spoke with that individual 2 or 3 years later, and he admitted, “To be honest, I’ve never encountered a suicidal gay adolescent, but it seemed appropriate to discuss it.” I thanked him for his honesty.

However, that reinforced for me the fact that there were many motivations behind this research. Some were driven by a genuine desire to help. Still, others were about grabbing the money — because our government, thank goodness, was providing funding to help gay youth in trouble, those with HIV, and those who were homeless or suicidal. However, there was no funding to support healthy gay youth.

If you need money to sustain yourself and your research, you’re not going to say, “Let’s talk about how creative and well-adjusted gay youth are.” That perspective is seen as trite and banal, even though it’s not culturally framed that way.

Jacobsen: So, the medicine example is that prevention is the best cure, correct? So, support for mental health-inducing activities, such as social acceptance and praising achievement, is a much better preventative than emergency intervention, right? The equivalent, by analogy, would be that when these kids are homeless, addicted to substances, or HIV positive, it’s like someone arriving at the ER with a severe affliction.

Savin-Williams: Right. It’s important to have the ER — absolutely. It’s not too late, but it is late in the day for that kind of help.

Jacobsen: That’s a good point because it’s not framed that way often.

Savin-Williams: Right. The net effect could have been better science. This is not just the clinical side because I know that, as clinicians, people want to discuss their struggles. Still, they also want to talk about their strengths — the good components of themselves. I encourage that. Let’s look critically at someone’s life, not just focus on what’s going wrong. I understand that as a clinician, but what bothered me was the science — because I’m a scientist.

I’m at a university, where supposedly we do solid research, but most writers in this area weren’t. They were at universities more focused on seeking funding and support. I’m not saying Cornell didn’t want me to get research grants — of course, they did — but I couldn’t. I made attempts. But who do you go to for funding? The department of goodwill and good things? I don’t know. That’s when I decided to conduct my research. That’s what I do. That’s what I get paid for. It’s who I am at heart.

I’m also a clinician. I care about people, but I also care about an accurate portrayal of people. I’ve talked to youth who say things like, “I don’t want to be gay because look at what happens to you if you’re gay.” I know it’s hard to believe that kids think or say that, but they do. They don’t read the research, but they see the articles or media portraying a horrific picture of what it means to be gay. Do you think they want to come out as gay under those circumstances? 

Jacobsen: This brings me to another point. You had qualifications in religious studies at the graduate level before transitioning into psychology. So, in this context, during the eighties, nineties, and 2000s, you were facing pushback for your research or observations about the reality of LGBT youth or adults living fulfilled lives.

The cultural context you were navigating was largely religious, with enough of a milieu for individuals to preach in the way Billy Graham preached or the World War II healing revival movement preached, along with Charismatics, Baptists, and others. Yet, those numbers are rapidly declining — the Baptist movement particularly and mainline Protestant denominations.

We now see a re-entrenchment into a fantasy of traditional masculinity in some of these hardline evangelical and Catholic movements.

So that seems like a reaction to the fact that such a significant decline has happened. In Canada, if you check the line of best fit from Statistics Canada to this year, Canada, for the first time, will likely be less than half Christian. I want to be careful that I’m understood. I’m not saying all Christians, nor any particular denomination or sect.

I’m speaking about trends as a whole, and then there are specific denominational trends within those trends. It’s like bell curves within bell curves, in a sense — right? Meta-Gaussian distributions or something like that. This line of thought makes me think about that cultural ocean in which you grew and developed as an academic, a researcher, and an honest observer. With your qualification in religious studies, did American religious life and culture at the time play a role in some of these views being expressed in the public health literature?

Savin-Williams: Well, certainly, the religious right would use this information to support their point of view for things like conversion therapy — saying, “If life is so bad, come to our side, and we’ll help you.” I don’t know how much they use that argument, but it’s important to note that this still exists today. You can say this was happening in the ’80s and ’90s. Still, I’ve reviewed much of the literature — not all of it, of course, but most of it. As of 2024, I have not found a single article that examines the contributions, benefits, or mental health of gay, lesbian, bisexual, transgender, or fluid individuals. None. I can show you over a hundred articles that indicate pathology but none that discuss health.

By the way, many of these researchers are gay themselves. It’s not just straight, religious people conducting this research. Some are, yes, but many are our friends and supporters, and I don’t doubt their good intentions. I think they are wrongheaded. The approach should emphasize the positives of being gay, not just the negatives. But that escapes most people. If you want to get published in my field, you go with the flow — you don’t go against it. If I tried to publish an article on what I’ve just said, I guarantee it would be rejected because it wouldn’t be believed.

One article went through that process, and I eventually decided it was ridiculous. I wasn’t going to waste my time butting my head against a system that refused even to let me enter the pages of their journals to present my perspective. So, this is the subject of my next book.

Jacobsen: Let’s pitch that next book! What is the working title? What is the main research question? And what have you found so far?

Savin-Williams: Well, you’ve caught me early in this process. I had thought my last book on straight men would be my final one — a glorious topic to explore and write about. After that, I said, “I’m done.” But then I kept feeling this nagging thought — like, I can’t publish articles, but maybe I can publish a book. So, it’s going to be something like The Mental Health of Not-Straight Youth, or maybe Gay, Lesbian, Bisexual, Whatever Youth. That’s where I’m leaning. I will review the past literature — its good and bad aspects — what it accomplished and didn’t, and maybe explore the effects.

Jacobsen: Why was this research done, and what were the consequences?

Savin-Williams: There will be a lot of speculation on my part, which is why I write books rather than articles these days. I know the reviewers will be the people I’m not being kind to. How’s that for a gentle rejection?

Jacobsen: What is this concept — mindful of the time, we’ve got six minutes left — of “mostly straight,” especially among many millennial young adults who are coming into full recognition of their identities?

Savin-Williams: We always thought that fluidity and flexibility were more of a “woman’s thing” because women tend to be more changeable in how they view their sexual identity and their recognition of orientation — not their sexual orientation itself but how they identify and understand that orientation. They don’t need to be rigid or categorical — they can move along a spectrum.

That literature is growing and is fairly well accepted now, especially among women. Most people agree with it. My argument, and why I’ve researched “mostly straight” men, is that we’re beginning to see this with Generation Z guys as well. They’re saying, “That’s how I am, too.”

Of course, I wanted to incorporate biological data, like genital arousal tests and pupil dilation. Indeed, many men who identified as straight had some level of attraction or response to male images. And several men have said, “If the right guy comes along, you just never know.”

Some of this was romantic — they could fall in love with a guy, and some have. Some of it was sexual. So, this is something I felt needed more attention — not just among women, but also men.

Jacobsen: What percentage are we talking about?

Savin-Williams: Well, we know it’s about 10% right now for women. And once again, I’m focusing on young adults. There’s no evidence that this will change, but we’ll see. It’s usually around 3%, 4%, or 5% for men.

That’s wrong. If we knew the real numbers, 15 to 20% of “straight” people are mostly straight. And they are delightful individuals. If I had to pick my friends from those I’ve interviewed, I’d say, “Give me the mostly straight ones.” They’re thoughtful, dynamic, and flexible.

Also, something I found surprising was that they were less homophobic than gay men. They are mostly straight individuals. If you want a proper perspective, you should ask the mostly straight.

Jacobsen: So what do they think about same-sex attractions?

Savin-Williams: “Yes, not a bad idea.” “Yes, I support them.”

Jacobsen: “Thoughtful, dynamic, and flexible” — those qualities sound like they’re in the

ballpark of the definition of mental health.

Savin-Williams: Yes, it does. It’s striking.

Jacobsen: There may be something wrong with the way we think about masculinity and femininity as strict categories. We need to think more in terms of fractionation and parsing.

Savin-Williams: You’re spot on because we get so caught up in rigid categories. The only categories that seem clear-cut are whether you’re born male or female. But sexual orientation exists along a spectrum, and so do gender identity and gender expression. It’s not just masculine or feminine, and I don’t think it’s just gay or straight. It seems so obvious that I can’t believe we’re still using such strict categories in our research. “Pick your category,” I say. Throw that study away — it’s irrelevant to most young people today. I’d even extend that to the boomers and certainly the millennials. That’s just not how they view themselves anymore. But if you force them and don’t offer any other option, they’ll choose the one closest to who they think they are. But we got that wrong.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts on today’s conversation?

Savin-Williams: Well, first of all, I appreciate this opportunity to preach. I have training in religious education, ministry, and so forth, so I’m aware that sometimes I get carried away with giving “the good word.”

Jacobsen: Stop your homilies, Ritch! It was wonderful to listen to you at your lectern, Ritch, thank you so much for your time today. I’ll be in touch.

Savin-Williams: Thanks, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Marcel Katz: The Art Plug

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/02

Marcel Katz (@theartplug) is a Miami-based creative director and founder of THE ART PLUG, a platform connecting contemporary art, innovation, and cultural events. With expertise in art, design, and music composition, he crafts viral brand campaigns, blending creativity and technology to deliver immersive experiences and elevate brand presence. Katz emphasizes the influence of travel and mentorship in his work, focusing on immersive experiences, innovative eyewear, and expanding into new fields. His dedication to fostering creativity and personal growth, both for himself and others, remains central to his mission.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What has inspired and evolved the vision for The Art Plug?

Marcel Katz: My inspiration has always been driven by passion. I began my creative journey simply because I loved helping creators. Over the years, through my travels, I’ve gained much of the inspiration that fuels my work today. The Art Plug has grown significantly since its beginnings as an art dealership in 2018. It has now evolved into a creative tech house, offering various services, from brand and art direction to creative solutions for individuals and businesses. We’ve expanded our expertise into diverse fields, including medical software, where we managed the branding and art direction, logistics and developer hiring. This blend of artistic creativity and technology perfectly exemplifies how innovation can transform industries.

While still providing residential and commercial curation of fine art, I’ve also explored my creativity, leading to the launch of MaisonMarcel. I.T.—my line of micro-collectible spectacles made in Modena, Italy. This project reflects my evolving artistic journey and commitment to creating unique, high-quality products.

On a personal level, I’ve grown into a mentor, coach, and brand builder, helping businesses and individuals scale both personally and professionally. My focus is to help creatives and brands unlock their full potential by refining their vision, guiding them through the branding process, and scaling their operations. Whether shaping a brand’s identity or developing business strategies, my approach aims to align personal growth with business goals, using creativity as a transformative tool.

Inspiration for The Art Plug has always come from the people around me. Our global reach exposes us to diverse perspectives, which continually fuel our growth and direction. As I mentioned on the podcast Empire is the Way with Steve Santacruz, we move where we are pulled, not pushed. This philosophy has allowed us to adapt, evolve, and scale while staying true to our core values.  

I can add here because it’s flowing—I like to flow—that I have a mentorship program where I help a select few artists or creatives for free every week. They can talk to, text, or contact me, and I help them with their creative journey. For example, an artist reached out to me.

Mind you, this is not a person paying me for coaching or anything like that. This is somebody who can’t afford it now, and that’s okay. The world should not be run by money. It should be run by human nature to help each other, not just to destroy.

So, this artist asked me, “Hey, I’m doing a deal with this company, and they want to create some products to sell in their yoga studios—like a bag, a yoga mat, things like that.” She’sShe said, “How do I approach this? What are the steps I should take to deal out?”

She texted me right before today’s interview, and I was like, “Hey, how are you?” I’ll call her Jane Doe. “Hi, Jane, how are you?” And she’s like, “I’m doing great. I’m just curious about this. What should be the next steps?” I told her, “Hey, here’s what you should do first. Here’s what you should do second. Here’s what you should do third.” She’s like, “Thank you so much for responding.” She’s happy with the response and ready to proceed to the next step. She will explain how the potential collaboration unfolds with the yoga studio.

I love those situations. And yes, my travels inspired me over the years. That fuels most of my work today—I was fortunate to travel the world.

For more information about The Art Plug and what we do, visit ARTPLUG.COM.

I’ve been to over 40 countries, and I draw much inspiration from various places—whether it’s from the currency, how things are documented, or the cultural representation of the people in the cities I’ve visited. Whether it’s Copenhagen, Modena in Italy, or my hometown of Miami, which has influenced me the most, I find inspiration everywhere. I love feeling like I can naturally relate to people from all over the globe. If someone contacts me from Asia or any other region, I can relate to them. I can relate to someone in Spain or from the U.K. just as quickly.

I have a natural ability to connect with people, which has fueled my brand. The Art Plug is not just an American brand. While we’re based in the U.S., we’ve activated projects worldwide. Since founding as an art dealership in 2018, The Art Plug has grown significantly. I started by buying and selling art.

I had an uncle named Gary, who runs an amazing website called PremiumPopArt.com. I’m happy to mention him because we sometimes collaborate on certain deals. He has access to high-quality, blue-chip investment art and introduced me to this market. He helped me secure my first Basquiat, which I later sold to Wilson Chandler, a basketball player with the Denver Nuggets. Getting involved with blue-chip art was a new and exciting phase for me, and it’s interesting to watch how the market value of these pieces grows as they become more popular.

Sometimes, a collector will reach out years later, wanting to sell a piece they purchased, and it might be worth more than when they bought it. But that’s only sometimes the case. Sometimes, it’s worth less. However, when you’re good at recognizing trends and understanding your evolution and the market, you can make informed decisions about what is worth investing in and displaying in your home.

The Art Plug, which started as a dealership focused on transactional relationships with collectors, has since evolved into a creative tech house. Today, we are a technology-driven brand that helps individuals and businesses connect the dots. We’ve expanded into various fields, including medical software. I even partnered with an E.R. specialist to develop a medical application, and our vision continues to deepen.

I enjoy working with Dr. Gurpal, an E.R. specialist in Canada. We have an amazing relationship, and I thoroughly enjoy our conversations and the work we do together. It doesn’t feel like work because I’m learning so much. My communication skills are constantly improving, and my ability to think like someone trained for years to perform emergency operations is growing. Every conversation teaches me something new, and I’m constantly evolving.

You’re trying to surround yourself with inspiring people without realizing it. You don’t realize these people are inspiring you until you’re talking about it, like in an interview like this, and then it hits you that those around you matter more than you thought. Even though I’ve always been aware of this, it has become even more important now. I’m more drawn to writers, journalists, and those who give back to the world—not just creatives.

Katz: We offer various services, from branding and art direction to creative solutions. This applies to both individuals and businesses.

Right now, my pride and joy aren’t just in the Art Plug but also in this medical software that will alleviate doctors’ bandwidth and improve communication in critical situations. So that’s exciting. We also provide art direction, logistics, communication assistance, and work with developers. We can help find the right team to bring an idea to life.

We’re known as a company with endless ideas. If we love a project, expect 50 concepts and a way to make those concepts happen. While we still offer residential and commercial curation of fine art, which is where I started, I still have to leave my roots. It’s just that these things are easier than they used to be.

I used to need to study more to figure things out, but now it comes naturally because I’ve been doing it for so long. What used to take me a day, I can now complete in a few hours. My capacity has increased because I’ve stayed in my field while expanding into new directions within the creative space, allowing me to work more efficiently. My team has also become more efficient in what we do.

Something that reflects the evolution I believe in is eyewear. The future is going to be on your face—in wearables. What you wear will have a technological component. I’ve been saying this for years. Now you can see companies like Meta working on eyewear with A.R. and V.R. capabilities, like the Ray-Ban Meta glasses, which is super cool. It’s not just a small brand pushing the boundaries of technological advancements in eyewear; it’s a major brand making this technology accessible to everyone. These glasses are affordable, around $200, compared to premium eyewear costing $1,000.

These Meta glasses also have practical utility. I’m working on incorporating similar strategies and functions into my current designs because I believe that in 5 to 10 years, you may not need a phone in your hand anymore. You’ll be able to see your text messages through your lenses and communicate freely without moving or saying much. Your thoughts will be synced to your devices. It’s a bit scary, but it’s also cool and exciting.

My website for eyewear is maisonmarcel. It. If you like a pair, I’ll hook you up. We could set up a giveaway through the article if you are interested. Just let me know!

I’m just touching on that. I’m happy to give a lucky reader a pair of eyewear. All the eyewear is made in Italy and inspired by my travels.

Enzo Ferrari started Ferrari in Modena, Italy, and I make my eyewear 100% in Italy. Many other brands claim their products are Italian-made or made in Paris. Still, the reality is that the majority of their production happens in Asia. They assemble or do certain finishing touches in Europe to claim it’s made there. But the truth is, many of these brands are made somewhere other than Italy. I’ve often been advised to lower my costs by manufacturing elsewhere, but I refuse.

I love working with a family in a small Italian town, making eyewear since 1950. This is their passion, not something they do just for money, and that inspires me. So, that’s Maison Marcel—part of the evolution of the Art Plug.

On a personal level, I’ve grown into becoming more of a mentor, coach, and brand builder. I help businesses and individuals scale both personally and professionally. I focus on helping creatives and brands expand their operations while shaping what their brands look and feel like. What emotion are they selling? I help them figure that out. The inspiration for the Art Plug has always come from the people around me and my travels.

Our global reach exposes us to diverse perspectives, which I love. It continuously fuels my growth and direction as a brand. I always interact with people with unique perspectives, which feeds our innovation. It’s a cycle—constantly changing, innovating, and re-inspiring ourselves at the Art Plug.

When deciding where or how I will evolve, I say, “I go where I’m pulled, not pushed.” Go where you’re wanted, where people are showing they need you. If you force an interaction, it only sometimes works. But if you find where you naturally fit, everything comes easier.

This philosophy has allowed me to adapt, evolve, and scale while staying true to my core values. I talk about this in the “Empire is the Way” podcast I recently did with the host, Steve Santacruz. It’s on YouTube: https://youtu.be/TCbj7pEqmBM?feature=shared.

www.MaisonMarcel.IT

Jacobsen: How can art influence social change in subtler ways than other disciplines?

Katz: Art influences social change in ways that are often subconscious. Many people need to realize the impact of visual elements on them. For example, street art can reshape a city’s identity, like in Wynwood, Miami, where public murals have transformed the neighbourhood into a global art hub. This cultural shift happens subtly—people are influenced by the colours, shapes, and emotions that art evokes, often unaware.

The power of public art lies in its ability to touch people’s lives without them realizing it. This invisible influence makes art such a compelling tool for social change. Like marketing studies show how colour affects consumer behaviour, street art similarly alters how people view their surroundings and themselves.

Have you ever seen a piece of art that touched you deeply, but you can’t remember exactly what the piece looked like? You may only remember the colour or what it communicated, but its impact stays with you.

Jacobsen: I’m working on an educational series with a classical realist artist. The series will cover art history from the Stone Age through the Greco-Roman period, the Renaissance, and onward. Then, we’ll look at some of the works he created over the past several decades. I don’t always recall how every piece from the masters he shows me in this series looks. Still, I do remember the emotional impact and the shifts in technique over time. The realism and the advancement in methods certainly stand out.

Katz: Exactly. You don’t have to be in the art industry to feel a positive effect from art. If you visit a museum, you don’t need to read every description of every piece. Just being in the presence of art is like going to the gym—it will have a lasting influence on you, and usually a positive one. Miami has great institutions offering affordable art and science experiences, like the Frost Science Museum and the Pérez Art Museum. These are great places to visit for a few bucks, take a walk, bite, and learn something new. It’s also a great place to take a date if you ever want an idea.

But I’m mindful of the time—we only have about 9 minutes left, so I’ll make it quick and finish the rest of the questions.

For more insights, visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: How has being open about mental health challenges helped your creative endeavour and connecting with people?

Katz: Being open about mental health has been crucial for me, not just as an individual but as a creative. Sharing my mental health journey, including a recent public meltdown, allowed me to see who supported me and who didn’t. It also made me more intentional about the people I surround myself with. Therapy has been a huge part of this process, helping me work on communication and understand who is worth investing my energy in.

This openness has also deepened my connections with others. Being vulnerable has created space for genuine interactions and collaboration, both personally and professionally. I’ve seen how mental health struggles can both hinder and fuel creativity, and addressing those challenges has enhanced my ability to connect with others, especially through mentorship.

For more on this and other projects, visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: How do you create immersive environments for people to join?

Katz: Creating immersive environments is about telling a story through the brand’s lens. When we work with a company—like a water brand, for example—we aim to create spaces that elevate the appreciation of their product by engaging multiple senses. Whether through lighting, materials, or even sound, we tailor each element to enhance the audience’s connection to the brand.

When promoting an artist, I focus on bringing their work to life, turning visual art into an immersive experience. This approach creates emotional bonds between the audience and the creator, similar to how Yayoi Kusama’s Infinity Rooms immerse viewers in a boundless, emotional space. We also pride ourselves on adaptability; sometimes, the final product looks different from the initially planned, but the improvisation often leads to even more impactful results.

To explore our immersive work, check out and visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: When promoting an artist, how do you focus on bringing their work to life and creating immersive experiences?

Katz: I focus on turning visual art into an immersive experience, creating emotional bonds between the audience and the creator—similar to how Yayoi Kusama’s infinity rooms immerse you in a boundless emotional space. We also pride ourselves on adaptability. Sometimes, the final product looks different from initially planned, but the improvisation often leads to an even more impactful result.

Jacobsen: How is A.R. influencing marketing?

Katz: A.R. is a game-changer in marketing, making experiences more interactive and personalized. It allows brands to integrate virtual elements into real-world environments, significantly boosting consumer engagement. Take IKEA’s A.R. app, which lets customers visualize home furniture. This kind of functionality makes the decision-making process more intuitive and engaging.

At The Art Plug, we’ve embraced A.R. to extend the reach of art beyond galleries, creating virtual exhibitions that people can experience through their devices. This democratizes art and makes it more accessible, breaking down the barriers of traditional spaces.

We host pop-up digital experiences throughout the year, depending on the partner or opportunity. I’m upgrading my platform, including a digital space and marketplace where collectors and creatives can connect, communicate, and showcase their art directly—no strings attached.

It will be subscription-based, but we’ll also offer a free option, which is super cool because not everyone can afford expensive platforms. Many of these spaces are costly, so artists are sometimes called “starving artists.” I’ve been there myself, eating ramen noodles for months because I had no money. I want artists to feel like they can showcase their work only because they think it’s not good enough or can’t afford it. We will always have a place for those people at the Art Plug. We’re a pedestal for artists to explore new ways of showcasing their creativity, and we promote their art fairly. It’s not just pay-to-play here.

For more AR-driven marketing ideas, visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: How can art be therapeutic?

Katz: Art is one of the most effective forms of therapy, offering an emotional outlet and a way to process difficult experiences. It promotes mindfulness, reduces stress, and fosters personal insight. Professional art therapists use guided sessions to help individuals work through trauma, improve communication, and enhance cognitive flexibility. Studies have shown that engaging in creative activities can boost self-esteem and motor skills and serve as a medium for social connection.

On a personal note, I found art to be a therapeutic escape during the COVID-19 pandemic. My digital art started as a hobby but became much bigger when one of my stickers went viral, amassing 30 million views monthly. This creative process helped me cope with the challenges of the pandemic but also connected me with a global audience, showing how art can heal and unite.

If you’re interested in exploring art’s therapeutic potential, head over to visit ARTPLUG.COM.

Jacobsen: What was your creative process like when you started making digital art?

Katz: During that time, I wondered what was happening in the world, like many others. I created digital art, which I had always experimented with but have not publicly shared. I decided to start putting it out there, and it became a hobby. I pushed it publicly, and unexpectedly, one of my first stickers got 30 million views. I was like, “Wait a minute, this is interesting!” It was just three frames—not even that complicated.

I kept creating more and more. Now, I have over 4.2 billion views on my Giphy channel. So, a hobby can become something you do for the rest of your life. It can help you heal, express yourself, and improve your cognitive abilities. For me, it was a way to work through my traumas.

Jacobsen: Thank you, Marcel!

Katz: Thanks so much.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Seth Meyers: Healthy and Narcissistic Relationships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/02

Seth Meyers, Psy.D. (Psychology Today) is a licensed clinical psychologist, T.V. guest, author, and relationship expert. He appears regularly on television on “Nancy Grace.” He has also appeared on “Dr. Drew,” “20/20,” “Good Morning America,” “The Doctors,” “Fox News,” Showbiz Tonight,” “Bill Cunningham,” “Jane Velez-Mitchell,” “The Early Show,” “Good Day L.A.,” “KTLA,” and others. He has been featured in The New York TimesUSA Today, and The Huffington Post. His official website includes many media credits and television clips. He wrote Dr. Seth’s Love Prescription: Overcome Relationship Repetition Syndrome and Find the Love You Deserve. His newest podcast, on Spotify and iTunes, is INSIGHT with Dr. Seth.

Meyers explores the differences between healthy and narcissistic relationships. Healthy relationships are characterized by mutual support, trust, and reciprocity. In contrast, narcissistic ones often involve power imbalances and a lack of empathy. Narcissists display grandiose thinking and create an emotionally intense but ultimately unhealthy dynamic. Meyers emphasizes the importance of finding a relationship where one’s nervous system feels balanced and peaceful, contrasting this with the overstimulation common in narcissistic relationships.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here for round two with Dr. Seth Meyers. We’re going to discuss his area of expertise, specifically relationships and narcissism, keeping the conversation focused. I want to begin with the basics, as many people who aren’t experts, like myself, may have ideas about them, but we can only partially understand them. So, how do you distinguish between healthy relationships and narcissistic ones?

Dr. Seth Meyers: A subtler question is whether there are any points where narcissistic and healthy relationships overlap. One of the hallmarks of healthy relationships is the presence of agreed-upon expectations for the relationship and each other. In healthy relationships, there should be reciprocity, consideration of each other’s feelings, and the capacity for perspective-taking. In unhealthy relationships, there is often no agreement on expectations, and the root of the problem frequently lies in power imbalances or hierarchies.

In many unhealthy relationships, there is a power imbalance where one partner is expected to dominate. The dominant partner expects the other to submit and know their place in the relationship. This dynamic can function as long as both partners remain in their prescribed roles of dominator and submitter. In other unhealthy relationships, the problem may not stem from power but dependence versus independence. There is anxiety around one partner individuating too much, leading to over-dependence.

In this type of relationship, which Melody Beattie refers to as codependent, the unspoken rule is that one cannot individuate without causing significant anxiety and problems within the relationship. As an aside, I believe Melody Beattie’s Codependent No More is one of the most helpful self-help books ever written. It addresses codependence, enmeshment, and the lack of boundaries that characterize many unhealthy relationships.

Jacobsen: Now, regarding Cluster B personality disorders, such as Narcissistic Personality Disorder (NPD), or individuals who fall along the narcissism spectrum—whether defined by traits or personality styles—how do these personalities fit into the dominator-submitter relationship dynamic?

Meyers: A colloquial way to describe this dynamic is to say that, in a relationship, a narcissistic personality must be recognized as the most important person in the room. This means that the narcissist’s needs take precedence over everyone else’s. It’s not psychopathic in the sense that the narcissist believes others have no needs at all, but rather that others’ needs are ranked a distant second to their own. Understanding this hierarchy and ranking is essential to understanding narcissistic thinking.

With a narcissistic personality in a relationship, the typical expectations of equality and mutual respect are abandoned from the start, as the narcissist would never agree to such terms. Problems develop because, initially, the non-narcissistic partner may set aside their thoughts and feelings to keep the peace and maintain the relationship. However, over time, the lack of fairness and reciprocity erodes their tolerance, eventually leading them to assert themselves and rebel against the unequal dynamic. The expectations within the relationship, or lack thereof, become a source of conflict. Additionally, in many relationships with a narcissist, there is a fundamental lack of sharing and mutual curiosity, which is often absent entirely.

One example would be that it is normal for two people in a relationship at the end of the day to show curiosity about what the other has experienced while they are out in the world. The narcissistic personality typically isn’t interested in what happens in another person’s day, whether it’s a stranger or a spouse. So, there’s this strange dynamic of a relationship of one when there are two people. It’s a circuitous solipsism. Everything feeds back into the mental landscape of the narcissist, which, from what I’ve gathered talking to other experts, is a rather fragmented and sad affair internally.

Jacobsen: If we are looking for a metaphor to describe the topography of a relationship with a narcissist, we can think of the narcissistic personality as a sort of island. What on this island is the least conducive to any healthy relationship? And, of those things present, are any even remotely treatable in a couples therapy setting, for instance?

Meyers: That’s a good question. A relationship with a narcissistic personality is not necessarily impossible. There are certain conditions under which someone could potentially maintain a relationship with a narcissist over time. What would be required is that the narcissist does not perceive the emotional needs and expressions of the other person as demanding or triggering in any way. For example, suppose a narcissist had a particularly complicated relationship with a parent, sibling, or previous romantic partner because they don’t typically engage in self-reflective work to heal. In that case, they will likely continue to carry those emotional wounds.

So, anyone in a relationship with them who reminds them of those past triggering individuals will likely not be tolerated. Narcissistic personalities do have some strengths they’ve cultivated over time, and they do have some capacity for relationships. Narcissists usually have biologically driven social needs for companionship. So, a relationship with a narcissist can work if the other person doesn’t ask for too much or talk too much.

Jacobsen: Essentially, they have to know their place and support the narcissist’s grandiose self-image.

Meyers: One example might be a husband who is married to a narcissistic wife. At parties, he regularly comments, “She must be one of the smartest people I’ve ever known,” or, “There’s no better mother to our children than this woman.” Now, whether these statements are true or not doesn’t matter. What matters for the narcissist is that the person they’ve chosen to keep supports their public image.

You see, the image at home doesn’t matter. What matters is the image in public. 

You mentioned something interesting earlier about their lack of self-insight or reflective capacity. That’s intriguing because it highlights the deep self-absorption and a lack of introspection. So how does that work? How does one have self-absorption without much self-reflection?

Meyers: Right. One way to understand narcissistic thinking is to relate it to the developmental growth spectrum we see in human beings. Picture an infant, a child, and an adult, each at different stages of awareness and cognitive development. For example, we don’t expect a four-year-old to have the capacity for complex thinking or emotional nuance because their brain development has yet to reach that point. The narcissistic personality, metaphorically speaking, functions cognitively more like a young child.

Jacobsen: That’s wild. Every time I hear it from an expert, depending on their background, it still surprises me because it’s difficult to wrap your mind around the idea that someone with the emotional maturity of a young child can be in the body of a fully grown adult—even an older adult.

Meyers: One area of research that could help answer some questions about what happens in the brain of narcissists is cognitive rigidity. A typical narcissist isn’t diagnosed as psychotic, meaning they don’t have delusions or hallucinations. However, they still exhibit grandiose thinking about themselves. So, what do we call someone who isn’t quite at the clinical level of psychosis but displays this exaggerated sense of self-importance? Is it simply grandiose narcissism, or is there a more appropriate diagnosis we haven’t yet identified?

Jacobsen: It sounds like a kind of “psychosis-lite.”

Meyers: Yes, so someone with this level of self-absorption can maintain certain functional relationships. 

Jacobsen: What’s it like for the person in those relationships? How do they feel when living within that narrow band of function with a narcissist? How do they approach you in clinical practice or casual conversation, seeking insight?

Meyers: That’s a great question. The experience of being in a close relationship with a narcissist is mind-bending. It doesn’t matter if the relationship is professional, familial, romantic, or friendship-based—proximity is key. Being near the narcissistic personality is what confuses those in the relationship.

The first stage in a relationship with a narcissist is often confusion. You might find yourself thinking, “Wait, what just happened? Did I do something wrong?” There’s much mental puzzle-solving, as these interactions with a narcissistic personality often feel like a puzzle that you’re trying to piece together.

They don’t understand what they did to upset the narcissistic personality or what they did to make them sad. The cause-and-effect relationships they’ve come to expect and rely on in most other human interactions don’t seem to explain why, in this case, the narcissistic individual is responding this way. This creates confusion. There are different emotional stages one goes through in processing one’s experience with a narcissist, and many of those stages may mirror Kübler-Ross’s stages of grief after being misunderstood for so long, after constantly feeling that they are hurting or upsetting the narcissist without understanding why, the person may feel angry and frustrated.

They may even reach a stage of learned helplessness, where they feel, “No matter what I do, I can’t win,” and they give up. They may feel depressed. Does the individual in a relationship with a narcissist ever reach the grief stage of acceptance? I believe that in relationships with a narcissist, the stage of acceptance often comes when the person says, “I can’t do this anymore. I can’t continue to function in this relationship.”

Jacobsen: In the first session, you used the phrase “self-erasure” to describe the experience of individuals in these relationships. This disorientation and the slow self-erasure over time—does that essentially mean long-term relationships with narcissists are unlikely? But short-term ones are possible, as long as certain things are taken into account, like catering to the narcissist’s ego in public, whether it’s about motherhood, brilliance, or physical appearance.

Meyers: Yes, a relationship with a narcissist can last as long as the other person remains tolerant of the significant imbalances—emotional and power imbalances. The relationship will continue as long as the non-narcissistic partner tolerates those dynamics. Multiple factors influence someone’s tolerance levels. For example, someone with strong self-esteem and independence may be more likely to end the relationship sooner. And by sooner, I mean within a few years. It’s important to remember that narcissists don’t show their flaws at the beginning of the relationship.

I’m not going to use those jargony terms about narcissists “seducing” their partners because I don’t find those helpful for understanding the raw emotions underneath. But in the beginning, the narcissist is on their best behaviour, and it’s not entirely an act. The narcissist does have some desire to connect with another person. A small part of them genuinely hopes they can find love and be accepted for who they are, warts and all.

It’s not all a performance from the very beginning. What starts to happen over time is that as the relationship deepens and the interdependence increases, the narcissist’s anxiety also increases. Narcissists have highly conflictual relationships with interdependence, dependence, and vulnerability. So, returning to the question of how long a person can remain tolerant in such a relationship, it’s often within a few years that the individual begins to recognize that something is deeply wrong with the relationship.

They often cannot pinpoint exactly what the problem is. They may even have researched the term “narcissist” online. Still, because diagnosing narcissism isn’t like taking a blood test, there’s always some degree of doubt. They wonder, “Is that what it is?” There’s no definitive proof; even having a label doesn’t solve the problem. So, someone financially independent, with no children or other dependents, might be able to end the relationship within a few years.

The problem arises when the narcissist gets comfortable, usually after long-term structures are in place. Once they realize they have the other person “hook, line, and sinker,” the situation becomes more difficult to escape—especially if young children or financial dependencies are involved. The financially or parentally vulnerable person is more likely to stay in the relationship for many years—not because they are happy, but because they feel they don’t have a choice.

Meyers: That’s how they feel—they tell themselves they can’t leave without major consequences. Another complicating factor is if the couple has purchased property together. Mutual financial responsibilities like property ownership can keep the relationship going for many years.

Jacobsen: Sounds like hell.

Meyers: Oh, yes, many have lived through it. People get stuck in that situation. They want out but don’t need these complicating factors like children or financial dependencies. 

Jacobsen: How, then, do you—as a therapist, a friend, or even a concerned family member—help someone in one of these hellish situations realize what’s happening? How do you gently guide them toward a way out, practically and emotionally?

Meyers: The starting point is simple: ask yourself two basic questions. First, what is the purpose of a romantic relationship? It should be mutual support, trust, and comfort. If your relationship isn’t meeting that purpose, you must look hard at it. The second question requires more time to answer—it’s not something you figure out in 60 seconds. It is, “Am I truly comfortable being single?” This is a crucial question. I’ve heard it from many people.

Jacobsen: In a more economically egalitarian time, that question can come with an immediate answer for many, can’t it?

Meyers: Yes, exactly. In a healthy relationship, there’s flexibility, adaptability, and authenticity. It’s a bidirectional, negotiated experience. If those elements are missing, it’s a sign that the relationship may not be as healthy as it should be.

Jacobsen: Genuineness, based on mutual comfort and trust, etc. So, what I’m thinking about is how, on the conservative side of things—typically the religious conservative or traditionalist side—they have well-established ideas about gender roles, like homemakers and breadwinners. On the other hand, in more progressive, center-left, or leftist circles, we see newer ideas with terms like “male feminist,” “boss girl,” or “boss babe” language. These narratives don’t entirely reverse traditional ones but provide potential for self-stereotyping in some respects, too. It’s a very interesting phenomenon.

An authentic and negotiated relationship can fall into any of those four categories, depending on how you map them along different spectrums. So, how do you help people realize that, in a negotiated relationship, where the goal is comfort and trust, it is really about individual choice, temperament, and personal circumstances? They don’t need to fit neatly into any of these categories. It doesn’t have to be performative, the way it often is in narcissistic relationships.

Meyers: Here’s what I say to clients: The goal is to understand the difference between a new relationship that makes your central nervous system feel balanced and peaceful versus one that doesn’t. In a healthy relationship, your nervous system feels balanced and peaceful. In a relationship with a narcissist, at the beginning, the central nervous system often feels like absolute bliss.

What many people like about a relationship with a narcissist at first is the feeling of being swept off their feet. It’s Las Vegas lights lighting up their insides. The narcissist says things to them that no one has ever said before. It’s terrifying.

That feeling is like a drug, but that’s a healthy relationship. The goal should be to find someone with whom your central nervous system feels balanced and at peace, not overstimulated. That’s the big difference between healthy and unhealthy relationships. 

Jacobsen: Thank you, Seth, for your time.

Meyers: All right, thanks! See you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Boro Dropulic: Gene Therapy Cost Reduction

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/12/01

Dr. Boro Dropulic is a biotech veteran and executive director of Caring Cross. He spearheads a revolutionary initiative to reduce gene therapy costs by up to 90%, making life-saving treatments significantly more affordable and accessible to millions. In partnership with Brazil’s Fundação Oswaldo Cruz (Fiocruz), Caring Cross has implemented a decentralized manufacturing model that produces gene therapies directly at the point of care, reducing CAR-T therapy costs from $373,000 to as low as $35,000. This approach has already succeeded in India and Spain. Boro is excited to explore its potential to transform global healthcare.

Dropulic talks about reducing gene therapy costs by up to 90%. Dropulic explains how they are developing more affordable CAR T-cell therapies by cutting material and manufacturing costs, establishing decentralized point-of-care models, and collaborating with organizations like Fiocruz in Brazil. They aim to make therapies accessible globally, including in low-income countries, by leveraging local resources and efficient workflows. Dropulic expresses personal fulfillment from helping improve patients’ lives.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Boro Dropulic. We are going to be discussing Charing Cross. As a biotech veteran and Executive Director of Caring Cross, I want to explore some of its new work, particularly the framework initiative to reduce the cost of gene therapy. The claim is that costs could be reduced by up to 90%. At face value, many gene therapy treatments can sound expensive, as they may seem like futuristic technology akin to something out of Star Trek.

When you propose a gene therapy cost reduction of up to 90%, what benchmark are you using for comparison, and how are you achieving such significant cost reductions? What is the scope of this reduction?

Dr. Boro Dropulic: Thanks for the invitation, Scott. It’s a pleasure to be here and to share what we are doing at Caring Cross.

Caring Cross has been a group of scientists and individuals in the field for many decades. What we’ve found is that the prices are extraordinarily and unnecessarily high. For example, the current price for some CAR T-cell therapies is around $350,000 to $475,000. Some stem cell gene therapies can range from $2 to $3 million for a single dose, not including the clinical costs.

Our approach to solving this problem is to reduce the cost of manufacturing, materials, and distribution, making these therapies more accessible to patients who need them. The first major factor is the cost of materials. Producing CAR T cells involves extracting cells, genetically modifying them with a vector, and then reintroducing the modified cells into the patient. These cells can then kill tumours or infected cells or replenish a defective gene. One of the biggest expenses in this process is the vector itself. Reducing the cost of producing these vectors can greatly lower the overall cost.

To tackle this, we created a public benefit corporation called Vector BioMed  that produces these vectors at about half the cost. In some cases, the costs are even lower, making producing these therapies more affordable.

In addition, we’ve simplified and shortened the workflows to produce the cell products. Typically, it takes 14 days or longer to produce CAR T cells. Still, we’ve managed to reduce that to 7 days and aim for a process that can be completed in a single day. We can significantly reduce costs by shortening the production time and simplifying the process while keeping it robust.

Another way we are addressing the high costs is by moving away from large, centralized manufacturing facilities. Currently, autologous cells are sent from hospitals to manufacturing facilities over long distances, produced there, and then returned. This process requires substantial logistical, manufacturing, and insurance costs. Maintaining such largefacilities, with fluctuating demand, is expensive.

Our alternative is a point-of-care manufacturing model, where smaller, flexible, and scalable facilities can be deployed near hospitals where patients receive care. This approach significantly reduces labour and logistical costs.

In summary, these are some of the strategies we’re using to achieve lower price points. Additionally, producing the therapies locally and within a shorter timeframe offers significant benefits to patients.

Scheduling is easier for clinicians, patients receive their products much quicker than expected, and patient outcomes significantly improve. We published a study several years ago where we definitively showed, in a publication, that the vein-to-vein times, as we call them, can be significantly reduced, resulting in better patient outcomes. Also, this decentralized or point-of-care manufacturing model is already operational in Spain. There is a group led by a hospital in Barcelona that now has ten clinical centers producing their own CAR T-cell products across Spain, doing so at a cost affordable for the Spanish National Health Insurance System—around €89,000 per dose.

Jacobsen: It’s not one-tenth of the cost, but it’s certainly much more affordable than $400,000. Now, you’ve focused on treatments for leukemia, lymphoma, HIV, and sickle cell disease. Why focus on those particular conditions in terms of therapy development?

Dropulic: These are all serious diseases with unmet needs. For leukemia and lymphoma, current CAR T-cell products are initially effective at generating a good response, but about half of the patients treated with CAR T therapy experience relapse. Part of that relapse is due to the loss of the target antigen, the CD19 antigen, that the CAR T cells are designed to attack. To address this, we’ve developed a triple CAR. If the patient’s cells lose that one antigen, the other two CARs remain available to target and kill the cells.

So, we are addressing a fundamental issue of relapse due to antigen loss in leukemia and lymphoma patients.

There are currently approved cures for sickle cell disease, but they cost $2.2 million and $3.1 million just for a single dose of cells. We can significantly reduce the cost of producing these therapies by at least tenfold, which is another critical area.

Thirdly, infectious diseases like HIV are important. HIV is currently controlled by drug therapy, but patients must remain on these drugs indefinitely to suppress the virus’s replication. Those of us in the field believe that if a cure is possible, it would be the best way to solve this issue, especially since long-term drug therapy has toxicities that accumulate over time. Many patients, particularly in Africa, are not on consistent therapy over long periods. In Western countries, patients are typically on therapy, but this is not the case in many other regions.

The entire field is working toward a single cure. Our CAR T-cell therapy is currently in clinical trials.

Jacobsen: How did collaborating with Fiocruz in Brazil help make gene therapies more accessible?

Dropulic: Yes. In that case, we actively collaborate with Fiocruz, sponsored by the Brazilian Ministry of Health. Caring Cross will transfer all the knowledge and technology needed to make the CAR T cells themselves and produce the vectors and some of the materials used to manufacture those CAR T cells. It’s a complete technology transfer, so Fiocruz can produce CAR T products locally more cost-effectively than purchasing them from the United States or other countries.

They achieve these efficiencies because they use local skilled labour, which is more cost-effective than labour in the United States. They can also produce the materials themselves. By producing both the products and materials locally, they gain significant efficiency.

Jacobsen: What about Vector BioMed to provide affordable GMP lentiviral vectors? How does that factor into reducing costs?

Dropulic: Yes, as I mentioned earlier, the cost of materials is a major issue, and vector cost is the single biggest material expense in producing these cells. When developing these inexpensive and robust workflows to produce CAR T cells, we couldn’t rely on third-party vector producers to provide them at a reasonable cost. Our teams have been making vectors for decades. Our team members were the first to put lentiviral vectors into humans and establish their safety.

Some of our team members also produced the vector that eventually became Kymriah. Novartis commercialized this first FDA-approved CAR T-cell product. With that extensive experience in vector production, we decided to create a public benefit corporation, Vector BioMed, to produce vectors at half the price for researchers or institutions that need them.

Any investigator needing a specific vector expressing a particular sequence can come to us for design and manufacturing. As a public benefit corporation, we also provide additional discounts for Caring Cross products to make them more affordable for our partners.

Jacobsen: I often mention this, especially after interviewing Gordon Guyatt, an epidemiologist in Canada and co-founder of Evidence-Based Medicine. He points out that values and preferences play a role in selecting healthcare systems in different societies. It’s not necessarily about technology, science, or medicine but about the values a country uses as a foundation for its healthcare system.

For example, Canada has a value and preference system focused on equity, which leads to a nationalized healthcare system with some degree of pharmacare. The United States, on the other hand, prioritizes autonomy, leading to a more privatized healthcare system.

Ignoring questions of efficiency and outcomes, if we look objectively at a society’s values and preferences, the following healthcare system reflects those values. So, do decentralized models for healthcare innovation help in nationalized or privatized contexts, especially considering the large differences in what’s valued in these systems?

Dropulic: It doesn’t make a huge difference, although a nationalized system may initially be easier to implement and deploy. It can help create a harmonious decentralized network, with payments by insurance and reimbursement being more standardized.

I see how this system works as well here in the United States, particularly in point-of-care manufacturing, especially when regional payers make things locally and efficiently. Government-related organizations like Medicare and Medicaid may find a localized hospital-based manufacturing network attractive. This approach can affordably produce these products consistently with high quality and at a sustainable price over the long term.

Jacobsen: How are the successes in India and Spain helpful for further implementation?

Dropulic: They are good examples showing that the system works, particularly in Spain, where it’s a fully reimbursable product. India is different, as it needs a true national health system. Implementation is based more on individual hospitals deploying and implementing these therapies locally. However, we’re seeing interest from companies and larger organizations in deploying point-of-care models and broadly deploying these technologies across India.

Jacobsen: Generally speaking, most societies have grown wealthier over the past 100 years, and the quality of life has also improved, whether in terms of education, health outcomes, or lifespan. While there may be individual or localized issues, the overall trend shows improvement in access to education and healthcare. With that general trend of improvement and the reduction in the cost of gene therapy, how long do you think it will be before even the poorest countries have access to these gene therapies at a reasonable cost relative to their national economic status, such as through purchase price parity (PPP)?

Dropulic: Some countries can move quickly. For example, Brazil has a sophisticated regulatory and biomanufacturing industry. In countries like Brazil, we can deploy technology quickly, supported by regulatory authorities connected to the FDA. Brazil’s regulatory framework allows them to learn and implement the knowledge within a proper regulatory structure.

Other countries, particularly in Africa, still need to develop a developed regulatory framework. Until that framework matures, it will take time for these technologies to be deployed. However, in terms of decreasing the price point for these therapies, we are moving quickly.

Each country or region will respond at its own pace, depending on its integration with the global gene therapy community, including regulatory bodies. Building the local infrastructure, training relevant clinical staff, and ensuring quality across a network of hospital sites will be critical to making these therapies affordable and sustainable.

Jacobsen: I have a personal question. How do you gain personal fulfillment as Executive Director, having worked in biotechnology for over 30 years?

Dropulic: I’m privileged to work in a space where we can help people suffering from serious diseases. We can provide potential cures by modifying cells to make them more functional, allowing them to kill tumour cells, eliminate infected cells, or replace defective genes. There’s nothing more rewarding than being in an area where the technology being developed and deployed in hospitals worldwide is actively helping people—giving them another chance at life. Many diseases we tackle are very serious, so being part of that journey is incredibly fulfilling.

Many of my team members feel the same way—we feel privileged to work in this space and have the opportunity to make a real impact. Whether it’s developing the workflows, producing the vectors, creating the actual medicines, or working with clinical investigators to bring these therapies through clinical trials to approval, the entire process is deeply meaningful because it ultimately benefits patients who need them.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for the opportunity and your time today.

Dropulic: Thank you. I appreciate your time and interest.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Take care.

Dropulic: Bye-bye.

Caring Cross is a 501(c)(3) nonprofit dedicated to accelerating the development of advanced medicines and ensuring access to cures for all patients, everywhere.

To enable its mission, Caring Cross is developing technologies and therapeutic candidates to improve the accessibility, affordability, and applicability of advanced medicines like CAR-T therapy and stem cell gene therapy. Caring Cross founded Vector BioMed, a for- profit vector contract development and manufacturing organization (CDMO), specializing in rapid lentiviral vector manufacturing solutions, to provide the industry a source of affordable high-quality GMP Lentiviral vectors. For more information on Caring Cross visit https://caringcross.org. For more information on Vector BioMed visit https://vectorbiomed.com.

Partnering with Caring Cross

At Caring Cross, we are committed to advancing healthcare through innovative partnerships. With decades of experience in developing revolutionary therapeutic products, our team focuses on hematologic malignancies such as acute lymphoblastic leukemia, non-Hodgkin lymphoma, and Multiple Myeloma, HIV and Sickle Cell Disease.

By partnering with like-minded inventors, hospitals, companies, and institutions, we can create additional innovation and value.

Our mission is to develop and implement improved technologies and therapeutic candidates that lower costs and improve access to novel CAR-T cell and other advanced therapies worldwide.

For more information on partnering with Caring Cross, visit https://caringcross.org/partnerships/

Last updated May  3,  2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

John Higgins: OS Studios, Esports, and Video Gaming

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/30

John Higgins is the CEO of OS Studios, a global creative marketing agency specializing in video gaming and esports. Under his leadership, OS Studios has won numerous awards, including Webby, Clio, and the EventEx Awards. OS Studios earned an Emmy nomination, and John Higgins won the Digiday Leader of the Year Award while producing two of London’s top 10 hottest tickets, according to TimeOut. Featured in Business Insider, Digiday, Ad Age, and The Drum, he’s a sought-after expert in marketing, sports, gaming, and entertainment. Starting in theatre with Mayhem Productions, John transitioned to TV, exploring commercials and global storytelling as gaming surged. His expertise in gaming culture has propelled OS Studios to the forefront, with a focus on inclusivity, mentorship, and sustainable tourism. He has recently been featured in The Los Angeles Tribune, Giant Bomb, and The Chicago Journal.

Higgins discusses the rapid growth of video games and esports, emphasizing the scale of gaming culture, which is expected to reach $260 billion by 2025. He highlights the impact of COVID-19 on their remote-first business model and how it accelerated their growth. Higgins explains the challenges of esports, including the “esports winter” and the shift from traditional sports models. He also shares insights into innovative marketing strategies, such as Heinz and Doritos campaigns, reshaping in-game advertising.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with John Higgins, who works in marketing, advertising, gaming, and esports. He’s the CEO of OS Studios, a global creative marketing agency specializing in video games and esports.

These areas have been rapidly growing in industry and sport—esports, in particular, can be considered a mental sport. Some elements focus more on reaction time, which is cognitive, but in a different way than traditional cognition. A lot is happening in this space.

Video games have surpassed Hollywood in revenue generation, and these platforms are massive for multiple industries. You won the Digiday Leader of the Year award and were recognized for professional excellence. What does the award represent, and what does it mean to you?

John Higgins: To give you an idea of the scale of gaming culture, by 2025, the global gaming industry is expected to be valued at around $260 billion, more than the combined value of the movie, music, and print industries. It’s enormous. It’s helpful to think of gaming culture now as social media 3.0 in many ways.

Regarding the Digiday award, it came as a surprise. I was nominated by my business partner, Ian Pons Jewell, with whom I co-founded O.S. Studios, and it came after the challenges of COVID-19. Strangely, COVID accelerated our growth. When the pandemic hit, and everyone had to stay home, O.S. Studios was already set up as a remote-first company.

Because of esports and gaming, we had already developed remote workflows—not just from a technical perspective but also from a cultural one. We figured out how to create social interactions and build large-scale cultural movements globally using marketing. We were ahead of the curve because if you want to work with gaming creators—whether they are on Twitch, YouTube, or other platforms—many of these creators make thousands to hundreds of thousands per month from their bedrooms. Suppose you ask them to leave their home to visit your studio, like traditional marketing or advertising shoots. In that case, you’d need to compensate them for the income they would lose by not being at home.

That compensation is substantial. So, from 2016 onwards, we developed strategies to create remote advertising ecosystems. When COVID hit, we had to speed up our plans. We went from feeling pretty nervous—wondering if we would have to shut down—to finding ways to make it work. At that time, we also had a venue business in Chinatown, Manhattan, which is doing well. Still, there were uncertainties about it back then.

I returned to my roots in broadcast and theatre, where I used to create shows that consistently sold out. We leaned into the entertainment aspect and adapted it to platforms like Twitch. We learned how to extend the engagement of our live shows through social media, creating challenges and keeping the energy alive.

As we continued producing these shows, brands started to get involved, opening up new revenue streams. In essence, we became early adopters of influencer-driven entertainment. I received the Digiday award for our success in navigating this transformation during a challenging period.

So, we could have done better for gamers. We started having companies reach out. I remember the NFL, the NBA, and all the big sports leagues getting in touch with us, asking, “Hey, can we host the after-party for the NFL Draft?” And it had to be remote, so we had to figure out how to make it entertaining because everyone was stuck at home.

We interestingly capitalized on that, which led to the Digiday Leader of the Year award. We were up against PepsiCo’s executive directors or CMOs—big names in the industry. So, it was a privilege to be recognized as the leader that year, which was great.

Jacobsen: Now that you’re in the U.K., how does the video game market look, given the vast international platforming of video games and their various sports-style formats?

Higgins: Yes, I’m actually in the U.K. right now. This past weekend, we launched an event with our client, Cloud Imperium Games, who are developing Star Citizen. We just hosted their CitizenCon for 4,000 people in Manchester.

It’s funny; people often ask me, “What about the U.K.?” because the North American market dominates sports, gaming, and entertainment. When they ask, I always say that the U.K. is about nine months behind.

What I mean is that while games often get released on the same day globally now—unlike in the past—the entertainment consumption around those games, particularly in the U.S., takes time to trend elsewhere. Put aside esports for a moment; what becomes the cultural zeitgeist or trending topic usually starts in America and gets copied in other regions as the creative norm.

For example, when Warzone dropped globally during early COVID-19, it didn’t immediately overtake FIFA as the top game. It took 6 to 9 months to become the dominant title, but once it did, it stayed as the go-to first-person shooter-meets-mass-multiplayer-online game.

I’m sorry, but I’m blanking on the term for it now. What’s it called when the last man standing wins?

Jacobsen: Do you mean battle royale?

Higgins: Yes, exactly! Warzone and Fortnite are all battle royale games. That’s what distinguishes them. The U.K., in terms of gaming trends, is often 6 to 9 months behind. Esports, however, is a different story. I mentioned that $250-$260 billion global valuation earlier, including esports.

Esports right now is valued at about $2 to $4 billion. So, it makes you realize how small esports are in the gaming culture. I don’t know if you’ve heard about the “esports winter,” but it’s well into effect now.

So, there’s this thing called the esports winter—it’s a joke, referencing Game of Thrones, like “Winter is coming.” Over the last year or year and a half, esports has shifted from being this sexy, exciting, futuristic way of sports consumption—everyone thought it would be the ultimate fan acquisition vehicle for rights holders. But over the last few years, the returns haven’t returned.

In the last year, many brands have pulled out of esports. 10% of the revenue that was there a year ago is still around this year. With that, we’ve seen things like the Overwatch League shutting down. Major companies and organizations like that, as well as big names in esports, have closed down. In the U.K., for instance, Guild Esports, which David Beckham was famously associated with (he was paid to be the frontman), was once valued at £20 million but sold for just £100,000 last week with £2 million of debt.

Jacobsen: Wow.

Higgins: Faze Clan also IPO’d, and while they started as an esports organization, they expanded their brand significantly. At one point, their valuation went wild—around $200 million. But recently, they merged with Gamesquare in a deal worth around $7 or $8 million, tens of millions less than their peak valuation. And now, they’re off the Nasdaq; you can’t buy their stock anymore.

This all stems from the esports market. Many brands and investors pulled out because they realized, as I always said from the early days at O.S., that we work in esports. Still, we never believed esports alone was the future. Gaming culture is the future, and esports is just a small part of it. The problem was that many people from traditional sports organizations like the NFL tried to recreate the sports model in esports—tying teams like the New York Subliners or Call of Duty teams to geographical locations.

But esports was built on something other than that. It wasn’t tied to a city or a country but to social movements, and that’s where they fundamentally got it wrong. So, going back to my original point, we’re going through an esports winter, and the U.K. is feeling the impact hard. U.S. esports organizations quickly adapted and diversified to become entertainment entities—they now control intellectual property (I.P.) in many ways. Some of them still compete, but their primary focus is on entertainment.

Jacobsen: In contrast, U.K. organizations stayed purely competitive for too long, so many no longer exist. That’s the key distinction between traditional sports and esports. Classical sports are typically tied to city or state identities—teams like the L.A. Rams are bound to their location. It’s part of the brand identity.

Higgins: Exactly. Unless you’re actively following it, it’s easy to miss how quickly esports has shifted. You’re not the first person today to mention that you didn’t know about this esports winter. But it’s happening. It could also be a market correction, like a bubble. Only a few people got involved with it early on. So, it’s a market correction as much as anything. 

Jacobsen: Did COVID-19 temporarily boost revenue and usage before the decline? Could that be tracked?

Higgins: Yes, a lot of it was people betting big. Especially within esports, 75% of all revenue came from sponsorship. I remember when Twitch paid $1 million for the rights to the NBA 2K League in its first year. Why wouldn’t they?

The NBA was going all-in on gaming. NBA 2K has around 30 million monthly active users. Everyone loves watching YouTube videos, and the NBA would make a live Twitch show every week for items like a pretty safe bet—you could argue there’d be traction and cultural relevance there. So, if you’re Intel, and you’ve already spent a load of money with the NBA, why not throw in an extra $5 million in sponsorship to get involved with the NBA 2K League? Twitch did something similar—they wanted to take the gamble and put in $1 million.

That’s an example of the early days. Everyone agreed, “We won’t measure success in six weeks or even six months. It’s a social movement. We need to see results over a year or two.” A lot of these things happened in 2018 and 2019. That’s when NBA 2K took off, and Overwatch took off around 2018. It takes time.

Then, COVID gave people more time to think, “Do you know what? We think the bet might still be working—let’s go another year.” So, many brands stayed and kept renewing deals, pouring money into teams, leagues, or in-game advertising, before they started realizing, “You know what? The return we’re seeing is so small. We could do better putting our money elsewhere in gaming culture, outside of the competitive esports scene.”

That created the bubble—everyone getting in on the hype too quickly. Look at A.I.—that’s cooled off now. NFTs? Same thing—there was all this hype. People didn’t know exactly what it was, but it was something. All of these trends compounded during that time.

Jacobsen: Do you see the future of marketing, advertising, and outreach for video games, and if this “winter” ends, esports as well, shifting as a consequence?

Higgins: Yes, good question. Where I see gaming going—and it’s sort of there already—is that gaming is becoming social media, just like Facebook was 15 or 20 years ago and YouTube was 10 years ago. Gaming is now the next phase.

I bring this up because we used to ask, “What did we do with social media five or ten years ago? How do we advertise through it?” We figured out how to turn social media from a good product into a more mixed product because of how much advertising is embedded in it. That’s where gaming is heading—for better or worse. It’s becoming a social channel.

Many people, especially 18 to 21-year-olds, are drawn to Fortnite. There’s something called Fortnite and Chill that’s especially popular. You create these maps, go into them with your friends, and strangers can join. You go in there, talk, chill, and explore the map. But good etiquette is that you don’t hurt each other. It’s similar to you and I going into an AOL chat room in the early days.

But now, it’s this giant metaverse where you can explore worlds together. It’s almost like a 3D Nexopia.

Jacobsen: It’s like Nexopia with guns you’re not allowed to use on each other, right?

Higgins: Correct. 

Jacobsen: You go in there, and they’re preregistered—the guns.

Preregistered and background-checked, mental health checks, the whole thing. We’re on the same page there. So, with that context, you start thinking about marketing and advertising. We’ve already learned, especially with this generation of cord-cutters—Gen Z and young millennials—that you must provide a value proposition. It would help if you gave them a reason to care about your message, brand, or whatever you’re trying to convey.

That’s where things are headed. I’ll give you a few examples. I can share good directions for things. For instance, Heinz recently, through Heinz and Toronto-based Ketchum, came up with an incredible idea for Call of Duty Warzone.

Did you see this? Still, they created the Heinz map in Warzone, identifying all the places you can hide and go AFK (away from the keyboard), drop the controller, and eat your chicken nuggets, McDonald’s, whatever. You can dip your fries in Heinz ketchup, take a break, and remain hidden in the game. They discovered random bushes where you couldn’t be seen, even with a sniper scope. These were the “safe places” for you to eat.

This campaign went viral in North America. It was genius; honestly, I wish I’d developed it myself. They didn’t even try to hide that it was advertising—they were transparent. They said, “Look, this is our product, and this is how you can use it to have a better experience while you game.”

Jacobsen: That’s clever.

Higgins: Right? And then there’s Doritos with DoorDash—they created a partnership where you could eat Doritos with one hand and still game with the other. They even suggested which game modes were best for this one-handed gaming experience.

So, you could eat your Doritos. They’re a bit like Cheetos—they get everywhere. And that’s Cheetos’ marketing campaign—”It goes everywhere.” They made it easier for you to eat with your fingers while gaming. I’m not saying that’s everything, but those things will become the norm. Right now, they’re the exception that proves the rule that paid media is still the 800-pound gorilla in the room when it comes to tackling gaming.

That’s going to become irrelevant. If you ask a gamer who’s maybe 25 to 30 years old, “Hey, tell me five brands in Borderlands that you liked on billboards,” they wouldn’t even know what you’re talking about. They’d be like, “What billboards?” There are billboards in there, but they’re fake brands. How will a real-life brand compete if the game itself can’t create a compelling enough lore for the story or campaign?

In-game advertising is going to have to get a lot smarter. To give a shout-out, a friend of mine works at Overwolf. They’re a fantastic organization. They’re one of the bigger digital marketing companies you have yet to hear of, but OS loves working with them. They’ve created various game middleware apps, especially on P.C. These apps track your data, stats, and friends. They create different ways to compare and compete, like daily bounty boards for League of Legends players.

They’ve also integrated ads in a fun way. Pringles recently did a campaign with them, the Pringle Challenge of the Day, where you could win Pringles while competing with your friends. The ads show up during gameplay and add to the experience. Hence, the transaction is obvious and makes things more fun.

That’s where things are headed. You’ll find that what’s happening in gaming is similar to what Netflix and other digital platforms are trying to figure out. They’re all looking for ways to make advertising additive while capturing much marketing revenue.

Jacobsen: Fair enough. Any final thoughts before we part ways, John?

Higgins: No, Scott, thanks for your time. I’m sorry I had to cut this short. I guess the last thing I’ll say is this: when we talk about gaming, or even in the bigger conversation of sports, gaming, and entertainment, I always say what we’re truly doing at O.S.—and why we’re so successful with brands coming to us—is fan acquisition. We’re audience experts, and we’re in the fan acquisition game. Video gaming is a juggernaut within the culture. That’s why we’re here. But in five years, who knows where we’ll be?

Jacobsen: Excellent, John. I appreciate your time. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Professor James Cordova: Healthy Intimate Relationships

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/29

Dr. James Cordova is a Professor of Psychology at Clark University and Director of the Relationship Checkup Program. He created the Relationship Checkup, a preventative relationship healthcare model designed to maintain relationship health through annual assessments. Dr. Cordova has led multiple large-scale studies, including a $1.3 million Department of Defense-funded trial to adapt his checkup for military settings, demonstrating significant improvements in relationship health and reduced depression among airmen and spouses. As president of Arammu, Inc., he continues to expand his work across military and civilian populations, offering relationship interventions and training counselors nationwide. His books and workshops promote relational mindfulness and emotional well-being.

Cordova emphasizes that authenticity, vulnerability, and emotional closeness are key to a thriving relationship, but challenges like the “hedgehog’s dilemma”—balancing closeness and avoiding hurt—remain inevitable. Cordova advocates for relationship checkups, like preventive health care, to strengthen bonds before issues become entrenched. He also highlights evolving societal norms and generational shifts in how relationships are approached and maintained.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here to have a little fun with James Cordova. We’re going to be talking about relationships. I believe you are the first in this series on relationships as a professional with the expertise I need because I’m not an expert—especially when expertise isn’t always respected. I know how to ask questions of those who are. To start, how do you define a proper and healthy relationship? 

Professor James Cordova: That’s a great question. Most of the work I do focuses on intimate relationships. Of course, there are many types of relationships, but the ones I specialize in are romantic and intimate.

When I think about an intimate relationship, it’s one where both people are invested in creating a space where they feel safe being their authentic selves with each other. That’s key to my definition of a healthy relationship: both partners feel accepted, flaws and all. I get to be my authentic self, and you accept that and are enthusiastic about it. And vice versa—you get to be your authentic self, and I am not just accepting but excited about that.

Of course, this comes with challenges. Once you move into the realm of authenticity, you also move into the realm of vulnerability. Some parts of ourselves haven’t always been accepted by others, bringing us to the hedgehog’s dilemma.

The hedgehog’s dilemma, as proposed by Schopenhauer, describes the difficulty of human intimacy. It’s the idea that, like hedgehogs, people want to be close to each other for warmth and connection, but because of their “prickles”—their flaws or emotional barriers—being too close can cause pain.

We want to feel safe in any intimate relationship because we are exposing our vulnerabilities. At the same time, we will inevitably hurt each other, often unintentionally. Using the metaphor, we’re going to “poke” each other.

The dilemma is: How do we stay at a comfortable “quill’s distance,” close enough to feel connected but not so close that we hurt each other too much? It’s a vulnerable space, and we will hurt each other, mostly without meaning to. Sometimes, we pull away to protect ourselves, leaving us lonely. So, we continually try to navigate this space; some people are better at it than others.

Schopenhauer’s point is that, no matter what, we will irritate and hurt each other’s feelings, even if we don’t mean to. We’re going to get in each other’s way. We will find things we do that we wish the other would do differently. For example, I suggest you load the dishwasher differently or avoid using that tone when upset.

Our instinctual response to feeling stung is usually some form of fight or flight. We either sting back or withdraw. Neither of these reactions is conducive to feeling safe being our authentic selves.

So, we need to learn how to be close, vulnerable, and sometimes hurt while repairing that hurt and not reacting destructively. It’s a lot to ask of the average person. So, we find that truly intimate relationships come with unavoidable challenges. Most couples resolve the porcupine’s dilemma with a détente—let’s be close, but not too close, not so close that it becomes challenging. As a result, there’s an unfortunate amount of loneliness in many long-term intimate relationships. The porcupine dilemma paints that picture.

Jacobsen: Yet, the time, generation, and society can change the frame. If we lived 300 or 400 years ago, when the average lifespan was half what it is today, the concept of relationships and partnerships would be simpler. When both partners passed, people were probably married for 10, 20, or 30 years.

Nowadays, in advanced industrial economies, we benefit from plumbing, electricity, air conditioning, heating, and various nutritious foods—although not everyone benefits equally from these advancements. These factors, along with medical advancements, expand lifespans. We can stitch people up and improve dental care and overall health spans. These seemingly unrelated factors indirectly benefit relationships by lengthening our lifespans, which changes how we view long-term relationships. So, partnerships and healthy relationships were originally a technology—a social contract built for a certainconception of human life when reaching 50 meant being an elder. 

If we consider today’s average life expectancy of 75 to 85 years—slightly longer for women and slightly shorter for men—it drastically changes the concept of a healthy marriage compared to what it meant in what now seems like a prehistoric era.

Cordova: It’s a good point because it changes the lived experience of “till death do us part.” It might have meant we had 5 or 10 years together before one of us passed away, which was very different from what it means today.

Some of the original functions of marriage or long-term intimate relationships were practical—about survival, procreation, and property. These were pragmatic needs at a time when life expectancy was relatively short.

But now, people expect much more from their long-term relationships. Lifespan itself is part of the reason why. It’s no longer just about economic security and someone to help raise kids. People want deeper emotional and personal fulfillment from their long-term intimate relationships.

It’s someone I love, feel close to, can talk to, and with whom we have all the elements piled onto that one relationship—vibrant sex life, economic viability, raising children together. That small subset of goals has expanded quite a bit. Now, most people are looking for a quality of connection in their long-term relationships that wasn’t as expected in previous generations. And other factors, while not minor, are secondary.

Jacobsen: In the past, women had little choice in marriage. So, equality movements—egalitarian movements, feminist activism—how do these changes in gender roles and desires for more egalitarianism in the home affect orientations toward healthy relationships? How are professionals like yourself viewing this as you gather more data across generations?

Cordova: Well, one way to think about it is that there’s a lot more choice about staying in a relationship at any given point. We can think about commitment inside a relationship as having two types: dedication commitment and constraint commitment. Dedication is, “I’m committed to you because I love you and want to be with you.” Constraint commitment is, “I’m with you because the alternative seems unbearable.”

In the past, particularly before women had the rights they have now, constraint commitment was much stronger. Women often needed to stay in marriages because of access to resources, finances, and opportunities. Thankfully, those constraints have lifted significantly, and what holds many of us in long-term relationships now is primarily dedication commitment—the desire to stay because of the quality of the relationship itself.

Because of this shift, the quality of our connection has become the most important part of a relationship for most people. The constraint commitment part has diminished, so we no longer have to endure dissatisfying or unhappy relationships because we have more options.

Jacobsen: What about the idea of the “7-year itch”? Is that real?

Cordova: It’s interesting. My familiar research suggests it’s more of a “3 to 4-year itch.” The most common time people are in a marriage before divorcing is shorter than seven years. It looks more like people discover relatively quickly that they’re incompatible.

So, the “7-year itch” suggests that we get antsy around that time because the newness wears off, and people start thinking about moving on. But we’re discovering that the headiness of early love often leads to marriage or a serious commitment. Then, as people settle into a longer-term relationship, they discover basic incompatibilities. Once that happens, when people realize they’re so incompatible that living in the same house becomes intolerable, they often choose to divorce.

It’s about more than getting bored but about needing to get along better. This points to how important fundamental compatibility is, especially for a long-term intimate relationship. 

Jacobsen: This leads to a question about that point and another: divorce rates are around half for first marriages, and so on. So, if the divorce rate is roughly 50%, that number also includes second, third, or even more remarriages and divorces. It’s skewed higher because some individuals are divorcing multiple times. If people are divorcing again and again, and if the “itch” happens around 3 to 4 years, how do you parse that data? How many of those divorces are second or third marriages, and how many are just first divorces?

Cordova: That’s an interesting question. The way I can answer it is this: the 50% divorce rate—depending on how you calculate it—tends to apply primarily to first marriages. About 50% of first marriages end in divorce, and that percentage increases with each subsequent marriage. So, about 60% of second marriages end in divorce, and roughly 70% of third marriages end in divorce.

One way to think about this is that, with each step, we’re seeing a titration. A higher percentage of folks who, for various reasons, struggle with long-term relationships are overrepresented in these statistics. So, those with personality types and skill sets that lend themselves to long-term intimate relationships are overrepresented in the 50% of first marriages that don’t end in divorce. On the other hand, those who are more prone to divorce are overrepresented in second and third marriages.

Part of my work focuses on driving that number down by shifting how we think about relationships—from how happy or satisfied we are to viewing relationships as a health domain. Instead of focusing purely on relationship satisfaction, we should consider relationship health care. Just as we think about what makes for a healthy body or good mental health, we should also consider what makes for healthy relationships.

As a culture, we have huge gaps in health care available for this complicated part of our lives. The only “health care” for relationships is typically tertiary—like couples therapy, which people seek only when motivated by pain or distress. The work I’ve been doing over the past couple of decades involves developing and testing protocols for regular relationship checkups or marriage checkups. This approach would mirror other domains of health care, where people receive regular professional care to maintain long-term health instead of waiting for things to go wrong before seeking help.

In dentistry, people used to wait to go to the dentist until their teeth hurt. As you mentioned, before the mid-1950s, most people expected to lose most of their teeth by the time they were elders. Now, with regular dental care, losing teeth is an anomaly. Our work relationship checkups are intended to bring relationship health care into the 21st century similarly.

Jacobsen: So, we’ve been dancing around many important relationship issues—good stuff. How do you set up a checkup or a checklist for a healthy relationship? I imagine this could come from various angles—academic literature, clinical experience, discussions with colleagues, and maybe even a doctoral thesis. How are you integrating all that into a checkup or checklist?

Cordova: The idea for me originated during my PhD work at the University of Washington with Neil Jacobson and John Gottman. At that time, we all had tertiary approaches to couples therapy—the equivalent of attending the dentist when your teeth already hurt.

We were trying to improve these tertiary couples therapies, saving more “painful teeth.” We were helping couples who had been suffering to suffer less. But what we discovered was that, over two years, about 50% of couples either didn’t improve through therapy or improved only to relapse within the next two years. So, for about half of the couples—those who sought therapy, and few do—it was often too little, too late.

It’s similar to dentistry: if you wait to go to the dentist until your tooth hurts, there’s only so much they can do for you—often, it’s just pulling the tooth. I was working on an internship with a modality called the “drinker’s checkup.” The idea was to catch people when their drinking became concerning and offer them a checkup to assess their behaviour and create motivation for change.

This inspired me to think about relationships: What if we had regular checkups for marriages or relationships? Because, as of now, we don’t have anything like that. We could provide professional checkups and early intervention, like dental checkups. In that case, we might improve relationship health, helping couples keep their relationships strong and healthy over time—just like we now expect to keep our teeth longer and healthier through regular dental care.

I began developing a brief, fun, strength-based intervention that couples could do annually to help maintain their relationship health. This would also allow them to intervene early if they started struggling with something. One thing we’ve learned is that even couples who are brave enough to go to therapy often wait until they’ve been distressed for 4 to 6 years. And we know that being in a distressed relationship for that long negatively affects both mental and physical health.

So, with all of those health systems deteriorating over 4 to 6 years, I wanted to create an intervention that couples could engage with much earlier—something less threatening than therapy, quick and simple, and designed to “catch and release,” addressing issues before they become too entrenched.

Come in for one or two sessions. We’ll do an assessment, provide feedback, and then send you on your way to a healthier, happier, more intimate relationship. Our research shows that this brief preventative intervention yields strong results across the full range of couples—from newlyweds who are happy and want to stay that way to couples struggling with certain issues but not enough to seek therapy independently.

The checkup can be beneficial for couples who aren’t quite ready for therapy but would come in for a checkup. We’ve even seen couples who would likely be good candidates for more intensive therapy benefit from this brief, strengths-based relationship checkup, even though they might be reluctant to try therapy for various reasons. Across all types of couples, we can show the value of this approach.

Jacobsen: Why strengths-based? I can understand why a weakness-based frame wouldn’t be effective. Still, it’s more work to see why a neutral-based perspective would be less effective than a strengths-based one.

Cordova: That’s a great question. We deliberately take a strengths-based approach to counteract our natural cognitive tendencies. As a species, we’re more inclined toward threat detection. Our natural perceptual apparatus is designed to scan the environment for threats, so in relationships, we often notice the things that irritate us or are problematic first.

In our relationship checkup approach, we focus on a gratitude mindset. If we can remind couples of what initially attracted them to each other and help them root into the best aspects of their relationship and who they are together, they’ll approach it from a place of gratitude when we discuss the struggles. They’ll better understand that they want to preserve and improve the relationship.

If we jump straight into “tell me why this relationship isn’t working,” it’s much harder to return to a place of connection. It often leads to a vicious cycle of negativity. That’s one of the reasons tertiary couples therapy can bog down quickly—it starts from a place of strong complaint. It tries to lighten the complaints, but often without that crucial reminder of why the relationship was valuable in the first place.

In contrast, the strengths-based approach helps couples focus on what’s best about their relationship, what they want to preserve, and why they’re willing to work hard to cope better with the challenges. So, yes, it’s like the compliment sandwich approach but deeper.

Jacobsen: Yes, I see. And it makes sense. We have a couple of cultural phenomena happening right now, too. I don’t want to put you in the position of being a social psychology or linguistics expert, but we’ve all seen certain ideas filter down from academic circles into public opinion pieces—published in journals, newspapers, and so on. One of those ideas is the concept of “silver divorces,” where divorce rates reportedly increase among boomers and older generations.

Another phenomenon we see is younger generations marrying less or partnering in nontraditional ways—common-law partnership’s, open relationships, or something else outside the traditional framework. There’s a shift in how Gen X and millennials view partnerships, compared to boomers or the Greatest Generation. I’m using those generational labels loosely as placeholders to help demographers, but we are seeing these trends.

Cordova: Absolutely, those trends are becoming more noticeable.

Jacobsen: So, you’ve got this dual generational effect around partnerships. What do you see in research or clinical practice? What’s happening with the older generations and the younger cohort of adults regarding how they view relationships? How do these trends explain some of these phenomena?

Cordova: Yes, it’s a great question. Both generations are grappling with the same underlying problem. The problem is what we touched on earlier—the porcupine’s dilemma. We want to be intimate, emotional closeness, and our vulnerability to be held safely in a relationship. But the challenge is that we will sting each other—an inevitable part of intimate relationships.

When we get stung, most of us react in ways that corrode the quality of our connection with our partner. As a result, many relationships end up lonelier than they want to be. Couples are close enough to raise a family together but not close enough to feel emotionally connected to each other.

Then, when they reach the empty nest phase, they may tolerate it for a while. Still, the emotional distance between them becomes so isolating that they separate. They can’t figure out how to return to each other because they’ve been growing apart for so many years.

Younger generations—emerging adults—have watched this happen with their parents, aunts, uncles, and older relatives. They want the same things: close, intimate relationships. But they’re looking for more flexible ways of achieving that, trying to avoid the pain and loneliness they’ve seen older generations experience.

However, their solutions must address the fundamental problem: How do we stay close while skillfully and responsively taking care of each other’s vulnerabilities so that we can be hurt without hurting?

The skill set we need to focus on is what we now refer to as emotional intelligence or emotional responsiveness versus reactivity. That’s the crucial point. When people in relationships start pulling away from each other because being too close becomes painful, the checkup can help them turn back toward each other instead of continuing to drift apart.

Everyone is trying to solve the challenge of being within “quill’s distance” in a relationship. The variety of solutions people come up with stems from the fact that we don’t have a healthcare framework for thinking about this, nor do we have the tools to thrive in long-term intimate relationships.

We’re left alone, essentially doing “our dentistry.” We’re trying to fix things with a hammer and chisel, doing our best without proper support.

Jacobsen: And the origin—your guy from Cast Away—when he’s first stranded, he’s got a bad tooth and has to smash it with a rock. Tom Hanks, right?

Cordova: Right, exactly. The older generation’s approach is like yanking the tooth, while the younger generation is trying to figure out, “How do we do this? Maybe I need to eat or drink differently—kombucha, maybe? How do I keep my teeth longer?”

We must realize that we’re not treating this as a healthcare issue. If we did, we wouldn’t have to suffer later in life or search for some magic elixir when we’re young. What if it was as simple as getting regular checkups for your relationship, the same way you get annual physicals or semiannual dental exams? What if it’s that simple?

Jacobsen: As I mentioned earlier, marriage is a social technology. Common-law marriage is both a social and legal technology. It can also be part of a religious framework and is considered a ‘transcendent technology.’ From that perspective, people made up these systems, so people can also create new systems or reinvent old ones.

Could health care and legal framework exist for healthier partnerships where we don’t assume “till death do us part”? Perhaps we could create something like a longer-term contract—lasting for the healthy years of the children if kids are involved—and then opt for renewal. This isn’t a new idea or a new idea to me. Maybe it’s a five-year, six-year, or ten-year contract, after which the couple can decide whether to renew for another five or three years, depending on how they feel. The partnership can adapt to realistic terms if assets, health, sentiments, or life paths change. It could be more practical and appealing, especially given our longer lifespans. It might even appeal to women since they tend to live longer.

Cordova: Yes, we’re coming full circle to your earlier point about longer lifespans. One of the fundamental truths about being human, especially in relationships, is that we are constantly changing. The person you’re in a relationship with now isn’t the same person you started with—even if it’s only been a week, let alone 50 years. And you’re not the same person you were when you entered the relationship, either.

Accounting for that continuous change is a good idea. Five years from now, we’re both going to be different people. That’s one thing when you might only have expected to live five or ten more years together. It’s entirely different when looking at another 50, 60, or 70 years.

So, the question you’re raising is: how do we account for that change? One way, as you’re suggesting, could be through shorter contracts. Another way might be to become more thoughtful, mindful, and deliberate about adapting to each other as we change over time.

That’s where regular checkups can play a role. They can help partners assess how they’ve both changed over the year—what’s new—and then figure out how to adapt to those changes in a healthier way. If we’re doing this regularly, instead of waking up 20 years later and not recognizing the person across the dinner table, there is a higher probability that we’ll change together rather than drift apart.

Jacobsen: Should there be any upper limit on how often someone can get married? If, as you said, there’s a filtering effect where marriage doesn’t work for some people, maybe they’re genuinely trying or being socially coerced into continuing. They keep trying until they get it right.

Cordova: Yes, it’s possible that a more solo lifestyle, not necessarily alone but solo, might suit some people’s psychological structure better. I don’t know if we’d want to impose a limit on how many times someone can marry, but it’s worth considering when people reach a point where they realize, “Maybe it’s me. Maybe I need to work on myself before I have the attitudes or skill sets required for a successful intimate relationship.”

The challenge is our tendency toward attribution error. When someone else does something that makes us mad, we think it’s about them—their personality. But when we do something that upsets someone else, we think it’s circumstantial—”I didn’t mean it,” or “It was external factors.” This can lead people to believe each failed relationship is the other person’s fault. At some point, though, you might need to stop and say, “I might be the issue here. Maybe I have my work to do.”

Jacobsen: What else can we explore? Let me check my notes. Ah! Do you want to plug your books? Would that help?

Cordova: Sure! Yes.

Jacobsen: What’s your short sales pitch for the books? 

  1. The Marriage Checkup: A Scientific Program for Sustaining and Strengthening Marital Health – Published May 16, 2009​; Rowman & Littlefield
  2. The Story of Mu – Published April 26, 2016​; Simon & Schuster
  3. The Mindful Path to Intimacy – Set to be published January 27, 2025​; Guilford Press

Cordova: All those are awesome books, and everyone should buy them! The new book that’s coming out—let me pull up the title—is called The Mindful Path to Intimacy. It’s coming out from Guilford Press in January.

It’s at this intersection between the relationship checkup concept—that there’s this naturally occurring corrosive process in relationships, where we pull away from each other because it’s difficult to be skillfully vulnerable—and mindfulness practices, which help us learn how to be skillfully vulnerable. This upcoming book aims to provide couples with the tools, practices, and insights to navigate that “quill’s distance” space with skill, grace, and compassion. The Mindful Path to Intimacy is about thinking of relationships as a practice rather than “work” or something you’re lucky to have if you are perfectly compatible. It’s about treating relationships as a regular practice, much like a spiritual practice.

A colleague says, “A true spiritual practice plays rough with the ego.”

Jacobsen: Be humble, yes. I understand.

Cordova: Yes, nothing plays rougher with the ego than trying to live in that vulnerable space with another human being. How we learn to be skillfully vulnerable is deeply tied to how we tolerate our vulnerability and respond to each other’s. That is as close to a spiritual practice as you can get. How might you approach your relationship as a practice?

The Mindful Path to Intimacy is designed to help couples do just that. If unskillful vulnerability corrodes connections, learning to be more mindful and skillfully vulnerable can strengthen those connections. Many psychologists today focus on genuineness or authenticity. This is a major point you brought up at the start—defining not only a relationship but a healthy one.

Jacobsen: Right. Regarding authenticity, we’ve had these evolving roles, including gender roles. We have traditional ideas—women as homemakers, men as breadwinners—and more progressive ones, like the “sensitive guy” or the “boss girl.” Even though these roles may seem more progressive, they are still social constructs defined within political and social contexts. I find the more progressive stance healthier, but I acknowledge that it’s based on my biases.

Cordova: Yes. When we talk about authenticity in relationships, for both individuals and the relationship itself, we mean finding who we are outside of the ideologies—political, social, religious—that we’ve been told we’re supposed to live by.

In an intimate relationship, I can learn more about myself. If I discover I can be true to myself, even if it’s a little countercultural, I can explore that more deeply. But if I find that my partner expects me to conform to some cultural ideal, my message is that I can’t be who I truly am. I have to play the role I’ve been told I ought to play. This creates loneliness, which we often try to solve through distractions—social media or other forms of escapism.

Jacobsen: Yes, in a way, we’re outsourcing that part of ourselves instead of looping it back in and integrating those feelings.

Cordova: Exactly, we’re not processing those feelings fully. And that ties into what you were saying about gender roles. In North America, especially among younger generations, there’s this image of a traditional religious family structure—the nuclear family—and even though it’s no longer as dominant, it still influences people. 

Jacobsen: Yet, I see the same dynamic with people in more non-religious, progressive circles. They’re still trying to live up to certain ideals in a different framework. So, in both cases, whether religious or non-religious, traditional or progressive, people are still grappling with predefined roles and the challenge of authenticity within those structures. So, in the traditional conservative example, you’ve got the mom who’s expected to embody the Martha’s Vineyard ideal, and the man is—well, I’ll need to look up an example, maybe someone like the character from Suits or something similar. On the progressive side, you have men labelled as “male feminists.” From a conservative viewpoint, that might be interpreted as someone emotional and sensitive to an extreme, performative degree.

But most people aren’t like that—it takes work to get things done. There are overlapping but distinct bell curves between the sexes and genders regarding how people express emotion and sensitivity. Then, with the “Boss Girl” idea, comedian Michelle Wolf had a sketch about this. It was around the time she became more prominent after the White House Correspondents’ Dinner. In the sketch, she’s a busy businesswoman, always on the phone, always “busy,” and it’s funny because it’s such a caricature.

That, too, is an image—a kind of ideological portrait that can be critiqued or parodied, just like we often do with the traditional nuclear family image. So, the point you’re making about doing countercultural things is subtle. It doesn’t have to be about mainstream culture—it could be countercultural, even within a subculture or a family system, if you’re discovering things about yourself that don’t fit the mould.

For some people, it might be obscure, like a mix of Kabbalah and niche linguistic hermeneutic. For others, it might be challenging homeopaths online. The range of things people explore as they evolve is wide. This touches on the idea of authenticity being highly individual and idiosyncratic.

Now, in the last five minutes, what would be your biggest tips for those who want to find someone compatible for a healthy relationship? And what are your tips for people in relationships to do their “dental checkups”?

Cordova: Great questions. There are two main tips. First, find a provider who can give you regular relationship health checkups. We’ve been working hard on this. We even created a company called Aramu.com.

Interestingly, “Arammu” is one of the oldest words for love we could find. The company aims to train as many mental health care providers as possible to offer regular relationship health checkups. So, the first recommendation is early and often—start healthy and stay healthy. Like they say, an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure.

The second tip is more on the “do it yourself” side. It’s about learning how to be hurt without being hurtful, how to tolerate your emotional reactivity without letting it take control of the moment, and how to be angry without acting destructively. Can I still behave skillfully and relationally if I’m hurt and angry? Can I be angry without acting destructively? That’s a huge challenge for all of us in intimate relationships.

Some people can learn those skills independently with good guidance, and others might need a bit of coaching. But the ability to be angry and still be relationally skillful is crucial—without it, we do much damage that’s hard to recover from.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Cordova: Absolutely. Thank you, Scott. Take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Garrett Garner, M.D. on Topical Estrogen’s Benefits for Skin Health

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/29

Dr. Garrett Garner, M.D. at SimpleFixRx and OB/GYN, has been seen in Yahoo! LifeYour Health Magazine, andHollywood Life. He is a native of Dallas and received his undergraduate degree from Vanderbilt University in 1992 and his medical degree from the University of Texas Southwestern Medical School in Dallas, Texas in 1996. He remained in Dallas to complete his residency training at the University of Texas Health Science Center at Parkland Hospital in Dallas, Texas. Dr. Garner joined Northlake OB/GYN in 2000 and is a partner of the group.Dr. Garner is board-certified in Obstetrics and Gynecology, a member of the Texas Medical Association, and a Fellow of the American College of Obstetrics and Gynecology. Garner explains that topical estrogen increases collagen and hyaluronic acid, improving skin thickness and moisture, especially in postmenopausal women. It can have side effects like melasma and is more effective for vaginal issues than other treatments like retinoids. Future developments in hormone-based skincare may enhance wrinkle reduction and scar prevention.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does topical estrogen work on skin? 

Dr. Garrett Garner, M.D.: Topical estrogen works by increasing collagen production. Collagen helps skin thickness. Estrogen also increases hyaluronic acid which increases skin moisture.

Jacobsen: How has experience with women’s health shaped understanding of topical estrogen’s benefits for skin health? 

Garner: Women’s health providers have long known the benefits of topical estrogen therapy, especially in postmenopausal women. Topical estrogen has been used for decades to treat thinning skin and other vaginal issues that are related to changing estrogen levels after menopause. These benefits have then migrated to other skin areas. 

Jacobsen: How does topical estrogen increase collagen production and the thickness of skin? 

Garner: Estrogen stimulates collagen production, helps decrease collagen breakdown, improves the elasticity of the skin, increases hyaluronic acid and sebum production which helps with moisture, and increase skin cell viability. 

Jacobsen: How is topical estrogen’s effectiveness and safety compared to other treatments like retinoids or hyaluronic acid? 

Garner: Topical estrogen is more effective at treating vaginal issues but I find it can have some side effects like melasma when used on the skin. Retinoids are more effective for wrinkles and hyaluronic acid works well on skin as well. 

Jacobsen: How does menopause contribute to skin aging? 

Garner: Menopause results in lower levels of estrogen which effects skinby making it more prone to wrinkling, thinning and sagging. 

Jacobsen: What side effects or risks come with topical estrogen for skincare? 

Garner: The main side effect can be the darkening of the skin, especially on the face. Some patients report swelling, burning, and vaginal irritation when it is used vaginally.

Jacobsen: How does SimpleFixRx promote accessible skincare and anti-aging solutions? 

Garner: SimplefixRx.com has topical products that help increase salicylic acid and hyaluronic acid in a patient’s skin which helps thicken skin and decrease wrinkle formation. They also have products with beeswax to help lock in the skin’s moisture.

Jacobsen: What have been statistically significant results in topical estrogen for skin improvement? 

Garner: Some studies have shown a decrease in dryness by 20-30% in patients’ skin when compared to no treatment—also, a decrease in skin looseness and wrinkles by about 20% compared to non-treated areas.

Jacobsen: How does Dr. Garner see the future of hormone-based treatments? 

Garner: I feel there will be many new developments in the treatment of skin with hormones. Hopefully, there will be the development of hormone-based creams to help with decreasing scar formation, aid in hair growth in men, and also better products to decrease wrinkle production and improve skin moisture retention.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Yeaseul Park: Orange Biomed’s New Diabetes Device

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/28

*Interview edited for readability.*

Yeaseul Park, CEO of Orange Biomed, is a Forbes 30 Under 30 honoree. She holds an MBA from Duke University and co-founded Orange Biomed, a company focused on innovative diabetes management technology. The company is expanding globally, with their OBM rapid A1c test in clinical trials at Seoul Asan Medical Center.

Park discusses the development of their innovative A1C diabetes management device. Park describes the motivation to create a more accessible and affordable test, highlights the challenges of existing technology, and shares insights on clinical trials, FDA clearance, and the device’s potential global impact.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We’re here today with Yeaseul Park, the co-founder and CEO of Orange Biomed. I want to compare your A1C device to current tests. What inspired you to create a newer device or test in this market?

Yeaseul Park: Our vision is to make A1C testing more accessible and affordable for anyone who wants to test and manage their diabetes or prediabetes. The problem I identified, especially during the COVID-19 pandemic, was the difficulty of getting tested. In the U.S., I found it challenging to visit a doctor and get this test done every three months. Currently, the technology is only available for professional use. You must see a healthcare provider regularly to get your A1C test results and monitor your glycemic control.

However, diabetes is not a one-time issue—it’s a chronic condition that requires lifelong management, which can be burdensome. We wanted to make testing more accessible. According to statistics, 12% of the adult population in the U.S. has diabetes, and 33% has prediabetes. The American Diabetes Association recommends that these individuals regularly test their A1C levels. So that’s our vision. 

Jacobsen: Now, how does your microfluidic technology provide more accurate results?

Park: First, I want to explain the limitations of current technology and how we aim to solve those problems. Existing A1C devices use protein quantification methods, which are complicated and require trained professionals to operate. These methods involve protein reagents that require refrigeration, have a short shelf life, and need significant maintenance, making it difficult for patients or caregivers to test A1C levels independently. These devices are also expensive, especially lab machines for medical centers or hospitals start at 6 digits, and smaller professional-use devices for clinics can cost around $5,000.

Our device is different because we don’t use protein reagents, making it much easier for anyone to use, similar to a COVID-19 test kit. Have you ever used a self-administered COVID test?

Jacobsen: Yes, a couple of times. But I was working on a horse farm then, so I was pretty isolated, and it wasn’t on the front of my experience at the time.

Park: I understand. That’s why we designed our device to be like a self-administered test kit, similar to the glucose monitoring systems that diabetes patients are familiar with. This will be the first time such a device is available for home use by patients or caregivers, although it still needs to be added to the market.

Jacobsen: Hemoglobin variants are a known issue. We’ve found a higher frequency of these variants among Black, Hispanic, and Asian American populations. How does your device make testing more accessible to populations that traditional methods may have underserved?

Park: Your question has two parts. The first part is about the hemoglobin variants. With existing technology, only lab devices can accurately identify hemoglobin variants. This means point-of-care (POC) devices cannot reliably detect these variants, which significantly impacts the accuracy of A1C levels. POC devices are more likely to give inaccurate readings, especially for individuals who are not part of the white population.

The second point is that since we are not using protein reagent technology but are utilizing microfluidic technology, we rely on the physiological features of red blood cells, not proteins. So, hemoglobin variants do not impact the performance of our device. Theoretically, hemoglobin variants can’t affect our device because they don’t involve identifying proteins. This principle allows us to overcome the limitations of current devices, particularly point-of-care ones.

Jacobsen: So, how do patients typically describe their experience when looking at older technologies? With newer technologies, like the microfluidic ones, how would they also describe their experience?

Park: Currently, patients are required to visit labs or their doctors to get this test done, which poses difficulties, especially for older individuals with diabetes or those with complications. It’s often harder for them to go to the doctor alone, and they may need someone to drive them or require at-home options. However, with current devices and technologies, it’s nearly impossible to do this at home.

There are some options, like direct-to-consumer home kits by mail. You get the package by mail or at a convenience store, draw a relatively large blood sample, send it to a lab, and receive results within five days. This is an alternative for those who can’t easily access a hospital, but it still takes more time and requires more blood. I tried one of those kits once, which required 60 times more blood than our device.

Our device only required a single drop of blood, while that kit required around 300 microliters, which felt like I was almost bleeding out. It’s really hard to draw that amount of blood with just a needle. 

Jacobsen: Not to mention, how packed these labs will be with blood! It’s too much blood!

Park: Some states don’t allow human samples like that to be sent through the mail, which limits service in certain areas of the U.S. Demand was high, especially during the COVID-19 pandemic, when getting a doctor’s appointment was difficult. People looked for other options, but they were still very expensive. Depending on the condition, A1C tests should be done regularly, at least twice a year or more frequently based on condition. With our reusable device at home, patients can get cartridges for each test and see their results within minutes.

So that’s how we want to solve this unmet patient problem. 

Jacobsen: Two factors in the United States are the main points of reference. One, they have a different style of healthcare—I’m Canadian, obviously—so it’s different in Canada from the United States. I talked to an epidemiologist, Gordon Guyatt, who is well-cited and co-founded Evidence-Based Medicine.

He argues that Canada values or prefers equity, while the United States emphasizes autonomy. This affects the kind of healthcare systems that people tend to prefer. In Canada, you get more nationalized healthcare; in the United States, it’s more privatized.

So, my first question is: does that impact accessibility for these tests and devices? So, does the difference in healthcare models between Canada and the U.S. impact accessibility for A1C devices like yours? In other words, how do the approaches to healthcare in these countries affect access to your device? This device is more accessible and easier for people because it bypasses the hemoglobin variant issue by not using proteins. So that’s one factor. Another potential barrier could be the healthcare model. Does that impact accessibility for people using this type of device? I don’t know.

Park: Let me also give you an example outside the U.S., where I live. In Korea, getting an A1C test at a doctor’s office is very easy compared to the U.S. But people still need this device because if it’s just a one-time test, you can visit a doctor whenever you want to take a day off to do it. But diabetes testing is not a one-time event—you must do it every few months.

Sometimes, they don’t give you the results right at the point of care. They may send a venous blood sample to the lab, and then you must wait for the results. The doctor might even require patients to return when the results are available to plan the treatment. So, it’s about something other than the healthcare system but people’s schedules. People working or studying often can’t commit to regular checkups and miss appointments because they want to maintain their routines. So, they need an at-home option.

I’ve also observed that in the U.S. When we first focused on suburban or rural areas, where doctor’s offices are far away, we thought the issue was mostly geographic. But even in big cities, where people live near their doctors, many don’t have time to visit during the day. So, even in Canada, where the healthcare system is completely different, people with chronic diseases still want to live normal lives while managing their conditions. 

Jacobsen: The next part of the question is about FDA clearance. Despite the differences in healthcare systems, the FDA is known for being very rigorous with its multi-stage trials or phases for new products to come to market, and this has been the case since the 1970s. You aim to bring the product to market in 2025 through FDA clearance. How is that process going? What hurdles have you encountered in ensuring you’re meeting all the requirements for approving a new product, especially given that you’re using a different type of technology?

Park: We are preparing to submit a 510(k) application next year for FDA clearance of the OBM rapid A1c device, classified as a Class 2 medical device. As the device has unique technological characteristics compared to the predicate device, we are conducting clinical studies to demonstrate that these technological differences do not raise new questions regarding safety and effectiveness. We aim to complete the clinical studies by early next year and submit the application by mid-year. We are eager to obtain FDA clearance as soon as possible, to help more people manage their diabetes effectively.

Jacobsen: How does the ISO 9001 certification ensure the quality of the product?

Park: ISO 9001 is an international standard for a quality management system. However, it’s not specific to medical devices—it’s more general. We are also preparing ISO 13485, which is specifically for medical devices. We are working on that certification in addition to already having ISO 9001.

ISO 9001 is a very holistic system. It requires that the entire management system be based on quality management principles. We’re using FDA-cleared software to ensure all documents are traceable and to record the development history. Even after we get approval, this system will track customer feedback and complaints, if any, and help us resolve issues systematically. This is very important. So, our entire management team is involved in that system.

Jacobsen: You received the KHF Innovation Award—how does it feel?

Park: Yes, that was a very recent achievement. If you’re familiar with CES, it’s similar to the CES Innovation Award in the U.S. The KHF Innovation Award is from South Korea’s largest annual medical device conference. The Korean Hospital Association gives this award to innovative ventures; we were fortunate to be one of the recipients.

Jacobsen: What are some important statistics relevant to men and for complications too? 

Park: So, for prediabetes and diabetes, A1C is an incredibly important biomarker. A1C is the top biomarker for diagnosing diabetes and has well-established standardized criteria. If your A1C level is higher than 6.5%, you have diabetes. If it’s between 5.7% and 6.4%, that means you have prediabetes. With this single biomarker, you can accurately understand your risk status.

Even after diagnosis, it’s crucial to regularly test A1C levels because this biomarker predicts the risk of developing diabetes-related complications. While most people are more familiar with glucose testing, the American Diabetes Association strongly recommends A1C testing for all diabetes patients. In contrast, glucose monitoring is recommended only for certain patients. These tests serve different purposes. Extensive research has shown that regular A1C testing can reduce the long-term probability of death and improve patient outcomes. I can provide the exact statistics after the meeting if needed.

Jacobsen: Can you explain some of the complications people with high A1C levels face? What are some of the conditions they may encounter?

Park: Yes, there are many microvascular complications, but the most common is retinopathy, which affects about 40% of diabetes patients. This condition can lead to blindness if not managed. There are also diabetic foot complications, neuropathy, cardiovascular, and ulcer issues, which are very common as well.

All of these complications are related to microvascular disease. When A1C levels are high, blood viscosity increases, leading to issues in the microvessels, not just the larger blood vessels. This can result in serious conditions like heart disease. Additionally, there are some differences in how diabetes affects men and women. For instance, type 2 diabetes, which accounts for 90-95% of cases, affects men and women differently in terms of complications and disease progression.

Men tend to develop diabetes at an earlier age than women. Research has shown that men with obesity are more likely to have upper body obesity, which is strongly correlated with insulin resistance—a significant risk factor for type 2 diabetes. As a result, men with upper body obesity tend to develop type 2 diabetes at a younger age. For women, it’s different.

Women are more likely to have lower body obesity, which has a different impact on diabetes. Women tend to develop diabetes later, often in their 60s or 70s, whereas men should be more cautious starting in their 40s. Current guidelines recommend that individuals begin annual screening tests for diabetes at age 35 to detect prediabetes or diabetes early, allowing for earlier intervention and prevention of complications.

Jacobsen: Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it. 

Park: Perfect. Thank you so much, Scott. I appreciate the conversation.

Jacobsen: Likewise, it was nice meeting you. Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

On Keith Raniere & NXIVM 3: Jim Heller, Maharaji Comparisons

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/27

Jim Heller is a former Canadian ashram premie. Currently, he is a criminal lawyer in Victoria, B.C., Canada, and a guitarist in a band called X-Flies. He has critiqued Maharaji’s past claims and his followers’ evasion of accountability. Heller looks at the parallels between Maharaji and NXIVM’s Keith Raniere, emphasizing manipulation, the surrender of autonomy, and the importance of critical thinking.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Jim Heller. You were a member of a cult, but you got out. I’m focusing on a series about NXIVM and DOS, founded by Keith Raniere, also known as Vanguard. When you reflect on reading a bit about Raniere for this session, thank you for taking the time to do that and for your reflection on time in Maharaji’s cult. What can you note as some of the consistency between these two systems and their leaders? That seems like a good starting point.

Jim Heller: I didn’t know much about NXIVM; honestly, it didn’t interest me much initially. But after you contacted me, I spent a little more time looking into Raniere, and what immediately stood out from the Wikipedia page and other sources I read was a parallel with the cult leader I followed for some time.

Maharaji came from a Hindu tradition, and his followers believed he embodied the cosmic force—essentially, God. He was God in human form, and as bizarre as that sounds, we believed it. We believed it was possible.

We adhered to a whole narrative and ideology: God regularly manifested in human form throughout the ages. There’s always one, only one. It was Maharaji’s father before him. It wasn’t Maharaji’s three elder brothers; it was Maharaji who took on the mantle from his father when he was just a child. We believed all of that. So when I look at Raniere, I think, okay, here’s another guy.

Raniere didn’t claim to be God or anything like that, but he had a smooth, powerful personality, and I know how it works. You can create a machine if you get a few good followers to promote you correctly. People can fall under the sway of it, and I’m sure that’s what happened with him. That’s how it was with my guru. Maharaji wasn’t doing this alone, either.

When Maharaji first came to the West, he had a coterie of saffron-robed, bald Mahatmas that we considered saints from India. They were propping him up, talking about how their profound meditations allowed them to see how incredibly cosmic and powerful he was. It all worked together as a cohesive narrative, and I’m sure Raniere had a similar setup. When someone is even slightly susceptible to that kind of thing—and I think anyone can be—they’re no match for it.

You find yourself in a group of people, and you won’t be the outspoken renegade because that will immediately push you to the outside. Something within the group dynamic appeals to you, and you don’t want to let that go. With Maharaji, it was the idea of enlightenment. We believed that if we stayed the course with him, overcame our doubts, and received his grace, we could rise higher and higher. One day, we thought, we could become saintly like those same saffron-robed, bald Mahatmas. We were promised incredible meditation experiences and believed we would eventually attain cosmic bliss. Nobody wanted to miss out on that.

We were manipulated, and he was manipulative. I’m sure there was something similar with Raniere. 

Jacobsen: What was he offering? What did people see in him?

Heller: I can’t say for sure, but I believe it followed the same path. To me, it’s all about the information you have. Can you ask the hard questions? Is there room for critical inquiry?

You don’t have to have the branding or the sex, but it’s on a continuum away from autonomy, free thought, objectivity, argument, and debate. I see everything like that. To me, “cult” isn’t that powerful a word anymore because I see cult-like thinking across the spectrum—politically, religiously, and ideologically. 

Jacobsen: What are your top signals or red flags about those particular contacts for people who are lured into one, have seen someone slowly fall into one, or are in one? What should they be looking for? Also, there are ways they can either rapidly or slowly decouple themselves from that, in your terminology, such as informationally closed systems or systems becoming more closed over time.

Heller: So, the most fundamental aspect of our autonomy is our mind. A human being who’s lost their mind—whether through Alzheimer’s, an accident, or whatever. It becomes questionable what’s left of them as a human being. Our mind makes us who we are, and our mind needs the ability to assess things independently.

The problem with the cult I was in is that we surrendered that ability. We turned our ultimate judgment to someone else—essentially to the group and Maharaji. I imagine that Raniere’s followers did the same. So, I think that’s where the tug of war has to be with anybody. If I had a young friend or anyone I thought was sliding into a closed thinking system, I would try to talk with them about that issue: what happens when they no longer have their thoughts to make decisions?

It gets scary because, once you hand over that level of judgment, you may not have a mind. You’re no longer thinking for yourself. I can give you many examples from my old cult. I’m sure ex-Raniere followers would say the same. Getting branded with disguised initials, for example—that’s just a small indication of what it’s like when someone hands over their autonomy. So, I would say to anyone that there’s nothing worth giving up your autonomy for. Nothing.

The problem, though, Scott, is this: cults offer different things in exchange for a person’s autonomy. In my case, we were told straight out that, yes, you’re being asked to surrender your mind, but if you do that, you’ve got the promise of incredible ecstasy through cosmic consciousness. So, maybe that’s a good trade-off. Some people may think it is. Maybe there are cults where people say, “I’m prepared to become a total slave of Muhammad and sacrifice my children or myself in martyrdom because of the ultimate reward.” So, the problem is that people don’t necessarily value the autonomy we have as human beings as something better than what a cult environment offers.

Sometimes, we don’t want that autonomy. That’s a problem. We have to make the best case possible for personal autonomy. And maybe it’s not as compelling to everyone. Maybe someone would say, “Jim, I get what you’re saying, but if I stay with a Raniere-type system, I’m promised certainty, maybe more sex than I would’ve otherwise gotten, and that appeals to me, or a certain status within the group. I’d rather be a big fish in that tiny, insular pond than deal with my status in the world.” People make those kinds of decisions. So, it’s difficult, but what’s the best reason for us not to do that?

You’ve got to have the best arguments for why it matters to be yourself—that’s the best thing you can get in life. That if you don’t have you, nothing else is worth it. But some people don’t think that. That’s the reality. 

Jacobsen: Raniere made a big claim of being one of the smartest people in the world and then developed this so-called ethical system. So, he wasn’t just the smartest person but potentially also the most ethical—that’s the implicated claim.

It’s a sense of grandiose superiority. He positioned himself as a leader who could guide and teach others. Was Maharaji given to similar styles of grandiose claims about himself? 

Heller: Totally. Worse. Maharaji makes Raniere look like nothing.

Jacobsen: Raniere looks like nothing?

Heller: Maharaji was considered the Lord of the Universe. He was the current, living embodiment of the cosmic forces we call God, and there was one like him on the planet at any time. How could that be? According to all sorts of ancient Hindu scriptures, the universe dictates that there is only one manifestation of God on Earth at any one time. There’s always one, but just one, and that was Maharaji. So, who could compete with that? Come on. I mean, the setup was perfect.

So, what do people need to understand about cult leaders and cult systems? You can say, “There’s something wrong with this miniature community.” Yeah, there’s something wrong with the personality structure of the cult leader or what they’re mimicking. And now, in many different dimensions of life, we’ve lost our sense of danger. It’s a dangerous time. We’ve lost a profound and natural taste for evidence. One of the greatest contributions of the Enlightenment—our care for evidence and following it wherever it leads—is being obscured. It might challenge your beliefs, but that’s good because, ultimately, you’re pursuing truth, and truth is an objective thing.

Raniere, because that’s who you first contacted me about and who I know you’re writing about—he sounds like a monster. May he rot in jail?

The extraordinary ridiculousness of Raniere’s claim that he was the smartest person in the world just another thing that pales compared to some of the other nonsense that gets allowed without challenge in our ongoing conversation. So, hell in a handbasket, Scott. 

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts or feelings based on today’s conversation about trolls?

Heller: No, not really. I look forward to a time when we can look back on this period as one of imbalance and when we’re back to arguing about everything. That would be great—nice and healthy—arguing with evidence, arguing with first principles, and agreeing on some first principles. First, principles and evidence—that’s all we need.

Jacobsen: All right. Thank you so much for your time today. Appreciate it.

Heller: Sure. My pleasure.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Conversation With Atheists In Kenya Society

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/26

The Atheists In Kenya Society (AIK) is a nonprofit organization founded by Harrison Mumia on February 17, 2016. It promotes the rights and visibility of atheists in Kenya and advocates for secularism and rational inquiry. AIK is affiliated with Humanists International and actively engages in legal and social activism.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, what’s going on in Kenya for atheists? How are things for you all? Oh, and ma’am, one ma’am.

Harrison Mumia: Yes, I’m happy we are having these engagements, and I am speaking on behalf of the Atheists In Kenya Society. One of our members, Ms. Sky, is also here. So, we’re doing reasonably well. The society has existed for the last seven years and was officially registered in February 2016.

To give you some context, we are in East Africa. Kenya is a deeply religious society. When I say deeply religious, I mean that the term “atheist” is widely misunderstood. People often don’t comprehend what it means to be an atheist, and even if they do, accepting it is difficult. 

We’ve also faced legal challenges because the Kenyan government does not support us. In Kenya, politics and religion are tightly intertwined. That’s why we face resistance from the political class whenever we try to advance our objectives. They don’t even want to hear about us. After we were registered, the government suspended our registration in the same year, 2016.

We took the matter to court and fought the case for two years. Fortunately, we won in 2018 because the court ruled that suspending our registration was unconstitutional. Since then, we have been working to create awareness, promote free thought, and encourage debates.

We are seeing a slight but progressive change in Kenyan society in terms of understanding that there are Kenyans who don’t believe in a supernatural entity. Some Kenyans view life differently and hold a worldview that does not involve religion. Although Kenya is still a deeply religious country, the younger generation is more open to skepticism and having conversations about these topics.

We remain a deeply religious country, but there is a shift toward more discussions. We are the only registered atheist organization in Kenya and, I believe, in this part of Africa, which includes East Africa. Suppose you look at countries like Uganda, Tanzania, and Zambia. In that case, we are the most active non-religious organization in the region, and we are doing a lot.

We run multiple campaigns, hold regular meetings, and have an active WhatsApp group. We are working hard to create spaces for people to engage in meaningful discussions. So far, we are doing quite well. That’s where we are right now.

Jacobsen: Ms. Sky, would you like to add something at this point?

Ms. Sky:  Oh, I have nothing to add because, based on the information you mentioned, it’s all true.

Mumia: All right, that’s fine. So, that is where we are. We have a membership. We have people who are registered members. But then again, we are facing a situation where people want to have conversations. They can identify as atheists, agnostics, skeptics, or even freethinkers.

However, the issue is that they don’t want to be open about it. They don’t want their parents to know. It’s still a stigmatized position in this country to be openly non-religious. So, you’ll find that many of our members are active in the WhatsApp groups, but they are not able to declare, “I am an atheist openly.” There is a transition happening in Kenya. The younger generation is more open to conversations about skepticism and religion. Some are willing to say, “I don’t believe in the existence of God.” However, we are still far from becoming an openly secular society. Kenya remains deeply religious overall.

Jacobsen: When you host events, how do you provide a sense of solidarity for people who, in East Africa, may not have a supportive community? Nsajigwa I Mwasokwa, for example, talks about being in a liberal society and multiparty society on paper but not truly liberal in a Tanzanian context. As far as I know, he does most of his activism and mentoring without a lot of support. So, how do you overcome that sense of isolation that people may feel through community events? 

Mumia: We have organized many outdoor events. We meet twice a month and have a Book Club event. The Book Club brings together those who enjoy reading. We focus on literature about enlightenment, philosophy, history, culture, and science.

The purpose of the Book Club is to introduce new perspectives and encourage critical thinking. For example, we’ve discussed Charles Darwin’s work on the theory of evolution, Albert Einstein’s work on the theory of relativity, and the history of African religions.

We explore how Africa transitioned from traditional religions to Christianity during colonialism and what African beliefs were like before colonialism. We examine the works of various authors and discuss these topics at our Book Club events. You can find videos of some of our events on YouTube.

We also have another event called the Godless Corner. This is a free-form gathering of freethinkers and atheists. There is no specific agenda; we meet to talk, discuss freely, and enjoy a beer or coffee. It allows people to connect with others who share a non-religious worldview.

We also organize hikes. In Kenya, there are places where you can go hiking or for nature walks. In the past seven months, we’ve organized two or three events that involved hiking and nature walks in places like Karura Forest. These events allow people to meet, interact, make friends, and build community. You can also find more of our events on YouTube.

We’ve organized activities like karaoke, a fun event for non-religious people. We’re trying to come up with all sorts of activities where people can participate. However, the most active engagement we see is online. We have a Facebook page with 10,000 followers, a Facebook group with 10,000 members, and a WhatsApp group with over 600 members.

We also have 10,000 followers on X (formerly Twitter), so online engagement is higher than physical engagement. I’m seeing a trend of people feeling more comfortable staying in their homes and chatting online.

Jacobsen: What do you observe in other online communities? In North America, for example, the ex-Muslim community primarily grew out of an online space. People like Armin Navabi and Atheist Republic have a couple million Facebook followers. These online spaces have become places where people can express themselves more freely. Do online spaces in Kenya provide a safer or more comfortable environment for people, allowing them to escape the judgment they might face in their local communities?

Mumia: Online communities are more comfortable spaces for many Kenyan non-believers than physical events. We typically get between 5 and 15 attendees when we hold physical meetings. But people are much more active online. It’s easier to engage online because there are no restrictions on time or location.

For instance, we have Kenyans living abroad—perhaps studying or working in other countries—but they can still join our WhatsApp and Facebook groups. Many people feel safer engaging online because Kenya is such a religious country, and the social stigma around non-belief is still strong. So, yes, a lot of our engagement happens through social media, and that’s a reality for us.

Unless anyone else wants to add something, I’d like to make sure everyone has a chance to speak. We have some Kenyans joining. Micah, are you there?

Micah MukhwanaYes, I’m here.

Mumia: You heard Scott’s question about how we engage as the Atheists In Kenya Society (AIK) and our online spaces. If you’d like to add anything, feel free to do so. 

Mukhwana: Yes, a lot is happening. We’ve been engaging in important matters, trying to make this more than just an online group. For example, people have been going for hikes and nature walks, which help us connect with nature.

There’s been a lot happening. I recently joined the WhatsApp group, and although I haven’t been super active, I’ve seen a lot of conversations and engagement in the short time I’ve been there.

Mumia: Yes, thank you. Scott, you should introduce yourselves at some point so everyone knows who they’re interacting with.

Jacobsen: Yes, sure. Hi, my name is Scott. I’m a humanist from Canada.

I’ve been involved in the humanist community for seven or eight years, probably. I’ve worked with Humanists International, Humanist Canada, the Center for Inquiry Canada, and various other humanist groups. I’ve been conducting interviews with atheists, humanists, and freethinkers for years, and there are certain gaps in getting some voices out into the global space.

So, I’ve focused on interviewing people from African, Latin American, and Asian contexts to help amplify those voices. I’m a freelance independent journalist with the Canadian Association of Journalists. I use my journalism to highlight atheism and humanism.

Mumia: Oh, it’s good to know that you’re a journalist. That’s great. So, in Kenya, we’ve found that Kenyans are more comfortable engaging online. If you call for a physical meeting, first of all, Kenya is not a small country.

For example, I’m in the capital city, but some drive six or seven hours away. They often tell me, “Mumia, we cannot come to Nairobi.” So, they prefer online engagement. We also don’t need the funds to organize meetings in every city in Kenya, so we typically hold events in Nairobi.

But I see the most comfort and activity in our online engagements, where most Kenyans engage. That’s the situation, but we plan to organize a conference. We’re considering hosting a humanist conference before the next international one in Luxembourg.

I’d like to see whether we can organize a conference in December or January, inviting people from outside the country to give speeches or hosting it online. We’ll see how that works out, as it would be our first humanist conference in Kenya. We’ve never had one before, but it would be important in advancing this cause.

Jacobsen: A lot of it can be done online or through symposiums. Symposiums can be good experimental ground for testing themes and organizational setups and working out any issues in preparation. In academic settings, organizing smaller symposiums has been helpful before. I encourage you to pursue conferences because they bring everyone together, offering something to look forward to either seasonally or annually. Does anyone have questions for Thomas, Micah, Henry, L, Fiona, or Hamza.

Mukhwana:  I do have a question. For instance, now that we are building a society in Kenya, can we also engage beyond the country? In Kenya, many people believe so strongly in God that they find it difficult to engage in conversations about atheism or skepticism. Can we have external conferences or meetups to connect with others globally? Could that help in creating a better society?

Ms. Sky: Yes.

Mumia: That is exactly what the society is working toward.Micah, you recently joined the WhatsApp group. The Atheists In Kenya Society is an associate member of Humanists International. Please attend our meetings in Nairobi when we organize them. You’ll be able to meet Kenyan atheists, interact with our leadership, and register as a member to learn more about what we’re doing. We have also partnered with African atheist organizations. By the way, Scott, we’re working with atheist groups in Ghana and Nigeria, like Leo Igwe.

Jacobsen: Yes, Leo Igwe. I’ve written for the Atheist Society of Nigeria’s blog, contributing about half a dozen to a dozen, maybe, articles, interviews, and other content when they were first registered. I’ve also interviewed members of the Humanist Association of Ghana (HAG) and recently published an interview with the founder of Accra Atheists and the vice president of Humanists International.

Mumia: Oh, really? That’s great!

Jacobsen: So, connecting with atheists in Ghana and Nigeria—those are two well-known groups. Ghana had a head start with its post-colonial history and Kwame Nkrumah’s leadership. Don’t feel disheartened if they seem ahead.

Mumia: Yes. But, of course, Ghana is in West Africa, and we’re in East Africa. Our trajectories were slightly different. Ghana gained independence first; they were the first African country to achieve independence. Kenya got its independence a bit later. That difference in timing is well understood. I’d also like to ask you a few questions. Once you’re done, I’ll also try to understand your perspective.

I want to ask the Kenyans who are here: How do you feel about what we’re doing as an organization compared to what we see at the national level? What’s your take? Do you feel Kenya is becoming more secular, or are we getting more entrenched in religion? Do you think we’re making progress toward secularism? I’d love to hear from any Kenyan. What is your perspective? Are Kenya becoming more open as a society, or are we still much closed off due to religion? What’s your general feeling, considering that the Atheists in Kenya Society have been trying hard to make our presence felt in the national sphere? Where do you think we stand regarding atheism, freethought, skepticism, and religious freedom? Or are you guys too scared to speak up, even now?

Fiona: It’s still conservative and religious, but there is progress.

Ms. Sky: Very little to be honest, if you add tribalism to that, it is a very evil concoction.

Mumia: Yes, I can see that. That’s encouraging. That’s also an accurate assessment. There is progress, but Kenya is still a religious society. As Scott mentioned, politics in Kenya is intertwined with religion, and that’s part of the problem. We don’t have leadership that’s open to promoting secularism. We are coming from an environment that is highly religious and politicized. Our politics is religious in nature. 

Jacobsen: Harrison, and Michelle Nekesa, what is involved in the website’s design?

Michelle Nekesa: That’s a good question. You need to ensure a good user interface and user experience. Write clean code to achieve a good output, right? You also need to conduct customer-centric or client-centric research to understand the users who will interact with the website. You have to consider its functionality. What is the website’s purpose?

What exactly is the goal? Do you want visitors to engage with a chatbot or view your content, whether blog posts or events are regularly updated on the site? When speaking as a client rather than a developer, the website must be appealing and interactive. A plain, black-and-white design that is unattractive doesn’t work. Especially now, with social media, we are used to well-designed software and websites. So, yes, a lot of good work went into designing this website. 

Mumia: She covered it all. From my perspective, I wanted to emphasize that if you think about Kenya, atheists are often perceived as devil worshippers or that there’s something wrong with us. I wanted to communicate through the website that we are human beings with humanist values.

Jacobsen: What’s your latest campaign, Atheists in Kenya Society? “We are human beings.” It sounds like such a long way to go.

Nekesa: [Laughing].  Yes, there is still a long road ahead. But as he mentioned, in more conservative or religious countries, when you don’t conform, you are labelled as a demon, Satanist, or part of the Illuminati, or other baseless claims.

So, yes, part of our website is dedicated to destigmatizing both humanism and atheism. We get a lot of direct messages asking if we are part of the Illuminati, and I’m like, the name of our society should make it clear that we are not devil worshippers or satan fanatics. So, yes, it’s important to address and dispel these misconceptions.

Mumia:  Exactly. We’ve made significant efforts to explain what humanism and atheism are and who we are as a society. When we were registered, we were legally registered by the government. So, we are not an illegal entity. We are a membership-based organization. Once you become a member, we provide certain benefits.

At least we can offer some legal assistance. Our team has a lawyer who does excellent pro bono work for us. He has been doing pro bono work for us during our court battles. So, we tell people that even though we don’t have much money, we can write letters and help them seek justice if they face discrimination or similar issues.

However, convincing people to become members of an atheist organization still requires some effort. People often question why they should join, and it takes time for them to understand the value of such an organization.But we hope it will become normal over time to say, “I belong to this organization because it stands for these values.”

I wish we were in, say, Norway or something. I hope we get funding from the government, but we are borrowing a lot from the IMF and others. Even if the government had funds, if Kenyans found out it was giving money to the Atheists in Kenya Society, they would protest at the State House.

Nekesa: While that would be ideal, let’s be realistic. Our healthcare system needs more funding, and our education system has challenges. So imagine saying to a country, “We’re paying taxes and need to develop our infrastructure, but can we allocate even 2% of those funds to support freedom of belief?”

They’d look at you and say, “We are hungry right now.” Our economy is in shambles. We’ve not been this economically weak in the last 25 years. Kenya has held significant economic power in East and Central Africa for the past quarter century, but that has collapsed in the last two years.

Apart from the ideological differences in a conservative mainstream culture, where Kenyans may appear liberal but are often only performatively so—sure, sure, sure— But yes, we are performatively liberal. When push comes to shove, people will not only protest, but they will say that there’s propaganda against Christianity, and now devils are ruling.

This is especially true because the current government used religion as one of its strategies to gain power by pandering to the religious masses. So, how do you pivot and say, “Now, we’re going to finance this?” Apart from having funds in the Central Bank of Kenya, there needs to be more willingness and capacity on both the government’s and the public’s sides. 

Jacobsen: So we’re talking about website design, atheists, and other topics. What else are we discussing? How can Kenyan atheists get involved with AIK (Atheists in Kenya Society)? And how can freethought individuals in Kenya become politically active without risking too much damage to their reputation? I’ve heard that some people even get fired from banks for being openly atheist.

Mumia: Yes, that’s true. It’s still risky. If you work for the government and you’re openly atheist, it may not sit well with the government. That’s how I see it. So, being associated with atheism in Kenya, especially if you work for the government, can be risky if it’s as open as my case. But if you stay quiet about it, you’ll likely be safe. We organize events to engage members and people who want to be part of our community.

I mentioned the book club, where we meet physically, and the Godless Corner, where we meet in person. We also organize online events. Sometimes, we hold online sessions and specific conversations on WhatsApp, during which we focus on a particular topic and engage in discussion. In general, online conversations are the easiest way for Kenyans to interact, especially because some can’t even tell their girlfriends, boyfriends, parents, or relatives that they are atheists. It’s serious—some people risk losing relationships over it.

Nekesa: Yes, Mumia, it’s true. You might be disowned. People will say you’re not a good Christian or Catholic, or even your friends may turn away. It sounds extreme, but many think that if you’re against religion, you must be on the side of the devil. It’s true, and it’s sad.

Jacobsen: What about the gendered aspects of this? Scriptures can be interpreted differently, and people will use them to attack others through that lens. In North America, for example, evangelical pastors often accuse women of having a “Jezebel spirit.” That’s different from calling someone satanic or possessed, which is more common in Kenya. How do you interpret this gendered lens when fundamentalist communities in Kenya attack male atheists versus female atheists?

How do you see the difference in how men and women are treated when they speak out as atheists in Kenya?

Nekesa: Again, it comes back to why Kenya is still considered liberal in some ways. Mumia, do you want to take this?

Mumia: No, no, but people do find it strange when a woman identifies as an unbeliever. There’s a lot of curiosity and surprise. Michelle, have you experienced that? It’s quite different for women.

Nekesa: Yes, I was talking about this. Yesterday, I spent 10 hours on Twitter, one of my favourite places to discuss these issues. We were discussing how, for men, especially those who believe in male superiority or champion patriarchy. It makes sense for them to be religious.

They use religious authority to support their arguments, even when those arguments are deeply flawed. But when it comes to women, it’s surprising to see them religious because why would you support a religion that requires you to be inferior to men? I remember telling my friends how, as a Catholic growing up, I noticed early on that women were always the ones cleaning the church.

Women would lead the choir and do everything except be priests. I was always curious, thinking, “They’re good enough to manage the welfare of the church, but suddenly they can’t sit on the big chairs?” As a child, I would wonder, “What does he have? Why does he get to sit on that altar with the big chair?” So, yes, I find it a bit confusing when women are staunchly religious compared to men.

Because for men, there are clear incentives to be religious, but for women, it’s like they’re going against their interests. Every day, especially online, you see African pastors preaching that if you have a cheating or abusive husband, don’t leave him—pray for him. So, being a woman in that space is tough.

Every day! I promise you, if I show you these videos daily, you’ll think I’m joking. These videos are from 2024, made by pastors all over the place. So, being a religious woman in that context doesn’t make sense. It’s like being against yourself. Yes, it could be clearer.

Jacobsen: Wow, that’s deep. I’m working with some women who are cataloging clergy-related abuse in Eastern Orthodoxy, particularly Greek and Romanian Orthodox churches. When these women go to conferences and meet others whom clergy or their congregation has victimized, women from these circumstances reported being told the same thing: “Just pray for your husband.” They need to be given real solutions.

Nekesa:  Yes, yes. And you know what’s crazy?

When you tie it to African culture—Mumia would know this—I always say it in Swahili and then translate it. It’s like “mwanamke mzuri ni mvumilivu,” which means a good woman or wife is persevering. The measure of a good wife is how much abuse she can absorb and tolerate.

So, if a woman wants to leave her husband, she’s seen as a bad wife. In my culture, a woman’s role is to hide the mess and shame of her husband. So imagine telling people, “I don’t want to clean his mess anymore. I want to leave.” They’d say, “You’re not a good woman, you’re not a good wife, and even the Bible says so.” Especially where African culture and religion intersect for women, it’s a dangerous place.

I see it firsthand. I see it all the time. Women of all classes and ethnicities or tribes in Kenya constantly discuss this. You go to a pastor and say, “My husband is abusive, whether sexually, financially, or physically.” And there’s no mention of the man’s actions.

The focus is always on, “What was your reaction?” Or they’re immediately gaslighted: “Maybe this is just the will of God, and you need to pray more. Have you been fasting? What role did you play in this? Did you trigger him? Were you submissive as the Bible says?”

It becomes this cycle of, “Why did I even come here? I might as well stay home and endure it.” It’s triggering for many women.

Jacobsen: I can imagine. Women who are in the middle range—perhaps not dealing with outright sexual assault but facing emotional and verbal abuse—go to their community, which, for many, is the church. They report, “I have a concern. I’m being abused. I’m being told I’m worthless.” Suppose the clergy don’t understand the context and how this impacts women as individuals. What happens to that woman when she’s told, “Pray more, fast more, and reflect on your sin first”?

Nekesa: I can think of a few cases. While they may not be as extreme as being outright told to pray and submit, there’s a blind spot we might be missing: these women trust these systems. They trust their religion. To them, there’s no possibility that the system or the people in it could be wrong. So, they’re often told, usually by polite or sensible leaders, “To be human is to be imperfect, and even Jesus died for our sins.”

They might not explicitly say it’s her fault, but they will take the passive approach, like, “Have you tried praying for him?” Because these women trust the voices of their clergy, they internalize this, thinking, “Oh, yes, I can’t believe I even had sinful thoughts of divorce or leaving my husband.” They may even feel guilty, thinking, “What did I do wrong? Maybe the abuse is my fault because I’m not sticking by him like I vowed, for better or for worse.”

Instead of feeling betrayed by their church or community, they feel they’ve betrayed God, their religion, or their husband by having sinful thoughts of leaving or breaking the marriage. It’s not always clear-cut or black and white.

Jacobsen: If a woman decides to leave, saying, “I’m tired of the abuse and the community’s denial of my abuse,” what happens within the community when the marriage is broken or a divorce occurs? How is that woman perceived?

Nekesa: Honestly, this is where our liberalism comes into play. While we are conservative in many ways, divorce is not such a foreign concept in Kenya. In the church, people may gossip or look down on a divorced woman because there’s much social capital attached to being a married woman, especially in Africa and within the African church. She will lose some social capital and respect, but more is needed to become completely isolated.

Of course, there will be a change in how she’s received. Before, she may have been seen as a “chosen wife,” representing a family, a marriage, or maybe even married to someone high in the church, like a deacon. After the divorce, she loses access to that status. However, unless she’s part of a strict, right-wing community, she will still retain many things, though to a lesser degree.

Jacobsen: Are there any final points you want to make in this interview? Go ahead.

Nekesa: Do I have any final points? Mumia, do you have any final points? For me personally, I saw a video that said, “Christianity is where women’s spirituality goes to die,” and I completely agreewith that. I don’t think mainstream religion provides a space for women to exist and be themselves as human beings outside of servitude to men. Mainstream religions, not just Christianity, don’t offer much for women in terms of autonomy.

Unless there’s some clear benefit—serious perks—I’ve always wondered how brilliant, strong women reconcile their faith with what the church demands. They often mention the community, the social capital, and the network they gain from the church. I get that, but on a deeper level, I don’t think the church has much to offer women. That’s my stance, and I’m quite comfortable with it.

That’s my final point. Mumia, do you have a final point?

Mumia:  I want to thank Scott for allowing us to engage with him, especially for the first time. I’m also happy Michelle joined. I’d like to know, “Where’s Michelle? Where’s Ella? Where’s Samson?” We have an executive committee, Scott, and I always like to have them participate in our engagements. So, anytime you want to talk to us again, email me.

I’ll bring the rest of the team so you can meet them. I hope we’ll meet in person one day, whether in Luxembourg or somewhere else, but I hope we do.

Jacobsen:  Prepare to be underwhelmed.

Nekesa: Haha, speak for yourself—just for the sake of banter!

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time and discussion today.

Nekesa: Good morning and good night, everyone.

Mumia: Yes, good night.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Art of Soulmaking Program

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/24

Caryn Roth is the Executive Director at Unconditional Freedom, where she leads transformative programs aimed at improving well-being in underserved populations, including incarcerated individuals. With a background in biomedical informatics and public health, she has a passion for data analysis and research. Caryn holds a Master’s in Public Health from The Ohio State University and has extensive experience in project management, analytics, and community engagement, having worked across various sectors to foster positive change. She is committed to creating impactful solutions that address societal challenges and promote health equity.

The Art of Soulmaking program connects incarcerated individuals with volunteers, fostering transformative growth through letter exchanges. The initiative promotes reflection, emotional well-being, and personal development. Survey results show reductions in stress, anger, and depression. Yoga and meditation complement the program, helping participants engage in meaningful self-exploration, and creating positive societal contributors.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What inspired the creation of the Art of Soulmaking program? 

Caryn Roth: The author of the book, Nicole Daedone, focuses her work on “turning poison into medicine.” Taking that which we as individuals, or society, try to discard, to create richness, creativity and beauty. She saw the massive waste of human potential and money of prisons and saw a way to do prisons differently. Penitentiary comes from the word penitence, which means sorrowful reflection for the purpose of change. Daedone’s vision, “The Prison Monastery,” seeks to use prisons for their original intent of penitence, rather than punishment. The Prison Monastery uses the existing structures, protocols, and staff of prisons, but changes the intent from punishment to penitence.  There is an in-person program which was piloted and well-documented at two different penitentiaries. The Art Of Soulmaking represents “A monastery in a book,” a guidebook specifically written for those incarcerated to do the meaningful soul searching that leads to true change of the heart.  

Jacobsen: How has the COVID-19 pandemic shaped its development?

Roth: The program came to life during the COVID-19 pandemic. As Unconditional Freedom staff set out to implement The Prison Monastery at Central California Women’s Facility, they were informed that no one was allowed to visit because of COVID related lockdowns. However, they would allow for a correspondence course and penpal system. Daedone, with the help of Beth Wareham, wrote the book The Art of Soulmaking in three months while incarcerated women at CCWF signed up to participate. In November 2021, the program launched at CCWF with 73 women.  Within one year, there were over 400 women signed up for the program, quickly becoming the most popular program at CCWF with close to 20% of the population enrolled.  

Jacobsen: What has been the growth of Unconditional Freedom from zero to 50,000 participants in 1000+ facilities?

Roth: After the launch at CCWF, the Unconditional Freedom team quickly expanded the program. The initial expansion focus was on death row, where the incarcerated typically have the fewest privileges for community and outdoors. It was here that The Art Of Soulmaking could have an outsized impact. We sent out invitations for books, with a message that the book contained the opportunity to turn one’s cell into their monastery. Within 24 months, 7% of the entire death row population in the United States was enrolled. 

Every week we receive letters from incarcerated individuals who hear about the book and mail us requesting a free book. Since the launch in 2020, enabled by generous donors, we’ve been able to maintain our policy that we will ship a free book to anyone incarcerated who asks for one.  

Edovo, the prison tablet and education provider has also been an incredible partner and supporter. Edovo features The Art Of Soulmaking book, along with our videos and related programs on their tablet, bringing great awareness to their users of the program. 

Jacobsen: How do yoga, meditation, and other practices help the well-being of the incarcerated?

Roth: Yoga and meditation are offered as daily practices, along with freestyle writing, to support people as they go through The Art of Soulmaking journey. The journey of Art Of Soulmaking is both rewarding, and rigorous. Participants are asked to consider the types of questions that take a lifetime to answer. For example, can they find perfection within themselves in the face of anything destructive they may have done? What does forgiveness really mean for them? Yoga and meditation help ‘yolk’ the heart, body and mind, making them fertile and supple so that areas of deep pain, shame, and darkness become accessible for examination and transformation. 

Jacobsen: How does the letter exchange between volunteers and prisoners contribute to positive change?

Roth: The Art Of Soulmaking letter exchange is built uniquely. In this exchange, both volunteers and the incarcerated take the program.  Daedone’s vision is that we are all hungry for something. For example, those incarcerated can often suffer the pain of feeling invisible, forgotten, and shameful. Those outside of prison, too, have hungers: for deep emotional access, for rich connection, to touch “the other side” of those who could not fit in. We then build up these ideas of “other”. And humans don’t do well with “other.” However strong societal norms may reinforce these differences, they are not natural for us. We all yearn for the intimacy of being known, and knowing others. The letter exchange is built to capture these needs: as an exchange between two people, where both acknowledge the benefit of participating. Altruism is the outcome, though not the purpose.  

“Soul Letters exchanged with a penpal from the Order of Malta penpal program, bridged the gap between isolation and connection. For the first time, I felt seen, heard, and understood.” –Miguel Venancio, Kern Valley State Prison 

Jacobsen: What is the rate in anger, depression, and stress reduction? How are these measured? 

Roth: The Art of Soulmaking workbook contains two surveys that participants fill out – once at the start of the program and once after completing the workbook and exercises. The first has likert-scale survey questions where participants self-assess their levels of stress, anger, depression and other metrics.  The second is a Eudaimonia survey around metrics of life fulfillment. Responses are stored electronically and can be compared for individuals who fill out both pre- and post-survey. Our data is based on 120 response sets over the prior four years.

Jacobsen: What makes you confident the program works?

Roth: We have received letters that have shared with us how the Art of Soulmaking has transformed the point of view of those who are incarcerated from feeling that life is hopeless, not worth living, nobody cares about them, and they have given up to feeling hopeful and positive and seeing their life circumstances in a new way. Participants have shared experiences of release of long-held and destructive emotions, finding a sense of purpose while being incarcerated, mending key relationships with those outside of prison, and feeling more ready for release from prison.  Art of Soulmaking is not affiliated with any religion nor are we against any religion so there is room for people to have their own beliefs and explore our material and come to their own conclusion. The combination of the quantitative results we’ve seen, and the continuous feedback we get from the incarcerated sharing their stories and transformations has us know the program works. 

“My experience has been life-changing, because the information provided in the Art of Soulmaking lessons aids in restoring dignity.  Dignity empowers our purpose, as well as understanding the capacity to convert my life’s pain into a meaningful contribution that not only enlarges our circle of influence, but make a positive impact as well.” —Brent, AL

I have been in and out of jails, prison, and rehabs for the last eight years. Relapse after relapse charge after charge I had nothing to live for or so I thought, until I ran across your program again and started to value life again. Now I’m rebuilding bridges and seeing life from a different point of view and I think you for that.” —Jermele F, VA Beach Correctional

“The Art of Soulmaking has transformed me and my life here behind bars — I used to be very aggressive and outwardly negative. I showed no compassion to anyone. I have changed so much that the Officers in the Jail here have started to read about the Art of Soulmaking. I can communicate with compassion and I can see all situations clearly.” —Rich G, Jefferson County Jail, NY

Jacobsen: How does Unconditional Freedom work with prison authorities?

Roth: A unique component of our program is that we believe in changing the whole prison ecosystem. Daedone has written a corollary workbook for corrections officers, called Guards To Guardians, designed to help officers transform the traumas endured on the job and re-envision a way of doing incarcerated that focuses on cultivating transformation for those within their care. The program is supported by over 30 senior mentor officers who travel to prisons speaking about the program and mentor junior officers. Our holistic approach has been well-received by prison authorities, many of whom are eager to have our programming at their facilities. 

Jacobsen: What are the next steps?

Roth: The next step is adding a program called Art of Soulmaking: Free the Artist. Through our Art of Soulmaking program, we have been blown away by artwork which incarcerated residents send us, showcasing their genius and creativity. The Free the Artist program provides a place for participants submit to their art of any medium to be shared on a central, publicly accessible website and newsletter. In this way we continue to encourage creative expression and healing for those involved, and provide a platform for creativity otherwise locked away in prison to be expressed for the world 

Jacobsen: How do you plan to expand its reach?

Roth: There is potential for our program to reach 600,000 people on the Edovo tablet as they expand their reach into prisons across the country. We are currently in conversations with three prisons for in person programming, which would include Art of Soulmaking, yoga, meditation and gardening. 

Testimonials:

This one is so great: 

Anthony H

Bibb Correctional 

Brent, AL

I am very grateful for the Art of Soulmaking. I would like to receive the Art of Soulmaking packet and I am very interested in being a facilitator. My experience has been life-changing, because the information provided in the Art of Soulmaking lessons aids in restoring dignity.  Dignity empowers our purpose, as well as understanding the capacity to convert my life’s pain into a meaningful contribution that not only enlarges our circle of influence, but make a positive impact as well. I love the alchemist paradigm as taught by the Art of Soulmaking, converting pain into power, poison into medicine, getting the crown out of the cross. Thank you Unconditional Freedom Project for your time and concern for us and we are now in a Monastery instead of a Prison.

This is a good one: 

Charles Finney, Union Correctional, Death Row

The Unconditional Freedom Program appeared to me as a means to recognize and escape the mental chains that bind one’s soul. Meditation and yoga exercise is the key to unlocking the inner regions of the self. I believe that ignorance is a much greater prison than bars and cement, so it doesn’t matter where you are in life, it’s what you make it that counts. I make all my sculptures out of q-tips and paper towels, so it doesn’t matter what you have if you find a way to use it and let your soul shine.

Jermele F

VA Beach Correctional

I am an inmate at Virginia Beach Correctional C’enter and I was sentenced to the drug program due to my addiction and upon completion I get to go back in front of the judge with my certificate and completion letter and have a chance to give my time back to the program. But it really wasn’t giving me the help I truly needed so I started taking courses on the Edovo tablet in order to further chase my sobriety. That’s when I stumbled across your course and read the Art of Soulmaking.  

I learned the art of yoga. I learned meditation. I learned how to tap into the inner me. I finished the course, earned the certificate. But I feel I can learn so much more from you guys. Can you send me information so I can share with my classmates? We need this program in this facility. I will be presenting the certificate I earned for passing your course and telling them that your program helped me rewire my brain and made my stay here not so bad. In the end, there was a part that said share your story and maybe I will help someone so here is a little bit about me.

I have been in and out of jails, prison, and rehabs for the last eight years. Relapse after relapse charge after charge I had nothing to live for or so I thought, until I ran across your program again and started to value life again. Now I’m rebuilding bridges and seeing life from a different point of view and I think you for that. I would love to go more into detail with my story. Maybe I’ll help someone.

Jose Mendiola, High Desert State Prison

My experience with the program was a pivotal moment in my life. It shows me that people do

care of the hard things that other people go through without even knowing who I am. It

changed me now because I care about others too now. When I can help them, I do my best and I feel very good when I help them. I feel like I made a difference for the greater good of this world.

Rich G testimonial 

Jefferson County Jail, NY

The Art of Soulmaking has transformed me and my life here behind bars — I used to be very aggressive and outwardly negative. I showed no compassion to anyone. I have changed so much that the Officers in the Jail here have started to read about the Art of Soulmaking. I can communicate with compassion and I can see all situations clearly. 

Michael D. Gallman

Evans Correctional Institution 

I let my pride get the best of me and I’m always stressing over the little things. But since I’ve taken this course, it taught me the unique ways of life. By me feeling confident and positive about the New Me, I know how to deal with things on a daily basis.  It took me forty five years to truly find myself. But once I did, I really do feel proud of myself. Faith is taking the first step, even when you don’t see the whole staircase.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Tony Newberne, High-Risk Myeloma Survival & Clinical Trials

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/23

Tony Newberne, a 10+ year survivor of high-risk myeloma, remains on continuous treatment. He is a certified personal trainer, dietary manager, and an active patient advocate for national nonprofits like the PAN Foundation. In his spare time, Tony enjoys quality moments with his partner and Doberman, tending to his vegetable garden, and relaxing with a good Netflix series. His resilience and advocacy work make him a dedicated supporter of health and wellness initiatives. Newberne discussed his myeloma journey, treatment experiences, and challenges in accessing clinical trials. Despite repeated denials, Newberne remains a patient advocate for clinical trial diversity, especially for Black men and the LGBTQIA+ community. The conversation touched on barriers in the American healthcare system and the importance of clinical trial access. Newberne emphasized positivity, thriving despite challenges, and the need for more outreach to underrepresented groups. They also shared travel experiences and reflections on life.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Tony Newberne to discuss clinical trials, particularly the different experiences and distinctions people can have. I’ve already spoken to Amy and Bill. Bill’s response focused more on his extensive experience, dating back to 2003, with prostate cancer. Now, yourself—what has your journey been with myeloma?

Tony Newberne: My journey with myeloma started when I was 39. On September 18th, 2013, I was diagnosed with high-risk multiple myeloma. At the time of diagnosis, I was given a 30% chance of surviving my hospital stay and a 50% chance of living for one year. When I was diagnosed, I was already in complete renal failure and had four lumbar fractures at L1, L2, L3, and L4. I underwent a stem cell transplant and received multiple blood transfusions, as well as radiation therapy. After spending 2-3 weeks in the hospital, I spent an additional two weeks in a rehabilitation facility. However, I don’t let this diagnosis defeat me. I remain positive, and I consider myself a thriver with multiple myeloma.

Jacobsen: How have repeated denials from clinical trials impacted your journey in fighting cancer?

Newberne: Yes, I have faced denials for clinical trials twice. The first time was in 2013 when I was initially diagnosed as critically ill. My oncologist informed me about a clinical trial he was involved in and recommended that I participate. I wanted to be part of the cure and was optimistic. Of course, I was eager to participate. However, due to being on dexamethasone for an extended period, I had exceeded the allowable limit for prior treatment, which disqualified me from the trial.

The second denial happened more recently, after my relapse in March of this year—March 2024. My oncologist informed me of the relapse and told me about a Phase 3 clinical trial called MonumenTAL-3. He wanted me to be part of that trial. Again, I was eager to participate. As a Black male, I wanted to represent and inspire other Black men to participate in clinical trials. Unfortunately, my doctor changed my treatment regimen, moving me from 14 days on treatment with 14 days off to 21 days on treatment with seven days off. Because of this change, they considered it a new line of treatment. I was no longer eligible for the trial. Both my doctor and I were frustrated by this decision.

I remain a willing and able participant but have not had the opportunity to join a clinical trial. I share this because I see, particularly among Black men, a tendency to avoid the doctor, preferring to be outdoors or stay active at home. Even men who take their health more seriously sometimes hold back. 20% of men admit they haven’t always been honest with their doctors, and I want to help change that.

Jacobsen: What are some of the systemic barriers in this context? Members of the LGBTQIA+ community and the African American community face unique challenges. When men from these communities consider participating in clinical trials or even going to the doctor, what barriers—especially psychological ones—consistently arise, as you alluded to earlier?

Newberne: Yes. Before we discuss this topic, I’d like to mention the PAN Foundation, a nonprofit organization with over 20 years of experience advocating for equitable access to health care through financial assistance, advocacy, education, and more. They are deeply committed, as am I, to accelerating everyone’s access to treatment. When I say everyone, I mean all people.

This commitment to health equity includes increasing participation and diversity in clinical trials. The lack of diversity in clinical trials poses a significant barrier to optimizing future medical advances for all. PAN provides clinical trial information to help people understand the underrepresentation of certain populations. This includes people of color, myself included as a Black gay man. Other marginalized communities also show strong interest and positive perceptions about clinical trials.

However, these populations—myself included—are not being asked or provided with the necessary information to participate. These communities are not hard to reach, we’re hardly reached. PAN wants to change that, and so do I, by ensuring we receive the information we need to make informed decisions about clinical trial participation.

As a Black, gay male, I want to play my part in clinical trials while also not being subjected to discrimination or barriers to access, as I have experienced multiple times, unfortunately.

Jacobsen: Bill mentioned in an earlier interview today—and maybe it was Amy as well—that when it comes to getting more people from underrepresented groups involved in clinical trials, it’s not about a lack of interest. It’s as simple as reaching out to those communities more effectively. It’s basically about making contact. On one hand, many people don’t know about clinical trials or how to access them. On the other hand, those running the trials aren’t doing enough outreach. That seems to be the issue.

Newberne: Absolutely. They are not doing enough outreach. Even in rural areas—and I live in a big city, a metropolitan area—despite that, Black men and other minorities often hesitate when it comes to health care. Men, in general, tend to participate in clinical trials more than women and often have more positive views about them.

When we talk about LGBTQIA+ men, we tend to be more knowledgeable and have more positive perceptions about clinical trials than LGBTQIA+ women. According to PAN’s research, Black men, although historically underrepresented in clinical trials, had more knowledge and better perceptions of clinical trials than white men. The survey showed that Black men had a higher perception and awareness of clinical trials than white men.

Jacobsen: Certain groups generally have a friendlier perception of clinical trials. So even though there’s a high level of trust in clinical trials, why aren’t more people from the general public reaching out to say, “I’m so-and-so, and I’m interested because I have XYZ condition, ranging from a severity of 0 to 10”?

Newberne: Yes, patients often enlist and trust their doctors. I’ll speak for myself here—I trust my doctors and talk to them about this. We need them to advocate for us with clinical trials. Sure, I can reach out to pharmaceutical companies or send an email. Still, I don’t feel like they’ll take us seriously unless it comes from someone with a PhD or a physician or psychiatrist—someone they see as important.

They don’t view us or me as important because I’m just a regular patient. I also believe that if pharmaceutical companies or clinical trial developers could eliminate the term “clinical trial” and replace it with something else—I don’t know what exactly—they’d see many more people willing to participate. More people would say, “I’m available, I’m here, pick me.”

I want to do it. I want to help change the lives of other patients. I want to get more of our people involved. We want to be part of the process. We want to be part of the cure. I’m that guy. I want to do that. Unfortunately, I continue not to have that opportunity.

Jacobsen: I’m reminded of the ethic of caring for others—like how people give blood or participate in clinical trials, regardless of the name. It’s the same idea of giving back in different contexts, whether donating blood or participating in clinical trials, even if we change the name. If you could come up with a different name for “clinical trials,” what would you call it”?

Newberne: “Open Doors Trial.” I was thinking of something like an open-door policy or something less clinical and less focused on the idea of a study. It needs to be something more relatable, something patients can connect to. Maybe something like “treatment access” or “treatment trial.” When people hear “clinical trial,” it almost feels like they’re being used as guinea pigs, especially because of the history of the Tuskegee trials from back in the day.

Jacobsen: That idea of focusing on the feel of the phrasing is important. Words that reflect what they are—like “tow truck” or “ashcan “—feel gritty, like the thing itself.

Newberne: Yes, exactly. 

Jacobsen: That’s a marketing and messaging issue, for sure. It’s about the language. So, putting public relations aside, let’s focus on that “Open Doors to Clinical Trials” initiative you mentioned, what can you tell me about that particular initiative from the PAN Foundation? How might that initiative have changed your experience if it had been in place earlier?

Newberne: So, with PAN launching the Open Doors to Clinical Trials initiative, offering an easy-to-navigate platform, a digital trial finder tool, and 1-on-1 support with experts who can help navigate the complexities of trials and identity barriers, they’ve transformed access through their website. I encourage people to visit clinicaltrials.panfoundation.org to learn more about clinical trials, search for trials in their area, and get1-on-1 support.. They’re doing tremendous work.

The PAN Foundation is truly exceptional. I’ve been involved with a few foundations. Still, when I first connected with PAN in 2023 for advocacy work on Capitol Hill, it felt like family. They were open, honest, accepting, loving, caring, and patient-driven. It exceeded all my expectations. I’ll do anything for the PAN Foundation.

Jacobsen: The American health care system differs from the Canadian system. I’m calling from Canada. There are broader challenges within the American system. How do those general issues—like drug costs and access to care—impact clinical trial access, especially for historically underrepresented populations? How do those challenges stack on top of existing barriers?

Newberne: First and foremost, funding is a huge issue. It’s expensive. Drug costs, access to care, and people having to decide, “Do I pay for this life-saving treatment? Do I cover my co-pays? Do I get an MRI? Or do I pay my mortgage? Keep the lights on this month? Buy groceries?” It’s so disheartening. The debt people can go into because of treatments is staggering. These treatments can be life-saving, but people must choose between bettering their health or avoiding financial ruin.

Getting into a clinical trial can be a game changer because you need to pay out of pocket or deal with co-pays for that trial. It could save your life, help improve your quality of life, and you won’t be burdened with medical debt. If you’re not in a trial, you’re paying for treatments, and those costs could put you into debt. 

Jacobsen: Medical debt is the number one reason for bankruptcy in the United States. 

Newberne: That’s why more people should be aware of organizations like PAN that can provide financial assistance and critical education on healthcare access.  

Jacobsen: So, do you have any final points, words, or calls to action for people based on our conversation today?

Newberne: My final point is to stay positive. Live life to the fullest, regardless of the health challenges you may be facing. Smile, and be there for your family and friends who love and support you. Allow them to be a part of your life to help make it better in any way they can. Don’t just survive—thrive. Be good to yourself. If your mental health is struggling, get help. Be kind to yourself because I don’t think we talk about mental health enough.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Tony, thank you so much for the opportunity and your time today.

Newberne: Thank you so much, Scott. It was such a pleasure meeting you.

Jacobsen: Likewise. Bye, Tony.

The PAN Foundation’s recent survey, conducted in collaboration with The Harris Poll, reveals a strong interest in clinical trials among underrepresented communities, including people of color and LGBTQIA+ individuals. The data highlights that while 83% of people of color and 86% of LGBTQIA+ respondents view clinical trials positively, a significant gap exists in participation rates. A major barrier is that many have never been invited to participate, despite showing interest. The survey also found that most people trust their healthcare providers, but only 22% of people of color and 20% of LGBTQIA+ individuals have had discussions with their doctors about clinical trial opportunities.

In response to these findings, the PAN Foundation has launched the Opening Doors to Clinical Trials initiative, designed to increase diversity and participation in clinical trials. This initiative offers resources like the ComPANion Access Navigators, who provide personalized support, and an online trial finder to help individuals navigate the process. By addressing barriers such as medical mistrust and logistical challenges, the PAN Foundation aims to create a more inclusive environment for clinical research, ensuring underrepresented populations have the opportunity to participate and contribute to advancements in healthcare.

For anyone ready to take the next step in learning more about clinical trials and how to get involved, visit the PAN Foundation’s Opening Doors to Clinical Trials initiative at clinicaltrials.panfoundation.org.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Bill Allen on Prostate Cancer and Personal Experience in Clinical Trials

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/22

Bill Allen has been living with prostate cancer since 2004, undergoing various treatments including surgeries, radiation, bone scans, and white blood cell transfusions. Prior to his retirement in 2013, he enjoyed a 40-year career with Travelers Insurance Company. Now, he fills his time with gardening, golfing, line dancing, and cherishing moments with his grandchildren and family. Allen spoke about his personal journey with prostate cancer, starting in 2003. Allen discusses his diagnosis, treatment, including surgery and radiation, and the challenges of clinical trials and medication. He emphasizes the importance of healthcare equity, particularly for African Americans, and highlights his participation in trials despite concerns, showing the value of patient representation and awareness in medical research.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, Bill, should we start with the personal aspects or clinical trial information? Let’s start with your journey. What is your personal experience as someone living with prostate cancer? How did you find out? How has it progressed? What is the process like for men who may not know what to look for? 

Bill Allen: Let’s begin in 2003. I had an annual exam. It’s important, especially after the age of 50, to have an annual check-up, which for me includes a digital rectal exam (DRE) of the prostate gland performed by my general practitioner. During that exam in 2003, I was advised that there was something slightly unusual about my prostate. My doctor wanted me to follow up. This was toward the end of the year, around October or November 2003. In 2004, I scheduled an appointment with a urologist who conducted further tests, including a biopsy. About a week or so after the biopsy, I was informed that I had prostate cancer.

Another indicator was my PSA level, which had risen to 12.5. That was another signal to my physician that further investigation was needed. My Gleason score came back at 7, with the highest score being 10, indicating that the cancer was moderately aggressive. So, I had to make some treatment decisions. In 2004, I was advised about the various treatment options available for prostate cancer at that time.

Not understanding what prostate cancer entailed, all I heard was the word “cancer,” and it hit me hard. I was overwhelmed with distress, depression, anxiety, and concern. It was traumatic. I remember going home that day; my wife, an educator, was at work. I have two sons—my oldest was in college in 2004, and my younger one was also away at school but had come home. The news just knocked the wind out of me.

Later, my wife and I met with the urologist, and they walked us through several treatment options. There was a range of therapies, including brachytherapy (seed implants), radiation, a prostatectomy, or a combination of radiation and hormone treatments. It took some time, but by May, I decided the best option for me was to have the cancer surgically removed from my body. I underwent a prostatectomy.

Back then, the procedure was more invasive than it is today. I like to say they “deleted” you. It’s a serious surgery. Nowadays, it’s done robotically, requiring just a small incision to remove the gland, and patients recover much more quickly. But in my case, they had to perform traditional open surgery. I stayed in the hospital for several days and went home with a catheter and medication. A home healthcare nurse visited to ensure my recovery was progressing well. The healing process took about eight weeks, and that’s the summary of my journey.

That was in 2006. I returned to work, and around 2010, my PSA rose again. The urologist, who was my primary caregiver at the time, had been monitoring me with periodic PSA blood tests. When my PSA began to rise, they recommended radiation. This meant they needed to radiate the prostate bed, which is the area where the prostate gland had been removed. They believed that some cancer cells were still present in that area.

I received treatment at Virginia Commonwealth University’s Massey Cancer Center in Richmond, Virginia, where I was living at the time. I underwent about 36 radiation treatments.

Jacobsen: Thirty-six treatments? How often were those?

Allen: Yes, 36 treatments, roughly one per week. During this time, I continued working, traveling, and flying for my job. I would come back home on certain days, often on a Thursday or Friday, to receive the radiation treatment. Fortunately, I experienced no major side effects and could continue working throughout the treatment.

During this time, one of the clinicians asked if I wanted to participate in a clinical trial. The study involved testing several drugs to determine if they could mitigate any side effects, lower my PSA, or prevent the spread of cancer. I considered it, and they provided me with all the documents and consent forms. I reviewed everything with my wife since this was all new to me. I’d never participated in a clinical trial before.

I had some reservations, especially being an African American man. I had attended an HBCU, Xavier University of Louisiana, in New Orleans, and I was aware of the troubling history of clinical trials that adversely affected African Americans. We all know about cases like Henrietta Lacks and others who were unknowingly subjected to experimentation.

Jacobsen: Given that history, what made you go through with it?

Allen: Despite my concerns, I decided to participate in the trial. I wanted to do everything I could to prevent the cancer from spreading, and I also saw the potential benefit for others if the drugs proved effective in treating prostate cancer. I started taking two drugs alongside the radiation. After my 36-week course of radiation ended, I continued in the clinical trial, going back to the clinic regularly for blood tests and check-ins with the clinician about how I was feeling and any side effects.

For the first few months, everything seemed fine. But about six months in, I started feeling off—exhausted and tired when I normally wouldn’t be. I shared this with the clinician and eventually decided I didn’t want to continue with the trial.

They said, “We’ll take you off. Come back, and we’ll still monitor you for a few visits. After a while, you should feel okay.”

And that’s what I did. So that was my introduction. The hardest part was making the decision and then dealing with what might have been a side effect, but I didn’t want to continue. I’m not sure whether that combination of drugs had any long-term effects on my condition. That was in 2010.

I’m still working, but my PSA rose again. I kept talking with my urologist, who was still my provider. That’s when I started hormone treatments, specifically with a drug called Lupron. It reduces the testosterone in your body, so the cancer doesn’t have the fuel to grow.

However, Lupron has other effects. It’s almost like medical castration, as it impacts your testes, testosterone levels, and muscle mass. It drastically reduces your testosterone, changing your physical makeup. I was getting the shot every three months, and it worked. Since 2010, I’ve been on hormone therapy. Over time, I moved from getting the shot every three months to now getting it every six months. Since moving from Virginia to Maryland, I now see a local urologist who manages my treatment.

Up until 2020, my PSA remained stable. It’s not at zero, but at about 0.1 or 0.2, which is very low and good. That means the cancer hasn’t metastasized or spread to other organs. Prostate cancer tends to attack the lymph nodes or bone marrow, which is where it does the most harm.

So, I’m trying to get my chronology straight here—I’m still on androgen therapy, and now I’ve been advised to consider oral therapy. There are two drugs I could take that would help minimize the rise of my PSA and specifically target the cancer proteins. At first, I didn’t want to take the drugs because their side effects seemed worse than the remedy itself.

I looked at one drug and read the detailed information about medications—the side effects, how to take it, when it was developed, and data from the trials. When I read about these oral drugs, I focused on how many people like me were in those studies.

If a study included 1,200 participants, the information would tell you what happened to those men. Some got sick, and some even died, though not necessarily from the drug but from the cancer itself. However, I didn’t see many participants who looked like me, and that made me hesitant about taking the drug because these drugs are a lot more powerful. So, I decided to wait and see instead of starting the oral therapy right away.

But eventually, I had to come around and make the decision to take oral medication to help with my prostate cancer. As of today, I’m on oral chemotherapy, and I still take my androgen or Lupron shots. I take four tablets a day. The cost of the oral medication is about $15,000 a bottle, which makes each pill worth around $120.

That was another reason for my hesitation. I’m retired, and while I have retirement income, covering that cost significantly impacts my life moving forward. It becomes a situation where you ask yourself: do you choose to live to die or die to live? I guess that’s the analogy I would use if you’re debating whether or not to take a drug.

Fortunately, the urologist and the practice I’m with have a unit specializing in writing grants. They help patients access funds to cover the cost of treatment for certain high-cost diseases. The funding is based on the disease, and they’ll cover some of the cost. I’m a Medicare recipient with a supplemental insurance plan, which helps, but my monthly copay was still close to $2,000.

That’s where the PAN Foundation came in. I learned about PAN, and they agreed to cover the cost of the medication for a year. You have to reapply for the grant every year, but I’m thankful to have a provider that offers this kind of service to its patients. And I’m also grateful for organizations like PAN, whose mission is to help individuals with diseases by covering the cost of medications that would otherwise be unaffordable.

With PAN’s help, I’ve been able to manage. My cancer did metastasize, and it spread to a lymph node in the upper lateral part of my body. In 2020, I had additional radiation to address the spread, and that seemed to work. It reduced the cancer in the lymph nodes, and I haven’t had any further problems.

The major issue I haven’t faced is that it hasn’t spread to my bones, which is a good sign. So, the decisions I’ve made about my health, along with the advice of my doctors, seem to be working. They provide much guidance, and I listen—when I say “sometimes,” it means I don’t always want to jump into the next suggested treatment immediately. There are some really exciting advancements in the treatment of prostate cancer in men.

There are many drugs available in the marketplace, and as your cancer progresses, you can move to the next stage of treatment. The goal is to keep your PSA from increasing and prevent the spread of the disease. So, when I say I listen to my doctors, they offer me various therapies. Still, it’s my choice to determine if I need that therapy at a particular moment. That’s always my question—do I need to do this now?

Where do I need to be in your health situation to start on a new plan or a new drug? Is there a point in the future where it might be too late if I wait too long, or could I delay starting too soon? These medications can significantly affect your physical health and well-being.

These drugs can make you tired, cause headaches and fatigue, and, in some cases, even lead to heart attacks or other cardiovascular issues. So, I want to be very careful about the approach I take. If I can manage my health as it is right now, that’s what I feel comfortable doing.

But as long as my doctors stay on top of things—they run CT and bone scans—they’re ensuring my bones are strong. I’m on calcium, vitamin D3, and other supplements to help support my immune system. I’ve taken a real interest in maintaining good health because I feel good.

I don’t have any pain from the prostate cancer. I can do my gardening, I can do my line dancing, I can go on trips, and I can spend quality time with my family and grandkids. That lets me control my feelings about what I can and can’t do, if that makes sense.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. Now, let’s focus for a moment on an important issue. Studies show that around 90% of people of colour in the United States trust healthcare providers. Still, participation in clinical trials is much lower. Can you share your thoughts on this and your reasons for encouraging more participation, especially within African American communities?

Allen: There are several factors at play. The first is perception. Many people don’t have a positive reaction to clinical trials. I had a positive experience with clinical trials. Most men—around 83%—view clinical trials as something positive. So, the general perception is good.

However, when it comes to participation, people want more information. In a study conducted by PAN, 58% of men of color said they would participate in clinical trials if they knew more about them. The survey also revealed that motivation plays a key role. For me, part of my motivation was helping others. Similarly, in PAN’s study, 40% of men of color said they would participate because they knew it could benefit others.

Trust in the provider, trial representation, and awareness of how clinical trials can break down barriers are critical. In the African American community, about 34% said they would participate, which is encouraging. They need to know when, where, and how it’s done.

The PAN Foundation has been working on this through its initiative. They’ve developed an “Opening Doors to Clinical Trials” website with a trial finder. Patients can search for clinical trials based on their specific disease and location—down to the zip code. Universities or clinics often run clinical trials, so it’s important to make this information accessible.

They’re run by different disease organizations. As I mentioned earlier, I have a brother, a nephew, and a cousin—she’s female—who participate in clinical trials for a degenerative disease called ataxia, which runs in my family. This disease originated on my mother’s side. Four of her siblings, including herself, passed away from this disease.

I have two brothers who have ataxia. One is in a clinical trial, and the other has passed away. So, I can see the value of having representation in clinical trials, even within my family. My family members’ motivation is to help any other relative who may face this disease in the future, which is crucial because this condition is genetic.

Awareness is key here—knowing where to find information is essential. From what I’ve learned, the PAN Foundation has prioritized patients in its efforts, ensuring equitable access to healthcare for individuals with various conditions.

Jacobsen: Bill, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Allen: Thank you. I appreciate being part of this. Well, is that enough information for you?

Allen: Yes, this is good. Including a personal story is quite nice. It adds a dimension to the discussion that makes it relatable.

Jacobsen: It’s a long personal story, starting back in 2003. That makes it even more helpful. Because for me, I didn’t know the journey could be so prolonged. I thought it was a matter of surgery or treatment, and then it’s over. But now I see how much it has evolved. Your story also reduces the stigma around trials and doctors, especially when you mention how surgery techniques have advanced—from being invasive to now being laparoscopic That’s helpful.

Allen: Yes, it’s quite an improvement.

Jacobsen: Thank you again.

Allen: You have a good day.

Jacobsen: You too. Take care.

The PAN Foundation’s recent survey, conducted in collaboration with The Harris Poll, reveals a strong interest in clinical trials among underrepresented communities, including people of color and LGBTQIA+ individuals. The data highlights that while 83% of people of color and 86% of LGBTQIA+ respondents view clinical trials positively, a significant gap exists in participation rates. A major barrier is that many have never been invited to participate, despite showing interest. The survey also found that most participants trust their healthcare providers, but only 22% of people of color and 20% of LGBTQIA+ individuals have had discussions with their doctors about clinical trial opportunities.

In response to these findings, the PAN Foundation has launched the Opening Doors to Clinical Trials initiative, designed to increase diversity and participation in clinical trials. This initiative offers resources like the ComPANion Access Navigators, who provide personalized support, and an online trial finder to help individuals navigate the process. By addressing barriers such as medical mistrust and logistical challenges, the PAN Foundation aims to create a more inclusive environment for clinical research, ensuring underrepresented populations have the opportunity to participate and contribute to advancements in healthcare.

For anyone ready to take the next step in learning more about clinical trials and how to get involved, visit the PAN Foundation’s Opening Doors to Clinical Trials initiative at clinicaltrials.panfoundation.org.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Amy Niles on Underrepresented Communities in Clinical Trials

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/21

 Amy Niles is a dedicated healthcare executive with over 30 years of experience in nonprofit leadership, strategy, and public health advocacy. As PAN’s Chief Mission Officer, she drives education initiatives, advocacy strategies, and public policy efforts. In 2013, she developed PAN’s national advocacy platform, positioning the organization as a trusted resource for policymakers. Passionate about patient access to care, she has also led successful healthcare startups and serves on the Specialty Pharmacy Certification Board and advisory boards. Niles discusses the importance of increasing participation in clinical trials, particularly from underrepresented communities like people of color, LGBTQIA+, and men. Niles emphasizes the need for education and communication between healthcare providers and patients to foster trust and encourage participation in these vital studies for advancing medical science.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by Amy Niles from the PAN Foundation. It’s important to begin by defining key terms clearly. Here’s a question: How would you differentiate clinical trials from other trials, particularly within healthcare?

Amy Niles: To help people better understand what we’re discussing today, we are focusing on encouraging participation in clinical trials for diseases and conditions that affect many individuals and specific medications. We don’t want to see trials conducted with limited representation from certain communities, followed by broad generalizations about the effectiveness of medications or treatments. This approach can lead to an incomplete understanding of the impact, particularly on underrepresented groups like men, the LGBTQIA+ community, and others. Historically, many participants in clinical trials have likely come from backgrounds similar to mine—middle-aged or older—which skews the statistical outcomes of the research.

As you mentioned, this doesn’t make the results as generalizable across the entire population as we would hope. The sample is often not representative of the general population. To advance medical knowledge and ensure real progress, it is essential that as many communities as possible are represented in these trials.

Jacobsen: When it comes to increasing participation from diverse populations in clinical trials, how does this align with the efforts of many organizations to improve diversity, equity, and access? Many organizations are focusing on these issues, which are practical and crucial to people’s lives, impacting not just life-and-death matters but also routine checkups and health maintenance throughout one’s lifetime.

Niles: Many of us, particularly men, must focus more on our health. Men often avoid visiting healthcare providers, skip annual checkups and miss important preventive measures and screenings. According to the CDC, men are 33% less likely than women to visit their doctors. The first step in addressing this is to educate everyone, especially men, about the importance of going to the doctor. Preventing disease and addressing health issues early benefits the individual and the healthcare system.

What became clear in the national poll we conducted is that across all communities—whether men, women, people of colour, or the LGBTQIA+ community—there is a general interest in clinical trials. People want to learn more about clinical trials to decide if participation might be right for them. However, they have not participated primarily because they haven’t been asked. These conversations simply aren’t happening with their healthcare providers.

They don’t have the information to make informed decisions. That’s why returning to ensuring men visit their healthcare providers is the first step. If they can see their healthcare providers, that conversation may happen. Generally speaking, we found that 1 in 5 individuals were conversing with their healthcare providers about clinical trials, another key initiative to focus on. It’s about empowering individuals with knowledge and encouraging healthcare providers to have these conversations with their patients.

Jacobsen: With the recent survey and your findings about participation in clinical trials, what are some of the things that stood out, apart from expectations?

Niles: Overall, what we found was broad interest across the population. We surveyed more than 4,000 individuals and oversampled for various communities. Six out of 10 respondents expressed interest in participating in clinical trials. Many of us have heard the myth that people don’t want to participate, but we found the opposite. They do want to participate. Close to 9 out of 10 individuals said they need more basic information about clinical trials—understanding potential costs, confidentiality issues, etc. If they have this information, they may be more inclined to participate.

The overarching finding was that the key reason for not participating was a need for more information and conversations with healthcare providers. We like to say these populations are not hard to reach—they are hardly reached. They want this information. Clinical trials may not be for everyone, but at least people are open-minded and want to learn more. They recognize not only the potential positive impact on themselves but also on others like them who are living with the same illness. This work is vital for advancing medical science.

Jacobsen: Which population came out as the most neglected? If you look at it proportionately, which populations tend to be clinically unseen?

Niles: I would say—and I’m looking at our data because we have a lot of statistics here—that people of color, generally speaking, had a positive view of clinical trials. When we looked at people of color, 83% had a positive view, and 58% expressed interest in participating—a little more than 1 in 2. We can certainly do a better job of educating people of color about clinical trials. They strongly trust their healthcare providers, as do most individuals across the dimensions we surveyed. Still, only 20%, or 1 in 5, are having these conversations.

A similar trend emerged in the LGBTQIA+ community. Eighty-six percent had a positive view of clinical trials, and 65% were interested in participating. The message here is that, through the PAN Foundation, we are trying to educate everyone about the importance of clinical trials, no matter what community they belong to. We are definitely focused on increasing diversity in clinical trials.

How do we reach these communities with more information? It’s through initiatives like the one we just launched. Still, it’s also through community work because health happens at the community level. Partnerships with other organizations, particularly those focused on specific communities—such as the LGBTQIA+ or African American community—are key to spreading the message and reaching these populations.

Jacobsen: And what about the factor of mistrust? You’re reporting wide trust, but mistrust is still a factor. How are you considering this in light of the generally high trust toward healthcare providers? When you talk about mistrust, what is the factor at play here if trust is already high?

Niles: There is some mistrust, and rightly so, in various communities about clinical trials because of egregious practices that have occurred in the past. When we asked, for example, among people of coloror in general, only some were fully aware of these past practices and the misrepresentations that have taken place. In our view, this was a positive finding—that not everyone was aware of—because it presents a unique opportunity to change perceptions about clinical trials and encourage participation. Trust in healthcare providers is generally high in all the populations we surveyed. The challenge is that healthcare providers need to initiate these conversations, and individuals should be empowered to view clinical trials as a potential treatment option and feel confident in raising questions about whether a trial might be appropriate for them.

Jacobsen: How do you provide personal support for patients considering clinical trials? How do you ensure that individuals get the personalized support they need?

Niles: One of the things I want to explain is our initiative called “Opening Doors to Clinical Trials,” which may answer your question. We’ve just launched a robust digital platform designed to explain clinical trials because they can be difficult to understand. We directly address the potential mistrust that people may have, especially due to past practices. We’re not shying away from it. We want to be transparent and provide clear information on accessing clinical trials.

That’s the first part of the initiative. The second part is the development of what we call our “Trial Finder Tool,” which is more user-friendly than clinicaltrials.gov. It helps individuals find clinical trials that may be beneficial to them.

But to answer your question more specifically, the third piece of our initiative involves our “Companion Access Navigators.” These are live people that individuals can speak to about clinical trials. They can help answer questions like: How do I find clinical trials? How do I have this conversation with my healthcare provider? What costs might I face if I participate in a clinical trial, and how do I navigate those costs?

In the first few weeks of launching this initiative, we’ve received calls about clinical trials and the “social drivers of health.” These are often the issues that prevent people from accessing healthcare in general. For example, suppose someone struggles to afford food, pay rent, or cover utility bills. In that case, these everyday life challenges may prevent them from focusing on important steps to improve their health, like going to the doctor or considering participation in a clinical trial. Through our navigators, we’re helping address these concerns by connecting people with resources in their local communities to alleviate those burdens and reduce the stress those factors can cause.

Jacobsen: How do you get men involved? I suspect this is generational, too. It’s probably a trite observation, but—

Niles: No, you are correct in general. Younger individuals may be more open to having a conversation about clinical trials. ‘How do we get men involved?’

There’s no easy answer for that. One way is to do interviews like this and get information through the media and publications, certainly through our website. We get a lot of visitors to our site, so we’d like to raise awareness that way. Another strategy is building relationships with organizations solely focused on men’s health; a few out there are doing a good job of that. We also speak at conferences and do media interviews.

There’s no single way to approach this. Men are one area of focus for us, as are people of color, the LGBTQIA+ community, and others. As a concept, diversity is broad and can be defined in many ways. So, we’re working all the angles—reaching men through their partners and spouses, for example.

I was the CEO of a national women’s health organization. I often say that women are typically the “health CEOs” of their families, which is generally true. So, working with women to encourage their partners and spouses to focus on their health is another opportunity. 

Jacobsen:We find, and this may also be generational, that married men tend to live longer and healthier lives than those who are not married. That factor may be influencing that cohort as well.

Niles: I have a statistic from the Global Burden of Disease Study. It states that men’s life expectancy is 6.5 years shorter than women’s. So, regardless of the numbers, we have a long way to go in improving our focus on prevention in this country and engaging people—no matter what community they’re part of—in their health.

Jacobsen: What are companion access navigators?

Niles: It’s a play on our organization’s name, PAN. PAN is a national healthcare organization whose sole focus is accelerating treatment access. We do that in three ways.

First, we provide financial assistance to people eligible for our programs to help cover the treatment costs they need. Second, we advocate for policy solutions to improve access to care. Third, we focus on education, including clinical trials as part of our education efforts, and advocacy, as legislation focuses on diversity in clinical trials.

Our companion access navigators respond live to questions people might have about clinical trials. They help people understand where to start and walk them through the process. They can guide individuals through our website, which has comprehensive information on clinical trials. They can also explain the types of trials and what questions might be asked when a sponsor considers them for a trial. They can also explain what individuals may need to think about before participating.

If the trial is being sponsored at an academic institution 200 miles away from someone, how will they get to that trial, and what are the costs involved? Walking them through all this information is key, but if cost is going to be an issue, helping that person find some support in their community will encourage their participation in the trial and not discourage them. 

Jacobsen: When looking at barriers, what would they be if you had to list your top five most significant ones?

Niles: Yes, cost is always an issue. We see it daily at the PAN Foundation—the cost of treatment and the costs associated with getting treatment. That is always a barrier. Geography can also be a barrier. Many people in this country live in rural areas far from clinical trials.

So, how do we engage those individuals? Another barrier is the need for more communication between patients and healthcare providers. If those conversations aren’t happening, we’re not doing the best job we can to encourage participation in clinical trials. We heard concerns about confidentiality through the survey, and our companion access navigators can also help address those. But overall, cost is always at the top. Some level of mistrust also exists, but that’s what we’re trying to overcome. 

Jacobsen: In some cases, it’s not full mistrust but healthy skepticism, which is beneficial. I wonder if a future survey could explore this healthy reservedness—where skepticism is appropriate in any health context so patients can take the proper precautions while not letting excessive mistrust prevent them from participating in clinical trials.

Nile Yes, I agree. A little skepticism is healthy, especially when it helps ensure patients ask the right questions. But when it crosses into too much mistrust, it becomes an issue because people miss out on trials and potential treatments.

Niles: You’re absolutely right. Individuals need to know they are their own best advocates. They should have some skepticism when a healthcare provider prescribes a certain medication. They should ask questions about the cost, the side effects, and whether a more effective or less costly option is available. However, many patients, and this is definitely generational, may be fearful or hesitant to question their healthcare provider, thinking the provider knows best, and their questions might be perceived negatively.

It’s so important to ask those questions. Ultimately, it’s a partnership between the patient and the healthcare provider. Still, the patient should always decide what’s best for them, whether regarding a medication or participating in a clinical trial.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Amy, thank you so much for your time today. I really appreciate it.

Niles: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Manny Manzel & Conor Crighton, ‘Crossed’ and New Connections

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/20

Crossed aims to facilitate authentic connections by focusing on real-life proximity and encounters, addressing superficiality in digital interactions. Manny Manzel and Conor Crighton founded Crossed. It uses geo-proximity technology to connect users with those they’ve physically encountered, fostering friendships, professional connections, and romantic relationships through shared experiences and natural interactions.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What was the motivation to create Crossed?

Manny Manzel and Conor Crighton: The motivation behind creating Crossed was to facilitate genuine, meaningful connections by focusing on real-life encounters and proximity. We wanted to build an app that seamlessly integrates into users’ daily lives, allowing them to form friendships, romantic relationships, or professional connections in a natural and authentic way.

Jacobsen: How does the app address superficiality in existing social and professional networking platforms?

Manzel & Crighton: Crossed combats superficiality by prioritizing real-world proximity over algorithms that favor popularity or appearance. This approach increases the likelihood of users forming deeper, more meaningful connections, as the app encourages interactions rooted in real-world experiences rather than digital personas.

Jacobsen: How does Crossed utilize geo-proximity technology?

Manzel & Crighton: Crossed uses geo-proximity technology to connect users with others they’ve physically crossed paths with. Whether on a college campus, at events, or during daily routines, users can see those who have been in the same spaces, giving a natural context to potential connections. Profiles only become visible to each other once both users have exited this bubble.

This built-in safety mechanism ensures a comfortable distance between users before their profiles pop up, enhancing user safety during the matching process.

Jacobsen: What challenges do students face when trying to make meaningful connections?

Manzel & Crighton: Students often struggle with shyness and social anxiety, compounded by the prevalence of platforms that prioritize surface-level interactions. Crossed offers a solution by providing a tool that encourages organic, real-world introductions, helping to bridge the gap and reduce the intimidation of approaching someone in person.

Jacobsen: What are creative strategies for students to break the ice?

Manzel & Crighton: One strategy is to get involved in group activities like campus events, clubs, or sports. For students who find this intimidating, Crossed provides a less daunting way to break the ice by facilitating connections that have already crossed paths in real life, making the first step toward conversation more natural.

Jacobsen: How does Crossed differentiate from traditional dating apps in fostering genuine encounters?

Manzel & Crighton: Unlike traditional dating apps that often rely on swiping based on superficial factors, Crossed encourages in-person encounters and connections built on shared experiences. It fosters friendships, professional opportunities, and romantic relationships through natural chemistry and context, rather than relying solely on digital profiles.

Jacobsen: What role does Crossed play in helping students form friendships, romantic relationships, and professional opportunities?

Manzel & Crighton: Crossed enhances real-world connections by focusing on shared spaces like dorms, classrooms, and social areas on college campuses. It helps students transform frequent, casual encounters into meaningful relationships, offering a platform that supports friendships, romances, and professional opportunities.

Jacobsen: How has the media attention influenced the app’s growth?

Manzel & Crighton: Media coverage has played a pivotal role in raising awareness of Crossed, boosting sign-ups, and generating interest in its unique features. The emphasis on geo-proximity and authentic real-world interactions has particularly resonated with college students looking for deeper connections beyond the digital world.

Jacobsen: What is the vision for Crossed to further real-life interactions on college campuses?

Manzel & Crighton: Crossed envisions becoming a vital part of campus life by continuing to integrate with students’ day-to-day activities. By organizing events and encouraging face-to-face interactions, the app aims to bridge the digital and physical worlds, helping students build long-lasting, authentic relationships that extend beyond the screen.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Chip Lupo, the Childbirth Considerations Per State

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/19

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing, combined with proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. The cost of childbirth in the U.S. differs significantly based on insurance coverage. Insured mothers pay about $2,600 for hospital delivery, while uninsured mothers may face costs close to $15,000. Financial challenges without paid parental leave, ongoing child care, and healthcare expenses make thorough planning essential for new parents’ financial stability.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How does the cost of childbirth differ between mothers with and without insurance?

Chip Lupo: The cost of childbirth in the U.S. can vary dramatically based on a mother’s insurance coverage. For those with insurance, a conventional hospital delivery averages more than $2,600. However, uninsured mothers face much higher costs, often close to $15,000. Beyond these base costs, prices fluctuate widely across states, as some areas offer more affordable delivery options. For example, North Dakota ranks low in delivery costs, while others such as California and New York are among the most expensive. Additionally, states’ policies on Medicaid expansion affect maternal care costs and access, which highlights the importance of healthcare accessibility for expecting parents.

Jacobsen: What factors were considered to rank the states for having a baby?

Lupo: WalletHub evaluated 31 key metrics across cost, health care, baby-friendliness, and family-friendliness, including hospital delivery charges, the availability of pediatricians, and child care accessibility. States such as Massachusetts and North Dakota came out on top by minimizing expenses and offering excellent medical and child care support.

Jacobsen: How do the best and worst states differ in conventional-delivery charges and cesarean-delivery charges?

Lupo: The costs for delivering a baby vary significantly, as some states offer much lower delivery fees than others. States like New Hampshire and North Dakota have some of the lowest costs for both conventional and cesarean deliveries, whereas states like New York, Florida, and California can charge much more. Factors such state healthcare quality, cost of living, and local healthcare policy strongly influence these differences, which underscores the importance of considering these dynamics when choosing where to have a baby.

Jacobsen: Why is Massachusetts considered the best state to have a baby?

Lupo: Massachusetts is the top state for having a baby because of its high-quality healthcare, supportive family policies, and safe environment for infants. The state also boasts the lowest infant mortality rate and the fourth-lowest maternal mortality rate in the U.S.

In addition, Massachusetts has robust parental leave policies and Medicaid-covered parenting programs, which ensures strong support for new parents. The state also ranks first and second in family-friendliness  and health care respectively, which reflects its commitment to long-term family support, making it an ideal place for raising children.

Jacobsen: What are typical unplanned expenses for new parents?

Lupo: New parents often face a range of unplanned expenses that can quickly add up, especially with the rising costs associated with childbirth and infant care. These can include unexpected hospital fees for delivery, and for some, increased costs if complications arise. Post-birth, new parents encounter high costs for childcare and babysitting. Pediatric care, vaccinations, and necessary health screenings further add to expenses, highlighting the importance of planning ahead and researching the best states for quality, affordable child and healthcare options.

Jacobsen: What financial challenges do parents face without federal paid parental leave?

Lupo: Without federal paid parental leave, parents face financial challenges that compound the high costs of childbirth and infant care. With conventional delivery costs averaging $2,600 with insurance or up to $15,000 without, many new parents face a difficult choice between a loss of income or taking time to bond with and care for their newborns. In states where childbirth and childcare costs are highest, the financial burden can be particularly severe. Additionally, without paid leave, parents are often forced back into work earlier, potentially missing out on crucial postpartum support and bonding time.

Jacobsen: What is the biggest financial mistake prospective parents make?

Lupo: The biggest financial mistake prospective parents make is underestimating the full scope of child-related expenses beyond the initial medical costs. While hospital delivery expenses can be costly, ongoing costs like child care, healthcare, and baby essentials can be even more financially burdensome. Failing to plan for these ongoing expenses can strain finances over the long term, especially in states with high infant-care costs. Planning early for both immediate and long-term child expenses can help parents better navigate the financial responsibilities of raising a family.

Jacobsen: How can local authorities make their cities more baby-friendly?

Lupo: Local authorities can focus on affordable and accessible child care that supports pediatric and maternal health and ensures a strong family infrastructure. Cities can expand the number of child care centers, promote affordable child care services, and implement Medicaid policies that cover maternal and parenting programs.

Expanded access to quality pediatric care, in addition to enough pediatricians and family doctors per capita will also ensure better health outcomes. Lastly, promoting family-friendly leave policies and mom groups can offer parents additional support, while creating a nurturing environment for both infants and their families.

Jacobsen: How can families benefit from public pre-kindergarten and paid parental leave?

Lupo: Public pre-kindergarten and paid parental leave can help reduce financial stress, as childbirth and early child care costs in the U.S. are high. States that support public pre-kindergarten and paid parental leave offer better affordability and accessibility, which are crucial for a child’s early development. Access to these benefits means parents can better manage work-life balance, secure consistent child care, and support their child’s health and education needs, which would make the overall family structure more sustainable and family-friendly.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Sang Won Bae on Detecting Depression With Apps

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/18

Dr. Sang Won Bae is an Assistant Professor at Stevens Institute of Technology’s Department of Systems and Enterprises, Charles V. Schaefer, Jr. School of Engineering and Science. Her research focuses on human-computer interaction, mobile health systems, and machine learning, with an emphasis on personalized interventions for vulnerable populations to promote health and safety. Bae talks about AI-powered smartphone applications designed to detect depression through subtle physiological and behavioural cues inspired during the pandemic to explore non-invasive identification mental health issues, particularly PupilSense, which analyzes pupil responses, and FacePsy, which assesses facial behavior markers including facial expressions and head gestures – for detecting depression in naturalistic settings. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Assistant Professor Sang Won Bae. I wouldn’t have imagined this kind of development, but science never ceases to surprise me. Detecting depression through the eyes – this is fascinating. Has there been any precursor to this style of research using indirect measures to detect depression?

Dr. Sang Won Bae: While recent studies explored detecting depression using mobile sensors like GPS, it was the pandemic that motivated me to start this project. During that time, many of us were struggling with feeling depressed. It was difficult to stay focused, manage work, and even keep up with studying. As a professor, I had to transition to online teaching, delivering lectures through Zoom since nobody was allowed to come to campus.

All classes were conducted on Zoom. I asked my students to turn on their cameras so I could see their reactions. This would allow me to adjust the content, shift the topic, or add more comments based on their level of engagement and how well they were understanding the material.

But in reality, very few students turned on their cameras. Almost everyone kept their cameras off, leaving me to wonder, “What’s going on? Are they even listening?” It felt isolating. I was teaching, but it felt like I was talking to no one. As a teacher, I wanted to interact with my students. Still, I felt isolated, both as an educator and as a human.

So, I started wondering, “What’s happening when the cameras are off? How do they feel about the lecture?” I wanted to understand what was going on behind the scenes, especially during the pandemic. While I wouldn’t describe my own feelings as full-blown depression, I did feel down, with an underlying sense of sadness and isolation. In early 2020 – around January or February – I contracted COVID, and that experience reinforced my belief that there was much more to explore.

People were putting on brave faces, but I wanted to know: could we find a way to help students and others who were struggling? What was really happening behind the scenes? We were no longer physically interacting, communicating only through devices—computers and smartphones—not human-to-human interaction. That’s when I felt we needed to do something about it, which became my motivation behind this project.

Jacobsen: This personal issue became a professional area of expertise for you.

Bae: Exactly, and it’s clear there are limitations of the existing systems. For example, there have been studies using the Facial Action Coding System to detect depression severity or mood disorders, but most of them were conducted in lab settings. Typically, these studies involved recording interviews with individuals experiencing mental health issues to analyze specific features, or they used actors to mimic various emotions in order to collect data. While these methods can be quite accurate, they often overlook a critical issue from the user’s perspective: the stigma associated with being monitored under the guise of advancing computer vision technology. 

Jacobsen: Why did you choose the eyes as a metric or marker for detecting depression? I assume it’s part of a broader spectrum, of course.

Bae: Yes, it’s not just about the eyes alone. Other facial expressions and physiological elements, such as the pupil-to-iris ratio, play important roles as well. For example, when you’re focused, your pupils tend to constrict. But if you’re distracted or not engaged, your pupils dilate. These subtle changes in pupil size, known as pupillometry, can provide valuable insights into a person’s mood or mental state.

The eyes are a particularly interesting marker because they are part of a larger set of behavioral and physiological phenotypes that can indicate attention, distraction, or even emotional states. The eyes not only reflect someone’s affective and cognitive status, but they can also hint at broader health conditions. For example, certain changes in  eye behavior have been linked to conditions like high blood pressure or neurological disorders. While it’s not the eyes themselves that show these issues directly, the patterns of eye movements and responses can be used to infer underlying health conditions through careful analysis.

Jacobsen: How does combining the analysis of the eyes with facial expressions provide a robust metric for detecting depression? And what is the margin of error?

Bae: We’ve reported an error rate of less than 5%. Our system achieved an accuracy of over 76% using PupilSense and 69% with FacePsy, using rigorous cross-validation approaches. This means that when new, unseen data from participants is introduced, the algorithm can predict whether someone is depressed with 76% accuracy using PupilSense and 69% accuracy using FacePsy.

This is quite innovative because other researchers often use different sensing technologies, like activities and GPS, which can raise privacy concerns. That’s why we try to use just the smartphone without invading privacy. The system only triggers and collects data when users use their smartphones.

If you’re asking what specific signals indicate depression, there are many. We’ve found key markers such as head gestures, eye movements, and smiling behaviour. Our mobile application includes a range of behavioural markers, including pupil-to-iris ratios.

As for accuracy, we’ve introduced two main applications and have two more in development. Recently, we published papers on understanding human emotions and mood using facial markers. The model’s performance would improve if we included additional sensors like GPS, movement tracking, or other features. However, using multiple sensors requires significant computational resources, and it could be more scalable for everyday use, as most researchers or participants would need access to large computing systems they don’t have.

That’s why our open-source affective sensing framework will be scalable—not in the distant future, but right now. We’ve already shared the framework and application data on GitHub. Many other developers and researchers can build upon this work for future studies in mental health, eye diseases, diabetes, and using facial features to understand dementia.

Many other diseases can be detected, and this will be feasible. 

Jacobsen: So, why the eyes? Why facial expressions? And why mobile?

Bae: We tend to make social faces and expressions when we meet people in person. We say, “Hi, how are you?” and smile. But when someone closes the door and looks at their mobile phone, they show a different side. They might browse, and we observe this shift – the change in their facial expressions and perhaps their mood when interacting with the virtual world through apps, search engines, and social media.

One interesting finding in our studies is that depressed individuals tend to smile more compared to healthy participants. It doesn’t seem intuitive at first, but this is part of the phenomenon of masking depression. We also noticed that, which we haven’t reported in full, depressed individuals were more likely to use social media, entertainment apps, games, and YouTube. They’re searching for something to entertain themselves, looking for fun, funny videos or other content to make them feel happier.

We are preparing follow-up studies to analyze app usage and to know more context about what people do when they feel sad or happy and how their mood changes would be ideal. Excessive use of social media can contribute to feelings of sadness or depression, especially when people compare their lives to the curated, idealized versions of others’ lives. Everyone seems to be happy, travelling, and enjoying life. This constant comparison can lead to a decline in mental health.

Jacobsen: Yes, people are curating an idealized version of themselves for the world to see, and others who view this may feel worse in comparison. There’s certainly a logic to that. The major benefits of this technology are, first, it’s cost-effective. Second, it can be implemented now. Third, it has reasonable accuracy. And fourth, it can be distributed globally as an app.

So, my main question is: if you’ve combined facial expression analysis with PupilSense for early depression detection, what other easy-to-measure metrics could be integrated into the same smartphone app further to increase the accuracy and robustness of early depression detection? Are you working on such developments? I’m sure you’ve thought about those.

Bae: Yes. If you’re asking about additional features, there is more we can explore, particularly regarding application usage. You mentioned curation, which refers to what users seek and how often they visit specific applications and content.

We are currently using Android application categories, and while we can’t always see the exact name of the app unless it’s registered, we can still understand if the app is categorized as entertainment, work-related, or GPS and navigation. It’s possible to analyze the relationship between the use of these different categories – productive apps, entertainment apps, and more – with their emotional state and depression. This virtual behaviour can give us insight into their mood, which would be useful for intervening and delivering specific content that could help.

However, it’s critical to understand that we don’t need to know exactly what they are reading or viewing. That would be too invasive. For instance, if an application knew exactly what I was reading, that would raise privacy concerns. However, knowing which category an app belongs to and how frequently users engage with it provides enough insight.

Think about Netflix, for example. They might want to know what users are watching and how they feel while watching. Our application can capture various emotions and sentiments, and the time of day or duration of app usage is critical. Understanding these patterns of depression could be key in developing a more innovative and preventative approach so we can identify when someone might need help before they realize it themselves.

Jacobsen: How can these apps be improved in their next iteration?

Bae: In the next iteration, the focus will be on improving our algorithm’s accuracy to obtain generalizability. We are working on validating the model further before moving into large-scale clinical trials with depression patients. So far, we’ve made significant strides by incorporating new sampling methods and optimizing features like sampling time and battery usage to ensure the app performs well in various real-world environments. 

To make the app more scalable and generalizable, we’ve been having productive discussions with institutions like Johns Hopkins and MATClinics. However, we’re eager to collaborate with more medical researchers and experts (email: sbae4@stevens.edu) who are interested in joining us in expanding the app’s potential.

Looking ahead, accessibility is another key priority. We want to make the app more user-friendly, especially for people who face barriers to healthcare, such as immigrants, low-income individuals, and others who have difficulty accessing hospitals or clinics. Our goal is to empower them to take control of their own health monitoring and management before any negative consequences arise. I firmly believe early detection saves lives when proper just-in-time interventions are delivered.

Jacobsen: What were the hurdles in the full development of this app?

Bae: One of the major hurdles was the approval process. It took almost a year to get the research started, largely due to the extra precautions and considerations around potential risks during the pandemic. Another challenge was finding participants for the modeling process. Given the pandemic, it was difficult to recruit enough people, and passive sensing research can be inconvenient for users, as they had to keep the app running for a full month without deleting it. I’m incredibly grateful to those who participated, as their commitment made a huge difference. Even though the compensation was minimal, they believed in the value of the research and stayed engaged. I’m also thankful to the volunteers who helped with pilot testing, as their support was crucial in overcoming these hurdles.

Jacobsen: Who were important collaborators?

Bae: The person who contributed the most was, without a doubt, Rahul, a PhD student in our lab, who worked tirelessly on the development. I also want to mention Priyanshu and Shahnaj, our assistant researcher and volunteer, for their help. And of course, Professor Tammy Chung from Rutgers University, who I’m currently collaborating with on an NIH project, has been incredibly supportive and believed in the potential of this research. Most importantly, this project wouldn’t have been possible without the Startup funding support from the Department of Systems and Enterprises at our university. 

Jacobsen: Dr. Bae, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Bae: Yes, thank you!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Older and Old Men’s Routines and Aging

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/16

According to some semi-reputable sources gathered in a listing hereRick G. Rosner may have among America’s, North America’s, and the world’s highest measured IQs at or above 190 (S.D. 15)/196 (S.D. 16) based on several high range test performances created by Christopher HardingJason BettsPaul Cooijmans, and Ronald Hoeflin. He earned 12 years of college credit in less than a year and graduated with the equivalent of 8 majors. He has received 8 Writers Guild Awardsand Emmy nominations and was titled 2013 North American Genius of the Year by The World Genius Directorywith the main “Genius” listing here.

He has written for Remote ControlCrank YankersThe Man ShowThe EmmysThe Grammys, and Jimmy Kimmel Live!. He worked as a bouncer, a nude art model, a roller-skating waiter, and a stripper. In a television commercialDomino’s Pizza named him the “World’s Smartest Man.” The commercial was taken off the air after Subway sandwiches issued a cease-and-desist. He was named “Best Bouncer” in the Denver Area, Colorado, by Westwood Magazine.

Rosner spent much of the late Disco Era as an undercover high school student. In addition, he spent 25 years as a bar bouncer and American fake ID-catcher, and 25+ years as a stripper, and nearly 30 years as a writer for more than 2,500 hours of network television. Errol Morris featured Rosner in the interview series entitled First Person, where some of this history was covered by Morris. He came in second, or lost, on Jeopardy!, sued Who Wants to Be a Millionaire? over a flawed question and lost the lawsuit. He won one game and lost one game on Are You Smarter Than a Drunk Person? (He was drunk). Finally, he spent 37+ years working on a time-invariant variation of the Big Bang Theory.

Currently, Rosner sits tweeting in a bathrobe (winter) or a towel (summer). He lives in Los AngelesCalifornia with his wife, dog, and goldfish. He and his wife have a daughter. You can send him money or questions at LanceVersusRick@Gmail.Com, or a direct message via Twitter, or find him on LinkedIn, or see him on YouTube

Rick Rosner: When I used to work at Kimmel, there was a swag corner that was mostly neglected, except by me. People would send things from their shows, books, movies, or whatever they were trying to pitch, hoping it would catch someone’s attention and be used on the show. But it never did. It just sat there on a set of bookshelves. I’d go over and see what was there. This shirt, for example, was from a show on MTV2.

The logo of MTV2 is Cerberus but with just two heads instead of the traditional three. It’s for a comedy and improv show called “Wild ‘N Out,” abbreviated as WNO.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What time are you getting up?

Rosner During the night, I wake up a couple of times. Usually, men my age wake up because they have to pee. I generally wake up because I have a dry mouth. I have this stuff to drink that makes the dry mouth disappear for a while. I might incidentally pee if I’m awake, but it’s not urgent.

Because I take a ton of fisetin, I tend to be a bit more wakeful. I also take dutasteride, which is Avodart for the prostate. So, Avodart plus fisetin means I don’t have to pee as much as some men my age. Today, I woke up at just about 6 AM. My alarm was set for 6:20.

I get up and generally eat part of a bagel with butter. I turn on the news and check my news sources, which include Drudge Report—once conservative and annoying but now pretty neutral, maybe even anti-Trump. I look at FiveThirtyEight, the poll aggregator. I also check Twitter.

Then, I got ready for one of the debate shows on PodTV. I participated in seven of these PodTV shows, where panellists debated with each other. I’ve gotten good at making my point concisely. I need to be more concise with you because I’m not fighting with anyone for talking time.

Jacobsen: I’m a patient person.

Rosner: Yeah, maybe too patient. I wish I had these skills when I was at Kimmel because we had to pitch ideas to Kimmel every day. A lot of late-night writers come from stand-up comedy. They get noticed for being funny.

I didn’t come from stand-up, but coming from stand-up helps you pitch at the table where he’s listening, along with a bunch of other people. It’s like being in the NBA—it’s some of the funniest people in America. It’s tough unless you’ve got a certain amount of stage presence. Anyway, at 7 AM, I go upstairs to the StreamYard computer.

StreamYard is a different platform than Zoom. We argue about issues for an hour. It’s usually three or four liberal guys versus a couple of conservatives. We debate the topics of the day. Earlier this week, it was the vice-presidential debate. If I’m lucky, the coffee has kicked in by the show’s end, and I’m ready for a good bowel movement. Today, though, it was just a few pellets.

So I’ve still got a bigger one in me. I take magnesium—Carole got me on it so I don’t get constipated. I’ve still got this pseudo-hernia where I had something frozen out with a liquid nitrogen needle. But it also killed the nerve that runs from my spine around to an ab muscle. So it’s still numb—today is day 77 of being knocked out. It generally takes three months for the nerve to regrow, maybe a little longer.

But anyway, I hope I get my missing ab back. I feed the dogs and call Carole, who’s 8 hours ahead of us in London, so it’s 4 PM over there. Then I try to go back to sleep. 

After 9 AM, so I wake up at 11. I eat some Popeye’s chicken. Our local Popeye’s on Laurel Canyon sells eight for $25, which is too much for tenders.

But last night, I went over to Cousin Kenny’s for a Rosh Hashanah dinner and passed through a neighbourhood that has a sketchy Popeye’s. You can get eight tenders for $9 instead of $25, which I need clarification on. Why such a big difference? Anyway, I appreciate that I can get tenders for about a buck apiece, plus the biscuits they throw in. So I eat some of that.

What else do I do? Oh, I tweet a lot and look at election polling statistics. I checked the University of Florida’s early voting website to see if anything made me more optimistic about the election because it was close. I found on the early voting website that women make up 53% of the early vote, which is good because women voted for Harris more than they voted for Trump.

But those statistics are from just five states out of the 24 or so that have started early voting. So, it’s yet to be indicative of a trend. In 2020, which the Democrats won, women were 52% of the vote. So I’m hoping we hold on to 53% for a few more weeks because day-of voters tend to lean Republican compared to early voters, which means they probably also lean male. I want us to build up a big surplus of women voters to feel confident.

I go back to bed again and take another nap. I’ll talk to Carole maybe before I take another nap. I sleep until 3 PM, and I take a lot of naps now. Then, I feed the dogs again, which is an elaborate process because we have elderly dogs with special dietary needs. They’re also persnickety—at least one of them is. For the older dog, who has Cushing’s disease, I use cooking scissors to chop up a bunch of chicken as the base.

Then I take some chicken Gerber baby food—two spoonfuls of that—and add it to their dietary low-sodium dog food. Both dogs get that, though one dog gets three times as much because you burn more calories with Cushing’s. Then they eat.

While they’re eating, I prepare the Cushing’s pill for the older dog. I drill a hole in a teeny chunk of chicken, stuff the pill in it, and feed it to him. After that, I take them out to pee.

I tell the dogs to pee. Only one of them consistently pees inside if you don’t take her out, so she’s the one who needs to be told to pee. Sometimes she does, sometimes she doesn’t. If she pees outside, she gets a treat—these doggy bacon strips.

Then I go to the gym. I start at LA Fitness on Coldwater. I do 27 leg presses, starting at 165 pounds and building up to around 295 pounds. Somebody was on the other machine I might use—it’s a cheat day, so there’s a bench press machine.

Or no—actually, no. Someone was on the overhead press machine, so I skipped that and focused on the legs there.

Then I go to the LA Fitness on Victory, which is 2 miles away. I do 12 sets of butterflies on the machine and 8 more leg presses there. Afterward, I head to the LA Fitness off Oxnard at NoHo West, the new shopping center, and do 17 sets on the ab machine. Finally, I go to the Y and do 20 sets of bench presses, finishing at 180 pounds, a new record for me on that machine, given my current body weight of about 138 pounds. That’s about 1.3 times my body weight, which would still be pathetic if I weighed more.

But given how skinny I am, 1.3 times my body weight is almost acceptable. Then I go to Planet Fitness at Laurel and Ventura and do 15 sets on the chest press and the pushdown machine, maxing out at 177.5 pounds. I come home, have a smoothie, and eat another piece of Popeye’s chicken.

What’s nice is that I took a piece of glass from the frame I bought. I collect micromosaic frames, and this one was beaten up because they’re all at least 100 years old, some more like 130 years old. The little mosaic parts fall out, and sometimes, people do a poor job of repairing them. You can’t see it here, but this particular repair was badly done—the person didn’t put the glass pieces back. They used plaster or clay material in the gaps and then painted them to resemble mosaics.

Tonight, if I’m awake enough, I’ll take a dental tool and start chipping away at the repair to replace the parts correctly with glass mosaic tiles. Also, the oval piece that covers the frame part where the picture goes was probably broken at some point. Whoever repaired it likely nipped a piece of glass to fit the oval space and probably wasn’t using a glass cutter—maybe nippers or even pliers.

So it was jagged. A nice small project while I was eating dinner was using a whetstone normally used for sharpening knives. I’ve wrecked mine because I use it for filing down mosaic tiles and framing glass to smooth out some of the jagged edges. It was unnecessary, but it gave me something to do while I ate dinner and watched “The Lego Batman Movie,” which was pretty decent.

Then, it was time to talk with you.

I took one for a bowel movement, but it was still pellets. So, I still have a giant one, and I’m hoping it will come out eventually.

Jacobsen: What do you find, capacity-wise—mentally, physically, sensation-wise—has declined the most with age? What are the most marked changes?

Rosner: I’ve mentioned that my willingness to waste hundreds of hours on IQ tests has declined. I’ve ruled against it now. It is a terrible waste of time because the odds of outscoring my established high score on a Cooijmans test are not high. I might still be as smart, but scoring high on a Cooijmans test is hard. He’s one of the few who offers tests with ceilings above my highest score, so that’s been a decline for me.

My reading has also declined for several reasons. One is that when I was younger, I got a reading done while working as an art model. As a younger model, I’d do crazy poses—just insane poses that took a lot of flexibility and strength. Eventually, I found a few poses that required flexibility but allowed me to hold a book simultaneously. Or if I were modelling for a painting, where I’d be posing for 20 to 25 hours, I’d try to incorporate a book into the pose, which some teachers would allow.

I could plow through many books that way, especially if the pose were painful because I’d read harder and faster to distract myself from the pain, right? But I don’t model anymore. Another place I used to read was at the gym. I wasn’t a jerk about it.

I’d spend less time reading between sets than the people who waste time on their phones between sets. I’d spend at most 20 seconds between sets reading. I’m a fast reader, so I could finish a page, or at least half a page, in those 20 seconds. But it would still piss people off.

People who thought nothing of others being on their phones at the gym would get offended when they saw me reading. They’d approach me and ask, “Are you using this?” They wouldn’t wait to see if I was doing sets. If they waited another 10 seconds, they’d see I was in the middle of a set. But people are stupid—jerks.

When COVID hit, I wanted to get in and out of the gym as fast as possible because, again, people are jerks and might be there with COVID. So, I stopped reading at the gym. Then I stopped reading at home, and for the same reason, I stopped taking IQ tests—it feels like I don’t have time to waste.

I don’t want to spend four or three hours reading books—maybe not even 90 minutes. And my patience for books has declined, just like it has for everyone else. We were talking about this last night at dinner. The deal is, when you Google something now, you’re familiar with this, right?

You Google something, and half the time, Google will use AI to write you two or more paragraphs answering the question it assumes you’re asking based on your query. Right? So you get the information. Google has become even more powerfulthan it used to be.

But I’ve had times where Google got it wrong. For example, I once tried to find the exact definition of “accursed.” I’d tweeted about Trump being accused of sexually assaulting and harassing 26 women, and some MAGA idiot wrote back. He meant to write “accused, not convicted,” but he wrote “accursed, not convicted.”

I loved that—it was my favourite tweet. So I was trying to find the exact definition of “accursed” to make fun of the guy by pasting it. But instead of giving me the definition, Google gave me biblical uses of the word.

I’ve tweeted a few times about how I wish Jesus would rapture all the world’s jerks to Europa, the ice moon of Jupiter. Europa is said to have fairly livable conditions. Its radioactive center makes it somewhat warm. So maybe Jesus could dig some ice caves for the world’s biggest jerks.

Anyway, I wonder if Google is spying on me. It probably saw me tweeting about Jesus and assumed I was religious. So when I searched for “accursed,” it gave me the Bible’s word usage.

But back to the main point: you can go online now and instantly get what you want to know. In the olden days, you had to go to the library. As a kid, I’d ride my bike or have my parents drive me to the library. We had a good library—it probably had about 150,000 to 200,000 books, which is still not enough compared to today.

Now, 50 million to 100 million books are distilled into articles online.

So back then, you had to hope that something close to the answer you needed could be found in one of the three books they had on the subject you were working on. But now, we don’t need books. Google spits it right into your eyes like a mother bird feeding a baby bird, which works against my patience with books. Also, Carole and I watch a ton of premium TV every night. The deal with books is that one person wrote it, and another person edited it, and those people may be interested in something other than what I care about regarding the plot. So there’s often much stuff I want to skip over, or at least skim, because it’s not engaging.

On the other hand, good TV has been filtered through the sensibilities and instincts of a dozen people—execs giving notes, etc. It often takes years for a show to be developed. Some of the most talented writers aren’t writing books—they’re writing for TV. As I said, the best TV has been filtered through many people to ensure everything is as good as possible. So, generally, the dialogue on a good TV show is better than the dialogue in a book. All this works against me wanting to read books. I used to read 5 or 6 books a week, and now I’m down to maybe two books a month, some of which are graphic novels because they’re easier to get through since they’re essentially shorter.

I still think about physics. My ability to think about it has been improved. My ability to do anything about it or make headway in convincing others—except maybe you—has never been great. But my ability to write… I’m a good writer and editor, but my output of long-form writing outside of Twitter is way down. It makes me wonder if I’ve lost something essential, if I’m blocked, or if I’m just lazy.

So those are three areas that have declined.

Do you notice any changes in your intellectual abilities as you move from your twenties into your thirties?

Jacobsen: I feel more relaxed. I feel more like myself. I don’t feel like I have to prove myself as much. I feel like producing something good, even in a small way, is good enough. My self-care is way better now.

I know when to take care of myself. It’s not overwhelming self-confidence, but I don’t drive myself as crazy as I might have in a previous decade. Sure, I work hard, but I know when to take a break, and I do. I still work long hours all week, but I’ve learned to balance things better. I might watch The Lord of the Rings—a simple tale of good and evil, crafted by a Catholic like Tolkien—but I enjoy that.

Rosner: Does your family or mom know how hard you work?

Jacobsen: I don’t think so. I think only a few people do. I don’t think anyone does. I keep that low-key myself.

Rosner: It’s a weird thing. It’s not weird that you’re weird—it’s just how life works. You generate hundreds of thousands of words a year, maybe even a million, through interviews and other journalism.

If someone noticed this, I’m sure the people you submit work to—like The Good Men Project, for instance—or anyone you generate content for must be delighted with your output. But that’s a professional relationship, and they probably don’t go around saying, “Wow!”

Or they do, but still, it’s their job. Do they go home and tell their partners, “There’s this one guy, and he’s just a machine”?

Jacobsen: Also, professional relationships shouldn’t necessarily come with the expectation of praise, right? The expectation is that you are to produce a product. They are to consider it and publish it—maybe, maybe not. Then, you move on to the next piece. Right?

Rosner: Yeah, exactly. At some point, I can imagine somebody asking, “You’ve got a sister, right?”

Jacobsen: I have a sister and a brother. They all know what I do, but they’re family.

Rosner: They think, “Scott went to Ukraine. What the hell was he doing there? I guess he worked at a horse farm or something, talks to people, and writes online articles.”

You can imagine their shock if, at some point, someone went to them and said, “How does it feel to be related to one of the most productive journalists in the world?” They’d be like, “What? We thought he was hanging out, talking to people.”

Jacobsen: Yeah. So, I’ll be house-sitting for a neighbour this weekend, caring for their dogs. And I’ve got a good opportunity coming up where I got selected again. I’m going to a graduate-level journalism training seminar. They fly you out, pay for your hotel, food, flight back, and the trainers who come to teach you. You go to these things, and there are journalists from various political stripes and publications. I recognized several names. When I went to the one last year, you had to apply and get selected. I got selected last year and again this time. So, I’ll be attending again. I’ll let you know how it goes.

Rosner: That’s great! So, when you go to these things, there are plenty of legit, objective journalists. But do you also bump into biased journalists from propaganda outlets like The Gateway Pundit?

Jacobsen: Not The Gateway Pundit, no. I’ve communicated and interacted with people who, within liberal circles, would be considered part of propaganda outlets. It’s probably tier 2 in terms of their online circulation. But during the training, I interact with them as individuals who happen to work at these places, and we’re all learning the same material. It’s just professional development for journalists. And then there are people like me who apply under the freelance, independent title.

Rosner: But enough about that—since this session is a bit of an odds-and-ends conversation, let me brag about my kid. Her hands are on the cover of Archaeology Magazine this month, holding a slip of cut paper with a design on it. She’s a specialist in the products created by schoolgirls, typically embroidered and sewn items from the early modern period—which generally starts in the Renaissance, maybe the 15th or 16th century, and extends into the 19th century.

Her expertise also includes other craft projects using wax, shellwork, cardboard, mica for shininess, and various materials. She worked at this place—what was its name? It’s in England and London and has been used since the 1700s. In the 17th or 18th century, it was a girls’ school, and the floorboards had gaps.

Jacobsen: That’s incredible! So, did they discover something in the gaps?

Rosner: Over time, objects like these intricate, handmade crafts had fallen between the floorboards, preserving them for centuries. She was involved in researching and handling these historic finds, which is how her hands ended up on the cover of Archaeology Magazine. It’s pretty cool.

Nothing big—nothing you’d fall into. But if you were working on a fussy craft project and there was a quarter-inch gap between the floorboards, over the decades—maybe centuries—a girl might drop something she was making, and it would slip through the crack to the floor below. They were doing a renovation and found all these scraps of paper that were 300 years old. They called in Isabella because this is her wheelhouse—identifying these kinds of scraps—and it turned into a whole exhibition.

One of her key points is that history tends to erase all but the most prominent figures. And even then, men get erased a lot less than women because men manage the affairs of the world. They left legal records, signed documents, and generated most of the official paperwork. So we know much more about men in the 17th and 18th centuries than we do about women—except for the Quakers, maybe, because they were meticulous record keepers and letter writers.

But for most women throughout history, it’s tough to find much. Isabella specializes in using household products, embroidery, and craft projects to piece together the lives of girls and women. So they called her in, and she was the expert on these scraps. They turned the scraps into a whole exhibition, which is pretty cool.

Archaeology Magazine discussed how this discovery offers a new angle on girls’ lives—these paper scraps that, by accident, survived for three centuries.

Let’s end this call. Isabella pointed out another issue around women: how they’ve been historically shortchanged. During her undergrad, or maybe when she was getting her master’s, she wrote about a problem that still exists today—women don’t have pockets. Women get super excited when a dress comes with pockets, but that’s been an issue for centuries. Where do women carry things?

And there’s also the theory—sorry, I know we’re almost out of time—from women’s studies that suggest women’s attire makes it easier for them to be sexually assaulted. It’s harder to run away in spiky heels, and dresses can be lifted easily to access parts of the body. So there’s been institutionalized repression and sexism even in everyday clothing. History messes everyone over, but it messes women over harder.

The end.

Jacobsen: Tomorrow, same time?

Rosner: Yeah, let’s do that. Thank you.

Jacobsen: You’re welcome. Thank you, too. Bye.

Rick Rosner, American Comedy Writer, www.rickrosner.org

Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Independent Journalist, www.in-sightpublishing.com

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Kateryna Kyrychenko, Legal Rights Concerns for Ukraine for 2024

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/15

Kateryna Kyrychenko is a legal professional specializing in international law and human rights. She holds a Master of Laws in Human Rights and is pursuing a PhD degree in international law, currently serving as a Program Manager and Legal Officer at the Public International Law & Policy Group. Kateryna has actively supported efforts to document war crimes during the Russo-Ukrainian war. In 2024, human rights abuses during the Russo-Ukrainian war included widespread war crimes, such as mass deportations, sexual violence, and targeting civilian infrastructure. Russian cyberattacks and environmental destruction have been significant, while crimes against cultural heritage and illegal deportation of Ukrainian children to Russia have raised allegations of genocide​.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I want to focus primarily on 2024 and areas of human rights documentation and abuses. What have been the most significant areas of concern and reportage regarding human rights during the Russo-Ukrainian war?

Kateryna Kyrychenko: Thank you for the question. It is quite a complex issue because, as the Prosecutor General of Ukraine mentioned in one of his interviews with The Washington Post, “I would say that, practically, there is no any war crime in history that was not and is not committed by Russians on Ukrainian soil.

That said, the number, scope, and scale of the crimes committed and documented are unprecedented, varying across different territories. In Ukraine, some areas have been occupied for nearly a decade. In contrast, others are not occupied but are subject to frequent missile and drone strikes. Depending on the situation in each area, we observe different human rights violations and war crimes, including crimes against humanity and alleged genocide. In addition to the more traditional war crimes, unfortunately, present in most conflicts, Ukraine is facing more sophisticated types of crimes, such as those related to cyberattacks.

This is a significant area that Ukrainian prosecutors focus on as they continue to build their capacities for prosecution. Ukrainian infrastructure and capabilities are under constant cyberattacks from Russia and its agents. Additionally, I want to highlight the area of crimes against cultural heritage, which is alarmingly frequent, particularly in the occupied areas. Ukrainian cultural heritage objects are being looted and illegally taken out of the country. A black market for these looted items has emerged, particularly in foreign countries, mostly Europe. Beyond these activities, cultural and historically significant objects are also being destroyed by missile strikes within mainland Ukraine. Again, the scale of this destruction is truly unprecedented.

For example, take the case of the Kherson Regional Art Museum. It was completely looted, with 90% of its stored objects taken out of Ukraine, and its whereabouts remain unknown. I emphasize this point because, in my opinion, these acts have the aspect of alleged cultural genocide. Beyond the physical removal or destruction of cultural objects, these actions deeply impact the population, culture, and future generations. Would you like me to expand on other crimes and human rights violations we have observed?

Jacobsen: Yes, please.

Kyrychenko: I work with the Public International Law & Policy Group, a global law firm, and we have been engaged in documentation efforts since the beginning of the full-scale invasion. We have helped Ukrainian NGOs build the capacities to interview victims of Russian war crimes on the ground. In particular, we have assisted the Ukrainian NGO OPORA, which relocated to Poland following the invasion, in establishing its war crimes documentation center. OPORA has since become the largest organization that has interviewed Ukrainians who have fled to Poland and collected their testimonies.

From the testimonies we have collected and from our documentation project with the Public International Law and Policy Group (PILPG), we have observed that people have been subjected to numerous violent crimes, including murder and rape. Additionally, there are many crimes with a material aspect, as occupying Russian forces have been looting and stealing virtually any objects of value, from small household items to larger possessions.

And I’m even talking about bottles of perfume or small pieces of kitchen equipment, for example, not to mention larger items. Besides that, what is especially concerning about the patterns of Russian crimes is the widespread use of sexual violence. I’m sorry; I’m trying to formulate this properly. People who have been subjected to these horrific crimes are not limited by gender or age.

It has been particularly shocking how rape is being used by Russian forces as a method of warfare. For instance, based on the reports from the UN Commission of Inquiry for Ukraine, their most recent findings have established a widespread pattern of using sexual violence against prisoners of war—Ukrainian soldiers—as a method of breaking morale. Beyond the obvious physical harm, the mental and psychological impact of these actions cannot be emphasized enough, whether on female victims, male victims, or their families. Moreover, there is the illegal detention not only of prisoners of war but also of civilians. The Office of the Prosecutor General regularly posts impressive numbers on its website, indicating the number of missing civilians.

Some of these civilians have been transferred to the Russian Federation, and some may have been killed. There is no clear information on many of these individuals. Another serious aspect is the illegal deportation of Ukrainian children to Russia. The fate of these children is deeply concerning, as investigations by Ukrainian and international organizations have demonstrated. These deported children are being subjected to sophisticated reeducation programs designed to change their identity and essentially turn them into Russians.

There have already been cases where deported Ukrainian teenage boys have been conscripted into the Russian army to fight in Ukraine. This pattern is not just about physical acts. Still, it is linked to the alleged genocide aimed at erasing Ukrainian culture and identity for future generations.

Jacobsen: When it comes to sexual violence and rape as weapons of war, the Beijing Declaration and other key women’s rights documents have clearly stated that this is a consequence of any war. Are there any nuances in how sexual violence is being used as a weapon of war in the Russo-Ukrainian conflict, or does it align with previous patterns without introducing new forms or methods of sexual violence?

Kyrychenko: That’s a good question. For the most part, it fits within the traditional understanding of sexual violence in conflict. However, what is particularly striking is the scale and the organized infrastructure behind these actions. In the recent report by the UN Commission of Inquiry on Ukraine that I mentioned earlier, they found evidence of an elaborate, well-coordinated system of detention centers, or so-called “torture camps,” in the Russian Federation. Illegally deported Ukrainians, both civilians and prisoners of war, are sent to these facilities, where they are subjected to horrendous treatment and crimes.

The same commission has also highlighted a clear hierarchy within this system, suggesting that these actions are coordinated from the top down. This indicates that such acts are not sporadic but are part of the Russian Federation’s broader policy and strategy in its approach to war.

Jacobsen: When reflecting on what you might expect for the rest of the year, considering that this interview might come out in early or mid-November, what are the areas of concern regarding human rights law for Ukrainians and potentially for Russians, too? For instance, there are dysfunctional nuclear facilities in the middle of a war, with multiple warnings from the IAEA about the importance of being extremely cautious with these facilities despite the ongoing conflict. Naturally, as you mentioned, it has been over two and a half years since the full-scale invasion began. We expect, based on prior documentation of wars, to see the continued use of sexual violence as a weapon of war, illegitimate deaths, forced conscription, destruction of administrative buildings, residential buildings, churches, cathedrals, UNESCO heritage sites, hospitals, and military facilities, as well as the indiscriminate killing of civilians, and the capture of prisoners of war for future exchanges.

All of this, including torture, is a grave concern. What concerns you most as we move toward the end of 2024?

Kyrychenko: Of course, it’s extremely difficult to identify one or a few things as more or less concerning, as all the things you mentioned are horrific and have a huge impact. There is a certain level of skepticism about ensuring accountability for these actions. But what I wanted to highlight specifically is the issue of nuclear blackmail and the intentional targeting of critical infrastructure. Energy infrastructure targeting is particularly concerning before the upcoming winter season. This has been a consistent Russian tactic aimed at breaking the morale of the Ukrainian people. It’s incredibly difficult to live in cities when the temperature drops below zero and there’s no water or electricity. It makes it hard for people to maintain their morale, keep fighting, working, and surviving such harsh conditions.

This has been the case for the past two winters, and concerns are rising about the upcoming winter. The Ukrainian government and energy companies are aware of this and are preparing accordingly. However, messages from the president and the government indicate that intelligence reports suggest more mass missile strikes on energy facilities are expected this winter. I’ve been here throughout all the winters, and it’s a drastically different situation depending on the season when you’re living in these conditions.

Jacobsen: I returned from Ukraine less than a month ago after an almost month-long trip. This was my second trip. My first trip was in November and December 2023. In my observation, the missile and drone strikes and warnings were fewer in November-December 2023 than during my last trip in 2024. Since the Kursk incursion, there has been an increase in the number of strikes. During two or three days of my time there, the air raid alarms were almost non-stop for 24-hour cycles. It felt noticeably different regarding the alerts on my phone and hearing the air raid sirens in the sky.

Naturally, there were air raid alarms every day in Ukraine. That’s just the reality. However, those two or three days were particularly intense, with the constant air raid alarms going off. Do you think the targeting of civilian infrastructure and the number of missile strikes has increased in the latter part of this year compared to 2023?

Kyrychenko: It’s difficult to say because it’s not the same every month. It depends on the developments at the frontline, especially with the beginning of the counteroffensive in Kursk, which has drawn some of Russia’s military capacities away. However, this year, the strikes have been heavily concentrated on energy facilities. While civilian objects are still being hit—much more frequently than military targets—it appears that Russia is focusing on energy infrastructure. This is essentially the easiest way to cripple the country’s economy and disrupt normal life. But there are, of course, periods where we are fortunate enough to experience fewer strikes.

For example, it was just this Monday when our armed forces reported the first night in 48 days without any drone strikes, which is surprising. So, yes, I wouldn’t be too optimistic. They may be regrouping, preparing for a wider, more intense strike. It’s not a time to be too hopeful, especially when considering the growing alliance with North Korea.

Jacobsen: Are there any legal precedents, either within Ukraine or the international community–where most agree that Russian Federation aggression was wrong, as per UN General Assembly Resolution ES-11/1–which condemned the invasion and the abuse within the international legal mechanisms? For example, could Russia’s partnership with North Korea be leveraged for further condemnation, especially as Russia continues its invasion of Ukraine? 

Kyrychenko: I haven’t seen any specific precedents at this time. Statements from several European bodies, such as the Parliamentary Assembly of the Council of Europe, have been made. However, since this situation develops, we must remain mindful and observe how it unfolds.

One additional point to mention is that besides North Korea and Iran—which has been supplying weapons to Russia—another significant player supporting Russia’s aggression is Belarus. Sometimes, Belarus gets overlooked in the broader picture. Still, given the grave human rights violations occurring there, as well as its regime’s support for Russia, it should be noted.

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts or conclusions based on today’s conversation that should be highlighted?

Kyrychenko: As the situation evolves, many potential changes could come to international law regarding Ukraine and Russia. For example, establishing a specialized tribunal for aggression, which might soon be created within the Council of Europe, could offer a model for holding Russian leadership accountable for their aggression. Additionally, the ICC arrest warrants issued against four Russian officials, including President Putin and other high-ranking generals, were processed relatively quickly compared to how these proceedings usually go. This war could bring about significant changes in international law and the global order, strengthening it and preventing regimes like Russia from launching unprovoked attacks without facing accountability.

One of the unique challenges in documenting war crimes in Ukraine, compared to other conflict zones, is the massive displacement of civilians. Millions of Ukrainians have fled the country since the full-scale invasion began, dispersing across the globe rather than being concentrated in specific refugee camps, as seen in other situations like with the Rohingya. This dispersal makes it significantly harder for investigators and documenters to access witnesses and victims. Within Ukraine, the situation is similarly complex. Internally displaced persons (IDPs) are scattered across rented accommodations, the homes of friends and relatives, or temporary shelters, making them harder to locate and interview systematically. This scattered nature of the population not only complicates documentation efforts but also poses logistical challenges for gathering consistent and reliable testimony.

Another critical but less-discussed category of crimes being committed on Ukrainian soil are environmental war crimes, including ecocide. The scale of environmental destruction in Ukraine has been massive, and there is an increasing effort to frame this destruction within the legal concept of ecocide. Ukraine is actively working to build a strong legal case for ecocide, a relatively new and evolving concept in international law. If successful, this could set a groundbreaking precedent in holding perpetrators accountable for crimes against the environment on the international stage. Achieving recognition of ecocide in Ukraine could have far-reaching implications, not only for international justice but also for addressing the global issue of environmental destruction as a war crime.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Kateryna, thank you very much for your time today. I’ll start working on this transcript for you.

Kyrychenko: Thank you so much for your time and work on this. Take care.

Jacobsen: Goodbye.

Further Internal Resources (Chronological, yyyy/mm/dd):

Humanist

Humanists International, Russian Federation, Ukraine, and the United Nations (2024/01/08)

Personal

The Long Happenstance of Iceland and Copenhagen (2023/12/09)

Violence’s Imaginarium: Informal Follow-Up to ‘War Is Hell’ (2024/07/11)

Romanian

Remus Cernea on Independent War Correspondence in Ukraine (2023/08/25)

Zaporizhzhia Field Interview With Remus Cernea (2024/02/21)

War and Destruction With Remus Cernea (2024/02/22)

Remus Cornea on Ukraine in Early 2024 (2024/04/29)

Remus Cernea on Perpetual War and Perpetual Peace (2024/06/28)

Alex Craiu on Journalism During War (2024/09/24)

Ukrainian

Ms. Oleksandra Romantsova on Ukraine and Putin (2023/09/01)

Oleksandra Romantsova on Prigozhin and Amnesty International (2023/12/03)

Dr. Roman Nekoliak on International Human Rights and Ukraine (2023/12/23)

Sorina Kiev: Being a Restauranteur During Russo-Ukrainian War (2024/01/27)

World Wars, Human Rights & Humanitarian Law w/ Roman Nekoliak (2024/03/07)

Oleksandra Romantsova: Financing Regional Defense in War (2024/03/11)

Russo-Ukrainian War Updates, February to April: O. Romantsova (2024/05/13)

Dr. Kateryna Busol on Dehumanization in Russo-Ukrainian War (2024/06/20)

Oleksandra Romantsova on April to May in Ukraine (2024/06/27)

Oleksandra Romantsova on Political Events and Public Living (2024/09/19)

Book Release

On the Russo-Ukrainian War: August, 2023 to July, 2024 (2024/09/18)

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

A Warming of the Biotech Sector Winter, Chris Frew

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/14

Chris Frew is the Founder of BioBuzz Networks, a life sciences talent community and recruitment platform, and the CEO of Workforce Genetics, LLC (WGx), a leading biotech recruitment firm. He has spent the last 20 years supporting companies with recruiting, marketing, and community-building solutions. His background includes founding a national life sciences staffing division and has worked closely alongside state and regional leaders on ecosystem building and workforce development initiatives in life sciences. He is passionate about building stronger connections in the biotech workforce and fostering long-term, sustainable talent pipelines. Frew discusses the “biotech winter,” a downturn in the life sciences industry post-COVID, characterized by reduced investments and layoffs. The sector is showing signs of recovery, particularly in manufacturing and later-stage companies. Challenges remain in job matching and recruitment, emphasizing the need for better communication between job seekers and employers.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Chris Frew of BioBuzz. We will discuss a particularly relevant topic, maybe not necessarily to blue-collar workers but those in high-skilled tech sectors. What is happening with the so-called “biotech winter”?

Chris Frew: Great question, and thank you for having me today. The term “biotech winter” has been used over the past two years. The life sciences and biotech industries have experienced a significant downturn since the post-COVID era. During the pandemic, there was an influx of capital into the industry. Still, the entire sector experienced a severe pullback afterward due to inflation and rising interest rates. As interest rates increased, investors began withdrawing from the sector. Thus, the industry transitioned from rapid growth during the COVID-19 years to a regressive downturn, resulting in over 20,000 layoffs and a significant drop of more than 40% in venture capital investment.

So, winter isn’t coming—it has already arrived for biotech. However, we are starting to see signs of recovery, or as we like to call it, the beginnings of spring. The industry is gradually returning to a more stable state. This raises questions about how the sector might rebound in terms of hiring. Which areas of this market are seeing job growth? And which sectors are not recovering?

Jacobsen: That’s an excellent question. Let me begin by discussing which sectors were most affected by the downturn. Many large pharmaceutical companies implemented layoffs. Some mergers and acquisitions resulted in job cuts, impacting everything from commercial departments to early research and development (R&D). Big pharma companies focused on their lead products and candidates, reducing their R&D efforts for new products. As a result, many scientists and engineers in these companies faced layoffs.

We also saw numerous biotech companies either leave the business or reduce their workforce to a skeleton crew due to a lack of investment. This downturn particularly affected highly educated white-collar workers, including PhD holders. The past two years have been challenging for many new PhD graduates who expected secure employment but needed a clear path to their first job outside academia.

However, as we emerge from this period, some funding is starting to return. Although early-stage R&D remains challenging due to the slow return of early-stage investment, there are signs of improvement.

Frew: We are seeing some developments in manufacturing skills. You mentioned blue-collar and white-collar workers and a highly educated workforce. There is a substantial blue-collar presence in biotech and life sciences. Manufacturing drugs and therapeutics might be considered a “gray collar” area—a blend of blue- and white-collar workforces. But we are starting to see this sector rebound.

We are witnessing job growth in certain areas as the industry recovers. Much of the recent funding has been directed toward later-stage companies, while early-stage companies face challenges. That’s why there may be some uneven progress. Apologies for the lights going off in the office; that’s why you noticed a change.

When considering individuals with PhDs or those involved in the gray-collar workforce, particularly on the manufacturing side, what are venture capitalists and investors looking for when evaluating opportunities in the biotech sector? What makes them more inclined to increase investment in biotech now, when previously they withdrew 40% of their investments?

Jacobsen: Interest rates play a significant role. A large amount of venture capital has been raised over the past 18 months, leaving many investment firms with “dry powder”—capital waiting to be deployed. With high interest rates, investors can earn good returns with lower risk by keeping their capital in funds. However, as rates decline and the market begins to shift, capital is more likely to be invested in higher-risk assets like life sciences.

Investors are most interested in later-stage companies, particularly those with Phase 2 or 3 trials. We’ve seen positive investment flows back into these areas. There’s also a growing focus on AI and big data applications in life sciences, especially drug discovery and clinical trials. These areas have generated considerable interest, and investments are being made there.

There is also continued interest in novel cell and gene therapies, though these are not hotter than they once were. Some of these areas, however, are still attracting significant investment. We’ve also observed a resurgence in traditional biologics, particularly antibody-based therapeutics, as new technologies emerge in that domain. While the investment landscape has yet to rebound completely, we see signs that investors are willing to reallocate their capital into life sciences.

Jacobsen: What would you consider some of the most promising areas of life sciences research where more risk-tolerant investors might be willing to invest moderate to substantial amounts of capital to advance these fields?

Frew: In life sciences, investing moderate amounts of capital is challenging because of the high costs associated with research and development. However, some investors are still willing to take on these risks to push forward innovative research areas.

Frew: Yes, life sciences can be quite capital-intensive. For example, suppose someone is willing to invest $1,000,000 in a seed round. In that case, it’s important to understand that many life science companies require hundreds of millions of dollars to reach the market. So, it’s primarily large investment firms that drive this market forward. However, there is much excitement around certain areas, such as the application of AI in the MedTech space, including predictive tools for diagnostics in healthcare and patient care.

While there are risks, investing in this space can be more appealing because bringing a product to market requires less time. You can demonstrate data and real-world applications more quickly. The MedTech space is witnessing interesting new applications where AI, biotech, and engineering converge to create significant impact, which can happen faster than with, say, a new cell therapy or a biologics-based vaccine that might take ten years or more to reach the market. This area is attracting more investment interest.

Jacobsen: Do you find that companies, larger investors, or individual benefactors are the primary sources of substantial investments, like the hundreds of millions of dollars required in this sector?

Frew: It’s largely investment firms that lead the industry from a funding perspective. One aspect that is particularly important to us is the role of ecosystems. In life sciences and biotech, geography is a key factor. These technologies often emerge from universities or are closely tied to research facilities. Unlike a tech company, which can have developers working remotely from anywhere, life sciences often require a team directly connected to a lab or facility, especially in production. As a result, life science hubs are critical.

For instance, I’m based in Baltimore, Maryland, a life science hub. The DMV region (DC, Maryland, Virginia) ranks as the number three biotech hub in the country. We also do much work in Philadelphia, a leading hub for cell and gene therapy, and North Carolina, which is known for being a top manufacturing and research hub for biotech. What’s interesting is the emergence of regional investors in these areas.

For example, in Baltimore, Blackbird Laboratories and Blackbird Ventures is an investment firm focused on supporting local companies, helping them launch from local universities, and providing the venture funding needed to scale. In North Carolina, a new investor called Cape Fear Bio focuses on supporting companies within the state and building a local ecosystem around them. This approach involves engaging other local investors in seed funding and early-stage capital, allowing them to support growth directly in their region.

In Maryland, we have a group called TEDCO, one of the leading venture firms in the area, playing a vital role in this regional investment model. These regional investors don’t just provide capital—they also bring their networks, resources, and expertise to help companies grow. We see a new and evolving model taking shape in these markets.

Jacobsen: What do you think facilitates recruitment into the life sciences industry?

Frew: Recruitment into the industry is critical, especially considering the highly skilled workforce, including individuals with Ph. Ds.

Frew: They have the appropriate skill set, yet many need a clear pathway to employment. Even if opportunities weren’t evident during their doctoral work, they often struggle to see them on the horizon. This is why awareness is so important, and storytelling plays a crucial role. Storytelling helps ensure that Ph. D.s understand the opportunities that exist in the industry.

That’s a significant issue. Networking and regional engagement between industry and academia to create those experiences are essential. You see much of that happening, and BioBuzz plays a significant role in facilitating these connections in our regional markets. We host events, showcase companies, and offer programming to support biotech companies. But it’s not just about PhDs.

Storytelling and awareness are also critical for underrepresented groups who might enter the more blue-collar areas of biotech as a starting point. Once someone gets their foot in the door in biotech, companies often support further education and career growth. There’s a solid workforce and economic development pathway in life sciences, and awareness is one of the biggest barriers. Many people think of biotech and assume they need a PhD, but that’s untrue.

There are many opportunities for those with a high school diploma or associate’s degree to enter the field, earn a greatsalary, and build a fulfilling career in an impactful industry. Storytelling, targeted programming, and meeting people where they are to share these success stories are crucial for attracting more talent to the industry. At BioBuzz, we work closely with employers to ensure their stories reach the right audiences. We help them engage with potential hires, whether they are targeting PhDs or lab technicians from associate’s programs. BioBuzz excels at showcasing what employers are doing and highlighting available job opportunities in the market.

Jacobsen: I have two questions. First, we see different expectations across generations in the workforce. As we emerge from the “biotech winter,” the technological and scientific landscape is evolving. Additionally, COVID has changed how people approach work in certain ways.

We are witnessing a shift in the workforce’s dynamics in this context. Platforms like Monster, Indeed, and others help connect employers and employees. My questions are: what are the evolving workforce needs in the life sciences? And how can recruitment platforms like Monster and Indeed adapt to this new environment to better match employees with the right employers?

Frew: Great question—thank you for that layered inquiry.

The evolving needs of the life sciences workforce are similar to those in many other markets. In today’s environment, adaptability is crucial. This is a shift from the more traditional roles in life sciences, where someone might spend their time at the bench, conducting research, pipetting, and running gels. In the past, things moved slower than they do now.

Frew: There is more collaboration with external vendors and partners than ever before. Even at the scientific level, demonstrating flexibility and adaptability is a critical skill, especially in the industry. This is similar to the IT field or many other industries these days. We live in a world where technology and trends evolve rapidly, so adaptability is essential.

Another trend is the rise of shorter-term gigs, freelance work, and fractional life-science roles. Companies have learned, especially post-pandemic, that some roles don’t require full-time staff. For instance, as a biotech company, I might hire fractional consultants or a part-time executive until I secure the larger funding needed to expand and bring on full-time employees if I want to manage risks during growth. This trend is evident in startups and midsize and larger companies, where the roles of consultants and freelancers are becoming increasingly prominent. Historically, this was less common in life sciences, but it’s a growing trend.

That’s also why BioBuzz Networks has launched—and is in the process of expanding—its online community and talent marketplace. We’re building an AI-powered talent marketplace integrated into the community platform we’ve developed and refined over the past 15 years. This new marketplace aims to connect our community members with employers seeking freelancers and professionals for fractional roles. Unlike platforms like Monster or traditional job boards, which are very transactional, life sciences require a different approach.

Life sciences is not a transactional field; it takes time to bring products to market. At BioBuzz, our focus on community building and storytelling, layered on top of a talent marketplace, offers the best outcomes for candidates. It’s also beneficial for employers who want to ensure they are making the right hire—someone who fits their specific needs and company culture well.

Jacobsen: What are the main complaints from employers? And what are the main complaints from employees?

Jacobsen: And what about the reverse, more positive side of that question? You mentioned the main complaints—what are they?

Frew: Correct, yes. The main complaints from employees—or let’s call them job seekers—are mostly about a lack of responsiveness, especially in life sciences. A microbiologist at one company might not be a fit for a similar role at another company because many nuances are involved. It often depends on the type of technology the company is working with and various other factors.

Often, highly qualified candidates who have the potential to perform well may only get an interview if they come from a biologics company rather than a small molecule company. These nuances can prevent capable candidates from conversing about a role, leaving them feeling screened out before the process begins.

On the flip side, employers’ biggest complaint is that when they post a job on LinkedIn or Indeed, they receive hundreds of applications from people who need to be qualified. You can see the disconnect here—candidates think they are qualified, while employers think they are not. Even with screening questions, employers often mention that they are overwhelmed with unqualified applicants who seem to be applying to fulfill a requirement or check a box.

There is a clear gap between job seekers’ and employers’ experiences, and it’s a challenge to address. We are actively working on this area. We have some interesting ideas on solving this issue—ways to communicate a candidate’s value proposition better and ensure potential applicants understand job descriptions more clearly. You’ll see more from us on this in the coming year.

These complaints clearly illustrate a disconnect in the process.

Jacobsen: Chris, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Frew: Thank you. I appreciate the conversation as well.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Top American Coffee Cities With Chip Lupo

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/13

Chip Lupo is an experienced personal finance writer currently contributing to WalletHub. With a background in journalism from Elon University, he has worked across various sectors, including finance, sports, politics, and religion. Chip has expertise in SEO best practices, content creation, and editing, combined with proficiency in Microsoft and Adobe applications. His career spans over two decades, during which he has held roles as a compliance analyst, wire editor, and night city editor. Chip’s passion for media and communications drives his commitment to high-quality content. Portland, Oregon, ranks as the top coffee city due to its vibrant local scene, affordability, and high-quality shops per capita. Fremont, California, leads in coffee spending, reflecting a national trend toward daily coffee consumption and investment in quality. Original report here.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What factors contribute to Portland, Oregon, being ranked as the top coffee city?

Chip Lupo: Portland, Oregon, earned the top ranking as a coffee city because of its robust local coffee scene that combines quality, accessibility, and unique coffee-related resources. Portland also has an impressive number of highly-rated, affordable coffee shops per capita, which makes it a popular choice for coffee lovers who appreciate quality without a high price tag. Additionally, the city boasts the top ranking for coffee and tea manufacturers per capita, thanks to its strong local production scene. Coffee enthusiasts in Portland enjoy a diverse selection of coffee experiences supported by a well-established community of coffeehouses and events that celebrate the coffee culture.

Jacobsen: How does Fremont, California’s highest average annual spending on coffee per household, reflect broader consumer behaviour?

Lupo: Fremont, California’s top-ranking average annual spending on coffee per household mirrors a broader trend in consumer behaviour: the role of coffee as a cultural staple and daily necessity for many Americans. With 67% of Americans drinking coffee daily and coffee prices continuing to rise, Fremont’s high expenditure reflects both the enduring popularity of coffee and the willingness of residents to invest in quality, convenience, and variety in their caffeine consumption. Fremont’s coffee culture also aligns with the national shift toward frequent coffee shop visits and the purchase of home coffee-making equipment.

Jacobsen: What is the reason for the significant difference in the number of coffee and tea manufacturers between Portland, Oregon, and Tulsa, Oklahoma?

Lupo: Portland, Oregon, and Tulsa, Oklahoma, have a notable disparity in coffee and tea manufacturers, largely because of each city’s unique culture and local demand for coffee. Portland’s deep-rooted coffee culture places it at the top of WalletHub’s coffee cities, with high rankings in affordable, top-rated coffee shops per capita and popular coffee-centric events, which contributes to its thriving local coffee manufacturing industry. In contrast, Tulsa, which ranks 62nd overall, has less demand and infrastructure geared toward coffee and, as a result, fewer manufacturers.

Jacobsen: What practical tips can coffee enthusiasts follow to enjoy their daily cup within budget?

Lupo: Coffee lovers seeking a budget-friendly way to enjoy their beverages should consider brewing at home. Currently, about 30% of households already own coffee makers. Additionally, investing in a quality machine can save a substantial amount of money over time compared to frequent coffee shop visits. Start with regular coffee brands at grocery stores, and as your skills improve, you may then explore gourmet brands to elevate your coffee home-brewing experience.

Additionally, cities such as Austin and San Antonio offer affordable coffee packs for home brewing, with prices lower than coastal cities like San Francisco. If you prefer the café atmosphere, focus on affordable spots rated 4.5 stars or higher, especially in coffee-centric cities like Portland or Seattle, which boast several budget-friendly options.

Jacobsen: What are the potential challenges and opportunities for entrepreneurs aiming to open a coffee business?

Lupo: Entrepreneurs exploring the coffee business must navigate an evolving landscape filled with both challenges and exciting opportunities. On the one hand, fierce competition from established brands and trends can make it difficult to stand out, while the high cost of quality equipment and location can strain budgets. Furthermore, deciding where to invest time and resources can be challenging amidst a rapidly changing industry, as the buzz around the latest products and flavours may not always lead to lasting customer interest.

However, the industry’s robust demand and the growing focus on unique coffee experiences provide solid opportunities. Home-brewing trends and DIY roasting communities are expanding, which may allow entrepreneurs to tap into niche markets.

Jacobsen: What are the main coffee and tea marketing and industry trends anticipated for 2024?

Lupo: Several interesting trends are expected to shape the coffee and tea industry in 2024, including a strong focus on personalization, with many brands marketing unique flavours to attract Gen Z consumers. Sustainability is also a key theme, as companies are starting to prioritize transparency and ethical sourcing. Additionally, the use of digital technology and automation is set to increase, which helps cafes maintain consistency while allowing baristas to focus more on their craft. Finally, small-batch retail options for hobbyist roasters may be on the rise as more people brew coffee at home.

Jacobsen: What is the projected future of the U.S. retail coffee market?

Lupo: The U.S. retail coffee market is expected to evolve significantly, with increased emphasis on innovative flavors and sustainable practices, while also embracing technology to enhance the customer experience.

Jacobsen: How might emerging consumer experiences and technological advancements influence the industry?

Lupo: Emerging consumer experiences, such as personalized coffee offerings and immersive tasting events, combined with technological advancements such as mobile ordering and AI-driven recommendations, are likely to reshape the coffee industry. These trends will enhance customer engagement, streamline operations, and create unique brand experiences, which will ultimately drive growth and increase loyalty in a highly competitive market.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Thomas G. Plante, Ph.D., ABPP, on Intimacy and Narcissism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/12

Thomas G. Plante, Ph.D., ABPPis the Augustin Cardinal Bea, S.J. University Professor, professor of psychology, and by courtesy, religious studies and the Jesuit School of Theology at Santa Clara University and directs the Applied Spirituality Institute. He is a scholar in residence of the Markkula Center for Applied Ethics, the largest applied ethics center in the world. Additionally, he is an emeritus adjunct clinical professor of psychiatry and behavioural sciences at Stanford University School of Medicine. He currently serves as editor of the APA journal, Spirituality in Clinical Practice. He is an APA fellow (in Divisions 12, 36, 38, 46, and 47) and served on APA’s Council of Representatives (2016-21). He has published 29 books, including Living Ethically in an Unethical World (2024), Spiritually Informed Therapy (2024), Sexual Abuse in the Catholic Church: A Decade of Crisis, 2002-2012 (2011), and Contemporary Clinical Psychology, Fourth Edition (2022). He has published over 250 journal articles and book chapters and writes and maintains a private clinical practice as a licensed psychologist in Menlo Park, CA. He has been frequently featured in most major national and international media outlets. Time Magazine featured him in 2005 and referred to him in a 2002 cover story about clerical abuse as one of “three leading American Catholics.” He served as vice-chair of the National Review Board for the Protection of Children and Youth for the U.S. Conference of Catholic Bishops and other child protection Church review boards. He received an undergraduate degree in psychology from Brown University, an M.A. and PhD in clinical psychology from the University of Kansas, and completed his clinical internship and postdoctoral fellowship in clinical and health psychology at Yale University.

Plante discusses narcissism in American culture, its impact on relationships, and how online environments exacerbate self-presentation issues. They explored different narcissistic types, the erosion of community values, and coping strategies for narcissism, emphasizing early intervention and fostering healthy environments for children.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Thomas Plante. Do you pronounce the “e” at the end, or is it just flat?

Professor Thomas Plante: Just “Plant.” 

Jacobsen: Well, today we’re here with Thomas Plante, apology, to discuss narcissism and relationships, along with some recent technological developments that have transformed how people relate to even the most intimate aspects of life. When you look at the landscape of narcissism and intimacy, who do you see as the first social victims of narcissism, and what elements of intimacy tend to get knocked down a bit?

Plante: The challenge is that our culture, at least in America—I can’t speak for other cultures, but certainly in America—focuses more and more on the theme, “It’s all about me.” What’s in my best interest? What pleases me? What do I want? Even with dating and dating apps, people have their checklists—this is what I want—almost like a checklist for qualities you’d want in a car, a house, or food at a restaurant.

The problem is that when we nurture a narcissistic culture, it creates problems for intimacy and the give-and-take in a quality, long-term, satisfying relationship. If it’s all about me, then it’s not about us, and that causes significant problems. So, I think the major dilemma is that as we continue to nurture and support narcissistic qualities in our culture, including how we raise children, we reduce the ability to negotiate the give-and-take necessary for a fulfilling, intimate, long-term relationship.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: To be subtle here in terms of clarification on “give-and-take, you don’t mean scorekeeping but simply the regular reciprocity found in a healthy union, correct?

Thomas Plante: Yes.

Jacobsen: The same principle applies to friendships, business relationships, or any healthy orientation of any social dynamic.

Plante: It should. We always have to remind ourselves. The world doesn’t revolve around us. We might like it too. It just doesn’t. The more that we are in touch with each other, the more we are here in the community. Now, some cultures do this much better than others. For example, a few weeks ago, I was in Japan. Talking to people there, they shared that nobody wants to stand out and be unique; everyone wants to fit in. Watching crowds coming out of the Tokyo subway, dressed the same, heading to work—it’s very different from America, where narcissistic culture is on steroids. It’s about give-and-take and being mindful and attentive to others’ needs, which becomes harder and harder for people.

Jacobsen: Does the online space affect this too? Things like alternate personas, pseudonyms, anonymity, in terms of the things people are willing to say, ask at one another, if not to one another. 

Plante: People do remarkable things from the safety of their computers without having to actually confront people in a personal way. People can be incredibly nasty. People can present themselves in a certain way that is absolutely not based on reality. They can do that all from the comfort of their own computer, wherever they’re located. That’s a huge problem. The other problem with social media is the fact that we’re always engaging in these social comparisons. So there’s a lot of research about upward and downward social comparisons, and people can present themselves as everybody is just great and wonderful and having a fabulous time. That makes people feel bad, and because of these upward comparisons. So, they’re more likely to then want to compensate for that by trying to pump up their own self-presentation. Then you get into an arms race about who’s more fabulous and wonderful and brilliant and whatever. This makes everything worse. 

Jacobsen: I haven’t actually thought about this one. Are there areas of narcissism in American culture that are more presenting of a super duper self than others? So, I’m not just generic; I’m better than everyone and everything, and in every quality, I have more specific aspects, smarts, and looks–I don’t know. 

Plante: First off, we have to understand that there are different kinds of narcissism out there. There are different flavours. Some people are more benign narcissists who want all the attention. They like attention. They like to think of themselves in a favourable way and present themselves in a favourable way, but they’re not trying to hurt anybody. They’re not trying to push anybody down. Those are more benign narcissists. Then we have these what we might call phallic narcissists who are like they need to not only feel great but need to push other people down, insult, bully, and try to make other people feel bad.

Then we have what we call the malignant narcissist, for example, which tends to be the most dangerous, which some people would say that some American politicians suffer from–where they have this combination of narcissism, paranoia, and antisocial personality, which means that not only does the world revolve around them; they think that everybody’s out to get them. They’re willing to lie and cheat and steal. It doesn’t matter because the ends justify the means. There’s no empathy for anybody else. Those are the most dangerous kind.

So, there are a lot of different flavours of narcissism comes in different flavours. There may be what we call comorbidity with that narcissism. In other words, other kinds of psychiatric problems are associated with this person or whatever other than just narcissism. So, we have to be kind of thoughtful about that. We have to kinda be mindful that the thing is, is that and it’s hard for people. We have to put ourselves in other people’s shoes. That’s really hard for a lot of people to do. 

Jacobsen:” Let’s take a direct question in inverse order, just for fun. If you were to take the common characteristics of a healthy person, psychology, psychological structure, and relationship, and then you were to look at an unhealthy person, in terms of what we’re talking about with regards to narcissism. What are the factors that are most key to identifying healthy versus unhealthy? So, looking at narcissism but trying to emphasize the more constructive, positive, healthy versions of people.

Plante: A certain degree of narcissism, self-interest or whatever, is important for survival. For example, I teach ethics. I’ve been teaching ethics for 35 years at Stanford and 30 years at Santa Clara University. When we ask students over three and a half decades to talk about how they decide to solve problems and ethical challenges, egoism, which is basically a kind of narcissism, is always part of the equation. They’re always gonna consider the egoism or the narcissistic view about “what’s in my best interest?”.

And that in and of itself isn’t necessarily so bad. Some ethicists will say that egoism can actually be a good thing. It can be for a variety of reasons. But can we temper that within with other principles that can operate, like the common good, like putting yourself in other people’s shoes, cooperation and collaboration and so forth? So, a little bit of narcissism isn’t necessarily so bad.

It’s just that when it sucks all the air out of the room. That’s when it’s particularly problematic. So I think there are a couple of ways of thinking about this. So, for example, if we can see our other people, I know it’s hard for people as family, brothers and sisters or something like that. If we could see the sacred in them, if we can see the importance in them, something like that, then we’re more likely to treat people well. Now, some people are able to do this, and we have to be thoughtful about this.

They can say, “Well, look. I benefit when I treat other people well, because then I have a good reputation. People like me. People cooperate with me.” Lots of times people can come to appreciate that they get a lot out of treating other people well and respectfully and all of that.

So, in some respects, sometimes we might call that altruism that is in the service of narcissism. It can, so somebody might say, “Hey, look, I’m treating people very well, and people love me, and they think the world of me, and that makes me feel good.” Maybe that’s not so bad. 

Jacobsen: What would you consider, in essence, a healthy countercultural relationship? 

Plante: That’s hard. Are we talking about it? It depends, at least. 

Jacobsen: That’s a good point. It was a pretty general question. I’ll rephrase. What would you do if we had a rising measurement of either self-perception or objectively identified narcissism? This changes the culture more towards unhealthy relationships. People think more about me rather than we, et cetera. So what would you characterize, given that the current culture is like that, as a counterculture relationship? What would you consider a healthy one, where people are treating each other decently, benevolently, with a give-and-take/with reciprocity, thinking of the general commons and their own ‘commons of 2’–as I call it–and so on?

Plante: Yes. I think it can be very refreshing, very refreshing when you do bump into people like that, communities like that, where they’re sort of being very gracious to one another, taking care of each other, have other people’s best interests in mind and stuff like that. So I think what helps with that is if you can have smaller communities that seem to nurture and support that. Now, so as an example, people may have found that in their religious communities over the years, their religious-spiritual communities.

They may have found people with a like mind. People have shared values or something like that. They may have found intimate relationships outside of those communities and matchmaking situations in these communities, and that wasn’t necessarily a bad thing. The other thing is that people used to not move around so much. Now, people move around all the time, across the country, the world, and so forth, so they don’t kind of hang around people that they grew up with.

And you’re just very much a part of the community. It doesn’t have to be religious; it could be set completely secular, but you’re part of a community where people know each other again, and they take care of each other and things like that. We seem to have lost that because people first move around a lot. Secondly, more and more people are not affiliated with any kind of spiritual or religious kinda community that keeps them together and takes care of one another and all of that. So there are so many now kinda lone rangers, if you wanna call it that, lone rangers. So where do they go to find community?

Maybe their yoga class. Where do they go? And so I think it’s really hard. When you don’t have that community, then you don’t not only do you not have certain values and things like that that are being reinforced and so forth. You don’t have people kind of watching out for you. You don’t have people who are vetting for you, so when people are dating, for example, through anonymous apps and stuff like that.

There’s really no vetting process there. Whereas if you’re part of a community, people know each other, they know the scoop, they can fill each other in on who’s behaving and who’s not behaving, who’s been naughty, who’s been nice, or something like that. So we’ve lost that. It’s unfortunate, but I think we need to somehow find a way for contemporary society to try to get that back. 

Jacobsen: We have a rising secular community or, better yet, a demographic rise.

Secular communities: What about people who are trying to do that in a small way, with things like Sunday assemblies, ethical and cultural movements, and humanist communities and societies? Do those do you meet the same sustainability standards? 

Plante: I don’t think they do, to be honest.

I understand that those attempts, those attempts, that they’ve tried to do that kind of thing, but I tend to think that most of those things have kind of fizzled out. They’re not that sustainable. That also seems to be true for these spiritual-religious communities that tend to have very little dogma, very little tradition, or something like that. For example, the Unitarians tend not to have that many churchgoers; you could say that they are long-term sustainable. Now, it’s kind of a tough one because a lot of the religious and spiritual communities have been suffering with fewer and fewer attendees. Certainly, the pandemic really put the kibosh on a lot of that.

It was already declining. It really declined quite, quite significantly. In fact, Gallup has done polling for many, many years in this regard. If you ask people, have you been to some kind of a religious, spiritual service in the past seven days? People historically, about 40% of the American population said yes. Then that went down to 30%, but that’s based on self-report.

And if you actually look at the people who actually show up, that 30% turns into 15%. So it keeps kind of going down. The spiritual and religious communities may have their issues, but they’ve got a long-standing tradition and so forth that have sustained these communities over decades, centuries, and even millennia. Some of these newer communities. I don’t think they’ve been very sustainable. So, I think we have to find some way to create or nurture more contemporary communities that, maybe, have some of the benefits of some of these ancient traditions but are modernized in a certain way.

In fact, I just published an article recently in one of the professional journals about how you have to change or die and that some of these communities. Unless, they’re willing to look at themselves and make some changes, may just die on the vine. For example, there’s an article in this week’s New Yorker Magazine that talks about shakers. There’s only apparently, there’s only 2 shakers left: 2. Or just the New Yorker article.

It’s a tradition, that that is certainly dying. That can that can happen to many other traditions too. They’re not careful. 

Jacobsen: Then we have the elephants in the digital room. What has online pornography done through dating dating and mating?

Plante: Yes, that’s a very good question. There’s some good research about that; I’ve got patients in my private practice over the years who have had some troubles with that.

The pornography thing is a problem for a couple of reasons. First off, young people and kids that’s how they’re learning about sex and some relationships and sexuality through online pornography. In fact, the New York Times actually, the New York Times Magazine had a big feature article. I don’t know. Maybe it was a year or two ago on this very issue.

Basically, this makes the argument that this is how people are learning about sex through pornography. That’s not a very good way to learn about sex and relationships. Then, people who are engaging in online or other kinds of pornography can have an addictive element where they need more and more excitement in order to meet their satisfaction needs. So things can get a little bit out of hand there. Then, when they try to maintain or start a regular relationship, they can find it boring compared to what they’ve seen online.

So, I do worry about online pornography for a wide variety of reasons. I’ve had a number of patients in my practice who have really struggled with it, where it had been quite damaging for their attempts at finding satisfactory, normal kind of regular relationships. Some of these folks have gotten themselves in trouble. They’ve had it on their work computer. They have had child pornography pop up. 

Jacobsen: Oh my gosh.

Plante: Which is illegal, of course. So, once you start walking down that road, I don’t think it generally ends very well. 

Jacobsen: If you were to characterize the ethic of a narcissistic person or culture, in fact, individual and collective, what would be that ethic? 

Plante: The ethic. The ethic is like, “It’s all about me.” It’s just the rallying cry if you will. It’s all about me. There was once a wonderful I. It reminds me of a line from a movie a number of years ago with Bette Midler. When she plays this role, she’s very narcissistic. She’s talking about herself, talking about herself. Then she finally pauses and says, “Oh, enough about me. What do you think about me?”

Jacobsen: [Laughing]. 

Plante: And it was kind of funny because there’s so much truth to that. You think about it.

You probably know people in your life. I certainly know plenty of people in my life who are more than happy to talk about themselves, and they’re whatever, but they never ever ask you a question about yourself. It just doesn’t happen. So, unless you bring something up, they will not ask. And if you do bring something up, then, about yourself or you start to tell a story or whatever, their eyes glass over, or they start looking around or something like that. And that’s part of our culture. So, I think the rallying cry is all about me. It really isn’t if that can only be damaging to satisfactory relationships. 

Jacobsen: How has Professor Jean Twenge’s research played into this? I am aware of a number of people who reference her work. 

Plante: I know I know of her work. It’s down in San Diego. She does great work, has a lot of good quality publications, gets a lot of press, and so forth. So, I think, yes, people do pay attention to her work. It does underscore, particularly young people’s, way of being today. Because she does focus primarily on young people, I think she does great work and research, and you certainly hear a lot about it.

Jacobsen: How does the self-absorption of a narcissist differ from a person who tends to find more meaning, value, value, and sustainability of self-concept from being alone more than from being in a community? So they like people. They have nothing wrong with people. They have no social deficits. They’re just more introverted in terms of their spacing.

Plante: Yes, that’s fine. It’s fine because, certainly, America, at least American culture, kind of pulls for extroversion. It’skind of funny because I do a lot of psychological evaluations for people who want to become clerics. They wanna become priests, nuns, or deacons in the Roman Catholic, Episcopalian, or Orthodox churches.

I do a lot of, well over 1,000 of, these. So, we complete the psychological evaluation and testing. A lot of people will say that they experience themselves as introverted. But when you look at the testing, they’re not. They don’t come out introverted compared to national norms. I have experienced an awful lot with people who, because our culture really pulls for extroversion, think they’re very introverted, but they’re just like everybody else.

It’s just that extroverts get so much attention and are reinforced in our culture. So there’s nothing wrong with those who tend to be more introverted and interested in more alone time than others. They get to recharge their batteries by being by themselves as opposed to being with other people. There is that well-known author, Susan Cain, who wrote a very popularbook called Quiet, which talks about life as a narcissist. I think it got an awful lot of press, and a lot of introverts kind ofcame out of the woodwork after that book was published.

But no, there’s nothing. Folks who are introverted are not necessarily narcissistic. They just need that kind of alone time to kind of recharge their batteries and feel more comfortable. That’s perfectly fine. Hopefully, they can find pathways in relationships, careers, and so forth that are suitable for their personality type.

Jacobsen: What have you seen in your practice as the most extreme cases of narcissism in terms of just interpersonal dealings? What comes to mind? What stories can you tell without any identifying material that you could talk about publicly? 

Plante: Yes, you certainly have to be thoughtful about confidentiality and all of that. You have to be careful not to disclose too much when you’re in this business. But, no, I’ve certainly had patients who are narcissistic on steroids. They’ve said some pretty amazing things. I can remember one couple I was seeing; they were engaged, but they were not yet married. They were having some conflict. He said right in front of her that he thinks about cars and that his fiancee is like a Volvo, very reliable and very stable.

But he’s the kind of guy that needs a Porsche now and then. He was trying to say that she was; she’s a great wife in terms of keeping things stable, but he needs some more excitement. Monogamy may be hard for him, so that was pretty remarkable. Another patient was gonna boycott her son’s wedding.

Jacobsen: [Laughing]. 

Plante: She didn’t like who he was going to get married to. When you kind of unpack why she was so upset with the person her son was gonna marry, basically, she said, when you kind of really get to it, “Because she’s not just like me. She’s not just like me.”

Jacobsen: Horrifying. 

Plante: Her son should marry somebody just like me.

Jacobsen: So, she was gonna boycott the wedding. Luckily, she ultimately did not boycott the wedding with a littleencouragement on my part. But there’s another guy. He got himself in trouble. He caused a scene. He was a college student who caused a kind of scene where he ended up throwing those big water coolers that are pretty big.

He was having a conflict with a secretary or admin in an office building or something. He was a customer. He got upset, so he ended up pulling one of those things out and throwing it at her. 

Jacobsen: Oh my.

Plante: When I asked, he said, “Well, she deserved it. She wasn’t giving me what I wanted.” 

And, you’re like, “Okay. All right. We have a lot of work to do here.” So, here I live in Silicon Valley. I live and work in Silicon Valley in Northern California. You’ve got it: a lot of these very successful tech. Executives, and so forth, are notorious for their narcissistic tendencies. And they can really create a lot of damage among those who either live with or work closely with them. So here, certainly in Silicon Valley, narcissism is very much reinforced, especially when people are so successful. They’re billionaires or close to it, and they feel like everything they do and say is a gift from God.

Jacobsen: Being mindful of time here. When you have people who come to you, one or both partners are narcissistic; in terms of treatment modalities, how much can you attenuate overall narcissism? Also, the subcomponents of what we call narcissism in a clinical setting, a therapeutic setting, can be diminished or even eliminated–differing opinions. 

Plante: Yes, because people, as they develop and get a little older and whatnot, just become who they are for the most part; people don’t change their personality very much once it’s kind of solidified. So if someone comes to me and they’re in their twenties, thirties, forties, as opposed to being little kids or something, basically, your goal is to try to help them develop the strategies, the coping skills, and so forth, that can help them cope and manage with who they are as opposed to radical change who they are.

That’s typically the goal. So when when so it’s trying to help them develop skills, strategies, feedback mechanisms, and so forth, that can help put the brakes on some of the impulses that they have to act in a narcissistic grandiose way. So, again, you’re not really trying to cure them. You’re trying to help them cope. Some things, in the psychiatric psychological world, you can kind of fix and some things you can’t.

Really, it’s about coping. Certainly when it comes to personality styles or personality disorders or anything like that, it’s really more about coping than curing. 

Jacobsen: It’s unfortunate. But if the evidence goes there, then we follow up. 

Plante: Right. Right. I think early intervention is always helpful because you see this stuff starting to unfold early in the game. Usually, people don’t wake up at age 40, and all of a sudden, they become narcissists. Usually, you can kind of see this coming. So, it’s helpful if you can try to engage in early intervention. Also, as I say, it takes a village here. When you think about it, it’s not just psychotherapy or anything like that that can that can help. It takes a lot of different things. So when I think of my own son, my own son is 28 years old.

I think he’s a great guy. I think he’s a wonderful guy. You think about, “Okay, how he became who he is? Well, certainly, part of it is genetics. Part of it is parenting, and part of it is the village that surrounds him. He was very active in Boy Scouts, and he was very active in music. He was very active in track and cross country. In some respects, you kind of shape people not only through culture and parenting but also the kind of community that surrounds them. I think we all have to be very thoughtful about that, if we’re parents or whatever, and be very mindful of what kind of communities we can surround our children with so that they can be good human beings.

So, for example, as I mentioned, my son was really into Boy Scouts. I was not a kid myself. Even to this very day, including a few hours ago, whenever I text him, I always text him an eagle emoji to remind him that he’s an Eagle Scout and should behave as such. I’ve been doing this ever since he went off to college. Literally, every time I text him, I alwaystext him an eagle as a little reminder that this is who you are. Embrace, embrace that. This is just a friendly reminder.

Jacobsen: Thomas, thank you very much for your time. I appreciate it. 

Plante: Sure. I’m always happy to help.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Nasser and Baran Yousefi: The Peace School

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/11

The Peace School is new in Canada, founded and accredited by the Ontario Ministry of Education in 2023. Currently, the school has five children with a capacity for 120 and is well-financed and supported by the parents whose children attend. The school’s pedagogy has attracted the attention and support of UNICEF, UNESCO, and UNHCR, which strongly encouraged Dr. Nasser Yousefi, the Principal of The Peace School, to share his pedagogy and learning environment with other countries. Canada was Dr. Yousefi’s first choice for the next Peace School. Dr. Yousefi began his career as a child psychologist, studying in Sweden and earning a Master’s in Education in Childhood Growth and Development. In his exploration of the best pedagogy and learning environment for children, Dr. Yousefi completed a PhD in Educational Approaches at Madonna University in Italy and a PhD in Educational Psychology at Northwest University in the USA. This training combined humanistic and cognitive approaches to education. For many years, Dr. Yousefi was an educational consultant for UNICEF. He has conducted educational and research activities for various groups of children, including immigrant children, minorities, street children, and children with special needs. Dr. Yousefi was the Principal of the Peace (Participatory) School in Tehran, Iran, from 2005 to 2023, graduating 500 students from kindergarten to high school, with graduates accepted at universities in Europe, America, and Canada. Dr. Yousefi is passionate about creating the best future for children and is dedicated to creating safe and nurturing learning environments based on holistic principles. 

Nasser discusses the humanistic educational model, emphasizing its difference from mainstream education. Humanistic schools focus on student empowerment, freedom of choice, and collaboration rather than passive learning and competition. They integrate societal events, personal experiences, and cultural backgrounds into the curriculum to foster well-rounded development. While often criticized for isolating students, The Peace School promotes active engagement with the community, offering field trips and diverse perspectives to encourage critical thinking and personal growth.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: How do you get funding for these educational efforts in the Islamic Republic of Iran? 

Dr. Nasser Yousefi and Baran Yousefi: So, all are provided by the tuition. We didn’t have any extra funding or financial support. The school was supervised by an NGO in Iran. The school was a project of this NGO. The NGO provided all the educational programming and everything else. Nothing came from outside the school; it was all within the NGO and the school system.

Sometimes, we held events to provide fun activities, like concerts or art exhibitions, and all the funds gathered from these events were used exclusively for the school. Most of the support and help we received came from volunteers. Many of our operations, educational programs, research, and even teacher training were handled by volunteers. We needed to pay only for basic things, like the rent for the building and our full-time teachers.

Everything we paid for was solely for the students. Aside from the building and salaries, everything else was handled by volunteers. Research, planning, and everything else were done voluntarily. The parents whose children were enrolled in the school also helped. We wanted the parents to be part of the whole system and to participate. When they helped and supported the school, it became important to them. Sometimes, we would ask if they had a party room in their building for events or meetings, if they could help with transportation or field trips, or volunteered for library operations. Anything that could reduce our expenses. The whole project was so interesting to them that they wanted to be involved.

They were so excited about the whole project and the school concept that they didn’t wait for us to ask for help; they did it themselves. One of the school’s principles was that we believed the whole community was our school. We could use community resources as learning opportunities for our students rather than building or creating new opportunities. We always used available resources provided by families, whether they worked in a company, factory, vet clinic, or lab.

Those opportunities were the best for our students to learn something new. It also decreased our expenses and created more learning opportunities. It helped us create a culture of utilizing available community resources for children. Instead of building something ourselves, we used what we already had. This model could be used in any city, not just the capital or larger cities. It could work in any city based on available resources and people. Looking at it broadly, there are many opportunities for schools to use for their students. It doesn’t mean we must create them; they are already available.

This approach also allowed us to have multiple field trips and use community resources. All the libraries in the city were our schools. All the museums were our school. Every company, factory, and store became part of our learning environment. We viewed the entire city as a learning opportunity. It meant that everyone in society was a teacher for us. The museum guide, or guides, yes. They would have been the best teachers, especially for the Museum of History. Or people who worked at the laboratory.

They were the best teachers for biology. We were open to other people becoming our teachers. We were fearless of letting more people join our team and welcomed them as much as possible. Everyone in Tehran, where we were based, was very welcoming to our students and the school. We wanted to hear from them because we respected their talents, abilities, and everything. We wanted them to be the experts in some situations, and they did everything they could for us. That’s why we never encountered any closed doors from the people.

We did face situations where the government closed doors for us, but people were very open and welcoming.

Jacobsen: A few things come to mind. This will be the shortest of the three I have in mind. When people own a school or the educational system and participate that way, did they adopt a motto or slogan within the school?

Yousefi: Yes, the founders had a motto. The school slogan was “Make the world a better place.” The teachers never expected anything specific from the students but always asked them to improve the world for themselves and others, regardless of their jobs or careers.

Yes, it doesn’t matter what job or career you follow; you can improve the world. You are not allowed to hurt anyone or make someone else suffer. You need to love others and show empathy and compassion. We tried to teach love and empathy. As teachers and adults, we don’t have much to teach students, but we can spread love to them.

Regarding the concerts and other fundraising efforts, we raised funds to reduce operating costs and lower parents’ fees. These concerts were private and not publicly announced. Generally, anyone is allowed to hold a concert, but for larger public events, they need a permit from the government. For us, it was different. Women, for example, are not allowed to perform publicly. Our fundraising concerts were all private and spread by word of mouth.

This touches on the third question, which might require a longer response. We did face some pressure and pushback from the government. The main issue was that they didn’t recognize us as a school. This meant we couldn’t give any diplomas or certificates to our students. So that was one of the issues, yes. The government wants every school to follow its curriculum and textbooks, and the same textbooks are used across the country. It doesn’t matter where the school is; every student has to read the same textbook.

That was one of the main issues and pushbacks. One of our biggest challenges was that the government only believed in one system and approach. They didn’t even allow an alternative approach to be considered. However, we wanted to continue promoting different and multiple approaches and methods worldwide, and we believed we had to at least look at them. We wanted to promote and support diversity rather than singularity, but the government needed help.

They wanted their system and approach to be seen and recognized. It doesn’t matter where you live in Iran, whether in the north, south, east, or west; everyone has to read the same textbook. It doesn’t consider their cultural, religious, or political backgrounds. Everyone has to read the same textbook and take the same exams. However, we must consider the child’s cultural background, history, language, stories, and even religion in their educational program. Iran has a diversity of religions and languages, and we can’t ignore this diversity. You can speak up to one language when there are various languages. In the humanistic approach, we must consider this diversity and these differences. We wanted to do this, and we tried to do it. Of course, we still try to do it, but the government doesn’t support it.

Jacobsen: So, no political violence was enacted against any of you, the students, the teachers, or the families. Is that correct?

Yousefi: Violence in the sense that we might usually imagine? No, because we were conducting a research project. The development of this alternative method over twenty years was a massive research project. We always told government organizations that we were implementing a research project to expand educational diversity. We always spoke as a group of specialists. However, I believe that the fact we were never officially recognized and our students were unable to receive an official diploma is itself a form of violence.

Jacobsen: When you’re in a highly religiously controlled society, and everyone, regardless of background, has to take these examinations and follow the educational curriculum, what is in it? What do people have to learn? Is it anything connected to the real world? Which parts are useful, and which are nonsense that train people to be effective citizens in a theocracy?

Yousefi: The focus of the schools is, after all, the promotion and expansion of religious thought, specifically introducing students to Islamic teachings. However, Iran is a country rich in diverse religions, where followers of different faiths have lived together in peace for centuries. When the official education system ignores this diversity and doesn’t provide opportunities for dialogue among followers of various religions, ethnicities, or minorities, diversity and plurality are ultimately lost. Of course, followers of religions like Christianity, Judaism, Zoroastrianism, and others had their own schools that only enrolled students of their faith. However, there was no interaction between students of different religions within the official education system. 

Jacobsen: As part of the curriculum, are kids taught things that aren’t useful, like prayer and other religious practices, that might be meaningful to the parents but not necessarily effective for dealing with the realities of life when they grow up?

Yousefi: In mainstream schools, there are subjects for religion and prayer. We don’t know exactly how parents feel because we aren’t in contact with parents from mainstream schools, but we hear they aren’t very satisfied with what’s happening. We also hear that sometimes their children practice something at school but something else at home, leading to conflicts.

They only study and read to pass exams. They don’t necessarily believe what they study. This isn’t limited to religious subjects; it includes history, literature, geography, and even science and social sciences. Students memorize the textbooks to pass exams. The textbooks include stories in literature that students have to read, but these are only sometimes the books they choose when they go to the library. We wanted to connect school and personal life, not separate them. It wasn’t easy; being honest with yourself and your education while maintaining balance was hard.

Jacobsen: Does the mainstream educational system make any distinctions between Sunni, Shia, Ahmadi, or Quranist interpretations of Islam, or is it all one version?

Yousefi: No, it only talks about Islam in a general sense. Discussions around Zoroastrianism and other faiths are not included. The government has its version of Islam that it promotes. It could be more realistic and accurate; it’s just something the government developed.

Jacobsen: A friend of mine is a cosmologist at UBCO and Lethbridge. He’s a Quranist Muslim. We’ve been discussing interfaith topics for a long time. He’s big on interfaith dialogues and humanistic interpretations of Islam, which might appeal to secularized individuals. However, this isn’t that. I’m a minor figure doing administrative stuff for them, but the Canadian Quantum Research Center has a decent number of citations. 

Jacobsen: Let’s contrast what was described with the mainstream system’s method and how it doesn’t recognize anything other than a single worldview, and not in an educational sense when I’m thinking about it. They’re taking it as true rather than a secularized world religions class, where they teach what people believe and let you decide for yourself. It’s much different. They’ve pre-decided for you. What’s your humanistic approach to this? 

Yousefi: We consider religion to be part of a child’s background. Many Persian poems have roots in Islam, Zoroastrianism, or even Judaism. So, when you want to learn about Rumi or Hafez, you must also learn about those roots. For example, you can’t understand Hafez’s poems if you don’t know the Torah stories or Rumi’s poems without knowledge of the Quran. The same applies to Eastern countries. If you don’t know the Bible, you can’t fully understand Victor Hugo’s or Charles Dickens’s stories.

Talking about the Bible, Quran, or Torah is necessary to understand literature and poetry. It doesn’t mean we are promoting that religion. Rather, it’s about understanding the culture and history needed to grasp something else. The same goes for science. Some scientific concepts have come from Eastern or Western positions or even how we look at evolution. There are different narratives about evolution rooted in religion. Discussing a scientist or physician doesn’t mean we are endorsing their religious views. We are discussing their ideas and theories. We only focus on religion as a background context. We don’t have a specific subject for religion, but we touch on it to explain the backstory of other topics. If a student is curious about a religion, we open up, considering it a great learning opportunity. But we always respect all religions and those who follow them. We are one of the rare schools with diverse religions, but we never promote any particular one.

We always help students learn more about a religion if they have questions. Some families specifically asked us not to talk about any religion, especially in Iran. However, we could only say yes if a child was interested in learning about Islam or any other religion . We respected their curiosity and taught them about it without promoting it.

In the context of Iran, if you advocate for something other than Islam, there could be negative consequences. But we never wanted to advocate for a specific religion because it would mean we couldn’t respect others. We wanted to allow students from other religions to speak freely and be heard. One year, the students themselves asked for a class on religion. We had a program to introduce each religion without advocating for any. We also explained that some people are atheists and don’t believe in any religion. We focused on diversity, saying, “This is it,” rather than limiting ourselves to one viewpoint.

This approach wasn’t limited to religion. It extended to literature and music as well. Some schools only teach one genre of music or one instrument. We introduced different genres and instruments, even challenging ones. We aimed to discuss the best examples in each genre across subjects like arts and science.

If a school restricts everything to one religion or genre, it restricts diversity. We encouraged students to love their country and respect other countries, lands, and nationalities. We never advocated for nationalism or exclusivity.

Jacobsen: So, that’s good. This last response will be helpful for those in Canada who may have a stereotype of what Iran is like. There’s this ghostly governmental presence that restricts everyone in every way. Can you describe the humanistic model of education, whether about politics, religion or anything else, in a compact way as something like individualistic cosmopolitanism for learning about a wide range of human identities and truths about the world in a semi-autonomous direction?

Yousefi: I am not a representative of the Iranian government, and my educational and research work was never approved by the government. Therefore, I cannot say what the public schools were thinking or what they expected from this education. Whatever it was, I was critical and opposed to the educational system.

Since the humanistic approach’s main objective is respect, it considers every person’s aspect and background. It allows people to talk about who they are today, helping them take the next steps. A humanistic teacher is not an ethics teacher; it’s not someone who judges people. It’s a person who accepts a child in every aspect, in every way possible.

For example, we consider children and see where they stand and what they bring from home, their past, their background, their culture, and everything else. But we don’t judge that child and their background. They will never trust us again if we judge them or share their dreams or thoughts. So, we need to accept them as they are, wherever they are, so we can help them take the next steps toward the future.

A humanistic teacher needs to correct the child immediately. We wait long enough to address their mistakes, issues, or misunderstandings. Sometimes, students come with a racist point of view, and we don’t stop them immediately. We listen and ask them to talk enough so we can understand where they need help. If we start to correct or judge them immediately, they will stop being honest with us and never share their thoughts. So, language, politics, religion, or nationality are not priorities for a humanistic education. What’s important is their characteristics, personalities, emotions, and understanding of the world; we must fully understand them to help them grow and develop. A humanistic teacher is more of a caregiver than a traditional teacher.

It’s someone who takes care of the children. We care about policies that support caring for students and children, whether it’s regulations, concepts, or theories. The world needs caregivers more than traditional teachers—not caregivers in the sense of caring for someone ill but someone who genuinely cares for children’s development and well-being. But that’s where I differ from a behaviourist teacher to a humanistic teacher. 

Jacobsen: Is there a risk in teaching students intellectual and analytical skills without a proportional development of emotional and social skills in students? A healthy development of the sentiments to make the intellectual and analytical skills more rounded.

Yousefi: It’s both the holistic approach and integrated education. Integrated education means we pay attention to the child’s needs immediately. You can’t say that you only focus on their cognitive development without paying attention to their nutrition or malnutrition. You can only focus on social skills by considering society’s rules and regulations. Cognitive psychology and behavioural psychology both caused the issue of segregating these needs. Cognitive psychology focuses only on cognitive needs and doesn’t consider emotional and social needs. 

Behavioural psychology only focuses on individual success and forgets that a child is a complex person with different developmental skills and needs. Paying attention to only one aspect and disregarding the others can be dangerous. It could be creativity, reasoning, or analyzing. We need to work on every need and aspect of a child at the right moment. If we skip paying attention to emotional and social needs, then we might end up with scientists who make bombs, promoting war and destruction.

Who’s making these bombs and weapons of mass destruction? It’s often those specialized individuals who lack emotional and social skills. They never had the opportunity to develop empathy and compassion. Yes, there are doctors and physicians involved in organ trafficking or mutilation who lack empathy. Where did they go to school? They might have attended very controlling and closed schools that forced them to think about war due to their conditions.

The world’s educational system fails to teach people to love each other and empathize; defending any war means going against humanity. Most of the workforce involved in the war, whether in the army, weapons factories, or transportation, attended schools that failed them. Teachers must answer how we taught them and who they became. It’s very sad and makes me emotional.

Jacobsen: Let’s shift topics so you don’t cry. Famously, Professor Noam Chomsky essentially destroyed B.F. Skinner’s behaviourism in an 8-page review article. This brought about the cognitive revolution, and humanistic psychology evolved from it. Rogers and other fundamental humanistic psychologists are dead. How has humanistic psychology and humanistic education evolved since its inception, so the cutting edge in the 2010s/2020s?

Yousefi: This person, Noam Chomsky, wasn’t the first to write against behaviourist education. He was one of the prominent critics. Maslow, Ferrier, Rogers, and Fromm were all critics of the behaviourist approach. People like Yalom and Pinker also criticize it. I am also a serious critic of behaviorism in my country. believe that we cannot easily overlook a system that harms the students’ psychology so much. We must raise our voices against behaviorist education.

Some people start questioning it when you shout negatively. I am  happy to have been among the few to question behaviourist education. It’s good when behaviourist psychologists and educational specialists hear this criticism. Yes, it’s like validation that you’re doing the right thing—not that you intended to, but you were compelled to.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Seth Meyers on Narcissistic Patterns and Phenomenology

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/11

Seth Meyers, Psy.D. (Psychology Today) is a licensed clinical psychologist, T.V. guest, author, and relationship expert. He appears regularly on television on “Nancy Grace” and has also appeared on “Dr. Drew,” “20/20,” “Good Morning America,” “The Doctors,” “Fox News,” Showbiz Tonight,” “Bill Cunningham,” “Jane Velez-Mitchell,” “The Early Show,” “Good Day L.A.,” “KTLA,” and others. He has been featured in The New York TimesUSA Today, and The Huffington Post. His official website includes many media credits and television clips. He wrote Dr. Seth’s Love Prescription: Overcome Relationship Repetition Syndrome and Find the Love You Deserve. His newest podcast, on Spotify and iTunes, is INSIGHT with Dr. Seth.

Meyers explains the complexities of treating narcissistic personality disorder (NPD), emphasizing the resistance to therapy due to narcissists’ lack of self-awareness and sensitivity to criticism. He discusses therapy options, the role of the false self, and the emotional toll on those close to narcissists, highlighting the frustration and self-erasure they often experience.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Seth Meyers. We want to get some first thoughts on treatment modalities for either formal NPD or people along a spectrum of narcissistic patterns of psychology. So, what are treatment modalities available? What is the efficacy? What are your general thoughts on that, as an expert here? 

Dr. Seth Meyers: Many individuals with mental health training will explain that a narcissistic personality is resistant to meaningful change. There are many different types of therapy that one could pursue for many different types of mental disorders, including personality disorders. One could seek out a behavioural type of therapy, such as dialectical behaviour therapy for the treatment of narcissistic personality, or one may seek out psychodynamic therapy, which is exploratory in nature to try to look at one’s unconscious drives, and motivations in order to see how that impacts their behaviour.

The same issue–let me put that differently; at root, narcissistic personality is a difficult disorder to study because it depends so much on the self-report of its subjects and because one’s self-image and presentation of self is central to the disorder, there is incredible loading or possibility for skewing and dishonest reporting. So, studying narcissism is much the experience of many reports of having a relationship with a severe Narcissist, which is to say, “Frustrating” because it is a complex construct that is difficult to truly examine. 

Jacobsen: Is the difficulty in truly examining it due to the longevity of the enriched falsehoods that build or construct the complexities of the false self? The false self starts early to replace the true self or the authentic self–as placeholder terms.Does the longevity of this false self-existence and development make it that complex construct? 

Meyers: So, to begin with, your question shows just how theoretical the construct of narcissism is. We have no ability toprove it. We will never prove the roots of narcissism.

Now, many people will talk about how there are two selves: a false self and a public self. As a practitioner and psychologist, I believe that. I also believe that we can glean that at some point in time, there was the construction of the bifurcation of 2 different selves. The problem is when it happened, it happened early, and that 6-year-old or 14-year-old probably wasn’t available to fill out any surveys that we could use later for psychological data reports. So we don’t know, and there’s a lot of inference.

There’s a lot of presumption that happens when we think about narcissists. What is most important whenever the conversation turns to narcissism is, “What can we say for sure? What can we say with the greatest certainty? And then what solutions are the best possible solutions given this, given what certainty we have”? What is most certain that we know is that people many people report having conflictual relationships with a subset of individuals who do not seem to have personality characteristics that are consistent with social convention and the social rules that young children are taught and then expected to have mastered by adult age, and those include basic things like empathy, social reciprocity, perspective taking, thinking about another person’s feelings.

We know for sure that there is a subset of individuals that display a lack of some of these important social characteristics, and yet, it does not necessarily translate to another subset of individuals we know of that we think of as full-blown psychopaths. And this subset that we are talking about is safe to call them–it is safe to refer to them as–narcissistic personalities because the DSM does do a good job of capturing those characteristics. Now, why does a person become a narcissist? We can only presume. Also, what is an effective treatment for a narcissist? Is there an effective treatment for a narcissist?

We’ll never have a good answer for that question a) because we would require an individual to believe that they have a problem in order to submit to treatment, and a part of the disorder is to resist the idea of there being any weakness or flaw. So, I’ll round out what I’m saying to say that another thing many people will share at the water cooler is that narcissists are never present for therapy, and this is common. This is conventional wisdom that narcissists don’t present for therapybecause they don’t believe anything is wrong with them. In my experience as a psychologist and as a practitioner, someone who has conducted and also reviewed 100, if not thousands, of complex mental assessments, mental health assessments over a 20-year career working in community mental health, hospitals, clinics, et cetera, that narcissistic personalities will actually sometimes present for therapy. Now, why do some narcissists go to treatment?

They do not go to treatment to correct problems they believe they have. They typically go because someone in their close personal life has bruised their ego, and what they do is they use the therapy and the therapist as a vehicle to ally with them and support them against the perceived threat or perpetrator who bruised their ego. Essentially, a narcissist may go to see a therapist to get the therapist to say, “Oh, you’re right. Your husband, or your wife, is crazy,” and sorry for talking so much.”

Jacobsen: It’s instructive. So they go to them for this validation of their false reality. 

Meyers: To be propped up, that false self to be propped up. 

Jacobsen: So when they’re doing this, are there ways in which ethically viable methodologies can leverage this pathology of that personality construct to provide a modicum of treatment?

Meyers: A meaningful question that is worth exploring is this one. If there is any way to reach a narcissist and possibly motivate change, what would that look like? The only hope for reaching a narcissist is to make them feel safe and to avoid anything at all that could even remotely be perceived as criticism. The narcissist is sensitive to criticism and hypersensitive to–hypersensitive in a way that almost reaches a state of clinical paranoia–that the slightest thing that could be wrong with them could act as dynamite because it could be used later as leverage against them. So a lot of what motivates the narcissist, what keeps them going, their guiding principle is to avoid vulnerability at all costs.

Narcissistic personalities tend to be scorekeepers, and the mental world they live in is all about who has the leverage. So exposing themselves and being vulnerable makes them terrified at root because they perceive it as an opening for someone to take advantage of them or exploit them, And they will not allow that under any circumstance. 

Jacobsen: So there’s a lot there. Fear is the emotion of vulnerability and living in terms of the mental mode and the presentation of a false self. So what links this root in fear reaction, something automatic, this false self, and this not wanting, this lack of desire–whatever the opposite of desire is for–any form of vulnerability?  So, the line of trend or thought is between linking both fear and not wanting any vulnerability. I guess the 4th one would be the extreme paranoia and the presentation of a false self in all ways. So let’s take a hypothetical–what happens if that person is, in fact, exposed and their illegitimate fears, in fact, do come true? What happens to this construct? 

Meyers: One of the deepest and most primitive fears that a severe narcissist will have is the fear of being exposed, and that means being exposed as a human being with three dimensions and both strengths and weaknesses. See, flaws are not to be tolerated in the mental world of a narcissist. They cannot exist.

A lot of people will say that narcissism is a shame-based disorder, that the root of it is shame, that a young person was shamed so badly early on that it created this overcompensated self later. It’s a theory. Do I believe that that’s true? In some cases, though, that may not have happened. So now what happened with narcissism is you had some people that created this term.

“Well, these are covert narcissists,” “Well, these are these are more traditional narcissists,” and then you’ve got another camp that talks about malignant narcissists. All of these different terms show you how complex we are as everyday people; you know how complex this term is. And again, how frustrating because the truth is all we have are theories. All we really have are theories. But to answer your question in an organized way, what happens to the severe narcissist when exposed?

When a severe narcissist’s character defects are exposed, any vulnerabilities or weaknesses are exposed and able to be seen by others, especially anyone outside the home. The individual who perpetrated that exposure will become the target of rage. What most people cannot begin to relate to is the lengths to which the narcissistic individual has spent their life, their time, their energy, their mornings, noons, and nights trying to seal off any possibility that someone may come to see them as faulty in any way. The progression, the natural automatic reaction, is rage. Now, is there something biologically based happening?

Is there different amygdala functioning in narcissists? At what age? See, what we would really need in in the best best of all possible worlds, we would have really elaborate batteries of testing done, on children at 5, at 10, at 15, at 25. That way, then we could have a little better sense of the true roots of narcissism. 

Jacobsen: It’s a good answer. What happens? Well, let’s take the inverse of these examples, and I don’t know how psychology presents itself. Healthy individuals, when they have their humanity shown, are not “exposed,” too, because “exposed” is a much more loaded term in this context. Although appropriate for the portrayal of the rage, coming out of the fear. So when someone has their regular self shown, they go to sleep. They go to the bathroom.

They wake up with bedheads. Just regular stuff. They got fired from some job some time ago. They failed an exam. Regular people stuff that happens from time to time. How does a normal, healthy person with a non-narcissistic psychological structure react, act, learn, and grow?

Meyers: So what I’m going to say to you is: I don’t know you, but I presume it will not make sense to you what I’m gonna say because my guess is that you are like most people.

If you ask a narcissist, what would you say are some of your weaknesses or some of your character defects? If you ask directly someone that you believe, and it’s only people, by the way, who truly can identify and know when an individual has this type of disorder, they feel it. They may not be mental health practitioners, but they know it; they feel it. They’ve read enough about it, usually people at work or people in their homes. Freud used to say that it is in one’s work life or one’s romantic life where one’s true deepest issues come out. It is true. It is within our work life and in our romantic life where, perhaps, our truest self gets to be known. Why? Because in those two environments, we are the most interdependent with others.

Interdependence, if you’re psychologically healthy, is terrific. Interdependence, if you are mentally unhealthy, is incredibly triggering. So a narcissist will tell you, will tell you, will look you straight in the eye with no effect, almost as if they don’t completely understand your question or are even slightly offended, will say, I don’t believe I really have any flaws.”

Jacobsen: That’s terrifying. 

Meyers: Which is terrifying. Now, what a healthy person would say to the narcissist is, but are you do you believe you are not a human being? A part of normal social and psychological development, right, is for each one of us to progress from the age of children to adulthood to see our fallibility, our vulnerability. It is to say that, in some ways, to be a severe narcissist, their grandiosity is so extreme that, actually, they don’t see themselves in some ways as even human. Do you doyou know how wild that is to to wrap your head around? 

Jacobsen: It seems as if from a non-expert perspective, when you’re saying these things, they are the literal case of a Martian, not coming down to Earth, but coming out of it, and finding themselves in a world in which their internal world is not fully integrated.

So there’s an insecurity of internal objects about life, ideas, people. So then, they have the paranoia example is quite interesting because it sounds they’re having a distorted interpretation of the events. Their internal objects are completely warped. So then, out of this paranoia, this misperception and misconception then becomes an extrapolated, to you, “Could you harm me sometime down the road? Therefore, I’m going to react and defend my hypothetical self.”

Meyers: That’s right. So, we are talking about cognitive distortion. We are talking about a type of cognitive distortion that can be so illogical. The question is, does it almost border on a mild psychotic process? At what point does someone’s grandiose delusion about their superiority break with reality to the point that we mental health experts would say, do we need to assess for psychosis? I’ll give you an example. I’ll share an example. I once had a supervisor in graduate school.

I went to grad school in New York. I once had a supervisor. She was working with a severely anorexic patient, severely anorexic. This individual had gone in and out of the hospital. The anorexia was so severe, and–I don’t know–you probably know enough about anorexia to know that this is a life-threatening disorder, anorexia. And this supervisor shared that she believed, based on her clinical expertise, she extrapolated that there may be what she believed is a psychotic element to that type of severe anorexia.

So, when we look at some of these cognitive distortions, now, we’re talking about severe narcissism as just one example, but there are many examples where one’s cognitive distortion about a thing, whether their own value as a person–narcissism, their own body–anorexia nervosa; when it can get so extreme that we really do have to ask ourselves to also rule out psychotic process diagnostically. 

Jacobsen: Those seem like things you could potentially have a metric in terms of even gross anatomy of the mind. For things like the Penfield Map, you do actually get proportional sizing of things based on the number of nerves. If someone has a warped self-map with body dysmorphia and bulimia nervosa, could you, in fact, find something like “neural correlates” for these kinds of things? 

Meyers: This is exactly why, in most colleges and universities, the psychology department is in the social sciences or inthe humanities department and not in the natural sciences. I do think that it’s possible. But any time we are trying to examine a disorder that is so interwoven with self-image, we will always have a challenge. 

Jacobsen: Just mindful of time. So, what about the consequences, not for the individual? Those seem a little more obvious because if the person is living a false self, they’re essentially living a lie to themselves. When they are with others, when they want to date, mate, as they do, or others want to do with them–for a variety of reasons? What are the consequences of those relationships for people who find themselves in this vortex? 

Meyers: Yes, so we are talking about the phenomenology of being in emotional proximity to a narcissist, the phenomenology of what it feels to be in a relationship, a consistent relationship with a narcissist.

I have written extensively about narcissism. I have worked with so many individuals who have had experiences with individuals who have narcissistic personalities. The experience is typically frustrating and self-erasing, self-dismissing. The individual in proximity to the narcissist, in regular proximity to the narcissist, comes to understand that their thoughts and feelings don’t really matter. Their thoughts and feelings are dismissed and waved away with a callous hand.

The individual comes to understand to keep the relationship; they must submit and agree to the spoken and unspoken rules that are outlined by the narcissist. Now, in the end, many narcissists are left either in work environments. People tend to leave those jobs or in romantic relationships; people will typically walk away. Children of narcissists will, sometimes, estrange themselves forever or for periods of time. Friendships will be abandoned altogether.

A lot of times, people that are blood ties or financial ties are the one thing that can keep people somewhat connected to people who are narcissists. 

This has been fun. You’re great. 

Jacobsen: Thank you very much. Appreciate it. 

Meyers: Thanks, Scott. See you later.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Enrico Gnaulati: Christian and Humanist Love Ethics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/10

Dr. Enrico Gnaulati is a clinical psychologist based in Pasadena, California, and the author of the nationally acclaimed book Back to Normal: Why Ordinary Childhood Behavior Is Mistaken for ADHD, Bipolar Disorder, and Autism Spectrum Disorder. His work has been featured on Al Jazeera America, KPCC Los Angeles, and KPFA Berkeley; in Maclean’s and Prevention magazines; and online at the Atlantic and Salon. Gnaulati talks about secular humanism, contrasting it with traditional Christian views on marriage. They explore differences in power dynamics, intimacy, egalitarianism, and mortality awareness, emphasizing secular humanism’s fairness and personal accountability in long-term relationships, based on “Out with Agape Love and In with Secular Love Ethics.”

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we’re here with Enrico Gnaulati. He is in Altadena, California, United States. I didn’t know about that place; I knew about Pasadena before hearing about it. So, how did you first get into secularism? A quick primer question. 

Enrico Gnaulati: The honest but quick answer is that I studied to be a Catholic priest in rural Scotland as a young teenager. So, I studied to be a Catholic priest from about age 13 and a half to about 17.

That is part of my deep personal history. As a young man, however, I immigrated to the United States. I was in college, where I started to take courses on Western civilization. Intellectually, I imploded at that point, experiencing what I would describe as a form of trauma. I felt that my Catholic upbringing had trapped my mind in a steel cage and so narrowed my understanding of the world that I felt betrayed. Since my early twenties, I’ve moved further away from organized religion. I eventually earned a master’s degree in existential-phenomenological psychology, reflecting my deep interest in existentialism and secular humanistic ways of understanding the world that substituted for that early Catholic conditioning.

That’s a broad answer, but more specifically, the article you’re interviewing me about today, published in Free Inquiry, is adapted from my recently released book, Flourishing Love: A Secular Guide to Lasting Intimate Relationships. In that book, I attempt to reclaim a pro-marriage, pro-intimate partnership perspective from the religious right and argue forcefully for a secular humanistic pro-marriage viewpoint. This has occupied much of my time recently.

Jacobsen: What were the obligations of marital institutions between partners—to themselves, one another, and their church—while growing up in the church or during your formal priestly training? How is marriage ideally supposed to play out within that theological framework?

Gnaulati: In my book and article, I argue that there are fundamentally different ways of thinking about marriage and long-term intimate partnerships. For listeners, when I say marriage, I also include long-term committed partnerships, so I use the term loosely. There are key differences between how secular humanists and people of faith—especially those with conservative views—think of marriage.

The conservative position carries significant moral weight, with accountability to a god or divine presence. You are supposed to make yourself lovable in the eyes of God first and your partner second. There’s a triangular approach to marriage, where being a good person is part of a reward-and-punishment system tied to an afterlife. In contrast, in the secular humanistic tradition, you are accountable to your flesh-and-blood partner. You treat them well because you desire to, not because it’s your moral obligation or because of divine surveillance monitoring how you love, give love, and receive love and determining whether that makes you an upstanding person of faith.

That’s a broad way to differentiate the two. There’s much more I could say. 

Jacobsen: How do you see communities formed around marriage functioning in an inter-belief context? This is an article-related topic, but it’s a fascinating question. I don’t see this explored too much, but your expertise may be helpful here. If you live in a multicultural, multi-ethnic, and pluralistic context—religiously speaking—are there any situations in which those formulations of how people should live in partnership come into conflict with one another? Or do people generally find themselves tolerant of different ways of partnering?

Gnaulati: It’s a good question, Scott. One of the reasons the Christian right is doubling down on traditional marriage is because they don’t see it holding up well in a pluralistic social context. In such a setting, there are multiple temptations, greater sexual openness, and views that sex can be used for pleasurable and bonding reasons, not just for procreation.

The more pluralistic and diverse communities become, the more openness there is to shifting sexual norms, and these norms are seen as a direct threat to Christian ideas about marriage. This leads to a more conservative doubling down on what the Christian right believes marriage ought to be. 

Jacobsen: Now, I hear more about Christian nationalism, the Christian right, and so on from Americans—particularly from American freethinkers—than from other countries. So when you see this doubling down on traditional marriage, you also see, within the secular humanist community, a more open acceptance of LGBTI+ ways of partnering. There is greater acceptance of marriage and common-law partnerships, diverse ceremonies and more flexible views on the time people may take before committing to someone. There’s a cosmopolitan appeal to the humanist ethos around partnership. What do you think are the strengths of that ethic, grounded in the principles of universalism, while acknowledging the wide range of ways human beings identify themselves and exist with one another?

Gnaulati: Yes. One way of thinking about it is that those who tend toward a more secular humanist mindset when approaching love and long-term partnerships tend to have a more egalitarian view of relationships than those who are more conservative, religiously speaking. Data shows that these egalitarian relationships are more likely to last longer.

If you have a more equitable, fairness-minded approach to relationships—where love is not about mutual self-sacrifice, as seen in Christian agape love, where Christ gave His life for humanity’s sins—that’s considered the highest form of love in Christian doctrine. This idea promotes radical altruism, where one gives and gives without being mindful of receiving. In contrast, secular humanists tend to be fair-minded. The quality of love you give is inherently connected to the quality of love you receive. There’s mutuality in the arrangement: we look out for each other, for each other’s happiness, and try to maintain fairness in the relationship. There’s no power imbalance; power is shared equally. These mindsets are more likely to be secular and humanistic in nature; whereas, among conservative Christians, you’re more likely to see a power hierarchy.

There’s always that struggle in faith communities, where people say, “Yes, we’re going to try to be fair, reasonable, and equitable between the genders, without power imbalances.” However, they can’t escape the underlying hierarchy: God, man, woman, child. That power hierarchy always lurks in the background. In marriages where there’s an erosion of power-sharing, where there’s an ideological belief in patriarchy and the superiority of men, even if some data shows that these marriages can last, they tend to be satisfactory, not flourishing marriages. It’s important to differentiate between the two.

Jacobsen: Are you, in some sense, suggesting that Christian fundamentalist marriages are bounded in a way that limits them to functioning at a low level? Is that a valid interpretation?

Gnaulati: Yes, there’s some data to suggest that.

At times, when I’m at my most ideological, I take the position that to have a flourishing partnership, you need a secular humanistic mindset. In this context, there’s accountability to a flesh-and-blood partner. You’re acting kindly, generously, forgivingly, and so on from a place of genuine human desire to be the best person you can be with someone you love, rather than acting in those ways as part of a rewards and punishment system tied to an afterlife. There’s a qualitative difference between being kind, generous and forgiving from a place of human desire versus doing so out of moral duty.

Jacobsen: I would differentiate those two. Yet here we are, a non-expert me talking to an expert you, and we’re noting the power structure between the divine, man, woman, and child. And, of course, here we are, two men discussing these things. In that hierarchy, women hold a much lower status than men. Does this obligation, this divine command for men to be in charge, affect their psychology or frame of mind over time in a way that subtly or overtly oppresses women? I don’t necessarily mean domestic abuse, but in more nuanced ways, where women are tacitly encouraged to suppress themselves and be suppressed.

Gnaulati: Yes. 

Jacobsen: They have to be inauthentic.

Gnaulati: It manifests in small, big, quasi-invisible, and highly visible ways. One thing I write about—and I don’t mean to shock your viewers or listeners—is the difference in orgasm rates between women in Christian marriages and those in non-Christian or less religious marriages. Women in Christian marriages are less likely to orgasm. I get somewhat sarcastic in my argument, saying, “Wow, there’s an example of men not honouring their Christian duty to make their wives happy.” Data shows that about 48% of Christian women in committed relationships usually or always orgasm, compared to about 65% of women in the general population. That’s a small example of how these dynamics can play out, even at the level of base pleasure.

Jacobsen: What about the sociopolitics of ordinary life and living together with a partner?

Gnaulati: Yes, exactly.

In an unequal power arrangement versus an equal power arrangement, if your Christian duty as a woman is to be self-sacrificing, submissive, and subservient to a degree, how much self-respect can you have when standing up for yourself? How can you ensure a balanced division of labour at home or a balanced marriage where burdens and benefits are shared equitably? This balance is essential to any healthy long-term intimate relationship—the constant balancing of giving and gaining is always there.

We often say that people in relationships shouldn’t keep score, but it’s a normal human tendency to do so. Explicitly or implicitly, consciously or unconsciously, people want things to be equitable. They want to feel they’re getting as much as they’re giving, and vice versa.

Jacobsen: What does the research say now, if anything, about the effect on women in those marriages? Are there higher levels of resentment toward husbands in Christian marriages as compared to more secular humanist marriages? Does that show up in research as statistically significant, with decent effect sizes regarding self-reported emotions in those states?

Gnaulati: I’m not familiar with specific research on this, so I’m trying to figure out how to comment in an informed way, but as a psychologist, I have some credibility when it comes to speculating. Let’s not forget that for certain subsets of people, regardless of gender, there can be psychological safety in giving up power and entrusting it to someone they perceive as superior.

So, you can’t always assume there’s resentment. Sometimes, it can be the reverse. There can be a pathological passivity, as the great psychoanalyst Erich Fromm wrote about—a desire to escape from freedom by giving up one’s freedoms and letting someone else make life decisions. This can provide psychological comfort and safety, but that doesn’t necessarily mean it’s good for that individual. Many people may be subservient and submissive without necessarily feeling resentful. They get used to relinquishing power and may even acquire a certain comfort or contentedness from it.

Jacobsen: Were there any precursors to Christian formulations of marriage that were sufficiently distinct to merit such a title, where the Christian formulation of marriage improved upon earlier forms?

Gnaulati: Oh, that’s an interesting question. I’m still determining. At least in my understanding of historical forces, there was probably a codification of normal human virtues—loyalty, decency, honesty, generosity, forgiveness, and so on. These things make relationships work and can be explained as normal human virtue rather than as Christian moral duties. One of the benefits of Christian marriage may have been to codify those virtues. I don’t know enough about the history of marriage to comment in an informed way about how it evolved. However, there were likely economic reasons too—inheritance patterns and such—that made marriage an important social institution from an economic, not necessarily a religious, standpoint. I don’t know enough about it to give you a more in-depth answer. 

Jacobsen: What should be the big takeaway for making a secular humanist marriage work compared to a traditional Christian one? What could potentially evolve the current secular humanist formulation? Are there areas for improvement, given that we are bound to an empirical moral philosophy? We’re open to new information which could further update our moral and philosophical foundations.

Gnaulati: We’re discovering that strong, flourishing marriages, as I’ve said, are anchored in a fairness and power-sharing mindset. There are other factors, too, such as the importance of physical affection and sex—versus not just for procreation, but for bonding and pleasure too. There’s definite data to support that.

The problem with a religious view of marriage is that it often doesn’t emphasize the importance of intimacy—not just sexual intercourse, but forms of physical affection like kissing, hugging, and holding hands. All the data shows that the strongest marriages embody an abundance of physical intimacy at various levels. That’s crucial.

What’s unique about a secular humanist perspective—and I write about this—is the embrace of mortality awareness as a motivator to be the best, most loving version of yourself in relationships. Nobody wants to die with deathbed regrets, thinking they could have been nicer, kinder, more generous, or more forgiving as a partner. That constant, low-grade, healthy awareness of mortality we carry as secular humanists can motivate us to be the best loving version of ourselves in relationships.

Jacobsen: Enrico, I appreciate your time today. We explored a lot, especially comparing and contrasting views on marriage.

Gnaulati: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

On Tejano Music 7: Selena Becoming Famous Early

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/08

A seasoned Musician (Vocals, Guitar and Piano), Filmmaker, and Actor, J.D. Mata has composed 100 songs and performed 100 shows and venues throughout. He has been a regular at the legendary “Whisky a Go Go,” where he has wooed audiences with his original shamanistic musical performances. He has written and directed nerous feature films, web series, and music videos. J.D. has also appeared in various national T.V. commercials and shows. Memorable appearances are TRUE BLOOD (HBO) as Tio Luca, THE UPS Store National television commercial, and the lead in the Lil Wayne music video, HOW TO LOVE, with over 129 million views. As a MOHAWK MEDICINE MAN, J.D. also led the spiritual-based film KATERI, which won the prestigious “Capex Dei” award at the Vatican in Rome. J.D. co-starred, performed and wrote the music for the original world premiere play, AN ENEMY of the PUEBLO — by one of today’s preeminent Chicana writers, Josefina Lopez! This is J.D.’s third Fringe; last year, he wrote, directed and starred in the Fringe Encore Performance award-winning “A Night at the Chicano Rock Opera.” He is in season 2 of his NEW YouTube series, ROCK god! J.D. is a native of McAllen, Texas and resides in North Hollywood, California. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: It’s rare for someone to become famous early on due to musical talent. That’s unusual. It can happen at any age, but most people fail. For most, it only happens so early.

Selena, as far as I know, achieved success very early in what was then a non-mainstream musical genre, which she helped bring into the mainstream. So, what was your path to achieving that level of success? #NotMyIdea.

J.D. Mata: I love this because we have these discussions, and they come from my perspective. As an artist, my goal—whether as a filmmaker, musician, or actor—is to be authentic. If I stay true to myself when writing a scene or creating art, I want it to be something no one has ever seen. Often, when I’m authentic, it naturally comes out that way because there’s no one else like me.

It doesn’t matter whether people perceive my work as eccentric or crazy; it’s none of my business what others think of my art. I say this to preface our conversations because that’s the benchmark here—the jumping-off point. I’m sharing my insights with you in a way no one has done before, simply by being authentic. I’m not reiterating what’s already been put on the record but rather offering my genuine take on Selena, and that’s why I’m enjoying this so much. It also makes this series interesting—it’s almost like I’m a filmmaker creating a movie about Selena based on her real life and my perception. Does that make sense?

Jacobsen: Yes. Now, back to the topic. How did Selena become so successful in an industry that wasn’t so big?

Mata: My take is that it was a twofold process. On one hand, as we’ve already discussed, the phenomenon of Tejano music occurred. It was inevitable. During that time, Tejano music was experiencing its golden age. It had just begun, and suddenly, major labels like EMI Latin and Capitol Records were signing Tejano artists, promoting them, and helping them achieve commercial success. Selena was part of this wave.

Why did this happen? Because Tejano’s music was fresh and new, it captured the imagination of Texas and beyond. It resonated with people across the U.S., especially those who danced to its rhythms. Many Tejano fans were Mexican Americans who migrated seasonally to work as farm labourers, picking crops like grapes, strawberries, and cotton. Even before Tejano music became a defined genre, artists performed at camps for these migrant workers nationwide. So, the seeds of Tejano music had already been sown across the U.S. Many migrants settled in Oregon, Washington, California, and Florida, where Tejano bands would later tour.

Jacobsen: So, we had Tejano music come on board. It was a phenomenon. The big record labels recognized its potential and saw that it could generate significant revenue. Tejano artists were travelling all over the United States. Selena was part of this movement. Remember, as we mentioned, she and her family started their band when she was just a child.

From the time she could sing, around age 10, they were working hard. Eventually, they got signed by a major record label, likely in 1992 or 1993, during the golden age of Tejano music. It took her about ten years to become an “overnight success.” That was the birth of Selena’s stardom. This is part of what I mean by a twofold approach.

Selena rose to fame alongside other Tejano artists like Grupo Mazz and La Mafia. Anyone familiar with Tejano music will recognize these names. They were also giants in the genre, and Selena was a giant among them. However, Selena’s trajectory wasn’t to stay solely within Tejano music, even though she was and remains the Queen of Tejano.

Her path eventually led her from Tejano to the American pop market, which makes her story so interesting. I’ve never seen this angle fully explored, which is why this interview is so groundbreaking.

Selena’s record wasn’t just to dominate Tejano but to conquer it while preparing for a crossover. She was the Queen of Tejano music worldwide. I’m sorry, I was eating nuts earlier—I’ll stop now. Her ultimate goal was to break into the mainstream American market as Gloria Estefan did with the Miami Sound Machine. Selena was poised to become the next big crossover star, rubbing shoulders with Madonna and other icons in the American music industry.

But then, we all know what tragically happened. She was murdered, and that event, combined with her immense talent, solidified her legendary status as the Queen of Tejano. Her father’s grit, Abraham Quintanilla, played a significant role in preserving her legacy. It wasn’t driven by ambition or a thirst for fame but by his desire to ensure that Selena’s story and her dreams were honoured.

He knew that his daughter wanted to reach the next level, and he made it his mission to take her there, even after her death, by telling her story accurately and honestly. What ultimately catapulted Selena to the next level was a combination of her exceptional talent as a Tejano artist and the unfortunate tragedy of her death. The interest generated by her passing and the biopic film that followed introduced her to an even wider audience.

People saw her talent, success story, and how she embodied the American Dream—specifically, the Mexican-American Dream. Today, Tejano music is not as prominent as it once was, but Selena remains its ambassador. While people continue to be fascinated by Selena herself, they often overlook the brilliance of Tejano music, which is still beautiful and vibrant.

Another important factor contributing to her posthumous success was the existing infrastructure. Major record labels had signed her before her death, and that foundation allowed her legacy to reach new heights even after her passing. The infrastructure and her father’s dedication ensured that Selena’s story and music would continue to resonate with fans worldwide.

Jacobsen: So, there was already a vehicle in place, through movies and other mediums, for her name and legacy to carry on. Another important point I’d like to explore here is giving credit to the DJs in Texas. Mando San Roman, for instance. He was an incredible DJ who recognized the greatness of Selena and played her music. At that time, DJs had more freedom in deciding whose music they would play. He was instrumental in promoting her. He doesn’t get enough credit for that.

Another phenomenal DJ was Rock and Roll James. He conducted some of the most iconic interviews with Selena. He had a show called Puro Tejano, and if you go to YouTube, you’ll find some wonderful clips of him and Selena. They had a great rapport, a real back-and-forth banter that connected Selena with the Tejano audience.

Mata: What about Johnny Canales?

Jacobsen: Yes, Johnny Canales is another one I have to mention. He also played a key role. His show, The Johnny Canales Show, was essential in bringing Tejano artists, including Selena, to a broader audience. He generously showcased her talent, and that exposure was crucial to her career trajectory.

Mando San Roman, Rock and Roll James, and Johnny Canales were part of the bigger puzzle leading to her worldwide fame. There was a progression: point A, to B, to C, and so on. Point Z is where Selena stands today as an iconic figure recognized globally. But people must understand that you must start at point A to reach point Z.

Mata: It sounds like these DJs were not just promoters but artists themselves.

Jacobsen: Exactly. Mando San Roman and Rock and Roll James were singers and composers. They knew talent when they saw it, and they knew how to nurture it—big kudos to them for recognizing Selena’s potential early on. Unfortunately, Johnny Canales recently passed away—may he rest in peace—but his contribution to Selena’s career and Tejano music was enormous. He helped bring her to the masses.

Jacobsen: Folks were able to see her talent. To build a house, you must build it on a solid foundation. The foundation for Selena’s trajectory was, first and foremost, her immense talent. Second, she had a father who was brilliant as a musician and a manager who deeply loved his daughter. She had a great band, too.

The band was tight—it was her family. The two members who weren’t family were treated like they were. It’s so important to have a united band, and hers was. This was all part of a house built on rock, not sand.

Then, she had key advocates like Mando San Roman, Rock and Roll James, and Johnny Canales. That was the genesis of Selena—the phenomenon we know now. That was the foundation that led to her success. So, that’s my answer to your question. Are there any more honourable mentions?

Mata: That wraps up the session format, right?

Jacobsen: Yes. We’ve covered some important stuff. Stand by, I need to blow my nose—beep boop—excuse me.

There are a few more honourable mentions. It was like catching lightning in a bottle—a perfect storm. Everything had to align perfectly. And, of course, we also talked about the movie. There was conflict between her father and her husband, Chris Pérez, which generated a lot of intrigue and interest. She was married to her guitarist, and their love story—eloping and all—added depth to the narrative. Rumours and typical storylines emerged, with protagonists and antagonists, even after her death, like in any interesting story.

The conflict between her father and husband added further intrigue, making the story compelling. Another honourable mention is Netflix’s production of Selena: The Series. By doing that, they helped prolong her legacy, keeping her a worldwide phenomenon.

Before I wrap up, let me mention one more honourable mention: Nano Ramirez. I’m glad you reminded me to mention him. Nano Ramirez was a visionary in the Tejano music scene. Let me spell it out: N-A-N-O, Ramirez, R-A-M-I-R-E-Z. He deserves a ton of credit. He owned a convention center and had the vision to showcase Tejano artists, including Selena, at a time when South Texas was very conservative.

He just released a book, and I recommend anyone interested in Tejano music to look him up and read his story. He’s a historic figure. Not only did he showcase Tejano music, but he also brought rock bands like AC/DC to his venue in McAllen, Texas. He had a brilliant entrepreneurial mind, living the American Dream, and he, too, recognized Selena’s talent early on.

He would promote her at his venue, and people from all over the Rio Grande Valley would come to see her. So, major props to Nano Ramirez, another key figure in Selena’s story. A part of the house is built on rock, which is Selena’s story.

Mata: Excellent. Thanks so much.

Jacobsen: Thank you, bro.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Deborah Unger, ‘Lost Women in Science’: Thalidomide

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/08

Deborah Unger talks about thalidomide and its tragic impact on pregnancy, the FDA’s history, and Lost Women of Science. Unger discusses thalidomide’s return for cancer treatment, Frances Kelsey’s role, and their podcast’s mission to highlight forgotten female scientists.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Deborah Unger to discuss thalidomide and a podcast on lost women in science. So, what was thalidomide?

Deborah Unger: Thalidomide was first marketed as a sedative. It was developed in West Germany in the 1950s by the pharmaceutical company Chemie Grünenthal. It was initially thought to be a completely non-toxic sedative. It succeeded in the German market and was licensed by many countries, but not the United States. As a sedative, it was considered non-addictive, unlike barbiturates, and it was believed to be impossible to overdose on. It was thought to be a good medicine for expectant mothers to calm them down and help them sleep, and it was even claimed to help with morning sickness. It was sold under different brand names. In Germany, it was called Contergan. In the United States, it was branded as Kevadon. However, it never gained approval from the FDA and was never widely marketed there. It was sold as Distaval in the UK and available in Australia under the same name.

Jacobsen: What were the health effects for pregnant individuals and those who were not?

Unger: It didn’t seem to affect most people who were not pregnant. The first adverse effects were related to nerve damage—people reported numbness in their fingers and toes, but this feedback was slow to reach the company. However, for pregnant women, especially those who took it during the early stages of pregnancy, the effects were devastating. Some experienced stillbirths and miscarriages, while babies that were born often had severe limb deformities and other serious internal malformations.

Thousands of babies across Europe were born with shortened or missing limbs, a condition called phocomelia. Phocomelia can be genetic, but it is extremely rare. Doctors were seeing an unprecedented number of babies born with shortened arms, legs, or both. This was a shocking event across Europe, Australia, Canada, and, to a lesser extent, the United States.

Jacobsen: What was the correlation between thalidomide and phocomelia, and is that pathway fully understood now?

Unger: The correlation is somewhat understood, but the exact mechanism remains unclear. Thalidomide interferes with the development of blood vessels, which affects the growth of limbs and other organs during early pregnancy. This is a simplified explanation, but essentially, the drug disrupts normal development, leading to the tragic outcomes we saw. Because of these effects, thalidomide cannot be used during pregnancy, as it will cause severe congenital disabilities like phocomelia.

Jacobsen: What happened to the children who survived birth with phocomelia?

Unger: Many of them are still alive today. They are now in their sixties, and there are thalidomide survivors around the world. They have had to adapt to their disabilities, and many have led successful lives, with some becoming doctors or artists. However, as they age, they face increasing health problems because their bodies have had to compensate for the lack of properly developed limbs. Many suffer from secondary health conditions, such as joint problems, due to the long-term strain on their bodies. There are still several hundred survivors worldwide who were affected by thalidomide in the 1960s.

Jacobsen: What was the size of the staffing and the budget for the FDA in those days, and what is it now? What does that tell you about some lessons learned from the history of thalidomide and other events?

Unger: We interviewed a historian, John Swann, at the FDA for our podcast, The Devil in the Details. He told us that in the 1960s, the FDA had 1,860 full-time staff and a budget of about $13.8 million. If you look up the latest data sheet on the FDA’s website, it now says there are around 18,600 employees, with a budget of about $6.7 billion. They oversee the safety of products worth approximately $3.6 trillion. You can see a massive increase in what the FDA does and how it operates.

Jacobsen: What do these numbers tell you? Were there other interesting insights about the FDA’s growth from this expert?

Unger: Yes, we were mainly asking him about this. What it indicates is that the FDA does far more now than it did in the 1960s. When the thalidomide application hit the desk of Dr. Frances Oldham Kelsey, who was reviewing it, there were no clinical trial requirements as we know them today. She couldn’t demand data from properly conducted clinical trials because they didn’t exist then. Instead, she had to use her intuition and judgment to realize the company hadn’t provided enough evidence of safety. The application needed to be completed.

When the thalidomide tragedy became widely known, Congress acted quickly to pass new laws that strengthened drug regulations, making clinical trials and safety reviews much more rigorous. As a result, the FDA had to expand its staff and budget to handle the increased regulatory burden.

Jacobsen: What are some similarly bad circumstances in U.S. history where looser regulations led to negative consequences?

Unger: There have been other scandals. One example was an elixir in the 1930s that used diethylene glycol—a poison—as a solvent. It killed over 100 people. That incident led to the first round of tougher drug regulations in the UU.S. But thalidomide was the case that truly reshaped the way the government oversees the pharmaceutical industry. Before the 1962 Kefauver-Harris Amendments, clinical trials didn’t even require informed consent, meaning patients often didn’t know they were part of a trial.

Our podcast episodes, The Devil in the Details, discuss Dr. Frances Oldham Kelsey’s role. Richardson-Merrell company was distributing thalidomide to doctors, saying, “This has been sold in Europe for four years with no known problems. Can you test it with your patients?” However, many doctors didn’t keep detailed records about which patients received it, how much was given, or the outcomes. There was a serious lack of rigour in drug testing at that time, which has changed significantly since then.

The drug companies didn’t have to provide scientific evidence that a drug did what it claimed, at least not to the extent required today. That was another major change in the law after the thalidomide crisis. The most relevant change in this case is that they must notify the FDA immediately when side effects are reported to a drug company. But during the thalidomide scandal, it took months—absolutely months, not weeks or days—for people to begin realizing and tracing the side effects of thalidomide.

People kept taking the drug because it wasn’t immediately pulled from the market or distribution stopped. It wasn’t until November 1961, after an investigation by a German pediatrician who linked the large number of phocomelia births to thalidomide, that it was finally taken off the market in Germany. However, the drug application in the U.S. remained active until March of the following year, which seems excessive to me.

Dr. Frances Kelsey at the FDA wasn’t even aware of these side effects that should have been reported. So, while we are in a better place now, there are still several things that could make us even safer as consumers of new drugs.

Jacobsen: Do you think consumers are now more alert and cautious about experimental drug use?

Unger: Well, if they take an experimental treatment today, they must give informed consent, which is a big difference. So, if someone has a very serious illness and nothing else is working, they might choose to try experimental drugs. However, thalidomide wasn’t marketed as a treatment for a life-threatening condition. It was marketed as a sleeping pill and for anxiety—drugs that were becoming more popular in the 1950s and 1960s but hadn’t been on the market before.

It had a very different marketing approach. One thing that always surprises me—and you can probably tell by my accent that I’m British—is that when you go to the UU.S., the TT.V.adverts for new drugs have these long disclaimers at the end, which are read at 100 miles an hour, listing all the contraindications. It sounds like no one would ever take those drugs, but that’s legally required now. It wasn’t like that in the 1960s.

So, today’s regulations are designed to help people stay safe. In the past, safety was almost a side issue when new drugs came to market.

Jacobsen: For those who have listened to the episodes of your podcast, has there been any feedback about how you describe the 64-year history of drug development and regulation, particularly with thalidomide, and the FDA’s growth into the regulatory body it is today?

Unger: Some people will see something as big and bureaucratic and assume it’s bad. When things aren’t talked about much and are running relatively uneventfully, that can be a sign that they’re functioning well. What this tells me about the FDA is that despite being a large and sometimes criticized organization, it plays a crucial role in ensuring drugs are as effective, safe, and useful as possible.

The podcast didn’t five deeply into the inner workings of the FDA. Still, we did touch on the discussions today about overregulation. At least in the current political climate, leading up to the US election, we’ve seen calls for entire government departments to be shut down, and the FDA has faced accusations of internal conspiracies. However, despite such criticisms, we must remember that the FDA’s role is to protect public health by ensuring that drugs are properly vetted before reaching consumers.

How can we be sure that drugs are safe without an independent regulator? The FDA missed the opioid crisis, where a drug was put on the market that was said to be non-addictive. Still, it turned out to be highly addictive, and the dosage levels were very high. People did become addicted, and we’ve all seen the devastating outcomes of that.

What we felt about the FDA when we looked into this is that the bureaucrats like Dr. Frances Oldham Kelsey, who sit in their cubicles, receive piles of documentation and go through them carefully. To me, as a consumer, that’s a comfort. Drug companies may want to get their products out quickly. They might not appreciate a nitpicking bureaucrat—trained as a doctor or pharmacologist—going through all the paperwork. Still, as a consumer, I’m grateful. Please look at all the details and make sure the drug is safe.

The FDA’s development has paralleled the expansion of both big and small pharmaceutical companies and the overall growth of the pharmaceutical market. They now oversee the safety of $3.6 trillion products in the U.S. market alone. That’s a vast amount. My perspective, and the one we came to after doing the series, is that you want knowledgeable, expert people who know what they’re doing to prevent scandals and crises like the thalidomide disaster.

Jacobsen: What other stories are being pursued through the Lost Women of Science podcast?

Unger: The Lost Women of Science podcast launched in 2021, and we explore a mix of different stories. We’ve done several seasons, including the Frances Kelsey season, a five-part series about her life, work, and impact. That was our fifth season. Our first series was about Dr. Dorothy Anderson, probably unknown to most of our listeners. She worked in a New York hospital and discovered that cystic fibrosis is a genetic disease. She dedicated her work to helping those suffering from cystic fibrosis.

We’ve also done a series on Dr. Marie Nyswander, who developed methadone as a treatment for heroin addiction, which we called The Doctor and the Fix. We’ve covered Klari von Neumann, one of the first computer programmers, who worked on the instructions for computers used in developing the atomic bomb and beyond.

Our mission is to tell the stories of forgotten female scientists so they can receive the recognition they deserve. We also produce 30-minute episodes about various scientists, including astronomers, engineers, and others.

Jacobsen: Which episode received the most reaction from listeners?

Unger: The episode that received the most response was about Yvonne Clark, a Black engineer who worked at NASA. The reaction was partly influenced by the popularity of Hidden Figures, which also highlighted Black engineers and mathematicians at NASA. We received a lot of positive feedback on that episode. Interestingly, in reaction to the Kelsey season, not the Clark season, one listener shared a very personal story on our Facebook page. He mentioned that his mother had taken thalidomide as part of a so-called clinical trial in the U.S., and his brother, who was born stillborn, didn’t survive long after birth. That was a particularly poignant response.

And thalidomide was the cause of that. But thalidomide has returned to the market. It is now used as a very effective treatment for certain kinds of cancer and for leprosy. Of course, it’s indicated not to be taken during pregnancy. The person who wrote in said he had recently been diagnosed with one of these types of cancers and was now being prescribed thalidomide to help treat his cancer.

It was the same drug that had taken his brother away many years before. 

Jacobsen: Did you interview any survivors of these pregnancies?

Unger: Yes, we did. That forms part of our final episode, as we tried to bring the story up to date. There is a U.S. Thalidomide Survivors Group, and many of them didn’t even know others existed until much later in life. They found each other through social media, often in their 50s and 60s, because thalidomide wasn’t discussed much after the early 1960s.

The U.S. remains one of the only developed countries that has never financially supported thalidomide survivors. This stems from the fact that the drug was never officially approved in the U.S. Those affected were taking it in these so-called clinical trials with virtually no records kept. When the FDA investigated, they estimated that only 17 people were born with phocomelia, which was a wild underestimate given how widely the drug was distributed. Today, it’s estimated that there are about 100 thalidomide survivors in the U.S., and they’ve come together.

In early September, they went to Washington to lobby the government for support. Jennifer Vanderbes, whom we interviewed for the podcast, wrote a great book called Wonder Drug. She tracked down many of these survivors, who had been largely forgotten—just like Dr. Frances Kelsey.

Jacobsen: Do you have a particular favourite episode?

Unger: Of our series? No, you should listen to all of them, from episodes 1 through 5, to get the full story.

Jacobsen: You might be biased.

Unger: I’m biased, but start with episode 1 and see how it grabs you. However, I have a favourite Lost Women of Scienceepisode outside the Frances Kelsey series. We did a 30-minute episode on a woman from the 1930s to 1950s, a chemistry teacher named Mary Louisa Willard. She was one of the first forensic scientists, and she teamed up with the police department in State College, Pennsylvania, where she was based, to help solve crimes using chemistry.

Jacobsen: And that sounds like a great episode. How did you team up with Scientific American for this project?

UngerScientific American is our publisher because they host our podcast on their website and help promote it. We do all the work, and they assist us in reaching more people. They might also help with marketing and advertising, which is always helpful.

Jacobsen: Marketing and advertising is always helpful.

Unger: Yes, it definitely is. We’d love to reach as many people as we can. 

Jacobsen: I’ve covered everything I wanted to convey and explored all the creative angles I can think of. 

Unger: At Lost Women of Science, we have a tip line.

We also have a database with over 300 female scientists we may cover in future episodes. Often, people know of forgotten women scientists who did great work but have yet to receive recognition. We encourage them to call us, leave a message or email us. You can find the tip line at lostwomenofscience.org. We also create shorter programs about the scientists people tell us about, in a segment called “From Our Inbox.”

We interviewed the person who had left the tip and then researched the scientist to create a story.

Jacobsen: What about your upcoming episode for Breast Cancer Awareness Month?

Unger: Sure! For Breast Cancer Awareness Month, we’re doing a two-part episode on a very overlooked figure—Dora Richardson. She was the chemist in England who synthesized the compound that became tamoxifen, one of the most revolutionary treatments for breast cancer. It’s a drug therapy that went on the market in the 1970s and has saved thousands of lives. Katie Couric, who is a breast cancer survivor herself, is introducing our episodes on Dora Richardson because, frankly, I don’t think many people realize it was a woman chemist who developed the compound that became tamoxifen.

That series will be released at the end of October. We have much more coming up in November, but I’ll leave it at that for now.

Jacobsen: Thanks so much, Deborah. 

Jacobsen: Any final thoughts based on our conversation today?

Unger: My final thought is that unless we purposefully tell these stories, they’ll continue to be forgotten. We want to inspire people—especially women and girls—to pursue careers in STEM. While many do today, knowing that others have faced obstacles before them and still made a difference can be incredibly motivating. By sharing these stories, we hope to prevent more women from becoming “lost women of science” and instead inspire them to make their marks in the field.

Jacobsen: Excellent, Deborah. Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Unger: Thank you, Scott.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Janice Harper: Surviving and Thriving From Mobbing

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/07

Janice Harper is a cultural anthropologist and the author of Mobbed! What to Do When They Really Are Out to Get You. She has written on the topic of mobbing and collective aggression for Psychology Today, The Huffington Post, and other publications. 

Harper discusses about mobbing and bullying, exploring the escalation of false accusations and the emotional toll on targets. They discuss how mobbing can lead to severe consequences like suicide or violence. Harper emphasizes self-reflection and gentleness, advising targets to move on, thrive, and find peace by accepting their experiences without internalizing victimhood.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with—should I say famous or infamous? No. Janice, Janice—we are here with the lovely Janice Harper. We’re going to be talking primarily about mobbing.

I sent an email focused mainly on narcissism. While it’s not your area of focus, an element of commentary here will be relevant to that series. So, how do we define mobbing? And how do we define bullying in a more precise context based on your experience?

Janice Harper: Bullying is a form of one-on-one interpersonal aggression. It might involve a few people targeting a single individual with aggression, such as verbal abuse or put-downs in the workplace. It could include sabotaging someone’s work, like the typical hostile colleague who singles someone out for abuse and writes them up for every minor issue. Mobbing is bullying on a larger scale, where someone in a position of power identifies a person to be eliminated and begins soliciting negative feedback about them, spreading rumours and gossip and encouraging others to join in.

In the workplace, the person might be subjected to investigation after investigation—often completely unfounded. However, the constant investigations create a perceived sense of wrongdoing. Mobbing is intended to eliminate someone from the workplace, group, or community. If not in a workplace, it could happen in a school, church, place of worship, or another community setting where the goal is to eliminate the individual because they won’t leave voluntarily, and direct elimination isn’t easy.

There’s a clear objective with mobbing—it’s not just how things are. The goal is to get rid of someone. Does that make sense?

Jacobsen: Mobbing can also involve false accusations, and these accusations can escalate into extraordinarily bizarre claims. For example, you were accused of building a hydrogen bomb and were investigated for it, right?

Harper: Yes, that’s correct.

Jacobsen: And you were exonerated, to be clear. So, what’s the danger in mobbing when things escalate to such a high level, where someone’s identity is being questioned and fabricated in such extreme ways?

Harper: Well, it’s a steady process. It doesn’t start with accusations like, “Oh, you’re building a hydrogen bomb.” In almost all cases, there’s a gradual escalation. In my case, it started with accusations that I lacked congeniality when I went up for tenure because I reported inappropriate behaviour by an instructor. It started with “she’s too negative,” then escalated to “she’s crazy,” then “she’s making suicidal threats,” then “she’s making homicidal threats.” Eventually, “she’s building a hydrogen bomb.”

You often see this steady progression of accusations in mobbing cases.

Jacobsen: How do these situations escalate so far out of hand? What are the dangers for people in these situations?

Harper: So, people amid mobbing experience significant dangers, including high rates of suicide. There are high rates of suicide among people who are mobbed because they’re stripped of their identity and publicly shamed. In my book, I write about the primal need for group support. When that group support is lost, especially in the workplace where someone’s means of making a living is threatened, it becomes primal.

People are threatening your economic survival. Your social survival is also threatened. You are so dehumanized, and your identity is so recast that there’s a high risk of suicide. Almost all mobbing targets who have contacted me have said they contemplated, if not attempted, suicide. Another danger is workplace violence, and I’ve written elsewhere about a case in Connecticut. I can’t recall the man’s name, but he worked in a trucking firm and eventually went postal. Even the term “going postal” comes from the aggression and mobbing that occurs with postal employees.

When someone is driven to the point of being completely dehumanized, feeling like they have no other option, and if they’re a male gun owner, there can be a real threat of violence. There are many cases where you hear about shootings in the workplace. Not in every case, but often, if you look behind it, there have been escalating attacks.

Now, what comes first, the chicken or the egg? Is the person perceived as potentially violent, so they become a target? Or can a person who isn’t at all violent be pushed to that extreme? In certain contexts, yes, they can. But the primary threat of mobbing is suicide for the targets. 

Jacobsen: I want to ensure we take a constructive frame here because, on a practical level. So, there are two stages to address: planning an exit and merging that with surviving and thriving after the exit. What are your main tips for finding a way out—from a community, family, workplace, religious setting–church, or mosque?

Harper: The first stage is recognizing that you’re the target of mobbing. And often, it takes people a long time to realize this. It did for me, too, because I initially saw it through the lens of bullying, focused on one abusive department chair. I was aware of the concept of mobbing, but it still took a while for me to recognize, “Oh, that’s what’s going on here.”

So, the first step is acknowledging that this is happening. Then, you have to get out of the situation. That’s the most difficult part for people. In the workplace, mobbing happens when eliminating a worker, which is not easy. A union, tenure, or other reasons may protect them. They aren’t going to quit easily because it’s hard to find another job or relocate their entire family to a new community for a new position. People are reluctant to leave, and often, there’s this accompanying feeling of, “I want justice. I’m innocent.” I certainly felt that way, too.

And almost everyone who comes to me is still in that mindset of “I’m going to fight this. I’m going to see lawyers.” And you can, but the more you fight it, the meaner they will get. The more they’re going to try to prove that you deserve this. So, getting out as early as possible gives you the best chance for survival. Once you get out, and even as you’re trying to get out, it’s important to address the obsessive thinking about it and the emotional flooding. Both happen when you’re being mobbed. 

Jacobsen: I’ve experienced it, though probably not to the degree of being investigated for building a hydrogen bomb. Right, yet I recall it’s almost like taking out the poison, or the source of the poison—removing the poison needle. That’s the equivalent of getting out. The immune system and the body need time to recover from the impact of that poison circulating through the system. It can take a while.

Harper: Yeah, it’s hard because the attacks are so wrong and constant. You are still determining what they’re going to do next. It’s like, “Oh my god, what’s next?” You’re not sleeping, constantly worrying and thinking about it all the time. And when you let your guard down, they pull more tricks—accuse you of something else, move you to a different position, take away responsibilities, or hold meetings without informing you. You find yourself shunned. It consumes your thinking, and it’s all you can focus on. In my book, I talk about techniques for controlling obsessive thinking.

Working with a therapist who understands cognitive behavioural techniques is important. They can help you break the cycle of obsessive thoughts—how one thought sparks another and keeps playing in your head repeatedly. Then there’s the emotional flooding, which is painful and humiliating.

You experience pain, shame, and rage over what’s happening to you. It’s crazy-making, and it can make you appear unhinged to others. They see you not performing well, acting paranoid, temperamental, and moody. It’s truly crazy-making.

So, address the emotional flooding, manage the obsessive thinking, and understand that you’re going through a grief process. Whether you’re losing your job, your community, or both, you’ll go through the stages of grief. Recognize it as grief—the bargaining, the anger, the denial, the depression, and finally, the acceptance.

The most important thing is this: in anti-bullying literature, they often say that bullies destroy lives. No. Perhaps they destroy aspects of your life, but they can only destroy your life if you decide to let them. It will be difficult to grow and heal if you stay in that place of rage and continue fighting for justice without moving on.

A central part of recovery is self-reflection. Some people accuse me of victim-blaming when I say this. Still, if you’ve been the target of mobbing, it’s important to understand how your actions or reactions may have contributed. That doesn’t mean it’s your fault, but it means you’re taking a holistic view of the situation.

Because even if it’s not to say it’s your fault it happened, how did you react to these situations? How did people perceive you? 

Jacobsen: Let me reflect on what I’m hearing. If this is a sticking point for people, it’s important to clarify quickly. I’m hearing that a community victimizes an individual. It’s important to make sure that has happened. This doesn’t deny the fact that victimization occurred, right?

Harper: Exactly. 

Jacobsen: Acknowledging that victimization occurred is essential, but also, as an individual, you must think, “How can I make sure I don’t take this on as my permanent identity so I can heal, grow, and move on?” And secondly, “How could any of my current or future actions potentially make this situation worse than it needs to be?” It’s a tricky consideration, a subtle point that can blow up for many people. It might be confused with victim-blaming; but as you’re describing, it’s more about empowering those who’ve been victimized. It’s empowering because it shifts the narrative for the individual.

Harper: Yes, the anti-bullying framework tends to say there is nothing you did, and the only reason this happened to you is because you’re so good at what you do that others felt threatened. That suggests you can’t be bullied if you’re a lousy employee, which is absurd. Anyone can be bullied, and maybe there was something you did or didn’t. But if you believe there’s absolutely nothing you could have done or did, that’s disempowering because it means, in your next job, you’re just as helpless.

However, if you think, “What about my reactions? In what way might my actions or reactions have played a part?” That can change things. Many people I’ve encountered have been so combative and aggressive (and I probably was one of them) that once the initial abuse begins, they become so pugilistic that it invites more abuse.

There’s a line in Frasier where the two brothers complain about being bullied when they were kids, and their dad says, “Yeah, but you didn’t need to take a briefcase to school.” And they say, “Briefcases? They were valises!” And he responds, “Yeah, but it invited it.” So, self-reflection is important, but it needs to come from a place of gentleness. You have to be gentle with yourself because if you’ve been mobbed, a crowd has already beaten you up, and you’re laying there bloodied on the ground, essentially. You don’t want to keep beating yourself up.

It’s about self-reflection with loving gentleness that helps you see how your responses, actions, or reactions may have contributed to your perception. Another part of the anti-bullying narrative says, “This happened to you because they were jealous—you’re so good at what you do.” There’s often an element of threat, but it’s a perceived threat.

If someone is good at what they do but also has a vulnerability, and others can sense that vulnerability, they’ll go after them. However, they see you as competent and without that perceived vulnerability. In that case, they may target you differently.

That’s a stellar employee. They’re rising in the ranks. No one will go after them unless that person has obvious insecurity or someone in a position of power identifies them as radioactive—stay away from this person. So, it’s got to be that combination of threat plus vulnerability to make them a target.

Jacobsen: What does thriving look like? Go.

Harper: Thriving—we all define that for ourselves. It’s being able to move on from it and to see it as an experience you went through, and as horrific as it was, it helps you learn more about yourself and others. It helps you not become bitter and to become a more multidimensional person. You might be wounded and likely come out of it with economic wounds. You’d come out of it with some professional wounds if it were in the workplace.

So, thriving is about accepting your life and who you are, regardless of any status that may have been pulled out from under you. Your livelihood may have taken a major blow. You may have taken major steps back socially, professionally, and economically. Still, it’s about being content with who you are and seeing that experience as, in some ways, a gift. Even if it wasn’t a welcomed gift, it helped you to see yourself and others in a more realistic but compassionate light.

Jacobsen: So, how do you feel now, beyond the indifference? How’s your life now?

Harper: Oh, it’s pretty great. It could be better, and I wish I were still a professor sometimes, so I feel that loss. But I work for myself now. I make far more than I ever did as a professor, working fewer hours. I live in a beautiful part of the world. I own a couple of homes.

I went from having nothing and losing everything to being probably much better off than I ever would have been if I’d stayed a professor—economically and financially. But it didn’t start that way. There were some rough years. But my life is good. I have a loving family and supportive friends, and it’s good.

But, like any major loss, it’s not like you think, “Oh, I wish this loss didn’t matter.” It’s a real loss; I wish I hadn’t lost my career. But that’s life. We only have one life, and it gets shorter every year. So, it’s up to us what we do with it.

Jacobsen: That’s wise advice. It was nice to meet you. Thank you so much for contributing to this exciting little series. It’s a positive topic.

Harper: Alright. Good luck with your project, Scott.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much. Nice to meet you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Glenn Branch on the Scopes Trial in Books

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/07

Glenn Branch is the deputy director of the National Center for Science Education. He is a prominent critic of creationism and intelligent design and an activist against campaigns of suppressing teaching of evolution and climate change in school education. He is also a fellow with the Committee for Skeptical Inquiry. The Scopes trial, though historically overblown and specific to its era, remains emblematic of the creationism versus evolution debate, influencing later legal and educational battles. Despite setbacks and evolving legal frameworks, including recent Supreme Court decisions, there is hope for evolution education’s improvement, driven by secularization and enhanced state science standards.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Reporters and scientists continue to come back to the Scopes trial. Why is this particular trial so pivotal? 

Glenn Branch: The historical significance of the Scopes trial is complex. On the one hand, it would be wrong to take it as the creationism/evolution controversy in a nutshell. It was artificial, overblown, and not decisive; a lot of its features are peculiar to its historical context (constitutional law, for example, has developed significantly since the 1920s); and many people only know it through Inherit the Wind – which was not a documentary.

On the other hand, the Scopes trial is, for better or for worse, emblematic of the creationism/evolution controversy. It showcased the enduring themes of creationist rhetoric. And it provided a template through which many continue to understand the creationism/evolution controversy. When Tennessee adopted an antievolution bill in 2012, it was with the Scopes trial in mind that a former legislator dubbed it “the monkey bill.”

Jacobsen: What does Keeping the Faith by Brenda Wineapple bring to the table for the Scopes trial?

Branch: Well, Keeping the Faith is the most recent full-length treatment of the Scopes trial. The author of a number of highly regarded biographies of American literary figures, Wineapple knows how to tell a compelling story. Of course, 99 years after the trial, you wouldn’t expect any new discoveries, and there wasn’t anything surprising in the book’s narrative; it was a little disappointing that Wineapple didn’t bring any new historical insight to her project, but it’s certainly well worth reading, especially for people with only a nodding acquaintance with the trial.

Jacobsen: How do authors like Wineapple portray Darrow, Bryan, and Mencken, in the Scopes trial? My first introduction to the trial was through H.L. Mencken, who was hilarious. 

Branch: There’s a lot of variance, I think, but one fairly common tactic, which Wineapple among others in effect adopts, is to put Bryan and Mencken at opposing poles, leaving Darrow to be the voice of moderation, the voice of reason. That’s also the approach of Inherit the Wind, both the play and the Hollywood movie, where Matthew Harrison Brady is Bryan, E. L. Hornbeck is Mencken, and Henry Drummond is Darrow. Brady is a monster of intolerance and bigotry (although he has a moment, defending the ingénue Rachel against her father), while Hornbeck is flippant and cruel, especially toward and about faith; whereas Drummond, at the end of the play, thoughtfully hefts a copy of Darwin’s On the Origin of Species and a Bible, and slips them together both into his briefcase. A writer of non-fiction can’t take such liberties, but you still see a tendency to take this line, although Darrow was clearly closer to Mencken on the Bryan-to-Mencken axis than the midpoint. I should say, though, that even though he helped to shape the historical memory of the trial, Mencken wasn’t tremendously important for the trial as such — obviously he wasn’t involved in the trial, and while he certainly offered hilarious dispatches from Dayton, as you say, he actually left town before the end of the trial, so he missed the spectacle of Darrow putting Bryan on the stand. We should also bear in mind that there were a lot of other players, including Dudley Field Malone, one of Scopes’s attorneys who gave what both Bryan and Mencken regarded as the most stirring speech of the whole trial. Malone, by the way, eventually left the law for Hollywood, where he had a minor career as an actor, including playing Churchill in Mission to Moscow.

Jacobsen: How are Prohibition, the KKK, and eugenics, to which Wineapple devotes substantial attention, part of this narrative too?

Branch: The period after World War I was busy, with a lot of schemes for social betterment burgeoning in the wake of the global conflict — even schemes that were poorly thought out or even vicious. Prohibition, which was intended to solve social problems like alcoholism, family violence, and political corruption, went into effect in 1920. The white supremacist terrorists known as the Ku Klux Klan revived around 1915, and aimed at purifying the country for the benefit of native-born white Protestants, to the exclusion of blacks, Catholics, and Jews. The eugenics movement had been around for a while, but it was certainly enjoying influence in the 1920s: the Immigration Act of 1924, which banned immigration from Asia and set quotas on immigrants from eastern and southern Europe, was sponsored by a member of Congress named Albert Johnson, who was president of the Eugenics Research Association at the time. Also among such schemes was the post-war expansion of public education, which led to children across the country being exposed to more than just the traditional readin’, ritin’, and ’rithmetic — even, as in Dayton, Tennessee, to evolution. So anybody who was in, or who was commenting on, public life would tend to have views about these schemes and the connections among them, even if they weren’t actively involved in promoting or resisting them.

Jacobsen: And where did our trio of Darrow, Bryan, and Mencken stand on these issues?

Branch: Prohibition is easy: Bryan was a major booster of Prohibition. An editorial published in a Chicago newspaper not that long before the Scopes trial joked, “Mr. Bryan, being frequently intoxicated by his own ideas, has no use for wine. It is immoral to deny that the world was made in six days and it is immoral for grapes to ferment. He is pained because he has not got the six day opinion written into the constitution of the United States, but he is glad that he has the grape opinion written there.” (That editorial was alluding to a report that Bryan was interested in a constitutional amendment to ban the teaching of evolution; whether or not that was an accurate report, no such amendment was ever introduced.) In contrast, Darrow and Mencken despised Prohibition — Mencken opposed it on principle and also because, as he said, “I am omnibibulous. I drink every known alcoholic drink, and I enjoy them all.”

Darrow and Mencken also despised the Klan, although their attitudes on race differed a bit. In between the Scopes trial and the appeal of the Scopes trial, Darrow spent his time defending Ossian Sweet, an African American physician in Detroit who had moved into a traditionally white neighborhood, defended himself against a hostile white mob, and was tried for murder; Darrow helped in his defense, which ended with a hung jury and a mistrial. Mencken indulged in casual racism both in his published writings and in his correspondence, but he also encouraged the writers of the Harlem Renaissance, and one of his last publications castigated a local authority for segregating its tennis facilities — he was a complicated guy. Bryan was a racist, but a paternalistic rather than a vicious one, unlike some of his southern colleagues in the Democratic party of the time; his last political success was convincing the Democratic National Convention in 1924 not to adopt a plank condemning the Klan by name.

As for eugenics, shortly after the trial, Darrow published a hostile essay entitled “The Eugenics Cult” in The American Mercury, of which Mencken was the editor. Mencken wasn’t any friendlier to the eugenics movement, although that may have been owing to his general opposition to organized efforts for what he called “uplift”; otherwise, he regarded himself as a follower of Nietzsche, and had a lot of time for “weak-to-the-wall” slogans. Bryan, who was a champion of the common man — as long as he was pious, rural, and white — was very much opposed to “weak-to-the-wall” attitudes; part of his opposition to evolution was based, in fact, on his view that Darwin’s Descent of Man espoused such attitudes. But he never seems to have complained about the contemporary eugenics movement, and his wife, Mary Baird Bryan, was a supporter of at least one major eugenics organization of the day.

Jacobsen: A common view is religion and science at combat for the Scopes trial. Although a part of it, what is a more accurate, potentially non-adversarial, perspective?

Branch: Perhaps surprisingly, none of the participants in the Scopes trial really regarded it as a combat between religion and science. Bryan, who really led the 1920s crusade for antievolution legislation, thought that it was a combat between religion — well, between Christianity, not to put too fine a point on it — and atheism. His attitude toward evolution wavered a bit — at times, he seemed to suggest that he’d be fine with evolution except for human evolution, and you’ll note that the Butler Act, under which Scopes was prosecuted, banned the teaching of human evolution specifically; at other times, he seemed to suggest that evolution was all bunk — but what he clearly opposed was what he regarded as attempts to undermine the foundations of Christianity, society, morality. It’s for that reason that he felt the need to impugn the scientific bona fides of evolution. But he was unsuccessful in recruiting people with scientific credentials as expert witnesses in the Scopes trial, and partly for that reason the prosecution team chose a legal strategy that wouldn’t have benefited from expert witnesses, instead simply arguing that Scopes had broken the law, end of story.

On the defense side, Darrow might have come closest to regarding it as a combat between religion and science, although his agnosticism means that he was less concerned about religion writ large and more concerned with dogmatic religion. One member of the team, Dudley Field Malone, was religious, a liberal Catholic. Arthur Garfield Hays was of Jewish descent but not particularly observant; I don’t know about the erratic and slovenly John Randolph Neal Jr., which of itself suggests that he wasn’t particularly religious. But the defense team strategy was in general to argue that the Butler Act falsely assumed that science and religion were in conflict. In the same vein, they picked expert witnesses not only for their scientific credentials but also for their expressions of faith. As it turns out, the judge held that the testimony of the expert witnesses was irrelevant — their testimony was read into the record for the purposes of appeal, but it wasn’t heard by the jury — and that the prosecution’s legal theory, that the only relevant issue was whether Scopes had taught human evolution, thus violating the law, was correct.

It’s a mistake, I think, to regard the Scopes trial as a manifestation of some eternal struggle between two monolithic capitalized entities called Science and Religion. Rather, it was a local, context-dependent, contingent struggle between a particular religious outlook and a particular area of science, all influenced by social and cultural factors and values in play in that particular place and at that particular time. Like the Facebook status says, it’s complicated.

Jacobsen: How did race, gender, and regional differences affect the public’s perception of the trial?

Branch:  The Scopes trial divided the African American community. Devout African Americans declared their fidelity to the Bible, and even to fundamentalism, although the presence of established denominations and the absence of modernist theology hindered the spread of organized fundamentalism in the African American community. African American intelligentsia such as the great sociologist W. E. B. DuBois, however, took the side of evolution, regarding it as representing progress, both in general and for their race. They did so even though scientific racism was alive and well in 1925; in part because they saw that scientific racism was on the wane, and in part because they were convinced that antievolutionism in the South was driven by a fear of evolution’s implications with regard to race.

As for gender, traditionally, women were responsible for the education, especially in faith and morals, of their children. Thus it was common for antievolutionists of the Scopes era to appeal to motherhood: John Washington Butler, who introduced the law under which Scopes was prosecuted, explained his motivation by saying, “As a little boy I was taught by my mother to believe in the Bible.” And women, at least in Tennessee, were eager for the public schools to become (or to continue to be) involved in teaching faith and morals. Yet women were not leaders in the antievolutionist movement, in part, because it was driven by a self-consciously combative, intellectualized, masculine form of Christianity: female antievolutionist crusaders like Aimee Semple McPherson were, and are, unusual.

Region is quite interesting. It’s not usually realized that fundamentalism was initially a Northern and urban phenomenon: a reaction to modernizing tendencies in religion that were initially influential only in the urban North. If there’s one person that I’d credit — or blame — as launching the antievolutionist movement in the 1920s, it would be William Bell Riley, who was a Baptist pastor in Minneapolis; it was his World Christian Fundamentals Association that recruited William Jennings Bryan for the Scopes trial. John Roach Straton, a pastor in New York City, was also influential. But fundamentalism was adapted to flourish in the South. In Fort Worth, Texas, the pistol-packing pastor J. Frank Norris, who memorably denounced “that hell-born, Bible-destroying, deity-of-Christ-denying, German rationalism known as evolution,” was as responsible as anyone for bringing antievolutionism south. And today the South enjoys a reputation as particularly hostile to evolution, even though the Midwest is probably on a par.

Anyone who’s interested in these aspects of the trial should read Jeffrey Moran’s American Genesis, published in 2012, which has a good discussion.

Jacobsen: What religious views were responsible for the Scopes trial?

Branch: That turns out to be a remarkably complex question! If you wanted to give a one-word answer, it might be “fundamentalism,” and you can certainly find respectable historians who study the trial who would agree. But in his American Apocalypse, published in 2014, Matthew Avery Sutton emphasizes that “evolution had not been a significant factor in the rise of the fundamentalist movement, nor had fundamentalism been at the base of Bryan’s crusade, nor were fundamentalists the only Americans uncomfortable with Darwin’s theories.” All three of those points are generally right, I think, so I’ll expand on them just a bit.

First, fundamentalism is often said to begin with the publication of The Fundamentals, a series of pamphlets published between 1910 and 1915 that addressed various issues from what we would now describe as a fundamentalist perspective. Evolution was not a major concern of these pamphlets, and the attitudes toward evolution that were visible were not especially hostile — dismissive or skeptical, perhaps, but not hostile. Second, Bryan, although a devout Presbyterian and someone eager to help steer the church — he ran for the position of Moderator of the General Assembly — wasn’t really involved with the fundamentalist movement until the 1920s, and his theological approach for much of his career was more similar to the so-called social gospel movement, which aimed to apply Christian ethics to social problems: Prohibition was one of the results, and Bryan was a keen Prohibitionist. Third, perhaps less impressive, Sutton is right that fundamentalists weren’t, and aren’t, the only Americans leery of evolution — but, on the other hand, they seem more inclined to try to enshrine their leeriness into public policy!

In any event, despite its potential to mislead, “fundamentalism” might be the best one-word answer you can give.

Jacobsen: Scopes was convicted, but although his conviction was overturned on appeal to the Tennessee Supreme Court, the Butler Act remained on the books. What became of it and of the other Scopes-era bans on teaching evolution?

Branch: The Tennessee legislature repealed the Butler Act in 1967, in part because of the publicity about it due to the Hollywood movie version of the play Inherit the Wind and in part because there were credible lawsuits being filed against its enforcement. Only two other states then had evolution statutes: Arkansas and Mississippi. The Arkansas law was challenged in a lawsuit that wound up with the Supreme Court in 1968, which ruled, in Epperson v. Arkansas, that the law violated the Establishment Clause of the First Amendment. The Mississippi law was similarly struck down by the Mississippi Supreme Court in 1970.

Jacobsen: But that wasn’t the end of efforts to undermine the teaching of evolution, was it?

Branch: By no means! The strategy in the second wave of legislation, from the 1970s to the 2000s, was to balance the teaching of evolution with a supposed alternative: “biblical creationism,” “creation science,” or “intelligent design.” But these proposals, when adopted, were routinely — and successfully — challenged as unconstitutional in the federal courts: a statute in Tennessee requiring equal time for biblical creationism in textbooks in Daniel v. Waters (1975); statutes in Arkansas and Louisiana requiring equal time for creation science in classrooms in McLean v. Arkansas (1982) and Edwards v. Aguillard (1987); and a Pennsylvania school district policy requiring the teaching of intelligent design in Kitzmiller v. Dover (2005). In each case, the court held that the supposed alternative to evolution was, at the bottom, religious, so a public school’s presentation of the supposed alternative as scientifically credible would violate the Establishment Clause of the First Amendment to the Constitution.

Jacobsen: But even the Kitzmiller trial didn’t put an end to it.

Branch: Alas, it didn’t. It was already clear to the proponents of intelligent design that despite their hopes their ideas weren’t going to survive constitutional scrutiny. As a result, a third wave of legislation emerged circa 2004, seeking to blunt the teaching of evolution. Without mentioning any supposed alternatives to evolution, such proposals typically allow (rather than require) public school teachers to present “the strengths and weaknesses” of supposedly controversial scientific topics, with evolution often the sole example adduced of such a topic. About eighty such bills have been introduced in state legislatures since 2004, with three enacted: in Mississippi in 2006, Louisiana in 2008, and Tennessee in 2012. These laws have not been challenged as unconstitutional in court in part because they are permissive: in the absence of egregious conduct on the part of a teacher, it would be difficult to demonstrate the harm caused by such a law to a prospective plaintiff. By the same token, however, it is unclear to what extent teachers in these states avail themselves of the license that the laws afford them to miseducate their students about evolution.

Jacobsen: What does the survey data tell us about evolution education at a national level — based on surveys from 1939-1940, 2007, and 2019?

Branch: The first of these surveys found that 53.7 percent of high school biology teachers reported that evolution was taught either as a fact or as a “principle underlying plant, animal and human origin.” The second found that 51 percent of high school biology teachers reported emphasizing that evolution was a fact while not giving any credence to creationism. Now, these surveys aren’t exactly comparable: there was probably a selection bias and a response bias in the earlier survey, resulting in a rosier picture for evolution education, and the questions are obviously different. Still, these results suggest a lack of progress over 67 years.

Matters are quite different when we compare the results of the 2007 survey with those of the 2019 replication, however. In that short 12 years, there was a considerable improvement, since the latter survey found 67 percent — up from 51 percent — of high school biology teachers reporting that evolution was a fact while not giving any credence to creationism. The improvement was in part to increasing exposure to evolution on the part of pre-service teachers and in part to increasing emphasis on evolution in state science standards, especially the Next Generation Science Standards, a model set of standards developed by 26 states and a consortium of various non-profit organizations, released in 2013, and adopted by 20 states plus the District of Columbia.

Jacobsen: So are we out of the woods, as far as evolution education is concerned?

Branch: Unfortunately, no. Of particular concern is the currently revanchist Supreme Court. In its decision in Kennedy v. Bremerton School District (2022), the court discarded what had been the settled tests for whether a government action violated the Establishment Clause of the First Amendment to the Constitution — the Lemon test and the related endorsement test — which were the foundation for the successful litigation against the antievolution legislation in the second wave. It is unclear whether such cases would be decided differently without those tests. But creationists are alive to the possibility. In 2021, Mary Bentley, a state representative in Arkansas, introduced a bill that would allow the state’s public school educators to “teach creationism as a theory of how the earth came to exist” — which it isn’t, but whatever. On the floor of the legislature, she was reminded by a colleague about the case law establishing the unconstitutionality of her proposal, and replied by “noting that the high court’s makeup has changed since then.” 

Jacobsen: But is there reason to hope?

Branch: Fortunately, yes! Despite the occasional outbreak of explicit attacks and a background level of implicit hostility across the country, creationist attacks on evolution education are on the wane, owing to the accelerating secularization of the United States and, perhaps, to the efforts of people of faith to reconcile their communities to evolution. Part of the reason that it’s been so easy historically to launch such attacks, of course, is that the U.S. educational system is so decentralized, with about 13,500 local school districts calling the shots with respect to curriculum. But despite the continuing decentralization of the American educational system, there are centripetal forces at work. State science standards have been increasing uniformity, as well as quality, in teacher preparation and professional development, textbooks, and curricula, with the availability of free, vetted, and standards-aligned curricula a recent phenomenon contributing as well. Perhaps in the future all American students will be in a position to appreciate that nothing in biology makes sense except in the light of evolution.

Jacobsen: What are your thoughts on the positive and negative aspects of K-12 education, particularly in situations where some students in certain school districts attend a more evolution-oriented biology class while others do not, based on the preferences of their parents? How might this affect those students after they graduate from K-12? How might this impact them during their K-12 education if they receive a less comprehensive understanding of the objective reality of evolution?

Branch: Well, there are numerous inequities in the U.S. educational system, many of which stem from local control, where most schools are funded by local property taxes and governed by locally elected school boards. This means that even within a single state, one student might be learning evolution from a prepared teacher willing to teach it effectively, while another may not. The system of local control extends even to individual schools and classrooms. Thus, a student in one classroom might receive a quality education in evolution while another student does not. There are anecdotes suggesting that, in some schools, students are informally placed into different classrooms based on what teachers anticipate their family’s reaction to learning about evolution.

This is unfair to students deprived of a complete understanding of a central concept in biology. It can also have long-term consequences if these students pursue higher education in fields where the study of evolution is essential or in careers in fields like medicine and agriculture, where knowledge of evolution is economically important. 

Jacobsen: I’m curious: What do we know about the 13,500 school districts? Have any representative surveys been conducted? 

Branch: In the late 1980s and early 1990s, there were a few surveys of school board members and their views on evolution education. Additionally, there may have been some studies of administrators from that period, but there has been little since then, so more work needs to be done.

In 2007, two political scientists from Penn State, Eric Plutzer and Michael Berkman, conducted only the second national survey of high school biology teachers regarding their thoughts on and teaching evolution. In 2019, the National Center for Science Education (NCSE) and Eric Plutzer replicated that survey and found substantial improvements. The NCSE, where I am the deputy director, promotes accurate and effective science education, particularly teaching evolution and climate change.

Jacobsen: If you were to conduct a new survey today, several decades later, covering the full 13,500 school districts, which factors would be the most critical to target for gaining insight into how these districts handle evolution and biology education?

Branch: That’s an interesting question. One important area would be to inquire about explicit formal policies. While school districts often have policy manuals, they tend to be generic or only slightly modified from boilerplate; but sometimes they have adopted formal policies aimed at undermining the teaching of evolution in one way or another What might be more revealing—but harder to uncover—would be informal policies, such as the extent to which students are informally tracked into evolution-friendly or evolution-unfriendly biology classes, as I mentioned earlier.

It could be challenging to ask administrators or board members about this, as they might be unwilling to report accurately if they believe a truthful answer could reflect poorly on them. Thoughtful consideration is needed to design questions that yield reliable information without triggering too much concern from respondents.

Jacobsen: Who is most important for a public education and critical thinking organization to engage with administrators, high school teachers, or local school board members?

Branch: Well, local school board members, who are locally elected, are crucial, but  in general, their main constituency is who they will listen to. We at NCSE have had friendly relations with several members of local and state school boards, but it’s not something we can always count on. Rather, we are more likely to assist local citizens by giving them talking points, suggestions, or strategies to approach local school board members, administrators, or teachers if they face challenges to evolution education in their schools. Teachers and administrators are responsive to certain types of claims they’re familiar with. For example, teachers and administrators can be reminded to check their local district’s policies if they need to follow them, or they can be directed to state science standards, which are documents specifying the skills and knowledge students are expected to gain through science education.

State science standards can be especially useful if a parent comes in and says, “Why are you teaching my kid evolution? I don’t like it. Stop”? Standards that contain evolution allow teachers to say, “Evolution is part of the state’s science standards. The state expects your child to learn about evolution, and that’s what I’m doing—just my job.”

Jacobsen: What do you find to be the most meaningful part of your job?

Branch: One thing I enjoy about my job is doing various tasks daily, so I stay energized. However, one of the most rewarding aspects is helping people navigate the intricacies of their local education system to resolve conflicts over the teaching of evolution. Most people don’t want to be publicly associated with lawsuits; they just want the issue to disappear. So, it’s a win for science education whenever NCSE can help them resolve the situation quietly. That’s one of the most gratifying parts of the job.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Glenn. 

Branch: My pleasure, Scott!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Paul Bramson on Communication, Confidence, and Coaching

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/06

Paul Bramson is among the most impactful and gifted keynote speakers and trainers globally. He consistently delivers compelling talks and training workshops that leave a lasting impression. Paul is recognized as a thought leader in communication, leadership, and sales. He has over 25 years of experience inspiring all levels of professionals, leaders, and teams. Paul’s ability to captivate and entertain audiences stems from his genuine passion, unique talents, and commitment to improving. He has recently been featured in BuiltInMSNGoBankingRatesFortune, and Forbes. Hediscusses knowing his communication talents early, becoming president of his high school class, and realizing his passion for public speaking. He talks about developing communication, sales, business, leadership, and keynote speaking skills while emphasizing the importance of confidence, preparation, and audience management. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Paul Bramson to discuss communication. I have an earlier live question for you. Did you show any early talents or personality style suggesting that you were interested in or effective at communication? Were there any moments in your early life where you realized this?

Paul Bramson: In my life. 

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: What do you think? I just woke up as an adult. I love this question, Scott. I’m going to be very American with you, so be ready. 

Jacobsen: You might be fitting to sound more stereotypically New York.

Bramson: I’m from Boston.

Jacobsen: Oh, you’re from Boston? Excellent! 

Bramson: I went to Boston University. My communication journey began early. I was big into sports and was captain of the basketball team. But it really started when I became president of my high school class, and I got the chance to speak to bigger audiences. That was the moment I thought, ‘Wow, I enjoy this, and I’m pretty good at it.’ However, as an adolescent, you don’t fully know. That was a tell-tale signs. That was a key moment when I realized I wanted to speak in front of people. That passion grew from there when I went to college.

Yes, I joined a fraternity and did a lot of socializing, but it wasn’t until I entered the business world—when I went into sales—and eventually became an international sales speaker and trainer for MCI Communications, traveling the world. I thought, ‘Wow, not only do I love doing this, but I’m also good at it.’ It was a gradual build-up from high school to college, to the work world, and then at age 32, I went out on my own.

Jacobsen: What was your experience with the fraternity? Did that help build your communication skills?

Bramson: It’s been a long time since I’ve talked about my fraternity. Scott, sometimes, people know they’re good at communicating with others. I was good at that. I worked as a bartender and at the doors, so I knew I could communicate well. However, that doesn’t always transcend into the work world.

I recognized I had strong communication skills, and I used them a lot within the fraternity and college life. The next logical step for me, though I’m a lot older than you, Scott, was to move into sales around 1992–1993. Sales helps you, more then than now, to leverage those communication skills. 

Jacobsen: When you are giving training and workshops, and public speaking and professional keynotes, what would you say are the emotional hurdles that can come from most people when they are beginning to do those things… 

Bramson: What do you mean by that?

Jacobsen: I mean by that the Jerry Seinfeld joke that people’s number one fear is public speaking. 

Bramson: Oh, it’s not even close. 

Jacobsen: Their number two is death. So, they’d rather be in the casket than giving the eulogy. 

Bramson: [Laughing] That is his. I used to use that one.

Jacobsen: There you go. In that sense, when you are helping people train in these skill sets, what do you look for in terms of difficulties that they may be commonly having, so you can help them as speakers, as communicators?

Bramson: When I do training, there is a difference between training and keynote speaking. So, I talk about all different topics. Sales, leadership, communications, connecting like a pro is a big one. What you’re talking about is presentation skills, people are nervous because they feel very vulnerable speaking in front of people. They need to get more reps at speaking in front of groups. The biggest challenge is the nervousness. They have been coached and trained appropriately, especially your generation and lower. There wasn’t a lot of the verbal communication, more tethered to the technology. I’m sure you’ve heard all of this, Scott. It is getting more reps and more appropriate coaching from people that are credible and getting less nervous doing it. When you’re older, you have the emotional intelligence and self-awareness to say, “What makes me nervous? What doesn’t make me nervous?”

When I’m in front of people, as long as I know my content, Scott—and this is the key thing—you’ve got to know your content. You’ve got to be prepared. Right now, you’re winging this interview, so I’m making you pivot. I can tell from your facial expressions, “Wow, he’s making me work a little harder at this.” By the way, when you know your content really well, and you do; if I know my content, I’m really good—like world-renowned good, Scott. I realized this when I was younger. I have a lot of inherent, innate skills. I can be charismatic, I can be dynamic. But the other thing I have, Scott, is that I know how to manage an audience. There are three things: you have to know your content, you have to be dynamic, and you have to be able to manage your audience. I can do all three. I knew that at a young age.

Here’s something interesting, Scott: I’ve never had imposter syndrome. I never experienced it. That’s a popular concept these days, right?

Jacobsen: Yes, it comes up a lot when people talk about these topics—even among highly successful people. 

Bramson: You have a good radio voice, Scott. 

Jacobsen: I appreciate that. 

Bramson: I didn’t say face. I said voice. 

Jacobsen: That’s right. 

Bramson: You’ve got an excellent voice.

Jacobsen: There’s this George Carlin line.

Bramson: Did you say, George Carlin? [Laughing] You love the comedians. 

Jacobsen: He once said that various comedians he knew, who were prominent at the time, were “wracked” with self-doubt. That was his word—“wracked.” 

Bramson: Comedians are a different bird. There’s something wrong with comedians to begin with, but that’s another story, as you probably know. Sorry, finish your question.

Jacobsen: Yes, so, when I hear the common more contemporary phrase “imposter syndrome,” which is popularized, I think of the more straightforward language of a prior generation of “self-doubt.”

Bramson: Fair. 

Jacobsen: Someone could have all the skills, they could perform well, but emotionally, they lack that security tied to their abilities. 

Bramson: Now, Scott, you’d have to put them on a therapist’s couch for that. There are some deep-rooted issues at play. But let’s say, we’re not having that conversation.

Jacobsen: Right.

Bramson: Imposter syndrome can come from a lot of different area. In my experience, I never lacked confidence in myself. I thank mom and dad for a strong upbringing. In my experience, aside from getting on a psychiatric couch, the reason why people experience imposter syndrome is that they don’t feel like they belong in that environment. They might be speaking to a much more educated or credible group, and they don’t feel they have the credibility. This is the kind of thing that leads to imposter syndrome from what I’ve seen working with people, especially with people who haven’t developed the skill set. If they haven’t been coached or trained appropriately, it’s like a professional athlete, Scott.

Unless you’ve had the reps, proper training, and coaching, I’ll use hockey as an example, which I’m sure you love being in Canada—I could be wrong. Imposter syndrome, especially among the young, stems from not feeling like they belong in that arena with more experienced people. When young people communicate to older audiences, they feel that imposter syndrome because they think they don’t have the credibility to do it. However, if a younger person has a strong skill set—such as being able to communicate well and having some emotional intelligence—that can mask or create a credibility.

For example, I might be older than you, Scott, but I could think, “Wow, Scott is a better communicator than I am.” As a result, I want to listen to you. Does that make sense to you?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: I hope that answers your question. 

Jacobsen: What do you find is the baseline skill set most people lack when they come for communication training? 

Bramson: Are we talking about communication, sales, leadership, or all of the above?

Jacobsen: Just communication.

Bramson: So, it depends. This gets a little deeper, especially when we’re talking about presentation skills. What do they lack? Confidence. They lack confidence, but eye contact, movement, posture, gestures—those are all visible actions. People often lack tremendous confidence in executing them. They simply haven’t put in the reps. They often fail because they haven’t practiced enough.

Jacobsen: How long does it take, or how many reps do they need? That’s a two-part question. 

Bramson: Well, this is complicated because reps can vary depending on the audience, the content, or the role they’re in.

Typically, they need about five years of consistent practice. I’m not just talking about getting up and doing one speech. You could do a speech 10 times, practice how you look and sound, and get good at that specific speech. But if we’re talking about building a foundational skill set, it takes about two to three years of consistent practice—at least once a month—to become proficient.

This takes real work, Scott, if you want to be “really good at it.” 

Jacobsen: But how often do you meet people who are motivated to become “really good at it”?

Bramson: Plenty of people say, “I wish I were more confident speaking in front of others.” That’s a huge crowd. People are always enamored when I tell them I’m a professional speaker. They ask, “What do you speak about?” I tell them sales, leadership. They’re like, “Wow, that’s exciting! I could never do that.” I hear it all the time. How do you feel speaking in front of people, Scott?

Jacobsen: Oh, I’m okay. 

Bramson: Do you wish you were better?

Jacobsen: It’s always nice thing to be a little bit better at something, sure. 

Bramson: “Something” or something like that?

Jacobsen: Sure, depending on what it is. It’s probably not good to become a better thief.

Bramson: Sure, but I said something like presenting.

Jacobsen: Yes, something virtuous like that. 

Bramson: “Virtuous” is a good word.

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: This kind of improvement takes time. I still work on presentation skills, but it’s not as popular as it used to be. It’s still popular, but what’s more popular now is how to communicate effectively with people—that’s the connecting part. How can someone connect with others better when they communicate? That’s the stuff that resonates with people now. Presentation skills are still fine. I do virtual presentations. My team does them too—virtual and face-to-face presentation skills. The big ones are connecting like a pro. How can I better connect with Scott so my message resonates with him rather than speaking one way? 

Jacobsen: Do you find this particularly poignant in sales and business?

Bramson: Life, Scott. Yes, it’s a life skill, Scott. If I know how you’re built—I call these your “underlying needs”—then I can speak in ways that resonate more with you. That’s part of a program I offer. If I understand your underlying needs, I can speak words and language more likely to resonate with you. You’re more likely to listen and engage. For example, do you have people in your life who absolutely drive you crazy when they talk to you? The answer is, ‘Yes.” They don’t know how to talk to you. On the flip side, do you have people in your life who just “get you”?

Jacobsen: Yes, in different ways and to different degrees.

Bramson: And you prefer to be around the people who get you, right?

Jacobsen: Sure, when I get out and want to socialize. 

Bramson: That’s because some people connect better with you than others. Let me give you an example, Scott. I won’t tell you what my specific underlying need is, but there are generally four: the need to be right, the need to be liked, the need to feel safe, and the need to look good. I’m on one of those needs. Do you remember what I asked you at the very beginning of this conversation?

Jacobsen: No, I don’t.

Bramson: I asked if you had done any research on me. 

Jacobsen: I said, “No.” 

Bramson: Now, that doesn’t resonate with me—not that Scott doesn’t resonate with me, but that statement didn’t. My underlying need is the need to look good, so I appreciate when people show they’ve prepared. I’m not saying you were disrespectful, but that’s an example of how our needs affect how we connect.

Bramson: So, I want to be clear. I’m not saying that. But if you had said, “Paul, I’ve done all this research about you,” that would have connected with me. When you say, “I’ve got nine other people,” I don’t care about that. I care about you and me connecting. Does that make sense?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: Now I’m assessing your underlying need. You’re not motivated by the need to look good, by the way. I don’t think that’s one of yours. You’re likely motivated by one of two things: the need to be right or the need to feel safe. Maybe the need to be liked, but not the need to look good. I haven’t fully defined this for you yet, though.

Jacobsen: Right.

Bramson: Anyway, that’s the connecting piece. 

Jacobsen: That four-part theory—is there an underlying psychological framework for it?

Bramson: I’ll make it easy for you. This isn’t about personality types, like Myers-Briggs or a DISC profile. Those are institutionalized systems. They’re fine. They have their place. What I’m talking about are motivational drivers. Why do you behave and react in certain ways when people talk to you? What makes you feel fulfilled or unfulfilled? That’s the underlying basis.

Jacobsen: Where do you find that people seeking communication, business, or sales skills usually fall within those four categories?

Bramson: It’s not about the person but rather the roles they gravitate toward. 

Jacobsen: That’s an interesting question.

Bramson: No, seriously, that’s a great question. I mean it. Very astute, Scott. Typically, people tend to go into roles that align with their underlying needs. It’s about what makes them feel fulfilled or not. For example, in sales, the need to look good and the need to be liked are common. These roles might attract people who want to stand out or build relationships or flex a  bit..

People in account management or engineering roles are more often driven by the need to be safe or the need to be right. They prefer predictable, process-oriented structure. The only reason I hesitate to peg you as someone driven by the need to be safe is that you’re a freelancer, which isn’t the safest of the roles. 

Jacobsen: [Laughing]. 

Bramson: [Laughing] Do you value relationships? 

Jacobsen: It depends, yes, to some degree, particularly close, intimate ones.

Bramson: If you leave this conversation, will you think about whether Paul liked you or whether Paul respected you? Which would matter more to you?

Jacobsen: Third option: neither.

Bramson: No, no, no. There’s no third option.

Jacobsen: Neither really matters.

Bramson: Don’t sidestep the question, Jacobsen. 

Jacobsen: It’s both.

Bramson: You might lean toward the need to feel safe. I said that earlier. 

Jacobsen: It might also be a false dichotomy.

Bramson: [Laughing] It’s not a false dichotomy. They’re not that dissimilar. There’s a lot of overlap. Anyway, I knew I was right. Let’s keep going.

Jacobsen: What are the stumbling blocks that are rarely encountered, but you do find? I’m thinking about areas where people, even after a year of learning basic skill sets and getting those reps in, still struggle. It’s not necessarily about skills or emotional motivations. So, when people are, let’s say, two to three years into developing a foundational skill set, or maybe even up to five years in to become proficient—whether it’s in sales, leadership, communication, or other areas—they’re quite far along. Yet, many people still face common issues, like a lack of confidence, imposter syndrome, or self-doubt. But I’m curious about the rarer challenges people face, even after getting training from you or others. What uncommon stumbling blocks come up at later stages of development?

Bramson: That’s a thoughtful question, so I appreciate it. I’ll give you an answer, and I hope it addresses what you’re asking.

What I’ve noticed isn’t something specific to the younger generation. The Gen Zs of the world are full of, excuse my language, piss and vinegar. They’re ready to take on the world, and they want to be better. They question things, but it’s to evolve.

However, as people progress in their careers, the one thing that is absolutely eye-opening to me is the lack of emotional intelligence, Scott. It’s scary. So, to answer your question—it’s not really an outlier, but it’s a significant issue.

Emotional intelligence has five elements, according to Daniel Goleman: self-awareness, self-regulation, motivation, empathy, and social skills. What I often see is a glaring lack of self-awareness and self-regulation, especially in leadership roles. It’s shocking, really. These are people leading teams, yet they lack those essential emotional skills.

Emotional intelligence has been around for years, and in the early 2000s, companies started to recognize the importance of soft skills. But even now, the absence of emotional intelligence in leadership is a real problem.

I’m not going to invest in this. But fast forward to 2024, and emotional intelligence is high on the list. The problem is that people aren’t being trained or coached appropriately, and they don’t interview for it.

Jacobsen: When they’re not interviewing for emotional intelligence, what about empathy? That’s one of the five elements of Goleman’s framework, which you mentioned. As I’ve interviewed experts on narcissism—and I’ll be interviewing more—there seems to be a rising tide of narcissistic traits over the past several decades.

Bramson: Did you say narcissism?

Jacobsen: Yes. There’s been a rise in narcissistic traits—not necessarily full-blown narcissistic personality disorder, though that might follow from the trend. It’s more of a cultural shift, with a rise in certain traits or subcomponents of narcissism. Social media might be a factor, but regardless of the cause, do you think a reduction in empathy is connected to that? Does this impact people’s ability to excel in sales, business, and communication?

Bramson: Empathy has a bigger impact on leadership, though it’s important for everyone. From a leadership perspective, empathy is often lacking, and it’s crucial—along with compassion and sympathy. While they aren’t the same, they’re closely related and fall under the same umbrella. But it’s not just empathy that’s the issue.

There’s also a significant lack of social skills. Some people just don’t connect well with others, and yet they’re put into leadership roles. It’s like, wait a minute—you’re leading an organization, but you don’t have the social skills to connect with people? That’s counterintuitive. So, it’s not just a lack of empathy; it’s also poor social skills. And those two—empathy and social skills—are critical for connecting well with others. The first three elements of emotional intelligence are more about the individual.

So, I’d argue it’s a combination: yes, empathy is lacking, but so are social skills. Have you ever been around someone and thought, “My god, they’re awkward”? I’m sure you’ve interviewed people like that—people who come across as awkward despite their professional achievements.

Jacobsen: That’s fair. Some people’s professions speak to those issues, and others just come across that way naturally. Recently, there was a story involving a student association. The student newspaper was reporting on improper actions by some of the executive members, and I reached out to interview them about it.

There was a petition to dissolve the student newspaper and the arts publication, along with the ink society publishing house. They wanted to remove any mention of the student association from past or future publications. The petition seemed questionable, with invalid student IDs and mismatched names.

One individual told me it was their first interview, as they had just jumped into the job. It was an awful situation to start with, so I kept the interview short and light. In that case, it wasn’t necessarily a lack of skills but rather sensitivity to inexperience. It echoes what you said earlier—sometimes younger people haven’t had the chance to develop those emotional or social skills yet.

So rather than something situational, they might be on the spectrum, or there might be something that makes it harder for them to develop these skills. That’s something deeply rooted. And it’s not something easily extirpated. It’s just there.

Bramson: Yes. 

Jacobsen: So you have to be sensitive to that. I’m not sure what my question is exactly, but when dealing with leadership and someone lacks those skills, how do you build them up? And if the issue is intrinsic, how do you help them develop those skills? I might be assuming something in that question, because it’s probably more about helping them facilitate their own development, rather than just teaching them.

Bramson: That’s fair, of course. Well, let’s do the first part first, and then don’t forget the second part. Do you have the second part ready?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Bramson: I’ve done a lot of this in my career, though I’ve moved away from it recently. You need one-on-one coaching. Forget about psychologists and sociologists—you can have them, but I once worked with a company that had a psychiatrist on staff. Fascinating guy, super smart. He was from Chicago and did institutionalized work with them, which was helpful, but most companies won’t do that. People need one-on-one coaching.

For instance, Scott, if I spent an hour with you, I wouldn’t be where I am today, but I’d be more effective after that hour—not because I don’t respect you, but because we’re talking about deep coaching. You’ve got to get into someone’s psyche, understand how they grew up—that’s something you touched on earlier. You need to understand their foundation and start from there. For example, let’s talk about where someone is empathetic and why they feel less empathy in certain situations.

Coaching is essential. No one gets better on their own—they just don’t. By the way, someone who grows without coaching or without what I call a “personal board of advisors” or mentors will find it hard to elevate. Sure, they can attend a training program, which is fantastic. But after leaving a great training program, it’s like a sermon—they’ll forget it in two weeks. You need consistent follow-up coaching. That’s how you become more aware and better. I hope that answers your first question.

Jacobsen: And what if the issue is intrinsic?

Bramson: What do you mean by intrinsic?

Jacobsen: So, qualifier: I’m not a medical professional. But if someone comes to you and says they have a particular issue that results in social deficits—something intrinsic that a medical professional has diagnosed—how do you handle that?

Bramson: That’s something for a medical professional to handle. If someone tells me they have a personality disorder, I’m out. I won’t go near that because I’m not a medical professional. I know what I’m good at, and I stay in my lane. I’m not a medical professional, so I can’t provide medical advice. When you talk about intrinsic or foundational issues—oh, I’m out. It’s funny—not funny in a humorous way, but interesting that you bring this up.

If someone brings up medical issues, I say, “I’m out.” I don’t touch that. You need to talk to a medical professional. I can discuss things from a work perspective, or from a life or work landscape perspective, without touching on medical topics. That’s where I’m comfortable. But anything medical—I’m out. People take medication for these issues, Scott, and if anyone without a medical degree attempts to handle that, it’s a scary situation. I wouldn’t go near it. So, are you getting what you need?

Jacobsen: Yes, this is interesting.

Bramson: Good. By the way, you’re doing a great job, Scott. Are you an academic? You’re very thoughtful. I imagine you were good in school. I have a slight suspicion. Either that or you didn’t try hard. 

Jacobsen: I’d say average in school.

Bramson: But you come across as very sharp. You come across as an academic, and that’s a compliment.

Jacobsen: Thank you. So, what’s your take-home message for people at the end of a session, like a keynote? When you finish up a keynote, what are you hoping people walk away with?

Bramson: I want them to be better. I want them to be better at work and better in life. People often get into relationships—whether it’s a work relationship or a personal one—and they don’t understand why things aren’t going well. The relationship isn’t evolving positively because they don’t connect well. You need to ask yourself, “Why is that?” It could be something you’re doing, or it could be something they’re doing, but you need to coach people to be better.

As Dr. Phil says, you have to teach people how to treat you. The other thing I want people to take away is this: stop talking from your own perspective and start speaking from someone else’s perspective if you want to connect with them. That’s what I want them to do. Stop communicating the way you’re built and start communicating based on how others are built. You’re more likely to connect if you speak the way they think, not the way you think.

Jacobsen: Drop the mic?

Bramson: Drop the mic! I’ll drop the mic on that one.

Jacobsen: I’m sure you do that occasionally.

Bramson: I will drop the mic!

Jacobsen: Excellent. It was nice to meet you. Thank you so much for your time today.

Bramson: Scott, thank you for carving out the time. I look forward to seeing the article. Excellent. It’s been a pleasure.

Jacobsen: Thanks, Paul. We’ll see you soon.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Elinor Greenberg, Ph.D., Defining and Identifying Narcissism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/05

Elinor Greenberg, Ph.D. (website) is the author of the book Borderline, Narcissistic, and Schizoid Adaptations: The Pursuit of Love, Admiration, and Safety. She is a globally recognized Gestalt therapy trainer specializing in the diagnosis and treatment of Borderline, Narcissistic, and Schizoid adaptations in a lively and practical way. She has trained psychotherapists in her approach in the England, Mexico, Norway, Russia, Sweden, US, Wales. She is an Associate Editor of the Gestalt Review, a faculty member of the New York Institute for Gestalt Therapy, and a faculty member of the Gestalt Center for Psychotherapy and Training, where she designed and taught a post-graduate program on the diagnosis and treatment of Borderline, Narcissistic, and Schizoid Adaptations. She is also a graduate of and former faculty member of “The Masterson Institute,” which is a post-graduate training institute teaching psychoanalytically oriented developmental, self, and object relations approach to the theory and treatment of personality disorders. She is a certified Ericksonian hypnotherapist and is in the National Registry for Certified Group Psychotherapists. Dr. Greenberg was honoured by Quora.com as a Top Writer for 2017 and 2018.

Greenberg explains the complexities of diagnosing narcissistic personality disorder. She emphasizes that narcissism involves rigid, maladaptive coping mechanisms rooted in childhood. Greenberg distinguishes between emotional and cognitive empathy, highlights the concept of “object constancy,” and describes her approach to therapy, including identifying splitting behaviours and listening for exaggeration and performative self-presentation in clients.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Elinor Greenberg, an expert in narcissism and other personality disorders. We’ll be focusing on narcissism today. I’d like to ask you about your unique approach to the treatment modalities of narcissism, which I was unaware of before being informed and educated by you. So, a two-part question:

First, how are we defining narcissism, and how do we use that definition to separate treatable from untreatable cases?

Elinor Greenberg: We don’t use that definition to separate treatable from untreatable. The definition helps to identify people who meet the full criteria for narcissistic personality disorder—what’s commonly called ‘the pattern.’ It’s the name of a pattern, not a label for the person. The pattern of coping that is termed narcissistic personality disorder is distinct from individuals who have narcissistic traits. These individuals may appear narcissistic on the surface, but at a deeper level, they are not.

In my definition of narcissistic personality disorder, the first criterion is that the individual must have a personality disorder. A personality disorder is generally defined as a rigid, maladaptive set of coping mechanisms, thought processes, behaviours, and interpretations that trace back to early childhood. These mechanisms likely developed, theoretically speaking (though we cannot prove it), in response to a home environment where the individual sought to maximize love and support while minimizing rejection and punishment. I reframe disorders as adaptations because I believe they begin as adaptations. However, the field defines them as maladaptive, persistent, and rigid responses that are often inappropriate. Nevertheless, the individual pays a price for these responses.

You can think of a personality disorder as a suit of armour—protection. Narcissistic personality disorder shields a person from humiliation, feelings of shame, and feelings of inadequacy. However, when you wear a suit of armour, you lose flexibility. So, you sacrifice flexibility in exchange for a specific kind of safety—feeling special, in the case of narcissism.

The first step is determining whether the person has a personality disorder, meaning they exhibit a rigid, maladaptive pattern that isn’t serving them and is interfering with their coping skills and functioning in important areas of daily life. On top of that, they would need to meet the criteria for narcissism.

Different criteria depend on the theoretical approach to narcissism. It’s like the story of the blind man and the elephant. Are you familiar with that?

Jacobsen: Yes.

Greenberg: For those who aren’t familiar with it. Briefly, five blind men are asked to describe an elephant. Each one touches a different part of the elephant. One touches the tail and says an elephant is like a string. Another touches the trunk and says an elephant is like a snake. One touches the side and says the elephant is like a wall, but you can feel it breathing. Narcissistic personality disorder is similar. Each theoretical school focuses on a different aspect of the same phenomenon, and all are more or less true.

In my first year, I had two clients like that. They initially seemed to view the therapy and me as adequate, even good. They praised me. Then, one day—maybe around six sessions in—I said something, and they suddenly hated me. It wasn’t just dislike. They didn’t calmly say, “Elinor” or “Dr. Greenberg”—whatever they preferred to call me—”I’m upset that you said that.” No, it wasn’t that kind of response.

It was pure hatred. The kind of reaction where they quit therapy, start yelling at me, and storm out of the room, accusing me of lacking professionalism or depth. They might even stop paying back the session when clients still paid me by check.

I couldn’t understand it. How could someone go from loving me to hating me, swinging from one extreme to the other, without any intermediary reaction that I could see? I must have said or done something that didn’t sit well with them. That’s when I began studying this phenomenon. I learned that object relations theory had the answer, explaining what I was witnessing—though I would not say I like the jargon.

I saw a lack of whole-object relations and object constancy. Now, why is this important? Why should I care? Well, nobody wants to be abused. Do you want to be abused?

Jacobsen: No, of course not.

Greenberg: Exactly. Few people enter a relationship wanting to be abused. However, a lack of object constancy is one of the greatest predictors of abuse in relationships during conflicts—whether it’s the abuse of a child, a partner, or even an employee. So, what does this mean? What does object constancy refer to?

It ties into whole object relations. If I have object constancy and like you, I will still like you even if you say something that annoys me. I may be upset by what you said, but it won’t destroy our relationship. I can process that.

I say things that annoy people, too. But if I’m disappointed in you, it doesn’t ruin our entire relationship. Let’s say we’ve had a ten-year friendship. Now, I’ve lost two narcissistic friends. I knew they were narcissists. I knew they often behaved like narcissists, idealizing me at first, but that wasn’t why I spent time with them. I liked them because they were interesting people. Then, one day, something happened; they were triggered and ghosted me. They stopped talking to me completely. I reached out, but I got no response.

This is typical. That’s the need for more object constancy. Someone gets hurt by me or is disappointed in what I said or did, or something someone else said affected our relationship, or even physical distance played a role. Many people cheat on their partners because, with physical distance, they cannot maintain their sense of a positive connection to the other person. So, if someone goes on a business trip and feels abandoned, or if they need and want their partner but don’t feel that connection, they might do something against their marriage vows—something they wouldn’t have done if they were still physically close to their partner.

A number of unpleasant outcomes occur when you don’t have whole object relations, which can lead to splitting in the middle of a fight. Why is this dangerous? A lack of object constancy means that in the middle of a fight, I go from seeing you as my loved one, my dear friend, to my enemy—someone I must protect myself against at all costs. This response is disproportionate and not based on reality.

It could be a baby I shake because it won’t quiet down, and I’m desperate for sleep, taking it personally. Or it could be my partner, whom I slap or throw the remote at during a fight because, if I’m the narcissist, I feel humiliated and attacked by them. There are many opportunities for this kind of reaction, which needs to be clarified.

In these moments, someone may do something abusive that they would never do if they had whole object relations. Their actions go against how they feel after the split. You hear about cases in the news—someone kills their wife, the police arrive, and they’re crying over her body, holding her and saying, “I love you, I love you, I never meant to do this.” I believe them. I believe that what happened to many of these people was that they lacked whole-object relations. They fought with their wife and lost sight of everything else in the heat of the moment.

Their love for this person, the entire history of good times, loving moments, even great sex—it all fades into the background. What remains is the desperate need to win the fight, to battle. If they’re prone to hitting, their partner will get hit. They won’t calm down until their partner is begging for forgiveness. If they’re not the violent type, they might stop talking to their partner altogether.

People who live with narcissists may endure someone refusing to speak to them for days as a form of punishment. The narcissist was triggered but didn’t become violent, so they withdrew instead. These are important concepts, and that’s why people find living with narcissists so difficult. Narcissists have an additional issue—they struggle to tune into others and feel genuine warmth. People with narcissistic personality disorder have little to no ability to feel this warmth for others.

Emotional empathy is different from cognitive empathy. Emotional empathy is when you see someone slam their finger with a hammer by accident, or maybe they’re on the screen, and you wince. That’s emotional empathy.

For most people, it’s difficult to watch someone else get hurt in a way they can imagine being hurt themselves or to see a child or animal suffer and remain calm about it. Their heart might race, or they might feel discomfort. Conversely, seeing someone embarrassed can trigger emotional empathy. I’ve had to leave movies because I would not say I liked watching a character’s embarrassment. It wasn’t funny to me at all, though others were laughing.

If you have emotional empathy, you connect to that person’s emotions. When you do this, your gut response mirrors what you imagine they’re feeling. Of course, you could be wrong. Maybe the person has a condition that dulls pain, and when they hit their finger, they don’t feel it. But the average person isn’t analyzing it that deeply; they’re reacting instinctively.

Emotional empathy is that gut feeling of joy when someone you love succeeds. For example, if your child calls you with good news, you feel warmth in your chest—what in Yiddish is called “naches”—and you’re genuinely happy for them. That’s emotional empathy. Or, when someone you care about is hurt, you feel bad for them and offer kindness, even if it’s inconvenient for you. Narcissists can’t do this. In the middle of a fight, a narcissist can hurt you without feeling any emotional pain.

Now, cognitive empathy is different. We all have it to some degree unless we’re neurodiverse in a way that limits it. Cognitive empathy is the ability to imagine what someone else might feel and respond appropriately based on that understanding. An example of this would be attending a friend’s wedding. You know you’re supposed to say everything is wonderful, even if you’re unhappy with the food or seating arrangements. Cognitive empathy tells you not to mention that the wrong entrée was brought or that the person sitting next to you made an inappropriate comment. You hold back because you wouldn’t want to hear those things if it were your wedding.

Cognitive empathy means doing the socially appropriate thing because it’s the right thing or benefits you somehow. For narcissist, they can display cognitive empathy even if they don’t feel it emotionally. For instance, at a funeral, a narcissist might not care that your father died unless his death affects them—maybe if he was financially supporting them. But if the narcissist is high-functioning, they will act as if they care because they know it’s the right thing to do.

So, that’s the difference between emotional and cognitive empathy. It’s important because, in the middle of a fight, no one usually stops to think, “Let me consider how the other person feels,” or “Maybe my first reaction to insult them will hurt our friendship in the long run.” For a narcissist, especially if they’ve lost whole object relations during the conflict, that thought isn’t available. And I say “average” because some narcissists can keep in mind that they have a use for you after the fight is over, especially if they see you as someone with higher status or importance. Others, however, won’t keep that in mind.

Jacobsen: Be mindful of time—seven and a half minutes. When you apply these concepts in a therapeutic setting, what are the first steps for treatment?

Greenberg: The first step is to make a differential diagnosis.

I’m looking for signs of splitting. If I’m approaching it from an object relations perspective, I’m looking for current and historical splitting. I pay attention to how they describe themselves and others. Now, everyone exaggerates sometimes—it’s part of modern conversation: “Oh, it’s so hot out,” or something similar. But narcissistic exaggeration is more extreme—they see themselves as the best and others as the worst. If I ask the average person about someone else, they might need more information or give a measured response. “On a scale of 1 to 10, how bad are they?” they’ll respond thoughtfully.

However, when you ask a narcissist, the person they dislike is always a ten on that scale. And if you ask them about themselves, “How special are you on a scale of 0 to 10?”—even when comparing themselves to someone they greatly admire—they might go as low as a 9, but they always see themselves as the best. I could give examples, but I don’t want to take up too much of your time. The point is, I listen to the language and challenge it: “Well, scale it for me.”

That’s what I’m paying attention to. I’m also listening for signs of empathy or a lack thereof and observing their self-presentation. I watch how they present themselves and how much effort they put into that presentation. For example, one man spent an entire session trying to present himself as someone who deeply cares whether I’m addressed as “Doctor” or “Ma’am” or something respectful, even though I repeatedly told him, “Call me Elinor, and let’s focus on why you’re here.” His wife had sent him to treatment for narcissism, but we spent the whole session with him, trying to show how respectful he was toward me. Something was off.

Jacobsen: It’s performative.

Greenberg: Exactly, it’s performative. Narcissists often perform one of two sides of a false self. Their authentic self was left behind in childhood to the extent that it wasn’t rewarded by their parents—or at least, they believed it wasn’t. Now, it’s not always the parents’ fault. There can be other situations or circumstances involved, and I’ve seen many of these. It’s not always about blaming the mother or the father. There are other contributing factors.

So, I’m listening to how they describe themselves. I’m also listening for balance. When they say, “My wife wanted me to come to therapy,” I ask, “Tell me about your wife and the issues she wants addressed.”

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Minister Riley Phoebus: The Satanic Temple Illinois

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/04

Riley Phoebus is a Minister in The Satanic Temple Illinois (TSTIL). Phoebus discusses how it was founded by Adam and Dante (Satanic pseudonyms) as a revival of TST Chicago, expanding statewide. Inspired by Satanist principles, TSTIL promotes knowledge, pluralism, and intellectual freedom. Its public displays, such as the crocheted serpent and Copernican reference, highlight themes of resistance to arbitrary authority and book bans. TSTIL emphasizes that it is a legitimate religion, not a publicity stunt, and fosters dialogue through community events like “Meet A Satanist” and charity initiatives.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Who were the founders, and what was the original inspiration for The Satanic Temple Illinois?

Minister Riley Phoebus: The original founders were Adam and Dante (Satanic pseudonyms). The Satanic Temple Illinois (TSTIL) emerged as a rebirth of TST Chicago, intentionally expanded in this iteration to include the entire state, rather than just the city. The inspiration was to form a community of Satanists organized around the principles and Seven Tenets of TST.

Jacobsen: What inspired the crocheted serpent at the Illinois Capitol?

Phoebus: The crocheted serpent is a direct representation of the serpent depicted in the 3rd chapter of Genesis. While Abrahamic followers of the text view the serpent as a nefarious, deceitful entity, we see the interaction between the serpent and Eve as an act of compassion and the sacred offer of knowledge. Furthermore, we reject the popular, misogynistic interpretation that Eve was a temptress to Adam, as Genesis 3:6 records that Adam was with Eve when the serpent revealed the truth about the fruit of knowledge and chose to eat the fruit freely. As Satanists, we view the pursuit of knowledge and the practice of free will as our innate rights, deserving of celebration. The plush, snuggly iteration of the serpent featured in our holiday display symbolizes the benevolence of The Adversary.

Jacobsen: The most creative activism I have seen in the North American freethought spaces have been The Satanic Temple – funny, good-hearted, dramatic, effective upon sentiments. How does The Satanic Temple of Illinois differentiate itself from other religious or secular organizations advocating for pluralism and free expression?

Phoebus: Thank you for your appreciative recognition. While there are other groups engaged in like-minded pursuits, some of which we periodically collaborate with, The Satanic Temple approaches this work from a unique perspective. We are not simply an activist organization, instead we are a religious community whose deeply embedded beliefs are inherently an act of resistance against arbitrary authority. As non-theistic Satanists, we are not only underrepresented, but disproportionately misrepresented in both social and political landscapes. The name “Satan” and its related terminology is so extensively vilified, that we rarely get the platform to even dispute the misconceptions widely circulated about us. However, we are able to leverage this baseless prejudice to make our voice heard and our message clear: if you want to allow religions to be represented in public administration, while adhering to the First Amendment, this is what that looks like – Satan in the Capitol.

Jacobsen: What significance does the Copernican reference hold in the display?

Phoebus: In the early 1600’s, Copernicus’s text was banned by the Catholic Church because it challenged the church’s stance by proposing that the Earth revolves around the Sun. We chose to use this book as a focal point of our display to highlight the value of Tenet 5. It is our belief that science, with its use of evidence and logical reasoning, should be the tool used to shape our worldview, rather than faith in the unprovable, or in this case, demonstrably false. “That which will not bend, must break, and that which can be destroyed by truth should never be spared its demise (The Satanic Temple’s Invocation).”

  1. Jacobsen: What has been the impact of your displays on promoting awareness about book bans and intellectual freedom in Illinois?

Phoebus: Including the Copernican text was a deliberate choice made to illuminate the dangers of book bans. Banning books that challenge the reasoning of the elite and/or social majority limits our intellectual freedom, restricting knowledge and curiosity under the guise of assumed morality. By drawing attention to the historic banning of such a powerful, transformative text, we hope that people will see the parallels to modern book bans and the dangers of oppressing innovative thought.

Jacobsen: What are some of the key misconceptions about The Satanic Temple? TST is entirely transparent and clear on the messaging. Yet, we’re constantly – as non-theist Satanists – misunderstood, cynically deliberately and ignorantly not.

Phoebus: There are two major misconceptions about The Satanic Temple, existing on opposite sides of the spectrum. On one hand, there’s the assumption that we worship a literal Satan. A quick glance on our website will dispel this myth rather quickly. We are non-theistic; we do not believe in any supernatural entities. On the other hand, a handful of people will jump to our defense by claiming it’s a publicity stunt or a political movement, that it’s just to rile people up. This is also not the case. The values of the archetype of Satan, The Adversary, especially as depicted in romantic literary works such as The Revolt of the Angels, informs our beliefs and practices. We are a legitimate religion with a strong community, a thriving ministry, common set of values (The Seven Tenets), ritual practices, services, and congregations. The dramatics and the dark humor are simply a pleasant byproduct.

Jacobsen: How do you view the intersection of religious freedom and public expression?

Phoebus: You can’t have religious freedom without protected public expression. This is particularly important for minority religions, especially in the context of the rising presence of Christian nationalism. The First Amendment protects not only the free practice of an individual’s religion, but also prohibits the US government from endorsing or favoring a particular religion with regards to the Establishment Clause. Pluralism is a fundamental value of our nation and must be protected at every level.

Jacobsen: What is the process behind designing and selecting specific themes or messages for the annual Capitol display?

Phoebus: The driving force behind our annual holiday display theme is identifying an intersection between our core beliefs and current events affecting minority religion and the fight for pluralism, both locally in Illinois and nationally. Our Holiday Display Committee works together to develop the design and message, then the entire congregation comes together as a whole to implement it.

Jacobsen: How do you encourage inter belief dialogue in Illinois? 

Phoebus: Our mere presence often causes conversation, and we can use that as an opportunity to make connections with folks of other religions. We’ve held a casual coffee and conversation event titled, “Meet A Satanist,” where folks could sit down with some of us and chat about whatever they wanted. Our annual Menstruatin’ with Satan charity drive – where folks can donate period products into collection boxes at local businesses – puts our efforts to help our community front and center; we hope that it inspires folks to look more closely into who we are and what we do. We have applied for membership in a few interfaith local groups, but have not been accepted into any as of yet. Our ministers serve our local community through important rituals like Unbaptisms, officiating weddings, and providing information to curious individuals or groups. It’s important to note that we do not proselytize. 

Jacobsen: What future projects or initiatives does The Satanic Temple of Illinois plan to promote pluralism and intellectual freedom?

Phoebus: We will continue to work with The Satanic Temple’s national campaigns such as After School Satan Club to bring religious pluralism efforts to Illinois. On a local level, we plan to continue our very successful annual charity drives and holiday displays in the Capitol building. Our incredible congregation is always coming up with new ideas to fulfill the needs of our community and continue the fight against Christian nationalism by exercising our fundamental rights.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Erica Anenberg on BuilderBud and Construction Contracting

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/04

Erica Anenberg is a general contractor and creator of BuilderBud, a construction project management app. With 30+ years of business and 10 years of construction experience, she empowers women in construction and tech, simplifies project management, and improves communication. Anenberg talks about LGBTQ+ inclusion in construction and her app, BuilderBud. BuilderBud helps homeowners manage construction projects by simplifying communication, task management, invoicing, and documentation. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Erica Anenberg. We’re going to be talking about the LGBTQ+ community and construction and a new app, which is an underrepresented area. I worked in that industry as a teenager. I wasn’t very skilled at it because I was a teenager, but I became aware of some nuanced aspects of construction culture. However, for anyone who’s worked in the field for a few months, these aspects aren’t subtle; they are the blunt realities of the culture that you either adapt to, leave, or move on to a new job site. These realities come with all the challenges that construction entails. So, when you think of a construction site as someone with experience, what image comes to mind compared to someone who has never worked in that field?

Erica Anenberg: For me, I see a construction site as exciting. It energizes me because I see the potential. However, someone without experience might see the danger. They need help conceptualizing any vision of what the project could become. Yes, I see a real opportunity. When I think of construction, I see a lot of potential. 

Jacobsen: So, what is BuilderBud?

Anenberg: BuilderBud is designed to help homeowners who may find the construction process overwhelming—the chaos and confusion. As a general contractor, I have experience organizing and implementing systems. We developed BuilderBud because we understand that homeowners and clients don’t have the same level of expertise. Many software available today cater only to general contractors, leaving out the homeowner in terms of design, user experience, and onboarding, which can be complicated and expensive.

Last year, we transitioned to one of the construction tech platforms, which made a difference. We were able to make this move because we were working on five projects simultaneously and earning more money. But when we started, I needed help to afford a $200-per-month software, which hindered our progress. So, now that I’ve found more success professionally and financially, I wanted to develop something to give back.

Yes, it’s a for-profit venture, and I want to benefit from it. However, I also developed BuilderBud to solve a problem that has yet to be addressed. Suppose this becomes my legacy, and all I achieve with BuilderBud is solving a problem for residential contractors who can’t afford expensive software or need more resources to onboard with a robust system. In that case, I’d be proud of that contribution. This also extends to the Latinx community, where many contractors need more funds or the understanding to implement costly software systems.

We are also planning to translate it into Spanish soon. So yes, that’s the long answer to your question, but I hope it answers it.

Jacobsen: It did. What was your experience flipping homes on Moussa’s show (“The Flipping El Moussa’s”) on HGTV?

Anenberg: It was very interesting because it wasn’t what I thought it would be. It was a lot more challenging than I expected because you have a timeline set by a TV production company rather than the construction schedule. Obviously, with flippers, they want you to go fast. But this was much more challenging because they had to meet the reveal’s deadlines and other production requirements.

Whether you were ready or not, you had to do it. Also, having a third party involved — the TV production company — along with Tarek’s team and our team made it more complex. The TV production company has an agenda outside of Tarek’s team and ours. I have to say it was one of the most challenging experiences I’ve ever had. Still, it was also incredibly rewarding and much fun. Tarek and Heather are wonderful people.

I adore Heather. She was so kind and compassionate. I was nervous — five cameras pointed at me, and the TV producer told me, “Just be yourself.” But you end up repeating yourself, literally, ten times. The same thing over and over because they have to catch it from different angles. Then they would say, “Yes, Eric, just be yourself,” and I think, “I’m no dummy, but this doesn’t feel like myself.” So, being myself in that setting was difficult because I’m not an actor.

It was tough, but Heather was supportive the entire time. She could see I was nervous, and she would encourage me. Tarek is a total dude, cracking jokes about things like farts — just a real guy’s guy. They’re adorable. I loved working with them.

Jacobsen: How are you working with Matriarchy Builds? 

Anenberg: Another incredible organization. Lacey and Gabrielle are the CEOs. They started this amazing organization about five years ago, building a community of women in construction. It feels like a home—you’re part of a family. It’s like a big hug whenever they have roundups. Knowing you’re supported, you feel wrapped in a warm blanket.

More support systems for women in construction need to be created. We only have a handful of female general contractors in LA — maybe ten or so. It’s a small community, but it’s growing. About five years ago, maybe 4% of women worked in the trades, and now we’re up to 14 or 15% in the last couple of years.

There have been grants given to women in construction, mostly on the commercial side. Another fantastic organization is WINTER (Women in Nontraditional Employment Roles). Have you heard of it? It’s for women in nontraditional roles and an organization that helps low-income women who want to become journeymen in trades like plumbing, electrical work, and carpentry. They offer free training and then get them union jobs. They’re turning out around 50 women a year or something like that.

Maybe more. The government is giving grants. The trades are aging out. That’s a huge problem. Within the next ten years, 50% of the workforce in the trades will retire.

They’re trying to solve this problem because, otherwise, you’d be looking at $1,000 to snake your toilet due to the high demand and the low supply—basic economics. To address this, they’re bringing in more women and promoting diversity, which is awesome. It’s also why we’re working on building Spanish-language adaptations of the app into its processes. Many of the workers come from Latin backgrounds. 

Jacobsen: They don’t necessarily have to be Mexican or Mexican-American labourers. I’m using Canadian terminology here, but many Hispanic workers in the United States, often performing basic labour, face language barriers that likely limit social mobility. And it’s not just Mexicans; many also come from Central and South American countries. So, language is a factor. How do you think making this language adaptation of the app can increase accessibility for some of these workers, enabling them to pool resources, share knowledge, and build their community of contractors?

Anenberg: Yes, I love it. That’s one of our missions—to help the Latinx community. They are the backbone of the construction industry, especially in California. I’m unsure about other regions, but we’re building on their labour. Society is undergoing a shift. People are much more accepting of diversity, LGBTQ+ individuals, and women. We’re also starting to demand it.

The Latin community wants to start making decisions. But it would help if you had an organization to do that and become more successful in construction. You cannot have chaos—you need business skills. If you don’t know your basic numbers, if you don’t know your costs or the percentage of what you should charge, you can’t succeed. That’s one of the things we built into BuilderBud. I said it’s so important.

I want the invoices to include the cost in each line item and show the percentage markup so contractors can see what they charge the client. It’s super basic. You put in $500, decide to double your money, enter a 100% profit margin, and the system calculates $1,000. There are no manual calculations, no miscommunication, and it’s all clear and organized.

It’s your contractor draft, not for the homeowner to see. You can view what the homeowner sees, which doesn’t include your costs. You can also get a signature from the homeowner once they sign the estimate or invoice, which is binding. This helps solve many accountability issues by having everything in writing, something the Latin community often needs to do.

Contractors often come out and give a price verbally. I’ve heard countless stories about endless fighting, miscommunication, issues, drama, and stress because one party thought they agreed to one thing, but nothing was written. People are getting burned—contractors aren’t getting paid, or homeowners are paying and not getting the work done. It’s a common issue.

Jacobsen: Little petty fights can escalate quickly. That’s also part of the larger issue — the nuances of the difficulties in construction. These are high-stress environments. Workers are out in the elements, putting in long days and trying to meet deadlines. Not everyone is being paid appropriately for the difficulty of the work. With the increasing demand for construction workers, I’ve heard we’ll need more than a million workers over the next six years to fill gaps in basic infrastructure projects, like piping and electrical outfitting.

How do you see BuilderBud expanding to help bridge these gaps in accessibility for contractors, whether they’re building businesses, working on contracts, or even tackling large infrastructure projects needed in LA and elsewhere?

Anenberg: BuilderBud’s big vision is definitely to create a community. If you’re doing a remodelling project, it’s like having your best friend there to help you. Our original tagline was “BuilderBud: Your Construction Bestie.” Still, we had to drop that because we needed to understand what it meant.

Now, it’s “Construction Made Easy.” It should feel as easy as having your best friend guide you through every step. When I think of something challenging, I know I’d feel more relieved if my best friend had my back. That’s what we’re trying to do—create that sense of support.

I want to focus on solving smaller problems, like reducing chaos, drama, miscommunication, and fighting, while improving organization. I can’t tell you how frustrating it is, even with our $200-a-month construction tech software, to arrive on-site and need help finding plans.

Things get lost between different projects, files, and paperwork, so I made it simple. I know you can tag files and filter them, but I want plans front and center. I want it to be clear—hit a button, and you immediately see the plans for that project. No searching, no filtering—just simple, direct access.

Same thing with specs. I can only tell you how hard it is if you have a physical spec book, which people aren’t doing anymore, or they need more resources or time to print a big, hefty spec book. 

Jacobsen: When I was in construction, they had these super detailed presentations. It was a massive book, like a meter by two-foot spec sheet.

Anenberg: That cost thousands of dollars and took someone hours to assemble. So yes, you still need to download spec sheets and drop them into the folder, but I’m trying to make it as easy as possible. What’s the easiest way for someone who doesn’t have a technology background and needs more money to pay for expensive software? I want it to be easy.

I want it to be easy for the homeowner because that matters. In the past, we’ve had this old-school mentality in construction. As a teenager, you probably remember that the contractor was likely an older white male with a “my way or the highway” attitude.

What he said went, he told his team that and told the client the same thing. He thought he knew best. That’s not to say all contractors were like that — some were collaborative and nice — but that was often the mentality.

Now, there’s a new generation of homeowners who are younger and won’t tolerate that kind of attitude. They want to collaborate and won’t stand for a prickly, difficult contractor. They’ll ghost that contractor and find someone who offers more hand-holding and support.

That’s why we developed BuilderBud and Girl Flip Construction, which has succeeded. We have a process in place before we even enter into a contract. We walk clients through an hour-long clarity call.

My wife, an angel on earth—so kind and loving—is our head of sales. She asks important questions like, “What didn’t work for you before? What are your cost concerns? What’s been the biggest pain point?” She’s digging into the psychology behind it all.

People need to give more credit to how much homeowners have invested. This is often their largest asset, something they’ve worked to acquire, and it’s a big deal. But many contractors believe, “It’s not a big deal. You’re just another client.” They’re churning through projects without caring about the individual.

That’s not a kind or respectful way to treat someone trusting you with everything they’ve worked for. There’s an incongruency in the construction industry about how homeowners are treated, especially in the residential sector. It’s unsure if it is the same for commercial projects worth $100 million, but it’s rampant for residential projects.

Jacobsen: My brother is in a skilled trade. A kid under him started his training at 17. By the time he finished, he was already working in the field, starting in his particular trade. He died. My brother was trying to get help—he died on the site. I remember when I was in construction, I left the site, and then I heard a month or two later that a guy was trying to leave the job site early and got stuck on the train tracks. This happened in Canada. The train came by and hit him on the driver’s side. That was it. So, while not extremely common, these incidents are common on construction sites. I can understand the prickliness of the older generation when safety equipment, like harnesses, wasn’t even considered back then. It’s like not wearing seatbelts.

Anenberg: Yes, but you’re right that certain incoming generations have a different mentality. People are trying to learn from those past mistakes. It doesn’t feel good to be talked to disrespectfully, and skipping safety measures like seatbelts or harnesses is unsafe. It’s also crucial to communicate clearly, especially when translating between English and Spanish, for things like agreed-upon costs, whether for materials or skilled labour on a project.

Jacobsen: Yes, exactly. These are all good points. Okay, let me make sure I touch on everything here. So, I’m quoting BuilderBud’s key features now: Task management with punch lists, daily logs with photo uploads, project-based chat communication, homeowner relationship management tools, simple invoicing and change order approvals.

Why is punch list task management so important?

Anenberg: Every job and day involves many tasks, and managing them is challenging. We used to keep our to-do lists in Microsoft, plus emails, text messages, and WhatsApp. Having everything in one place, organized by project, is super important. And being able to see all tasks across all projects is equally crucial.

I’m the use case for BuilderBud. I know exactly what I need. Yes, you don’t want to build something solely for yourself, but I’m very detail-oriented as a woman. I listen to what people are struggling with, and there are always little things that make a big difference.

For example, homeowners always ask, “When’s someone showing up?” So we created a simple button that the worker can hit to say, “On my way. “It gives a window of 1 to 2 hours before or after lunch. It’s a super simple feature, but it keeps the homeowner informed.

Punch lists can be assigned to people, and that’s standard technology today. But having it all in one place, front and center, with the contractor able to see tasks for all projects and all team members and each team member able to see what they’ve been assigned—that’s the game changer.

Jacobsen: For daily logs, why photo uploads?

Anenberg: It’s about accountability. I can only be on some job sites daily, but I need to know what work has been done on each site. So, photo uploads are a given. They also help identify issues.

For example, if a homeowner gets home and sees trash left behind, they can take a picture and submit a homeowner update, saying, “Your guys left this mess. There are ants here. Can you please ask them to clean up next time?” This way, they feel seen and heard, and everything is completely accountable.

It’s all in writing. So, the next time it comes up, or I tell someone, “The homeowner has said this,” there’s a log of it. It’s been documented, so it can’t happen again. And if it does happen again, that person can no longer work with us. Accountability, liability, and trust—those are the three main factors. 

Jacobsen: This isn’t a critique but an observation of how these things play out. As you note, millennials and other generations are in a cultural transition. Statistical differences between generations are small but subtle enough to be significant. So, accountability is key, and I agree. Based on my experience, there could be some cultural clash at the individual level when it comes to adapting to these new expectations.

Anenberg: Yes, exactly.

Jacobsen: Project-based chat communication—my first thought is, is it encrypted so it’s safe from prying eyes? Do people feel secure using it?

Anenberg: Yes, it’s secure. Only the assigned people are in the chat. We’ll have separate chats for materials, another for the homeowner, etc. It’s similar to WhatsApp, where you can name the chat and invite specific people. However, the key is organizing and naming the chats based on topics or tasks.

One of the hardest things, especially on the iPhone, is finding a specific message when you have 15,000 messages. It’s terrible for the organization. So, having everything in one place makes it much easier.

Jacobsen: Organization is key. With these tools, you’re trying to make construction easier.

Anenberg: That’s all I’m trying to do—make construction easier.

Jacobsen: You mentioned homeowner relationship management tools. That sounds good, but can you explain what that means?

Anenberg: It’s essentially easy-to-use technology with a simple user interface. It’s a way for homeowners to see the entire project at their fingertips. They can view contracts, see tasks or events, and have direct access to chat with us. It’s their portal. If you have something like this in construction, you’re unique because no one uses it.

Construction is one of the least digitized industries—only agriculture is behind us. The bar is very low in construction tech. Contractors still use three-part invoicing paper—pink, yellow, and white copies.

Jacobsen: Yes, I’ve seen that too. It’s painful.

Anenberg: It is incredible, but the growth will be rapid. In the next few years, construction tech is going to take off. PropTech, which deals with property technology and construction tech, is still brand new, but it will become very popular. You’ll see them everywhere within the next five years.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. I recall working with a well-established, old-school family at a horse farm. The wife, a former Olympian in showjumping for Canada, had to transition from paper and pencil to electronic payments and systems. That process took a long time.

Anenberg: Yes, it’s similar. Transitioning from the old way of doing things to using new technology can take time, but it’s worth it once the change is made.

Jacobsen: When I was there for 27 months, living and working in that industry, writing about it, they finally made the transition. It wasn’t too painful because it was a smaller community of workers. Still, it is more challenging for larger, more established companies with 50 or 200 employees. It’s more painful for them.

Okay, last question. Simple invoicing and change order approvals—why do you want it to be simple? Hashtag rhetorical question.

Anenberg: Because everything else is complicated! In construction, it takes work. When you think about the energy behind construction, you think of concrete—something hard. I’m trying to soften the process a bit.

If you can have simple invoicing where everything is signed, approved, and in writing, all in one place by project, and easy to find, that’s a small ask, but it’s solving a big problem. These things cause more stress than necessary, so anything that alleviates stress in construction is a win.

Jacobsen: Erica, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Anenberg: Yes, awesome. Thank you. It was nice meeting you.

Jacobsen: Nice meeting you, too. Bye, and good luck with season 2 coming in 2025!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

On American Anti-Trans Groups With Imara Jones

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/03

Imara Jones is an Emmy and Peabody award-winning American political journalist and transgender activist. She founded TransLash Media, a platform focused on transgender storytelling. Jones holds degrees from Columbia University and the London School of Economics and previously worked in the Clinton White House and Viacom. In 2019, she chaired the UN High-Level Meeting on Gender Diversity. Time magazine named her among the Time 100 most influential people of 2023. She discusses the post-January 6th shift of hate groups like Patriot Front and Proud Boys towards local politics, focusing on anti-LGBTQ+ rhetoric to destabilize communities and gain political legitimacy.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Imara Jones. What is happening in the American hate space, particularly with groups like Patriot Front and Proud Boys?

Imara Jones: You asked, “What is happening in the American hate space?” Is that right?

Jacobsen: Yes, especially concerning Patriot Front, Proud Boys, and others. 

Jones: What often goes unnoticed and is intentionally ignored is that after January 6th, these organizations decided to “atomize” their activities. This shift was a response to the American national security state, which, even though it was slow to respond—let’s be honest, it still shows signs of being slow—posed a significant threat. So far, over 1,000 people have been indicted, and many of these groups’ leaders are behind bars. It’s not been a good look for them. So, they adopted a strategy to “go local.”

In an interview, Gavin McInnes told me that this “go local” approach kept members engaged, recruited new ones, and aligned themselves with local politicians. The idea was to maintain relevance as a brand and continue their national efforts on a regional level. Their goal is to destabilize democracies and create an atmosphere of fear and intimidation. This strategy isn’t unique to the Proud Boys; Patriot Front and other groups are doing the same.

Patriot Front, in particular, has identified Idaho as a testing ground for these ideas. They’ve worked in tandem with local politicians and a think tank called the Idaho Freedom Foundation. The foundation serves as a center of gravity, linking paramilitary activities, new laws that seek to legalize militia groups, and local politicians—all with the goal of destabilizing communities, spreading fear and intimidation, and paving the way for the election of more extreme politicians. People are either too afraid to speak up, intimidated to run for office, or chased out of office.

This “petri dish” approach—targeting democracy at its core, one community at a time—has been replicated in many places across the United States. What was unexpected for me and my team as we investigated this was how anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ sentiment has become a focal point for these local demonstrations of force and intimidation. Anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ hate is being used to galvanize and localize these groups’ activities. Still, their ultimate goal remains the same as before.

Jacobsen: What kinds of emails do you receive from people sympathetic to these hate groups?

Jones: Interestingly, they have largely steered clear of me and my organization. There doesn’t seem to be any rhyme or reason as to when they decide to show their “dragon teeth,” so to speak, but it’s infrequent. Occasionally, we see a little spike in some messages on social media but not a full-throated focus on us. We’ve been told that they tend to pick on people they believe they can intimidate because showing force and then seeing people back down is key to them appearing powerful, which helps them recruit more members and makes them seem bigger than they are.

If they are, they may be more reticent because they may sense, “That’s kind of not me, and that’s not us.” That also may play into it. Someone told me explicitly, “Well, these groups know who you are, but they know that if they come after you, they’re going to elevate you.” So, much of their calculus goes into who they decide to attack.

Jacobsen: When it comes to a lot of these organizations, particularly the white identity ones, they are oriented around various far-right ideologies and conspiracy theories. I was talking to Dr. Alon Milwicki, a senior researcher in antisemitism at the Southern Poverty Law Center (SPLC). He described how the unifying scapegoat for many of these hate groups is antisemitism. You mentioned Patriot Front, the Proud Boys, and others. Granted, antisemitism isn’t the main focus for these groups, but it’s an element that remains consistent across them.

Jacobsen: How does this manifest locally, especially when they’re shifting their tactics to target local politics, counties, towns, and rural areas?

Jones: Yes, antisemitism is the long-standing baseline for all of these groups. However, what we’ve seen over the past year, and there’s so much evidence to support this, is that the new animating, cross-cutting factor among these groups is anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ activity.

The SPLC released a report over the summer that shows two key things. First, there are now more hate groups on record than ever before in their history of keeping such data. Second, half of all white supremacist groups were engaged in anti-LGBTQ activity in 2023 alone. One thing often overlooked is how effective this issue is for them. It gets to the heart of “otherization,” which is crucial for these groups. It allows them to target a vulnerable community they know lacks the resources to fight back.

Another factor is that this approach gets to the core of their arguments about white supremacy and patriarchy in an easily digestible way. It enables them to make connections with larger political infrastructures, particularly the GOP, which, in their view, gives them an air of legitimacy. They don’t get that kind of legitimacy around antisemitism.

Especially in light of the ongoing conflict following the events of October 7th in Gaza, antisemitism doesn’t have the same appeal for them. But anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ sentiment allows them to foster relationships with mainstream politicians, solidifying their legitimacy. This, in turn, advances their overall goals and cause.

Building relationships with these groups can be advantageous for some politicians because maintaining an air of intimidation, especially when pushing unpopular views, isn’t necessarily bad for them. There’s a currency that these hate groups gain from this activity, a currency that antisemitism alone cannot provide. That’s one reason why they’ve embraced anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ rhetoric so strongly in the past two years.

Jacobsen: In my interviews with the humanist and freethought communities, a common observation is that many groups opposing LGBTQ+ rights often base their views on theological reasons—or rather, theological excuses. Typically, they rely on selective literal interpretations of Abrahamic texts, particularly from the Old and New Testaments. How much do you see theology being used as a bludgeon to justify emotional, verbal, and sometimes physical violence against members of the trans and wider LGBTQ+ community by these hate groups? They claim to see something in hermeneutics in the Christian holy texts.

Jones: What animates these groups is, honestly, patriarchy and white supremacy. As we can see, there’s a crisis among men in America. Still, white men, in particular, are experiencing a unique crisis for various reasons.

When you combine that with the growing decline in religious activity in America, you find these ideas being secularized in powerful ways. For example, we know that historically, within the Ku Klux Klan, there was a significant connection between Christianity and white supremacy—it was explicit and deeply interwoven. This was a core belief.

What’s happened now is that the secularization of these ideas has been distilled into concepts like the “Great Replacement” theory. This theory essentially argues that white people, particularly white men, are in danger because not enough white people are having babies. While there is still a strong Christian element to the Great Replacement theory, its main appeal is racial and patriarchal supremacy.

Part of their argument is that to protect the white race; they must enforce the gender binary and prevent Black and brown people from coming into the country and changing the fabric of America. To the extent that religion plays a role in this, it involves ensuring that Jews are excluded from society. This is why Jewish organizations in the United States are focused on these groups, given their targeting of Jewish communities.

The Great Replacement theory has Christian supremacist overtones, but it’s fundamentally about patriarchy and race. Additionally, we can’t ignore that new groups, like the Blood Tribe, are creating new religions, particularly around Odinism. This is a fusion of worship of the Norse god Odin with elements of Nazi ideology, including the worship of Hitler. We must recognize the religious aspect of these movements. Still, we also need to understand how they transform in important ways.

Jacobsen: When combating ideologically driven hate at an individual level—whether it’s a friend making an offhand comment at work, activism at a political rally, or policy-making at the state or federal level—what are the common mistakes we make? How can we learn from these failures and build on the successes in combating this?

Jones: The first mistake is to take the threat seriously. Ironically, the Canadian government does take them seriously because the Proud Boys are on a terrorist watch list. Canada added them to that list right after January 6th. Whatever the Canadian government saw from an intelligence or national security standpoint led them to take this group seriously. But people don’t take these groups seriously daily because they mask their true intentions.

They try to present themselves as beer-drinking frat boys, which helps hide how organized they are and what they’re trying to achieve. This image makes it easier for them to recruit because it doesn’t seem threatening at first. Then, once people are in, they acculturate them to violence, organize them into paramilitary structures, and gradually get them used to taking risks and committing acts of violence. When they believe it is right to reveal their true colours, they’ll drop the frat-boy facade and show who they are.

In some ways, they thought January 6th was their moment, but it wasn’t. Still, they haven’t abandoned their goal of using violence—and force of arms, if necessary—to make the United States what they want it to be. That’s something people don’t fully understand about these groups, including the Proud Boys. People don’t take them seriously enough, and that’s the first issue.

The second issue is that there’s an entire ecosystem that conditions people for supremacist violence. This ecosystem exists online, particularly in gaming communities, chat rooms, and other digital spaces they’ve created. We haven’t done enough to counter that. There’s very little education about white supremacy and supremacist violence.

This lack of education is evident, especially with the push to ban discussions about actual history in the United States or even in Canada when it comes to the atrocities committed to seizing land and the rest of it. Without acknowledgment of these histories, people don’t understand how they might be participating in a legacy of violence. If they were more aware, we’d likely see less of it.

We also don’t enforce the laws we have. Technically, many of these groups are not allowed under U.S. law. Organized militias or non-military armed groups are supposed to fall under state jurisdiction, like the National Guard. That’s what militias are, by law.

So, you have armed, politically motivated groups operating in the U.S. That’s technically not allowed in that case, but we don’t enforce those laws. Organizations are trying to change this. They’re educating local attorneys general, law enforcement, and others, telling them they must crack down on these groups. This isn’t First Amendment-protected activity under the Constitution; it’s something else entirely.

We need to be more proactive and robust. We don’t have a program to deradicalize people once they’re in these groups. So much could be done, but we need to do it. The reason is that we need to take this threat seriously. There’s still this idea that it’s just a few people on the fringe, and we don’t need to take it seriously. Meanwhile, these groups are preparing more and more for the moment when, as I mentioned earlier, they believe it’s time to drop the facade and engage in violence.

That’s something we need to pay more attention to. 

Jacobsen: Something interesting I came across recently is the notion that there’s no such thing as a lone wolf. For years, we’ve heard that the real danger comes from lone wolves. That’s right. Episode 3 challenges that idea. What do you mean by that?

Jones: The concept of the “lone wolf” actually originated from white supremacist groups in the 1980s. It was a way to mask the violence they were inciting by encouraging individuals to commit violent acts, often through books, videotapes, and demonstrations. These individuals were not acting alone—they were part of a larger movement, even if they were isolated in their actions.

A prime example of this is Timothy McVeigh, responsible for the Oklahoma City bombing. McVeigh had been deeply influenced by a book called The Turner Diaries, which still strongly influences these groups today. The book tells the story of someone who starts a civil war through individual acts of violence while being part of a like-minded community. Fast forward to today, and these dynamics happen even faster because of social media. Is the idea of lone wolves a strategy for these groups?

These groups perform public demonstrations because they know it will spread across social media, which helps to activate people. Take Dylann Roof, for instance. He carried a Rhodesian flag and shot up a Black church filled with mostly older adults. Rhodesia hadn’t existed during Roof’s lifetime, so why did he feel an affinity for it? It’s because of the radicalization that happens online and elsewhere through the kind of activities we’ve been discussing.

These paramilitary organizations created the notion of a “lone wolf.” Their goal isn’t just to be an organized hammer. They’re hoping that individual acts of violence, which appear isolated and unprovoked, will be the spark that allows them to drop the facade and go all in. Do lone wolves exist in this context?

For example, just last year in Ohio, the Blood Tribe held a large demonstration. Afterward, someone who had participated attempted to commit an act of domestic terrorism by targeting a church hosting a drag story hour. He had originally gone to protest, and it almost escalated into a firefight with Blood Tribe members present. These so-called lone wolves are, in reality, part of a larger, cultivated plan.

Jacobsen: I travelled across the United States earlier this year, tracing a W-shaped pattern from New York to Seattle, and I saw evidence of this. Yes, I see what you’re saying. On Amtrak, in coach. I wouldn’t necessarily do that again—it was a long trip. But I could see the Emanuel African Methodist Episcopal Church in Charleston. What struck me was how ordinary the church looked; it could be anywhere. This could have been any church. The idea that there are no lone wolves—that these acts result from people being radicalized through online spaces—is key. But the victims? This could have been any church. It just happened to be the one the shooter targeted because that’s where he was radicalized. Yes, it was targeted, but that’s my big takeaway from travelling in the United States. I also felt more unsafe compared to Canada. The atmosphere is different.

Jones: Right. It feels tense. I notice that when I travel too. It feels different here compared to other places. There’s something indescribable but noticeable. We see it reflected in statistics about mass shootings and other forms of violence. Still, there’s a palpable difference in the atmosphere. Many older people have said they don’t remember the country feeling this unstable.

Yes, and one thing to note is that these so-called “lone wolves” believe they are engaging in heroic acts. They think they’re taking the action that will spark a larger race war, which they see as necessary. They believe they’ll win and that it’s necessary to impose racial, gender-based, and sometimes religiously informed authoritarianism in the United States.

They don’t see these acts as isolated incidents. They’re likely surprised when there isn’t a mass uprising after their actions because they’ve been told through these networks that their actions will spark a revolution. They see themselves as figures like the assassin of Archduke Ferdinand, whose actions led to World War I. They probably expect the same result and are baffled when it doesn’t happen.

Whether it’s the Buffalo shooter who deliberately targeted a Black grocery store, Dylann Roof, or others we’ve discussed, they seem to expect this larger reaction. 

Jacobsen: Imara, unfortunately, we’re almost out of time. Do you have any final points that need to be addressed?

Jones: Yes, the oxygen these groups thrive on is provided by our failure to acknowledge who they are. If we did, we could stop them. The ideas may persist, but we don’t have to live with the constant threat of paramilitary violence. The fact that we now have more of these groups on record than ever before—since the SPLC started counting 40 years ago—shows we’re not taking this threat seriously enough as a society. There’s also a lack of understanding about how anti-trans and anti-LGBTQ sentiment has been an accelerant for their growth and activities. Until we confront both of these issues, we’ll continue to live under this spectre, and it could even worsen depending on the outcome of future elections. There’s much work and many reasons to be concerned about, but it doesn’t have to be this way. 

Jacobsen: Imara, thank you so much for your time. I appreciate it.

Jones: Thank you so much. Take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Lisa Marino: The Dopple Registry

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/02

Lisa Marino is the CEO and Co-Founder of The Dopple Registry, a platform revolutionizing the baby registry and subscription box models to meet the evolving needs of parents. Marino is a Hispanic female executive and mother of two with over 20 years of experience in digital media. She envisions The Dopple Registry as a seamless, supportive shopping platform for parents, featuring high-quality, luxury baby products curated by expert moms. Additionally, sheserves as a board member for Pacific Clinics in California. She is also a board member of Pacific Clinics in California. The Dopple Registry has been featured in Today’s ParentThe Chicago Journal, and Mommies Reviews.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are here today with Lisa Marino, the CEO and co-founder of the Dopple Registry. Today, we’ll discuss advice for new dads, things dads need, and how to be a better father. The focus is parenting, family health, wellness, pregnancy, and more. With the Dopple Registry, how do you provide a simplified shopping experience for new parents? 

Lisa Marino: Let’s take a step back for a moment. The Dopple motto is, “It takes a village to raise a family.” Our mission as a company is to activate that village for every family in this country. Let’s discuss why that matters. First, we’ve created a revolutionary gifting platform that evolves as families do. We’re starting with a baby registry, which is something everyone understands. It’s also a time when families spend a large chunk of money out of pocket to prepare for the birth of a child. On top of that, many families take a hit on income, as one or both parents often stay home with the baby.

This results in a double whammy of financial impact on families. Today’s registries fall short because they’re event-driven. Once the birth or wedding happens, they become obsolete. They haven’t still need to address how to manage recurring purchases, such as diapers, formula, and other weekly or monthly needs. You need to feed your kids and ensure the house has formula.

Additionally, today’s registries don’t need to account for services in meaningful ways. Think about night nannies, doulas, midwives, dog walkers, or childcare if you’re not a first-time parent and already have kids at home. Meal services are also included in the existing registry experience. Today’s registries focus too much on stuff.

Consider platforms like Babylist, Amazon, Walmart, and Target. They sell products. While you need those items, families require more wraparound services and the ability to receive gifted recurring purchases sustainably. By leaving these critical components off the table, families need a clearer way to communicate their needs to their village.

For example, we had a beta tester, a mom having her second child, who was excited when she saw the opportunity for therapy services. One of the services we offer is mental health therapy. She said, “I struggled with postpartum depression so badly with my first child. If I can have therapy sessions gifted to me, I can address it early and prevent it from becoming overwhelming.” This has a huge impact not just on her mental health but on her entire family’s well-being.

Again, it gives families access to things they normally wouldn’t have in a group-gifted environment. Now, we have every family rank their top 10 items, and we guide gifters toward those items. Gifters are often budget-constrained so that the average gifter will contribute between $25 and $100.

You have major donors, especially grandparents, best friends, or close family, who will contribute $100 if not thousands. But for the most part, the gifting range is between $25 and $100. We’ve removed that budget constraint because we fractionalize every gift over $100. This way, we encourage gifters to contribute to the items that matter most to them in the top ten. So, you don’t care about the doula or the night nurse, but you care about diapers, and you’ll buy one month of diapers for the family.

The mom’s cousin might buy another month, and her coworker might buy yet another month. Suddenly, 12 gifters have reverse-engineered a 12-month diaper subscription, with each month gifted by a different person within an affordable gifting budget. That profoundly changes how people think about pregnancy and what they need. Meals are another great example. We encourage every family to add between 20 and 40 healthy, premade meals to their registry, which can support any diet and be delivered to your house. No one who brings home a newborn wants to cook.

That’s just the reality. So, if you’re breastfeeding or up with the baby in the middle of the night and you’re hungry, instead of ordering McDonald’s from DoorDash, you can go to the refrigerator, grab a healthy meal that spends three minutes in the microwave, and you’re ready to go. That’s what we’re so excited about. 

Jacobsen: As this applies to dads, it’s more about families. You’re running pilots with different service provider collectives and state and local government agencies. Is this to create a platform that connects service providers and families?

Marino: The platform levels the playing field because, today, these services exist, but most are paid out of pocket by families, which makes them available primarily to more affluent people. In our model, because you’re reaching out to your village, these services can now be available to everyone. For lower- and middle-income families, we can further factor in subsidies to become part of the village beyond just friends and family.

Jacobsen: What types of structured services do you see families choosing the most? Is it a year’s worth of diapers or something similar?

Marino: Definitely diapers and meals. Those are the top items because they are real family pain points daily. But, especially for families who aren’t first-time parents, they need extra nanny help when the baby first comes home. Who will care for the other kids while mom or dad cares for the newborn?

Those are critical ones. We’ve partnered with a nanny group that has access to about 3,500 nannies across the US. So, when families come on board and don’t have their nanny but need some short-term help while the mom is on maternity leave, we can match them with a nanny and get that group gifted.

Jacobsen: What about things more on the periphery of need but still sufficient to be kept as part of the platform? You mentioned things like a year’s supply of diapers. Would something like therapy be considered more on the periphery of need, or is it more core?

Marino: I’d say think of pre- and postpartum doula services. Today, they sit at the periphery but should be at the core. Once a family brings a newborn home, it takes time for the stress to start showing its impact.

In the first week or two, you’ll have home visits from a lactation consultant, maybe a doula, or a couple of other services sponsored by the hospital or the state. However, the stress impacts the family after these visits are no longer paid for. Closing the gap with additional visits or services helps keep the family healthy.

Tons of data show this. For example, one of the charts we have—which I’d be happy to send you—shows that 25% of moms experience postpartum depression (PPD). Moms who receive doula and other perinatal support services reduce that rate by 57%. By ensuring families have access to these critical services, which they may not think about or know they need—especially lower- and middle-income families who can’t afford it—we bring these services front and center, ensuring they’re not paid out of pocket by the family.

We can help close the gap in maternal and child health. And as they say, “Happy wife, happy life!” It helps keep the family healthy.

Jacobsen: How has this company developed?

Marino: So, I acquired Dopple in August of 2023. Before being introduced to Dopple, I was already building a baby registry, but it was a classic registry that would compete with what’s out there today. When Dopple came across my desk, I said, “Wow.”

The ability to handle subscriptions and recurring purchases compared to a regular registry can be a profound change. Since then, the vision has grown tremendously over the last 9 or 10 months. What has happened as a result is, after acquiring Dopple and rebooting the revenue stream, getting the moms on the subscription clothing box business flowing again, I realized that the combination of the registry I was building plus the Dopple platform could transform families’ lives significantly if we did it right. The opportunity was so big that it made sense to sell off the media piece of the business. That segment brought in a few million in annual revenue and gave me a great income, but it would always be more impactful and offer as big an opportunity as what Dopple sits on today. So, I sold it in January and have been focused on Dopple and the registry ever since.

Jacobsen: What is the hardest aspect to work around with the Dopple Registry? Is it ensuring that certain systems and processes are integrated well enough for a better customer experience?

Marino: Actually, it’s always about the customer experience. But because we’re offering something that doesn’t exist here, it’s about ensuring the messaging is clear. It’s about ensuring everyone understands the wins and the benefits of thinking about things holistically.

That’s where our partnerships with some of these state and local governments come into play. Their mission at these agencies is to create messaging and ensure that everyone knows they have access to services and solutions. We come in as the partner and say, “All right, we can connect everyone.” For example, they might have funds allocated or available, and they’re trying to build solutions to connect healthcare systems, service providers, and moms. Well, guess what? We’re the platform that can do all that for them.

It’s about educating and changing families’ perspectives on what it means to raise children and how we do that. For example, we go well beyond the birth of the child. If a mom signs up for 12 months of diapers, we deliver those diapers every month. If she goes online and says, “Oh, my son is no longer a size 2; he’s now a size 3,” we send a new box with the correct size, and away we go.

We can offer many other things because we’re serving parents beyond birth. What we’re launching in December by Black Friday is our wish list component. Now, we’re not just doing baby registries; families with older kids can build wish lists for birthdays, holidays, or anything they want. Again, you can include services, products, or contributions to a 529 account. Imagine being able to swap out all the plastic toys you get for your kids during Christmas and holidays!

It ends up in the landfill, but with 529 contributions, even if it’s just $25 over 17 years, that adds up. And you’re leveraging your village to get what your family truly needs. Other great examples include swim lessons, private coaches, or therapy. Whether it’s mental health or, like in my daughter’s case—she’s autistic—maybe she needs occupational therapy. There are various situations where families need help, and this allows them to prioritize, communicate, and get some or all of it paid for.

Jacobsen: How, given your experience as a model for this, does that influence your decision-making when assessing customer needs and identifying what families are most likely to want? How do you foresee, stage by stage, the next areas of need for families?

Marino: Well, let’s step back briefly and discuss how Dopple became a concept. It’s literally over two decades in the making. When I had my daughter—my first child—we were on welfare for a variety of reasons, which we don’t need to get into. Not only did the state of California help us, but we had to build our village to get through.

Our parents bought nursery furniture, my dad bought a year’s worth of diapers, and our siblings paid for electric bills. Our friends from business school took us out to dinner, paid for it, and gave us the leftovers. Everyone came together as a community and supported us.

We’ve built that sense of community into a platform because I know what it means to pull together all those resources in a scalable way for people to get through tough times. Taking the stress off families is critical.

So, when we look at where we’re going next today, it’s more scientific than our origin story. We’re conducting questionnaires and market research to figure out our next steps. We’re already considering a range of opportunities for Q1 of 2025 and have started those research processes.

Jacobsen: Where are you hoping to expand the registry beyond Q4? What about the next few years?

Marino: So, think about it this way: We start with baby registries, but we’ll also have wish lists. As families evolve—whether having more kids or as the kids get older—we’ve got an entire platform that can help activate your village for those needs. Ultimately, I live in the sandwich generation and care for my parents and kids.

Let’s say my dad needed surgery, and insurance only covered so much. We could create a wish list for what he needs as an older adult, which differs from what you need when having kids. We can assemble a wish list, prioritize the items, and have them all gifted.

We can handle any stage of life, and that’s what’s so exciting for us—we evolve as families evolve.

Jacobsen: Any final points based on today’s conversation?

Marino: No, we’re good. Hopefully, this will be interesting, and you will see how it impacts dads.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much. 

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mandisa Thomas on Secular Song, Art, and Activism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/02

Mandisa Thomas (she/her/hers) is the founder and President of Black Nonbelievers. Although never formally indoctrinated into belief, Mandisa was heavily exposed to Christianity, Black Nationalism, and Islam. 

Mandisa has many media appearances, including CBS Sunday MorningCNN.com, Playboy, The Humanist, and JET magazines. She has been a guest on podcasts such as NPR’s Code Switchand 1A and the documentaries Contradictionand My Week in Atheism. Mandisa serves on the Board for Humanist Global Charity and previously for American Atheists, the American Humanist Association, Foundation Beyond Belief (now GO Humanity), and the Secular Coalition for America.

In 2022, Mandisa was featured on the Atlanta billboard and newspaper ad for the Freedom From Religion Foundation’s “I’m Secular and I Vote” campaign. She has also received multiple honours, including the 2022 Wolfson Award, and is a co-recipient of the 2020 Harvard Humanist of the Year.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here again with the wonderful Mandisa Thomas to discuss all things related to Black Nonbelievers. You’re on the cusp of a flight with Dan Barker from the Freedom From Religion Foundation. On paper, it’s business. Off paper, is it still business where you’re headed? 

Mandisa Thomas: [Laughing] Yes, it is. And it is more activism than just business. I’m going to the first-ever African Freethought Music and Arts Festival. Dan Barker and I will perform a version of Godless Gospel with some music students at the University of Lagos in Nigeria.

There will also be a talent competition, and I will be one of the judges. As the saying goes, “If you do what you love, it doesn’t feel like work.” I’m excited to be a part of this because it’s an important way for Black Nonbelievers to connect with the humanist community in Nigeria, bringing talent and creativity together and exploring how we can collaborate. 

Jacobsen: There is now a talent competition with monetary prizes. Will you be judging any of these?

Thomas: Yes, and I’m excited. However, I’m always a little nervous when I do things like this because I certainly don’t consider myself the best singer in the world. Sometimes I wonder if I’m even the best person to judge such a competition. Still, I’m excited about it because I have a good ear for music. I’m eager to see what these young people bring, especially when combining activism with creativity.

Jacobsen: What about the choir being brought over to present original music that will be or is part of an album featuring compositions by Dan and others? Could you call it American secular music?

Thomas: Yes. So, for Godless Gospel, Dan and I will be rehearsing with some of the students who will be singing with us, and we’ll determine how many students will be part of the choir during the festival. We plan to perform about three songs, and I’ll be rehearsing, working with, and teaching the students and other singers the songs we’ll be performing. We also have some recorded music we can practice with, and a piano will be there. Dan is an accomplished piano player and composer, so we’ll likely perform one song in a piano or acoustic version, and the rest will be sung along with the recorded music.

We have the song lyrics and the music, so we will spend a few intense days preparing with the other singers to ensure we deliver a great performance. Gospel music, in general, is a continuation of music that transcended the American slavery period and early African American musical traditions. Still, it also traces back to the African continent. African rhythms and musical styles have translated well into American music.

We’re looking forward to seeing how that connection plays out as we perform the current music and continue working on new music for the album.

Jacobsen: When was the last time you visited an African country? What kind of cultural and moral enrichment did you experience during that first trip, and what are your feelings before embarking on this second trip? I understand it has been quite some time since your last visit. Also, what are you hoping to gain from this trip?

Thomas: Absolutely. So, the first time I ever visited Africa was in Ghana. That was back in 1991 when I was 14 years old. The purpose of that trip was a youth trip where we visited different places of education in Accra and another major city, Kumasi, which was a Christian village. We received a good education during that trip and visited W.E.B. Du Bois’s home, where he relocated after leaving America. We visited the organization established in his honour. 

I was there with other teenagers my age, many of whom I had grown up with. It was fun, but as an American teenager in another country, There was a bit of naivete. We learned a lot, though, and it helped us grow. We also visited the slave castles of Cape Coast and Elmina, where captives were held before being put on ships for the transatlantic slave trade. That experience was horrifying, but we could comprehend its gravity even at that age.

Because I had grown up learning about Black history and culture, as well as institutional racism, it wasn’t completely foreign to me, but being there in person was impactful. I will take a similar tour as an adult visiting Nigeria, which is close to Ghana. I’ll see how much things have progressed in Nigeria, even though this is my first time there. I’ll also be reminded of why we do this work and why it’s so impactful for me and others in this activism, especially regarding lineage, history, and culture. We should never forget the horrific actions committed against people, which so many are now trying to revise or erase from history. These events are very personal to me.

It’s also meaningful because of our connections with people like Dr. Leo Igwe. This will be my third time seeing him in person.. I’ll also meet others with whom I’ve connected virtually, which will be fantastic. I hope to get new material from this trip to share with our members in the United States. I want to show what we can achieve by working with fellow free thinkers, humanists, and atheists across the diaspora. Additionally, I’m excited to be enriched by being in a new place. Lagos will be my first visit, and I’m eager to see the city and learn from the other speakers.

I’m looking forward to an enriching, educational, and inspirational experience. 

Jacobsen: Leo Igwe is a nexus; he’s involved in many things. It’s extremely impressive to see all he’s done over the last few years I’ve known him. We should also touch on Black Nonbelievers. What’s going on with the cruise this year, Mandisa?

Thomas: Yes, our annual BN SeaCon 2024 will take place from November 29th through December 5th, and we are still departing out of Miami, Florida. This year, we will be on Royal Caribbean’s Independence of the Seas. Some of our speakers include Chris Cameron, Candace Gorham, Kristie Puckett, an abolitionist from North Carolina, and Teddy Reeves, the Religion and Life Curator at the National Museum of African American History and Culture.

From there, we are also working on a Revival of Reason in March 2025. We hope to bring Godless Gospel back together with other speakers and presenters to host workshops on wellness for Black atheists and how they can get involved in activism. It’s important to emphasize the value of financially supporting organizations like Black Nonbelievers so we can continue to host events like this, sustain our sponsorships, and maintain our community activism and engagement. We also look forward to contributing to another African Free Thought Music and Arts Festival.

We have a lot of exciting things coming up! We will also be involved in the FORWARD Conference with the National Museum of African American History and Culture at the beginning of November. I submitted a paper to discuss Black Nonbelievers before that conference, which was accepted. So, I’ll present alongside other Black religious thought leaders and thinkers in general and showcase the changing landscape of religion in Black communities.

Jacobsen: That’s great! So, what do you think are some of the more nuanced areas of change in the religious space for African Americans—both for those in religious institutions and those who find that religion is no longer for them—and how do they come to organizations like Black Nonbelievers?

Thomas: Many younger people—mostly millennials, Gen Z and beyond—are moving away from traditional, fundamentalist religious practices. These practices don’t align well with their everyday lives or values. Even among religious individuals, there’s a growing realization that simply “praying on it” doesn’t work for everyone. So, more people find comfort in stepping away from these traditions despite their initial trepidation or apprehension.

When they come to organizations like Black Nonbelievers, they find affirmation, validation, and the resources they need to understand what it means to be nonreligious in real-time within their communities and cultures. It’s inspiring how many people are opening their eyes to the limitations of religion and finding alternative ways to build community, which has been impactful and inspiring.

Even if they don’t identify as atheists or humanists, they recognize the issues religion presents for our communities. It’s been eye-opening to see the shift in how people view activism and what they believe it should look like. Activism should be about action, coalition-building, and standing up for our rights as human beings.

We’re also reaching institutions like the National Museum of African American History and Culture, providing a framework for Black nonreligious representation, advocacy, and community. Though it’s still a growing movement and a work in progress, that’s how history is made. We’re fortunate to be part of this ever-growing change within our community.

Jacobsen: What do you consider the most heartwarming moment you’ve had this year or since we last talked?

Thomas: Oh my gosh, there have been so many. I recently had the opportunity to attend a Black women’s empowerment event co-sponsored by one of our partner organizations, Compassion & Choices. When the guest speaker, their special speaker, said that 2023 was a hard year for her, it hit so close to home for me.

I remember giving the representative for Compassion & Choices a huge hug because they continuously support our events. They are our major sponsor for BN SeaCon, and at that moment, she let me know that she still supports our organization and sees our work. It was so meaningful for her to tell me that we are helping them reshape how they reach out to people. Compassion & Choices focuses on medical aid for dying and end-of-life advocacy, and bringing those conversations to communities that need them is important.

It has helped them and others understand how to engage the larger population, especially those who no longer subscribe to fundamental religious practices. So, knowing that people see us, knowing that they recognize the work we do, and knowing we are connecting with people in meaningful ways has been incredibly heartwarming. This happened just in the past few days.

Jacobsen: What do you think about the end of the year and the political flip?

Thomas: For the end of the year and what’s coming up, it is important to donate to organizations like Black Nonbelievers, particularly during the holiday season, but all year round. In this political climate, it’s crucial. Granted, we don’t endorse specific candidates but always encourage people to vote for their values. It’s important to ensure that we don’t vote people into office who use their religious beliefs to impose on public policy because we’re seeing that happen a lot here in the United States.

It will take individuals and organizations working together to prevent that. The country doesn’t need to become a theocracy; we must continue fighting against that.

Jacobsen: Also, regarding critical moments in this election season or cycle, what about organizations where you might disagree on 10%, 20%, or even 5% of things? But we all agree on the importance of combating incursions into politics and the public space, where we all value the separation of religious institutions and government. What would your message be to them, in terms of targeted objectives, about staying on the same page and working together despite our disagreements?

Thomas: We need to continue to look out for one another and ensure that, as a community, we affirm all human beings. Even if we don’t agree on every issue, we need to be united in standing up for the values we all share—especially when fighting against the merging of religion and politics.

In a way that we are not discounting the voices still marginalized in our communities, it is important to make sure they are listening to us, especially for larger organizations. Many issues will impact us shortly, and we have to be vigilant. We will need support from those organizations and individuals to continue doing the crucial grassroots work that often doesn’t receive the resources and support it deserves. We must continue learning from each other, particularly from the people on the ground who are making those changes.

Black Nonbelievers IS a grassroots organization. Still, I encourage more of our fellow organizations to adopt a grassroots approach alongside us. This allows them to see firsthand how things can be impacted and to continue working together toward better solutions.

Jacobsen: I can vouch for this. You also have wonderful swag. So, if people want to make donations, they can also get some merchandise in return!

Thomas: Absolutely. We accept donations as a 501(c)(3) organization, but you can also purchase merchandise. We have Black Nonbelievers swag, including a new shirt we debuted on our website with a quote from Edith Gray, our newest co-host on In the Cut. So, donate and purchase online through our website to support and represent our organization. It also encourages others to support us and our work.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Mandisa, thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it, as always.

Thomas: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Steven Emmert on Secular Coalitions and Christian Nationalism

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/11/01

Steven Emmert is the Executive Director of the Secular Coalition for America, engaging in discussions on the growing influence of Christian nationalism in American politics. He emphasizes the importance of separating religion from governance, analyzing movements like Senator Josh Hawley’s Christian nationalist rhetoric, and advocating for secularism amidst political and social challenges.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, Steven Emmert from the Secular Coalition for America joins us. Recently, Senator Josh Hawley presented an interesting framing of the current political moment. He represents a class of politicians who were once more on the fringe but have, in some ways, become more mainstream. Today, I’d like to focus not only on Senator Hawley but also on the broader concept of Christian nationalism in the context of the current election.

Why did Senator Hawley title his essay “The Christian Nationalism We Need”? How did he frame it as a positive idea? And what was the response from the Secular Coalition for America, particularly from you as the Executive Director?

Steven Emmert: First, Scott, thank you for this opportunity to speak with you this afternoon. I appreciate it.

Regarding why he titled his article as he did, I believe he is part of a growing group advocating that if we bring the Bible into more areas of public life, our problems will be solved. This group asserts that the issues we face as a country and society stem from the absence of Christ. This viewpoint was once more fringe but has become increasingly mainstream within one of our major political parties. This perspective has become a prominent talking point, particularly among their support base, which includes many evangelical Protestants who resonate with this message.

Jacobsen: It has become easier for figures like Hawley to make these claims, even though much needs to be more accurate. Politics often involves some distortion, but the myth of a Christian nation, a Christian founding, and Christian Founding Fathers is becoming more prevalent in public discourse and political rhetoric. Why is this happening now?

Emmert: Yes, that seems to be how they market and sell this narrative—by convincing people that the country was founded on Christian principles and is how it was supposed to be. In reality, Europeans who came here were largely fleeing religious persecution, which is why the United States became unique in its explicit separation of church and state. This distinction has been foundational to our country.

Jacobsen: There has also been rhetoric about the left “destroying” God. What have you heard about this all-powerful, all-knowing entity supposedly being destroyed by a political ideology?

Emmert: Yes, well, again, this is part of their marketing strategy. They must portray themselves as victims to rile up support, much like the so-called “War on Christmas” we used to hear about every December. I never quite understood that, but it worked for them in terms of gaining donations, votes, rally attendance, or however they sought power. Interestingly, their actions often seem far removed from the teachings of Jesus Christ.

Jacobsen: I was introduced to this idea by two chapter leaders of The Satanic Temple in Arizona, Stu de Haan and Michelle Shortt, who explained how this narrative is marketed.  But this conversation took place years ago. They essentially noted that if they don’t get what they want 100% of the time, they adopt a victim mentality, using it as political currency. A couple of things are happening here. There’s much hyperbole around terms like “woke,” with them portraying themselves as victims. This critique—though not always, but often in an everyday sense—is sent from the Christian nationalist, self-identified, side towards others. Yet they simultaneously see themselves as victims of left-wing political movements and social policy.

They frame this as an attack on their rights, such as freedom of speech, religious liberties, and so on, whether or not these claims are legitimate. It becomes a political sloganeering tool. On the academic side, in less colloquial terms, there can certainly be legitimate critiques of any social and political ideology. I wouldn’t exclude “wokeness” from that. I’m aware of academic critiques suggesting that if you are re-essentializing people, that can be problematic.

But about this idea of a “religion of the trans flag” or framing it as the crisis of our time, along with the claim that we’re in a spiritual battle and need spiritual warfare—these are all biblically and Abrahamically-oriented terminologies used to push a particular worldview onto the public. Do you think this is closely tied to the rapid and massive decline of Christianity in the United States?

Emmert: Absolutely. They’re seeing the writing on the wall. When you look at survey after survey of religious identification, especially among those with no religious affiliation—the “nones” (N-O-N-E-S)—you see that now around 30% of adults in America do not have any religious affiliation. This number has increased dramatically over the last 30 to 40 years. If you break it down by age group, among those under 40, that number is well over 50%. So, while America has historically been a majority Christian nation, it’s clear that this will not always be the case. They recognize this shift is coming and do everything they can to resist it.

Jacobsen: You can look at Canada as a comparative example. While the United States has more people, a more complicated social context, a longer history, and arguably, more fervent religiosity, Canada’s religious landscape is changing rapidly. Based on the lines of best fit, Canada will likely become less than half Christian either this year or sometime next year. Back in the 1970s, over 90% of Canadians identified as Christian. By 2001, that number had dropped to over 75%.

Emmert: Exactly. Right. Our countries have a huge parallel, even though the United States is still more religious. 

Jacobsen: We see that the U.S. is slowly moving towards where Britain is, while Canada is already further along regarding religious disaffiliation. In Canada, we identify as a constitutional monarchy—democratic in phrasing but still constitutional monarchy. We don’t often talk about being a Christian country, even though historically, much of Canada was built by and for Christians. This rhetoric, therefore, feels like a weird about-face or ad hoc response to the current political moment rather than something deeply rooted in the history of either country.

Jacobsen: So, how many Christians identify with the ideology of Christian nationalism? 

Emmert: I’ve seen various numbers, but I’m always curious about how people define Christian nationalism because that’s the crux of it, right? If people think, “Oh yes, we’re a Christian nation because we’ve always been a Christian nation, because most people go to a Christian church on Sunday,” that’s vastly different from what Christian nationalism is and what it aims to do to this country. While there is a significant portion of Christians who support the concept of Christian nationalism, I’m always skeptical of those actual numbers because they depend on how people define or interpret the term. However, one thing we do know is that among evangelical Protestants, support for Christian nationalism is close to 90%, and they make up a significant portion of our citizens, particularly our voters.

Jacobsen: When it comes to political violence, how do Christian nationalists with a right-wing authoritarian views align with approval of political violence? 

Emmert: January 6, 2021, clearly indicated that many are on board. In surveys I’ve read where the question is posed, “Do you feel violence is justified to keep our country ‘ours’?” it’s consistently evangelical Protestants who are more likely to support violence, secession, or any means necessary to preserve what they believe is “theirs,”whatever that might mean.

Jacobsen: What have you seen as effective in terms of activism? The Secular Coalition for America is comprised of a large number of organizations. I’m familiar with the names of all of them in the context of secularism in America. It’s impressive that you’ve brought them all together, especially given the challenges that can arise—whether it’s personality conflicts or differences in focus, with some groups preferring to be community-oriented rather than politically engaged. These complexities are part of any social and communal activist movement. So, what have you found effective in bringing everyone together and working toward a common cause?

Emmert: You hit the nail on the head. We focus on agreeing on 80-90% of things and set aside the remaining 10-20% to get to work. Otherwise, we all end up suffering. When the Secular Coalition for America was founded over 20 years ago by Herb Silverman and the late Woody Kaplan, it came from the recognition that the voice of atheists, agnostics, and secular groups was largely absent in Washington, DC. We didn’t have much of a presence at all. So, while there are some disagreements on that 10-20%, the activism that needs to take place here in our nation’s capital is something all of our organizations recognize we’re stronger together.

While some groups have since established their presence here in Washington, DC, we all agree that to represent our 21-member organizations best, we need a central group like the Secular Coalition for America to lead these advocacy efforts. One thing that impressed me this summer was our work to raise awareness about Project 2025. This is a playbook created to ensure that if a Republican candidate wins the presidency, there’s a roadmap for what they plan to do in the first 100 days and their goals for the rest of the term. We’ve seen growing attention and engagement as we’ve informed people about what this would look like. It highlights the potential dangers to our freedoms, rights, and constitution if we head down that path with another four-year term. Many public figures, particularly American public figures, deserve credit for engaging with these issues and countering some of the usual stereotypes.

Jacobsen: A lot of them are genuinely intelligent. I looked at Senator Hawley’s background—he has a bachelor’s degree from Stanford University and a J.D. from Yale University. He’s an intelligent fellow. The bigger question is, what is sensible? Is it sensible to claim a Christian founding for this country and to push a nationalist version of that narrative in the present moment? It needs to be more sensible and factual. When you look at someone’s biography, like Hawley’s, there’s no apparent deficit of intelligence, qualifications, or ability to live a functional life. So, the next assumption is either they’re lying about American history for political purposes, or they’ve been misinformed or propagandized about it. Those seem like the two main possibilities. What do you think is going on with some of these folks?

Emmert: It’s about recognizing power, and they want to hold on to it. You can’t tell me that someone with a law degree from Harvard or Yale doesn’t understand the U.S. Constitution. It’s simple. So, they’re either lying through their teeth or received a very poor legal education, and I don’t think it’s the latter. They see this as what they must do to maintain their power and gain more.

Jacobsen: Do you foresee a risk of political violence in the upcoming election?

Emmert: I would like to think that after what we experienced four years ago, we’re past that. Still, we certainly need to plan for it as a possibility. We know that election officials in various counties have received numerous death threats that had to be taken seriously. Some people are currently in jail or prison for making those threats. So, the threat of violence is real, and it’s something we need to be prepared for, even though I’d like to believe we’re above that as a society. Unfortunately, I’ve been proven wrong.

Jacobsen: Also, according to Pew Research and other academic studies, secular people are one of the most disliked groups in the American public’s perception. They often arouse feelings of distrust and even hate. How do you sell a movement and yourself politically in such an environment? How do you overcome strong public opposition, especially when politics relies on personality, messaging, sloganeering, grassroots organizing, and so on?

Emmert: It’s important to recognize that change is a process. People don’t change their minds overnight. Let me use gay marriage as an example. When Massachusetts became the first state to legalize gay marriage, it wasn’t widely approved. It wasn’t as strongly opposed as in places like Alabama, but most people were still against it. However, a year later, when they conducted another poll, most people supported it. People initially feared they would be required to marry someone of the same sex, but when they realized that wasn’t the case, they thought, “Oh, this doesn’t impact me at all.”

As other states went through the same process, the Republican Party focused heavily on opposing gay marriage in the 2004 election. Now, they hardly mention it. They’ve just found new “boogeymen” to scare people with, or at least attempt to. It’s up to us, as an organization and as citizens, to understand that change is a process. These shifts don’t happen overnight.

Look at the anti-abortion movement. They worked for 50 years before they achieved their goal. We need to be just as strategic and committed.

Jacobsen: Is there anything I need to clarify regarding the response to Hawley and the issue of political violence? What do you think?

Emmert: No, we’ve covered most of it. I got to mention Project 2025, which was important because it’s critical. If you agree, I’ve touched on everything I wanted.

Jacobsen: Yes, we’ve covered a lot. Thank you so much for your time today, Steve. I appreciate it.

Emmert: Thank you. I’ve enjoyed talking with you, and feel free to reach out again. We can chat after the election, too.

Jacobsen: Absolutely, I will. I’ll go through this process and send you the transcript for the whole thing.

Emmert: Sounds great. Thanks so much. Enjoy the rest of your day.

Jacobsen: All right, thank you. You too. Goodbye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Nyamat Singh, Petition to Dissolve PIPS at KPU

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/31

Nyamat Singh is the Managing Editor of The Runner. Singh discussed the initial shock, invalid signatures, and the broader implications for freedom of expression of the petition. She emphasized the importance of student journalism and urged students to understand petitions fully before signing, citing concerns about censorship.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here to discuss the petition status you have been reporting on. You are managing it as a key person. How did this story first come to your attention?

Nyamat Singh: This happened in late September, though I am still determining the exact date. I was at the office when someone dropped off the petition, which was in a large, chunky orange folder.

At that time, Claudia was on vacation in Ireland, so it was just Devaki. We also received an email with the petition, but I had the physical copy. My initial reaction was to panic a bit, so I immediately called Devaki, and she saw it as well.

One of the messages she wrote in our group chat said, “Everyone, a huge storm is coming. They are trying to stop us.” I do not remember her exact words, but it was something along those lines. We were all trying to figure out what to do, and Suneet was also present.

We were brainstorming ideas because this was the first time this had ever happened. Devaki took the lead, and we decided to reach out to KPU. Our first step was to verify the student IDs to confirm whether the signatures were valid. KPU responded almost immediately, and we discovered that many signatures were invalid.

That is how it all began. When you discovered this, what was the reaction from the staff and your colleagues? How did everyone feel?

Initially, only the editorial staff knew—me, Claudia, Suneet, and Devaki. We kept it within our group. Claudia, even though she took time off, handled it efficiently. Despite the time difference, she was responsive, which was very helpful.

At first, it was just the four of us. When Claudia returned, we decided to consult journalism instructors for their perspectives. We also reached out to our legal team. Initially, we were all shocked.

Jacobsen: As the situation developed, what has happened with the petition? Has it changed how you operate internally?

Singh: It has mostly stayed the same operations. We are still reporting on the same topics. The petition called for a special general meeting (SGM), but we decided not to hold one because a significant portion of the signatures were invalid.

We have heard another petition might be in the works, but we cannot confirm it until we receive it—whether by email or physical delivery. For now, we have decided not to hold the SGM. I do not know. We’ll see what happens if there’s another petition. 

Jacobsen: One of the requests was to remove any reference—current or future—of the KSA in The Runner’s reportage. From your perspective as a journalist, what does this do to freedom of expression and the press within an institution of higher learning? Asking to erase years of hard work that’s quite significant.

Singh: Yes, whoever sent this petition asks us to erase years of work. The Runner has been reporting on the KSA for a long time. This is not just our work now; it is years of work since 2008 we were formed. That is terrible for the people who have spent so much time and hard work on these stories, bringing them to the students. It also concerns freedom of expression. One of their new bylaw demands is to allow minimal media presence, only five minutes, in their meetings.

I usually attend these council meetings to report on them. It’s been quite a process, and things have been different recently. 

Jacobsen: Another request was to limit the time someone could attend and record the Kwantlen Student Association’s regular meetings. So, what was the immediate interpretation of this request in the petition?

Singh: Yes, this was one of the bylaw changes. When we attend meetings, we usually record the whole thing, so we have a record of what was said. If we are allowed to record, there is a way to prove what happened in those meetings. People could ask us, “What proof do you have that this happened?” That is why we always record.

Having that recording as backup is crucial. If someone questions us, we can say, “Here is the recording.” It is not like we are making things up. Limiting our ability to record would hinder our work. How would we report on these meetings if we could not record them?

Jacobsen: I was informed–and it was confirmed–that the cost for PIPS, The Runner, and PULP Mag for each student at Kwantlen Polytechnic is 75¢ per credit. However, almost none—or virtually none—of the students at Kwantlen Polytechnic University have requested an opt-out option for this particular benefit. Given how low the cost is and how few students seem to disagree with the publications’ existence, this petition seems to go against the general opinion of the student body. What feedback have you received from students or staff about this petition, especially as more details emerged about the demand for no reportage on the KSA?

Singh: Yes, as more information about the petition’s demands, including no reportage on the KSA, emerged, it became clear that this request went against the interests of many students and staff.

Jacobsen: Issues included the need for valid student IDs for some of the names listed or mismatches between student IDs and names, and some students even thought this had something to do with a Cultus Lake trip. How did this information, as it surfaced, reach the staff—whether through personal conversations, walking around campus, or informal feedback to the publication?

Singh: Online feedback was significant. When we wrote a story about this, Claudia’s editorial received much attention on Twitter and other platforms. That is where most of our feedback came from. Eventually, students started finding out what was happening.

All of them were quite shocked and questioned what was going on. Some of the students told us they did not know what it was for. A few even thought it was for the Cultus Lake trip, while others thought it had something to do with the student association.

That doesn’t look good because this is a petition to dissolve the student publication, and I do not think the student association should be involved. Those were some of the initial reactions. Staff members also found out, and conversations started happening in classes. Instructors brought it up and distributed copies of our issues, telling students to remember what was happening. We were fortunate to have that support within the KPU community.

We also discovered that many students wanted us to stay, which was reassuring after seeing the 150 signatures.

Jacobsen: Could there be a standard process for something as extreme as the dissolution of student publications or the merger of board involvement between the KSA and the student newspaper? For example, based on who was running the petition, should there be a threshold of 100 or 150 signatures, followed by an open call for two weeks or a month for a counter-petition to see the opposing side? Because while 100 or 150 signatures are a lot for a student petition, there are tens of thousands of students across KPU’s various campuses. It is helpful and shows concern from some students, but it might only represent part of the picture, especially with such a significant claim. This is about something other than starting a new club, dissolving a club, or hosting an event that needs a $1,000 bursary.

Singh: Yes, that is very true. Because 150 students want the student publications gone, they only represent part of the KPU student body. It’s not just about dissolving The Runner but also about dissolving PIPS, which they had just started.

I remember Yana saying something like, “We are collateral damage,” which felt true. There is no way of proving who sent this petition, but we felt bad if our reporting triggered it. However, more than a threshold of 150 students is needed to make decisions about these publications. Many students might be interested in knowing what is happening and where their money is going, and we do not only report on the student association.

We cover a wide range of topics—KPU events, issues in the Lower Mainland, opinions, and pop culture—and we are also doing video work. Our work is so much more than just reporting on the student association, and I don’t think that should only affect our ability to report in the future.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts before we wrap up today?

Singh: Yes, student journalism is important. My message to the students would be this: If you’re signing a petition, ensure you know what it is about before signing. You would not want democracy to disappear. We have seen censorship happening worldwide, and a student publication is at the core of student life at KPU. So, think before you sign anything.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you so much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Singh: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Entemake Aman (阿曼) on American High-I.Q. Societies and Tests

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/31

*Updated November, 2024.*

Entemake Aman discusses high-IQ societies, particularly focusing on American culture, ethical challenges, and emphasized the significance of supervised tests like the SAT and GRE, while noting the impact of digitalization on test integrity. He explored how high-IQ societies could improve collaboration and maintain ethical standards.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Have you had any luck getting onto CGTN? I doubt I can help in that department–outside of my reach.

Entemake Aman: I am not getting anywhere in that department.

Jacobsen: How did the American media look to you after the article was published? Thank you for noting some questionable behaviour in scores in the Asiatic region, at least with one individual, several received documentation from another.

Aman: American media is more authoritative and influential. Geniuses are often honest, and we all hope there are no liars in the circle of high intelligence.

Jacobsen: When you look at different examinations in the U.S., what ones seem to tap the g factor?

Aman: The SAT and GRE are the only I.Q. tests in the United States that measure children’s G-factor.

Jacobsen: What have been some of the recent positive and negative developments in the high-I.Q. world in Asia? There tends to be more focus on the Americas and Europe.

Aman: I am only looking at the high I.Q. circles in Europe and the United States because I suspect there have been scammers in the high I.Q. circles in Asia since 2012.

Jacobsen: You have more of an affinity for American culture than me. What do you like about it? I tend to be more lukewarm about it.

Aman: I like American movies, the culture of I.Q. testing, the culture of educating gifted children, and the emphasis on creativity.

Jacobsen: How important are constitutions and broader high-I.Q. society guidelines to high-I.Q. societies? I know of three former Mega Society members of note: Keith Allen Raniere, Christopher Michael Langan, and YoungHoon Bryan Kim. The Mega Society was founded in 1982 by Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin. Keith Allen Raniere (12)was sentenced to 120 years in jail. He “was convicted by a federal jury in June 2019 of racketeering, racketeering conspiracy, sex trafficking, attempted sex trafficking, sex trafficking conspiracy, forced labour conspiracy and wire fraud conspiracy.” Christopher Michael Langan went through litigation with the Mega Society (12). He founded the Mega Foundation in 1999 as a 501c(3) tax-exempt non-profit corporation. YoungHoon Bryan Kim was the Senior Membership Officer of Chris Langan’s Mega Foundation until about 2020, then joined the Mega Society from 2020 to late August, 2024. Following anaward and an interview with Ian Bott–alongside others like Aubrey de Grey, Professor Howard Gardner chose revocation of his award and assessed Kim’s United Sigma Intelligence Association (founded by HanKyungLee, M.D. (1) in 2007 as United Sigma Korea (1), as explained by Kim in Phenomenon of the World Intelligence Network, and registered in 2023 by YoungHoon Bryan Kim) in August, 2021 in “Good Work, Compromised Work, Bad Work… And Ego.” Gardner gave an additional examination in a mid-October, 2021 update to the same article republished in The Good Project. The USIA Lifetime Achievement Awardformerly the USIA Award, has been awarded to Neil deGrasse Tyson, Jennifer Doudna, Richard Dawkins, Noam Chomsky, Yuval Hariri, Anthony Giddens, Elizabeth Blackburn, Terence Tao, and Howard Gardner.

[Ed. Update October, 2024: A professional photo of YoungHoon Bryan Kim claimed as “own work” under the username ‘Reality180‘ was uploaded on June 1, 2024 in English Wikipedia. The same username, ‘Reality180,’ attempted to create English Wikipedia pages ‘YoungHoon Bryan Kim‘ (May 29, 2024) and ‘United Sigma Intelligence Association‘ (April 21, 2024). The same identified pattern occurred with Korean Wikipedia username ‘Reality180‘ with a professional photo of YoungHoon Kryan Kim claimed as “자작” (Google Translate: ‘One’s own work.’), which created the Korean Wikipedia page ‘세계지능협회‘ (United Sigma Intelligence Association) and only ever edited Korean Wikipedia pages for YoungHoon Bryan Kim and United Sigma Intelligence Association (English). Also, Korean Wikipedia username ‘211.237.101.103’ (English) only ever created and edited the page ‘ 김영훈 (아이큐)’ or “Kim Young-hoon (IQ).” Recently, the same for Korean Wikipedia username ‘61.255.211.119‘ (English) only ever editing Korean Wikipedia page ‘세계지능협회‘ (United Sigma Intelligence Association) and ‘ 김영훈 (아이큐)’  or “Kim Young-hoon (IQ).” A Reddit thread about IQ Olympiad 3 years ago focused on English Wikipedia editing too, particularly around username ‘58.227.250.85.’ (User contributions) ‘Reality180‘ on Korean Wikipedia threatened to sue (English)–on November 15, 2023–another Korean Wikipedia user who had the username ‘2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5‘ (English). ‘2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5‘ claimed ‘Reality180‘ was a Christian and, at one point, training to become a priest (English). Subsequently, a legal context was reported on, by YoungHoon Bryan Kim in a professional or personal blog (English), on March 18, 2024. Recently, the claimed GIGA Society (TM) medium account issued statements about Ronald Hoeflin (1), the “Mega Society,” (1) “IQ Olympiad,” (1) “South Korean Jeong Kye-won(정계원) called Andrew Zheng or Andrew Jeong,” (1) “another giga-level group” and here, (12) and “Scott Douglas Jacobsen.” (1)]

Aman: The High I.Q. Society asks only for I.Q. There are no other requirements. I would guess that only 0.1% of the people in the high I.Q. association are problem characters. If they are no longer members of the Mega Society, then the Mega Society may focus more on moral aspects.

Jacobsen: I would agree. It is a handful or less than a handful, or less than 0.1%. The vast majority have been excellent and kind to and with me, whether in word or deed. As a practical example, they have been generous with their talents and time in expressing their views in interviews for over a decade. Are there any emerging trends in the approach to I.Q. testing?

Aman: There are a few new trends in I.Q. tests. They have only one purpose: to measure the G-factor. So, it is all about the ability to find patterns.

Jacobsen: How will the high-I.Q. community evolve over the next decade?

Aman: I prefer supervised I.Q. tests, like Stanford Binet. Hopefully, there will be better I.Q. tests in the next ten years. The most important thing for the I.Q. society is whether its members’ I.Q. is qualified.

Jacobsen: Are there any unique challenges the American high-I.Q. community faces compared to other regions?

Aman: Members of the American High I.Q. Society is doing reasonable quality control, but some answers to American I.Q. tests have been leaked. I hope the American I.Q. test is changed to a paper I.Q. test.

Jacobsen: How has digitalization impacted networking and collaboration within the high-I.Q. community?

Aman: Digitization makes it easier for knowledgeable people to communicate. However, it could also lead to the leakage of answers.

Jacobsen: Are there specific regions where high-I.Q. communities are particularly active or growing?

Aman: America. Because America values I.Q.

Jacobsen: How does the high-I.Q. community support the development of young talent?

Aman: Mensa often reports on child prodigies under seven, bringing them to society’s attention. Mensa also has some social benefits. Some companies may focus on whether someone is a Mensa member.

Jacobsen: Have any recent debates or controversies within the high-I.Q. community?

Aman: I have not been paying attention to the High I.Q. Society has been controversial for a long time.

Jacobsen: What role do you see artificial intelligence play in the future of high-I.Q. communities?

Aman: Artificial intelligence may be able to design brilliant questions for people.

Jacobsen: How do different cultural attitudes about I.Q. in different parts of the United States seem on the outside?

Aman: Most states have rules for gifted children. In 1961, California became the first state to legislate meritocracy education.

Jacobsen: What seems like the different cultural attitudes towards intelligence and high-I.Q. communities in the States?

Aman:  Supportive. Because the United States values I.Q. the most.

Jacobsen: From your analysis, you claimed to have answers stolen from your computer after it was hacked. What is how hacking is done?

Aman: That is one thing I regret and am sorry for. I should have deleted the answer from my mailbox. He probably planted a computer virus.

Jacobsen: How can test-makers protect themselves and their answers, especially from hacking and cheaters?

Aman: The authors no longer provide email addresses to the testers. Instead, submit using a paper envelope, like Mega Test.

Jacobsen: If we were to ignore paper and pencil tests, what qualitative metrics would you have noticed in gifted and talented people? So, words, deeds, and other non-test markers of higher I.Q.s—those that indicate the factor—I am curious how you see these as culturally and individually emergent.

Aman: Geniuses often have good character, quick thinking, and original thinking about every problem. They also like to talk to themselves sometimes.

Jacobsen: Are there aspects of American culture you find in Asian cultures now?

Aman: High-I.Q. societies have also emerged in Asia.

Jacobsen: Would it be helpful for high-I.Q. societies that are more established to implement ethical guidelines?

Aman: That doesn’t help the High IQ Society.

Jacobsen: On constitutions, what about inclusion in refined constitutions for expulsions of individual members on the vote of the membership? I know the Mega Society included a clause for expulsions in its Constitution–”Drafted by Chris Cole and Kevin Langdon; ratified January 1, 2001; amended August, 2005,” Article IV. Elections in Paragraph 7:

  1. Any member may call for the expulsion of any other member at any time. An expulsion vote shall be held only if after the call for expulsion has been seconded by another member. The member whose expulsion is proposed shall be entitled to up to eight pages to present a defense in the issue following the appearance of the second to the call for expulsion (which may be the same issue in which the original call appears), which shall also contain a ballot, and every member shall be entitled to present up to two pages for or against the expulsion. Expulsion of a member shall require two-thirds of the votes cast on the expulsion. The member whose expulsion is proposed shall be allowed to vote in the expulsion election.

In the Mega Society’s ~42-year history, it has been used only once to expel a member. The expulsion from the Mega Society was based on vastly overwhelming “votes cast” against the expelled member’s defense case. After the subsequent expulsion from the Mega Society, removal from the mailing list, deletion from the listing on the website, and so on, the then-former member later sent an email to the Mega Society claiming withdrawal from the Mega Society, and then later publicly claimed to have voluntarily resigned from the Mega Society.

You don’t have take it on faith. You could email the Mega Society or a representative.

Aman: It is a good idea. It raises the moral level of the I.Q. Society. It can make their communication more positive.

Jacobsen: What can high-I.Q. societies do to stop the leakage of test answers and maintain test integrity now?

Aman: I.Q. test questions are not published, and paper envelopes are used. The test creator’s email number is not provided. Periodically check to see if the answers are leaked.

Jacobsen: What are the positive things Mensa is doing to foster young people, nurture young talent, and keep the spirit of the high-I.Q. societies alive in positive contributions to community building, which so many of these people crave?

Aman: Mensa’s advantage is supervised testing. It can identify gifted children and help them find a platform to communicate.

Jacobsen: Specifically, how could A.I. help develop hard test questions for people to separate intelligent people from brilliant people?

Aman: Artificial intelligence may have higher I.Q.s, be proficient in psychology, and create complex I.Q. tests for people.

Jacobsen: How could online platforms be more robust in terms of security and prevention of cheating? The Adaptive I.Q. Test comes to mind from a team in the Mega Society.

Aman: Artificial intelligence may be able to help solve this problem, with any leaks about I.Q. test answers automatically blocked. The team should switch I.Q. tests regularly.

Jacobsen: Could high-I.Q. societies do with more diversity?

Aman: No need. Paying attention to the quality of members is the most important.

Jacobsen: How do you perceive the role of digital platforms in shaping the future interactions of high-I.Q. communities?

Aman: Increase the risk of I.Q. test questions being discussed and leaked.

Jacobsen: What measures can high-I.Q. societies implement to prevent the leaking of test answers and ensure test integrity?

Aman: Use paper envelopes to test; do not reveal the questions.

Jacobsen: What are some fundamental cultural differences you have observed in attitudes toward intelligence across various regions in the United States?

Aman: For example, in junior high schools in suburban St. Louis, gifted classes are similar in the difficulty of teaching knowledge to ordinary classes, but they pay more attention to cultivating students’ practical and hands-on skills, often organizing science experiments and speech competitions. On the East Coast, where the pace of life is much faster, it is different. Maryland’s gifted class advocates advanced education, children have more homework, and small and medium-sized tests are standard.

Jacobsen: What are the most significant ethical guidelines that high-I.Q. societies should consider adopting?

Aman: Abide by the laws of the state.

Jacobsen: How might artificial intelligence contribute to developing more challenging I.Q. tests, and what implications could this have for test fairness?

Aman: I do not think it affects fairness.

Jacobsen: Are there any high-I.Q. communities outside the United States and Europe that you find particularly noteworthy or growing in influence?

Aman: Not found. I think the American High IQ Society is the best in the world.

Jacobsen: What qualitative traits have you observed that indicate high intelligence beyond traditional I.Q. test metrics?

Aman: No other indicator surpasses I.Q. tests.

Jacobsen: How do you see the evolution of high-I.Q. societies over the next decade, especially regarding inclusion, diversity, and ethical practices?

Aman: The diversity of I.Q. society does not matter. What matters is the quality of members of an I.Q. society. There will probably be more good tests in the next ten years, and members’ ethics will get higher and higher.

Jacobsen: What positive contributions do organizations like Mensa make to support young talent within high-I.Q. communities?

Aman: Regular meetings, monthly magazines. Some countries may have social benefits. Large companies may require Mensa membership.

Jacobsen: In what ways could online I.Q. testing platforms improve their security measures to prevent cheating and maintain credibility?

Aman: Using an envelope paper I.Q. test, the author of the I.Q. test question regularly investigates whether there is a possibility of giving away the answer. Keep the test questions secret.

Jacobsen: Can you share your personal journey in high-IQ societies? How being a member has influenced you?

Aman: When I joined Mensa, I had a high-quality circle. But it didn’t affect me that much.

Jacobsen: How being a member has influenced you?

Aman: I met some successful people. The effect on me is that I have an easy circle to communicate with.

Jacobsen: How has being part of high-IQ communities affected your relationships, both personally and professionally?

Aman: I found Mensa to be generally of higher quality than those around me. They have better characters. I prefer to talk to them.

Jacobsen: What are the subtle ethical challenges high-IQ societies face today?

Aman: The High IQ Society needs more supervised IQ tests.

Jacobsen: How can they address them?

Aman: Establish supervised examination rooms. Like the Stanford Binet test and the Mensa test.

Jacobsen: Are current ethical guidelines in high-IQ societies effective?

Aman: Effective.

Jacobsen: How could they be improved?

Aman: The most important thing is to obey the laws of the country.

Jacobsen: Besides test security, how can technology enhance collaboration and networking in high-IQ communities?

Aman: Technology has made it easier for members of high-IQ societies to meet.

Jacobsen: How can artificial intelligence improve communication and collaboration among high-IQ society members?

Aman: Artificial intelligence can help find members of highly intelligent associations in a particular country.

Jacobsen: How can high-IQ societies promote cultural diversity and inclusion among their global members?

Aman: The High IQ Society test requires no knowledge. It only requires a high IQ.

Jacobsen: How can members of high-IQ societies use their abilities to make meaningful contributions to society?

Aman: Studies mathematics, philosophy and physics.

Jacobsen: How can high-IQ societies encourage members to apply their intelligence to solve real-world problems and help their communities?

Aman: The High IQ Society creates different hobby groups.

[Update November 10, 2024: Upon further investigation, an old certificate of the Extreme Sigma Society of United Sigma Korea founded by HanKyung Lee, M.D. stated:

Extreme Sigma Korea (E.S.K) – High IQ society

Membership Certificate

Extreme Sigma Korea (E.S.K) is an International high I.Q. society located in Korea, founded on July 25, 2012, by HanKyung Lee, M.D., with the aim to gather people who have a high level of intelligence above I.Q. 220 sd24 or I.Q. 175 sd15 of the unselected adult population. The society Genius Member (G.M) is granted to individuals having achieved the required cognitive performance.

We certify that Marco RipàIs Honorary Member (H.M.) of E.S.K – High IQ society

E.S.K Honorary Member: 021318eskhmDate Issued: 30 July 2015

The FounderHanKyung Lee, M.D.

Sigma Korea website (copyright 2007) stated on March 22, 2017:

Sigma Korea is an International  high I.Q society located in Korea founded on July 3, 2007 by HanKyung Lee, M.D which has various groups according to cognitive performance; Three Sigma Korea (T.S.K) ≥ IQ 172 sd24 or IQ 145 sd15, Four Sigma Korea (F.S.K) ≥ IQ 196 sd24 or IQ 160 sd15 and Extreme Sigma Korea (E.S.K) ≥ IQ 220 sd24 or IQ 175 sd15 of the unselected adult population. The aim of Sigma Korea is to gather the people who have high level of intelligence and provide an intellectual discussions in forums that TSK, FSK, ESK members are allowed to share ideas and opinion for intellectual life. 

Sigma Korea high IQ society may have important meaning enough as one of I.Q societies in the world. Korea always have been top I.Q ranking country in the world by official statistics and reported academic resources. If you participate in this project is to gather the people who have high cognitive performance located in Korea, you would be a member of the best IQ country society in the world. In the history, Korean couldn’t help using their brain to keep identity and survive against others, and consequently this environment help people to do their best in intelligence. It is well explained considering geopolitical factors have utilized for scientific research as well as the humanities field in academia like anthropology with sociobiology. That is this society is just for the people welcome to intellectual work. 

YoungHoon Kim and HanKyung Lee are mentioned on the lower portion of the website. HanKyung Lee’s old blog can be found here. United Sigma Intelligence Association, up to and including June 15, 2021, cited its copyright as from 2007 to 2021 with a founding in 2007 and a founder of HanKyung Lee, M.D. The current claimed founder is YoungHoon Bryan Kim with a founding date of 2019.

Therefore, following from the October, 2024 update, according to available records, Sigma Korea, founded in 2007 by Dr. HanKyung Lee, became United Sigma Korea, founded in 2007 by Dr. HanKyung Lee, and later the United Sigma Intelligence Association. Up to at least June 15, 2021, the founding date was cited as 2007 with Dr. Lee as founder. Later, the founding date was claimed as 2019, founded by YoungHoon Bryan Kim, with the incorporation in 2023 by YoungHoon Bryan Kim.

IQ Olympiad (Foundation Limited) (1, 2, 3) was in partnership with United Sigma Intelligence Association. To quote United Sigma Intelligence Association:

USIA has signed the IQ Olympiad Foundation partnership.

The IQ Olympiad is an intellectual growth platform that everyone can participate in by refining and sharing IQ tests around the world. Users can access different types of IQ tests here, which can meet intellectual needs and challenge human intelligence limitations. The IQ Olympiad is a decentralized platform where users create and provide IQ test content themselves and users become consumers of IQ test content. The founder of the IQ Olympiad Foundation is Ronald K. Hoeflin, PhD, who is the founder of the Mega Society.

Website: https://iqolympiad.org

Other listed partners were Lifeboat Foundation, World Memory Sports Council, HK, Korea Memory Sports Association,Complex Biological System Alliance, World Academy of Medical Sciences, International Longevity Alliance, and India Future Society.

IQ Olympiad (Project) listed United Sigma Intelligence Association as a partner in addition to a list of other organizations:

United Sigma Intelligence Association : https://www.usiassociation.org

Lifeboat Foundation : https://lifeboat.com

International Longevity Alliance : https://longevityalliance.org

World Academy of Medical Sciences : https://wams.online

Complex Biological Systems Alliance : http://www.cbsaimtt.com

Hong Kong Institute of Memory Education : https://www.wmsc-hk.com

Gifted High IQ Network : https://www.giftediqnetwork.org

Genius High IQ Network : https://www.geniusiqnetwork.org

World Intelligence Network : https://www.iqsociety.org

Olympiq High IQ Soicety [sic]: https://olymp.iqsociety.org

Helliq High IQ Society : https://hell.iqsociety.org

Civiq High IQ Society : https://civ.iqsociety.org

Griq High IQ Society : https://gr.iqsociety.org

Qiq High IQ Society : https://q.iqsociety.org

Iqid High IQ Society : https://child.iqsociety.org

This High IQ Society : https://www.thisiqsociety.org

4G High IQ Society : https://www.4giqsociety.org

Brain High IQ Society : https://www.brainiqsociety.org

ELITE High IQ Society : https://www.eliteiqsociety.org

6N High IQ Society : https://www.6niqsociety.org

NOUS High IQ Society : https://www.nousiqsociety.org

Venus High IQ Society : https://venushighiqsociety.org

Catholiq High IQ Society : http://www.catholiq.org

Catholiq High IQ Society : http://www.catholiq.org

American High IQ Society : https://ahiqs.org

Canadian High IQ Society : https://chiqs.org

Global High IQ Society : https://ghiqs.org

Torr High IQ Society : https://torr.org

IQ Olympiad listed YoungHoon Bryan Kim’s high-range test entitled KIT-1 including a listing of his IQ Olympiad business email, stating:

Kim’s Intelligence Test (KIT-1) is a verbal associations high range IQ test developed by YoungHoon Kim in 2022. Please send your answers to bryan@iqolympiad.org, along with your full name, nationality, age, gender and all prior I.Q. scores. Valid answers are single words, and you can send one answer per question. Scoring fee is “free” of charge if you join the IQ Olympiad Forum : https://forum.iqolympiad.org. KIT – 1 supports two attempts and raw score will be reported in both of them according to the current norm.

IQ Olympiad Medium account on January 3, 2022 in “IQ Olympiad team member named in 2022 Genius of the Year Awards” said, “IQ Olympiad’s Global Strategy Officer YoungHoon Bryan Kim was named 2022 Genius of the Year Award from high IQ world.” This was online until, at least, November 30, 2023. It has since been deleted.

Therefore, according to their official statements, IQ Olympiad and the United Sigma Intelligence Association listed each other as partners and featured YoungHoon Bryan Kim in their communications.

Circa December, 2019, Jonathan Mize’s God Versus Language published in December, 2019, cites a number of acknowledgements, including Mr. Christopher Langan and Dr. Gina Langan of the Mega Foundation, and YoungHoon Kim, among many others of the Mega Foundation community:

I am no doubt indebted to numerous members of the CTMU community, including of course Christopher Langan himself. Various members have assisted me in as diverse things as the inclusion of the ever-so-challenging to conjure “unisect symbol” (thank you Raj Dye!) to the genesis of cover design ideas (Adam Haas) and the development and consideration of various topics analyzed within the book. I am indebted to the following members of the community for providing thought- provoking material and engaging in stimulating conversation about topics related to the book: Gina Langan, Jesse Franckowiak, Alexis Pantelides, Dylan Catlow, James Bowery, Arek Sobiczewski, Eike Freidank, Quest Quinn DeWitt Brown, Ethan Swofford, John Rice, Bernard Skomal, Aaron Esbenshade, Martin LoBretto, Martin Ezeugwu, Jason Jackson, Micha Szczsny, Lennox Niece, Zachary Auf, Daniel Falk, Charles Ringer, Matisse Mallette, Richard Jefferson Yorke, YoungHoon Kim, Megan Lorrayne and Johnny Yiu. 

Kim served as the Senior Membership Officer for the Mega Foundation until 2020. In the same year, he joined the Mega Society as a member. As of August 2024, Kim is no longer listed as a member of the Mega Society. Verification can be obtained through official Mega Society channels: https://megasociety.org/#officers.

Circa July 13, 2019, in the Phenomenon (World Intelligence Network) interview republished from In-Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen, YoungHoon Bryan Kim stated:

Hi, before saying my story, I appreciate talking with this journal and being a part of your interviewee series. To put myself shortly, I have studied philosophy and theology in Korea University and Yonsei University, which are called Sky Universities (or Ivy league in South Korea), as well as studying B.M. piano in a music College. 

My full-memberships may be the most interesting. The scores are accredited by some professional psychologists, of OLYMPIQ Society, Mega Foundation for IQ 175, sd15 and Epimetheus for IQ 160, sd15, I am also working as a president in the United Sigma Korea with ESK, IQ 175, sd15 society, which was founded in 2007 by Hankyung Lee, M.D…

…Graduating from high school, firstly, I attended B.M. classical piano in one music college (university). Completed 2 years out of 4, I changed my major to humanities and studied a variety of fields on the academic degree B.A. programme in Korean Ivy league, called, as noted, the Sky Universities. Additionally, I also completed a diploma in London. Now, I am preparing to attend Ph.D. programme in Harvard University, Graduate School…

…Next year, I will apply Harvard with a few of the prestigious graduate schools. I said, on the former question, about my academic journey from studying music to humanities. That is my next step to be a professional scholar. I am sure that you will see I am studying and researching in there, as always, soon…

…Most of the societies I am involved with have the qualification of the professional psychological test by a psychologist. This is far from several societies that just accept non-professional and even online IQ test. If we acknowledge, by any possibility, non-professional IQ test could measure the human intelligence, any of the society approved League be unsuitable for the name of a high-IQ society…

…I recognize that there are many cheating issues. Most of the cases are from the score on non-verifiable tests like so-called high-range IQ test, which do not require any identification of the testee or have been compromised. Even though, most of the test makers are still scoring. That is another reason that we could not believe the score from that.

At the time of the interview, Kim was a member of the following high-IQ societies: “Mensa, TOPS, ISPE, TNS (Triple Nine Society), OATH (One in a Thousand), Epimetheus, Mega Foundation, and OLYMPIQ Society.”

On September 10, 2024, US Weekly’s Isabel Mohan published an article online featuring the US Weekly new Editor-in-Chief Dan Wakeford doing an interview with YoungHoon Bryan Kim in an article entitled “World’s Smartest Man Believes the Higher Your IQ, the Greater Your Need For Gossip (Exclusive).” Kim was quoted in the article:

“I love news and stories from the celebrity and entertainment worlds, because it helps a lot with my anxiety,” he told Us, noting that many people with particularly high IQs can struggle with their mental health. “I believe that celebrities and the entertainment industry are harnessing our culture and their content is so intriguing for me. They’re the ones that are entertaining all of us. They are artists so I think, in a way, learning about their lives is a form of art experience. It’s an escape for me as well, but also a source of inspiration.”

Despite dedicating his life to science and technology, Kim has an equal respect for creativity. “Not only are the celebrities really creative, they’re also helping us think of new ideas and new ways to express ourselves,” he says. “And it helps us become more motivated to become better versions of ourselves. And pop culture never stops!”

As well as being a huge fan of BTS — the first K Pop act to go truly global — Kim is also something of a Swiftie, and says that this helps him feel more immersed in US culture; yes, keeping up with celebrities can give us a wider world view too!

The article is no longer available on the US Weekly website but remains accessible on other platforms, e.g., AOL, “World’s Smartest Man Believes the Higher Your IQ, the Greater Your Need For Gossip,” and MSN, “World’s Smartest Man Loves Celebrity Gossip Too!

With more investigation into information from the October, 2024 update, English Wikipedia username “58.227.250.85” referenced in the Reddit post entitled “Ron Hoeflin’s New Online IQ Test Hub” was searched on English Wikipedia. “User contributions for 58.227.250.85” stated only edits to English Wikipedia entries for Ronald K. Hoeflin, High-IQ society, Kim Ung-yong, Christopher Langan, and Youngsook Park between February 4, 2020, and August 2, 2021.

According to “User talk:58.227.250.85: Revision history,” “58.227.250.85” was blocked for disruptive editing by “Rklawton” and “Kinu” with prior warnings from English Wikipedians. The content of the edits for “58.227.250.85” comprised additions relevant to deletion of Mega Society and Prometheus Society, addition of United Sigma Intelligence Association (1, 2), addition of Ronald Hoeflin with USIA reference, addition of United Sigma Intelligence Association again (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6), and addition of IQ Olympiad (1, 2, 3, 4), including claiming USIA is “currently the most active and representative organization of high-intelligence organizations.”

Circa March, 2023, a Korean article “세계인명사전 IQ 1위 천재 김영훈 씨, ‘목사’의 길 걷는다” or ‘Kim Young-hoon, the number one genius IQ in the world’s famous class, walks the path of ‘Pastor‘ (March 20, 2023) claimed YoungHoon Bryan Kim ‘entered the pastor candidate course at Hanshin University Graduate School of Theology directly managed by the Korean Presbyterian Association.’ Another article titled “현재 IQ 전 세계 ‘1위’라는 33세 한국 남성, 전혀 예상치 못한 직업 택했다” or ‘A 33-year-old Korean man whose IQ is currently the ‘No. 1’ in the world chose a completely unexpected job.’ (March 28, 2023) claimed that Kim was ‘currently enrolled in the pastoral candidate course at Hanshin University Graduate School of Theology directly managed by the Korean Christian Presbyterian Association. After graduating from graduate school next year, he will take the pastor course as a full-time evangelist the following year.’

The same article quotes YoungHoon Bryan Kim:

‘I originally had a meaning in theology. I wanted to be a theologian, but there was a time when I wandered for a while as my study abroad was wrong,’ he said. ‘After graduating from graduate school, I plan to work as a full-time evangelist and take a doctoral program in theology together. I would like to contribute to nurturing future students as a theologian in the future, while doing theological research and ministry in parallel.’

As indicated in the October, 2024, update, ‘Reality180‘ on Korean Wikipedia threatened to sue (English)–on November 15, 2023–another Korean Wikipedia user who had the username ‘2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5‘ (English). Before the threat of suing Korean Wikipedia User “2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92:974A:23B5,” Korean Wikipedia User ‘2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5‘ (English) added the edit to the ‘Kim Young-hoon (IQ)’ Korean Wikipedia page with the claim:

‘However, the admissions officers of the High Intelligence Prometheus Society suspected his score fraud and did not grant him membership in the society, and he instead created the Prometheus 2.0 Society and joined it. This new society is a trademark infringement by using a name similar to the existing Prometheus, the same selection criteria, and a similar logo.[5]

The Korean Wikipedia page of ‘Kim Young-hoon (IQ),’ as such, during the time of the edit of Korean Wikipedia user “2607:740:2D:7:ABAF:CD92: 974A:23B5” also claimed:

‘Kim Young-hoon (May 25, 1989 ~ ) is a candidate pastor in Korea. He graduated from the Department of Theology at Yonsei University and is currently enrolled in the pastoral candidate course at the Hanshin UniversityTheological Graduate School directly managed by the Korean Christian Presbyterian Association.[1]

…He is currently working as a pastor candidate and evangelist of the Korean Presbyterian Church.[7]

…Dropped out of King’s College London graduate school

I’m a student at Hanshin University Graduate School’

This portion the version listed above about dropping out of King’s College London graduate school was edited to ‘King’s College London Graduate School Mathematics Master’s (MSc).’

In 2024, a website of YoungHoon Bryan Kim’s claimed Kim to be no longer involved in any religious activities starting January of 2024: “※ 참고김영훈은 2024년 1월을 기점으로 종교와 관련된 일은 공식적으로 하지 않습니다” or ‘※ Note: Kim Young-hoon will not officially engage in any work related to religion as of January 2024.’

Independent investigation by Scott Jacobsen revealed YoungHoon Bryan Kim requested inclusion in articles listing individuals with the highest IQs, e.g., “Top 10 People With Highest IQ In History.” (Curious Matrix of Domagoj Parner), even contacting, at least one, several times. The article addition to Curious Matrix stated:

    1. YoungHoon Kim – IQ Score: 276

In 2024, YoungHoon Kim from South Korea was recognized as number one in the world among the 50 people with the highest IQ 276 in America’s top magazine, Reader’s Digest, holding the highest IQ record holder officially certified by Korea Record Institute, World Genius Directory, Global Genius Registry, Esoteriq Society, and GIGA Society. With perfect scores on various experimental high range intelligence tests, he is the 1st ranked lifetime member of Mega Society, the one-in-a-million level high IQ society which was the only one listed in the Guinness Book of World Records and included all the people who were listed in the Guinness Book of World Records for the highest IQ.

Note: YoungHoon Kim founded an organization, the United Sigma Intelligence Association for the world’s brightest minds, of which seven Nobel Prize winners are official fellows/members. From his organization, The greatest minds in the world such as Noam Chomsky, Yuval Harari, Richard Dawkins, Howard Gardner, Neil deGrasse Tyson, and Terence Tao have received official awards with the winners’ consent.

This has since been deleted.

Circa July 14, 2024, the GIGA Society (TM) Medium page republished most or all of the article BBC Science Focus: Who has the highest IQ in the world in 2024? with an additional commentary on specifically YoungHoon Bryan Kim, the article “BBC Science Focus: Who has the highest IQ in the world in 2024? (Fact Check).” The GIGA Society (™) article stated:

NOTE: BBC Science Focus is providing incorrect information without any fact checking. Therefore, through this article, we will provide a BBC Science Focus article that has been properly fact-checked…

…Pictured above, YoungHoon Kim is said to have the highest IQ score in the world currently, with an impressive score of 276. If this South Korean intellectual scored IQ 276, he is definitely out in front.

Effectively tying for the title, though, is Marilyn Vos Savant. Her recorded IQ in the Guinness World Records was 228, awarded between the 1986–1989 editions until the record was discontinued in 1990, with IQ scores deemed too unreliable to document.

This article has since been deleted.

The GIGA Society (™) Facebook group lists a series of different title edits since July 10, 2021. These names, with dates of change, include:

  • United Giga Society (USIA) Jul 16, 2021
  • UNITED GIGA SOCIETY (USIA) July 19, 2021
  • UNITED GIGA SOCIETY Dec 21, 2021
  • GIGA SOCIETY 190 June 9, 2022
  • GIGA Society — Discussion Group Jul 4, 2022
  • GIGA Society — Secret Group Jul 6, 2022
  • GIGA Society — The Official GIGA High IQ Society Jan 8, 2023
  • GIGA Society Membership Jan 8, 2023
  • GIGA Society Official Jan 26, 2024
  • GIGA SocietyTM Official Jul 14, 2024
  • GIGA Society Official Jul 26, 2024

The first name change to United Giga Society happened on July 16, 2021, becoming United Giga Society (USIA), or UNITED GIGA SOCIETY (USIA) on July 19, 2021 and UNITED GIGA SOCIETY on Dec 21, 2021. From July 16, 2021 to July 26, 2024, United Giga Society (2021) was then renamed to GIGA Society Official.

On September 9, 2021, the web domain for United Giga Society–https://gigaiqsociety.org–was registered.

On October 1, 2021, ABSNewswire published the press release entitled “GIGA SOCIETY, THE WORLD’S MOST EXCLUSIVE HIGH I.Q. SOCIETY.” The company name described was United Giga Society with the main contact person as “Bryan Kim.” United Giga Society (2021) contact person Bryan Kim’s press release claimed:

Qualifications to join is 1) High Range IQ test score ≥ IQ 190 SD15, and 2) High Range IQ Society membership ≥ IQ 190 SD15. There is only full membership at the United Giga Society and Membership is free of charge.

It has been known to occur that social media “groups” started by impostors made unauthorized use of the name “Giga Society” or some variant or misspelling thereof.

Such groups are not affiliated with the United Giga Society, and membership in them under no circumstance entitles one to call oneself a member of the United Giga Society.

For more information, visit – https://gigaiqsociety.org

The wording in the United Giga Society’s press release is similar to a warning previously issued on the Giga Society website founded by Paul Cooijmans in 1996.  Giga Society (1996) of Paul Cooijmans stated:

It has been known to occur that social media “groups” started by impostors made unauthorized use of the name “Giga Society” or some variant or misspelling thereof. Such groups are not affiliated with the Giga Society, and membership in them under no circumstance entitles one to call oneself a member of the Giga Society. Contact the society’s Psychometitor to verify whether any particular group is bona fide.

Visiting the website of United Giga Society, the executives and positions listed circa October 25, 2021, were the following:

President: YoungHoon Bryan Kim

Vice-President: Iakovos Koukas

Membership Officer: Masaaki Yamauchi

United Giga Society contact person, “Bryan Kim,” released “GIGA SOCIETY, THE WORLD’S MOST EXCLUSIVE HIGH I.Q. SOCIETY,” listing the President of United Giga Society as “YoungHoon Bryan Kim.” In addition, the certificate of United Giga Society claimed “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” was the “Founder” of United Giga Society in 2021. Therefore, United Giga Society contact person “Bryan Kim” released a press release through ABSNewswire about United Giga Society founded by “Younhoon [sic] Bryan Kim” led by “President: YoungHoon Bryan Kim,” and the wording in the United Giga Society’s press release was similar to that of the Giga Society founded by Paul Cooijmans.

Another press release from ABSNewswire entitled “GIGA society – What is the real Giga Society?” was released on July 6, 2022, claiming “The official GIGA Society was originally established in 2001 as the Esoteriq Society by Masaaki Yamauchi.” This claim is echoed later. “YoungHoon Kim” edited only two entries in Golden, on World Genius Directory and GIGA Society. Golden claims “GIGA Society” founded in 2001 by Masaaki Yamauchi. The “World Genius Directory” entry only had 2 editors. It claimed, “The World Genius Directory was created by Dr. Jason Betts. Currently, YoungHoon Kim ranks first in the world according to this organization’s IQ data.”

Circa October 25, 2021, the listed membership of United Giga Society, were the following 9 individuals:

IACOVOS KOUKASGREECE

YOUNGHOON KIMSOUTH KOREA

MARIOS PRODROMOUCYPRUS

GLENN ALDENNORWAY

TOR ARNE JøRGENSENNORWAY

TOMAS PERNACZECH REPUBLIC

DANY PROVOSTCANADA

FENGZHI WUCHINATOM CHITTENDENUSA

Circa May 19, 2022, the membership was the following:

IACOVOS KOUKASGREECE

YOUNGHOON KIMSOUTH KOREA

EVANGELOS KATSIOULISGreece

RICK ROSNERUSA

MISLAV PREDAVECCROATIA

DANY PROVOSTCANADA

MARIOS PRODROMOUCYPRUS

TOMAS PERNACZECH REPUBLIC

FENGZHI WUCHINA

So, between October 25, 2021 and May 19, 2022, Glenn Alden, Tor Arne Jorgensen, Dany Provost, and Tom Chittenden, were listed then not listed as members, while Evangelos Katsioulis, Rick Rosner, Mislav Predavec, and Fengzhi Wu, were added to the membership.

Circa October 25, 2021, the partners listed for United Giga Society were United Sigma Intelligence Association (USIA),World Memory Championships (HongKong), Global Genius Directory, ESOTERIQ Society, Gifted High IQ Network,Genius High IQ Network, NOUS 200 High IQ Society, 6G High IQ Society, NOUS High IQ Society, 6N High IQ Society, ELITE High IQ Society, 4G High IQ Society, BRAIN High IQ Society, THIS High IQ Society, Opal Quest Group, TENIQ High IQ Network, Global High IQ Society, Canadian High IQ Society, American High IQ Society, Italian High IQ Society,Synapse High IQ Network, ICON High IQ Society, Callidus High IQ Society, Capabilis High IQ Society, Magnus High IQ Society, Egregius High IQ Society, and Profundus High IQ Society.

By March 7, 2022, President, Vice-President, and Membership Officer, changed to administrators, who were the same Iakovos Koukas, Masaaki Yamauchi, YoungHoon Kim, with the addition of Nikolaos Soulios.

By May 19, 2022, the partners for United Giga Society were no longer claimed on the website, while GIGA UNION was claimed through United Giga Society. GIGA UNION was described: “GIGA UNION is an association of societies whose membership requirements are IQ 190 SD15 or higher. The purpose of GIGA UNION is to unite and increase communication with IQ 190 scorers or IQ 190 societies around the world.” Listed below its description were several organizations: UNITED GIGA SOCIETY, SINGULARITY SOCIETY, ESOTERIQ SOCIETY, NOUS 200 Society, and6G HIGH IQ SOCIETY.

By June 10, 2022, United Giga Society’s website became THE GIGA SOCIETY 190. The United Giga Society Facebook group’s name was changed from “UNITED GIGA SOCIETY” to “GIGA SOCIETY 190” on June 9, 2022. The administrators for THE GIGA SOCIETY 190 were Iakovos Koukas, Masaaki Yamauchi, and YoungHoon Kim. Nikolaos Soulios was no longer listed. The members were YoungHoon Kim, Iakovos Koukas, Evangelos Katsioulis, Rick Rosner, Mislav Predavec, Dany Provost, Fengzhi Wu, Marios Prodromou, and Tomas Perna.

Giga Society 190 claimed, “Giga Society 190 was originally established in 2001 as the Esoteriq Society. The Giga Society 190 shares the history and spirit of the Esoteriq Society. Currently, the two societies are operating independently.” No founder is claimed for Giga Society 190. The United Giga Society certificate claimed a founding by “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” with the first press release and website active in 2021.

Circa June 28, 2022, THE GIGA SOCIETY 190 administrators were replaced with President Evangelos Katsioulis, MD, PhD, and Vice President Masaaki Yamauchi, BSc & Vice President Iakovos Koukas, MSc.

Circa July 6, 2022, THE GIGA SOCIETY 190 became GIGA Society, where “GIGA stands for Global Intellectual Giga Association.” The United Giga Society Facebook group page was renamed again–from GIGA SOCIETY 190–on July 4, 2022 to “GIGA Society — Discussion Group” and then on July 6, 2022 to “GIGA Society — Secret Group.” President Evangelos Katsioulis, MD, PhD, and Vice President Masaaki Yamauchi, BSc & Vice President Iakovos Koukas, MSc were no longer listed on the website in those capacities. Neither were the prior administrators listed in their prior capacities. Previously listed members Evangelos Katsioulis, Dany Provost, and Rick Rosner were removed and Kirk Butt, Tom Chittenden, and Tianxi Yu were added to the membership. Chittenden was added, again in this round after removal between October 25, 2021 and May 19, 2022, originally.

Circa July 7, 2022, a new website, gigasociety.net, was registered in place of the September 9, 2021 web domain registered for United Giga Society–https://gigaiqsociety.org. Links led from the latter to the former.

Circa July 12, 2022, on the new web domain, GIGA Society created the GIGA NETWORK. The GIGA NETWORK was described as “an alliance of high IQ societies worldwide. The purpose of GIGA NETWORK is to unite and increase communication with high IQ scorers or high societies around the world.” In addition, GIGA Society was described there: “GIGA Society is an extremely high IQ society for those who scored IQ 190 SD15 on the high range IQ test. The society was originally established in 2001.”

Circa August 17, 2022, the officers of GIGA Society were YoungHoon Kim, (South Korea), Masaaki Yamauchi(Japan),Claus Volko, (Austria), and Kathy Kendrick (USA). GIGA Publication was started. It stated.

For the first time in the world, the publication of the GIGA Society was brought to the book market. Although it is only a record of the society’s current state, this information will become a valuable piece of history in the future.

Amazon Kindle: https://www.amazon.com/dp/B0B6B3KLXL/ref=cm_sw_r_tw_dp_6S2TA4K1YW6RY7HZR20D

The Kindle edition book has since been removed from availability. Advisors listed were Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia),Manahel Thabet, PhD (UAE), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada),Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA),Claus D. Volko, MD, MSc (Austria), and Amit M. Shelat, MD (USA). The GIGA Council was formed. The GIGA Society stated, “The GIGA Council was formed to select the GIGA Society’s admission tests and to discover the best high range IQ tests.” The members of the GIGA Council were Mislav Predavec (Croatia), Kirk Raymond Butt (Canada), andYoungHoon Kim (South Korea). The GIGA Network comprised of GIGA Society, Global Genius Registry, Generiq Society, Grand Master Society, Prometheus 2.0, Nobel Society, ESOTERIQ Society,EVANGELIQ Society, GIGA Society, Global Genius Registry, Generiq Society, Grand Master Society, Prometheus 2.0,Nobel Society, ESOTERIQ Society, and EVANGELIQ Society.

Circa September 29, 2022, Marco Ripà was added to the membership list. The GIGA Society claimed, “The official GIGA Society was originally established in 2001 as the Esoteriq Society by Masaaki Yamauchi. GIGA Society shares the history and spirit of the Esoteriq Society. Currently, the two societies are operating independently.” The United Giga Society, in 2021, certificate claimed “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” and the website claimed “YoungHoon Bryan Kim” was the President & Founder.

Circa January 8 to 26, the United Giga Society Facebook page name changed again from “GIGA Society — The Official GIGA High IQ Society” on Jan 8, 2023 to “GIGA Society Membership” on Jan 8, 2023 to “GIGA Society Official” on Jan 26, 2023.

Circa February 5, 2023, GIGA Network claimed:

Anyone with an IQ score within the top 1% or an IQ 135 (SD15) or higher can join GIGA Network as a regular member. After membership registration is approved, members can receive the official GIGA Network certificate including a certified IQ score. An official member of the GIGA Network has a personal profile within the GIGA Network website. A sample profile can be found here.

Circa February 7, 2023, the GIGA committee was founded, saying, “GIGA committee was established to secure democracy and fairness in administration, introduce specialized knowledge, and discuss decision-making by GIGA Soceity [sic] and GIGA Network.” Its members were Raymond Keene, OBE (UK), Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA), Manahel Thabet, PhD (KSA), Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada), Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA), Simon Olling Rebsdorf, PhD (Denmark), Amit M. Shelat, DO (USA), Dr. M. M. Karindas, MD (Netherlands), Claus D. Volko, MD, MSc (Austria), YoungHoon Kim (South Korea), Masaaki Yamauchi (Japan), and Kathy Kendrick (USA). GIGA Society is claimed as “an experimental project of GIGA Network.” The updated list of the GIGA Network is GIGA SOCIETY,ESOTERIQ SOCIETY, GRAND MASTER SOCIETY, PROMETHEUS 2.0 SOCIETY, NOBEL SOCIETY,GLOBAL GENIUS REGISTRY, and KIT HIGH RANGE IQ TEST. A new web domain was made for GIGA Network at this time–https://www.giga-network.org/. Its About page stated:

GIGA Network is a global organization for the high intelligence network founded by YoungHoon Kim who is ranked number one in the World Genius Directory. The aim of GIGA Network is to integrate high IQ people & societies, to certify high IQ scores, and to publish GIGA Records which is the world’s highest IQ list certified by GIGA Network. GIGA in GIGA Network means Global Intelligence Giga Association.

Circa March 14, 2023, GIGA Publications had a new book for high-range tests. This is still online. The tests accepted for admission were KIT High Range IQ Test (by YoungHoon Kim), Hoeflin Power Test (by Ronald K. Hoeflin), Hoeflin’s Ultra Test (by Roanld K. Hoeflin), Eureka Test (by N. Lygeros), G-test (by N. Lygeros), 916 (by Laurent Dubois), Hyper Test (by Laurent Dubois), LSHR (by Ivan Ivec), LSHR Light (by Ivan Ivec), DOT&LINE&PLANE (by Tianxi Yu),Death Figures (by Tianxi Yu), Ivory Tower (by Tianxi Yu), Cats Are Tailors (by Mahir Wu), LDA-SWaN (by Gianluigi Lombardi), Challenger (by Zoran Bijac), SLSE II (by Jonathan Wai), Lux25 (by Jason Betts), and Sigma Test Extended (Hindemburg Melão Jr.). The GIGA Network claimed:

GIGA Network is a global organization for the high intelligence network founded by YoungHoon Kim who is ranked number one in the World Genius Directory. The aim of GIGA Network is to integrate high IQ people & societies, to certify high IQ scores, and to publish GIGA Records which is the world’s highest IQ list certified by GIGA Network. GIGA in GIGA Network means Global Intelligence Giga Association.    

GIGA Network uses cutting-edge statistics and scientific technologies to verify human high intelligence. The limits of human intelligence will be challenged by experimental high intelligence assessments called high range IQ test. GIGA Network serves as an institution that recognizes IQ scores by evaluating them. It will serve as an official certification authority in the high IQ network.

The GIGA Network established the Grand Master Society, the Prometheus 2.0 Society, and the Nobel Society with the GIGA Society at the head for the purpose of research on high intelligence.

Circa March 22, 2023, the GIGA Records was created with a sample certificate presented. It has since been deleted.

Circa May 13, 2023, there was a GIGA Network facebook page. It has since been deleted. Jeff Leonard was added as a member. GIGA Society was no longer claimed as established by Esoteriq Society by Maasaki Yamauchi in 2001. No claimed President or Founder.

Circa September 3, 2023, no claimed president or founder since 2021 under United Giga Society with Founder “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” & President “YoungHoon Bryan Kim,” or 2022 with President Evangelos Katsioulis, MD, PhD, or then in 2022 claimed as established in 2001 as Esoteriq Society by Masaaki Yamauchi or Masaaki Yamauchi as the Founder. GIGA Society said about its foundation:

GIGA Foundation is a global organization for the high intelligence network founded by YoungHoon Kim who is ranked number one in the World Genius Directory. The aim of GIGA Foundation is to integrate high IQ people & societies, to certify high IQ scores, and to publish GIGA Records which is the world’s highest IQ list certified by GIGA Foundation. GIGA in GIGA Foundation means Global Intelligence Giga Association.    

GIGA Foundation uses cutting-edge statistics and scientific technologies to verify human high intelligence. The limits of human intelligence will be challenged by experimental high intelligence assessments called high range IQ test. GIGA Foundation serves as an institution that recognizes IQ scores by evaluating them. It will serve as an official certification authority in the high IQ network.

The GIGA Foundation established the Grand Master Society, the Prometheus 2.0 Society, and the Nobel Society with the GIGA Society at the head for the purpose of research on high intelligence.

Circa April 20, 2024, a new president was claimed for the GIGA Society. The GIGA Society said, “The President of GIGA Society is Dr. Tom Chittenden who is an Honorary Professor in the Department of Artificial Intelligence at the University of London.” Dr. Tom Chittenden’s LinkedIn profile lists a presidency beginning October, 2023.  The updated GIGA committee included Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA), Raymond Keene, OBE (UK), Manahel Thabet, PhD (KSA), Fabiano de Abreu, PhD (Brazil), Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada), Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA), Simon Olling Rebsdorf, PhD (Denmark), Amit M. Shelat, DO (USA), Dr. M. M. Karindas, MD (Netherlands), Claus D. Volko, MD, MSc (Austria), Masaaki Yamauchi (Japan), and Kathy Kendrick (USA). The Hyper Society was created. The website descriptions explained:

HYPER Society

HYPER Society is an intellectual enhancement and self-development community founded by United Intelligence Research Institute of USIA and YoungHoon Kim, the record holder of the highest IQ officially certified by Korea Record Institute, World Genius Dictionary and Global Genius Registry (IQ 210, SD15 = IQ 276, SD24). 

*HYPER Society is a cooperative organization of GIGA Society.

HYPER Mission

The goal of HYPER Society is to provide mentoring for personal and interpersonal growth and social and emotional self-realization that cannot be experienced outside by sharing and communicating with each other’s intellectual curiosity.

Contact

      • Email: lab@usiassociation.org

Highest IQ 276 was established as a webpage, too. GIGA Society claimed to be founded in 2001; no reference to Masaaki Yamauchi or Esoteriq Society at that time. HYPER Society has since been deleted.

Circa June 22, 2024, GIGA Society claimed Ronald Hoeflin was the “Honorary Founder” of GIGA Society, and founded in 1982, as follows:

GIGA Society, as the world’s most exclusive high IQ organization, was originally founded in 1982 by Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin under the name Mega Society as the world’s highest IQ society which was the only one listed in Guinness Book of World Records in histoy. [sic] However, while the Mega Society sets a very high intelligence level of one in a million as a condition for membership, GIGA Society sets a condition for joining a superintelligence of one in a billion…

◆ NOTE: As the most exclusive high IQ organization for individuals with an intelligence of one in a billion, GIGA Society continues the spirit of Ronald K. Hoeflin and his Mega Society…

…HONORARY FOUNDER

Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin

Circa July 16, 2024, GIGA Society repeated the claims as well as noted and warned:

■ NOTE: Except for the nine members above, GIGA Society does not have any other members.

■ NOTE: As the most exclusive high IQ organization for individuals with an intelligence of one in a billion, GIGA Society continues the spirit of Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin and his Mega Society.

■ Warning: Here is the official GIGA Society™ for those who score IQ 190 (SD 15) on an acceptable high range IQ test. However, there is another giga-level group which accepts unprofessional uncensored tests authored by the group’s founder who is not properly disciplined academically.

Circa August 14, 2024, for the GIGA Society, all claims to the honorary presidency of Dr. Ronald Hoeflin were removed in addition to removal of claims to GIGA Society being founded in 1982.

Circa August, 2024, according to the Mega Society, YoungHoon Bryan Kim was expelled by the Mega Society following a membership vote with 1 vote in defense of YoungHoon Bryan Kim and the rest against him. YoungHoon Bryan Kim then sent an email to the Mega Society as a then-former Mega Society member claiming withdrawal from the Mega Society. As of August 2024, Kim is no longer listed as a member of the Mega Society. Verification can be obtained through official Mega Society channels: https://megasociety.org/#officers. GIGA Society (™) then released a statement claiming YoungHoon Bryan Kim voluntarily resigned from the Mega Society.

YoungHoon Bryan Kim connected Scott Douglas Jacobsen to Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin for a 3-part interview published in In-Sight Publishing’s platform in 2019, and then republished the 3-part interview on the United Sigma Intelligence Association website with Kim’s approval. In total, these extensive views and ideas of Hoeflin were published in comprehensive interviews on the In-Sight Publishing website, United Sigma Intelligence Association website, and in the former USIA Research Journal–this has since been deleted–with Dr. Ronald Hoeflin in 2019/2020. No public allegations against Hoeflin or others were made between 2019 and July, 2024 to views or opinions expressed by Hoeflin. As cited in “On High-Range Test Construction 19: Dr. Ronald K. Hoeflin”:

*Original publication in In-Sight 1, 2, and 3, and republished in the USIA Research Journal (United Sigma Intelligence Association) in 2019/2020 under the leadership of YoungHoon Kim founded by HanKyung Lee, M.D.in2007 as United Sigma Korea and registered in 2023 by YoungHoon Bryan Kim (USIA Website: 1, 2, 3; USIA Research Journal: 1, 2, 3; USIA Blog: 1, 2, 3).*

Circa August, 2024, onwards, the allegations against several people and organizations were made on several organizational and media platforms, referenced in the October, 2024 update and here. Based on available records, the following sequence of events occurred from removing Hoeflin’s name from the GIGA Society (™) website followed by allegations against several people and organizations: Ronald Hoeflin name claim and founder claim removal from GIGA Society (™) website, Mega Society expulsion of YoungHoon Bryan Kim as a member, YoungHoon Bryan Kim’s withdrawal claim letter to Mega Society as a then-former Mega Society member, GIGA Society (™) Medium account article with voluntary resignation claim for YoungHoon Bryan Kim, and then most of the GIGA Society (™) and other organizational-and-outlet allegations.

Circa November 4, 2024, the GIGA Committee members are Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA) YoungHoon Kim, DSc, hc., EdD, hc. (South Korea), Raymond Keene, OBE (UK), Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada), Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA), Simon Olling Rebsdorf, PhD (Denmark), Amit M. Shelat, DO (USA), Dr. M. M. Karindas, MD (Netherlands), Soo-Young Kwon, PhD (South Korea), Masaaki Yamauchi (Japan), and Kathy Kendrick (USA). The GIGA Society™ claimed to be founded by The Brain Trust registered in 1989, as in the following:

As an experimental high-range IQ project, GIGA SocietyTM is an extremely high IQ society for the certified highest IQ people who scored at or above IQ 190 (SD 15) on an acceptable high-range IQ test, in partnership with World Mind Sports Council & World Memory Championships founded by Tony Buzan, the inventor of Mind Maps. GIGA SocietyTM was founded by The Brain Trust registered in 1989 as a nonprofit organization in the United Kingdom.

The only other giga-level society with both the theoretical level and the title “Giga Society” was founded by Paul Cooijmans in 1996. This has been the only claimed founder and founding date of the Giga Society in contrast to the United Giga Society to the GIGA Society (™). Jeff Leonard no longer listed as a member of GIGA Society (™). Christopher Harding, the Founder of the International Society for Philosophical Enquiry, died in August of 2024. Since Harding’s death, he has been listed as a member of the GIGA Society (™). Therefore, after Harding’s passing, his name appeared on the GIGA Society (™) membership list.

Therefore:

  • The first press release and press contact person was Bryan Kim shortly after the registration of the first website in late 2021.
  • The name of the organization since 2021 registration of the website and release of the first press release–referencing the Facebook group page name changes–has been changed several times.
  • The web domain registrations for United Giga Society to GIGA Society–the name changes over time–have beenJuly 7, 2022 for gigasociety.net and September 9, 2021 for https://gigaiqsociety.org.
  • The claimed founders have been “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim,” Masaaki Yamauchi, Ronald Hoeflin, and The Brain Trust of the deceased Tony Buzan, with the original press release and website released in 2021, then claimed founding in 2001 (Esoteriq Society), then claimed founding in 1982 (The Mega Society), then claimed as “founded by The Brain Trust registered in 1989 as a nonprofit organization in the United Kingdom,” respectively.
  • The presidents have been YoungHoon Bryan Kim, Evangelos Katsioulis, and Tom Chittenden.
  • The membership officer has been Masaaki Yamauchi.
  • The vice presidents have been Iakovos Koukas and Masaaki Yamauchi.
  • The administrators have been Iakovos Koukas, Masaaki Yamauchi, YoungHoon Kim, and Nikolaos Soulios.
  • The GIGA Council members have been Mislav Predavec (Croatia), Kirk Raymond Butt (Canada), and YoungHoon Kim (South Korea).
  • The committee members have been Amit M. Shelat, DO (USA), Fabiano de Abreu, PhD (Brazil), Claus D. Volko, MD, MSc (Austria), Eick Sternhagen, DPhil (Germany), Ilia Stambler, PhD (Israel), Ivan Ivec, PhD (Croatia), Kathy Kendrick (USA), Kirk Butt, ThD, PhD (Canada), Manahel Thabet, PhD (KSA), Mark Tabladillo, PhD (USA), Masaaki Yamauchi (Japan), Raymond Keene, OBE (UK), Simon Olling Rebsdorf, PhD (Denmark), Tim Roberts, PhD (Australia), Tom Chittenden, PhD, DPhil, PStat (USA), YoungHoon Kim (South Korea), and Dr. M. M. Karindas, MD (Netherlands).
  • The members have been Iacovos Koukas, YoungHoon Kim, Marios Prodromou, Glenn Alden, Tor Arne Jørgensen, Tomas Perna, Dany Provost, Fengzhi Wu, Tom Chittenden, Evangelos Katsioulis, Rick Rosner, Mislav Predavec, Kirk Butt, Tianxi Yu, Jeff Leonard, and Christopher Harding.
  • The partners have been United Sigma Intelligence Association (USIA), World Memory Championships (HongKong), Global Genius Directory, ESOTERIQ Society, Gifted High IQ Network, Genius High IQ Network, NOUS 200 High IQ Society, 6G High IQ Society, NOUS High IQ Society, 6N High IQ Society, ELITE High IQ Society, 4G High IQ Society, BRAIN High IQ Society, THIS High IQ Society, Opal Quest Group, TENIQ High IQ Network, Global High IQ Society, Canadian High IQ Society, American High IQ Society, Italian High IQ Society, Synapse High IQ Network, ICON High IQ Society, Callidus High IQ Society, Capabilis High IQ Society, Magnus High IQ Society, Egregius High IQ Society, and Profundus High IQ Society, and World Mind Sports Council & World Memory Championships.
  • The GIGA UNION, GIGA Network, or GIGA Foundation, members have been 6G High IQ Society, Esoteriq Society, Evangeliq Society, Generiq Society, Giga Society, Global Genius Registry, Grand Master Society, KIT High Range IQ Test, Nobel Society, Nous 200 Society, Prometheus 2.0, Singularity Society, and United Giga Society.

The variety of allegations on the GIGA Society (™) Medium account were replicated about “Scott Douglas Jacobsen” in a prior version on the United Sigma Intelligence Association YouTube channel: Mark Coeckelberg,  Maria Ho, Ellen Langer, Ian Terry,  Richard Nisbett, Duncan Pritchard, Martin Rees, and Howard Gardner (who gave an extensive assessment of the United Sigma Intelligence Association).

The only listed LinkedIn employee of the United Sigma Intelligence Association is 1 person, YoungHoon Bryan Kim. The only listed LinkedIn employee of the GIGA Society (™) is 1 person, YoungHoon Bryan Kim. YoungHoon Bryan Kim listed having worked at GIGA Society (™) for 2 years and 11 months, and United Sigma Intelligence Association for 5 years. There is only 1 employee listed for each in the 2 years and 11 month span as well as 5 year period of employment, GIGA Society (™) and United Sigma Intelligence Association, respectively. Posts on the GIGA Society (™) Medium account and the United Sigma Intelligence Association YouTube channel have included allegations regarding several individuals and organizations. Noted in the October update, about numerous individuals and organizations:

Ronald Hoeflin (1), the “Mega Society,” (1) “IQ Olympiad,” (1) “South Korean Jeong Kye-won(정계원) called Andrew Zheng or Andrew Jeong,” (1) “another giga-level group” and here, (1, 2) and “Scott Douglas Jacobsen.” (1)

Most of these were posted during and after August, 2024. One related to “Scott Douglas Jacobsen” stated “Aubrey de Grey” into it. The name, “Aubrey de Grey,” has been removed, while the allegation of “sex offender” remains there. (1) The Aubrey de Grey interview by Ian Bott for United Sigma Intelligence Association was online for several years until August, 2024, then moved to a private video or removed from the United Sigma Intelligence Association Channel, and then the allegations by GIGA Society (™) against Aubrey de Grey were made. The longest consistent allegation since founding as United Giga Society in 2021 by “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” was in the press release by “Bryan Kim” and against ‘another giga-level group.’ Similar statements were published on various platforms, including www.iqsingularity.com extensively, United Sigma Intelligence Association main site, the www.geni.com article entitled “Highest IQ 276 Ever Recorded in the World in 2024,” the vocal.media article entitled “Highest IQ 276 Ever Recorded in the World 2024,” the USIA YouTube channel more extensively, https://www.202society.org/ website extensively, and numerous other places, even in YoungHoon Bryan Kim’s Instagram account claiming more fully on August 28, 2024:

The founder of Mega Society, Dr. Ronald Hoeflin founded the cryptocurrency coin company IQ Olympiad (Foundation) together with South Korean Jeong Kye-won(정계원) called Andrew Zheng or Andrew Jeong.

They are illegally stealing the intellectual property of YoungHoon Kim and YoungHoon Kim’s United Sigma Intelligence Association(USIA). YoungHoon Kim and his organization USIA are not affiliated with IQ Olympiad in any way.

For these reasons and Mega Society’s support for sex offender and extreme racism with eugenics, YoungHoon Kim voluntarily resigned from the Mega Society in August 2024.

GIGA Society (™) Medium account (12 followers at present) articles relate mostly about claims about or issues relating to YoungHoon Bryan Kim. These articles include “Introduction to GIGA Society™,” “What is High Range IQ Test?,” “GIGA MEMBERS,” “IQ Olympiad & Mega Society,” “World’s Highest IQ 276 Ever Recorded in History,” “GIGA Society™ Members,” “Global Genius Registry | World’s Highest IQ People,” “Top 10 People Alive with the World’s Highest IQ Ever Recorded,” “NANO Society, Founded by Dr. Ivan Ivec,” “Dr. YoungHoon Kim voluntarily resigned from the Mega Society,” “Official World Record® Holder for The World’s Highest IQ,” “Warning for Spreading False Information – GIGA Society™,” and “Dr. YoungHoon Kim, Wikipedia, World’s Highest IQ 276 Record in History.”

All community posts on the GIGA Society YouTube channel relate only to YoungHoon Bryan Kim. All posts on the GIGA Society Instagram page relate only to YoungHoon Bryan Kim. These reflect content and posts on the Instagram page for YoungHoon Bryan Kim.

Circa June 28, 2024, following the release of the press release by ABSNewswire entitled “GIGA SOCIETY, THE WORLD’S MOST EXCLUSIVE HIGH I.Q. SOCIETY” (October 1, 2021) with contact person “Bryan Kim” for United Giga Society claiming Founder “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim” and President “YoungHoon Bryan Kim,” GIGA Society (™) published “Top 10 People Alive with the World’s Highest IQ Ever Recorded” (May 27, 2024) in its Medium account and EINPresswire released a press release entitled “GIGA Society Announces List of People with Highest IQ in the World in 2024.” The EINPresswire press release said, “Note: This article was written in collaboration with the GIGA Society.” Of YoungHoon Bryan Kim, it stated:

As of 2024, the highest recorded IQ score belongs to YoungHoon Kim from South Korea, with an IQ of 276. This score is verified by multiple organizations, including the Korea Record Institute, World Genius Directory, Global Genius Registry, Esoteriq Society, and GIGA Society. YoungHoon Kim’s exceptional intelligence is recognized globally, and he holds memberships in several extremely high-IQ societies such as the Giga Society and the Mega Society which was the only one listed in the Guinness World Records in history. 

His achievements span various fields, including psychology, neuroscience, and linguistics. Serving as an intelligence specialist advisor at the World Mind Sports Council and World Memory Championships, YoungHoon Kim founded an organization, the United Sigma Intelligence Association for the world’s brightest minds, which includes seven Nobel Prize winners. From his organization, the greatest minds in the world such as Noam Chomsky, Yuval Harari, Richard Dawkins, Howard Gardner, Neil deGrasse Tyson, and Terence Tao have received official awards with the winners’ consent.

This content was picked up by several publications and repeated.

From July 16, 2021, to November 10, 2024, these amount to many of the evolutions since the origin of United Giga Society’s instantiations, with the press release and first website registration as United Giga Society, to United Giga Society (USIA), UNITED GIGA SOCIETY (USIA), UNITED GIGA SOCIETY, GIGA SOCIETY 190, and GIGA Society Official described on Facebook, and then to the current GIGA Society (), as documented above.]

[Update November 17, 2024: Based on further investigation, Paul Cooijmans, Founder of the Giga Society and the Glia Society, expelled YoungHoon Bryan Kim from the Glia Society around the time of “United Giga Society” as a high-I.Q. society name use, as investigated in the November 10, 2024 update. (United Giga Society transitioned over many iterations into GIGA Society.) This reflects the expulsion of Kim from the Mega Society in August of 2024. Verification can be obtained through official Mega Society contact channels, https://megasociety.org/#officers, and official Glia Society & Giga Society contact channels, https://paulcooijmans.com/contact.html, for each case.

Circa Spring, 2020, I resigned from the United Sigma Intelligence Association (USIA) as its executive director and its main editor. My direct editorial successor was one of the main founding figures of the Intelligent Design creationism movement, Dr. William Dembski, particularly known for work on Specified Complexity, and in the International Society for Complexity, Information, and Design (ISCID) (of which Mr. Christopher Michael Langan was among its select ISCID Fellows) and its flagship Intelligent Design creationism journal. Other editorial replacements included other members of the Mega Foundation community. Both ISCID and PCID are defunct now. At the time, I served as Secretary-General of Young Humanists International as well, as the youth branch of Humanists International. Upon resignation from USIA, the United Sigma Intelligence Association with no humanist history and led by a Christian President, YoungHoon Bryan Kim–who eventually in 2023 intended on becoming a Christian pastor and Christian evangelist as someone in ‘the pastor candidate course at Hanshin University Graduate School of Theology directly managed by the Korean Presbyterian Association,’ applied to become a member organization of the same non-religious global secular humanist institution, Humanists International. United Sigma Intelligence Association’s organizational membership was rejected. They began hiring, at least, one long-term friend and colleague, Angeleos Sofocleous too. Later, Sofocleous no longer works for USIA.

Furthermore, there was no contact, or minimal contact in terse response, with YoungHoon Bryan Kim since the resignation in Spring, 2020. However, for about three years after resignation, I received emails from YoungHoon Bryan Kim with various content. The varied content included offers for work as head editor again, wanting to restore our relationship, asking for my forgiveness, claiming admiration for my passionate activities, the difficult in finding someone who is as enthusiastic as me about these activities, promises to treat me well as a humanist, claiming to be no longer hostile or aggressive to others, claiming to have matured, someone (Kim) who wants to be friends with wide ranges of communities as someone founding various communities, offers to allow me to write new articles, information about new projects including leading IQ Olympiad, offers to work on anything, to be operating the Nobel SocietyPrometheus 2.0Grand Master Societynew GIGA Society, and USIA, and creating admissions tests for them, claiming to make a list of high range IQ tests with Mislav Predavec and Kirk Butt, that he’s working with Claus Volko and Anja Jaenicke to publish the journals for those societies, claiming to be willing to do anything with me and whatever I suggest, that it would be an honour to work with me once again, and links to claims as a Fellow of the World Genius Directory (12) with the articles claiming Kim’s membership in the Mega Society and in United Giga Society, etc. Communication was instigated one-way from YoungHoon Bryan Kim to me, over the course of about three years, since my resignation in the Spring, 2020.

YoungHoon Bryan Kim claimed a reason for my resignation from USIA in relation to the Mega Foundation’s Dr. Gina Langan and Mr. Christopher Michael Langan in a letter to the Mega Society in the Summer of 2024. Verification can be obtained through official Mega Society contact channels, https://megasociety.org/#officers. In addition, the United Sigma Intelligence Association former partner, Mega Foundation, maintained a post from April 18, 2020, for several years, with some content asserting a claim for the reason for my resignation from USIA, reinforced by Mr. Langan in the post’s comments section claiming the same using personal attacks or ad hominem, “Little Scott Jacobsen is the idiot who resigned as ‘chief editor’ of the USIA journal in protest over the partnership.” I never gave the reason(s) for formal resignation from the United Sigma Intelligence Association. Therefore, neither YoungHoon Bryan Kim, the USIA, Mr. Christopher Michael Langan, Dr. Gina Langan, nor Mega Foundation, were privy to this information, and so could not know this real reason or the real reasons for resignation from USIA, though presented claims up to over four years later. I never appointed any fellows, nor do I identify as a militant atheist. Fellows were solely finalized in appointment by the then-President and current President of the United Sigma Intelligence Association, YoungHoon Bryan Kim.

Circa 2024, further inquiries revealed, Tianxi Yu resigned from GIGA Society, formerly United Giga Society founded by “YounHoon [sic] Bryan Kim,” and requested removal of his name from the GIGA Society, website. He gave commentary about his experience in a post on Zhihu, as translated by ChatGPT:

“I’m honestly shocked—I thought I’d gone “diving” (laying low), but a friend just told me I got “called out.” Well, since I’ve got some complaints about the whole GIGA Society thing too, let’s get into it.

I was one of the first to join Younghoon Kim’s GIGA Society. No idea how YK did it, scoring over 200 and convincing Evangelos Katsioulis to endorse the “legitimacy” of his GIGA Society. Back then, YK took over this whole GIGA scene and invited me to join. I thought, “Well, why not?”—it was free and gave me some “status.”

But the more I learned about the high-IQ community abroad, the more it all just started to feel like a joke. Besides YK, there’s also Iakovos Koukas, both scoring high on verbal tests. When I found that out, I had a massive “WTF” moment. Like, how do they even dare to use those super-easy verbal tests as their IQ scores? Anyone who knows the field understands that numbers and spatial problems are generally respected because they show real depth of thinking, but verbal tests? Realistically, verbal test scales don’t go as high as numbers and spatial tests because they just don’t measure as much. But these guys abroad? They treat it like it’s the real deal.

I’ve actually chatted with IK a few times. My takeaway? He’s not exactly impressive. He doesn’t speak with conviction, and his thinking lacks edge. But IK’s sneaky—he’ll say stuff like, “I don’t really care about IQ,” but then acts like, “I’m the smartest one around.” And the worst part? People actually buy it. YK, though, is one of the most shameless idiots I’ve ever met. Not only does he use crappy test scores, but he also goes around bragging he’s got an IQ of 276 (using SD24, no less), claiming he’s the smartest person alive (gigasociety.net/worlds-…). To sell this image, he even promotes it on YouTube and has entries about it on Medium, Wikipedia, and LinkedIn. Honestly, it’s wild. I’ve never seen someone so shameless—are all Koreans like this?

I didn’t talk with YK much, but when I first joined GIGA, he buttered me up, calling me the “smartest person he knew.” No clue how many times he’s used that line—Scott Jacobsen told me YK said the same to him. I glanced at his KIT series of problems, and let’s just say they’re awful. The scale doesn’t match what I’d expect; I even wonder if he’s ever taken a legitimate test. But YK’s managed to get support from a lot of people in the international high-IQ circles—besides EK and IK, there’s Mislav Predavec, Kirk Butt, and others backing him.

All of this has made me lose interest, so I’ve basically quit all the international societies. I left GIGA ages ago, and after getting called out today, I emailed them to remove my name from their member list. These people are just a bunch of scammers propping each other up, and being listed as a member makes me feel like an accomplice. Historically, the three most recognized societies with IQ cutoffs above 190 were GIGA Society, Nano Society, and Esoteriq Society. I used to be a member of all three, but now I’m only keeping my membership in Ivan Ivec’s Nano Society, which currently has six members worldwide. Some might ask, “What about Esoteriq Society?” Well, that got taken over by YK too—Masaaki Yamauchi got overrun by him. I’d already emailed Esoteriq Society ages ago to quit, but no one replied, so my name’s still there.

As of now, the only person in China who’s joined Paul Cooijmans’ official GIGA Society is Wu Meiheng. He got a perfect score on PC’s Alchemist test with an IQ of 196, which is seriously impressive. I also thought about scoring on PC’s tests, but our compatibility is so bad I got my lowest score ever.

Nowadays, the international high-IQ circles are full of people just hyping themselves up and chatting all day like they’re nuclear-powered mules, never taking a break. I’d suggest taking a page out of Jonathan Wai’s book—while he may not be the most meticulous grader, the man really puts in the work. Google Scholar shows he’s been cited 5,746 times, with his top paper cited 2,461 times. In 2024 alone, he’s published ten papers, mostly as the first or corresponding author—a true academic heavyweight. Since subscribing to his profile, I’m constantly getting Google Scholar Alerts for “Jonathan Wai – new article.” Then I look at the crap I’ve produced and my pitiful citations, and I’m just stunned.”

Tianxi Yu no longer listed on the GIGA Society website as a member based on request for resignation from GIGA Society and removal of his name from the GIGA Society website, including quitting the Facebook group earlier.]

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Alan Goffinski, Composition and ‘Terrestrials’

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/30

 Alan Goffinski is a producer, sound designer, and storyteller, currently a producer and music director for Terrestrials, a Radiolab for Kids podcast. With experience at WNYC, BBC, and more, Alan has earned multiple awards, including 2 Black Podcasting Awards and a Webby. A former touring musician, he co-founded Know No Stranger, an arts collective blending creativity with community. Alan’s diverse talents extend to gardening, fire-breathing, and bicycling, and he served as Executive Director for a community arts nonprofit in Charlottesville, Virginia. He continues to freelance in sound design and music composition. Goffinski talks about his role in Terrestrials, focusing on creating music that engages both kids and adults. Goffinski emphasizes the importance of authentic musical choices, avoiding condescension, and exploring varied genres. They discuss themes like recursive islands and treasure hunts, using music to enhance storytelling and foster emotional connections with listeners.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Alan Goffinski. First question: What is a songbud? I need to familiarize myself with the term. 

Alan Goffinski: Honestly, it’s not a name that I gave myself. It’s a name that Lulu Miller, the show’s writer, assigned me. In addition to producing episodes of Terrestrials, my role is to create music, write music, and play it to move the story along, add depth or context, or emphasize a scientific idea or point. You can think of my or this character’s role as a musical sidekick in the program.

Jacobsen: I listened to some of the performers, including a guest named Tasha. I enjoyed her music and listened to some of it before the interview. How did she get connected to the show? How do these artists get connected to the show? Do you search for them, or does another representative find them and ask, “What do you think?”

Goffinski: Yeah, we have a great lineup of musical cameos this season, with Tasha being the first you mentioned. She just released a new album on Bayonet Records. She recently finished a stint on Broadway in the Sufjan Stevens musical. All the cameos featured this season are from artists our team respects and is excited about incorporating into our work. We like to have fun with what we do. In the vein of Yo-Yo Ma on Sesame Street, we figured that including some Easter eggs for adults in the episodes would make the show more enjoyable for everyone, including ourselves. All of these connections are ones I’ve made through music or by reaching out because I was interested in a possible collaboration.

Jacobsen: Now, we have NASA scientists, poets, painters, even ethnologists coming on. It’s a science-oriented presentation. So, how do you characterize music and composition when thinking about scientific topics? Are you in a particular state of mind, rather than Jay-Z giving props to Tom Ford or rapping about New York? When approaching scientific and educational topics, are you asking about the process or the aesthetic choices around composition?

Goffinski: Many of these songs start as a group effort with the whole team. We have an excellent, dynamic team. We’re all friends who love to work together and collaborate. That might be our secret weapon—pitch meetings and brainstorming sessions are creative lightning, generating many fantastic ideas. You’ll notice in the show that we don’t write “kiddie music.” We try not to write down to kids. Instead, we invite them into varied musical genres and styles. This approach is partly because we want to create a family-friendly show everyone can enjoy. We also believe kids feel more valued and appreciated when they hear content that doesn’t talk down to them.

Jacobsen: So, that leads to the question: What does that mean in practical terms, in terms of aesthetic choice? How do you ensure the type of the music doesn’t stay the same while inviting kids into a wider range of musical styles? Because that’s a very interesting point that I hadn’t considered—you’re creating a family-friendly podcast for the whole family rather than just for kids. Some cartoons are strictly for children, with no inside jokes for adults or anything like that.

Goffinski: Yeah, we try not to do that. As much as we’d love to have a global hit like Baby Shark, we’re not trying to create something that annoys parents and makes them want to turn it off. We want the program to be one that people keep coming back to. So, we write songs that can be very emotional or fun, depending on the moment in the episode where the song appears. If we need a musical stinger to transition from one part of the show to the next or emphasize a point, that could be fun and playful. But we’re aiming for a big moment at the end of an episode, where we want kids to connect with the storyteller meaningfully or see themselves in the creature or character we’re focusing on. In that case, we are open to writing something more emotionally resonant. Does that answer your question?

Jacobsen: It helps a bit, but let me ask from a different angle. What are the guiding principles when it comes to musical selection? When people think of kids’ movies, they often have certain expectations, like a PG rating, which influences sound, visual effects, and storyline choices to stay within those boundaries. Are there specific choices you’re making to reflect family values and to create something enjoyable for families? Then are certain musical genres more appropriate for a family environment? Does that factor into your process?

Goffinski: Yes, I understand what you’re asking. Nothing is necessarily off-limits. When I write a song for kids in any genre, I aim to do it authentically. I want to honour the genre’s history and style, not create a caricature. We want it to be truly soulful if it’s a soul song. If it’s a punk song, we want it to feel like real punk. We want the music to have an impact and to resonate with listeners. We choose to include a punk or metal song in an episode. In that case, genre best serves that particular moment in the story. One thing I appreciate about working on this show with this team is that we don’t limit ourselves regarding musical style. We focus on what best fits the story we’re telling.

And I’m writing a different song repeatedly. It’s not all baby music. It’s not all childish. Yes, it’s for kids, but it’s also for us. We make the show and want to love and be proud of it. So, we put everything we’ve got into the songs we write. None of them are throwaways. 

Jacobsen: There was one particular episode, “The Bull’s Eye,” about treasure hunts and recursive islands. So, when you’re presenting on Treasure Hunt and Recursive Islands, what does it involve? Is it like an island on a lake, an island on a lake on an island, and so on? I recall a family member mentioning something like this during a camping trip discussion, which was very confusing. So, when you’re thinking about this concept—this idea of a lake on an island on a lake on an island—how do you approach that as a composer? How do you build that into your musical structure?

Goffinski: I’m excited about this one because it was my pitch, and I produced the episode. It allowed me to incorporate music and singing more deliberately and intricately, embedding them within the narrative. Using stacked harmonies and pitch, I was able to illustrate this idea of “stacking”—this nesting effect that happens with the geographic phenomenon of the island within a lake.

I know this can be hard to describe in words, but by stacking these harmonies—using higher voices to represent the tiny island in the center, then building out to the lake, the next island, the next lake, and so on, to the ocean—you end up with this layered, bull’s-eye sound. It’s like a rippling auditory experience that mirrors the concept of a recursive island. It’s satisfying. We use this musical device throughout the episode to help listeners grasp this somewhat confusing and abstract concept, framing it as a treasure hunt.

Jacobsen: That’s interesting—it makes me think of a quest. Is there a way to weave that theme into the musical structure so that listeners almost feel like they’re following a path or hunting for something? Is it possible to create that feeling through the music beyond just using stacked harmonies to replicate what’s happening visually in the landscape? It could even be as playful as Monty Python on their fake horses in The Holy Grail when they’re on a quest and run into the Frenchman or the man with three heads who wants little potted plants. 

Goffinski: That concept is captured in the episode’s closing song. We wanted to convey the idea that there’s excitement in the search, in keeping your eyes open and being willing to look at the world in new ways. So, I wrote a very upbeat, driving song that gives a sense of movement—like you’re travelling, moving forward in life, searching for a goal or pursuing something exciting or meaningful.

The song I’m referring to features a Nashville harpist named Timbre. She’s a fantastic musician who adds a delicate yet driving countermelody to the composition. This ties together the overlapping vocal lines and the unique time signature in a beautiful way, balancing the tension of the search with the joy of it and the joy of pursuing knowledge—or, in this case, the pursuit of a hobby or even a small, undiscovered patch of earth.

Jacobsen: What else is important for listeners to understand about using a wide range of musical genres and tuning them to the themes of these episodes centred on education and science?

Goffinski: I always come back to this idea of not talking down to kids. I will not teach them down but invite them into big ideas and conversations. In the same way that we use complex words in the podcast or invite kids along on emotional journeys—like those dealing with grief or loss—the musical compositions can do the same. They can bring kids along and invite them to explore a deeper sense of their own emotions. This way, they feel better equipped to carry what they learn from the podcast into their day-to-day lives—maybe they can exhibit more empathy, find more joy, or keep an open mind when encountering new ideas.

With that musical connection and a song that sticks in their heads, I’d like to think that kids and listeners of all ages can hold onto that experience. Hopefully, they carry it more firmly and deeply in their hearts and emotions.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Alan, thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it. All good?

Goffinski: We’re good, man.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Brian Quigley on New Nicotine Replacement Therapy Technologies

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/30

Qnovia received FDA clearance for its Investigational New Drug (IND) application for RespiRx™ Nicotine Inhaler (QN-01), an innovative nicotine replacement therapy (NRT). A Phase 1 trial will assess its safety and effectiveness. CEO Brian Quigley highlights its potential to revolutionize smoking cessation and other treatments. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by Brian Quigley, CEO of Qnovia, to discuss the RespiRx nicotine inhaler, also known as QN-01. With FDA clearance now obtained and clinical trials on the horizon, what inspired the development of this particular technology? Could you walk us through that process? Is this the only product the company offers?

Brian Quigley: Great! I’m excited to be speaking with you today. Qnovia is a company focused on developing a portfolio of inhaled therapeutics across various therapeutic areas. We are based in Richmond, Virginia. The core inspiration for our work stems from the technology behind what I’m holding right now—our device, the RespiRx. It is a handheld, portable nebulizer with a drug-filled cartridge. Nebulization has been used to safely deliver medicines via inhalation for decades.

We chose to focus on smoking cessation as our initial area of emphasis. On a personal note, my father was a lifelong smoker. He smoked for 50 years and tried to quit every year, using every combination of available therapies, but he was never able to successfully stop. The troubling reality is that millions of smokers are in the same situation. In the U.S., for example, there are approximately 28 million smokers, and more than half try to quit each year. Yet, the most common method they use is quitting cold turkey.

Why is that? Because the medications available to help them quit are outdated—most are over 20 years old. There has been little innovation in developing new treatments to help smokers quit, and the available options are largely ineffective. Our device aims to change that. RespiRx is a nicotine replacement therapy that delivers nicotine in an aerosol, allowing it to be inhaled into the lungs. This offers real advantages in terms of the speed and dosage of nicotine delivered, helping to alleviate cravings and withdrawal symptoms that smokers experience when attempting to quit. That’s a bit about the inspiration and the core technology behind what we’re doing.

Jacobsen: When going through FDA trials, people often wonder: How long do they take? How rigorous are they? What is the rejection or rerouting rate for new products?

Quigley: One positive aspect is that the public can trust that regulators ensure the safety and efficacy of the medicines that reach them. That’s the good news.

The challenge for a small company, however, is the significant time and financial investment required to meet the two critical thresholds for regulatory approval: safety and efficacy. At Qnovia, opening the IND (Investigational New Drug) application with the FDA means they have reviewed our initial safety data, as well as our device data on performance, controls, and compliance, and have deemed it safe to proceed with human clinical trials. However, there are three phases of clinical trials that need to be completed with the FDA.

Phase 1 focuses on demonstrating safety, tolerability, and getting a preliminary understanding of drug delivery in the body. That’s what we’ll be completing in our Phase 1 study. Phase 2 will involve approximately 100 subjects and will examine different dosing regimens and usage patterns to assess both tolerability and efficacy. Finally, the Phase 3 pivotal efficacy study generates the data that will be submitted as part of our New Drug Application (NDA) for FDA approval. In total, this process represents about four years of work and tens of millions of dollars invested in bringing the drug to market.

What’s interesting is that we’re advancing this technology in both the U.S. and the U.K. We’re doing this because the U.K. has a different mindset regarding how to demonstrate safety and efficacy for new smoking cessation medicines. They’ve created a pathway that, while not fast, cheap, or simple, is more streamlined and has clinical requirements that are easier for us to fund and execute. It takes less time and money compared to the U.S. However, our approach with any regulator we engage with is to address what they want to see, and our goal is to generate that data to ultimately get approved. That’s how we help save lives at the end of the day. So, in the U.S., we still have a lot of work to do. But the fact that we’re the first truly inhaled smoking cessation medicine to enter clinical trials is an important milestone.

We’ve already generated our first “first-in-human” data outside of the U.S., which gives us confidence in what our Phase 1 study will demonstrate. We are committed to continuing down this path to get this technology into the hands of smokers who want to quit.

Jacobsen: Would you consider the biggest hurdles to be in advancing this type of technology? As you mentioned, it’s been a long time since there was an update in this area, and smokers, who represent one of the largest groups struggling with addiction, are significantly impacted.

Quigley: The biggest hurdle lies in how regulators define efficacy. When it comes to drug development, the most common question I get asked is: “What endpoint do we need to show to get regulatory approval?” For smoking cessation, the endpoint is to use the medicine for 12 weeks as part of a step-down therapy. The FDA wants to see not only complete abstinence during those 12 weeks but also for 52 weeks after stopping the medication.

When you think about complete abstinence from addiction over 52 weeks, it’s incredibly difficult to achieve. Quitting smoking is extremely hard. If a person relapses, even with just one cigarette, it counts against us in demonstrating efficacy, and that’s a high bar. It’s achievable, but it is a very high standard.

What’s also interesting is that last year, the FDA published guidance to drive innovation in treating stimulant use disorders, such as methamphetamine and cocaine addiction. In that guidance, they proposed endpoints, including a reduction in the number of days someone uses these substances as a measure of progress from a public health perspective. When you compare this to the requirements for demonstrating efficacy in smoking cessation, there seems to be a bit of a disconnect.

The status quo for smoking cessation medicine is that someone out there today is smoking 20 cigarettes—the deadliest consumer product ever made. That presents a significant opportunity. In fact, the FDA is having a public hearing on October 21st, and there I will be sharing my views to contribute to the conversation about what else can be done to promote innovation in cessation medicine. That’s a real example of some of the challenges we’re facing.

Again, our view is that we’ll do the work. We’re a venture-backed company, so we’ll raise the capital and fund the necessary studies. However, when comparing the U.S. clinical pathway to the U.K. pathway, the reality is that, despite being a U.S.-based company, this product will likely be approved and available to help smokers quit in the U.K. years ahead of when it will be approved in the U.S.

Jacobsen: Earlier in the interview, you mentioned being a smaller company, which can be a big hurdle in itself, especially financially, compared to larger companies when going through the FDA approval process, from safety to efficacy. How significant is that barrier for smaller companies?

Quigley: It’s a double-edged sword, honestly. The strength we have is that we’re nimble. We move quickly and don’t have a big bureaucracy to navigate. A big part of being effective in this space is constantly learning, generating new data, and adapting. From that standpoint, being a smaller company is actually an advantage.

That said, we have only five employees at Qnovia. We rely heavily on external resources, advisors, and consultants to help guide us when and where we need support. So, bandwidth is definitely a challenge for a small company like ours, as there’s only so much we can do at any one time. The good news is that will change. We plan to bring more people on board and expand the team, but it’s still a double-edged sword.

Jacobsen: How do you make a compelling pitch to venture capitalists to say, “I have a good product, please invest in me”?

Quigley: That’s a great question. The key to winning over venture capitalists is data. The way they evaluate any drug development opportunity is by looking at the potential patient population and assessing the risk. They want to see data you’ve generated, where you are in the regulatory process, and how much validation you’ve achieved. The more data and validation, the lower the risk and the higher the likelihood that you’ll actually get your medicine into the hands of the people who need it.

What’s interesting, and this is a challenge specific to smoking cessation, is that many people I talk to ask, “If this could have been solved, wouldn’t it have been solved already?” So, there’s sometimes a perception that it’s an old problem and, while it’s still an issue, people wonder if it’s really worthwhile to invest in it. Then they compare it to what’s trendy, like GLP-1 drugs.

Everyone wants to have the next Ozempic, and some people think we should put our money there. So, oftentimes, we find ourselves speaking truth to a massive need, but we’re fighting against what’s trendy from an investor’s perspective. The good news is that we have a strong and committed base of investors who have backed this company because they believe in the importance of ending the death and disease caused by combustible cigarette use. If you buy into that mission, then you invest in our company.

I liken investing to being an actor. You have to go to 100 casting calls to find the right director who believes in you. But they are out there, and that’s how we’ve been able to get to this point and how we’ll continue to move forward.

Jacobsen: What would you consider the strongest critique of the company and the product?

Quigley: One of the challenges or critiques we hear frequently is around the confusion created by reduced-risk tobacco products, such as e-cigarettes. People often ask, “How do we compete with e-cigarettes and other reduced-risk products? And why do we even need new medicine? Shouldn’t those be the answer?”

My response is that it’s a nuanced view, but my strong belief is that we’re different. Smokers, when they become health-conscious, need multiple options. Some may say, “I’m not ready to quit, but I don’t want to die,” and that’s where reduced-risk products like e-cigarettes play an important role. We don’t compete with that—it’s a different need state. However, without a doubt, there are millions of smokers who ultimately say, “I want to stop. I no longer want to be addicted, and I can’t do it.” They’ve tried every product, but they keep going back to cigarettes, and their goal is to fully quit. That’s where we come in.

There are a lot of interesting dynamics in this space, but the development of new medicines—true medicines—has been left behind and somewhat lost in the noise. We’re not here to compete with reduced-risk products. We’re a drug company, while those products come from tobacco companies. We’re doing something different. If the public health vision of a future without cigarette use is to become a reality, then there will need to be a variety of products, including cessation medicines, to make that happen.

Jacobsen: Why will this technology reach the U.K. market so much faster than the U.S. market?

Quigley: It all comes down to the clinical endpoints. In the U.K., they’ve taken a more progressive approach to promoting innovation in smoking cessation medicine. They were one of the first countries to publicly support the role that e-cigarettes could play in helping smokers quit.

The guidance they’ve created is designed to help companies like ours, as well as e-cigarette companies, pursue medicinal licensing in the U.K. to help people quit smoking. Ultimately, their clinical requirements are different. Where in the U.S. we have to go through Phase 1, Phase 2, and Phase 3 trials, in the U.K., there’s a single clinical study to be executed. The goal of that study is to demonstrate that the nicotine we’re delivering is lower than what’s delivered by a cigarette. The MHRA (Medicines and Healthcare products Regulatory Agency) has made the broad assumption that less nicotine than a cigarette means it’s safer, given that millions of people are smoking cigarettes today. So, by delivering less nicotine, we’re not introducing any new harm to society.

Efficacy, in this case, is defined by the relative increase in nicotine delivery compared to existing nicotine replacement therapies. The U.K. has taken a broader view of the public health need, simplifying the clinical studies required to get to market. That’s the biggest difference between the two regulatory pathways.

Jacobsen: What about accessibility in terms of personal finance? In the U.K., there’s a societal emphasis on equity in healthcare, while in the U.S., the focus is more on autonomy and privatized healthcare. With those different values and preferences, how do outcomes, provisions, access to healthcare systems, and available technologies change at the individual level? How does it affect consumers who want access to your product?

Quigley: That’s a great question. I would expect there to be some differences in how the product is tailored to fit the user population, considering preferences, the healthcare environment, and the perspectives of healthcare providers and stakeholders in the U.K. versus the U.S. I’ll give you an example: the NHS.

The National Health Service (NHS) in the U.K. has a robust infrastructure for stop-smoking treatments. In some of our early conversations with individuals from the NHS, they viewed this product as a step-down therapy. This means you start at a certain nicotine level, and the device controls how much nicotine you receive, gradually stepping down over time to help you fully quit.

The NHS highlighted an important consideration: one of the primary intervention points in the U.K. healthcare system for smokers is admission to a mental health facility. For example, if someone is admitted to a mental health facility, part of their treatment may include helping them stop smoking. Their concern was that stepping down too quickly could cause harm to a person in such a vulnerable state. Therefore, they expressed the need for more flexibility in how the medicine is delivered to different patient populations.

In the U.K., I can envision the device and its programmatic use as a medicine being more flexible, aligned with the feedback we receive from stakeholders in the public health system. This flexibility would be an important part of ensuring the product meets the needs of diverse patients, especially in settings like mental health facilities. That’s a big part of the work ahead.

The healthcare system and how patients interact with their healthcare providers are different between countries. For example, in the U.K., they’ve created a stop-smoking service program that runs through pharmacies. If I want to quit smoking, I can go to my pharmacy, where my pharmacist is trained to provide behavioral support and counseling for smoking cessation. If I meet with my pharmacist every week, I can get my medicine at no cost and receive that behavioral support, which is crucial for quitting. So, our medicine and its use must be designed and purpose-fit for how practitioners will engage with patients.

That’s a long way of saying that we are ultimately guided by what the patient population and healthcare environment look like in each geography. That informs what we need to do differently with the device.

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today.

Quigley: No worries! It was great chatting with you. I appreciate it. It was great chatting with you. Great questions, by the way.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Carl Allen and Rick Rosner on Polls in America

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/29

Carl Allen discusses correcting misunderstandings about polling, particularly the common belief that polls predict election outcomes. Allen highlights that polls are snapshots of current opinion, not forecasts, and that even experts often misinterpret them. He compares polling to theoretical ideal gases, emphasizing that no poll is perfect, even in optimal conditions. While there’s “no such thing” as an ideal poll, there’s also no such thing as an ideal gas: but the “ideal” framework allows for a set of standards any poll, even nonideal ones, can be compared to. Currently, many people are shocked to find, that analysts in different countries use different, contradictory standards based on nothing more than their country’s tradition. Because polls are currently so poorly understood, Allen has drawn upon easily understood examples and analogies that are technical enough to satisfy any expert, but not too technical for the average reader. The book addresses issues like misinterpreting poll margins, the role of undecided voters, and how even well-conducted polls can be misused by media and analysts. Allen advocates for more transparent methodologies and scientific rigor in polling analysis. 

Rick G. Rosner is known for high scores on various high-range tests. He earned 12 years of college credit in under a year and graduated with the equivalent of eight majors. Rosner has written for popular shows like Crank Yankers and Jimmy Kimmel Live! and won a Writers Guild Award. He’s also worked as a bouncer, stripper, and roller-skating waiter. Featured in Errol Morris’s First Person, Rosner lost on Jeopardy! and famously sued Who Wants to Be a Millionaire. He lives in Los Angeles with his wife and two dogs.

Carl Allen is the author of The Polls Weren’t Wrong and the owner of Triple Digit Speed Pitch, LLC. With a background in sports and political data, he has created new polling metrics and previously worked as a data scout for MLB and NFL. Allen holds a Master’s degree in Sport and Fitness Administration from the University of Louisville and is bilingual in English and Spanish. He is also a  passionate advocate for statistical literacy in polling analysis and science as a whole

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with ‘RealRickRosner’ and ‘RealCarlAllen’ to talk about polls, particularly a new book by Carl. The new book’s title is The Polls Weren’t Wrong, by Carl Allen. Thank you very much. Let’s take a step back. Carl, what was your original motivation for writing this particular book?

Carl Allen: I saw so much unscientific, poor analysis being done—not just in the media, but at the very top of the field. Often, when we have a complex concept that only scientists understand, the media breaks it down in a way that makes you cringe a little. It doesn’t make sense.

Polling data is unique at this point in the field. It’s been around for nearly 100 years in political polling. However, the problems with how the media discusses polls—the same misunderstandings—exist at the very top of the field. I always tell people why my book came out in 2024 and not 2020 because I couldn’t convince myself that people with the credentials—the experts in the field—didn’t understand some of these basic concepts. One of the most basic concepts is that polls are not predictions.

Polls are not predictions of election outcomes. When I say that, some people nod, saying, “Yes, that makes sense.” Others are extremely skeptical of the idea that experts—those who publish and write academic articles and books—don’t understand that. So, I had to show that they believe an accurate poll will predict an election outcome. That is a fundamental misunderstanding of what polls do and the data a poll provides.

I approached this not as a scientist or statistician but as a researcher and educator. The purpose of the book, in short, is twofold. First, it is to inform the public. Right now, the public needs to be more informed about how polls work, and that’s a problem.

Second, and slightly harder but arguably more important in the short term, is to fix how experts analyze polls. If experts change how they interpret and explain polls, the media will follow, and the public will be better informed. But right now, misinformation runs throughout. One of the main points of Carl’s book is that you can have excellent poll results. Still, the media and even high-level analysts can misinterpret the results.

Rick Rosner: And I have a lot of other gripes because most polls aren’t perfect.

Allen: No poll is perfect. There’s no such thing as a perfect poll. But as scientists, one way we explain things to beginners is to ask, “If this measurement were perfect in every way, what would it show us?” One example I use in the book is ideal gases.

If you’ve taken a chemistry class, you might remember ideal gases: P.V. equals nRT, volume, and temperature, all of which you must account for. But the secret about ideal gases is that they aren’t real. It’s not a real phenomenon. It’s something that educators and scientists created to explain a much more complex concept. Political polls, however, are easier to understand than thermodynamics.

While theoretical ideal polls and ideal gases are easier to comprehend, ideal polls are much easier to grasp. In my first presentation to the reader, I demonstrate what an ideal poll measures and show that even if a poll is conducted perfectly in every possible way, it would still result in imperfect data—an imperfect estimate. This understanding is crucial: even an ideal poll can be imperfect.

We shouldn’t have higher expectations for real-world, non-ideal polls than ideal ones. 

Rosner: Can I give you some real-world examples? We do have a couple. Last week, two polls showed crosstabs for people aged 18 to 29. For context, a crosstab is a subset of data for a specific demographic group. In this case, young people aged 18 to 29. One poll had Kamala Harris up by 31 points. Another poll, released within an hour of the first one, had her up by just 3 points.

So, what do you do with that? And how does that happen? That’s a real-world example, number one. Another example from today involves two candidates for governor in North Carolina: Josh Stein and the flawed Mark Robinson. Last week, Robinson got into trouble—he’s always posted lunatic stuff—but this time, new information surfaced about his past. He had been posting on a site called “New to Africa,” discussing inappropriate sexual encounters with his sister-in-law and boasting about them. He also called himself a “black Nazi” and said if we could still enslave people, he would own some. He’s a jackass.

The first polls measuring the impact of this scandal came out, showing Stein leading Robinson 50 to 35.  Compare that to the polls for Harris versus Trump, which often show Harris leading by 52–48 or 51–49. One notable difference between these polls is that the numbers add up to 100% in the Harris examples. That could be a good sign, or it could be misleading. Did they remove the people who expressed no preference?

But the Stein-Robinson poll only adds up to 85%. In the book, you explain how the missing 15% can cause various issues and lead to swampy conclusions.

Allen: Absolutely. That’s a perfect point. When the numbers don’t add up to 100%, it indicates that some people gave a response that needs to be reflected in the top two results. To simplify, Stein was at 50%, and Robinson was at 40%.

50 plus 40 is 90. That means 10% are somewhere else. Where is that somewhere else? In some elections, part of that 10% expresses support for a third party. Only I don’t believe any third-party candidates are running for governor in North Carolina. If there are, or there are “write-ins” I doubt they get much of a percentage.

Allen: It’s Democrat plus Republican, equaling 100%. That’s the only possible outcome. It’s binary. Election results are binary. In this case, it’s a simpler example—Democrat plus Republican equals 100%. There is no other possible outcome. But before the election, even with only two candidates, there are still three possible responses in the poll: Democrat, Republican, or “don’t know yet” (or undecided, depending on how you split it).

The flawed logic comes in when analysts try to eliminate the undecided option, attempting to make an apples-to-apples comparison. So, let’s say Stein (the Democrat) is at 50, and Robinson (the Republican) is at 40. We know that 50 plus 40 isn’t going to be the election result. So, where do those other 10% go? They’re in the land of the undecided. The poll doesn’t tell us how those people will eventually vote—it only tells us how many there are.

As a forecaster, I make a prediction when I dig into the data. My job as an analyst is to figure out where the undecided are most likely to go. In the U.S., the assumption is that undecideds will split 50/50. That assumption feels reasonable and safe, but the reality is that it rarely happens. We know this from past elections and past data.

Even intuitively, a 50/50 split might only sometimes occur. So, when we account for the undecideds, I say, “If they split 60/40, we should account for that. If they split 70/30, we should account for that. If they split 50/50, we need data to support that.” We cannot just assume that a 50/50 split is the default or the null hypothesis.

That is not valid science. In the U.S., instead of saying “50/40 with 10 percent undecided,” they often say “50/40, so this candidate is up by 10.” They assume the election result must be that Candidate A wins by 10. They assume the undecideds will split evenly, 55/45. The unscientific part that misinforms the public and that I’m trying to correct—is the assertion that any discrepancy from a 55/45 result means the poll was wrong.

They claim that if a poll shows a 50/40/10 split, it means Candidate A must win by 10 points in the election or else the poll was inaccurate. That’s the entire logic. I’m not exaggerating or taking liberties here. This is the academic definition—universally accepted in the United States—of poll accuracy: the margin, or difference between the two candidates in the poll, must equal the margin in the election result, or else the poll is considered wrong.

Rosner: And we talked about this a couple of days ago—people have a problem with uncertainty.

Allen: The entire gambling industry is based on people believing they can predict something highly unpredictable, like the outcome of a sports game.

Rosner: Even Einstein, the smartest guy in the world at the time, couldn’t handle quantum mechanics. He said that some things are inherently unpredictable. He spent so much of his later life trying to figure out how that could be, and he famously said, “God does not play dice with the universe.”

Allen: I was just about to give the same quote. Yes, that’s a great quote.

Rosner: So, people want certainty, and those who analyze polls want to give the illusion of predictive certainty. This leads people into all sorts of confusion. In the case of Robinson, there’s another confounding factor: voters who are so discouraged by their candidate that they don’t even tick a box. They may vote in the presidential election but not in the governor’s race. That could happen, and it does happen. It happens both ways. There will also be voters so disappointed by the presidential candidates that they only vote for the down-ballot candidates.

Allen: All of this makes sense. These things will happen in unpredictable numbers, making it even tougher to make any reliable prediction. I love the dice analogy because fair dice have a known probability. We can calculate the outcome of rolling two fair dice with extreme precision.

One of the issues I have with statistical literacy is that statistics classes often focus on precision. They teach students to calculate probabilities down to the decimal point, which is fine. There’s nothing wrong with that. But more basic statistical literacy, which I emphasize, involves asking: even if you can’t calculate the exact probability, can you still tell me which outcome is more likely?

For example, when rolling two fair dice, the sum of the dice will always be between 2 and 12. The most common outcome is seven because there are more ways to roll a seven than any other number. More combinations add up to 7. It’s the most common outcome but still not likely—just more probable than the others.

Rosner: There’s only about a 17% chance of rolling a 7—6 out of 36 possibilities. 

Allen: For some learners, this helps them wrap their heads around probability. For others, it doesn’t click as easily. When I was talking to a high school stats class the other day, here’s the example I gave:

I said, “There’s a prize if you’re on the winning team. I won’t tell you the prize, but Team 1 wins if the dice sum is 2, 3, 4, or 5. Team 2 wins if the sum is 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12. Pick your teams.”

Every single student in the class—all 30 of them—chose Team 2 (6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12). So, I asked, “What are the chances that your team wins if I roll the dice?” The students started pulling out their calculators.

I said, “No calculators. Just give me a rough guess.” 

Rosner: 6 out of 36.

Allen: I wanted them to give me an approximation.

AllenRosner: One of the students said 80%, another said 60%. I responded, “But you both said greater than 50%, so your side is favoured. You can say that with certainty.”

I asked, “Are you 100% certain that your sidete is favoured?” They looked at each other briefly and said, “Yes, I’m 100% certain that our side is favoured.” So I continued, “You don’t know if the probability is 60% or 80%, but you’re certain it’s greater than 50%?” They all nodded in agreement.

I said, “Beautiful. This is an excellent lesson in probability. Even though you don’t know the exact probability, you can still say with certainty that it’s greater than something. In this case, greater than 50%. Now, we can calculate the probability with certainty: it’s 26 out of 36, about 73%. But here’s the key—while all of you chose the same option and agreed that this side is favoured, is it possible you’re wrong?”

The word ‘wrong’ carries a misleading meaning. Does “wrong” mean you chose the wrong favourite, or does “wrong”, mean the result doesn’t match what you predicted? This is where we get into the concept of The Polls Weren’t Wrong, saying that polls are not predictions. Polls are not predictions of election outcomes. Polls are observations of the present state.

All the students correctly observed that they’d go with 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12 if they had to choose. I rolled the dice, and it was a 9. Everyone won. Woo! Everybody was happy. But we know mathematically, with certainty, that they would have been “wrong” about 27% of the time.

Rosner: Exactly, and this brings us to the 2016 election. That leads almost directly into it because some forecasters said Trump had a 66% chance of losing, while others said 99%. Can we say with certainty that the 99% estimate was a badnumber? Yes, we can—but that takes a few steps to explain.

When discussing discomfort with uncertainty, people tend to remain rational when discussing dice or coin flips—things with clear, calculable probabilities. But emotions run high when we start talking about political polls and elections. Anxiety spikes, especially around 2024, as Trump does nothing to calm people’s fears about what his second presidency might look like.

Allen: Absolutely. To tie this into the book and build on what we’ve been discussing, Chapter 4 introduces the concept of ideal polls. If a poll is conducted perfectly, by every possible measure, this is the data it would produce. Many of the reviewers of my book said, “But this isn’t possible.” My response was, “A: That’s bullshit. It is possible, and I can prove it. B: Even if it weren’t possible, that doesn’t mean it’s not a useful concept.”

In the same way, chemistry classes teach about ideal gases or optometry, and physics classes teach about ideal lenses. Ideal lenses aren’t real, and ideal gases and fluids aren’t real, either. But we use these concepts to understand what would happen under perfect, ideal conditions.

A political poll can never be conducted without some margin of error because of the margin of error. That’s a statistical fact. It doesn’t matter what your sample size is. If you take a census, you’re no longer conducting a poll.

Rosner: A census is where you get the actual result from every participant in what you’re trying to measure—in this case, the population. 

Allen: Exactly. And when we use the word “population” in statistics, we talk about the people of interest or the measured items. 

Rosner: In the context of elections, the votes cast are, by definition, a census because you’re capturing data from everyone who voted.

Allen: A census of actual voters is simply the election results. We often deal with tens of millions, sometimes even over 100 million, when discussing election numbers. But our brains aren’t built to handle numbers that large. We’re wired to think in terms of tens or hundreds. So, when I introduce the concept of ideal polls in Chapter 2 of the book, I explain how sample size works to achieve a given margin of error. The sample size that tends to be used is around 600.

Rosner: After a certain sample size, the size of the population no longer matters.

Allen: This is an unintuitive fact of statistics, but it’s testable and provable. Students often see the margin of error as an abstract concept, just numbers plugged into a formula. However, my approach is to show that even experts often misunderstand and need to understand what the margin of error applies to.

There needs to be more clarity on what this formula means and how it’s understood. I provide several examples in the book, but here’s a simple one: Imagine you’re in a class of 100 students. You can ask them whether they have a dog or what they plan to eat for lunch tomorrow. You’d need to survey about 86 students to get an accurate sample – a margin of error down to +/- 4%

So, I took a random sample of 86 students and asked them questions. Let’s say I get 50% for option A and 50% for option B. What do those numbers mean? It means that if I had asked every student in the population the same question simultaneously (instead of only the same of 86), then the results would be within the margin of error as often as dictated by the sample size and the confidence interval.

This is a very important point: the margin of error relies on the subjunctive—on the “if” statement. It’s hypothetical in nature. If I had asked everyone, the numbers would be within the margin of error. This is a testable, provable concept. The math behind the margin of error works because of this “if” scenario. That’s critical to understand because it explains how polls are tools for observation, not prediction.

I always emphasize this when explaining statistical literacy. You don’t need to understand every formula in depth, but you need to grasp the concept that underlies the margin of error—it’s about the likelihood of the results being representative if you had surveyed the entire population. That’s the essence of how the margin of error works, which I tell students often.

If you’re decent at coding or Excel, you can simulate polling with a population of a million A’s and B’s, then take a random sample of 600 to 1,000. Ninety-five percent of the time, you’ll get results within the confidence interval. 

Rosner: But people on T.V., even experts like Steve Kornacki, only sometimes consider that when working with numbers on their boards. They’re thinking in terms of spreads and margins. When we look at a poll that says 50% for Candidate A, it doesn’t mean 50%.

Allen: It means 50%, plus or minus 3%. The example I give in the book—and it’s great because it perfectly illustrates the point—is with dice. If you ask me for a 95% confidence interval for the roll of two dice, my answer would be 7, plus or minus 4. That means I’m 95% confident the outcome will be between 3 and 11. You eliminate the extreme possibilities, like 2 or 12. You’re 95% confident that the dice roll won’t be a 2 or 12.

So, saying “7 plus or minus 4” means the result could fall anywhere within that range. Imagine the misunderstanding if someone said, “Carl said 7.” No, I didn’t say 7—I said 7, plus or minus 4. Those are very different statements, and the same misunderstanding happens with polls. When a poll says 50%, it means 50%, plus or minus 3. The number RIGHT NOW is likely to fall somewhere in that range. But as we discussed earlier, that 10% undecided can and will influence the eventual result – the election. Different calculations.

Rosner: That’s a great point. But let’s shift to some real-world gripes. In the book, you ask innocuous questions to people, like, “What are you doing for lunch?” Most people will answer that question. Some might say, “None of your business,” but you’ll get a decent response rate. But consider this: The New York Times/Siena poll made 194,000 phone calls to get 2,000 respondents, meaning only one out of 100 agreed to participate. That raises the likelihood that some people are not representative and may even be fringe respondents.

On top of that, this election cycle has an added layer of deception. I suspect—and this is just a theory—that some Trump supporters might purposely give false answers. For example, a MAGA voter might say they’re a Democrat voting for Trump to manipulate the poll results. It looks more significant when a Democrat switches to vote for Trump.

I agree that’s possible, though there’s no way to prove it definitively. I think that potential issue might have lessened when Harris replaced Biden as the Democratic candidate. But as you said, all of this is speculation.

Allen: While it could happen, the impact would have to be large and well-orchestrated to make a significant difference in the poll results. 

Rosner: It could shift the numbers by 1% or 2%, no question; however, in an election where 1% or 2% could be the margin in key states, even that small shift can have a big effect.

Allen: That small margin can make all the difference in close races. Still, the likelihood of large-scale coordinated false responses is low. It is. So it’s very hard to detect that small movement and change. I want to add something, too. I noted your earlier speech when you said that people want poll data to be predictive. In my conversations with pollsters, it often comes back to what they believe people want to see. Remember, pollsters usually don’t pay out of their pockets to conduct polls. Most of the time, they are funded by media outlets or sponsors. So, one of the things I’ve had to hammer home—and stand my ground on—is that pollsters are incentivized to make their data seem more important, impactful, and meaningful than it is. I always say this, and I say it in the book:

“Data is under no obligation to be meaningful to you in the way you want it to be.”

Rosner: This ties back to your point about seeing unusual numbers from pollsters. When you see numbers that don’t match other polls, it can indicate that the pollster has integrity and isn’t massaging the data. You call it ‘herding,’ where everyone sticks together because numbers closer to the average are more believable to the public than outliers.

Allen:Yes, it’s a “cover your ass” technique because pollsters know how they’ll be judged for accuracy. However, the current measurements for accuracy need to be more scientific and measure the poll’s accuracy.

The current measurements—without going on a rant—are invalid. They don’t measure what they claim to measure. But pollsters know how they’ll be judged, and the mentality is: It’s better to be wrong with everyone than to be the lone outlier. If your poll shows something very different from other polls, you have two options:

  1. Don’t release the poll.
  2. Fudge the data just enough so your numbers don’t look too different.

This way, if the election result aligns with the consensus, everyone can claim they were “in the ballpark.” But if the outcome deviates from the polls, it’s not just one pollster’s fault—everyone was wrong. This creates a dangerous environment for the independence of poll data because pollsters are judged based on flawed standards and don’t want to stand out.

Suppose we judged polls from a more scientific perspective. In that case, we’d encourage pollsters to use different methodologies, apply different weighting techniques, and be transparent with their data. Whatever numbers they get, they should release them.

Allen: The problem is that if everyone is doing things the same way, if everyone feels pressured to conform to flawed standards, then having 20 pollsters—or even more, as we have now—becomes less valuable statistically. Having 2 or 3 independent pollsters who aren’t herding their data would be more valuable.

Rosner: That’s one of the key takeaways from your book and a message of common sense: Don’t freak out about polls, especially individual polls. There are so many sources of error and misinterpretation in polls that the main message should be: don’t freak out. Don’t waste your time freaking out. Instead, focus on getting people to vote. Polls can help guide where to focus your efforts, indicating which states might be competitive, but you still have to do the work to turn those gettable states into wins.

 In Chapter 4, you discuss ideal polls and present a chart demonstrating how even an ideal poll will show fluctuations. 

Allen: The polling instrument is inherently noisy, even if we know the population with 100% certainty. A poll showing 47%, followed by one showing 52%, doesn’t necessarily indicate movement or a trend. Sometimes, it’s just noise. Yes, rule number one of polls: fluctuation is normal. Individual polls, while important, are just tiny pieces of data in a much bigger picture. 

Rosner: Now, I’ve got one more gripe. You talk about Nate Silver and 538. Nate Silver doesn’t work for 538 anymore. 

Allen: ABC News bought 538 from Nate Silver maybe two years ago. Now, Nate is doing his own thing, working independently with his model.

Rosner: 538 still uses Nate Silver’s model, but it’s no longer tied to him. The 538 team has its methods now. (Important note – I believe 538 now uses a model Morris has brought, and Silver uses the one he previously used at 538 – if you’d like to update)

Rosner: 538’s recipe currently shows Harris up by 2.7%. But if you look at the 20 most recent polls, the average shows her up by 4.5%. Something about that recipe doesn’t add up.

Jacobsen: So, individual psychological factors are also at play here, particularly regarding how people interpret polls, statistics, and public education on these topics. Are we talking about cognitive closure? People want certainty in a context of uncertainty. This need for cognitive closure pushes people to seek definitive answers, even when the situation doesn’t warrant it. People want closure and certainty, even though the nature of polls and predictions is inherently uncertain. I understand from a psychological perspective—why people want certainty. But in science, and again, I would understand if the public and even the media had trouble grasping this concept. 

Allen: The real problem—and the reason I wrote the book—is that experts, not just a few here and there, but a consensus of experts in the field, are misinforming the public. This isn’t just happening in articles; it’s in academic journals and books. Things written by experts for experts wrong.

Allen: They are objectively wrong. I have a list of quotes I share frequently because they’re so easy to interpret, and there’s no context in which these statements make sense. For example, when Nate Silver says, “The poll averages underestimated this candidate by 8 points in the election result,” that’s incorrect. Poll averages do not predict election results, nor do polls themselves. When G. Elliott Morris says, “The polls predicted this candidate would win by 1,” that’s also incorrect. 

When the American Association of Public Opinion Research (AAPOR)—a board of experts hired to analyze poll data—says, “The polls predicted that Hillary Clinton would win,” that is objectively false. There is no context where that statement is accurate. I approach this cognitive dissonance with people, and this is where I gain and lose followers on social media. But my goal is not to gain followers—I want to educate people. The cognitive dissonance is strong because people can’t believe that experts don’t understand this concept.

When you tell people that polls aren’t predictions, most agree, but there’s a reluctance to confront specific experts on this issue. It’s like people are afraid of confrontation. When I call out experts like Tom Bonier or G. Elliott Morris—who frequently post about polls—or even Nate Silver when they say things like, “This poll predicted the candidate would win by 3,” I don’t get direct responses anymore. But they are wrong when they make these claims. It’s easy to say “polls are not predictions,” but it’s difficult for people to accept that experts are wrong. The experts say polls, if accurate,should predict who will win and by how much, but that’s not true.

That’s the psychological factor you’re talking about – cognitive closure. How accurate were the polls? An easy, wrong methodology is currently accepted, and I want to bring scientific standards to the field, nothing more. Well, I also want experts to issue mass retractions for their false claims about what they believe “polls predicted” but that’s another topic.

In my book, I break  down how polls work – and how they should be evaluated -into two parts. The first half of my book is a baseline of education. I build up certain concepts step by step. The second half focuses specifically on political polls. Using the foundation from the first half, I analyze political polls. The content is presented in a way that’s easy to digest and, I hope, somewhat entertaining. It’s simple but explains each concept individually, allowing readers to understand how political polls work.

An ideal poll is one in which the only source of error is the margin of error itself. This is a concept that currently only exists in my book. There is no framework for defining an ideal poll. Analysts in the U.K. and U.S. approach poll analysis with different assumptions. I argue that, although we know political polls are not ideal, understanding non-ideal polls requires knowing what an ideal poll would measure—just like how we teach ideal gases in chemistry or ideal lenses in physics. It’s a theoretical framework to help people understand the basics before diving into real-world complexities.

I didn’t invent the concept of an ideal poll, I just outlined it. Still, it’s foundational to understanding how polls work, especially when analyzing non-ideal, real-world polling data. The concept is rooted in the math. This math has existed for at least 300 years. Still, by naming it and giving it a formal definition, we provide a framework that makes it easier for people to understand. When I say that the book’s first half is an introduction to polls, many experts and smart people who’ve taken statistics classes might think, “I don’t need that.” But I’m telling them, “Yes, you do.” Why? Because they still think a poll predicts the election outcome—and it doesn’t.

These fundamental concepts are what I’m building on. It’s not just about stating facts; it’s about understanding them. Anyone can regurgitate facts—”A squared plus B squared equals C squared” or “P.V. equals nRT”—but spitting out facts isn’t the same as comprehending them. 

Applying the Pythagorean Theorem to an isosceles triangle, to use a simpler example, would not be valid. Even if you don’t know, or remember, that lesson from school – me pointing out “hey, this is wrong, you can’t do that” should be sufficient for the average person to understand who’s right and who’s wrong. The same exact thing is true for the formulas being used to compare polls to elections.The ability to regurgitate some formula is not useful if you don’t know what the output means, or when to use it.

Rosner: Beyond people not understanding these basics, there are so many other abuses of statistical data that it becomes a whole mess. 

Allen: Yes, people don’t understand what polls should do, but they misuse the information in various ways. One of my reviewers, who now works for an NFL team and has a Ph.D. in applied mathematics, said something profound. He noted that statistical literacy is arguably as important as regular literacy.  

Rosner: But we don’t teach statistics. After algebra and geometry, we push students into calculus when most people should learn statistics instead. 

Allen: Unless you’re going into a field like engineering, where calculus is more relevant, statistics should be prioritized. Statistics is almost like logic, but we treat it as just another branch of math. 

Rosner: The concepts aren’t that tough—you could teach nearly everyone the basics of statistics, but we don’t. Yes, and towards the end of the book, you talk about the 2016 Hillary Clinton election. The 2024 numbers look similar to the 2016 numbers. Am I wrong?

Allen: No, they don’t look similar at all. But point out what you think is a similarity, and I’ll tell you where you’re off.

Rosner: 2016, third-party parties, such as Gary Johnson and Jill Stein, had a significant presence.  

Allen: Having third-party candidates affects the data in ways that should be obvious to anyone with a basic understanding of statistics. However, analysts often focus only on the spread between the two major candidates. For example, they might say, “Hillary Clinton is up 4 points with 44% to Trump’s 40%.” Still, they ignore the 5% going to third-party candidates and the 11% undecided. That’s mathematically different from an election where Kamala Harris has 50% and Trump has 46%.

Comparing these numbers as if they’re apples to apples (because both are “up by 4” shows a need for more understanding of polling data. I always say this on social media and get pushback, but I don’t care—because it’s true. The presence of third-party candidates changes the data dynamics in ways that analysts often overlook.

I’ll keep saying this until people fix their nonsensical analysis. No one who truly understands how poll data works would compare those elections apples to apples. I said it in 2020 when Joe Biden was up by 4 in the poll averages in various states. People freaked out like they did when Hillary Clinton was up by 4. However, looking at the data this way needs to be corrected.

In Chapter 24 of my book, I wrote a bit tongue-in-cheek to make a clear point: in an election where the most votes win, 50% plus one vote is all you need. That’s the threshold. That’s the only number we know with certainty. Applying that simple, obvious fact, I prove in the book that experts sometimes need help understanding this.

For example, they’ll compare a poll that says 44% for one candidate and 40% for another with one that says 52% to 48%, as if both are the same because the margin is 4 points. But no—52% is polling across the finish line because we know 50% wins the election. If a poll underestimates a candidate at 52%, they’re still at 51 or 50—they still win. But it’s not even close to the same as if a poll underestimates a candidate at 44%, 43%, or 42%.

That’s a crucial distinction. The numbers the poll gives us—like 44% for one candidate, plus or minus the margin of error—that’s how it should be reported. And if you have 50%, plus or minus the margin of error, that’s the critical number. But people fixate on spread analysis—just looking at the gap between the two candidates—and that’s not how polls should be interpreted.

Chapter 9 of the book discusses this fallacy—spread analysis. People think the gap between two candidates is the only number that matters, but it’s not. No one who understands polling would think that way.

Rosner: Right now, if you look at swing states, you might see numbers like 48–46. In some cases, Trump is at the top, while Harris is at the top in others. But when you add in third-party candidates like Stein or the undecided voters, you’ve got to account for all that. It’s not just about hitting 50% but accounting for the third-party votes and undecided voters.

Allen: The math here is straightforward: if there are only two candidates, as is often the case in the U.S., I’m not calculating the probability that Candidate A wins by a certain margin. I’m calculating the probability that Candidate A gets at least 50% of the vote. In 2020, that’s where things got interesting.

In 2020, there were multiple moments where I realized that I did understand this better than many of the experts. Take Maine or New Hampshire, for example. Joe Biden was ahead in the polling averages by 53% to 40% in both states. FiveThirtyEight  gave him around a 90% chance of winning. But the real issue wasn’t just the spread—it was about whether Biden would cross the 50% threshold and understanding that made all the difference.

Now, when I calculated the probability that a candidate gets at least 50% of the vote when their polling average is 53% or higher, given that there were still 6% undecided, I found it to be over 99%. Even if my calculations were off by a huge factor , that still leaves a probability of 96%, 97%, or 98%. So when I saw these 90% probabilities being thrown around for Biden, I thought, “No, they’re using flawed spread analysis.” They said the spread between Biden and Trump was such that Trump could still overtake him if the spread were off by 10 points. There’s an interesting note in my book that points to the possibility that a very simple clerical error contributed to this probability problem – and no one there caught it!

But when you understand how poll error calculations work, you realize that the probability of a candidate outperforming their poll number is much higher when there are 15% undecided voters than when there are only 5%. This sounds obvious when I say it. If there are more undecided voters, the final result is more uncertain. But spread analysis doesn’t account for that uncertainty. It treats a 42-40 poll as if it’s the same as a 50-48 poll, which is fundamentally incorrect.

Rosner: Let me throw some numbers at you. You’re giving Harris close to a two-thirds chance of winning right now. In 2016, Hillary was up by about 5% in the national aggregate, but that’s not helpful because of swing states and the Electoral College. Then Comey dropped the FBI investigation news with 11 days to go. She was up 5% but won the popular vote by only 2%. That announcement may have cost her 1% or 1.5%, but nobody knows.

In 2020, Biden was up by 8% to 10% in the week before the election but won by 4.5%. Now you’re saying Harris has about a 2-to-3 chance of winning, but what’s happening?

Allen: The analysis done by experts and the media in 2016 goes like this: Hillary was up by 5%, then she lost by 1%. Therefore, the polls were off by 6%. But this is not a valid analysis, and here’s why. Hillary Clinton’s polling average wasn’t above 47% in any swing state—none—not in Michigan, Pennsylvania, Wisconsin, or even Maine. So that means there were a lot of undecided voters still on the table.

Rosner: Looking at 47% for Clinton and around 43% for Trump leaves 10% of voters who hadn’t decided or considered third-party candidates; that undecided group could heavily influence the election’s outcome.

Allen: Yes. I have the exact numbers in the book, and they vary by state—46-41, 45-42—but the key point is that in no swing state was Hillary’s polling average above 47%. This meant a significant portion of the electorate was still undecided, and that’s where the real uncertainty lay.

Oh, here it is, right in front of me—Pennsylvania. Hillary Clinton’s polling average in Pennsylvania was 46.3%, and Trump’s was 43.9%. So, the analysts said she was up by about 2.5%. Now, what are they doing today? They say, “Oh, Kamala Harris is only up by 2.5%, and Hillary lost, so there’s this normal polling error.”

No, that’s bullshit. We’re calculating the probability that Kamala Harris will get at least 49.5% of the vote because third parties and fringe candidates will likely take about 1-2%. Even if we simplify the math and say the probability she gets 50%, that’s what we’re analyzing. There’s no magic number in polling except for 50%. And it’s not magic—it’s math. You get to 50%, and you win, period—end of story. 50% is the number that matters. If you get 50%, you win. That’s it.

So let’s say Kamala Harris’s polling average is 49%, and Trump is 47%. I’m not analyzing that poll by saying, “Harris is up by 2.” I’m analyzing it by asking the probability that she reaches 50%. In my forecast, I account for third parties taking about 1.5% of the vote. So, the real analysis is the probability that she gets to something like 49.3%, which is enough to win.

Rosner: So, to simplify: in 2016, Hillary and Trump’s combined polling numbers increased to less than 90%. The remaining undecided or third-party votes, which made up 10-12%, made all the difference. However, in this election, Harris was 48%, and Trump was at 46%, adding up to 94%. That means only 6% are left unallocated. It’s much easier for Harris to make up the 2% to get to 50% than for Hillary to bridge that gap in 2016.

Allen: Hillary had a much steeper climb to get to 50% or even 49% because there were more undecided and third-party votes in play. In this election, the smaller number of undecided voters makes it easier for Harris to reach 50%. 

I’ve taken a few notes and want to explain why I wrote the book. The simplest reason? Because experts are misinforming the public. This isn’t a rare or one-off issue. Experts analyze polls by the spread, margin, whatever you want to call it: the difference between the top two candidates. But that’s an internally invalid metric. Spread doesn’t measure what they claim it does. Spread analysis needs to capture the full picture.

In the book, I explain why this is the case. An ideal poll is a poll where the only source of error is the margin of error. It’s possible to have an ideal poll, but political polls aren’t ideal—and that doesn’t matter. The math behind polling, from which we get the margin of error, is the same math that underlies an ideal poll.

Rule number 1 of polling data: fluctuation is normal and expected. Individual polls should be taken with a grain of salt. The numbers will go up and down. If a pollster consistently releases the same numbers—49, 49, 49, 49—I’m highly skeptical of that pollster because it’s statistically impossible to get the same number consistently if you’re conducting polls correctly.

So even in an ideal poll, you wouldn’t expect the same number every time. Even in an ideal poll, there should be fluctuation. If you’re getting the same number repeatedly, something is off. In non-ideal polls, we should expect even more fluctuations. 

What I would say about the last part of the book is that there are some important statistics. The book’s first half is about the why—the foundation of polling and why the public and even experts misunderstand it. The book’s second half is the what—and this is where it blows people’s minds. My analysis is scientifically valid, and it makes predictions.

If my analysis is correct, it should hold that candidates who poll closer to 50% tend to win, regardless of how much they are up by. So, a 50–48 poll is better than a 46–40 poll, even though the margin (+2 vs. +6) is smaller. If my analysis is wrong and spread is a valid way to interpret polls, then the opposite would be true. But it’s not—and that’s the counterintuitive yet obvious conclusion if you think about it.

Rosner: That makes perfect sense. Our minds have been conditioned by spread analysis to the top.

Allen: If this book had been written 100 years ago, it wouldn’t have been controversial. Most people would’ve considered it obvious. But because of this obsession with margin analysis—up by two versus up by 6—sometimes being up by two is better, mathematically, than being up by 6. It’s a mathematical fact. It’s provable and observable; we have data to back it up. I put all of this in the book.

Rosner: It’s like with the Dodgers. Their lead kept shrinking over the last two months of the season. I always asked myself, is it better to be up by eight games in July or up by two games with a week to go?

Allen: Bingo. That’s the perfect question. I get this all the time with political data. People ask me, “Is it better to be up 49–47 in a poll average or 46–40?” I know the answer, but the answer given by experts is different.

Rosner: Who’s right? They can’t both be true.

Allen: Only one of these can be used. This has led to a combative debate in the field. Some experts who used to be friendly with me are no longer because they realize that my work and their work can’t coexist. There’s this dissonance—they cling to how things have always been done. But my work is provable. It’s objectively correct, it’s been tested, and it holds up. To Rick’s point, it’s not hard to understand.

Allen: Most of this can be taught to high school or college students. The fact that experts still get it wrong—still analyze polls by margin, by who’s ahead and by how much—is baffling. This is a new way for most people to think about polling, but it’s the correct way. The old, misinformed spread analysis has confused people for too long. This approach simplifies things and aligns with the reality of how polling works.

There’s a quote in the book: “Even numerate people can be misled when they’re misinformed. ” For many years, people have talked about the spread as if it were the golden standard—the metric we should use. These people have Ph. D.s in statistics, but in practice, even experts are misled by the spread.

Rosner: In gambling, you bet on the spread. But applying that mindset—like you do in NFL betting—to politics becomes deceptive. Spread is a misleading metric. Spread proclaims to measure who is ahead and by how much, but it fails on both counts.

Allen: Absolutely. I talk about this in the book. It’s simple to prove—anyone can do it. You can even use real data to show it. We could cover this in another call.

Jacobsen: What have early sales of the book been like, and how long have you been working on it?

Allen: Sure! So, presales opened on September 2nd. I aggressively promoted on social media and other channels, and sales did well in the first few days. After that, I took a short break to set up some media appearances. The book was officially released on September 23rd when preorders were shipped, and regular orders opened. I did another push then, and sales spiked again. It’s been a peak-and-valley situation since.

But realistically, my mentality is that I have about a month and a half until the election to capture people’s attention. When I started, it was two months. The truth is, after the election, I expect more interest from academics. I’ve already had invitations to speak at universities after the election, but that’s more of a niche market. My book isn’t just for academics or people in the field—it’s for anyone who wants to understand polls better. The average person tunes into polls only in the months leading up to elections, so that’s where my focus has been.

Rosner: Do you work with the Florida Elections Project or the early voter guy?

Allen: No, I haven’t worked with him. I’ve been focused on my projects for now. I follow all these people because they provide interesting insights. I always tell people you must take the good with the bad with these analysts. Whenever I criticize Nate Silver, Tom Bonier, G. Elliott Morris, or whoever, people assume two things: First, they take it personally, which isn’t the case—I don’t know them personally. And second, they assume I’m saying they don’t do any good work. That’s not true at all.

I always say, “They’re right about this. They do good work here.” I can learn from people, and many analysts do better work than me in other areas, like early voting counts or election day calls. For example, Dave Wasserman is great at calling elections when the votes start coming in. I’ve tried to do what these people do and couldn’t improve on it. So, I follow them and learn from their expertise. But in cases when they do poor work, I criticize that and say, “No, that’s not right. You need to learn a bit from me.”

As someone who never stops learning, I’m even wearing my “Never Stop Learning” shirt today, and I take both sides of the coin. You take the good with the bad. There’s always value in learning from others, even if you don’t agree with everything they do.

The background of this book started in 2016, during that notorious election. After Sam Wang announced his 99.9% probability that Hillary Clinton would win, he famously said he’d eat a bug if she lost. And to his credit, he did eat a bug. But many other forecasters still need to follow through on their grand promises. They said they’d delete their accounts if they were wrong about some things in 2020, and again in 2022,but they have yet to do so.

The book’s origins go back to 2016 when I saw people with big reputations misinforming the public. Before I got into the margin and spread analysis, I thought, “How can so many smart people not understand that states are correlated?” What happens in Wisconsin affects Michigan, which affects Pennsylvania.

Rosner: So, what was your first step into forecasting?

Allen: My first attempt at building a forecast was in 2008. I was a freshman in college with my laptop open, trying to calculate poll averages. I thought I had it all figured out. Then, I realized that Ohio is correlated with Michigan, which is correlated with Indiana and Iowa. I didn’t know how to do that math back then, so I shut my laptop, went to the gym, and didn’t think about it for another eight years.

By 2016, I had learned more and improved my math skills. I built a forecast that gave Hillary Clinton a 70% chance to win—not because she was up by six or anything like that, but because I saw she was only polling at 46% or 47% in the swing states. Trump still had a path to victory. I realized that if he won Wisconsin, there was a good chance that he would also win Michigan and Pennsylvania. These states are correlated, and all the forecasters who put Hillary at 99% to win didn’t account for this.

It’s obvious, but I understand it might not be for the average person. However, it should be obvious to any statistician or model builder that what happens in one state is not independent of another.

Rosner: So, did Nate Silver think the same about correlated states back then?

Allen: Nate Silver acknowledged the correlation between states and calculated them very well, one of the things I learned from him, but his model gave different probabilities than other forecasters that year. He was more cautious than others who were giving Hillary 99%. He gave her around a 70% chance, similar to my forecast, because he recognized the possibility of Trump winning correlated states like Wisconsin, Michigan, and Pennsylvania. Nate’s thinking was closer to mine, but many others completely overlooked that factor.

Yes, At that time, Nate Silver was the only mainstream forecaster who got the numbers right to understand that states are correlated. Huffington Post, Sam Wang, and several others said, “Well, if she loses Wisconsin, that’s fine because she can still win Michigan, and she’s 90% to win Michigan. Even if she doesn’t win Michigan, she can still win Pennsylvania, and she’s 86% to win Pennsylvania.” Or whatever the numbers were. But the reality is, as soon as one of those dominoes falls, all the downstream probabilities drop dramatically—from 90 to 40, from 86 to 32—because those states are correlated.

To summarize, I wrote the book backward. I knew what I knew but only fully understood why later. From 2017 to 2020, I was reaching out to experts, academics, and people in the field, saying, “Look, there’s something in my research that shows how much someone is “up” in a poll— is not as important as their actual poll number.” I knew I was onto something but couldn’t fully wrap my head around it. I asked if anyone wanted to take it from there. No one was interested, so I had to do it alone.

From there, I started working backward. I gathered all the data from 2004, through, 2018, at that time. I knew what I was trying to prove, but in statistical literacy, you can’t just say, “Here’s the formula; deal with it.” You have to prove it—you have to show your work. So, I worked backward, asking, “How do I know this?” Chapter 16: compensating error. “How do I know that?” Chapter 11: weighted results. “How do I know that?” Chapter 7: present polls versus plan polls and a simultaneous census. And, of course, Chapter 4: ideal polls. Chapter 2: the margin of error for polls in very small populations, where a census is easily conducted.

While the book was written backward from my perspective, it’s logical and straightforward for the reader because it builds a foundation. You need to understand one concept before moving on to the next.

Rosner: That makes sense. Yesterday, after you told me, I explained to my wife how Harris’s 48-46 in some states is much better than Hillary’s 44-40 in 2016. But I only had a limited “math window” with her before she said, “I don’t care.” I need to get it across in time!

Allen: Yes, it takes time to grasp. But to understand this election—and my book—your point is exactly right: a small lead close to 49 or 50% is better than a larger lead farther from it. It’s counterintuitive because we’ve been trained to think about margins, but it’s  mathematically and logically true. The closer you are to 50%, the less room for things to go wrong between now and the finish line.

Rosner: That does make sense if you let go of the spread mentality. Analysts and academic articles use the same language: “She’s up by 2” and “He’s up by 4.” I had someone jokingly send me an article today from The New York Times or maybe their website using that same spread logic.

Allen: Right, that’s the spread mentality I’m trying to break down. It’s ingrained in how people think about elections. Still, as you understand polling better, you realize how flawed that thinking is. The closer a candidate is to 50%, the more likely they will win, regardless of the margin.

If people say things like, “What if the polls are off by as much as they were in 2016, 2020, or 2022?”—you can’t make those comparisons. Those aren’t apples-to-apples situations. First, comparing midterms to a general election is a bad comparison. Even comparing 2020 to 2024 is difficult because the variables are different. And 2016 is an outlier. You’re taking an outlier and trying to apply it to 2024, which is not a sound method.

It’s like in a movie when two people are on the floor, both trying to reach for a gun. It’s better to be 6 inches away from the gun. At the same time, the other person is a foot away rather than 3 feet away, while the other person is 5 feet away. The analogy I use in the book is a footrace. Imagine watching a race and knowing one runner is ahead by 2 meters. Now, is that the most valuable piece of information? It depends. If the finish line is at 50 meters, knowing how far someone is from the finish line gives you a lot more information than just knowing who’s ahead by 2 meters.

So, let’s say you’re in a race, and you’re ahead by 2 meters. Would you rather be ahead 49–47 or 42–40? You’d rather be closer to the finish line, right? That’s where I start. It’s better to be closer to 50 for an equal spread percentage. That makes sense.

Then I ask, “Would you rather be ahead 49–47 or 44–40?” At 49%, you only need one more percent to get to 50. At 44%, you still need 6. So, the probability that the person behind you overtakes you is greater when you’re farther from 50%. When people focus on the spread in elections, it’s almost like football fans worrying about covering it. But in an election, there’s no significant benefit to winning by 10 points instead of 2.

Rosner: Right, the goal is just to get past 50%.

Allen: When calculating win probability, we ask, “What’s the probability that this candidate gets at least 50% of the vote?” I’m not trying to determine whether a candidate wins by 10 points because that doesn’t matter. Yeah, I can calculate those probabilities, and yeah, the probability of winning “by 10” is higher at 44-40 – but the average person doesn’t care about that. They want win probability. And in our elections, there’s no added benefit to winning by 10. Math and logic people like to hedge with “all else equal” but the truth is, in elections, there are always so many variables.

Rosner: Like in 2016 when James Comey threw a bag of dog shit on the track with his last-minute FBI announcement.

Allen: Hillary was leading, and then Comey threw dog shit on the track with 11 days to go. But in 2024, things are more locked down because fewer undecided voters exist. So, according to my logic, there’s less chance for something like that to throw things off.

Harris is likelier to make it through, especially when fewer undecided voters  left, with some data supporting they’ll lean Democrat, very different from 2016In 2016, Hillary lost a significant portion of those undecideds who flipped to Trump, which cost her a huge chunk of her perceived “lead”. Some of her voters probably didn’t even show up to vote because of the perception that she “had it in the bag,” which is another issue with how the spread is often misinterpreted.

If I tell you, “She’s up by 6, she’s got this,” it can lead to voter complacency. This is where Nick Panagakis comes in. As far as I can see, he’s the only historical researcher who identified this issue. Political polling has existed for over 100 years, since Gallup and Literary Digest. I discovered his work in old journal articles and newspapers. Still, no one knows his name anymore—his work has essentially been lost to history.

Rosner: Panagakis sounds like someone ahead of his time.

Allen: He’s the only person I’ve found who corroborates my findings. He published in a few academic journals, but his work needs to be noticed. In the 1980s, he came up with some essential rules of analysis. He said, “Rules of analysis are necessary—not as simple as ‘an 8-point lead is safe, and a 2-point lead is close.'” That sounds eerily like what I’m saying today.

Rosner: That sounds like what you’ve been arguing about.

Allen: The eerie part is that I didn’t come across his work until 2021 or 2022. I was looking for past research similar to what I was saying, and then I found this guy. He’s got his chapter in my book, Chapter 21. When I found his work, I was floored—he was saying many of the same things I’m saying today, and he had the evidence to back it up.

Panagakis argued that undecided voters sometimes split unevenly. Often, they go disproportionately to the candidate who’s behind. If you account for that, polls that appear wrong are very accurate. His work would have been criticized, modified, and accepted in a proper scientific field. But because political polling is so contaminated with this obsession over spread logic—who’s up and by how much—his work was buried.

Rosner: That’s fascinating. 

Rosner: Unfortunately, this spread mentality has clouded the field for so long. Statistics as a field has its shameful history, with a lot of it developed by racists who used population statistics to push agendas—proving white superiority over non-whites. It’s a terrible history if you dig into it.

But to shift the focus for a second, I’d like to talk about the history of presidential polling and get your thoughts on something. Presidential polling began around the end of FDR’s era in the 1940s, about 80 years ago. Suppose you look at the history of presidential approval. In that case, it has steadily declined over time, with one major exception—9/11, which gave George W. Bush a huge bump in approval as the country rallied behind him for a few months. But aside from that, approval has been declining from president to president, regardless of whether they’re good or bad. As we get more polarized, average approval goes down. Do you have any thoughts on this?

Jacobsen: It makes sense that approval ratings would decline as the country becomes more polarized. We’re in a time where fewer people are willing to give the benefit of the doubt to a president from the opposing party. The rise of media echo chambers and the constant stream of information also make it easier for people to entrench themselves in their views, which means fewer opportunities for a president to win over the other side.

Allen: That’s true. We’re increasingly seeing a political climate where people feel they’re choosing the lesser of two evils. It’s not that they strongly support one side but that they feel the other side is worse. And regarding Donald Trump, MAGA is almost an exception in recent political history. If you look at Mitt Romney, John McCain, or George W. Bush, there wasn’t the same personal loyalty to the candidate. However, with Trump, a large number of his supporters turned out to vote specifically for him. You didn’t see that kind of enthusiasm for Joe Biden, and you likely won’t see it for Kamala Harris.

Rosner: Barack Obama might be an exception on the Democratic side, however. His following wasn’t so much a cult of personality but more about empowerment and inspiration. But overall, the polarization of U.S. politics is fascinating, especially compared to countries with five or more political parties. In those places, voters can more easily shift from one party to another. If they don’t support one party in a particular election, they ideologically move to the next one.

Allen: But in the U.S., moving from Democrat to Republican or Republican to Democrat is a huge shift. It’s a big ask to go from voting for Donald Trump to voting for Kamala Harris or vice versa. That’s a major ideological jump. So, the data we get regarding popularity in the U.S. can be skewed. Take Mitch McConnell, for example. He regularly has around 30% approval in his home state of Kentucky. However, he still won reelection because, to Kentucky voters, he’s the lesser of two evils. Whoever the Democrats run is always portrayed as far-left, out of touch with Kentucky values, and so on.

Rosner: That’s a pattern we’re seeing more and more—this hyper-polarized environment. Historically, it is hard to look at approval ratings because this extreme polarization has only intensified over the last 10 to 20 years. Having a charismatic candidate greatly helps, but it has been a while since we’ve had one. The last truly charismatic presidential candidate was Obama in 2012. In 2016, both candidates—Trump and Clinton—had high negatives—the same thing happened in 2020. Now, however, Harris has some charisma. She has amazing hair, historically a big deal in elections. JFK, great hair. Clinton has pretty good hair. Reagan has amazing hair.

Allen: There’s something to appearance in politics. It’s not a deciding factor, but it plays a role. A psychologist could speak more to that than I can, but there’s something about how a candidate looks and sounds. Someone who looks the part and is eloquent can have more appeal than someone who might be smart and have good policies but doesn’t come across as well visually or rhetorically. Rosner: There’s something to that. Presidents are like America’s flight attendants. Remember how exciting flight attendants were in the 1960s? They wore mini skirts and were the subject of many, many fantasies. Over the years, they’ve been replaced with the idea of flight attendants who don’t have to be sexy. But presidents are, to some extent, America’s sexy cheerleaders, and it’s good to want one who’s “cute.”

there’s an element of that in how we perceive political figures.

Allen: But I want to get back to something I mentioned earlier. I was flipping through my book, and a point I repeatedly make is crucial on social media and in the book. Regurgitating a fact is not the same as understanding it. I’ll elaborate. Analysts and experts often regurgitate certain facts like, “Polls are snapshots.” That’s correct, but they must truly understand what that means when analyzing the data.

Rosner: They say one thing and then contradict themselves in the analysis.

Allen: They’ll say, “Polls are snapshots,” but then they analyze them as predictions. There’s a disconnect. Saying you understand something and demonstrating it are two different things. This is why I was so excited when the publisher asked me to write a book on statistical literacy. Instead of writing for experts in a bubble—which they need to get out of—I also had the chance to explain these concepts more broadly.

One key concept I talk about is the idea of a simultaneous census. What does a poll measure? That seems like a dreadfully simple question. But if you ask experts, you’ll get various answers, and many will repeat a textbook definition, calling it a “snapshot.” Then, when you ask them to explain what the poll means, they often need to be more knowledgeable. Their words prove they don’t need to learn what the data signifies. They’ll say, “The polls predicted…” No. Polls are not predictions.

Rosner: So, what do polls measure, in your view?

Allen: Polls are an estimate of a simultaneous census—a snapshot of a candidate’s base of support at that moment in time, not a prediction of the future. That’s why the margin of error plays such a huge role. Take a candidate polling at 49%. Before we even discuss undecided or people potentially changing their minds, that 49% could be 50% or 51%. Or it could be 48% or 47%.

Mathematically speaking, 49% is just as likely to be 50 or 51 as it is to be 48 or 47. It’s more likely to be close to 49, so candidates polling at 49% do well. Now, compare that to a candidate polling at 44%. That 44% could be 45% or 46%, but it could also be 43% or 42%. Even at 46%—the high end of their base of support—they’re still far from 50%, which means they can easily be overtaken.

Rosner: So, it’s not just about being ahead, but about how close you are to 50%.

Allen: The closer you reach 50%, the better your chances. That’s why analyzing polling numbers properly is so important. Candidates polling at 44% are in a much riskier position because, even at their best, they’re still far from the finish line.

Allen: When I talk about the simultaneous census concept, the question it answers is: What portion of the population currently supports this candidate? It’s about understanding what a poll is measuring. In Chapter 8, I explain this with a real experiment. Suppose you had asked everyone in the population the same question simultaneously. In that case, the result would fall within the margin of error.

Rosner: You also talk about ideal polls.

Allen: But let’s talk about bad snapshots—like putting a filter on your phone to look super hot.

Rosner: Right, like Rasmussen.

Allen: Yes. Rasmussen got kicked out of the 538 aggregate for being too biased.

Rosner: So, what about those “bad pictures” of the population?

Allen: The reason Rasmussen was kicked out of the 538 aggregate wasn’t necessarily because they were too biased—it was because they didn’t share their methodology. When 538 asked, “You’ve got these numbers, but where did you get them from?” and Rasmussen essentially said, “Don’t worry about it,” that’s a red flag. It doesn’t matter if the data is legitimate—if someone says, “I’ve got these numbers,” then refuses to explain how they got them, that’s problematic.

It’s simple: your data should only be included if you’re forthright about how you conducted your polling. This is true in any field of science. It automatically loses credibility if you’re clear about your methods and your data can’t be replicated. Nate Silver has a slightly different opinion. He acknowledges that there might be a good reason not to include Rasmussen because of their methodology. Still, he argues that Rasmussen’s overall accuracy wasn’t bad, so it’s debatable.

Rosner: So, I could just put out a “Carl Allen Poll,” saying Harris is at 48 and Trump at 46, and when someone asks, “Where did you get those numbers?” I could say, “Don’t worry about it,” that would fly.

Allen: Your data shouldn’t be considered if you’re not doing real research. Accuracy alone isn’t enough—transparency is key. Without it, the data is useless.

Rosner: What about methodologies that bug you? When I look up how some polling companies operate, I see things that bother me. For example, some companies use a paid panel—they recruit 5,000 people, try to make them demographically balanced, and then ask a random sample of 1,000 from that panel each week what they think. They pay them a little, but what if the pool is contaminated? What if someone is peeing into the pool?

Allen: Yes, that’s a concern.

Rosner: And then there are companies still using landlines! I’m old—I still have a landline—but that’s outdated. What do you think of those methodologies?

Allen: I find methodologies suspect, but there’s a big “but” here. It’s important. The issue isn’t necessarily the method itself—it’s how you use it. For example, using a paid panel can introduce bias. However, you can still get valuable information if the data is weighted correctly and the methodology is transparent. It’s the same with landlines. It seems outdated, but combined with other methods, it can still contribute to a representative sample. The key is transparency and understanding the limitations of each method.

Allen: The purpose of a transparent methodology is to ensure that it is conducted with scientific goals in mind. The goal of transparent methodology is not to confine everyone to a strict framework and dictate that everything must be done in a specific way. Because it is so imprecise, polling data is a science—but an inexact science. Suppose someone develops a technique to achieve a better random sample. In that case, we should not reject it simply because it does not align with established guidelines.

I strongly advocate for diversity and innovation in methodology, provided there is transparency about how it is being conducted. Whether it’s landline polls, cell phone polls, online panels, or mixed methods, I support them all. As an analyst who examines this data, I want to determine which methodology is effective and which is not and how a flawed methodology could be improved.

The book discusses a significant point about Literary Digest, which became infamous for conducting political polls before elections. Their methodology involved sending out mail-in surveys to their subscribers, which produced a vast sample but not a random one. Their subscribers were typically more affluent and urban, which skewed the results. Despite this, for several elections in the 1920s and early 1930s, their unscientific polls produced results so close to the actual outcomes that even scientists concluded the results were reliable.

However, in 1936, Literary Digest “prediction” as it was reported, said  that Republican candidate Alf Landon would defeat Franklin D. Roosevelt with 57% of the vote. When the election results came in, Roosevelt won in a landslide, receiving 62% of the vote. This massive polling error exposed the flaws in their methodology—such as the failure to account for the demographic biases of their mailing list. In hindsight, and only in hindsight, did it become clear that their methods were unsound, but this significant failure revealed those flaws. The perception of being “accurate” by an unscientific measure gave them credibility they didn’t deserve. This is the exact mindset people still have today. Note how casually the experts that demean the Literary Digest judge a poll’s accuracy by how well it predicted past elections. Ask them what rating they’d have given to the Literary Digest prior to 1936. They’ll block you for it. A similar issue occurred in 1948 with the famously incorrect “Dewey Defeats Truman” headline, where polling missteps, and misinterpretation,also contributed to the erroneous forecast.

Allen: In Chapter 5, I emphasize that fluctuation in poll results is normal. Even the best pollsters sometimes produce slightly inaccurate results—that’s how it works. We cannot view polls as instruments that are supposed to be perfect. More independent pollsters—independent being the keyword—who do not skew their data would significantly advance the field. This will only be possible if better methodologies, like the ones I propose in the book for analyzing poll accuracy, are adopted.

Rosner: So, you should take the opportunity to plug your book hard here.

Allen: Sure. The Polls Weren’t Wrong will change how polling data is analyzed and understood in the U.S. and worldwide. I make this claim because the book’s scientific approach is one that will win out over the current methods.All the analyses and methods I use are grounded in science. The methods for analyzing pollscurrently  in the U.S. and globally are not scientifically sound. Polling will improve with a greater understanding of history and the adoption of better scientific methods. Whether this shift happens in two or twenty years isn’t for me to decide, but the world would undoubtedly benefit from it. People would have a clearer understanding of what poll data means.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Wonderful Mkhutche on Updates in Malawian Humanism, Late 2024

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/29

Wonderful Mkhutche is Humanists Malawi’s Executive Director.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are back with Wonderful Mkhutche today. I want to discuss some updated issues in Malawi, whether related to witchcraft, the parliament, the educational system, or particular people or groups being persecuted for various reasons, some of which we know. What are some of the newer developments that have taken place in 2024, since the summer, regarding humanist equality and non-religious rights in Malawi?

Wonderful Mkhutche: In general, the situation remains the same. We still have witchcraft cases and the violence that follows. Recently, a new development that surprised some, though not many, was an academic study investigating witchcraft and politics. It concluded that even high-ranking politicians believe that witchcraft is necessary for success in politics. This research also delved into other cross-cutting issues, such as how a leader can be held accountable if they believe their position is due to witchcraft rather than the people’s votes.

Regarding education, the situation remains largely unchanged. Religion heavily influences our educational system, with students taught about the Bible from early primary school. I have written extensively, arguing that we should follow a different path. We need to separate education from religion, but people have yet to be ready to accept this.

While things are mostly the same, there are minor changes here and there. 

Jacobsen: What are the issues that may have regressed in terms of activism?

Mkhutche: When I looked at the research I mentioned earlier, I felt we needed to progress. We are not moving forward because these are high-ranking individuals in important decision-making positions in the government, yet they hold these beliefs. I also considered the ongoing witchcraft debate, which may soon be taken to parliament. The Malawi Law Commission has recommended changing the law to recognize the existence of witchcraft. If this debate reaches parliament, I fear the law will change, which would take us several steps backward. Currently, the law does not recognize witchcraft, but if it does, we will be forced to argue against it.

That said, there are some positive developments. People’s attitudes are changing. For instance, whenever an issue arises concerning witchcraft or when a government official refers to prayer as the solution to the country’s problems, people tag me on social media. This indicates they want to hear the humanist perspective, different from the case seven or eight years ago. Back then, there was only one narrative about witchcraft and religious issues. Still, now, people seem more open to other perspectives.

Even the media, such as radio stations, are now engaging me whenever there are discussions about witchcraft or issues concerning religion and politics. This is a positive development.

Jacobsen: Looking at where we are now, are there any particular new cases around witchcraft allegations in Malawi that should be noted?

Mkhutche: There are not any particular cases, as the cases are the usual ones where a family accuses an older adult of witchcraft or situations where people in workplaces accuse each other of witchcraft. So, no specific cases come to mind. However, I can check our database and suggest one or two cases for you if necessary.

Jacobsen: Regarding the church’s role in Malawi, a Vatican visit about a month ago focused on the upcoming elections and the ongoing food crisis. For those who don’t know the context or haven’t had direct experience, how does having a food crisis, a highly religious society, and the Vatican’s political influence make humanist activism more difficult? You’re dealing with international institutions like the Catholic Church and the dominant political system while people are desperately searching for answers because there may not be enough food next week.

Mkhutche: Yes, exactly. The urgency of survival here is a major factor. Most people are focused on basic needs—finding food for tomorrow, getting dressed, and having shelter. When people are in survival mode, it is hard to start questioning or reflecting on religious matters. They are content with the religious beliefs they inherited from their families because they don’t have the time or energy to debate these things.

So, in this context, it is challenging to promote humanism. Christianity is the dominant religion in Malawi, not only in the religious sphere but also in Malawians’ social and political life. When you talk about issues like witchcraft, I have encountered many people who use the Bible as evidence that witchcraft exists. This makes it difficult to challenge the Bible’s dominance in Malawian society.

Even though they may not have much evidence, the Bible is infallible for many. If they were to deny the existence of witchcraft, despite the lack of evidence, they would feel like they are going against the Bible. 

Jacobsen: However, there has been a positive development from the church’s side. We have a Catholic Bishop Martin Mtumbuka, who openly states that he does not believe in the existence of witchcraft. He argues that witchcraft is the result of poverty and ignorance.

Mkhutche: Bishop Mtumbuka is quite vocal about this point. Two weeks ago, I even wrote an article in the newspaper recognizing the important role he is playing because, in a way, he is challenging the Christian belief in witchcraft. I described him as a courageous man willing to spark this debate. If we have more individuals like him in the coming years, other religious leaders may take a similar stance. This would help us greatly, as religious people are unlikely to listen to us humanists directly. They can listen to their religious leaders if they also take that stand. 

Jacobsen: There are grassroots campaigns plus help from international groups such as UNICEF. So, I am aware of the Vaccinate My Village campaign that happened in Malawi. Community leaders, health workers, and others could collaborate to build community sensibility around vaccinating against COVID infections. So, they can naturally resist taking the vaccines when they may not have as many intensive care units if the situation worsens. But, even in wealthy countries like the United States, they have anti-vaxxers. So, it doesn’t necessarily concern the country’s wealth. It has to do with your sensibility about how you understand the world. 

Mkhutche: Yes. 

Jacobsen: So, how is the humanist community doing there now for humanist Malawi? 

Mkhutche: When it comes to vaccine issues, they are not directly connected to witchcraft because, in the Malawian understanding, we have two kinds of things. We’re not talking about these mysteries. We have witchcraft, which is connected to things happening in the tradition and the local context. Then we have Satanism, things that happen, maybe from the urban or foreign setup. So when it comes to issues of the vaccine, people are more aligned towards thinking that the vaccine is connected to certain and not witchcraft, per se. However, a small section of the population comes up with that additive. We also have another section that may bring about conspiracy theories. But in general, people are receptive whenever there is a certain vaccine. So, when we look at this context and how we are working as a humanist, we are working against a society that behaves differently from how we view our world as a humanist. So you have a society that believes that everything, any detail, happens in our lives because of God. So whenever there is a drought, there is no food, they say that it’s God, or even sometimes they will say Satan. 

Jacobsen: And what’s the current size of Humanists Malawi now? 

Mkhutche: In terms of membership, we have around 120 members. This measurement is based on our WhatsApp group. I started an initiative to register everyone as members a year ago formally. Still, only about five people have registered so far. Some people need to see the benefits or positivity of registering.

In contrast, others are hesitant because they do not want to be openly identified as humanists or atheists for various reasons. But for now, we use the WhatsApp group as the standard for our membership count. Of course, some people come and go, but we generally use that as our basis.

Jacobsen: When talking to your members, what are the most consistent compliments about the community once they understand what you’re all about? And what are the most common complaints about the broader culture in Malawi?

Mkhutche: In a sense, the Humanist Malawi community becomes a sanctuary for people. Once they understand what we stand for, they often compliment the openness and the fact that we provide a space where people can freely express themselves without fear of judgment. However, they also often express frustration about the dominant religious and cultural mindset in Malawi, which can be isolating for those who question or reject traditional beliefs.

Jacobsen: Regarding positive feedback from your members, what are they most happy about?

Mkhutche: They are happy that we have made a breakthrough on certain platforms, especially in the media, where we were previously absent. As I mentioned, we are constantly discussing humanism from different perspectives, and they are glad to see that it is now part of the public discourse. Some members are also positive that I am publicly advancing this narrative.

Others express that they felt religion had confined them, and now that they have joined the humanist movement, they feel free in their minds. They appreciate understanding the world in its complexity rather than through the limiting lens of religion. These are some of the positive responses we get.

Regarding negative feedback, members often feel that the humanist community in Malawi could be more well-organized. As I mentioned earlier, we have gotten people to register to get to know each other, follow up, and be there for each other when needed. But people did not come forward. It is easier to be organized when members are willing to show up. It would be beneficial to be more organized, especially in cases of illness, funerals, or other events where humanism should also be represented.

Jacobsen: Have you considered hosting an annual conference, symposium, or pub night? I don’t know what the equivalent would be in Malawian culture. Still, some seasonal or monthly gatherings for members would be good.

Mkhutche: We have considered that, but I was skeptical about whether the idea would work, given the members’ commitments. However, we are developing our first magazine to gather stories from our members. Members themselves will contribute these stories. We are also working on a book where members will provide articles.

This is a way to organize ourselves on a different platform since we face challenges meeting in person. We plan to organize a conference to discuss various humanist themes. We’ve had a similar initiative. Last year, we held a debate at the University of Malawi. However, the attendees were students who were not members of Humanists Malawi. This showed us that we can organize events where humanism is discussed, and we hope to extend this to our members.

The challenge with hosting larger events, like a conference, is that they can be expensive. We would need to invite people from across the country, covering transportation, accommodation, and food—which may not be easy in our context. But it’s something I always think about.

Jacobsen: Are you noticing any demographic commonalities within your roughly 120 members, or are you getting people from various backgrounds across Malawi? Do you notice any common trends in your members’ demographics?

Mkhutche: Yes. Most members of Humanists Malawi come from a religious background because that is the default position for nearly every Malawian. Everyone is raised within a religious context. Regarding gender, I would say 99 percent of our members are men. It’s not that we discourage women from joining. Still, in our context, it is rare for women to have the courage to debate against societal norms and religious identity.

At one point, we had around five women in our WhatsApp group, but almost all left. This is largely because of our context—women are generally not as forthcoming when it comes to questioning religion. So, in terms of demographics, we all share a religious background, but the group is predominantly male. The majority of our members are also young people.

The youth are at the forefront of questioning religious issues, unlike the older generation, which is still deeply involved in the church. Young people are exposed to new ideas through information, knowledge, and social media, so they are more willing to engage with humanism.

Jacobsen: Last year, there was a proposal to recognize the existence of witchcraft in legislation. What has happened with that?

Mkhutche: That proposal is now at the cabinet level. When it reaches the cabinet level, they are preparing to discuss it. After the Minister of Justice scrutinizes it from all angles, the government will present its perspective and then take it to parliament for debate and possible approval. However, it has been stuck at the cabinet level for some time, likely because it’s controversial.

But one of these days, we will see it in parliament. Once it gets there, it will likely pass, given the nature of our politicians and a recent study that found many Malawian politicians believe in witchcraft. They believe it sustains their political careers. We must also acknowledge that these politicians come from backgrounds where witchcraft was ingrained in their beliefs. When it reaches parliament, it will likely pass, which could set us back by ten years. We would have to start all over again to change that law.

It’s also important to note that some of our allies who combat common issues have deep philosophical differences, which can complicate things.

Jacobsen: On Bishop Martin Mtumbuka of the Catholic Church in Karonga Diocese, he has taken a stand against witchcraft-based violence. What can you say regarding mutual support in combating this particular issue?

Mkhutche: Yes, Bishop Mtumbuka is one of our major allies. Of course, other prominent individuals occasionally write on their social media platforms that they don’t believe in witchcraft. As for Bishop Mtumbuka, I plan to meet him. A few days ago, I was able to get his contact information. So, if he comes to the south or central regions, I will meet him and discuss how we can collaborate.

If we take a picture together and share it publicly, it will show that we are united in saying that witchcraft does not exist. That kind of collaboration is what I am looking for. I learned this approach from Dr. Leo. He said that even if you work with church leaders, as long as you share the same goal, you should not hesitate to collaborate because we all work toward the same goal—human welfare.

Jacobsen: I’m just double-checking the news. I haven’t seen anything new, except that Father Claude Boucher, from the Catholic Church in Bula Mission, Dowa, recently passed away.

Mkhutche: Yes, Father Boucher was truly one of a kind. He tried to find common ground between religion, especially Christianity or Catholicism, and local culture. In doing so, he was initiated into the Gule Wamkulu secret cult among the Chewa people. At one point, he even attempted to explore witchcraft. He clearly stated that if anyone could introduce him to witchcraft, they should do so because he wanted to understand Malawian culture deeply. Unfortunately, no one was willing to take him down that path.

So, while he did not explicitly say that witchcraft does not exist, he pointed out that there was no one available to teach him about it. I remember writing about his death, and I emphasized that if someone like him wanted to explore witchcraft. Still, no one was available to guide him; perhaps we could conclude that witchcraft is not real. After all, someone should have been willing to teach him if it were genuine.

Jacobsen: Was he Canadian?

Mkhutche: Yes, originally from Canada.

Jacobsen: Do you know which part of Canada he was from? 

Mkhutche: I need to find out which part of Canada. He was probably from the French-speaking part, so Quebec or Ottawa.

Jacobsen: That’s funny. I didn’t know that! You learn something new every day.

Mkhutche: Exactly.

Jacobsen: All right, let’s call it a day.

Mkhutche: Yes, wonderful. Thank you very much for your time today. I appreciate it.

Jacobsen: Thank you. Let’s keep talking next time.

Mkhutche: Absolutely. Take care.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Movember, EMS, Firefighters, Resilience With Frank Leeb

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/28

The Enhanced Stress First Aid program, funded by Movember, provides tailored mental health support for firefighters and EMS, improving accessibility through online training and flexibility. Frank Leeb is the Managing Director for the First Responder Center for Excellence and a Retired FDNY Chief Officer.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Frank Leeb, who will discuss advancements in mental health support for firefighter and EMS organizations. The First Responder Center for Excellence has developed an enhanced Stress First Aid (SFA) program. This new program is designed to help firefighters and EMS personnel manage stress in their high-pressure roles.

How does building mental well-being and resilience benefit professionals? This is a softball question.

Frank Leeb: Yes, it is. Building mental resilience is crucial. It helps prepare responders for the challenges and situations they may face as firefighters, EMTs, or paramedics.

By introducing resilience-building mechanisms early, our first responders are better equipped to manage the stress of their jobs. They can recover more quickly if they experience increased stress due to their work. In the fields of homeland security, fire, and EMS, we often refer to the concept of being “left or right of the boom”—meaning before or after an incident occurs. Our focus is on preparing responders before an incident, in the “left of the boom” stage, to build their mental resilience. This is the primary goal of the program.

Jacobsen: Many classes are now offered online, which is especially helpful for those juggling responsibilities like family or caregiving. This format allows more people to access and attend these courses, making it easier for them to gain valuable information. How extensive are the online services for this education?

Leeb: The class we offer takes about 40 minutes to complete one module. It’s free for firefighters or EMS personnel who want to take it. Initially, the program was delivered in person as part of a three-year project with Movember. However, due to COVID-19, we transitioned to an online format.

The long-term benefit of offering this online is substantial. In-person classes could only reach a limited number of people. Still, online courses allow us to “force multiply” the message, reaching many more responders, especially in remote areas where gathering enough people for in-person training can be challenging. Smaller or rural departments often need more funding for in-person training, so this online option enables them to train all their members without the need to travel to a single location. They can complete the course from the comfort of their homes or firehouses.

This model, which we implemented during our work with Movember, has proven successful. The First Responder Center for Excellence plans to create more modules in this format.

Jacobsen: How was stress managed for firefighters and EMS personnel in the past, and how is it viewed now? How is this newer understanding integrated into the education?

Leeb: That’s a great question. Often, we have peer support groups and people who come in after a firefighter is struggling. But again, let’s switch to preloading the mechanisms to deal with it. Let’s teach different strategies, such as breathing exercises or mindfulness, and equip responders with the tools to recover quickly. In addition, bringing those trainings online, as I mentioned, has broadened the audience we can reach.

Jacobsen: When I was in basic training for the Canadian military this year for 7 of the 8 weeks/8 of the 9 weeks, they introduced tactical breathing. So, they practice something similar to pranayama. It’s essentially the same when it comes to calming the nervous system and reducing anxiety. This kind of direct physiological practice is very helpful in stressful situations.

Leeb: Well, those techniques would have been useful for you in Ukraine, right? It’s all about calming and getting your body into the right state.

Jacobsen: That’s right. 

Leeb: It’s about understanding the sympathetic and parasympathetic systems and how we can influence them. That’s what these classes aim to do—they provide the tools first responders need to survive, thrive, and continue. We know that first responders encounter situations that many people will never see. They do things and go places that most people won’t experience on a normal day. We want our first responders to be resilient and ready for the next call. 

Jacobsen: Their work conditions are often unpredictable. For example, when I was in Ukraine, a couple of instances caused genuine fear due to the circumstances. However, I won’t go into detail. That’s a reality for first responders. In extreme work environments, whether domestic or international, they witness emergencies, tragedies, and death firsthand. It doesn’t have to be like a high-speed car chase in a movie with Harrison Ford or Mel Gibson. Simply witnessing traumatic situations in others is physiologically triggering.

Leeb: Exactly. You’re right. It could be as simple as responding to a medical run and encountering a case of child abuse or a young child who didn’t survive. You might also be performing CPR on someone or attending to a horrific car accident. It doesn’t have to be a major disaster like 9/11, where I was a responder in the afternoon in lower Manhattan. We know there are significant mental health impacts from those situations. And just a month later, in October of the same year, a plane crashed in Queens, and I responded to that as well. Programs for mental health back then were either lacking or inadequate.

In many cases, the necessary mental health support systems were not in place to prepare you for the psychological impact of those experiences. When I was with the FDNY, where I recently retired, this led to a drastic shift in how we handle peer counselling and our counselling unit. There has been significant evolution in this area. Similarly, at the First Responder Center for Excellence, transitioning from in-person to online training while ensuring we preload these mental health mechanisms into first responders represents a dramatic shift in preparing for these inevitable events. Firefighters will face these challenges, and it doesn’t matter whether you work in a busy city like New York or Toronto or in a suburb anywhere—emergencies happen everywhere.

Online training is important because we can reach responders everywhere, which is crucial. 

Jacobsen: Not every responder will get the same attention or recognition that 9/11 first responders received, like when Jon Stewart advocated for their health issues. His focus was primarily on cancer and other related conditions. But when it comes to mental health, it’s rare to see long-term, intensive advocacy from someone that prominent. How do you balance short-term initiatives, like month-long awareness campaigns like Movember, with the long-term commitment required for mental health support?

Leeb: For us, working with Movember was part of a three-year project. So, regardless of the month, our class was available year-round because emergencies happen all year, and preparing for mental wellness is a constant task. Movember was the perfect partner for us because of their recognition and because when people see the Movember logo, particularly men—and firefighters are predominantly men—they pay attention. While we’re working to shift the demographics a bit, Movember’s appeal and global reach were crucial in helping us get our message out to the right people.

Let’s face it: who still shaves their mustache in November? Some firefighters keep their mustaches in November without knowing the backstory behind Movember or why it started. When we can leverage organizations like Movember for good, it’s a win for men everywhere, especially for firefighters. That’s why the program was successful.

When we shifted to the online class, we immediately saw positive results. Based on feedback, we adjusted the content slightly in years two and three and ended up with an astonishing completion rate of 76%. If you have a program where nearly 80% of participants complete it, that’s a significant achievement.

Jacobsen: That’s a great final note. What do you think?

Leeb: I agree, that’s good. Thank you for your work, too—whether it’s about this or your reporting from Ukraine, it’s important for people to hear those stories.

Jacobsen: Thanks. I’m just a holler-back girl!

Leeb: [Laughing] All right. Take care of yourself.

Jacobsen: You too. Take care. Bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Matthew Lesko on Grants for Debt

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/28

 Matthew Lesko, born May 11, 1943, is an American author and infomercial personality known for his “Free Money” books and TV appearances. He gained fame for his colorful suits adorned with question marks and claims to help people access government funds. Despite criticism, Lesko has published over twenty books on federal grants and public assistance. He resides in Maryland with his third wife, Wendy Schaetzel Lesko, and their two children.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Matthew Lesko to discuss grants, debt, and other intriguing topics that, when tax time comes around, everyone can’t help but feel anxious about. You’ve had a 40+ year career educating the public about these matters. My first question is: why did this interest you, and how did you make a living?

Matthew Lesko: Honestly, I don’t know. I’m 81 years old now. When I started, I was in the military for three years, two months, and nine days during the Vietnam War. Afterward, I went to graduate school. I wasn’t much of an intellectual, but several universities took my GI Bill money, even though I couldn’t get into grad school before the war.

After that, I earned an MBA and started several businesses. My first MBA was in computers, and I launched a computer software company in the 1970s, but it failed. Another business I started also failed. I kept failing at everything.

Then, I became a consultant. When you’re failing, you often end up as a consultant. I lived in Washington, D.C., and started working for Fortune 500 companies, helping them navigate the federal government to get what they needed. I didn’t know much about Washington myself, however. I grew up in a small town called Wilkes-Barre, Pennsylvania—like Henderson Hot Springs or a town like that. I didn’t know anything about government, but I was hungry, and these companies were paying me to find information. So, I went to various government agencies and was shocked by the available resources.

Coming from a small coal-mining town, I had always thought the government was just the IRS, the DMV, and the post office—that was it. But what shocked me was that people could secure millions of dollars and become billionaires through government programs. I thought, “Holy shit, why doesn’t everyone do this?” Especially the people back in Wilkes-Barre!

That was my first business, and it grew. I started with just myself, a phone, and a desk, which eventually became successful. But after a while, I got tired of helping rich people—they were no fun. All they cared about was making more money. I wanted to enjoy life and have fun, and I found that giving talks and seeing people smile and laugh brought me joy.

I used to give speeches at companies like Procter & Gamble, but no one ever laughed during those talks. It would take me weeks to realize I had done a good job because everyone was too afraid to show emotion in front of their colleagues. That environment wasn’t for me.

Then, one day, an agent found me. There was an article about me in Parade magazine, a big Sunday supplement in the U.S. that reaches millions of readers. The article was about how I helped businesses find government information. After publishing it, an agent approached me and said, “Why don’t you write a book?”

I laughed because I had flunked English three times in college. Writing a book felt like going to Mars. But, well, here we are!

Jacobsen: You tried that with your book, and it became a New York Times bestseller. How did that come about?

Lesko: Yes, I did! The book became a New York Times bestseller, and I copied everything from government publications. I didn’t write a word. Remember, I flunked English.

I found a book at the Government Printing Office called The Catalog of Federal Domestic Assistance and literally cut and pasted from it. You could do that with government publications. Nothing in the government is copyrighted because “We, The People,” own everything. See? So, you’re not protecting anything because everyone is the owner. So, I took that catalogue, which had around 2,000 programs, and made a book out of it.

After a couple of failed businesses, I had already learned that having customers is the key to staying in business. If you can’t get customers, you don’t have a business. Everybody worries about all this other stuff, but that’s irrelevant. After wasting a lot of money on advertising, I realized that free advertising—getting people to write about you—is the best way. I couldn’t afford to buy an article in Parade magazine, but getting someone to write it costs me nothing. It’s all about hard work and understanding the process.

When my consumer book came out, I thought, “How do I market this?” Local talk shows were the way to go at that time—every city had them. Not just talk radio but local news shows, too. I made a career selling millions of books by going from city to city, doing ten shows in one city, getting on a plane, and doing ten more shows in the next. That’s how I built my success.

But then people stopped buying reference books because of the Internet. Remember that? It put me out of business for reference books since everyone thought they could get everything for free online. It took me years to figure out how to pivot because the information is still important. I just had to figure out how to present it in a way that people would find valuable.

What I do now is more successful than anything I’ve done before. I had infomercials that were famous here in the U.S., and I sold many books. But now, it’s about community. I have something called LeskoHelp, which is people helping people. I’m just the “trained seal” who gets people in, but the real magic happens when others who’ve figured out the system help people get the necessary resources. This has been more profitable than anything I’ve done before.

My other businesses were bigger but less profitable than this one. I love it because I see how much it helps people. People who didn’t know how to spell “USA” now get grants to pay their rent or utilities. They had no idea this help existed.

What bothers me is that rich people know all about this stuff and use it constantly. The people who need it don’t know it exists. In America, half the population can’t afford an unexpected $500 bill. They don’t have the money. There’s so much need in this country now. The rich keep getting richer, and the poor keep falling further behind.

The number of impoverished people is increasing, and these government programs are more important than ever. The government now gives out an average of $17,000 per person every year through these programs. But there are thousands and thousands of different programs, and people have yet to learn about them. People will call a government office, and even the people working there don’t know what programs they have available.

The key is finding the right office and transferring that information to people who need it. I don’t think I’m the best person to teach someone just starting because I have 50 years of experience. That can be intimidating for someone new to this. It’s hard to understand where they’re coming from.

But the most valuable part of what I do is through the community of members who’ve learned from me. They can teach each other. The best part is that I only charge $20 monthly for access. I could easily charge $2,000 or $3,000, and people would pay for it. In the U.S., information is worth what people are willing to pay. But I didn’t want to do that. Everyone told me I should charge at least $500 a month when I started. Instead, I wanted to be the $20 guy.

For $20 a month, you can get as much information as possible. There’s no upsell, no hidden fees. I don’t care. I’ll even teach you for free, and I do that often. I want people to know that they don’t need me. Some people in your neighbourhood—wherever you are in the U.S.—get paid by the government to do what I do, and they do it for free. But nobody knows about them. People on the street don’t know that.

Lesko: What was the question again?

Jacobsen: How did you originally get started with this 49 years ago? You’ve given a lot of context, but I also want to dive into how major media coverage—like on Oprah or Larry King—helped expand your reach to the millions of people who watch those shows. How did that exposure help?

Lesko: Oh. It helped me reach more people than I ever imagined. That’s why I was a regular on Late Night with David Letterman. I must have appeared on his show seven times or so. They’d call me whenever someone cancelled. I learned early on that the media doesn’t care what you say. I used to think, “They’re going to open my book, go to page 37, and ask me about this specific fact.” But nobody does that. Nobody reads it. It’s all entertainment.

I was the go-to guest when someone cancelled. I remember once when Letterman’s team called me in Chicago in the middle of the day. They said, “Did someone cancel? We need you here for the 5 o’clock show.” And just like that, I’d fly to New York.

What a thrill it was! I always wondered, “Who am I subbing for?” Larry King used to do this, too, when he had an hour-long show. He’d have one guest for the first half-hour and another for the second half-hour. He’d say, “Lesko, come on down and wait. We may or may not use you as the second guest.”

I’d sit there while some big star was on during the first half-hour. If the star couldn’t stay for another half-hour, they’d say, “Let’s go with Lesko.” If the star said yes, I’d be bumped, but they’d owe me one, and I’d get invited back again. That’s how I became a reliable, professional guest. But, of course, there was always a limit to that.

Then I started thinking about how to market myself. I realized that I was doing so well as a guest, so I needed to figure out how to translate that success into paid ads without actually paying for the ads. I never paid for anything. I discovered that if I provided an ad and said, “Hey, if nobody buys this time slot, use my ad, and I’ll give you half the money,” I could make a fortune. I did this on CNN and made so much money but didn’t pay for the time. My theory was simple.

Back when I was selling books in New York, it was frustrating that bookstores got half the money. I got, like, 10%. Practically nothing! My market wasn’t people hanging around bookstores, but when I was a guest on shows like Larry King, viewers had to go to a bookstore to get my book. I was driving traffic to bookstores, but my audience wasn’t necessarily book browsers.

When I decided to publish my books, I wondered how I would do it. Should I publish 100,000 books and send them to bookstores? I didn’t have that kind of money. So, I figured out a different approach. Larry King was one of the first places I tested it. I used an 800 number. People would call, give their credit card information, and I’d get the money before they even got the book. It was great!

I didn’t need money upfront to make it work, and I was getting national coverage through the 800 number. My market wasn’t people hanging out in bookstores. My customers were people struggling in life, and they needed quick access to the information I had. This approach worked well. Then I did infomercials, which were huge. I love entertaining and trying to bring joy to people’s lives. That’s why I dress like this—every day is about bringing joy to my own life, too.

I dress like this all the time. When I walk down the street, people smile at me. They don’t know me or my work—maybe some do occasionally—but just seeing me makes them smile, and that’s why I do it. But when people look at you and smile, that’s a wonderful feeling. If I can make people smile for no reason, and they don’t even know me—that’s a gift. Even if they don’t buy anything, just having people around you always smiling—that’s a nice way to live. I don’t care that much about selling anymore.

Jacobsen: How can ordinary Americans take advantage of some of these grants, which average $17,000 annually?

Lesko: That’s the key! It would be nice if there were a single website for it all, but I have eight websites you can start with. These people do what I do, but they do it for free because the government pays them. Let’s go through some of them.

If you have bad credit, there are government programs not only to pay your living expenses—rent, utilities, mortgage, or car payments—but also to provide free counsellors. These counsellors will sit down with you, help you eliminate debt, and deal with your creditors—all free. You can find them at hud.gov/counseling. You can make an appointment right there.

I recommend making appointments with 2 or 3 of these counsellors because only some know everything, and you want to ensure you understand all your options. Otherwise, your alternative is to go on Google, type in “debt,” and get 250 million websites. The right program is in there, but you’ll never find it—it’s probably on page 7,240. You’ll never get to it because everything on Google is from someone trying to make money off you. Everything I’m telling people about comes from people who want to give you money. These programs don’t have advertising money, so you’ll never find them on Google. People get frustrated and end up paying someone when they don’t have to, which only gets them into deeper financial trouble.

The next thing is doing something with your life. Do you want to start a business? Be a freelancer? Have an invention? Start a nonprofit? The government provides free consultants in every city in the country—probably half a dozen to two or three dozen in each city. These consultants receive government grants to help you set things up. They don’t charge you. They help you find money, give you legal assistance—everything.

The government has a database where you can find these consultants. Go to sba.gov/local-assistance, enter your ZIP code, and find out where these people are. You call them up and make an appointment. Getting Help these days requires some reporting skills, like what you do as a reporter.

With Google, people think they no longer need to use the phone. But I’m sure when you’re working on an article, you have to get on the phone, talk to half a dozen people, and gather real information. Instead of relying on 500 websites and still knowing nothing, you talk to people. That’s what you must do now—at least for my work. It’s essential!

So that’s free help for you to get started on that business you’ve always wanted or that invention idea instead of going to Google and finding someone who will charge you $10,000 to do something worse. There’s also a ton of job training in the United States. It’s incredible.

Most of our population doesn’t have a degree, which used to be where all the money was. Now, it’s all about skills. You don’t need a degree as much anymore but need the right skills. The government is pouring a lot of money into training programs and will pay you while you train. You could make maybe $40,000 a year while you’re training, and after a couple of years, you could move into a career making $100,000 a year—without a degree. All of this can be done without a degree.

A good place to start for job training is careeronestop.org. You go there, call them, make an appointment, and talk to someone. That’s how you get things done. We tend to think we need to find an application to fill out, but no—you need to find someone who knows what they’re doing. It’s like when you’re writing an article. I’m sure you want to talk to a knowledgeable person who can tell you exactly what to look for, right? Instead of going down 500 alleys and finding nothing, you want to know the best ones to explore.

And it’s hard to do this through Google. Maybe A.I. can help. I’ve used it myself. It’s fancy and entertaining, but when it comes to finding this kind of information—the non-commercial stuff—it’s not always from the heart. Our economy is two-thirds capitalism, but the other third is the “giving economy.” This includes nonprofits and government offices—places that give back to you, not take money from you.

So, for example, you can use ChatGPT. Even the free version will work. You could ask, “Show me 50 nonprofit organizations and government offices that help me get money or resources to start a business in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania. Give me the websites.” And you’ll get them. You won’t get 5 billion websites with people trying to sell you something—you’ll get useful information. I know this data so well that every time I use it, I can tell it’s the real stuff.

That excites me about A.I. But, like everything, once it gets too popular, someone will figure out how to make money off it, and then we’ll get all the nonsense again, like what happened with Google. Another wonderful site we have here in the U.S. is findhelp.org. You may have something similar in Canada. It’s a database of nonprofit organizations and government offices that give money and help for education, jobs, healthcare, legal services, and more. I put in my ZIP code and found 3,900 organizations in my area alone that help with all kinds of things.

I was helping someone with this and needed financial assistance. So, I put the term “financial assistance” and my ZIP code into findhelp.org. I have 250 nonprofit organizations in my ZIP code giving financial assistance. You can do the same thing—go to findhelp.org, put in your ZIP code, and you’ll see. It’s amazing. For example, if you need Help with rent, you’ll find 70 or so programs that help people with rent—not just one program.

That’s the problem. People hear about grants, try one place, and if it’s not for them, they give up and say, “There are no grants for me. Lesko must be an idiot!” But it doesn’t work that way. It’s like looking for a job—you have to knock on many doors, but you have to knock on the right doors. If you’re on Google, most of the doors you’re knocking on ask for money from you. You might only find one or two that want to give you money, and if they say no, you think it’s not for you.

That’s something I have to help people fight against. It’s the same with healthcare. I know that some developed countries don’t have free healthcare. You might think Canada’s doing just fine. I know, I know, that was my joke!

Jacobsen: Canada has exciting developments, like early national pharmacare and more. Canada is moving closer to a European-style extended model. There are also organizations working on key issues like reproductive rights and pharmacokinetics. They’re better equipped to discuss those topics. Still, your joke does highlight the difference between the U.S. and Canada, especially for middle- and lower-income people.

Lesko: For people in the U.S., having something like that is a dream. But here’s a website that can help: needyMeds.org. It’s a great resource to find low- and no-cost clinics, prescription drugs, and even grants to help with travel for medical care. They also provide resources for living expenses while you’re recovering. These aggregators are important to me because I don’t have to put all this information together—they do.

What’s interesting to me is what’s happening in Nevada. Medicaid is for low-income people who get good care while the income limit is there. Nevada is now including rental assistance as a health condition in Medicaid. If you don’t have a place to live, you’re more likely to get sick and end up in the emergency room, so they’re offering six months of rent as part of Medicaid coverage. That’s fascinating to me.

All of these things are a struggle, but thank God it gives me something to do until I die. It’s something bigger than myself to work on, which is the key in life—having something bigger than yourself. And that’s why narcissists have a frustrating life—they’re never working on something bigger than themselves. The only way to get out of that is to focus on something beyond yourself. I might have a bit of narcissism in me, too. I could easily get stuck in my head and never get out. Even at my age, though I don’t need to figure out how to feed myself anymore, I still ask, “How many people can I help?”

That’s why now, what I work on is love. I can’t run faster, get stronger, or get smarter—all that stuff is going downhill with age. But I can love harder. That’s something I can still improve on. That’s why I wear hearts now. I want to figure out how to love more deeply. Growing up in the fifties as a man, you couldn’t talk about love. If you said “love,” you had to marry the person! Especially to another man—you couldn’t say that. That’s only recently become more accepted. But now, I’m opening my heart, and even with LeskoHelp, I’m trying to love these people in a way that no one else can. The more you help others, the more your heart grows.

Lesko: Helping others is selfish because it feels so good. You’re not just doing something for them; you’re doing it for yourself. When your heart grows, you have a better life. Walking around with an open heart is the most interesting way to live.

Lesko: In the U.S., at least, not much in our society encourages an open heart. You’re supposed to be meaner, tougher, and better than everyone else. It’s too bad. When I started this journey of self-expression, I began by wearing these outfits. This is who I am inside, but I was never encouraged to show it. I lost much money at first because people didn’t want me on their T.V. shows. They’d say, “How can this guy dressed like a clown talk about finances?” But I knew this was me. And once I embraced that, more doors opened.

Lesko: The tough things in life are the real moments that shape you. Anyone can handle success—that’s easy. You get the money, go to the bank. There is no challenge there. But how do you handle failure? That’s the real test because it happens more often. I’ve written 100 books, but only 10 made money.

So, how do you deal with failure? That’s the common scenario—not “How do I invest $1,000,000?” That’s a nice problem to have, but it’s rare. That’s why my work with LeskoHelp is focused on sharing that understanding with others. We encourage the people I work with and the members to love and support one another.

This would’ve sounded ridiculous to me 20 or 30 years ago—maybe even a few years ago. But somehow, in my eighties, this idea of opening your heart has become important to me. Life doesn’t give you many chances for that, so you have to set it up yourself. I call it “throwing your party.” No one will throw a party for you—you must make it happen. It’s tough because everyone’s so protective. Even when you get advice from your loved ones, they often act as your biggest enemy. They want to protect you from failing, but failure is inevitable when you do something new. And that’s okay!

It has to be that way. Think about it: when you learn to walk or ride a bicycle, you’re going to fall on your ass a bunch of times before you get it right. So, it’s not wise to talk to loved ones when you’re doing something new because you’ll fail, and they’ll try to protect you. You can only say, “Yes, I know I’m going to fail,” because you must overcome that failure.

That failure opens up new things you couldn’t see until you got the stupid mistakes out of the way first. For example, getting kicked out of the Home Shopping Network cost me millions. But when that door closed, many windows opened that I didn’t even know existed.

Everyone told me, “Don’t give up that money—it’s stupid!” But it was from the heart. That’s why I believe your heart is smarter than your brain. But we don’t trust our hearts because we want to make a spreadsheet first and get expert advice. These experts don’t know what to do with their lives, so how can they tell you what to do with yours? They’re guessing just like everyone else. It’s silly how we run things in this country.

We’re all insecure, and professionals thrive on that insecurity. That’s why they must convince you they know the secret to charge more. 

Jacobsen: One of the leading causes of bankruptcy in the United States is medical bills, especially end-of-life care. Someone ends up paying for those bills, eventually.

Lesko: Absolutely. 

Jacobsen: If people are looking for help with those bills or are seeking methodologies to navigate that system, what can they do? Are there resources or strategies you can direct them to?

Lesko: Yes! There are things people can do, but often, we wait until the last moment to make these decisions. I had a member write to me about an emergency hospital visit where they didn’t have coverage, and they walked out with a $1,600 bill.

What we need to teach people is to ask how not to pay that bill. Every hospital in the United States cannot charge everyone because they receive government money. About 70% of the people who get a hospital bill in the U.S. shouldn’t have to pay it. Hospitals send the bills anyway because they’re businesses.

Lesko: But you have to know and ask. There are also nonprofit organizations that help you negotiate those bills and find government programs. One such organization is the PAN Foundation. They’ll help you navigate all that stuff. There are so many government programs available.

For instance, when Obamacare came in, about half of the people without healthcare were already eligible for existing programs but didn’t know it. That’s the problem—people don’t know about these programs and think they don’t have coverage. Another great resource is needyMeds.org. Before you go to the doctor, you can use that site to find doctors who won’t charge you because they’re already getting money from the government to provide free care.

But if you’re taken to a hospital by ambulance, and they bring you to their preferred hospital where they’re getting some commission, it’s over. However, we’ve now got regulations in place to prevent surprise medical bills, and there’s a government fund to help with that. The government has an 800 number you can call, and they’ll fight it for you for free. A good place to start finding resources like this is findhelp.org. Look under categories like “health care” and start making calls. You won’t find what you need immediately, but if you talk to enough people listed under healthcare there, you’ll find the right resource.

Try that over Google. The doctors who advertise on Google show up first, but on findhelp.org, everyone listed there doesn’t advertise and offers free services.

Another interesting thing we’re doing now—and I’m working on it myself—is giving back. Our small business isn’t big; it’s just a handful of people, but it’s so profitable that we give half the money back to members. Every month, we give away $70,000 to our paid members. They apply, and we distribute $70,000.

There’s also an organization—whose name escapes me—working with the government. What they do is buy old hospital debt for pennies on the dollar. When people don’t pay their hospital bills, it goes on their record, and then they can’t buy a house or a car because of that debt. This organization uses nonprofit or government money—say they get $10 million—and can buy $200 million of bad hospital debt with that. So, everyone in that ZIP code no longer has hospital debt. Instead of $200 million, they settle it for around $1 million.

It doesn’t solve the long-term problem, but it’s an interesting solution. If someone has a few thousand dollars and wants to help, they could give it to an organization like that and potentially clear the hospital debt of 1,000 people with just the snap of a finger. That’s one neat thing about the U.S.—we’re creative that way, even though we’re often shortsighted in addressing the root problems. We create answers that aren’t perfect but help after the fact.

Jacobsen: I want to be mindful of your time. Do you have any final core lessons to share from the last 49 years of working in this field, helping the public?

Lesko: For me, the open heart is so important now. Having fun is critical, too. If you’re not having fun, no one else will enjoy being around you, and they won’t feel love from you either. You have to have an open heart. People instinctively know if you’re genuine, which comes from being comfortable and not worried.

As a younger man, I don’t know if I could have done this as well because I was too focused on some success—which I didn’t even understand then. My success is measured by how much I can give before I die. There’s nothing else tangible you can take with you.

So, if you devote your life to helping people, even if you don’t feel like you have the skills to do that right now, remember that your heart is smarter than your brain. Make more decisions based on your heart. Use your brain to ensure you’re not going off a cliff, but follow your heart. You may not be successful, but at least you’ll have fun doing it. And honestly, even if you follow your brain, you might not be successful either, and you definitely won’t enjoy it as much.

Jacobsen: Is that enough? Matthew, thank you so much for your time today. We discussed LeskoHelp and some resources people can use if they need support, whether for minor or major issues.

Lesko: I have one more thing. People don’t always want to spend $20 to start, so try Lesko.com. It’s free! That’s a starter set, a free way to get your feet wet and see if this stuff works at all.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you so much.

Lesko: You bet. Take care. Bye!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Ex-Muslims of North America (EXMNA) to Co-Host Panel Discussion

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/27

Ex-Muslims of North America (EXMNA) to Co-Host Panel Discussion on Ending Extrajudicial Violence Resulting from Apostasy and Blasphemy Laws 

October 29, 2024 | 1:00 PM EST | Church Center of the United Nations, New York, NY

Ex-Muslims of North America (EXMNA), in collaboration with a coalition of international human rights organizations, will co-host a vital panel discussion titled “Ending Extrajudicial Violence Resulting from Apostasy and Blasphemy Laws” on October 29th, 2024, at 1:00 PM EST. The event will take place at the Church Center of the United Nations, located at 777 United Nations Plaza, New York, NY.

EXMNA is a human rights organization that focuses on providing support for those who leave Islam by advocating for the acceptance of religious dissent and reducing discrimination faced by apostates from Islam by promoting secular values. 

This event will feature distinguished panelists from diverse faith backgrounds, many of whom have personally experienced the injustice of extrajudicial violence. Panelists will engage in a crucial conversation addressing how to combat the rise in violent acts carried out against individuals accused of apostasy and blasphemy. The panel aims to bring attention to this widespread human rights violation and urge UN Member States to take decisive steps to protect those most at risk.

Muhammad Syed, Founder and President of EXMNA, emphasized the importance of addressing this issue: “The violence stemming from blasphemy and apostasy laws is not just a tragedy for those affected—it is an attack on the fundamental human right of freedom of belief. We must confront and challenge these draconian laws, which threaten anyone who dares to think freely.”

Panelists include:

Aysha Khan, Director of Operations for EXMNA, further stressed the urgency of this issue, saying: “It is crucial to emphasize that anti-blasphemy and anti-apostasy laws do not discriminate. They affect people of all faith backgrounds as well as those with no faith at all.”

This free, in-person event will spotlight survivors and advocates, focusing on the need for international cooperation to end extrajudicial violence and protect the fundamental freedoms of conscience, religion, and belief.

To register for the event, please click HERE.

For more information, please contact:  

Ex-Muslims of North America  

Email: info@exmuslims.org  

Website: https://www.exmuslims.org

Media Contact:

Aysha Khan

Director of Operations

Ex-Muslims of North America

Email: aysha@exmuslims.org

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Nasser Yousefi and Baran Yousefi on Humanistic Education’s Necessity

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/27

The Peace School is new in Canada, founded and accredited by the Ontario Ministry of Education in 2023. Currently, the school has five children with a capacity of 120 and is well-financed and supported by the parents whose children attend. The school’s pedagogy has attracted the attention and support of UNICEF, UNESCO, and UNHCR, which strongly encouraged Dr. Nasser Yousefi, the Principal of The Peace School, to share his pedagogy and learning environment with other countries. Canada was Dr. Yousefi’s first choice for the next Peace School. Dr. Yousefi began his career as a child psychologist, studying in Sweden and earning a Master’s in Education in Childhood Growth and Development. In exploring the best pedagogy and learning environment for children, Dr. Yousefi completed a PhD in Educational Approaches at Madonna University in Italy and a PhD in Educational Psychology at Northwest University in the USA. This training combined humanistic and cognitive approaches to education. For many years, Dr. Yousefi was an educational consultant for UNICEF. He has conducted educationaland research activities for various groups of children, including immigrant children, minorities, street children, and children with special needs. Dr. Yousefi was the Principal of the Peace (Participatory) School in Tehran, Iran, from 2005 to 2023, graduating 500 students from kindergarten to high school, with graduates accepted at universities in Europe, America, and Canada. Dr. Yousefi is passionate about creating the best future for children and is dedicated to creating safe and nurturing learning environments based on holistic principles. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Round 3 with Nasser Yousefi and Baran Yousefi. Hello. How are you today?

Dr. Nasser Nasser and Baran Yousefi: Good. How are you?

Jacobsen: Thank you. I’m good. I had a nap, coffee, and Diet Pepsi, and I’m doing well. I was listening to Nelly. He’s a decent rapper in some of his songs, so I’m doing well. Let’s talk more about humanistic education. What is the importance of humanistic education today? When I say this, I’m being trite because humanistic education should be valuable in any era. So, in the contemporary period, what is the appeal of humanistic teaching? And in the Canadian context, where educational outcomes are generally good, what areas could humanistic education improve even further? Those are the more relevant questions I have.

Yousefi: Thank you for giving us this time to talk about this. Humanistic psychology started shortly after World War II, so it’s been almost 70 years. It has opened many doors around the world and introduced various new subjects.

It has made significant contributions to healthcare, sociology, and industrial psychology. However, it still needs to enter education or promote itself within the educational system. It has influenced other fields, but education and schools are still needed. The humanistic approach, in general, has found its way into evolutionary biology, digital science, technology, and evolutionary anthropology.

Developmental psychology, economics, and other disciplines have also been impacted. But it hasn’t fully entered schools. Behaviorist education, established before and after the First and Second World Wars, continues to dominate schools.

The behaviourist model has long been entrenched in the educational system, and the schools that promote this approach are very powerful. This causes a contradiction between the expansion of the humanistic approach in other fields and its stagnation in schools.

It’s interesting and surprising how humanistic psychology is developing and expanding rapidly in various sectors, yet schools remain resistant. Many philosophers argue that humanistic psychology is changing the world and making it a better place. Still, schools have closed their doors to it. Behaviorist schools claim, “We’re fine; we’re working.”

We’re doing very well. We don’t need that. It’s not a matter of time. We can work that out. Even in Canada, they’re saying that our schools are good. Why do we need that in other schools? Schools are doing very well. Not just in Canadian schools but in all schools worldwide that are influenced by the behaviourist approach to education. In these schools, everything—the curriculum, the lesson plans—is predetermined for students.

Specialists decide what students should learn, what they should study, and even what they should not learn. Sometimes, they even predetermine the resources students should access or not. It’s essentially saying, “What I define as learning is what you should consider learning.” You will only succeed if you learn what I’m telling you. You have to study the material thoroughly and memorize it to pass.

This approach applies to all levels of education—from preschool and kindergarten to university. Some individuals decide in advance what students should learn. However, they never ask students what they think, what they want to learn, or how they perceive different topics. What I, the teacher, tell you is more important than what you think.

In this system, the teacher enters the classroom with a predetermined lesson or program and simultaneously delivers the same content to 20 or 30 students. Behaviourist education claims to contribute to public knowledge by teaching everyone the same subject or content. However, it is more about imposing information on students, whether they want to learn it.

While teachers deliver the same material to all students, they expect each student to practice and internalize it individually. Students are required to learn it on their own and then take tests or quizzes by themselves. The emphasis on individual grades and assessments forces students to work in isolation.

They are taught to keep their knowledge to themselves. Even though we teach one thing to everyone, they must practice and master it on their own. The grading system, specific to each student, encourages them to address issues or subjects individually, leading to competition. Students aim to achieve the highest grade alone, without collaboration.

This system fosters individuality, not individualism. It tells students that only they can learn the subject and help themselves succeed or pass the grade. Those students who achieve the highest grades often receive more benefits, whether through compliments like “You’re smarter” or other rewards.

You’re more intellectual. But we don’t interpret this as “This student did what I wanted them to do.” Behaviourist education says that if a student does what the teacher wants, it means that the student is smarter.

We also see students who, for various reasons, may not want to engage with a particular subject or may not spend as much time on it as others. Behaviourist teachers or schools often label those students as not smart or underperforming.

When students are taught to study alone, focusing solely on themselves and their success, they lose sight of the collective good or the needs of others. They are conditioned to believe that their success is only about them.

Humanistic education is the opposite of behaviourist education. Since every student is unique, we introduce various topics and programs tailored to each individual. We ask students what they think and want to learn—not based on what we want as educators but on their interests and needs.

We ask the students and gather input from teachers, parents, and others involved in the student’s life. We then design a program specifically tailored to that student. Something interesting happens in this process: although the learning experience is individualized, we encourage students to share what they have learned with others.

We ask them to share their thoughts, explain where they are in their learning journey, and discuss what they have gained from it. If they need help, they can ask for it. We promote a culture of sharing among students. Hence, they learn not just from their own experiences but also from the experiences of their peers.

In this way, education becomes a collective process; what one student learns individually benefits everyone. We move forward together, helping each other develop our knowledge because we recognize that no one can achieve everything independently.

This is the main difference between humanistic and behaviourist education. Behaviourist education begins with a general topic for everyone, often leading to individualism and isolation. In contrast, humanistic education uses individual needs and interests to contribute to the community and support others.

While humanistic education focuses on individual needs, interests, and characteristics, it teaches students how personal growth can help others. In contrast, behaviourist education doesn’t allow students to discover their interests or needs because no one asks them what they think or want. They are told what is important and what they should study, which leads to standardization.

Eventually, in behaviourist schools, all students become the same. They end up listening to the same music and following the same path because individuality is lost. It’s a form of educational standardization which limits personal expression and development. They wear the same clothes and eat the same food. When you go to different countries, you notice that young people seem similar. They all look the same, listen to the same music, and watch the same movies. It’s all part of standardization.

It’s a result of behaviourist schools, which emphasize standardization over personalization. These schools focus on making everyone conform but only care about superficial conformity. In humanistic schools, however, we emphasize personalization. While we encourage students to align with others and think about others, we also emphasize the importance of moving forward together.

In behaviourist schools, students are constantly told to think about themselves and be individualistic. Over time, students can become narcissistic because they receive the message that they need to be successful above all else. They are taught that if they are successful, they are good people.

As students compete and compare themselves to one another, they develop narcissistic tendencies. They believe that the grades they receive reflect their worth as individuals and that achieving high grades makes them inherently good people. The schools, however, forget to teach compassion.

Erich Fromm discusses this in his work. He points out that behaviourist schools don’t nurture love in students; instead, they nurture narcissism. Selfish people don’t truly love themselves—they have a distorted view of themselves, which was shaped during their school years. They don’t have real self-love.

A person who doesn’t truly love themselves cannot love others. How can someone who doesn’t love themselves help or care for others? They may appear successful in university or society. They may even become doctors, but a doctor who doesn’t love their patients won’t communicate effectively or care for them with empathy. They might become a successful engineer, but they won’t care about the person who uses their product. Their focus is solely on selling their product, not its impact on people.

These individuals are constantly thinking about their interests. Around the world, people suffer at the hands of physicians who don’t care about their patients or others who provide services without compassion. For services to truly benefit people, the provider must care about those using the service.

That’s why we see products and services being developed that don’t truly benefit people. In some European countries, those involved in human trafficking are often also involved in organ trafficking. And who performs these organ operations? Prominent doctors—highly skilled professionals.

It raises questions. Which universities did they attend? The people involved in making chemical weapons or atomic bombs are among the best chemists and scientists in the world. Yet, they use their skills in ways that harm humanity. These are the best in their fields, but their focus is purely on their professional success, not how their work affects others.

Where did you go to school? How could you create something that works against humanity and humans? This results from an education system that needs to place more emphasis on individualism and individuality. Schools aren’t doing well—not just in Canada, but everywhere. This is exactly where humanistic education can help future generations. We need to help humanistic education enter schools. The humanistic approach has a direct connection to peace. The more the humanistic approach develops, the closer we get to peace.

Steven Pinker also agrees with this theory. He supports the idea that peace grew and developed when the humanistic approach expanded to other subjects and areas. We should evolve education in schools to help students think about and help others. In that case, we can see significant changes in the world. But do we need to overhaul the entire system?

The world, as it stands now, needs this humanistic approach and this testing. A country like Canada could be the first to adopt this and advocate for other nations to follow. We can transform the educational system by fostering a loving and compassionate approach to education. If Canada takes the lead, many other countries will follow. My current lifestyle only works for some. We need to help people feel better and live better lives. The humanistic approach always supports this theory. It focuses on both individuals and others at the same time. As teachers, we can carry this philosophy to the next generations and help them thrive.

Jacobsen: Just a quick follow-up to the previous question. There are three systems at play in practice. One is more secular, meaning no religion is involved. If we take big countries like China, they use a particular political ideology as the metric for success. Students are expected to follow the party line in certain subjects, and the entire education system is geared toward conformity with the state. The focus is on creating engineers and scientists who serve the state. At the same time, they must align with party ideology in the political realm. It’s a form of looking out for oneself, but it’s out of fear and in service of the state. Another system is non-secular—it’s religious and theocratic.

You might even find someone like Harun Yahya, also known as Adnan Oktar, who wrote The Atlas of Creation in the educational curriculum. You’re learning about intelligent design and creationism from an Islamic theological perspective. In that case, you’re in a similar system, but it’s bound to religious ideology. You see this in small Christian cults in different parts of the world. So, it’s not limited to a particular religion—it’s just a faith-based version of an education system.

Another version, which you described precisely, is where individualism isn’t developed, but individuality is. That individuality is based on competition between people and fits well into any rank-ordering system. If you get an A, you’re a good person; if you get a D, you’re a bad person. Your self-esteem, self-worth, and self-concept become tied to your grades, extracurriculars, and your school’s prestige—whether it’s an Ivy League institution or not.

In this last example, you see the development of narcissism. I need to conduct formal research on connecting these ideas. Still, I’ve spoken to experts and read works that suggest there has been a rise in narcissism in North America and probably in Western countries in general over the past few decades. As for the first two examples—the secular, dogmatic education system and the religious ones—I’m not sure if there’s been a similar rise in narcissism. However, there’s a common thread in all three, which is deindividuation, something you noted earlier.

Everyone becomes more or less the same. There might be reasons for this: it could be framed as social cohesion or harmony, ensuring everyone believes in the correct faith and the right God, or ensuring everyone becomes self-sufficient in society. These outcomes may be helpful to the individual. Still, they seem more beneficial to the country’s dominant ideology.

So, within a humanistic model, what is the main proposition differentiating it from these three systems, which lean more toward a behaviourist approach? What are the core differences, aside from that the person in the humanistic model isn’t developing their individuality for more intangible things like healthy emotional development? As you would know better than I, people who slide into higher levels of narcissism are often emotionally, developmentally, and maturationally stunted.

You could summarize all that by saying that, in each case, people follow a faith-based system with the “correct” religion and political dogma or worship the Self.

Yousefi: I think those directly involved in policymaking, particularly in education, don’t necessarily love human beings. What they share, regardless of the system—whether secular, communist, religious, or capitalist—is that they don’t truly care about humans. It doesn’t matter which ideology they follow. For me, it doesn’t matter what policy a government follows if it doesn’t care about humans. Any system that lacks compassion for people is inherently corrupt.

Love for humanity is not just a simple feeling or perhaps a curiosity-driven sentiment; it is a deep respect for the historical journey of human life. Modern humans are the result of billions of years of evolution. Astonishing events have occurred for us to reach this point. Billions of humans and living creatures have made evolutionary efforts to achieve this position. Today’s human is the product of the pain, suffering, and hardships of all their ancestors. They are the result of the incredible struggles our ancestors endured to survive and overcome diseases. We are even the outcome of all the efforts our ancestors put into learning skills and enhancing their abilities.

The genes that today’s humans carry have a long history of health, wisdom, and awareness. This is how we can truly speak about love for humanity. When a human is killed in war or violence, a treasure of wisdom and knowledge is left incomplete. In this way, it’s impossible to look at humanity without feeling immense respect, gratitude, and love for nature, evolution, and life itself. How can one look at a human and not view their background with admiration and love? How can one work for humanity and not let this love flow into action?

If we love human beings, everything changes. Everything changes. I believe we need to focus more on this concept of love than on the specifics of education or capitalism. The policymakers and people in charge are confusing us with these titles—secular, non-secular, communist, capitalist, and so on.

They are causing suffering by using these titles as labels, which goes against all our evolutionary and societal progress. I considers himself committed to promoting love for human beings and teaches students and children how to love others. I believe that if we learn to love others, we can improve healthcare and the economy. We can make everything better. And now is the time to do that.

Jacobsen: I should clarify. Is it hatred of people? Or is it an incomplete understanding of the people leading to this suffering in all these different cases? That’s an important distinction.

Yousefi: Yes. So, he generally believes that love can solve any problem we face. When I asked him why he thinks we don’t love other humans, he said we were never taught to love others. In schools, we weren’t even taught how to have compassion, empathy, or love for others. As Erich Fromm would say, even love requires learning. Carl Rogers also expressed this idea—that we must learn how to love to have good policies and structures and help each other.

I sometimes thinks the world needs policymakers and leaders who are more like caregivers than traditional politicians. We need judges, leaders, or teachers who act as caregivers and can truly take care of us. Perhaps the world needs good parents—people who can help others grow, learn to love and feel compassion and empathy. 

Jacobsen: This leads to a question about contingency or a dependency on prior conditions. The idea of narcissism, for example. Individuals who have strong personality or psychological profiles in the narcissism scale, based on an expert reporting recently, do not have any potential cures at this time, at least widely accepted. So, if we have created a culture, even in wealthy and well-educated countries, of narcissism, and if there is no immediate cure or fix for this condition, and if these people are characterized by the inability to love both themselves and subsequently others, how do we implement this widely in a society where a hunk of the population who, by definition, will be unable to partake of this?

Yousefi: The idea is that humanistic psychology believes people can change. If we have logical and well-structured policies, the new generation can change. They can change just like we’ve learned many new things compared to four decades ago.

For example, people’s views on feminism and women’s rights have evolved significantly in the last five decades. The perception of the LGBTQ+ community has also changed over the past few years. How we approach the environment has also shifted—we are more environmentally conscious than we used to be. Groups of people have been working hard to teach others, encouraging change and growth.

People are much more compassionate and understanding toward individuals with disabilities than 50 years ago. We’ve changed; we’ve learned how to change and become better. This same principle can apply to other areas of society—we can learn and change together. It takes time, but it’s not impossible. But that’s not all. Especially in our market-driven world, if we focus on loving people, empathy, and compassion, everything will eventually improve. It’s heartwarming to see that people are constantly learning and changing. We are better than we were 100 years ago.

Things will improve in the next 100 years if we take action and plan for it. Many specialists believe that humanity is moving toward a better future. However, this improvement has only been possible because many people have worked hard to create a better world. Now, more than ever, we need more people to contribute to this progress. Education, in particular, has the power to make a significant impact. If humanistic principles enter the educational system, we will see a major revolution in how we love, live, and strive for peace. I hope for this revolution. I truly hope.

Jacobsen: In faith-based ideologies, the idea is typically to mould someone into a utility for worship. In secular political ideologies, the focus is often on perfecting someone to be useful to the state or the common good. In capitalist and individualistic societies, the orientation is around consumerism, individualism, and turning people into utilities to generate capital. Each of these systems has pathological elements to varying degrees.

From your perspective, it’s less about perfecting the person and more about developing the person within a human community. That’s an entirely different orientation. Is that the core difference in the humanistic model?

Yousefi: No, it’s not just about developing the individual. It’s about building a society that works for the development of all humans. A healthy society leads to healthy people, just like healthy people can lead to a healthy society.

Let me explain it this way: societies change through healthy individuals, and healthy individuals contribute to a better society. They have a mutual interaction—healthy society, healthy people; healthy people, healthy society.

Jacobsen: That directly answers my question. The three examples I gave—faith-based, secular political, and capitalist systems—each have an idealized version of a person in mind. However, your approach focuses on the dynamic interaction between the individual and society. The humanistic model works more from the bottom up. It asks, “Where is this person at? How can we develop their capacities based on their temperament?” There’s a constant feedback loop between the individual and society. Are there any other aspects of the humanistic model in the 21st century that we should cover?

Yousefi: Not for now.

Jacobsen: What do you think Pink Floyd got right in their commentary and song The Wall about the British education system in the 1970s? What did they get right?

Yousefi: What was correct about their critique? It was Pink Floyd’s take on how the system had become almost a disaster. Britannia. You can still see it—standardization. They showed how students don’t need what’s predetermined for them to learn. It’s a system of control. The controlling state wants to control everyone simultaneously, and that’s one of the criticisms they addressed.

Yousefi: He believes that sooner or later, schools will change. We have no other choice but to change; otherwise, societies will collapse from the inside. Education systems try to shape humans, but human evolution won’t allow that. The system is already devalued, and we will eventually rid ourselves of it and develop new systems and approaches. He’s waiting for that day.

Jacobsen: That’s a good final note.

Yousefi: Right.

Jacobsen: Thanks again for your time today. I appreciate it.

Yousefi: Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Jonathan Rose on the Prepper Bar and Matt Hughes

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/26

The Prepper bar was inspired by clients seeking practical, divisible precious metals for bartering and emergencies. Jonathan Rose is the Creator of the Prepper Basr and comes out of Genesis Gold Group created a wallet-sized silver bar, divisible into smaller amounts for everyday use. It addresses concerns about the impracticality of large metal bars, providing versatility, portability, and utility for preppers, homesteaders, and beyond.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, what was the inspiration behind the creation of the Prepper bar?

Jonathan Rose: The inspiration came from our clients. At Genesis Gold Group, we specialize in helping people acquire precious metals. Here in the United States, there are two common ways people do this: through an IRA or a 401(k), which can be rolled over tax and penalty-free to store physical metals, or we ship metals directly to people’s homes, where they store them.

Over the years, clients with IRAs or those holding physical metals would sometimes buy items like a kilo of gold. And while it’s impressive and valuable, it’s heavy. If you can lift it, it’s yours! But many people would ask us, “Jonathan, I have this bar of gold or silver. How do I use it? How do I spend it?” You cannot pull a hacksaw to cut it into smaller pieces for trading.

Clients often wanted something more tradeable, barterable, and practical for everyday use. We heard this repeatedly. Many of our clients are preppers or homesteaders living off the land, so we realized there was a niche in the market for more utility products. That’s how we came up with the Prepper bar.

This is the first one we minted, and it is made of silver. Essentially, the Prepper bar is “wealth in your wallet.” It’s credit-card-sized, and it fits in your wallet. It can be carried just like a credit card for those reading this.

The design features grooves, like a Hershey’s chocolate bar, that allow you to break pieces off easily. The top row is one-twentieth of an ounce, the middle row is one-quarter of an ounce, and the bottom is one-tenth. This is the only fractional, divisible bar minted in the U.S. today.

We used to offer clients a product from Switzerland called the Valcambi bar, a 100-gram bar. However, when you import from another country, you pay a premium. That premium was passed on to the client, so we decided to mint and manufacture our bar here in America. We designed it to be divided into three sections, making it versatile and practical. We started with silver, and it’s been very well-received. We then moved on to gold. This is 24-carat gold.

Jacobsen: Do these bars have the same groove sizes as the silver ones?

Rose: Yes, they have the same groove sizes. If you compare the two, the gold feels a fraction thinner than the silver. To me, it feels smoother. However, we sovereignized these two products, meaning the IRS has approved them for inclusion in IRAs.

Jacobsen: What does that do for an individual?

Rose: If they put this in an IRA, 90 to 95% of our clients who take distributions say, “Jonathan, I don’t want to liquidate this. Send me the metal.” When they get the metal, many wonder how they’ll use or spend it. Now, they can put things like the Prepper bars and other products in their IRAs and take possession of them.

These bars are easy to stack, portable, and tradable. That’s how the Prepper bar came about. When we made the prototype, it wasn’t easy to manufacture because of the challenge of making it divisible without losing pieces of metal. Some science and trial and error were involved in developing a successful product.

Once it did work, I sent a few out to some of the homesteaders who promote Genesis Gold Group, and they loved it. They thought it was the coolest thing they’d ever seen. When I called them back and asked how they liked the Prepper bar, they said, “Oh, we’ve already used it.”

I asked, “What do you mean you used it?” They explained, “Well, in our community, we do a lot of bartering and trade.” They had already spent portions of it. That blew my mind!

Would I personally buy one to trade? I live in a more civilized area, so my mindset is different. By that, I mean I live in suburban Beverly Hills. It’s a cool product to own. But I understand why my clients—especially preppers and homesteaders—would want it.

Also, I buy these bars because we’re heading toward a fiscal cliff when I look at the U.S. dollar, with $35 trillion in debt. Look at what’s happening with hurricanes, for example. We’ve had telecommunications systems go down recently at airports, leaving people stranded. Phone services have gone down.

Many people are rightfully worried about a cashless society and the rise of the digital dollar. People prefer to have something like this as a backup. If we’re ever in a cashless society or if something happens and cards don’t work. You don’t have cash on hand; this Prepper bar is like a Swiss Army knife of currency that you can carry with you.

Anytime you can take something with as long a historical track record as gold and add utility to it, you’ve got a winner. We have that with this product. We listened to what people were asking for and provided them with a solution—whether inside their retirement account or for use in bartering or emergencies.

The Valcambi bar is from Switzerland. The problem with it is that it needs to be bigger. It’s made of 1-gram pieces and comes hermetically sealed in a plastic container. When you rip it open, you lose some of its value. There is only a little utility to that bar besides looking cool.

On the other hand, this Prepper bar is made in America and is divisible by three, giving it real utility. These communities, especially preppers and homesteaders, use it in barter and trade systems—essentially, closed or relatively small communities of people living off the land.

Jacobsen: What about in the context of emergencies? How are these bars being used in more “civilized” areas of America, especially densely populated ones? What situations could these bars be useful in as well?

Rose: In case of an emergency, it provides peace of mind. People view gold as a tangible asset with intrinsic value. With the rise of a cashless society, central bank digital currencies, and growing uncertainty, many are rightfully concerned about the unknown, especially the dollar, which carries much economic baggage. This Prepper bar is something you’d want in your preparedness kit, alongside firearms, canned goods, and water supplies. It’s for those “what-if” situations, ensuring you have something tangible at home in an emergency.

Those who’ve used these bars in bartering, typically in prepper communities, are living in small towns or on farmland. Their role is centred around preparedness, and they rely on these bars for practical use in a more closed, self-sustaining environment.

But someone like myself, living in Beverly Hills, would keep something like this at home in my safe. If I ever needed to leave quickly, it’s portable. I can pick it up and throw it in my bag. If I needed to barter with it, I definitely could. People love gold and silver.

And with what’s happening worldwide, gold and silver prices have increased significantly. Today, gold and silver have risen by over 40% in the past year, which is remarkable. Does that mean they’ll go up another 40% next year? If anyone tells you that, it should raise a red flag because no one has a crystal ball. But we have a pretty good roadmap and can see what’s happening worldwide.

Just look at what’s unfolding in Israel, Russia, and Ukraine or what Jerome Powell, head of the Federal Reserve, said about expecting more regional bank failures. These are clear signs of economic instability.

Again, we talk about debt, and debt does matter. The dollar has much baggage, especially with a pivotal election in less than 30 days. What will the next big factor be after that? Will it be supply chain issues or another COVID outbreak?

The world has changed a lot since COVID, and so have people’s strategies regarding how they feel they need to prepare for the unknown. When people look at their overall financial game plan, assets like these check a box for many.

Jacobsen: As people break off different segments, are there any concerns about the durability of the remaining piece after a segment is removed?

Rose: No, not at all. I’ve broken off plenty of pieces myself. I have some lying around on my desk here. Let’s see if I’ve got any pieces.

Jacobsen: Is it your stray silver and gold?

Rose: Yes. I know we can’t see it on camera, but with some smaller pieces, you can bend them, and they will break off. It’s robust. It won’t break into your wallet—you’ll need to apply pressure, almost like snapping a credit card. You’ll feel it heating up, and then it will slowly break.

This isn’t plastic—it’s metal—but it’s malleable. We put much thought into the design to ensure it breaks cleanly. The grooves are designed to a specific thickness to ensure that when you break it, there’s no waste. The pieces come apart neatly.

Jacobsen: What are the Genesis Gold IRAs, and how does this build into the long-term vision of the Prepper Bar? You mentioned IRAs earlier, but this is a more targeted question about Genesis Gold and its long-term vision.

Rose: Genesis Gold Group has a long-term vision that integrates IRAs and precious metals. I used to work for Merrill Lynch and Morgan Stanley and was involved with the London Metal Exchange. I’ve been in this industry for many years.

When I worked at the London Metal Exchange, one of the trading pits next to me was precious metals. I dealt with base metals like aluminum, copper, tin, lead, and zinc. I always had a fascination with gold. My grandfather used to give me a British gold sovereign coin every Christmas, and I still have those coins today. They’re worth much more now than they were back then. My son has them now.

So, I had an early understanding of gold’s appeal and uniqueness. As time went on and I worked on the London Metal Exchange, I interacted with some top traders. I used to ask them about trading futures in precious metals, and they always gave me the same advice.

Jacobsen: If you’re going to invest in gold, should you invest in the physical commodity itself?

Rose: Absolutely. Investing in the physical commodity is the safest way to invest in gold. That advice has always stuck with me. After I left London and got involved in physical metals here in the U.S., I worked in the industry for a long time. I consulted for HSBC and AIG and even went to Asia to teach financial advisors how to sell gold. In the early 2000s, they offered jewelry as an investment rather than coins and bars, which was an interesting time.

When I returned to the U.S., people still needed to become more familiar with holding gold as an investment and putting it into a pension, IRA, or 401(k). I worked in the industry for many years and took a break. When I returned, I realized many companies were overcharging and offering big premiums. There was a right way and a wrong way to do this. So, I re-entered the industry to correct what people were doing wrong—without naming any companies because I didn’t want to get a cease.

But even today, you see these big gold gimmicks and “free silver” promotions, which make the hairs on my neck stand up. That’s why Genesis Gold Group came to fruition—to help people invest in gold correctly, educating them on the various products, whether it’s gold, silver, platinum, or palladium. We help them decide between coins or bars based on their goals and outlook.

Over the years, I’ve always been asked, “How will I spend this gold bar?” That question came up time and time again. Knowing there was a need for a product that checks multiple boxes, we developed the Prepper bar.

People love being able to include the Prepper bar in their IRAs because it provides the gold and silver exposure they’re looking for as a safety net. When they take distributions, they can take them in something they can use, spend, or barter with. It protects their retirement accounts with gold and silver while offering the option to cash out into fiat currency or take possession of gold, silver, or other coins and bars.

The Prepper bar is crucial for Genesis because it’s an exclusive product no other company can offer. It caters to a niche market of clients looking for this utility product.

Regarding the Prepper bar, we’ve also started a charity with a former UFC fighter named Matt Hughes. If you’re a UFC fan, he’s a nine-time world champion who has retired. You can visit the Matt Hughes Project. I haven’t shared this publicly, but we’re launching this initiative with other UFC fighters. We’re donating proceeds from the sales of the Prepper bar to help people with traumatic brain injuries.

Jacobsen: What is the Matt Hughes Project?

Rose: Traumatic brain injury (TBI) is often called a silent disease. It’s something many veterans suffer from when they return from war. Someone like Matt Hughes, who retired as a 9-time world champion with all his faculties intact, experienced a severe injury over ten years ago. He was hit by a train and ended up in a coma for 19 days. He was in a vegetative state, and his recovery journey has been amazing.

We met each other at a traumatic brain injury event that Genesis Gold Group happened to sponsor. Over time, we became friends with many people from the TBI community. Unfortunately, we discovered that the donated money was only sometimes used to help those who needed it. It was often going into the pockets of the wrong people.

The problem with some nonprofits—not all, but many of them—is that too little of the money donated reaches the people who need help. We saw that firsthand. So, my two partners and I decided to create a new charity to raise awareness about TBI, and we started the Matt Hughes Project, which is now online.

We filmed a documentary about Matt’s recovery, journey, and what he’s doing with his life today. We aim to help others who need grants and support for traumatic brain injuries. Many veterans come back from service with no help at all, even though there’s money available. They may need assistance with walking, speaking, cognitive therapy, guide dogs, or other forms of rehabilitation. It’s shocking how much corruption there is at the state and local levels—there’s money, but it’s not going to the right people.

With the Matt Hughes Project, Genesis Gold Group, and the Prepper Bar, we can kickstart this charity and make a real impact. People who buy these Prepper bars or invest in gold are indirectly and directly helping us support the TBI charity, a cause close to our hearts.

Jacobsen: With digital currencies, online banking, and all that stuff, are there any risks of the valuation of precious metals like gold and silver decreasing over time as these digital currencies become more incorporated into mainstream economic life?

Rose: Yes, the digital dollar is here, and it will stay. It’s part of the evolution of everything.

When I was a child, my dad carried a big Filofax everywhere. Then, he had a brick phone that he always carried with him. Over time, phones got smaller, and now we have smartphones. It’s all part of the evolution of technology and society.

It’s similar to the BRIC nations—Brazil, Russia, India, and China. They’re gathering together and want to create their gold-based currency. This is all happening. The digital dollar, central bank digital currencies—it’s all happening.

Blockchain, crypto—it’s all intermingled right now, and it’s the future. That scares people because they don’t understand it, and what they don’t understand, they’re afraid of. What people do understand is tangible assets—if you don’t hold it, you don’t own it. So when people hear that a digital dollar might replace the dollar, it causes panic.

As these government programs slowly come online, and they’re being tested today, they’ll have a bullish impact on the price of gold. People would rather have something physical in their hands than a digital dollar, which is just zeros and ones in central bank digital currencies.

Yes, it’s a digital dollar, but it’s also a way to track people—who you’re spending money with, how you’re spending it, and where. That’s the first concern people raise: government overreach. There’s a lot you can do when you control people’s money, and that’s been proven before. For example, Canadian truckers were striking during the protests, and the government froze their digital assets. That’s how they shut them down.

People are concerned about the digital dollar, and how will that affect the price of gold? It will have a bullish impact because people will want to hold onto something with inherent value rather than something controlled by others behind the scenes, like a digital currency made of zeros and ones.

There are lots of great questions here, Scott. Thank you so much for your time today.

Jacobsen: Thank you.

Rose: You’re welcome.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Len Prazych on His Two Fathers

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/26

Len Prazych, an 11-year-old survivor of clergy abuse, shared his experience of parental denial and healing. He believes many male victims, like himself, delay reporting due to shame. Prazych emphasized the importance of discussing abuse openly and offering support to those affected, especially men reluctant to come forward.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I am with Len Prazych. This is a recommendation of a mutual woman colleague who is involved in deep research into clergy-related abuse. So, thank you for coming forward.

I know that these particular cases are probably more difficult than for women. One, there might be fewer men and boy victims. Also, as far as I know, more women tend to come forward. That’s only a qualitative analysis, not a formal quantitative analysis. So, you wrote a book.

You are a survivor and coming forward to report on this from an American orientation. So, how old were you when this happened? 

Len Prazych: I was 11 years old at the time of my incident. And if I can make a point and that is I believe there are more boys and men who experienced abuse. I believe fewer come forward because of the shame, guilt and pain associated with it.

Also, I learned at the recent SNAP (Survivors Network of those Abused by Priests) Conference that men often wait decades before admitting their abuse, if they do so at all. In some cases, it may be 10, 20, 30, 40 years. In my case, it was 50-plus years before I came forward with it and wrote my memoir. 

I got up in the middle of the night and told my mother that Father Duncanson had his hand in my underwear. The following morning he was gone. So somehow, as an 11-year-old altar boy, I could make a priest disappear? I was both confused and sad, and the fact that no one wanted to speak about it ever again only added to the confusion, the anger, the frustration, the shame, the guilt, and the ultimately ruined relationship with my father for the next 50 years. 

So yes, many men are reluctant to come forward. But sometimes, it’s not their conscious choice. Sometimes the abuse is so traumatic that the brain suppresses those painful memories or incidents. They consciously do not remember it happening.

And it usually comes out later in life when there’s a problem with anger, alcoholism, addiction, relationship issues, or something else that triggers the memory of the incident. It’s not until decades later that they may remember, wow, I was abused and then they have to come to terms with that.

I’m in no way comparing my one-time incident of what was essentially a fondling to the horrific abuse that others have suffered. I think this is another reason I remember the event as if it happened yesterday. It was a one-time event, but I remember the details clearly, and that’s likely because I’ve been writing about it, talking about it, and thinking about it. 

I’ve largely healed and forgiven, but I will never forget. It’s something I don’t want to see repeated with anyone. I believe it’s important to say something if you see something, and we need to talk about these things because, for the most part, we don’t—especially men.

Jacobsen: When you told your mother, did she recall the context or her response? Did that help with future conversations around this subject when you started discussing it more openly and publicly?

Prazych: No. Both my parents denied it ever happened. I can only speculate that decades later when I brought it up that it may have been just a blip in their life, something to bury and forget. But at the time of the incident, my mother was the one who took action, so I thought she would confirm that it happened, even decades later. I suspect she supported my father in his adamant refusal to acknowledge the abuse and perhaps, keeping his pact with the church to stay quiet. From what I’ve read, the practice of having parents being paid by the parish or the bishop to stay silent about their boy’s abuse was common back then. I have no reason to believe that it doesn’t still happen. In my case, my family never really had money so the incentive of a cash “settlement” to stay silent was probably very strong. My parents were raising three boys in Catholic school, so perhaps they received free tuition, but again, I can only speculate. It’s unlikely that I will ever know. 

Jacobsen: That sounds like an incredibly difficult experience, and how these situations were handled is troubling.

Prazych: Yes, it was, and I still think about it, but I’ve come to terms with how things were dealt with, even though I believe it was wrong. Maybe they got some help otherwise. Whatever the case, my parents never discussed it again and took the secret to their graves. 

Jacobsen: So, when it came to this particular case, has this methodology been corroborated by future reports from other survivors, as well as official church documents about a policy of silence and shuffling priests around?

Prazych: I can reference accounts in the literature, which is widely available, about families being paid off to keep their stories quiet. If not, lawyers may have to get involved and perhaps, the case is settled out of court. 

Jacobsen: What themes have you noticed in male survivor stories, particularly after attending the SNAP conference or potentially others? What are some of the thematic threads that run through them?

Prazych: As I’ve shared, one is the reluctance to come forward and share due to the shame and the perception that it’s a weakness. It affects a man’s life and his relationships, and it may manifest in addictions, anger, abuse, and more. 

Jacobsen: Did any men report substance misuse as a way to cope with emotional problems?

Prazych: I’m confident hundreds have done that and support groups are full of individuals who have suffered tremendous abuse. 

Jacobsen: When you write a full book, it becomes a project. It could be 60,000 words or 120,000 words. Either way, for most people who don’t spend time writing, that’s a huge amount, especially when typing each letter on the keyboard. So, why did you write a full-length text describing this context for yourself?

Prazych: I am a professional writer. I publish a weekly trade publication so getting the words on the page never a problem for me. I’ve also always been a journaler. I believe in journaling and note-taking as a regular practice, it’s my meditation and one way I cope, organize my life, express feelings, etc.

It was during the period after my father passed—a three-year period of helping him die, after spending three years helping him help my mother die—that journaling became tremendously important to me. I was essentially grieving both parents after six years. During one of my entries, I stumbled onto writing a letter to my father.

Jacobsen: And where were you going with that?

Prazych: So, I wrote this handwritten letter and felt like, wow, that came out pretty easily. Let me keep going. Then I had another letter and another. The memories started connecting so I added some elements of literary interest. There was no shortage of things to write about and things I wanted to ask my father, though obviously, some questions never got answers. There were also things I just wanted to say, and it felt good to say them.

As a first-time memoirist, 60,000 words is about the low end of where you want to land for your readers, and you better have a good story to tell within those 60,000 words. So, I was aiming for that amount. I had a great editor who helped me with many things we all need editors for. So, getting it done wasn’t an issue. 

A few obstacles, however—and this relates to one of your earlier questions about men wanting to share their stories, not necessarily about priestly abuse, but any abuse—stem from unconscious reasons for not writing. Because they’re unconscious, you don’t always know why. Still, after working through them, you realize that some of the same messaging initially prevented you from sharing your story.

For me, as an 11-year-old, the messages for me were:

  • You don’t talk badly about priests or the Catholic Church.
  • We don’t discuss these things in our family.
  • We don’t share our secrets unless we confess them to a priest
  • We don’t talk about sex.

So to speak about being abused by your beloved priest in your parents’ bed? There was no way that was going to be talked about! So, the message was always to stay silent and repress those feelings. Not an uncommon thing, I’ve discovered, especially in Catholic families. I often say that the incident of abuse itself wasn’t as bad as the 50 years of betrayal and gaslighting by my parents, the priests, and the Catholic Church. That was the real trauma for me, and it’s what still lingers in my thoughts and from what I’ve heard, in the stories of others.

Jacobsen: Was this a one-off event, or did you have recurring memories? Did it happen two or three times?

Prazych: It was a one-time, one-off event

Jacobsen: Is the book out yet?

Prazych: Yes, it’s been out for a year. I self-published and, for the most part, have been self-promoting and advertising. If you check my website, I’ve been doing media appearances over the past few months, which I’m very pleased with. Every time I do a radio interview or a live TV spot, I notice a small bump in book sales. It’s available on Amazon by contacting me directly via my website at LenPrazych.com.

Jacobsen: So, how did this affect the arc of your position on the tenets of faith and the religious community over time? An important point isn’t discussed enough: less about the incident and more about the fallout—the narrative built around the Catholic Church or churches in general. How has your relationship with the church been since that time, since being 11?

Prazych: Well, I’ve always had questions and a natural curiosity about the mysteries of not only Catholicism but all religions. But from the age of 11, there was still the mandate:

  • You must go to church on Sunday.
  • You must go to confession.
  • You must the sacraments and the 10 Commandments

I did this with a very dubious perspective, even as an 11-year-old. I thought, “All right, I think I see how this works now,” but I wasn’t sure. I was 11! But it did spark my curiosity about the bigger questions—why do we listen to these people, the priests, that is? But I couldn’t take it seriously after that because they couldn’t answer the questions I had, questions I couldn’t articulate at the time—like, why do priests abuse children? I couldn’t wrap my head around that.

I also attended an all-boys Catholic high school, which was generally a positive experience. But at some point, during religious education class in sophomore year, I believe, when I rebelled and shut out anything related to organized religion. That pretty much marked the beginning of my separation from both my parents and the church but became conflicted when I was going to marry

In the Catholic tradition, when a man and a woman are getting married, they go through something called Pre-Cana, a weekend moderated by a priest—because, of course, who else would know best about a healthy relationship between a man and a woman? That forced me to confront my own biases and I wondered, “Am I going to let something like a single incident of priestly abuse stop me from moving forward with my life and living as a good Catholic family?” I couldn’t say no at the time. And then there was the expectation of raising my children in the Catholic faith. But that only lasted for so long. My children saw for themselves at an early age—maybe with some urging and teaching from me—to avoid that.

So, my relationship with the Catholic Church since then has been pretty nonexistent.

Jacobsen: Do you think that’s a relatively normal outcome for someone who’s been abused by a father or priest?

Prazych: Is it normal? I don’t know what “normal” is, to be honest. The more I talk with people who’ve been abused, the more I see a variety of responses. For some, like myself, it’s, “Yeah, I know what happened, and I want nothing to do with the Church.” As long as no one’s telling you that you have to go to church, many will have nothing to do with the church, priests, or religion in general. But others who’ve been abused for years still maintain their faith in God and continue going to church. They don’t like what happened to them, of course, but they still have this faith that’s embedded in them and apparently cannot let go of. There’s a spectrum of experiences in between.

Jacobsen: What, in brief terms, can you share about your abuser?

Prazych: With Katherine’s help, I’ve learned much more about him than I knew since I finished my book. I learned everything I could find out on Ancestry.com and other free websites available to the public. I discovered that Father Wesley Duncanson was born in Waltham, Massachusetts and was married at age 16, which surprised me. He joined the military at age 17, served for six or seven years, then went to college as a premed student. After that, he went to a monastery and was ordained in 1956.

With Katherine’s help in accessing the Catholic Directory, we created a timeline of his life in the priesthood. And from what we can tell, Saint Henry’s, my parish, was his last assignment until he died in 1979.

By speaking up and saying something, I may have ended the career of a probable serial pedophile and sex abuser. I say “probable” because although I haven’t seen the records and may never see them, the NJ State Police say the records they’ve subpoenaed are “voluminous.” 

By reporting Father Duncanson, I may have prevented others from being abused—both in my church and wherever else he may have been assigned, if the Church did send him elsewhere. More importantly, I may have protected my two younger brothers from being abused. Pedophile priests have been notorious for preying on families with multiple siblings. Once they’re in the door, it becomes much easier for them to continue abusing others in that family. There are several documented cases of this, and I know someone personally who experienced it.

Jacobsen: That’s tragic; the family structure can also be exploited.

Prazych: Yeah.

Jacobsen: Yeah, the state of the family structure. So, in these instances of lack of parental oversight or involvement—whether the mom or dad isn’t assertive in ensuring the child’s safety, especially during adolescence—how do you view that?

Prazych: I would hesitate to lean heavily on the idea of “lack of oversight” in a negative way. My parents were hard workers. Dad worked all day and Mom worked at night. Dad helped neighbours and did odd jobs to make extra money when he wasn’t working his day job. It wasn’t like they were neglecting or partying and letting us kids go unsupervised. Aside from this incident, my father was a saint, and my mother supported him.

But when a parish priest took an interest in their oldest son and offered to take him and his friends horseback riding, bowling, or out for pizza—things we couldn’t afford to do—the influencing a priest must have seemed wonderful. It wasn’t a matter of my parents ignoring us; they were busy providing a living so we had what we needed. But priests could see that, too. What hardworking parents wouldn’t appreciate having their child looked after for a couple hours, a weekend, or even an overnight? I describe one incident like that in the book. 

Jacobsen: What you’re describing is part of the nuance in many of these stories. On the one hand, you have families of likely blue-collar parents and a dual-income household, where a priest stepping in to mentor and partially raise young boys within that community can seem like a positive thing. There are overnights, some literature is discussed, maybe even a higher education influence, and one-on-one time where social skills and norms are expressed. The kid can feel noticed and appreciated. But at the same time, those few incidents within that smaller arc leave a mark until later in life.

Prazych: Right. 

Jacobsen: So, how do you reconcile these two narratives that aren’t necessarily in conflict but exist simultaneously in the same lifetime? 

Prazych: I’ll admit, yes; I loved this priest. I loved him like I loved my father because I was getting from him what I wasn’t getting from my dad—the time and attention that a growing boy needs. That’s one of the reasons the abuse was so painful. But there was also this rift developing, where I was asking too many questions of both my fathers, questions that didn’t have satisfactory answers.

Jacobsen: Yeah, I can see that.

Prazych: Father Duncanson seemed genuinely curious about me—what I was reading at age 11, my chemistry experiments in the basement. So, in a way, he became my stand-in father. He’d even come to my baseball games, games my father wouldn’t or couldn’t attend. 

Jacobsen: He was very avuncular.

Prazych: Paternal, a little too paternal, as I would soon realize. So, he fooled an 11-year-old child. Congratulations! But part of my work in therapy has been about forgiving that little boy who may have thought it was somehow his fault. I know now that it wasn’t my fault. I didn’t do anything to bring this on. I was being an 11-year-old kid. Do you want to pay attention to me and teach me some stuff? Sure, I’m on board with that. I’m still on board with that at age 65— just keep your hand out of my pants while you’re doing it!

Jacobsen: There’s also an aspect of this where many men in North American cultures fear getting involved in public life, particularly in mentoring or spending time with kids who aren’t their own, because of the stigma associated with it. There are a lot of conflicting feelings for many men—they’d love to take a kid to a ballgame, go bowling, camping, or whatever—but this social stigma exists. At the same time, you have this minority of cases where adult men get past that stigma, win the trust of the community, or take a position of trust, and then leverage that to take advantage of young people—often boys or adolescent males in particular. It’s a strange cultural conversation.

And the case that you experienced, and that others bring forward at SNAP and similar organizations, are cases of acute abuse. But it’s part of a larger conversation about male mentorship—what are red flags and what aren’t. We’re not always having the necessary conversation around what is just stereotyping of men and what are actual, appropriate red flags.

How do you feel overall, given your positive reflection on some aspects of your experience, about how the Catholic Church mentors and raises boys who aren’t their own? How do you think general culture handles this?

Prazych: I can’t say. I need to be closer to the issue now to give an educated opinion. But from my perspective, as an older male now, my wife has often said, “You should be a mentor; you have so much to offer.” I did great with four kids. I’m doing great with two grandkids. But the thought of anything untoward happening to any of them in terms of abuse—well, that’s a huge trigger for me.

But I don’t want to be alone in the same room with a child that’s not my grandchild. If I’m in a bathroom in a restaurant and a little boy walks in, I immediately walk out. I don’t want even the thought of being alone any situation where it’s just me and another child. Knowing what I know and having experienced what I’ve experienced, I don’t want to be in that position.

Jacobsen: That’s a conversation that’s not even on the main agenda, but it’s part of an important, albeit undeveloped, secondary discussion—how individuals like yourself are triggered by the fallout from their own experiences and how this intersects with the stereotyping of men in mentor or authority roles with young people. These are all important conversations, even if it’s not the primary point of this one.

Prazych: Right. It’s something to keep in mind, at least. I like to ask if others have been abused by Father Wesley Luke Duncanson at Saint Henry’s Parish in Bayonne, New Jersey, or anywhere else, that it’s okay to come forward and share their secret.

Jacobsen: So, based on some of the information given earlier in the interview, if people know someone who may have been a survivor during that time or if they are survivors but have been afraid to come forward, how can they get in contact?

Prazych: They can contact me personally. My email is on my website, but they can also contact me at len@prazcomm.com. My phone number is international, in case they’re in another country. My number in New York, United States, is 518-366-9017.

What I’ve also done recently is prepare for another career as a life coach, to perhaps help both men and women. In this capacity, as a survivor of sexual abuse, I’m willing to coach others—whether it’s coming forward with their story or writing about it. Writing could be journaling, poetry, short stories, or even letters to their father—not necessarily for publication. It’s about demonstrating the therapeutic power of writing to heal. I’m happy to speak with anyone interested in doing that. It may be a gentle way to come forward, even if they can’t yet verbally articulate what they need to share.

As I mentioned, men are now coming forward after decades, and for all the reasons that men often wait so long to do so. This is the demographic—this is the time, as it was for me. I was recently asked to speak to a men’s group of survivors of abuse aged 50 to 60. This is the demographic that tends to come forward and share their stories of abuse. I’m happy to help anyone share and tell their story, even if it’s just to listen without judgment. I’d gladly share my experiences and knowledge.

Jacobsen: If anyone wants to publish an anonymous letter about their experience or response, they can send it to me, too. I can help: scottdouglasjacobsen@yahoo.com.

Prazych: Thank you for that. 

Jacobsen: Did we cover everything?

Prazych: Yes, we’ve hit the main topics. I’m happy to speak to a group—whether it’s a men’s group, as I’ve been asked before, or even a small book club. I’ll be adding more information about readings and appearances to my website. My press details are there now, but I plan to build a larger platform as this message gains more traction. Ultimately, it’s about preventing sexual abuse of children from happening at all. If you see something, say something. Let’s talk about these things. And parents, tell your children the truth, okay? If my parents had told me the following day what had happened to me, we may not even be having this conversation. 

Jacobsen: Len, nice to meet you, and thank you.

Jacobsen: It’s a pleasure, Scott. Thank you for your promptness in turning around the article and giving the story the attention and coverage it deserves.

Prazych: As I’m finding, and this can be an aside or not, social media has promoted and publicized my books. I hadn’t been on Facebook, Instagram, TikTok, or any of those before. I had no reason to, no interest. But I realized it was necessary if I was going to sell books and get some coverage.

What it did do was reconnect me with several of my old classmates. It allowed me to say, “By the way, this is my book. This is what happened to me.” The response was collectively, “Oh, we’re sorry. We didn’t know this happened to you, and you said nothing.” Well, how could they know unless it happened to them, too, which it didn’t? For most of the people I spoke with, they didn’t even remember Father Duncanson. That made me think, “Did this guy exist? How come nobody else remembers him?” 

Jacobsen: But you have the documentation—Father Duncanson was there when you were there.

Prazych: Yes, but it’s with the New Jersey State Police Sex Crimes Unit. Hopefully, one day, it will come to public light with the New Jersey Grand Jury. In the meantime, if anyone else comes forward they could have a criminal or civil case. But if no one else comes forward and accuses Father Duncanson, my case “dies” because my parents, Father Duncanson and the pastor at the time, who were the only other “witnesses to the crime,” took their secrets to their graves. 

I’m happy I was able to get Father Duncanson listed on the BishopAccountability.org website. That’s an accomplishment because someone else may not want to come forward but may see that someone else did and say, “Oh, Len did it. Maybe I can come forward, too.” That might help verify their claim or show the power of confession to heal emotionally and physically. Keeping these secrets takes a tremendous toll on mental and physical health. It can manifest in addictions, alcoholism, and even cancer—any number of stress-related diseases that come from withholding the truth. So, I’m encouraging people to tell their secrets, as hard as it may be. Maybe I can be living proof. “Hey, it took me 50 years, but you can do it too, and you’ll be better off for it.” 

Jacobsen: Thank you, Len.

Prazych: You’re very welcome, Scott. And thank you for allowing me to share my story and my message of hope and healing.

Further Internal Resources (Chronological, yyyy/mm/dd):

Historical Articles

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 1: Adam Metropoulos (2024/01/11)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 2: Domestic Violence (2024/01/12)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 3: Finances (2024/01/16)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 4: Sex Abuse (2024/01/17)

Interviews

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu on Clergy-Perpetrated Sexual Abuse (2024/06/02)

Katherine Archer on California Senate Bill 894 (2024/06/11)

Dorothy Small on Abuse of Adults in the Roman Catholic Church (2024/06/16)

Melanie Sakoda on Orthodox Clergy-Related Misconduct (2024/06/23)

Professor David K. Pooler, Ph.D., LCSW-S on Clergy Adult Sexual Abuse (2024/07/21)

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu & Dorothy Small: Ecumenical Catholic-Orthodox Discourse (2024/07/24)

Professor David K. Pooler, Ph.D., LCSW-S on Consent and Power (2024/08/13)

Irene Deschênes on Outrage Canada (2024/09/05)

Press Releases:

#ChurchToo Survivors Call on CA Governor Gavin Newsom (2024/06/09)

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Mark Ellwood on Gender and Work Time Use

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/25

A 34-year time study by Mark Ellwood, President of Pace Productivity Inc., reveals that women manage time better than men at work. Women complete tasks faster, prioritize important activities more effectively, and align closer to ideal weekly schedules. These findings have significant implications for corporate policies and work-life balance strategies.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are here with Mark Ellwood to discuss working hours and efficiency in time management from a gender perspective. Mark, what was the origin of this extensive research on hours worked, efficiency, and time use in the workplace, specifically focusing on male and female employees?

Mark Ellwood: I’m a consultant specializing in corporate time studies. I invented a small electronic device called a “TimeCorder,” which employees use to track their time on different activities. Typically, they do this for about two weeks, and most people enjoy the process. I attend many international conferences on time use, and one consistent finding is that, domestically, women spend more time on unpaid household management tasks than men. Women spend about 3.6 hours daily on these tasks, compared to only 2.2 hours for men. This includes childcare, meal preparation, and household maintenance. These patterns are well-established in many Western countries. Given that I do many of these workplace studies, I wondered what implications these domestic patterns might have at work.

Over the years, I’ve gathered data from many clients as companies pay me to conduct time studies. I’ve built up a largedatabase, so I decided to dive in and explore any differences between men and women at work that might mirror or diverge from household patterns. That was the starting point for this research. 

Jacobsen: So, what are the key findings from this study, which analyzed data from 200 organizations across 41 countries?

Ellwood: Well, I collected around 500,000 hours of data from 1990 when I started these studies. I didn’t have detailed demographic information, so my first step was categorizing people by gender. For example, names like “Judy” and “Bill” were easy to classify, but names like “Kelly” required some research. After sorting individuals into male and female groups, I proceeded with the analysis. While I don’t have information on age or marital status, one might assume that many women are mothers, as they fall within the typical working age range of 20 to 50 years.

My main finding is that women are generally better at managing their time at work than men. Time management books often offer common-sense advice and case studies, but there’s not a lot of hard data. I was excited to find empirical evidence to support these insights. One of the first key findings is that women, on average, work fewer hours than men. When calculating work hours, I include personal time at the workplace—pre-COVID at the office or working from home. For instance, going out to lunch is part of the workday, so I include it. Personal time at work is minimal, about three hours per week. Men work around 48 hours per week, while women work approximately 45 hours per week.

So, there’s a clear difference—women work fewer hours than men, and that’s one of the four key findings suggesting that women are better at managing their time than men. Some might ask, why is that? What’s the explanation? The obvious connection is that many of these women are mothers, and we know from other data that they often take on more domestic responsibilities, like caring for children. Who’s going home to pick up the kids from daycare? Who’s going to take them to ballet class or prepare meals? Typically, it’s the women.

From that data, they would strive to be as efficient at work, working fewer hours but aiming to get the same amount done as men. They must manage their time effectively to fulfill their professional and domestic responsibilities. As a result, the total working hours reflect this balancing act. 

Jacobsen: I crunched some quick numbers on the ratios, as this analysis is fairly binary when looking at broad statistics. In terms of hours worked, men average 48.4 hours per week, while women work 45.2 hours per week when including breaks. That’s about a 7% difference.

However, when you look at the prioritization of time for top management tasks, women allocate 22% of their time to top priorities, compared to 18% for men. That’s about a 20% difference in favour of women. While these percentages might not seem significant every week, over a year, for an employee or a middle manager, the impact can be quite substantial.

Extending that over an entire work year makes these small differences much clearer and contributes to significant company performance gains. These gains impact the “soft power” aspects, like reputation, and the “hard power” aspects, like financial capability. What are some crucial details about male and female workers that are essential for business health?

Ellwood: Indeed, and let’s revisit that 22% and 18% figure because it’s one of the more striking findings. If you look at time management books, they advise you to focus on important tasks. Some of your listeners or readers might be familiar with the Eisenhower Matrix—it’s the idea of prioritizing tasks based on whether they’re urgent and important or not urgent and not important.

Interestingly, this concept wasn’t coined by President Eisenhower; it originated with a college dean but was later attributed to him. Many time management experts have since adopted it. The key advice is to focus on important rather than urgent activities. Stephen Covey touched on this in his book The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People. Still, no one has defined these “important” activities.

They’ve alluded to them, but I wanted to map them out more clearly. When I conduct my time studies, I ask people beforehand, “What are the most important tasks you need to do in your job?” You might think salespeople should say “selling,” but let’s dig deeper.

As expected, salespeople say prospecting and selling are the most important activities. Managers, on the other hand, should be coaching and directing. At the same time, field supervisors should ensure the environment is set up and safe. For customer service workers, it’s about servicing customers. So, those are the activities people identify as most important—aligning with that “important but not urgent” quadrant from the Eisenhower Matrix. Then the question is, how do their time profiles compare to those priorities?

So, if you look at salespeople who say, “I’m supposed to be prospecting,” then ask, “Are you prospecting?” the answer is yes. Still, the numbers are lower than you might expect. Outside sales reps spend about 23% of their time prospecting, while all sales reps combined are around 28%. When you map out these priorities against time spent across various jobs, you find that most knowledge workers—because we’re talking about knowledge workers here—only spend about 20% of their time on their highest-priority tasks. That’s it.

The rest of the time is spent travelling, processing paperwork, attending meetings, planning the day, and taking breaks. Suppose the average time spent on top priorities is 20%. In that case, women spend 22% of their time on their highest-priority tasks, while men spend only 18%. This means that, based on this second of the four measures, women tend to be better time managers than men.

You asked about the implications of these findings. One takeaway could be to hire more women. However, it also suggests that time management training could benefit organizations. These skills can be learned and developed. We often assume people are naturally good at managing meetings, emails, or projects. Still, we only provide a little formal training. If organizations offered more training, you could see those numbers increase.

That average 20% of time spent on top priorities could rise to 30%. That’s a significant increase—about an hour more per day spent on important tasks. In some cases, we’ve seen up to a 50% improvement, and that’s what organizations should aim for finding ways for employees to spend more time on their highest-priority tasks.

Jacobsen: Now, I want to introduce the concept of margin of error. When we compare numbers like 48.4 hours versus 45.2 hours per week, or time spent on tasks—16 minutes versus 22 minutes per task for women and men, or 22% versus 18%—we need to ask which of these differences are statistically significant and which ones are more moderate. This helps ensure that when people look at this data, they understand the magnitude of the difference and which differences are the most significant and worth paying attention to.

Ellwood: That’s a great question, and I did drill down into specific jobs to explore this further. We looked at sales reps, commercial bankers, customer service staff, financial planners, and retail store staff. We have more data in some roles than in others, but across all these job types, we were able to see significant differences.

It’s challenging to review every job in detail across all measures, but I did conduct some in-depth analysis. With thousands of hours of data, we found that these differences apply across various job types and are real and statistically significant.

Jacobsen: Did you notice any cultural factors that influenced these findings when comparing North America to Western Europe?

Ellwood: I haven’t observed any notable cultural differences. While I’ve conducted time studies in about 41 countries, most data comes from North America and the UK, making up about 80% of my database. Large multinational organizations mostly conduct these studies, so cultural differences don’t play a significant role in these findings. However, different results might emerge in other cultural contexts.

You’ve only got people’s names, and it’s hard to tell which culture they’re associated with since you don’t have that demographic data. But you’re seeing much consistency in North America and the UK. 

Jacobsen: What do you think is happening in women’s work patterns, particularly in prioritization and efficiency, that gives them an edge overall?

Ellwood: That’s the toughest question of all. I can point to the data showing that women are better time managers. But then the question is, as you asked, why is that?

There may be two or three reasons. The first is the one I mentioned earlier: many women must get home to care for their children. They must be as efficient as possible during the workday to leave on time to manage their domestic responsibilities.

The second reason could be the skills they develop as busy mothers transfer to the workplace. Talk to any mother—I’ve spoken to many—and they’ll tell you that being a mother is demanding. They’re constantly juggling different priorities. Whether they’re bringing work home or managing home tasks alongside work, those experiences—handling kids’ events, cooking, cleaning—might sharpen their skills in managing multiple tasks efficiently. Those time management skills may carry over to their professional lives.

The third reason, which is more speculative, might be cognitive differences. I am hesitant to dwell on this because the data isn’t conclusive. Still, slight differences in brain function—perhaps in how tasks are prioritized or attention to detail—could play a role. However, since that’s just a guess, I’ll stay away from it for now.

Jacobsen: What could be an extension of this research? What are the “next steps” for future studies, as they say in academic presentations?

Ellwood: Well, we could certainly delve deeper into cultural differences. We could focus more specifically on mothers versus women as a whole group. I’m currently studying executive women, gathering much more detailed demographic and life experience data. This focuses specifically on senior executive women.

So, we need more studies like this, especially in the workplace. For organizations, setting measurable targets is crucial. Interestingly, we saw much monitoring during COVID-19, and people weren’t happy with it. But with my devices, employees like using them because they’re easy, fun, and anonymous. That’s the key difference.

There was a growing sentiment during COVID that we shouldn’t care so much about how people spend their time. But I disagree—you should care about it as a diagnostic tool. It’s like running a 100-meter dash. You care about the time, whether 10 seconds or 9.9 seconds. Still, it would help if you also looked at the details: steps per second, stride length, oxygen intake—all the smaller elements contributing to a successful run. Similarly, time management at work isn’t something you need to monitor constantly. Still, you should be aware of it as a tool to improve performance.

Are you working 40 hours or 45 hours? It doesn’t matter. What matters is using that time data as a diagnostic tool to figure out if you’re getting bogged down in administrative activities or if meetings are going on too long—things that everyone complains about. When you attach data to those concerns, you can use it to diagnose and address them.

Rather than me doing all the research, organizations can start to track and monitor these things themselves. They can set ideal targets. One of the things I did in my studies was establish where people ideally want to spend their time, compare that to where they spend their time, and identify the gaps.

Jacobsen: Are you something of a “time doctor”?

Ellwood: Yes, I’ve thought of that term, and there are a few “time doctors” out there. I also use the term “time diagnostics,” but it’s clunky. So yes, I am a doctor, but I’m also a consultant. I diagnose the issues by saying, “Here’s what’s happening, here are the symptoms, and here’s what needs to be done.” I analyze what’s going on, identify the problems, and then make recommendations for improvement.

Jacobsen: It sounds like you’re a Dr. When, not a Dr. Who. You have three books: 

What’s your quick pitch for each of them?

Ellwood: Sure! Starting with The Poetic Path to Getting More Done, it’s an entire book of time management tips presented in poetic form. Let me read you a quick one:

Your time is your ally; it’s not a black hole.

The choice is your own to take more control.

Beginning right now, it’s for you to decide,

You’ll get more results with a new sense of pride.

Be inspired today to make a small shift,

Your time is your own—more hours are your gift.

Once you get started, you’ll be able to boast,

That you’ve got much more time for what matters most.

Jacobsen: That’s great! So, what are your core recommendations based on all of this data? Whether gendered or not, what are some key things that can help improve efficiency and make the workday run more smoothly, with positive effects like reduced workplace tension and a better sense of well-being?

Ellwood: I have two main recommendations. First, being productive means spending more time on your highest-priority tasks and less time on lower-priority tasks, like administrative paperwork. Second, work is inherently collaborative. When people complain about the volume of emails or endless meetings, I remind them that those things are what make work “work.” We should celebrate the value of staying in touch and collaborating.

That said, meetings must be run more effectively, and email should be managed better. I’ve measured the time people spend on unnecessary email, and it’s a staggering 3.4 hours per week. So, there’s much room for improvement in both areas.

Email was supposed to be the great big saviour of communication. And while it has its benefits, it also takes time. So, instead of solely relying on technological improvements to manage your time, focus on prioritizing high-priority tasks, running meetings efficiently, and communicating via email more effectively. We could all benefit from better training in these areas, and corporations should invest in such training to get the most out of their employees.

Better training is key. Companies often overlook the value of time management skills, but employees can work more effectively with proper training.

Jacobsen: Are there any other details from this study that we still need to cover?

Ellwood: We didn’t touch on the ideal profile, but we’ve covered most of the main points.

Jacobsen: Let’s dive into that quickly, then. What is the ideal profile?

Ellwood: We asked individuals where they ideally think they should spend their time across various activities. When we totalled up the differences, we found that women are closer to their ideal profiles by about three hours per week than men. So, they’re doing better in that regard as well.

Setting an ideal profile—a target for where you want to spend your time—is a useful exercise. It’s a diagnostic tool you don’t need to use constantly. Still, as many time management books suggest, it’s worth doing periodically, say for a few weeks. You can track your time using my system or any other and then compare where you spend your time versus where you want to spend it. Women tend to do this well; men could find ways to improve and close that gap.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Thank you very much for your time, Mark.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Event: ‘Ending Extrajudicial Violence Resulting From Apostasy and Blasphemy Laws’

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/24

Aysha Khan is the Director of Operations for Ex-Muslims of North America (EXMNA). Join us in hearing stories from advocates, activists and first hand witnesses to extrajudicial violence resulting from apostasy and blasphemy charges. Our aim is to bring attention to these egregious human rights violations and urge UN member states to work towards preventing future violence driven by an intolerance for freedom of conscience, religion and belief.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We have an event organized by Ex-Muslims of North America titled “Ending Extrajudicial Violence Resulting from Apostasy and Blasphemy Laws.” It discusses ways to stop unjust violence against individuals or groups accused of apostasy or blasphemy.

Adding my perspective here, apostasy and blasphemy are imaginary crimes. This is not a new thought, but the fact that they are claims about a god or assume a god means they should only affect those who believe. They should not apply to those who do not believe. Otherwise, it’s not a proper secular system but rather a violation of freedom of religion, belief, and conscience based on a religious claim. What is the most important part of holding this event?

Aysha Khan: It is crucial to emphasize that anti-blasphemy and anti-apostasy laws do not discriminate. They affect people of all faith backgrounds and those with no faith background. First, I want to note that Ex-Muslims of North America are hosting this event in collaboration with the American Humanist Association, Jubilee Campaign, and Set My People Free. We have a broad coalition of organizations and individuals represented on the panel. This includes practicing Christians, practicing Muslims, humanists, atheists, civil society representatives, and individuals who work directly with U.S. government agencies. We are proud of the panel we’ve assembled, and we hope not only to draw attention from UN member states to these gut-wrenching stories but also to highlight how these laws create an environment of impunity.

These laws encourage vigilante violence. A country may have a law criminalizing or penalizing religious dissidents but may not enforce that law. Yet, it may turn a blind eye to people taking matters into their own hands against those accused. These laws are often not used against people accused of blasphemy against a particular faith. Instead, they are frequently used to settle personal or political grievances.

This event aims to highlight the injustice of these laws and their mere existence and humanize the stories of those affected. 

Jacobsen: We now have six key speakers for this event:

What do each of these speakers bring in terms of experience, expertise, and personal stories?

Khan: One of the speakers is Nadine Maenza, President of the International Religious Freedom Secretariat. She represents several organizations that advocate for freedom of religion and belief. She has vast experience navigating these spaces, convening influential individuals from the U.S. government, intergovernmental agencies, and civil society. We also have speakers who have had family members imprisoned on blasphemy charges, others who have lost family members to vigilante violence following blasphemy accusations, and individuals who have been forced to seek asylum abroad after being accused and hunted—not only by their home governments but also by religious extremists. The speakers’ experiences span a broad spectrum of persecution, whether they were rightfully or wrongfully accused.

But what it does is it creates a chilling effect on any vocalizing of a difference of opinion on religion. So, we’re trying to highlight how unfair these laws are, even for those who practice the religion that is supposedly being insulted.

Jacobsen: What about individuals who are non-Muslim, or not even ex-Muslim, but have an interest in these stories and the understanding of blasphemy laws being imposed on others beyond those who stand against a state-endorsed version of Islam? What should appeal to them as well?

Khan: I come to this cultural and ethical understanding: no one is safe from these accusations when these laws are on the books. It does not matter whether you are a member of that religion. These laws are so subjective. Even the concept of an insult or offence is subjective.

What I might find offensive is not what you might find offensive, and it depends on how someone is feeling that day, how vengeful, upset, or tolerant they are. It does not matter who you are, your origin, or your religion. These laws are unfair and are not applied equally across the board.

Jacobsen: Where is the event going to be hosted?

Khan: It is scheduled for the 29th of October at 1 PM at the UN Church Center, which is close to the UN headquarters. It’s a free event. Registration is required through our Eventbrite link, and we look forward to a lively discussion after each speaker’s remarks. The event will last about an hour, and we purposely scheduled it around lunchtime, so if you can pop in and out, that would be great. We’re excited about the broad coalition of sponsors and speakers.

Jacobsen: Are there other ex-Muslim organizations taking part in this?

Khan: They are not, but we are trying to ensure they know this event is taking place. Please reach out if any ex-Muslim organizations in or around the area are interested in cosponsoring or helping with outreach.

Jacobsen: Right. Thank you for your time today.

Khan: Yeah, no problem. Thank you.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Bojan Jovanović (w/ Damir Katulić): Survivor Advocacy, Serbian Orthodoxy

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/24

Bojan Jovanović is a Father in the Serbian Orthodox Church, and Damir Katulić is the president of the Association of Christians of Croatia. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Thank you for your patience with me, and for taking the time for this interview today. Often, the media stories on the Catholic Church garner more attention and notoriety. Orthodoxy seems less affected in the public sphere. I do not want to stereotype or portray this inaccurately or unfairly, as the subject matter arouses many emotions and instincts at tension with one another, because of the seriousness of the allegations and the severity of the consequences for churches, communities, priests, and laity: defensiveness, retribution, fear, pity, pain, regret, anger, betrayal, shame, sadness, disillusionment, guilt, helplessness, maybe hope. As my knowledge and experience grows on this topic, I want to relay experiences and views with sensitivity, but with forthrightness, given the deep impact on people’s lives. I will fail at this, but I will continue to aim for this mark in this work. In prior writing, my bias would have been more oriented towards a bias of directed blame against abusive acts within religious institutions without proposal of, or search for, realistic and concrete constructive solutions. Looking back at my younger self, the former emotions in empathy with the experiences of others in pain seems legitimate, while not directing these energies to appropriate formal and grassroots fairness and justice movements was a gap, a failing. I come from the intellectual backgrounds of several non-religious traditions locally and internationally, which colours, therefore potentially biases, the qualitative research into these areas. How have you observed clergy-related abuse manifesting at the local level within the Serbian Orthodox Church?

Bojan Jovanović:  Clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church has been observed in several ways at the local level. Reports often include:

  1. Sexual Abuse Allegations: Instances of sexual misconduct by clergy members have emerged, leading to a lack of trust among congregants.
  2. Financial Mismanagement: Abuse of power related to financial resources, such as misappropriation of donations or misuse of church funds.
  3. Spiritual Abuse: Manipulation of parishioners’ faith for personal gain, including coercive practices and control over congregants’ personal lives.
  4. Lack of Accountability: Inadequate responses to complaints, with some cases being covered up or not addressed properly, causing further harm to victims.
  5. Community Division: Conflicts within congregations often arise as a result of these abuses, leading to factions and loss of community cohesion.

Efforts to address these issues vary, but many advocate for greater transparency and accountability within the church structure.

Jacobsen: How do the local and national contexts both reflect and differentiate from one another?

Jovanović: The local and national contexts within the Serbian Orthodox Church reflect and differentiate from one another in several key ways:

Reflection:

  1. Cultural Traditions: Both levels share deep-rooted cultural and religious traditions that shape practices and beliefs. Local communities often preserve specific customs that align with national church teachings.
  2. Hierarchical Structure: The local parishes operate under the broader national church hierarchy, maintaining a unified doctrinal stance and organizational framework.
  3. Shared Challenges: Issues like clergy misconduct or financial mismanagement are often seen at both local and national levels, prompting similar responses or initiatives for reform.

Differentiation:

  1. Local Dynamics: Local communities may have unique social, economic, and political conditions that influence their practices and responses to issues. For instance, rural parishes may prioritize different concerns than urban ones.
  2. Response to Issues: Local leadership may handle allegations or community conflicts in ways that differ from national policies, leading to varied levels of accountability and transparency.
  3. Engagement with Community: Local churches often have closer relationships with their congregants, which can affect how they address community needs and concerns, diverging from the more formal, national approach.
  4. Diverse Opinions: While the national church may present a unified front, local congregations can have diverse opinions on theological and social issues, leading to potential tensions between local practices and national directives.

In summary, while the local and national contexts of the Serbian Orthodox Church are interconnected, they also exhibit distinct characteristics shaped by their specific environments and community needs.

Jacobsen: What are the challenges to communities in Serbia when addressing abuse allegations against clergy members?

Jovanović: Communities in Serbia face several challenges when addressing abuse allegations against clergy members:

  1. Cultural Stigma: There is a strong cultural reverence for clergy, making it difficult for victims to come forward due to fear of backlash or disbelief from the community.
  2. Lack of Support Systems: Many communities lack adequate support services for victims, such as counseling or legal assistance, which can deter reporting.
  3. Hierarchy and Authority: The hierarchical structure of the church can lead to conflicts of interest, where local leaders may protect clergy members rather than address allegations appropriately.
  4. Fear of Isolation: Victims may fear social isolation or ostracism from their community if they speak out against a beloved figure, which can perpetuate silence.
  5. Inadequate Church Response: The national church’s slow or insufficient responses to allegations can undermine trust and discourage communities from taking action.
  6. Legal and Institutional Barriers: Navigating legal processes can be complex, and there may be a lack of clear mechanisms for reporting abuse within the church.
  7. Historical Context: Past experiences with authority and distrust in institutions can lead to skepticism about the efficacy of reporting mechanisms.

These challenges can create an environment where abuse remains unaddressed, further complicating the path to justice for victims.

Jacobsen: How does the Serbian Orthodox Church’s approach to handling abuse cases compare with other national religious institutions in the region?

Jovanović: The Serbian Orthodox Church’s approach to handling abuse cases has several distinctive features when compared to other national religious institutions in the region:

Similarities:

  1. Hierarchical Structures: Like many religious institutions in the region, the Serbian Orthodox Church operates under a hierarchical structure that can complicate accountability and transparency.
  2. Cultural Sensitivity: Many religious organizations in the region grapple with cultural stigmas surrounding abuse, which can lead to reluctance in reporting and addressing allegations.
  3. Community Relations: Similar to other institutions, local communities often prioritize maintaining their relationships with clergy, leading to underreporting of abuse cases.

Differences:

  1. Public Response: The Serbian Orthodox Church has faced criticism for its slow or inadequate response to allegations, while some other religious institutions may have adopted more proactive measures, including public apologies and commitments to reform.
  2. Institutional Reform: Other religious organizations in the region may have established clearer protocols for handling abuse cases, such as independent review boards or mandatory reporting policies, which the Serbian Orthodox Church has been slower to implement.
  3. Victim Support: Some institutions have developed robust support systems for victims, including counseling and advocacy services, which may not be as developed within the Serbian Orthodox Church.
  4. Engagement with Authorities: The willingness to collaborate with civil authorities can vary. Some religious institutions may have more established partnerships with law enforcement, while the Serbian Orthodox Church has historically been more insular in handling cases internally.

Conclusion:

Overall, while there are some common challenges across religious institutions in the region, the Serbian Orthodox Church’s approach to abuse allegations can differ significantly in terms of responsiveness, victim support, and institutional reform. These differences can impact the effectiveness of addressing abuse and fostering trust within communities.

Jacobsen: Can you discuss the impact of clergy-related abuse scandals on public trust in religious institutions in Serbia and neighboring countries?

Jovanović: Clergy-related abuse scandals have significantly impacted public trust in religious institutions in Serbia and neighboring countries in several ways:

Erosion of Trust

  1. Loss of Credibility: Scandals undermine the perceived integrity of religious leaders, leading to a general loss of credibility for the institutions they represent. Many congregants begin to question the moral authority of their religious leaders.
  2. Disillusionment Among Faithful: Long-standing members may feel betrayed, causing disillusionment with the church and a decline in regular attendance or participation in religious activities.
  3. Increased Skepticism: Communities may become more skeptical of religious teachings and practices, particularly regarding ethical behavior and accountability within the church.

Community Division

  1. Polarization: Scandals can create divisions within communities, with some members defending the clergy and others calling for accountability and reform. This polarization can weaken community cohesion.
  2. Fear of Reporting: Victims may feel discouraged from coming forward due to a perceived lack of support or fear of ostracism, further perpetuating a culture of silence.

Social and Political Repercussions

  1. Demand for Reform: Increased awareness of abuse scandals often leads to calls for institutional reform, including better oversight mechanisms and clearer reporting procedures for allegations.
  2. Public Discourse: These scandals can shift public discourse about the role of religion in society, prompting discussions about accountability, transparency, and the need for reform in religious institutions.

Comparative Impact in Neighboring Countries

  1. Similar Trends: Neighboring countries may experience similar declines in trust, especially if their religious institutions face comparable scandals. The impact can be magnified if media coverage highlights systemic issues.
  2. Cultural Differences: The degree of impact may vary based on cultural attitudes towards religion and authority. In some regions, religious institutions may retain a strong influence despite scandals, while in others, the trust may decline more sharply.

Conclusion

Overall, clergy-related abuse scandals pose significant challenges to public trust in religious institutions in Serbia and neighboring countries. The fallout from these scandals can lead to lasting changes in how communities perceive and engage with their religious leaders, ultimately influencing the role of religion in society.

Jacobsen: What role does the Serbian government play in either addressing or overlooking clergy-related abuse within Orthodoxy?

Jovanović: The Serbian government plays a complex role in addressing or overlooking clergy-related abuse within the Orthodox Church, characterized by several key factors:

Addressing Abuse

  1. Legal Framework: The government has established laws that criminalize abuse, including sexual abuse, which can apply to clergy members. These laws create a basis for legal action against offenders.
  2. Cooperation with Authorities: In some cases, the government has cooperated with law enforcement to investigate allegations against clergy members, especially when public pressure mounts for accountability.
  3. Public Awareness Campaigns: The government may support initiatives aimed at raising awareness about abuse and promoting rights for victims, although this is often influenced by civil society rather than direct government action.

Overlooking Abuse

  1. Cultural Sensitivity: The close relationship between the Serbian Orthodox Church and national identity can lead to hesitance in pursuing investigations against clergy, as doing so may be seen as undermining the church’s authority.
  2. Political Influence: Religious leaders often hold significant sway in political matters, which can lead to a reluctance to confront or adequately address allegations against clergy members to maintain political stability and support.
  3. Lack of Accountability: The government may overlook systemic issues within the church, leading to inadequate responses to abuse allegations. This can be attributed to a desire to avoid conflict with the church and its followers.
  4. Historical Context: A history of church-state relations may contribute to a tendency to prioritize religious authority over accountability, leading to a culture where allegations are handled internally rather than through formal legal channels.

Conclusion

In summary, the Serbian government’s role in addressing or overlooking clergy-related abuse within Orthodoxy is multifaceted. While there are legal mechanisms and instances of cooperation, cultural and political factors often lead to a lack of thorough investigation and accountability, creating a challenging environment for victims seeking justice.

Jacobsen: How have international organizations and the global community responded to allegations of abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church?

Jovanović: International organizations and the global community have responded to allegations of abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church in several ways:

Advocacy and Pressure

  1. Human Rights Organizations: Groups such as Amnesty International and Human Rights Watch have highlighted cases of abuse and called for accountability, urging the Serbian government and the church to take allegations seriously.
  2. Public Statements: Various international bodies, including the European Union, have made public statements emphasizing the importance of addressing abuse allegations within religious institutions and ensuring the protection of victims’ rights.

Monitoring and Reporting

  1. Regular Monitoring: International organizations often monitor the situation regarding religious freedoms and abuses within various countries, including Serbia. Reports may include sections on the Serbian Orthodox Church and its handling of abuse cases.
  2. Investigative Reports: Some organizations produce detailed reports on the state of religious institutions, assessing their responses to abuse allegations and providing recommendations for improvement.

Support for Victims

  1. Resources for Advocacy: International NGOs sometimes provide resources and training for local advocacy groups to support victims and raise awareness about abuse within religious contexts.
  2. Networking with Local Groups: International organizations often collaborate with local NGOs and civil society to amplify the voices of victims and push for reforms within the church and the broader society.

Calls for Reform

  1. Institutional Recommendations: International bodies may call for the Serbian Orthodox Church to adopt more transparent procedures for handling allegations, including independent investigations and better support for victims.
  2. Legal Reforms: Advocacy for stronger legal frameworks to protect victims and ensure accountability for clergy members may also be a focus, pressuring the government to strengthen its legal stance on abuse.

Challenges

  1. Cultural Sensitivity: The close ties between the church and national identity can make international advocacy challenging, as local sentiments may resist perceived external interference in religious affairs.
  2. Limited Impact: The effectiveness of international responses can be limited by the church’s internal dynamics and the political context within Serbia, which may prioritize maintaining stability over addressing allegations.

Conclusion

Overall, international organizations and the global community have taken steps to respond to allegations of abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church, advocating for accountability and reform. However, the interplay of cultural, political, and religious factors can complicate these efforts and affect their outcomes.

Jacobsen: Are there global patterns in how religious institutions handle abuse allegations, and where does the Serbian Orthodox Church fit within this international context? Professor David Pooler in the United States has noted consistencies to me. 

Damir Katulić: In principle one can talk about the global patterns of how religious institutions (meaning not just churches pertain to Christian religion but a religion institutions in general) handle abuse allegations. It is almost like the model of 5 stages of grief. The first reaction is usually a denial. But after firm evidence is presented then we are witnessing the anger of the religious institutions, their bargaining with the legal and public domains, and in most cases acceptance in the form of the court settlements. Since institutions can not been depressed, we are lacking this part of the grief model. Anyhow, this process is in direct correlation with the size of the religion’s institution; the bigger the institution, the condemnation of the abuse is more rapid and wide.

What is special about Serbian Orthodox Church in this model is that SPC is lacking the universal character of the religion institution, and it is deeply intertwined with the political agenda of the Serbian state. Therefore, the whole process of dealing with the abuse problem is suspended in the step one because the Serbian state doesn’t allow that the information of the abuses becomes public and when it against all odds does, state uses its institutions (including the state-controlled media) to suppress it. 

This practice makes the handling of the abuse issues in the SPC extremely hard and very often quite dangerous.

Jacobsen: What lessons can be drawn from international cases of clergy-related abuse that might help address these issues within Serbia?

Katulić: To really deal with the issue of clergy-related abuse within the SPC this problem has to become international so that a Serbian state loses its mechanism to suppress it from the public domain. The more countries, non-governmental institutions and publicly acclaimed individuals are aware of this problem and talk about it openly, it would be immensely harder to conceal this issue within the corridors of power in Serbia and SPC as a main perpetrator. 

So, the main lesson would be to internationalize the abuse cases that happen within the SPC and then it will be dealt with like the other similar cases in the last couple of decades around the world.

Jacobsen: How does collaboration with regional experts like Mr. Ivan Valek enhance understanding and action against clergy-related abuse in the Balkans?

Katulić: Mr. Ivan Valek is really a well-educated expert in this field that invested decades of his life exploring this topic. His expertise can be really helpful not just because he has a deep understanding of this problem, but he possesses a broad knowledge of a historical concept related to the religion issues in the region of the Balkans. Therefore, whoever would like to expand and enhance its understanding of this topics should, in some form, have a contact and conversation with Mr. Valek.

Jacobsen: What importance does cross-border cooperation hold in effectively tackling clergy-related abuse at both national and regional levels?

Jovanović: Cross-border cooperation is crucial in effectively tackling clergy-related abuse at both national and regional levels for several reasons:

  1. Shared Best Practices

Exchange of Information: Countries can share successful strategies and protocols for addressing abuse cases, enhancing overall effectiveness in handling allegations.

Training Programs: Joint training initiatives can equip clergy and lay leaders with the necessary skills to recognize and respond to abuse.

  1. Strengthening Legal Frameworks

Harmonization of Laws: Collaborative efforts can lead to more consistent legal standards and practices regarding abuse across borders, making it harder for perpetrators to evade justice by relocating.

Mutual Legal Assistance: Countries can support each other in prosecuting offenders who may flee to another jurisdiction.

  1. Victim Support and Advocacy

Cross-border Networks: Establishing networks among NGOs and support organizations can provide victims with resources and assistance regardless of where they are located.

Awareness Campaigns: Collaborative campaigns can raise awareness about abuse and available support services, fostering a culture of accountability.

  1. Joint Investigations

Pooling Resources: Collaborative investigations can be more effective, pooling resources and expertise to address complex cases that cross national boundaries.

Sharing Intelligence: Law enforcement agencies can share intelligence and evidence, facilitating more thorough investigations.

  1. Cultural Sensitivity and Understanding

Regional Context: Understanding the cultural dynamics and sensitivities of different countries can improve the effectiveness of interventions and responses to abuse allegations.

Building Trust: Cross-border partnerships can foster trust between countries, communities, and religious institutions, essential for effectively addressing abuse.

  1. Strengthening Institutional Accountability

Joint Oversight Bodies: Establishing regional oversight bodies can ensure consistent monitoring and accountability for religious institutions across borders.

Encouraging Transparency: Collaborative efforts can promote transparency in how allegations are handled, making it easier to hold institutions accountable.

Conclusion

Cross-border cooperation is vital in addressing clergy-related abuse, as it enhances legal frameworks, supports victims, fosters shared knowledge, and strengthens institutional accountability. By working together, countries can create a more effective response to abuse that transcends national boundaries, ultimately protecting vulnerable individuals and fostering a culture of accountability within religious institutions.

Jacobsen: What has been the hoped-for impact through promoting your updated book at the International Book Fair in Montenegro?

Jovanović: Promoting an updated book at the International Book Fair in Montenegro aims to achieve several hoped-for impacts:

  1. Increased Visibility

Broader Reach: The fair provides an opportunity to reach a diverse audience, including readers, publishers, and literary agents, enhancing the book’s visibility in the market.

  1. Engagement with Readers

Direct Interaction: Engaging with readers allows for firsthand feedback, fostering a connection that can lead to increased interest and sales.

  1. Networking Opportunities

Collaborations: The event facilitates networking with other authors, publishers, and industry professionals, potentially leading to future collaborations and partnerships.

  1. Cultural Exchange

Promoting Dialogue: Showcasing the book can stimulate discussions about its themes, contributing to cultural exchange and dialogue within the literary community.

  1. Strengthening Literary Community

Supporting Local Authors: Participation in the fair highlights the importance of local literature, helping to strengthen the overall literary community in Montenegro.

  1. Sales and Distribution

Increased Sales: The fair provides a platform for direct sales, potentially boosting initial sales figures and establishing distribution channels.

  1. Feedback for Future Works

Valuable Insights: Feedback received during the fair can inform future writing projects and marketing strategies, helping to refine the author’s approach.

Conclusion

Overall, promoting the updated book at the International Book Fair in Montenegro is expected to enhance visibility, foster engagement, and contribute to the broader literary landscape, ultimately supporting the author’s career and the promotion of literature in the region.

Jacobsen: How has media coverage at different levels influenced public perception and institutional responses to clergy-related abuse in Serbia?

Jovanović: Media coverage at different levels has significantly influenced public perception and institutional responses to clergy-related abuse in Serbia in several ways:

  1. Shaping Public Awareness

Raising Awareness: Media reports have brought attention to instances of clergy-related abuse, informing the public about the issues and prompting discussions that may have previously been suppressed.

Highlighting Victims’ Stories: By sharing personal accounts from victims, the media has humanized the issue, making it more relatable and fostering empathy among the public.

  1. Influencing Public Opinion

Framing the Narrative: The way media outlets frame the narrative around abuse can shape public opinion, either by emphasizing accountability and justice or by downplaying the severity of the allegations.

Creating Outrage or Support: Intense media coverage can lead to public outrage, pressuring institutions to respond more decisively to allegations. Conversely, favorable coverage can create a protective atmosphere for the church.

  1. Impacting Institutional Responses

Accountability Pressure: Media scrutiny can compel institutions, including the Serbian Orthodox Church and the government, to take allegations more seriously and implement reforms to address systemic issues.

Response Strategies: Institutions may adopt different strategies in response to media coverage—either reinforcing their positions or making public commitments to transparency and accountability based on the coverage.

  1. Regional and International Influence

Comparative Analysis: Coverage may draw comparisons with how similar cases are handled in other countries, influencing public expectations regarding accountability and institutional reforms.

Global Awareness: International media attention can amplify local issues, prompting both public and institutional responses that align with global human rights standards.

  1. Encouraging Dialogue and Reform

Facilitating Conversations: Media coverage can encourage broader societal conversations about the role of religion, authority, and accountability, potentially leading to demands for reform.

Inspiring Activism: Increased awareness and public interest can mobilize civil society organizations and activists to advocate for victims’ rights and institutional change.

Conclusion

In summary, media coverage at various levels has played a crucial role in shaping public perception and influencing institutional responses to clergy-related abuse in Serbia. By raising awareness, framing narratives, and applying pressure for accountability, the media has the potential to foster significant change within both religious institutions and broader societal attitudes.

Jacobsen: How might international human rights frameworks be applied to address clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church?

Jovanović: International human rights frameworks can be applied to address clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church in several key ways:

  1. Legal Obligations and Accountability

Ratification of Treaties: Serbia is a party to various international human rights treaties, such as the Convention on the Rights of the Child and the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights. These treaties obligate the state to protect individuals from abuse and ensure accountability.

Incorporation into Domestic Law: The principles of these treaties can be integrated into national legislation, requiring the Serbian government to establish legal mechanisms that address clergy-related abuse effectively.

  1. Protection of Victims’ Rights

Access to Justice: International frameworks emphasize the right of victims to seek justice and redress. Implementing these rights can empower victims of clergy-related abuse to come forward and report incidents without fear of reprisal.

Support Services: Frameworks can guide the development of support services for victims, including counseling, legal assistance, and safe reporting mechanisms.

  1. Monitoring and Reporting Mechanisms

Independent Oversight: Establishing independent bodies to monitor cases of abuse within religious institutions can ensure transparency and accountability. International human rights bodies often recommend the creation of such mechanisms.

Regular Reporting: Countries are encouraged to report on their compliance with human rights obligations. This can include data on abuse cases within religious institutions, fostering accountability and public awareness.

  1. Training and Capacity Building

Education for Clergy and Officials: International human rights frameworks can promote training programs for clergy, church officials, and law enforcement on recognizing, preventing, and responding to abuse.

Best Practices: Sharing best practices from other countries that have successfully addressed similar issues can guide reforms within the Serbian Orthodox Church.

  1. Encouraging Collaboration with Civil Society

Partnerships with NGOs: International frameworks can encourage collaboration between the church, the government, and civil society organizations to address abuse comprehensively.

Community Engagement: Involving communities in discussions about clergy-related abuse can help raise awareness and promote a culture of accountability within religious institutions.

  1. Advocacy for Institutional Reforms

Policy Recommendations: Human rights bodies can provide recommendations for reforms within the Serbian Orthodox Church, such as establishing clear reporting procedures for abuse and creating transparent investigative processes.

Accountability for Leadership: Advocating for accountability measures for church leaders who fail to address allegations of abuse can promote a culture of responsibility.

Conclusion

By applying international human rights frameworks, Serbia can enhance its approach to addressing clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church. This includes ensuring legal accountability, protecting victims’ rights, fostering transparency, and promoting collaboration with civil society, ultimately contributing to a safer and more accountable environment within religious institutions.

Jacobsen: What are the legal and institutional barriers at the national level that hinder effective prosecution of abuse cases involving clergy?

Jovanović: The legal and institutional barriers at the national level that hinder effective prosecution of abuse cases involving clergy can include:

  1. Weak Legal Framework

Insufficient Laws: Existing laws may not adequately address clergy-related abuse, leaving gaps that can be exploited by perpetrators.

Statute of Limitations: In many jurisdictions, the statute of limitations may be too short, preventing the prosecution of cases that come to light after a significant delay.

  1. Institutional Protection

Clerical Privilege: Some legal systems may afford clergy special protections or privileges, making it more difficult to prosecute them compared to lay individuals.

Internal Church Investigations: Many religious institutions may prefer to handle allegations internally, often resulting in inadequate investigations and lack of accountability.

  1. Cultural and Social Factors

Religious Influence: The strong influence of religious institutions in society can lead to reluctance among victims to come forward due to fear of stigmatization or retribution.

Public Sentiment: Societal attitudes that prioritize the reputation of the church over justice for victims can hinder reporting and prosecution.

  1. Lack of Resources and Training

Inadequate Training for Law Enforcement: Police and legal personnel may lack specific training on handling abuse cases involving clergy, leading to mishandling of investigations.

Limited Resources: Financial and human resources for investigating and prosecuting such cases may be insufficient, affecting the overall efficacy of the legal process.

  1. Judicial Bias

Perceived Bias: There may be a perceived or actual bias within the judicial system favoring religious institutions, leading to reluctance to prosecute cases against clergy.

Fear of Community Reaction: Judges and prosecutors might fear backlash from religious communities, which could influence their decisions regarding prosecution.

  1. Victim Support Deficiencies

Lack of Support Services: Insufficient victim support services can deter individuals from coming forward, as they may feel unsupported in navigating the legal system.

Trauma and Stigma: The trauma associated with abuse, coupled with societal stigma, can prevent victims from pursuing legal action.

Conclusion

These barriers create a complex environment that can obstruct justice for victims of clergy-related abuse. Addressing these challenges requires comprehensive legal reforms, enhanced training for law enforcement, better support for victims, and cultural shifts that prioritize accountability and transparency.

Jacobsen: How does the culture of silence at the local level affect efforts to expose and prevent abuse? What can break this culture?

Jovanović: The culture of silence at the local level significantly affects efforts to expose and prevent abuse in several ways:

  1. Hindrance to Reporting

Fear of Retaliation: Victims and witnesses may fear reprisals from the community or the church, deterring them from coming forward.

Stigma: There may be societal stigma attached to reporting abuse, particularly in religious contexts, which can silence victims and supporters.

  1. Normalization of Abuse

Cultural Acceptance: If abuse is seen as a normal part of the religious or community environment, it becomes more difficult to challenge and address.

Minimization of Issues: Community narratives may downplay the severity of abuse, leading to a lack of urgency in addressing the problem.

  1. Lack of Support Systems

Insufficient Resources: Communities may lack adequate support services for victims, further entrenching silence.

Limited Awareness: There may be a lack of awareness about the rights of victims and the mechanisms available for reporting abuse.

  1. Institutional Protectionism

Covering Up: Religious institutions may prioritize their reputation over accountability, leading to internal cover-ups rather than external reporting.

Inadequate Responses: Institutions may have inadequate procedures for handling allegations, reinforcing the culture of silence.

What Can Break This Culture?

  1. Education and Awareness Campaigns

Public Education: Increasing awareness about abuse and its effects can empower victims and the community to speak out.

Training Programs: Offering training on rights and available resources can help dismantle the stigma associated with reporting.

  1. Supportive Environment

Creating Safe Spaces: Establishing confidential reporting mechanisms can encourage victims to come forward without fear of exposure.

Community Support Groups: Fostering supportive networks for victims can help them feel less isolated and more empowered to speak out.

  1. Engagement of Community Leaders

Involvement of Influential Figures: Engaging respected community and religious leaders in discussions about abuse can lend credibility to efforts to break the silence.

Public Statements: Leaders can make public statements denouncing abuse, reinforcing a culture of accountability.

  1. Legal and Institutional Reforms

Strengthening Legal Frameworks: Implementing laws that protect whistleblowers and provide clear reporting pathways can encourage more individuals to come forward.

Accountability Mechanisms: Establishing independent oversight bodies can ensure that allegations are taken seriously and investigated thoroughly.

  1. Advocacy and Activism

Grassroots Movements: Supporting grassroots initiatives that advocate for victims’ rights can create pressure for change at both the community and institutional levels.

Coalitions: Forming coalitions among NGOs, activists, and community members can amplify efforts to expose and prevent abuse.

Conclusion

Breaking the culture of silence requires a multifaceted approach that combines education, support, community engagement, legal reforms, and advocacy. By fostering an environment that prioritizes accountability and victim support, communities can more effectively expose and prevent abuse.

Jacobsen: What are effective ways in which to continue and expand survivor advocacy, so victims can move from survivors to thrivers with appropriate social supports?

Jovanović:  Continuing and expanding survivor advocacy is crucial for helping victims transition from surviving to thriving. Here are effective ways to achieve this:

  1. Holistic Support Services

Comprehensive Care: Provide integrated services that address physical, mental, and emotional health, including counseling, medical care, and legal support.

Safe Housing: Ensure access to safe and affordable housing options for survivors to rebuild their lives without fear.

  1. Empowerment Programs

Skill Development: Offer vocational training and educational programs to help survivors gain independence and financial stability.

Leadership Opportunities: Encourage survivors to take on leadership roles within advocacy organizations, allowing them to influence policy and support others.

  1. Community Engagement

Support Networks: Foster peer support groups where survivors can share experiences and resources, creating a sense of community and belonging.

Awareness Campaigns: Conduct community outreach to educate the public about survivor issues and reduce stigma, fostering a more supportive environment.

  1. Advocacy and Policy Change

Lobby for Legal Reforms: Advocate for changes in laws and policies that protect survivors and provide necessary resources.

Partnerships with Organizations: Collaborate with NGOs, government agencies, and other stakeholders to strengthen advocacy efforts and resource availability.

  1. Access to Resources

Information Hubs: Create centralized resources where survivors can find information on available services, legal rights, and support systems.

Financial Assistance: Provide grants or funds to help survivors with immediate needs, such as medical bills or educational expenses.

  1. Mental Health Support

Trauma-Informed Care: Train service providers in trauma-informed approaches to ensure that survivors feel safe and respected in all interactions.

Crisis Intervention Services: Establish immediate support services for survivors in crisis, including hotlines and emergency counseling.

  1. Cultural Competence and Inclusivity

Tailored Programs: Develop services that are culturally sensitive and inclusive of diverse communities, ensuring that all survivors feel represented and understood.

Language Access: Provide resources in multiple languages to accommodate non-native speakers.

  1. Monitoring and Evaluation

Feedback Mechanisms: Implement systems for survivors to provide feedback on programs and services, ensuring that their voices shape ongoing advocacy efforts.

Data Collection: Collect and analyze data on survivor needs and outcomes to inform program development and improve service delivery.

  1. Long-Term Follow-Up

Continued Support: Establish long-term follow-up services to check in on survivors, ensuring they have ongoing access to resources and support.

Mentorship Programs: Pair survivors with mentors who can guide them through their healing and empowerment journeys.

Conclusion

By implementing these strategies, advocacy efforts can create a supportive framework that empowers survivors, helping them transition from surviving to thriving. Collaboration, comprehensive services, and a focus on empowerment are essential components of this process.

Jacobsen: How do cultural and religious factors unique to Serbia and the Balkans influence the recognition and handling of abuse allegations?

Jovanović:  Cultural and religious factors unique to Serbia and the Balkans significantly influence the recognition and handling of abuse allegations in several ways:

  1. Cultural Attitudes Toward Authority

Respect for Authority: There is often a deep-seated respect for authority figures, including clergy, which can lead to reluctance in questioning or reporting allegations against them. This can result in a culture of silence around abuse.

Collective Identity: The importance of community and collective identity may discourage individuals from coming forward, as doing so could bring shame to the community or institution.

  1. Religious Influence

Clerical Authority: The Serbian Orthodox Church holds considerable sway in societal norms and values. Allegations against clergy can be seen as attacks on the church itself, leading to defensiveness and denial rather than accountability.

Moral Expectations: Religious teachings often emphasize forgiveness and redemption, which can lead to a tendency to downplay the severity of abuse or to prioritize reconciliation over justice.

  1. Stigmatization of Victims

Social Stigma: Victims of abuse may face stigma and isolation, leading to fears of being ostracized by their communities. This can deter reporting and seeking help.

Gender Roles: Traditional gender norms can further complicate the situation, as women may feel pressure to conform to societal expectations that prioritize family unity over individual well-being.

  1. Legal and Institutional Framework

Inadequate Legal Protections: The legal system may not fully address the complexities of abuse allegations, particularly within religious contexts, leading to insufficient responses to reported cases.

Internal Church Mechanisms: The tendency for religious institutions to handle allegations internally can result in inadequate investigations and a lack of transparency, reinforcing the culture of silence.

  1. Historical Context

Legacy of Conflict: The historical context of the Balkans, including recent conflicts, can affect societal attitudes toward authority and trust in institutions. Distrust in state systems may lead individuals to rely on religious institutions, complicating the response to allegations.

Collective Trauma: The region’s history of trauma can influence how communities respond to individual trauma, often prioritizing collective healing over addressing specific allegations.

  1. Community Support Structures

Limited Resources: Support systems for victims may be underdeveloped, making it difficult for individuals to find help or advocacy. Communities may lack access to counseling or legal assistance.

Role of NGOs: While some NGOs work to address these issues, their influence may be limited by cultural and religious norms, making it challenging to advocate for change.

Conclusion

Cultural and religious factors in Serbia and the Balkans create a complex landscape for recognizing and handling abuse allegations. The interplay of authority, stigma, and community dynamics can hinder reporting and accountability. Addressing these challenges requires a nuanced understanding of local contexts, as well as efforts to educate communities and reform institutional responses.

Jacobsen: What are necessary actions for effectively combatting clergy-related abuse in the Serbian Orthodox Church for the long-term?

Jovanović: Effectively combatting clergy-related abuse in the Serbian Orthodox Church for the long term requires a multifaceted approach that includes the following necessary actions:

  1. Establishing Transparent Reporting Mechanisms

Independent Reporting Channels: Create confidential and independent channels for victims to report abuse without fear of retaliation.

Clear Protocols: Develop clear procedures for handling allegations that ensure thorough investigations and accountability.

  1. Implementing Robust Training Programs

Clergy Training: Provide comprehensive training for clergy on ethical conduct, boundaries, and the impact of abuse.

Educating Congregations: Offer educational programs for congregants about recognizing signs of abuse and the importance of reporting.

  1. Strengthening Legal Frameworks

Advocating for Legislative Changes: Work with lawmakers to ensure that legal protections for victims are strengthened and that there are stringent penalties for abusers.

Collaboration with Law Enforcement: Foster partnerships between church leaders and law enforcement to ensure that abuse cases are taken seriously and investigated thoroughly.

  1. Creating Support Systems for Survivors

Counseling Services: Establish access to psychological support and counseling for victims of abuse.

Support Networks: Develop peer support groups for survivors to share experiences and healing resources.

  1. Promoting a Culture of Accountability

Zero Tolerance Policy: Implement a clear zero-tolerance policy for abuse within the church, emphasizing that all allegations will be taken seriously.

Public Accountability: Encourage public statements from church leaders that condemn abuse and outline the church’s commitment to preventing it.

  1. Encouraging Community Engagement

Community Awareness Campaigns: Conduct outreach programs to educate the public on the issue of clergy-related abuse and the importance of supporting victims.

Involving Lay Leaders: Engage lay leaders and members of the congregation in discussions about preventing abuse and promoting a safe environment.

  1. Ensuring Transparency and Accountability in Investigations

Independent Oversight Committees: Establish independent committees to oversee investigations of abuse allegations and ensure transparency in the process.

Regular Reporting: Require regular public reports on the church’s handling of abuse allegations to maintain accountability.

  1. Fostering a Safe Environment within the Church

Policy Development: Create and enforce policies that promote safe interactions between clergy and congregants, particularly minors.

Regular Audits: Conduct regular audits of church practices and policies related to abuse prevention and response.

  1. Encouraging International Cooperation

Learning from Best Practices: Collaborate with international organizations and other religious institutions to adopt best practices for preventing and addressing abuse.

Support from Global Church Bodies: Seek support from global Orthodox church organizations in implementing reforms.

  1. Promoting Open Dialogue within the Church

Encouraging Whistleblower Protections: Implement protections for whistleblowers who report misconduct or abuse.

Facilitating Conversations: Create forums for open dialogue about clergy-related issues, allowing congregants to express concerns and propose solutions.

Conclusion

Addressing clergy-related abuse within the Serbian Orthodox Church requires commitment, transparency, and a collaborative approach. By implementing these actions, the church can create a safer environment for its members and foster a culture of accountability and support for victims.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the opportunity and your time, Bojan.

Jovanović: You’re welcome! If you have any more questions or need further assistance, feel free to ask.

Further Internal Resources (Chronological, yyyy/mm/dd):

Historical Articles

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 1: Adam Metropoulos (2024/01/11)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 2: Domestic Violence (2024/01/12)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 3: Finances (2024/01/16)

Crimes of the Eastern Orthodox Church 4: Sex Abuse (2024/01/17)

Interviews

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu on Clergy-Perpetrated Sexual Abuse (2024/06/02)

Katherine Archer on California Senate Bill 894 (2024/06/11)

Dorothy Small on Abuse of Adults in the Roman Catholic Church (2024/06/16)

Melanie Sakoda on Orthodox Clergy-Related Misconduct (2024/06/23)

Professor David K. Pooler, Ph.D., LCSW-S on Clergy Adult Sexual Abuse (2024/07/21)

Dr. Hermina Nedelescu & Dorothy Small: Ecumenical Catholic-Orthodox Discourse (2024/07/24)

Professor David K. Pooler, Ph.D., LCSW-S on Consent and Power (2024/08/13)

Irene Deschênes on Outrage Canada (2024/09/05)

Press Releases:

#ChurchToo Survivors Call on CA Governor Gavin Newsom (2024/06/09)

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Åsa Heuser on Brazil’s Humanists and Evangelicals

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/23

Åsa Heuser is a Finnish member of Humanistas Brasil. She discusses her move to Brazil, the challenges of promoting humanism in a religious country, and tensions between individual freedom and social responsibility. Heuser highlights issues with evangelical groups, including religious discrimination, financial abuse, and lack of public understanding of secular humanism.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Åsa Heuser because she is Finnish and a member of Humanistas Brasil. Quick question: How did you go from Finland to Brazil regarding organizational membership?

Åsa Heuser: I came to Brazil as a teenager because my father got a job here. He brought the family along, and that’s how I ended up in Brazil. I stayed, married, had children, and now I have grandchildren. I’ve been living in Brazil for over 50 years.

Jacobsen: What are the main issues facing Brazilian humanism? What do you view as the more positive aspects of community activities?

Heuser: It is challenging to get people to pay attention to what humanism is because it is relatively new in Brazil. It’s in its early stages, and getting the message across is difficult. Secular morality is a strange concept in Brazil’s religious mindset, so spreading the idea and getting more people involved is challenging. Even those familiar with humanism and identifying as humanists need help getting others interested.

That’s one issue. However, we have a group on WhatsApp and maintain profiles on Instagram and Facebook. One of the members even wrote a book, which is being made available to those who want to read it.

We try to share information about humanism on social media so people can learn more about it, but it spreads slowly.

Jacobsen: What community activities do members participate in online or in person?

Heuser: Meeting in person is challenging because Brazil is such a large country. When members live in the same region, they try to meet up, but most discussions happen on WhatsApp.

We discuss ethical issues and various aspects of humanism, exploring how we can apply these principles. We also have a separate group for board members and an open group for anyone interested. However, sometimes, people join the open group without fully understanding the concept of humanism, leading to disagreements and some tension.

Jacobsen: Let me interject here with a relevant example: There was a moment with the South African secular group, the South African Secular Society (SASS). It went like this:

we can register marriage officers. We have had various applications from theists. We point people at the SASS mission statement and ethos, which includes the naturalist worldview.

We say very early on, “Do you support the SASS mission and ethos?” The only choice is, “Yes.” We say, “Are you prepared to do marriage ceremonies free of supernatural content?” The only answer is, “Yes.”

We say, “Are you prepared to do same-sex and heterosexual sex marriages?” The only answer is, “Yes.” There is, “Are you prepared to do counselling?” It is an optional one. Anyway, people will blithely skim through these, “Yes, yes, yes, carry on, no problems.”

Then we ask for motivation, “Why do you want to become a secular marriage officer?” At that point, we can quite easily get things like, “Oh, I am a pastor at so-and-so congregation. I wanted to marry my congregants.”

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: We also get, “I am a prominent member of x, y, z church.” We don’t see it is in the motivation, but we also ask them for sample ceremonies.

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: For example, in fact, we had one very recently. I hadn’t gone through the ceremony when we copied it in. We put this one on Google Docs, so the whole team could see it. But I started reading it.

And oops! This chap is mentioning God!

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: He has 4 citations of God! He has got several references to several biblical verses.

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: Now, in fact, Wynand can tell you more about how this one got through the cracks. He set up various protections. But due to technical website issues, he turned it off. So, the person had got through right to that point.

I emailed him to say, “I noticed that you’ve ticked all the boxes saying you’re a secular person and everything else. You’ve agreed to the terms and conditions and everything else. But I see that you’re citing God and making biblical references in your marriage ceremonies. Can you clarify for us?”

He writes back and says, “Cancel my application, I am a Christian and I believe in GOD!”

[Wynand’s Meijer’s wife laughing in the background – not part of the conversation, but listening into it, obviously.]

Jacobsen: [Laughing].

Raubenheimer: I wrote back saying, “Please tell us how you got that far through our form, so that we can make it easier and waste their time.” I didn’t mention wasting our time, which was obvious as well.

I did not hear back from him. The interesting thing is, this man is an attorney.

Jacobsen: Oh my goodness.

There was some confusion; unfortunately, the situation escalated into frustration.

So, that can happen in humanist groups with a complete misunderstanding, like, “How can you live without the divine?”

Heuser: Yes, most people don’t understand atheism. They simply can’t.

So when they come into the community, they don’t necessarily understand what that implies. Recently, there was a guy who called himself an “ANCAP.” Do you know what that means?

Jacobsen: No. 

Heuser: It refers to an anarchist capitalist.

Jacobsen: Oh yes, right. 

Heuser: So he was there, arguing that humanist rules were authoritarianism and that people should be free to do whatever they want. However, the group argued that we must also think about the collective.

Yes, we can’t only think about our freedom. But he was adamant, insisting, “No, we should be free, even to avoid vaccination,” and that goes against humanism. Capitalism, especially in that form, goes against humanism.

Jacobsen: Yes, there are certain strands of that, and the Amsterdam Declaration stipulates “social responsibility,” balancing individual freedom with social responsibility.

Heuser: Exactly. I think you can’t be individualistic—it’s absurd. We are very clear about being secular humanists, so that point is clear.

Jacobsen: Yes, but I’ve noticed that some people have started branding mechanisms that strip away the word “secular” for simplicity, or even “humanism” itself. I understand the context, but secular humanism must remain clear.

Heuser: In Brazil, we need to make that distinction very clear.

Jacobsen: Especially with the rise of evangelicals and the relative decline of Catholics, how has this shift in religious dynamics impacted secular organizations and movements in Brazil?

Heuser: There are practical issues. For example, some politicians try to pass laws based on religion. Some propose that the Bible be read in schools before classes start or that students pray in class.

Jacobsen: So, does your group directly intervene in these issues?

Heuser: We don’t have the power to intervene directly, but independent lawyers can step in. They file lawsuits to counter these attempts to impose religion in a secular state.

Jacobsen: How often do these bills succeed when proposed in parliament or local government levels?

Heuser: If nobody opposes them, they succeed. There was a case on the national level where they tried to impose that all libraries must have a Bible. Someone said, “Well, you can’t obligate all libraries to have a copy of the Bible. Why not include all the other religious books that exist?” Of course, it’s not forbidden to have a Bible, but you can’t impose it.

Jacobsen: It’s a library, so they likely already have one in many cases. I don’t think there are many libraries without a Bible because it’s so mainstream.

Heuser: Yes, but there was still that attempt to impose it. 

Jacobsen: There’s a joke in North America about why all these hotels have Gideon Bibles. Also, people wonder, “What is a Gideon?” So, these sorts of jokes quietly float around in North American circles.

Heuser: Yes, it’s a similar orientation.

Jacobsen: What do you think are some of the serious violations of equality of rights, especially as you’re noting, primarily by evangelicals in Brazil?

Heuser: Yes, it’s widespread. For example, we have African religions here, like Candomblé. These evangelicals are fiercely opposed to them. So, these groups, these African religions, suffer a lot of discrimination and even violence from evangelical groups. That’s a serious violation of the secular state.

Jacobsen: Are the authorities doing anything to defend them?

Heuser: Unfortunately, I don’t see much action from the authorities defending them. It’s sad.

Jacobsen: Are there ethnic tensions related to this since Candomblé is probably more associated with black communities?

Heuser: It used to be primarily a religion of black people, but nowadays, there are many white people involved as well. So, it’s no longer just a racial issue but also a religious one. These evangelical groups have targeted Candomblé, calling it a religion of the devil, literally. Some extreme pastors use that language.

Jacobsen: Yes, I’ve heard similar rhetoric in North America, particularly in the U.S. Pastors claim that people who argue for the separation of church and state or try to stop violations of this principle in public institutions are demonic. What seems like metaphors to outsiders aren’t metaphors to them.

Heuser: Yes, I know. 

Jacobsen: They talk about spiritual battles. 

Heuser: That’s exactly what happens here in Brazil.

Jacobsen: What’s the consequence for ordinary people? How does it affect them?

Heuser: Many people give a lot of money to these churches. Some churches even tell people to stop taking their medication. I’ve heard of cases where people died because they followed that advice. It’s a serious problem.

Jacobsen: That’s truly alarming.

Heuser: Yes, it’s a serious issue.

Jacobsen: So, are these evangelicals more on the charismatic end of things?

Heuser: Yes. They have these cult-like gatherings, with chanting and everything you can imagine. Then, they become so passionate that you can’t reason with them anymore.

Jacobsen: So, do common people become very angry and upset?

Heuser: Yes, for example, the former president had a motto, something like “God above all.” It was like “God, homeland, and patriotism” or something like that. These churches don’t pay taxes, so they are exempt from land, buildings, and services taxes.

Jacobsen: Are all of their assets and activities tax-exempt?

Heuser: Yes, exactly. In Brazil, some of these churches are suspected to be involved with criminal groups like drug traffickers. That can lead to the possibility of money laundering because they receive all this money from their congregations, and there’s no accountability. They can report receiving as much as they want, and some of that money might come from other sources, like drug trafficking.

Jacobsen: That’s alarming. 

Heuser: And for drug addicts, these churches often run centers meant to help them. Still, instead, they’re being brainwashed by religious organizations. And under Bolsonaro’s presidency, they were trying to get public resources to fund these centers, so they benefited from all sides. They received public funding to run these centers, which they used to brainwash people who were struggling with drug addiction.

Jacobsen: Typically, these organizations are led by one man at the top, who often institutionalizes communal or individual abuse. Most public awareness of these issues comes from front-page news stories about sexual violence, assault, or illicit affairs that don’t align with biblical mandates. Often, many men and women within these communities are complicit in protecting the leader’s image.

Heuser: Yes, that’s exactly what we see here in Brazil. On the other hand, the general public is so brainwashed that if you say these accusations are false, they’ll believe they are false. The fake news problem is so widespread here that people have been led to believe only in sources favouring the powerful—these leaders. If the leaders say it’s a lie, the public will believe it’s a lie, and they won’t believe the truth.

Jacobsen: What happens to the women in these communities, especially when they are more often subjected to coercive situations or sexual violence? It seems many institutions are coercive, pressuring people to give finances even when they’re in poverty or facing economic abuse.

Heuser: Yes, it’s a serious problem. Women, in particular, are often coerced, and the financial abuse in these institutions is rampant. Even those in poverty are expected to give what little they have to support the church, reinforcing economic abuse in these communities.

Jacobsen: So, are these evangelicals more on the charismatic end of things?

Heuser: Yes. They have these cult-like gatherings, with chanting and everything you can imagine. Then, they become so passionate that you can’t reason with them anymore.

Jacobsen: So, do common people become very angry and upset?

Heuser: Yes, for example, the former president had a motto, something like “God above all.” It was like “God, homeland, and patriotism” or something like that. These churches don’t pay taxes, so they are exempt from land, buildings, and services taxes.

Jacobsen: Are all of their assets and activities tax-exempt?

Heuser: Yes, exactly. In Brazil, many of these churches are also involved with drug trafficking. Some are engaged in money laundering because they receive all this money from their congregations, and there’s no accountability. They can report receiving as much as they want, and some of that money might come from other sources, like drug trafficking.

Jacobsen: That’s alarming. And for drug addicts, these churches often run centers meant to help them. Still, instead, they’re being brainwashed by religious organizations.

Heuser: Yes, they brainwash them. And under Bolsonaro’s presidency, they were trying to get public resources to fund these centers, so they benefited from all sides. They received public funding to run these centers, which they used to brainwash people who were struggling with drug addiction.

Jacobsen: Typically, these organizations are led by one man at the top, who often institutionalizes communal or individual abuse. Most public awareness of these issues comes from front-page news stories about sexual violence, assault, or illicit affairs that don’t align with biblical mandates. Often, many men and women within these communities are complicit in protecting the leader’s image.

Heuser: Yes, that’s exactly what we see here in Brazil. On the other hand, the general public is so brainwashed that if you say these accusations are false, they’ll believe they are false. The fake news problem is so widespread here that people have been led to believe only in sources favouring the powerful—these leaders. If the leaders say it’s a lie, the public will believe it’s a lie, and they won’t believe the truth.

Jacobsen: What happens to the women in these communities, especially when they are more often subjected to coercive situations or sexual violence? It seems many institutions are coercive, pressuring people to give finances even when they’re in poverty or facing economic abuse.

Heuser: Yes, it’s a serious problem. Women, in particular, are often coerced, and the financial abuse in these institutions is rampant. Even those in poverty are expected to give what little they have to support the church, reinforcing economic abuse in these communities.

Jacobsen: Few people with more resources are willing to finance these kinds of organizations because they don’t see any direct benefit. The biggest boosts I’ve heard of are when people die and leave a portion of their will to a humanist organization. That has been the largest financial support for these organizations, outside government-funded ones, like the Norwegian humanists. The Norwegian humanists receive government funding and function just as well as the churches—sometimes even better.

Jacobsen: When I spoke with them in Copenhagen in 2023, they wanted less government funding, which I’ve never heard from a religious institution. It’s almost funny—”We want less money.” They could build institutions, donate to neighbouring countries, and support surrounding communities. It’s impressive.

There’s been a lot more conversation about the differences in funding between the North and South and how that affects growth rates. In North America and Western Europe, for example, humanists advocate for many things—such as healthcare, pharmacare, and education systems—that are already established. These regions often have lower correctional rates as well. These are the things that humanists value and aim for globally.

Heuser: There are differences, but those things are central to what we want to achieve.

Jacobsen: I’ve noticed that the global humanists I’ve met from the Global South tend to be more resilient because they face tougher circumstances. They have much to teach the Global North about creativity, especially since they must be more resourceful with limited resources.

Heuser: I agree. 

Jacobsen: To help the overall humanist movement, more financial support should be provided from the Global North to the Global South. However, the knowledge exchange should be bidirectional, particularly regarding creativity—humanists from the Global South can offer valuable insights. What creative solutions or activities have you found while working, living, and consulting in the southern regions? One thing I’ve noticed, similar to Brazil and Canada, is that distance is a big challenge. Some communities have started doing online discussion groups and WhatsApp groups. 

Heuser: We have a WhatsApp group for everyone, and it helps people connect.

Jacobsen: So, that’s been effective?

Heuser: Yes, it works well. People often use it to find out how many humanists are in their city and arrange local meetings.

Jacobsen: That sounds like a good solution for connecting across large distances. What would you mainly recommend for humanist organizations to grow, become more resilient, and handle challenges such as economic, legal, and community violence? What are the key issues humanist organizations might face?

Heuser: As I mentioned, we are so few that we only have a little power to do a lot. But the most important thing would be to spread the idea more, to get more people to understand humanism and what we propose. That would make a difference because not all atheists are humanists. There are many atheists, but they don’t necessarily have the idea of an ethical system based on humanism.

Jacobsen: Yes, that’s a very good point.

Heuser: The main focus is getting the message out to reach more people.

Jacobsen: There’s also potential for building inter-belief or inter-organizational partnerships. Many people, even if they don’t explicitly talk about humanism in their daily lives, work, or activism, align with the core values of humanism. Many human rights organizations, for example, do work that reflects humanist principles, even if they don’t call it that.

Heuser: Yes.

Jacobsen: Feminist organizations as well, especially when it comes to addressing issues like sexual violence, which is something that often overlaps with humanist concerns.

Heuser: Right. For example, in evangelical communities, when women go to their pastor for help, they’re often told to pray to God for their husbands to change. That’s the only advice they get—no real help. They don’t help her. They tell her to endure it, not to complain.

Jacobsen: And issues like femicide—the rates tend to be higher in these communities, correct?

Heuser: Yes, the rates of femicide and domestic violence are quite high, especially in evangelical groups.

Jacobsen: What role can humanists play in addressing these issues? Has there been any advocacy to slow it down?

Heuser: Unfortunately, as a small group, we don’t have much power to interfere with these issues on a large scale. If we had more people, we could do something. But as it stands, our influence is limited. But there are things humanists could do if they had more numbers. For example, I know of one humanist celebrant in Brazil who performs humanist ceremonies. Even though he’s not a formal group member, when someone asks about humanist ceremonies, I refer them to him.

Jacobsen: That’s great to hear. There are small wins like that. Thank you so much for your time today. Do you have any final reflections before we wrap up?

Heuser: Not really; I’ve given you as much information as I could. It was less than you expected, but if you have more questions in the future, feel free to reach out.

Jacobsen: Absolutely. We’ll stay in touch. Thank you again.

Heuser: Thank you. Goodbye.

Jacobsen: Goodbye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

AJ on Global Humanism Lessons From Singapore

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/23

AJ serves as a director and trustee of Humanists International. He is a founding trustee of the National Multifaith Youth Centre in the UK. He also serves as national coordinator of Young Humanists UK.. He can be seen on XInstagramMetaLinkedInHumanism Now podcast, and his professional pagelast interview too.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So, here’s another recap of the International Humanist Conference in Singapore, which was held alongside the Humanists International General Assembly, featuring prominent figures from the humanist movement. A notable name in youth humanism from the UK attended. AJ, what was your first impression of Singapore when you arrived? And what would you say was your main takeaway?

AJ: My first impression? I’ve visited Singapore several times before. I have family there, and in Malaysia, so it wasn’t my first time experiencing the culture. In that sense, it felt like coming home, with a sense of nostalgia. I hadn’t travelled to Singapore—or much at all—in the past five years.

It was refreshing to be on the road again and to reconnect with fellow humanist friends. The experience may not have been as new or surprising to me as it was for others. Still, I did appreciate the warm Singaporean welcome, generous hospitality, and positive, energetic way of speaking. The honesty in how Malaysians and Singaporeans express themselves resonates with me. The welcome from the humanist community in Singapore was fantastic.

In the lead-up to the conference, there were some concerns about government oversight, surveillance, and their interest in our activities—particularly about speaker visas—which might have conflicted with the human rights values held by many of us. While some concerns did come up, they didn’t overshadow the event. The immigration process was smooth, and the friendliness and dedication of the people immediately struck me.

As for my takeaway, I was particularly pleased that interfaith dialogue and harmony were central themes at this conference. The International Humanist Conference (hosted by Humanists Society Singapore) and the Humanists International General Assembly took place over the long weekend. Interfaith dialogue is a significant aspect of my Humanism and is why I joined the humanist movement. I am a humanist ambassador, someone who engages in dialogue with other faiths and beliefs rather than being inward-looking. Singapore embodies that spirit, and I left with renewed motivation and inspiration to continue my interfaith work. That message truly resonated with me.

Jacobsen: Did you participate in any speakers, workshops, or guided tours?

AJ: Yes, as a Humanists International board member, I was able to attend quite a few sessions. Certainly, the guided tour stood out to me. It continued the interfaith theme of Singapore. It was present every day of the event. The guided tour, including a workshop-style Q&A session, really stood out. There was also a demonstration of some interfaith work and deradicalization efforts. We visited a mosque as part of the cultural tour, so the tour/workshop combo was part of the same event.

The tour highlighted Singapore’s deep history, even though it’s quite a small place geographically. Different parts of the city reflect different aspects of its history. We visited a synagogue, though we didn’t go inside, and we also saw the old colonial British quarters, Indian areas with a history of Indian merchants, and the Malay and Chinese districts. For those on the tour visiting Singapore for the first time, it was an excellent way to showcase why Singapore places such a high value on interfaith harmony.

Singapore’s past includes violent conflicts between different groups, often stemming from colonial decisions. Singapore decided to set differences aside as a city-state and prioritize tolerance and coexistence. This is a great source of pride for Singaporeans, and that sentiment was very clear throughout the tour.

As part of the tour, we also visited a school where they emphasized that everyone in Singapore must learn English. Still, they also have to learn their native language, whether it’s Malay, Tamil, or Chinese. This reflects the pragmatic values of Singaporean society, which seeks unity through shared language and encourages a strong connection to individual cultural heritage.

It wasn’t anything new to me since my Indian family has been in Singapore for about 20 years. However, it was still inspiring to see it in practice. We could weave in the humanist and interfaith messages during the cultural tours.

Here’s an example of how they promote inter-religious harmony with government approval. We must acknowledge that the government sees the benefit, even for cynical economic reasons. Inter-religious harmony is beneficial because it doesn’t interfere with business and makes the environment more attractive for businesses. Singapore has thrived because of this approach. In that sense, there was a certain poignancy to it all.

Speaking as a UK resident, just a few weeks before I left, communal violence had broken out in certain areas. It became a national and international story, with fears of riots spreading to many cities. In the end, it didn’t escalate as feared, but the violence in one town caught the nation’s attention and shocked us. It reminded us of the society we’re living in post-Brexit.

So, we arrived in Singapore and took this cultural tour the next day. Our guide—a Singaporean—talked about the terrible riots they had in the past, with violence, bloodshed, and militaristic marches from different faith groups. The government had to make a decision and take the lead. They told the faith and cultural groups, “You’ll have a place, but it’s a place we define.” And that place was the same for every religion.

It was inspiring, though perhaps not perfect and too heavy-handed for those with Western sensibilities. Some might call it a manufactured or artificial harmony. Whatever it is, it works in Singapore in ways the UK model doesn’t. It was sobering, especially as someone with a British passport coming over and seeing this firsthand.

I should also mention the deradicalization workshop, which included visiting a mosque. It was a Sunni mosque right in the middle of Singapore, and it worked closely with the government and security services to deradicalize Singaporeans from various backgrounds—regardless of class, nationality, ethnic background, or even gender. Both males and females, even teenagers, who might have been radicalized online, are part of this effort. They focus on Muslims who have been drawn towards extremism or are showing sympathies for extremist ideologies.

That was particularly inspiring—their commitment to this work. We humanist guests to the mosque hit them with a few hard questions. You’re asking people to suspend their disbelief and believe in something without evidence, which in this case is Islam, even if it’s moderate Islam. So, it would be surprising if some people took their interpretations further. Isn’t it all part of the same path? This sparked quite a lively discussion between the humanist audience and the deradicalization staff at the mosque.

For someone like me, I run a Quran class, and I have many progressive Muslim friends. I also engage in interfaith dialogue with Muslims, studying the Quran, reinterpreting it, etc. That aspect of the conversation stood out to me as well.

Jacobsen: When it comes to the style of conversation within interfaith harmony work, as I know you’re very involved in that in the UK—particularly in orienting Humanism towards increasing tolerance, compassion, and advancing human rights—did you notice a difference in language use at the interfaith harmony workshop or presentation compared to the British context? They have similar goals. But do they use different means in terms of communication styles?

AJ: Yes. That’s something Britain can learn from. Of course, the two countries have slightly different personalities. Singaporeans communicate much more practically, matter-of-fact, and directly. They’re very down-to-earth. Brits, like Canadians, tend to beat around the bush more, with a lot of deference and politeness, often not directly saying what they mean.

Sometimes, that British approach can be beneficial. As Lincoln said, “The point of tact is not sharp.” But in Singapore, they can be quite sharp, yet it works because they’re clear that the sharpness is not about discriminating based on faith. It’s more about saying, “Look, we’re all Singaporeans.” They’ll lay down the law in a way that says, “If you act this way, we, as a society, have to object because that’s not what being Singaporean is about. It’s bad for business or bad for the nation’s goals.”

They emphasize how, 50 years ago, Singapore was seen as a backwater in the Malay Peninsula. Still, now it’s known globally for its intelligence, work ethic, financial power, and trade. They’ve achieved that by choosing a certain direction and pulling together as a society, creating a Singaporean identity.

The tour guide mentioned that this identity is a “manufactured” one. Being “Singaporean” didn’t exist long ago but was purposefully created. That identity has been actively embraced and is still alive and well today. It’s kept in the forefront. In contrast, in Britain, there’s more of a tendency to “coddle” people, so to speak—everyone wants to get along, and we’re often overly nice to each other. But here, things happen without too much government interference, while in Singapore, there seems to be more of a fear or respect for the government.

There’s a noticeable difference in how the two countries interact with their governments and the public. In Britain, it’s not seen in quite the same way.

Only some people agree with the government’s approach. Some people think the government is too soft on certainissues, like preaching. In contrast, others feel it’s overreaching, so they disengage entirely. 

The government’s backing of interfaith institutions in Singapore, especially the IRO (Inter-Religious Organization), gives these activities more credibility than those in the UK. In Singapore, government support lends interfaith work increased legitimacy, whereas, in the UK, the approach often feels a bit “kumbaya”—very soft, idealistic, and sometimes naive. We’re constantly grappling with nebulous concepts, especially in the post-Brexit environment, like “British values.”

What exactly are British values? How do we define them? And once we do, do we have the confidence to assert them and say, “These are British values. You either opt in or leave”?

Singapore is clear on this point—they’ve decided to enforce a strong social contract. In some ways, they’re almost forced to because of geographical limitations. There isn’t enough space in Singapore, so if you’re going to stay there, you must sign up for certain aspects of their social contract, which is rigidly enforced.

In the UK, it’s different, partly due to the long history of invasions, waves of immigration, and the post-colonial environment. Many young Brits don’t have the appetite to be forceful or demanding of the immigrant population. For these reasons, interfaith conversations in the UK don’t carry as much weight. They aren’t as respected, even by the government.

In Singapore, interfaith efforts are more successful because of the government’s support and the collective buy-in to the Singaporean identity. They can afford to be more direct. There’s a sense that interfaith work is part of building a great Singapore. They tell people, “This is why we’re here—get on board.” And people generally go along with it. In the UK, not so much.

Jacobsen: That’s an interesting analysis. Your commentary on Singapore’s interfaith work highlights its pragmatism. But it’s also about the broader approach to interfaith work, which is contextual nationally. Singapore’s history is different from Britain’s, and its geographic context and constraints are different, too. Both are wealthy, well-educated countries, but those geographic constraints place pressures on the type of country you can build and how you define national values. In Singapore, they’ve defined “Singaporean values,” and interfaith work is integrated into that framework. I agree with that analysis. What were the emotional highs and lows of the conference for you—not just the takeaways, but your feelings during the event?

AJ: One of the most memorable moments was Sunday, Friday, or Thursday. I am trying to remember the exact days, but before the official conference and the General Assembly began; they hosted a social night, which included a buffet dinner.Afterward, they had an open mic session—though it seemed spontaneous, it had some structure. Maybe the president of the humanist societies from Singapore and Malaysia would come up and speak, along with Andrew Copson and a few others. That part was planned.

Then, they asked, “Does anyone else have something to share?” because there was time left; and people didn’t want to head home immediately. What followed was almost an hour of performances. My fellow board member Roslyn Mould came out with an LGBTQ pride song, a rap, which she displayed on the projector while dancing around. She got everyone up and dancing, too.

It turned into an impromptu talent show. Peter Dankwa from Humanists International played an instrument—the harmonica.. People also read poetry. I loved that. People introduced themselves, and it felt like a gathering of ambassadors. Sudesh Ghoderao from India came up, and many ambassadors or leaders from their respective countries also spoke. It was nice and very spontaneous.

People voiced their concerns in a very open forum. It was so successful that we discussed it in the board meeting afterward and decided we should have more of these kinds of sessions. While we want things to be manageable, having an open mic format allows people to share freely. Some gave speeches about what was happening in their countries, while others performed or expressed gratitude.

There were discussions on various issues; someone even raised the topic of Israel and Palestine. A representative from Free Thought Lebanon spoke, which resonated with me. That may have been one of the emotional lows, especially when we passed resolutions on Afghanistan and Venezuela. The resolution on Venezuela could have been much stronger, but it passed nonetheless.

There wasn’t a voice from the members on the Israel-Palestine issue, and someone from the audience did raise that during the General Assembly, saying, “There’s an elephant in the room that we’re not addressing.” That was an area for improvement, and it was disappointing. But someone raised it during this unstructured open mic session before the conference officially began. People were nodding along, and giving a good reaction was a highlight, even if it still needed to be addressed formally with a resolution.

Jacobsen: How are you planning to incorporate some of the lessons from the General Assembly in Singapore into youth humanism globally once you’re back and settled, even though it might feel like months since you were at the conference?

AJ: Yes, time does always seem to run away from us. Seeing many young volunteers from the Singaporean Humanist Society and the Malaysian and Indonesian Humanist societies was very pleasing. It’s tough to be openly humanist or atheist in those countries, but having their presence was significant. The Malaysian society rejoined after dropping out, and this was the first time that the Indonesian group Humanesia was admitted as a member.

Now that we have those regional groupings in the informal WhatsApp community of Humanists Worldwide, I want to build on that, harness and elevate their voices, and make them more visible on Instagram, TikTok, or wherever they’re active. They’ve got a lot of enthusiastic volunteers.

In the past, I’ve done other interfaith work in Singapore from 2018 to 2019, meeting Baha’is, Sufi groups, Muslims, and Buddhists. This time, however, it felt like there was even more energy from Singapore and Malaysia, which we need to include here in the UK. Tapping into that, cross-promoting, and elevating their voices to energize British youth would be very welcome.

As the coordinator of Young Humanists in the UK, along with my colleague Nicole Shasha, I sometimes feel like we’retoo relaxed and lackadaisical. Our friends in Sweden say the same thing—they almost wish the Swedish Church was worse because things are too comfortable, making it hard to push Humanism forward without a clear “enemy.”

Connecting UK youth to Malaysian and Indonesian youth, especially in the context of major social issues like Israel-Palestine, could be a powerful opportunity. To return to the missing resolution on Israel-Palestine, while it was discussedinformally around the conference, it needed to be formally addressed with a resolution or official statement.

That’s a significant gap, especially when youth are looking to charities, NGOs, or global movements, especially those that put human rights and equality at the forefront. We need a clear stance on Israel-Palestine, whether from the board, the members, or even just individual humanist board members. Over the past year, I’ve tried to be active on TikTok and, in my capacity, speak out on the issue, but I feel we’re missing a massive opportunity to connect with the youth on what is one of the most important social justice issues of our time.

This issue could become as big as another Vietnam or Iraq war—arguably, it already is. Time will tell how history views it. That’s why it’s so important to address it. For example, one of the first questions our Indonesian friends asked before joining and after being voted in was, “What’s Humanists International (HI) doing? What’s the global humanist movement doing about Israel-Palestine?”

And we couldn’t point to anything concrete. That’s a major lesson to learn. I’ve been involved in personal activism on Israel-Palestine in one way or another since 2008. Still, I have yet to have the opportunity to link it with Humanism directly. I’d love to do that more, not only because it would energize and connect with youth here in the UK but also because it’s the right thing to do.

Jacobsen: AJ, how can people get in contact with you, read your work, or listen to your fabulous podcast?

AJ: Thank you! Yes, you can include a link to my website, alavari.info. All the links to my social media are there—TikTok is where I’ve been most active recently. The podcast Humanism Now will becoming  back shortly after the summer break. I help co-produce it and also join the guest panel on the podcast. It’s UK-based but has an international flavour.

I’d invite the audience to follow our work there!

Jacobsen: AJ, thank you very much for taking the time out. I appreciate it.

AJ: I appreciate you, too. Have a good one.

Jacobsen: Take care. Speak soon.

AJ: Excellent. Take care. Bye!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Anthony Cruz Pantojas, MATS, MALS, BCC on Global Humanist Reflections

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/22

Anthony Cruz Pantojas, MATS, MALS, BCC (they/them), is the Humanist Chaplain and Coordinator of Africana Spirituality at Tufts University. Pantojas was the delegate for Atheists United for the Humanists International 2024 General Assembly in Singapore.

Jacobsen: So, Anthony, what was your experience in Singapore at the General Assembly for Humanists International?

Pantojas: I’ve been reflecting on my experience. It was the first time I took an extensive international trip. It was “a shift in my center.” As I headed to Singapore, I reflected on how we define the center of our worlds.

Of course, on a 22-hour-plus flight, I thought about where I was headed, who I would meet, and the purpose of going. It exceeded my expectations. I arrived and left with a deeper sense of humility, awe, and gratitude for the opportunity to go.

Jacobsen: Did you have to apply to get the chance to go, or were you just told, “You’re going,” and suddenly found yourself on a 22-hour flight to Singapore?

Pantojas: It was a combination of different factors. It began as a conversation about my desire to attend, and having worked with Evan Clark, the Executive Director of Atheists United, at a youth conference a few months prior, everything aligned. I received support from Humanists International through a travel grant and financial support from other peers, which made it possible for me to attend.

Jacobsen: When you finally landed in Singapore, did you go straight to the hotel and conference, or did you take some detours, like trying out local food or getting a souvenir?

Pantojas: It was an unplanned detour. I happened to sit right behind one Debbie Goddard, one of the Humanists International board members who also is a staff member from American Atheists. I connected with her and then met with other peers from the US—again, unplanned. We took public transportation together, which was an amazing experience, going directly from the airport to our hotel and sharing a meal. That was a highlight of the trip. The spontaneous interactions created a palpable sense of hospitality and welcome. So, yeah, that was the start of my experience.

Jacobsen: What was it like meeting humanists from different regions of the world? This is often a great wake-up call that helps people realize various concerns while noticing the same core value systems.

Pantojas: I wouldn’t use the term “wake-up call” because I hail from the Caribbean, specifically Puerto Rico, one of the oldest colonies of the United States. I’ve always lived in this experience of being a US citizen while being perceived and understood as outside the North American Imaginary. I’ve always had a pluralizing experience in life, which extends to my practice of humanism.

I’ve always had a sensibility towards broadening the notion of the “center” and understanding humanism beyond the Western conceptions of historical humanism. What I needed, and what I was seeking, was exactly what you’re asking—how do we begin to listen and become proximate to peers and colleagues navigating their sense of identity and belonging? How do they strategize and live through a secular perspective, particularly where they might put their lives on the line for it? To another extent, this is more of a philosophical stance.

Of course, you identify as a humanist, atheist, or whatever term resonates with you. To other understandings, it’s an amalgamation of philosophy, identity, culture, and various concepts of a secular humanist, atheist, or non-theist life. So, again, it was both a microcosm and a global experience at the same time. 

Jacobsen: What are some of the more personally noteworthy presentations or workshops you could attend at the conference?

Pantojas: More than just the presentations, it was the opportunity to participate in the tours I signed up for. Not to my credit, but more to my obliviousness, I met people from the Humanist Society (Singapore) without knowing they were staff or in leadership positions. Just meeting them as members of the tour was amazing to me. I emphasize relationality, one of the main frameworks I’m constantly trying to embody, practice, and center in my work and life.

The Humanist Society (Singapore) curated various tours from various organizations. They were ushering us into a world that isn’t my own and listening to how they frame their histories. They live in a relatively young society, yet the design, intentionality, and work that went into building what they have is impressive. That speaks to human creativity and capacity—what can be achieved in what some might call a modern world.

That leads me to the Humanist Society (Singapore) itself. We were able to come in and see the work they’ve done and are still doing, especially in collaboration with Humanists International, to put together this international conference. I’m still reflecting on and cherishing that in my work here and in conversations with peers.

Jacobsen: Were there particular people you met that you clicked with?

Pantojas: I connected with the president of the Humanist Society (Singapore), Norhaiyah Mahmood, without knowing she was the president at first. Her warmth, hospitality, and how she supported one of the tours in such a non-imposing way stood out to me. I talked with her and later found out she was the president. I was like, “Oh, wow!” It didn’t change anything, but the fact that she modeled a humanist stance that made others feel seen, welcomed, and accompanied was amazing.

I also connected with many other people—spoke, bantered, and strategized with them. I remember connecting with folks from Asia, Africa, and Europe. It was great to chat with them while walking or commuting to different events, and seeing the diverse work they are doing within their contexts was inspiring.

Jacobsen: When it came to what you hoped to get or take away from the conference and General Assembly, what were some of the bigger takeaways? And what were some of the smaller, more nuanced things you wouldn’t necessarily have expected when you first went?

Pantojas: Yes, the more nuanced takeaway is the power of positionality and how it plays out in a space that connects to voting power—in this context, the General Assembly specifically. How does a person representing an organization (whether a full member, affiliate, or otherwise) use their vote, voice, and perspective in a space that then shifts into global humanist and secular policy? I’ve been exposed to and understand this since I serve on humanist and non-humanist boards and organizations. I see the value of shifting or distributing power as board members, staff, and others participate in decision-making. But being in this global space for the first time and seeing how even one vote makes a difference was a mind-shifting experience.

That’s a common experience when you realize it’s not just symbolic democratic action. People take their time and use their votes carefully, raising their cards depending on how many votes they have. It’s a good experience.

Jacobsen: Were any policies, declarations, or new board members that stood out to you during the voting or presentations? Is anything particularly noteworthy?

Pantojas: What stood out for me was how we utilize our experiences, institutional power, and capacity to vote to center other communities that might not be present in the space—and the complexity of what that means. We want more diverse representation, yet sometimes, the work doesn’t fully benefit those not physically present in the space. One of my takeaways is the careful consideration of those voices that are missing.

Where am I, relative to the themes, topics, or changes being discussed? How do I respond, even if I am not directly affected because it’s not my experience? Are we making decisions that perpetuate structural violence? I summed this up in a conversation with a colleague during a recent presentation, reflecting on my positionality—hailing from the Global South but being positioned in the Global North.

How do we navigate those multiple worlds? It’s not about leaving behind or saying, “I’m no longer connected.” In a globalized world, we don’t need to be physically present in a place to feel the power and repercussions that democratic processes have within our global communities. It is about interdependence.

Jacobsen: Were there any conversations about the influence of communications technologies, like the Internet, on organizing activism and community for international humanists?

Pantojas: Yes, on a smaller scale. Using WhatsApp, for example, speaks to people’s preferences. It was interesting to see who already had the app downloaded and who advocated for other apps or media based on what they were used to. For some, this was how they communicated daily—how they connected—especially when it’s not safe to be publicly visible or hold a sign saying, “Hey, I’m a humanist.”

For example, the WhatsApp group had different groups, settings, and formats that were right to hold the global experience and contextualize it to other folks’ different expressions, needs, and desires. Of course, all of them were open. It was amazing to see how we were not just using the material, the physical world, by moving through it but also integrating the digital world, which is so much a part of us. That was something I deeply appreciated because, throughout my time there, it was one of the primary ways to communicate. And I thought it was just amazing to be able to do that. 

Jacobsen: What are some integrations of a theme or style of presentation that you saw in Singapore that could be carried forward into the next General Assembly?

Pantojas: Yes, one of the reflections I held onto was how much I showed up for all these different things, or maybe if I missed something—like a dinner—because, of course, I was exhausted that first time. I wanted to hear more about the Singapore Humanist Society. Not in an incredibly formal way, but more like: What are you doing? What have you done? What has worked? What hasn’t worked? Not necessarily to compare and contrast but to hear about their organizational processes.

During the pandemic, I had the opportunity to attend one of their Zoom conferences specifically for Asia, and I joined. That’s how I continued the work of listening and being in proximity and solidarity with other humanist organizations, communities, and practitioners. I missed that and wanted more of it.

Regarding how this relates to the next General Assembly, General Assemblies should be contextual to the realities of the community hosting it. I wouldn’t translate things directly from one context to another. However, I hope it becomes more open regarding visas and creates opportunities for people to attend. Access is crucial to the human experience in general. The way we’re trying to model that we are a global community invested in democratic processes, connected to radical listening, and genuinely hearing what the members desire, need, and want—it’s important to create opportunities for the most people to participate in an international gathering like this.

Jacobsen: Do you have a favourite food you tried there?

Pantojas: I had duck several years ago when I was living in Manhattan, New York, and got to taste it just a week or two before I left New York, and I never had it again. After one of the tours, which was led by a Chinese woman local to Singapore, she recommended an authentic spot to eat. I had the opportunity to have a meal there with another participant from the international conference. I had duck with rice and Thai tea.

It was such an amazing experience because it was so local. It was like an everyday, ordinary place to have a meal. It wasn’t a flashy, high-end place. It was just, “Hey, everyone’s having a meal here,” and that was amazing—to have the same food that everyday people enjoy was incredible.

Jacobsen: How long did it take to get over the jet lag when you returned from that 22-hour flight?

Pantojas: I was very surprised by how well my body adapted. Whether it was the adrenaline, excitement, or a combination of everything, I adapted quickly. I noticed that, at least on the Singapore side, the nights felt long. But other than that, I was able to do everything. When I returned from my trip, I hosted an open house for my work. So, as we say, I had to hit the ground running.

Jacobsen: Are there any parts I missed? Do you feel comfortable that I’ve covered everything?

Pantojas: Yes, we’ve covered most of it. Unless you want to bring up something or something you’re curious about. Being the only Puerto Rican in that space was surprising and unsurprising. It wasn’t a new feeling, but it still held both surprise and familiarity. In the American context, it’s not unusual to feel like the “other” as a Puerto Rican, so it’s a kind of bland surprise.

Jacobsen: Right. In a place like Singapore, though, you’re removed from that negative historical context that might exist in the U.S. for Puerto Ricans. It’s a different kind of detachment from that history. In Singapore, or even in a broader South or Southeast Asian context, the experience is different because you don’t carry the same baggage of American colonialism or marginalization. You meet people and access services, but it detaches from that historical context. Psychologically, it feels different in terms of being the “other.”

That ties back to what you mentioned earlier about shifting the center and the concept of positionality. When does one hold spatial, cultural power, access, or even domination in certain spaces?

Pantojas: It’s about understanding when and where we hold power and how it plays out in different contexts. How does that shift and change depending on your context? How do you navigate those processes? It was also fascinating to be in Singapore and connect with people from Latin America and South America in that space.

I had to fly 20-plus hours to physically connect with people from other parts of the world, specifically from my immediate area of cultural proximity. That was enriching personally, but also in terms of the invitation I took away from it. How are we continually creating everyday moments of encounter and programming to strengthen and expand our relationships—not just for the sake of the relationships but also for modeling and building a global community?

At least for me, it’s centered on relationships. It’s not just about attending a conference or doing delegate work. It’s about how we think about the character of our relationships. One example of connecting the digital and the physical is that I’ve been using some of the interbelief work published by the Humanist Society of Singapore for several years. They do incredible work navigating interreligious engagement, and other aspects of building bridges between communities.

Regarding HAPI, it was incredible to physically meet many of these young humanists, who are doing incredible work, building generational relationships, producing knowledge, and building capacity and leveraging their funds of knowledge in their contexts. They’re also using digital platforms to allow others, like myself, to witness their work. Sitting down, having a meal, and listening to many different stories was a powerful experience. 

Jacobsen: Thank you so much for your time today. Anthony, nice to meet you. 

Pantojas: Thank you so much. Be well.

Jacobsen: You too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Aftab Siddiqui on AMDC Endorsement of Harris and Walz

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/21

The American Muslim Democratic Caucus (AMDC) has officially endorsed Vice President Kamala Harris and Governor Tim Walz for President and Vice President in the upcoming U.S. election. Highlighting their commitment to peace, human rights, and diplomatic solutions, the AMDC emphasizes their alignment with the organization’s values of democracy, fairness, and justice. The caucus urges American Muslims to support the Harris-Walz ticket, citing their “Freedom and Future” platform as the most promising choice for advancing both domestic and international progress. The AMDC plans to mobilize efforts nationwide to back their candidacy. 

At the first Muslim Democratic Caucus, speakers discussed American Muslims’ political journey. Initially endorsing Bush in 2000, Muslims felt abandoned by Republicans after 9/11. Formerly GOP donors, many shifted toward the Democratic Party. Leaders like Keith Ellison urged increased political involvement, highlighting the need for Muslim representation at all government levels.

Aftab Siddiqui is the Co-Chair of the AMDC. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Aftab Siddiqui from the American Muslim Democratic Caucus to discuss the endorsement of Kamala Harris and Tim Walz for president and vice president, respectively. Please tell us about the discussion around this endorsement and the reasons that ultimately led the organization to decide.

Aftab Siddiqui: The discussions have been ongoing for the last 10 or 11 months, particularly in light of the ongoing violence in Gaza and the West Bank. There is a lot of anger and anguish about what is happening there, and everyone understands that the United States is a key player that can influence the situation. Unfortunately, President Biden has refused to take substantial action beyond expressing deep concern over civilian casualties and claiming that Israel is assuring the U.S. that everything is by international law. This has gone on for far too long.

As a result, Biden has lost significant support within the Muslim community, particularly the American Muslim community. Kamala Harris, as vice president, shares some responsibility. Still, we all recognize that there is only one president in the United States at a time. Until January 20th next year, Biden will remain in office, and whatever he says goes. Kamala Harris does not have much influence over the administration’s decisions, especially since Biden and many of his advisors firmly support Israel. We believe that Kamala needs more (different) policies, particularly in the Middle East.

Jacobsen: What are the perspectives within the Muslim community on how to move forward politically?

Siddiqui: There are varied opinions within our community about how to proceed. Some believe we should not vote and stay home in protest. Others feel we should not sit out and instead support a third-party candidate. Many people are considering this option, with Jill Stein, the Green Party candidate for president, being favoured among this group. I haven’t heard anyone talking about voting for Trump, although historically, around 10% of the Muslim community has supported Republican candidates. Still, I haven’t seen anyone openly advocating for Trump because of his anti-Muslim and anti-Palestinian rhetoric. During his first term as president, he was certainly not a friend to the Palestinians.

Now, the community is split. Many imams and community leaders are urging people to vote rather than abstain, so we are left with two main options: either vote for a third-party candidate or support the Democrats. There was much discussion around this. While there were differing opinions, we reached an almost unanimous consensus.

Jacobsen: Let’s discuss the current support for the Palestinian cause. What has your organization observed over the last ten months?

Siddiqui: The only consistent support we’ve seen over the last ten months has come from the left—specifically, progressives, young people, and the grassroots of the Democratic Party. More than 70% of them have been advocating for a ceasefire and are even willing to support an arms embargo on Israel. We concluded that the Palestinian issue in the United States is not only a moral and justice issue but also a political one. We’re receiving support primarily from the Democratic Party, maybe not from the top echelon, but certainly from the grassroots. Time and again, we’ve seen the grassroots rally in support of Palestinians, whether through student-led demonstrations or others risking their careers and academic credentials to stand in solidarity with Palestinians.

So, we decided that the only way forward was to support Kamala Harris. While it would have made things easier for us if Kamala had been more neutral in her positions, we recognize that she has spoken about Palestinian rights. She supports a two-state solution and has emphasized the dignity and human rights of Palestinians. However, her rhetoric in support of Israel has also been quite strong. But this is an election year, and we are in the final few weeks of the campaign. No candidate will make statements that could harm their political prospects, especially in what appears to be a close election, according to most polls and reports. It may not be as close, and Kamala might win by a large margin, but for now, the trends suggest the race is tight, particularly in swing states.

We understand the challenges of politics, having been involved for more than two decades. It’s difficult for someone in Kamala’s position to take a stand against Biden’s policies or stances.

The community remains divided, and emotions are running high, particularly with the situation in Lebanon flaring up. We are deeply concerned, as we have a significant Lebanese community within our ranks. Their families, homes, and loved ones are in danger due to the actions of war hawks in Tel Aviv, frankly speaking. This is another reason we view this as a political issue, and we have decided to move forward by supporting the Harris-Walz ticket, hoping they will win.

If they do win, we will have at least 70% of Democrats at the grassroots level with us, and we’ll continue to apply pressure to change U.S. policies regarding its blanket support for the state of Israel. We understand that Israel is a friend and ally of the United States. Still, we also see how pro-Israeli forces dominate the mainstream media. The media constantly parrots statements from the IDF, with very little coverage given to the plight of Palestinians or the situation in Lebanon.

Additionally, there are interest groups that want to keep the conflict ongoing. The United States commits about $4 billion annually to Israel, and these funds are used to purchase U.S. weapons and hardware. Naturally, the military-industrial complex benefits from this arrangement and would like to see even more billions flowing into their coffers.

Jacobsen: There’s a strong support base for continued aid to Israel. Could you explain what factors contribute to this, particularly from within the Republican side and interest groups?

Siddiqui: Yes, there are indeed strong groups that support continued aid to Israel. On the Republican side, there are evangelical Christians who believe, based on their interpretation of the Bible, that Israel must be in a dominant position to facilitate the second coming of Christ. This is a significant factor. Then, there are powerful lobbies, like AIPAC (American Israel Public Affairs Committee). AIPAC, for example, is spending $100 million to ensure that no congressman, congresswoman, or senator is elected who speaks independently on this issue. Unless members of Congress align with the Israeli perspective, they face threats in their primaries or general elections. This is why many Congress and Senate members support almost anything Netanyahu demands, regardless of the president’s position. Although I don’t think Biden opposes these policies, we all remember how, during Obama’s presidency, Netanyahu was invited to address CongressMany Democratic members boycotted the speech, much like today.

But the reality is that AIPAC has a stranglehold on both Congress and the Senate. That’s one of the main issues. On a personal level, I understand that this is a marathon. Any meaningful change regarding the political situation and the Palestinian issue will take time. I’ve been working on this issue since arriving in the United States in the late 1990s, and back then, there was virtually no support for Palestinians within the Democratic Party. We faced significant obstacles trying to pass resolutions on the two-state solution or any form of support for the Palestinian people. However, after the events of October 7th, a tragic and horrible occurrence, the situation has shifted.

The aftermath of October 7th has led to a shift in the thinking of many Americans. Now, more than 50% of Americans are deeply concerned about what is happening in Gaza, and they recognize that it’s morally wrong. People understand that someone needs to intervene to stop this. There is now much more understanding of the Palestinian issue—their humanity, demands, and call for self-determination. From this perspective, I would say that support for Palestinians among average Americans has grown significantly.

The Palestinian issue is political here; as they say in politics, timing is everything. Right now, we have the support of most Americans and about two-thirds of Democrats. We intend to continue working on this; and within a few election cycles, we’ll be able to change U.S. policies regarding Israel and Palestine.

Let me also talk about the American Muslim community. There are three large groups within the community. The largest group is the indigenous Muslim population, primarily African Americans, who make up close to 40% of the community. They have overwhelmingly voted for Democrats. The other two major groups are South Asians—Pakistanis, Indians, Bangladeshis, Sri Lankans, and Nepalese—and then there are the Arabs, people from the Middle East.

The Arab population from countries where democracy hasn’t traditionally existed initially struggled to understand the value of voting and the political process. This was particularly true for the first generation of immigrants. However, that has changed, and now we are seeing thousands of younger Arab Americans who do understand the value of democracy and the importance of voting.

Among the South Asians, many come from countries where some form of democracy exists, so they tend to understand the importance of political participation. Looking around, you’ll see more and more of these individuals involved in different political groups across the United States. However, it is important to remember that 40% of American Muslims are Indigenous [Ed. Defined as inclusive of African-American or black Americans by Siddiqui.], and 60% are part of the immigrant community. These immigrant communities often come from countries with a deeper understanding of the situation in Palestine and maintain a global perspective. They are at the forefront of the struggle for Palestinian rights.

The community remains divided, but we emphasize the importance of voting and encouraging them to vote for Democrats from top to bottom. That’s the only way out of this difficult situation for the American Muslim community.

Jacobsen: What about distinctions among sects or denominations? Are the differences not based on heritage—such as Bangladeshi, Pakistani, or Arab—but rather along sect lines like Sunni, Shia, or others? Are there any distinctions in voting patterns within those subgroups in the United States?

Siddiqui: We don’t see any distinctions in voting patterns based on sect. On a global level, regardless of sect, the Palestinian issue is a top concern for the 1.7 billion Muslims worldwide, no matter where they live. I’m from Pakistan, and I visit every two to three years. Palestine is consistently the top issue for Muslims there.

When I was in Pakistan earlier this year, in February and March, every day, the headlines were about Palestinian children throwing stones at Israeli soldiers and the soldiers shooting back. Horrific images like these, which we often don’t see in the U.S., are widely covered there. I’ve known about the Palestinian issue since I was a child, having grown up in Pakistan.

The global Muslim community has a deep understanding of the Palestinian issue, and there is virtually no disagreement on supporting the Palestinian people. This holds across sectarian lines, whether Shia or Sunni. Globally, about 80% of Muslims are Sunni, with roughly 10% (20%) Shia, give or take. Here in the U.S., when I first arrived, I had Shia friends who would pray in Sunni mosques, and I have prayed in Shia mosques, which is not very common elsewhere. However, because we’re such a small minority here—about 1 to 2% of the population—we don’t have the luxury of differentiating between sects.

As the Shia population has grown, they’ve built their own mosques and educational institutions. However, when it comes to voting patterns, there is little difference between Shias and Sunnis. They tend to vote in similar ways.

Jacobsen: Could you summarize what other issues, besides the Palestinian issue, were important to the American Muslim Democratic community in making this endorsement for Harris? What are the key issues for the immigrant communities in the American Muslim Democratic community, aside from the Palestinian issue?

Siddiqui: Immigrant communities tend to have the same issues as the broader local community. Health care, good jobs, and a strong economy are important. One key difference is the issue of guns. Immigrant communities come from countries where civilians are generally not allowed to own firearms, and the gun industry is highly regulated in many parts of the world. But in the United States, there is an unfortunate abundance of guns—millions of people own them, and it’s concerning.

One of the top issues for immigrant communities, especially Muslim families, is the fact that active shooter drills are now being conducted in elementary, middle, and high schools. Young children are being exposed to these drills, and it’s deeply troubling to many parents. Islamophobia is an important issue for our community.

The environment is also a critical issue, especially for the younger generation of Muslims. Climate change and environmental sustainability are top concerns. So, in general, the issues that concern the average Democrat—whether related to the environment, health care, or gun control—are also issues for the immigrant community, whether they are Muslim or non-Muslim.

In Texas, for example, where I live, voter turnout is low, even though there are more Democratic voters than Republican ones. When voter turnout increases, Texas could shift toward being a blue state. In fact, in the most recent U.S. Senate race against Ted Cruz, the Democratic candidate is leading by a small margin—1%. While that’s not a huge lead, it’s a significant psychological shift, showing the trend in Texas.

More people are moving to Texas from states like California, Oregon, New York, and New Jersey—predominantly blue states—so they tend to lean more Democratic. Obama lost Texas by 16 points, Hillary Clinton lost by 9 points, and Biden lost by just 5 points. Ted Cruz narrowly defeated Beto O’Rourke by only 2.3%. Texas is slowly moving toward the Democrats, but the state’s policies under Governor Greg Abbott continue to reflect conservative priorities.

Another important issue for immigrant communities is immigration reform. The immigrant community strongly supports changes in the laws to reduce the number of undocumented people living in the country. It’s estimated that around 12 million people in the U.S. are undocumented. While some corporations and big farms benefit from this—since undocumented people often don’t report abuses, are underpaid, and lack labour protections—it’s harmful to the economy and society. Undocumented workers often don’t go to the police or seek help, making it difficult to address crime in those communities.

Lastly, Texas faces challenges related to the separation of church and state. Governor Greg Abbott has been trying to introduce biblical teachings into the public school system, funded by taxpayer money. According to the U.S. Constitution, there should be a separation between religion and state. Still, the Texas Republican Party is gradually trying to erode that boundary. They’ve already made changes to the school curriculum, and it’s concerning for many who value the constitutional principle of secularism.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Peter Dankwa on the HI General Assembly in Singapore

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/21

Peter Nyarko Dankwa is a member of the Humanist Association of Ghana. He is outspoken about spreading humanism and critical thinking. He uses his blog, Peter’s Box, to promote humanism and critical thinking. At a Toastmasters meeting in 2019, Peter delivered a speech titled ‘No Monkey Games,’ which was inspired by humanist values. He has held several leadership positions in Toastmasters International, from the club to the district level. Peter holds a bachelor’s degree in Aerospace Engineering.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: We are back again with Peter Dankwa from the Humanist Association of Ghana, or Ghana humanists generally. You just came back from the General Assembly (GA) in Singapore, where you attended your first GA (General Assembly). What were your biggest takeaways?

Peter Dankwa: I had been looking forward to attending my first GA and was excited to be part of the whole process, especially since Humanists International (HI) offered grants to some of us. I was fortunate to attend and would say I was highly impressed with the diversity within HI. Humanists from different walks of life, countries, and cultures were present, and networking with them gave me a broader perspective on humanism and how some countries strive to live by humanist principles. The experience was truly eye-opening.

It was enriching, and I particularly appreciated the agenda. When it came time for voting, I saw firsthand how HI practices democracy and freedom of speech. I saw everything you hear in humanist discussions or the principles of humanism. I was highly impressed.

Jacobsen: That was exactly what I felt when I first experienced it, too. I thought, “Oh, this is how normal people operate.” But, of course, this isn’t the norm, as we both know. That’s a common reflection. Unfortunately, I wasn’t able to attend this year.

Were there any specific parts of the theme of inter-faith harmony and dialogue that stood out to you? From workshops, presentations, the surrounding culture, or informal discussions over lunch or at the bar?

Dankwa: Yes, there was a talk by a Muslim woman. One thing I took away from her presentation was that while we often view religious people through the lens of community identity, some aspects of their identity are deeply personal. We risk making a mistake by generalizing. For instance, if you meet a Muslim and immediately think, “Oh, you’re Muslim, so you must believe this and that,” you might miss that individual’s identity and their unique motivations for being Muslim. This is often where conflict begins—starting from assumptions based on group identity rather than understanding the individual’s reasons for belonging to the group. Her point made me realize that we’ve been guilty of this for a while, always viewing religious people through the lens of identity politics without considering their personal experiences and motivations.

Jacobsen: Do you think relying on heuristics to understand group dynamics is problematic, especially when it overlooks the individual? Is it truly a mistake, perhaps even offensive to many?

Dankwa: It was suggested that we break the ice and initiate meaningful dialogue. It all boils down to dialogue—engaging in a conversation where you and the other person can reflect on what has been said. Suppose you only focus on community identity and don’t engage with the individual. In that case, you risk missing the opportunity for deeper understanding. The key is to move beyond the group identity and engage at a personal level, which provides the tool for effective dialogue.

Jacobsen: Were there any subtle insights from the General Assembly about the principles of dialogue that need to be agreed upon for a discourse to take place? And what happens if you find yourself in a conversation where those basic principles are absent, where some people are either unwilling to hear what you’re saying or are so combative that no realdiscussion can occur? So, there is a sort of fanatical rejection or fanatical aggressiveness in discourse. Was there a particular portion of the workshop where you experienced that?

Dankwa: Yes, there was a specific moment during the Q&A session when an audience member made a statement that felt antagonistic. There needed to be more friction in the exchange of ideas. This behaviour is welcome in a humanist setting because we are here to share ideas. The panel members were ready to listen and genuinely understand this person’s origin.

However, suppose you transpose this situation to an everyday setting, where conversations might be more volatile, and people may be. What’s the word? If they are too aggressive in their approach, you will only sometimes have that opportunity for open discussion. At the conference, there was space to agree and disagree civilly because we are humanists and understand the values we hold dear.

It was a very open environment. We were given the chance to voice our opinions. But in everyday settings, there’s still much work to be done in this regard. As humanists, it’s incumbent upon us to show more tolerance in our day-to-day interactions. My mentor once told me, “Peter, you don’t have to do their homework for them,” meaning that gaining values and virtues isn’t something others will receive easily. They may need to go through their own experiences, and those experiences include the friction we’ve been discussing.

At the conference, friction was welcomed. There was a moment when things got a bit tense, and I wondered if things might take a bad turn. But then I realized we were having a productive dialogue, and I enjoyed watching from afar, taking notes.

Jacobsen: That resonates with my own experiences in Iceland and Copenhagen. Two important takeaways from those events were how at home I felt, being among people from everywhere, all sharing a certain sensibility—a shared worldview. It was like a microcosm of what a unified, global future could be. It was quite wonderful. How was your feeling interacting with people from all these countries, many of whom spoke English as a second or even a 19th language?

Dankwa: I’ll start with the host country, Singapore. Singaporeans are lovely people, especially older people. For some reason, I connect more with older people because I’m always seeking wisdom from those more experienced than me. I had great conversations with Nora and Peter from Humanists International.

Nora has been exceptionally kind and helpful, always going out of her way to assist the attendees. Peter, in particular, was very interested in Ghana and how things are going here. I had many enjoyable conversations with both of them. I also met another remarkable woman, Gerda.

It’s quite impressive how we are not alone in our activism. Even though we may have different experiences, the underlying principles—equity, empathy, and so on—remain the same. I enjoyed that aspect of my interactions with everyone.

In fact, on a Friday night, I delivered a speech titled To Be or Not To Be. That speech was inspired by what I had observed within the humanist community. Here’s the thing—sometimes humanism can sound too good to be true, or it might seem like an ideal. But when I saw people like Roslyn, Dr. Leo, and Javan actively advocating for humanism, I realized there’s much more we can do. I told myself that everything counts and anything can make a difference. So, I decided to add my voice because you never know whom you might influence.

My speech encouraged us, as humanists, to do more. That was another highlight of the social night. I also had the chance to witness much talent. I enjoyed Inga’s performance—she played beautifully on her guitar. I can’t recall the exact name of the song, but it was quite memorable.

Overall, the networking was fantastic. You learned about different cultures, how people practice humanism in their countries, and the challenges they face. It made me realize that we are not alone in our struggles. It was a truly eye-opening experience.

Jacobsen: Did you have any favourite presentations?

Dankwa: Yes. There was a presentation by the founder of Humanist Singapore. His name escapes me right now—He gave an excellent presentation.

Jacobsen: Yes, it’s Paul Simon

Dankwa: His presentation sheds light on the advocacy involved in humanism. People often associate humanism with human rights because they sound similar, but humanism is much broader than that. He provided valuable insights, not just about the atmosphere in Singapore but also in other places. He’s well-travelled and highly educated, so he offered many practical tips and statistics highlighting humanism and the opposite—non-humanism. That was a presentation I thoroughly enjoyed.

Also, the Muslim woman—I didn’t catch her name, forgive me—her presentation was impactful. She spoke from the perspective of a religious person, and I appreciated where she was coming from.

Jacobsen: Yes, Paul Simon sounds like a wise man. As for the Muslim presenter, the point you’re raising is important. I’ve done interviews with religious leaders, too, and that’s a common concern—they feel like they’re treated as a monolithic block, almost like a political party. Catholics, for instance, often express frustration about being perceived that way.

So, their fear is being treated as a block. On the other hand, I can see why heuristics come into play—it’s a group of over a billion people. Some core tenets exist when dealing with something as large as a global belief system, and people will make broad statements. It’s not like a country with a small population; it’s a vast, interconnected belief system.

I can see both ends, but it’s great that you brought up both presentations. I won’t ask who your favourite person was—let’s keep that private! What things did other humanist communities do that could be useful in a Ghanaian context?

Dankwa: Wow, interesting. One thing that stood out was volunteerism. Even though Singapore was hosting the event, many people volunteered for different aspects of the program. Ghana lags in this area.

It’s not just in Ghana, though—it’s a global issue. Only a few people often do most of the work, which can make it feel overwhelming. But when more people get involved, it becomes easier to communicate our values and make progress. So, I’d encourage my fellow Ghanaians to adopt a stronger culture of volunteerism.

Some countries are fortunate enough to have government funding for their humanist activities. They have a large membership base and resources to fund their initiatives. A few even receive government subsidies. This brings up an important question about the concept of volunteerism in humanism. If government funding is available, why not have paid positions, as we see in large organizations, instead of relying solely on volunteers?

For instance, you have highly dedicated volunteers who excel in their areas. They get noticed, move up, and might eventually receive internships or paid positions. This way, they could make a living from their humanist activism and community-building efforts.

Jacobsen: Would a model like that work in places like Ghana, if feasible?

Dankwa: Most definitely. It’s feasible, but the challenge lies in timing and the general atmosphere in the country, which is highly religious. Only recently—within the last four or five years—has the Humanist Association of Ghana started receiving invitations to national forums and civil society discussions. It’s a positive step, but Ghana is extremely religious.

In Ghana, there isn’t a clear separation of church and state. Certain institutions still look to the clergy for advice. When you try to bring in a different perspective, it can come across as though you’re opposing the dominant religious view. This is compounded by the fact that the majority of what we receive, culturally and politically, is influenced by religious institutions.

This even ties into the anti-LGBTQ+ bill, which is heavily religiously motivated. The bill’s proponents frequently reference the Bible, the Quran, or religious beliefs in general. Challenging these viewpoints is difficult because religion strongly influences the government and society. To change this dynamic, we would need a political evolution and a mental revolution in how we think about religion and governance.

There must be much education to get to that point. Can we only have platforms to support humanist organizations and other civil society groups pursuing their goals? But most importantly, the responsibility still falls on us, so I keep mentioning volunteerism.

If you look at our religious counterparts, for example, they excel in areas like education and healthcare. They set up schools and hospitals, and many religious bodies advocate for their causes, ensuring they’re heard. That’s something we, as the Humanist Association of Ghana, and more broadly, need to emulate. We need to make tangible contributions to growth and development, something concrete we can rely on.

Humanists International (HI) is doing a great job providing grants to help members embark on such projects. We’re improving in that regard. But, as I said earlier, it’s a race against time, where we need not just political change but a mental revolution. That’s why I continue to emphasize volunteerism—it’s through our collective efforts that we’ll create change. My voice is being heard today because of my volunteerism, and you’re dedicating your time because of the value you see in it. So, volunteerism is the starting point, but the mental revolution is equally essential.

Jacobsen: And the point about the bill is crucial because it ties into the international aspect of this. I’m aware that American evangelicals, and perhaps some hardline Catholics, are highly supportive of this anti-LGBTQ+ bill. I need to find out the extent of the funding or the degree of their involvement. Still, there’s no doubt that Americans have pushed this agenda in Ghana. Canadians also have hardline evangelicals who might be involved.

To a large extent, North Americans have not been helpful regarding this bill. So, even if we have feasible volunteer efforts to counter such bills, we are all engaged in a common struggle. Americans face similar challenges with their hardline evangelicals and Catholics, who are exporting this extreme ideology to influence the political and policy landscape of countries that are already deeply religious. In a way, many people in these countries welcome that extremism because they see those groups as their brothers and sisters in faith.

So, what did you learn from meeting people in other countries who may face even more extreme religious or political contexts with greater social or legal repercussions for their humanist beliefs?

Dankwa: I gained a lot from those conversations because they made my problems seem smaller by comparison. There’s an element of discretion in how we communicate our values, especially in places where freedoms are more severely repressed.

For example, I noted at least three or four countries where the human rights situation was dire. In particular, many people were concerned about how their countries treated them. This brings me back to the idea of discretion—when communicating about repression or difficulty in a country, it’s crucial to prioritize safety above all else. So, while it’s important to stand by our values and advocate for them, we must also be careful about our actions.

Jacobsen: So you’re saying that in countries with harsh repression, being strategic in how you communicate can sometimes be more important than the message itself to protect people’s safety?

Dankwa: Safety is paramount; in some contexts, being too vocal or open can lead to serious consequences. So, we must balance standing up for our values with ensuring people aren’t in danger.

That’s an important point that struck me. As a media person and blogger, I’m always trying to stay up to date with the latest news, get new information, and share it. However, I noticed during the conference that I was being advised to be careful with some of the things I publish. So, in my passion to advocate and be an activist, I also need to exercise discretion, at least for the sake of those involved.

Activism and advocacy might seem straightforward—you want people to know what’s happening and present all your logical points. But sometimes, it can come back to bite you. So, much discretion goes into humanism, and you must communicate wisely. There’s a time to speak, and there’s a time to remain silent. That’s one of the big lessons I took from this experience.

Jacobsen: That’s a critical point. For some people, protesting isn’t always the best or safest response in certain contexts. Safety is the primary concern. I remember in 2023, during a conversation in a workshop, one participant and I were comparing our situations. He said something like, “I would just like to walk around the street without fear of being beheaded.”

Jacobsen: That was my reaction, too, right? Like, wow. In Canada, yes, we have discrimination, legal issues, symbolic nonsense, creationism, anti-science movements, homeopathy, and so on. These are all real problems because they waste resources and spread false hope. But that individual’s issue was immediate—life or death. The difference is stark.

You must pump the brakes and recognize that safety comes first. I appreciated how you used the word “discretion” earlier. We’re not afraid but don’t live in those immediate, dangerous contexts like some people do. It’s not about letting fear take over the conversation. It’s about rational analysis and calculating whether it’s safe or not. Discretion is the right term here—it’s about being thoughtful in our actions and responses.

Did you get a chance to explore Singapore while you were there?

Dankwa: Yes, I had some time to look around. I made the most of my commute to the venue to experience the city. But the journey was long, and I was super jet-lagged and disoriented. I rested most of the time so I wouldn’t miss any sessions. So, while I had grand plans to visit different places, in the end, I didn’t get to do as much exploring as I had hoped.

Jacobsen: So, you only had the chance to visit a few places because you wanted to avoid overexerting yourself?

Dankwa: Yes, exactly. I didn’t want to push myself too much, but I enjoyed the landscape. It was impressive to see how green the place was. Singapore is essentially an island country, and you would expect a limited amount of vegetation. But everything was lush and vivid. It was quite striking, especially when I compared it to Ghana. I kept thinking, “What did they do right that we’re missing?” It made me reflect on the differences between our development paths since both countries gained independence around the same time. I also enjoyed their transportation system. It was easy to navigate, and every stop had a city map. I was genuinely impressed.

Jacobsen: I’ve asked about the conference, your trip, Ghana, and the challenges with North American Christians pushing the anti-LGBTQ+ bill. We’ve also touched on your favourite speakers and the event’s themes. We gave TattSi Tan his well-deserved props. But what do you think is important for people who might not know much about Ghana to understand, especially someone from a place like Canada who doesn’t have much contact with the global humanist movement—what should they know about Ghanaian humanism?

Dankwa: They should first know that the Ghanaian humanist space is quite youthful. A lot of young people are involved in humanism here. This is probably due to education—as more people get educated, they start asking critical questions that inform their decisions about how they want to live their lives.

Volunteerism is also a significant aspect of Ghanaian humanism, though we’re still working on it. We must always exercise discretion, especially when the government gives us little space. For example, at our monthly meeting on Sunday, our president reminded us of the need to be discreet in these times.

Ghanaian humanism still has a long way to go. Volunteerism is a mixed bag, and that makes it difficult to meet certainobjectives. However, on the positive side, Ghanaians are always ready to work towards something meaningful. If you propose an idea that promotes humanism, people will jump on board, bringing different skills to the table. For example, the Vice President of Humanists International is Ghanaian, and our African Regional Coordinator is Ghanaian. I volunteer for Young Humanists International (YHI).

Once a cause is clearly defined, Ghanaians and the diaspora will get involved. That’s the beautiful thing about Ghanaian humanism. It’s not just local; Ghanaians abroad also contribute significantly.

Jacobsen: Peter, it’s past midnight for me. I need to get some sleep.

Dankwa: You deserve a good rest. Well, I am done!

Jacobsen: Thank you! Thank you so much for your time. I hope you have a great day at work!

Dankwa: Thanks, you too. Take care!

Jacobsen: All right, take care. Bye!

Dankwa: Bye!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

What Are the Chances of Trump and Harris?

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/20

According to some semi-reputable sources gathered in a listing hereRick G. Rosner may have among America’s, North America’s, and the world’s highest measured IQs at or above 190 (S.D. 15)/196 (S.D. 16) based on several high range test performances created by Christopher HardingJason BettsPaul Cooijmans, and Ronald Hoeflin. He earned 12 years of college credit in less than a year and graduated with the equivalent of 8 majors. He has received 8 Writers Guild Awards and Emmy nominations, and was titled 2013 North American Genius of the Year by The World Genius Directory with the main “Genius” listing here.

He has written for Remote ControlCrank YankersThe Man ShowThe EmmysThe Grammys, and Jimmy Kimmel Live!. He worked as a bouncer, a nude art model, a roller-skating waiter, and a stripper. In a television commercialDomino’s Pizza named him the “World’s Smartest Man.” The commercial was taken off the air after Subway sandwiches issued a cease-and-desist. He was named “Best Bouncer” in the Denver Area, Colorado, by Westwood Magazine.

Rosner spent much of the late Disco Era as an undercover high school student. In addition, he spent 25 years as a bar bouncer and American fake ID-catcher, and 25+ years as a stripper, and nearly 30 years as a writer for more than 2,500 hours of network television. Errol Morris featured Rosner in the interview series entitled First Person, where some of this history was covered by Morris. He came in second, or lost, on Jeopardy!, sued Who Wants to Be a Millionaire? over a flawed question and lost the lawsuit. He won one game and lost one game on Are You Smarter Than a Drunk Person? (He was drunk). Finally, he spent 37+ years working on a time-invariant variation of the Big Bang Theory.

Currently, Rosner sits tweeting in a bathrobe (winter) or a towel (summer). He lives in Los AngelesCalifornia with his wife, dog, and goldfish. He and his wife have a daughter. You can send him money or questions at LanceVersusRick@Gmail.Com, or a direct message via Twitter, or find him on LinkedIn, or see him on YouTube

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What do you think of Kamala Harris as a person, politician, and thinker?

Rick Rosner: All right. She’s fine. She was a prosecutor or the Attorney General for 27 years, so we know she’s competent. The other side likes to say she got her job by dating Willie Brown, a California politician, 30 years ago. He had been separated from his wife for many years at that point—maybe divorced, I’m not sure—but it wasn’t like anything scandalous. The idea that she rose to power because she dated a powerful politician is just desperate horseshit.

The other side throws out much desperate horseshit. She did her job as Assistant DA, DA, and then-Attorney General for 27 years. You don’t stay in those roles for that long because you dated someone. Then, she was a senator for four years before becoming VP. Her short time in national politics is an advantage, as it was for Obama, who was also a senator for just four years before becoming president. It gives the opposition less history to attack.

Hillary Clinton was in the national spotlight for 30 years, which gave them a lot of ammunition to twist.

Harris is competent and running a good campaign. When she ran for president three almost four years ago, one of her weaknesses was giving meandering answers. I don’t think she’s doing that this time around. She’s out there doing rallies and campaigning hard. Meanwhile, Trump is barely campaigning—either because he’s incompetent or lazy, or maybe he’s overconfident and thinks he can pull the same trick as last time, claiming he won when he knew he didn’t. It seems like she’s putting in the work.

She’s a normal, sane politician, and we need a normal, sane government right now. My whole thesis about politics is that the world is being disrupted by accelerating tech, and tech will determine international leadership. Whoever leads in tech will essentially lead the world, as we have since World War II. But we’re going to have an increasingly hard time doing that if our government is run by crazy, incompetent, anti-education assholes, grifters, and lunatics. Harris represents normality, which is crucial.

Jacobsen: Makes sense.

Rosner: I like some of her proposals, but she doesn’t have any better answers on Israel and Gaza than anyone else, so she tends to stay out of that discussion. Overall, she’s good. She’s fine. I doubt she’s a genius, but she’s certainly competent.

Biden’s not a genius. I believe he’s highly competent after 50 years in national politics, but the presidency doesn’t require genius. As I’ve said before, the one sure genius we had was Teddy Roosevelt. He wrote 50 books and knew a lot. He did a lot—some terrible things, no doubt, but some good, like antitrust legislation.

Roosevelt did some good stuff. He pushed for changes in football rules because so many people were getting killed playing in the early 1900s. He helped introduce the forward pass, which changed the structure of the game. Before that, it was more like rugby but even more violent.

He was the “speak softly and carry a big stick” guy. Anyway, he was a genius. I mentioned this before, and someone pointed out that John Quincy Adams might have been a genius, too, but that’s going way back. Genius isn’t a requirement for the presidency.

Jacobsen: Agreed, genius isn’t necessary.

Rosner: Kamala Harris will do well. It depends on whether Democrats win the House and hold the Senate. The odds of getting that trifecta are low. It also depends on whether she wins and if the tide of Trumpism recedes. But that’s unlikely unless Republicans get thoroughly beaten.

Do you like her?

Jacobsen: She’s charismatic, which we haven’t had since Obama. Do you think the verbal skills required for a lawyer and law school training will help her in debates or sparring matches?

Rosner: Definitely. She was disciplined in her debate with Trump and made him look like an a-hole. But he has the advantage of his supporters not caring what he says or does. She came across as convincingly competent.

Her campaign theme seems to be “joy,” and she conveys that authentically. Remember, in 2016, Hillary Clinton got criticized for her laugh being “inauthentic,”—which was just another bullshit critique. But Harris smiles a lot, and people see that as genuine.

It’s similar to how Walz comes off as a jovial guy. People respond to that.

If you look at approval ratings, Trump is at minus ten net approval, Vance is at almost minus 11, Walz is at plus 3.7 or 8%, and Harris is even. That’s good for her, especially considering she shared Biden’s approval ratings. Biden entered office with around plus 17, but his approval dropped into the minus 10 to 15 range after pulling out of Afghanistan. Harris being back at even is a big deal.

Rick Rosner, American Comedy Writer, www.rickrosner.org

Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Independent Journalist, www.in-sightpublishing.com

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

On Tejano Music 6: Selena’s Father

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/19

A seasoned Musician (Vocals, Guitar and Piano), Filmmaker, and Actor, J.D. Mata has composed 100 songs and performed 100 shows and venues throughout. He has been a regular at the legendary “Whisky a Go Go,” where he has wooed audiences with his original shamanistic musical performances. He has written and directed nerous feature films, web series, and music videos. J.D. has also appeared in various national T.V. commercials and shows. Memorable appearances are TRUE BLOOD (HBO) as Tio Luca, THE UPS Store National television commercial, and the lead in the Lil Wayne music video, HOW TO LOVE, with over 129 million views. As a MOHAWK MEDICINE MAN, J.D. also led the spiritual-based film KATERI, which won the prestigious “Capex Dei” award at the Vatican in Rome. J.D. co-starred, performed and wrote the music for the original world premiere play, AN ENEMY of the PUEBLO — by one of today’s preeminent Chicana writers, Josefina Lopez! This is J.D.’s third Fringe; last year, he wrote, directed and starred in the Fringe Encore Performance award-winning “A Night at the Chicano Rock Opera.” He is in season 2 of his NEW YouTube series, ROCK god! J.D. is a native of McAllen, Texas and resides in North Hollywood, California. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Let’s begin with a brief introduction to Selena, a significant figure in Tejano music who tragically passed away at a young age. Can you tell us about her upbringing, particularly her father’s role? What are some of the stories surrounding her childhood? To provide context, how did her father, Abraham Quintanilla, parent her? How did his approach differ from others? And how do families recognize exceptional talent in young people who can express it meaningfully? 

J.D. Mata: My perspective is based on things I’ve read and heard and my intuition. By intuition, I mean as a Mexican-American who grew up with a father who was a musician. For the sake of conversation, let’s imagine I’m Selena in this story, and I’ll share from the child’s perspective—whether that’s Selena or her brother, AB. I want to discuss Abraham Quintanilla, her father, because he reminds me a lot of my father, a musician. Let me begin by acknowledging that this is an exciting approach.

Based on what I’ve learned, it’s well-known that Abraham Quintanilla, Selena’s father, was a musician who had a band called Los Dinos in his younger years. He was a talented musician and served in the military, which is how he met his wife, Marcella. They fell in love and got married.

Their first child was Suzette, who went on to play drums in Selena’s band. Then, they had their son, AB Quintanilla III, followed by Selena. Because Abraham was a musician himself, he recognized his children’s musical talents early on.

He especially recognized Selena’s remarkable singing voice. When it comes to talent, you either have it or you don’t, and Selena certainly did. Abraham noticed that from a young age. Being a musician, he wanted to live his dreams through his children’s success. He believed that if anyone could guide and advocate for his daughter, it should be him.

It’s similar to how I would feel if I had a child with a talent for singing or acting. Although I don’t have children, I would certainly advocate for them if I did. Who better to steer that ship than a dedicated parent? To get to the point, Abraham was their mentor and music guru, not just their father.

He was the manager, booking agent, band founder, and more. One thing Abraham had, which many artists lack—and something I’ve struggled with but am improving on—is that he was a talented musician and a sharp businessman. After all, it’s called show business for a reason. Abraham Quintanilla deserves much credit for that.

I’m a huge fan and an advocate. I look at it from an academic or intellectual point of view. Without Abraham Quintanilla, there is no Selena because he was such a fierce and astute advocate for his kids. That’s why they made it. It would help if you had an intense, loyal advocate who’s there for you through thick and thin, and they indeed went through many trials and tribulations. Not only was he their manager, but he was also their father. You talk about a “papa bear,” and that’s what he was. He encouraged his kids to pursue music as a career, and that became his career, too.

He shifted from being a restaurant owner to investing in their music career, and the band even played at the family restaurant. Essentially, he was an entrepreneur. Being in the music field, especially in this capitalistic society, you must be an entrepreneur. You’re constantly persuading people to buy your product, and that’s precisely what he did—he convinced the public to buy Selena’s music. That’s capitalism 101: the exchange of goods and services without government interference, just one citizen persuading another to invest in their product. Abraham was selling Selena’s records and knew how to do it well.

When it came to the music itself, he was tough. Even though his kids loved music, he pushed them hard. He understood that talent isn’t enough—you must nurture it. Like watering a plant, you have to practice and perfect your craft. He knew that, as a musician himself. He ensured his kids rehearsed daily, even though they sometimes hated it. But that’s why they became so good. They weren’t just playing the same small, junky gigs everyone else was; they were mastering their craft.

If you want to discuss an American success story, look at Selena and her family. That is the essence of the American dream—coming from humble beginnings and achieving greatness through hard work. I don’t think that’s emphasized enough, how they’re a true American success story. Selena became musically successful, but it was only possible because her father was a genius—not just as a music manager or producer, but as an advocate for their brand. He was incredibly astute and a hard worker. He would even drive the bus to get them from gig to gig.

I know how tough that is because I’m on tour now. It’s brutal. You play the show, wake up the next day and drive to the following location. It’s exhausting—driving six to eight hours to the next gig, sometimes with your bus breaking down. That’s the grind they went through.

So not only was Abraham Quintanilla an incredible musician, manager, and mentor, but he was also a mechanic. When the bus broke down, he had to fix it. On top of all that, he was an exceptional father. Some might argue about how great he was, considering that Selena missed out on typical teenage experiences like prom or football games. But sometimes, success demands sacrifice, and that’s what their journey requires. Had Selena not been tragically killed, she was on her way to becoming an even bigger icon.

The apple doesn’t fall far from the tree. We can see that in Selena’s entrepreneurial spirit. She had opened her clothing boutique, and there were rumours that she was planning to leave the band to focus on her boutique. Whether or not that’s true, the point is that she was set to become a millionaire as a fashion designer. And where did she get her entrepreneurial spirit? From her father.

We also must remember her mother, Marcella. Behind every successful man, there’s a strong woman. Marcella held the family together. While much of this is based on intuition, it’s clear that the strength of their family came from love. When you love your family, you support them, and I’m sure Abraham and Marcella were a strong team.

I’m presenting a perspective I have yet to see or hear elsewhere. It could be because I see the world differently as an artist and an entrepreneur. I’ve been a Tejano artist, and my father reminds me of Abraham Quintanilla. So, I bring a unique perspective to this conversation.

I’ve never met Abraham Quintanilla, though I’d love to. What I’m sharing is based on what I’ve read and my intuition as a Mexican-American and as the son of a musician who advocated for me and nurtured my talents. In some ways, I see Abraham as a father figure, even though we’ve never met. If we did, we’d look each other in the eye and understand one another immediately.

Abraham has been criticized for “living off his daughter’s name,” but I don’t see it that way. He’s simply keeping the record straight about what happened to Selena and preserving her legacy. Selena is known worldwide today because her father was astute enough to keep the rights to the first movie about her life. He had the vision to ensure her story was told correctly, understanding Selena’s brilliance, genius, and sacrifice and the entire family. He may face criticism, but Abraham knew people needed to hear Selena’s story. He was smart enough to ensure they heard it from the family rather than from speculative sources.

And I’m sure it was excruciating for him to relive all those memories and tell the story through the movie. Even today, it must still be unbearable for him. But despite the pain, he continues because of his deep love, passion, and devotion—to Selena, the brand, the craft, and the family. He has no choice but to carry on. By the way, Suzette is the older sister and continues to be involved. They’ve created a museum. They played a role in ensuring the Selena series was as accurate as possible.

Abraham Quintanilla he’s the root of it all. He’s the strong, traditional Mexican figure at the foundation of the massive “Selena tree” that has grown to reach the entire world. Without him, there would be nothing. That’s what I have to say about his role.

Are there any other questions related to that? For example, you asked about the marriage between Abraham and Marcella and what their love was like. It’s a love story, a beautiful one. The proof is in the fact that they’re still married. How often do you hear about families torn apart by tragedy like theirs? And then consider the music business—it’s brutal, it tears people apart. Yet, they stayed together through it all.

That’s real love. Of course, they’re human, and there must have been conflict, like in any relationship, but they made it through at the end of the day. That’s love. So, to answer your question, when you see them, you can’t help but recognize that their love is strong.

Intuitively, I feel this because my parents stayed together and loved each other deeply. While I’ve never met Abraham and Marcella, and I’m not a psychologist or family therapist, I base my understanding on what I’ve seen in interviews, what I’ve read, and my own experience.

Jacobsen: Were they a product of their generation, where marriages were likelier to stick it out? 

Mata: Probably. But they’re also living in a time when many couples from that generation haven’t stayed together. So yes, their generation may have shaped them, but I believe their love would have lasted in any era.

As for your question about how Abraham’s parenting style may have differed between Selena and her siblings, there wasn’t much difference. He seemed consistent based on what I’ve read and observed and my understanding of Mexican culture. It didn’t matter that Selena was the star or the lead singer—he treated them all the same.

He was strict with his rules. There was no drinking or smoking on the bus—not just for his children but also for the musicians. Everyone had to be in bed at a particular time. He had a policy of not interacting much with fans because he believed there needed to be a mystique between the artist and the audience. That mystique would fade if the fans got to know them too well. He enforced that with all of his children, not just Selena.

So he had a policy where you could talk to the fans but weren’t allowed to develop friendships with them to maintain that mystique. And it wasn’t just Selena; all the kids had the same treatment. It’s not that he outright forbade them from attending football games or proms, but the business demands didn’t allow it.

Most of their gigs were on the weekends when all the socializing happened at school. Eventually, Selena had to drop out of school, and she later earned her GED. I’m not sure about AB or Suzette, but I know Selena did it, and she also became an advocate for education. Based on the interviews I’ve read, she never complained about the path her life took. She understood how fortunate she was to be following her dream.

Abraham was equal in how he disciplined and guided all his children. He instilled professionalism in them and maintained their faith as a core part of their upbringing. I don’t want to speculate too much, but I believe they were associated with the Church of the Latter-day Saints, though I could be wrong. What’s clear is that faith was essential to their family, and they were God-fearing people, which Abraham instilled in his children.

By the way, I have a YouTube series called Rock God, and in episode 8, I meet Selena. It’s a fantastic episode where I visit her star on the Hollywood Walk of Fame. While I’m there, I get hit by a guy on a scooter. I pass out, and while I’m concussed, Selena appears to me. So, if anyone reading this is interested, go to YouTube, search for Rocca JD Mata, and check out episode 8.

I mention this because, in the episode, I made a point of portraying Selena in a way that’s respectful to her faith. In the Seventh-day Adventist tradition, they believe that when people die, they don’t go to heaven right away; instead, they’re “sleeping” until Jesus returns. So, in the episode, Selena wakes up and says, “Oh, I’ve been sleeping,” to stay true to that belief.

Jacobsen: How’s your time looking tonight?

Mata: I’ve got a project I’m working on, so this will probably be it for tonight. Same time, we’ll get back into the groove.

Jacobsen: Great, I’ll see you then.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

The Rock God of Assisted Living Facilities

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/18

 A seasoned Musician (Vocals, Guitar and Piano), Filmmaker, and Actor, J.D. Mata has composed 100 songs and performed 100 shows and venues throughout. He has been a regular at the legendary “Whisky a Go Go,” where he has wooed audiences with his original shamanistic musical performances. He has written and directed nerous feature films, web series, and music videos. J.D. has also appeared in various national T.V. commercials and shows. Memorable appearances are TRUE BLOOD (HBO) as Tio Luca, THE UPS Store National television commercial, and the lead in the Lil Wayne music video, HOW TO LOVE, with over 129 million views. As a MOHAWK MEDICINE MAN, J.D. also led the spiritual-based film KATERI, which won the prestigious “Capex Dei” award at the Vatican in Rome. J.D. co-starred, performed and wrote the music for the original world premiere play, AN ENEMY of the PUEBLO — by one of today’s preeminent Chicana writers, Josefina Lopez! This is J.D.’s third Fringe; last year, he wrote, directed and starred in the Fringe Encore Performance award-winning “A Night at the Chicano Rock Opera.” He is in season 2 of his NEW YouTube series, ROCK god! J.D. is a native of McAllen, Texas and resides in North Hollywood, California. 

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: I guess you have a new album or an older music collection in older language. It’s an interesting situation with the online space now because it’s not typically a physical album or disc anymore—it’s streamed most of the time. Anyway, you have what we might call an album about ‘Rock God.’ At the same time, you informed me that you performed today or tonight at an assisted living facility in Los Angeles?

J.D. Mata: Actually, it was in Simi Valley, which is about 40 miles north of Los Angeles, in Ventura County. So I was in Simi Valley, entertaining at an assisted living facility. 

Jacobsen: Why would they choose ‘The Rock God’ over backgammon, chess, cards night, or even an early rest? Also, how did you get the gig? 

Mata: Those are a lot of questions, but I want to clarify that it’s not an album called ‘Rock God.’ It’s a YouTube series.

Jacobsen: Thank you for the correction. So, yes, it’s a YouTube series.

Mata: I call it ‘Rock God. ‘ The premise is about Aaron, a struggling musician who sets out to live his dreams in Los Angeles. You see his struggles; ultimately, he becomes a ‘Rock God,’ but in the nursing home circuit. This concept was created before the pandemic. I have 12 episodes up, or 11. Season 1 consists of 10 episodes, shot over the last three to three-and-a-half years as I developed the pre-pandemic concept.

I shot the first couple of episodes initially, but then the pandemic hit, and I could no longer enter nursing homes due to COVID-19. Musicians weren’t allowed anywhere near, which threw off the entire premise. So, ‘Rock God’ shifted temporarily, but I’m now returning to the original concept. The series is essentially about the struggles of a musician. I’ve had plenty of horror stories and beautiful moments about the realities of this life.

I recommend that people check YouTube and search for ‘Rock God J.D. Mata’ to watch the episodes. You can also go to X (formerly known as Twitter), where I have uploaded all 11 episodes. We’re technically the first comedy series on X.

Regarding today’s conversation, it’s fascinating because I want to correct myself—I’ve been using the term ‘nursing homes,’ but ‘assisted living facilities’ is more accurate. I’ve performed at these places, ‘nursing homes,’ since the early 1980s. The pandemic halted that, but I recently started again, reclaiming the ‘Rock God’ of the nursing home circuit.

I want to be as accurate as possible. There are no longer nursing homes, per se; it’s assisted living. That makes sense because “nursing home” carries a negative connotation, and there have been many advances.

However, some facilities are strictly nursing homes where people are bedridden or confined. But many people here have difficulty walking or need 24/7 care. That’s the facility I played at today, and it’s adorable. It’s in the middle of a strip mall so residents can access the pharmacy, Rite Aid, and coffee shop more efficiently. It’s an excellent concept.

I was the ‘Rock God,’ and in a way, that term is accurate. If they had lighters, they would’ve lit them! I played “Hotel California,” “Freebird,” and “Pretty Woman,” and they were all singing along. They knew the words, which is interesting because, back in the eighties, I was doing “All of Me” and “Ain’t Misbehavin’.”

In a way, I am the ‘Rock God’ because I’ve been playing classic rock songs for years, and many of my contemporaries haven’t tapped into the assisted living circuit yet. They don’t know about it; they’re still playing the bars. But, man, I’ll tell you what.

I haven’t shot this particular episode yet, but I look at their faces and eyes, and they’re so into it. I look at some women and think, “She was probably hot in her twenties.” And they’re still beautiful in their way. 

Jacobsen: Were there any particular people who stood out during your performance? Maybe someone with a cane or in a wheelchair who came to life in a heartwarming way.

Mata: A hundred percent. Three people come to mind. It’s a couple, then a gentleman and another woman. The first couple—his name is Richard or Dick, and his girlfriend’s name is Judy. I remember their names fondly. I use word association to remember names—Richard because of “Dick’s Office Supply.” My dad worked for Dick’s Office Supply, so that’s how I remember. And Judy, I sing “Hey Jude” to her, which makes it easy to remember.

This couple always holds hands when I perform. I played some 50s songs like “Put Your Head on My Shoulder,”and they recognized them. They were probably teenagers when those songs were hits. They held hands and swayed to the music. I feel like I took them back to their youth. I also played “Rock Around the Clock” and “Let’s Go to the Hop,” I could imagine them as teenyboppers at a sock hop, dancing and being in love. They left an impact on me.

Then there’s another gentleman named Paul. He’s hunched over, strolls with a walker, and can barely look at you because he is hunched. It’s hard to understand him, but he’s sharp as a whip. His challenges are primarily physical, though there might be some cognitive decline. But he’s funny, remembers my name, and engages with the show. I’ll joke with him and say, “Paul, you still owe me money!” He’ll reply, “How much?” and we laugh.

There’s also a woman in a wheelchair whose name I can’t remember, but she’s incredibly witty. She gets all the jokes and is always engaged. People like her, along with Paul, make the performances memorable.

Like, for example, one of the jokes that I use when I go to these places, and they have a great sense of humour, is this: I start by saying, “today, I got a package in the mail. I got a box in the mail.” They’re engaged and ask, “Who was it from?” I reply, “It was a package from my ex-girlfriend.” They go, “Oh,” and I say, “Yes, I shook it, and man, that thing was heavy—it made a thumping noise. I opened it up, and guess what was inside?” They ask, “What?” I say, “Moccasins.” They go, “Moccasins?” I say, “Yes, water moccasins.” Then they say, “Oh, water moccasins, the snake.”

Everybody knows what water moccasins are. Then I tell them, “You’ll never guess what I did. I got a pot, boiled some water, threw the moccasins in, and guess what? I’m inviting my ex-girlfriend over for dinner.” They all laugh—they get that type of humour.

And then there’s this particular woman who always adds to the joke. I am trying to remember exactly what she says, but she’s super funny and has a biting sense of humour. Seeing her in a wheelchair makes you appreciate the human body and mind. The body might be a shell, but the mind is where the miracle is.

I go on with the show, continuing the joke: “We broke up because one day she showed up early in the morning after being out all night. Her hair is dishevelled. I ask, ‘Where have you been?’ and she says, ‘I was at my sister’s house.’ But I knew she lied because I was with her sister all night.” The audience laughs—they love these jokes and are still old enough to get them.

That particular woman I mentioned always retorts to something I say in a clever, funny way—not mean-spirited, but in good fun. She becomes part of the act. I have some memorable moments with the residents while I play music.

And as I mentioned earlier, they sing along with me when I play Pretty Woman or Stand by Me. When I play Piano Man, they’re right there with me, too. If they still had access to lighters, they’d light them to my music.

Jacobsen: Do you get many invitations now?

Mata: I opened up an email a couple of days ago from another place, so yes, I’m starting to get more invites. I’m becoming the rock guy—word travels. Before the pandemic, I did it for years because it’s a circuit. Like people tour arenas and play bars, there’s also a circuit for assisted living homes. And now, I’m doing three of those facilities regularly. Before the pandemic, I performed at about seven different facilities throughout LA. I was the rock god of the assisted living circuit.

Jacobsen: As you play for these people, many of whom are later in life, what feeling comes up for you?

Mata: As I was leaving, one of the staff members said, “Man, you bring so much enthusiasm and energy to these performances. Many musicians show up, play, and then leave, but you put your whole heart and soul into it. You engage with the audience.” And I told her, “You’re right.” I’ve played in all kinds of settings—I’ve performed for the Fly on the Wall at a bar, and I’ve also performed for 100,000 people at a concert during my Tejano days. Whether it’s for one person or 100,000, I give the same energy and the same passion.

The folks at the assisted living homes get the same juice from me as anyone else, whether it’s a small venue or a big one. It doesn’t matter. It’s all about the performance. If you have passion for what you do, you will give it your all, no matter the situation or location.

I love it—I’m passionate about it. Even as an actor, it’s the same thing. I’m going to be authentic, always. As a musician, my authentic self comes out when I perform and with passion.

Jacobsen: You are one of the most authentic people I know. At the same time, you’ve made sacrifices in your life for that authenticity. You may not make as much money or have a large social circle, but the people in your life matter, and the money you make, you’ve earned. You live a meaningful life.

Mata: It’s funny you say that because you become wiser as you get older. You start to see things more clearly. But that doesn’t happen to everyone. Some people get older and don’t necessarily become wiser. Sometimes, you don’t know what you don’t know.

I’m not going to claim that I have all the answers. There’s that saying, “It’s easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich man to enter heaven.” And for those reading this, Jose is a practicing Catholic and a longtime choir conductor for a Catholic choir. So, this wisdom comes from a life of practice.

Yes, I had a moment of understanding tonight, Earl, before our conversation when you mentioned the sacrifice of poverty. It’s not about being rich or poor; it’s a metaphor. I don’t think people go to hell because they’re rich. But I understand it now.

Let me explain. I was in a horrible situation some time ago—I won’t give specifics because I don’t want to implicate anyone—but I knew some affluent people. I was in the wrong spot financially, emotionally, and career-wise. I never asked for help, though I got through it with some people’s support. However, one person had the means to help but didn’t. I never asked them for help, but they clarified that they won’t help struggling artists. For me, it wasn’t about being an artist but about working through life. Life is messy, and that’s the truth.

The thing is, I get where she’s coming from. I understood it yesterday because it’s not that she didn’t want to help me—it’s that she’s never struggled. It doesn’t matter; the person has never gone through what I’ve gone through. I get that.

I know that I’ll have wealth one day, and who knows? I’ll be the same way. Maybe wealth changes you. But I doubt it because I’m 59, and I’ve been through many struggles. Many wealthy people have helped me out of tricky situations, and I haven’t forgotten that.

I get it if you’re wealthy and have never gone through what I have. That person has never experienced the same hardships because they were born with wealth. They don’t know what they don’t know. For them, it’s righteous. They might think, “If you feed the cat, the cat’s going to keep coming back,” and then you own the cat. But that was never my intention.

Sometimes, I’m grateful for my path when discussing sacrifice, especially when it leads to moments like today. Yes, I’m paid for performing at assisted living facilities, and they pay me well. Part of me wants to help, but another part needs the money, too. So I do it both because it’s a good deed and because I need the income.

If I accumulate wealth, will I still play at assisted living facilities? Right now, I’d say yes—probably yes—because I’m already a millionaire. I love my life, even though I don’t have much wealth. I’d love to own a grand piano, an Apple Watch, or a big house where I could play music anytime, 24/7. I live in an apartment complex, and I’m not living in poverty.

But compared to absolute poverty, which you’ve probably seen in your travels, I’m fortunate. Here in America, we live like kings and queens. Still, I’d love to have wealth so I could employ people. I could make more movies, hire actors, makeup artists, wardrobe people, and more. These are the things I can’t do now with independent projects because I need the finances to support them.

So yes, being an artist, the “Rock God” of assisted living homes comes with sacrifices. To play these places, you still have to be good—you can’t suck. So, I practice every day. That’s the sacrifice.

The reality is, when you live the life of an artist, you have to sacrifice relationships and family. I always say that you can cheat on me—if I have a girlfriend, it doesn’t bother me. But if you cheat on me artistically, like if you have a party and I’m not the first person you think to hire, then you’ve hurt me. What that says to me is either I’m not good enough, or you don’t value me.

That’s how the artist’s mind works. For me, as JD, the artist and the “Rock God” of the assisted living home circuit, it cuts deep. It’s another entirely different discussion—the artist’s psyche, particularly for me as a musician.

But in my heart, I’m a millionaire. Do I want to be a millionaire in terms of my bank account? Yes. Because wealth is just information, just numbers. You can be wealthy if you think like a millionaire, even if your bank account doesn’t reflect it yet.

For me, it’s just a matter of time. And when my bank account catches up, I hope and pray that I don’t forget where I came from. Some wealthy people remember, but others don’t know what they don’t know. That’s why they say it’s easier for a camel to pass through the eye of a needle than for a rich person to enter heaven. It’s not a condemnation to hell—it’s a metaphor for understanding. People who haven’t experienced real struggle may not fully understand what it’s like.

So, I don’t resent that person who didn’t help me. I love that person. I get it now. Life is just like that—people are different, and everyone has their way of living.

Every musician should play at assisted living homes.

Jacobsen: JD, thank you for your discussion on assisted living homes. This may be the first conversation I’ve ever had about performing in assisted living homes, especially in a positive light. It’s something new.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Yana Fershtein on a Student Petition at KPU

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/17

Yana Fershtein is the Managing Editor of PULP Mag. She discusses editorial independence, the petition affecting PIPS, and student involvement.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we’re here with Yana Fershtein from PULP Mag. Yana, as an initial question, how long have you been involved with PULP Mag?

Yana Fershtein: I joined PULP Mag as the new managing editor in June, so about three months and a bit.

Jacobsen: What was your prior level of managerial and editorial experience? Is this your first managing editor position?

Fershtein: Yes, it is.

Jacobsen: What do you know about the petition and how it affects PIPS and the magazine’s operations?

Fershtein: I heard about it from the PIPS operations manager. She reached out to me when they first received the petition, as it would affect PULP Mag. Being the managing editor, they involved me right away. However, I wasn’t very involved in the initial stages of figuring out what the petition meant and what needed to be done.

I did, however, speak with some of the Runner’s staff. I believe it was the managing editor. They explained to me the history of the relationship between the Runner and the KSA, as well as what this petition means for PIPS, the Runner, and PULP Mag by extension.

Jacobsen: So, when looking at the petition’s call for KSA board involvement, for instance, if this first step is approved, would it raise concerns for you, or no, regarding editorial independence?

Not necessarily for the Runner, but if it were to escalate, such as them wanting a seat on the PIPS board and gaining editorial oversight over PULP Mag and the Runner, then yes, it would concern me. 

Fershtein: My biggest concern would be the possibility that PIPS, the Runner, or both publications could be killed at any point. Additionally, the nature of our content, primarily artistic and literary works, focuses less on objective, unbiased reporting and more on creativity and expression. Emotions are often involved in what we publish, and if editorial independence from the KSA council members is compromised, contributors may not feel free to express themselves fully. As we are a publication primarily for KPU students, I believe they should retain the right to express themselves artistically.

Jacobsen: How much do students contribute per credit to PULP Mag?

Fershtein: It’s 75¢ per credit for PIPS, and that funding is split between the Runner and PULP Mag.

Jacobsen: Have you or any prior managing editors ever received complaints about this contribution of less than a dollar per credit?

Fershtein: I can’t speak for any previous managing editors, but no one has said anything to me. I’ve never received any complaints, and I haven’t heard of anyone, formally or informally, objecting to it. It’s also an optional fee. People can opt out of it. 

Jacobsen: What do you think is the importance of editorial independence when writing for a community? You are a student publication for students,  especially given your knowledge of expressing emotions and putting feelings into, for instance, loud colors on the page and evocative wording. Can you comment on that? Editorial freedom is crucial, whether you’re talking about traditional newspaper writing or creative expression in more artistic formats, like PULP Mag and other similar publications serving the public. 

Fershtein: I think it’s very important. One of the things we aim to do is publish work that is unique or pushes boundaries because that’s often the kind of artwork that becomes important and significant on a broader scale. For students, who are usually early in their careers, this is especially true. Many are just starting to realize they can share their writing with the world.

A lot of magazines or publishers have a high barrier to entry. That’s why having PULP Mag exist as a student-run publication, yet independent from governing bodies like the school or the student union, is so important. It provides students with an easier way to share their work as they’re starting out. They feel supported and know they can express themselves without holding back. Creative writing and art allow for expression in ways that writing a newspaper article might not.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts you’d like to share on this topic? I also want to be sensitive to the fact that it’s not easy being put on the spot just three months into a new job.

Fershtein: Are you asking specifically about this question or overall?

Jacobsen: Overall, and in reflection on everything we’ve discussed, especially given the context of starting a new role and then having this event happen. I can’t imagine this being easy. 

Fershtein: It’s been quite a learning curve. I spoke to some previous managing editors. They unanimously said this had never happened before. What stings a bit is that PULP Mag wasn’t really an instigator for any of this in any way. 

The magazine got caught in the crossfire of this. It made me wonder whether the best interests of everyone were really considered. Sometimes it felt like PULP Mag and the students it serves—creative writing students, art students, or even students from other disciplines wanting to express themselves—weren’t really taken into account. Otherwise, this experience has definitely made me more aware of what’s happening at KPU. I’ve felt very supported by the Runner staff, especially Claudia. She’s been great at explaining everything to me, especially since I just started not too long ago. It can only go up from here.

Jacobsen: Yana, thank you very much for your time today.

Fershtein: Thank you. I appreciate you reaching out to me and giving PULP Mag a voice because it did feel a little like we were watching things unfold without being able to do much. Thank you for seeking PULP’s perspective.

Jacobsen: You’re very welcome. 

Fershtein: Cool. Great. Thank you, it was great talking to you, Scott.

Jacobsen: Thank you. Bye.

Fershtein: Bye-bye.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Dr. Nicholas Jenner on Codependency Recovery

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/17

In an upcoming interview with Dr. Nicholas Jenner, a seasoned therapist and coach with over 20 years of experience, we explore his new program, “Self Leadership for Codependents.” Dr. Jenner discusses his expertise in helping women break free from codependent relationships, fostering emotional independence, and embracing personal autonomy. He shares his compassionate approach, rooted in Internal Family Systems therapy and practical tools, offering a transformative path toward healthier relationships and self-growth.

Dr. Nicholas Jenner is a counseling psychotherapist and the founder of Boundaries of the Soul Therapy LTD. With over 20 years of experience, he specializes in codependency recovery and other mental health issues. Subscribe to Dr Jenner Podcast – Self-leadership For Codependents

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: So today, we are here with Dr. Nicholas Jenner to talk about his new program and some more. He specializes in codependency, with an emphasis on women, though men are affected by it as well. I want to begin with two foundational points before we delve into the core of today’s interview. First, what is codependency? Second, what is an important consideration regarding how this issue affects men and women, based on your professional experience?

Dr. Nicholas Jenner: Thank you, Scott. I’m happy to be here. The first question is complex because there are many definitions of codependency. Generally speaking, as we understand it today, codependency involves prioritizing others’ needs at the expense of one’s own to maintain relationships. While this may seem generous, it is often a way to control the situation and keep others happy to feel secure in the relationship.

Codependent people tend to please and enable others to avoid conflict or rejection. We’ll explore this in more depth as the conversation progresses. As for your second question, codependency can affect anyone, though it’s more commonly observed in women. However, men are also susceptible to it. In my experience working with individuals and couples, it is prevalent in various cultures and social backgrounds. Codependency doesn’t discriminate based on gender, country, or culture.

There’s also the aspect of childhood experiences, which we can discuss later. 

Jacobsen: Now, in terms of predecessors in the field, there are certainly influential figures. Are people like Eric Berne, who developed Transactional Analysis, and others who contributed to research on codependency part of it?

Jenner: It’s important to note that the concept of codependency initially emerged in the context of addiction recovery, particularly in relationships where one partner was addicted to substances. Around 30 to 40 years ago, the term “co-alcoholic” was used to describe individuals who were in relationships with alcoholics, and it was believed they enabled their partner’s addiction. There’s an old anecdote about a woman complaining about her husband’s drinking yet keeping beer in the fridge to keep him from going to the bar.

Over the past 20 years, research on codependency has expanded beyond addiction. It now includes behaviours within relationships where one person relies excessively on another for emotional support. I came across the concept of codependency about 15 years ago, particularly in the context of “love addiction,” which became more widely discussed in the media at that time. Codependency is now recognized as a significant behavioural pattern in relationships and often stems from childhood experiences.

As for your question on pioneers in the field, one of the challenges with codependency is that it needs to be formally recognized as a psychological disorder. It doesn’t appear in the DSM (Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders), so there is no official clinical diagnosis. However, several influential figures have contributed to the understanding of codependency, such as Pia Mellody, who introduced the concept of “facing codependence,” Melody Beattie, whose work on recovery from codependency is widely recognized, and Ross Rosenberg, who explored the connection between codependency and narcissistic relationships.

These are all people who know a lot about codependency. 

Jacobsen: How do you see this manifest in a therapeutic setting, in a professional, controlled environment, for people who happen to have this as a psychological factor in their overall profile?

Jenner: Of course. I usually see them in the first consultation. Generally, because codependency starts in childhood, we can often trace it back by assessing that period. Most people who struggle with codependency have a similar type of childhood experience.

Now, it’s different for everyone. Still, a typical codependent family dynamic often includes an overworked, overwhelmed mother and an emotionally distant father. This pattern is quite common. However, it can be any family structure where a child grows up without forming a strong connection with their caregivers. I once read that if you didn’t have a meaningful connection with a caregiver, you’re likely to become codependent as an adult.

This is where codependency begins. Many have trouble remembering key details when talking to someone about their childhood. Still, through careful exploration, you can identify where these codependent patterns and traits began to emerge. Codependency often develops due to two types of trauma: relational trauma and developmental trauma. Relational trauma involves learning about relationships from parents, whether those lessons are healthy or not. Developmental trauma refers to any event that interrupts a child’s natural progression through normal developmental stages.

In addition, there’s a Freudian concept known as “repetition compulsion,” which suggests that as adults, people seek out relationships to try to resolve issues from early childhood. We can examine those patterns, types of relationships, and childhood experiences to determine if someone is codependent.

Jacobsen: What about the prospects for self-regulation of codependency as a psychological and social trait in adults—let’s say, people who are fully cognitively developed, 25 and older? How can men and women overcome or manage the typically well-established pathways by that point in life?

Jenner: Absolutely. You’re right to bring that up. I meet many codependents who are aware of their issues, but the key challenge is moving from awareness to action. Awareness alone is not enough; action is required to manage codependency.

In the program I’ve developed for lifetime access, a 13-week audio series, we guide participants from codependent awareness to codependent action. If I may, I’ll explain more about that as I answer your question. When we reach the action phase, it can be summed up in two words: personal autonomy.

Personal autonomy is crucial, both for the individual and within relationships. In a typical codependent relationship, you often find an enmeshed dynamic where two people are so entangled that it becomes dysfunctional. One partner may be emotionally distant, while the codependent partner tries to control the shared space in the relationship. This push-pull dynamic is a hallmark of codependent relationships.

Jenner: And they tend to forget everything outside of that relationship. They become engrossed and entangled with each other. For me, the end goal of any codependent work is personal autonomy. This means seeing yourself as an individual with a healthy sense of self.

It would be best to have your hobbies, pastimes, and friends. You must have your purpose in life and allow the other person to do the same. This is critical because codependents typically do not. Then, a special space must be reserved for the relationship, balancing “me time” and “us time.”

Jacobsen: What is the path from a strong form of codependency to healthier relationships and a better self-concept?

Jenner: That’s a complex question, even though it sounds simple. It depends on the individual. You have to realize that codependency is not love. I often have couples coming into therapy saying, “We think one of us is codependent, but we love each other.” My thought is, “You don’t love each other.” As a codependent, you don’t truly know what love is because codependency is about control. Codependency is controlling, so it depends on the person and their willingness to change.

It also depends on what type of codependent they are. Codependency is a generic term, but there are various types: controlling codependents, avoidant codependents, enabling codependents, and people-pleasing codependents. Interestingly, there’s also a masochistic codependent who can be seen as the ultimate victim.

All these factors influence how long recovery might take. I think that there’s no classic “recovery” from codependency. It’s not as simple as taking a pill and feeling better. It’s about managing your daily life, staying present, focusing on yourself, and doing the internal work.

Jacobsen: What about self-help exercises, journaling, or meditation? How do those practices help with self-regulation and grounding in the present moment?

Jenner: Those are perfect exercises. The program I wrote includes meditation, and every audio session includes a journaling prompt to complete over the week. In therapy, I always encourage people to journal. It’s incredibly useful for grounding.

Meditation is also something I frequently use in therapy. Breathing exercises lead to my main method, Internal Family Systems Therapy (IFS) or parts work combined with inner child work. I use these techniques to dig into childhood experiences and the past to facilitate healing.

Jacobsen: What do you find is the biggest sticking point in the therapy process for individuals with codependency?

Jacobsen: That jump between awareness and action—many codependents get stuck in this process. Most people who come into therapy say, “I am codependent.” They’ve learned this through research, reading books, or perhaps a therapist or someone else told them.

They are aware of what codependency is and where it originated. They recognize their childhood patterns and can say, “Yes, this happened, and my symptoms match what I’ve read.” The big leap, of course, is moving from awareness to action.

The key is applying all that knowledge and awareness to create a new life. You need to shift that awareness from the mind to the body and take action. That’s the biggest challenge I see.

Because codependency is often tied to relationships, a common sticking point is when a codependent individual is alone. They might say, “I’m never going to have another relationship. I’ll focus on myself.” But once they meet someone, the codependent tendencies tend to reemerge.

So, the focal point of therapy is helping someone become aware of their codependency and take meaningful action. Guiding them through that process is the muddy terrain we, as therapists, must navigate.

Jacobsen: What is your most practical advice for people struggling with this issue in their day-to-day lives?

Jenner: My most practical advice would be to recognize that you’re codependent, acknowledge that you tend to control relationships, that you have an external focus, and that you need to shift that work inward.

Also, understand that if you want to have a healthy relationship with someone, you must do the necessary inner work. Codependents often spend much of their time in denial. In my program, I address this at length.

And to be honest, it’s easy to be codependent because you’re seen as the “good egg.” You’re the one who does everything for everyone, and people come to you. It is challenging to give up that control. But the reality is, if you want a good relationship with a healthy person, you need to do the work.

This means shifting your focus from external sources of validation to internal growth.

Jacobsen: Suppose you were to compare two healthy people in a relationship with two codependent people. How would those relationships look and differ?

Jenner: Two healthy people in a relationship have personal autonomy. They have independence and interdependence within the relationship, meaning they rely on each other in a balanced way. They are individuals who are comfortable with themselves and can support each other without losing their own identity.

Now, such relationships are rare. The prevalence of codependency in relationships is quite high. Two healthy people are happy to be independent. They don’t feel threatened when their partner spends time with others or pursues personal interests. They nurture the relationship while respecting each other’s individuality.

Two codependent people, on the other hand, usually don’t work well together. It’s like trying to push two magnets together. There will be a lack of trust and blurred boundaries, and the relationship will often be tense.

Jenner: They will isolate themselves within the relationship, and their life outside will wither.

Jacobsen: What is the lifespan of a codependent relationship? If these relationships are ultimately bound to self-destruct for most people, what’s the timeline? I’m curious.

Jenner: This is an interesting question because codependent relationships can last a long time. Codependents are hypervigilant, and they tend to attract emotionally distant people, creating a push-pull dynamic. Let’s bring in the concept of repetition compulsion. Codependents often try to fix earlier relationships through their current ones. This makes them hypervigilant, ensuring they provide what their partner needs to feel secure. This can sustain the relationship for many years, even decades.

Even when codependent couples come to therapy, the obvious issues may be in front of them, but they often don’t see it. So, these relationships either implode quickly or can last a long time due to denial, avoidance, and a constant sense of “we’re okay”—when, in fact, they are not.

Jacobsen: Have the rates of codependency gone up or down over the last few decades?

Jenner: Awareness of codependency has certainly increased, but I need to find out whether the rates of actual codependency have changed. I’ve seen claims suggesting that up to 80% of the global population is codependent in some way, though I wouldn’t go that far. However, it is very prevalent. What has increased is awareness, and the concept of codependency is evolving. It’s being applied not only to romantic relationships but also to the workplace, friendships, and family dynamics, especially between parents and children.

Codependency is everywhere. From my experience working with clients, I see a lot of codependent behaviour in both the people I work with and their surrounding relationships. However, determining whether the rate of codependency has increased is difficult. There isn’t much formal monitoring of it.

Jacobsen: You mentioned earlier that there are gender aspects to codependency. What about race, age, or culture? Do those factors influence how codependency manifests, regardless of its variety or severity?

Jenner: Yes, codependency can manifest across all demographics—race, age, culture, creed. However, in cultures where men are dominant, and women are taught to be submissive, codependency is more prevalent. We don’t need to name specific cultures. Still, it’s clear that in societies where men hold more power and women are expected to be subservient, codependency thrives.

Jacobsen: So, would there be some real codependency there?

Jenner: Yes, definitely. But, in the Western world, codependency doesn’t have limits. It doesn’t matter your age, race, creed, or colour—codependency doesn’t discriminate.

Jacobsen: What are your biggest lessons over two decades of working in this field?

Jenner: The main thing I’ve learned is that when codependents come into therapy, they’re often filled with hopelessness. Some don’t know what’s wrong with them; some don’t think anything is wrong, and others believe everything is wrong.

I want to give anyone coming into therapy the message that there is hope. Over the past two decades, I’ve seen many people change their lives once they realize that by taking action, they can lead a good life, build healthy relationships, and surround themselves with good people. So, that’s one key lesson—there’s always hope for codependents.

On the other side of the coin, if you look at people with narcissistic tendencies—without labelling everyone as a narcissist—it’s not as easy to work with them. But for codependents, there’s always hope. That’s the most important thing I’ve learned in these two decades.

Jacobsen: In the life of a therapist, especially when specializing in areas like narcissism, codependency, or borderline personality disorder, do you find that you, as a therapist, learn things about yourself while working with others?

Jenner:I can only speak for myself, but I learn something about myself when working with clients. As I mentioned earlier, I recognize myself as a codependent. I’ve guided people through codependency based on my own experiences and mistakes in relationships. I know what it feels like to be codependent.

However, that doesn’t make me a teacher—I’m also a learner. I learn from my clients. I resonate with their experiences and am always willing to help them through their struggles.

If you don’t mind me talking about my program again, which comes with lifetime access to the content, its core is a blend of my personal experience as a codependent and my professional experience working with codependents. It covers the key aspects of codependency—where it originates, what it looks like, and the different types. From there, it moves through the core challenges of codependency, such as the lack of boundaries and the drama triangle, and how to address them.

So, yes, I learn from my clients, and it’s an incredible experience to witness someone who starts off feeling hopeless and emotional in the first session grow much stronger as they begin to turn the focus inward. It’s truly inspiring.

Jacobsen: Dr. Jenner, thank you for the opportunity and your time today.

Jenner: Thank you, Scott. It was nice to meet you.

Jacobsen: Nice to meet you, too.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

What Is More Important: Kindness, Empathy, or Intelligence?

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/16

According to some semi-reputable sources gathered in a listing hereRick G. Rosner may have among America’s, North America’s, and the world’s highest measured IQs at or above 190 (S.D. 15)/196 (S.D. 16) based on several high range test performances created by Christopher HardingJason BettsPaul Cooijmans, and Ronald Hoeflin. He earned 12 years of college credit in less than a year and graduated with the equivalent of 8 majors. He has received 8 Writers Guild Awards and Emmy nominations, and was titled 2013 North American Genius of the Year by The World Genius Directory with the main “Genius” listing here.

He has written for Remote ControlCrank YankersThe Man ShowThe EmmysThe Grammys, and Jimmy Kimmel Live!. He worked as a bouncer, a nude art model, a roller-skating waiter, and a stripper. In a television commercialDomino’s Pizza named him the “World’s Smartest Man.” The commercial was taken off the air after Subway sandwiches issued a cease-and-desist. He was named “Best Bouncer” in the Denver Area, Colorado, by Westwood Magazine.

Rosner spent much of the late Disco Era as an undercover high school student. In addition, he spent 25 years as a bar bouncer and American fake ID-catcher, and 25+ years as a stripper, and nearly 30 years as a writer for more than 2,500 hours of network television. Errol Morris featured Rosner in the interview series entitled First Person, where some of this history was covered by Morris. He came in second, or lost, on Jeopardy!, sued Who Wants to Be a Millionaire? over a flawed question and lost the lawsuit. He won one game and lost one game on Are You Smarter Than a Drunk Person? (He was drunk). Finally, he spent 37+ years working on a time-invariant variation of the Big Bang Theory.

Currently, Rosner sits tweeting in a bathrobe (winter) or a towel (summer). He lives in Los AngelesCalifornia with his wife, dog, and goldfish. He and his wife have a daughter. You can send him money or questions at LanceVersusRick@Gmail.Com, or a direct message via Twitter, or find him on LinkedIn, or see him on YouTube

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What is more important: kindness, empathy, or intelligence?

Rick Rosner: It depends on the context, but kindness is the most important in building a decent society. If people are consistently kind to each other, society can function well. You don’t have to understand others fully to be kind to them. Empathy extends the reach of your kindness. If you can only understand people like you, that limits who you’ll be kind to. But if you can work on empathy, it broadens your range. Intelligence is probably the least important when it comes to holding society together. Intelligence is for finding solutions when there’s no obvious solution already in place.

Jacobsen: That makes sense. So, to use something like your personal example, maybe, if someone is mildly gifted and can create problems up to, say, three and a third standard deviations above the norm. Still, you’re four or five or more standard deviations above the norm; you might overthink the problem and see patterns that weren’t meant to be there. You’ve probably walked through life seeing this happen, where even the most complicated occupations don’t require that high of an intelligence—personality might matter more. There’s a dual factor here—intelligence and personality.

Rosner: Trump and many of his supporters aren’t morons, but their personality makes them effectively moronic. They’re the “do your own research” people who lazily look into things or accept crappy arguments because they lack the curiosity or energy to poke holes in those arguments. They embrace ideas that support their prejudices without critically engaging with them. They aren’t so dumb that they couldn’t be taught that their views are based on faulty information. They don’t care enough to change their minds.

That’s true in life strategies, too. You can have average or slightly above-average intelligence and still succeed by following the standard behaviours that society lays out. One place where I went wrong was spending too much effort on failed strategies—like trying to get a girlfriend before I was boyfriend material.

Jacobsen: That’s an interesting point. The marker of being “boyfriend material” is constantly shifting, however.

Rosner: True. But I remember being in 4th grade, and I was despairing because I thought, “This is years away from being able to have sex with someone else!” It was way too early to be that concerned about it. But even then, I was worried about when and how I’d get a girlfriend. Other people around me didn’t seem worried, which confused me.

Jacobsen: That’s a lot of pressure at such a young age.

Rosner: It was. I went back to high school several times after graduating and saw a big difference. My class, the class of ’78, was horny. We bought into the idea that you shouldn’t leave high school with your virginity intact. But it was different when I saw the classes of ’79 and ’86. Many people didn’t seem to care as much about hooking up, which annoyed me. One guy in particular, who was cool, had a cool car and a decent personality. He wasn’t focused on hitting on girls at all. He spent his weekends hanging out in parking lots with his car buddies. When I asked him why he wasn’t worried about not having a girlfriend, he said, “You can’t worry about everything, man.” That attitude probably served him well later in life.

Jacobsen: It’s funny how sometimes simple advice like that can be exactly what we need to hear.

Rosner: If someone had told me back then, “You’ll be fine. Just do some basic things like lift weights, stay in shape, and be funny,” I probably would’ve been more chill. You’ll meet somebody. Just follow the path that most people follow—live your life, lower your standards, and meet someone perfectly acceptable. You don’t have to be brilliant to do that. It’s not a philosophy; it’s just about not worrying about stuff like that. It’s more of a passive strategy that people of all IQ levels follow.

And it has to work. Otherwise, we wouldn’t have 8 billion people on Earth. In my younger days, I’d spend at least 100 nights a year in bars—during the era when that’s where you went to hook up. I was mostly getting paid to work at bars, so I wasn’t just some sad case, spending two nights a week forlornly hanging out in a disco, hoping to hit on someone.

Jacobsen: At least you were getting paid to be there.

Rosner: Even if I didn’t meet someone, I was making money. And sometimes, I’d catch a fake ID or two, which I loved doing, or get involved in a brawl, which was usually fun.

Rick Rosner, American Comedy Writer, www.rickrosner.org

Scott Douglas Jacobsen, Independent Journalist, www.in-sightpublishing.com

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Josh Bowmar on Ethical Bowhunting and Conservation

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/15

 *The Bowmars were convicted of “Conspiring to Violate the Lacey Act (2).*

Josh Bowmar, a passionate bowhunter and fitness expert. Co-owner of Bowmar Archery, Josh has hunted globally with his wife Sarah, supporting ethical hunting and wildlife conservation. With 2.24 million YouTube subscribers, Bowmar Bowhunting YouTube channel, Josh offers archery tips and insights into their innovative Beast Broadhead. As an IFBB Pro Men’s Physique athlete, he also highlights the connection between fitness and hunting performance. He’s excited to contribute to your platform’s community of hunters and outdoor enthusiasts.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: What was your start in hunting, particularly bow hunting?

Josh Bowmar: We were die-hard hunters, and honestly, most of the meat we ate was from what we hunted. That was cool, and that’s how I got my start. That’s where I began and where the foundation for my passion started. With a last name like Bowmar, you’re destined to be a bow hunter. 

Jacobsen: I also want to make a distinction between ordinary hunting and ethical hunting. Ethical hunting is tied to wildlife conservation. By analogy, as a non-expert, I think of something like fishing, where you can fish to catch food, and then there’s another form, like catch and release. So, how do you distinguish between ethical bow hunting and what I’m terming, for now, ordinary hunting?

Bowmar: That’s not a complicated question because the two go hand in hand. The better question would be: what’s the difference between killing something and ethically hunting something? Some people just kill, but being a killer versus being an ethical hunter is different. The word “ethics” should be understood as what is good for the animal. For example, if you’re hunting an endangered species and there are only a few left, and you kill one, that’s not good for the species—it could lead to extinction.

Ethical hunting, however, involves a few key factors. First, it’s about legality; you want to ensure you’re hunting within the legal guidelines, following the rules and tag laws the government sets. That’s number one. Second, you need to use the animal—harvest it for food. It’s important to eat what you hunt. Some hunters don’t do this with certain animals, and that’s when you need to ask yourself: why are you hunting if you’re not going to use the animal? There’s certainly a trophy aspect to hunting, and we can discuss that if you’d like.

However, when it comes to distinguishing ethical from unethical hunting, it boils down to the sustainability of the animal population and the value hunting adds to conservation efforts. Suppose hunting adds value to the animal, which generates revenue, which goes back into conservation efforts, supporting the animals, their habitats, and their populations. Without that value, there’s no protection for the species, and eradication can be the result. If nobody hunts an animal, farmers aren’t incentivized to lease land for wildlife habitats, and they might resort to poisoning animals to protect their crops.

Africa is a great example. I digress from the question. Still, it’s a deep rabbit hole when we get into the sustainability of hunting, ethics, and the differences between trophy hunting and non-trophy hunting. There’s a lot to talk about. 

Jacobsen: If we take Africa as an example, you’ve been on these long hunting trips. What do you notice in that context where ethical bow hunting is an important consideration?

Bowmar: Well, Africa is the best example of conservation. For instance, if I go there and hunt big game—let’s say I hunt an antelope—I obviously can’t eat all of it. That would contradict my earlier point about using the animals I hunt. But just because I’m not the one eating it doesn’t mean the animal isn’t used. A lot of the meat is donated to the local community.

For example, if I shoot a large Cape buffalo with around 1,000 pounds of meat, we distribute it to the locals at no charge. They get the meat, and it’s a win-win for the community and conservation efforts. Now, let’s take the ethical aspect further and consider what happens when hunting is banned. This occurred in Kenya, which banned hunting and used to be one of the most popular hunting destinations in the 1970s and 1980s.

This historical example shows us the consequences of such a ban. While I don’t know the exact numbers, it’s been estimated that close to 70% of the animal population in Kenya was wiped out after hunting was prohibited. The only places where animals still thrive are in protected national parks. You might think, “If people aren’t hunting, why are the animals dying?” It seems counterintuitive—if you stop killing animals, the population should grow, right? But that’s not what happens, especially in Africa.

The reason is tied to the local people. In many parts of Africa, food is a form of currency, and meat, in particular, is highly valued. It’s hard to come by, and when hunting is banned, the locals turn to poaching to meet their needs. They over-harvest wildlife, killing everything they can to sell the meat for profit.

When hunting is legal, however, the situation changes. Money from hunting is invested in the community and conservation efforts. Take an outfitter, for example, who manages 10,000 acres bordering a community. That community agrees not to kill animals in exchange for the meat paid hunters provide. Legal hunting incentivizes sustainable wildlife use, benefiting the community and animal populations.

Do you know there’s value in that animal? That value is translated into money, which goes to the outfitter and the community. The outfitter is then incentivized to protect the animals and prevent eradication by working with the local people and tribes.

For example, if someone is caught poaching, the tribe doesn’t receive meat for three months. It’s like a self-policing system, almost like a kangaroo court, where the community enforces their own rules. If someone poaches an animal, the whole tribe suffers by losing access to meat for three months. The tribe will hold the poacher accountable because his actions harm the entire community. A symbiotic relationship between the hunters, the animals, and the local people makes the ecosystem thrive.

Without money from hunting, those animals would become a burden to protect. Communities can’t afford to protect animals or stop poaching without the necessary funds and resources. So, animal populations thrive in areas where hunting is allowed and regulated. In contrast, in regions of Africa where hunting has been banned, animal populations decline significantly. Kenya is a prime example of this; after they banned hunting, their animal population plummeted.

Jacobsen: So you’re referring to a communal value system involving both the locals and tourists—whether bow hunters or professionals—based on ethics rather than just informal or unwritten rules?

Bowmar: Exactly. It doesn’t have to be tourists or foreigners coming in to hunt. The system works similarly everywhere as long as there are regulations in place. For example, if I want to buy a deer tag in Iowa, I must pay for it. That money goes to the government, and I can only shoot one buck with that tag. If I want to shoot another buck, I have to pay again. Some states have stricter limits, but a financial exchange goes back into conservation efforts, including funding rangers and staff who protect the animals and enforce laws around wildlife conservation.

The same principles apply in Africa. When there are rules and regulations, and people pay to hunt animals, that money can go back into programs that protect the animals and enforce laws. It’s similar to any legal system: people rob stores, but there are real consequences when they do. The problem occurs when hunting is banned. There’s no longer a hunting category in the government, which means there’s no funding or resources to protect the animals.

Of course, I’m simplifying things, but that’s the general idea. For example, if someone poaches an animal, law enforcement might investigate. Still, I’m not fully familiar with every African country’s rules and regulations.

Based on my experience in Tanzania, South Africa, and Uganda—places where I’ve spent time hunting—tourism hunting is definitely where the most revenue comes from. That money is reinvested into those properties, improving the habitat and enhancing the quality of life for the animals. This also ensures the longevity of harvesting specific animals, rather than just indiscriminately killing any animal. And that’s where ethics come into play. Whether they agree with trophy hunting or hunting in general, non-hunters need to understand that this isn’t about personal preference.

The reality is that nothing in the wild dies of old age. Many people imagine that animals, like hippopotamus, will eventually find a tree, lay down, and peacefully die of old age. But that’s different from how it works. When an animal becomes too slow or weak in the wild, it gets eaten alive. There are no exceptions. Once an animal becomes unable to contribute to its group, herd, or ecosystem and can no longer fend for itself, it will be killed and eaten alive, which is one of the most horrific deaths imaginable.

As hunters, we train to be as professional and ethical as possible, at least the good ones do. We target animals at the end of their life—old, mature bulls, rams, or bucks. Whatever the species, we focus on the older animals. The local community utilizes the meat from those animals. As a hunter, you’re paying to harvest those specific African animals. In the United States, if you hunt on your property, the value is in the hunt experience and the meat you get from the animal.

So, no matter where you hunt, value is always exchanged for the animal. And that’s why hunting is so critically important—even non-hunters should support it if they care about the survival of species and the health of wildlife populations.

Jacobsen: When you’re bowhunting older or more infirm animals that would likely be picked off earlier in the wild, what do you target on the animal to ensure a quicker or more humane death?

Bowmar: Well, being a bowhunter, I always make it as challenging as possible for myself. If I had the option to use a gun, I could shoot much further, and it would be easier—there’s no question about that. However, bowhunting requires a lot more practice and proficiency to be skilled enough to shoot an animal effectively with a bow.

To answer your question about ensuring a fast and humane death, it’s important to understand that I give the animal a greater chance to escape by choosing to be a bowhunter. The main difference between rifle hunting and bowhunting is that with a rifle, once you see the animal, the hunt is essentially over. But with bowhunting, when you see the animal, the real hunt has only just begun. The key is precision—hitting vital organs, such as the heart or lungs, to ensure a quick and humane kill.

There’s a significant difference with bowhunting because you have to get close. When you get close, you enter the animal’s senses—its eyesight, smell, hearing, and awareness of the many dangers around. That animal is likely to get away, and as a bowhunter, that’s okay. But if everything goes right, and you’re about to take the shot, the success of that shot depends on the steps taken up to that point, including how well you’ve trained as an archer and shooter.

I spend much time practicing with my bow to ensure I can make the best possible shot when the moment comes. I also use lethal-tipped broadheads or arrows. Specifically, I use my brand, Beast Broadheads, the most technologically advanced broadhead ever engineered. It kills animals faster than anything else we’ve seen due to its blade sharpness and precision. There are many factors to ensure a quick, humane kill and a big part of that is avoiding bad shots—shots that have a low chance of hitting the right spot to ensure the animal dies within 60 seconds.

At the end of the day, though, you’re still hunting animals, and things can go wrong. However, the goal is to always put yourself in a position where failures are extremely rare.

Jacobsen: What do you do with more amateur or inexperienced bowhunters who come along to learn how to make good shots and develop the patience needed to get close for more proficient, efficient kills?

Bowmar: I don’t take people hunting; I’m not a guide or outfitter. But for people trying to learn, it’s like mastering any other skill. It takes much time, and repetition is the mother of all skills. It’s about going out, trying, failing, and learning a little each time until you get it right. Over the years, you get better and better.

If someone wants to accelerate their learning, they can hire an outfitter who is also a bowhunter and can mentor them during the hunt. But the less experienced you are, the more limited your hunting capabilities. For beginners, it’s often best to hunt in controlled environments, like overbait or at watering holes, where the shots are closer and easier. Stalking and sneaking up on animals in the wild, particularly in western hunting, where you’re trying to get close without being detected, is much harder.

Jacobsen: Even as an experienced bowhunter, what are some critical aspects of maintaining fitness, health, and skill in your shot? How much do you have to practice? How much do you need to maintain your physique for this sport?

Bowmar: It depends on what you’re hunting. Suppose you’re going into the high country to hunt elk, hiking 10 miles daily at 7,000 to 10,000 feet. In that case, it requires an enormous amount of training and endurance. Even in Africa, the conditions are tough. We’re out in the sun for 12 to 14 hours daily, sweating constantly. We’re doing stalk after stalk and typically covering 2 to 6 miles daily with gear. You often need to run from one spot to the next to get into the right position to cut off your target animal.

So, fitness makes things easier—there’s no question. But it’s not always necessary, depending on what you’re hunting. For example, if you’re in a deer stand hunting whitetail, you might not need to be in top physical condition. However, suppose you’re hunting out west or doing free-range hunts in Africa, like in Tanzania, where there’s lots of hiking. In that case, you need to be in shape. You must maintain good cardiovascular endurance because if you’re out of breath after a run to get into position, you won’t be able to make an accurate shot.

In any sport, being in good physical shape helps, not hurts.

Jacobsen: What would you consider your most memorable bowhunting story?

Bowmar: There are just too many to narrow it down to one. It’s impossible to pick a single favourite. But I’ll give you a brief overview and answer your question.

When I hunt here in Iowa, on my farm, there are deer that I’ve been pursuing for years—not just one hunt, but years of effort. So, those hunts hold a special place in my heart. Then there’s hunting in Africa, like in Tanzania. One of my most memorable hunts was 2022, when I shot a world-record crocodile. It measured 16 and a half feet, breaking the record by almost a foot. It was an absolute monster and a crazy memory, especially since such a large croc is rare. This one was probably over 100 years old.

There are so many animals and experiences to choose from—it’s hard to pick one. Every hunt is special in its way. Most non-hunters don’t realize how significant and memorable each hunt can be.

Each hunt creates a core memory you’ll always remember. It’s a deeply spiritual, emotional experience and incredibly primal. Most people have never experienced anything like it, so they don’t understand what it feels like.

But I can promise you, if you ever hunt and succeed, you’ll unlock deep, ancestral, primal instincts you’ve never felt before. You’ll be like, “Wow, this is very different from anything I’ve experienced emotionally and in terms of accomplishment.” Then you realize, “Wow, if I’m alive today, it’s because I come from a line of successful hunters.” If they weren’t, they wouldn’t have survived. It’s not a question of whether you have hunters in your lineage but how far back you must go to find them.

Tapping into that ancestral part of yourself unlocks something profound—it’s hard to describe unless you’re a hunter. The accomplishment, adrenaline, and achievement from successfully harvesting an animal that feeds your family are unique. Eating that animal, having a relationship with your food rather than having someone else do the killing, is a different experience.

I’ve met many people who are against hunting but still eat meat. And I ask them, “Do you think the cow that became your burger committed suicide?” No, someone else did the killing for you. So, if you’re against hunting but eat meat, there’s a contradiction there. I’m going out and killing my food while you’re having someone else do it for you. There’s a big difference.

Imagine going out and hunting an animal that you had to outsmart, pursue, and finally harvest. Then, you butcher the meat and feed your family. It’s a different experience than just getting a cheeseburger from the store.

Jacobsen: Do you have any final thoughts or reflections for individuals looking to get into bowhunting or those curious about the philosophy and ethics of ethical hunting? As you explained earlier, it’s only sometimes obvious how hunting impacts conservation.

Bowmar: Yeah, I have some final thoughts. If you want to get into hunting, the first step is finding a local pro shop—an archery pro shop. These guys will teach you how to shoot, and they’ll sell you a bow. That’s a crucial first step.

As for conservation, it’s very clear: wherever there is a lot of regulated hunting controlled by the government and agencies, there’s also a thriving population of animals. In fact, in some places, animal populations grow so much that the authorities have to hire people to manage the population by shooting more animals. Hunting contributes significantly to conservation, even though it might be obvious to everyone.

If you truly care about animals, you should greatly support hunting. Whether you like it or not, or however you choose to view it, hunters have the biggest impact on environmental health and the well-being of the animals that live there.

Jacobsen: Excellent. Josh, thank you for your time today and for giving us some insight into bowhunting and the ethics of hunting in general.

Bowmar: Absolutely. Feel free to reach out anytime. I enjoyed it.

Jacobsen: Excellent. All right.

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.

Luke Powers on National Homelessness Statistics

Author(s): Scott Douglas Jacobsen

Publication (Outlet/Website): The Good Men Project

Publication Date (yyyy/mm/dd): 2024/10/14

Luke Powers is a business professional who helps people donate more effectively. As a graduate of the University of Notre Dame’s Mendoza College of Business, Luke majored in management consulting and minored in innovation and entrepreneurship. He is passionate about leveraging his business expertise to make a positive impact. His interests include business development, start-up strategy, and consultative sales. Luke is based in Miami, Florida, and continues to develop his entrepreneurial skills. SmileHub released new reports on the Best Charities for Homeless Support and the States That Help Homeless People the Most in 2024.

Scott Douglas Jacobsen: Today, we are joined by Luke Powers from SmileHub. We’ll focus on five critical areas regarding homelessness in the United States. To start, what is the current state of homelessness in the U.S.?

Luke Powers: National homelessness is at a critical juncture. Over 580,000 people are affected, according to the latest estimates, many of whom face systemic barriers such as mental health challenges and a lack of affordable housing. Chronic homelessness is at its highest level in recent years, as many states struggle to provide sufficient resources despite varied efforts to address the crisis. These combined factors have created a situation where nearly one-quarter of all homeless individuals experience chronic patterns of homelessness. States like California and New York lead the way in overall homeless numbers, while states in the Southeast and South, such as Tennessee and Georgia, lag significantly in providing adequate support. The situation is exacerbated by expensive rental markets and insufficient shelter availability, leading many people experiencing homelessness to remain unsheltered.

Jacobsen: Where would you say the situation is the worst, either by state or, if available, by city?

Powers: While I don’t have specific city-level data, I can tell you that the bottom three states—ranking 50th, 49th, and 48th—are Tennessee, Georgia, and South Carolina in terms of providing sufficient support for people experiencing homelessness. If you visit our blog page, you can see the detailed rankings. The Southeast region consistently ranks poorly, with six states in the bottom ten—seven if you include Louisiana. Tennessee, Georgia, Florida, and South Carolina, in particular, struggle with high rates of unsheltered individuals and significant barriers to accessing affordable housing and essential services.

Jacobsen: Which areas have the lowest levels of homelessness?

Powers: Based on the data, there’s a general trend across the Midwest and Northeast where states provide better support for individuals experiencing homelessness. Connecticut, Illinois, North Dakota, Maryland, New York, Indiana, Massachusetts, Minnesota, Wyoming, and Montana are the top ten states supporting homeless individuals. Montana stands out as an outlier from that regional pattern but still performs well in homelessness support.

Jacobsen: What are the notable outlier states, and what are the reasons for their rankings for reducing and increasing homelessness? To clarify, outliers on the subfactors for reduced and increased homelessness.

Powers: Let me break this down into three primary categories: shelters and housing support, homeless support services, and food and health support. For positive outliers, Connecticut ranks in the top 16 across all categories. It is in the top four for shelter, housing, food, and health support. On the other hand, Tennessee ranks last (50th) in shelters and housing support, 46th in food and health support, and 26th in homeless youth support. Homeless youth support is a critical factor where Tennessee struggles, and these low rankings in shelters, housing, and food and health support contribute to its overall poor performance.

If you’re looking at larger states, California ranks 21st overall, but despite having the largest homeless population in the country, they are 43rd in shelters and housing support. Despite considerable efforts, this illustrates the state’s ongoing challenges in effectively addressing homelessness.

So, getting that support is difficult. However, they are ranked number one in homeless youth support and just below average at 30th in food and health support. Texas, another one of our largest states, ranks 36th overall. They are 29th in shelters and housing support, 5th in homeless youth support, but ranked last, 50th in food and health support. So, you can see how some bigger states have issues, even if they perform well in certain areas.

Jacobsen: What tends to reduce the level of homelessness in realistic terms?

Powers: Reducing homelessness is a complex issue and requires a multifaceted approach. This includes increasing the availability of affordable housing, providing adequate shelters and support services, and addressing healthcare and employment barriers. States that implement supportive policies, such as expanded Medicaid and protections for people experiencing homelessness, or states with fewer anti-homeless policies tend to see reductions in homelessness. Investments in charities, mental health services, and employment opportunities also help reduce homelessness. Key factors include reducing the hours needed to afford housing and improving access to education and employment.

Jacobsen: Are there any other important topics related to this report that we should highlight?

Powers: We’ve covered the significant aspects of the report. My only question was whether you’d like more details about larger states like Florida and New York.

Jacobsen: Yes, let’s continue with that. Please share the information on New York, Florida, and Pennsylvania to round out the top five largest states by population.

Powers: Sure. New York ranks fifth among the five most populous states, placing fifth overall. It is fifth in shelters and housing support, 21st in homeless youth support, and 20th in food and health support. Despite being just slightly above average in two of those categories, it performs well in shelters and housing support, which raises its overall ranking.

Conversely, Florida ranks 43rd overall, 46th in shelters and housing support, 10th in homeless youth support, and 45th in food and health support. This shows a trend of the most populous states struggling to support their large homeless populations.

Lastly, Pennsylvania ranks 11th overall. Like other states in the Midwest and Northeast, they perform relatively well, ranking 21st in shelters and housing support, 19th in homeless youth support, and 6th in food and health support.

States that rank highly in these categories typically offer better support services for their populations, such as more mental health counsellors per capita, fewer anti-homeless policies, more healthcare centers for people experiencing homelessness, lower unemployment rates, and fewer unsheltered homeless individuals. They also have laws protecting sources of income, more emergency housing vouchers per person experiencing homelessness, and lower minimum wages required to afford a studio apartment. It isn’t easy to cover every topic in this discussion, but I’ve highlighted some of the most critical factors. Let me know if you need more information.

Jacobsen: That should be all for now. I appreciate your time today and all the information you’ve shared. Hopefully, we can do more of these in the future.

Powers: Absolutely. To see more of our reports, visit smilehub.org/blog.

Jacobsen: Great. Thank you so much for your time, Luke. I appreciate it.

Powers: Thanks, Scott. Have a good one!

Last updated May 3, 2025. These terms govern all In Sight Publishing content—past, present, and future—and supersede any prior notices.In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen is licensed under a Creative Commons BY‑NC‑ND 4.0; © In Sight Publishing by Scott Douglas Jacobsen 2012–Present. All trademarksperformancesdatabases & branding are owned by their rights holders; no use without permission. Unauthorized copying, modification, framing or public communication is prohibited. External links are not endorsed. Cookies & tracking require consent, and data processing complies with PIPEDA & GDPR; no data from children < 13 (COPPA). Content meets WCAG 2.1 AA under the Accessible Canada Act & is preserved in open archival formats with backups. Excerpts & links require full credit & hyperlink; limited quoting under fair-dealing & fair-use. All content is informational; no liability for errors or omissions: Feedback welcome, and verified errors corrected promptly. For permissions or DMCA notices, email: scott.jacobsen2025@gmail.com. Site use is governed by BC laws; content is “as‑is,” liability limited, users indemnify us; moral, performers’ & database sui generis rights reserved.